DBBBEBHOOMIMIWHI

ROLL OF HONOUR

accf.df:re fontks integros

MEMBERS OF THE LINNEAN
SOCIETY OF NEW SOUTH WALES
WHO SERVED IN THE GREAT
WAR - 1914 - I9I8 ' A. a

KILLED IN ACTION

D. B. FRY '^ H. STEPHENS

ACTIVE SERVICE

M.AUROUSSEAU. .'n.C. » CBADHATH
E. 1. BICKFORD t R.W. BRETNALL
PROF. R. BROOA\ - W. M. CARNE
PROF. T.W.E.- DAVID, D.S.O. " A\. HENRY
E.W.FERGUSON - G. A\. GOLDFINCH
C.O.HAMBLIN - L.M.HARRISON
C.F.LASERON ^ W. R . B. O L 1 VER
F.H.KENNY " D.S. NORTH - E.S.STOKES

MUNITION WORK ETC.

E.GRIFFITHS ^ SIR.D.MAWSON '^ C.E.TILLEY

■ imi«imimimi«imimimimimjmimim[mi«i»i»imi«im;«imi«wii

PROCEEDINGS fe ' "— )'i

OF THE X^ # K/

LiMMEnM Society

OF

New South Wales

For the Year

1920

Vol. XLV.

WITH THIRTY-TWO PLATES

And 138 Text-figures.

StdNB Y :
PRINTED AND PUBLISHED FOR THE SOCIETY BY

THE SYDNEY AND MELBOURNE PUBLISHING CO., LTD,
11 Wilmot Street, Sydney,

AND

SOLD BY THE SOCIETY.

192a21 .

lU.

C0NTE/NT5 OF PROCEEDINGS. 1920.

PART I. (No. 177).

{Issued 25th June, 1920.)

Pages.

Presidential Address, delivered at the Foi-ty-fifth Annual Meeting, 31st

March, 1920, by J. J. Fletcher, M. A., B.Se. (Plates i.-viii.) .... 1-47

Ropiness in Wattle Bark Infusions. By R. Gi-eig-Suiith, D.Sc,

Macleay Bacteriologist to the Society. (Plate ix.) .. ■ 52-89

Australian Syllidae, EusylUdae, and Auiolytidae. By W. A. Haswell,
M.A., D.Sc, F.R.S., Emeritus Professor of Biology, the Univer-
sity of Sydney. (Plates x.-xiii.) 90-112

The Carabidae of Tasmania. By Thomas G. Sloane. (Four Test-

flgures. ) '. 113-17S

A New Genus of Australian Delphacidae (Homoptera) . By F. Muir,
F.E.S. (Commwfiicated by E. W. Ferguson, M.B., Ch.M.) (One
Text-figure.) 181-182

An Undescribed Species of Clytocosmus Skuse. By C. P. Alexander,
Ph.D. (Communicated bi) R. J. Tilh/ard, M.A., D.Sc. F.L.S.,
F.E.S.) , .. .; 183-184

Hon. Treasurer's Balance Sheet 48-50

Elections and Announcements 47, 51, 179

Notes and Exhibits 179-180

PART II. (No. 178).
{Issued 16th August, 1920).

Descriptions of Australian FUes of the family Asilidae (Diptera), with

synonyms and notes. By G. H. Hardy. (Sixteen Text-figures.) 185-202

Report on the Neuropteroid Insects of the Hot Springs Region, N.Z.,
in relation to the problem of Trout Food. By R. J. Tillyai-d,
M.A., D.Sc, F.L.S., F.E.S., Linnean Macleay Fellow of the
Society in Zoology. (Two Text-figures.) 205-213

The Panorpoid Complex. Additions and Corrections to Part 3. By
R. J. Tillyard, M.A., D.Sc, F.L.S., F.E.S., Linnean Macleay
Fellow of the Society in Zoology. (One Text-figure.) 214-217

C\ }^ l-\ i

IV. CONTENTS.

Pages.

Notes on Some Australian Tenehrionidae, with descriptions of new
species; — also of a new genus and species of Buprestidae. By

H. J. Carter, B.A., F.E.S. (Fourteen Text-figures.) 222-249

On the male Genitalia of some Kobber-flies belonging to the sub-family

Asilinae (Diptm-a) . By G.H.Hardy. (Twelve Text-figures. ). . 250-259
Notes from the Botanic Gardens, Sydney. By A. A. Hamilton .. .. 260-2G4
The Atrypidae of New South Wales, with references to those recordetl
from other States of Australia. By J. Mitchell and W. S. Dun,

(Plates xiv.-xvi., and Five Text-Figau-es.) 266-27G

Note on certain variations of the Sporocyst in a species of Saprolegnia.
By Marjorie I. Collins, B.Sc, Linnean Macleay Fellow of the

Society in Botany. (Eleven Text-figures.) 277-284

The Geology and Petrology of the Great Serpentine Belt of New South
Wales. Part ix. The Geology, Palaeontology and Petrography
of the Currabubula District, with notes on adjacent regions. By
Professor W. N. Benson, B.A., D.Sc, F.G.S., W. S. Dun, and
W. R. Browne, B.Sc. Section A. — General Geology (W. N.

Benson). (Plates xvii.-xviia^ and Nine Text-figures.) 285-317

Special General Meeting (Macleay Centenary) 218-223

Elections and Announcements 203, 221, 2G5

Notes and Exhibits 203-4, 221, 265

PART III. (No. 179).
(Issued 8th November, 1920).

A List of the Species of Australian Carabidae which range beyond

Australia and its Dependent Islands. By Thomas G. Sloane .. 320-323

On dental incrustations and the so-called "Gold-Plating" of Sheep's

Teeth. By Thos. Steel 324-328

On the Structure of the Resin-secreting Glands in some Australian
Plants. By Marjorie T. Collins, B.Sc, Linnean Macleay Fellow of
the Society in Botany. (Twelve Text-fig\ires. ) 329-336

The Geology and Petrology of the Great Serpentine Belt of New South
Wales. Part ix. The Geology, Palaeontology and Petrography
of the Currabubula District, with Notes on Adjacent Regions. By
Professor W. N. Benson, B.A., D.Sc. F.G.S.. W. S. Dun. and
W. R. Browne, B.Sc.
Section B. — Palaeontology. (W. S. Dun and W. N. Benson). Ap-
pendix by r. Chapman, A.L.S. (Plates xviii.-xxiv., jmd eight

Text-figures. ) 337-374

Section C . —Petrography . (W. R. Browne). (Plate xxv.) .... 405-423

Descriptions of New Species of Australian Cnleoptera. Part xvi. By

Arthur M. Lea, F.E.S 375-403

The Chemical Examination of Macrozamia spiralis. By .Tames 1\I.
Petrie, D.Sc, F.T.C., Linnean Macleay Fellow of the Society in
Biochemistry 424-442

CONTENTS. V.

Pages.

Two New Hymenoptera of the Superfamily Proctotrypidae from Aus-
tralia. By Alan P. Dodd. (Commmiicated by W. W. Froggatt,
F.L.S.) 443-446

Cyanogenesis iu Plants. Part iv. The Hydrocyanic Acid of Hetero-
dendron — A Fodder Plant of New South Wales. By James M.
Petrie, D.Sc, F.I.C., Linnean Macleay Fellow of the Society in
Biochemistry 447-459

Notes on Australian Tabanidae. By Eustace W. Ferguson, M.B., Ch.M.,

and Gerald F. Hill, F.E.S. " 460-467

Descriptions of New Forms of Butterflies from the South Pacific. By

G. A. Waterhouse, B.Sc, B.E., F.E.S 468-471

Elections and Announcements 318, 404, 472

Notes and Exhibits 318-9, 404, 472

PART IV. (No. 180).
{Issued 7th March, 1921.)
Revision of Australian Lepidoptera — Liparidae. By A. Jefferis

Turner, M.D., F.E.S ". 474-499

A new Avian Trematode. By Eleanor E. Chase, B.Sc, Demonstrator
in Zoology, University of Sydney. {Communicated by Professor
S. J. Johnston, B.A., D.Sc.) (Plate xxvi., and one Text-figure.) .. 500-504
Studies in Life-histories of Australian Diptera Brachycera. Part i.
Stratiomyiidae. No. 1. Metoponia rubriceps Macquart. By
Vera Irwin-Smith, B.Sc, F.L.S., Linnean Macleay Fellow of the
Society in Zoology. (Plates xxvii.-xxviii., and Twenty-three Text-
figures.) '. 505-530

A Revision of the Chiromyzini (Diptera). By G. H. Hardy. (Plates

xxix . -XXX . ) 532-542

Some new Brachiopods from the Middle Palaeozoic Rocks of New South
Wales. By John Mitchell, late Principal of the Technical College

and School of Mines, Newcastle. (Plate xxxi.) 543-551

Nematode Parasites of the Domestic Pigeon {Cohimba livia domestica)

in Australia. By Vera Irwin-Smith, B.Sc, F.L.S., Linnean

Macleay Fellow of the Society in Zoology. (Nineteen Text-flgaires. ) 552-563

A Few Notes on the Botany of Lord Howe Island. (Sixth Paper. ) By

J. H. Maiden, I.S.O., F.R.S., F.L.S., Government Botanist and

Director of the Botanic Gardens, Sydney 564-566

The Society's Heritage from the Macleays. Address by the President,
J. J. Fletcher, M.A., B.Sc, at the Special General Meeting, 14th

June, 1920 .. .. 567-635

Donations and Exclianges 636-648

List of Members, 1920 649-653

Notes and Exhibits 473, 531

Elections and Announcements 53I

Title-page j

Contents ;;;

Corrigenda Yi_

List of New Tribal and Generic Names vi.

List of Plates vii.

Index i.-xri.

yi.

CONTENTS.

LIST OF NEW TRIBAL AND
IN THIS V

Page.

Agoniea (Agonicini) 130

Agonifiui (Carabidae uniperfor-

atae) 1^9

Amygdalophyllum (Coelenterata :

Actinozoa) 339

Atrypoidea (Atrypidae) .. .. 'Ill
Boreoides ( C'birouiyzini, Dip-

tera) 539

Calyptogonia (Migadopiui) .. 121
Cephaloslrungylus ( Tricbo-

stroiigylidae) 553

Chylnus (Broscinij 1-9

Cycloidotrypa (Polyzoa, Cyclo-

stomata) 366

GENERIC NAMES PROPOSED
GLUME (1920).

Cyriuides ( Chrysot-broinae)
Habrophylla (Liparidae) . .
llemilexomyia (Diapriidae)
Menearch us ( Tenebrioninae )
Merizodini (^ Carabidae unipe

foratae )

Molungia ( Spirif eridae ) ..

Oligeria (Liparidae)

Percodermus ( Meiizodini ) .
Pseudembulophora (Homoptera
Pterocyrtus (Merizodini) ..
Pterugmim (Pterosticbiui)

Page.

222
482
443
229

139
546
480
14(1
181
140
155

CORRIGENDA.

Page 43, for line 48 (fourtb from bottom) read whether, if one pair of piunae
persists at a certain stage, that pair is always the
190, line 16— 1

198, explanation of text-flg. 12-— [ for vwrgites, read margitis.

199. lines 11. 12. 19— )

Page
Page
Page
Page

198, line 24

(third from bottom) for little beyond discal cell, read little

Page
Page
Page
Page

Page
Page
Page
Page
Page
Page
Page

Page

beyond the middle of the diseal cell.
199, line 10 — for paratype, read allotype.
265, line 32 — (tifth from bottom) for artica, read arctica.
267, line 27 — for fig. 13, read fig. 6.

line 27 — for Ptycomphalu-s, read Ptychomphalus.

290,

read Phanerotrema hurindia,

line 30 — for Phanerotrema aitslralis,

the former name being preoccupied.

line 35 — for Hyolites, read Hyolithes.
291, line 26 — for resting, read rest.
309, line 41 — for western, read ea.stern.
356, lines 37. 38 — for Ptiicomplialux, read Ptychoniphalufi.
359, lines 8, 28 — for Phnrierotr.ema au-MraJh, read P. hurindia.
363, line 1 — for Hyolites, read Ilyolithes.
365, line 11 — for Torryourn, read Torryburn.
374, lines 26, 28, 31 — for PhoMerotremu anntralitt, read P. hurindia.

lines 30, 32 — for Ptycomphalii.<i, read Ptycliomphaliis.
404, line 23 — for Canyza read Conyza.

CONTENTS. VU.

LIST OF PLATES.

PROCEEDINGS, 1920.

Frontispiece (issued with Part iv.) — The Society's Honour RolL

i. — Leaves of Reversion-Foliage of Acacia suaveolenti.

ii. — Euphyllcde and Seedling of Acacia implexa (?).

iii. — Caesalpinia Gilliesii, Acacia discolor, and Revei-sion Shoots of A. implexa ('?).

iv. — Acacia Baileyana and Reversion Shoots oi-A. implexa (?) .

v.-vii. — Reversion Shoots of Acacia im^plexa (?).

viii. — Acacia podalyriaefolia, A. myrtifolia, A. discolor, A. decurrens and Jac-

aranda.
IX. — Bacteria causing Ropiness in Wattle Bark Infusions,
x.-xiii. — Australian SylUdae and EusylUdae.
xiv.-xvi. — Atrypidae of New South Wales.
xvii. — Geological Map of the Currabubula District,
sviia. — Topographical Map of the Currabubula District,
xviiii — Amygdalophyllum etheridgei, n.gen. et sp.

xix.-xxiii. — Lower Carboniferous Fossils from the Currabubula District,
xxiv. — Lower Carboniferous Fossils and Glaciated Pebbles.
XXV. — Carboniferous Rocks from the Currabubula District,
xxvi. — Holostomum repens, n.sp.

sxvii . -xxviii . — Metamorphosis of Metoponia rubrieeps.
xxix. — Metoponia gemina, n.sp., M. rubrieeps and Chiromyza prisca.
Jcxx. — Chiromyza auetralis and Boreoides subulata, n.sp.
xxxi. — Middle Palaeozoic Brachjopods from New South Wales.

PHOCEEDINaS

i* * \i

LINNEAN SOCIETY

OP

ISrEA\^ south: ^Vi^LLES.

WEDNESDAY, MARCH 31.st, 1920.

The Forty-fiith Annual General Meeting, together with the Ordinary Monthly
Meeting was held in the Linnean HaJl, Ithaca Road, Elizabeth Bay, on Wednesday
evening, March 31st, 1920.

ANNUAL GENERAL MEETING.

Mr. J. J. Fletcher, M.A., B.Sc, President, in the Chair.
The Minutes of the preceding Annual General Meeting (March 26th, 1919)
were read and confirmed.

PRESIDENTIAL ADDRESS.
(Plates i.-viii.)

Once again, after live years, we hold our jVnnual Meeting under the fegis of
Peace. The interval since our last Annual gathering has been a very eventful
period, a year crowded with stirring events. This has been due in part to the
fact that so many of them have brought reminders of the "eternal verities" in
their train . First of all, we have had the Proclamation, and then the Ratification
of Peace, and the prospect of a League of Nations. But the War ended by
armistice and not by surrender, and the Peace which followed was a peace by
negotiation and not a peace after surrender; and so many nations had been drawn
into the War, that the problems for consideration and settlement were so numerous
and so difficult, that the preliminaries were protracted, and sometimes lacked
unanimity. Now the war has ended, the return to a peace-footing has not come
about quite so soon, or in quite the same way as perhaps was ■ expected, so pro-
foundly have world-affairs 'become involved, and been upset. For example, the
belief that high prices for food and clothing would come down when the war-
purchases ceased, has not been realised .

Not less eventful or moving to us has been our witness of the epilogue of the
story, which began "Australia ivill be there" ; then, in due time attained the clearer
note, "Australia was there"; and then the epilogue "Australia is here again" —
but not all, by about fiO.OOO. This story has been a telling illustration of what

2 president's address.

the enemy quite failed to realise, namely, bow great moral issues eoukl stir and
iinite tree democracies in a great crisis. The return of Anzacs and Diggers, as
well as of those who whole-heartedly co-operated with them in all sorts of capaci-
ties, and of the men of the Australian Navy, has demonstrated to us the charac-
teristic modesty of the modest man, who, thrice armed because the quarrel into
which he was drawn was just, then did liis bit, and idayed the game, but is loth
to talk about his deeds. We are glad to know that the repatriation and de-
mobilisation of the Australian troops has been almost completed; and that the
problem of their return to civil life is receiving the attention and consideration
which it deserves.

One of the most moving events of the year was tlie simple but very effective
ceremony observed, by the wish of His Majesty, on the eleventh day of the
eleventh month, at the eleventh hour, when, standing with uncovered heads, all
business suspended and traffic stopped, our hearts took charge of us, and we paid
our silent and sincere homage to the memory of the honoured and mighty Dead,
who, though dead, yet speak to very many. I think we all hope that the observ-
ance of this simple and touching ceremony, "the King's Great Silence,'' as it has
been aptly termed, so appealing in its directness and in its naturalness, will be-
come an annual fixture; and that, in unison, we shall continue to hold these real
and legitimate stop-work Meetings, not only "Lest we forget," but also to show
that we have not forgotten.

Another stiri-ing event in the early part of the year, not without its lessons,
was a severe epidemic of influenza of a virulent type, which, as in other countries,
not only upset, from top to bottom, the home-life, the educational life, the business-
life, the industrial life, and every other grade of our community life, but brought
bereavement to many households and aggregates. Nevertheless, the blackness of
the calamitous cloud, which overshadowed us for so long, was not without some
silver streaks of lining, in the shape of the unselfishness and self-sacrifice, heroic
as often as circumstances required, on the part of doctors, nurses, and volunteers
of both sexes, intent on doing their utmost, at all risks, for the relief of the pros-
trated and the helpless, and the succour and comfort of the bereaved.

Another great event was the memorable visit of the Triumphant Four, re-
gardless of Father Neptune's approval, descending upon Australia like a "bolt
from the blue." It was a great achievement, which justly evoked appreciative
words and deeds. But have we, as a community, appreciated the real significance,
and the inner meaning of this much-needed object lesson? Sir Ross Smith did
not tell us how many strikes there were on the aerial \-oyag'e; or how tlie mechanics
held a stop-work meeting aloft, and said — "Our mates produced this machine;
therefore, we are entitled to all the products of this stunt. If you don't concede
that, we will hitch the wagon to a star, and go on strike." Of course, we know
why Sir Ross Smith did not mention the subject of strikes. So having shown
very great entliusiasm and appreciation over a very successful cnter]>i-ise, because
the organisation, co-operation, co-ordination, concentration, single-mindedness,
unity of purpose, were about as I'erfect, and as perfectly proxided for as tliey
could be, in a very ■ limited space, under very strenuous and exacting conditions,
waste of every kind, including energy potential and otherwise, eliminated, and
friction reduced to a minimum — what more did the sequel amount to than revenovs
a nos moutonn, strikes, discord, ebullitions of accentuated, vituperative party-
feeling on the eve of two elections, &c., &c. "Man is a scholar eager imlecd to
learn, but most forgetful having learned.''

PRESIDENTS ADDRESS. 3

Other events that have come home to us by the experience of a shortage of
bread, or a shortage of sugar, and the interruption of communications with tlie
distant vStates or New Zealand, or in some other way, are the numerous Strikes
which have interfered with what we are accustomed to call our normal, every-day
social and business-life and activities. Fortunately the meeting oi the Austral-
asian Association for the Advancement of Science was due next year, and not
this, or it must have lapsed.

We have also had the disturbing experiences of a Federal Election and a
State Election, both carried out with a great deal of friction, and personal as
well as party-bitterness and recrimination.

June 13th, ensuing, will be the centenary of the birth of the Society's bene-
factor. Sir William Macleay. The Council is arranging for a Special Meeting,
to be held on June 14th, the actual day of the anniversary being Sunday this
year. Further particulars will be furnished to Members in the Abstract of Pro-
ceedings after the Meeting to be held on 26th May.

Since the last Annual Meeting, more of our Soldier-Members, or Members
•who volunteered for war-work abroad, have returned to Australia; and we have
had the pleasure of personally welcoming some of them at one or other of our
Meeting's. We are now able to compile a complete list of those who have served
the Nation or the Commonwealth abroad, in some capacity or other as follows : —

Active Service.

Aurousseau, M., M.C. Ferguson, E. W. Laseron, C. F.

Badham. C. *Fry, D. B. North, D. S.

Bickford, E. I. Goldfinch, G. M. Oliver, W. R. B.

Bretnall, R. W. Hamblin, C. O. "Stephens, H.

Broom, Prof. R. Harrison. L. M. Stokes, E. S.

Carne, W. M. Henry, M.

David, Prof. T. W. E., D.S.O. Kenny, F. H.
* Killed in action .

MuxiTiON" Work, etc.
Griffiths, E. Mawson, Sir D. Tilley, C. E. '

A special Honour Roll is in contemplation, of such a character that coloured
copies of it can be prepared for insertion in the Parts of the Proceedings, so
that every Member may have one, especially those Members who live at a distance.
It is proposed that the original shall be displayed in a conspicuous place in the
Hall; and that it shall be formally unveiled in a becoming manner, as part of
the programme of the Special Meeting for the celebration of the William Macleay
Centenary, on June 14th. It is to be a permanent, memorial record of the names
of those Members of the Society, who represent, to the rest of us, the great aggre-
gate of comrades who successfully strove to save the rest of the world from Might
as against Right. The Council thinks that Members would like to have a direct,
personal interest in this appropriate memorial; and it accordingly invites us to
contribute, according to our means, a share of the cost of providing it, as a tribute
to the great aggregate which our Soldier-Members represent, as well as to them
collectively. I commend the proposal to your favourable consideration.

The concluding Part of Volume xliv., of the Society's Proceedings was is-
sued on the 15th instant. The complete volume (912 and sxsii. pp., 47 Plates,
and 212 Text-figures) contains thirty-four papers, ten of which were contributed

4 PRESIDtXr S ADDRESS.

by members of the Society's research staff. These cover a representati\-e series
cf the subjects in which the Society is directly interested.

Our exchange-relations with Societies and Institutions outside the Common-
wealth have begun to show gratifying signs of recovery. The Bureau of inter-
national E.xchanges at Washington has been able to resume its despatches to this
part of the world, after suspension brought about by war-conditions; and this
means a great deal to the Society. Postal communications have improved some-
what, though still not altogether normal. Consequently, Scientific Societies in
neutral and other countries are seeking to fulfil the obligations which were inter-
fered with by abnormal conditions. But it affords me very special pleasure and
satisfaction to be able to announce, that, after the turmoil of war, five out of
the seven Belgian Scientific Societies with which we liave exchanged publications
for so many years, and from whom we were so abruptly cut oft' in 1914, have
succeeded in getting into touch with us again. These are I'Aeademie Royale des
Sciences des Lettres et des Beaux-Arts de Belgique, Societe Entomologicjue de
Belgique, Societe Geologique de Belgique, Societe Royal de Botanique de Bel-
gique, and Societe Royal Zoologiqvie et Malacologique de Belgique. I gladly
avail myself of this opportunity of offering to them the Society's cordial greet-
ings on the resumption of their scientific activities, its sj-mpathy with them in
the anxieties and trials which they have endured, as well as any help that we
can give, if it be necessary. The total number of exchanges received during the
Session 1918-19 amounts to 799 additions to the library, received from 132 Socie-
ties, Institutions. &c., and ten private donors, as compared with 687, 846, 1243,
1028, and 1285 for the five preceding Sessions. Effort has been made, on the
Society's part, to bring its despatches as far as possible up to date.

Six Ordinary Members were elected, five have resigned during the year; we
have lost one of our older members by death; and, in addition, news came to
us of the decease of one of our soldier-members some time ago.

Harrt Stephens, like Dene Try, was a very promising young biologist,
whose career ended ]>rematurely amid the havoc of battle. After leaving school,
he entered the Department of Agriculture as a cadet; later on he took the degree
of B.Sc, in Agriculture; and was subsequently appointed to a Walter and Eliza
Hall Agricultural Fellowship with the object of doing research-work upon Cereal
Rusts. He had made some progress in this work, when war was declared, and
he enlisted for active service in 1915. He left for the front, as Second Lieu-
tenant, in February, 1916, and spent some time in Egy]5t. Thence he pro-
ceeded to Salisbury, where he was promoted to First Lieutenant ; later, he ac-
companied his battalion to France, where, in May, 1917, he became Captain.
On the night of 18th November, 1917, three weeks after his twenty-seventh birth-
day, he luid just entered the trench to which he was allotted, when he was killed
instantaneously by a bursting shell. Captain Stephens was elected a Member
in 1915, Init, in conse(|uonce of the pressure of his I'niversity and other work, we
never had the pleasure of welcoming him to our Meetings. Professor Watt, with
whom he liad most to do at the University, as well as Mr. Maiden, speak of him
in the highest terms as possessing in a marked degree the qualities which go to
make a successful investigator, as well as a keen sense of honour and of duty.
His University course was higlily creditable, as he gained the Belmore Scholai-ship
for Chemistry and Geology in his first year, and l^fr. Maiden's jirize for Agri-
cultural Botany; and first class lioiioui's and a I'niversity medal at grailuation.
Biological ivsearch in Australia has suffci-cd a groat loss by the untimely deaths
of the only two of our Sohlicr-Mcnibers wlio liavc nut n>tnriu'd to us.

PKESIDEXT S ADDRESS. O

WiLLiAii Joseph Rainbow, elected a Member in 1893, migTated from Eng-
land to New Zealand iu 1873, and ten years later eame to Sydney. While en-
gaged in journalistic work, he became enthusiastically intei'ested in natural his-
tory; and, in 1895, he was appointed entomologist to the Australian Museum,
and continued to. hold that position until his death on 21st November, 1919 . He
was especially interested in the Araiieidae; and his numerous contributions to a
knowledge of this and other groups, include seventeen papers in the Society's
Proceedings for the years 1892-1902 ; and others in the Records of the Australian
Museum, and in the "Australian Naturalist." He was also the author of two
useful additions to our popular science manuals, namely "A Guide to the Study
of Butterflies," and "Mosquitoes: their Habits and Distribution." Mr. Rainbow
was personally known to many of us as a kindly, earnest, upright man, very
keenly interested in his work, and very desirous of helping others to realise the
attractiveness and the interest of the wonderful Australian fauna. One of his
sons enlisted soon after the outbreak of war, and was killed at the Dardanelles
on May 24th, 1915. This sorrowful event hastened the death of his wife soon
afterwards. Another son also enlisted, and returned a few days after his father's
decease .

Recent events have brought about some changes directly or indirectly affect-
ing the scientific life of the community. Their decease has deprived it of two
of our scientific veterans — Sir Thomas Anderson Stuart, Professor of Physiology
in the University of Sydney; and Robert Etheridg-e, .Tunr., Director and Curator
cf the Australian Museum, both, at one time, Meml)ers of this Society, and the
latter, tor some years, a Member of Council.

Several of our Menibeis have retired from acti\e work after [lutting up long
records of faithful and productive service.

Professor Anderson Stuart, Dean of the Facidty of Medicine of the Uni-
versity of Sydney, and Chairman of Directors of the Royal Prince Alfred Hos-
pital, has been a very prominent figure in the educational and public life of the
State ever since his arrival in 1883. The development of the Medical School
and its growing infiuence as a factor in medical education, aft'ord abundant testi-
mony to his organising capacity and his forceful character. His death, on Feb-
ruary 29th, 1920, at the age of 61, closes an impressive chapter of personal his-
tory, as well as a very important stage in University history on the medical side.

Robert Etheeidge, June., was, I think, the oldest scientific worker in liarness
iu Australia. His first contribution to scientific knowledge, a geological ([uarter-
sheet map of the Yan Yean district of Victoria (2 N.E.), embodying the results
of his field-work during the preceding year, was published in 1869. His last,
the second of two papers on the early history of the Australian Museum, was
issued on 4th December, 1919, about a month before his decease; so that his pub-
lished work covers a period of fully fifty years. He was the son of Roljert
Etlieridge, Senr., to whom there is a vei-y interesting reference in Geikie's "Life
of Sir Roderick Murehison" (1875) (Vol. ii., p. 259) to this effect— "Early in
July, 1856, Murehison betook himself into Gloucestershire to see some of his old
Silurian haunts. Mr. Ramsay joined him, and some time was spent by them
among the Silurian and Oolitic rocks of the Tortworth district, where they en-
joyed the hospitality of Loi-d Ducie, who accompanied them iu their excursions."
"Among the Cotteswold liills," Murehison records in his journal, "we
made various excursions in the range of the Lower Oolites, and were accom-
panied by a very intelligent person who had been in Imsiness in Cheltenham, and

6 president's address.

hail i|Uitted It fur the hammer. Thi.s was Kobert Etheriilge. Judging from his
celerity, liis quickness in finding shells and naming them, and in drawing sec-tions,
I said to Ramsay •This is the man we must have to put our Jermyn Street ^Museum
in order.'" Geikie adds, in a footnote, — "Mr. Etheridge. whose merits were al-
ready known to Lord Ducie, had been asked by his Lordship to meet the geologists
at Tortworth. He was soon after appointed Assistant Naturalist to the Geo-
logical Survey; subsequently, on the resignation of Mr. Salter, he became Palae-
ontologist, and siuee that time has gradually risen to hold a foremost place among
the palaeontologists of this country." Roliert Etheridge, Junr., was a boy about
nine years old at this time; and he seems to have inherited his father's interest
in geolog-y, and especially in pal8et>ntology ; for, about 1868, as field-geologist, he
joined the staff of the Geological Survey of Victoria, so ably organised in 1852
and conducted for seventeen yeai-s by Dr. Alfred Selwyn, with the eo-operation
of men like Richard Daintree. C. s' Wilkinson, C. D'Oyley H. ApHn, H. Y.
L. Browii, and others, who not only left their mark on tlie records of Victorian
geology, but subseijuently occupied important official positions in Queensland,
New South Wales, South Australia, or elsewhere in the Commonwealth, or in
New Zealand . R . Etheridge, Junr., on severing his connection with the Geo-
logical Survey of Victoria, became palieontologist to the Geological Surrey of
Scotland, and afterwards senior assistant in the Geological Department of the
British Museum. In 1887, he came back to Australia to fill the position of
palaeontologist to the Geological Survey of New South Walet and to the Aus-
tralian Museum, of which, in 1895, he became Curator, and later on Director.
The list of his contributions to seientifle knowledge, and especially those I'elating
to the palaeontology and anthropology of Australia is very voluminous and valu-
able. Thirty-six of his papei-s, together with six joint papers, are to be found
in the Society's Proceedings for the years 1888-1915, together with one in the
Macleay Memorial Volume. One needs to be a palfpoutologist to appreciate the
merits of his long-sustained work; but I think that it may l)e said of him, that
he did very much for Australian palaeontology, what his father did for British
paliBontology. But over and above this, in connection with the Australian
Museum, he has left a good record as an able organiser and director. His laboure
ended on January 5th, 1920, in his seventy-third year, while he was away for a
holiday at ]\rittagong. We may hope for a more extended biography written by
one who was a colleague, and had a direct interest in his work.

The untimely death of Dr. T. M. Gellatly, Director of the Commonwealth
Institute of Science and Industry, at the early age of 40, is much to be deplored .
He was appointed Chairman of Directors of the future permanent Institute, only
so recently as June, 1918, with the object of organising the industrial scientific
investigations of the Commonwealth. He possessed some special (jualifications
for the work to which he was apiminted; l)ut an attack of pneumonic infiuenza
prematurely ended his pi'omising career on 24th September, 1919, and deprived
the Commonwealth of an able officer for whom it will be difficult to find a sub-
stitute with like (|ualifications.

Several of our Membei's, including Mr. J. E. Carne, Mr. T. Steel, Mr. C.
T. Musson, Mr. A. G. Hamilton, and our Corresponding Member, Sir Baldwin
Spencer, of Melbourne, have recently retired from active official work, but happily
without losing their interest in scientific work generally. Mr. Carne's connection
with the Department of Mines dates from 1879, and, on his retirement at the end
of the \ear, he had been Gt)vernment Geologist for about four yeai-s. His con-

PRESIDENT S ADDRESS. <

tributions to a knowledge of the geology of New South AVales are numerous and
important; and all he knows is not yet on record. Mr. Steel has been associated
for many years with an institution which provides one of our necessary food-
stuffs, and, at the same time, is notable for its appreciation of the importance of
the application of science to industry, and for its regard for the status and wel-;
tare of its scientific officers. Mr. Musson has been a member of the scientific
staff of the Hawkesbury Agricultural College ever since its foundation in 1891.
Mr. Hamihon has been connected with the Department of Education for many
years, and latterly a member of the staff of the Teachers' Training College.
Professor Baldwin Spencer, by his professorial work, his zoological and anthro-
pological contributions, and the scientific records of his travels in Australian out-
of-the-way places, has deservedly come to the front as one of Australia's repre-
sentative men of science. Those of the younger generation who are coining on,
nowadays more than ever, need the encouragement, the help, and a share of the
fruit of the long experience of veterans such as these; and we may be sure that
it will not be withheld when the opportunity offers. The Society is fortunate
in having three of them still on the Council.

To Mr. E. C. Andrews, who has been appointed to succeed Mr. Carne, I
would offer, on behalf of ^itlembers, our cordial congi-aiulations, not only on his
appointmen*^^ to the important position of Government Creologist, but also on his
ha\ing such worthy predecessors to follow, in carrying on the development of tlie
geological knowledge of New South Wales.

To Dr. .J. B. Cleland. who has recently been appointed to the newly estab-
lished Chair of Pathology in the University of Adelaide, our congratulations are
due. We regret that his removal to another State deprives us of an active
Member, and also a Member of Council. But we know that his <iualiflcatious
include much 'valuable experience, and that his appointment to Adelaide means
an opportunity of undertaking effective work in a new field. We wish tliat he
may be very successful.

To Dr. T. Storie Dixson, too, one of our senior Members, I would like to
offer, on behalf of Members, our congratulations on the recent announcement in
the newspapers, that His Gracious Majesty the Iving. as Patron, has conferred
upon him the honour of Ivnight of Grace of the Order of St. John of Jerusalem
in England, in recognition of his long and enthusiastic services m connection with
the St. John Ambulance Brigade, of which he is Commissioner in New South
Wales .

A change of printers became necessary during the year, and I am glad to
say that our new printer is giving satisfaction. The cost of printing of every
kind, however, has increased considerably. Taking advantage of the opportunity
of making fresh arrangements, the Council has decided to enlarge the size of the
Proceeding's, from demy octavo to crown quarto, retaining the same size type,
commencing with the volume for 1920. This will not only give more room for
illustrations, but will simplify the work of supphdng the reprints, which, by
arrangement with the University, are furnished to Linnean ]\Iacleay Fellows, who
carry out their research-work in the University laboratories, under the Regulations
for Research Students. These, hitherto, have had to be specially printed.

The issue of the Monthly Abstracts, which was temporarily suspended, under
war-conditions, after July, 1916, was resumed after the Jleeting in October last,
and will be generally appreciated, because it keeiis distant Members and Societies
in touch with what the Society is doing in the intervals bet'^een the issues of

8 president's address.

the successive Parts of the Proceedings. I would remind Members of the Coun-
cil's injunction that the notices of exhibits at Meetings should be as brief as pos-
sible, and confined as far as possible to the scientific aspec*. of the specimens
shown. Members are asked also not to exhibit too great a variety of different
exhibits at the same Meeting, as this is likely to necessitate too complicated and
too lengthy entries in indexing them.

Concomitantly with the growth of the Society's library, and of the natural
accumulation of its reserve-stock of publications, we have, foi- some yeai-s past,
felt a pressing need for more shelf-room, and more storage-room. During the
]-eeess, the Council has provided for some imjaortaut structural alterations in the
Society's Hall, to meet these and other requirements, together with the installation
of the electric light, and for some necessary, new lavatory arrangements. These
have been completed in a very satisfactory manner by the contractor, Mr. James
Leckie, under the able superintendence of the architect. Mr. A. W. "Warden, in
time for the Annual Meeting.

The year's work of the Society's research-staff may be summarised thus.
Dr. R. Greig Smith, Macleay Bacteriologist to the Society, contributed two papers
on "The Germicidal Activity of the Eucalyptus Oils," which appeared in Parts
i. and ii. of the Proceedings for 1919. He has also completed a paper '"Ropi-
ness in AVattle-bark Infusions," which will be communicated at this month's Meet-
ing.

Dr. J. M. Petrie, Linnean Macleay Fellow of the Society in Biochemistry,
lias carried out an elaborate examination of the leaves, and also of the nuts, of
Macrozamia spiralis, but, in both cases, the extracts failed to yield evidence of
the presence of any poisonous substance, which was detrimental when fed to
animals. A considerable amount of experimental work has been carried out
with lleterodeiidrcm oleaefolia, in order to obtain the eyanogenetic glucoside which
is contained in the leaves. The active principle can be concentrated into viscous
syrup, but hitherto all attempts to induce it to yield a crystalline compound
have failed. The results of these two investigations will be communicated to the
Society, at an early date, in two papei-s, entitled, "The Chemistry of Macm-
zamia." and "The Stock-poison Heterndendron, including experiments on the
Hydrocyanic acid Content." In addition to the foregoing, woi'k is in progress
on the Native Pomegranate {Capparis Mit.chelli). which has proved to be an-
other cyano-genetic plant, though not hitherto known to be, or even suspected of
being poisonous. Also, a continuous series of cjuantitative experiments has been
made, to determine the amounts of hydrocyanic acid evolved from Zieria Smithii
under various conditions.

Dr. R. J. Tillyard, Linnean Macleay Fellow ot the Society in Zoology,
conti-ibuted seven papers during the year, all of wlii(^h have been pub-
lished . These include — "On the Morphology and Systematic Position of the
Family Micropterygidae (sens, lat.), Introduction and Part i.; "Mesozoic Insects
of Queensland," Nos. 5, 6, and 7; "A Fossil Insect Wing belonging to the new
Order Paramecoptera, ancestral to the Triclio])(('ra and Lepidoptcra, from the
Upper Coal Measui-es of Newcastle, N.S.W."; "Studies in Australian Neurop-
tera," No. 8; and "The Panorpoid Complex. Part iii.'' Dr. Tillyard intenils to
continue woiking upon the life-histories of Australian Neuropteroid Insects, and
to make an attempt to bring the systematic knowledge of certain groups up to
date in order to facilitate his morphological work. In October, the Council
granted him porinissiim to visil New Zc;danil. in (ir<lci' to obtain imiiortant ma-

PRESIDEXT S ADDRESS. 9

terial for the i'urtlier working-out of the phylogeny of the Panorpoid Orders,
and especially the Faiuily Micropteri/giclae, which has its head(iuarters there; and
also to collect material in all Neuropteroid groups, in order to study it in con-
junction with the closely allied Australian fauna. Good results were obtained,
except in the Rotorua-Taupo district, where the rainbow-trout introduced into
the lakes had exercised the first call on the insect-fauna in which he was mainly
interested. But this visit to Xew Zealand opened the way for an offer of the
position of Biologist at the Cawthron Institute, about to be established at Nel-
son, which Dr. Tillyard has decided to accept; and, after to-day, we part with
our Senior Fellow next to Dr. Petrie. He has been a member of the Society's
research-staff for ti\e years; and his papers during that period have been a
prominent feature in the Society's Proceeding's. He has not only studied the
Australian aspect of world-problems, but he has tried to open up world-problems
from the Australian standpoint; which is my idea of what Australian workers,
as far as possible and according to their oppoiiunities and resources, should aim
at doing. In losing Dr. Tillyard, what we regret is not so much that we are
losing him as a Fellow of the Society, but that Australia is losing, him ; and
that our hopes, that an opening for doing what he is about to undertake in New
Zealand, would be available for him in Australia, have Ijeen without result. Con-
sequently, it merely remains for me to voice, on behalf of the Council and of the
Society, our apjjreciation of the importance of the work which he has been doing
so enthusiastically for so long; of expressing our sincere regret at losing him,
not only as a Fellow of the Society, but most of all as a scientific worker resi-
dent in Australia; and of wishing him every success in the new sphere of work
which he is about to enter. At any rate, I think he will l)e ready to acknowledge
that his official connection with the Society has been helpful to him as a research-
worker: and that the fruits of his work are, in some measure, his tribute to the
memory of the Ijenevolent and far-seeing man who made the Society's Fellowships
possible.

Dr. H. S. Halcro Wardlaw, Linnean Maeleay Fellow in Physiology,
utilised the opportunity afforded liy the outbreak of ]ineumonic influenza, in the
early part of the year, of making an important investigation in connection there-
with. Measurements of the oys'gen-capacity and other properties of the Ijlood
of influenza patients were made; and the results were embodied in a paper en-
titled "The Venous Oxygen-content and the Alkaline Reserve of the Blood in
Pneumonic Influenza," which was published in Part iii. of the Proceedings for
]919. The work on the reciprocal dialysis of blood and milk has been con-
tinued. The effect on the total solid matter, ash, chlorine, phosphoric acid, and
calcium has been examined. It has been found, contrary to expectation, that,
when milk is dialysed against the blood of the same species, certain of the in-
organic constituents of the milk pass into the blood in considerable quantity.
The further surprising result, that the presence of the red corpuscles of the blood
materially diminishes (his effect has also been obtained. An interpretation of
these pheno.nena has not yet been arrived at, and will need further consideration ;
as do also some other incompleted investigations. Dr. Wardlaw resigned his
Fellowship in September, in order to take up a University appointment as Lec-
turer and Demonstrator in Physiology; and, in this capacity, he is taking part in
the work of the Commission appointed to investigate the prevalence of disease
among mine-workers at Broken Hill. While regretting the Society's loss of Dr.
Wardlaw as a Linnean Jlacleav Fellow, I would offer to him, on behalf of the

ID president's address.

Council and of Members, cordial congratulations on his appointment to the staff
of the University, and of wishing him every success. His five papers contributed
to the Society's Proceedings, as a Fellow for more than three years and a half,
are important additions to the volumes, and bear testimony to his ability to do
liigh-chiss rescarcii-W'jrk .

Miss V. Irwin Smith, Linneau Macleay Fellow of the Society in
Zoology, has devoted her time tc the study of Nematodes, and of the life-histories
of the Braehyeerous Diptera. Considerable progress has been made with both
groups, in collecting material, in looking into the literature of the subject, and
in the examination and drawing of specimens; and the results are already very
promising .

Six applications for Linneau Macleay Fellowships, 1920-21, were received
in response to the Council's invitation announced on October 29th, 1919; I have
now the pleasure of making the first public announcement of the Council's re-
appointment of Dr. J. M. Petrie and Miss V. Irwin Smith to r^llowships in
Biochemistry and Zoology; and of the appointment of Miss M. I. Collins, B.Sc.
to a Fellowship in Botany from 1st proximo; and, on behalf of the Society, as
war-conditions have given place to something approaching a normal state of
things, I have much pleasure in wishing them every success in carrying out their
investigations. Dr. Tillyard was also re-appointed; but, as already mentioned,
in consecjuence of his contemplated removal to New Zealand, he resigned his
Fellowship as from 31st March, 192(1.

Miss Collins has <|ualifications wliicli justify our expectation of an
enlargement of the Society's scope of work in a very desirable direction. She
has an excellent University record, supplemented in an important way by some
experience of research-work and of teaching. She won the Deas Thomson
Scholarship and Professor David's Prize for Geology in 1914, and graduated in
Science in 1915, with First Class Honours in Botany. Miss Collins was awarded
a Science Research Scholarsliip in 191(i and the following year, up to the time
of her appointment as Demonstrator in Botany in the University of Adelaide
under Professor T. G. B. Osborn. For some time she has been actively in-
terested in the effect of certain climatic factors — especially drought and excessive
sunliglit — upon the distribution and structure of Australian plants. This is a
very characteristic, imi^ortant, comjirehensive, and promising Australian
problem. Her paper "On the Leat'-anatomy of Scaecola crarisifolin,"
with special reference to the "Epidermal Secretion," which was \n\h-
lished in the Proceedings for 1918, was the starting-point . In several papers
almost ready for publication, the condition of leaf-lacf|uering and the glandular
structures responsible for the same, have l)een investigated in plants of other genera
available, some of which were obtained from the Broken Hill district. Miss
Collins will now have time to comjilete these, and still further to develop the
subject in hand . Two branches of Science in which the Society is s|)ecially in-
terested, and in which jjrogress has lagged behind, are the morphology of Aus-
tralian phanerogams, and Australian soil-bacteriology and the bionomics of soil-
organisms, especially in the arid parts of Australia. Our old member, Mr. A.
G. Hamilton, with only such laboratory- facilities as a ]irivate individual can
extemporise, and in his wearied leisure, has, for years, manfully striven to ac-
complish some morphological and pollination-work; and, considering his draw-
backs, his labours liave not been in vain. The great hindrance to progress in
this particular l)ranch lias been that, until 1913, there was no Botanical Depart-

president's address. 11

ment at tbu Uni\ersity, and no properly equipped botanical laboratory in
this, the Mother-State of the Commonwealth. The Professor of Botany has been
carrying out important investigations on Australian Cryptogams since its estab-
lishment. But Australian Phanerogams offer a no less attractive and importc.nt
field for morphological research work. We cannot but hail, with great satisfac-
tion, the appointment of JNIiss Collins, because this is not only the firet time
that a Linnean Macleay Fellow in Botany has been appointed, but it is the first
time that a botanical candidate has offered. Moreover, she is interested in Aus-
tralian problems; and it is the investigation of characteristic Australian problems
that is urgently needed, to the exclusion of purely academic biological problems
■which can be carried out au\-vvhere else on the habitable globe; and which may
be left to those who lack the opportunity or the resources for othei-wise getting
to work. Anotlier source of satisfaction is that the systematists may now hope
for some of that needful co-operation, without which they have had to work, as
best they could, for so long.

Dr. A. B. Walkom, who succeeded me as Secretary, to-day completes his
fii'st year of service. As a Memher of the Society since 1909, and as a Linnean
Macleay Fellow in Geology, 1912-13, he began with some preliminary knowledge
of the Society and its work, and was not a stranger to us. As Hon. Secretary
of the Royal Society of Queensland for tour years, and as President for one year
before bis removal to Sydney, he had the opportunity of gaining experience which
has-been very useful to him and to the Society. He was Lecturer in Geology in
the University of Queensland for six years, and was selected by the Council out
of thirteen candidates. As I have co-operated with him in preparing an up-to-
date catalogue of the serial publications in the Society's library; and, in other
ways, have been in close touch with him ever since his appointment, it affords me
much pleasure to bear my testimony to his capacity for taking u|) and carrying
out his duties, as well as to his zeal and efficiency.

The Council has also been able to jirovide for an assistant; and I have plea-
sure in saying that Miss Watson is very efficiently carrying out her duties.

One of the lessons which the War has forced upon the attention of the British,
as well as other nations, is the importance of Science in the conduct of human
affairs, and especially the need of a more satisfactory organisation of scientific
effort . Scientific experts in Great Britain are expressing the \'iews, not only from
the purely British standpoint, but also from the British national or imperial stand-
point. Through their representati\-e, the Royal Society of London, they are ask-
ing the Dominions not only to co-operate with the mother-country to this end, and
for this purpose; but also to join with the mother-country in an International co-
operative effort with which it is associated, and for the establislnnent of which,
some progress has already been made, as the result of two Inter- Allied Conferences
on the future conduct of scientific work of an international character, held in
Paris, November 26-29, 1918; and in -July, 1919. Accoi-dingly. early in the year,
the Royal Society of New South Wales, as the senior Scientific Society of the
Commonwealth, was a.sked by the Royal Society of London "to take the necessary
steps to establish some organisation in Australia which could act as a National
Research Council and nominate National Committees of such Associations as you
may desire to join."

The Royal Society of New South Wales accordingly communicated with the
Scientific Societies in the different States of the Commonwealth, asking them to
appoint delegates; and when this had been carried out, it arranged for a Con-

12 president's address.

ference of the delegates to consider the proposal to form an Australian National
Research Council. The Conference was held on 21st August. 1919, when certain
Resolutions were unanimously passed. As it is desirable that publicity shoidd
be given to these before the next Meeting of the Australasian Association, in
January, 1921, thej' are accordingly included herewith. 1 may say that, in the
appointment of representatives, the effort was made to have all the States repre-
sented, as far as it was possible. To save space, only the representatives' of the
branches of Science in which the Society is directly interested are given.

1. That this meeting proceed to nominate a provisional Australian National
Research Council.

2. That each important branch of science in Australia be represented on the
Council .

3. That the branches of science to be represented include: Agriculture, An-
thropology', Astronomy, Botany, Chemistry, Engineering, Geograpliy, Geology,
Mathematics, ^Meteorology, Pathology, Physics, Phj'siologv, Veterinary Science,
Zoology .

4. That there be two representatives of each of these sciences, on the National
Council .

5. That the representatives of the provisional Australian National Researih
Council be:—

1. Agrici'ltcrk^

A. E. V. Richardson, M.A., B.Sc. (Victoria).
Professor R. D. Watt, M.A., B.Sc. (New South Wales).
2. Anthropology —

C. Hedley, F.L.S. (New South Wales).

Sir Baldwin Spencer, K.C.M.G., M.A.. D.Sc. F.R.S. (Victoria).

4. BOTAXY

J. H. Maiden, I.S.O., F.R.S., F.L.S. (New South Wales).
Professor T. G. B. Osborn, M.Sc. (South Australia) .
8. Geology —

Professor T. W. E. David, C.:\r.G., D.S.O., r,.A., D.Sc. F.II.S.

(New South Wales) .
Professor E. W. Skeats, D.Sc, F.G. S. (Victoria)..

13. Physiology' —

Professor H. G. Chapman, M.D., B.S. (New South Wales').
Professor W. A. Osborne, D. Sc, M.B. (Victoria).

14. Veterinary Science —

Professor ,J. D. Stewart, B.V.Sc, M.R.C.V.S. (New South Wales) .
Prof. H. A. Woodruff, :\r.R.C.V.S., M.R.C.S.. L.R.C.P. (Victoria).

15. Zoology —

Professor W. J. Dakin, D.Sc. F.Z.S., F.L.S. (Western Australia).
Professor W. A. Haswell, M.A., D.Sc, F.R.S. (New South Wales) .

6. That Mr. R. II. Cambage, F.L.S. (New South Wales) be a member of
the Australian National Research Council and also its Honorary Secretary.

7. That the provisional Council hold office until the new Council shall have
been appointed at the next meeting of the Australasian Association for the Ad-
vancement of Science, in I .January, 1921 .

8. That the election of the new Australian National IJcscarch Council l)e
entrusted to the Council of the Australasian Association for the Advancement of
Science at its meeting in .Tnnnarv, 1021 .

president's address. 13

9. That at least ten of the retiring members of the Council shall not be
eligible for re-election, but that this provision shall not operate at the election of
the first Australian National Research Council in January, 1921.

10. That a provisional Executive Committee consisting of a Chairman, an
Honorary Secretary, and three other members be appointed to act at once in all
matters considered urgent, and that the members of such Executive Committee
be :— Professor David (Chairman), Mr. E. H. Cambage (Hon. Secretary),
Professor Chapman, Mr. J. H. Maiden, and Professor Pollock.

11. That it be recommended to this provisional Executive Committee that
the Commonwealth Government be requested to make the financial provisions
necessary for carrying on the work of the Australian I^ational Research Council,
and that for this purpose representations be made to the Prime Minister.

12. In the event of any of the members of ; the provisional Council or the
Executive Committee, declining to accept office, that the Executive be empowered
to fill the vacancies .

The International Research Council has already provided for the establish-
ment of (1) An International Astronomical Union to promote and co-ordinate the
study of Astronomy and Astrophysics; (2) An International Union of Geophysics,
to promote the study of the various branches of the Physics of the Earth; and
(3) An International Chemical Council, to promote international co-operation in
chemistry. Steps will be taken to establish cognate Unions for other branches of
Science. In the meantime, the Australian National Council has asked its repre-
sentatives of Zoology to report on the desirability, or otherwise, of joining the
International Union of Biological Science (when it snail have become established),
more particularly as regards the section of Zoology; and they are inviting others
to confer with them. The object aimed at in forming an International Union of
Biological Science is "to encourage the study of Biology in its various branches,
and more especially" : —

(a) "To initiate and organise the conduct of researches which depend on, co-
operation between countries.

(b) "Ta provide for their scientific discussion and publication."

(c) "To encourage the establishment and improvement of Research Labora-
tories which are accessible to students of all nationalities."

(d) "To promote the organisation of International Congresses."

(e) "To facilitate the preparation and issue of bibliographical publications."
The sections proposed are — General Biology, Physiology, Zoology, Botany,

Medical Sciences, Applied Biology.

Now, theoretically, what is proposed as above is admirable, and no one can
gainsay the need for it, or at least for something of the sort, if the resources for
carrying it out are forthcoming. But there is also another side to the question,
which is not less important for us, and that is. the question of more, and better
organisation of scientific effort from the purely Australian point of view. How
are we to provide for this? At present men of Science in Australia are but a
handful, occupied with official duties, centralised in the capital city of each of the
States, at considerable distances apart, with few opportunities for personal inter-
course. The only comprehensive, unifying organisation in the branches of
Science in which this Society is directly interested, is the Australasian Association
for the Advancement of Science. As a private individual, interested in Science,
I venture to express the hope, that, after the next Meeting, to be held in Hobart
in January, 1921. the Association will give up entirely the practice of reading

14 prestdext's address.

papers in the different Sectiuns, with a view to restricting its activities in the
following manner — to jjroviding opportunity, (1) for personal intercourse be-
tween the Members; (?.) for Presidential Addresses as at present; (3) for dis-
cussing prearranged scientific problems of Sectional or general interest; (4) for
discussing matters relating to the organisation of scientific effort in Australia;
and for doing what it can to accomplish it . In other words, that it should leave
to the Australian Scientific Societies the matter of reading and publishing scientific
papers; and assume the functions ol an Australasian Parliament of Science, in the
interest of promoting co-operation, and a better organisation of scientific effort.
As an example of one of many Australian problems — a •world-problem in
process of being opened* up from the Australian standpoint, under Australian
conditions — wliich is being carried out in the right way, namely by organised team-
work, and, not in Sydney, but at a remote country centre, where the problem
takes its origin. I call your attention to a scientific investigation which is being
carried out at Broken Hill, under the direction of one of our Alembers, Professor
Chapman. A Technical Commission of Inquiry has been appointed recently,
under the State Board of Trade, to investigate the prevalence of disease among-st
mine-woikers at Broken Hill. The investigations will occupy six months, and
£15,000 has been allotted for the work. Professor Chapman, one of our ]\Iem-
bers, has been appointed Chairman of the Commission, and was asked by the
Premier to associate with himself in the Commission such gentlemen as would be
competent to take charge of different phases of the investigation. The Com-
mission is making medical examinations of as many of the mine workers at
Broken Hill as are available, with the object of ascertaining the degree of preval-
ence of miner's phthisis, lead-poisoning, and anchylostomiasis. It is hoped to
study 4500 men who will form about 60 % of those employed along the lode.
Two large X-ray machines have been installed and radiograms are made of each
man's chest by Dr. W. A. Edwards. Six medical practitiono.'S, working under
the direction of Dr. S. A. Smith, are carrying out a thorough medical examina- '
tion of each man. When needed special bacteriological and chemical and cytol-
ogical tests are performed. Through the courtesy of the Commonwealth Clov-
ernment. the services of Dr W. A. Sawyer of the International Healtii ISoard
have been made available to the Commission for the investigation of the oc-
currence of hookworm. As a lesult, a complete working-unit, comprising four
microscopists and two assistants under the control of Dr. Rosenthal, has been
transferred to Broken Hill from Queensland. The staff concerned in this medical
in\estigatiou comprises seven medical practitioners, four mici'oscopists, five as-
sistants, and four statistical clerks, together with four members of the Commission.
The Conunission will endeavour to establish a relation between the sign and symji-
toms of disease noted in the mine worker, the appearance of the radiographic
picture of the lungs and the pathological changes which can be observed in the
lungs of dead miners. As the Commission has been asked to report on the con-
ditions antecedent to the occurrence of ill-health among mine-workers, investiga-
tions are being made into the chemical and physical charactei-s of the dust pro-
duced in the various operations of mining. Some analyses are being performed
upon the ash of the lungs of mine-workers in the hope of adding to the store
of our knowledge about the dust present in the lung-s. Samples of the dust float-
ing in the air of the mines are also being subjected to chemical and physical
examination. This part of the work of the Ccmunissiou has been under the
control of Dr. II. S. H. Wardlaw, who is assisted bv four chemists. We look

president's address. 15

forward, with gj-eat interest, to the results of this well-organised, well-equipped,
co-ordinated effort, the most notable in these respects that we have yet had in
New South Wales.

One of the events of the year has been the oulinination of a disastrous
drought ; and though there has been relief in some districts, other localities are
still much in need of rain. It has been a costly visitation to the State. The
returns of the approximate number of live stock in New South Wales on 31st
December, 1919, as compared with those of the corresponding period of 1918,
show that there has been a decrease of 72,434 horses, partly due to very little
breeding on account of low prices and small demand, and in part to the drought
conditions experienced in many districts for the greater part of the year; of
399,378 cattle, attributable mainly to the effects of the drought, namely, to death
from starvation, conditions not favourable to breeding, and the forwarding of
cattle to market on account of the holdings not being able to carry large stock;
and of 7,028,852 sheep, attributable almost wholly to the droughty conditions,
which have been very severe on breeding-ewes, so that over the greater part of
the State, the lambing was a failure.* in addition to the pecuniary loss repre-
sented by the depreciation of the State's flocks and herds by drought, it is neces-
sary to take count of the fact that the Government is raising a loan of £1,000,000
by the issue of Treasury Bills bearing interest at the rate of 5J per cent., with a
currency of two years from March 1st, 1920, for the purpose of providing funds
to finance advances to distressed farmers, and also to meet payments for seed-
wheat purchased by the Government for issue to farmers, and for other purposes.
The drought, therefore, has not only been another expensive intimation that Aus-
tralia has still some lessons to learn about the solution of drought-problems ; but
that Australia has not learnt all there was to learn from previous similar ex-
periences, particularly the drought which culminated in 1902, and was responsible,
among other losses, for the reduction of the flocks of the State from forty-three
to about twenty millions. "Prevention is better than cure," but as periodical
droughts have a legitimate place in Nature's scheme of things in Australia, Man
cannot, therefore, prevent their occurrence. But is it impossible to learn how to
mitigate, if not to prevent, at any rate in some measure, the periodical levy on
the wealth of the State by droughts? Why is it, for example, that it is left to
droughts to cull the flocks and herds in the exacting way in which it is done by
every serious drought? Answers to these, or other cognate questions are not
bard to find. What Australia especially needs to learn is how to cope successfully
with drought-problems; and to learn that, it is necessary to understand and take
to heart, that droughts are teachers, and not a curse; since they are a legitimate
factor in Nature's scheme of things in this quarter of the globe. Rabbits and
Prickly Pear, &c., may be curses; but Nature is not responsible in any way for
their foothold in Australia. A recent writer has diagnosed the state of Britain,
before her eyes were opened by the War, in the following wordsf — "We have
sloughed our besetting sins in many mental processes. Before the War, men of
science were grossly academic and individual : often abstract to the point of per-
verted mysticism; and the line they took encouraged the men of commerce to the
contempt of pure knowledge. Men of science, merchants, the banks, and the
Government were all in watertight compartments, working apart, and more than

* For further details see the Sydney Morning Herald, February 26, 1920, p. 5 to which
I am indebted for the particulars quoted.

tThomas, W. B., "A Better England — Not a Worse," Nineteenth Century, No. 514,
December, 1919, p. 1013.

Id president's address.

this, contemning one another. The result was tliat, from the nation's point of
view, the brains of the chemist were wasted, tlie activities of the merchants handi-
capped, the wealth of the hanks locked up, and politicians a vain lu.xury. The
British brain was working; but was a mileh-cow for other astuter nations." What
is here said or implied about the importance of the co-operation of men of science
with commercial men and with Governments, and about the national lack of the
appreciation and practice of it, before the War, is only too true. But the men
of science are not, equally with others, to blame for it. For, from time to time,
their representative spokesmen have pointed out what was needed, but their warn-
ings and their recommendations have too often failed to arouse attention or elicit
any response. Or if noticed, their views have been dubbed "counsels of perfec-
tion," or "arm-chaii-" advice, which the "practical" man can well afford to ridicule,
or neglect altogether. Now, in the case of Australia, there is great need for a
closer and more effective co-operation of Science with the primary producer, the
man on the land. With the manufacturer also, but in this case, the need can be
easily provided for, since all he has to do is to make the necessary provision for
increasing his staff by the addition of such scientific experts, chemists or what-
ever they may be, as circumstances require. But the ease of the primary pro-
ducer is different, and it requires the most earnest consideration. It is necessary
for him to learn and understand, what he is apt to overlook, or fail to realise the
importance of — small blame to him, under the circumstances which have encour-
aged it — that there is a theoretical side to his practical acti\ities, which needs to
be taken into account ; that in his case, as in others, the theoretical side and the
practical side are complementary, since true theories are merely the generalisations
upon which practice is to proceed. Now a lack of appreciation of this need of
the recognition of the complementary relations of science and jiractice in rela-
tion to di'ought-problems is jilaiuly in evidence in books and in newspa;ier records ;
and I shall refer to some of them presently. One imperative reason for taking
account of them henceforth is, what is implied in the statement that "Australia's
bid for greatness rests upon her agricultural possibilities'' ;* and that considerable
progress has been made in this direction since these words were recorded, with
more to follow in the immediate future. The imperativeness of the reason re-
ferred to arises in this way. In the earliest days of settlement in the inland
districts, the man on the land was a pastoralist solely. But now that he is de-
voting more and more attention to agriculture, it is necessary to remember that
this means a steadily increasing removal of the natural covering of the soil — in
the shape of forest, or scrub, or gTasses, or whatever it may be — and that his
operations necessitate, over a steadily increasing area, a profound disturbance of
the soil-organisms and of their relations to the indigenous plants, which have come
about as the result of Natu7-e's long-standing arrangements. Now these are mat-
ters which cannot be treated with absolute indifference; for they mean nmi-h : ;iiid
what they may do or mean, it is necessary to leam.

When Australia was colonised in 1788, the first settlers found everything
very diffei-ent from what they had been accustomed to. In due time, a spokes-
num took it upon himself to voice the strangeness of the land to which they had
migrated. This was ]\rr. Barron Field, a Supreme Court Judge in Sydney from
1810-2.3. To him, the colonists were the antipodes of the old folks at home.
Consequently Australia not oidy was, but ought to be, the Land of Upside Down .
It was the great Freak-Land. The plants were freaks, the animals were freaks,

•Gullett, H. S., ".\ustralia's Development: the Coming of the Farmer," Chambers'
.Tiiurnal, .Tanuarv, 1909.

PRESIDENT S ADUKESS. 17

the climate wiw freakish, the euii.steUations were unfamiliar. He not only set
about cataloguing the freaks — "But this is New Holland . . . where the
swans are black and the eagles are white; where the kangaroo, an animal be-
tween the squirrel and the deer, has five claws on its fore-paws, and three talons
on its hind-legs, like a bird, and yet hops on its tail; where the mole (Ornithor-
hynchus paradoxus) lays egg-s, and has a duck's bill," &c., &e.* But he also pro-
ceeded to account for them on the supposition that other countries were created
in the beginning, whereas the fifth Continent was an after-bii'th. not conceived
in the beginning, but which emerged at the first sinning, and was, tiieref ore, curst ;
and the freaks were the fruit of it.

At a later date (1884), another spokesman, Marcus Clark, expressed his
views about Australia thus — "Europe is the home of knightly song, of bright
deeds and clear morning thought. ... In Australia alone is to be found
the Grotesque, the Weird, the strange scribblings of Nature learning how to write.
Some see no beauty in our trees without shade, our flowere without perfume, our
birds who cannot fly, and our beasts who have not yet learned to walk on all
fours."! These and similar effusions are not to be regarded simply as nonsense.
On the contrary, they are most instructive and precious landmarks in the progress
of a knowledge of Australia in Australia, in the daysi when Science was too un-
developed to offer the real interjiretation. The spokesmen were educated men,
but men of a too literary education, for whom science-teaching was not available
in their youth ; but what they said was untainted with the idea that gives birth
to what is apt to be regarded as the only thing worth while, "That's the way to
make money."

In Barron Field's time, even scientific men thought that species were created
as such. If the animals and jilants of Austi'alia were freaks, then that was what
they were intended to be. Marcus Clark might have read Darwin's ''Origin of
Species," but, if so, it failed to impress him. But to-day, scientific men can
explain the supposed f reakishness . Some of it was due to the fact that Aus-
tralia was a sort of "Noah's Ark" for "living fossils" ; some of it had no particular
significance, but much of it was the outward and visible sign of successful adapta-
tion to periodically arid conditions, whereby the supposed freaks were enaljled
to survive droughts, and to live in harmony with a variable and. at times, exact-
ing environment. Mwtntis iiititdnditi, just what the man who goes on tlie laud
needs to know.

At a still later period, only sixteen years ago, another spokesman, another
kind of spokesman, expressed his views about life on the land in Australia. These
deserve caustic criticism, not merely because what the writer has to say is non-
sense, l)ut because it is pernicious nonsense. I refer to a leading article, en-
titled "Australian Pessimism," in the Evening News for April 4th, 1903. After
remarking- upon the absence of poems of a fresh, joyous nature written by an
Australian; of successful attempts to write on the two topics which engross
writers of most other nations — viz., lo\e and home-life, the writer proceeds to
say — "The secret is to be found in the conditions of existence here : life in the
Australian bush is one long weai-y gamble with malignant fate; no man feels sure
of his return for his labour and money; that incomprehensible deity known as
'luck' i-ules everything. The greatest care may be wasted, the greatest preeau-

' Geographical Memoirs of New South Wales. Edited by Barron Field (1825),
pp. mi, 494.

tPrefaoe to "Poems of the late Adam Lindsay Gordon" (1884).

IS PRESIDENT S AUUHESS.

tious come to naught against the breath ol' tlrought or thu ravage of the bush-fiie.
Lite becomes a long watching, with as much cynicism and fortitude as the watcher
can avail himself of, the turning of the great wheel of fortune, which deals out
failure to one man, and success to another, quite irrespeetivi. of their merits.
Under these circumstances, it is no wonder that a tone of cynical le\ity towards
life is the dominant note of Australian literature. 'Home' is just a place wher^
one makes money or loses it, as the case may be,"' and so on. Xow the most
oppropriate label for this diatribe is just — "The Squeaker has squoken.'' Aus-
tralia surely offers no locus standi to such an undesirable alien as fatalism. But
fatalism harnessed to ignorance is a hopeless combination, which deserves no
(juarter from Science. Is there one returned soUiier who would deliberately say,
of the recent terrible war, that the incomprehensible deity known as "luck" ruled
everything in connection with it, the only drawback being that the huge armies
of the two sets of opponents had to engage in a death-struggle, in order to find
out which side the incomprehensible deity favoured, and intended to win .' Xo
wonder that Australia has never been in a position to export a snigU- hale of
wo<j1 or of sheepskins, a single hide, or a frozen carcase! No wonder, also, that
Australian bush-cliildren have never learned to sing "Home, Sweet Home; tliere
is no place like Home" ! And how delightful, by comparison, it must be for a
man on the land to live in a country where the thermometer is often down to zero
or lower, for weeks or longer at a stretch, and the culled stock need to be housed
and fed for about five months, more or less, out of the twelve !

Another writer, in reference to the 190'J drought, speaks of it as — "the
struggle of man against a relentless, cruel environment ; the sweeping away by
overwhelming odds of fortunes, won by years of toil ; of the barren mockery
of 'what has been,' of disaster, desolation and ruin ; of men stripped and wounded
fighting to the end with enduring pluck."" Why not emigrate to Siberia, Russia,
or Canaila. which are not troubled with droughts, but merely have luird winters?

"Old Saltbush" (Walter Smith) in liis poem entitled "Drought: written in
1877, when the Drought was at its worst,"t furnishes another example. This is
really, though it is not what it was intended to be, the story of a squatter who,
after a run of good seasons, thought he would take a sporting chance for just one
year more, at any rate; or perhaps he tossed-up over it. But the drought came
when he was not expecting it, and caught him wholly uniirepared, with a full
complement of .stock ami sheep. It will be noticed that the starving animals are
not spoken of as crawling around the empty siloes, or the dricd-up dams, or about
the artesian bore, which is on strike, but only along the banks of the empty
"great stream-beds," where the "rotting carcasses'' are. The following is portion
of whJit the poet has to say about it: —

lu the great streain-beils, nniddy hules

Where once was water deep.
Ave filled with rotting carcasses

Of cattle and of sheep ;
Aloni; the hanks in ghastly groups

(FuU half their number gone)
The starving stock all feelily craw 1.

Poor wrecks of skin and bone.

Oh ! Demon Drought ! that sweeps away
The hard-earned wealth of years, etc.

•Sydney Morning Herald, November 17th, 1908, in "On the Land" column.
fAustrallan Ballads and other Poems, selected and edited by D. Sladen, p. 2(il.

president's address. lit

still auutlier quotatiou. this time a cliai-ai'ter-sketch from an artiflf entilic-il
"The Man Out Back," published in the Sydney Daily Telegraph of December
29th, 1900. '•Times have changed, and a certain type of the old Australian
pioneer has well-nigh gone. He was one who did things in a large way, and
usually made his fortune. He was an interesting character, and his methods, if
primitive, were eft'eetive. Rough in speech, jjlain of dress, fond of hard work,
with long hours and simple food, he was yet genial in company. In business,
he was usually hard and stern, and he was especially noted for his shrewd dealings
in money-matters. He lived to make money, and any hindrance that stood iu
his way was brushed aside by his strong personality. 'A pound saved is as good
as two pounds made,' one that I knew used to say. He succeeded, and accumu-
lated money, and, what is more to the point, stuck fast to it. 'You'll have to leave
your wealth behind you, and whoever gets it will probably spend it recklessly,"
I said to him once, with a frankness that did not displease him. 'Well,' he
answered with a hard laugh, 'if those who come after me get lialf as much
pleasure in spending it as I have had in making the money, I'll be pierfectly
satisfied.' When he took up '250,000 acres in the back country, he was content
with a poor dwelling-place. A shelter from the rain was almost the main con-
sideration. He dill not believe in making improvements. 'Eat out the country,
and then move elsewhere, was bis motto. 'If they want you to make improve-
ments, throw up the country,' he said. In time of drought his sheep were dying
for want of water and feed. 'Let them <lie; it doesn't pay me to feed them. I
can buy plenty more when the rain comes. That's the way to make money.' "

What is amiss with the sentiments expressed in the extracts quoted? They
are wrong in at least two I'espects. Firstly, they are views of Man's relation to
Nature based ui)on self-interest, that is upon his money-making in.stinct — the idea
that it may l)e cheaper and less trouble to take chances, even if it results in
drought culling the flocks and herds, than it is to learn how to prevent it; and
that "That's the way to make money." And, secondly, they take no account
whatever of the complemental, scientific side of what droughts are, of what they
mean, and of the part they play in the economy of Nature, and of Man's concern
with them from this point of view.

Man needs rest after strenuous work, whether physical or mental; and I he
physiologist can give a scientific explanation of the need of it, and of the
result of it.

The land also periodically needs a rest or sweetening, and the biologist can
give a scientific explanation of the need of it, as well as of the result of it. It
is a matter of expeiience, that the year after a drought breaks np. is a bumper
year for crops and herbage.

Nature has adopted two ways of resting and sweetening the land, and. at the
same time, of generally clearing up and putting things in order, getting rid of
weaklings and undesirables, and putting species, that have got out of bounds, back
into their proper places. These are, (1) annually recurring, hard winters, as in
the extra-tropical countries of the Northern Hemisphere, the hardness varying with
the latitude. This may be distinguished as the winter-sleep or resting of the
land. And (2) periodical droughts in the subtropical countries of the Southern
Hemisphere, like Australia, Subtropical South America, and South Africa, which
liave mild winters, not severe enough to give the land a thorough rest or sweetening.
The arrears accumulate imtil, sooner or later, the drought comes, puts things
straight again, strikes a balance, and makes way for a new start, the onset of

20 president's address.

tbe bumper year. This may be distrnguishetl as the drought-sleep or resting
or sweetening of the laud. The dittereuce between Nature's two methods of doing
the same kind of thing depends on geographical position, aiul on cosmical condi-
tions of high and low pressure areas, sun-spots perhaps, and so on ; and, of
these, the meteorologist and the astronomer can give a scientific account.

Therefore, to rail at droughts, to call them a curse, to sjieak of them as re-
sponsible for a relentless, cruel environment for the man who goes on the land in
Australia, or as a Demon who robs the squatter of his hard-earned wealth, some
of it earned simply by allowing Nature to convert grass, her own grass, into wool
and mutton, is to be as ignorantly foolish as to say, night, the need of sleep
and recreation, the Sabbath-day's rest, and holidays are curses, unfriendly
Demons, because they nightly, weekly, or periodically interrupt his money-making
activities. And it might be supplemented by lamenting that Jian is such an im-
perfect creature, because a perfect man should have an iron constitution, which
would enable him to dispense with sleep and rest, so that he might uninterrupt-
edly be making money, twenty-four hours per diem, seven days per week, three
hundred and sixty-tive days per annum, year in and year out . That would be
the way to make money !

The man on the land in tlie Northern Hemisphere, after sreiierations of ex-
perience, has learned his lesson, and is able to live in harmon>' with iiis environ-
ment. The severity of the annually recurring winters compels him to house and
feed his stock; therefore, he must grow enough fodder to provide for them, and
he must cull his flocks and herds, so that the demand for fodder shall not exceed
the supply. What helps him to learn his lesson is, that the recurrence of winter-
conditions, on the whole, is so regular, that he can arrange his programme
of work by the almanac; and, not less, that he certainly knows that he will be
ruined, if he does not come up to the mark. So, knowing exactly what he has
to do, and how to do it, and what will happen if he fails to do it, he makes
good ; and abstains from talking nonsense and heresy about his relentless, cruel
environment, even when the thermometer goes below zero; or about winter being
a curse. In a word, lie Ijccomes a ]>hilosopher, in the primary sense of the
word; and the idea of a long, weary gamble with malignant frost and ice finds
no place in his mind.

The man on the land in Austi-alia, Subtropical S..uth America, and South
Africa, has to carry out his work on a ditferent basis, inasmuch as he lias to learn
how to adapt himself to Nature's arrangements for giving the land its needed
rest and sweetening, juot by a regularly, annually recurring winter-sleep, but by
a periodical but not regularly lecurring drought-sleep. Nature, in Austi'alia,
has proWded a genial climate, with splendid natural jiasture-grasses and fodder-
plants; with no hard, annually recurring winter, recjuiring the man on the land
to house his stock, and grow crops to feed them under those circumstances, as
well as to cull out all but what he can feed; and, in many cases, with procurable
water, tiiough it may not always be visible on the sui'face. Nevertheless, he ha.s
not yet learned to live in harnumy with his enviroinncnt, so successfully as his
representative in the Northern Hemisphere, because, though he knows from ex-
perience or from historical recoi-ds, that droughts are certainly to be looked for
from time to time, lie cannot tell from the almanac exactly when to exiiect them.
This recunence of dro\ights at uncertain intervals, which he cannot calculate. —
and Science cannot definitely ]iel]> him in that respect at ])rcsent — is a dis-
turbing factor, wliich )iei indically makes Ids environment erratic, and ]nits him out

president's address. 21

of harmony with it. This iinfertaiuty introduces the teinj^tation to take chances,
which may l)e disastrous, and underlies the idea of the "Gamble out West."

What Australia needs to learn, by the guidance and co-operation of Science
— and there is no Ijetter way of doing' it — is, how to insure against damage by
droughts. That is: — (1) How to prevent the production of "necessitous farm-
ers,'' re<]uiring St&te aid, to the amount of about £1,000,000, in order to re-
habilitate themselves after a visitation of drought. The State Trea^surer reports
that, already, £600.000 has been disbursed for this purpose. Do hard winters
in the Northern Hemisphere ever or often produce "necessitous farmers" re(|uir-
ing to be relieved l)y the State, to such an amount ?

(2) How to prevent droughts from cuUing the herds and Hocks, on the
customary colossal scale ; and from obliterating the promise of harvests .

This can be expressed in another way — How can the man on the land in
Australia, with the aid of Science, learn to solve the following questions?

1. In attempting to in.sure against, or to cope with droughts, is he at-
tempting to accomplish the impossible; or is he only in some districts, or in
some cases, trying to accomplish the impossible?

2. Or is he attemjiting to accomplish the possible (a) in the right way; or
( b ) with good intentions, l)ut with insufficient knowledge or equipment, or with
inadequate resources?

From time to time, especially on festive occasions, important j'ersonages in-
dulge in forecasting the future population of Australia as 100 millions, or even
200 millions, and in descanting upon the necessity of filling up the empty spaces
of the continent, but, in the reports of their speeches in the newspapers, as far
as I have seen, without insisting on the very necessary stipulation — if and when
Australia learns, or is going to learn, or has learned, how to cope with drought
problems. The strengfh of a chain is the strength of the weakest link. The
population that Australia can support, is the population that she can safely carry
when droughts come. The State is recovering in part from a very severe ex-
perience of drought. Great activity is lieing displayed in all the States in the
way of facilitating the settlement of returned soldiers, and immigrants on the
land. This Meeting seems to me to Ije an opportune occasion for asking what, I
think, is a proper and a ]>ertinent question, because drought problems are
primarily scientific problems, and, therefore, the guidance and co-operation of
Science is needeil for their solution. The question, I would ask, is the twofold,
neglected question — How is it, seeing that drought-problems are so very important,
that we ha\e no Handbook, or Manual, or fade mecum of Australian Drought-
Problems; and if not, why not; and how soon may we look forward to having
one? We have manuals of the flora, of the fauna, of the birds, of the fishes, of
the fungi, of the fodder-plants and gi'asses, of the minerals and fossils, and so
on : and we know them to be of fundamental importance, and to be most helpful
and suggestive, in the investigation of problems to which thej' relate. In antici-
pation of the visit of Members of the British Association for the Advancement
of Science in 1914. an admirable series of Handbooks, one for each of the older
States, and one for the Commonwealth as a whole, was published. These served
not only for the enlightenment of the visitors, but are standard works of reference
to-day. Wliat I have in view is something different from these, and something
which is not intended in any way to clash with, or supersede the publications of
the State Department of Agi-iculture, for example, some of which contain articles
bearing upon some aspect or other of drought-problems. It is not to be a l)Ook

-I PRESIDEXT S ADDRESS.

to teach the man on the huul how to grow crops, or how to raise stock, primarily,
or how to accumulate shekels, or anythinir of that sort. Jt is to be a book solely
for the purpose of setting forth the complemental, theoretical side of the practical
activities of the man on the land, esjjecially in relation to drouaht-iJroblems. with
tlie object of enabling him to understand what it is he needs to learn in order to
make the most of his resources in providing against disaster; that is how to live
and keep in harmony with his somewliat erratic environment: and tu understand
that drought is not a curse, and that he is not called on to fight droughts, but
to fight his ignorance about how to cope with them, which ought to be. sooner
or later, enlightenaljle, provided that Science is afforded an opportunity of helping
him.

Apart Ironi the fact that no such book, as 1 have i>roposed. is available at
]>resent, the need nt such a book is not that nothing at all is known al)out
drought-problems, hut that so much of what is known is to lie found in back
numbers of newsijapers or in scientific .journals, where it is not accessible to
those who want it, and could make use of it; and that tliese contributions to
knowledge deal only with jiarticular aspects or cases, and not eomijrehensively
witli the subject in its entirety. What is wanted, as I think, is a selfcontained
Handbook of the complementary, theoretical side of drought-problems. I give
a sketch of the ground that, in my opinion, nught l)c covered by it, just as some-
thing for consideration and discussion: — ■

Synopsis.

Nature and Man, Nature's Insurgent Son---Disturbance of Nature's Balance
by Settlement, and what that involves; the reckless or careless introduction of
undesirable Aliens, lil^e Rabbits, Prickly Pear, &c. ; and the reason why they
flourish in tlicir new environment — Droughts: their Histoi-y and Periodicity in
Australia — Droughts in South Africa, and Subtropical South America — Their
Cause and ]\reaning in the Economy of Nature: Nature's two ways of resting
or sweetening the land, and, at the same time, of clearing up. putting thing's
in order, and striking a balance, by (1) severe cold, or (2) more or less intense
aridity — The year after a drought, the bumper year for crops and lierbage. and the
scientific explanation of the resting and sweetening of the land — The Lessons to
be learned from the high level and low-level Flood-plains of the Hawkcsbury River
Valley, as in evidence at Richmond; and from the desiccated Lake Eyre Basin of
Central Australia, called by Gregory "The Dead Heart of Australia" — The Adap-
tations of the indigenous Plants and Animals to arid conditions, and the lessons
to.be learned from them — The Man on the Land in the Northern Hemisphere, with
an annually recurring liard winter, in harmony with his environment — The Man
on the Land in the Southern Ileniisjjhere. witli mild winters hut periodical
droughts, whose ]ieriodicity cannot at present be calculated, not yet wholly in
harmony with his environment — The need to conserve the fertility of the Soil, and
the indigenous grasses and fodder-plants — Disturbance of the Soil-organisms, and
of their long-standing association with the indigenous Plants, especially the
Acacias and Eu<alypts; the Bionomics of Soil-organisms in the arid portions of
the Continent; and the risks from strong, dry. Westerly Winds, in the absence
of a covering of Snow, when the natural covering of the ground has been re-
moved— Lessons from Droughts; and the Application of the Lessons — Bibliography,
as a guide to more detailed consideration of special subjects — Index, &c.

Hap)>ily there have been and are men on the land in Australia, who have
leariicil tlijit droughts are not a cui'se, tliough rabbits and prickly pear may be;

PRESIDEXT'.S .iDDRESS. 23

fliat the land needs a periodical rest or sweetening; that it is the dry climate and
(he high-class uutritixe native grasses and herbage, wiiieh are largely responsible
for the excellence of Australian wools; that if every season were a good one, the
stock and sheep would suffer severely from parasites, and from diseases; and,
best of all, men who do not believe that Nature's great scheme of tilings, which,
by flow degrees, has evolved from the womb of Time, has arrived at its present
advanced state of development, for the sole and only purpose of gratifying the
money-making instincts of the Get-rich-quick Dollarton Shekelf ords, just as and
how they would like to be able to order it. Records of the actual experience of
intelligent and enlightened men of this kind, are among tlie things wanted ; and
some of it is already on record in the files of old newspapers. They are men
who can appreciate the words of Mr. Roosevelt, when President of the United
States, in his opening Address to the American Forest Congress, held at Washing-
ton, January, 1905 — "All of you know that there is opportunity in any new
country for the development of the type of temporary inhabitant whose idea is
to skin the country and go somewhere else. . . . That man is a curse and
nut a l)lessing to the country. The prop of the country must be the business
man who intends so to run his business that it will be profitable to his children
after him. ... I ask, with all the intensity I am capable of, that the men
of the West will remember the sharji distinction 1 have just drawn between the
man who skins flie land, and the man who develops the country."

Tile book should not be a one-man book, but a team-work book, supervised
by a capable editor. It should lie simply but scientifically written by specialists
in the different branches, after the manner of the Handbooks ])repared, at dif-
ferent times, for the Meetings of the Australasian and of the British Associa-
tions for the Advancement of Scienece. But, for the chapters to which they
relate, and especially those on the lessons of droughts and their application, from
the practical man's side, the files of tlie newspapers, at least as far back as
the drought which began in 1888, should he systematically looked up. Some of
the articles therein are excellent, for they are often the records of actual experi-
ence and first-hand knowledge; and, as such, they are of historical interest. The
cream of all these should be skimmed, sup]ilemented as may be required, and
put into the Handliook; and, if desirable, referred to in the Bibliography. Papers
in scientific journals should lie utilised in a similar manner.

But the pnblicati(m of a Handbook, in the way of pro])aganda, is not
enough . Tlie annual output of books is so enonnous, that any particular book is
apt to lie ]iut on the shelf, and perhaps forgotten. Therefore some propagandists
are needed . A good way of providing for these, I think, would be the endow-
ment of a course of three annual lectures. One lecturer always to be a scientific
man; another always to be a man on the land; and the third always to be a
business man callable of dealing with the statistical and financial aspects of
drouglit-probleras. The lecturers to be appointed annually, a year in advance,
so that they may have time for the preparation of their lectures. The lecturers
to be allowed to choose the subjects of their lectures, provided — and this is to tie
a sine qua )ion — that the aim and object thereof is to elaborate, to expound, to
make clear, and, if possible or necessary, to amplify tlie Handbook. The lec-
tures sometimes to be delivered in Sydney when the primary jiroducers come to
hold their annual Congresses; and, sometimes in one or other of the centrally
situated and accessible country towns, as may be decided . In this way, attention
would periodically be focussed on the Handliook, and on tlie subject with which

24 president's address.

it lias to do. Discussion tliereon would be promoted. If taken up and entered
into entliusiastically, tlie subject of drought-problems should become a live sub-
ject, as it ougbt to be, ami as it needs to be; and then we may expect to make
some progress.

Next only to the need of righteousness, and of the maintenance of tlie in-
tegrity and welfare of the Empire, the question of how to cope successfully with
droughts in Australia, stands second to none in its importance. For Australia's
bid for greatness rests upon this, inasmuch as her agriculture and other possi-
bilities can only be imperfectly realised without it.

(Kv TlIK CORRKCT I XTKRPKET.iTlOX OP TH !•; SO-CALLKU PhYI.LODES OF THE
AUSTRALIAX PhVI.LOUIXEOUS AcAt'IAS.

(Plates i.-viii. )

The Australian Hora furnishes numerous examples of plant-structures, which,
as one usually sees them, are difficult to understand, jiartly because they repre-
sent secondary developments which have been superimposed on the primal y,
natural order of things; and partly because one commonly meets with complicated
adult structures, of which the early stages are not always readily obtainable. The
so-called phyllodes of Australian Acacias are one of the most common and
familiar examples of these plant-puzzles. These have been regarded as the
'•classical'' examples of phyllodes, because there are so many species of pliyllo-
dineous Acacias, and they are so widely distributed . Nevertheless, strictly sjieak-
ing. they are not "phyllodes" within the meaning of the recognised definition of
these leaf-substitutes. For example, in the Glossary of Terms prefixed to the
first volume of the Flora Australiensis (p. xxxix.) will be found the definition —
"Pli,\llodiuin - a flat petiole with no blade." Asa Gray defines a phyllodium as
"a petiole usurping the form and function of a leaf-blade." In both cases, these
definitions are intended to apply to the flattened leaf-suljstitutes of the Australian
phyllodineous Acacias.* Bentham says of Division i., PIn/llodiiieae — "Leaves all
(except on young seedlings and occasionally one or two on young branches') re-
duced to phtjllodia, that is to the petiole either terete or angular or more or less
vertically dilated so as to assume the appearance of a rigid simple leaf, with
an upper and a lower edge or margin, and two lateral simifar surfaces, and
either sessile or contracted at the base into a short petiole, the upper edge often
bearing 1, 2, or rarely 3 or more sliield-shaped or tubercular or depressed
glands." (Fl. Austr., ii.. p. 319.)

But the so-called phyllodes of the Australian phyllodineous Acacias are not
simply Hattened petioles which have lost their blades. The current statements
about them, such as those f|uoted above, are imperfect generalisations based upon
inadequate material. On the contrary, they are the flattened, primary leaf-axes
or common petioles of bipinnate leaves which ha\e lost their iiinuiv; and it is
the fiirmer which have usurped the forui and I'unctiou of the latter; and not
fiatteneil petioles which have usurped the form and function of leaf-blades.
The so-called phyllodes of Au.stralian Acacias may be long, or short, or very
short. If long, they are the flattened primary axes, or common petioles, (.f
potentially long bipinnate leaves, with numerous pairs of lunnir. If short, or
very short, they are the flattened primary axes, or common petioles, of potentially

•tiray's Botanical Text-book (18871. pp. 110. 426.

PRESIDENT S ADDRESS. -3

short, bipiimatc loaves, with several, or only one pair of pinnse, whose pinnae
have vanished. Tlierel'ore, as the so-called phyllodes of the Australian phyllo-
dineous Aeaeias are not e.xaetly eomparable with the phyllodes of other plants,
and are not phyllodes witliin the meaning of the current definitions thereof, they
should be distinguished from ordinary phyllodes, and also have a distinctive name.
As they are neither cladodes nor phylloclades, within the meaning of the current
definitions of these stru<;tures, I propose to call them Euphyllodia or euphyllodes,
in tlie sense that they are something more than is implied in the accepted defini-
tion of phyllodes; and. therefore, something more than simply flattened i^etioles;
inasmuch as they really are. as 1 shall show, in what follows, vertically flattened,
primary leaf-axes or common petioles, whose pinna? have been suppressed, which
have usurped the form and function of lea\es. Instead of Phyllodinea! and
phyllodineous Acacias. T propose to use the terms Eupliyllodines and euphyllo-
dineous Acacias, in order to be consistent.

Several more detailed interpretations of the phyllodes. so-called, of Aus-
tralian Acacias are on record. One was offered by Morren. in 1852.* Unfor-
tunately, no copy of this paper is available in Sydney, and I do not know on
what kind of evidence he based his views. But two authore, Maxwell Masters
and Baron von Mueller, have given the substance of Morren 's hypothesis. Mas-
ters says§ — "When the blade of the leaf is suppressed it often happens that
the stalk of the leaf is flattened, as it were, by cimipensation, and the petiole
has then much the appearance of a flat ribbon (phyllode). This happens con-
stantly in certain species of Acacia, Oxalis, &c.. and has been attributed, but
doubtless erroneously, to the fusion of the leaflets in im early state of develop-
ment and in the position of rest."

Baron von Mueller seems to have acceiited Morren's hypothesis, but without
mentioning the author of it. In his "Introduction to Botanic Teachings" (p.
25. 1877), he says of the Australian Acacias — "This enormous number of con-
generic plants [about .300 species] can conveniently be separated into two main
groups, according to the structure of their leaves, whetiier consisting of a simple
blade, or whether formed by distinct leaflets. The first of this primary division
is called that of the Phyllodineje, from a Greek word implying leaf-like form,
because the supposed simple leaves are in reality formed by the confluence of
leaflets, stalldets and stalks into one leaf-like mass, or according to the more
generally adopted but less accurate views simply dilated leaf-stalks (piiyllodia ) ;
this metamorphosis is most readily demonstrated and proved by observing the
apparently simple-leaved Acacias in early growth, when the first leaves developed
by the young seedling will be found to be compound, consisting of leaflets ar-
ranged in two rows, thus forming iiinnae, several again of these pinn<B forming
the bipinnate leaf, the axes along which the leaflets are placed being also ar-
ranged in a pinnate manner. What in the phyllodineous division of the genus
Acacia is noticed only on the leaves of the young plant, becomes normal through-
out for the second group, that of the Bipinnatse."

A second interpretation is current in Textbooks of Botany. This is not
less unsatisfactory than the Baron's. It is frequently presented as a brief,
definite, and apparently authoritative statement — an axiom or a postulate, as it
were, which the student is to accept in faith. For example. Bentliam, in his
generic description of Acacia, says — "Leaves twice pinnate or reduced to a simple

•0. Morren, Bull. Acad. Beltf., 18.52, t.xix., p. 444.
SMasters, Vegetal)Ip Teratology, p.329, 18(i9.

26 i'HP:slUh'NT'.S ADDRE.<S.

jiliyllodiuiii oi- (lilattMl j)cliiilc" (Fl. Aiist., ii.. p. 301). Kciiut says* — "It lias
already been mentioiieil on p. 335 [(|Uoteii later on t'oi another reason] that a
like nioditieation of function oeeurs in many Australian Aeaeias, the foliage-
leaves of whieli are de\oid of green blades whilst the leaf stalks are developed as
gi'een, flattened, outspread organs, the so-called phyllodes." These, and similar
statements are based on no more logical argument than this — The phyllodiiieous
Acacias have phyllodes; phyllodes are flattened petioles, &c.; therefore the idiyl-
lodes of Acacias are flattened petioles, which have lost iheir l)lades. The fallacy
of the argument lies in the fact, that the so-called |)lyil(MUneous Acacias have
not i)hyllodcs in the accei)ted meaning of the term.

Sometimes however, authors venture to give an explanation. Hut the ex-
planations known to me are not less fallacious than the definitions of the phyl-
lodes, so-called, of Australian Acacias. For example, Lubbock, in his "Flowers,
Fiuit.s, and Leaves" (p. 120, %. 75: 1880) gives an explanation, together with
an illustration of a seedling — the liret ever )niblished, as far as 1 know, lie
says — "The ly])ical leaves of Acacias are pinnate, with a numbei- of leaflets.
On the other liand, many of the Australian Acacias have leaves (or. to sjieak more
correctly, jihyllodes) more or less elongated or willow-like. But if we raise
them from seed we tind, for'instance. in Acacia mlicina, so called from its le-
semlilance to a Willow, that the lirst leaves are pinnate (Fig. 75), and ditlVr
in nothing from those characteristic of the genus. In the later ones, however,
the leaflets are I'educed in number, and the leafstalk is slightly compressed
laterally. The fifth or sixth leaf, perhaps, will have the leaflets reduced to a
single )iair, and the leaf-stalk still more flattened, wliilc when the jilant is a little
older, nothing remains excejit the flattened ]>etiole." Xow the passage (juoted is
very remarkable, liul hardly more so than others of similar import to be found
in <ither books. Such statements are im|)erfect generalisations baseil upon in-
ade(|uate niateilal. Though jiiit forward in good I'aith, they are nevertheless
pitfalls and stumbling-lilocks. lioth for teachers and students. The first state-
ment that "the tyi)ical leaves of Acacias are pinnate" is faulty. There are no
Acacias with jiinnate leaves. On the contrary, the typical Acacias have twice
))innate or bi])innate leaves. Xext, "I'lit it we raise them from seed we fliul,
for instance, in Acacia saliciiui . . . that the Hrst leaves are pinnate (Fig.
75), and differ in nothing from those characteristic of the genus." The seedling
shown in Fig. 75 has no pinnate leaf or leaves. The first is a liipinnate leaf
with one jjair of pinn;B, the second is also a bipinnate leaf with one i)air of
jiinnie. and with an indication of the so-called phyllode on the ii])per .side: the
third is also l)ipinijate with one ])air of inniia'. and indications of the so-called
))liyllo<le on both upper iind lower siilcs; while the luurlli niiil fifth are complete
phyllodes. so-called.

Lulibock's descrii)tion and figure of a seedling of .1. saliciiia are the mdv
ones of this s))ecies yet iiublished. But if the seedling figured was not an
anomalous (jiie, it was an incomplete specimen; and Lubbock ilid not notice that
the first leaf, which should have been a simply pinnate leaf, or i)erhai)s a pair
of opposite simiily pinnate leaves, was missing. But what one particularly
wants to know, is. why Lubbock calls the structure, to which the single pair of
jiinna' of his bipinnate leaves is attached, the "leaf-stalk," which is firstly slightly
compressed laterally, and then finally become the flattened petiole or phyllode?
Tn other words, on what gTounds is it taken for granted that the iiinna? of the

'Natural History of Plants, En<;lish TiT.nslation, Vol. i.. |i.ii:f7.

PRESIDENT S AHUDESS.

bipiiinate leaves of Aeaeia-seedlings with only a single pair of theiu, which ap-
pear sueeessively after the first simply pinnate leaf, or in some cases after an
opposite pair of them, represent a pair of pinnae at the node immediately above
the leaf-stalk or petiole ? I have not yet met with any description of Acacia
seedlings or Acacias in which this question is answered, or even considered,
except by Preston, referred to later on . As a matter of fact, the pair of pinnae
of bipinnate leaves, with only one pair, such as successively make their appear-
ance after the first simply pinnate leaf, or a paii- of them, represents the
apical pair; and what is below them is the entire primary leaf -axis or common
petiole, and not simply the ordinary petiole. That is to say, the succession
of the pairs of pinna? in the development of a bipinnate leaf with several pairs
cf pinnae, of an Australian Acacia, is basipetal: and not basifugal, as tacitly
assumed, and taken for gi-anted.

It is interesting to note, therefore, how two eminent liiologists, like von
Mueller and Lubbock, independently came to the conclusion that, not merely the
same sort of evidence, but the selfsame evidence — the evidence afforded by the
"first leaves" of phyllodineous Acacia-seedlings — demonstrated and proved two
divergent, and irreconcilable hypotheses: the metamorphosis of liipinnate leaves
into phyllodes by the confluence of leaflets, stalklets and stalks in the one case;
and by the flattening of the petioles and the disappearance of the blades, in the
other. AVhat is wrong with these two discordant conclusions is not that one is
correct, and the other incorrect; but that neither of them is wholly correct, and
that both are partially iucoiTect. Mueller's hypothesis is incorrect in so far as
the leaflets and stalklets, that is the pinnae, are concerned ; for these abort entirely,
and take no part whatever in the formation of the so-called phyllodes. The
e^'idence on that point is clear and conclusive; and one is at a loss to under-
stand how Morren and he were led to think that the leaflets and stalklets con-
cresced with the stalks or axes. But the stalks, that is the primary axes, or
common petioles of the actual or potential bipinnate leaves, the ordinary petioles
together with the rhachises, do flatten to form the so-called phyllodes, and are
the only components thereof; and, to that extent, his hypothesis is correct. But
Fupposing that there is a confluence of leaflets, stalklets and stalks, why was
Mueller content to call such structures phyllodes, when, by the current definition,
phyllodes are flattened petioles, which have lost their blades — neither more nor
less?

On the other hand, Lubbock's hypothesis is incorrect in supposing that, in
the formation of Acacia phyllodes, so called, "nothing remains except the flat-
tened petiole"; whereas, in truth, everything remains except the iiinn*. But
it is correct in so far as the pinnae are concerned, for these vanish entirely.

T\'hile lack of adequate material, and of personal knowledge of the plants
as they grow under natural conditions, are the ultimate reasons for the long-
standing, incorrect, current ideas about the phyllodes, so-called, of Australian
Acacias, there ai-e three main proximate reasons : —

(1) The ambiguous, because too general, statements about the "first leaves"
of the seedlings of the Australian phyllodineous Acacias ; and the neglect to deter-
mine the mode of the succession of the pairs of pinnae in the development of the
bipinnate leaves.

(2) Either the non-recognition of the jiresence of tlie "seta teriiiiiialis" of
Bentham, or "the recurved point," or the "excurrent point" of the common petiole
or of its distal component, the rhachis; or, if noticed pnd mentioned, the disre-

28 presidext's address

r

gard of its meaiiiiiy: aiu! siguificaiife. when discussing tho nature aiul iiitcrpret-
tion of Acaeia-pbyllodes, so-called.

And (3) The omission to take into account the siiiiiilc but very significant
fact, that the ])etioles, or apparent petioles of all the known Australian bipinnate
Acacias, of which twenty-two species are described by Benthaui in the Flora
Australicnsis, are short or even very short, relatively to the leugfh of the entire,
primary leaf-axes, or common petioles; whereas some Acacia-phyllodes, so-
called, are not only much longer than the petioles of any existing bipinnate
Australian Acacia, being as long as 12 to 20 inches in some species ; but are even
longer than the couunon petioles of the longest leaves of any known, bipinnate,
Australian Acacia.

I propose, therefore, to consider these three questions seriatim, and in .some
detail, because it is time the real nature of the so-called phyllodes of Australian
Acacias was recognised and taken into account. The current belief about them
is a barren conception, which has obstructed the progress of knowledge, and
leads one into the wilderness. If the so-called phyllodes of Australian Acacias
are simi)ly flattened petioles which have lost their blades, there is nothing more'
to be said al)out them that is of any importance. But when one knows what
they really are, it is a simple matter to reconstruct the euphyllodineous
Acacias, and, then having done this, to find corresponding analogues among the
existing, bipinnate species. And not only so, but when one knows where, when,
and how to look for reversion-foliage and reversion-shoots of the right sort, one
can find Nature actually reconstructing them, as T sliall presently show. Having
arrived at this stage, the study of the euphyllodineous Acacias takes on an en-
tirely new, and extremely interesting and )iromising aspect.

Thk "First Lkaves" of the Seedlings of ArsTRALiAX Acacias.

From the extracts given above, it is eviilent that, by the expression the "first
leaves'" of Acacia-seedlings, Mueller and Lubltuck mean — and the same remark
will apply to other authors who express themselves similarly — the earUest leaves
which successively develop on young seedlings; and that neither of them takes
account of the simply pinnate leaf, or sometimes a i^air of opposite, simply
pinnate leaves, which is, or which are, actually the fii'st to appear.

The foliage of the young' seedlings of the Bipinnata- is similar to that of
other plants with bipinnate foliage, in that the earliest leaves to make their
appearance are of a simpler type than those ^\•luch follow them in later stages
of the development of the complete hipiMnatc' leaf. Tlie march of progi'ess, as
is usual, is from simple to complex.

The very first leaf is an abruptly pinnate leaf, with sevei-al pairs of leaflets,
or there may lie an opposite pair of them. The second is an abruptly bipinnate
leaf witii oiu' pair of pinn;p and more or less numerous pairs of leaflets. Now
this leaf, and others like it. which follow, represents and corresponds to a leaf
like the first, in which the ajiical pair of leaflets has been replaced liy an apical
pair of pinna;; while the lower pair, or pairs, of leaflets, counting from above,
have been suppressed. That tiiis is the correct view to take is shown by the
presence of the seta terminalia, or terminal seta, in which the primary leaf-axis
lerminntes in l)oth cases. Tliis is the renuiant of a terminal leaflet in the flrst,
al)ruptly pinnate leaf; and the remnant of a terminal pinna in the .abi-uptly bi-
pinnate second leal', and in others like it. as will be discussed more in detail
later on.

president's address. 29

lu seedliugs ul' ,i. disculur, one of the very eomuiuu l)ipmuate Acacias of the
Sydney district, for example, the first leaf is abruptly pinnate with about six
pairs ot leaflets; tlie second, third, and fourth may be bipinnate with seven pairs
of leaflets on the second and third, and twelve pairs on the fourth. The iifth,
sixth, and seventh may be bipinnate, with two pairs of pinnre ; these correspond
to a leaf like the first, in which the apical pair of leaflets, and the pair next
below, have been replaced by pairs of pinna'. The eighth leaf may have three
pairs of piuna;; this corresponds to a leaf like the fiist, in which the apical pair
of leaflets, and two pairs next below, have been replaced by pinnae. After the
eighth the number ot pinnae may increase by one pair more or less consecutively
in succeeding leaves, until something approaching the maximum is attained. In
one seedling however, and the only one seen, the third leaf had two pairs of
pinnffi. In seedliug-s of other species, the number of pairs of pinnae increases
sometimes a little sooner, sometimes a little later, much in the same manner as
described above in A. discolor. The terminal seta, unless accidentally missing,
terminates the common petiole of every leaf, at every stage of growth. There-
fore, the mode of succession of the pairs of pinnae in the gradual development
of the bipinnate leaf is basipetal, and not basifugal, as has hitherto been tacitly
assumed and taken for granted in every case that has come under my notice.

The primary leaf-axis of the tii-st, abruptly pinnate leaf may be slightly
longer than that of the second bipinnate leaf with one pair < f pinnae, but the
latter have uiore than twice as many leaflets. As the number of pinnae increases,
the axis lengthens proportionally, until it reaches its final dimensions. When
the maximum number of pairs have been developed it will be noticed that the
petiole is relatively short.

Young seedlings of the Euphyllodineie, old enovtgh to show the transition
from bijjinnate leaves to euphyllodes, are very interesting and insti'uctive. They
are the embodiment, and, at the same time, the visible presentment or picture of
an intense struggle between two antagonistic tendencies or forces. On the one
hand, the hereditary tendency to produce the ancestral type of foliage makes a
start in the normal way. The first leaf is an abruptly pinnate leaf, or, in some
species, there may be an opposite pair of them. The second leaf is an abruptly
bipinnate leaf with one pair of piiinae, just as in the seedlings of the Bipinnatfe.
Very soon, somewhat sooner in some species than in others, the antagttnistic ten-
dency, the euphyllode-producing tendency, nowadays also an inherited tendency,
manifests itself, and, after a few preliminary stages, the usurper succeeds in
swamijing tlie natural tendency to continue tlie production of bipinnate foliage.
This commonly, but not always, happens before the seedlings are strong enough
to enable the biijinnate leaves to develop a second pair of pinnte; and, in such
species, the second, third, fourth, fifth leaf or some later one may be the earliest
complete euphyllode .

The ol)ject of the struggle is to get rid of the pinnae, whose leaflets are the
transpiring and assimilating organs proper, and to substitute for them the ver-
tical, flattened, leaf-like leaf-axes or common petioles, or euphyllodes, capable of
taking over and carrying out the functions of the leaflets on a more economical
basis for regulating the water-supply and expenditure. It is important to realise
this; and that the contest is not between flattening, ordinary petioles, and leaf-
Wades, which are to vanish. Now a substitutional structure, and a structure for
which a substitute is being provided, cannot comjjletely coexist and function in
all respects simultaneously. In the case of the substitution of euphyllodes or

30 . prksiijkxt'.s aui)1;k.>s.

flattened leaf-axes lor pairs of jiiuuie, irom the nature ot the case, the suhstitu-
tion or ruplaeeuient caiiuot take place iustautaneously in a flash, but only by
gradual, intermediate stages. It necessarily follows, therefore, that some indi-
cation of both can and may be present at the same time, but in an invei-sely pro-
portional ratio. If the pinnse are strongly in evidence, after the struggle be-
gins, the euphyllode will be only slightly indicated; wiiereas if the euphylloiie
is strongly in the ascendant, but not yet complete, the pinnas will show signs
of some kind ur other that they are on the wane. Tiie swamping, euphyllode-
producing tendency usually acts too promptly in young seedlings to show the
inversely proportional relations between the two contestants very satisfactorily.
But good examples of reversion-foliage, and the leaves of reversion-shoots sliow
them most beautifully and convincingly.

Sir Jolin Lubbock, afterwards Lord Avebiuy, in his great book "On Seed-
lings" (18i)2), mentions or describes, or describes and figures seedlings of se\en
species of Acacia. But his material was very limited, and sometimes lestricted
to a single seedling. It is remarkable that the species, whose seeds he was able
to get, are all out-of-the-way or inland species, and do not include a single
example of our common and familiar species. Lubbock was interested in them
as seedliug-s merely; and it was not his object to discuss the nature of the euphy-
lodes of those that were euphyllodineous species. Having complete seedlings at
his disposal, he was able to recognise, this time, that the flrst of six of them was
an abrujitly pinnate leaf. But of two species, not tigured, A. Oswaldi and A.
aeanthocarpa he says — ''Leaves compound and abruptly pinnate or reduced to
phyllodes," and "First leaves compound, abniptly pinnate"; but as he makes no
mention of the presence of bipinnate lea\es in either case, one does not know
how to take these statements, since his descriptions of the seedling's of these two
species are all that are available at present. On the other hand, he describes I he
flrst six leaves of a seedling of A. Burkitti as bipinnate. This is the oidy
Acacia-seedling, without an abruptly pinnate flrst leaf, or a pair of them, yet
recorded. Lubl)o(k also recognises the presence of Hentiiam's terminal seta in
the seedlings of two species, but unfortunately he locates it on the petioles.
Thus, of the flrst six leaves of .^1. Burkitti, all bipinnate with one pair of pinn;e,
he says "petiole excurrent between the pinn;e, with a subulate slender point."
Also of A. vertieillata he say.s — "Leaves at flrst pinnate then bipinnate, then
reduced to phyllodes . . . petioles laterally compressed . . . and ]>ni-
jecting beyond the pinnw with a subulate acute aristate point." The petiole of a
comjxiund leaf is tiie portion of the common petiole, or primary leaf-axis, below
the lowest pair of piniia»; therefore, all the ])inna3 are attached to the rhachis;
consequently it is the common petiole, or its distal couipcment, the rhachis, which
terminates in an excurrent point or terminal seta. If the petiole terminates in an
"excurrent i)oint," then, since the latter is above the pair of pinnw. these nuist
be attached to the petiole — whidi is absurd. He correctly adds, however — •
"rhachis of pinna- excurrent in the form of a small subulate point." And lie
sliould have said — common petiole, or the rliachis which is its distal component,
with an excurrent point. But, accepting the current idea, tliat the phyllodes of
Acacias are simply flattened petioles, he tacitly assumed and took for granted,
as he did in the earlier passage quoted above, that the single pair of pinnae of
his bipinnate leaves was the lowest or basal pair, whereas it is the apical or
uppermost pair which appears first; and that the stalk to which the pinnffi were
aflaclied was the petiole, whereas it was the common i>etioh> or primary leaf-
axis, as is proved by its lerminating in an excurrent point or terminal seta.

phesidext's address. 31

Mr. K. H. Canibage has recently taken up the study of Acacia-seedlings
where Lubbock left off; and, from his extensi\-e knowledge of the Australian flora,
sud' of Acacias growing under natural conditions, he is eminently tjualifled to
undei'take it. Since 1915, lie has iiublished live instalments of a monograph on
"Acacia-Seedlings." which include descriptions and excellent photographs of the
seeds, pods, and young seedlings of fifty-five species. This is an excelfent be-
ginning of a very important contribution to knowledge, which can only be done
properly as he is doing it, with personal knowledge of the jslants under natural
conditions, and with adequate material. As it is necessarily a leisure-time study,
he deserves, in an especial manner, all the encouragement and help that we can
give him. If he will take into consideration the evidence I am now bringing
forward, and will modify his terminology accordingly, 1 venture to predict that
liis work will become more inspiring and interesting even than it has been.

Cambage's papers and illustrations show admirably, how promptly the
swanii)ing effect of the usurping, euphyllode-produeing tendency takes place in all
the eupliyllodineous sjiecies he has described, with the exception of .1. Dielatioxtjlon.
This is one of a small group' of exceptional species, which includes ^1. ruhida,
and apparently also the non-Australian species, A. heterophi/lla, that is in need
of special and detailed study of good series of gradational stages.

The transition from an abruptly pinnate leaf, or more usually from a bi-
pinnate leaf with one pair of pinnae, or sometimes two pairs, to the first complete
euphyllode, of seedlings of the euphyllodineous Australian Acacias, may take
place on any leaf, from the second to the ninth, or even later, according to the
species, and according to circumstances. The difference in seedlings of the same
species is mainly due to the absence or the presence of lingering stages of the
dwindling pinnae. It is usually, but not invariably, complete before the seedlings
are able to develoji leaves with two pairs of pinn». Cambage has found it to
be the second leaf in A. alata (not counting the members of the opposite first
pair of simply pinnate leaves separately), in about a dozen specimens, so that
no bipinnate leaves with one pair of pinnae had a chance to develop. He has
also found it to be the third leaf sometimes in A. excelsa. In the seedling figured
by me (PI. ii., fig. 2) it is the fourth leaf. This is the seedling of the species
(prol)ably A. implexa, as Mr. Cambage has been good enough to advise me)
which has furnished me with my best and most instructive reversion-shoots and
suckers, because the euphyllodcs are so long, up to about 9 inches. I was not
interested in the plants before they were scorched, and the portions of the plants
above ground killed, but without damage to the root-system, by a bush-fire, or in
some cases injured in other ways; and there has not been time yet for the new
shoots to flower; and I have been unable to find adult, uninjured plants in a
condition suitable for exact identification of the species. In the seedling shown,
the first abruptly jjinnate leaf had three pairs of leaflets, but the apical pair, and
one of the next i)air below, were missing, when I got the sjiecimen. The second,
third, and fourth are bipinnate, with only one pair of pinnae in all of them.
One pinna of the second is damaged, and is represented by one leaflet and a
portion of its fellow. Above what remains of the damaged pinna in the position
shown, the terminal seta at the apex may be seen in the photogTaph of the com-
mon petiole, projecting to the left. Tlie fiftli is a short, relatively broad, com-
plete euphyllode, 23 inches long; the sixth is longer but narrower; the seventh is
still longer; the eighth (bent in the photo) is 7 i inches long. An average
sample of a complete euphyllode from a reversion-shoot, 8J inches long, is shown

32 " president's address.

beside tbe seedling on the left. My leveision-sboots show fifteen later stages
that are skipped in this seedling, to be referred to later on.

Of sixteen bush-seedling's of .1. falcata, the tirst comijlete euphyllude was the
fifth leaf in nine, tlie sixth in sis, and the seventh of one; the leaf immediately
preceding the first comijlete eviphyllode in each of two seedlings had two pairs
of pinnw. Of sixteen bush-seedlings of A. myrtifolia, the tirst complete euphyl-
lode was the fifth of two, the sixth of seven, the seventh of six, and the eighth
of one; seedlings of this species also sometimes have one, and occasionally two
leaves with two pairs of pinnse. Seedlings of A. lini folia, of which tbe first
complete eupbyllode may be the sixth-ninth, may also have one leaf, or two
leaves, or, as in one of my specimens, three leaves, with two pairs of pinna?.
The leaves of seedlings of A. suaveolens often sliow most interesting lingering
stages of dwindling pairs of pinnse, the last of which may be represented by
only a single pair of leaflets, with the terminal seta at the apex of the rhaehis;
and this is quite as conspicuous at the apices of tbe succeeding euphyllodes.
Further details will l)e found in Cambage's papers.*

Thk Terminal Seta or Recurved Point of the Bipixnate Le.-isks and
El'phyllodes op Australian Acacias.

No. 3 of the definitions given in Bentham's paper on the Jlimosea\ referred
to later on, is very important, namely — "A small point terminates the petioles
whether common or partial, in all or nearly all Mimoseae. It is usuaUy setifoi'm,
though sometimes short and thick, and occasionally almost foliaceous, sometimes
apparently continuous with the jjetioles [i.e., the common or partial petioles as
defined on p 324; but not petioles in the sense in which some later authors use
the term, foLuwing Kunth], at other times falling readily oflE. This point has
by some been termed a gland; but, it would appear, erroneously. It may pos-
sibly be the rudiment of a terminal i)inna or leallet ; but as there is no evidence
beyond its position [i.e., terminating the common or partial petioles] to show
that it is so, I have been unwilling to give it any other name than seta termiiialis.''

Now this was written some seventeen years before the publication of Dar-
win's "Origin of Species." Chapter xiii., of the "Origin" deals, in part, with the
subject of Rudimentary Organs. Darwin's treatment of the subject gave an
altogether new view of the imjjoi'tanee and significance of rudimentary organs
and vestigial structures. To-day, remnants and \estigial structures mean very
much more to the morphologist than they did seventy-eight yeare ago. Then,
Bentham knew of "no evidence, beyond its position,"' to say more than that the
seta terminalis was possibly "the rudiment of a terminal pinna or leaflet." To-
day, I imagine, no one qualified to speak, will take exception to the statement
that it really is, what Bentham, seventy-eight years ago, said it possibly might be.
The setn terminalis of the pari-pinnate leaf of (a.-ysia Candotleana. for example,
a common garden plant, or of the pari-pinnate first leaf of Acacia-seedlings,
undoubtedly represents the remnant of an aborted terminal leaflet, corresponding
to the terminal leaflet present in Rohinia pseudacaeia, for example: just as. in
the bipinnate foliage of seedlings or of the adult i)lants of tiie Bii)innatae, or in
the bipinnate foliage of seedlings, on the young euphyllndes, and frequently on
the adult eui)hyllodes of the Euphyllodiueae. unless accidently missing, it repre-

* Cambage, "Acacia Seedlings." Parts i.-v. Jouvn. Proc. K. Soo. N.S.Wales, Vols,
xlix -liii., 191,")-19.

president's address. 33

sents tbe remuaut uf a vanished terminal pinna corresponding to the terminal
pinna of the impari-bipinnate leaves of Caesalpinia &illiesii. (PI. ii., fig. 1) .

Moreover the setae terminales of the reversion-foliage of A. suaveolens are
sometimes green and foliaceous, like incomplete leaflets or a pair of leaflets (PI.
i., fig-s. 4, 8, 9, 10) ; and the leaves of reversion-shoots of A. implexa (?) and A.
podalyriae folia sometimes have thread-like rudiments of the axes of the terminal
pinna present, without leaflets, but with a terminal seta at the apex (PI. viii. 5, 6).

Admittedly, the seta terminalis is of no practical importance to the describer
of species. Nevertheless, in his paper on the Mimoseae, almost aU the species
of which have bipinnate leaves, Bentham took the trouble to discuss what he
conceived to be its meaning and significance. It was unfortunate, therefore, that,
when he came to deal with the Australian Acacias in the second volume of the
Flora Australiensis, especially as the euphyllodineous species far outnumber the
bipinnate species, he took no account of the seta terminalis, as defined in the
paper on Mimoseas, or of its significance, except that he merely mentions its
occurrence, under another name, the "recurved point," in two only of the twenty-
two species of Bipinnatas which he describes, as if these were the only two species
in which it was to be found. Thus of A. polyhotrya he says — "the rhachis ter-
minating in a recurved deciduous point'' (p. 414) ; and of A. leptoclada — "Pinnje
3-5 pairs, 3-4 lines long, on a common petiole of 1 to A in., ending in a recurved
point" (p. 416).

But the recurved point, or seta terminalis, unless it is accidentally missing, is
usually e(|ually constant and significant, not only in other bipinnate Acacias in
which no mention is made of its presence; but also on the leaves of seedlings
of the EuphijUodineae, and at the apices of euphyllodes, especially in the young
stages. Bentham furnished descriptions of 271 species of ""euphyllodineous
Acacias. It is remarkable, therefore, that the setae terminales of some of them
did not attract his notice, or arouse his suspicion that the so-called phyUodes
of Acacias were something more than merely flattened petioles.

Kerner is the only author known to met who rightly recognises that there is
3 vestigial stracture at the apex of the so-called phyllodes of Acacias, which, in
reality, is Bentham's seta terminalis, in which the common petiole, or the rhachis.
its distal component, terminates; but not the petiole, as Lubbock expressed it. —
Thus he says — "In many of the vetches of the Southern European flora (Lathyrus,
Nissolia, Ochrus) but especially in a large number of Australian shnibs and trees,
principally acacias (Acacia longifolia, falcata, myrtifnlia, armata, cultrata, Mela-
noxylon, decipiens, etc . ) it is the leaf -stalks which are extended like leaves placed
vertically, and then the development of the leaf-lamina is either entirely arrested,
or has the appearance of an appendage at the apex of the flat, green leaf -stalk or
"phyllode" as it is called."* As far as the Acacias are concerned, the appendage
at the apex of the "phyllodes." here referred to, is simply Bentham's seta ter-
minalis, or recurved point, the rudiment of an arrested terminal pinna, in which
the common petiole, or its distal comjionent, the rhachis, terminates. It is not,
as Kerner supposes, under the influence of the current dogma, that Acacia-
phyllodes, so-called, are simply flattened leaf-stalks or petioles, the remnant of an
arrested leaf-lamina. The pinnse only have been arrested, and not the rhachis
as well. Consequently, the tenninal seta retains its normal position at the apex
of the rhachis, that is, the apex of the common petiole, or the primary axis of

•Natural History of Plants, English Edition, Vol. i., p. 335.
fBut see the reference to Goebel's views f>ostea, p. 44.

34 president's address.

the leaf. But that Kerner should be the only author, so far as I can learn, to
liave recognised the occurrence of an apical, vestigial structure on the so-called
phyllodes of the Australian Acacias, is both surprising and interesting. His
mistake, like the mistakes of others, was attributable to a lack of adequate ma-
terial for study. Nevertheless, his obseixation is notable.

The meaning and significance, and in some cases the occu.Tcnce, of the ter-
minal seta or recur\ed or excurrent point, or rudiment of tiie terminal pinna,
of the leaves of the Australian Acacias, whether in the seedling-stage or otherwise,
have received such scant eonsideratiou from authors, that a comparison of the
leaves of Acacias with those of other genera with remarkable bipinnate leaves is
not only very instructive, but wliat can be learned in this way needs to be em-
phasised and allowed for.

For comparative purposes, the most satisfactory material is afforded by the
leaves of three plants belonging to exotic genera, more or less common in gardens
in Sydney. I am unable to find anything about them in any books available to
me, from the particular standpoint in which T am interested in them. These
are Caesalpinia GiUiesil Wall., native of La Plata States, which is of interest
because the leaves have a terminal pinna, but the i)inn» lack a terminal leaflet ;
Jacaranda ovali folia R.Br., native of Brazil, which is remarkable because the
leaves have a fugacious terminal pinna which is wanting in the mature leaves, the
pinnas have a terminal leaflet, and the mode of succession of both the pinnae and
the leaflets in the development of the bipinnate leaf is basifugal; and the West
Indian Calliandra portoricensis, whose leaves, like those of the bipinnate Acacias,
have neither a terminal pinna, nor have the pinna? a terminal leaflet; but, in both
cases, especially in the young leaves, vmless it is accidentally missing, the ter-
minal setae are conspicuous.

C. Gilliesii has leaves up to nearly 7 inches long, to the base of the terminal
pinna; witli twelxe or thirteen pairs of short pinnae, with about eight to ten pairs
of leaflets. As in the Acacias, the leaves present anomalies. Some of the pinnae
are alternate instead of opjjosite; one of a pair is sometimes missing; the ter-
minal pinna is occasionally missing; the number of pairs of leaflets of tiie idnnai
is variable. The leaves show: — (1) that the internodes are about as long as the
spread of an expanded pair of leaflets, measured from tip to tip across the partial
rhachis; (2) that the pinnae of the lower pairs are fairly at right angles to the
axis, but that the ajiical pair and several paire next below do usually move in-
wards slightly, so that there may be some slight overlapping of the lower leaflets
of the ajiical pair and the terminal pair, even though the latter has a longer
petiole tlian the others; (3) and that the petiole uuiy lie no longer tlian tiie lowest
internode, or half as long again ; but however mucli it may be. it is liut a small
fraction of the length of the entire axis or conmion [letiole. Fig. 1 of PI. iii..
represents the upper portion of a leaf, in which the pinna? of the apical \r.\\v
are at right angles to the .axis; and this was chosen for illustration because the
terminal pinna was fully displayed. Lubbock figures a very young seedling of
this species, with only the first leaf, which is nliru|illy lunnatc. but no I'urthcr ]iar-
ticulars are given .

The longest .Tacai'anda leaf that 1 liavc, without (lortion of the ti]), which is
missing, is 211 inches long, petiole 2if, with .32 pairs of pinna\ some of which
are alternate. Longer leaves may be seen on some trees. Mature leaves rarely
show anything at the ajicx, but the basal scar of something which is missing. 1
figure a small leaf from a young plant Si inches long, which should have eighteen
pairs of ])inna' and a terminal ))inna: l)ut tlic terminal i>inna, and four pairs of

presidext's address. 35

piiuife are represented by large leaflets, some of them with serrated edges. I
have also other leaves showing more advanced, but still, incomplete transforma-
tions. On the other hand, one can get examples in which the terminal pinna is
jH-esent, Ijut the leaHets are not expanded. In this condition, it is apt to be
fugacious; and one often tinds only a withered or broken remnant of it. The
basifugal succession of both the pinna! and the leaflets in the development of the
bipinnate leaves is vei-y interesting. The pinna in the basal region are usually
short; in the middle region they are very long, with numerous pairs of pinnae, and
s tei-minal leaflet. The internodes may be as long as, or shorter than the spread
of an opposite pair of expanded leaflets. The petiole is relatively very short,
as long as about two or three, or more, internodes, if some of the possible lowest
pinna' do not develop. The variable length of mature leaves on the same plant,
that is the variable number of the pairs of pinnae present, is, I think, attributable
to accidents, at different stages of gi-owth, to the apical portion of the leaves
before the basifugal development of the full number of pinnae is complete.

The leaves of CalUandra have up to six or seven pairs of pimiffi. As in the
bipinnate Acacias, the terminal pinna, as well as the terminal leaflet of the pinnae,
has been arrested; but, in Iwth cases, their remnants, the terminal seta3, are pre-
sent, unless accidentally missing, and are esjieciully noticeable in young leaves.
Of a leaf with six pairs of pinnae, the length of the common petiole was 34 inches;
Ihe spread of a pair of opposite expanded leaflets 11, or about the length
of two internodes; and the length of the petiole 2-1. The petioles of these
leaves, proportionately to the length of the common petioles, are the longest I
have met w^th; and the length of the internodes is less than the spread of an
opposite pair of leaflets ; but this causes no overlapping .as the apical pair of
pinnie, and one or two pairs below them move upwards and inwards, and the
basal pair move downwards and inwards.

The youngest leaves of .1. discolor that one can get, siiow excellently the ter-
minal setae both of the common petiole and of the pinnae (PI. viii., fig. 2). Also
that there is no addition of pinnae at the apex of the leaf, after the lowest pinna?
are developed, as in Jacaranda. All the pinnae that are to be present in the mature
leaf, are represented in the primordium of the leaf; and when the pinucP of the
young leaves move into place, and the leaflets expand, the iiinnfe are all equally
developed . Similar statements are applicable to the very young leaves of A.
decurrens.

Fig. 2 of PI. iii., shows the leaf of a seedling of this speciei*, with three pairs
of pinnae, the middle pair of which illustrate the incomplete ba-sipetal development
of the leaflets.

Due recognition of the meaning and significance of the terminal setcB of the
leaves of the bipinnate Acacias, and especially of the leaves of seedling's with
only one pair of pinnae, is the key to the understanding of euphyllodes. What-
ever else may be wanting, the apical pair of pinnae- is always present, unless acci-
dentally missing, except in decadent stages such as are shown in Plate vii.

The Petioles or the Lea\'es of Bipinx"ate Australiax Acacias

The euphyllodes of some Australian Acacias are very long, from 12-20 inches.
In considering the nature of such remarkable developments as these, it is neces-
sary to consider some of the characters of the leaves of the bipinnate Acacias.
and especially of their petioles.

36 • president's address.

Seventy-eight years ago, Mr. Bentbam monographed the species of Mimosa.
He began his paper by formulating some definitions." Thus he said — "Before
entering into descriptive details, some preliminary explanations may be necessary
relating to some of the terms used in characterising Mimoseoe, and applied by
different writers in different senses. ... I have uniformly adopted the
phraseology usually followed by De Candollc, giving the name of pinnae to the
primary divisions, and of foliola to the ultimate divisions [of the bipinnate leaf].
I have also designated by petiolus communis, the xi-hole of the stalk
to which the pinnae are affixed, not (as is done by Kunth), that part only which
is below the lowest pair of pinnae, and by petiolus partialis I have meant the
whole of the stalk to which the foliola are attached." Accordingly, in this paper,
Bentham refrains altogether from using the terms petiole and rhacbis.

The adoption of the term common petiole, in the sense defined, has the ad-
vantage of avoiding a possible difficulty — namely, if the portion of the common
petiole of a bipinnate leaf below the lowest pair of pinnae, the petiole in the
Kuuthian sense, is longer than the internode immediately above, how is one to be
cjuite sure that at least one pair of pinnse, below the lowest pair present, has not
been suppressed; and that, consequently, the supposed petiole is only ap-
parently, and not really, the actual petiole?

When Bentham came to deal with the Acacias in the second volume of the
Mora Austrabensis (18G4), he adopted a somewhat different and mixed termin-
ology, partlj- as defined above for the Mimoseae proper, and partly in accordance
with the definitions given in the Introduction and Glossary prefixed to the de-
scriptive matter in the first volume. While stiU using the term common petiole
for the whole of the stalk to which the pinnae are affixed, he also uses the term
petiole, in the Kunthian sense, for that part which is below the lowest pah- of
pinucB; and he also uses the term rhachis. But I do not understand Bentham to
use the term common petiole as synonymous with the term rhacliis. as defined in
the Introduction- — "39. The common stalk [of a compound leaf] upon which the
leaflets are inserted is called the common petiole or the rhachis."

If one examines the impari-pinnate leaves of Tecoma capensis (4 pairs),
T. radieans (4-5 pairs), Rohinia pseudacacia (8 pairs), Ailanthus glanduhi!<a
(up to 14 or more pairs) — all common garden-plants, with leaves of the same
type, varying considerably in length according to the number of the pairs of
leaflets, with fairly large leaflets, much about the same breadth — it may be
noticed: (1) that the length of the intemodes corresponds to, or is a little longer
"than the greatest breadth of the leaflets, so that these may be fully exposed to the
light without any overlapping; (2) that the leaflets are fairly at right angles to
the axis to which they are attached; (3) that by the leng-thening of the petiole of
the terminal leaflet, this also is fairly displayed without overlapping the leaflets
of the pair next below; and (4), that the petioles — the portions of the common
petioles below the lowest pair of pinnje — are relatively short or very short, no
longer sometimes than the lowest internode, or half as long again, or a little
longer .

If, next, one examines the pari-pinnate leaves of Cassia C andolleana. also
common in gardens, with four pairs of leaflets, it may be noticed: — (1) that the
intemodes are about as long as, or a little longer than, the greatest width of the
leaflets; (2) that, in the absence of the terminal leaflet, the leaflets of the first
pair, or of the first and second pairs next below, usually move slightly inwards,

• Bentham, "Notes on Mimoseae, with a short Synopsis of Species." Hooker's Journal
of Botany, Vol. iv., p. 342, 1842,

PRESIDENT'S ADDRESS.

37

while the two still lower pairs are more or less at right angles to the axis; (3)
that there is a terminal seta representing a remnant of the missing terminal
leaflet, unless it is accidentally wanting, as it often is in the full-grown leaves,
■which is green and very conspicuous in quite young fresh leaves;
and (4) that the petiole, real or apparent, is somewhat variable in length in
different leaves, and may be about half as long again as the lowest internode, or
even a little more.

In the pari-bipinnate leaves of the Australian Acacias, it will be noticed — {!)
that, in the absence of the terminal pinna, represented by the terminal seta, the
pinnfe of the apical pair invariably, as far as I have seen, move inwards so as
almost or actually to touch or even slightly overlap; that those of a few pairs
below, if the pairs are numerous, may also move inwards, but that some of the
lowest pairs may be more or less at right angles;— (2) that the internodes are
about as long as the spread of an opposite pair of expanded leaflets measured
from tip to tip, but may be slightly longer; the internodes of the same leaf may
also vary slightly in length— and (3) that the petioles, apparent or real, are
short if the leaflets are short, excessively short sometimes as in A. Bailey ana, and
A. Jonesii, but nnich longer, though still relatively short, if the leaflets are long
as in A. prulnosa, or very long indeed, as in A. elata. Following are the mea-
surements of the leaves of the five species available : —

A. Baileyana — 4 pairs of pinnae; common petiole, IJ; lowest internode, i;
petiole, i inch. (PI. iv., fig. 1). The lai-gest number of pinnae noticed is five
pairs. The leaflets of this species are not sensitive.

A. discolor — 9 pairs of pinnae; common petiole, 4J ; lowest internode, A;
petiole, 1 inch. In another leaf on the same branch, tlie petiole was no longer
than the internode above.

A. decurrens — 17 pairs of pinna;; common petiole. 51; lowest internode, ^;
petiole, I inch.

A. pruinosa — G pairs of pinnse; common petiole, Hi; leaflets up to 5; lowest
internode, J; petiole, If inch.

A. elata — 5 pairs of pinnae; common petiole, 9f ; leaflets up to 1| (Bentham
gives up to 2 inches); lowest internode. If; petiole, 2| inches. Three other
leaves have the petioles somewhat shorter. This species has very long pinnas,
up to more than 8 inches.

Bipinnate leaves may be short, or long, or of intermediate length, according
to the number of pairs of pinnae present; that is, according to the number and
length of the internodes, and the length of the apparent petiole. The number
of pairs of pinnae present in a given length depends on the length of the leaflets,
and this is a very variable quantitj'.

The bipinnate leaves of A. elata and A. pniiiiosa, of all the twenty-two
species described in the Flora Australiensis, and as described therein, have the
longest leaflets. Therefore, they may be expected to have, as they actually have,
the longest internodes, and the longest petioles, real or apparent. No seedlings
of euphyllodineous Acacias have as yet, been described by Cambage, with leaflets
promising to be anytliing like as long as those of A. elata.

Allowing about 3 inches as the maximum length of the petioles of the Aus-
tralian bipinnate Acacia with, by far, the longest leaflets known, what valid
ground is there for supposing, if the so-called phyllodes are simply flattened
petioles which have dropped their blades, that they can attain lengths of "from
P in. to 1 ft." (.1. macradenia), "above a foot long, the upper ones A ft." (A.

38 president's address.

cyanophylla), "lower phyllodia (i I(j Id iu. long" (.1. LiiuUeiji), '"3-10 in. loag
or even more'' {A. iiachycarpa), and others, as describcil by Bentliani? 1 have
euphyllodes of .1. lonyifolia up to 13J inches long, and lA broad; and Maiden
has recorded a variety of this species with phyllodes, so-called, up to 20 inches
Jong. Allowing one-third of the total length for that of the petioles, euphyllodes
l'2-"20 inches long — if they are simply thittened petioles which have lost their
blades — should belong to potential bipinnate leaves 3 to 5 feet long!

The euphyllodes of Australian Acacias may be short or they may i)c long.
If very short, they are the Hattened axes of species, which, if they had not be-
eonic euphyllodineous, would have only a few (1, '2, or 3) pairs of pinua^. If
long, under similar circumstances, they should liavc numerous pairs of piimse, as
sliown in my i)hotograplis |Pls. v.-vii.) of leaves of reversion-shoots of a species
with long eupliyllodes, up to 8| (PI. ii., fig. 1) inches long, or even longer. But
flattened petioles of leaves of Anstralian Acac'ias, which have lost their blades, as
long as 12-20 inches, are mythical structures; and the idea that there are, or may
be such is nothing less than fantastic I

The current idea that the euphyllodes ol' Australian Acacias are simiily
flattened petioles which have lost their blades, is a barren conception which has
retarded the progress of knowledge. If that is all they are, one is ])reclu(led
from discussing the question of what sort of bipinnate Acacias the eu])hvlhMlineous
Acacias would or might be if they did not develop euphyllodes.

But when it is realised that the euphyllodes are the Hattened, ]iriniary leaf-
axes or common petioles of bipinnate leaves which liave lost their pinn;e, it be-
comes possible to reconstruct them theoretically in a very simple way, and then
to find analogues of them among the existing Bipinnatfe, since these itu-lude
Acacias of wiiich the adult leaves have — one pair of i)innie only, "on a common
petiole of about I inch long," as Bentham records of .1. Gilberti, or "1 or 2 pairs,
the common ])etiole about 1 incli" (.1. suliemsa). or any number of pairs up to
"usually 10 to 20 i)air.s" (.1. deulbatu, length of coMuiion jietiole not stated), or
"15 to 20 pairs, the common i)etiole 2 to 3 in<-iies" (,1. BidwilV), or piissil)ly
even more, if one were to search carefully oxer abiuidance of material.

The simple method of reconstructing them is, to nu'asure with a pair of com-
passes the length, from tip to ti]) across the partial iliachis, of a good ])air of
op])osite, expanded leaflets on the l)ii)innate leaves of a seedling. Tiiis will give
approximately the length of an internode. Then measure off the internodes on
a eujiliyllode, beginning at the apex, and what is over, regard as the iietiole.
This will enable one to calculate approximately the ])ossible number of jiairs of
pinnas tiiat could be present. If one can get a scc<lling with a leaf with two
pairs of pinnae, one can comimrc' the leniilli of tlic intei-nodc with llie length
of an opi>ositc jiair of leaflets. Hax'ing done tliis, then look tor the bipinnate
analogue among the l)ipinnate s])ecies described by Rent ham, or others, and
figured in Mueller's "Iconoi;ra|)hy of the Acacias," or elsewhere. But. of course,
reversion-foliaiie. and es])ecially i-cversion-shoots. if one can get good S|)ecimen.s,
will show N'alurc's method of actually doing it.

Hk\HRS10\-1''0I,IAGK, KeVKRSI0N-Si1(X)TS, .\NI) SrCKKRS.

Textbooks sometimes nu'ution, in an in<leHnite way. the occurrence of rever-
sion-foliage on euphyllodineous Acacias which have lieen pruned or otherwise in-
jured, Lubbock and Tiiom<5"s figure si)rays of,!, melunoxylon, with bolli eu))hyl-
lodes and bipinnate leaves: and other authors menti(m similar peculiarities. This

president's address. 39

species is an exceptioual one, in need of special investigation. It is a species
which I have not had the opportunity of e.xamining. A. lonyi folia is much in-
fested by borers, and one can iind plants which have l)een broken by people in
getting the flowers, but I have never met with revei-sion-foliage. Seedlings of .-1.
falcata are often so badly attacked by insect gall-makers, that the growing point
may be killed, but I have not found that it induces the production of reversion-
foliage. Plants of A. myrti folia often show a disorganised production of crowd-
ed euphyllodes, apparently due to fungoid attacks, but I have failed to find re-
version-foliage .

Quite the most satisfactory species for foliage vt tiiis kind is A. suaveolens,
because one can get it in abundance. Adxanced seedlings up to 5 feet high, seem
to be particularly liable to fungoid attacks, which sometimes seriously interfere
with, or e\-en kill the growing-point, often resulting in large excrescences of ab-
noiTiial growth on the summit. If this happens, not too close to the ground,
it frequently results in an outburst of reversion-foliage along a portion of the
stem, or on the proximal portions of any branches that may be present. This
will often supi)ly most instructive stages in the transition from bininnate leaves
to euphyllodes, whicli are not shown in normal seedlings.

Eleven examples of remarkable leaves (nat; size) are shown in Plate i. These
are of interest because, in addition to the ordinary apical pair of pinna, or this
and the second ])air next below it, some of them show pairs of reduced pinnae, or
single reduced jiinna'. ]>airs of leaflets or single leaflets, at different levels, on the
margin of the developing euphyllode or half-euphyllode, instead of on the mid-
rib; other's show foliaceous terminal setae; and two have three leaves at a node.
Figs. 1, 3, and 11 have no or but slight development of the lower side of the
euphyllodes. All three have an odd pinna below the first jsair of iiinnse, or just
below the second pair (the leaflets missing in Fig. 3); and, at a lower level,
a pair of pinnae with a reduced numlier of leaflets, on tlie margin of the euphyl-
lode. A. suaveolens is remarkable in this respect, namely, for the transference of
the leaf -buds to the margin of the eujihyllode, instead of their remaining on the
midrib .

Figs. 2 and 6 show two pairs of pinnae (one pinna missing in Fig. 0) and a
single, small pinna, with but few leaflets, on the edge of the euphyllode. They
are figured especially to show, what I have seen only in the reversion-foliage of
this species, in which it is common — the occurrence of three leaves at some of the
nodes, of which the middle one is always the most developed. In the examples
given, the two lateral leaves of the trio are simjjly pinnate. But, sometimes, one
or both may be bipinnate ; or the middle one may be a complete large euphyllode,
while one, at least, of the lateral ones may be a smaller euphyllode. The two
lateral leaves probably develop from reserve-buds. Lubbock describes and figures
a seedling of ^1. i-erticillata, of which the sixtli leaf was represented by a single
euphyllode. but some of the succeeding ones by broken or complete whorls of
euphyllodes. Other species may also have whorled or verticillate or grouped
euphyllodes; but, as far as I know, nothing analogous to it is known in bipinnate
Acacias. Fig. 2 shows the terminal seta; and the retarding effect of the pre-
sence of the second jiair of pinn^ on the flattening of the internode, and for some
distance below.

Figs. 4, 5, and 7 show a pair of leaflets, or two odd leaflets, on the margins of
the euphyllode at different levels. Sometimes a jiinna, or a leaflet or leaflets,
may be quite close to the base, indicating that the petiolar portion of the euphyl-

40 president's address.

lode is relatively very short. I liave two examples of nearly complete eupbyl-
lodes, one of which has an apical pair of pinnae, and a large leaflet with an op-
posite pair of small ones, on the margin | inch from the base; while the other
has an apical pinna with two pairs of leaflets, and a marginal pinna with two
l)airs of leaflets, § inch from the base. Another specimen has one pair of pinn<e,
of which one has a terminal leaflet. I have one leaf with three complete pairs of
pinna;.

Figs. 4, 8, 9, 10 show foUaeeous terminal setae. Two of them have mar-
ginal leaflets, and in one case, a pinna which shrivelled in drying.

I am indebted to Mr. C. T. Musson for some very interesting reversion-
shoots from a shrub of A. podahjriaffolia, which had been cut back. These are
particularly interesting, because this species has sliort enphyllodes, which are
nearly as broad as they are long, up to IJ x 1% inches. Seventeen leaves

16

show no flattening on the lower side, and fifteen of these have two pairs of pinnai.
Three of these are figured. ( Plate vii., figs. 1-3. ) They all show much flattening
of the upper side of the leaf-axis up to the level of the lower pair of piunae,
and some flattening of the internode. But the lower, broad, flattened portion has
a loose end. The presence of the lower pair of pinnae, by retarding the flatten-
ing of the internodal contribution to the complete euphyllode and blocking the
■way, left the portion below the lower pair of pinnae in the lurch, in all three
eases; and I have others more or less like them. Two examples, with one pair
of pinnae (PI. vii., figs. -1-5) show very well the rudiment of the terminal pinna,
without leaflets, with the terminal seta, which, in this species, unless accidentally
missing, is usually conspicuous on the early euphyllodes, and particularly on the
young ones. It is so long sometimes that, when dry, it twists. It is obvious
that, in this case, the euphyUode comprises two, or at the most, three, internodes,
and the petiole. If it were not euphyllodineous, this species would be a bipin-
nate Acacia with three pairs of pinna?, occasionally, perhaps, four at the most .
Cambage has recently described and figui'ed the seedling of this species [Part v.
of his papers] .

The finest examples of reversion-shoots and suckers, I have yet seeu, are two
lots of A. implexa (?), which I quite casually met with in March, 1919: One
lot comprises specimens from two plants, 8-10 feet high, growing close together,
that had been badly scorched by a l)ush-flre, which killed the parts above gTound,
but without injury to the root-system. Reversion-shoots from the base of the
stems, and suckers from some of the roots came up freely. T fortunately found
them in the early stages; and specimens were taken, from time to time, over a
period of six months, until what were left had only euphyllodes, or a few bipinnate
leaves of no importance. The second lot was procured from some half dozen
plants at the side of a country-road, which had been miscliie\ii\islv broken or cut
off a little above the ground .

From the complete collection, I have been able to select a sequence of leaves,
which include — (1) simply pinnate leaves, present on two suckers, but, if de-
veloped, missing on the reversion-shoots; (2) bipiniuite leaves with from one to
eleven actual or potential pairs of pinna;, some of the lowest pairs being repre-
sented by leaflets; and (3) the five late stages of the waning pinna?, and the wax-
ing flattening of the long conniion petioles or primary leaf-axes, shown in Plate
vii. The entire se(|uenee is not shown, my main object being to show as many as
possible of the best examples illustrating the inversely projiortional ratio in
which the two antagonists are represented at various stages. The sul)stitution of
flattening axes for piuu;e is not a case of "walk in. walk nut." It is an intense

president's address. 41

struggle between them. The potentially heavyweight euphyllodes knoek-out the
bantam pinnje very promptly in weak seedlings. But, in reversion-shoots, with
a weU-established root-system to back them up, they put up a much better fight,
and are able to prolong the strugglel, hopeless though it is.

These specimens are most interesting because the euphyllodes are so long, up
to about 9 inches, and yet not too narrow. This means that, if they were not
euphyllodes, they would be bipiunate leaves with numerous pairs of pinniB, up to
15-20. Therefore, they contrast admirably with, and supplement the two cases,
one with very short and the other with euphyllodes of medium length, already con-
sidered. Nevertheless, they show only another phase of the same kind of thing.
The three ^re not special cases, but only those of which I have been able to get
adequate material.

The illustrations (Plates ii.-vii.) need little explanation, if it is kept in
mind : —

(1) That the succession of the pinna?, in the development of the compound,
bipinnate leaves of the Australian Acacias is basipetal, not basifugal, as
in the leaves of Jacaranda. In seedlings, the first leaf, or a pair of
them, is simply pinnate, a simpler type of those which come after it.
Then follows an abruptly bijtinnate leaf with one pair of pinnae, repre-
senting the replacement of the apical pair of leaflets of the first pinnate
leaf, without any representatives of the other pairs of leaflets. That it
is the apical pair, is shown by the presence of the terminal seta at the
apex of the common petiole of every leaf, from start to finish, unless it
is accidentally missing. Then, in due course, in the seedlings of the
Bipinnatae, of some of the EujjhyllodineaB, and in reversion-foliage and
reversion-shoots of any of them, follow leaves with two. three, or more
up to the complete number, or approximating thereto. These represent
always the apical pair and one, two, three, or more pairs, as the case
may be, up to the full number, of successive pairs of pinnse, in order
next below the apical pair. The apical pair is always present in every
leaf, however many pairs of pinnje may be present, except in the de-
cadent stages of the outgoing pinnae, as illustrated in Plate vii.

(2) Therefore, if the full possible number is not present, the shortage is in
the lower portion of the series. Also, the good, well-developed pinnae, if
all of tliem are not equally well-developed, when a number of pairs are
present, are those attached to the upper jiart of the common petiole ; and
the poor specimens, sometimes only represented by leaflets, are attaciied
to the lower part of the leaf-axis, as is shown in figs. 1-4 of PI. vi., and
figs. 4 and 6 of PI. vii .

(3) This provides an opening for the flattening of the axis to make a start
on tlie proximal portion of the leaf-axis, where pinnae are absent or
poorly developed. If only one pair of pinnae is present at the apex, the
surviving apical pair, as shown by the presence of the terminal seta, the

entire leaf-axis may flatten from top to bottom (PI. iii., fig. 5; PI. vii..
fig. 4) . Illustrations of flattening axes with an apical pair of pinnae,
more or less resembling my examples, are commonly shown in textbooks,
as confirmation of the statement, that the so-called phyllodes of Acacias
are flattened petioles which have lost their blades!
The figures of Plates iv.-v., and fig. 5 of PI. vi., show a few pairs (2-5) of
strong pinnae attached to the upper part of the leaf-axis ; well-marked flattening
of the axis in the lower part; but retarded flattening where the pinn» are situated.

42 president's address.

though there may be unmistakable indications of it. Fig. 3 of PI. iv., and lig. 5 of
PI. vi., show the damping effect of the presence of good pinniB e.xcellently.

Fig-s. 1-4 of PI. vi., sbow the retarding influence of the presence of pinnse on
the flattening, in the leaves with the ma.ximum number of. pairs of pinna", that I
have succeeded in landing. These are very instructive. Leaves with 7-9 pairs
are not shown, only for want of space, and because they do not show anything
more than these do.

Plate vii. shows the last stages of the decadent pinn<e, correlated with a
maximum of flattening of the leaf-axis. Figs. 1, 2. 4 and 6, rei)resenting the
pinnae on their last leg-s, are the only ones of the entire series wliich lack the
apical pair of pinnse. Figs. 4 and 5 are particularly instructive, because they
show a minimum amount of flattening in the proximal part of the leat-axis, where
the forlorn surviving pinn® or leaflets are stranded ; and then, distad of them, the
flattening soon increases. Fig. 4 has but two single pinnie with a reduced number
of leaflets ; unfortunately the upper portion of the euphyllode was missing when I
got it. Fig. 6 shows the lowest pair, and the one next above, represented by
leaflets; and then, altove these, a pair of reduced pinnae, and a distal better pair.
The portion of the axis below the lowest leaflet, the real or apparent petiole, is
longer than the internode above it — even allowing that it may be the real petiole —
but it is relatively very, short. In the face of such evidence as this, can anyone
still believe that the so-called phyllodes of the Australian Acacias are merely flat-
tened leafstalks or petioles which have lost their blades'?

An interesting paper by Dr. C. E. Preston, on "Peculiar Stages of Foliage
in tiie Genus Acacia," is contained in the American Naturalist, Vol. xxxvi., p.
727, September, 1902. This is worth attention, because what is so often tacitly
assumed and taken for granted, is discussed in this jjaper; namely, to which pair
of leaflets of the fii'st simply pinnate leaf of a seedling does the single pair of
pinnae of the next bipinnate leaf correspond? Preston says: "A peculiar tran-
sition-stage between the singly pinnate and the bii)innate is sometimes found in
seedlings of A. leprosa Sieber, when growing under cultivation. The shadow-
prints (Figs. 1 and 2) annexed sliow the nature of this peculiarity. The lower
pair of leaflets only is replaced by a pair of strongly developed jiinna-, while the
rest of the axis runs on singly i)iimate and rather weak in structure. As a I'ule,
no such continuation of the main axis is to be found." Shadow-prints of two
young seedlings are given, showing an '"abnormal third leaf" in each ease; the
first being simply pinnate, the second bipinnate, and the third apparently tripin-
nate. With all due deference to the author, and simply on the ba.sis of nia/jna
est i-eritcix et preraleat, T venture to express the ojiinion that, having inadcquats
material, he completely missed the significance of his abnormal leaves, and mis-
interi^reted them .

From my standpoint, tlii'V arc one of two thing's — (1 ) cither exani]des of
tripinnate leaves, an apical pair together with a terminal pinna (the middle one) ;
or, what is more probable, a complete, apical pair (the middle one, and one of the
lateral ones), and an incomplete |iair next below (the other lateral one. its fellow,
missing), the internode which should have separated the pairs (complete or in-
complete) not having lengthened. One cannot decide which view is correct, be-
cause the terminal seta is not mentioned ; and it is not recognisable in the small
shadow-prints. In lioth cases, the stalk l)elow the three pinnae is the common
petiole or primary leaf-axis, and not the petiole only, as the author suiiposos; as
is suggested by the length of it.

Tambagc has examined seedlings of more species than ;iny other writer;
descrii)tions and illustrations of fifty-five have already been published. He has
not so far found a leaf of a seedling with the terminal pinna present, but he has

president's address. 43

met with one instauce of it in the leaf of a sucker. 1 have had the opportunity
of looking over several thousand wild seedling-s, representing: about twelve species,
in the hope of finding anomalies, but with little sueeess. I have not yet seen u
leaf of any Aoacia. seedling or adult, which had a complete terminal pinna; but
a leafless thread-like representative of its axis, with a terminal seta, is sometime*
to be found in the leaves of reversion-shoots (PL iii., figs 5. 6; PI. viii.. figs. 5-6).
1 have also one bipinnate leaf of a seedling, of wliich one pinna has a terminal
leaflet. J. leprosa is an Australian species, but no other descriptions of seedlings
have been published. If the leaves of Preston's two seedlings really represent
tripinnate leaves (that is the apical i>air, together with a terminal ]>inna), thev
are, as yet, the first to be recorded .

What I believe to be tlie correct explanation of them is, that they are merely
examples like the three shown in ray PI. iii., fig. 3; and PI. viii., figs. 9-10. The
first of these is the leaf of a reversion-shoot. I have others like it; and otliei-s
with the two pairs complete, but separated by a very short internode. The
second is a leaf of a seedling of .1. my rti folia, and the only specimen I have. But
Cambage has figured similar leaves of A. huxifolia and A. pycnantha [Acacia
Seedling's. Part iii., p. 393] . When the termisal seta is taken account of, there is
no dilliculfy in interin-efing them. The third is a leaf of .1. decurreiis, which is
comjiarable with the others.

I have failed to find any e^-idence whatever that the lowest or proximal i)air of
leaflets of the first simply pinnate leaf is ever replaced by a pair of strongly
developed pinnae, while the rest of the axis runs on simply pinnate, and rather
weak in structure. On the contrary, the apical pair of leaflets is replaced by an
apical pair of jsmnsp; and there is no replacement at all of the lower leaflets of
the first pinnate leaf before the transition of complete euphyllodes in seedlings
of many species, though there is in others, as in the Bijiinnatse. Tlierefore, in
every leaf, at every stage -of development, whatex'er else may be present or absent,
the apical pair is normally present, and, in the very early stages, it is the only
pair. The succession of the pinnae in the development of the bijiinnate leaf is
basipetal.

The leaf of A. decurretis figured by Preston as '"showing a tendency towards
a triple pinnation," that is, "showing clearly the third degree on some of the l)asal
leaflets of the jjinnas," is a remarkable Ijut rare aberration. This species is a very
common one in the Sydney district, and I have examined many leaves; but T have
not succeeded in fuiding specimens of this or any other Acacia which sliow it.
But I have collected three leaves of Jacaranda, which have a few of the liasal
leaflets of the lowest pinnae exemplifying a tendency toward a triple pinnation.

But what Preston has to say about the leaves of A. heteroplii/lln, of which
he gives illustrations, is very important. Tliis is a si)ecies indigenous t^o the
Island of Bourbon and Mauritius, or both of them, T believe; and T cannot liear
that it is cultivated in Sydney gardens. It is sometimes mentioned in textbooks,
and it appears to be a remarkaljle species, like A. melanoryJon, A. nibida. and
])erhaps some <ithers, all of which are worthy of a detailed study of gradational
series of plants of various ages. Preston says — "There was also found a fairly
large number of stages [of .4. heterojjJii/na] which lead one to doubt greatly whe-
ther in all cases it is the petiole only which is transformed to the phvllode, ana
pinnae. They illustrate ^•ery well the inversely projiortional ratio in which the
proximal one. The prints which follow may, to be sure, represent mere anomalies,
but from their numlier, at least, they cannot but raise in one's mind a certain hesi-
tation to consider the existence of a law as to method in any way establislied .

44 president's address.

Here the flattening appears in ^ome cases entu-ely on the distal jjortions without
attecting the petiole, in othei-s both petiole and rhachis are involved to varied
extents. How these are to be interpreted under one general law seems incompre-
hensible."

Preston does not say whether the seven leaves figured are such as are to be
found on ordinary plants, whose growth has not been interfered with by pruning
or othei'wise. In the absence of descriptions of the plants or of seedlings, and of
personal knowledge of the species, or of any other like it, I cannot settle the
point. But they are certainly comparable with some of the leaves of reversion-
shoots, as shown in my Plates, especially PI. iii.-vi. They are pictures of the
contest between the flattening common petioles, or leaf-axes, and the pairs of
pinna;. They illustrate very well the inversely proportional ratio in which the
two antagonists are present in any particular leaf; and how, if pinnae are present,
no matter where they may be located, the flattening of the leaf-axis is retarded
where they are situated ; and how, if they are absent on some part of the axis, no
matter where, the flattening of the axis is correspondingly favoured in that parti-
cular region. The localised damping or retarding effect of the presence of the
pinna? on the flattening of the leaf-axis is very well shown in some of his figures.

But the idea that the so-called phyllodes of some Acacias are flattened petioles
which have lost their blades, and of others, that they are flattened axes which
have lost their pinnae, is erroneous. There are not two kinds of phyllodes. so-
oalled, of Acacias. The two hypotheses, that there are, cannot be harmonised.
Therefore. I am prepared to go further than Preston, and say that the attempt to
interpret them under one definite law not only seems, but is, incomprehensiltle,
inasmuch as it is not possible. The so-called phyllodes of Australian Acacias ai-e
not flattened petioles which have lost their blades, as both seedlings, when they are
correctly interpreted, and reversion-foliage and reversion-shoots demonstrate.
Therefore, they have been improperly called phyllodes; and consequently any
attempt to interpret them in terms of something which they are not. cannot b\it
be futile. But when it is realised that the euphyllodes of all the Acacias of which
we have sufficient knowledge, are flattened leaf-axes or common petioles, which
have lost their pinnae, then it becomes possible to say, that there is but one definite
law which applies to all that are known, and that it is a readily comprehensible
law.

I regret that I am unable to consult Reinke's paper,* referred to by Preston.
It is not available in Sydney. The abstract of it in the Journal of- the Royal
Microscopical Society (1897, p. 549) does not include Reinke's views about
phyllodes. Under the circumstances, Preston supplies what one chiefly wants to
know, namely — "-1. ruhida A. Cunn. and .1. IteteroplniUa Willd., have aireaily
been described by Reinke, and in his article one stage in the transition as it
occurs in -I. helerophylla is figured. According to tliat author, the change is
merely a gradual flattening of the petiole, accompanied by the reduction of parts
more distal." It is not surprising that Preston was unable to reconcile tlie views
here stated, with the characteristics of the leaves which he figures.

Goebel, in liis "Organogi'aphy of Plants" (Vol. i., p. 166, fig. 10'2 I remarks^
"The best known and most frequently quoted are the species of Acacia which pro-
duce phyllodes. The phyllodes arise by the l)roadening in a vertical direction of
the leaf-stalk, sometimes also of the leaf-midrib, whilst the lamina aborts. Seed-
ling plants (Fig. 102). however, have, without exception, so far as they have been
examined, leaves which are like those of the species — possessing a bipinnate

* Reinke, J., " TTntersuchnngen iiher die Assimilationsorgane der Ijeguminosen."
Pringrsheim's Jahrb. f. wiss. Bot. Brl. xxx., 1896.

PRESIDENT'S ADDRESS. 45

lamina aud a normal leaf -stalk. As successive leaves are formed, the leaf -stalk
gi-aduaUy broadens, whilst the lamina is reduced until the form of the phyllodg
is attained, in some species foliage-leaves may again appear after the phyUodes,
for instance in A. heterophylla."

Also, in Vol. ii., p. 355 he adds — "The best examples of the formation of phyl-
lodes are to be found in a number of Australian species of Acacia." It is usually
said that in the phyllode of Acacia the lamina is entirely wanting. This is incor-
rect, for the lamina can always be seen upon the priniordium. ... In some
species, for example A. floribunda, A. melanoxylon, and A. unoinata, there are
transition-forms which show that the rhachis may have a share in the formation
of the phyllode."

Inadequate material, and the disregard of the presence, the meaning, and the
significance of the terminal seta, as in so many other cases, are herein responsible
for the misinterpretation of seedlings. What Goebel calls the primordium of the
lamina, which is always present upon the phyllode, I should term the terminal
seta merely, or sometimes, in the young or early euphyllodes (but not in late ones),
juvenile stages of a pair of pinnae, always the apical pair, together with the ter-
minal seta, at the apex of the flattened common petiole. His suspicion that, in
some species, the so-called phyUodes are something more than flattened leaf -stalks,
is interesting. I regret that I have not been able to make more use of Goebel's
important treatise. I have been unable to purchase or borrow it; and there are
so few copies in Sydney, that one can consiilt them only under time-consuming
conditions.

EXPLANATION OF PLATES i.-viii.

KEFEEENCE LETTERS.

a. i. p., leafless, thread-like axis of the terminal pinna-^. t. 5., foliaceous ter-
minal seta — /. />., terminal pinna — t. s., terminal seta

Plate i. — A. suaveolejis (reversion-foliage).

Figs. 1-7 and 11 show leaves with two pairs or one pair of good pinnae on the
•upper part of the common petiole or primary leaf -axis; and poorer pinnse with a
reduced number of leaflets, or a pair of leaflets or odd leaflets on the margin of the
lower part of the flattening leaf-axis below the second good pair (when there are
two pairs), that is, on the developing half-euphyllode (the flattening on the upper
side of the axis only), or euphyllode. Note the inversely proportional ratio in
which the two antagonists are present.

Figs. 2 and 6 show also three leaves at a node, the two lateral ones simply
pinnate.

Figs. 4, 7, 9, 10 show green, foliaceous, terminal setae.

Plate ii — A. implexa (?).

Fig- 1 — An average complete euphyllode.

Fig. 2. — K seedling showing the transition from a bipinnate leaf with one pair
of pinnae (the apical pairl to a complete euphyllode on the fifth leaf. The fourth
leaf is a portrait of the two juvenile antagonists — a pair of pinnae (bantam), and
the leaf-axis or common petiole to which they are attached (the potential heavy-
weight, which, after the tussle is all over, attains the dimensions of the example
shown in Fig- 1) .

46 president's address.

Plate iii.

Fif. 1. — Upper portion of a leaf of Caesalphiia Gilliesii to show th; terminal
pinna present in this species. This, in the Acacias, aborts, and is represented by
a remnant, the terminal seta.

Fig. 2. — Leaf of a seedling of A. discolor, showing the basipetal. incomplete
developments of the leaflets of the middle pair.

Figs 3-6. — Leaves of Reversion-shoots of .,•/. iutf<texa (?).

Fig. 3. — Back view of a leaf with what appears to be a terminal pinna. The
middle one and the one on the right constitute the apical pair, as indicated by the
presence of the terminal seta (discernible with a lens in the photo>. The one
on the left, whose fellow did not develop, represents an incomplete second pair
next below, very close to the apical pair because the internode did not lengthen.

Fig. 4. — Leaf with one pinna of the second pair missing. Two alternate, or
perhaps odd pinnae below, represented by large leaflets.

Fig. .5. — Leaf with the apical pair of pinnae only, and a terminal pinna repre-
sented by a leafiless thread-like axis, and a terminal seta. The whole of the axis
is more or less flattened.

Fig. 6. — Another leaf with three pairs of good pinnae, and a rudimentary, leaf-
less, terminal pinna, and a terminal seta. Some flattening of the axis throughout,
but retarded where the pinnas are.

Plate iv.

Fig. 1. — Complete leaf (back view) of A. Baileyaiia, with four pairs of pinnae,
and a terminal seta, visible with a lens. Note the excessively short petiole.

Figs. 2. — Leaves of reversion-shoots of A. implexa, including two complete
euphyllodes. The branchlet shows the order of the succession. Xote the inversely
proportional ratio in which the two antagonists are present — good pinnae on the
upper part of the axis: much flattening on the lower part, extending upwards, but
retarded where the pinna are (especially in Fig. 31. Also the termmal seta at the
tip of the larger phyllode : rudimentary pinnae in the smaller one.

Plate V — Leaves of Reversion-shoots of A. iviplexa (?).

Figs. 1-5. — Most interesting stages of the contest when the antagonists are fairly
equally matched. Good pinnae on the upper part of the axis: flattening most
marked on the lower part, extending upwards, but retarded where the pinnae are.
Note the terminal setae, with some indication of the developing pinnae of the apical
pair in the youngest euphyllodes, and the terminal seta alone in the largest one.

Plate vi — Leaves of Reversion-shoots of A. implexa (?).

Figs. 5-6 supplement the series shown in Plate v., and are fine specimens.

Figs. 1-3. with 11 and 10 pairs of pinnae, the maximum number, as yet seen,
show the pinnae doing their very best. Some of the lowest pinnae show reduction
in the number of leaflets. The lowest pinnae in all three are represented by leaflets.
The presence of so many pinnae has obviously put the brake on the flattening of
the axes. Note the short petiole in Fig. 3. and the terminal seta in Fig. 5. Also,
that, in the leaves of this species, the pinnae are attached to the midrib, and not
to the margin, as in A. suaveoletis (PI. i.).

Plate vii. — Leaves of Reversion-shoots of A. implexa (?).

Figs. 1-7.— Six decadent stages of the waning pinnae, variou.sly located, and a
complete euphyllode. The common petioles or primary leaf-axes show more or less
flattening from base to apex. TTie distal portion of No. 4 is missing: but note
the retardation of the flattening in the lower portion of this and No. 6. where the
reduced pinnae, or leaflets are: and how the flattening increases distad of the
distal pinna or pair of" them. Note also the short petiolar portion of No. 6. in which
the two proximal pairs of pinnae are represented by leaflets.

president's address. 47

Plate viii

Figs. 14. — Four, developing half-euphyllodes of A. podalyriaefolia with two
pairs of pinnae; some flattening of the internode; and the broad flap-Uke flattening
of the axis below the second pair of pinnae, with a loose end, which, but for the
presence of the lower pair of pinns, would be joined up with the apex by the fully
flattened, internodal portion.

Figs. 5-7. — One half-phyllode, and one nearly complete, with one pair of pinnae,
and a rudimentary, leafless, terminal pinna and terminal seta, of the same species.

Fig. 7.— Young euphyllodes of the same species, showing the conspicuous ter-
minal setae.

Fig. 8. Three very young leaves of A. discolor, showing the terminal setse of

both the rhachis, and of the partial rhachises.

Fig. 9. — Upper portion of seedling of A. myrtifolia with the fifth leaf apparently
tripinnate. TTie middle one and the one on the right, with the terminal seta be-
tween but behind them, are the apical pair. The one on the left represents an
incomplete second pair next below, the internode not having lengthened.

Fig. 10. — Upper portion of a leaf of A. decurrens, showing the same sort of
thing, the middle pinna and the one on the left being the apical pair. The rest of
the leaf, together with eight pairs of pinnae have been removed.

Fig, 11. Upper portion of a not mature remarkable leaf of Jacaranda (the rest

of the leaf, with eleven pairs of pinnae having been removed!, showing four pairs
of pinnse towards the apex, and the terminal pinna, all represented by leaflets, some
with serrated edges; and the pinna: with terminal leaflets.

Mr. J. H. Campbell, Hon. Treasurer, presented the balance sheets for the
year 1919, duly signed by the Auditor, Mr. F. H. Rayment, F.C.P.A., Incor-
porated Accountant; and he moved that it be received and adopted, which was
carried unanimously.

No valid nominations of other Candidates having been received, the President
declared the following elections for the ensuing Session to be duly made : —

president: Mr. J. J. Fletcher, M.A., B.Sc.

MEMBERS OF COUNCIL (to fill six vacancics) : — Messrs. J. E. Carne, F.G.S.,
H. J. Carter, B.A., F.E.S., Prof. T. W. E. David, C.M.G., D.S.O., D.Sc,
F.R.S., Prof. W. A. Haswell, M.A., D.Sc, A. H. S. Lucas, M.A., B.Sc, and
J. H. Maiden, I.S.O., F.R.S.

auditor: Mr. F. H. Raj-ment, F.C.P.A.

It was resolved, on the motion of Miss S. Hynes, seconded by Mr. A. G.
Hamilton, "that it is the opinion of Members of this Society that in the interests of
Science, the Rowan Collection of paintings should be retained in this the Mother

State."

On the motion of Mr. A. G. Hamilton, a very cordial vote of thanks to the
retiring President, Mr. J. J. Fletcher, was carried by acclamation.

48

o o
o o

00

to

•^J< O CD

05 — I (N

O O O

o o o

■ O O Q

■^ o o
o_ o_ en

W

'SI

<

0

o

Si

a

w
»

CO

0^

o

CO o
(O o

w to

=** 25

^ c

OJ ? C

aj r rt

+J . •

4) J3

'S 2 -

o " ■

o

O O 00

o o to

o o o
o t^ to
o"

_5 = O

A O o

V) o o

-^' CD

2i^ «1

' 3 E~ >^

'-' -O K» "
> C -1^
lU ^ U

§^ s

° « 3

CJ

■*->

U5 C3

•H a

s ^

o e

O O CO O O CI

O iC t^ CO o o

1^ O (M CC CD t^

Tt< (M -rp r^ Oi

« O — ' CO

<I>

.o

a

^

5

«

u

o

Q

cq

O d) '

a

c

c

<u O

as 5

w O

0) MO

< p.

u<

„ ° c S rt.i^
^ i_ m o 4J o

«

T^ • CO o
"> . O! -si"

CO to
• (M --

" O 00
05 O CO

CO o o
en CO --

^ CO

CO o

10 t>.

co

CO 0 0 Tf 0

0 —

c 0

to >0 ^ CO ^

0 (M

0--

10 "O rt CO 'O

— ' -■

10 »o

<

T3 C
CO

Co 3 X

'^^ 2

w c ta

■ - +J -*J

b c ''^

O - .

■•fi

o t

>, c

S 2
a' '5

a. «

C — t-.

.22 .s 5

^ ^ D.

^

m

CJ

C
« 3

^ .Sex

C

c „, «

oj 2 -^

^ i/i

O'l-

3 S) ra 1j J« a V <u

■T3
C

g

3

W OS

0

aj--

^

"C 0

•c

I.

3

c -^^

C
a

T3

^•S

C

p^

0 «
opa

a

►J o
Wffi

oa

Oh

o

•0

3

<

<

u

CX

3

u

'*3
n

fc

v~

u

H

t/i

^

w

t-

§

:3

>"

<

c/;

«

p.fo

w

49

H

SS

^

o

O

0>

Q

«<

M

X

«

ti!

O

)J

H

o

u

03

o

u

<!

o

«

15

<!

hJ

<

«

— ; o

yj O

O

<

00 o -^
CO o cc

-H to 05
■-* -^
— < (M

pa

■" S "

Ci3 t^ ^~*

c

c

m

p

K

9

■"

3

!D j:;

U

k- (

o

> Ul

C 01

^u

c

*H

E"

o c

W

i o

g

Ss

u

OJ 0)

Q

PShh

«

>! .

^

CQ ■

■2

■a

c!

yi O O CC O I-» 00 I^

8g

o c

CO

^

TJ<

v>

oo

oo

t-H

s

!3

■a -

_^ : ft

rt . "
<v .

Hi

S ^"^

o SS

5:2-2
< — -

I <

a

01

S

o

O

u

cu

nj a> 01 ^ ^ nj 01

ctj oi OJ Ki; cu c ra

o
K

w
m

<

K

•p

3

3 I*
O U

ft fL,

ffi

■c Bj

3 CM

c 2

■a
c

H.

o

w ',::

so

0 = 0
000

10 to o

irs i-< CO
o^ CD 05

en

H

^

0

0

u

2

u

o>

•a!

tH

tT

xn

0

Pu

A

M

2

»

1

09

^

Q

0

-«A

»J

1^

eo

H

-*3

h

ca

t«

H
H

<!

U

0

<!

H

S

u

iz;

!z;

1!

<!

1-1

U

<

13

n

ca

5S

1) . • c

_; <=

«8

s

>,oo

nl

00

u
rt

0 0

(M t^

P

0 --'

rt

^

C/3

w

J

5

Si

<U

3 +j ■»->

'^ o

13 3 "

■a 3
Ocn

1

•a

iz;
o

u

u

<

O
u

m

; o 00 CO o w

ui o 00 — ' o o

o c^ o o i^

i:*^ O 'O ^- O 05

■* O) C^l CO

O K

n
c« .
CD o

g C.S
^^ 3<^

B o 4) cii «;

o . - - -

H - - "

c
o

a
►J

n
<

S
C

ca

c
•a
>^
w

y^

W

0

0

e
S

•a
3

(N

W

. •

•s<

0 •

3&.

"C , ;

oCJ

u •

p. ft.

Vl

CJ

■^H

■C/'.

3K

as

M;^

<

rtf

^^

3
O

T3

C

ca

fl-

ea
•A
W

31

ORDINARY MONTHLY MEETING.

31st MARCH, 1920.

Mr. J. J. Fleteher, M.A.. B.Sc, President, in the Chair.

Tlie Donations and Exchanges received since the ]3revious monthly meeting
(26th Novemher. 1919), amounting to 40 Vols., 480 Parts or Nos., 51 Bulletins,
18 Reports and 15 Pamphlets, received from 106 Societies and Institutions and 5
l)rivate donors, were laid upon the table.

52

HOPJXESS IN WATTLE BARK INFUSIONS.

By R. Greig-S-mith, D.Sc, Macleay Bacteriologist to the Society.

(With Plate ix.)

The development of i-opiness in tan liquors is oeeasionally met with and \n-o-
Ijably would be of more conunon occurrence but for the fact that tanners have
learnt by experience how to treat their liquors in order to avoid this objectionable
fermentation. The phenomenon does not appear to have been examined, or at
least no information about such rojiiness has been published. Doubtless the rea-
son for this lies in the difficulty of isolating an organism, capable of producing
ropiness, from such a population of diverse organisms as must be present in a
fluid with the history of tan. liquor. But, beyond this fact, there is something
about the subject that is peculiar, as was shown before this investigation was
begun. A tan li(|uor claimed to be ropy was sent to the laboratory and upon
being examined no ropiness could be detected. It was (uiite limpid and, upon
being tested for viscosity, showed a water ratio of 1.0714 at 19°. When allowed
to flow through a tine capillary, 100 e.e. of the reputed ropy liquor ran through
in 210 seconds as against 196 seconds for distilled water. The liquid was plated
and the bacteria examined, but no ropy organisms could be detected.

The Isolation of the Bacteria.

On account of the diversity of the tan liquor fliu'a and the difficulty of ob-
taining a good specimen of ropy liquor at the time, the writer considered that the
]>roblem could best be attacked from the side of the wattle bark. There promised
to be more chance of obtaining an organism capable of causing the ropy fermen-
tation of raw bark infusions than of isolating a similar organism from a ropy
tan liquor. As a matter of fact, during some experimental work, ropiness did de-
velop in a bark infusion and a search showed, among many colonies, one pos-
sessing a ropy consistency upon a plate of dextrose medium. The organism
also caused a fluid medium containing dextrose to become ropy. It was reserved
until occasion permitted its further examination .

Some months later, it was decided to isolate fresh races of the ropy organism.
FragTiients of wattle bark (Acacia p/ionnitha) were jiut into boltles and covercil
with water and sometimes with nutrient li(|uids. Two bottles out of many showed
ropiness. One of them had received raw tap water, the other boiled tap water
with 0.25 % meat-extract. It was evident that the bacterium was to be found
in the bark and was not derived from an outside source such as the tap water and,
from the great number of bottles that were prepared, it was shown that the
liacteria were not to be found on every bit of bark. A further test as to the
.absence of the bacteria in tap water was made by filtering a (piantity of water
and using the sli'ne that adhered to the candle in conjunction with sterilised and
raw baiks. No ro]iiness developed in either case.

BY n. GREICi-^^MITiI.

53

It was noted, but this may be of no importance, that the ropy infusions were
slow to show gi-owths of moukls on the surface of the fluids, while all the non-
ropy tests soon became covered with mould. Possibly the ropy bacterium
utilised all the available carbohydrate.

The ropy fluids in both of the positive tests contained many bacteria capable
of forming slime on dextrose media, but only one of the numerous forms pro-
duced ropy colonies and the same organism was found in both positive tests. It
gave a canary-coloured, loose, slightly raised growth on nutrient agar, and under
the microscope appeared as a round yellow colony with central granules and
homogeneous periphery. The bacterium was gi-own in bouillon and after some
time another bacterium of identical form but with different cultural characters
appeared. This was at first supposed to be an impurity in the original colony
but the same supposed impurity appeared in both races and in others obtained
at a later date from bark. The supposed impurity was subsequently recognised
as a phase of the original organism. Al .

The ropy organism first isolated and set aside for future examination will be
referred to as B., the most active phase of which is P>2. The organism isolated
later and obtained several times from wattle-bark will be called A. Both bacteria
exist in phases best recognised by the appearance of the colonies growing on the
surface of nutrient agar. There is the primary phase, such as Al, a weak rope-
produeer, which can be altered into the strong rope-producer, A2 . The change of
phase is not abrupt and transition phases are met with. Some of these, generally
yellow in colour by transmitted light, are closer related to Al, others, grey or
smoky, are nearer akin to A2. The phase Bl was occasionally noted but, as com-
pared with A2. B2 is remarkably stable.

The ropy bacterium, mixed i)ossibly with the altered phase, readily developed
ropiness in nutritive solutions containing dextrose, but did not have any apparent
acti(m upon a sterilised infusion of wattle bark. In case the infusion had been
altered by the sterilisation and become unsuitable tor tlie development of the ropy
substance, the bacteria were grown in pasteurised infusion, then in infusion
stei-ilised by filtration through porcelain and finally in raw infusion, but in none
of these was there any trace of ropiness. This was rather aggTavating but cjuite
in keeping with certain earlier attempts to transfer the ropiness of the original
infusion to bottles containing healthy infusions. Unless a mass infection were
made, the ropine-ss could not be transferred, and one had the suspicion that the
ropy substance had not increased, but had simply become more diffuse.

The explanation of the apparent anomaly was found after it had been shown
that the slime or ropy material was coagulated by tannic acid. It follows from
this observation that in the original case the ropiness had developed liefore much
tannin had passed into the water, otlierwise the slime ])roduced by the bacteria
would have been coagiilated upon the bodies of the bacteria, and would have pie-
vented them becoming distributed in the bulk of the liquid. To prove the rea-
soning, wattle bark, sterilised at 130°. was covered with water, seeded with the
bacterium, B2, and incubated at 28°. In sixteen hours a ropy infusion was ob-
tained. A repetition gave the same result.

So far we have arrived at the stage that ropiness is developed in weak in-
fusions of bark substance and not in strong, and it remained to determine the
amount of tannin wliich would permit or prohibit the production of slime.

On account of the inability to obtain a pure tannin, tannic acid was employed
in the experimental wdik with s^Tithetic media. TVattle bark infusion contains

54 ROPINESS IN WATTLE BARK INFUSIONS

tanuiu with certain nutritive substances. These consist partlj- of salts, partly of
nitrogenous bodies, probably amido-aeitls akin to asparagin and pai-tly of sugar.
The latter is either free or so loosely combined with the glucosidal tannin as to
be readily fermentable by yeasts or by B. eoli communis.

A saline solution containing 2 <"<- dextrose, 0.2 % asparagin and mixed salts
was treated with increasing quantities of tannic acid and portions were seeded
with the phase B2. The portion with 5 % of tannic acid showed a gi-owth of
bacteria but there was no evidence of ropiness. The portions with 2 % and less
were ropy in 16 hours. Twenty-five days afterwards, the portion with 1 % was
ropy, the others were not and contained fiocculent sediments. This experiment
mdi'-ated tliat the organism could develo)i ropiness in fluids containnig dextrose
and up to 2 % of tannic acid. This amount seemed to be the limit, as in coui-se
of time it slowly coagulated the ropy substance.

Experiments with Infusions of Bark.

An infusion of wattle bark was sterilised by filtration through porcelain. It
had a Sp.G. of 1.026 at 22° which is roughly equivalent to 5% of tannin.
Portions of this infusion were diluted and seeded with bacterium A. subsequently
tound to be a mixture of Al and A2. Ropiness appeared in 16 houi-s with the
quarter streng-th while the half strength was unaltered . An extension of this ex-
periment with more graduated strengths was made with the results as shown in
the table.

Table i. — "Diluted Infusion of Bark.

Days at 28"

3

Bark infusion, diluted. Sp. G., 1.026.

10 to ion

1.5 tc 100

20 to 100

2.5 to ion

;io to 100

35 to 100

s

s

o

0

-

-

s

0

-

+

+

o

0

s

+

0

0

s

^

o

0

«

+

o

•In this and subsequent tables, "S" indicates a slight ropiness, the
Huiil t^ivint; threads varying from oue-sixti'eutli to one-eighth of an
inch in length. "4-" indicates tlireads of one quarter of an inch or
longer. ■•O" means no apparent ropiness and. in some cases, no
groivth.

The small amount of ropiness obtained with water containing 10 ^'c of the
infusion may have been due to ihe paucity of nutrients and the slower appear-
ance of the ropiness with 25 <"( and over was possibly caused by the retarding
action of the tannin which appeared to hfive coagulated the ropy material liy the
6th day. The disappearance of the ropiness may not iiave been entirely due to
the coagulation of the ropy substance, for other experin.ents with acids and with
salts, wliich will be descrit)cd later, gave indications of a digestion or solution
taiing place.

Some time afterwards, eighty days to be exact, the filtered extract which luid
thrown a deposit was dihilid with water in the proportion of three parts of

BY R. GEEIG-SMITH. 55

extract to seventeen oi water, thus briugmg the original approximately 5 % of
tannin down to about | %. The solution was divided into three sets, each set
containing a control and two other portions, one with 0.2 % and one with 0.4 %
of calcium lactate. The sets were seeded with phases Al, A2 and B2. Phase Al
did not become ropy. Phase B2 developed ropmess in the control only, while
phase A2 showed ropiness in all tests . In these, the ropiness did not appear until
the third day at 28° and it had disappeared by the sixth, giving place to cob-
webby growths consisting of bacteria emmeshed in coagulated slime. The ex-
periment showed that ropiness may develop in dilutions of old extract of wattle-
bark and that it soon disappears. It also seemed to sliow that calcium lactate, a
substance probably occurring in old tan liquors, has little or no influence in as-
sisting the ropy fermentation.

During the investigation the bacteria were tested to see if they retained the
power of making infusions of wattle bark ropy. Their- physiological activities
were being tested in sj'nthetic solutions, and in these the characteristic ropiness
was being produced, but it -vras considered advisable to prove that this also hap-
]iened in bark infusions. Thirty gram portions of raw bark were put into sterile
4-oiince bottles and 50 e.c. portions of sterile water were added. The water
just covered the bark. The liquids were seeded with the bacteria and incubated
at 28°. Upon the first occasion of this routine testing, phase Al produced the
characteristic ropiness in a day and phases B2 and A2 in two days.

Twelve days later the test was repeated. Phases B2 and A2a developed the
ropiness in two days, a duplicate race of B2 in three days. By the fourth day,
phase A2 had developed ropiness. Phase Al, which had given a positive result
twelve days before, was negative.

Other tests made from time to time showed, like the above, a certain varia-
bility in the activity of the phases. Tliis was to be expected, for a stock culture
could not be kept on account of the alteration . of one phase into another. The
bacteria were carried over from colony to colony, that is, plates were smeared
every few days and from these, colonies were picked out and seeded into bouillon.
It was only by proceeding in this way that the phases Al and A2 could be main-
tained in a pure state.

When infected bark is covered with water and allowed to stand, the bacteria
gr-ow and produce the ropy substance, while the solution increases in strength.
The bacteria apparently grow in clumps of slime, that is to. say, they form a
coherent sHrne and remain imbedded in this slimey environment. This is demon-
strated when the bacteria are gTown in saccharine nutrient solutions containing
chalk ; the blobs of cohesive slime can be seen upon rotating the flask, and they are
meapable of being broken up by the rotation of the flask. Once the blob of
slime around the bacteria is admitted, it becomes a matter of question as to the
diffusive speed of the tannins and non-tannins through the slimes, just as it is
a question about the diffusive speed of the non-tannins and tannins from the bark.

If in making an extract, the non-tannins, which we will presume are chiefly
bacterial nutrients are the first to diffuse, or preponderate in the initial diffusion,
the bacteria will grow and, in doing so, form a protective slime envelope which
may be protective until the tannins become sufficiently concentrated to coagulate
it. Such a coagulation occurs experimentally in dilute infusions of bark, but it
has not been observed to occur in cases where the bark has been covered with
water, and the infusion allowed to remain in contact with the bark.

In an endeavour to throw some light upon this matter, portions of raw bark
were treated with water in the ratio of three of bark to five of water, and after

56 ROPINESS IX WATTLE BARK INFUSIONS

contact for varying times, the infusions were filtered. Tlie following were the
Specific Gravities of the extracts : — 15 minutes, 1.010 ; 30 minutes, 1.013 ; 1 hour,
1.016; 2 hours, 1.020; 3 hours, 1.024; 4 hours, 1.027; 5 hours, 1.029; 1 day,
1.048; 3 days, 1.052. The infusions were portioned into tubes and seeded with
phases of the bacteria.

Phase Al: no ropiness in any of the extracts.
A2: ropiness in all up to three hours.
B2: ropiness in all up to 24 hours.

The experiment was repeated with new extracts i\\> to ti\e hours.
Phase Al : no ro]>iness in any of the extracts .
A2 : ropiness in al! extracts.
B2 : ropiness in all extracts .

From the earlier tests with bark extract, it appeared pi'obable that tannin
when present in excess will prohibit the formation of the ropy substance. But
we are in doubt as to just hnw much will constitute an excess. Tannic acid
seemed to act differently t'nnn tlie tannin in bark extract, and it is possil)le that
ropiness occui's when there is a balance between the tannins and non-tannins of
the extracts. Several experiments were made with the idea of feeling the way
in this direction.

A quantity of bark was infused for two days at 28° with twice the weight of
water. The infusion had a Sp. G. of 1.053. Portions were seeded with the
various phases of the bacteria and in no case was ropiness obtained. The extract
was probably too rich in tannin to permit the formation of the slime. It was
then jn'ogressively diluted down to one-tenth the strength and seeded with phases
A2 and B2. No ropiness became apparent. Bearing in mind the earlier ex-
periment with the tamed infusions of bark, in which the live hours' infusion having
a Sp. G. of 1.029 became ropy, it seems that this longer infusion, after dilution
to an approximate Sp. G. of 1,005, failed to produce ropiness because the tan-
nins overwhelmed tlie activity of the nutrients.

In another experiment bark was treated for two hours with twice its weight
of water and filtered. A i|uantity of water equal to that removed was added
to the residual bark and allowed to remain in contact for 22 hours. The tivo
infusions were callei
of solids and 0.232

The two infusions were mixed in descending and ascending proportions from 5
to 0 and from 0 to 5 and seeded with A2 and B2. The tests witli B2 did not
become ropy.

Table ii. — Medium and Stronu- Infusion of Hark.

Phase

A2

Days

at 28"

1

2

3

"A"

1 (

•B"

0

+

5

0

+

4

1

o

—

s

:i

'J

o

S

s

'f

:i

o

s

0

1

4

0

0

0

0

5

0

0

0

BY R. GREIG-SMITH.

57

The experiment seems to indicate that as the water lies in contact witii the
bark, tlie nutrients and tannins diffuse out and the proportion of these is such
that ropiuess can develop. But after a time, the tannins begin to preponderate
and the development of ropiness is prevented .

Infusion "A" was treated with increasing amounts of tannic acid and seeded
with A2. Ropiness developed in the ccatrol, but not in the portions containing
_0 . 5 % and over .

The Change in Reaction.

During the growth in synthetic media, the bacteria prc.duce a small but
definite amount of acid from the sugar. In the presence of gljcerine the medium
may remain unaltered or it may become less acid. For example, a ropy dextrose
fluid showed -4-3.4° while the control was -(-1.7°. A bulk culture with glycerine
had at the start -\-2° to methyl red, -f5.5° to litmus and -(-8.5 to phenolphth-
alein . On the 6th and 12th days, when ([uite ropy, the same respective acidities
were determinl-d . This however is unusual, for in other cases the glycerine me-
dium became alkaline, as will be seen in some experiments given in the pages
that follow.

The effect of varying the original acidity upon the development of ropiness
was tested in a few expei'iuients.

A fluid containing glycerine, meat extract and salts was divided into 50 c.e.
portions, and these were given progressive quantities of phosphoric acid before
being seeded with the bacterium A which was probably a mixture of the phases
Al and A2. Ropiness appeared on the fourth day at 28° in the portions con-
taining originally an acidity of from -3° to methyl-red (=-(-2.5° to phenolphth-
alein) to -(-6° (=11.5°) but not in those containing -(-16° (=21. f°) and over.
The conditions were unchanged on the sixth day.

A similar test was made with dextrose in place of glycerine . After sterilisa-
tion the fluid showed -9° to methyl-red and -[-6° to phenolphthalein . The por-
tions were acidified progressively and seeded with the mixed phases, Al and A2.

Table iii. -Dextrose with increasing acidity.

Phase

K1 +

A2

Days at 28°

1

2

.3

4

7

Acidity to methyl-ved

H-

+

S

-1° and under

0

0

-fl°

0

-(-

+

4-

O

+5°

0

+

+

+

s

-f-8°

0

-f

+

4-

4-

4-12°

J-

4-

4-

+

0

4-15° and over

flocciiles

Portions in which the phosphoric acid was replaced by sulphuric and hydro-
chloric acids gave similar results.

The experiment shows that there is a certain range of original acidity from
about -(-5° to -(-12° as' shown by methyl-red which conditions a rapid production

58

ROPINESS IN WATTLE BARK IXFVSIONS

of ropiness. When tbe acidity is greater the ropy material assumes the tloeculent
condition. In most cases the ropiness was evanescent and soon disappeared, a
circumstance which was subsequently traced to the presence of the phase Al.
The acidity in the presence of dextrose probably increased, for the portions with
-f-15° of original acidity showed -(-20° at the end of the experiment.

Another test was made with glycerine, using 0.5 % of the hydrated phosphate
of soda instead of the usual mixture of salts. The medium as prepared was
neutral to methyl-red and portions were acidified with jiliosjihoric acid.

Table iv. — Glycerine with increasing acidity.

Phase

Al

A2

Acidity to methyl-red

Days at 28°

2

4

11

2

i

11

17

Acidity to methyl-red

o

1

,

+

+

-f5=

+3°

+7.5°

s

+

+

+

+

—

— 10°

+

+

+

+

+

T-5°

-1-12.5°

+

+

+

-X-

-

-

—

+ 15°

0

s

+

+

+

-r

—

+20°

+

+

+

0

s

+

+7°

On the eighth day the portions infected with phase Al showed, in the case
of the 12.5° and of the 15°, the presence of transition forms. The original
acidity decreased as time went on; on the seventeenth day, the test with an
original acidity of -|-5° had become +3°. -|-1()° had become -|-5°. and -|-2n° had
become -\-7° to methyl-red.

The original acidity of a glycerine medium does not seem to liave much in-
fluence upon the production of ropiness, but this may be explained by the fact
that the acidity is reduced during the growth of the organism.

The acidity of spent tan liquors seems to vary from -|-12.5° to -(-20° by
Proctei''s lime water test, and one which was tested showed -|-10.4° by this test
and -(-5° by methyl-red. So far as mere acidity is concerned, the organism
should produce ropiness in such an end-liquor, but when tested it did not do so.

The Disappearance of Ropiness.

The disappearance of the ropiness in cultun' fluids was noted first in the
case of B2 when growing in a medium containing saccliarose 2^r. meat extract
0.5 % and mixed 'salts (KH.l'O^, 0.2 %: MgSO+ Aq. 0.1 %; CaCIo, 0.02 %)
made neutral to methyl-red. The fluid was ropy on the fourth day at 28° and
quite limpid on the 6th when the acidity had risen to -)-8° . Again the experiment
with varying amounts of acid noted on p. 57 showed a solution or digestion of the
ropy material in the case of A. a mixture of Al and A2.

The speed in the digestion of the ropy substance was tested up(in several oc-
casions by growing tlie phases of the bacteria in medium containing 2 ''c of
dextrose witli meat extract and mixed salts at 28°. The bacterial phases had
been picked fi-om agar plates and were typical, that ij to say, they were the

PV R. (iREIG-SlIITH. 59

pliases known as Al, A2 and A2a. From the plates they were seeded into
nutrient broth and transfers were made daily. In tliis medium they doubtless
altered in the one direction or the other, but the change was very much slower
tlian when a sugar or glycerine was present. The first test with the dextrose
medium was made one day after isolation from the plate, and during the growth
the medium became ropy and then, after an inter\al, the ropiness disappeared
and the liquid became limpid.

Al became lini|)icl mi the 3rd day.
A2 15th day.

A2a 2()th day.

The second test was made six days after the isolation of the phase.
Al became limpid on the 3rd day.
A2 20th day.

A2a was still ropy on the 26th day.
The tliii'd test was made thirteen days after the isolation.
Al Ijecame limjiid on the 6th day.
A2 was limpid on the 22nd day.
A2a was still ropy on the 22nd day.
Al -\- A2 was limpid on the 8th day.
Al -)- A2a was limpid on the 8th day.
In this test the purity of the phases was examined in a few eases. On the
12th day, Al contained a few pure typical colonies, and on the 19th day no bac-
teria were found in a large loop of the culture. The digestion of the slime is
apparently a prelude to the disintegration or death of the bacteria. On the 12th
day both A2 and A2a contained bacteria which grew as colonies ■^ith the tint of
Al but much more granular; the granular lumps radiated to the margin and
became larger as they appi'oached the edge. This was the transition stage be-
tween phase Al and A2. On the same day, large loops taken from the mixed
growths of Al with A2 and A2a were found to l)e sterile. Phase A2 consisted
of Al with a few of A2.

Other instances of the solution of tlie ropy material will bo seen in the ex-
periments dealing with the saline and carbonaceous nutrients.

The phase A2a gives a more ropy colony on nutrient agar than A2 which
is somewhat gelatinous and is not so elastic when touched with the needle. It is,
however, difficult to discriminate between the two as, when free to grow, the
phase A2 often preponderates. That is to say, a plate when smeared with a
reputed culture of either A2 or A2a may show a preponderance of A2a in the
comparatively thickly sown parts and A2 in the areas with few colonies. At
times, the two phases seemed to be I'emarkably consistent in remaining true to
phase. In the majority of the experiments, A2a, has been classified under the
phaSe A2 foi< the sake of simplicity but where both A2 and A2a have been
simultaneously tested, the original designations have been retained to indicate a
duplicate test.

The earlier observations led to the belief that the disappearance might result
from the formation of acid from the sugar but this was negatived by an experi-
ment made with tlie idea of determinhig the nature of the acids formed in the
presence of sugar. The medium contained dextrose, meat-extract, potassium
chloride and chalk; it was seeded w^th a mixture of Al and A2 then known as
Bact. A. The liquid never became acid and the particles of chalk were freely
suspended when the fla.sk was rotated. It was first incubated at 37°, at which

(iO ROPINESS IX WATTLK HARK IXFUSIONS

temperature uo ropiness developeil. Then the fiask was trausf erred to au iu-
cubator at 28° and the culture became strongly ropy, the brownish ropy blobs,
one (it which was about two inches iu diameter, were clearly shown against the
milky chalk suspension. The flask was returned to the incubator at 37° when
the ropiness disappeared. Once more the ropiness appeared at "28°. These ob-
servations clearly show that a digestion of the ropy substance occurs at 37° in a
neutral solution. An acid reaction of the medium is not essential for the diges-
tion of the slime but it is possible that it may assist.

That the temperature has mucli to do with the speed of the digestion of tlie
slime was shown in a test in whicii jihase Al was grown at 22° and at 28°.
Both were ropy on the second day. the 28° test was limpid on the 5th and the 22°
test on the 8th day.

The experiment with chalk suggested the secretion of a slime-dissolving enzyme
by the i>hase Al. Prolmbly this is so but when experiments were made in which
old fluid cultures of Al were added to lumps of the purified gelatinous slime of
A2 in presence of an antiseptic, no solution of the slime was ol)tained.

It became evident that phase Al was capable of forming and eventually
digesting the ropy substance. It also rapidly dies out and it may be noted in
this connection that it jn-oduces a more rapid liquefaction of gelatine. If the
A2 phase is used originally, the ropy substance may j)ersist, while if a mixture
of the phases is initially present, digestion occurs, but at a later period than in
the case of the pure Al phase. It seemed to be entirely a question of the rela-
tive numbers of the two phases during the period of bacterial growth. Instances
of the autodigestion of the ropy material will be found in tlic exiiciiments with
the various svfgars and salts.

Change uf Phase.

These observations led to testing the reversion or alteration of the pha,ses.
It had been noted that glycerine favoured the production of ropiness from phase
Al and that dextrose did not or, if it did, the ropy fluid subsequently became
limpid. This was confirmed in experiments subsequently recorded with sugars,
etc., where i-opiness slowly developed and persisted in the presence of glycerine
but did not persist when other sources of carbon were used.

-V specific test was made with cultures of the phases Al and A2 taken from
]iuic colonies and grown in broth for one day before being seeded into tlie test
bottles. Phase Al was .sown in a fluid containing glycerine, meat-extract and
sodimu phosphate while phase A2 was grown in dextrose with mixed salts as on
p. .58. Rotli tests were ropy on the third day, and on tile thirteentli day, phase
Al in the glycerine was quite ropy, while phase A2 in the dextrose was limpid.
Plates were piepared on the thirteentli day and these showed that piiase Al con-
sisted of a mixture of typical colonies of phases Al and A2, and that iiha.se A2
hail licen altered into more or less vacuolated colonics of phase Al .

The experiment conclusively slmwed that the phases were reversil)h'.

The Action uf I'lnniic Acid.

The bacterium B2 was peculiar in giving iiroiKJunced riqiy solutions when
seeded into infusions of wattle l)ark of increasing strength and little ropiness in
synthetic liiiiiids. The reason for this could only he explained liy testing tlie
various nutrients in tlie presence of the nearest approach to the tannins avail-
able. niiiMch laiiriic acid. It imiv lie that the tannins in wattle bark infusions

BV R. GREIG-SIIITH. 61

behave dili'ereatly to commercial tannic acid and this should be kept in mind
when interpreting: the results obtained in testing the commercial acid.

A solution of dextrose, meat extract and mixed salts was prepared, and to
portions quantities of tannic acid rising from zero up to 0.6 % were added
before the addition of B'2. That with 0.1 <'f gave a faint ropiness and those
with 0.2 % to 0.5 Sc contained slimey striug-s. There was no pronounced ropi-
ness in any of them.

As meat extract forms a precipitate with tannic acid, it was replaced by
asparagin. In this solution, B2 produced ropiness in the presence of 0.1 %
and 0.2 % of tannic acid. The control test and those with quantities greater
than 0.2 % ga\e a good growth of bacteria but no slime.

The experiment was repeated with a slightly greater percentage of asparagin
(0.2 %) and dextrose (3 %) with mixed salts. Phase A2 gave ropy liquids
with the control and 0.1 % of tannic acid, but not with larger quantities. Phase
B2 only produced feebly gelatinous surface ring's with quantities of tannic acid
up to 0.2 Si:-

A medium containing levulose, 3 %, asparagin, U.2 r^ and potassium citrate,
0.1 %, was prepared and .seeded with phases A2 and B2. The former was a very
active sUme producer when used and produced ropiness in the presence of quan-
tities of tannic acid up to 0.5% and a slight ropiness with 1 %. Phase B2
gave an evanescent ropiness in the flask containing 0.5 per cent only, and not in
any of the others.

The influence of the original acidity of the medium was tested by means of
a solution containing dextrose, asparagin and mixed salts. One set had an
acidity to phenulphthaleiu of -|-17°, another was neutralised until the acidity was
-|-2.5°. Both were seeded with phase B2. That with -(-17'- gave no ropiness
in the control, a slight ropiness with 1 % of tannic acid and a distinct ropiness
with 0.2 % ; larger amounts were negative. With -|-2.5°, ropiness developed in
the control test only. Thus the production of ropiness was irregular. Phase B2
gave ropiness in the control with -(-2.5° and not with -[-17°; with -(-17'' and a
small cjuantity of tannic acid it produced a ropy fluid.

In these experiments with tannic acid, either dextrose or levulose had been
used and with them a certain irregularity of effect had been obtained. It was
therefore deemed advisable to test the effect of other sources of carbon. As will
be seen later, the experiment with nitrogenous nutrients seemed to indicate that a
maximum amount of ropy substance would be formed in the presence of asparagin
or ammonium sulphate. Similarly, the saline experiments indicated that sodium
succinate was a favourable salt. Accordingly, media were prepared containing
asparagin or ammonium sulphate 0.25 %, sodium succinate 0.2 % and a source
of carbon 2 %. Tannic acid to the extent of 0.5 % was added to each flask after
infection, by which procedure a coagulation of the infecting droplet was avoided.
When a drop of infected bouillon, is added to a solution of tannic acid, the drop
is coagulated and the contained bacteria are probably prevented from being dis-
persed freely in the liquid. It is possible that much of the irregularity in the
previous experiments may have been due to this imprisonment of the bacteria.

The gToups of flasks were seeded with A2 and B2. Another group was
seeded with Bl but as a plate, smeared at the time of infection showed that the
phase had become altered to B2, the group became a duplicate of B2. Phase B2
was pure, while A2 at the time of seeding contained 90 % of A2 and 10 % of Al.

62

ROPINESS IN WATTLE BARK IXPUSIONS

Table v. — Sugars, etc. with 0-5% Tannic Acid.

Phase

A2

B2

Source of Nitrogen Asparagin

Ammonium
Sulphate

Asparagin

Ammonium
Sulphate

Days at 28°

6 i 10

6 10

6 10

6 10

1. Dextrose

2. Levulose

3. Saccharose

4. Maltose
o. Galactose

6. Raifinose

7. Mannit

8. Control

(0

O O

0
O

s
o

o

0

s
o

o

0 ( o

o i o

i. ( o

^ is

-

+

+

+

+

0

0

0

0

o

-

^

+

-l-

-r

0

0

0

0

0

-

+

_1_

-

0

0

0

0

+

+

-

-

0

o

0

0

o

+

0

s
o

0

4-
o

0

o

0

o

o

o

s

s

o

0

s
o

o

o o o
o o s

0 10 o

On the 4tLi tlav, the ammonium sulphate tests of A2 were phited to see how
far the pliases liad altered.

Table va. — Percentage of Phase A2 in Ammonium Sulphate at 28°

Start.

4 Days.

10 Days.

Mannit

90

90

13

Saccharose ...

90

6.5

15

Maltose

90

:?5

25

Raffinose

90

30

5

Galactose

90

20

-0

Dextrose

90

10

0

Levulose ^

Control )

90

0

0

In all oases, except mannit, the cohesive pha.se A2 had become, by the fourtli
day, more or less altered to the ditt'use phase Al, and it is rather c-vtraordinary
that those with a maximum proportion of the diffuse ])liase should have been ropy.
It is possible tiiat the ropy substance was formed before the alteration to the dif-
fuse phase occurred and the gradual suppression of the phase A2 as shown by
the relative numbers on the 10th day, bears out this idea. Another jieculiarity
is that while the maltose test with asparagin gave no ropiness, and with ammonium
sulphate a jjronounced ropiness <m the 4th day, smears made on that day showed
the same proportion of A2, viz. 35 %. From these proportions it would appear
tliat ropiness has less to do with tho phase of the organism than the previous tests
had led one to believe, but as on the 10th day, the asparagin tost contained 1 %
of A2, and the ammonium sulphate test 25 %. there is still the suspicion that
some relation exists.

BV R. GEEIG-SMITH.

63

The diiplictite tests ut' phase B2 were lairly cuiieonhmt; ditt'erences were ob-
tained with levulose and saccharose in conjunction with ammonium sulphate.
With asparagin, a slight difference occurred in the case of levulose.

Phase IVi, in this experiment, was shown to possess considerable activity in
producing ropiness in tlie presence of tannic acid as compared with the prelimin-
ary tests, liut it is possible that the saline constituents had much to do with the
ditt'erences obtained .

In the experiment the media contained 0.5 of tannic acid and, as ropiness was
obtained with this percentage, it was deemed advisable to see to what extent the
most active phase could tolerate this acid. A medium containing dextrose 2 %,
asparagin or ammonium sulphate 0.25 % and sodium succinate 0.2 % was por-
tioned out and seeded with phase A2 taken from a colony two days previously.
Then the various quantities of tannic acid were added.

Table vi. — Dextrose with increasina; Tannic Acid.

Phase

A2

Source of Nitrogen.

Aspai

agin.

Ammonium Sulphate.

Days at 28°

1

3

6

10

1

3

6 1 10

Tannic Acid

per cent.

0-2

+

+

+

+

+

-

+

+

0-4

+

+

+

-1-

1

+

+

-

+

0-6

+

+

-f

+

S

O-

+

+

0-8

+

+

+

+

S

-

+

+

1-0

S

s

+

s

s

+

s

o

1-5

s

s

S

0

o

0

0

0

2-0

-0

o

0

0

0

0

0

0

On the 6th day certain of the cultures were smeared on agar. With 0.2 %
and 0.6 % of tannic acid, in the presence of asparagin, the colonies were of a
novel type. They appeared as round, raised, glistening, buff-coloured colonies
with a glutinous consistency. Microscopically they had dark centres from which
dark tufted fibres radiated through a yellow matrix to near the margin. In 10
% of the colonies this structure blended into that of phase A2, part of the colony
showing the fibrous structure at one side and that of A2 at the other. They were
clearly a transition phase of A2 more nearly related to A2 than to Al. With
1 % and 2 % of tannic acid the colonies consisted entirely of the phase Al .

By the 12th day, the medium containing asparagin with 0.2 % of acid showed
96 % "of Al, 2 % of the fibrous transition form of A2, and 2 % of A2. With
larger amounts of acid the cultures contained very few living bacteria but they
were of the kinds noted on the 6th day.

The cultures containing ammonium sulphate w^ere tested on the 12th and 16th
days. They contained few bacteria; with 0.2 % of acid, they consisted of the
introduced phase A2 an<l. with larger quantities, they were the Al phase.

64

liOPIXESS IN WATTLK BARK INFUSIONS

The teiideney of the tannic; acid is to alter the phase A2 to Al but this pro-
bably occurs alter the ropy substance has been formed in the medium.

The experiment showed that a fairly active culture of the phase A2 could
produce ropiness in the presence of <iuantities of tannic acid up to 1 % with
ammonium sulphate, and up to 1.5 % with asparagin.

The sugar test with 0.5 % of tannic acid showed that galactose was a useful
sugar for inducing the formation of ropiness, and an experiment was made to
see the effect of increasing quantities of tannic acid in the presence of this sugar.
The medium contained galactose 2 %, asparagin 0.25 %, sodium succinate 0.1 %,
and sodium jiliospliate, anhydrous. 0.2 %. The phases were plated at the start
and found to be pure.

Table vii

— Galactose with increasing

Tannic Acid.

Phase

Al

A2

B2

Days at 28°

2

4

6

9

13

2

4

«

9

13

2

4

6

9

13

Tannic Acid

per cent.

0-2.5

0

0

0

0

o

+

+

+

+

+

0

S

s

o

0

0-5

0

0

S

s

0

+

+

+

+

+

0

s

0

0

0

0-75

0

0

s

s

s

+

+

+

+

+

S

s

s

s

o

l-O

s

s

s

s

s

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

s

s

s

1-25

s

s

s

s

s

+

+

+

+

+ .

s

s

s

s

s

1-5

o

0

0

0

0

+

+

+

+

47

s

s

s

s

0

1-75

0

0

0

0

0

+

+

+

+

+■

0

0

S'

s

0

20

0

0

0

0

0

o

s

s

s

0

0

s

s

s

0

2-25

0

0

0

0

o

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

s

0

2-5

0

0

o

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

o

0

0

0

0

'I'he flasks with 0.5 % and 1 % of tannic acid were examineil sexeral limes by
the plate method on nritrient agar with fhc following results: —

Table viirt. — Change of Phase.

Phase

Al

A2

O-o'/r

B2

Tannic Acid

0-5%

i'/"

1%

0.5%

1%

Start

Al

Al

A2

A2

m

B2

Four days

Al

Al

A 2

A2

K2

B2

Nine days

Al with 5% A2

Al

A2, 40% ; A2, trans, m^/e ;
Al, -.iO'/r

Al

B2, trims.

B2, trans.

Fourteen days

-

Al

A2, 30% ; A2, trans. «0% ;
Al, 10%

Al

B2

B2

BY R. GREIG-SMITH.

65

It is clear from the experiment that tlie phase Al is capable of producing-
ropiness in the presence of from 0.5 % to 1.25 % ofi tannic acid in a medium
containing galactose. With 0.25 % there was no ropiness formed, and as the
acid increased, so did the viscosity. Tannic acid or, possibly, acidity seems
therefore to be a sine qua non for the foi-mation of ropiness by this phase of the
. liacterium A.

The phase A2 at the time of the experiment was a strong slime-foi-mer, and
gave a pronounced ropy solution in the presence of amounts of tannic acid up to
] %. The ropy substance had been formed in the early days of the experiment,
and it did not alter, although the phase in the ease of 0.5 % of tannic acid
changed to a mixture of phases, and in the case of 1 % it changed to Al.

The phase B2 gave ropiness in amounts of tannic acid up to 2.25 %, but the
viscosity of the solutions was never so pronounced as in the ease of A2. The
most viscous solution was obtained in the presence of 1 % of tannic acid.

The experiment shows that the three phases which were tested produced
ropiness in synthetic media when the tannic acid varied in amount up to 1.25 %
or 2.25 %, and that the tendency of the bacterial phase A2 is to change, in the
presence of tannic acid, to Al, and for the bacterial phase B2 to remain constant.

The same galactose medium was used to determine the comparative amounts
of tannic acid and of phosphoric acid necessary to prevent the formation of ropi-
ness by phase A2.

Table viii. —Tannic and Phosphoric Acids compared.

Phase

A2

.Days at 28°

1

3

7

1

3

7

1 Tannic Acid
j per cent.

Phosphoric Acid
in decfrees.

1

0-0

4-

+

+

0

+

+

+

2

0-2.-,

+

+

+

3

+

+ •

+

3

0-5

+

+

+

6

+

+

+

4

0-7.5

+

+

+

9

+

+

+

o

1-0

S

+

+

12

+

+

+

6

1-2.5

S

+

+

15

S

+

+

7

1..5

s

+.

+

18

s

+

+

8 1-75

s

+

+

21

s

4-

+

9 20

0

0

0

24

s

+

+

10 2-25

0

0

0

27

s

+

+

11

2-5

0

0

0

30

0

0 .

0

Certain of the cultures were examined at the end of the first day, and they
were found to contain the introduced phase, A2, in pure culture. They were
again examined on the seventh day and it was found that the phase had altered
to Al.

BC

UOPIXESS IN WATTLE liAKK: INFUSIONS,

Talile viiiiz. -Percentage Composition of the Phases (Seventh day).

Tannic Acid

Phosphoric Acid

Al

A2

A2 trans.

Al

A2

A2 trans.

1

35

25

40

80

10

10

•4

n

90

10

70

20

10

.')

80

3

15

85

15

0

9

SterUe

75

15

10

Tlie indication that a moderate quantity of tannic acid tended to maintain
the stability of tlie introduced phase A2, led to the tannic acid tests being again
examined on the 10th day, when the following percentage counts, of the kinds of
colonies were noted.

Table viiiA. — Percentage Composition of the Pliases with Tannic Acid (Tenth day)

Al

A2

A2 (transition)

1

70

m

0

2

(1

1).')

5

:i

(1

.■)0

.50

4

2.")

().")

10

5

100

0

0

6*

90

10

o

•Scanty growth.

It appears that from 0.25 % to 0.5 % of tannic acid, when added to a syn-
thetic medium such as was used, maintains the stability of the A2 phase and
tliat smaller or larger quantities bring about its conversion to the less cohesive
l)liase Al. In contrast, phosphoric acid does not appear to have much influence ni
maintaining the stability, for on the 7tli day there was a 70 to 85 % conversiou,
irrespective of the amount of acid added.

The limiting amount of tannic acid in this syntlietic medium for the phase A2
at the (iuic of making the experiment was 2 ""r and of phosphoric acid -|-30°
(equivalent to 30 c.c. of normal acid ]ier litre).

The two last experiments with tannic acid in synthetic media indicated that
2% of the acid prohibited the formation of the ropy substance. It aiipcared to
l)c advisable to extend tlic line of experimentation and obtain some information
vegai-ding the action of tannic acid when added to an infusion of wattle-bark
capable of giving ropiness. With this object in view an infusion was prepared by
mixing three parts of water with two parts of bark, and filtering the li(|uid at the
end of two hours. Portions were seeded with .\2 and B2, and were treated with
progressively increasing (|uantities of tannic acid. The portions seeded with A2
did not develop ropiness and when examined on the 4th day they were found to
contain from 85 % to 05 % of Al. The portions seeded with B2 developed a pro-

BY R. GREIG-SMITH.

67

noiinced ropiness with ((uantities of tannic acid up to 0.4 % and a slight ropiuoss
with 0.7%. On the 4tli and 9th days these contained a pure culture of B2.

The experiment was repeated a fortnight later with a similarly prepared in-
fusion. It had a Sp. G. 1.023 at 21° and an acidity of +24° by Procter's
lime water test. A similar infusion made on the following- day at 21° had a Sp. Gr.
1.022. -|-22.5° by Procter's test and -|-7° to methyl-red. Procter's test seems to
indicate the acids other than tannic acid that are present, for tannic acid- in pur-i
solution is precipitated at once by the lime water.

Table ix. — Bark infusion with Tannic Acid.

Phase

Al

A2

B2

Days at 28°

2

3

5

9

2

3

5

9

2

3

5

9

Tannic Acid

per cent.

0-0

0

0

0

0

+

+

+

-t-

s

+

+

+

0.1

0

0

0

O

0

0

s

s

s

+

+

+

0-2

0

0

0

O

o

0

0

0

s

+

+

-f-

0-t

o

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

+

+

+

0-fi

o

o

o

o

0

0

o

0

o

0

0

o

AVe see that an infusion of wattle-bark having a Sp. G. of 1.023 is immune
to the phase Al and that the derived phase A2 is able to develop ropiness, but the
addition of a small quantity of tannic acid, 0.2 %, prevents the formation. A
.smaller quantity, 0.1 %, permits a slight ropiness to appear. Phase B2 is more
tolerant of tannic acid, the limiting amount of which lies between 0.4 % and 0.0 %.

Larger amounts of tannic acid were used but these are omitted from the table.
The i^ortions containing- over 0.4 % showed cobwebby growths, doubtless consist-
ing of bacteria bound up with coagulated slime.

As a bark liquor o'f Sp. G. 1.010 may contain 1.8 % of tannin and 0.5 %
to 0.7 % of e.xtractives (non-tannins), the infusion of Sp. G. 1.023 presumably
contained about 4 % of tannin. The experiments show that this reputed 4 % of
tannin had much the same effect in prohibiting- the formation of ropiness as 1.75 %
of pure tannic acid.

A stronger infusion of wattle bark of Sp. G. 1.054 wh^n seeded with A2
and B2 did not develop ropiness, even when the infusion was streng:thened by
quantities of dextrose and ammonium sulphate rising- to 5% and 0.5% respect-
ively. This seems to indicate that the tannins are the iiroliibiting- agents, and when
they are present in sufficient amount, Ijacterial nutrients have little influence in
assisting- the development of ropiness .

A few tests had been made in the earlier part of the research to see if the
quantity of sugar in synthetic media had any effect in increasing the formation ut
ropiness, Imt it was not definitely shown that the amount of ropiness was in-o-
portional to the sugar in the medium, or that any advantage would be gained by
increasing the quantity over the usual 2 %. It seemed possible, however, that
sugar miglit to some extent modify the action of tannic acid, and that an increase

08

KOPIXESS IN WATTLE BARK IXFUSIONS,

in the sugar content might enahle the organism to withstand a higher amoimt of
tannic acid. To test the matter portions of fluid containing asparagin 0.5 %,
and sodium succinate 0.2 %, were given increasing amounts of dextrose and of
tannic acid. The portions were seeded with a drop of a bouillon culture of A2
which at the time of inoculation contained A2, 85 %, and Al, 15 %, as shown
by plate culture.

TiiVile X. — Increasing Dextrose and Tannic Acid.

Dextrose %

2

4

6

Days at 28°

3

7

11

3

7

11

3

7

11

Tannic Acid

1-0

S

-

+

-f"

+

4-

+

+

t-

1-25

s

S

s

s

+

s

+

+

s

1-5

s

s

0

s

s

o

s

+

0

1-75

s

0

0

s

s

0

s

4-

0

20

o

0

0

s

s

o

s

s

o

2-25

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

The portions with 1.5 % of tannic acid were examined on the 8th day. Tliat
with 2 % of dextrose contained Al with 5 % of A2, with 4 % of dextrose had A I
with 20 % of A2, and 6 % of dextrose had Al with 25 % of A2.

To judge by the pronouncedly ropy tests, an increase in the sugar does appear
to mask, to some extent, the action of the acid, for on the 3rd and 7th days tlie
"-(-" indications rise with the amount of acid, but so far as slight ropiness is
concerned, thei-e is little difference between the 4 % and the 6 %. The increased
sugar also prevents, or rather hinders, the convei-sion of the phase A2 to Al, and
thus masks the action of the acid by enabling more ropy substance to be formed
Ijy the cohesive phase.

Sources of Nitrogen.

An early attempt to determine the most favorable source of nitrogen was
made witli solutions of dextrose and mixed salts containing amounts of nitrogen
approximately equivalent to 0.2% of asparagin. On the sixth day a mixture of
phases Al and A2 had produced I'opiness to a greater or loss degree with as-
paragin, meat-extract, peptone, and ammonium sulphate, but potassium nitrate
gave little growth and no ropLness. A second test using one-sixth the f|uantili.«
of nitrogen and replacing the dextrose by glycerin showed that ropiness had de-
veloped by the fiftli day in the presence of all the above sources of nitrogen, and
also of potassium ferrieyanide. Thus in the presence of glycerin and mixed salt'<
any of these sources of nitrogen will serve.

At a later date, a more comprehensive experiment was made with jihiuses Al,
A2 and B2, using 2 % of dextrose or glycerin, 0.3% of potassium cifrnte and
0.25 % of the various nitrogenous substances.

BV R. GREIG-SIIITH.
Table xi. — Sources of Nitrogen.

69

Phase

A2

B2

Carbon source

Dextrose

Glycerin

Dextrose

Glycerin

Days at 28°

3

6

9

13

19

3

.6

9

is! 19

3

6

9
O

13
O

19
0

3
0

6
O

9
0

13
0

19

Meat-exti'act

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+ +

+

+

O

Peptone

+

+

+

+

0

0

0

+

+ + s

s

0

o

0

S

0

0

+

+

Asparagin

+

+

.+

+

+

+

+

+

+ !s

+

+

+

s

0

s

+

+

+ s

Ammonium

sulphate

_L

+ +

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

S

+

+

+

+

-L

-t-

+ +

Potassium

nitrate

+

0

0

0

0

+

+

+

+

+

o

o

<)

o

o

+

+

+

0 0

Potassium

ferricyamde

o

+

+

0

0

0

+

+

+ ;S

0

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

0 o

Phase Al is omitted from the table as all the tests were negative with the
exception of peptone plus glycerine which became ropy on the 13th and was stiU.
ropy on the 24th day. On tlie 19th day a smear showed that the liquid contained
95 % of A2 and 5 % of Al.

On the 11th (B2) and 13th (A2) days the fluids were smeared on plates of
nutrient agar and counts were made of the approximate proportions of the phase?.

Table xi(7. — Percentage Proportion of Phases.

Phase added

A2

B2

Source of Carbon

Dextrose

Glycerin

Dextrose

Glycerin

Phases determined

Al

Al (tr.)

A2

Al

Al (tr.)

A2

Bl

Bl (tr.)

B2

Bl

Bl (tr.)

B2

Meat-extract ,

-

100

—

—

90

10

dead

10

25

65

Peptone

30

70

25

40

25

_

100

75

—

25

Asparagin

—

25

75

—

65

35 15 —

85

~

—

100

Ammonium sulphate

80

10

10

—

90

10

— . 100

—

70

30

—

Potassium nitrate

dead

—

45

55

no growth

20

10

70

Pot. ferricyanide

10 j 80

10

—

—

100

nearlj' dead 100

—

—

—

It is dilHcult to see any relation between the rojiiuess as determined ou Table
xio. -with the proportion of the phases. Even when the transition phases of
Al=Al(tr.) and of Bl^Bl(tr.) are included with the cohesive phases, there ap-
pears to be no reason for connecting ropiness with a particular phase of the
organisms. One is, therefore, inclined to the idea that in most cases the ropy sub-
stance is formed first and the alteration of phase occurs subsequentl3^ (compare
p. 64 1 . The altered phase may in some cases digest the preformed ropy substance.
The untabulated tests with phase Al showed that the nature of the infecting phase
largely determines the formation of ropiness.

70

HOPIXESS IX WATTLE BAKK UJPCSIOXS,

Confirmatory tests were made witli phase Al, a mixture of Al with A2. and
with A2 using- levuh)se 2 9c an<i sodium chloride 0.3 '"f . They t)ore out the results
obtained witli dextrose and citrate.

The work has sliown that the jduise A2 can produce ropincss from de.xirnse it
glycei'in in. the presence of meat-extract, peptone, asparagin or ammonium sul-
phate, and from glycerin with nitrate bnt not from dextrose with nitrate. Doubt-
less this is due to the formation of an acid reaction in the mediuui cuntaining
sugar and the concomitant jiroductiou of free nitric acid. Ferncyanide produced
ropiness, but the (|uantity was scanty as compared with the otlu'r sources of
nitrogen .

The phase B2 acted best witli asparagiu and ammimium sulphate. Meac-
extract gave an evanescent ropiness with dextrose, but none at all with glycerin.
The behaviour with nitrate was much the same as with A2 and proliidily I'nr the
same reason. Ferricyanide was an unsuital)le source of nitrogen.

'ihe liifluenci of I'oni/d.b- .Vdyar.s,, etc.

The acti\ity of the bacteria in the presence of various sources of carbon was
tested with a saline asparagin solution containing various sugars, etc. liojiiness
was jirotluced in the presence of saccharose, dextrose, levulose, galactose, glycerin
and mannit. It was not produced from maltose, lactose, dextrin or gum-acacia.

In testing the most suitable amount of glycerin, a solution ccmtaining 1%
sliowed ropiness first, but in time the higher percentages made headway. On the
eighth day the order of ropiness seemed to be 5 %, 1 %, 10 % and 2 ' , when tiie
slimes were coagulated and weighed. With 1 %, 100 c.c. of media gave 80 milli-
gi-ams, 2 % gave 04, 5 '^i gave 88, and 10 % gave 90 inilligrauis. The 2 % te-t
was ]irobabIy low, in which case all <|uaiitities gave much tlie same juikiuuI id' fii|)v
substance.

The ropiness seemed to become more ahundiuit when grown in deep layers of
fluid; in shallow layers there aiipears In be a greater growth cd' cells ami hss
slime.

An e.xpei'iment was made with carbohydrates when considering the subject
of acidity. A solution containing sugar or glycerin 2'~/c. KII.,P(|j 0.2 '^f,
MgSO.jAq. 0.1 9r, €a('l20.02% was made nrutrnl to methyl-red and seeded wi; h
a mixture of Al +A2 and with B2.

Talili> xii. Chauge of Kcactiuii with Siigar.« iind (xlvfci-iu.

Phase

Al + A2

B2

Eiul acidity to
inethyl-recl

End aciility to
methyl-red

Days at 28°

1

2

3

4

4

1

2

•A

4

4

Dextrose
L(;vulose
Saccharose
Glycerin

0
O

s

s

■(-

4-

4-

4-

4-

4-

-4-

4-
4-

4-8°

4-9°
4-6-.5°
— 9-5°

0
0

o

0

0

o
s

0

0
0

s

0

0

0

o

0

4-9-,5°
4-9°
+-8°
6-5°

nV R. GREIG-SMITH.

71

The eNpfi'iment showed a distinet advance of I'roiH +0° to -(-9° in the acidity
with the sugai-s iind a reduction of about the same number of degrees with glycerin
during' the four days' growth at 28°.

A more comprehensive test was iiiaik' into the effect of various sources of
carbon upon the jiroduction of ropiness. A medium containing 2 % of sugars, etc.,
0.25% meat extract and 0.5% of crystalline sodium phosphate was prepared
and portions were seeded with the phases.

Table xiii. — Sources of Carbon (1).

Phase

\1

A2

A2a

B2

Days at 28°

li2

4

6i9

1
d

2

+

4

+

6

+

9
O

1

0

2
0

4
S

6
0

9I1

0|0

2
0

4
0

6
0

9

Dextrose ...

0 S

0

0

0

0

Levulose ...

0

+ S[0

0

o

+

+

+

s

o

+

+

+

+:o

0

s

0

0

Saccharose

0

o

0

0

o

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

0

0

0

0

0

Glycerin

0

0

s

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

0

0

0

0

0

Lactose

0

0

0

0

0

o

s

s

B

s

0

S

+

s

00

1

0

0

0

0

Galactose ...

0

s

s

s

0

o

+

+

+

+

0

+

+

+

+

0

0

s

s

0

Mannit

0

0

0

o

o

+

+

+

+.

+

+

+

+■

+

+

0

0

+

+

+

Maltose

0

s

o

0

0

+

+

+

+

+

0

+

S

s

s

0

0

0

0

0

Dextrin

o

0

0

0

0

0

0

o

0

0

o

0

0

0

0^0

0

0

0

0

Gum acacia

<^

o

oio 0

0

0

o

o

0

0

0

o

0

0 0

0

0

0

0

Control

0

0

0 o

0

0

o

o

0

0

0

0

0

0

0 0

0

0

0

0

When the experiment was well undi-r way, it was found tnat ])hase A2 and
(A2a) had altered and contained more oi- less of Al, a fact that should be taken
into account in considering the disapi)earauce of the ropiness. It had also been
discovered that the growth of phase Al in glycerin caused some of the bacteria
to assume the phase A2, possibly on account of the medium beeoming alkaline in
contrast to the acidiiication in the presence of sugars. The results of this ex-
l)eriment engender the belief that glycerin is the only substance of those tested
wliich can alter Al into A2 and that dextrose can rapidly alter A2 into Al. The
role these sulistances play is presumably in the suppre.ssion or exaltation of the
]>ower of the bacteria to secrete a slime dissolving enzyme.

Meanwhile it had been determined that the saline constituents of the medium
had an influence in the production of the ropiness, especially with i)hase H2. la
a saline test, Table xvi., Al gave a ropy medium in the pi-esence of sodium
chloride and with no other salt, while pota-ssium citrate was most favotirable wirli
phase B2 and as good as several others with phase A2 (A2a). A nieilium was
accordingly prepared containing 2 '^c of carboliydrate or other nutrient, 0.25 %
meat extract and 0.2 % of common salt for phase Al and of potassium citrate for
the others. The bacteria had been pickeil from plates three days previously.

72

ROPIXESS IN WATTLE BARK INFUSIONS,

TiiliU) xiv. — Sources of Carbon {2).

Phase

Al (NaCl)

A

2 (Citrate)

n

2 (Citrate)

Days at 28°

1

2

^

5

n

1

2

4

5

7

11

1

2

4

5

7

11

1. Dextrose

0

0

0

o

0

o

+

+

+

+

+

^

-t-

+

S

s

0

o

2. Levulose

0

0

^

-

4-

+

+

+

+

+

-f

o

0

+■

+

+

-

3. Saccharose

0

0

+

s

0

0

+

+

+ ■

+

+

4-

o

s

+

+

+

-

4. Glycerin

s

+

+

_{-

+

+

s

J-

4-

0

0

0

0

0

0'

5. Lactose

0

0

0

0

0

0

o

0

o

0

0

0

0

0

0

o

0

0

0. Galactose

-^

o

0

o

+

+

-f

0

+

+

+

_L

_i_

7. Mannit

0

0

^

J-

+

s

+

+

-

-~

-4-

0

s

+

+

+

-r

8. Maltose

o

o

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

9. Raftinose

o

0

0

0

0

0

0

s

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

10. No Sugar

0

0

0

0

0

o

0

0

0

0

o

o

0

o

0

0

0

o

' Confirmed by a separate test.

On the first clay of the experiment, Al (6), when plated, showed a pure cul-
ture of phase Al. On the eleventh day, B2 (1) contained no living bacteria in a
large loop of the medium ; tests Al (2,1 and 7) contained a mixture of the two
phases, Al and A2, as well as transition colonies.

A consideration of the last two experiments leads to the conclusion that in
the presence of glycerin the phase Al tends to become A2 irrespective of whether
the salt is present a.^ a phosphate or a chloride. With phosphate of soda and
the various sugars the teudoncy is for it to remain unaltered. The case is differ-
ent with sodium chloride, for levulose, and mannit (and also glycerin) change the
phase to A2, the predominance of which gives a permanent ropiness within the
limiting time of the experiment.

The phase A2 tends to change to Al in the presence of dextrose and phos-
phate, but not so mucli with the other sugars, while in the presence of citrate it
seems to remain unaltered.

Phase B2 (Table xiv.) is peculiar in giving no ropmess in the presence of
glycerin and in the ropiness dissohing in the presence of dextrose. Dextrose ap-
pears to have caused the reversion to a phase T?l akin to Al before assisting in
the death of the organism.

Tiie (|uantity of sugar has an influence in determining the ropiness of fluid
media. For cxaniple a solution containing 0.25% each of meat extract and
sodium pluisphate and 1 . 2 and 5 % of dextrose showed the following
with two cultures of Al. Phase Al(l) showed a colony with a granular centre,
Pha,se Al(2) had a stipi)lcd centre. These had been picked from a jilate thirteen
days previous 1o tlic licninniug of the experiment, and had been transferred daily
in bouillon.

Tt is clear that 2 % and 5 % of dextrose are best for obtaining roi>y solutions
with rai-es of Al sliowing colonies with granular centres. The colonies with
stippled centres liave lost much of their slime-forming power. The stippling is

Vr R. GREIO- SMITH.
Table xv. — Increasing Amounts of Sugar.

V3

Dextrose

1

%

2

%

5

%

Days at 28°

1

2

3 i

6

9

1

2

3

4

6

9

1

2

3

4

6

9

Phase Al(l)

S

S

0 0

0

O

+

+

+

+

0 0

+

+

+

-1-

+

O

Phase Al (2)

0

o

0

0

0

O

o

0

0

0

0

0

O

O

+

+

0

O

Acidity to
methyl-red

+.S°

+4°

-1-6°

caused l)y the preseuce of dusters of microscopic crystals of magnesium am-
monium phosphate and these are not in evidence in the granular colonies. Large
crystals, however, develop slowly in the agai-. and are found in the old plates. It
would appear that the development of ammonia runs pari passu with the forma-
tion of slime-digestive fennents, for it seems reasonalile to consider that the ropy
fubstance was digested as soon as it formed in the case of phase Al(2) with 1 %
and 2 % of sugar. With 5 %, the increased sugar resulted in the slime-forming
power temporarily overbalancing the slime-digesting power of the bacterium.

A synopsis of tables v., xiii., and xiv. gives a dearer view of the effects of
the various sources of carbon than a detailed reference to the tables themselves.
In this sjTiopsis dextrin and gum-aeacia have been omitted because under no
circumstances did they ever assist in the formation of ropiness.

Table xiv;?. -Synopsis of Sugar, etc., Experiments.

Phase

Al

A2

B:

1

Meat Extract
with

Tannic Acid
with

Meat Extract
with

Tannic Acid
with

Meat Extract
with

phos-
phate

chlor-
ide

ammon.
sulph.

aspara-
gin

phos-
phate

citrate

ammon.
sulph.

aspara-
gin

phos-
phate

citrate

Galactose

S

+

- ' "-

-L

-

^

+

S

-r

Levulose

+

_i_

-

~^

+

+

S

S

+

Saccharose

s

+

+

-L.

+

+

+

+

s

+

Mannit

0

+

+

+

-r

+

S

+

+,

4-

Dextrose

s

O

+

-!-

+

+

+

+

0

-f-

Glycerin

4-

+

+

+

+

+

—

0

0

Lactose

0 ' 0

-

-

O

—

—

0

0

Maltose

s

o

+ j 0

+

o

0

o

0

0

Raffinose

—

0

0 0

—

S

0

0

_^_

o

Of all the sources of carbon, galactose seems best fitted to produce the ropy
material. This is to be expected since the ro])y substance is essentially a galac-
tose anhydride and one would naturally think that the bacteria could form it most
easily from this sugar. But the other sugars are not far behind in their capacity

74 ROPIXESS IX WATTLE BARK INFI'SIOXS^

for assisting in the production. Levuldsc and saccharose aic .yoodseconds. There
is a suggestion that suerase or invertase is secreted by tlie bactci-ia as saccharose
is the only biose that is utilised to any extent, but a search for this en/.ynie did
not show its existence.

It is curious that the hexatomic alct)hol, manuit, should l)e so good, but it
seems to be peculiarly suitable for the i)roduction of many kinds of slime and is
ver\' frequently used in bacteriology for the nutrition of slime-forming bacteria.

Dextrose probably acts (|uite as well as the other substances, but it seems to
be specially adajited to form a slime dissolving enzyme and on this account the
rope-producing action of the stigar is not so clearly shown.

Glycerin is peculiar. It acts as a source of carbon for tne phase A'2 and
alters Al to this phase, it does not seiTe as a favourable nutrient for B2; in-
deed, it is not only unfavourable, but it also slowly changes B2 to the jihase Bl,
■ind therefore acts in op]Josite directions with the two bacteria. Like mannit, it is
a general nutrient for the production of .slime from the majority of slinie-formiu^
bactei-ia, as will be seen from a perusal of my papers upon slime-forming bac-
teria.

Maltose, raffinose anil lactose may be considered as being ineapable of utilisa-
tion by the bacteria A and B. It is true that A2 can utilise them to some exten'^.
I)ut this phase is very active, and is able to make bouillon ropy, a fact which
should be considered in connection with the production of ropiness in the presence
of meat-extract.

It is probable that with suitable nitrogenous and saline nutrients and suitable
conditions as regards acidity, the liacteria A and B are capable of fonning ropy
solutions from any source of carbon, and that the absence of the bacteria, rather
than an unsuitable pabulum, sho\dd lie the object aimed at in preventing ropiness
in wattle bark infusions.

'///(■ fiifliD'nce (if Salts.

It is customary to add salts to bacteriological Ihuds for tlie |)urp(ise of sup-
plying all those that may be necessary for the nutritiim of the bacteria and of
raising the osmotic pressure. The ordinary nutrient bouillon, agar and gelatine
contains J % of common salt together with the salts that may be contained in
the meat-extract used in the jireparation of the media. With this amount of
saline matter, the ordinary bacteria grow very well, but it does not I'olhiw that
this amount is best for all bacteria. Water and soil bacteria, for example, exist
upon nuich less, and it is a matter of common knowledge to the bacteriologist that
the saline content of bacteriological (luids can be raised or lowered considerably
without harming the bacteria to any great e.xtent.

In the earlier experiments the saline matter had been \isually added to the
extent of ()..S %> ••"'! generally consisted of pota.ssium ])iiosphate 0.2 %. mag-
nesium sulphate, 0.1 ''/c, and calcium chloride. 0.02 %. As these may or may not
be good for assisting the bacteria in the production of the roiiy substance, a num-
ber of tests -were made to get some information upon the matter.

In ah early experiment, a solution of glycerin, 2 %, and meat-extract,
0.25 %, was divided into portions, and each received 0.1 % of certain salts.
They were seeded with A. a mixture of Al and A2. Tiiat with calcium nitrate
seemed to give the most slime on the second day. After twenty days' incubjition
the slimes were coagulated with alcohol and weighed. The inilliai'anis nl' ash-free
slime ficr 100 c.c. of li(|uiil are given below:—

BY B. GRBKi-SMITH.

75

Calt'ium iiitrati'. a(| 2()()

'Jalcium i-hlorkle 175

Caleium lactate 152

Magnesium sulphate. a(| 132

Potassium mondliydiotjeii ])hospliate . . . . 105

Sodium acetate 88

No salt 85

Sodium succinate 82

Sodium lactate 80

Potassium-sodium tartrate, acj 57

The influence of the salts of the earths in promoting- the formation of the
ropy substance is clearly shown. Potassium, as represented by the phosphate, has
more influence than the indifferent salts of sodium. The weights of slime
obtained from the media containing the lactates of caleium and sodium show that
the base and not the acid is the active component of the salt, but that the acid
has some influence is indicated by the slime obtained in the presence of sodium-
potassium tartrate.

These results were obtained in a medium containing glycerin, which in other
tests had been found to maintain the original reaction or to bring about an alka-
line condition of the medium. Dextrose and other sugars produced an acid eoti-
dition and as wattle bark extracts are acid and as the carbohydrate in such ex-
tracts is probably of the nature of dextrose, possibly as a glucoside, it was con-
sidered advisable to test the activity of the bacteria in media containing this sugar
with various salts. Accordingly a fluid containing dextrose 1 %, meat-extract
0.25 %, was prepared, .and portions of it received 0.1 % of anhydrous salt.
After sterilisation the sets were infected with bacteria which had been (aken from
pure colonies upon the previous day.

Table xvi. — Salts with Dextrose 1%.

Phase

Al

A2

A2a.

B2

Days at 28°

1

3

5

1

3

5

7

13

1

3

o

7

13

1

3

13

Magnesium sulphate

S

o

0

s

+

+

S

0

+

0

0

0

o

0

0

o

Calcium lactate

0

o

0

0

s

s

s

s

+

s

o

0

0

o

o

0

Calcium chloride

o

0

0

s

+

_l_

-1-

0

+

4-

s

o

6

o

0

0

C:ilciui]i nitrate

o

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

SdiMuiii chloride

+

0

0

s

+

-r

o

0

+

0

0

0

o

0

0

o

Sodium acetate

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

Sodium phosphate

o

0

o

+

+

+

+

s

+

+

+

0

o

0

s

0

Sodi im liictate

o

0

0

s

0

0

o

0

+

0

0

0

0

0

0

o

Pot. sotlium tartrate

0

0

0

s

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

s

0

+

o

o

Potiibsium citrate

0

o

0

s

4-

+

-1-

+

+

+

+

-f

0

+

s

0

Potassium nitrate

0

0

o

o

0

0

0

0

0

0

o

0

o

0

0

0

No salt

o

o

o

s

0

0

0

o

+

0

0

o

0

0

0

0

76

ROPIXESS I.\- WATTLE BARK IXFUSIONS,

Certain of the tests were examined by plate cultui'e from time to time, and it
was found that Al was pure on the 1st and 4th days. Phase B2 was pure on
the 12th daj-. Phase A2a appeared to be a mixture of Al and A2. Phasj A2
seemed to \k- influenced in its persistence by the salt. In the sodium lactate test
it was pure on the 12th day, in the citrate it contaLued a few of Al tm the 7th
day and on the same day the sodium chloride test consisted chiefly of Al.

In the presence of sodium acetate and of calcium nitrate, not only was 1 here
no sUme formed, but there was a complete absence of growth, a circumstance
which led to the examination of the influence of the acetate ujiou the production
of ropiness in bark extracts infected with rope-producing organisms.

The quantity of dextrose in the medium did not seem to affect the results to
any degTee, for the medium was strengthend with 3 ^r of dextrose and seeded
with Al. Calcium chloride gave a slight and fugitive ropiness on the 1st day
and citrate gave a fugitive ropiness on the 2nd day. All the other tests were
negative .

As the activity of the saline constituents appeared to be of importance, espe-
cially in regard to the nmtation of the organism, another test was made. In this
the dextrose was used in 2 % strength with meat-extract 0.2.5 %, and the salts as
before, viz., 0.1 % of the anhydrous salt. The infecting phases liad been taken
from typical colonies two days before the experiment was started.

a . .

Table

xvii.-

—Salts with De.xtrose

2%.

Phase

Al

A2

A2a.

B2

Days at 28°

1

2

3

+

7
0

10
0

1
0

2

+

3

+

7

+

10
0

17
0

1
+

2

+

3

+

7
0

10
0

17
0

1

s

2'

+

3

+

7,10

17

1. Magnesium

S

+

O

0

0

snlphato.

2. Calcium

0

0

0

0

0

+

+

+

+

0

0

+

+

+

+

s

Si

0

+

-f

+

s

s

lactate.

'^. Calcium

s

+

s

0

0

0

+

+

+

+

0

+

+

+

+

o

0

+

+

+

+ ,-

0

chloride.

4. Calcium

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

o

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0 0

0

nitrate.

5. Calcium

+

+

+

0

0

+

+

+

+

0

0

+

+

+

+

0

0

+

+

+

+

s

0

sulphate,

6. Sodium

0

+

+

0

0

0

+

+

+

0

0

+

+

+

+

0

0

+

+

+

+

s

0

chloride.

7. Soflium

0

+

+

+

0

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

4-

+

_L

0

0

+

+

-1-

+

+

0

phosphate.

8. Soclium

0

0

-1-

0

0

0

+

+

0

0

0

s

_t-

+

0

0

0

+

+

+

+

0

0

lactate.

9. Sod. Pot.

0

+

+

0

0

0

+

+

+

s

0

+

+

+

+

0

0

o

+

+

+

+

o

tartrate.

10. rotassium

o

+

+

+

0

0

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

0

0

+

+

+

+

o

citrate.

11. Sodium

0

+

+

0,

0

0

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

4-

succinate.

12. No salt.

0

+

+

0 0

+

+

±

+

0

0

+

+

+

0

0

0

+

+

±

+

0

0

On the seventh day some of the tests were plated with the Inllciuitig results: —
Al (succinate), typical colonies of Al.
A2 (sod. lactate), colonies of Al with stippled centres.
A2a (control), a mixture of colonies of Al and A2.
B2 (magn. sulph.). colonies of Bl, some with stippled centres.

BY R. GREIG-SMITH.

77

On the teuth day other tests were plated.

A2 (phosphate), typical colonies of Al as well as transition colonies

ol' the same.
A2a (citrate), typical colonies of Al.
B2 (cale. sulph.), colonies of Bl with 2 % of B2.
B2 (phosphate), colonies of Bl.
B2 (citrate), colonies of Bl.
The disappearance of the ropiness in the test with magTiesium sulphate iirst
suggested the possibility of there being a phase of B2 secreting a digestive sub-
stance akin to Al, and the actual presence of this phase Bl upon the plates led
to the examination of the stock culture. The latter was found to be pure B2 and
the conclusion was reached that bacterium A was not peculiar in alone possessing
phases or conditions with less physiological stability than races.

Part of expei-iment xvii. was repeated to confirm the changeability of phase
B2, in media containing 1 % of dextrose, 0.25 % of meat-extract, and 0.1 % of
anhydrous magnesium sulphate, sodium chloride or sodium lactate.

Tabic

xvii]

■-

-Change

of Phase.

Phase

Al

A2

A2a

B2

Days at 28°

1

2

3

6

8

1

2

3

6

+

8

S

1

+

2

-f-

3

+

6

+

8
0

1

+

2

+

3

+

6

+

8

1. Magnesium sulphate

0

S

s

0

0

+

+

-f

0

2. Sodium chloride

O

0

s

0

0

+

+

+

+

0

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

+

0

3. Sodium lactate

0

0

0

0

0

S

+

+

+

0

0

+

+

0

0

+

+

+

+

s

Plates were prepared- on the eighth day.

A2 (magn. sulph.), Al, coarsely granular as well as transition fonns.

A2 (sod. chloride), Al with stippled centre.

B2 (mag-n. sulph.), Bl, some with stippled centres.

B2 (sod. chloride), phase Bl.

The experiment confirms the previous one, and shows the alteration of phases
A2 and B2 into phases Al and Bl, in the presence of dextrose, some aid being
possibly given by the salt.

Typical colonies of phase B2 wei'e ])ut into l)ottles containing dextrose with
mixed salts and into s-lycerin with sodium phosphate, both with meat extract as
a nitrosi'enous nutrient. No ropiness had occurred by the third day when plates
were prepared . The glycerin contained phase Bl and B2 with transition colonies .
The dextrose did not alter phase B2.

Tyijical colonies of phase B2 were seeded into fluid media containing 3 % of
levulose or dextrose with 0.2 % of potassium citrate and 0.25 % of meat-
extract. In four days the dextrose medium was ropy, while the levulose was
not, and both contained the introduced phase in pure culture. By the seventh day
the ropiness had disappeared in the dextrose flask, but plate cultivation showed
that it contained the introduced cohesive phase B2 only. The levulose meHum
contained the cohesive and introduced phase B2, together with 25 % of the diffuse
pha.se Bl. The diffuse phase is akin to Al, but differs in being brownish or pale
buff instead of yellowish or pale straw. Furthermore, there is the suggestion of

7g

ROPINESS IN WATTLK BARK IMFDSIONS,

a wavy structure as it' the tlatteued colony lia<l an undulating' surfaci'. No further
change hail occurred by the sixteenth day.

The diffuse phase, Bl, was grown in a glycerin phosphate medium to see in
which dircclion an alteration would occur. On the 17th day, H'J was present, but
it had disappeared l)y the 23rd. In another test tiie bacteria on the Otli day
were all transition forms of B2, and on the 12th there were 75 % of Bl, 15 %
of B2, and 10 % of the transition form noted on the Gth.

The results seem to show that dextrose tends to maintain the phase 112 and
glycerin the phase Bl, but this is influenced by the nature of the salt.

Ordinary bouillon maintains the phase B2 and that is why the existence of
a phase lil was not suspected for a loiii;' time. II is ilit'lVvent with A2 which is
slowly changed to Al in bouillon.

After finding that levulose favoured the production of the ropy substimce
more than dextrose, the experiment with the various salts was repeated upon two
occasions using levulose as the carbohydrate. The jihases Al, A2 and B2 were
tested, and, for the sake of com]iaiison. a further set of salts with dextrose was
used for B2. The experiments duplicated one another, and the salient points of
both are embodied in the table. Both sets of Al (levulose) and B2 (dextrose)
are omitted because they were almost entirely negative; the second set of A2
was the same as the first set.

After sterilisation, the dextrose medium in the first experiment bad a reaction
of — 1.5° to methyl-red and -(-3° to phenolphthalein, and this was sufficiently
{•Ikaline to give precipitates in the tubes containing the salts of lime. In the
course of the experiment, the reaction was tested on the seventh day in tests 4

Table xix. — Levulose ivith Various Salts.

■phase

A2

B2

B2 (Second
Experiment)

Sugar

Levulose

Levulose

Days at 28°

1

«

12

.3

5

7

10

12

3

5

9

+

14

1. Magnesium

S

+

+

0

0

s

+

+

1-

+

S

sulphate

2. Calcium

s

+

4-

0

o

0

0

0

O

0

+

+

lactate

:!. Calcium

0

+

4-

0

0

0

0

0

s

s

+

+

chloride

4. Potassium

0

+

+

s

s

+

+

0

+

+

+

-f

sulphate

.'5. Sodium

o

+

+

s

s

s

o

0

+

+

H~

+

chloride

(i. Calcium

s

+

+

+

s

s

s

0

+

+

+

4-

sulphate

7. Sodium

o

+

+

o

s

0

0

0

+

+

+

+

phosphate

8. Soflium

0

+

+

0

0

0

0

o

■ +

+

+

+

lactate

9. Sodium Potas.

0

+

+

s

s

■s

o

0

s

s

+

+

tartrate

10. Potassium

0

+

+

0

s

s

s

0

+

+

+

j-

citrate

11. Sodium

0

+

+

0

s

s

s

s

+

+

+

s

succinate

12. No salt

0

+

+

0

0

4-

O-

0

+

+'

+

4-

By l;. GREIG-SMITH. 79

and 5. Piiase A'2 with levulose showed -{-3° to methyl-red and -j-9-5° to phen-
( Iphthalcin, while B2 with dextrose showed -(-11° and -}-14.5° respectively.
Thus there was an ap]>roximate increase in the acidity during the seven days' incu-
bation of -|-5° with levulose and -j-12° with dextrose. It is possible that the
greater development of ropiness with levulose may be traced to the lesser produc-
tion of acid favouring the stal)ility of the cohesive phases of tlie bacteria.

Phase Al, in the tirst experiment, showed no ropines.s in any of tlie tests luilil
the 10th day, when that with succinate was ropy, and contained a mixture of
jihases Al and A2a. In the second exiK'riment, the tests were negative until llie
5th day, when the phosphate gave a positive result. On the 13th day, the phos-
phate contained A2 with a few transition forms of Al . On the same day the
potassium sulphate and sodium chloride tests contained the phase Al with a few
ivansition forms. On the 19th day, the ropiness had disappeared in the phos-'
l>halc test, and the medium contained A2, 2.5 %, Al, 5 % and transition forms 70
% . In this case the pliosphate ajiparently altered the phase to A2, which pro-
duced the ropy substance and, as the i)r(jportion of A2 decreased, the ropy sub-
stance dissolved. Al has been omitted from the table.

Phase A2 produced ropiness witli all the salts as well as in tlie control. It
wa-s api)areiitly too active to reijuire any assistance from the saline constituents.
On the 1 2th day, the tests containing the salts of lime were gelatinous as well
as ropy, and the media flowed like a soft jelly. In the second experiment, ])ha.se
A2a was used, and all the tests were ropy on the 2nd day, and the ropiness
persisted to the end of the experiment on the 19tli day. Thus A2a duplicated
A2.

Phase H2 with dextrose gave a slight ro])incss on the first day with tartrate
and succinate, but it liad vanished by the Si'd day. Then all tests were negative
until the 12th day, when the citrate test became ropy. In the second experi-
ment no ropiness was obtained with any of the salts.

Phase B2 with levulose gave more favourable results, but there was a derided
(iitt'erence lietween the two experiments. Tlint made on the later date gave a
greater ara<iunt of ropiness which the control test seemed to indicate as being
due to n more active condition of the infecting organism.

On the whole the saline tests, and especially those in the last two experi-
ments, seem to indicate that given a suitable source of carbon and an active
bacterium, tlie salts employed in the tests have little influence in ))i-oducing
lopiness. When the bacterium is not active, the salt may alter the jihase, and
thus assist in the ]iroduction of a ropy lif(uid .

Acetates mnl Nitrates ('lii'rk /I'ojjmesx.

The saline tests showed that nitrates and acetates prevented the development
of ropiness in artificial media, and naturally this led to testing the influence of
the acetate in hark infusions to see if the same jirohibition occurred.

One part of bark was added to two ])arts of water and varying amounts
of sodium acetate were added to the portions lief'ore seeding- with B2. Ropiness
develo])ed in the control, but not in the jiortion containing 0.03 %, i.e., 3 parts
per 10,000.

Another test was made with bark and water containing 0.02 '^/r of acetate,
iiortions being seeiled with ))iiases Al. A2 and P>2 . The controls became ropy.

80 ROPINESS DT WATTLE BARK INFUSIONS,

and so did phase A2 with the acetate. The phases Al and B2 with the acetate
did not become ropy.

From these two tests, it appears that the limiting strength of the acetate for
cheeking ropiness in bark infusions lies between 2 and 3 parts per 10,000.

Still one more test was made with bark and water containing 1. 2, 3 and 4
parts of acetate of sodium per 10,000, the liquids being seeded with phases Al,
A2, and B2. Ropiness developed in the tests seeded with phases A2 and B2
containing one part per 10,000 but not in the stronger solutions. Phase Al did
not produce ropiness in the weakest solution.

The conclusion that we come to from al consideration of all the tests is that
crystalline sodium acetate, when added to the water used for extracting wattle
bark, in the proportion of three parts of salt to 10,000 of water or 3 pounds to
1,000 gallons will prevent the formation of ropiness in wattle bark extract.

The Natuie of the Eopt/ Substance.

An attempt was made to obtain the slime in bulk by growing the bacterium
A in fluid media containing dextrose or glycerin, but the quantities of slime were
very small. This may possibly have been caused by autodigestion as noted in
the various experiments with sjoithetic media, but of this I have no definite in-
formation to offer. More successful results were got by gi-owing the organism
on solid agar. Several drojis of a broth culture of the organism was smeared
on plates of a medium containing glycerin 5 %, meat-extract 1 So potassium
nitrate 0.1 % and sodium phosphate 0.2 %. The first gi-owth obtained in a
few days was yellow, loose, and was easily scraped off. The second growth that
came up was translucent and elastic. It adhered w^th more or less tenacity to
the agar, and some bits could not be removed. It was noted that the toughness
increased with time, and the reason for this was explained later when it was
learned that glycerin caused the phase Al to alter progressively to A2, the more
insoluble phase.

The collection of films was treated with alcohol and filtered ; the coagulum
was treated with water in which it simply swelled up; there was no solution.
The swollen slime was heated in an autoclave at three atmospheres' pressure for
half an hour when a solution and a sediment were obtained. The liquid was fil-
tered with the aid of aluminiimi hydrate, and the filtrate was concentrated by
evaporation. A portion sufficiently dilute to enable light to pass through was
tested in the polariscope and found to give a reading of -|-2.i2'' in a 200 mm.
tube. Thus the gum was dextro-rotatory. The solution was further evaporated
to a mucilaginous consistency and tested dropwise with various reagents.

Coagulation was effected with alcohol, basic lead acetate, ammoniacal lead
acetate, ferric chloride and phosphotungstic acid, but the following had no act-on:
lead acetate, baryta water, lime water, milk of lime, copper sulphate, the same
followed by sodium hydrate. Fehling's solution, iodine, tannic acid, sodium hydrate
or sulphuric acid. These are the general reactions with the autoclaved slimes,
i.e., slimes which by the autoclave treatment have l)een separated into a soluble
gummy matter nn<l into coagulated proteid. The natural, uncoagulated ropy sub-
stance would behave i|uite differently. In one case where a slime was autociaved
for five and a half houi-s. coagulation was effected only with basic lead acetate
and by phosphotungstic acid.

BY R. GRElG-SMITii.

81

The sohible condition of the gummy matter does not appear to be stable, for
when it was evaporated to dryness it became insoluble, and did not again form
a solution with water.

The thickened mucilage which did not contain any reducing sugars, was
boiled for ten hours with 5 % sulphuric acid under an aerial condenser, and
during the hydrolysis it was noted that, like all the bacterial gums that I have
examined, furfural was given off. The solution was neutralised with barium car-
bonate, filtered, treated with basic lead acetate, filtered, treated with sodium car-
bonate, again filtered, acidified with acetic acid, and evaporated. The solution
ivas dextro-rotatory .

The osazone was prepared in the usual manner, and the bulk of the tar
was removed by percolating the dried crystals with chloroform, then by a mix-
ture of chloroform and alcohol, and finally with chloroform. The crystalline
mass was dissolved in alcohol and allowed to stand. Successive crops of crystals
deposited, and were removed, dried and tested for their melting points. These
ranged from 202° to 193°. The intermediate crops were again crystallised, but
in no case could crystals with a m.p. higher than 202° to 203° be obtained.
Doubtless they were a mixture of glucosazone, m.p. 205°, and galactosazone, 193°,
but the quantities were always too small to enable the pure glucosazone to be
obtained. It is possible that the small quantity of glucose was present in the
hydrolysed gums as an impurity. In testing the gum previous to hydrolysis for
sugar, no positive indication was obtained, but it must be remembered that only
a small portion was used and, while the impurity may not have been detectable
in a small portion, it may show itself in the bulk after hydrolysis.

As an example of the relative amounts of crystals obtained, the following
weights from a half portion of the hydrolysed gum are given.
1st crop — 12 milligrams, 201°

2nd ,

, —170

195°

3rd ,

, —138

193°

4th ,

. — 50

193°

5th ,

, - 27

193°

6th ,

. - 2

190°

Mother-liquor evaporated and treated with chloroform, which dissolved a
brownish-yellow tarry matter.

residue . . . . 22 milligrams, 181°

The second bacterium, B2, was grown on plates of levulose asparagin tannin
agar and yielded a number of tough skins which Avere easily pulled from the agar
surfaces. It was not always possible to get the ropy material upon this medium
for several later attempts failed. The slime of A2 is uuich more readily obtained.
There was, however, sufficient slime to enable a detennination of the hydrolytic
li-cduets to l)e made. The rather thick emulsion, for the gum after solution by
the autoclave treatment became partly coagulated upon evaporation, was unsuit-
> lie for testing the rotary power. The osazones were precisely similar to those
furnished by A2. and yielded similar fractional crops of crystals melting at tem-
peratures ranging from 202° to 193°, showing that the hydrolytic products of the
sHme of B2 were precisely similar in composition to those of A2.

The evidence goes to show that the ropy substance is essentially a dextroro-
tatory galactan.

A crop of films of the B2 slime of B2 was subsequently obtained upon im
agar medium containing agar 2 %, saccharose 5 %, ammonium sulphate 1 %,

82 ROPIXESS IJf WATTLE BARK INFUSIONS,

potassium citrate 0.3 <^-r with 0.1 St <'t taunic aciil atlded at tlie time of poiiriiig
the jilates. After 17 clays at 22°, the tihiis were jiicked off. suspeiuled in water
overnight, and coagulated with alcohol. The water and alcohol treatment was
repeated. The films suspended ill water were heated in the autoclave fo'" 15
minutes at three atmospheres pressure, l)ut tlie treatment did not liquefy them.
The water was acidified with two c.c. of normal sulplnnic acid wliich produced an
acidity of -)-5°, and the suspension was again autoclaved for an liour. The
films liad dissolved. The solution was carefully evaporated to smaller volume,
and a ijoi'tion was clarified with alumina cream and the rotation of the fluid
observed. The ash-free solids had a specific rotation of [a]D = -|-0.017°. The
solution gave a yellow precipitate with Fehling's .solution, and it apjieared that
the treatment had partly hydmlysed the gum. It was treated witli alcohol, and
the unaltacked gum was filtered off. The ash-free solids in the filtrate had a
specific rotation of [,i]ji ^=-|-0.002°. The ditlcrence between these two rota-
tions shows that the gum. ]ireci|>itabl(' by alcohol is slightly dextro-rotatory.

Tlie Aciih fiiriiicd hij the Biirleriii.

In the routine testing, the bacteria, A and B, were found to produce acid
and gas from dextrose and saccharose when these sugars were present in broth.
The nature of the acids was further examined. Tlie bacteria were grown in a
medium containing 5 % of dextrose, 1 % of meat-extract, and 0.5 % of sodium
jihosphate with the addition of chalk from time to time. The bacterium B2 used
up the carbonate more quickly than Al or A2, and naturally yielded a greater
quantity of acids when tlie cultures were worked up at the end of a month's
inculiation.

Tlie methoil followed in determining the nature of the acids, etc., was es.sen-
tially that described in these Proceedings*

Ethyl alcohol was found in small amount in the cultures from both bacteria.
It was proved by giving the iodoform test, by burning with a blue flame and by
having aB.P. of 79°.

A small quantity of insoluble fatly acid was ohlaiiicd fnim the culture of each
bacterium. That from A melted at 37°, and from B at 32°. Both were pro-
bably mixtures, but the quantities were too small to separate. The softer acids
of B were spread on a piece of filter paper and incubated at 28°. when the
more fluid portion was absorbed, leaving a resid\ie which melted at 40°, and be-
came clear at 42.5°.

The volatile acids did not contain formic acid. The solutions were neutralised
with baryta water, and after evaporation were dried at 140°. The A salts con-
tained .52.36 % of barium, the B salts 53.8 %. As barium acetate contains
53.73 % of l)ariiuu. it is clear that the volatile acids in both ceases consisted
entirely of acetic acid.

The non-volatile acids contained a small (|uantity of an acid giving a lime
salt insoluble in 70 9r alcohol. After aciilification and extraction with ether,
monoclinic prisms, melting at 182°, were ol)tained. Succinic acid under the
same conditions melted at the same temperatnre, and thus it was proxcil that
botli bacteria form a small (|uantity of succinic acid.

The only other non-volatile acid was lactic. The zinc salt of lactic acid was
jircpared from two cultures of the A bacterium originally seeded with Al and

•/.or. cit., 1901, 606; 190.% 114.

r>Y K. GREIG-SMlTIi. 83

A2. The ihst: Al. was separated as the lime salt t'vom the non-volatile acids;
the second was prepared directly t'nim the total acids. Al contained 18.12 %
ot water of crystallisation, and A2 contained 18.42 %. The latter showed a
specific rotation ot [Jp --= — 3.35°, and upon being acidified with hydrochloric
acid in the proportion of 2 c.c. of strong acid to 20 c.c. of solution it showed no
rotation. The acid was theiefore inactive lactic acid with a laevo-rotatory zinc
salt, and this was apparently the only form of acid present.

In preparing the zinc salt of the B2 acid, three crops of crystals were obtained.
The first weighed 2.02 grams, and contained 13. 2G % of water of crystallisation.
Zinc jjaralactate contains 12.9 %, equivalent to two molecules. The zinc salt
when dissolved in water had a specific rotation of [aJD ^ — 5.18", and with
the adilition of 2 c.c. of strong hydrochloric acid to 20 c.c, the rotation became
[Jd = -(-2.74°. The firet crop of crystals therefore consisted of paralactate.
This acid is said to be contained in meat-extract, but in this ease it was the result
of tile bacterial activity, because it was not found in the cultures from Bacterium
A which was grown in media prepared fiom the same formula.

The second croj) of crystals weighed 0.8 grams, and contained 15.18 % of
water of crystallisation, showing it to be a mixture of two forms of acid. The
third crop weighed 0.30 grams, and contained 18.75 % of water. The zinc salt
of ordinary ethylidene or fermentation lactic acid contams 18.18 %, equivi-.lent
to three molecules of water, and this was undoubtedly the form of acid in the
third crop of crystals.

The calcium salt was prepared from a portion of the non-volatile acids. It
containc<l 26.50 % of water, equivalent to 4J molecules (26.2 %), and was*
either a mixture of the calcium salts of the two forms of acid, or it was the
more insoluble paralactate, as was indicated by the comparative (fuantity obtained
(2.0 grams). The calcium salt of the ordinaiy :i<-i<l would probal)ly have been
in the mother liquor from the crystals.

The acids formed by the two bacteria, A and B, from dextrose in the pre-
sence of chalk have been shown to consist chiefly of lactic and acetic acids with
small quantities of succinic acid and mixed insoluble fatty acids. Ethyl alcohol
was also formed in small amount, and it may be that this was the source of the
acetic acid. There was a difference in the nature of tiie lactic acids. Both
bacteria formed the ordinary fermentation lactic acid, but B2, in addition, ]iro-
duced the dextro-rotatory paralactie acid.

A Glucoside may he formed. — When the A2 culture was acidifle<l witli sul-
phuric acid and extracted with ether, a quantity of fllras was carried uji by the
&ther and conveyed to the distillation flask. At the end of the extraction, the
fther was shaken up with water and the sui)ernatant ether containing the acids
wa.s used for their identification. The yellowish watery liquid was evaporated,
and yielded a syrup which was assumed to be glucose carried over with the
films. Upon ta-sting it. however, it was found to be intensely bitter. The syrup
was diluted with water, acidified with acid and shaken up with chloroform. The
chloroform was evaporated off, and a yellow bitter syrup obtained. The acid
solution was treated with ammonia in excess and again extracted with chloro-
form. Upon evaporating the chloroform, a small quantity of a colourless bitter
syrup remained. Tl)e presence of a glucoside is therefore indicated, and should
this prove to be correct, the further examination will be dealt with in a future
paper.

84 KOPINESS IN WATTLE BARK IXIXSIOXS,

Cultural Cluiructers.
BACTERiUil A, witb phases Al ami A'J. A2a.
Morpholo(jij.—A. Gram-negative, motile, short rod with rouudod ends. It
appears generally as a rod 0.5 X 1/^j but varies from an apparent coccus to
rods up to 2/i in leng-th. Spores were never observed. The flagella are long
and vary in number. They are frequently single, and polar, but more often they
are peritrichous. Up to five have been observed.

Nutrient ac/ar stroke.— X raised, glistening, .canary-coloured growth of loose
consistency. The cohesive phase A2 grows as a dry rough expansion.

Nutrient agar colonies.— Xiter a day's incubation at 28° there is little dis-
tinction between the phases beyond the tints under the microscope. Al is yel-
lowish, A2 is gTey, and all phases are either homogeneous or have a finely granu-
lar centre. Differences are readily seen on the second day, when Al is circular,
slightly raised and yellowish, while A2 and A2a are milky white and dome-
shaped. A2a maintains the dome shape, bvit A2 has developed or will develop
a more or less flattened and corrugated base, so that the whole colony has a
nipple-shape. In consistency Al is quite loose, A2 and A2a are ropy or tough,
and adhere firmly to the agar from which the colony has to be dug away. A2a
is more ropy than A2. Microscopically, Al is canary-coloured, A2 and A2a
are smoke-coloured or gi-ey. Al has a granular centre witTi homogeneous outer
portion. A ring of egg-shaped granules is frequently seen around the centre
among the smaller granules which become finer and ultimately vanish in the
homogeneous portion. The granulation may be replaced by a stippling due to
'the presence of small clusters of crystals of triple phosphate. In old plates,
four or five days, the agar becomes studded with comparatively large aggregates
of the same crystals. A2a is round, has a dark centre and a cog-wheel struc-
lure at the margin. In some cases the centre is lighter, and a rosette structure
can be maae out. A marginal ring shows protrusions which alternate with tlie
points of the rosette giving rise to the cog-wheel appearance.

A2 is not rounded or circular like A2a, but is more or less roughly dentate.
There are usually from five to seven lobes, more or less roughly pointed, and
the rough points consist of frog-s]iawn-like masses of gi-anules. The internal
stnicture is not visible, but there is an occasional suggestion of a rosette or
radial structure.

Divergences from these phases have been noted as transition forms. The
main difference between Al and A2 is in the colour, the difference between a
canary colour and a smoke tint. The yellow transition colonies range from the
more or less pitted forms of the stippled or granular colonies of Al to those in
which the wliole colony is gTanular with the grannies radiating to the edge and
becoming more and more coarsely granular as tiie margin is approached. The
smoke-coloured transition colonies show a fibrous structure, the coarse f.bres
stretching from a dark centre to near the margin. Some colonies have been
seen with this fibrous striicture at one side and the A2 structure at the other.

The difference in microscopical structip-r is closely associated with tiie flat,
dome or nipiilc-shaited macroscopical structure of the colony.

"Wlien the bacteria have been quiescent for some time, as, for example,
when they have been existing iipon agar or in brotli for a month or two without
transfer, these differences may not be noted. Raised, flat-topped colonies may
form, and these do not show any characteristic markings.

Ntdrient-gelatin stnh. — Tn three days. Al showed a filiform canal and sunken
nail-head. In five days there was a liiiuefied saccate area at the top of tlie canal.

BY E. GREIG-SMITH. 83

A2 and A2a showed a filiform canal with an npper portion waved and hearing' a
flat nail-head. In five davs the nail-head had become a napiform softened area.

Nutrient tjelatin eoloires. — Al gave colonies showing an irregular, granular,
ivy-leaf-like structure in a shallow depression of softened gelatin. By the fifth
day the gelatio had H(|ueflcd and the growth had broken up into irregular scat-
tered grannies. A2 and A2a liquefied the medium slowly, and the colonies re-
jnained as moruloid or frog-spawn-like masses of irregular gi'anules.

Glucose gelatin colonies. — The phases were all much the same, and this ap-
plies to all media with sugar. Al gave pale yellow colonies with i-aised centres
and raised circular margins (button-shape) ; they were about 7 mm. diameter in
four days. A2 grew as irregular moruloid masses, 3-5 mm. in diameter. Both
phases softened the gelatine.

Dextrose agar. — Al gTew as a smooth raised colony of ropy consistency; A2,
dome-shaped, with or without a rugose margin, and the consistency wa.s rubber-
like rather than ropy.

Bouillon. — A pronounced surface film and slightly turbid medium with a
faint deposit excepting when a film has fallen down. A2 causes the upper layers
of medium to be ropy. Nitrates are reduced to nitrites, indol is formed and
anmionia is produced.

Potato. — A scanty, glistening, pale buff growth.

Starch. — Faint saccharification occurred.

Litmus-milk. — The medium was unaltered.

Litmus broth icith sugars, etc. — Saccharose and dextrose gave acid and gas.
Mannit showed a bleaching only, lactose was unaltered.

Classification number. — 221 .131.3523.

Bacterium B2.

Morphologg. — As A2, but a little stouter rod, 0.(1^.

Nutrient Agar Stroke. — As A2.

Nutrient Agar Colonies. — A corrugated, dome-shaped colony smaller than A2,
in appearance like a minute white raspberry. Microscopically, the colonies on
thickly sown ]ilates show a granular central area bounded by an irregular, dark,
ivy-leaf shaped band outside which and half way to the edge there is a dark
circular ring; otherwise the colony structure is coarsely granular. The freely-
growing colonies have often rosette or spoke-like marking's extending from the
centre to the repand edge, but the typical structure is mesenteric.

Nutrient gelatin stab. — As A2, but the liquefaction is very slow.

Nutrient gelatin colonies. — As A2.

Glucose gelatin colonies. — As A2, but Ihey do not liquefy the medium.

Dextrose Agar. — As A2.

Bouillon. — As Al, but the film is flakey.

Potato. — A glistening white growth.

Starch. — As A.

Litmus milk. — As A.

Litmus broth with sugars, etc. — As A.

Classification, number. — As A.

The two bacteria have some resemblance to Bac. Atherstonei, the variable
galactan bacterium described by me as having been obtained from the tissues of
Strgchnos Atherstonei.* That organism exhibited two phases. The colonies in
glucose-gelatin grew as brittle transparent masses, apparently containing a brittle

•These Proceedings, 1904, 442.

8G ROPIXESS IX WATTLE BARK INFUSIONS,

transparent ^lun. anil as loose, yellow, sliiucy gi'owtlis. Tlic cohesive ])liase was
rapidly cliangetl to the ilittuse phase by growinj;- in s^hieose-selatin at 30°. The
gum was a galaetan, hut was liydrolysed witli difficulty, while tlie reactions oT the
mucilage were clitt'eretit from those noted with the wattle-hark hacreria.

( 'iixri.rsioxs.

The imcstigation was undertaken with the idea of endeavouring to eluciilate
one of the i)roblenis that is occasionally' met hy tlie tanner. It is possil)le that
every case of ropiness may not he bacterial, hut it may be granted that in the
great majority of cases it is a Ijacteriological phenomenon, and any infornuitiim
regarding it sliould lie of value.

To attack the problem from the side of the tannery would he a matter of
nnich dilliculty, for one cannot always get cases of ropiness at suital)lc times,
and, when rojiiness does occur, circumstances may not be sucli as to facilitate the
investigation. That it is not an easy ])roblem is shown by the fact that up to {he
present it has not been investigated, and, doubtless, tliis may be traced to the
nudti]iiicity of organisms swarming in the tan-li(jUors and tlie habit whicli slime
bacteria have of growing in cliiin])s. while most of the other bacteria diffuse
themselves. It apiieared to be an easier way to attack tlie problem from another
aspect, that of the ropiness that occurs in wattle bark infusions, and there is
every reason to believe that the results obtained with the infusiims will he laiucly
applicable to tanning li(|uors.

In the bark of wattle trees, many bacteria may he capable of producing ropy
infusions, but so far only two have been found. They are closely allied to one
another and differ, not so much in their bacterioscoi>ic characters as in their phy-
siological properties, that is, in their ])ower of forming the ropy substance under
different conditions, especially as regards nutrition. The bacteria lia\'e been pro-
visionally named A and B. Like several gum-formiug bacteria which have been
descrilied by the writer,* each bacterium can show two phases, one forming' a
comparatively soluble slime, the other giving a viscous slime.

The pos.session of two phases is not unique and possibly a double phase may
be expected to occur with many slime-forming bacteria. The alteration of phase
is possibly associated with the presence or comparative absence of a gum-digesting
enzyme. The soluble phase certainly possesses a larger amount id' a gelatine-
dissolving en/.yme, and one can, at will, by altering the incubation temi)erature,
obtain a mobile or a viscous fluid.

There appears to be something in liark infusions that induces the snliilile
phase to become the insoluble phase and gives rise to ropiness.

The tannins of hark infusions liave a prohibiting action upon the formation
of ropiness, cm account of their property of co.ag'ulating the slime, and for this
to occur a certain concentration is necessary. For Racterium .\ this is e(|uiva-
lent to a specific gravity of 1.024, and for Bacterium B, 1.048. Pure tannic
acid is more active, for the prohibiting amount is much under the (|iianlities of
tannin represented by the gravities of the infusions. In synthetic media. 2 '^ r of
tannic acid prevents the formation of ropiness by coagulating the slime, as it is
formed, upon the bodies of the bacteria.

In view of this differenti.nl action of tannin as compared with tannic .-ii-id.

'Tlie liaotei-iii rusponsible for tlic |iv<iiluctiou tif the soIuMe :iud uisolulile wattle
gums were uained /I. ticaciae aud /?. iiiitunihiiniiii, and it was shown tliat the one form
could lie nlterc'il ti) the other. //. .U/irrsloiiei fthese Proceedings, liKH. H'i) exists as
two phases, .me tunning a sqlulilc sliuie. the .■tlu-r ]iroducing !in insoluble gelatinous
gabictau.

BY R. UREIG-SillTH.

87

tlu' lial)ilit.v oL' weak taiining' cud liiiuors to become ropy \vill depend ui(u:i the
taunie acid, for the tannins will have become liydrolysed by bacterial action to
glucose and tannic acid. Thus afresh liquor with asp. g. of, say, 1.02-i, con-
taining about 5'^r of tannin will be quite different in its action to an old liquui
of the same gra\ity containing perhaps 5 % of tannic acid. Again, it has been
shown that certain salts, notably acetates, prohibit the growth of the rope-
forming l)aeteria. Acetic acid is a very common by-product of bacterial activity,
and may follow up the alcoholic fermentation should yeasts become active in the
liciuors. If acetates are present in the spent liquors they will have a decided
influence in preventing the development of ropiness. The matter is therefore
complicated; so much will depend upon the composition of the li(|uoi'.

Once the ropiness is formed in infusions still in contact with the bark, it
does not disappear even although the concentration of tannin becomes greater
than that necessary to coagulate the slime. Under similar conditions in synthetic
media, or in infusions out of contact with (lie bark, tlie riipiness disappears either
through coagulation or digestion.

The acidity of the infusion doubtless jilays a part in promoting ropiness.
This was the case with synthetic media which with some phases of the organisms
gave most ropiness when the acidity varied from -|-8 to -|-12°, or when it con-
tained from 0.75 % to 1 % of tannic acid. In opposition to thi^, the bacteria when
grown in the presence of chalk and, thei-efore, in a neutral medium, produced
ropiness at 28°, and not at 37° .

But the main condition is the presence of a sugar and of tlie many that were
tested, galactose was the most efficient in promoting the formation of uuieus.
Levulose, saccharose, dextrose and the non-sugars, matniit and glycerin were
nearly as good, while maltose, lactose and raffinose wei-e iucaiiable of assisting
the slime-forming function.

The nature of the salts did not ajjpeaa' to have nuu-li lutluence when sufh-
cient sugar was present. But with a detieieney of sugar (1 %) or with a feeble
bacterium, the salt may play a part. Acetates and nitrates prevented the j;rowth
of the acti\-e bacteria, and they give us a means of preventing the development
of ropiness in bark infusions and presumably in tanning liq»iors. Three poimds
of acetate of soda to 1,000 gallons of the water used in making the extract will -
prevent the development of ropiness.

So far as the nitrogenous food is concerned, it did not seem to matter much
wnetber meat-extract, peptone, asparagin or ammonium sulphate was used.
Nitrates in alkaline solution will also serve, but in the presence of acid or what
comes to the same thing, in the presence of sugar, they prohibit growth.

The ropy substance itself is a galactan, and by the hydrolytie action of sul-
phuric acid is converted to galactose. The insoluble slime swells u]i enormously
with water, and in common with most insoluble gums, can be liquefied by heat-
ing under pressure in contact with a small quantity of sulphuric acid (-\-5°).

Certain l)y-producfs are formed l)y the bacteria when growing in solutions of
dextrose and saccharose in the presence of chalk. These consist of ethyl alcohol,
succinic acid, a mixture of fatty acids, all in small amounts, and acetic and fer-
mentation lactic acids. The lactic acid preponderates. In addition to these,
which are formed by both bacteria, Bacterinm B produces paralactic acid.

Other differences between the bacteria A and B are that B does not seem to
Ite able to utilise glycerin, and its insohible phase, as compared with A. is verv
stable .

88 nOPINESS IX WATTLE BARK INFUSIONS,

SUMSIARY.

Two closely allied bacteria were isolated from ropj' infusions of wattle bark.
Tbey caused the mucinous fermentation of bark infusions and of synthetic media
containing sugar.

Fresh infusions, of Sp.G., 1.024 and less, were made ropy by A, and of 1.048
and less, Ijy B.

The bacteria exist in two phases which can bo altered at will. One jiroduces
a soluble slime, the other an insoluble mucus. The rojiiness Ls produced chiefly
by the insoluble phases.

The utilisal)le sugars are galactose, levulose, saccharose and dextrose, the
non-sugars are mannit and glycerin.

The sources of nitrogen include meat-extract, peptone, asparagin. ammonium
sulphate, and potassium nitrate in alkaline solution.

The saline constituents have little influence in presence of sufficient sugar.

A slight acidity favours the production of ropincss, the optimum ranging
from -|- 8° to -|- 12°. The optimum amount of tannic acid runs from 0.75 % to
1 %. The limiting amounts are -|-30° and 2 % of tannic acid.

The mucus is a galactan, and is hydrolysed to galactose.

The by-prodiK'ts from sugar are chiefly inactive lactic and acetic acids. Ethyl
alcohol, succinic acid and a mixture of non-volatile fatty acids are produced in
small amounts. In addition to these, bacterium B produces paralaetic acid.

I have to thank Mr. F. A. Coombs for information regarding the iise of
wattle-bark and for obtaining the opinions of some tanners upon the occurrence
of ropiness. I am also indebted to Mr. "W. W. L'Estrange for nnicli valuable
assistance given during the course of the investigation.

Appendix: — Opinions tijj(i)i I!op>)iess.

Mr. F. A. Coombs, Lecturer upon Tanning in the Sydney Technical College,
circularised a number of master tanners asking their experieuee regarding the
occurrence of ropiness in wattle bark liquors, and the replies are thus summarised.

Kopiness does occur in wattle bark liquors, but as to its frequency in barks
from particular places or from young or old trees no inforin%tion could be ob-
tained.

It occurs in liquoi-s prepared from immature or freshly-stripped liark.

It is met with most frequently during the Summer months, January, Febru-
ary, and March, but may also occur in the Spring.

Ropiness may develop in weak or .strong liquors.

If the liquors stand for a fairly long time without handling they may become
ro|iy.

It may not be attributed to the constant use of spent colouring li(|uors, but
this presumes that they have been treated in some way. One tanner was definite
in stating that the trouble starts with the use of weak colouring liquors that
ought to be run away, and added tliat ixissibly some fanners, wlien strengthening
the six'nt li(|uor.'., let the bark ferment.

Kopiness occurs in liquoi-s other than wattle-bark li(|Uors.

The weak or sjjent liquors, when not run away, are either steamed, boiled, or
treated with disinfectant, and in these ways tlio development of ropiness in the
liquors is prevented.

BY R. GRBIG-SMITH. 89

EXPLAN'ATiON OF PLATE IX.

Colonies growing on the surface of Nutrient Agar.

1.— Cobny of Al.

2. — Colonies of Al and A2a growing side by side. The almost homogeneous

character of Al and the cog-wheel structure of A2a are brought out.
3. — Colony of A2. This was a specially translucent colony. They are generally

opaque, except at the margm.
4,- — Colonies of B2. Thickly sown colonies, showing the ivy-leaf structure.
5. — Colony of B2. Mature colony, showing the r.nesenteric structure.
6. — Ropy Bark infusion, flowing siphon-wise.

(Photographed by Mr. W. W. L'Estrange.)

90

AUSTHALiAX SYLLIDAE. /■:CS) J.I.I OAl-J AXi!) AUIOLYTIUAE.
llv W. A. Haswki.l, yi.X.. D.Si'.. I'Mi.S.. K.mkritus Professou oi' liioLOuv,

UnIVKRSITV (II- SvilXEY.

(Witii i'hilcs x.-xiii.)

INTHdHrcTIOX.

This paper deals with the faiuilies Sjiiliiluc, EuaiiUidac and Aulolijtidac of
the section Syllidea (Polychaeta Phanerocephala), and is to some extent a con-
tinuation of one on the Exoc/onea recently* published. Unlike the latter, how-
ever, it is entirely systematic and descriptive, structural and developmental jjoints
bein": reserved for separate treatment. The material consists almost exclusi\-ely of
specimens collected by the author al)out low-water mark in Port Jackson atul
examined in the living condition in the Hrst instance. The types of the species
described as new have been deposited in the Australian Museum.

In 1885 I published descriptions of six uieml)ers of the family Si/llidar I'ound
in Port Jackson. The original specimens jiave been lost, but the identity of Ave
of the six species is definitely determined as a result of Aus^-ener's study of the
Polychaeta collected by the Ilamburj;' Expedition to South-western Australia (1),
together witli the present contribution. There remains in doubt Giiutliosi/llis
sonata niihi. This was founded on a solitary specinuni obtained with the dredge.
There are indications that Auyener's identification with this of a TjipoiiiiUis in liis
collection is incorrect.

The general classification here followed is that ol' IMalaquin, and, witliin the
extensive genus StiUh. the division into sul)-gcnera proposed by Langerlians and
followed by various recent writers (De Saint-. Joseph, Gravier, Augener) lias l)een
adopted .

1 have found some dilficulty in dealing with the uenus PidimsiiUis. Mahn-
gren's original diagnosis (41, p. 3i)) comprises the following points — a single
pharyngeal tootli; compound setae with long slender bidentate appendages; capil-
lary setae on I lie middle and posterior segments; other characters as in St/llis.
The type species, P. compacta, has '"palpi ilistantes,"' "tentacula indistincte arti-
culata" and "cirri dorsuales vix articulali."

In the classification of the S/iUidca clalxirated by Langerlians (3f)). Piono-
syllis is characterised as having the palpi not fused, the tentacles and dorsal cirri
not articulated, and as having the |iliarynx aniicd with a single tooth which is
situated anteriorly.

In Malaquin's scheme (-10). I'iniKisiillis is grouped among the EunyUidae—
Syllidea possessing ventral cirri, having the jialpi fused at the base only, the
tentacles and dorsal cirri indistinctly articulated, and reproducing only directly
without schizogainy. From the other geiicia of that family it is distinguished by
the single, anterior \ pharyngeal tooth.

,Joiu\ Linn. Soo. Lond., xxiv., No. 227.

BV W. A. HASWELL.

91

The following suggi'steil iliaguosis of Plo)iosyUis assuiiios that the type species,
P. compacta, has tlie palpi united at the base.

Syllidea witli ventral cirri, the palpi luiiteil at the bases only, tlie tentacles
ami cirri devoid of segmentation or incompletely segmented, tl'e compound setae
bidentate. The pharynx with a single tooth situated anteriorly; no schizogamy,
This would exclu<le species such as iSi/llix e.iili.'i Gra\ier, S. m((croceras Grube,
-S'. hyaUiia Grube, ,S'. moniliformis Savigny, and a nuni))er of otliers, which ap-
proach Pionosyllis in having the palpi fused at the base, or the tentacles imper-
fectly segmented or in the union of both of these cliaracters, if reproduction
is accompanied by scliizogamy.

Family SYLI.IDAK.

Genus S v i, i. i s Savigny.

Sub-genus Ttpostllis Langerhans.

Syllis (Typosvllis) VARiKiiATA Orube. (Plate X.. tigs. 1 and 2).

Sijllis variegata, Grube, (19), p. 85, Taf. 3, fig. ti.

Syllis hexayoHiferti, Claparede, (5), p. 73, PI. 5, tig. 2.

? Thoe fu^iiformis, Kinberg, (31), p. 249.

? Thoe fusiformis, Kinberg, (32), p. til. Tab. 51, flg. 4-8.

Syllis nigropimetutu, Haswell, (25), ]). 12, PI. .52, flg-s. 1-3.

t<yllis compacta, Gravier, (16), p. lt)5, PI. 9, fig. 11.

Syllis (TyposylUs) rarieyata, Gravier, (10), p. 158, tigs. 24 to 27, PI. 9. tig. 8.

Syllis {TyposylUs) variegata, De St. Joseph, (48). p. 22 (146).

Syllis variegata, Marenzeller, (42), 2 Beitrag, p. 19, PI. 2, fig. 2.

Syllis variegata, Langerhans, (36), p. 532.

Syllis variegata, Marion et Bobretzky, (45), ]). 22.

Syllis [TyposylUs) variegula, Augener, (1), ]). 190.

Syllis closterobranchia var., Ehlere, (10), 1, p. 20, Taf. 3, flg. 1-4.

Syllis (TyposylUs) variegata is the commonest species of Syllis in Port .Jack-
son, and in some situations, as among the roots of oar-weeds (Eklonia), it is ex-
tremely abundant, by far the most numerous of the larger Polychaeta. It also
occure in Poit Stephens. It gTows to a large size, being often two or even
three cm. in length in the living, fully-extended condition; but coidiacts to al)out
half its length when fixed by any of the ordinary methods.*

Such large specimens, and the majority of the smaller ones, are readily
recognisable owing to the very characteristic ])attern of the pigment on tlie dorsal
sui-face. The main feature of this pattern wliich was figured liroadly by Maren-
zeller (42), is the arrangement of black or brown pigment on the dorsal surface of
each segment, in snch a way as to leave two, somewhat irregular, transversely
elongated, colourless spaces (spectacle pattern) . This pigment pattern is most
pronounced in front, the pigment fading away towards the posterior end. An
almost invariable featui'e, so far as the Sydney specimens arc concerned, is the
alternation of darker and lighter segments, the latter always being the segments
bearing the larger, dorsally directed pairs of cirri, the more ventrally directed
shorter pairs which alternate with them being borne on the darker segments , f

' By pourinsj over well-extended live speeiuiens. water warmed to 70°C. iiiniu-diate
paraly.sis is produced and fixation can be effected with little contraction.

+ This arrangenii'ut is most protialily connected witli the exceptional seu.'<iti\enes.s to
hright light shown liy this species.

92 AUSTRALIAN SYLLIDAE^ EUSYLLIUAE AND ArTOIATIUAE,

CompaiativL'l}- rare are specimens in which, though the dorsal surface is
darkly pigmented, it wants the characteristic pattern described aI)o\e, the pigment
being disposed in transverse bands, lr\vo on each segment; here too there is an
alternation of darker and lighter segments with the alternation of the shorter
and longer cirri.

^lany of the smaller specimens however, are devoid of the dark pigment.
Many of these have a light red colour due to the presence of diffused particles
of red pigment, some are gTeenish, others orange or yellow.

Apart from markings and colouration, the following points seem to be dis-
tinctive of a. varieyata: —

Palpi in the living animal elongated, lo-iger than the prostomiuni, their inner
edges in contact at the base for about a fourtli of their length, narrowing distally
with rounded ends, with a deep hollow on the inner part of the ventral surface.
Tentacles and cirri elongated, with numerous well-defined segments filled with
twisted unicellular (vermiculate) glands. Dorsal cirri alternately longer and
shorter, with from twenty to thirty-five segments. The anal cirri are simOar to
the dorsal : between them is a median narrow process .

As in other species of Si/llis, the i:iara podium, when viewed from above or
below, though not deeply cleft, appears divided into two lobes at the end. In
anterior or posterior view these lobes are found to represent broad vertical Haps,
anterior and posterior. Close to the latter on its dorsal side are the points of
the acicula; between the flaps or lobes is the irregular surface through which Ihe
s?tao protrude.

The compound setae (Plate x., fig. 1) 8 (o 12 in number in each parapodium,
are of uniform character throughout; they all have the appendage (falx) straight,
bidentate terminally, and with a strong fringe of some 20 pieces along the cutting
edge of the blade.

The length of the falx is greater in the setae of the anterior region of the
body than in those of the segments behind, but the difference is not great, and the
transition from one form to the other is very gradual.

As pointed out by Augener, each parapodium in the extreme posteiior region
has, as in most species of SylUs, a simple seta in addition to tht compound. This,
which is always dorsal to all the latter, is in ,s'. var'ieguta of the gently curved, ter-
minally bidentate type which is the commonest foim of these simple setae in tlie
majority of the sijecies of Syllis which 1 have seen. The acicuhi (Plate x., tig. 2)
arc fairly characteristic. Usually there are three in each parapodium; hut
sometimes there are four or five. When three are present one — the most anterior
and ventral — is almost always very slightly l;ent at the end, and slightly knobbed ;
the other two, which are very stout, are straight to the end and olrfusely or
acutely pointed.

The position o! the parts of tlie i)roboscis in the usual iTlraclcd state is
usuiiUy regarded as important in the diagnosis of -the species of Si/llis: it is
fairly constant in the individuals of a species, but is subject to some modification
owing to the occasional occurrence of states of incomplete retraction . More im-
portant is the loifjih of the pharynx and jnoventriculus in terms of the number
of segments through wliich each runs. Within a limited range of variation this
appears to be constant for each species — except in (h<' coiniinvntivcly rare in-
^tanees of regeneration.

In S. variegata both iiharynx and iirovciitiicuhis arc comparatively long, each
running througli eight. Iwolvc oi- fourteen segments.

BY W. A. HASWELL. 93

Syllis (TyposYLLis) PECTiNAN'.s, 11 . sp . (Plate X., tig. 3-6).

AVIic'u alive and fully extended this is a slender, almost thread-like worm,
measuring, in the case of the larger specimens, about 1.5 to 2 cm. in length. The
colour varies considerably, the differences being due mainly to differences in the
colour of the intestine as described below. The body-wall may be transparent and
colourless, but usually there are widely-diffused minute particles of reddish-brown
pigment, most abundant in the dorsal integument in the anterior region, where,
in some cases, they tend here and there to become arranged m very irregular
transverse lines stronger towards the anterior and posterior limits of the segment.
The pigment may be scattered also through the tentacles, palpi and cirri, but
sometimes these appendages are completely colourless.

The tentacles and cirri contain numerous sausage-shaped glands which are
usually extremely bright and conspicuous in the living animal. Sensory cilia are
abundant on the tentacles, palpi and dorsal cirri, less abundant on the ventral
cirri. Vibratile cilia run along the sides of the segments between the parapodia.

The prostomium is broader than long, elliptical in general outline. The pig-
ment which it usually bears dorsally, is irregularly distributed. The eyes are
always comparatively small, and a frontal pair is rarely present. The palpi are
entirely separate, though in close contact in their basal portions. The median
tentacle is the longest — about five times the length of the prostomium, with about
35 well-defined joints; the lateral about thrice the lengfh of the prostomium, with
about 25 joints.

The peristomium appears on the dorsal surface for a narrow space only.
The dorsal peristomial tentacles are about equal in length to the median, and have
about the same number of joints; the ventral are a little shorter.

There are about 60-70 segments in the body before stolonisation begins.

The parapodia (Plate x., fig. 4) are not very prominent, less than half the
breadth of the body, slightly bilobed, the anterior lobe much the more prominent.
Each contains about 10 or 12 compound setae (Plate x., fig. 5) which vary little
in character throughout. Their falces are all relatively short, unidentate, with a
fringe of unusually strong, pointed processes along the cutting edge, those to-
wards the apex becoming very rudimentary. There is a simple seta (Plate x.,
fig. 6) on the dorsal side of the compound in all the posterior parapodia: in a
specimen of 67 segments without definite stolonisation these begin on the 26th
segment, and are continued to the posterior end ; in a female specimen of about
60 segments with a stolon, they begin four segments in front of the stolon (on
the 40th segment) ; in another similar specimen they begin nine segments in front
of the stolon. They are similar to the simple setae of ,9. variegata — gently curved
towards the free end, pointed, obscurely bidentate, and with four or five cilia on
the concave edge of the terminal curved region. In three or four of the last
segments a simple bidentate seta occurs on the ventral side of the bundle of com-
pound setae : this is finer and shorter than the dorsal simple seta, and does not
seem to be always present.

In specimens with mature stolons, bundles of capillary setae occur on all
the segments of the stolon; when fully developed these are twice or thrice the
length of the compound setae.

There are four acicula (Plate x., fig. 4) in each of the most anterior para-
podia, three or two in the rest; all are knobbed at the ends with the knob usually
sharply bent, but towards the dorsal side, so that the bend is not readily per-
ceptible.

94 AUSIRALIAN SYLLIDAE, EUSyl-MDAK AND ACTOLYTIDAE.

Of tiie tlorsal cirri there is an alteniation oJ' longer and sliortcr. tin- longer
in the anteiior region more than twice as long as the breadtli of the body, and
composed of about forty segments. Tlie ventral cirri are short, not extending
as far as the ends of the parapodia. The anal cirri are similar to the larger
dorsal; between them is a well-dexclopcd, narrow median process.

The pharynx, -which is brownisii or reddish, extends as far as the 9th seg-
ment. An important feature is that the tooth is situated some little distance be-
hind tlie anterior mai'gin of the pharynx (Plate x., fig. 3) . The proventriculus
is rather variable, lying in the lOth to 14th or 15th or 9th to 14th or 10th to 18th
segments — five to eight segments. Brown pigment runs in the raphes and the
annular bands of non-striated muscles, of wliich there arc about 35. The vcntri-
culus, light Ijrown or red in colour, has the usual T-shaped caeca, tlie anterior branch
the larger. The intestine is deeply constricted, usually of a dark grciii colour,
or yellow or orange mixed with green, or orange throughout.

In ripe females, the ovaries, purple in colour, are developed from about the
30tli to the 40th segments, l)ackwards — the stohm, of about "20 to 25 segments,
beginning about the 40th or 50th. In the nuile, the ripe stolon is of a bright
red, pink or scarlet colour, and consists of about 20 segments witli dilated nei>,hridia
packed with sperms in roiuidetl groups.

T. pectinans occurs veiy abundantly between tide-marks in Port Jackson,
and is particularly numerous among the tulics ol' the common Sorpulid. Cideolaria
hystrlx.

Relying on Langerhans's account (30, ]>. 5.'30, Taf. 31, fig. 3) of the species
wliich he identified with S. prolij'era Krohn, I was at first indmed to regard the
form above described as referable to that species. One of the chief reasons for
thi.i view was the exceptional position in both of the pharyngeal tooth. A care-
ful comparison showed, however, that such a determination could not be main-
tained. Langerhans refers to the compound setae in 5. prnlifera as "bidentate"
without any qualification. jMoreocer, .V. armutidi, wliich Langerhans regards as
identical, is described liy Claparede (5, p. 70) as having setae with bidentate
appendages; and the same holds good of .v. lussincnsis Grubo (20, p. 40). also
regarded by Langerhans as synonymous with the sai\ie species.* Mcintosh's
figures (39) of the coiniiound setae in ,s'. (Pioiios/iUis) prolifera also all represent
them as strongly bidentate. On the whole the evidence .seems to be in favour
of the conclusion that the Australian sjiecies is a hitherto undescribed s])ecies of
T/iposi/His, characterised by llic combination of two unusual characters — the back-
ward position of the tooth and the ]>i('sciic(' of unidcntate compound setae.

Svi.i.is (Ti-posVLLis) TitcxcATA. n.s|i. (Plate x., Iig;. 7-14.)

Tliis, like 7'. jiecHindis, is a slender eloiigafcd Si/lli^, wliicli. when alive and
fully extended, becomes a narrow thread. There are over a hundred segments
(110-120) in a I'ldl-grown siiecinien . The general colour is reddish Avithout
definite markings, darkened behind liy the intestine. The length is from 1 to 2
cm. The tentacles and dorsal cirri are full of twisted (vermionlate) unicellular
glands similar to those of S. rnrinidla.

•Langerhans regards S.fiuvieiisis of Elders i»« also identical with .s'. firoliffnt : if
that view bo woll-finmilcil. Ehlers's figure (fi, Taf. ix.. fig. 4) of a coinpoiinil seta must he
incorrect .

BV W. A. IIASWELL.

95

The prostoiiiium is nearly twice as Ijioad as Jong, with four very small eyes.
The median tentacle is about thrice the length of the ijrostomium. with about 25
joints; the lateral a little shorter, with about 17 joints. The palpi are ovate, veiy
little narrower at the apex, with the inner edges, in close contact with one another
at the base Init not fused, diverging very slightly distally.

The dorsal peristomial tentacle is nearly as long as the median, with about
18 joints; the ventral a little shorter.

The parapodia are relatively long; nearly half the breadth of the body in
length, and in general outline resemble those of ,S'. pectinans. Each has about
8-10 compound setae. These (Plate x., figs. 8 and 9) are all of the same type,
the only ditt'erence between them being a gradual reduction in length of the falx
from the dorsal to the ventral side; all are bidentate with a small secondary
tooth and a row of tine cilia along the cutting edge. A simple seta ( Plate x.,
fig. 10) lies on the dorsal side of the compound seta in a variable number of the
most posterior segments. It differs from the simple setae of S. variegata and
S. pectinans in being truncate. A shorter, simple, pointed seta lies on the ven-
tral side in the last two or three segments. There is sometimes a single aciculum
in each parapodium, sometimes two or three: they are sharply bent forwards at
the ends. (Plate x., figs. 11-14. )

The dorsal cirri are long and thick, the first being the longest, with about 28
segments. The rest are alternately longer and shorter, the longer (about 25
joints) longer than the breadth of the body, the shorter (about 17 joints) about
e(iual to it. The ventral cirri scarcely reach as far as the ends of the parapodia.
The anal cirri have about 16 joints. There is a narrow median process between
them as in S. pectinans.

The pharynx is red in colour. When the proboscis is fully drawn back it is
long and narrow, extending from the fourth segment, in which the tooth is situ-
ated, to tlie thirteenth. The proventriculus is relatively short, extending through
only about four to six segments.

Syllis tricncata has been found in Port Stephens as well as Port .Jackson.

Many specimens of S. truncata bear either one or two white spots on the
dorsal surface over the proventriculus or its junction with the intestine. When
two are present they may occur on the 16th and 17th or on the 17th and 18th
segments ; when one only occurs it is usually found on the 18th segment . These
white bodies lie in the substance of the dorsal body-wall between the ejiidermis
and the muscular layers, and extend across a considerable part of the breadth
of the segment. Contained in each are a large number of rounded masses of an
average diameter of about .05 mm., each made up of innumerable minute cor-
puscles of an approximate diameter of 0.002 mm.

That these bodies are encysted Sporozoa appears to admit of little doubt .
The constancy of their position would appear to be accounted for by the position
of the ventriculus and caeca^ — the walls of the latter being comparatively tliin and
easily traversed by the trophozoite in its migration outwards from the lumen of
the alimentary canal.

In liis description of the Polycliaeta of the Canaries Langerlians (35) gives
an account of a species of Ti/posi/llis, which he calls T. pulvinata, characterised
by the presence of cushion-like elevations of the dorsal surface of the 18th, 19th,
and 20th segments. There can be little doubt that in this species the swellings
are due to the same cause as in T. truncata. T. pulvinata is described as having

96 AUSTRALIAN SYLLIDAE, KUSYLLIDAE AND AUTOLYTIDAE^

the setae distinctly iinidentate, and tlius aijpoars to differ in a definite way from
2". truncata.

Syllis (Ttposyllis) punctulata, u.sp. (Plate xi., figs. 1-lG.)

The length of this very well-marked species is about 1 cm. and the breadth
.75 mm. There are about 70 segments in all. The prevailing colour of the
dorsal surface is dark red, usually lighter behind, with innumerable minute colour-
less dots marking the position of integumentary glands. The prostomium and
peristomium are much lighter than the body, of a bright orange, the prostomium
with an irregular pattern of a darker colour concentrated in front in the position
in which frontal eyes usually occur. Vibratile cilia occur on the sides of the
segments between the parapodia.

The prostomium (Plate xi., tig. 1) is broader than long; the presence of
frontal eyes is inconstant : the ordinary eyes are rather small, the posterior neaier
together than the anterior. The palpi are divergent from the base, slightly nar-
rowed distally, longer than the prostomium. The median tentacle is more than
twice the length of the prostomium, of about 20 to 30 segments; the lateral ten-
tacles are twice the length of the prostomium, of about 12 to 20 segments. Of
the peristomial tentacles the dorsal, which is slightly the longer, is of about the
same length as the median. All the tentacles are very distinctly segmented, as
are also the dorsal and anal cirri.

The parapodia (Plate xi., fig 2) are not deeply divided. There are 10-12
compound setae (figs. 3 and 4), all of one type, with bidentate falces, which are
slightly longer in proportion in the more anterior segments. There are two
simple setae in all the posterior parapodia. One of these (figs. 5 to 10) is
dorsai to the compound setae : it first appears about the twenty-eighth segment
and continues to the posterior end; it is obscurely bidentate; the other (fig. 11)
which occurs only on the last few segments, is ventral to the compound setae and
is very strongly bidentate, its extremity closely corresponding to the end of the
appendage of one of the compound setae. The acicula (figs. 12-16). of which
there are three or four in each parapodium, vary a little in shape, but one (the
most anterior, (figs. 12 and 13) is always strongly bent forwards at the end, and
another (fig. 16) symmetricallj- pointed.

The dorsal cirri are very distinctly articulated. The first are the longest, as
long as the median tentacles, with about 25 to 35 segments. The remainder are
shorter than the breadth of the segments and contain 18 to 35 segments: there is
no regular alternation. The ventral cirri are short, not extending beyond the
ends of the parapodia. The anal cirri are of about the same length as the aver-
age dorsal. The pharyngeal tooth is not quite anterior. The pharynx extends
to the 7th segment; the proventriculus lies in the 8th to the 13th.

One specimen has a buff-colouri'd female stolon; the ova extend forwards
several seguicnts in front of the head of the stolon.

S. piiiictulnta occurs about the liases of Algae growing on rocks about low-
water mai-k in Port .Jackson and P.o(nny Pay.

SVI.I.IS (TVPOSVLLIS) Ci.OSTEROBRAXC'lIIA Schuiiivda.

Syllis closlerohranchla, Sclnnarda. (40). 2 Tlieil, p. 72.

Siillis clnsterobraiichia, Ehlers (10), I., p. 19. Taf. iii., fig. 1-4.

St/llis (Ti/po.'iiillis) dosterohranchiii, Augener. (1). ii. 201. Text-fig. 23.

(For some additional synonyms, see Augener.)

BY W. A. HASWELL. 97

Ehlcrs ill 1904 identified specimeiis of a iSyllis received from New Zealand
with Schmarda's ^'. cloaterobranchia, the types of which (from S. Africa) he had
the opportunity of examining.

Augener found specimens in the collection from S.W. Australia, and gives
some additional particulars. The species thus defined is quite common a little
below low-water mark in Port Jackson. The largest specimens measure 4 cm.
in length and 1.5 mm. in breadth.

A simple, pointed seta, obscurely bidentate, is present on the dorsal r-ide of
the compound setae in the last nine or ten parapodia, disappearing at the point
where the characteristic thick, "pseudoypsiloid," compound setae begin to make
their appearance. A very similar simple seta lies on the ventral side in a few
of the terminal segments.

In a male specimen of 147 segments, the segments are filled with sperms from
the 120th backwards, but there is no definite indication of a stolon. Another
specimen of 95 segments had no sign of gonads.

Syllis (Typosyllis) gracilis Gravier. (Plate x., fig. 15.)

Syllis gracilis, Gravier, (16), p. 150, PI. 9, figs. 4-6.

(?) Syllis longissima, Gravier, I.C., p. 154.

Syllis (Typosyllis) gracilis, Augener (1), p. 206.

For further synonymy, see Langerhans (36) and Mcintosh (39) .

This widely-distributed form, found by Augener in the Hamburg collections
froiii South-west Australia, occurs frequently among Algae etc. brought ap from
below low-water mark in Port Jackson.

Dorsal simple setae, pointed and obscurely bidentate like the corresponding
.=ietae in /S*. closterobranchia, occur on a few of the last segments. The acicula
(Plate X., fig. 15) are peculiar, each having a slight rounded terminal enlarge-
ment from which a peg-like process projects obliquely.

Syllis (Typosyllis) parturiexs, n.sp. (Plate xi., figs. 17, 18.)

This small Syllis, of which I have only obtained a single specimen, differs
from all the other members of the group, with the exception of S. vivipara, in
being viviparous.

It is only 4-5 mm. in lengfh, and colourless but for a mottling of bluish green
in the epithelium of the middle part of the intestine. There are 32 segments.
The prostomium is slightly broader than long, and bears four very small eyes
in addition to a minute frontal pair. The palpi are about equal in length to
the prostomium; they are sub-conical, divergent from near the base, where they
are in contact for a short distance. The median prostomial tentacle is about six
times the length of the prostomium, and lias about 35 segments; the lateral about
four times. The dorsal peristomial tentacle is much longer than the ventral,
nearly as long as the median prostomial. All the tentacles, with the dorsal cirri,
are very distinctly segmented. The parapodia are not deeply divided. Each
bears about 10 compound setae with bidentate falces. In a few of the last seg-
ments there is a single simple seta on the dorsal side of each parapodium. There
is a single aciculum which is slightly enlarged and slightly oblique at the end.

The dorsal cirri are alternately longer and shorter, the longer containing
about 35 segments, and their length much exceeding the breadth of the body.
The ventral cirri are slender, and scarcely extend as far as the extremity of the
parapodia. The anal cirri resemble the longer dorsal.

98 ^U.STKALIAS' SYLI.IDAK, Kl'SYLLIDAE AND At'TOIATIDAE,

The pharynx extends tu the 5th segment, the pro\eutiiculus to the 9th.

There are two advaiu-eil embryos, one in the 14th ami the other in the loth
segment. In the l'2th and 13th segments there is a single ovum on either side.

Hitherto, as already stated, Hyllis viiipara Ivrohn has been the only vivi-
parous Syllid known.* From that species the jiresent form differs in the b.den-
tate fharaeter of the compound setae, as well as in the piesenee of frc>ntal eyes
and the greater lengfh of the dorsal cirri.

Though it seems probable that .s'. partiirieiis is hermaphrouite, and that te.stes
are present in most of the segments, the specimen does not afford conclusive evi-
dence of this.

SVLLIS (TyPOSYLLIS) AUCiEXKRl, U.SJl. ( Phitc xi.. tigs. 1!) to 22.)

Syllis (Typosi/Uis) kinhei(jiaiia Haswell. Augeiiei-, (1). |>. 197, Text-fig. 22.
Taf. iii., tig. 38.

Si/Uis (Typosi/Uis) Kinberyiaiia Haswell, Fauvel, (13), p. 194.

The species of iSyllis which Augener described under the name of S.
kinbergiana Haswell, while expressing some doubts as to the correctness of the
determination, is not very rare in Port Jackson, and. as it appears to be unnamed,
I have given it the above name. Augener's -wrong' determination is doubtless
partly due to my having given insufficient data; but theii- are at least two points
given in my original account which are entirely inconi])atible with Augener's eou-
elusiou — viz the very indistinctl.v articulated cirri and the transverse intraseg-
mental lines. Augener's description is verj' ade(]uatc. juid I will merely add the
following brief notes : —

There are frecjueutly no markings, but sometimes theie is a pair of grey
transverse lines on the doreal surface of each segment in the anterior region.
Frontal eyes are present in most if not all cases, but they are sometimes repre-
sented by minute dots which may not be symmetrically placed.

The ordinary compound setae resemble those of ^■. variegata in shape, but the
fringe of processes along the cutting edge of the fals is less developed. These
are the only compound setae in the posterior region. But in the anterior and
middle regions the two most dorsally placed in each parapodium (Plate xi., fig.
20) have the appendage relatively long and narrow — longer and narrower than
is represented in Augenei-'s fig. 22a. The obscurely bidentate simple setae of
the posterior region which are similar to those of 6'. variegata, may extend for-
wards as far as about the 20th segment from the anterior end. The acicula (figs.
21 and 22) are one to four; when there are two, the more anterior (fig. 21) is
very slightly bent fonvard at the end, with an oblique terminal (posterior) face
which is slightly concave: the more posterior (fig. 22) nearly symmetrically point-
ed. When only one aeiculum is present it is of the former typo: when there are
three or four, two or three are of the latter.

Syllis (Typosyllis) KtSBERGiANA Haswell. (Plate xi., figs. 2.3-27: IMate xii.,

figs. 1 and 2 ) .

Syllis kinbergiana, Haswell, (25), p. 7, PI. 51, figs. 1-3.

Nnti Syllis (Tyjjosyllis) kivherc/iana Ilasw.. Auircner. (1). ]>. 107, Taf. iii.,
fig. 38, Text-fig. 22 a-c.

Nee Syllis {Typosyllis) kinbergiana, Fauvel, (IS), ji. 194.

• See Goodrich (14), and Potts (47).

BY ^•. A. HASWELL. 99

In the living- condition the eolouring of thi.s species renders it readily capable
of recognition. In preserved specimens in which the colour is lost, the most
striking features are: — (1) the presence in the anterior region of the body of an
impressed line or narrow groove running transversely across the dorsal surface of
each segment; (2) the deeply bi-lobed character of the parapodia; (3) the imper-
fect segmentation of the dorsal cirri.

In the living condition the body is greenish-yellow or light yellow with
greenish transverse lines. On the doi-sal surface just behind the head is a patch
of white, and on each segment is a pair of very light yellowish- or greenish-white
dots. The head and the palpi are red, the eyes crimson.

The length of the largest specimens is 6 cm., the breadth in the uncontracted
state only 2-3 mm. In all the anterior part of the body, as far back as the be-
ginning <.)f the intestine, are tlie transversa grooves above refen-ed to, appearing
in contracted specimens as notches in the lateral edges of the segments (Plate
sdi., flg. 1).

Sensory cilia are present on the tentacles and cirri and the ends of the
palpi . Vibratile cilia occur on the palpi and on the sides of the segments. The
■whole integument is full of small oval glands.

The peristomium is bilobed, the lobes ,-ounded on the dorsal aspect. The
eyes are rather small, the posterior much the smaller. The palpi are twice the
length of the prostomium when fully extended; they are fused together at the
base for a short distance. The prostomial tentacles are usually sub-equal, a
little longer than the palpi, segmented, but not very distinctly.

The parapodia (Plate sii., fig. 2) are very deeply divided into anterior and
posterior lobes. There are about 20 compound setae (Plate xi., figs. 23 to 26),
all with long and rather narrow falees which are bidentate and have extremely
minute teeth along the cutting eclge. On the posterior segments there is a very
tine, truncate, simple seta on each parapodium dorsal to the compound setae.
Theie are two, sometimes three, acieula of which one, the most anterior (tig. 27),
is sharply bent foi-wards at the end and the others are obliquely truncate or
obliquely pointed. No capillary setae have been seen. The dorsal cirri are
rather short, very imperfectly segmented.

The pharynx runs through only three to six segments, the proventriculus
usually only through three or four.

Stilis (Typosyllis) coru.scans Haswell. (Plate xi., figs. 28-31).

Syllis corruscans, Haswell, (25), p. 734, PL 1., fig. 1-3. and Iv., fig. 5.

? Syllis corruscans Hasw., Augener, (1), p. 208.

This is the largest of the Australian Syllids, attaining a lengih of as much as
14 em. with a maximum breadth of about 5 mm. There are 150 to 200 segments.
The colour of the dorsal surface is usually dark green, sometimes dark brown;
that of the ventral surface and of the parapodia and cirri light red or orange.
The prostomium is bright crimson. On the dorsal surface of the peristomium ap-
pears a bright green spot or band.

The integ-umentary glands are so arranged and developed as to give a corru-
gated appearance to the darkly-pigmented dorsal surface, the eoiTugations being
sometimes arranged in transverse rows, two or three on each segment with narrow
furrows between.

The breadth of the prostomium is nearly twice the length. It becomes partly
withdrawn under the prostomium when the animal is touched or irritated. The

100 AUSTRALIAN SYLLIDAE, EUSYLI.IDAK AND At'TOI-YTIDAE,

palpi are broad at the l)ase, fused with oue another lor a shoi't distance,
longer thau the prostomium, usuaUy directed downwards, hollowed out lielow
and internally. The eyes are rather small, those of the anterior pair larger
and wider apart than those of the posterior. The three prostomial tentacles are
feubequal, a little longer than the palpi, indistinctly segmented or entirely unseg-
mented. The peristomial tentacles which are also indistinctly ringed, are subei|iial,
the dorsal a little longer than the ventral, shorter than the prostomial.

The parapodia are relatively short. Each bears 15 to 20 compound setae.
These (Plate xi., figs. 29-31) are all of the same essential character, with bideatate
falces, but the most dorsally situated (fig. 29) have the falces long and slender,
a gradual transition taking place towards the most ventral setae which have the
falces short and comparatively broad. In a few of the most posterior segments
tliere are also simple setae — one dorsal to the comi^ound setae of each jjarapodium.
slender and hair-like, the other ventral, very short, terminating like the compound
setae but without the articulation. There are 5 to 7 or more pointed acicula in
each parapodium, one sharply bent forwards at the end. The dorsal cirri are
alternately longer and shorter, about equal in length to the breadth of the body,
not very distinctly segmented, smooth and unsegmented at the base, indistinctly
segmented towards the apex.

In the original description I stated that in this species male stolons are given
off from a female stock. In my more recent notes I can find no confirmation of
this. Female stolons are very rare, but they occur. In the case of the female,
as in that of the male, stolon, sexual elements similar to those in the stolon occur
also, as in other species of Syllis, in the posterior region of the stock. It may
be that in certain circumstances, or at certain seasons, the formation of a female
stolon may so rapidly follow that of a male that the posterior region of the stock
contains well formed ova before the male zooid becomes detached. But I have
been unable to find any such case among recently examined specimens, which all
show evidence of normal schizogamy without hermaphroditism.*

S. eoruscans is far from being a typical Syllis. Structurally, in fact, it is
closely connected with various species of Eusyllis, and it might quite well be
described as a Eusyllis which i-eproduces with schizogamy. Apart from the super-
ficial features of connection between the palpi at theu- bases and imperfect seg-
mentation of the tentacles and dorsal cirri, S. eoruscans is Eusyllis-M^n in having
the rim of the cuticle of the pharynx ocea-sionally divided in an iiTegular way into
a number of lobes, which can hardly be termed teeth. t Moreover the arrangement
of the radial muscles of the wall of the pro vent riculus corresponds completely
with that which characterises Eusyllis, and differs from that which occurs gener-
ally, if not universally, in typical sjiecies of Syllis.

Sub-geniis Haplosyllis Langerhans.

Syli.is (Haplosyllis) spoxgicola Grube.

Syllis sponyicola, Grube, (18), p. 104, PI. 4, fig. 4.
Syllis djiboutiensis, Gravier, (Ki), p. 147, PI. 9, fig. 3, lOOO.
Syllis djiboutiensis, Augener, (1), p. 213.
(For additional synonymy see Mcintosh, (39), p. 197.)

'Sec F. A. Potts (47). ' '

tDo Saint-Joseph (48) states :— "Chez beauccup de liiisylli.':, et cola indiifi'reinnieut

dans chaque esp^ce, lo bord de la trompe, au lieu d'i-tro donti'h' nVst ijiic cli'cliiijuctr et

s'^loigne peu du bord uni et quelquefois aussi an jieu di'chiquetc' de la tronipo dos

Pionosyllis. ' '

BV w. A. haswf:ll. 101

I have only obtained in Poii Jackson two or three small specimens of this
very Avidely-distributed species .

Sub-tfcuus Eh l e u s i a Lancjerhans.
Syllis (Ehlkhsia) ferrugixea Langerhans. (Plate xii., figs. 3-10. )

Ehlersia ferruginea, Langerhans, (35), p. 104, fig. 10.

SylUs (Ehlersia) ferruginea, Augener, (1), p. 211, Text-tig. 2(J.

The two sijecimens from Port Jackson which I refer to this species were not
seen alive; in the preserved condition they have a dull yellowish-grey colour. Their
length is about 8 mm., and each contains some ninety to a hundred very short
segments the leng-th being less than a tenth of the breadth.

The prostomium (Plate xii., tig. 3) bears six pairs of eyes — the frontal mere
dots of pigment, the others also very small. The palpi are sub-triangular when
viewed from above; behind thej' bulge out beyond the lateral edge of the pros-
tomium. The median tentacle is over four times the length of the prostomium
and is made up of about forty-five articuli ; the lateral are three-fourths of the
length of the median. Of the peristomial, the dorsal, as usual the longer, is a
little longer than the lateral prostomial. The parapodia are not deeply divided.
In the anterior region there are in each parapodium dorsally three or four com-
pound setae (fig. 4) of the Ehlersia type with long and slender falces, feebly
bidentate: ventrally the rest of the compound setae (figs. 5-7), about ten in num-
ber, have relatively short bidentate falces with the secondary tooth more strongly
developed than the terminal. Posteriorly the setae of the latter type become
gradually replaced by setae (fig. 7) with very short, strongly curved falces with
the secondary tooth much larger than the terminal. In the posterior segments
there is a simple seta with a rounded extremity dorsal to the compound setae in
each parapodium . In the last two or three segTiients there is alfio a ventral simple
seta (fig. 8) in each parapodium, similar to the adjoining compound setae, but
without the joint. There arc usually two acicula (figs. 9 and 10), slightly
knobbed and bent forwards at the end, in each parapodium.

The anterior dorsal cirri are distinctly segmented, but in both specimens
segmentation completely disappears before the middle of the body is reached.
The first is longer than the rest, rather longer than the breadth of the liody. The
ventral cirri are cylindrical and not as long as the parapodia.

The pliarynx extends to the 10th segment; its tooth is anteriorly situated.
The proventriculus extends to the eighteenth segment; it contains about 30 an-
nular bands.

Genus T r v r a x 0 s y l l i s Clajiarede.

Trypaxosvi.lis ZEiiRA ftrube.

Syllis zebra, Grnbe, (19), p. 80, Taf. iii., fig. 7.
Triipanostjllis krohnii, Claparede, (5), p. 98.
T. krohnii, Be St.-Joseph, (48), p. 56 (.180).

T. ^ebra, Mcintosh, (39), p. 169, PI. 1.. fies. 9 and 10: PI. li., fig. 1; PI. Ixx.,
fig. 8: PI. Ixxix., fig. 18.

;' Eurymedusa picta, Kinbcrg, (31), iion Elders, (10).
Syllis taeniae formis, Haswell, (25), p. 9, PI. 1., figs. 4 and 5.
Trypanosyllis Eichardi, Gravier, (16), p. 168, PI. ix., figs. 12, 13.
Trypanosyllis taeniaeformis, Augener, (1), p. 230.

102 AUSTIJALIAX SYLLIDAE, EUSYLI,IU.VE AXD AUTOLy'IIDAE,

Whether Kinberg's Eury medusa pieta is the same as Trypanosi/llis zehra must
remain somewhat uncertain until the type sjjecimen has l)een re-examined. The
original diagnosis of the former is not very adequate; nor are the figures of it in
the "Eugenies Resa" of much value in distinguishing the species. But the name,
and the locality afford some indication "Port Jackson, Novae Hollandiae, summa
aqua." On the other hand, the New Zealand and South Australian species whieh
Ehlers put down as Eurymedusa picta Kinberg, after examining Kinberg's ori-
ginal specimen, is quite distinct, and has been determined by Benham as a si^eeies
of Odontosyllis (see Odontosi/Uis suteri Bonhain) .

T. zebra is not at all rare a little below low-water in Port Jackson, frequent-
ing especially the roots of the Laminarian Eklonia radiata. It is one of the larger
iSyllids, attaining a length of as much as 6 or 7 cm. Both male and female
stolons are white with two pairs of red eyes.

The mode of stolonisation in the Port Jackson form is that des^cribed by
Marion and Bobretsky (45), and De St.-Josoph (48) as characterising T. zebra
[See Potts (47), p. 13] . When the stolon is ready for separation tlie stuck hears
ventrally a small prolongation terminating in a pair of anal ciiri.

Family EITSYLLIDAE.
Genus S y l l i d e s Oersted.
Syi.lides L0XGICI17HATA Oersted.

Syllides longicirrata, Oersted, (46), p. 11, Tab. ii., fig. 2 a-h.

Syllides longicirrata, Malmgren, (41), p. 39.

Syllides longocirrata, Langerhans, (36), p. 548.

AnoplosylUs ftdva, Marion et Bobretzky, (45), p. 28, PI. ii. and iii.. fig. 8.

? Syllis ochracea, Marenzeller, (42), p. 27, Taf. iii., fig. 1.

Syllides longocirrata, De Saint-Joseph, (48), p. 165 (41).

Syllides longocirrata, Augener, (1), p. 229.

The three specimens of Syllides which I have obtained in Port Jaeksor
agree very closely with Marion and Bobretzky's description and figure of Anoplo-
sylUs fulva except in one point, which may be of some importance. My speci-
mens have well-developed lenses in the frontal eyes — a condition rarely met with.
The posterior eyes have no lenses. I have not been able to see the ventral simple
setae referi-ed to by Langerhans. The dorsal simple setae, which are gently curved
find blunt, occur singly on all the pai-apodia except the first tlu-ee.

The yellow corpuscles which are distributed over the whole dorsal surface ol'
the peristomium correspond very closely" with the constituent elements of the
"yellow bodies" of the Exogoneae. In a female specimen ovaries occur from the
ninth setigerous segment backwards.

Genus E T' r y s t l l i s Ehlers.

EORYSYLLIS TUBERCULATA EhlcrS.

Eurysyllis tuhercuhihi, Ehlers, (0), p. 264. Taf. 11, fig's. 4-7.
Polymasttis paradoxus, Claparede, (5), p. 109, PI. viii., fig. 3.
I have seen only two sjiecimens of this remarkable form, obtained a1 Point
Piper, Port Jackson. aiiKnig Algae.

BY W. A. IIASWELL. 103

Genus Pionosyllis MaluigTcn .
PioxosYLM.s iielakmixki'jii;a, n.sp. (Plate xii., figs. ]l-l(j; Plate xiii., fls,'. 1.)

Complete, sexually mature specimens reach a length nL' about 1.4 cm. with a
breadth of about 1 mm., and contain 05 to 75 segments. But many specimens
show evidence of having lost a part of the fragile posterior region, which has
become imperfectly regenerated . Thus a number of specimens contain only about
25 to 50 segments of nornud character, with or without a narrow posterior con-
tinuation of 3 to 12 sundl segments, obviously formed by a process of regenera-
tion .

The general groun<l-colour in the living animal is yellowish, or greenish, or
light pink. On the jn-ostomium, just behind the eyes, is a transverse black line con-
cave forwards; this sends forwards a median longitudinal ban<l .vhich bifurcates in
front between the eyes. Usually the dorsal surface of the palin is dark with a narrow
obliciue light line. Each of the first few segments has a simple transverse black
band across its dorsal surface. On a few segments (usually the fifth to the
eighth, sometimes a larger number) there is a second transvei-se black band.
Further back again each segment has a single band, broad iu the middle, nar-
rowing laterally. These bands become shorter posteriorly and disappear alto-
gether towards the middle of the body — the posterior part being either devoid of
markings or with lighter grey transverse lines. Some black pigment also occurs
on the ventral surface of a few of the most anterior segments of the body-
Similar pigment is also present in the pharynx, in the proventriculus and in the
walls of the nephridia.

Vibratile cilia are present on the palpi, on the lateral liorders (.if the seg-
ments and in groups on the parapodia. Non-motile (sensoi-y) cilia are abundant
on the tentacles and cirri.

The prostomium (Plate xiii., fig. 1) is broader than long. The peri.stomium
is visible dorsally for a short distance only. The eyes Aary greatly in develop-
ment, but are usually large and may touch or overlap : small frontal eyes are pre-
sent. The palpi are large, entirely separate, divergent from close to the base,
with an almost oblong outline: but frequently their shape is disguised by various
degrees of flexion. In the active living animal they are usually extended almost
vertically downwards and folded inwards at the ends, so as fre(|uently to touch
one another ventrally in front of the mouth. The prostomial and peristomial ten-
tacles are segmented, Imt the segmentation is less distinct towards the base. The
median prostomial tentacle is longer than the lateral, longer than the prostomium
and palpi together. The dorsal peristomial tentacle, longer thai^ the ventral,
is about equal in length to the median prostomial.

The long, narrow, pointed para]iodia are about e(|ual in length to half the
breadth of the segments. At about the 23rd segment, a distinct notopodial rudi-
ment with a small aeiculum makes its appearance, and persists throughout the
rest of the segments. Each neuropodium has one, two, or sometimes three,
aeicula and about fifteen to twenty long and slender compound setae. The
acicula (Plate xii., fig. 16) have a conical extremity surrounded at the base by
a ring-like thickening. In the compound setae of the anterior region (Plate xii..
fig. 11), the falces, very long and narrow in the case of the most dorsal, decrease
in length ventrally, becoming quite short, but ai'e all of the same essential charac-
ter: bidontate with the two terminal teeth nearly equal, the cutting edge convex,
finely ciliated. Posteriorly (Plate xii., figs. 12-15) a change takes place: the

104 AUSTRALIAN- SYLLIDAE, EUSYLLIDAE AXD AVTOLTTIDAE,

fak-es become shorter, and the secontlary tooth comes to preponderate over the
tenninal. In the parapodia of the most posterior region there are two sets of
simple setae, one of the fli'st set on the dorsal side of each bundle of compound
setae, and one of the second set on the ventral side. The dorsal simple setae are
slender liairs like the capillary swimming setae; the ventral resemble the sliortest
and most ventral of the compound setae except in the absence of the articulation.
In scxiuiUy mature specimens the seg-meuts containing the ripe genital products,
and usually a few in front of them, have notopodial Ijundles of capillary setae;
but these are very sliort, much shorter than the compound setae.

The dorsal eii-ri are alternately longer and shorter; the longer are in general
about as long as the breadth of the body or a little longer; all are verj- slender
i'nd indistinctly segmented. The ventral cirri are short, rarely extending as far
as the ends of the parapodia, and usually falling far short of it. in shape they
are elongated compressed cones, the terminal portion comparatively slender.
These ventral cirri are mobile to a quite unusual degree, the slender tip moving
about freely. The anal cirri are entirely unsegmented.

When the proboscis is retracted, the ring of phar^-ngeal papillae lies in the
fifth segment. In the eighth seg-mcnt lies the single dorsal tooth, which is thus
well behind its usual position, though it is still in front of the middle of the
pharynx. The pharynx extends back as far as the thirteenth segment; the pio-
ventrieulus lies in the fourteenth to the twentieth. The latter has about twenty-
five rows of muscle-columns.

There is no trace of schizogamy. Mature males have the segments full of
sperms from about the twentieth segment backwards, except in a limited regit n
at the posterior end. The females, when mature, have numerous small ova in
each of the segments from about the twenty-third to about tlie fifty-fifth. Gesta-
tion apparently does not occur.

The nephridia are very conspicuous in most specimens owing to their walls
containing much black pigiuent.

In spite of the fact that the union between tiie palpi is absent, and in
spite of the presence of the limited degree of segmentation in the tentacles and
dorsal cirri, this species seems to find its nearest allies in the members of the genus
Piotiosi/llis. The position of the tooth, though it is not further back than in
certain species of Si/Uif', such as S. prolifera, seems to separate it from the other
described species of Pimiosiilli^ ■ Apparently it comes nearest to P. u-eissmanni
Langerhans [(3G). ji. 24G, fig. 11] and P. ireissmainioides of Augeuer [(1), p.
223. text-fig. 30] .

P. melaenoncphra is not rare among the roots of oar-weeds (Eklonia radiatii)
in Tort .Tackson. It is very alert and active and very fragile, so that complete
s|)(Mimens are not easily obtained.

PioxosTi.iJS DIVARICATA Keferstcin. (Plate xiii.. figs. 2 and 3).

SijUift divaricalri. Kefersteiu. (30). ]> . 111.

Si/llis nnrmamiica, Claparede, (4), ]>. 40, Taf. xiii.. fig. 24.

PinnosyUis dh-aricrita. Langerhans, (SO. p. .54.5.

Piotwsiillis ? diriiriraln. ^fclntosh, (38). p. llU. PI. lix., fig. 12; PI. Ix., fig.
7; PI. Ixxix., fig. 17.

Tlu' only specimen of this species which T have obtained is about 8 mm. in
lengtli in tlic preserved condition and less than 1 mm. in greatest breadth. It
'\a.s almost colourless in I'roiit when alive, but for black pigment in the proto-

BT V^^ A. HASWELL. 105

plasmic cores of the radial muscle-fibres of the proventriculus; but throughout
the greater part of its leng-th it was strongly coloured with dark browu, almost
black, pigment, not collected into transverse lines, but distributed over the dorsal
surface and the parapodia, with a tendency to the formation, in places, of irregu-
lar longitudinal lines. There are 43 segments, but some have been lost. To-
wards the middle, where the body is broadest, the length of the segments is about
one-fourth of the breadth.

The prostomium is a little broader than long, and bears lour rather large
eyes, the twiy of each side in close contact. The tentacles and dorsal cirri are
entirely devoid of segmentation. The median tentacle is about three to four
times the length of the prostomium, the lateral scarcely twice that length. The
palpi diverge widely from one another, and their basal junction is of very slight
extent. The dorsal peristomial tentacle is longer than the median prostoniial,
about five times the length of the prostomium.

The dorsal cirri are longer than the breadth of the segments in front ; shorter
behind. The parapodia are simple and undivided, much shorter than the breadth
of the segments.

The setae (Plate xiii., figs. 2 and 3) usually about 12 in each parapodium,
are very long and slender, and are all of one type, though decreasing as usual in
the length of the fals from the dorsal towards the ventral side. The falx ter-
minates in two teeth situated close together, the secondary tooth rather more pro-
nounced than the terminal, and strongly hooked. No simple setae are present,
but this may be due to the loss of the posterior segments. The acicula, two or
three in number, are simple and straight and sharp-pointed or blunt. The ven-
tral ein-i are shorter than the parapodia, long, conical, but with a suddenly nar-
rowing terminal part.

The phar^Tix extends to the tenth segment : its median tooth, which is blunt,
lies just Ijehind its anterior margin in the 5th segment . The proventriculus ex-
tends to the 15th segment, and has about 30 rows of muscle-columns.

Though there are one or two points (such as the absence of frontal eyes) in
which the single specimen does not agree with the description of the European
species, the correspondence on the whole is very close.

Genus Odoktosyllis Claparcde.

Odontosyllis detecta Augener.

Odontosyllis detecta Augener (1), p. 236, Taf. iii., fig. 33 and text-tig. 34.

I have obtained five specimens which seem to be referable to this species — •
three mature males and two mature females. Since Augener had only a single
incomplete specimen before him, I am able to supplement his account with sundry
additional particulars.

The largest specimens are about 6 mm. in lengtli and contain 35 to 40
segments. There is no definite colouration apart from the colours of the int,rnal
organs. Vibratile cilia are widely distributed on the surface — on the palpi, on
the prostomium, on the peristomium, on the borders of the segments, and on the
parapodia. Non-motile (sensory) cilia are also abundant, and are sjiecially elon-
gated on the inner borders of the palpi.

In the males the enonnous eyes occupy a large part of the dorsal portion
of the prostomium, and posteriorly those of opposite sides are only separated by
a very narrow interval ; in one specimen they bulge out beyond the normal limits

106 AUSTKALIAX tYLLIliAf,, KUSYLLIHAE AXD AVTOLYTIDAE,

of the prostomiiim . In the specimen last referred to there is no clear indication
that there are two eyes on each side, and only one lens is distinguishable; Imt in
the remaining males the anterior and [losterior eyes, though intimately united, are
to be distinguished by their sei)arate lenses and by slight fissures. In the female,
on the other hand, the eyes are quite small and separate; in front of each an-
terior eye is a small frontal eye which appears to have a small lens.

The palpi are Cjuite conspicuous both in the living and fixed specimens,
'i'heir basal parts are fused to form a transverse bridge in front of the mouth.
From this bridge, the anterior edge of which is slightly in front of the anterior
border of the prostomium, s(>parated from one another by a wide- interval, arise the
free portions of the palpi as uvate processes projecting forwards in front of the
prostomium, or doubled back on the ventral side. There is no trace of a nuchal
prominence .

The tentacles and cirri present no trace of definite segmentation, though ir-
j-cgularly annulated. Tlie median tentacle is about twice the length of the pros-
tomium, the lateral a little shorter than the median. Of the peristomial tentacles
the dorsal is, as usual, the longer, and is, approximately, of the same length as
the lateral prostomial. Of tlie dorsal cirri the first is much longer than the
others, and is about the lengtli of the median tentacle or a little longer. The
rest are alternately longer and shorter: on the average tlieir length is about ('(lunl
to half the breadth of the body.

Tlie ])arapodia are bilolinl, the poslerinr (d.irsal) lobe being the larger.
There are ten or twelve compound setae in each ])arapodium. These, which are
figured by Augener (Text-fig. 34), have short, unidentate f aloes. On the dorsal
.side of the compound setae in each parapodium there is, in all but the first 8 to IG
segments, a very fine capillary simple seta; no ventral simple setae were found.

Capillary swimming setae are present in one of the male specimens from the
14th segment backwards, absent in the others. There is a single aciculum with a
.slightly knobbed extremity which is distinctly bent backwards. The ventral <-irri
are broad, ovate, shorter than the parapodia.

The pharynx extends as far Ijack as the 6th segment; the proventriculus to
the 10th. The pharyngeal teeth are somewhat difficult of analysis. But tliere
seem to be six teeth and two jaw-pieces, two of the teeth being closely connected
with the latter, and the remaining four free between them. This is very near
what is described and figured by IMarenzcller [(42). Taf. iv., fig. 2D] for Odoiiio-
syllis virescens (O. ctenostoma).

In the females, ovaries nccui' from the (ith or 7th segments backwards. In
the male, testes begin about the lith segment. A limited region, comprising the
11th to the 14th segments, is in mU lliiee specimens specially developed, with large
testes in the 13th and 14tli, and tlie body-cavities distended with ripe speniiatozoa
which are absent in the rest of the body.

The specimens were found among Algae at AVatson's Bay, Port Jackson .

Augener, on the strength of the enlarged eyes, compares his Q. detrcta with
(). hiialina (xrube; but there seems to be sufficient evidence to prove that the
teature in (|uestion is a sexual and not a specific character. Apart from this, the
affinities of 0. rletecta are much more with 0. ctenostoma, with Which Augener
makes no comparison . In faet, the only differences to be detected are the ab-
sence of the nuchal lobe, and also of the dorsal, simple, hooked setae, which, ac-
cording to Langerhans [(36). p. 55('). fig. l.'jrt. /i.l and St.-.Toseph [(47). p. .53,
177], occur on the more posterior jiarajiodia in the latter species.

EV W. A. HASWELL. 107

Odoxtosylli.s rrLGURANs And. et Edw.
Odontosyllis fulgurans, Audouin et Edwards, Ann. Sci. nat., t. xxix., p. 229
Odontosylli^ fulgurans, Mcintosh, (39), p. 178, PI. xlix., fig. 5; PI. lix., figs.
15 and 15 a and 6; PI. Ixx., fig-. 11; PI. Ixxx., fig. 4.
For i'urtlier synonymy see Mcintosh.

I have obtained only two specimens of an Odvntosyllis which, if not identical
with the European and North American species above named, is very nearly
related to it. 0. fulgurans seems to be characterised lay the great length
of the proventriculus, running through ten or eleven segments, the hooked falces
of the compound setae with a minute tooth near the middle of the cutting edge,
and the absence of nuchal or occipital lobe.

In the living condition the Port Jackson specimens were of a brownish colour
with iiregular whitish flecks; the eyes were red. The only complete specimen is
about 7 mm. long', with about 50 segments. In one the pigment of the two eyes
on either side is to some extent coalescent; in the other the two are close to-
gether but clearly separated ; in the former a pair of frontal eyes are represented
by a pair of veiltrally placed minute specks of pigment.

The teeth in the retracted condition of the proboscis lie in the fourth seg-
ment. As far as can be made out they are sis in number. A striking feature
is the presence in the wall of tlie pharynx, just l)ehind the teeth and immediately
in front of the anterior end of the proventriculus, of an opaque ring wliich ap-
pears fjuite black in the cleared specimen. A similar appearance on a smaller
scale is observable at the posterior end of the proventriculus. These two dark
bodies are evidently the proventricular glands, anterior and posterior, wliich I
described in the Exogoneae. They, or at least tlie anterior, occur in all Sgllidea
bo far as I have observed ; but they ai'e usually very inconspicuous and only recog-
nisable in sections* or, in the case of some of tlie Exogoneae, in favourably stained
entire specimens.

Odontosyllis suteri Benham.
Odontosylhs suteri, Benham, (2), ]). 161, figs. 1 and 2.
Euryrnediisa picta, Ehlers, (10). p. 21.
Non Eiiry medusa picia, Kinborg, (.31) .

Odontosylhs suteri has been found )jy Benham at various points on the
coast of the South Island of New Zealand, and also occurs at the Kennadec
Islands. I have only hitherto found two specimens in Port Jackson. Ehlers's
confusion of this s|iecies with Eurymedusa jricta of Kinberg is referred to under
Trypanosyllis zebra.

0. suteri is characterised (1) by the presence of a wellmarked nuchal lobe,
(2) by the falx of tlie compound setae tei-niinating in a single tooth, but having a
"secondary tooth" about the middle of the concave edge, and (3) by the very
long proventriculus running through 15 segments. As in 0. fidgitrans the pro-
ventricular glands are very consjjicuous in the cleared specimen.

I am indebted to Professor Benham for New Zealand specimens.

Odoxtostllis feeycinetensis Augener.
OdontosyUis freycinetensis, Augener, (1), p. 234, PI. ii., flg. 7; text-fig. .33.
I have obtained only one specimen of an OdontosyUis which is certainly
identical with Augener's 0. freycinetensis from Western Australia. It is 4 mm.

*A trace of the anterior crlands is distingiiishable in Auirener's fiffnre of O. "landir
losa (Taf. iii., fig. :?7). ^ m .,

108 AUSTRALIAN- SYLLIDAE, EUSYLLIDAE AXD ACTOLYTIDAE,

lonjr. and eorup rises only 24 segments, but is obviously incomplete. It is of a
general gi-ey colour, darker in the region behind the proventriculus than in front.
The colouration proves under the microscope to be due to the presence of irreguhir
patches of black pigment partly arranged in broken transverse lines. This occurs
not, as is usually the case, in the dorsal integument, but deep within the muscular
layers — presumably in the peritoneum.

The pharynx and proventriculus are displaced owing to rupture: tlie teeth
and jaw-pieces, so far as they can be seen, closely resemble those of 0. detectn.
The acicula do not end in a simple point, but are sharply bent forwards at tl.c
extremity .

Genus A ii B L y o s y l L I s Grube.

AiiBLYOSYLLis SPECTABiLis Johnston. (Plate xiii., figs. -I-IO).

Pterosyllis (Gattiola) spectabilis, Johnston, (29), p. 195, PL xvia. figs. 1-7.

Pterosi/llis formosa, Claparede, (4), p. 46, PI. xiii., figs. 30-34.

Pterosyllis plectorlnjncha, Marenzeller (42), p. 47, PI. 5, fig. 3.

Amblyosyllis Madeirensis, Laugerhans. (3G|, p. 561, PL 32, fig. 19.

Pterosyllis (Gattiola) spectabilis, St.-Joseph, (48). p. 63, PL 9, figs, 64-67.

This small Syllid occurs sparingly among the roots of Eklonia a few feet
below low-water mark in Port Jackson.

The length is about 1 cm. iind the number of segments 14 to 30. Some
specimens are colourless or nearly so, or have only the dorsal cirri pigmented ;
others, in addition to the pigment in the cirri, have an elaborate pattern formed
of dark pigment on the dorsal surface of the segments; others have a systom
of transverse violet lines. In some female specimens, two longitudinal wolet
lines run throughout the intestinal region. In some the only internal colouration
is due to the orange intestinal epithelium. The tentacles and eim, including the
ventral, are full of mulbeiTy-shaped glands which discharge fine thread-like bodies.
All the tentacles and the dorsal ciiTi are alike in not being distinctly segmented
at their bases. The prostomium. (Plate xiii.. fig. 4) rounded in outline, bears
two pairs of eyes of variable size dorsally and a third, very minute, pair in front
of them, but on the ventral surface, and therefore directed downwards. The
median tentacle is about ten times the lengtii of the prostomium, the lateral about
four or five times. The palpi (PL xiii., fig. 5) are very short, scarcely visible from
above, united together for a short distance in front of the mouth to form a sort
of upper lip with a median suture; laterally each extends outwards so as to pro-
ject slightly beyond the lateral border of the prostomium.

The peristomium. small and closely united to the prostomium, bears dors-
ally and laterally, widely separated from one another, a pair of ciliated lol)es
which represent the "ailerons occipitaux" or nuchal wings of other spe<'ies. 'I'hese
may be short and globular, or may be elongated so as to extend back over the
first setigerous segment. The dorsal iierisfnmial tentacle is longer than the
ventral, about the lengtii of the lateral iirostmiiial.

The parapodia (fig. fi) have a very distinct anterior lobe or lingula. Each
bears some 5 to 12 stout, bidentatc. compound setae (figs. 7 and 8) witli very fine
i;nd short cilia on the cutting edge. The acicula, usually five or six in each
]iarapodiuni, are straiglii and iiointed. The dorsal cirri are much longer than
the breadth of the body in tlie living and active condition; tliey are not definitely
segmented towards the base. The })road ventral cirri are longer than the para-
podia. The penultimate segment has two pairs of jointed cirri, the dorsal the

BY W. A. HASWELL. 109

longer, cousiderably longer than the breadth of the segment, the ventral composed
of only two or three joints. The anal cirri are similar to the dorsal.

The oral end of the pharynx i^ provided with a circlet of six well-separateil
teeth (figs. 9 and 10), each of which is divided into five sharp cusps, the central
one larger than the othex-s.

The Port Jackson Amblyosyllis is very nearly related to that found at Dinar<l
by St.-Joseph and regarded by him as being identical with Gattiola spectabili^:
of Johnston (29), Pterosyllis plectorhyncha of Marenzeller (42), and
P. madeirensis of Langerhans (36) . The apparent greater lateral ex-
tension of the palpi in the Australian form, together with the varia-
bility in the length of the nuchal wings and the presence of the ventral
eye-spots, are probably not of crucial importance, while the correspondence of the
setae and acicula and the peculiar glands in the tentacles and cirri, with the
threads which they discharge, correspond closely with St.-Joseph's descriptions.
The only discrepancy that appears to be of importance is with regard to the teeth.
Marenzeller's figure [(42), Taf. v., fig. 3D] of the teeth of his Pterosyllis plector-
hyncha is much nearer what is to be seen in the Port Jackson specimens than St.
Joseph's description and figures [(48), p. 65, PI. 9, fig. 66]. In spite of these
apparent differences it appears probable that the European and Australian forms
will prove to be identical.

Augener (1) found only fragments of an Amblyosyllis in the Hamburg Ex-
pedition's eolleetiou. These he considered to agree well with Ehlers's A. granosa
from Magellan (7).

Family AUTOLYTIDAE.
Genus Autolytus.

AUTOLVTUS PACHYCERUS Aug.

Autolytus paehycerus, Augener, (1), p. 257, fig. 11 and 12; Text-fig. 40.

The Port Jackson species of Autolytus which I refer to the above species is
characterised by its extremely brilliant colouration, but alcohol-jireserved speci-
mens after a time, comjiletely lose all ti'ace of this, and Augener's statement "Die
Farbung ist eintonig gelblich weiss ohne besondere zeichnung" becomes applicable
to themi

The most striking superficial feature of thee living worm is the presence in
the middle of the dorsal surface of each segment of a bright blue or purple spot,
usually rounded, but sometimes produced into a transverse streak. This occurs
both in the stock and in the stolons at all stages. The ground colour is red or
orange .

The stock is about 5 mm. iu length and contains about 50 segments. The
proventrieulus lies in the 7th and 8th, or 8th and 9th segments; in one specimen
it was more elongated, extending from the 8th to the 12th. The first stolon is
produced by sehi^ogamy. Later a chain results from gemmation. The separated
off female stolons containing each about 30 segments at first swim about actively
and are provided with capillary swimming setae on all the segments except the
first seven or eight. Aftei-wards the capillary setae become lost, and a little
before or shortly after this takes place the ova are discharged, to be subsequently
carried about enclosed in a capsule on the ventral surface of the parent.

A male stolon has about the same number of segments as the female and ha:;
capillary setae on all the segments except the first three.

In all stages the first pair of dorsal cirri are much longer than any of the
rest except the second which approaches it in length.

110 AUSTRALIAN STLLIDAE, EUSYLLIDAE AND AUTOLTTIDAE,

LITERATURE.

1. AuGEXER, H.— PolycLaeta. i. Eirantia. Die Fauiia Sudwest Australiens . 4

Bd.,'o Lief, 1913.

2. Bexham, W. B. — Notes uu some Xew Zealand Polychaetes. Trans. N.Z.

Inst, VoL 17, 1914.

3. Claparede, R. — Annelidas chetopodes du Golte de Naples. Mem. Soc.

Phys. Hist. nat. Geneve, tome 19, 1868.
4_ .— Beobaclitungen uber Anat. und Eutwickeliingsgeschielite wirbel-

loser Thiere. 1803.
5. . — Glanures zootomiques parmi les Aimelides de Port \'eudres.

Mem. Soc. Phys. Hist. nat.'Geneve, tome 17, 1804.
6. Ehlers, E. — Die Borstenwurmer. Leipzig, 1864.
7 . Ergebnisse der Hamburg-Magalhaens Sammebreise, iii., Bd., Poly-

chaeten, 1897.
g_ . Die Polyi-liaeten-Sammlung der deutschen Sudpolar Exped. 1901-

1903. 1917.
9. •. — Siboga Polj-chaeten .

10. . — Xeuseelandisehe AnneUden. 1904 and 1907.

11. EisiG, H. — Ueber das Vorkommen eines Sehwimmblasenabnlichen Organ l.ei

Anneliden. Mittheil. Zool. Stat, zu Neapel, ii. Band, 1881.

12. Fauvel, p.— Annelides polychetes des Hes Falkland. Arch. Zool. esp. et

gen., tome 55, 1916.

13. . — Annelides polychetes de I'Australie meridionale. Arch. Zool.

exp. et gen., tome 56, 1917. ,

14. Goodrich, E. S. — Observations on SyHis vivipara Krohn. Journ. Linn.

Soc. Lond., Vol. 28, p. 105, Pl. 13. 1900.

15. Gravier, C. — Les annelides polychetes. Deux. Exped. antarct. franc.

IG. . — Annelides polychetes de la Mer Rouge. Nouv. Arch, du Miis.

d'Hist. nat., 4 serie, tome 2. 1900.

17. Grtjbe. E.— Die Fanulien der Anneliden. Ai-ch. f. Naturg., 16 Bd. 1850.

18. . — Besehreibungen neuer oder wenig bekannter Anneliden. A'ierter

Beitrag. Arch. f. Xaturg., Jahrg. 1855.

19 . . . . — Beschr. neuer oder wenig bekannter Anneliden. Funf ter Beit-

rag. Arch. f. Naturg., Jahrg. 1800.

20. . — Beschr. neuer oder wenig bekannter Anneliden. Seehster Beitrag.

Arch. f. Xaturg., 29 Band, 1863.

21. . — Annulata Oerstediana Af. Xaturbist. Foren. Yidensk. Meddel-

ser. 1857.

22. . — Die Insel Lussin und ihre Meeresfauna. Breslau, 1864.

23. . — Besehreibungen neuer oder wenig bekannter Anneliden des

Rothen Meeres. Monatsb. der Kgl. Akad. der Wiss. Berlin. 1869.

24. . — Annulata Semperiana. Mem. Acad. Imp. Sciences. St. Peters-

bourg, 7e. serie, tome 25, Xo. 8. 1878.

25. Haswell, W. a. — Observations on some Australian Polychaeta. Proc.

Linn. Soc. X.S.Wales. Vol. 10, 1885.

26 . . — On the structure of the so-called glandidar ventricle of Syllis .

Quart. Journ. Micro. Sci., (n.s.) Vol. 20, 1886.

27. . — A comparative study of striated muscle. Quart. .Jour. ^licro.

Sci., (n.s.) Vol. 30, 1889."

BY W. A. HASWEIA. Ill

28. IzcKA, A. — En-antiate Polychaeta of Japan. Juuiu. College of Science,

Imp. Uuivei-sity ul' Tokyo, Vol. xxx., 1912.

29. JOHXSTOX, G. — Catalogue of British non-parasitieal Woriu.-. London, 1865.

30. IvEFERSTElx. — Zeitscher . f. wiss. Zool., 12 Band, p. 111.

31. KixBERG, J. G. H. — Annulata nova: continuatio. Ofvers. af K.Vet. Akad.

Forh., 1865, No. 2.

32. . — Fregatt. Eugen. Kesa, vii., Annulata, 1857.

33. Kr(ihx. — Ueber eine lebendig-geberende Syllis-Art. Ai-ch. f. Xaturg.. 35

Bd., 1869.

34. •. — Ai-ch. f. Naturg., 18 Band, 1852.

35. Laxgerhaxs, P. — Ueber einige Canarische Anueliden. Xova Acta der Karl

Leopold-Carol. Deutscher Akad. der Natnrf. Halle, 42 Bd., 1881.

36. . — Die AVii rm-f auna von Madeira. Zeitscbr. f. wiss. Zool., 32 Bd.,

1879.

37. McIxTOSH, W. C. — The Polychaeta. Reports of ChaUenger Expedition.

Zoolog}-, Vol. 12, 1885.

38. . — Marine Annelids (Polychaeta) of South Afi-ica. :^ra^ne In-
vestigations in South Africa. Dep. of Agi-iculture, Cape Town, Yol. iu.,
1903^;

39. . — A Monograph of the British Annelids, Yol. 2. part 1. Ray

Society. 1908.

40. Malaqcix, a. — Recherches sur les S.vllidens. ^lem. Soc. Sci. Lille, 1893.

41. Malmgrex", a. J. — Annulata Polychaeta Spetsbergiae. Greenlandiae, Island-

iae et Scandinaviae hactenus cognita. Helsingfors, 1867.

42. Marexzeller, E. von. — Zur Kenntniss der Adi-iatischen Anneliden. Sitzb.

der K. Akad. der Wissensch. Wien. 69 and 72 Bande. 1874 and 1875.

43. . — Sudjapaniiche Anneliden. Denkschr. K. Akad. Wien. 41 Bd.,

1879.

44. Mariox. a. F. — Draguages an large de Marseille. .\nn. Sc. nat., t. 8, 1878.

45. Mariox, A. F. et Bobretzkt, N. — Etude des annelides du Golfe de Mar-

seille. Ann. Sci. nat., tome 2, 1875.

46. Oersted, F. — Fortegnelse over d.vr samlede i Christianiafjord ved Urobak.

Copenhagen.

47. PoTT.'s, F. A. — Methods of reproduction iu the Syllids. Ergebnisse u. Fort-

schritte der Zoologie, 3 Bd.. 1911.

48 . St.- Joseph, Barox" de. — Les annelides polychetes des cotes de Dinard . Ann .

Sci. nat.. 7e. serie, t. 1, 1887.

49. ScHlTAEDA, L. — Xeue wirbellose Thiere. II. Theil, 1861.

50. SorTHERX", R. — Archiannelida and Polychaeta. Clare Island Survey. Pror

R. Irish Acad., Yol. 31. 1914.

51. YioriER. — Etudes sur les animaux Lnferieurs de la baie d' Alger. Arch. Zool

Exp., 2e serie, t. 2, 1885.

52. TTiLLEV, A.— Polvchaeta of the "Southern Cross," 1902.

112 AUSTRALIAN SYLLIDAE, El'SYLLIDAE AND AUTOLYTIDAE.

EXPLANATION OF PLATES.
Plate X.

Fig. 1. Svllis c'<^i'iegala. Oue of the compound setae, (x 1500).

Fig. 2. Syl/is Viiriegaia. Acicula. (x t40).

Fig. 3. Svllis peclinans, n. sp. Dorsal view of head and anterior region of body, (x 80).

Fig. 4. S. pcctiiidiis. Outline of parapodium in the anterior region seen from the dorsal

side, with the acicula.
Fig. 5. S. pectinans. One of the compound setae, (x 1040).
Fig. 6. S. pecliiians. Dorsal simple seta, (x 1040).
Fig. 7. S. Iruncala, n. sy. Dorsal view of anterior region, (x 100).
Figs. 8-9. S. truncata. Compound setae, (x 1040 and 1400).
Fig. 10. S. triiiica/a. Dorsal simple seta, (x 1400).
Figs. 11-14. 5. truncata. Acicula. (x 1400).
Fig. 15. S. gracilis. Acicula. (x 1040).

Plate xi.

Fig. 1. Syllis punrtiilata, n. sp. Dorsal view of anterior region, magnified.

Fig. 2. S. puncticlata. Outline of parapodium fioui above.

Fig. 3. S. punctulata. Compound seta of the anterior region, (x 1040).

Fig. 4. S. punctulata. Compound seta of the posterior rtgion. (x 1040).

Figs. 5-10. S. punctulata. Dorsal simple setae, (x 1040).

Fig. 11. S. punctulata. Ventral simple seta, (x 1040).

Figs. 12-16. S. punctulata. Acicula (x 1040).

Fig. 17. S. parturiens, n. up. Anterior region, (x 140).

Fig. 18. .S". parturiens. Most dorsal compound seta.

Fig. 19. .9. augeueri, n. sp. Dorsal view of parapodium (x 440).

Fig. 20. S. augeneri. Most dorsal compound seta, (x 1400).

Figs. 21-22. ..S. augeneri. Acicula. (x 1400).

Figs. 23-26. 5. kinbergiana Haswell. Compound seta (x 1040).

Fig. 27. S. kinbergiana. Acicula. (x 1000).

Fig. 28. S. corus,cans Haswell. Head, magnified.

Figs. 29-31. S. coruscans. Compound setae, (x (iOO).

Plate xii.

Fig. 1. Syllis kinbergiana. Anterior region, dorsal view.

Fig. 2. .S". kinbergiana. Outline of parapodium as seen from above, (x 240).

Fig. 3. .S. ferrugifiea Laugerhans. Dorsal view of anterior extremity, magnified.

Fif. 4. S. ferruginea. One of the most dorsal of the compound setae, (x 104tl).

Figs. 5-7. S. ferruginea. More ventraUy situated compound setae, (x 1040).

Fig. 8. 5. ferruginea. Ventral simple seta, (x 1040).

Figs. 9-10. 5. ferruginea. Acicula. (x lOiO).

Fig. 11. Pionosyllis nielaenonephra, n. sp. One of the most dorsal compound setae of

the anterior segments, (x 1040).
Fig. 12. P. luelaenonephra. One of the most dorsal setae of the posterior segments.

(X 1040).
Figs. 13-14. P. inelaenonep/ira. Compound setae of posterior segments, (x 1040).
Fig. 15. /'. nielaenonephra. Ventral simple seta of posterior segments, (x 1040).
Fig. 16. /'. nielaenonephra. Aciculuiu.

Plate xiii.

Fig. 1. Pionosyllis melaenonephra. Anterior region, magnified.

Pig. 2. /-". divaricata Keferstein. Most dorsal of the compound setae, (x 1040).

Fig. 3. P. divaricata. More ventral compound seta, (x 1040).

Fig. 4. .■\niblvosyllis spectabilis Johnston. Anterior region, dorsal view.

Fig. 5. A. spectabilis. Ventral aspect of heail in outline to show the palpi and Uic

ventral eyes.

Fig. 6. .1. spectabilis. Outline of parai>odium from above, (x 240).

Fig. 7. ,-/. .•ipcctabilis Most dorsal compound seta, (x 1040).

Fig. 8. .-/. spectabilis More ventrally situated compound seta, (x 1040).

Fig. 9. .1. .spectabilis. Circlet of six coniposile teeth round the rim of the pharynx.
Fig. 10. >■/. spectabilis. One of the teeth, (x 10-W).

113

THE CARABIDAE OF TASMANIA.
By Thomas G. Sloane.
(With four text -figures.)

Tliis paper is founded on the Carabidae from the collection of the late Mr.
Augustus Simson, of Launeeston, which has recently been acquired by the Trus-
tees of the South Australian Museum. In addition, I have been able to examine
the large collection of Carabidae made by Messrs. H. J. Carter and A. M.
Lea in northern and western Tasmania dui-ing the month of January, 1918, which
consisted of 51 species; 14 of these were new species, of which 11 were not
represented in the Simson collection. The Tasmanian species in my own collec-
tion, some belonging to Mr. Lea, and some sent by Mr. F. M. Littler from
Launeeston have also been seen.

The type specimens of the new species described in this paper have been
sent to the South Australian Museum.

I Synopsis of Paper.

(1) Introduction.

Scutellar stride of the Carabidae.
Tarsal vesture of the Carabidae.

Umbilicate punctures of the elytra of the Carabidae.
Anterior cotyloid cavities of the Carabidae.
, Middle cotyloid cavities of the Carabidae.

Anterior tibiae and tibial spurs of the Carabidae.
Components of the Tasmanian Carabideous fauna.
Key to tribes of Carabidae in Australia and Tasmania.

(2) The Carabidae of Tasmania and islands of Bass Straits.

(3) Appendix. List of species not dealt with in the body of the paper.

Introduction.

Scutellar striole. In the Carabidae the elytra have usually nine striae and a
short striole at the base of the first or second stria known as the scutellar striole.*
There are many variations from this normal pattern; bometimes the elytra are
without any striae, while in Planetes australis Macl., there are twenty-five striae;
probably every number from one to twenty-five occurs, but I only know of more
than seventeen as occurring in some species of Planetes and in the genus Polij-
stichus. Only the scutellar striole will be considered, in order to obtain an idea
of its taxonomic value; for, though it has been used as a classificatory character,
its morphology and origin do not seem to have been given attention. The
Carabidae must originally have had the elytra 10-striate, the scutellar striole

* Sometimes in the tribe Pterostichini a well developed tenth stria occurs, but
in such cases the series of umbilicate punctures is found in the( usual position on
the ninth interstice, so that in these cases it seems evident that the extra stria has
been developed on the ninth interstice.

114

THE CARABIDAE OF TASJIAXIA,

beiug the rudiment of a stria now more or less lost. The clue to the
original striation of the elytra may be found in tlie tribe Migadopiui of tlie
Southern Hemisphere, and in the Holarctic genus Pelophila, where an extra
second stria is found basad from the apical declivity. The text figures given
below show the four distinctive forms of the normal Carab striation with regard
to the scutellar striole.

Fig. 1 is the pattern of the striation in Calyptogunia ater SI., a Migadopid
from Tasmania, viz., ten striae on the basal two thirds, and nine towards the
apex as a result of the abbreviation of the second stria.

Fig. 2 shows the junction of the first stria with the remnant of the second
stria as exemplified by Dicrochile ventralis Blackb.

Fig. 3 gives the second stria reduced to a striole at the base of the second
interstice as occurring in Gtiathaphunus herhaceus SI.

Fig. 4 is drawn from the elytra of Culadromus elseyi to show the commonest
form of striation in the Carabidae; here the base of the first stria has become the
scutellar striole owing to the capture of the first stria by the second.

It may be assumed that a strong tendency towards the reduction of the ori-
ginal second stria by shrinking away from the apex must have developed very
early in the history of the Carabidae, and that in many cases the reduced st;cond
stria became united with the first; this union of the first and second striae has
then been the means of the tendency for the elimination of one stria having been
transferred to the basal part of the first stria. Often the second stria has been
completely lost where the reduction has continued on the second interstice, but
it is very rarely that when the base of the first stria has become the striole, it
has been altogether atrophied.

Fig. 1. Calyp/os^oaia atcr Sloane.

Fig. 3. (iiiat/uiplianus herbaceus Sloane.

Fig. 2. Dicrochile r'eiilicilis Blackliurn.
Fig. 4. Catadromiis elseyi White.

BY THOMAS G. SLOANE. 115

Vesture beneath joints of anterior tarsi tn <S. The vesture of the u:.ider-
surfaee of some of the joints of the anterior tarsi (also of the middle tai-si in
feome cases where the anterior tarsi are clothed beneath) has long been recog-
nised as an important character for the classification of the Carabidae, tut I
have seen no notice of its probable course of development. To have the under-
side of some joints of the tarsi clothed beneath is essentially a character of the
male; very rarely the basal joint of the female is dilatate and clothed beneath, e.g.,
in the American genus Stenomorphus, and in the Australian species Xotonomus
cques Cast., and N. parallelomorphus Chaud. The vesture assumes two main
forms, viz., the spongiose and the biseriate forms. The spongiose vesture is
older than the biseriate \esture, and is that from which the latter is derived; it
alone is found in the Carabidae-disjuuctae ; the tribes Migadopini and Hiletini
of this division have four anterior tarsi dilatate and clothed beneath. Most
of the tribes of the Carabidae-conjunctae have the biserate form of the tarsal
vesture, but spongiose vesture occurs in the Broscini and Pelecini of the (^ara-
bidae-uniperforatae, and in the Chlaeniini, Oodini, Licinini. Agi'iini, Dryptini,
and Brachynini of the Carabidae-biperforatae. The Harpalini are the only tribe
known to me in which both the spongiose and biseriate types of tarsal ve^.ture
occur, and here is found the clue to the derivation of the biseriate from the
spongiose vesture. In the genus Amblystomus the brushes of squamae beneath
the joints of the four anterior tarsi are dense with a longitudinal line dividing
them in the middle, so that actually the squamae are arranged bilaterally. Any
bilateral form would have an equal number of rows of squamae on each side of
the joints; this can be seen in the American genus Anisotarsus, and in some
species of Diaplwromerus. At any decrease in the number of rows of squamae
which occurred, one row would go off on each side, and so the biseriate type
of vesture would develop. That this might be the case may be seen by ex-
amining Anisodactylus discoidetis Dej., a North American species, which has
eight rows of squamae on the second joint of the anterior tarsi, but only four
on the second joint of the middle tarsi. If this view of the origin of the
biseriate type of tarsal vesture be accepted, the fact that thjs form occurs in
one division of the tribe Harpalini and in the tribe Pterostichini, is to be con-
sidered a case of analogous variation, and not as any evidence of affinity; the
occurrence of spongiose tarsal vesture in the Harpalini suggests that this tribe
is more ancient than the Pterostichini, a tribe with only the' biseriate form.
Seeing that the tendency to reduction has only to be carried one step
beyond the biseriate fonn of vesture to result in the tarsi becoming naked be-
neath, it is not astonishing that naked tarsi in the male appear in all directions
throughout the Carabidae; genera have been proposed only on the character of
unclothed tarsal joints but it may be confidently asserted that this negative char-
acter is not of generic value.

Umbib'cate piunctures of elytra. It seems evident that the interstices of the
elytra represent the longitudinal veins, and the striae the interspaces of the upper
wings of the insect-gToup from which the Coleoptera are derived. In the Cara-
bidae, on one or more of the odd interstices of the ordinary 9-striate elytron,
may be found sensitive setae rising from umbilicate punctures. Dr. G. H. Horn
has used the terms "ocellate" or "dorsal punctures" for these setigerous punc-
tures; but, seeing that they have often considerable taxonomic value in the fitniily
Carabidae, it seems necessary to have one definite and unvarying term for them:
the name umbilicate punctures, which has been applied to them already, might

116 THE CARABIDAE OF TASMANIA,

with advantage be restricted to them wlieu describing Carabidae. Umbilicate
punctures are often wanting from all the odd irterstices except the ninth.. Dr.
G. H. Horn has said that they are wanting from the ninth interstice in the
genera Panageus, Micrixys, and Apotomns, but I am not sure that sucli is the
case; in Panageua and Micrixys they seem to be hidden by the setosity of the
interstice, but I considered I detected umbilicate punctures in Panageus; Apoto-
mus shows, in fresh specimens, at least one long sensitive seta near the base
and another near the apex of the ninth stria; if these setae are not rubbed off,
the punctures from which they rise may be discerned. I regard these sensitive
setae of the odd interstices of the elytra as honiologous with the "macrotrichia''
found by Dr. Tillyard on the wings of the Meeoptera; and this gives a leason
for their position and taxonomic value.

Anterior cotyloid cavities. In the first division of the Carabidae. or sub-
family Carabinae (here called Carabidae disjunctae) the anterior coxal ca\ities
have one opening inwards; in the second division, or subfamily Harpalinae (here
called Carabidae conjunctae) there may be either one or two openings inwards;
therefore I have further divided the Carabidae conjunctae by this character into
Carabidae uniperforatae and Carabidae biperforatae. The division of the in-
ward opening of the anterior cotyloid cavities iijto two foramina is caused by
.■i chitinous crosspiece which extends at right angles from each .?ide of the cntf^
I'urca .

Attention may be drawn to an aberrant modification of the biperforate form
of the cavities found in the genus Silphomorpla, where the point of each
epimerum has moved forward and become attached on each side to the ehitmous
crossbar of the cavity; this results in Silphomorpha showing but one opening in-
wards, which is not homologous with the single opening of the uniperiorate
cavity, but with the anterior foramen of the biperforate cavity. Silphomorpha
has the antefurca very short, the posterior part of the anterior coxae more ex-
posed than usual, and the posterior opening of the ordinary biperforate cavity
completely lost owing to the shifting forward of the epimera. Our othei' Pseu-
domoi-phid genus Adelotopus has the ordinary biperforate form of the cotyloid
cavities, and the antefurca of usual length. It may be noted, as a case of analo-
gous variation, that the anterior coxal cavities in the family Hydrophilidac re-
semble those of Silphomorpha.

The results obtained by the use of the different forms of the anterior coty-
loid cavities in the classification of the Carabidae are satisfactory, and a gi-eat
help in determining the position and afTinities o^ many genera in the family;
but their use causes the arrangement of the tribes to differ greatly from the
system now generally recognised. Taking the "Catalogus Coieoptei-orum
Europae "(1906) as a standard of the present arrangement of the tribes the
plan here adopted brings about the following changes of position. The Scari-
tinae, Elaphrinae and Lorocerinae would come first, followed by the Omonhro-
ninae and the Carabinae; the position of the tribes from Morioninae to Pori-
goninae would remain the same; Granigcrinne, Harpalinae, Zabrinae, Amarinae.
Pterostichinae, Masoreinae. and Odacanthinao would follow as members of the
Carabidae uniperforatae (but my arrangement of the tribes of this division
would not be the same as in the Catalogus). Apotominae. Panageinae, Chlae-
iiiinae, Oodinae, Licininae, Lebiinae, Dryptinae, and Brachyninae would be placed
in the Carabidae biperforatae. The position of the following tribes in my sys-
tem may be indicated :— Anchonderini and Egini to be included in the Otiacan-

BY THOMAS G. SLOANE. 117

tiiiiii as suggested by Sc-liaum; Cratoceriiii (as typified by the genus Basolia)
comes into the Carabidae uniperforate ; Mormolyeini, Agriini, Anthiini, Graph-
ipterini, and Oithogonini, all of which I have examined, belong to the Carabidae
biperforatae.

With regard to the plan of having- names for the six great sections into which
the system here advocated divides the Carabidae, it has seemed to me that an
undoubted benefit of definiteness results from its use, therefore I hope ii will
prove acce]3table to Carabophiles.

Middle co.ral cavities. As a matter of some interest it may be placed on
record that in the Carabidae generally (inclnding Metrius) the middle coxal cavi-
ties are confluent, the mesosternum being arched to cover the opening between
the cavities by its meetins; with the metasternum between the coxae; but, m. the
tribe Ozaenini. as far as I have observed, each coxal cavity is completely de-
fuied, and separated from the other by a chitinous partition, as a result of the
close and continuous attachment of the mesosternum and metasternum. Further
investigation on this subject is required, both in the Carabidae generally, and in
the Ozaenini, where my observations have been confined to two species, viz.,
Pseudozaeua orientalis Klug., and Mystropomus subcostatus Chaud.

Anterior tibiae. — The spurs and their position. Hitherto authors seem to
have recognised practically only two plans, as far as the position of the two
spurs of the anterior tibiae are concerned, viz, (1) both terminal (as in Cara-
6ms), (2) one above the other (as in the Scaritini) ; but there is a want of exact-
ness about this statement of the case, as may be readily seen Ijy anyone who
will examine the position of the spurs in the tribes Ozaenini, Carabini, and Scari-
tini, not to mention others. One of the spurs never varies in its position
throughout the Carabidae, it is always at the inner side of the apex of the
tibia ; in the tribes Metriini and Ozaenini, the other spur is opposite the inner
one at the outer side of the apex; here there can be no question as to both
spurs lieing terminal, nor as to which is the inner, and which the outer. An ex-
amination of any member of the tribe Carabini will show that it is the spur
corresponding to the outer one in the Ozaenini that is the one which, by a
change in position, becomes placed on the lower side of the tibia, a little ob-
liquely above the inner spur; it is far moi'e distant from the apex in the Scari-
tini and other tribes. Dr. G. H. Horn habitually used the term "inner" for
the spur which varies in position; this is evidently an erroneous term, and seeing
that in e\ery case, where it is not opposite the inner spur at the outer side of
the ajiex. it is more or less above the apex, the term upper would seem more
suitable for it ; also I think the words "both spurs terminal" can only accurately
be applied to the tibiae in the tribes Metriini and Ozaenini. AVhether the posi-
tion of the spurs in Metriini and Ozaenini implies any relationship between these
tribes T am not prepared to say, but I believe the form of the anterior tibiae
found ill these two tribes is the most archaic now existing, and I attach a high
value to it.

CO-MPONENTS OF THE TaSMAXIAN CARAB-FAUNA.

Tile Carab-faura of Tasmania includes 18 tribes, 60 genera, and 183 species
[and there are. besides, 1 tribe (Chlaeniiiii), 1 genus {Chlaeiiins) and 9 species re-
ported from the islands of Bass Strait; also, the introduced Laemostenwi eoni-
planati(s Dej.] Two tribes, 8 genera, and 59 species have not yet been found
on the mainland of Australia; this endemic part of the fauna is essentially

118 THE CARABIDAE OF TASMANIA,

Antarctic. On tbe whole the Carab-lauua of Tasmania is an Australian one
modified by the presence of a greater proportion of Antarctic forms than occur
in the fauna of the continent, and by the absence of the numerous oriental
tribes, genera anil species that are such a conspicuous clinracter of the C;i.<ibidae
of Australia.

Keejiiug in view accepted jieological opinions, it is evident there may well
be tiiree component parts in the insect fauna of Tasmania, viz., (1) an original
Mesozoic fauna similar to that of Australia in the Mesozoie era ; ( 2 ) an Antarc-
tic element introduced along with the Marsupials not later than the Miocene;
(3) an inflow of immigrants from Australia in late Pliocene and Pleistocene
times. Of these, the Antarctic will be the most easily discernible, for tlie other
two components are parts of one fauna, as it apjieared before and after the long
Eocene-Miocene separation between Australia and Tasmania. It is obvious that
the glaciation of Tasmania during the Koscuisko epoch (Pleistocene) must have
profoundly affected both the original (Pre-Tertiary ) and Antarctic (E'icene-
Miocene) faunas, for only on the low lands fciuld any insects have survived.
This glacial period must also have prevented the access to Tasmania of many
warmth-loving Australian groups during the la.st union of Ta.smania with Aus-
tralia, and it will hive lielped the spread of Antarctic species along the cord'llera
of Eastern Australia.

I take the present opportunity to draw attention to a striking fact which is
disclosed by studying the present distribution of dragonflies. In the list of genera
of dragonflies given by Dr. R. J. Tillyard in his book, ''The Biology of Dr:igon-
flies," ]i. 300, he enumerates for the order Odonata, 36"2 genera Iselonging to the
different zoogeographical regions of the world. These are distributed between
the different regions in the following numbers: — Neotropical region. Ill cenera;
Nearctic, 24; Palaearctic, 14; Ethiopian, 70; Oriental, 82; Australian, 1. Theso
figures show 242 genera in the three southern lanl masses of the globe, as against
120 genera in the three nortliern land masses. In 1806 I obtained a simihii' re-
sult for the tiger beetles, my figures showing 30 genera found in the three so;ilhern
land areas, as against 8 in the three northern areas. This question requires to be
treated in a similar way for other orders and families of insects before any in-
ferences of value can be drawn from it, but the results obtained from these two
widely-separated groups of insects have led me to suppose (1) that the present
distribution of insects may have been mainly from the south, and (2) that the
present distribution of animals may be, even in such an ancient class as the
Insecta, largely a matter of tlie Tertiary period ; this latter inference would
mean that the northern lands had undergone more vicissitudes in the destruction
of their animal life during the Tertiary period than southern lands, and had
been since the l)eginning of Tertiary limes largely stocked from the south.

Family CARATUnAE.

Table of Tribes found in .Australia and Tasmania.

1. (101 Middle coxal cavities not entirely enclosed by the sterna, epimera

of the mesosternum attaining the coxae. Carabidae disjunctae.

2. (7) Anterior coxal cavities closed behind Carabidae clausae.

3. (41 Anterior tibiae emarginate on inner side, both spurs tenninal .Oz.\kxini.

4. (3) Anterior tibiae emarginate on inner side, one spur above apex

BY THOMAS G. SLOANE. 119

5. (6) Body not pedunculate, bases of prothorax and elytra in contact with

one another. (Elytra 10-striate basad from apical declivity.)

MiGADOPlNl.

6. (5) Body pedunculate, bases of prothora.x: and elytra remote from one

another Scaritini.

7. (2) Anterior coxal cavities open beh'nd Cakabidae apketae.

8. (91 Mandibles strongly dentate on inner side. Outer apical angle of an-

terior tibiae prolonged Pamboeini.

9. (8) Mandibles unarmed on inner side. Outer apical angle of anterior tibiae

not prolonged Carabini.

10. (1) Middle coxal cavities entirely enclosed by the sterna, epimera of the

mesosternum not attaining the coxae . . . . Cakabidae conjunctae.

11. (32) Anterior coxal cavities with a single opening inwards

Cakabidae unipekforatae.

12. (17) Head with one supraorbital seta on each side. Posterior marginal

.seta of piothorax, if present, distant from basal angle. Anterior
tarsi in c?, if with vesture beneath, usually with fourth joint clothed
— often intermediate tarsi also with vesture beneath

13. (16) Posterior marginal seta of prothora.x present, distant from basal angle.

14. (15) Antennae with three basal joints glabrous; also fourth joint, at least

near base. Vesture of tarsi in c?, if present, spongiose Broscini.

15. (14) Antennae with three basal joints glabrous; fourth joint setulose. Four

joints of anterior tarsi in d biseriately squamose beneath. Agonicini.

16. (13) Posterior marginal seta of prothorax wanting, c?, if with tarsal ves-

ture, usually with fourth joint clothed (vesture either spongiose or
biseriate) Harpalini.

17. (12) Hiead normally with two supraorbital setae on each side. Posterior

marginal seta of prothorax, if present, near basal angle. Anterior
tarsi in d, if with vesture beneath, never with more than three basal
joints clothed — intermediate tarsi never with vesture beneath.

18. (231 Mandibles with a sensitive seta in scrobe of outer side. Antennae

with not more than two basal joints glabrous. Anterior tarsi in cJ
not clothed beneath on more than two basal joints.

19. (22) Palpi not subulate.

20. (21) Elytra with margin interrupted posteriorly by an internal plica. Maxil-

lary palpi with penultimate joint setulose. (Tarsi hairy above.)

Merizodini.

21. (201 Elytra with margin not interrupted posteriorly by an internal plica.

Maxillary palpi with penultimate joint glabrous Trechini.

22. (19) Palpi subulate Bembidiini.

23. (18) Mandibles usually without a sensitive seta in scrobe of outer side. An-

tennae with three basal joints glabrous. (If mandibles with a sensi-
tive seta in scrobe, then three joints of antennae glabrous — except
genus Pteroginiis with third joint setulose, but with three basal
joints of anterior tarsi biseriately squamose beneath in c?-)

24. (25) Prosternum with intercoxal declivity of prosternum projecting back-

wards in the form of a wedge. Paraglossae corneous, small, tri-
angular, much shorter than ligula. (Large black species 29-34 mm.
in length.) Cuneipectini.

25. (24) Prosternum with intercoxal declivity not triangularly produced back-

wards. Paraglossae membranous

26. (27) Elytra with an inner plica near each side, usually visible at apical

sinuosities , Pterostichini.

120 TIIK C.U^ABIDAE OF TASMANIA,

27. (26) Elytra without an inner plica.

28. (29) Head not constricted at base to a condyliform neck. Prothorax de-

pressed, wider than head. (Pro-episterna not \-isible at sides from
above.) Anchomenini.

29. (28) Head — except very rarely — narrowed behind eyes. Prothorax narrow,

very rarely wider than head.

30. (31) Tarsi with ungues simple Odacanthini.

31. (30) Tarsi with ungues pectinate Ctenodacttlini.

32. (11) Anterior co.xal cavities with two openings inwards

Carabidae biperforatae.

33. (58) Head without antennal grooves beneath.

34. (37) Mandibles with a sensitive seta in scrobe of outer side,

35. (36) Elytra truncate. Prothorax bordered at sides; sutures of prosternum

visible .' Bkachynini.

36. (35) Elytra entire at apex. Prothora.x constricted to a narrow base;

lateral border and sutures of prosternum not visible. (Body
pedunculate, scutellum on peduncle. Maxillary palpi very long
and narrow.) Apotomini.

37. (34) Mandibles without a sensitive seta in scrobe of outer side

38. (39) Clypeus emarginate, or excised, exposing basal membrane of labrum.

39. (38) Clypeus entire, not exposing basal membrane of labrum. Licinini.

40. (45) Elytra with an inner plica near each side visible at apical sinuosities.

41. (42) Head with two supraorbital setae on each side. Apical joint of

maxillary palpi obliquely set on to penultimate joint . . Panaoeini.

42. (41) Head with one supraorbital seta on each side. Apical joint of

ma.xillary palpi normally set on to penultimate joint.

43. (44) Elytra with ninth interstice variable in width, never linear or situated

in a furrow below plane of eighth interstice Chlaeniini.

44. (43) Elytra with ninth interstice linear and placed in a furrow . . Oodini.

45. (40) Elytra without an inner plica on each side.

46. (47) Tibial spurs long, serrulate on lower edge of outer side. Tetragonoderini.

47. (46) Tibial spurs short, not serrulate.

48. (51) Penultimate joint of labial palpi bisetose on anterior margin.

49. (50) Mentum supported at base by a raised submentum Lkbiini.

50. (49) Mentum not divided from gulae by a raised submentum. Pentaoonicini.

51. (48) Penviltimate joint of labial palpi plurisetose on anterior margin.

52. (55) Antennae with basal joint ver.v long, longer than two succeeding joints

together.

53. (54) Mentum narrowly united to submentum. base of maxillae unusuallv

exposed. Prothorax not bordered. Elytra without usual bordtr
and infiexed margin _ Dryptini,

54. (531 Mentum widely united to submentum. Prothorax and elytra with

lateral borders Zupijni.

55. (52) Antennae with basal joint not of unusual length, not as long as two

succeeding joints together.

56. (57) Ligula corneous; paraglossae well developed, free, membranous

Physocratophini.

57. (56) Ligula wide corneous: paraglossae adherent to ligula, often rudiment-

ary Helluonini.

58. (33) Head with distinct, usually long antennal grooves beneath

PsSUDOMORPHlNI.

V.Y THOMAS (j. SLOANE. 121

CABABIDAE DISJUNCTAE.

CARABIDAE CLAUSAE.

Tribe Migadopini.

Form elongate ; prothorax subquadrate, widest before middle, anterior angles ob-
tuse, not prominent; head not deeply set m prothorax .. .. Calyptogonia.
Form short oval; prothorax widest at base, anterior angles acute, projecting
forward to base of eyes; head deeply set in prothorax Stichonotus.

C A L Y P T 0 G O N I A, gen. IIOV.

Apterous. Head large, convex, not narrowed behind eyes, one supraorbital
seta on each side; eyes round, convex, not inclosed behind, distant from buccal
fissure; gular sutures wide apart. Labrum wide, emarginate, 6-setose. Clypeus
wide, truncate; ano'les rounded; sides covering upper basal angles of mandibles.
Mandibles short, wide, strongly rounded externally; scrobe short, asetose; inner
side with a triangular denticulate prominence behind middle; apex acute. Maxil-
lae with outer lobe 2- jointed, stout; inner lobe slender, strongly falcate, apex
acute, inner side pluridentate (about six or eight teeth equally distant from one
another, the odd teeth spiniform). Maxillary palpi rather long; second .joint
stout; two apical joints slender, apical a little longer than penultimate, truncate.
Mentum short, trisinuate, median sinuosit.y wids, shallow; sinus strongly bordered
in middle; lobes rounded at apex. Lignila corneous, wide, convex, truncate, bise-
tose : paraglossae cartilaginous, of same length as and adherent to ligula ; ' ex-
ternal angles rounded and bearing about four minute setules. Labial palpi with
penultimate joint rather short, bisetose; apical joint long (a half longer than
penultimate joint), club-shaped, compressed, truncate. Antennae setaceous; four
basal joints glabrous, first stout, hardly as long as second and third together, uni-
setigerous. second a little shorter than fourth, third a little longer than se.^ond
and fourth; joints 5-11 about equal, longer than third. Prothorax transverse;
base emarginate, wider than apex; lateral margins asetose; lateral border thick.
Elytra connate, truncate-oval, convex, bordered at base, striate; ten striae before
apical declivity, second stria extending backwards to beginning of apical de-
(livity; no dorsal iimbilicate punctures; apical margin rounded, not sinuate; or
interrupted by an internal plica on each side. Scutellum short, wide. Proster-
uum with anterior coxal cavities closed; intercoxal declivity not proininent, nar-
row. Mesosternum with epimera reaching coxae. Metasternum short ; episterna
short, wide, posterior margin oblique; epimera not visible. Legs moderate: pos-
terior coxae contiguous; anterior tibiae short, incrassate, two short stout spinules
externally at apex, inner side strongly emarginate, inner spur distant from apex;
posterior tibiae elongate, slender. Tarsi: posterior long, slender; anterior in c?
with four basal joints dilatate and with spongiose tissue beneath, second and third
joints much wider than first and fourth; intermediate about as long as tibiae,
two basal joints dilatate and spongiose beneath. Genotype, C. ater SI.

Calyptogonia ater, sp. nov.

Oblong, convex, black. Head large, convex (2.7 mm. across eyes), without
sculpture. Prothorax broader than long (2.7 x 3.6 mm.), widest about middle,
lightly narrowed to base, smooth; sides lightly arcuate; apex (2.5 mm.) narrower
than base (3 nun '. truncate, bordered on each side, angles obtuse, hardly prom-

122 THE CARABIDAE OP TASMANIA, ,

inont; base emarginate, not Vjordered, angles obtuse; lateral border thick, shnrply
defined by a narrow sulcus; median line lightly impressed. Elytra ovate (7 X
4.8 mm.), convex; ten well marked striae on each elytron becoming obsolescent
just before apex, second obsolete on apical decl'vity; interstices lightly convex,
lateral interstice seriate-punctate. Under surface impunctate. Length 11 — 13.5.
breadth 4.15 — 5.2 mm.

JIab. — Magnet (Lea), Cradle Mountain, Strahan (Carter and Lea). A
numerous series of specimens has been examined, collected by Messrs. Carter and
Lea in January, 1918, but Mr. Lea fii-st found this species at Magnet many jcars
ago.

Genus Stichonotus.

Stichonotus piceus Sloane.

llab. — Mount Wellington (Lea), Cradle Mountain (Carter and Lea).

Two specimens from Cradle Mountain, sent by Mr. Carter, are of shorter
and more oval form than the others, resembling in shape S. leai SI. more Ihan
S. piceux, with which I consider it eonspeeific.

Stichonotus leai Slr.ane.

Hub. — Magnet (Lea), Waratali (Carter).

Tribe Scaritini.

Ligula small, prolonged, narrow and bisetose at tip; paraglossae tree, small,
t;arrow, pointed. Base of ma.\illae not covered by mentum. Basal joint of an-
tennae unisetose Group Clivinidks.

Ligula broad, corneous; paraglossae corneous, ciliate at apex. Mentum broad
and concealing at sides base of maxillae. Basal joint of antennae asetose

Ci-oup Caeenides.
Group Clivinides.

Genus C l i v i x a.

Table of Tasmanian species.

1. (2) Elytra with four inner striae free at base, fifth joining sixth at base.

(Elytra with a black sutural stripe. I suturalis Piitz.

2. (ll Elytra with three inner striae free at base, fourth joining fifth at base.

3. (4) Clypeus with median part projecting beyond lateral parts, angular at

sides. Anterior tibiae 4-dentate externally . . . . heterogena Putz.

4. (31 Clypeus with anterior margin emarginate. lateral parts not divided from

median part. Anterior tibiae 3-dentate externally.

5. (6) i. Upper external tooth of anterior tiliiae w«ll developed. Prosternuni

without pectoral nodules vagans Putz.

6. (5) J. Upper external tooth of anterior tibiae obsolete. Prosternum with

a distinct pectoral ridge on each side ending anteriorly in a nodule

diliitipcs Putz. var. tasmanitiisis SI.

Clivixa suTlHALis Putzeys.

[= a. verticalis Putz.; = C. dursalis Blackb. (1889).]
My view is that the three names mentioned above have all been given to one
species. By an error I cited it as C. rlincoidnlis Blackb. in 1904,

Hab. — Hobart, Sandford (Lea). Also found in Southern and S.W. Aus-
tralia,

BY THOSIAS G. SLOAXE. 123

Clivixa heterogexa Piiizeys.

{■■= C. angustula Putz. ; = C. (Jcplanata Putz. )

7/a6.— Swansea (Simson); Latrobe (Lea). Widely spread in S.E. Aus-
tralia.

Clivixa vagaxs Putzeys.

In 1904 I applied the name ('. ratjans Putz., to a specimen from Tas!;iania
sent to me by Blackbnrn, and I still support this identification. It differs Irom
C. dilutipes Putz., var. tasmniiiensis SI. by c? with anterior tibiae more str. ngly
dentate, prosternum without pectoral nodules.

Ha().— Strahan (Lea).

Clivixa dilutipes Putzeys, var. ta'JMAXIexsis Sloane.

In 1896 I wrongly identified C. dilutipes and C. lepida; my C. lepida w'as C.
dilutipes Putz., and my C. dilutipes of 1896 is now C. misella SI. The variety
tasmaniensis differs from the typical C. dilutipes of the mainland by the shape of
the anterior tibiae in c?; — the digitations are more reduced, the upper very
feeble (practically obsolete), the penultimate greatly reduced: apical spur
longer and more obtuse at apex; in $ (as in, ('. dilutipes) the digitations are
moi-e developed than in c?, and tJie apical spur is pointed. The prosternum in c?
bears on each side before the coxae a well developed ridge, ending anteriorly in a
small nodule; this nodule is not found in ?.

Hab. — Launceston, East and West Tamar, Great Lake, Swansea, Evandale
(Simson, No. 2620); Latrobe (Lea).

Group Carenides.

Clypeus with intermediate angles obtuse : not marked ; lateral seta placed in-
wards from intermediate angles. Anterior tibiae with penultimate external tooth
placed distad from apical spur Scaraphites.

Clypeus with intermediate angkg prominent, triangular; later seta placed out-
wards from intermediate angles. Anterior tibiae with penultimate external tooth
placed basad from apical spur Carenum.

Scaeaphites rotuxdipexxis Dejean.

Hah. — Kelso, Swansea, Georgetown (Simson, No. 1791); King Is., S.E.
Australia, Lord Howe Is.

Carenum morosum Sloane (1907).

A species with anterior tibiae bidentate, ard elytra impunctate. It suits
'neither the description nor the figure of C. politulum Westw., which was described
as coming from Tasmania, it has not the posterior angles slightly emarginate.
Both the description and figure of C. politidum suggest a species closely resemb-
ling C. laeviyutum Macleay, but having the elytra impunctate, so that it may be
an impvmctate form of C. laevigatum; I have seen a Carenum from the mainland
with impunctate elytra that I could not distingaiish from C. laevigatum.

Hob.— George's Bay (Simson, No. 2313).

Note. — C. morosiun is very close to C. laevipenne Mac!., but has the border
of the prothorax much more raised at the posterior angles.

Carexum laevigatuji Macleay.

A specimen not differing from the form of C. laevigatum found in Victoria.
Hah. — Launceston (Simson).

124 THE CARABIDAE OF TASMANIA,

CAEABIDAE APERTAE.

Tribe Carabini.

Calosojia ^chayeki Eriflison.
(? = C. australe Hope; = C. grandipenne Castelnau J

The description of C. australe Hope reads as if founded on a rather dis-
coloured specimen of C. schayeri.

Hah. — Launeeston, Flinders Is. (Simson) ; King Is. (Lea); widely distributed
in Australia.

Note. — C. oceaiiiciiiii Perroud [^ C. a-ullcri Waterhouse (1898)]. I cannot
differentiate C. ualkeri (X.W. Australia) from C. oceauicum (Kew Caledonia).

CARABIDAE COX.JUXCTAE.

CARABIDAE UXIPERFORATAE.

Tribfi Broscini.

Table of Tasmanian genera.

1. (2) Suborbital cicatrix present (obsolete only in Tasmanian species of the

P. iastnanicus group). Elytra with four lateral punctures, penul-
mate puncture giving off a short stria (sides pluripunctate only in
P. viridiaeneus). (Mandibles with a ssta in scrobe of outer side.'

Promecodervs.

2. (1) Suborbital cicatrix wanting. Elytra pluripunctate along sides.

3. (6) Head transversely impressed behind eyes and with strong divergent

frontal impressions; one supra-orbital seta on each side: antennae
moniliform; mandibles short. Mes-episterna narrow.

4. (5) Mandibles with a seta in scrobe of outer side Eurtltchnvs.

5. (4) Mandibles without a seta in scrobe of outer side .. Chtlnus (nom. nov.)

6. (3) Head very large, transverse and frontal impressions obsolete: three

supra-orbital setae and one or two punctures on vertex on each side;
antennae long, slender. Mes-episterna wide. S- Anterior femora
not protuberant on lower side Pekcosoma.

Genus P r o it e c o d e r r .s.

Table of Tasmanian species.

1 (2) Elytra pluripunctate along sides; — about eight or ten punctures ex-

tending from shoulders to apex viridiaeneus SI.

2 (1) Elytra quadripunctate on sides: — one puncture posthumeral, the

others on apical third, penultimate strioliform.

3 (14) Head with a distinct suborbital cicatrix.

4 (5) Apex of, abdomen in c? with three setigerous pores, set in a triangle,

in $ with two setigerous pores on each side of apex. S- — Anterior
femora strongly and suddenly dilatate basad from middle of lower
side; ventral segments 3 — 5 piliferous. Length, 13-1.5 mm.

bfuiinicornis Dej.

5 (4) .Apex of abdomen in S with one, in S with two setigerous pores on

each side of apex. c?. — Anterior femora not suddenly dilatate;
ventral segments with only the two usual ambulatorial setae.

6 (13) Legs dark.

7 (12) Dorsal surface convex, c?- — Two or three basal joints of middle tarsi

with vesture beneath.

BY THOMAS G. SLOANE. 125

S (9) Impressions of ventral segments linear. Posterior tarsi with apical
joint wide at base, subparallel on sides, c?. — Twxd basal joints of
middle tarsi with vesture beneath. Length, 13-16 mm.

gibbosus Gray.

9 (S) Impressions of ventral segments foveiform. Posterior tarsi with apical
joint elongate, narrow at base. <S. — Three basal joints of middle
tarsi with vesture beneath.

10 (11) Prothorax with border subsinuate before basal angles, these subrecfc

angular, very slightly obtuse . Length, 15 mm. . . cordicollis SI.

11 '(10) Prothorax with border arcuate to base, basal angles open. Length,

12-13 mm bassi Cast.

12 (7) Dorsal surface depressed. <S ■ — Intermediate tarsi naked beneath;

anterior tarsi with four joints clothed beneath. (Head strongly
impressed across vertex; c?. — Posterior tibiae curved.) Length,
12-14 mm curvipes SI.

13 (6) Legs testaceous. (Cupreous. S- — Middle tarsi naked' beneath.)

Length, 7.. 5 — 9 mm aiprescfiis SI.

l-l (3) Head with suborbital cicatrix obsolete. 6- — Middle tarsi naked be-
neath.

15 (16) <S . — Four joints of anterior tarsi with vesture beneath. Length, 11

mm longus SI.

16 (15) S- — Three joints of anterior tarsi with vesture beneath.

17 (18) Prothorax with sides roundly curved to base, basal angles open.

Length, 10 mm tasmanicus Cast.

IS (17) Prothorax with sides obliquely cur\-ed to base, basal angles obtuse
but marked. Length, S.5-10.5 mm. plehius SI.

Phojiecoderus subdepeessus Guer.

I only kuow P. elegans Cast., from the Melbourne district, as a species which
suits Putzeys' description of P. subdepressiis Guer. Putzeys' treatment of the
two sjjecies P. subdepressus and P. elegans in his "Revision" of 1873 leaves the
impression on my mind that only one species was before him. I have not seen
any species from Tasmania that is P. subdepressus Guer.

Promecodeeit.? modestus Cast.

This species is said by Castelnau to be from Tasmania. Castelnau's descrip-
tion might ajiply to P. longus SI., but. in his Revision. Putzeys, with Castelnau's
single specimen (?) before him, says it has the basal angles of the prothorax
rectangidar. I have not seen it from Tasmania, or the mainland.

Promecoderus viridiaeneus Sloane (1915).

Ha!).— Stanley, Zeehan (Simson, No. 3465) ; Cradle Mountain, Strahan,
Waratali (Carter and Lea).

PROMEC0DERU.S BECXNIOORNTS Dejean.

(^ P. degener Guer.)

A variable species in size and appearance. I attribute to it all Tasmanian
specimens with the basal angles of the prothorax very wide (open), and which
have in the c? the following characters: — Ventral segments 3 — 5 plurisetose in
middle, apical segment with three setigerous punctures on each side, placed tri-
angularly (two of the punctures marginal) ; anterior femora suddenly dilatate on

120 THE C'ARABIDAE OF TASMANIA,

lower side (usuallj' armed with a denticule) ; posterior trochanters very long aud
obtusely pointed; anterior tarsi with four, intermediate with two joints clothed
beneath. Leng1:h, 11 — 14.5 mm.

Hah. — Denison Gorge, Ben Lomond (Simson No. 3052); Strahan (Carter and
Lea); Marrawali. Wilmot, Sheffield, Burnie, Devonport. Ulverstone (Lea).

Var. ovicoLLis Cast. I can only regard P. ovicollis Cast., as a variety of
P. brunnicornis Dejean, from which it differs by its more convex form, reddish
antennae, c? with anterior femora less swoUen beneath, and with the denticule
obsolete; posterior femora less ampliate on lower side, posterior trochanters
stouter and shorter.

Hab.—Laxmceston. Great Lake (Simson, No. .3091); Hobart (Lea).

PROiiEcoDERUs GiBBO.su.s Gray.

(= p. mastersi Macleay.)

Distinguished by its convex form, sharply marked ba.sal angles of prothorax,

strongly striate elytra, fourth and fifth ventral segments with a trausvei-se linear

impression on each side. Length, 13 — 16 mm. I cannot now differentiate P. moii-

tersi MacL, of the mainland from the Tasmania-i P. gibhosus.

Ilab. — Launceston, Brighton, Avoea, Hobart (Simson, No. 1166); Ulver-
stone (Lea).

Promecoderus curvipes, sp. nov.

Elongate-oval, depressed; head transversely impressed across vertex; pro-
thorax oval, depressed, abruptly declivous to basal angles, these open; elytra
oval, depressed on disc, lightly striate, interstices depressed, a little undulate;
ventral segments 4- -6 foveolate on each side. Bronzed — or aeneous — black; liead
and prothorax nitid, rather virescent; inflexed margins of elytra rather cupreous;
undersurface and femora nitid, virescent; tibiae, tarsi, and antennae piceous
brown.

Head large (2.75 mm. across eyes); vertex convex; eyes round, convex;
postoeular part of orbits well developed, about one half size of eyes. Protiiorax
rather oval (4 X 3.9 mm.), widest about anterior third; sides lightly rounded;
apex wide, lightly emarginate ; anterior angles a little prominent, not near neck :
disc depressed; a wide, shallow, transverse impression before base; basal angles
obtuse, placed beneath a lateral declivity; border narrow, wider anteriorly than
posteriorly, obsolete on middle of base; median line lightly impressed. Elytra
oval (7.5 X 4.5 mm.), depressed (but not flat) on disc, a little declivous to
peduncle, wide across base, lightly rounded on sides; striae light, rather erenulate,
seventh and eighth obsolete. Apical ventral seginent in c? witli one. in 2 with
two setae on eacli side of apex.

c?. — Anterior femora club-shaped, not suddenly inflated or dentate on lower
•side; posterior tibiae arcuate on lower side, wide at apex, densely fringed with
setae on apical half of lower side : anterior tarsi with four joints wide and
spongiose beneath; intermediate tarsi narrow, not clothed beneath. Lerisrtli.
12—14, breadth, 4.2—4.5 mm.

TTah. — Tasmania (Simson, No. 3111) .

Fourteen specimens have been examined. In ajipearance it resembles P.
hrinnvcornif: Dej.; l)ut differs by basal angles of prothorax more overlapped by
tlie sides of the segment, and less widely open; and by the following very distinct
characters of the male : — anterior femora not suddenly and greatly dilatate and
dentate on lower side; posterior trochanters shorter; posterior tibiae bent in-

BY THOMAS G. SLOANE. 127

wards and fringed witli hair on lower side; intermediate tarsi narrow, not
spongiose beneath; ventral segments not pilose in middle. It is allied to P.
tongtis SI., from which it differs by size larger, curvature and hair-fringe of lower
side of posterior tibiae in male.

Promecoderus cuprescens^ sp. nov.

Elongate-ovijl, rather depressed; prothorax oval-eordiform, lateral border
narrow, obsolescent near base ; elytra oval, finely crenulate-striate ; anterior f wnora
not greatly swollen on lower side; c?, anterior tarsi with four joints dilatatc and
spongiose "beneath, intermediate tarsi without spongiose tissue beneath. Cupreous,
under surface aeneous; legs ferruginous, femora darker than tibiae; antennae
fuscous, base testrx-eous.

Head cupreous, eyes convex, prominent, lightly inclosed behind; temporal
cicatrix distinct. Prothorax broader than long (2.3 X 2.5 mm.), depressed, more
or less subfoveate; base strongly bordered on fach side; lateral border narrow,
reduced and almost obsolete just before base ; sides- very declivous to basal angles,
these rectangular. Elytra oval (5X3 mm.), lightly convex; striae distinct (less
so near sides), a little crenulate; interstices depressed, more or less feebly undu-
late; three posterior lateral impressions foveiform, penultimate one not gi^-ing
off a striole. Ventral segments 3—5 without lateral foveae or sulci; apical seg-
ment in d' 1-, in ? 2-setose on each side of apex. Length, 7.5 — 9, breadth,
3—3.25 nun.

Hah. — Cradle Mountain, Waratah (Carter End Lea). A good series of
specimens.

A very distinct species, differing from all others by the following characters
in conjunction: — small size, coppery colour, and light-coloured legs. Prom P.
tasmanicus Cast, (which also has the intermediate tarsi naked beneath in d), it
differs by colour, prothorax less transverse, less rounded on sides, basal angles
much lower down on sides, and not so obtuse, elytra less convex. There are some
foveae on the prothorax which vary in number and distinctness; usually four are
more or less distinct : two about equidistant from median line and border at widest
part of segment, and two others behind these aliout level with end of median line
— sometimes two otlier foveae may be noticed, one on each side of the median
line at the middle of its length.

Promecoderus loxgus, sp. nov.

d. — Depressed, elongate. Upper surface aeneous or nigro-aeneous ; undei sur-
face nitid, of a gTeenish bronzy colour, inflexed margins of elytra aeneous; tarsi,
palpi, and antennae reddish.

Head with suborbital cicatrix obsolete; eyes pi-ominent; post-ocular part of
orbits about one third length of ej'e, curving continuously with eye. Prothorax
depressed, as long as broad (3.1 X 3.1 mm.), lightly rounded on sides, lightlv and
widely transversely impressed near base, declivous to basal angles, these obtuse;
a light rounded impression on each side a little before middle. Elytra oval (6.5
X 4 mm.), depressed, lightly striate, discal striae crenulate, lateral striae obsolete;
humeral angles marked. Ventral segments 3 — 5 witli a lightly impressed rounded
fovea on each side ; -apical segTiient with one seta on each side at apex. Anterior
femora club-shaped, lower side not sharply inflated or dentate; anterior tarsi with
four joints wide and spongiose beneath; interm;Hliate tarsi narrow, not clothed
beneath. Length. 11; breadth, 4 mm.

Hah. — Launceston. Zeehan (Simson).

128 THE CARABIDAE OF TASMANIA,

There were two specimens in the Simson Coll. without number. It is of
evidently larger size and narrower form than the species which I identify as P.
tasmanicus Cast.; both prothorax and elytra much less strongly rounded on sides;
anterior tarsi in male with four, not three, joints clothed beneath. It cannot be
P. subdepressus Guer. by basal angles of prothorax not rectangular — as said by
Putzeys .

Promecoderus tasmanicus Casteluau.

I attribute the name P. tasmanicus to a species given to me by the late Mr.
George Masters, ticketed "Tasmania" ; this specimen evidently represents the ^orm
with a wide prothorax referred to by Castelnau. The following description will
enable it to be recognised: —

Nigro-virescent ; inflexed margins of elytra aeneous ; under surface with slight
viridescent reflections; anterior tarsi and palpi reddish. Elliptical-oval, rather
depressed. Head with suborbital cicatrix obsolete; eyes convex, prominent; post-
ocular part of orbits about one third length of eye. Prothorax broader than
long (2.7 X 3 mm.), cordiform-oval, strongly rounded on .sides, lightly transversely
depressed across base, declivous to basal angles, these obtuse. Elytra oval,
declivous to peduncle, rather strongly and roundly declivous to apex; disc lightly
striate; humeral angles marked. Anterior tarsi with three joints clothed beneath;
intermediate tarsi not clothed beneath. Length, 10.2, breadth, 3.7 mm.

Specimens received from Mr. Lea ticketed "Mount Wellington" only differ
slightly, as under:-— c?, colour black; form narrower; both prothorax and elytra
less strongly rounded on sides. Length, 10.5; proth., 2.75 x 2.85; breadth. 3.6
mm. This is probably the narrow form referred to by Castelnau. P. tasmanicus
was not represented in the Simson Coll.

Promecoderus plebius, sp. nov.

Elliptical-oval, lightly convex; head with suborbital cicatrix obsolete; pro-
thorax with basal angles obtuse, but marked ; elytra oval, convex, striate on disc.
Black; legs piceous; tarsi and antennae piceous red.

Head ordinary (2 mm. across eyes). Prothorax lightly convex, subcordate,
as long as broad (2.7 X 2.7 mm.), widest about anterior third, lightly rounded on
sides; sides narrowed in a gentle curve to base; basal area with a shallow, riither
rounded impression on each side; border narrow, well developed on each side of
i'pex and base; basal angles set low down, open but marked. Elytra oval (5.5 x
3.5 mm.) ; striae well marked on disc, obsolete on sides. Ventral segments 4 — 6
with a shallow impression on each side. (?. — Anterior tarsi with three joints
clothed beneath; intermediate tarsi not clothed beneath. Length, 8.5—10,
breadth. 3.3—3.8 mm.

Hub. — Ben Lomond, 5000 feet (Siinsmi). Six specimens.

I separate P. plebius from P. tasmanicus Cast., by shape more conNcx. espe-
cially of prothorax, which is less strongly rounded on sides, and with basal angles
set lower down, and more marked, though obtuse; even should it be regarded as a
variety of P. tasmanicus, .its separation under a varietal name seems advisable.

Genus E u R Y L y c H N r .s.
EuRTLTCHNUS FEMORALis Sloane (1915).

A black species apparently only differing from the genus Chiihiiis
(= Li/chnus Putzeys) by the presence of a mandibular seta. Prothorax sinuate
on sides before base, basal angles marked. Length. 14 mm.

//aft.— Benisim Gorge (Simson No. .3413); Mount Horror (Lea).

BY THOMAS 0. SLOANE. 129

Genus C H y l n u s, uom. uov.
Lychnus Putzeys.

The name Lychnus was already in use when Putzeys proposed it in 1868; I
now suggest Chylnus (formed by a rearrangement of the lettera in Lychnus) to re-
place it.

Chylnus ater Putzeys.

{^= Lychnus striatuhis Bates, = L. stranrjulahis Bates.)

1 have idcntifled a specimen in my eoUection as Lychnus ater Putz.. with
every likelihood of the identification being correct, seeing that a comparison with
specimens in the Howitt Coll. named "Mecodema tasmanicum Castelnau" snowed
it to be the same species; Putzeys in his "Revision" of 1873 notes that there were
liine specimens in the Castelnau Coll. under the name Mecodema tasmauicmn
— a cabinet name. I conclude that Chylnus ater Putzeys = Lychnus striatuhis
Bates, and that L. strangulatus Bates (numbered 3051 in the Simson Coll.) is a
larger and smoother form; specimens in the Simson Coll. (No. 3084). and also
taken by Jlessr-s. Carter and Lea at Wilmot and Waratah, evidently represent the
convex tliird species alluded to by Bates (Cist. Ent., 1878, p. 318), but I am
not prepared to distinguish it from Chylnus atei, nor can I separate Lychnus
strauyulatus Bates by any definite characters. The species seems a variable one
in size and appearance, the sides of the prothorax have one or two setae just
before the middle, and from two to six setae near the anterior angles. Length,
16 — 20, lireadth, 5.5 — 0.6 mm. One dwarfed specimen, 15.5 X -1.7 mm.

Hab. — Launeestou, Denison Gorge, Ben Lomond, 4000 feet (Simson No.
3051); Zeehan (Simson), Wilmot, Waratah (Carter and Lea) [Simson, No.
3684]; Great Lake (Simson).

Genus P e r c o ,s o :.[ a.

The genus Percosoma is a distinct one characterised by head large, mandibles
long, decussate; antennae elongate, second joint longer than fourth; prothorax
plurisetose along sides, lateral border not attaining base; elytra with fifth inter-
stice punctate; mes-epimera wide; posterior tarsi a little compressed, fifth joint
narrow, vertical on sides (this character occurs also to a more marked degree in
some genera of Searitini, e.g., Scaraphites).

Elytra sub-striate, interstices flat. Length, 25 — 27 mm. .. . carenoides White.
Elytra strongly striate, interstices convex on sides. Length, 24-35 mm.

sulcipenue Bate?.
Percosoma cauenoides White.

ffab.^Mount AA'^ellington (Simson, No. 2727).

Percosoma sulcipenxk Bates.

Jlah. — Denison Gorge, Wynyard (Simson, No. 3463); Cradle Mountain,
Waratah (Carter and Lea).

Tribe Agonicini, trib. nov.

I place between the tribes Broscini and Harpalini a new tribe which is re-
quired for two Tasmanian species in the Simson collection; the following will be
the definition of this tribe.

Head with one sui)ra-orbitai puncture on carh side; mandibles long, decu.ssate;
serol)e of outer si>'e asetose. Antennae inserted under a latei'al ridge, slender;

130 THE CARABIDAE OF TASMANIA^

l;asal joint long, scapiform; three basal joints glabrous. Labriiin emargiiiate,
4-setose. Mentum toothed. Palpi elongate; apical joints setose, ot labial .securi-
form. Prothorax suboval; basal angles obtuse; two marginal punctures on each
side, anterior at apical, posterior at basal third. Elytra convex, oval, striate;
disc impunctate; scutellar striole very short, nt base of first in'^erstice; margiL
not interrupted posteriorly by an inner plica. Anterior eoxal cavities with a
single opening inwards. Mes-epimera not reaching eoxal cavities; inet-episterna
iiuadrate, not divided from epimera. Legs long: anterior tibiae emarginate be-
neath; upper spine at inner side of emargination. d'. — Anterior tarsi with four
joints dilatate and biseriately squamosa beneath; fourth joint of anterior and in-
termediate tarsi emarginate; posterior tarsi long, narrow, fourth joint triangular,
simple.

A G O N I c A, gen. ncv.

Head narrow ; front depressed, smooth, lightly bi-impressed ; one seta above
middle of eye on each side; eyes prominent, hemispherical, not inclosed at base,
distant from buccal fissure beneath. Labrum wide, short, emarginate, 4-setose.
Clypeus not divided from front by a visible suture, bisetose. Mandibles long,
acute, decussate, without a seta in scrobe of outer side. Mentum with a pro-
minent triangular median tooth. Palpi elongate: labial with penultimate joint
long, slender, bisetose; apical joint widely securiform, setulose: maxUlary long,
slender; two apical joints setose; terminal joint fusiform, stouter and a little
longer than penultimate, compressed, blunt at apex. Antennae sttaceous, rising
at apex of a marginal ridge; basal condyle visible; basal joint long, nearly as
long as three succeeding joints together; three basal joints glabrous; second
and fourth joints much shorter than third. Pi-othorax oval, depressed; basal
angles rounded; two marginal setae on each side, anterior at apical third, pos-
terior at basal third. Elytra oval, convex, not bordered across base, lightly
striate ; striae well marked on disc, faint towards sides ; margin not interrupted
posteriorly by an internal plica. Body shortly pedunculate; seutellum on
jjeduncle. Prosternum with eoxal cavities closed behind ; mes-epimera not reach-
ing coxae; met-episterna quadrate, no visible suture between eiiisternum and
epimeron. Anterior eoxal cavities with one opening inwards. Ventral segments
without transverse sulci; apical segment in c? with two marginal setae on each
side. Legs long: femora — anterior a little con.pressed, swollen: interme<lia;e
roundly swollen on lower side about anterior thiid; posterior lightly swollen on
lower side; tibiae — anterior emarginate beneath, a sharp spur above emargin:;tion,
apical spur short, stout; posterior slender, spurs short, c?. — Anterior tarsi with
i'our basal joints dilatate, biseriately squamulosc beneath; fourth joint of four
anterior tarsi short, emarginate, of posterior tarsi triangular, simple: ujiper sur-
face of tarsi sparsely setose.

AnoNiCA .SIM.SONI, sp. nov.

Elliptical, convex; mandibles promiuenK decussate; liibrum s-hort, emargin-
ate, 4-s('tose; antennae with basal joint elongate (hmger than two succc((ling
joints together); front strongly l)i-im]iressed ; eyes convex, distant I'roui Imccal
fissure beneath. Black.

Head narrow (1.3 mm. across eyes); frontal impressions wide; hittial setae
of clypcus at anterior extremity of frontal impressions; clyjical suture obsolete.
Prothorax hardly broader than long (2 X 2.1 mm.), not declivous to base in

BV THOMAS G. SLOANU. 131

nuiliUf. laevigate (some faint transverse striolae crossing median line) ; anterior
angles wide, liartlly prominent ; sides arcuate ; base truncate, angles rounded ;
border narrow, marginal channel narrow; lateral basal foveae short, shallow.
Elytra oval (4 >< 2.8 mm.), convex, strongly declivous to apex, striate; five ^nner
striae well marked on disc ; striae 6 — 8 obsolescent on sides, eighth deeply impressed
posteriorly ; intei'stices not convex, third impunctate ; lateral border narrow,
reaching peduncle Length, 7.5. breadth. 2.8 nun.
Hdb. — Zeehan (Simson). Unique.

Agoxica ovalipexxis, sp. nov.

Elliptical-oval ; head bi-impressed ; prothorax quadrate-oval, basal angles
obtuse, jjosterior marginal seta at basal third; elytra oval, striate on disc, lateral
striae obsolete, two inner interstices convex near base, third impunctate. Blark.

Head narrow (0.8 mm. across eyes); vertex convex; front depressed, bi-
impressed; impressions extending on to clypeus; clypeus declivous to anterior
margin; lateral seta very near outer angle, outside (not in) anterior extremity of
frontal impression. Prothorax as long as broad (1.2 X 1.2 mm.), laevigate;
anterior angles wide, hardly advanced; sides evenly and lightly arcuate; base
truncate, angles rounded off; border narrow, extending round basal angles; mar-
ginal channel narrow; median strongly impressed. Elytra oval (2.6 X 1.8
n»m.), lightly convex; humeral angles rounded: apical curve subsinuate on each
side: four inner striae well marked, fifth faint, 6 — 8 obsolete on sides, eighth
deeply impressed posteriorly. Length, 4.5, breadth, 1.8 nmi.

ifab.— Lottah (Simson No. 3120).

A single specimen was in the Simson collection; it differs from A. simsoni SI..
by smaller size, less convex form, lateral setae of clypeus not in frontal impres-
sions, &c.

Tribe HarpaUni.
Table of Tasmanian genera.

1 (81 Labial palpi with penultimate joint plurisetose. (Elytra fully striate,

eyes distant from buccal fissure beneath, c?. — If with four anterior
tarsi squamosa beneath, then four joints clothed with dense tissue
beneath. )

2 (5) Posterior tarsi long; first joint as long as, or longer than two succeed-

ing joints together.

3 (4) Elytra with at least third interstice pluripvinctate . . Gnathaphanus.

4 (3) Elytra with third interstice unipunctate Diaphokomebds.

5 (2) Posterior tarsi short: first joint short, not as long as two succeeding

joints togeUier.

6 (7) Sinus of mentum with a median tooth Hyphabpax.

7 (6) Sinus of mentum without a median tooth Cenogmus.

8 (1) Labial palpi with penultimate joint bisetose. (In Ainblystoinus some

other feebly developed setules also.)

9 (12) Labium with paraglossae overlapping one another in front of ligula;

mentum edentate.

10 (11) Elytra with first stria present, or interrupted near base, or obsolete, —

if present, bent outwards near base and a scutellar striole present
on first interstice, — if interrupted, scutellar striole obsolete or nearly
so. c? — Four anterior tarsi either with or without vesture beneath.

AsiBLTSTOJinS.

11 (10) Elytra with first stria bent inwards near base, scutellar striole wanting.

c?. — Anterior tarsi without vesture beneath Haplaneb.

132 THE CARABIDAE OF TASMANIA,

12 (9) Labium with paraglossae free at apex; mentum dentate. (Elytra

fully striate.)

13 (14) \'entral segments (including basal fovea in d'l glabrous. Posterior

tarsi long, first joint muth longer than se(?ond. S- — Four anterior
tarsi with joints 24 wide, clothed with dense tissue beneath

XemAiSLOSSA.

14 (131 Ventral segments (including basal fovea in c?) satulose. Posterior tarsi

short, first joint not as long as two succeeding joints together.
(J. — Four anterior tarsi with squamae disposed biseriately at sides

of joints EUTHENARUS.

Genus Gnathaphanus.

Gnathaphanu.s adelaidak Castelnau.

Hah. — Launceston, Brighton, Great Lake, Avoca, Hobart, Flinder.-: Is.
(Siinson No. 2481).

Genus Diaphorojierus.

Table of Tasmanian species.

1 (8) Elytra with humeral angles marked and dentate, third interstice uni-

punctate.

2 (7) Legs black, or with tibiae and tarsi piceous; antennae black, or

infuscate with basal joint ferruginous.

3 (4) Prothorax with sides not sinuate posteriorly, basal angles obtuse

(Colour bronze, or viridiaeneous) cdwart/si Casteln.

4 (31 Prothorax with sides sinuate posteriorly, basal angles square.

5 (61 Colour virescent. Length, 7 mm reilaii^s^itlus ChawX.

6 (5) Colour black. Length, S mm quadi-icollis Ohaud.

7 (21 Tibiae, tarsi, and antennae ferruginous. (Scutellar stride punctifonni.

Length, 6.5 mm viridipennis St.

S (1) Elytra with humeral angles not dentate, third interstice impuncta,te.
(Prothorax densely punctate on each side of base, sides strongly
sinuate to base, basal angles rectangular. Length, 9.7-10.5 mm.

pcratcr SI.

Xote. — D. amaroides Casteln. (= Ilarpalut: patnicloides Castelu. = //. raii-
diemensis Casteln. = 11. illawarensis Casteln., according to Chaudoir) is al.so re-
ported from Tasmania ; but, not having seen it from the island, I liave thought it
better not to include it in the table from sjieciuicns of the mainiami. It i> dis-
tinguished by its ferruginous tibiae and tarsi.

DlAI'HOROJIERrS KUWARDSI Ca^tl'luau.

I'.i'onzi'd, or bronzy-green; legs black; basal joint of anlcnnac testaceous.
Length, 8.5 mm. 1 consider this species to l)e conspecitic with />. edward.^i
Casteln., a species about which little is yet known.

Hid). — Falmouth (Simson), Stonor (Lea). Also occurs in X'icturia.

Dl.MMIOlIllMKlilS HEC'TAXCULUS Chaui

i)ir.

A viridcseent s]>iM-ics with basal angles of pi.itlinrax i-cclniii;iilMr. Length,
6.5 — 7 nnn.

Ilab. — Bi'ighton ( Siuison, uniiiuc). Also found in south-ea^tcni Austrrdia.

BY THOMAS G. SLOANE. 133

D1APHOROJIERU.S QUAiiRicOLLis Cliaudoir.

A specimen which I identify as I), quadricollis Chaud., from the description,
iiiis been sent to me by Mr. Lea for examination.

Dee]) black; prothorax with sides lightly sinuate before base, basal angles
square but obtuse at summit, lateral ba-sal impressions imininctate; elytra with
puncture of third interstice more distant from apex than usual. Length, 8.5 mm.

Ilah. — Zeehan (Lea).

DiAPiioiiOJiKitus viRiDiPEXXiSj sp. nov.

Oval, convex; head large, eyes prominent, lightly inclosed at base, mentuni
toothed; prothorax transverse, wider across base (2 mm.) than apex (1.5 mm.),
basal angles obtuse; elytra ovate, convex, strongly and fully striate, second inter-
stice with a very short striole at base, third interstice with a puncture about
posterior third, humeral angles dentate; undersurface glabrous; abdomen in (?
with a well marked, median, basal, shallow impressicm ; point of prosternum
sinirsely setulose; tirst joint of hind tarsi long, about as long as two succeeding
joints together; 6- — Four anterior tarsi dilatate, joints 1 — i densely clothed with
squamae beneath, the squamae arranged in longitudinal rows. Black, nitid; elytra
bluish green; femora piceous; tibiae, tarsi, antennae, and palpi ferruginous.

Head convex, not narrowed behinil eyes (1.5 mm. across eyes); post-ocular
part of orbits small, rising obliquely but abruptly from head. Prothorax laevi-
gata, convex, broader than long (l.ti x 2.2 mm.), roundly and decidedly narrowed
to apex, very lightly and obliquely narrowed to base; apex lightlx' emargiuate,
angles obtuse ; base truncate, angles obtuse but marked ; median line obsolescent ;
border entire. Elytra shortly truncate-oval (4 X 2.8 mm.), convex, strongly de-
clivous to apex; ai^ical curve short, hardly sinuate on each side; interstices sub-
convex, narrow and convex at apex; ninth interstice wide and with a double row
of punctures towards apex. Lengih, fi.5, breadth. 2.8 mm.

Hab. — Hobart (Lea). The type specimen belongs to Mr. Lea, and another
is in my collection, given to me by Mr. H. J. Carter, who found it at Hobart.

A small species, not like any other species of the genus Bktphoromerus; in
general appearance it resembles a species of Hypharpa.r, but is at once distin-
guished from the species of that genus by the form of the posterior tarsi, \ihich
have the basal joint much longer — longer than tKe elongate inner apical .spur of
the tibiae.

DiAPHOROMERU.S PERATER, Sp. nOV.

Oval, cou\ex. form robust; head large; prothorax trans\erse, strongly sinuate
on sides posteriorly, basal half closely punctate on each side, basal angles rec-
tangular; elytra strongly striate, interstices convex, third inqiunctate. humeral
angles marked but not dentate. Black.

Head large (2.(35 across eyes), convex; front obli(|uely de])ressed to anterior
margin; clypeus transversely impressed behind anterior margin between lateral
setae; clypeal suture distinct, linear, giving off at each end an oblic|ueIy divergent
line extending across frontal depression towards eye; left mandible hooked, pro-
jecting beyond labrum. right mandible folded under labrum and left mandible.
Prothorax broader than long (2.3 X 3.4 mm.) ; base truncate, wiiler (3 mm.) than
apex (2.7 mm.); sides rounded anteriorly, sinuate posteriorly and meeting base
at right angles; anterior angles a little prominent, obtuse; Ijasal angles rectangu-

134 THE CARABIDAE OF TASMANIA,

lar; upper surface depressed and with a light wide concavity on each side of oase,
closely and finely punctate towards base and along sides to marginal seta; a dis-
tinct curved anterior transverse line distant from anterior margin; median line
short, not deep; marginal channel wide; border reflesed on sides, entire on base,
extending almost to middle on each side of apex. Elytra ovate (6.2 x 4.5 nun.),
lightly convex; base wide, trancate; apical curve lightly sinuate on each fide;
striae deep; .stride at base of second interstice elongate; interstices convex,
strongly so on apical declivity. Posterior tarsi with basal joint almost as long
as two succeeding joints together. Length, 9.7 — 10.5, breadth. 4.2 — 4.5 mm.

Hab. — Tasmania (Simson Coll. No. 3686); Hobart, Huon River. B-,rnie
(Lea); "Warburton, Victoria (Sloane).

A very distinct species, whicli it seems only necessary to compare witli Har-
23alus moestits Dej., a species which I refer to Kijpharpax on account of its short
posterior tarsi. Compared with H. moestus, it is larger; head more depressed
anteriorly; prothorax with basal angles more sharply rectangular, anterior angles
more prominent, lateral channel wider, base more depressed on each side, punctura-
tion of basal parts finer, denser, and oversjn-eadiug more of the surface; elytra
less convex, basal border much less prominent at shoulders, striae deeper, scutellar
striole much longer, interstices more convex, third impunctate ( in H. moestus
unipunctate above apical declivity) ; posterior tai-si longer; first joint of antennae
black — not ferruginous.

Genus H y p H A R p A x.

Table of Tasmanian species.

1 (2) Elytra with third interstice unipunctate on apical declivity. J. — Pos-

terior femora strongly and sharply dilatate, dentate or subdentate

on lower side . (Prothorax with basal angles very obtuse. )

peroni Cast.

2 (V\ Elytra with third interstice unipunctate above apical declivity.

c?. — Posterior femora not strongly dilatate on lower side.

3 (4) Prothorax with basal angles obtuse (though a little marked), not

punctate on each side of base, except in bottom of basal impres-
sions. (Tibiae dull red with apex piceous) . Length, 5.7-7 mm.

australis Dej .

4 (31 Prothorax with basal angles well marked, punctate on each side of

base.
•"i (6) Prothorax with sides oblique to base. Elytra lightly convex; humeral
angles not dentate. Colour obscure, bronze: tibiae ferruginous.

piceous at apex. Length, 6.5 — 7 mm aereus Dej.

6 (5 1 Prothorax with sides sinuate before base, basal angles square. Elytra
very convex; humeral angles dentate. Colour black, legs black ..

moestus Dej .
HvpiiARPAX PERONI Castclnau.

{= 77. novae-hollandiae Cast., ^ H. inoniatits Blackb. (uon Gerniar).

= H. latiuscultis Chaudoir, ^ H. puntticauda Bates.]*

I identify specimens from Launceston in the Simson collection as Riipliarpax
peroni Cast , a sjiecies which Blackburn, from South Australian specimens, identi-

• I am indebted to Mr. H. E. Andrews.of London, for the information that Chaudoir'®
name was published before Bates's.

BY THOMAS G. SLOANE. 135

fled as Ilarpahts inornatus Germ., though Chauiloir had in 1878 put H. inornatus
Germ., as a synonym of Harpalus australis Dej. I believe that on this question
Chaudoir was right. The Simson collection contains specimens which are evi-
dently H. puncticauda Bates, by their heavier form, prothorax more rounded on
sides, and trochanters obtuse at apex (not almost straight on outer side nearly to
apex and truncated in a curve from inner side) ; this is the same thing, from
description, as H. latiusculus Chaudoir, but seems to rne conspecific with a speci-
men from Lannceston, which I cannot differentiate from H. peroni of the main-
land; therefore, I feel unable to consider //. puncticauda Bates as a variety, but
this is a point that can only be settled by careful collecting throughout Tasmania.
The sharpness of the angulation of the lower side of the femora in c? varies in
degree in Tasmanian specimens, as in other species of the genus; in the specimen
from Launceston referred to above, it is shortly dentate. In length Tasmanian
specimens vary from 6.7 to 8 mm., and vary in colour from a dull copper-c.:lour
to almost black. Tt was numbered 2478 and 2483 in Simson collection, but I
cannot differentiate the specimens so numbered.

Hab. — Launceston, Brighton, Evandale, Longford, Interlaken (Simson) : Par-
attah, Stonor, Hobart (Lea). Widely spread in Australia,

Hypharpax australis Dejean.

Hab. — Launceston, Evandale, Great Lake (Simson, No. 2484) ; Stonor. ]\Iount
Wellington (Lea) ; Lord Howe Island (Lea). Widely spread in S.E. Austr.iha.

Hypharpax aereus Dejean.

Ilab. — Hobart (Lea). Southern coastal districts of Australia.

Hypharpax moestus Dejean.

Hab. — Brighton ( Simson, No. 2881 ) ; Hobart ( Lea ) . Also reported I'rom
Melbourne.

Genus C E N 0 G M D s.

Cenogmus rotundicollis Castelnau.

Hab. — Tasmania (Lea). Very widely distributed over Australia.

Genus A m b l t s t o Ji u s.

Erichson, Kaf. Mark. Brandb., i., p. 59, 1837; Hispalis Rambur, Faun. A)idal.,
p. 135, 1842; Megaristerus Nietner, Ann. Mag. N.H., 1858, p. 427; Notopk-ilus
Blackburn, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 1887, p. 185; Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales,
1889, p. 1250; Thenarotidius Sloane, op. cit. 1898, p. 461; Psilonothus Sloane,
op. cit., 1899. p. 557.

All authoi-s have not been in agreement as to the position of the genus Ambly-
stomus; for Erichson, Lacordaire, Bates, Ganglbauer, and Tschitscherine its jjlace
was in the tribe Harpalini; for Schaum, in the Lebiini; for Bedel and Apfelbeck
in the Licinini; in the European Catalogue of 1906 it is placed in a special tiibe;
I believe it to represent a group in the tribe Harpalini. The genus is here used in a
wide sense, the genera Notophihis, Thenarotidius and Psilonothus being included in
it. Of these, Thenarotidius is unquestionably a synonym, and I do not know
definite reasons foi' maintaining yotophilus and Psilonothus as distinct. Koto-
philus has the clypeus and lalirum symmetrical, but the want of symmetry in

13() THK CARABIDAE OF TASMANIA,

Ambh/stomus varies so considerably that I do not tliink this a character on which
the genus should be founded. The clypeus and labrum cannot be said to be
as_\inmetrical in Psilonothus, and Ps. ovalis SI., has naked tarsi in d', but a species
described below, ,1. convexus, is evidently congeneric with Ps. orafo, yet has the
four anterior tarsi in c?, lightly dilatate and squamulose beneath.

Table of Tasmanian species.

1 (4i Met-episterna elongate: elytra striate near suture, puncture of third

interstice before apical declivity ; eyes near buccal fissure beneath-
Winged.

2 (3 1 Prothora.x arcuate to base, basal angles rounded, not marked. Leilgth,

3.3-3.5 mm iiiger Blackb.

3 (21 Prothorax decidedly and obliquely narrowed to base; basal angles ob-

tuse, but marked. Length, 2.3--2.5 mm. .. .. parvus. Blackb.

4 (li Met-episterna (excluding epimeral quadrate; elytra without striae

on disc, puncture of third interstice on apical declivity; eyes distant
from buccal fissure beneath. Apterous.

5 (6) c? with four anterior tarsi squamulose beneath. Length. \-A.h mm.

couie.xus SI.

6 (5 1 (S with anterior tarsi naked beneath. Length, 2.5 — 3mm. ovalis Si.

AilBLYSTOiirs (NoTOPillLCS) xic.F.R Blackburn.

Hah. — Evandale (Simson No. 3122); Latrobe, Jordan River. Strahan, j\Iount
Wellington (Lea). Common in South-eastern Australia.

A:wBLYSTOMU.s (NoTOPHiLis) PARVUS Blackburn.

Hah. — Launceston, Evandale. Zeehan (Simsuu. Xo. 2877); Jordan River
(Lea). South Australia.

AlIBLTSTOlirs CONVEXUS, SJl. nov.

Apterous, oval, convex; prothorax with lateral margin narrow; elytra smooth,
a fine puncture at position of third interstice near apical fifth ; met-cpis(erna
wide, short, quadrate — including epimera longer than broad; posterior tarsi with
first joint as long as three succeeding joints together. <S. — Abdomen at apex
bisetose on each side; four anterior tarsi with joints 1 — 4 lightly dil.atate and
sr|uamnlose beneath. Olivaceous-black; liasal joint of antennae ..nd tibiae testa-
ccniis-lirown.

Head sniootli; labrum. clypeus and front sliagreened, and sliowing some
miiuite punctures under a lens; eyes round, convex, distant from buccal fissure
beneath; mentuni edentate. Prothorax smooth, convex, transver.se — cordate (1.1
X 1.4 mm.) ; base wide; basal angles obtuse; lateral border narrow, more strongl.v
reflexed at basal angles, entire on base. Elytra smooth, convex, oval (2.6 ^ 2
mm.) ; eighth stria obsolete; submargina! punctures wantiui;' on niiddle of sides.
Length, 4.1—4.4, breadth, 1.75—2 mm.

Hah. — Brighton (Simson. No. 2858). Also fimnd l)y .Mr. Lea at Liu-irdale
and Port Lincoln, S. Australia.

A distinct species much larger tlian .L {Psihniothu.f) ovalis SI. Compared
with Amhliignathns minutux, a species I also refer to Amhli/stomus. r.nd to v, hicli
it is allied, the prothorax narrowly bordered at once distinguishes it

BY THOMAS G. SLOAXE. ' 137

Amblystojius (Psilonothus) ovalis Sloane.

Hab. — Strahan (Carter and Leal. This species, which extends from N.S.
Wales to Western Australia, was represented in the Simson collection by one
specimen, without exact locality.

Genus H A p l a n e r.

Haplaner velox Castelnau.

Hnh. — Wedge Bay (Hardy). H. velox was sent to me by Mr. H. .1. Cprter,
as having- been found at Wedge Bay by Mr. Hardy. It is found in the southern
coastal districts of Australia from Perth to Melbourne.

Genus N e ji a (; l o 8 s a.

Sober, Gay's Hist. Chili: Zool., iv., p. 215, .1848; Lecanonherus Chaudoir,
Bull. Soc. Imp. Nat. Mosc, 1850. p. 446; Theiiarotes Bates, Cist. Ent.. 1878, p.
320.

I have examined a specimen of Nemar/Iosfia hrevis Sober (^ Lecatminerus
maryinatus Reed) from Chili; and do not know how to distinguish the genus
Lecanomerus from Nemaglossa, nor do I think that Thenarotes is (even on Bates's
own showing) separable from Lecanomerus, except by trivial characters that are
not of generic value ; therefore thess three genera are considered as one here.

Table of Tasmanian species.

1 (4) Form stout; upper surface black, rarely with a virescent tinge on

elytra.

2 (31 Size major, 6.5--7 mm. Elytra nitid in J. opaque in 2

Z'fr/ifa/is Erichs-

3 (2) Size minor, 4. .5 mm. Form oval, convex; elytra nitid in both sexes

Diastcrsi Macl.

4 (1) Form narrow; prothorax at least reddish.

5 (S) Head black; antennae infuscate after second joint.

6 (7) Elytra red at base; each elytron with a piceous plaga extending over

interstices 2-8. Length, 5 mm bico/or '61.

7 (6> Elytra piceous; first interstice, apex, and lateral margin reddish.

Length, 3.8-4.1 mm oh/usa^l.

S (o) Colour (including head and antennae) reddish: each elytron with a
piceous plaga extending over interstices 2-5. Length, 5 mm

tnsuianica Bates.

Nemaglossa (Harpalus) verticalis Erichson.

if«6.— Launceston (Simson, No. 2480), West Tamar (Simson. No. 3105);
Devonport, Zeehan, Hobart (Lea). Common in the coastal districts of N.S.
Wales and Victoria

Nemaglossa mastersi Macleay.

(^Acupalpus mastersi Macl., = Lecanomerus nitidus Blackb.)
Hab. — Stanley, Stonor, King Is. (Lea). Also found over a large area of
S.E. Australia.

NEM.i(;LOSSA (Thenarotes) bicolor Sloane.

Hnh. — Launceston, Beaeonsfield (Simson, No. 2492). Also found in Victoria
and S . Australia.

138 THE CARABIDAE OF TA.SJIAXIA,

Nemaglossa obtcsa^ »p. nov.

Elongate-oval; head bifoveate; prothorax laevigate, punctate on each side
of basal foveae; elytra tiuneate-oval (2.5 X 1.8 mm.), convex, fully striate, second
interstice without striole at base, third interstice unipunctate a little before apical
third. Head black ; prothorax ferruginous, middle of anterior margin and disc
vaguely infuseate; elytra piceous-black, first interstice, lateral margins and apex
reddish; legs testaceous; antennae infuseate, two basal joints testaceous; man-
dibles and labrum reddish.

Head laevigate; each frontal fovea giving off an oblicjue line running towards
middle of eyes; vertex convex; eyes prominent, lightly inclosed behind. Pro-
thorax broader than long (0.9 X 1.2 mm.), widest before middle; sides lightly
rounded, roundly and strongly narrowed to apex, decidedly narrowed to base;
apex truncate; angles rounded, not marked; base tnmcate in a curve, angles
obtuse, not marked; lateral basal foveae wide, shallow, punctate; median line
distinct. Length. 3.8 — i.l mm., breadth, 1.8 mm.

Hab. — Evandale (Simson, No. 2494); Launceston, Latrobe, Strahau (Lea).

This is the species whicli is entered as Thenarotes discoidalis Blackb. in Lea's
"List" of 1902, but I believe it to be a distinct species. Compared with .Y.
atriceps (^ Trechus id Macleay), it differs by prothorax more strongly narrowed
to base, basal angles more rounded off. I am not sure that I know X. minor
Blackb., which may not be different from N. atriceps Mad. ; the same differences
should separate A', olitusa from N. minor as from X. atriceps. It seems to me
better to consider the Tasmanian species as distinct, rather than attach it to any
of the described species of the mainland as a variety. All the allied forms known
to me from the mainland differ from A'^. ohtusa by having the prothorax less
strongly narrowed to base, and witli the basal angles more marked.

Two small specimens belonging to Mr. Lea, ticketed "Launceston" are
smaller than the typical form (3.5 mm.) and have the elytra almost wholly
black, only the first interstice towards apex, lateral margins posteriorly, and apex
narrowly reddish; it may be a variety.

Nemaglcssa (Thenarotes) tasjianica Bates.

Hab. — Launceston (Simson, No. 249]). Also cimmion in S.E. Australia.

Genus E u t ii e n a r u s.

Prothorax with basal angles rectangular: legs yellowish .. //ow/i/zw Erichs.
Prothorax with basal angles obtuse; legs black nii^r/his B\.

Euthexarus (Harpalu.s) PRo:HPTrs Erichson.

Ilab. — Launceston, Beaconsfield, Kelso, Zeehan (Simson, No. 2859); Latrobe,
Strahan. King Is. (Lea). Common in S.E. Australia.

Euthexarus xigellus, sp. nov.

Elongate-oval; prothorax laevigate, sparsely punctate in ba.sal impressions;
elytra convex, fullv striate, second interstice without striole at base, third inter-
stice unipunctate near posterior third. Black; antennae piceous with basal .loint
reddish ; legs black ; tarsi ferruginous-brown, posterior darker tlian anterior.

Head laevigate- frontal im])ressions well nuirkcd, ()l)li(me. anterior extremi-
ties connected by clypeal suture; eyes not prominent. Prothorax broader thaa

BT THOMAS G. SLOAXE. 139

long- (1 >^ 1.3 mm); sides rouutled, angnstate to base; base areuate-tnmeate,
angles obtuse; border thick, extending round basal angles on each side; lateral
basal fovea wide,, shallow, punetulate. Elytra wider than prothorax (2.65 X
1.75 mm.), strongly declivous to apex; inner humeral angles widely obtuse;
apical curve short, without lateral sinuosities; striae entire, fine but well defined,
Eeeond rising from a rather large puncture; interstices depressed. Length, 4.2,
breadth, 1.75 mm.

Hah. — Strahan (Lea). Unicjue.

Allied to E. comes SI., from which it presents the following differences: —
legs black; eyes less convex; protliorax more strongly narrowed to base, less
densely punctate along base, ])articularly near angles.

Tribe Merizodini, trib. nov.

Antennae with second and third joints setulose; mandibles with a seta in
groove of outer side; maxillary palpi with penultimate joint setiferous, apical
joint glabrous. Elytra -with margin interrupted posteriorly by an inner plica,
eighth interstice carinate towards apex.

I have formulated this tribe for the Australasian siaeeies hitherto put in the
genus Oopterus. Dr. R . Jeannel, of Toulouse, has examined the genotype, Oopte-
rus elivinoides Guerin, and ha.s kindly communicated to me the fact that not only
is it not congeneric with the New Zealand species hitherto refen-ed to as Oopterus,
but actually belongs to another tribe of the Carabidae; this leaves the South
American Merisodus as the first described genus of this tribe, and therefore the
one from which the tribal name must be taken. The characters given above
differentiate this tribe from the Treehini. The only extra- Australasian genus of
the tribe known to me is Merizodus, the genotype of which, 1/. angusticolUs Solier
from Chili, I have examined.

Table of genera.

Eyes large, prominent.

Head with two supra-orbital setae on each side.

Elytra bordered on base; prothorax without a submarginal carina.

Facies Oodes-WV-e. Prothorax with posterior marginal seta present.

Bb.\chtdema.
Facies Hnrpa!iis-\'\Ve. Prothorax without posterior marginal seta

Pebcodebmus.

Elytra not bordered on base; prothorax with a submarginal carina

near basal angles, posterior marginal seta present . . . . Merizodus.

Head with one supra-orbital seta on each side. [Prothorax with a

submarginal carina and a marginal seta near basal angles: elytra

with border obsolete except beside humeral angle.] . . Pteroctbtus.

S (Ii Eyes small, depressed. [Prothorax narrow, near basal angles concave

and without submarginal carina; legs unusually long.) Idacababus.

Genus B E A c H V D E II a.

Brac'HYDema TASMAXiAE SI. (^ B. cictorioe SI.)

I now believe I was wrong in trying to differentiate the Tasmanian and Vic-
torian forms from one another.

Hab. — Denison Gorge (Simson No. 3126), Hobart (Lea); Warburtim. Vic-
toria (Sloane).

1

(8)

2

("1

3

(61

4

(.51

5

(4)

6

(31

7

(21

140 THK CARABIDAE OF TASIIAXIA.

P E R C 0 D E R II r S, gen. nov.

Head small; froutal impressions obsolete; two supra-orbital setae ou each
side; eyes hemispherical, hardh- inclosed at base, distant from buccal fissure be-
neath. Labrum truncate, G-setose. Clypeus with a seta on eaeli side. Man-
dibles with a seta in scrobe of outer side. Palpi stout : maxillary with penulti-
mate joint obconic, setose; apical joint stout, short, obtusely pointed, glabious;
labial short; penultimate joint bisetose; apical joint short, stout, obtusely pointed.
Antennae long, slender; second and third joints setulose. Prothorax depressed,
subquadrate, wider across base than apex, lightly and roundly ampliate at widest
part, bi-impressed on each side of base; basal angles rectangular, obtuse at sum-
mit ; border nan-ow, passing round basal angles ; submarginal basal carina not
developed; jjosterior marginal seta wanting. Elytra rather depressed: base bor-
dered; humeral angles marked, not dentate; striae lightly marked on disc, obso-
lete on sides; first interstice with a very short striole at base, third 4-])unctate
fceside third stria, eighth cariuate at apex, obsolete in middle. c?. — Anterior tarei
with two basal joints lightly dilatate and squamose beneath.

The position of this genus is near Pterocyrtus, but it differs by f(irm more
depressed ; head with froutal impressions obsolete, two supra-orbital setae on each
side; prothorax without a submarginal basal carina, seta at ba.sal angles wanting.
The genotype is a small, jet-black, rather nitid beetle.

Percodkrjius xiiiKii, sp. nov.

Elli|)tieal-oval, sulidepressed. Black, nitid ; legs and antennae piceous or
piceous red, femora darker than tibiae, base of antennae reddi.sh. Head short (1.3
mm. across eyes); front wide; eyes large, round, prominent. Prothorax sub-
quadrate (1.5 X 2 mm.), widest just before middle, depressed: apex narrow
(1.2 mm.), angles not prominent, rounded; sides arcuate anteriorly, subsiimate
to liase; base wide (1.7 mm.), tnincate, angles rectangular, summit obtuse: l)order
narrow, passing round Ijoth anterior and basal angles, very narrow in middle of
apex, obsolete in middle of ba.se; basal impressions shallow, inner one well
marked, outer one short, distinct; space between these imjiressions wide, depressed.
Elytra with disc lightly striate; sides smooth; third interstice 4-punctat<.', eighth
carinate at apex, obsolete in middle; a short striole at base of first interstice.
Tarsi seto.se on ujiper surface; basal joint of posterior tarsi as long as three suc-
ceeding joints together. Lengfli, 6, breadth, 2.3 mm.

Hab. — Great Lake (Simsonl. Three specimens.

P T E r (I c v R T r s. gen. nov.

Head bi-impressed: impressions not di\ergeiit posteriorly: one sa)>ra-orl)itaI
seta on each side; eyes distant from buccal tissure beneath. L:ibrum truncate,
fi-setose. Mandibles with a seta in scrobe of outer side. Mentum with sinus
moderately deep, oblicjiic on sides; a wide prominent median tootii. Ligula cor-
neous, narrow, rounded at apex, bisetose in middle of ajiex: [laragiossae narrow,
free, hardly extending beyond ligula. Palpi stout; labial sliort; penultimate
joint 2-setose in front, ai>ical joint comjirt-ssed, rather wide behind middle; ni.ixil-
lary with two apical joints short, wide at point of union: penultimate joint
obconic, narrow at base, .setose; apical joint angustate, obtuse at apex. Maxillae
hooked, sparsely setose on inner side, outer lobe biarticulate. Antennae slender,
not long: joints short, second and third about eiiual (third Iiardly longer than

BY THOMAS 0. SLOANE. ' 141

second); joints 4 — 10 oval, monilifonu, e(|ual; basal joint only glabrous. Pro-
tliorax broader than long; two short impressions on each side of base; border
narrow, terminating at basal angles; two marginal setae on each side, posterior
seta at basal angle. Elytra convex; base not bordered; humeral angles marked;
lateral channel terminating at humeral angle; margin interrupted posteriorly and
with an internal plica; eighth interstice carinate at apex, an apical striole along
inner side of carina. Metepisterna short; metepiraera narrow, not distinct.
^'entral segments corneous, tirst narrowly dividing posterior coxae; segments
3 — G with an ambulatorial seta on each side near middle; apical segment in d
unisetose, in ? bisetose on each side. Tarsi with a few setae on upper surface;
<?. — Anterior short; two basal joints triangular, a little dilatate, triangularly pro-
duced at inner apical angle, squamose on lower side.' Genotype, P. globosus
Sloane.

I am not sure whether the New Zealand species whicli are now referred to
Oopteriis are actually congeneric with Ptcrnci/rtus, but they are certainly very
closely allied.

Table of Species.

1 (6) Eyes convex, prominent: elytra strongly convex on disc.

2 (5) Prothorax widest before middle; sides lightly sinuate near base; a

prominent, narrow, submarginal ridge at base.

3 (4) Size major. Elytra decidedly striate on disc. Length, .5--5.5 mm.

striatiilus SI.

4 (3) Size miner- Elytra smooth. Length, 3.3 — 4 mm. .. tasiuanicus Cast.

5 (21 Prothorax widest at middle: sides obliquely njaitrowed to base (base

wide); submarginal basal ridge short, wide, lightly raissd. Length,
4.3-5 mm globosus %\.

6 (1) Eyes small, round, not prominent: elytra not strongly convex on disc.

(Colour reddish, elytra strongly striate on disc). Length, 4 mm.

rubescens SI.

PTEROCyRTUS STBIATULUS, Sp. noV.

Apterous, oval, robust, convex; head wide, front with tw^o elongate, rather
irregular, parallel depressions; prothorax subquadrate, wider across base (1.4
mm.) than apex (1.1 mm.), a submarginal carina on each side of base; elytra
oval, convex, punctate-striate on disc, striae 5 — 7 faint. Black, with a narrow
reddish margin at apex; legs and antennae pieeous red.

Head large (1.15 mm. across eyes); frontal impressions parallel, not out-
turned posteriorly; one supra-orbital seta on each side behind the convex lateral
space; ej'es convex, rather prominent. Prothorax broader than long (1.3 >< 1.7
mm.), widest before middle, strongly angustate to apex, obliquely narrowed to
base; sides subsinuate just before ba.se; basal angles rectangiilar ; basal foveae
deep, bi-impressed ; base truncate, slojting slightly forward on each side; sub-
marginal carina narrow, well developed ; lateral channel narrow and deep towards
base ; a seta in channel at basal angle ; border narrow, reflexed. Elytra much
wider than prothorax ( 3 . .5 X 2.7 mm. ) . strongly rounded on sides ; humei'al
angles prominent, shortly subdentiform ; basal border obsolete, but closing lateral
channel at humeral angles; scutellar striole wanting; four inner striae well marked
im disc, weaker on apical declivity, eighth strongly impressed; interstices a little
convex on disc, third finely 3-puiictate beside third stria, eighth carinate tow ards
apex, ninth narrow, depressed. Length, 5 — 5.5, breadth, 2.4 — 2.7 mm.

142 THE CARADIDAE OF TASIIAXIA,

Hab. — Cradle Mountain (Carter and Lea). Several specimens.
Note. — A specimen in the Simson collection from the Blue Tier is 4.8 mm. iu
length, and has a similar prothorax, but the eljtra less strongly striate.

PTEROcrRTUs (DRiiiosTOiiA) TA.siiANicu.s Castslnau.

Brown; head, prothorax and margin of elytra reddish. Length, 3.2, breadth,
1.5 mm.

Ilab. — Blue Tier (Simson, No. 3121). Two specimens.

This is likely Drimostoma tasmanica Cast., but seems smaller than the type
form. Bates referred it to Oopterus.

Three specimens were in the Simson Coll. under No. 3121, which are a little
larger and black in colour. Length, 3.6 — 4 mm. I believe they must go under
P. tasmanica.

Pterocyrtus globosds, sp. nov.

Apterous, subglobose; head large, lightlj' bi-impressed ; prothorax transverse,
wider across base (1.5 mm.) than apex (1.1 mm.); eljftra subglobose, subs'.,riate
on disc, smooth towards sides. Black; ehira with narrow lateral and wide apical
testaceous margin ; leg's and antennae reddish.

Head wide, convex (1.2 mm. across eyes) ; frontal impressions parallel, short;
eyes convex, prominent. Prothorax convex, broader than long (1.3 ^ 1.7 wm.),
broadest just before middle, strongly angnistate to apex, gently obliquely narrow-
ed to base; basal angles rectangular; base tnmcate; two short basal impressions
on each side (inner foveiform, outer narrow) ; a short rather wide submargiual
carina near each basal angle; posterior marginal seta in lateral channel at basal
angle. Elj^ra subrotundate (3 X 2.6 mm.); three inner striae marked towards
base, tii'st entire, eighth strongly impressed; third interstice finely 3-punctate along
third stria, eighth shortly carinate at apes, ninth narrow, placed at bottom oi the
lateral channel. Length, 4.3 — 5, breadth 2.3 — 2.6 mm.

Hah. — Cradle Mountain, TVaratah (Carter and Lea). A good series of speci-
mens.

Differs from the black species in the Simson Coll., which T have referred
above to P. taamanicus Cast., by form shorter; prothorax shorter, more trans-
verse, more ampliate at widest part, wider across base, latei-al basal impressions
not so deep and more distinctly divided into two foveae, lateral basal carina
shorter, more distant from, and less parallel to the margin; elytra more ampliate,
inn(>r striae more distinct, sides and apex with a much more distinct ferruginous
margin. From P. striatulm SI., it differs almost by the same characters as from
P. tas7)ia)iicus, and has the elytra much less strongly striate.

Pterocyrtus rubescens, sp. nov.

Oval, convex; head with frontal channels not divergent posteriorly: jjixi-
thorax sub(|iiad7-ate, basal angles rectangular; elytra oval, convex, crenulate-striate
on <lisc, hunu^ral angles marked, scutellar striole wanting, basal border obsoiete
inwards from fifth interstice. Reddish, sometimes becoming brownish on disc of
elytra.

Head convex (0.7 mm. across eyes); frontal channels wide, parallel, ex-
liniling backward In level with base of eyes, not out-turned at j)osterior extremity;
eyes not prominent, small, round, lightly convex; a narrow lateral sulcus passing
al)ove eye and extending behind eyes on each side of head. Prothorax broader

BT THOMAS G. SLOANE. 143

than Ion,? (1 X 1.'2 mm), broadest before middle, wider across base than apex;
sides obIi(|uely narrowed to base; apex truncate; base bisinuate (lightly rounded
in middle, sti-aig-ht on each side) ; basal angles marked, rectangular, with summit
blunted; border narrow; lateral basal impressions well marked; a short carina
near each basal angle on inner side of marginal channel. Elytra oval (2.5 x
1.75 mm.), convex; five inner striae well marked on disc, becoming faint (ex-
cept first) on apical declivity, lateral striae more feeble, eighth near ma-gin;
eighth interstice strongly carinate at apex, wide and declivous beneath this carina.
£?. — Tarsi with two basal joints dilatate, triangular at inner apical angle. Length,
4, breadth, 1.75 mm.

Hub. — Waratah (Carter and Lea).

Distinguished from other known Tasmanian species by eyes smaller, more
depressed ; form less roljust ; elytra much less convex and ampliate ; colour reddish

brown, &e.

Tribe Trechini.

Genus T r e c h u s.

(Sporades Fauvel = Trechodes Blackburn.)

Table of Australian and Tasmanian species.

1 (32) Prothorax with base truncate.

2 (3) Head narrow, hardly constricted behind eyes; eyes small, depressed.

Black. Length, 5 mm leai SI.

3 (2) Head decidedly constricted behind eyes; eyes convex, more or less

prominent.

4 (19) Elytra with third puncture of third interstice on apical dechvity.

5 (14) Form depressed, or subdepressed. Colour black, or with indeterminate

pattern.

6 (9) Elytra with punctures of third interstice not interrupting the interstice.

(Apical striole continuous with fifth stria. Black.)

7 (8) Elytra with border extending inwards on base to first interstice.

Length, 5.7 mm ' fiacijicus SI.

S (7) Elytra with border not extending inwards on base past third interstice.
Length, 6.5--7 mm robustus SI.

9 (6) Elytra with anterior puncture of third interstice interrupting the in-
terstice, or beside fourth stria.

10 (11) Elytra with interstices depressed. Piceous. Length, 5 — 5.5 mm.

dieiiienetisis Bates.

11 (10) Elytra with interstices convex. Bicolorous species.

12 (13) Prothorax with basal angles acute, preceded by a short sinuosity;

elytra with basal border reaching first interstice. Length, 5.5 mm.

victor iae Blackb.

13 (12) Prothorax with basal angles subrectangular, obtuse, not preceded by

a sinuosity; elytra with basal border not reaching inward beyond
fourth interstice. Length, 3.8 mm castelnatd SI.

14 (5) Form convex, elytra oviform. Black, elytra with a transverse fascia

of testaceous maculae on posterior half, sometimes also a testaceous
post-humeral lunule.

15 (16) Elytra without post-humeral maculae. Length, 4.3 mm

s.ubornatellus Blackb.

16 (15) Elytra with post-humeral maculae.

17 (18) Elytra strongly striate on disc, striae 2-4 strongly impressed on apical

declivity; anterior discal puncture near third stria. Length, 3.3
mm carter i ^\.

144 THE CARABIDAE OF TASIIAXIA,

IS (17) Elytra substriate. striae 2-4 obsolete on apical declivity; anterior discal
puncture near fourth stria. Length, 4.2 mm. .. .. coxi SI.

19 (41 Elytra with third puncture of third interstice distant from apsx, not
on apical declivity.

20 (231 Elytra with striae 1 — " deeply impressed; interstices convex.

21 (221 Colour black, legs piceous. Length, 4 mm aiistriniis SI.

22 (21) Colour piceous-testaceous. femora testaceous, tibiae light brown.
Length, 3.8 mm sitnsotii 'BXa.cV.h.

23 (201 Elytra striate on disc, striae becoming obsolete towards sides; inter-
stices depressed.

24 (27) Elytra piceous-black, with a testaceous, post-humeral macula on each
elytron .

25 (26) Prothorax with basal angles acute, preceded by a sinuosity. Length,
3.4 mm longinoiatus SI.

26 (25) Prothorax with basal angles obtuse, not preceded by a sinuosity.
Length 3.7 mm brevinotalns SI.

Elytra black, without post-humeral maculae.

Prothorax with sides obliquely narrowed to base; basal angles marked

and with border prominent.
Elytra subdepressed, sides lightly rounded. Length, 3 mm,

tiitens Putzeys.
(29) Elytra convex, sides strongly rounded. Length, 3.8 mm

blackburni SI.
Prothorax with sides evenly rounded to base; basal angles obtuse, not
marked nor with border prominent. Length, 3 mm,

tasiiianiae Blackb.
Prothorax with base lobate.

Prothorax with basal angles prominent, triangular, base truncate
.behind them on each side of lobe; each elytron with six punctate

striae. Length, 4 mm baldieiisis Blackb.

3-1 (331 Prothorax with basal angles not prominent and triangular, base sloping
behind them on each side of lobe : elytra with not more than three
simple striae on each side of suture.

35 (36) Elytra with three inner striae marked. Length, 4 mm. inac/eayi SI.

36 (35) Elytra unistriate on each side of suture.

37 (38) Head wide; prothorax transverse, depressed, lateral margin and channel

wide, elytra depressed. Length, 3.5 — i mm. bipartitiim Macleay.

3S (37) Head narrow; prothorax globose, lateral margin and channel narrow;

elytra convex, a deep transverse-oblique foveiform impression at

. position of anterior discal puncture. Black, nitid. Length. 2.8

mm gibbipennis Blackb.

I sent specimens of Benibidiiim bipartilum Mad., to Dr. R. Jeannel, of Tou-
louse, tile ])resent authority on the tribe Trechini, and liave been infonued b.v
liiiu that it l)elongs to ."^pdrades of Fauvel (.genotype, ^'. sejpiDictatus Fauv.. New
Caledonia), a genus which Dr. Jeaunel informed me has also been found in tlie
Oriental Region, and in East Africa. Tlie genus Trechodes, founded by Hiaek-
burn on his Benibiditim aecuhiides, must become a synonym of Sporades, for tlie
only difference I can note between Bemhidium hiparliliim Macl.. and B. gernidides
Blackl)., is one of colour (B. bipartitum, el.vtra piceous, head and prothorax red;
B. secaloides^ ujiper surface wholly piceous). Tlie genus Trechus as used in this
paper will include Spontdeti as a subgenus.

Blackburn has tahulate<l the Australian and Tasmanian species of Trechus
known tn liiiii (Trans. Roy. Sor. S. Aust., lOfll. p. 117). My idea of tlie genus

27

(24)

28

(31)

29

(30)

30

(29)

31

(28 1

32

(1)

33

(341

l!V THOMAS G. SLOAXE. 1-15

is wider than his. as including his Trechodes, and the table given above is on
quite dilferent lines from his.

.Maeleay has described as belonging to the genus Trechus, four species whicli
must be excluded from it. These are T. ater, T. atricepfi, and T. concolor^ which
are Harpalids, and T. rufilahris which is a species of Perigona.

To render my work more complete I have included in the table the species of
the mainland, and have described a new species (T. castelnaui) from Victoria.

Trechus leai, sp. nov.

Elongate-oval, convex ; liead narrow, eyes small, depressed ; prothorax broader
than long, base truncate, basal angles obtuse; elytra oval, fully striate, eighth
interstice narrow and raised at apex. Black; legs, antennae, and mouth-parts
reddish.

Head convex, elongate (0.9 mm. across eyes), hardly narrowed behind eyes;
frontal impressions long, parallel, deep; eyes small, round, depressed; post-ocular
parts of orbits very little swollen, longer than eyes. Prothorax convex, sub-
quadrate (1.3 X 1.5 mm.), broadest before middle, wider across base than apex;
sides lightly rounded, obliquely narrowed to base, border wide, reflexed, prominent
at basal angles; lateral Ijasal impressions short, rather narrow, separated from
marginal channel by a raised space. Elytra strongly convex, oval (3.2 x 2.2
mm. ) ; interstices convex on disc, third with a f oveif orm puncture about anterior
third, and another puncture b^ide second stria on posterior declivity. Length,
5, breadth, 2.2 mm.

Hah. — Cradle Mountain (Carter and Lea). Uni(iue.

This species is very distinct from all other described Tasmanian species. By
the form of its head, prothorax, and elytra it is allied to T. subornatellus Blfickb..
but can be distinguished easily from that species l)v laiger size; head narrower
with less prominent eyes; elytra without a pattern, etc.

Trechus pacificus, sp. nov.

Elongate-oval, subconvex; head ordinary, eyes prominent; protliorax short,
wide truncate at base, basal angles obtuse but marked; elytra oval, fully striate,
apical striole continuous witli fifth stria, basal border extending inwards to scu-
tellum. Deep black, nitid ; femora pieeous ; tibiae and tarsi reddish.

Head wide (1.2 mm. across eyes), front strongly bi-impressed ; lateral and
median spaces convex ; eyes prominent ; post-ocular parts of orbits about half
the length of eyes; labrnm emarginat«. Prothorax transverse (1.2 x l.g mm),
widest at middle, a little wider across base (1.45 mm.) than apex (1.3 mm.) ;
apex lightly emarginate; anterior angles rounded; sides evenly rounded; border
reflexed, prominent at basal angles; lateral basal impressions shallow, wide.
Elytra oval (3.5 X 2.3 mm.), strongly striate; striae simple, eighth distinct;
interstices depressed third 3-punctate (two anterior punctures foveiform, beside
tliird stria, third on apical declivity beside second stria) ; interstices 6 — 8 united at
apex to f onn a narrow pointed ridge. Length, 5.7, breadth, 2 . 3 mm .

Hab. — Strahan (Carter and Lea). Unique.

Allied to T. robustus SI., Init smaller; colour dee|ier black; femora pieeous;
eyes more prominent; post-ocular part of orbits smaller; prothorax proportion-
ately wider, evenly rounded on sides, widest at middle, less emarginate on base,
basal foveae shallower; elytra less convex, more decidedly bordered on base, bc:rder
extending inwards past fourth interstice — (it is tlie only Tasmanian species siiow-
ing this character).

14G THE CARABIDAE OP TASMANIA,

Trechus robustus, sp. nov.

Elongate-oval, subeonvex; head large, eyes prominent; prothoiax short, wide,
truncate-emarginate at base, basal angles obtuse; elytra oval, fully striate, apical
stride eontinuous with fifth stria. Piceous, elytra rather iridescent: reflexed and
inflexed margins of elytra, leg's, antennae, and mouth-parts reddisli.

Head wide (1.5 mm. across eyes); vertex convex; front bi-impressed ; lateral
and median spaces convex ; eyes roundly prominent ; post-ocular i)art of orbits
large, two-thirds length of eyes; labrum emarginate. Prothorax transverse (1.5
X 2 mm.), broadest before middle, a little wider across base (l.li mm.) than
apex (1.5 mm.); apex emarginate; anterior angles obtuse; sides lightly rounded;
border wide, reflexed ; lateral basal foveae wide, short, strongly impressed, bor-
dered along posterior margin. Elytra oval (4 x 2.5 mm), rather convex; striae
simple, third 3-punetate (two anterior punctures beside third stria, third beside
second stria just below beginning of apical declivity) ; interstices (i — 8 united at
apex to form a narrow ridge; border not extending on base inwards past fourth
interstice. Length, 6.5 — 7, breadth, 2.5 — 2.7 mm.

Hab. — Zeehan (Coll. Simson, type); Waratah (Carter).

Two specimens have been examined; it is the largest Australian species of
the genus, and is allied to T. pacificus SI.; under the description of T. pacificuft
will be found a note of the most obvious differences between these two species.

Trechus diemenensis Bates.
[= T. soUdior Blackburn (1901).]

Hab. — Launceston, St Mary's (Simson, No. 3045); Waratnh (Carter and
Lea). "In moss and lichens," Lea.

I obtained specimens of a species of Trechus m a damp decaying log at
MarysvLlle, Victoria, in January; it agreed with the description of T. soiidior
Blackb. ; but to me, it seems couspeeitic with T. diemenensis ; specimens from
Dorrigo, N.S.W., are larger, more shining, and smoother towards sides of elytra,
but do not seem specifically distinct.

Trechus castel.vaui, sp. nov.

Uroad, oval, subdepressed ; head strongly bisulcate; prothorax traiisv.-rse.
wide across base; elytra fully striate, striae deep, disc bifoveohUe on course ol
fourth stria, a hooked striole on each side of apex, marginal furrow and bnrder
not extending inwards along base bej'ond fourth interstice. Piceous; ]>rotlH)ra\
brown with disc piceous; elytra piceous, a lateral space and apex brownish testa-
ceous (the lateral testaceous marking is a stripe occupying that i)art of se\enth
interstice ojiposite the interval between the discal foveae, and sending off a nai--
row transverse branch across sixth and fifth interstices just behind the level of
the posterior fovea); femora Ijrowiiish testaceous; tibiae, tarsi, and antennae
brown; palpi testaceous.

Head large (0.8 across eyes); frontal furrows deep, curving outwards an-
teriorly and posteriorly; median sjiace convex; eyes round, convex, coarsely
faceted, orbits small behind eyes. Prothorax transvei-se (0.8 X 1.2 mm), sub-
depressed, wider iicro.ss base tiian apex; sides lightly rounded, sliglitly olili(,uely
narrowed to base; basal angles obtuse, subrectangular; base slightly obli(|uely trun-
cate on each side, a little produced backward in middle; marginal channel wide;
margin wide, explanate and reflexed at basal angles; basal foveae dee|), divided from
margin by a narrow ridge; median line deeply impressed. Elytra widely oval
(2.2 X 1.8 mm.), depressed on disc, decidedly declivous on siiles. roundeil at

Ur THOMAS G. SLOANE. 147

sliuuldi'i-s; striae deep, simple, first entire, curving round apex and extending
forward opposite jiosterior extremity of sixth stria in a short deeply marked
course hooked at extremity (about apical fifth); interstices rather irregidar, con-
vex towards sides, second wdde towards apex, third ended considerably before
apex by the union of third and fourth striae, interrupted by posterior discal fovea,
fourth interrupted about l)asal fifth by anterior fovea. Length, 3.8. breadth, 1.8
nun .

JJiib. — Victoria: IVIarysville and Warburton (Sloaue).

One specimen obtained by me at Warburton, and another at Marysville in
January, in damp, heavily wooded gullies.

Allied to T. victoriae Blackb., but differing by smaller size; darker colour;
head less swollen at eyes; prothorax less rounded on sides, not sinuate before
basal angles, these not acute; elytra similar, but with sculpture of the apical de-
clivity different {T. victoriae without a hooked sublateral striole), marginal border
not extending along ba-se to peduncle as in T. victoriae. It is altogether different
from T. sim.ioni Blackb., by fades; prothorax more transverse (not cordate), more
\^'idely mai-gined; elytra more depressed, humeral angles more marked (in T.
gimsoni quite rounded off), anterior discal puncture interrupting fourth inter-
stice, etc.

Trechus carteri, sn. nov.

Oval, convex; head large, eyes convex, orbits small behind eyes; prothorax
subquadrate. base truncate, basal angles rectangular (a little blunted at summit) ;
elytra oval, disc strongly striate, striae fainter towards sides.

Black: leg's (tibiae darker than femora), base of antennae, and mouth-i>arts
testaceous; prothorax piceous, reddish towards basal angles; elytra with yellowish
markings as under: — (1) on apical margin and first interstice on apical dechvity,
(2) a post humeral oblique macula extending from fourth stria behind anterior
discal puncture to margin, and reaching base at shoulder, (3) a small discal spot
on third interstice at second puncture, (4) an irregular arcuate fascia from
fourth stria to margin above apical declivity.

Prothorax Ijroader than long (0.7 x 0 . 85 mm. ) , widest before middle, hardly
wider acro.ss base than apex; sides lightly rounded, obliquely narrowed to l)ase;
lateral border not wide anteriorly, strongly reflexed towards base. Elytra widely
oval (2 X 1.5 mm.), convex, four inner striae strongly impressed, eighth obsolete
on sides, third interstice 3-punctate (two anterior punctures beside third stria,
third on apical declivity beside second stria) ; eighth interstice carinate at apex,
defined on inner side by the well marked apical striole. Length, 3.3, Ijreadth,
1.5 mm.

Hab. — Cradle Mountain (Carter and Lea). Many specimens. "In moss and
lichens," Lea.

Allied to T. fiuhornatellus Blackl)., from whicli it can be readily differentiated
by size smaller: prothorax more strongly narrowed to base, border narrower;
elytra witli post-humeral maculae. From T. coxi SI., which it resembles in pat-
tern of elytra, it can be distinguished by smaller size; eyes smaller and less con-
vex; prothorax much less transverse, more narrowed to base; elytra with striae
strongly impressed on disc.

Trechus austrixus, sp. nov.

Elongate-oval, convex. Head rather wide, strongly arcuately bisulcate; pro-
thorax subcordate, apex and base of about equal width, basal angles almost rec-

148 THE CARABIDAE OF TA.S3IAXIA.

tangular; elytra oval, strongly striate, seventh and eighth striae weak, interstices
1 — 5 convex, third interstice 3-punctate beside third stria. a]>ical striole in line
with fifth stria. Black, legs and antennae reddish.

Head large (0.8 mm. across eyes), obliquely narrowed l)ehiiid eyes (continu-
ously with slope of eyes); vertex convex; frontal sulci curved, decidedly diver-
gent and defining orbits posteriorly; eyes prominent; mandibles prominent;
labrum emarginate. Prothorax broader than long (0.85 ^ 1.15 mm.); apex
lightly emarginate; anterit)r angles obtuse, a little prominent; sides lightly
rounded; base truncate, sloping lightly forward at each side; Ijasal angles, sulrect-
angiilar. summit obtuse; border strongly reflexed, not wide, liardly wider towards
base; lateral channel curving round at basal angles and uniting with bottom of
basal impressions, these deep; median line strongly impressed. Elytra oval (2.5
X 1.6 mm.), convex; humeral angles rounded off, not marked; interstices (i — 8
uniting to form a narrow carina at apex, this carina defined on inner side by a
strongly impressed apical striole; posterior puncture of third interstice level with
anterior end of apical striole. Leng'th. 4. breadth, l.fi nun.

Hah. — Great Lake. Unique in the Simson Coll.

A very distinct species, not nearly allieil to any other yet found in Tasnmnia.
If the sides of the prothorax are viewed from straight above they ajijH'ar to be
lightly sinuate before the basal angles; but. if looked at from the o|)posite side
across the segment, this sinuosity (which is caused by a sliyht lioi-i/.ontal curve
of the border) disappears.

Trechu.s siiisoxi Blackburn (1894).

Hah. — Thonias Plains (Simson, No. 3506).

Trechcs loxginotatus, sp. nov.

Oval, robust; head large, arcuately bisulcate; prothorax cordate, narrower
across base than apex, sides sinuate posteriorly, basal angles acute; elytra widely
oval, weakly striate, third interstice 3-punctate, posterior puncture above apical
declivity. Black; elytra with a humeral lunule, inflexed margin, apex, a .small
ante-apical spot, and apical part of first interstice lurid-testaceous; antennae in-
fuseate, base reddish ; legs testaceous, tibiae and tarsi brown.

Head finely shagreened. large (0.7 mm. across eyes), strongly narrowed be-
hind eyes) ; vertex convex; frontal sulci curved, strongly divergent posteriorly;
eyes convex, rather small, a little prominent; post-ocular part of orbits about as
long as eyes, curving continuously with eyes to head. Protliorax broader tlian
long (0.7 X 1 mm.) ; apex liglitly emarginate; anterior angles obtuse, bordered,
a little prominent; sides lightly rounded anteriorly, shortly sinuate before base;
basal angles acute; base truncate; border narrow, refie.ved, very little wider at
Itasal angles; lateral channel curving round at basal angles to form bottom of
basal impressions, these well marked; median line well marked (m disc. Elytra
oval (2 X 1.4 inin.l subconvex; base wide; basal curve .short; diseal striae lightly
impressed, first only entire; striae 6 — 8 obsolescent; recurved apical striole nanow.
Length, 3.4, brcadlh, 1.4 mm.

Tlab. — Ben Lomond, 5(1(11) fi'et (Simson). rnique.

With T. hrerinniatus SI., this species forms a distinct group. Cniiqiaring
these two species with T. monolobus Putz., and T. scapularis Putz., from Cliili,
species which also have post-humeral maculae, it is at once seen that there is iittle
affinity towards the riiilian species. The Tasmanian species have the liciul uar-

BY THOMAS G. SLOANE. 149

riiwer. moi-o (lee])ly bisuleate, eyes smaller and less proininent ; elytra more striate,
third pimeture of the third interstice above the apical declivity. In T. longino-
tatits the elytra have, on each, a lurid testaceous humeral lunule extending- from
the sixth interstice at the humeral angle and curving inwards liehind the anlerior
puncture of third interstice on to the fourth interstice, and there is au indistinct
macula of a duller colour on the apical declivity beside the recurved striole.

TrECIIUS BREVINOTATU.S, sp. nOV.

Oval; head large, arcuately bisuleate; prothorax cordate, hardly narrower at
base than apex, sides roundly narrowed to base, basal angles obtuse; elytra oval,
lightly striate, interstices depressed, third 3-punctate beside third stria, posterior
puncture above apical declivity. Pieeous-black ; vertex, sides and base of pro-
thorax (narrowly), border, inflexed margin, and tirst intei-stiee (especially behind
niiddlel reddish; apex (rather widely), and a rotundate humeral spot outside fifth
interstice lurid-testaceous; antennae infuscate, l)ase reddish; legs testaceous; tiliiae
and tarsi brownish.

Head largi' (0.7 across eyes) ; vertex convex; frontal sulci deep, lightly diver-
gent posteriorly; post-ocular part of orbits small (not half size of eye), strongly
raised from head; eyes large, convex. Prothorax broader than long (0.7 X
1 mm.) ; apex truncate; angles obtuse, not prominent; sides lightly rounded; base
truncate; angles obtuse; lateral border narrow anteriorly, a little wider near base ;
lateral channel wide; lateral basal impressions well marked; median line distinct.
Elvira oval (2.2 -^ 1.5 ram.), convex (a little depressed near suture) : base wide;
striae 1 — 5 lightly impressed, 6 — 8 obsolescent. Length. 3.7, breadth. 1.5 mm.

Hah. — Great Lake (Simson). Unique.

Allied to T. loucjinotatus SI., from which it differs decidedly b\' eyes larger
and more convex, orbits less developed behind eyes, frontal sulci less divergent
jiosteriorly; iirothoi'ax with anterior angles less prominent, sides not sinuate
before basal angles, these obtuse; elytra witli shoulders more rounded off, post-
humeral maculae shorter, not reaching backwards as far as anterior puncture of
third interstice. The apical decli^'ity is of a rather lurid-testaceous colour, bul the
dark ground coloui' extends well down the declivity.

Trechus xitens Putzeys.

T have identified T. nitens Putz., from the description. Length, 3 mm.

Hab. — Mount Wellington (Lea); "in roots of grass at summit.'' Mr. Lea
sent it to me, ticketed T. tasmaniae Blackb., which I believe to be an allied, bvtt
distinct, species.

Trechus blackburxi, sn. nov.

Oval; head large; prothorax cordate; elytra rotundate-oval, convex. Black;
inflexed margins of elytra, legs, mouth-parts, and antennae reddisli.

Head ordinary (0.8 mm. across eyes). Prothorax cordate (0.8 x 1 mm.),
widest before middle; base and apex of about equal width; sides rounded, oblique-
ly narrowed to base; basal angles marked, obtuse; border strongly reflexed at
basal angles; lateral basal impressions foveiform. Elytra widely oval (2.3 x 1.7
mm.), convex; base rotundate; disc striate; striae faint towards sides; apical
striole in line with fifth stria (but not quite uniting with it) ; third inteistiee
3-punctate beside third stria, posterior puncture above apical declivity; interstices
f) — 8 uniting to form a ridge at apex. Length, 3.8, breadth, 1.7 mm.

Hah. — Cradle Mountain (Carter and Lea).

150 THE r.VRAUIDAE OF TASMANIA,

Allied to T. nitens Putz., which it closely resembles, but laraor: inothovax
more cordate; elytra more convex, wider, more strongly rounded on sides, )tiore
anipliate on each side of peduncle in a more evenly rounded curve. The wider,
more convex, and more rotundate elytra are Ihe most conspicuous differences. Tt
differs from 7. Utsmaniae Bhickb. by size larger; prothorax less njunded on sides,
border promincht at l)asal angles, etc.

Trechus tasmaxiae Blackburn.

This species (as included in the table of species given above) ha-* liecu identi-
fied from the description.

Hab. — Cradle Mnuntain (Carter and Lea).

Trechus baldikxsis Blackburn.

T/ab.— Cleveland, fJreat Lake (Sirason, No. 3312).

Trechus macleayi, sp. nov.

Subdepressed ; head wide, arcuately bisulcate, eyes prominent ; protliorax sub-
quadrate, base sliortly lobate, posterior angles obtuse; elytra witli tliree inner
striae marked, othei-s (including eighth) obsolete, recurved apical striole distinct,
third interstice 3-pnnetate (two anterior punctures beside third stria, third
puncture on apical declivity beside second stria), an elongate striole at base of
first interstice, liasal border reaching scutelhun. Piceous; elytra witli latei'al
channel, infiexe<l margin, and apex ferruginous; femora hirid-testacemis; til)iae
and tarsi brown ; antennae infuscate, basal joint reddish.

Head large (0.8 across eyes); frontal sulci deep, curved, strongly divergent
posteriorly; median frontal space convex, not as wide as lateral spaces, these
convex; sui)ra-(>rl)ital ])nnctures near eye, anterior set in a foveifonn puncture;
eyes hemisiiherical, large, prominent; postocular part of orbits laminate, strongly
and aliruptly raised from head. Prothorax liroiuler than long (0.8 X 1 nmi. ), a
little wider across basal angles than apex; anterior angles wide, rounded; apex
truncate; sides lightly rounded; basal curve between posterior angles wide, bisinu-
ate, curving forward from sinuosity to posterior angle on each side; basal lolw
short, wide, rounded; lateral l)order narrow, rather widely vellexed beside basal
angles; anterioi- transverse imjjression faint: b;\se (le<-livous on each side towards
margin; posterior marginal seta on edge of border at posterior angle. Elytrn
subde|>ressed (2.5 X 1.7 mm.), laevigate outside discal foveae, wide at oase;
humeral angles rounded; sides subparallel (hardly rounded); two inner slriae
well marked, second not reaching apex, third faint. Lo'ng'th, 4. breadtli. 1.7 mm.

TTrih. — Cleveland ( Simson, No. 3504). T^'nique. Orampian Mountains, ^'ic■-
toria (Mr. Ejnar Fischer).

A very distinct species allied to T. hiparlitum ~S\m\.. from wliicli it differ- liy
larger size; clarker ciilcnir; jirotliorax with jiosterior angles far less marked; elytra
with more than nne stria cm each side of suture.

TRKCirus laiiUii'KN'N'is P>hu-kburn {Tm-hinhs i'l. Rlackb. )

Tlab. — Lake District (Blackburn), Orampian Moimtains, Victoria. Mr.
Ejnar Fischer has o-jvon me a specimen which T consider to be 7'. nilihiiKiniis
Blackb. Tt is jdtogether different from any other s|iec-ies knovii to uie.

BY THOMAS (1. SLOAXE. 151

Tribe Bembidiini.

Table of Tasmanian genera.

1 (41 Elytra with a scutellar striole at base of first interstice; anterior

tibiae not oblique at apex.

2 (3 1 Clvpeus decidedly obliquely narrowed to apex Behbidium.

3 (21 Clypeus short, wide, hardly narrowed to apex Cillenum.

■i (1) Elytra without a scutellar striole: anterior tibiae oblique above apex

externally Tachys.

Genus B e m b i d i u ii.

Bembidium dubium Blaekburn.

)/a6.— Cleveland (Simson, No. 3505).

Genus C i l l e x u m.

CiLLEXuir MA.STERSI Sloane.

I cannot differentiate specimens in the Simson collection from specimens from
Sydney. Ilfracombe ("on beach," Simson).

Genus T a c h t s.
Table of Tasmanian .species.

1 (4) Elytra with a submarginal stria on middle of sides (indicated by some

punctures in Tasmanian species 1.

2 (3) Elytra 6-striat6: prothorax strongly rounded on sides. Length. 2—2.2

mm sni/is/ria/iis Blackb-

3 (2) Elytra 5-striate: prothorax lightly rounded on sides. Length, 2.2 mm.

tlindersi Blackb.

4 (1) Elytra with submarginal stria obsolete on sides.

5 (6) Form short, oval, very convex; prothorax not perceptibly narrowed to

base; elytra lae-vigat?, unistriate on each side of suture, unipunctate
on disc, apical striole well developed. Length, 2.2 mm.

hifoveatui Ma:l.

6 (51 Depressed; prothorax evidently narrowed to base; elytra bipunctate

on disc, apical striole obsolete. Length. 1.5-1.7 mm.
, t apt lis Blackb.

All these species also occur on the mainland.

Tachts semisthiatus Blackburn.

llah. — Stralian (Simson), Latrobe, Jordan River, Hobart, Kina Is. (Lea).

Tachy.s flixderst Blackburn.

//('/). — Jordan River (Leal.

Tachys bifoveatus Alacleay.

Hah. — West Tauiar (Simson).

Tachys captus Blackburn.

Allied to T. (Pohjderis) brevicornis Cbaud., of the northern hemisphere. I
have not seen it from Tasmania, but Mr. Lea has recorded it in his "List" of
1902.

152 THE CAHADIDAK OF TASJIANIA.

Tribe Pterostichini.
Table of Tasmanian genera.

1 (S) Mandibles with a seta in scrobe of outer side. (Xomiini, Sloane,

olim.)

2 (3) Elytra with eighth interstice not carinate at apex. . . Mectclothorax.

3 (2) Elytra with eighth interstice carinate near apex.

4 (5) Intercoxal part of mesosternum narrow and excised at apex; met-

episterna elongate Amblytelus.

5 (4) Intercoxal part of mosostsrnum wide and emarginate at apex; met-

episterna short, quadrate.

6 (7,1 Antennae with third joint bearing a few fine setules besides usual

apical setae Ptkroqmus.

7 (6) Antennae with third joint glabrous (except usual apical setaei .. ..

Pher-sita.
S (1) Mandibles without a seta in scrobe of outer side. (Pterostichini,

sensii siricto.)
9 (24) Antennae with three basal joints glabrous.

10 (13) Ventral segments 4 — 6 transversely sulcate. (Scutellar striole of

elytra, if present, at base of second interstice. Apterous. I

11 (12) Head with frontal sulci obsolete. (Elytra with three punctures on

third interstice — all beside third stria. I Simodontus.

12 (11) Head with strongly impressed divergent frontal sulci .. PRosopoaMUS.

13 (lU) \'entral segments without transverse sulci.

14 (21) Elytra w^ith scutellar striole at base of first interstice.

1.") (IS) Apterous. (Elytra with third interstice punctate: met-episterna in
Tasmanian species short.)

16 (17 1 Prothorax depressed across base, basal impressions wide, extending to

lateral border Rhabdotus.

17 (16 1 Prothorax with basal impressions narrow, distant from lateral border.

NoTOSOMDS.

18 (15) Winged. (Met-episterna elongate.)

19 (20) Elytra with third interstice 3-punctate (Two anterior punctures beside

second stria, posterior puncture beside third stria i . . Pskcdoceneus.

20 (191 Elytra with third interstice impunctate Chlaenioidius.

21 (14) Elytra without scutellar striole. Winged.

22 (23) Elytra with third interstice unipunctate near middle, pro-episterna

laevigate Loxandrus.

23 (22) Elytra with third interstice impunctate: pro-episterna striolate

Rhytisternus.

24 (9) Antennae with four basal joints glabrous. (Length exceeding 26 mm.)

Catabromus.

I am now unable to sup]inrt the separation of the aeiicra with a seta in tlie
outer scrohe of the mandibles from the great tribe Pterostichini: in the tribe
Mig-adopini there is the genn.s Tthi/tidnfjnathus with a mandibular seta, though
usually it is wanting in the tribe, and many Broscides of Australia, Tasmania,
and New Zealand are without the ordinary mandibular seta of the tribe Bro.;eini.

Loxantlrus ijaniitimts C'astelnau was deserihed from Tasmania, but I have
not seen it.

BY THOMAS G. SLOANE. 153

Genus M e c y c l o t ii o r a x.

Mecyclothorax ambiguus Erichson.

J/rt(;.— Launceston, AVest Tamar, Evandale, Great Lake (Simson. Nos. 2493,
2(U2. 3473); King Is. (Lea); Cradle Mountain, Waratah (Carter and Lea).
Occurs also in Australia (widely spread), and Xew Zealand.

Genus A m b l y t e l u .s.

Table of Tasmanian species.

1 (81 Upper surface unicolorous.

2 ("I Prothorax with basal angles obtuse, anterior marginal seta present.

.3 (6) Prothorax with margin widely reflexed and bearing a seta at basal
angles .

4 (5) Elytra with third, fifth, and seventh interstices seriate-punctate; striae

strongly crenulate. Length, 7.5 mm siria/iis SI.

5 (4) Elytra with third and fifth interstices punctate, seventh impunctate;

striae finely crenulate. Length. 8 mm sinisoiii S\.

6 (3) Prothorax with margin narrow and without a seta at basal angles.

(Elytra with striae faint, or obsolete; third interstice only
punctate). Length 7-8 mm iiiger S\.

7 (2 1 Prothorax with basal angles marked, anterior marginal seta wanting.

(Third interstice of elytra impunctate.) Length, 4.5 — 5.5 mm.

placidus Lea.

S (1) Elytra black with two discoidal vittae and lateral margins testaceous.

(Third, fifth and seventh interstices punctate, sutural black area

reaching base. I Length, 8 — 11 mm cur/us Fabr.

My conception of the genus Amhhjtelus includes Di/ntricliothurar of Black-
burn, which I believe to have been differentiated generically from Amblytehis on
insuffieient grounds. I do not know Dyscolus australls Erichs., and /). dilotatus
Erichs., in nature.

AmULYTELU.S STRI.\TUy, Sp. UOV.

Oval; prothorax a little wider at base (1.5 mm.) than apex (1.35 mm.),
rounded on sides, basal angles obtuse, two marginal setae on each side; elytra
oval, wide, strongly punetate-striate, interstices 3, 5, and 7 bearing a series of
setiferous punctures. Black ; femora reddish piceous ; tibiae, tarsi , antennae, and
palpi ferruginous.

Head large (1.5 mm. across eyes), obliquely narrowed behind eyes, convex
posteriorly; occiput a little swollen behind eyes (beside posterior supra-orbital
seta) ; front depressed; eyes large, protuberant. Prothorax l)roader than long (1.5
X 2.1 mm.), widest before middle, strongly roundly narrowed to apex, narrowed
to base in a light curve; apex very lightly emarginate, bordered; anterior angles
widely obtuse, not near neck; base arcuate, lightly sinuate on each side, bordered;
lateral border wide, bearing a few fine setules near anterior angles besides two
usual marginal setae. Elytra oval (5 x 3.5 mm.), convex; apical curve wide,
sinuate at extremity of ninth interstice ; border wide, reflexed ; striae strongly
crenulate. Tarsi with fourth joint of anterior wide, deeply excised; of inter-
mediate deeply excised, lobes short, outer more prominent than inner; of posterior
small, emarginate (not bilol)ed), outer side a little more prominent than inner.
Length, 7.5, breadth, 3 — 3.5 mm.

Hah. — Great Lake ( Simson 1. Three specimens.

154 THE CAKABIDAE OF TASMANIA,

In size and shape resembling A. simsoni SI., but distinct by colour black;
bead larger; elytra more strongly striate, the striae more coareely erenulate,
seventii interstice well defined and seriate-punctate. It may be allied to Dy<coliis
australis Erichs., but does not agree with tlie description of that species by colour;
lonn of prothorax (also basal angles and lateral basal impressions) ; elytra evi-
dently far more strongly striate, etc.; in all the characters just mentioned it
differs even more from the description "f O. iJilatatus Erichs.

Amblytelu.s simsoxi, sp. no\-.

Oval; inothorax cordate, rounded on sides; basal angles obtuse, two maigmal
setae on each side; elytra oval, wide, liglitly punctate-striate (sixth and seventii
striae faint or obsolete), third interstice with three punctures, fifth interstice with
one or two fine punctures on disc, seventh interstice impunctate. Brown (iiead
and prothorax piceous brown, elytra reddish brown) ; legs, antennae, palpi, and
abdomen fenniginous (tibiae darker than femora) ; prosternum and mesostcnum
reddish piceous.

Head large (1.7 mm. across eyes), lightly angustate behind eyes; vertex con-
vex; front depressed; eyes prominent. Prothorax broader than long (1.7 X 2.1
mm.); apex (1.5 mm.) a very little narrower than base; base arcuate, very
lightly sinuate on each side ; lateral border wide, cut obliquely behind basal angles ;
lateral basal impressions well developed, short, wide; median line lightly im-
pressed. Elytra oval (5.4 X 3.5 mm.), convex; five inner striae well marked,
fine, erenulate; interetices depressed. Met-episterna (without epimera) about a.s
broad as long. Tarsi with fourtli joint of anterior wide, deeply excised; of inter-
mediate bilobed (outer lobe a little longer than inner); of posterior wide, imar-
ginate, outer side produced into a short lobe. Leng-tli, 8, breadth, 3.5 — 3.8 mm.

Hob. — Tasmania (Simson, No. 3314). Three specimens. A fourth speci-
men is darker in colour, proportionately a little wider, and more decidedly striate,
but seems conspecific. Ben Lomond, 4000 feet (Simson).

In tlie Simson collection this species was named Di/scohis dilatatus Erichson,
but it does not at all suit the description of that siiecies; attention may be drawn
to the following differences from Eriehson's description of D. dilatatus : — Colour
not "subaneomicans" ; antennae and prosternuiu not testaceous; basal angles of
prothorax not "deiiticiili iiistar subprominulis" ; elytra not "subtiUissime obsole-
tpifue striatic." Erichson makes no mention of jiunctures on the third and fiftli
interstices in the descri))tion of I), dilatatus, and in all his descriptions of otiier
Tasmanian Carabs these punctures are carefully recorded, when present. It may
be near D. australis Erichs., l)ut I cannot think it agrees with that si>ecies in
colour — "metallico-nilidus" ; it has not the basal angles of prothorax ^'promiiiulif:
aubrectis" ; and the elytra are t(io decidedly striate to be described as "siibl'litrr
nbsolete<iue purictiito-striatis."

AilliLVTKLrs NIGER, Sp. nOV.

A])terous, oval; jirothorax of about equal width at base and apex, rounded on
sides, basal angles not marked, anterior marginal seta present, basal seta wanting;
elj-tra oval, wide, feebly striate, striae obsolete towards sides, eighth entire.
Black; tibiae reddish piceous; tarsi and antennae reddisli.

Head convex (1.5 across eyes), depressed between eyes, liglitly and obli(|uely nar-
rowed behind eyes; frontal impressions feeble; eyes jirotuberant. Prothorax broader
tiian long (1.5 X 2 mm.), widest before middle, subdepressed ; apex lightly eniaryin-

BY THOMAS G. SLOANE. 155

ate. finely bordered ; anterior angles obtuse, not near neck; lateral border narrow;
lateral basal impressions wide, sliallow. Elytra oval (4.4 x 3.5 mm.) , eonve.x ; apical
"urve wide, a little sinuate at extremity of ninth interstice; sides a little narrowed
to base; bolder rather wide, reflexed; interstices depressed, third with two or three
fine punctures on disc. Met-episterna (without epimera) about as long as broad.
Leno-th. 7—8. breadth, 2.0— .3.5 mm.

//(//a— -Mount Wellingion ("Summit," Lea). Ten specimens have been ex-
amined. Mr. Lea informed me it was found on trunks of trees.

A distinct species differino; from all others described by the followinj;- charac-
ters in conjunction : colour black ; jirothorax rounded on sides, narrowly bordered ;
posterior margiiial seta wanting; in no other species of Amblfitelus known to me
does tins occur. Compared with .1. cnrttix Fabr.. the fourth .ioint of the tarsi is
less strongly bilobed.

AiiBLYTELUs (Dystrichothorax) PLAt'iors Lea (1008).

It is a distingiiisliing character of this species to have the legs testaceous with
the middle part of the femora black; the lobes of the fourth joint of the tarsi are
equal. Length. 4.5 — 5.5 mm.

Hub. — Cradle Mountain, Waratah (C'arter and Lea); King Is. ( Lea) A
large series of specimens was obtained by Messi-s. Carter and Lea. some of whicli
Mr. Lea recorded as found "on King William Pine."

AiiBLYTELUs CL'RTUS Fabricius.

A specimen (?) from Launceston, 0.5 ram. in h-ng-tli, with the sutural black
stripe of the elytra reaching the base. I cannot differentiate from the tyiiical form
of the mainland. Six other specimens (c?) are in the Simson collection, which,
though smaller (6 7 — 8.5 mm.), must be taken to be eonspecitic with the larger
specimen, from which they only differ by their smaller size; it would seem that
Tasmanian specimens of A. eurtiis are of smaller average size than those of the
mainland.

Hub. — Launceston, Brighton (Sir)ison, No. 1368); Exeter (Carter).

Var. vittata Motschulsky. — A numerous series of si)ecimens (16. c?, V.) in
the Simson collection seem to represent A. vittatus Motsch. ; these specimens only
differ from .1. curtus Fabr., by having the eighth interstice black, as well as the
sixth and seventh, leaving only a narrow testaceous margin — the ninth interstice.
It is doubtful whether this slight colour variety is deserving of a varietal name.
Length. 8.5 — 11 mm.

Hub. — Launceston. Bi'igliton. St. Patrick's Hiver. Turner'-^ Marsli. .\voca. In-
terlaken (Simson No. 1368).

P T E K 0 f i M u .s^ gen. niiv.

Head convex^ laevigate; frout<il imjtressions strongly impressed, short, obli'Uiely
divergent backwards ; two supraorbital setae on each side ; a longitudinal ))or<ler above
base of antennae; eyes convex, strongly inclosed at base, distant from buccal
fissure beneath. Labrum truncate, 6-setose. Clypeus with a setiger(5us foveiform
puncture on each side. Mandibles stout, hooked, a seta in outer serobe. Maxillae
short; inner lobe hooked, not densely spinulose on inner side; outer lobe witii two
joints, apical joint stout. Maxillary paljii rather long; penultimate joint short,
obconic, very sparsely setulose: apical joint stout, fusiform, sjiarsely setulose.
Mentum with a short triangular median tooth. Lignla small, c<irneous. bisetose.

150 THE CARABIDjVE OF TASMANIA,

Labial palpi short; penultimate joint bisetose; apical joint short, subt'usifonn,
rather ampliate at basal third, obtuse at* apex, sparsely setulose. Antennae slen-
der, compressed, not long; two basal joints glabrous; thii-d joint one-half longer
than second, longer than fourth, sparsely setulose. Prothorax lightly trans\erse,
rounded on sides, subsinuate just before base; basal angles rectan.gular ; posterior
marginal seta wanting; a few tine punctures on each side of base. Elytra convex,
fully striate; third interstice 3-punctate beside third stria; eighth interstice ^ub-
carinate towards apex; base bordered; margin interrupted by an internal plica
towards apex. Met-episterna short, quadrate (including epinun-a hardly longer
than broad). Ventral segments without a transverse sulcus; ai^cal segment bise-
tose on each side in both sexes (in ? also with two other anteapieal setae). An-
terior tarsi in c? with three basal joints lightly dilatate and biseriately squamulose
beneath.

Though the third joint of the antennae is spar.?ely setulose, and the penulti-
mate joint of the maxillar>- {'alpi has some minute setules, this genus cannot be
placed in the tribe Merizoduii on account of the anterior tarsi in c? having tliree
joints dilatate and biseriately squamulose beneath. I believe its jiosition is beside
Phersita.

Pterogmus rufipes, sp. nov.

Oval, convex; head strongly bi-impressed ; prothorax sub(iuadratc, punctulate
and without a submarginal carina near basal angles, posterior marginal seta
wanting: elytra strongly striate, bordered on base, third interstice 3-punctate be-
side third stria. Black ; margin of elytra, legs, and antennae reddish.

Head wide (1.2 mm.) across eyes; vertex laevigate: frontal impressions deep,
strongly divergent, attaining margin at middle of eyes, connected in front by a
strong transverse line; spaces between bolder and frontal sulci convex; anterior
supra-orbital seta situated at posterior extremity of frontal sulci. Prothorax
laevigate, broader than long (1.4 x 2 mm.), widest just before middle, a little
wider across liase (1.5 mm) than apex (1.3 mm.); sides roundeil. shortly sinuate
before ba.se: border narrow, continued strongly along base on each side; ba.sal
angles a little prominent, summit obtuse, inner angle well marked; median line
distinct; lateral basal impressions narrow, well marked. Elytra oval (3.() >< 2.6
mm.), convex; humeral angles obtuse but marked (basal border a little r.-iis^'d
above lateral border at junction) ; interstices a little convex, more strongly so on
apical declivity; eiglitli inteistice wide, strongly raised above ninth iind with a
narrow edge near apex , ninth narrow. seriate-|>unctate. Length. 5.. 5 — 6.5,
breadth, 2.5 — 2.G mm

Hah.— Ben Lomond, 4000 feet (Simson Xo. 3124): Waiatali (Carter and
Lea) . A good series of specimens was in the Simson Coll.

Resembles a species of Abacetus, or a rather convex species of Simodiintits
in general aiijicai'ance. No marginal seta is present near the b.asal angles in any
of the eight s]>ccimens before mc.

Geiuis P 11 K u s 1 T A.

Believing thai the validity of Castelnau's genus Teraphis cannot be main-
tained under tlie laws ol nomenclature, owing to the previous use of Therapis
(1810), and Tcrnplni^ (1804). I adhere to the change of name I proposed in
1903. T now prefer to consider Drimostoma mnntanum Cast., as the type of a
section in the genus Phemila rather than to fornnilate a new genus for its recep-

BY THOMAS G. SLOANE. 157

tion; it does not belong to the genus Drimostoma. Drimostoma helmsi SI., also
represents a section of the genus Phersita; but if we examine many other genera
we will find variations among- the species as great as those between Teraphis mel-
boiinieiiais Cast., Drimostoma montanum Cast., and Z>. helmsi SI.

Table of Australian and Tasmanian species.

1 (6) Antennae increasing in thickness to apex, joints 5 — 11 moniliform,

compressed; elytra with humeral angles dentate; met-episterna
(with epimera) longer than broad (epimera long).

2 (5) Prothorax with outer basal impression strongly impressed, third inter-

stice of elytra bipunctate beside third stria.

3 (4) Prothorax with sides obhquely subsinuate to base, basal angles rect-

angular, not denticulate inelbourrtensis Cast,

4 (3) Prothorax with sides arcuate posteriorly, very shortly sinuate just

before base, basal angles denticulate tasinanica SI.

5 (2) Prothorax with outer basal impressions obsolescent; elytra with third

interstice impunctate helmsi SI.

6 (1) Antennae setaceous, slender, joints 5 — 11 oblong; elytra with humeral

angles marked but not dentate; met-episterna (with epimera)
quadrate (epimera very short). (Forni very convex, elytra with
third interstice impunctate.)

7 (10) Prothorax with outer basal impression shallow and separated from

inner impression.
S (9) Form larger, less convex; elytra less ampliate on sides. . .Length, 7.5 —

8.5 mm montana Cast.

9 (S) Form smaller, more convex; elytra more ampliate on sides. Length,

5.6 — 6.3 mm aus/nilis Cast.

10 (7) Prothorax with outer basal impression deep, not separated from inner

impression. Length, 6.7 mm coiivexa SI.

Note. — Teraphis melbournensis Cast. {= T. argutoroides Cast., from speci-
mens in Howitt Coll.). Drimostoma montanum Cast. (^= D. alpestris Cast.) 1
feel sure the synonymy given here is correct.

Phersita ta.smanica, sp. uov.

Oblong-oval; prothorax wide, wider at base (1.7 mm.) than apex (1.5 mm.) ;
elytra ovate, strongly crenulate-striate, eighth interstice carinate towards apex,
first interstice with a well marked short striole at base, third interstice bipunctate
beside third stria, basal border acutely denticulate at shoulders. Ferruginous-
brown.

Front stmngly bi-impressed, impressions divergent backwards; eyes (with
orbits) reniform; postocular part of orbits rather more than half the length of
eyes, slojaing obliquely to neck. Prothorax large (l.G ^ 2.2 mm.), rather de-
pressed; sides rounded, very shortly sinuate beside basal angles; anterior angles
obtuse, bordered; base truncate, angles acute, subdentate; lateral margin rather
wide, especially posteriorly; lateral basal impressions wide, sparsely punctidate.
Elytra truncate-oval (4 X 2.6 mm.), lightly convex; interstices a little convex,
seventh stria present a.s a row of closely placed punctures. Length, 7, breadth,
■2.6 mm.

Hah. — Tasmania (Simson No. 3119). Several specimens.

Allied to Ph. melbournensis Cast., but eyes less globose and prominent, post
ocular part of orbits longer, less abruptly raised from head; protliorax more

158 THE CARABIDAE OF TASMANIA,

rounded on sides, more depressed posteriorly, sinuosity of sides luueli shnrter,
denticle at basal angles more sharply marked; elytra with humeral tooth mure
l)rominent.

Phebsita AUSTPans Cast.

Ilab. — Tasmania (Simson, No. 3()90). Unifiue.

Phersita convexa, sp. nov.

Uval, convex; pruthorax broader than long, roundly ampliate at middle, sides
sinuate l)etore basal angles, base deeply c(mcave, punctate; elytra very convex,
strongly erenulate-striate; scutellar striole wanting, interstices convex, third im-
punctate, eighth strongly raised above seventh stria and subcarinate at apex, ninth
narrow, seriate punctate. Black; legs, antennae, and palpi red.

Head convex (1.5 mm. across eyes); frontal impressions parallel, wide,
shallow; eyes prominent, distant from buccal fissure beneath, lightly inclosed at
base. Prothorax broader than long (1.8 x 2.3 nun.), convex, declivous to base;
sides rounded, shortly (but evidently) sinuate to base; basal angles rectangular,
subdentate; base truncate above peduncle, sloping slightly forward on each side;
basal area depressed, punctate; two impressions on each side, outer impression
shorter than inner, space between these impressions depressed; median line dis-
tinct. Elytra oval (4 x 3.2 mm.), declivous to base, strongly declivous to apex;
base wide, emarginate, bordered ; humeral angles marked, not dentate ; sides
rounded. Length. 6.7, breadth, 3.2 mm.

Ilab. — Zeehan (Simson, No. 2123); Strahau and Waratah (Carter and lea).
Eleven specimens have been examined.

Very closely allied to Ph. australis Cast., from which it differs by larger size,
more convex form; the concavity formed by the bases of prothorax and elytra
deeper and (on prothorax) more punctate; prothorax more ampliate on sides,
basal impressions deeper, margin more strongly raised above the outer impression.

Genus S i Ji o d o N T u s.

Xote. — I have identified with confidence S. orthomoides Chaudoir, as synony-
mous with S. {.Irgutor) hulomelanus Germ. {Hah. — Mount Lofty Ranges, S.
Aust.). S. elongatus Chaudoii-, I believe to be a species found about Sydney, and
in the Blue Mountains [cf. Sldane. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1899, p. 573); I
have not seen it from Tasmania.

Table of Tasmanian species.

1 (4) Metepisterna elongate.

2 (3) Prothorax hardly narrowed to base; interstices of elytra depressed

austral is Dej .

3 (2) Prothorax evidently narrowed to base; elytra lightly striate

transfuga Chaud.

4 (li Met-episterna short aeneipennis Chaud.

SiMODOXTUs AUSTRALIS Dejean.

7.5 '^ 3.1 iniii. This species was not in the Siiuson Coll., but speci;nens
ticketed "Ta-s." were sent to me from the Soutii Australian Museum.

iVo/f. — Two specimens (c?) from Mr. Lea's collection ticketed "llobart'' are
more elongate than .S'. australi.'<, and have the elytra more strongly striate; more
.specimens would be needed to enable it to be properly studied.

BY THOMAS O. SLOANE. 159

Two spcfimens (c?) from Green Island are in the Simsou Coll. num oerert
2482; these have altogether the facies of .9. convexus Chaud., but have the basal
angles of the prothorax more marked. It seems conspecific with S. convexus, but
I am not prepared to determine it.

SiMODONTUS TRANSFUGA Chaudoir.

I identify as S. transfuga, specimens in the Simson Coll. ("No. 3479") ; it
differs from A', amtralis Dej. by shape more elongate, more parallel; prothorax
less transverse, more narrowed to base, more shortly narrowed to apex (in S. aub-
tralis the prothorax is widest about middle, in S. transfuga a little before middle') ;
el>i;ra with humeral denticule more prominent, more opacjue in 9- S. murraiianus
Blaekb., very closely resembles S. transfuga. but has the humeral denticule of the
elytra less developed.

//ob.^Brighton, Flinders Is. (No. 3479) .

. SiMODONTUS AENEiPEXNis Chaudoir.

Hab. — Brighton. Devonport (Simson): Stanley, King Is. (Lea). Also lound
in Victoria (Portland).

Genus Prosopogmus.

My idea of the genus Prosopogmus includes Chaudoir's subgenera Ceneus,
Uiirnwchihis, and Ophrijosternus.

Table of Tasmanian and Australian species.

1 (22) Elytra with eighth interstice free at apex, fifth and seventh inclosing

sixth.

2 (19) Elytra with third interstice 3-punctate (anterior puncture beside third,

two posterior punctures beside second stria).

3 (14) Legs red. femora sometimes piceous.

4 (9) Size large. 10.5—13.5 mm.

5 (8) Prothorax with basal angles well marked; elytra depressed on disc.

6 (7) Black. Length, 12—13.5 mm. hoisdiivali C&st.

7 (6) Head and prothorax bright green, elytra with eighth and ninth inter-

stices green. Length, 10.5 mm harpaloides ChauA.

8 (5) Prothorax with basal angles obtuse; elytra lightly convex on disc.

Length. 11.5 mm. leai SI.

9 (4) Size smaller, not exceeding 8.5 mm.

10 (13) Prothorax with basal angles rectangular; elytra with seventh ,md
eighth interstices narrow, convex, subequal in width with ninth.

II (12) Elytra with punctures of third interstice punctiform. Length, 7.5

mm austritius SI.

12 (11) Elytra with punctures of third interstice foveiform. Length, 6.5 mm.

riihicornis 81.

13 (10) Prothorax with basal angles obtuse; elytra with eighth interstice

much wider than ninth. Length, 7 — 8 mm tasmanicus SI.

14 (3) Legs testaceous.

15 (16) Elytra with interstices (including lateral ones) depressed. (Olivaceous,

shagreened; prothorax not punctate near base; dorsal punctures of
elytra interrupting the narrow third interstice.) Length, 7 mm.

yarrensis SI.

16 (15) Elytra with lateral interstices convex.

17 (18) Prothorax strongly punctate on each side of base. Pioeous, elytra

reddish near sides and on apical declivity. Length, 6.5 mm

punctiferus SI.

160 THE CARABIDAE OF TASMANIA.

IS (17) Prothorax minutely punctate in lateral basal impressions. Piceous,
elytra with sides (widely) and apex brownish yellow. Length,
7 — 8 mm foveipennis Macl.

19 (2! Elytra with one or two punctures beside .second interstice, (anterior

puncture wanting) .

20 (21) Prothorax hardly narrowed to base, sides not subsinuate posteriorly.

basal impressions wide and shallow ; elytra with only one puncture
on third interstice (the posterior one). Length. 10.5 mm.

sitspfcta Chaud.

21 (201 Prothorax decidedly narrowed to base, sides subsinuate posteriorly,

two deep basal impressions on each side ; elytra with two punctures
on third interstice beside third stria. Length, 8.5 — 10 mm.

moiiochroHs Chaud.

22 (1) Elytra with seventh interstice inclosed at apex by sixth and eighth.

(Met-episterna elongate.)

23 (26) Elytra with interstices nitid and strongly convex in both sexes.

24 (25j Prothorax with basal impressions impunctate. Length, 10 — 11.5 mm.

coraciniis Erichs.

25 (24) Prothorax with basal impressions punctate. Length, 7 — 8 mm.

occidentalis Macl.

26 (23) Elytra with interstices opaque in 5^.

27 (28) Prothorax evidently narrowed to base; striole at base of second elytral

interstice short. Colour atrous. Length, 9 mm. nainoyensis SI-

28 (27) Prothorax not evidently narrowed to base; striole at base of second

interstice elongate. Colour of a somewhat bronzy or greenish tint.

29 (30) Antennae and tarsi ferruginous. Colour atrous, with slight metallic

bronzed tint on elytra. Length. 7.5 — 9 mm. oodifortnis JVIacl.

30 (29) Antennae and tarsi infuscate. Upper surface bluish green. Length,

7 — 8.5 mm (/eV/Vfl/^/wi Tschitsch.

Note. — P. (Arijutor) nitidipennis MaeL, is a species of Prosopogmii^. but uo
specimen is avaihvble to me at present. P. (Ahax) reichei Cast- is likel.v con-
specific with P. boi.sdurali Cast. P. {Ilar2jalut') qaudraticollis Cast., I liave not
identified. P. inaperatus Sloane is not now available tor reference; the type is
missin.n'. All the sj)ecies known to me as occurring- in Tasmania are noted liere-
iimler. '

PROsoroi;.\n's lkai, sp. nnv.

?. — Elliptical, lii;litly convex; prothorax >ulii|u:ulrntc, liase (3.2 nun.) much
wider than apex (2.5 nun.), basal angles oljtusc; elytra strongly striate, inter-
stices not convex except towards ajiex, third interstice 3-punctatc, shouMci-s den-
tate; met-episterna (with e]>imera) longer than antcri(n- lircadlh; jirostcniuia boi--
dered at point. Black nitid.

Head convex (2.2 mm.) across eyes; frontal iiiiiircssions not decii. diveigent
hackwards; eyes inclosed beliind. renifonn (with orbits). Prothorax trans\ er.se
C2.75 X 3. .5 nun.), widest before middle, strongly narrowed to apex, liglitly
iibli(|uely narrowed to base, impunctate near base; anterior margin bordered,
liardly eniai'ginale; base lightl.y emarginate in middle, truncate on each side;
lateral border narrow; median line lightly impressed; inner basal imiircssicm
shallow, sulciform, outer impression obsolete; posterior marginal puncture fovei-
form, a little distance from liase. Elytra oval ((i.7 x 4 mm.); third interstice
with anterior ))unctnre beside third stria, two jiosterior jniuctures beside second
stria; eiglith interstice free at apex, fifth and seventh inclosing sixth, ninth seriate-

BY TH05IAS 11. SLOAXE. , lljl

punctate, the punctnivs not interrujJted in middle ; sthole at base of seeon<i inter-
stice linear. Length, 11.5, breadth, 4 mm.

Hab. — Tasmania (Lea). Unique.

In size and general appearance more resembling P. coracinus Erichs. than
any other species; Ijut differing decidedly by frontal impressions weaker, eyes less
convex, more strongly inchised at base by orbits; prothorax with basal angles
obtuse, outer basal impression obsolete; elytra with striae shallower, interstices
much less convex, lit'th and seventh inclosing sixth at apex, eighth free at apex,
punctures of ninth not interrupted in middle.

Prosopogmtjs tasmanicus, sp. nov.

d. — Parallel-elliptical; prothorax subquadrate, wider at base (2.1 mm.) than
apex (1.7 mm.), bi-impressed on each side of base, basal angles obtuse, but
marived; elytra striate, interstices depressed, third interstice 3-punctate, eighth free
at apes; met-episterna (with epimera) longer than broad. Black; tibiae piteous
red; tarsi and antennae red.

Head ordinary (1.6 across eyes), lightly bi-impressed. Prothorax broader
than long (2 >< 2.5 mm.) ; sides ai'cuate to apex, oblique to base; inner basal im-
pression sulciform, outer foveiform; pore of joosterior marginal seta distinct, be-
tween outer basal impression and basal angle. Elytra truncate-oval (4.5 X 3
mm. ) ; humeral angle strongly marked, shortly* dentate ; interstices a little eon-
vex towards apex, third with anterior puncture beside third stria, two posterior
punctures beside second stria, fifth and seventh inclosing- sixth at apex; strioie at
base of second interstice short. Prostei-num bordered at point, ventral segnients
smooth; d" with two, ? with four setigerous submarginal punctures at apex.
Length, 7 — 7.7, breadth, 2.15 — 3 mm.

9. — A little wider than c?; prothorax with basal angles a little more obi use;
elytra slightly duller.

Hah. — Denison Gorge, Lottah, Zeehan, Mount Wellington (Simson, No.
3118); Devonport, Sheffield, Hobart (Lea).

The type is from Denison Gorge; two specimens (5) in the Simson Coll. from
Mount "Wellington, have the prothorax with basal angles more obtuse than in the
specimen ($) from Lottah, and a specimen (?) from Zeehan has the second,
fourth, and sixth interstices of the elytra evidently wider than the third, fifth,
and seventh; two specimens in Mr. Lea's collection from Devonport and Sheffield
have the elytra more strongly striated than in the type. I believe all these
specimens are refei-able to one species, but a good knowledge of numerous speci-
mens from many localities in Tasmania is necessary before the question of its
variations can be dealt with.

Prosofogmus punctiferus, sp. nov.

(?. — Elliptical-oval, subdepressed ; prothorax subquadrate, wider at base (1.7
mm.) than apex (1.5 mm.), bi-impressed and punctate on each side of base, basal
angles almost rectangular; elytra strongly striate, interstices convex on lateral
and apical declivities, third 3-punctate, eighth free at apex; met-episterna (with
epimera) longer than broad, without epimera hardly as long on inner side as at
anterior margin. Head and prothorax shining bronzed-black; el.vtra piceous with
faint bronzy tints on disc ; lateral margin from seventh interstice and some obscure
maculae on apical declivity brownish; undersurf ace black (including posterior coxae
and base of posterior trochanters) ; antennae and palpi ferruginous; mandibles

162 THE CARABIDAK OF TASMANIA,

piceous red; tour anterior coxae, temora, and apex of posterior trochanters testa-
ceous; tibiae, tarsi, and four anterior troclianters ferruginous; extreme a]K-x of
femora and tibiae infuseate.

Head ordinary (1.3 mm. across eyes), lightly bi-impressed. Proti.orax
transverse (1.5 ^ 2 mm.), widest before middle; sides lightly curved to apex,
oblique to base ; apex lightly emarginate ; base lightly emargiuate in middle ; basal
angles marked, almost rectangular, obtuse at summit; base depressed, bi-impressed
and covered with a decided puucturation on each side; a posterior marginal seta
present just within basal angle. Elytra truncate-oval (3.6 X 2.3 mm.), lightly
convex; second and fourtli interstices wider than third; seventh and eighth inter-
stices equal, convex, narrower than ninth ; striole at base of second interstice elon-
gate; punctures of third interstice interrupting its course. Length, 6.5, breadth,
2.3 mm.

Hab. — Waratab (Lea). Unique.

A distinct species dift'ering from all others, except P. yarre)isi.'< SI., and P.
foveipennis MacL, by its testaceous leg's; from P. yarrensis it differs greatly by
I olour ; prothorax strongly punctate ; elytra with interstices more convex, especially
the narrower eighth. The specimen before me has a foveiform depression on the
fifth interstice, half-way between the two posterior punctures of the third inter-
stice.

Prosopoghus monochrous Chaudoir.

(^ Hormochiliis id., = Eccoptogenius feronoides Castelnau.)

ffa&.— Launceston (Simson No. 2477); Hobart (Lea). Also found in the
coastal districts of Victoria and N . S . Wales.

Prosopogmus coracinds Erichson,

(= Pterostichus id., = Ceneus chali/beipennis Chaudoir, = Feroiiia vili^.)

Castelnau).
Prosopogmus delicatulus Tschitscherine (1898). (Feronia (Ophryosternus) ea.)

Its most apparent differences from P. oodiformis Macl,, a common species on
the mainland, are its bluish-green colour, and infuseate tarsi and antennae.
Hab. — Launceston, East Tamar (Simson).

Genus R h a b d o t u s.
RiiABOOTUS EEPLEXUS Chaudoir.

Pterostichus diemenensis Cast., is synonymous witli 1!. rcflexus Chaud.,
and I would reduce E. floridus Bates to a variety. Chaudoir descritied R.
reflcxus as black, sides of prothorax subsinuate, basal angle rectangular; ir.
jloridus Bates has similar angles, but is, as Bates says, "distinguished from
JV. reflexiis by the rich, uniform, purple colour of the elytra." A specimen
from Zeehan has head black, prothorax nigro-vireseent, elytra jniiitle;
jirothorax wider than usual at base, basal angles rather obtuse, sides curving very
lightly to base. AVith the large series of specimens I have befm-e me 1 cannot
draw any defuiite line dividing P. flaridus from R. reflexus; there seems every
degree of variation of colour from the l)lack specimens to the most highly coloured.

Ilab. — K. reflexus, typical form : Mount Wellington, Ben Lomond, 4000 feet,
Forester River (Simson). Var. floridu: Zeehan, Strahan (Simson, Nos. 3040
3317, 3464); Cradle Mountain, Waratah, Mag-net, Devonport (Lea).

BY THOMAS G. SLOANE. 163

Genus N o t o n o m u s.

Table of Tasmanian species.

1 (4) Elytra deeply and fully striate, interstices convex, particularly at

apex.

2 (31 Elytra with apical sinuosities obsolescent. Length, . 15 — 20 mm.

politulus Chai'.d.

3 (2) Elvtra with apical sinuosities well marked, (third interstice inflated

near apex, in ? protuberant; a triangular projection on lateral
border on each side of apex in S). Length, 16.5 — 18 mm.

ttiberiiaudiis Bates.

4 (1) Elytral striae (excepting eigh-th) faint or obsolete, interstices de-

pressed.
5 (61 Elvtra with lateral border narrow near base, basal border forming a
blunt protuberance at humeral angles. Length, 13 — 16 mm.

chalybeus Dej.

6 (5) Elytra with lateral border strongly refiexed near base, .basal border

uniting with lateral border at humeral angles without a marked

prominence. Length, 16.5 — IS mm. philippi Newm.

NoTONOMUS POLITULUS Chaudoir.

This species is widely distributed in Tasmania; specimens are in the Simson
Coll. from Launceston, Denison Gorge, Ben Lomond (4000 feet), Forester River,
Wynyard, Straban, Zeehan, Mount Wellington (Nos. 3056, 3090), Flinders Is.
(No. 2728). It occurs at Cradle Mountain, Waratah, Straban (Carter and Lea).
In the long series of specimens brought from Waratab by Mr. Lea in January,
1918, the number of punctures on the third interstice of the elytra varies from two
to four; some specimens had the protborax a little more narrowed to 'the base, and
the elytra more rounded on the sides than usual, but all were evidently of one
species .

NoTONOMUS TUBERic'AUDUS Bates.

It is easy to distinguish the ? of this species from the $ of iV. politulw!
Chaud., by the ante-apical protuberance of the third interstice of the elytra, and
the triangular projection on the border near the apex; but to separate the t? is
not so easy; the third interstice is a little swollen at apex, and the fourth interstice
curves round the extremity of the third in a way it does not do in N. jiolitulus;
the lateral apical sinuosities also are more decided.

ilof).— Denison Gorge, Ben Lomond, 4000 feet (Simson, No. 3112).

NoTONOMUs CHALYBEUS Dejean.
Hub. — Stanley (Simson No. 3466); Straban (Carter and Lea); King Is.
(Lea).

NoTONOJius PHILIPPI Newman.

Hah. — Flinders Is. (Simson 3478). Also common about Port Phillip.
Genus P S E r D 0 C E N E u s.
PsEUDOCENEUS sonciTUs Erichson.
(? = Po.ecilus iridipennis Cast., 1 ^ P. iridescens Cast.)
Hab. — Launceston, Kelso, Evandale, Avoca, Great Lake (Simson No. 2896).
Small specimens (length 8.5 mm.) from the Great Lake were numbered "3693," as
distinct from P. solicitus; this form is more convex; protborax shorter, more

1(J4 THE CARABIDAE OF TASMANIA,

rounded on sides; eljira more strongly striate, interstices convex; there are, how-
ever, iu the Simsou Coll. specimens which link this slightly diflferentiated race
with the typical foi-m of the species; one would need to be more confident of the
value of these apparent differences than I am to give a distinctive name to No.
3693 of the Simson Coll.

Genus C H l a e x i o i d u s.

Chlaexioidus prolixus Erichson.

ifo!).— Flinders Is. (Simson No. 2487).

Genus Rhytisternus.

Table of Tasmanian species.

1 (4) Prothorax sinuate, or subsinuate before basal angles, these marked.

2 (3) Elytra with all striae distinctly marked, interstices convex at apex

(seventh stria faint or obsolete for two thirds of its length).
Length, 10—12 mm iiiiser Chaud.

3 (2) Elvtra with five inner striae well marked, sixth and seventh faint or

obsolete, except near apex. Length, 15 — 17 m.m. liopkiinis Chaud.

4 (1) Prothorax with sides arcuate to base, basal angles not marked. ( Four

inner striae wsll marked, striae 5 — 7 faint or obsolete, except to-
wards apex.) Length, 14 — 17 mm na//ioderus ChavtA.

All these species are common and widely spread on the Australian mainland;
only R. cijathoderus (No. 2476) was in the Simson Coll. The others are included
here on the authority of Jlr. Lea's "List" of :i.)02.

Genus Catadroixus.
C'atadromus lacordairei Castelnau.
Hall. — Macquarie River, Tasmania (Simson). Generally distributed in Aus-
tralia.

Tribe Anchomenini.

Table of Tasmanian genera.

1 (4) Mentum dentate; prothorax with a marginal seta at basal angles;

outer lobe of maxillae biarticulate.

2 (31 Elytra with third interstice punctate; tarsi glabrous above, ungues

simple Anchomenus.

3 '(2j Elytra with third interstice impunttate: tarsi setose above, ungue.':

serrulate Laemostenus.

4 (1) .Mentum edentate; prothorax without a marginal seta at basal angles;

outer lobe of maxillae uniartiiulate Homothks.

Anchomenus jiargixellus Erichson
Hah. — Evandalc, East Ta)nar, Great Lake (Simsou, No. 2876); Strahan,
Waratah (Carter and Lea).

Laemostenu.s COMPI.AXATU.S Dejean.
//((/.I.-— Lauuceslun (Simson). Intruchiccd.

Genus H 0 M 0 T ii E s.
I now consider this genus to belong to tlic tribe Anchomenini, which is the
position assigned to it by Erichson. It is certainly not a Lebiid, the anterior coxal
cavities liaving a single o])cning inwards; the tarsal vesture of tlie c? is as in the
.Vnchtimenini, not as in the Odacanthini.

BV THOMAS G. SLOANE. 165

Note. — I would delete from the genus, and from the Australian fauna,
Homothes emarginatus Chaudoir, which I have recognised from the description as
a species of Celebes and Borneo ; it requires a new genus.

Table of Tasmanian species.

1 (4) Prothorax arcuate-angustate to base, and with an evident juxta-basal

sinuosity.

2 (3 1 Elytra sericeous-black, inflexed margins piceous; antennae with seventh

and eighth joints albescent elegavs N'ewm,

3 (2 1 Elytra sericeous-brown, lighter-coloured near margin, inflexed margins

testaceous: antennae brownish . (Punctures of third and ninth in-
terstices set in testaceous spots.) i^uttifer Germ.

4 (li Prothorax obliquely angustate to base without evident juxta-basal

sinuosity. (Punctures of third interstice not testaceous.)

5 (61 Elytra with interstices flat, striae shallow; elytra sericeous-black'

femora testaceous with apex infuscate sericeiis Erichs.

6 (5) Elytra with interstices rather convex, striae deep; elytra black, opaque;

femora piceous nii^er SI

HoiioTHE'-; ELEOAN.s Newuian.

(?^ II. micans Germ.).)
ITob.— Brighton, Roseberry, Strahan (Simson. No. 2613); Waratah, Bruni
Is. (Lea). Common in S.E. Australia.

HbMOTHES GUTTiFER Germar.

iJ(j6.— Launccston, Brighton (Simson, No. 2964). Very widely distributed
on the mainland.

Homothes sericeus Ericlison.

(= n. jjarricollis Blackburn, = H. vicinus Sloane). I feel confident about
this synonym>-.

Hab. — Strahan (Simson). Ranges from Sydney to Perth on the mainland.

HoirnTirRs xiOEr;, sp. nov.

Black, oiiaque; tibiae lurid.

Depressed. 'Head convex (1.5 mm. across eyes), lightly obliquely narrcwed
behind eyes. Prothorax shagreened, wider than head, cordate (1.4 X 1.7 mm,),
widest and angulate at marginal seta, obliquely naiTowed to base; sides not situate
before base. Elytra oval (5 X 3.3 mm.), suljsinuate-truncate at apes, deeply
crenulate-striate; interstices opaque, shagreened, subeonvex, a little transversely
wrinkled, especially towards sides; third interstice 5-punctate. Length, 8.2,
breadth, 3.3 mm.

Hab. — Cradle Mountain (Carter). Unique.

A very distinct species differentiated from all others by colour coal-black;
femora black: elytra more strongly striate, etc. Its prothorax resembles that of
H. sericeus Erichs., but is wider, and the sides are obliquely angustate to the
base with a faint outward curve, not an inward curve as in H. sericeus.

Tribe Ctenodactylini.
This tribe has not hitherto been recognised as entering the Australian fauna,
but Plagiotehim opalescens Ollifif, is certainly a member of it, as is also Plagio-
telnm iriiiiim Solier: these two species are. from comparison, truly congeneric

Ki"! THE CARABIDAE OF TASMANIA,

Plagioteluji opalescens Olliff.

Protliorax with a fine marginal seta just before middle, no seta near basal
ang-les; elytra with two shallow discal impressions alono; course of third inteistire
(anterior impression consideral)ly before, posterior just behind middle) : anterior
coxal cavity with a single opening inwards; mesosternum unusually narrow be-
tween middle coxae; apex of abdomen in c? 6-setose, in 2 plurisetuse; tarsi more
or less setulose beneath in both sexes, particularly the bilobed fourth joint; (?,
anterior tarsi chithed beneath with long, not dense, griseous hairs, this setosity on
second and third joints most developed towards sides, in middle of these joints two
narrow rows of ])nl villi; ungues pectinate.

Hab. — Waratah (Carter and Lea). Not unconnuon on thiwcrs of Li'pto-
spermuni.

(AHA HI DAE BU'ElUOh'ATAE.

Tribe Licininii.
Table of Tasmanian genera.

1 (41 Mentum joining gula without support at base. Penultimate ioint of

labial palpi bisetose.

2 (31 Antennae with tv/o basal joints glabrous LESTiGNATHrs.

3 (2i .\ntennae with three basal joints glabrous Lacordairi.\.

4 (11 Mentum supported at base by a submentum. Penultimate joint of

labial palpi plurisetose Dickochilk

Genus L K S T I G N A T IT V S.
Table of species.

1 (4) Elytra with two fine punctures on third interstice.

2 (31 Size major; elytra with apical curve even. Length, 13. .5 — 1.5..') mm.

iitisor Erichs.

3 (2i Size minor; elytra with apical curve strongly sinuate on each side.

Length, 9.. 0 mm simsoni Bates.

4 (1) Elytra with three or four foveiform punctures on third interstice.

Length, 7.5 mm. foveatiis SI.

LE.STiGNATHrs cfRSOR Ericlison.

This species is widely spread, and varies a good deal in size and ai>pcaranc(',
some specimens being proportionately broader than others; the lengtli varies trom
13.5 to 15.5, and the brea<lth from 5 to (5. 2 mm.; the protliorax varies from 3 ><
3.1 to 3.3 X 3.5 mm. (in these measurements the length of the prothorax has
. been measured between anterior and basal an.gles, i.e., at place of greatest k'ngth).
The greater breadtli of the prothorax and elytra in some specimens as compared
with others is evidently not altogether a sexual difference, thougli generally narrow
specimens are females. The specimens from the AVest Coast seem usually smaller
than those from Dcnison Gorge ami Ben Lomond.

Hah. — Dcnison Gorge, Ren Lumond, Zeelian, Slialiaii (Simsnn. No. Ii114);
Waratah, Mount Magnet (Ijca).

IjKSTinx'.VTius SIMSONI Batcs.

(Simson No. 3115.)

' LesTIGNATHUS FOVEATTJS, sp. linv.

Oval; prothiuax bisetose on each side, posterior seta on edge of liorder a

little before basal angle; elytra lightly striate, interstices flat, third witli tiiree or

four foveae; antennae with two basal joints glabrous, tliiril setulose; met-

BY THOMAS G. SLOANE. 107

episterna short, transverse. Pieeous black ; lateral channel and inflexed miirgin
of elytra testaceous; legs pieeous; four anterior coxae, posterior trochai-ters,
apex and base of femora, and tarsi lurid-testaceous; antennae infuscate.

Head small (12 mm. across eyes); labrum emarginate, with four submar-
ginal setae. Prothorax broader than long (1.6 ^ 2 mm.), widest at anterior
third, depressed, flat on each side of base; lateral basal inqiressions narrow, dis-
tant from lateral margin ; sides rounded, strongly roundly narrowed to apex, nar-
rowed in a gentle curve to base; apex feebly emarginate in middle; angles
rounded off; border narrow, hardly more strongly retlexed at basal angles than
on middle of sides, entire along anterior margin, obsolete only on middle of
base. Elytra ovate (4.6 ^ 3.1 mm.); apical curve short, oblique, not pereeiitibly
bisinuate; inner striae more or less interruj)ted near lia-se; disc with a row of four
equally spaced foveiform punctures on third interstice. Penultimate joint of
maxillary paljji proportionately shorter, and terminal joints of both maxillary
and labial palpi stouter than in L. cursor Erichs. Length, 7.5, breadth, 3.1 mm.

Hab. — Zeehan (Simson, type), Waratah, Strahan (Carter and Lea).

A distinct species, which differs decidedly from the other two species o: the
genus by the four large discal punctures of the third interstice of the elytra. As
in L. simsoni Bates, the posterior marginal seta of the prothorax rises from a
pore on the edge of the border a little before the basal angle; in L. cursor the
post-marginal seta and its pore are obsolete. The prothorax is flatter and sh(.rtcr
than in L. cursor, therefore more resembling that of L. simsoni.

Genus L a c o r d a i r i a,

Lacordairia CALAThoides Castelnau.

Oval, de])ressed Head small (1 mm. across eyes); antennae with three
basal joints glabrous; labrum deeply triangularly excised, 4-setose; clypeus emar
ginate. Prothorax depressed, transverse (1.5 x 2.2 mm.), evidently wider across
base than apex ; derm finely shagreened ; sides lightly rounded ■ apex lightlv
emarginate; angles obtuse; base truncate, curving lightly forward on each side,
angles obtuse; basal area flat on each side; lateral basal impressions short, dis-
tinct; border entire, narrow on sides, bearing at basal angle a setigerous jiore.
Elytra ovate (4.2 X 2.9 mm.), depressed on disc, lightly declivous to basal border
on each side of base, rather strongly declivous to apex, finely striate; interstices
flat, third impunctate, eighth very wide; apical curve short, even. Black, nitid;
antennae, tibiae, and tarsi ferruginous. Leng-th, 7, breadth, 2.0.

Hab.— St. Marys (Simson, N,,. 3643). Unique.

I feel confident in identifying this species as L. caJathnides Cast., and offer
the above description to record some characters of importance not noticed by
Castelnau. It diffei-s from the Victorian species L. argutoroides Cast, (which also
has the third interstice of the elytra impunctate) by femora pieeous; form wider;
prothorax broader with sides more evenly rounded ; elytra much wider, more finely
striate, eighth interstice wider, etc.

Genus D i c r o c ii i l e.

Table of Tasmanian species.

1 (2) Prothorax with a deep concavity on each side, base bordered externally
by the strongly upturned margin, basal angles marked; third inter-
stice of elytra 3-punctate. Length, 15.5 mm. .. quadricollis Cast.

168 THE CARABIDAE OF TASIIANIA,

2 (1) Prothorax flat on each side of base, the depressed area bordered ex-

ternally by the lateral border, basal angles rounded: third interstice
of elytra 2-punctate.

3 (6) Prothorax very broad: elytra with interstices convex, nitid in both

sexes.

4 (5) Elytra with striae crenulate. Length. 14 — 1.5 mm. goryi Guer.

5 (4) Elytra with striae simple. Length. 12 mm. .. . brez'icollix Chdi-ad.

6 (3) Prothorax lightly transverse: elytra with interstices depressed, opaque

in ?. Length, 12 mm ' miniita Cast.

yote. — Bates reported T). ptinctipennis Cast., as a Tasmanian species received
from Mr. Simson ; perlia])s tliis may be the same speeies which I have identified
as D. qtiadricollis Cast.

DlCKOt'HILE QUADRICOLLIS Cast.

c?. Black. Head large. Prothorax subtiuadrate (2.5 X 3.G mm.), widest'
before middle; base and apex of equal width (3 mm.); sides subsinuate pos-
teriorly; basal angles marked; a concavity on each side of base extending to the
strongly upturned margins. Elytra -wide, strongly striate; striae simple; mter-
stices hardly convex, third 3-punctate. "\^entral segments 3 — 5 setigero-piuictate.
Length, 15, breadth. 6 mm.

Hob. — Flinders Is. (Simson, No. 2375). Also found in Victoria.

I unhesitatingly identify this species as I). quacJricollis Cast. ; it is conspecific
with specimens in my collection from Mooroolbark (eastward of IMelbourne). In
the ?, the ventral segments ai-e without setigerous punctures.

DiCROCHiLE GORYi Guerin.

jl„h. — Falmouth (Simson). Very widely spread in Australia.

DiCROCiTiLE BREVicOLLis Chaudoir.

jiab. — Great Lake (Simson). Widely spread in Australia.

DiCROCHiLE MiNUTA Castelnau.

Jfob .—Hobart (Lea); Epping (Griffith). In a note. Mr. Lea says, "I'ound
by Mr. Gritlith flying plentifully in Eppin.g Forest at dusk." Common and wide-
ly spread on the mainland. It may be noted that in all the specimens I liavc ex-
amined, only two punctures have been present on the (liivd interstice of tlic elytra,
though Castelnau gives the number as three.

Tribe Oodini.
Genus 0 o d e s.
OODEs MODESTl's Casteliiau.
//«!-.— Evandale (Simson, No. 3502).

Genus C 0 p t o c A r p u s.
C0PT0CAi!PUS AUSTRALis Dejcan.
Hah. — Launceston. Ea.«t Tamar. Evandale (Simson).
Tribe Tetragonoderini.
Genus S a r o t ir n « c r e p i s.

Lebionwrphn (fjeii. itied.) Chaudoir. Eetrnma (nom praeor.) Blackburn.

T have found the characters on which Blm-kburn sought to establish his cenus

r,Y THOMAS G. SLOANE.

169

Ectroma elusive; and, tlioug-h the species on which Blackburn founded this genus
(genotype, Lehia civica Newm.), might be put in Chaudoir's suggested genus
Lebiomorpha (genotype, L. civicn Newm.), as has been done by me in the past, it
now seems better to follow Macleay and refer them to Sarothrocrepis, sensu lato.

Table of Tasmanian species.

1 (10) Fourth joint of all tarsi bilobed.

2 (7) Size large. Length. 7.o mm., or over.

3 (6) Prothorax testaceous.

4 (5) Elytra with interstices 6 — 8 infuscate to base, base also infuscate.

Length, 9 — 10 mm at/icftrNevim.

5 (4) Elytra testaceous on basal third, and with a large, ante-apical, black

area. Length, 7.5 — 8 mm posticalis Guar.

6 (3) Prothorax and elytra piceous (or black) with wide, testaceous, latere.!

margins. Length, 7 — 8 mm /uc/i/osn ^ewm

7 (2) Size small, less than 6 mm. in length.

S (9) Head testaceous, elytra black with post-basal plagae, lateral margins,
and apex testaceous benefica Newm.

9 (8) Head and prothorax black, elytra black with testaceous post-basal
plagae r/z'/ra Newm.

10 (1) Tarsi with fourth ioint bilobed on four anterior tarsi, simple on pos-

terior tarsi.

11 (12) Elytra testaceous, four basal black spots and a wide, post-median,

black area extending across elytra — only lateral border and inflexed
margins excepted grm<is Blackb.

12 (11) Elytra testaceous, two basal black spots on fourth and fifth interstices,

and a narrow irregular black fascia above apical declivity (its
anterior margin deeply emarginate) . (Sometimes the fascia con-
tinuous across six inner interstices, sometimes it is obsolete on fifth
interstice and its usual apex appears as a small black spot just
before the middle of the length of the sixth interstice — typical form.)

inquinala Erichs.
Sarothrocrepis calida Newman.

(= S. !nfnscata Sloane, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, 1916, p. 206.)
Mr. H. E. Andrewes, to whom I sent specimens, has compared S. infuscata
with the type of Lebia calida, in the British Museum, and has informed me that it
is the same species. I believe it is distinct from S. corticalis Fabr.

Hab. — Launceston, Brighton. St. Patrick's River, Mole Creek (Simson, No.
■2486) ; Burnie, Sheffield (Carter and Lea). Also found in the mountains of S.E.
Australia.

Sarothroorepis posticalis Guerin.

[= S. suavis Sloane (non Blackburn), Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, 1917,

p. 423.]

I formerly took this species for S. suavis Blackb., from which it differs by the
sharply marked basal angles of the prothorax. Testaceous, with a large black
patch on the apical half of the elytra. Length, 7.5 — 8 mm.

Hah. — Tyannceston, Brighton. Beaconsfield, West Taniar (Simson No. 267.5).
Also found in the mountains of S.E. Australia.

Sarothrocrepis luctuosa Newman.
Hah. — Brighton (Simson, No. 2676). Widely spread in the mountains of y^^\ C
South-eastern Australia. /v ^ _„

LU LIBRA

170 THE CARABIDAE OF TASMAXIA,

Sarothrocrepis benefica Newman.

Hah. — Launoe^ton, St. Patrick's River, Ejiping (Siinson, No. 2490). Widely
spread in Australia.

Sarothrocrepis 'civica Newman.

TIab. — Laimceston, West Tamar, Kareola (Simson, No. 3311). Widely >preiid
iu Australia.

Sarothrocrepis gravis Blackburn.

Hah. — Denison Gorge (Simson). Mountains of Victoria and N.S. Wales.

Sarothrocrepis ixqvix.vta Eriehson.

Hab. — Kelso ''beach'' (Simson).

Tribe Lebiini.
Table of Tasmanian genera.

1 (41 Tarsi with fourth joint bilobed.

2 (3) Labial palpi with apical joint stout, but not triangularly securiform

Xanthoph.iea.

3 (2) Labial palpi with apical joint securiform. (Tarsi glabrous.)

Triqonothops.

4 11) Tarsi with fourth joint simple.

.5 (10) Mesosternum narrow between intermediate coxae.

() (9) Tarsi setulose on upper surface. Interstices of elytra setulose-punc-

tate, third bearing at least three setifsrous punctures.
7 (8) Palpi with penultimate joint long: intermediate tarsi in c? with two

or three joints squamose beneath Philophloeu.s.

5 (7) Palpi with penultimate joint short; intermediate tarsi in c? without

squamae beneath Aoonochila.

9 161 Tarsi glabrous on upper surface. Interstices of elytra laevigate, third
bipunctate (anterior puncture on basal third beside third stria,
posterior puncture about apical third beside second stria*

DiAB.lTICrs.

Mesosternum wide between intermediate coxae.

Eyes not enclosed at base in s-voUen orbits Microlkstes?

Eyes enclosed at base in swollen orbits Anomotarvs.

Genus X A X t H o p h a k a.
Table of Tasmanian species.

Tarsi with upper surface setose : antennae with basal joints setulose.
Form narrow, elongate (elytra, 5X3 mm.) ; elytra testaceous with a

piceous vitta along sixth and seventh interstices. infuscata Chaud.
Form oval (elytra, 4 X 3.2 mm.); upper surface piceous .. . .sc/osa Si-
Tarsi with upper surface glabrous; antennae with three basal joints

glabrous. Testaceous fintr/iinodcnis Chaud.

Xan'TIIOpiiaka ikfuspata (~'liaudoir.

Hub. — Launccston, Bri.u:hton, Beaconsfleld, George Town (Simson, No. 2488).

Xanthophaea setosa, sp. nov.

Oval; lieail obli(|ucl.v and .strongly narrowed behind eyes, antennae with three
ba-sal .ioints sparsely setulose; prothorax transverse, lateral margins explanate,
reflc.xod, b.isal angles a<'Ute, surface s])ai'sel.v setose, several long setae on anterior

10

(5)

11

(12)

12

(11)

1

(4)

2

(3)

3

(2)

4

(1)

BY THOMAS r,. SLOASE. 171

part of sides; elytra wide, ovate, interstices sparsely setigero-piinctate; tarsi
fcetose on upper surface, fourth joint deeply emarginate, ungues pe<'tinate. Piceons;
antennae and palpi ferruginous; leg's feriiiginous-yello-w.

Head wide across eyes (1.5 mm.); vertex convex, setose; front wide, sub-
depressed; labrum rounded at angles, apex emargrinate in middle, 6-setose, the
setae submarginal ; palpi stout, labial with apical joint stout, obliquely trvirieate
from inner side, strongly rounded on external side ; raentum with a strong median
tooth. Prothorax broader than long (1.3 x i.g mm.), widest at anterior third,
wider at base (l.-l mm.) than apex (1.2 mm.) ; apes lightly emai-ginate ; anterior
angles rounded; sides rounded on anterior two-thirds, subsinuate posteriorly and
meeting base at right angles; basal angles acute, denticulate; base truncate on
each side behind margins, a little produced liackwards and truncate in middle;
median line strongly impressed, the setae of the surface rising from punctures.
Elytra ovate {-i ^ 3.2 mm.), lightly convex, widest a little behind middle, -Tiore
narrowed to base than to apex, rounded on sides; apex emarginate at suture; outer
angles widely rounded ; setae of interstices sparsely and rather irregularly placed,
rising from conspicuous punctures; striole at base of first interstice i-hort.
Abdomen setigero-punctate. in c? with one, in 2 with two setae on eadi side of
apex. Length, 7 — 8, breadth, 3.2 — 3.4 mm.

Hab. — Mount Wellingfon (Lea). Five specimens have been examined.

Thoroughly distinguished from all other species except X. pilosula Chaud.,

.by its setose upper surface. X. pilosula is unknown to me in nature, but X. setosa

differs greatly from the description of that species which is described a.s having

the elytra narrower and more elongate than X. vittata Dej. ; in X. setosa the

elytra are much wider and more oval than in X. rittata.

Xanthoph.vea beachinoderu.s Chaud.

Ilah. — Launceston (Littler). Also from Western Australia. South Australia,
Victoria, and Xew South Wales.

Genus T r i r, o x 0 t h o p .s.

Trigoxothops pacifica Erichson.

I have seen only this one species from Tasmania; it is a species which varies
considerablv in size and appearance; alwavs in T. pacifica the base of the elvtra is
black.

Tfnb.— Launceston, Brighton, St. Patrick's River. Mole Creek ( Simsun. No.
2489).

Genus PniLOPHLOEUfi.
Idiiis Chaudoir.

Table of Tasmanian species.

1 (6) Prothorax with more than one marginal seta anteriorly. Apex of

abdomen plurisetose.

2 (3^ Prothorax narrow, usually with three setae on each side (very rarely

with two or four setae) . Intermediate tarsi in c? with three joints
squamose beneath distinguendtis Chaud.

3 (21 Prothorax wide. Intermediate tarsi in S with two joints squamo:-<e

beneath.

4 (.5) Size major (12 mm. I. Prothorax lightly emarginate, three to five

setae anteriorly on each side eticalvp/i Germ .

172 THE CARABIDAE OF TASMAXIA,

5 (41 Size minor (S.5 — 9 mm. I. Prothorax deeply emarginate. two strong

setae on each side distant from apex, several fine setules at apical
angles. (Apex of abdomen in J 4-setose on each side.'

viyitiiecophilus Lea

6 (li Prothorax with one marginal seta anteriorly.

7 (Si Black. (Apex of abdomen plurisetose. ) inoesliis Chaud.

8 (7» Picsous: head, prothorax (sometimes disc infuscatei. margins of elytra,

a discoidal plaga on each elytron, antennae, and legs testaceous.

9 (12) Prothorax deeply emarginate.

10 (111 Prothorax with basal angles rounded oft: elytra 3-maculate. Apex of

abdomen in both sexes 4-setose on each side sivisoni SI.

11 (10' Prothorax with basal angles marked, though obtuse: elytra bivittate,

vittae uniting at apex, narrow or interrupted at apical third. Apex
of abdomen in ? 2-setose on each side oh/iisiis Chaud.r

12 (9i Prothorax lightly emarginate. (Elytra with two narrow pointed dis-

coidal vittae. Apex of abdom.en in V 2-setose on each side.^

hhittiitiis SI.

yote. — I take the present opportunity of leeording that on examining the
type specimen of P. ornati(i< Blackl)., it was evident tliat P. tnaicatiis SI. was the
same species.

Philophloeus nisTiXGrEXDUS Chaudoir.

This species is distinguished by haWng the eljiral vittae usually short and
pointed, rarely extending to the second puncture of third interstice; the tyineal
form lias generally three anterior marginal setae on the prothorax, rarely four,
and in one Tasmanian specimen only two setae on each side.

Hah. — Turner'.^ Jlarsh, St. Patrick's Plains. ]\Iole Creek iSimsonl.

Philophloeus EfCALYPTi Genuar.

It can hardly be distinguished from P. auxtralis Dej.. except by the inter-
mediate tarsi of J having two. not three joints squamosa beneath; this char;ieter
I have found con.stant in P. eucah/pti and P. distitifjiiendus Chaud. I do not .see
any reasons for distinguishing the Tasmanian fonn by the varietal name ''tas-
tiMitica," as suggested by Blackburn.

Hah. — Launceston, Brighton ( Simson, Xo. 2485 ) . •

Philophloeus JiYRiiECOPniLU.s Lea.

Hub. — ^fole Creek. Karoola (Simson).

FHiLOPin.OErs hoestcs Chaudoir.

(= Tdius id. Cliaud.)

Il(d>. — Great Lake (Simson).

PhILOPHLOEUS SIMSOXI, SJ). nov.

Oval, depres.sed ; head depressed; prothorax deeply emarginate, postc'rior
angles rounded off, two marginal setae on each side; elytra biplagiate on basal
half; apical ventral segment in c? 3- or 4-setosp. in $ 4- or 5-setosc on each side;
intermediate tarsi in c? with two basal joints si|uamose beneath. Head, disc of
prothorax. tibiae, tarsi, palpi, antennae, and undei-surface more or less ferru-
ginous: femora and margins of prothorax testaceous; eh-tra piceous, a large

BY THOMAS G. SLOAXE. 173

elongate plaga extentling' from base to about half the length on interstices 3 — 5 of
each elytron, a rather large common apical mark on intei'stices 1 — 1 (emarginate
on anterior margin), and a narrow lateral margin testaceous.

Head wide (1.8 mm. across eyes), strongly obliquely narrowed behind eyes,
finely shagreened and punctiilate ; eyes very prominent. Prothorax transverse
(1.5 X 2.7 mm.); surface covered with fine setulose punctures; lateral margins
wide, depressed ; sides strongly rounded ; base shortly lobate. Elytra (juadrate-
oval (4.6 >^ 3.8 mm.); striae obsolescent; base arcuate on each side, emarginate
in middle. Length 8.5. breadth, 3.8 mm.

Hab. — Launeeston, Kelso, Mole Creek (Simson, No. 2847).

I know of no described species attributed to Philophloeus which has the pat-
fern of the elytra similar to that of P. simsoni. It is allied to P. sydneyensis
Blackb.. with which it agrees in apical emargination of the prothorax. and the
two marginal setae; apex of abdomen 4-setose on each side in S; intermediate
tarsi with two joints squamose beneath ; but the pattern of the elytra is different ;
in P. sydneyensis the \)a\.e vittae reach the apex, where they unite. Compared
with P. myrmecophilus Lea, the prothorax has the anterior angles less rotimdate,
not plurisetulose. the sides not with two or three setae anteriorly; eh'tra with
shorter plagae, and apex testaceous in middle.

Philophloeus obtu.sus Chaudoir?

Two specimens (?, No. 2674) are in the Simson collection without exact
locality, which I identify as P. ohtusus Chaud. Prothorax with two setae on
each side; apex of abdomen in ? bisetose on each side; it resembles P. simsoni in
pattern, but the testaceous plagae are more elongate, in one specimen attaining
the apical macula, the prothorax is differently shaped, being less oblique and
arcuate on each side of base, basal angles marked, but obtuse at summit and pre
ceded by a light sinuosity. Length, 7 — 8, breadth, 3.5 — 3.7 mm.

Philophloeus bivittatu.s, sp. no\ .

Oval, depressed; ])rothorax transverse, two lateral marginal setae on each
side, basal angles obtuse; elytra bivitt ate, the vittae long, pointed, apex and ninth
interstice piceous; apex of abdomen (t?) 2-setose on each side. Piceous; mai--
gins of prothorax (widely), vittae, lateral channel, border and inflexed margins of
elytra, femora, middle of prosternum, and metasternum testaceous; head, an-
tennae; mouth-parts, tibiae, and tarsi ferruginous; abdomen infuscate.

Head wide (1.65 mm. across eyes), shagTcened, sparsely punctulate. Pro-
thorax transverse (1.3 X 2.5 mm.); apex lightly emarginate; sides rounded,
widely and obtusely subangulate at anterior marginal seta, oblique to base; basal
angles obtuse ; basal lobe short ; base obliquely truncate on each side. Elytra oval-
quadrate (4.3 X 3.4 mm.), finely and closely setulose-punetate, faintly striate;
inner apical angles obtuse; base not roundly prominent on each side. Leugth,
7.5. breadth, 3.4 mm.

Hob. — Launeeston (Simson). Two specimens.

Nearly allied to P. confertus Blackburn. From the Western Australian
species which I identify as P. confertus it differs by <S with tarsal vesture on under
side of three basal joints of intermediate tarsi ; colour darker, especially pro-
thorax not wholly testaceous; prothorax less transverse, less roundly narrowed
anteriorly, anterior angles a little indicated, not so roundly obtuse. P. confertus
has the apex of abdomen in both sexes bisetose on each side.

174 THE CARABIDAE OF TASMANIA,

Genus A G o x o c h i l a.
Table of Tasmanian species.

1 (10) Prothorax transverse, strongly ampliate behind anterior angles. (Head

short, eyes hemispherical.)

2 (5) Elytra with discal spots transverse, greatly reduced in length beyond

fifth interstice.

3 (4) Prothorax with sides oblique to base, basal angles obtuse. Length,

5.0 — 6.5 mm ciirtula Erichs.

4 (3) Prothorax with sides sinuate to base, basal angles rectangular. Length,

5 mm bhnaculaia SI.

5 (2) Elytra with discal spots variable, but not greatly reduced in length

beyond fifth interstice.

6 (9) Prothorax ampliate and strongly rounded at widest part, evidently nar-

rowed to base; sides subsinuate before base.

7 (8) Size major (7 — 7.5 mm.). Prothorax with one or two marginal setae

before middle , .. .. plagiata SI.

8 (7) Size minor (4.5 — 5 mm.). Prothorax with one seta before middle

sinuosa Chaud.

9 (6) Prothorax lightly rounded at widest part, obliquely narrowed to base.

(Base wide; basal angles obtuse.) Length, 5 — 6 mm.

binoiata White.

10 (1) Prothorax lightly ampliate behind anterior angles. (Form rather

elongate; elytra with narrow discal spots.)

11 (12) Size minor (4.5 — 5 mm.). Head short, eyes hemispherical

/e>! est rata Blackb.

12 (11) Size major (5.5 — 6 mm.). Head longer, eyes prominent, but less

than hemispherical.

13 (14) Prothorax with basal angles obtuse; anterior margmal seta at anterior

third. Length, 5.5 — 6 mm bigiitiata Cha.u6..

14 (13) Prothorax with basal angles sharply marked, anterior marginal seta be-

hind anterior third. Length, 5.5 mm Jlindersi 'SX.

Agonochila cuetola Erichson.
(= A. corticalis Chaudoir.)

Ilab. — Launeeston, Kelso, Beaconsfleld, Avoca, Turner's Marsh, Epping, In-

torlakon (SiiiLSon, No. 2487); Wilmot, Waratali (Carter and Lea). Common in
R.E. Australia.

Agonochila hi.aiaci^lata, sp. nov.

Depressed ; i)rothorax transverse, lightly emarginate at apex, sides strongly
ampliate at widest part, sinuate posteriorly, basal angles reftangular, lateral
margins explaiiate. wide anteriorly; elytra widest behind middle, decidedly nar-
rowed to base, i>uneturation rather coarse. Piceous; elytra 3-uiaculate, nmeulae
testaceous, discal pair irregularly oval, extending across interstices 3 — 6, apical
spot connuon to both elytra, wide, extending forward on third and fnnrtli inter-
stices.

Head pimehdale, dejiressed (1.25 mm. across eyes); eyes hemispliern-al.
Prothorax widely transverse (1 ^ 1.65 mm.); sides strongly rounded, suban.gu-
late beside anterior marginal seta; sides strongly sinuate posteriorly, meeting
base at right angles; apex lightly and widely emarginate; base shortly lohate, cut
sharply on each side; basal angles sliarp, almost rectangular; disc a little convex,

BY THOMAS G. SLOANE. 175

covered with small setuluse puuftures; margins wide, ruguloso-puiictate. Length,
5, breadth, 2.3 mm.

Hah. — Launceston (Bimson).

Only the specimen on whit-h the description is founded suits it in regard to
the sharply rectangular basal angles of the prothorax; a second specimen
(gummed on the same card with the type) has the prothorax similar, except that
the ante-basal sinuosity of the sides is less developed, and the summit of the
angles is a little obtuse; a third specimen (c?) resembling the second was num-
bered 3688; the pattern of the elytra in these three specimens is the same.

Agonochila plagiata Sloane.

Tlab. — Sheffield. (Carter). I originally found this species on the trunks of
Eucalyptus curiacea in N.S. Wales

Agonochila sinuo.sa Chaudoir.

Depressed ; protliorax transverse, lightly emarginate at apex, base and spex
of about equal width (LI mm.), basal angles obtuse, lateral margins explmate
posteriorly, narrow anteriorly; elytra widest behind middle, a little narrowed to
base, puncturation fine. Head rather dark red; prothorax ferruginous, some-
times slightly infuscate on disc; elytra piceous with testaceous markings, some-
times bimaculate on anterior half, and with an apical mark common to both eJsrtra
(trimaculate form), sometimes the two discal marks reach the apical one along
the fourth, or fourth and fifth interstices (bivittate form) ; tibiae and antennae
ferruginous, femora and basal joint of antennae testaceous. Length, 4.5 — 5 mm.
The measurements of a specimen are: — Length, 5, proth., 1 x 1.5, el., 2.8 X 2.2
mm.

Hah. — Launceston (Carter); Hobart (Lea).

I have identified A. sinuosa Chaud., from the description of that author, w hich
is insufficient. In pattern of elytra it is variable, so much so that it seems to
me very probable that A. ritlula Chaud., will prove to be the same. It was num-
bered 3315 in the Simson Coll.. and under that number there was also a second
specimen having the elytral pattern of the trimaculate form, but with the three
spots much larger, prothorax with margins wide anteriorly; I believe this repre-
sents an undescribed species, but it could not be satisfactorily dealt with on a
single specimen .

Agonochila binotata White.

After comparison of Tasmanian specimens with one from New Zealai'.d, I
consider the species the same ; it has not yet been found on the mainland of Aus-
tralia.

Hab.— Mole Creek (Simson, No. 2610).

Agonochila fenestrata Blackburn.
Hab. — Tasmania (Simson, No. 2898). Widely spread on the mainland.

Agoxochila biguttata Chaudoir.

Hab. — Launceston (Simson, No. 2735) . Widely spread on the mainland.

Agonochila flinders:, sp. nov.

Elongate. Prothorax subquadrate (1 X 1.4 mm.); sides lightly sinuate
posteriorly; basal angles subrectangular. obtuse at summit. Elytra much wider

176 TUE CARABIDAE OF TASMAKIA,.

tliiiii piothorax (3 X 2.3 mm.), resembling those of A. higuttata, but a little
wide)-, veiy flnely setulose-punetate. Head, inothorax, tibiae, tarsi, and ant'-nnae
ferruginous; elytra piceous-brown, a nebulous elongate spot on disc of eacii
elytron between anterior and second setiferous puncture of third interstice.
Length, 5.5, breadth, 2.3.

Hab. — Flinders Is. (Simson, No. 3491). Two specimens.
Allied to -1. higuttata Chaud., but differing by head and prothora.x reddish;
prothorax wider, anterior marginal seta further from apex, basal angles more
decidedly marked; elytra proiuirtionately wider, diseal spots less clearly defined,
tlie apical, light-coloured s]iot is wanting, ))ut tliis often occurs in A. higuttata.

Genus D I a B a T i c T.' s.

DiABATicus austrai.is ErichsoH.

Hah. — Launceston, St. Marys, Flinders Is. (Simson, No. 2609).

Genus Microlestes f.

Table of Tasmanian Species.

Elytra piceous, shoulders and usually an apical .spot testaceous /iiaiuralis Macl.

Upper surface black, elytra shining yamie Blackb.

MiCROLESTE.s (f) HUMERAi.i.s Macleay.
7/«^.— Hobart (Lea).

MiCROLESTES (?) YARKAE I?lackburn.
2/a6.— New Norfolk (Lea).

Genus A n o m o t a r u s.
Anomotabus aeneu.s Macleay.
Huh. — Hrightun, East Tamar (Simson. Xii. 2908).
Tribe Pentagonicini.

Neck condyliform; eyes of ordinary size Pkntagonica-

Neck wide; eyes unusually largo and prominent Scopodes.

Genus S c o P o ij E .s.
Table of Tasmanian species .

1 (10) Prothorax with two marginal setae on each side.

2 (3) Prothora.x with posterior marginal seta at posterior anglts, the&; not

dentiform. Length, 6.3 mm iasmaiiicus BuX&s

3 (21 Prothorax with posterior marginal seta on an ante-basal, triangular,

dentiform prominence.
•1 (9) Head with frontal declivity depressed, strongly shagreened; clypeus
strongly shagreened, not divided from front by a deep transverse
impression.
5 (6i Black (including legs and upper side of basal joint of antennae).

Length, 5 mm. boops ^lichi.

Rather metallic, legs lurid or fiavous.

Legs lurid; antennae infuscate after third joint. Length, 4 — 4.5 mm.

sig^ Hiatus Germ .
Legs and antennae testaceous; (tarsi and sometimes antennae to-
wards apex rather infuscate). Length, 5 — 5.5 mm. Jiavipcs Bla^-k,
Head with frontal declivity convex, not shagreened; clypeus with
basal part raised into a convex transverse ridge, di\-ided from front
by a deep transverse impression. (Black, each elytron deeply 3-

foveate.) Length, 3.6—5.5 mm alerrimu.s Chaud.

10 ( 1 ) Prothorax strongly angustate to base without ante-basal prominence
or posterior marginal set.-.. Length, 6 mm griffilhi SI.

6

(5)

*

(8)

s

(7)

9

(4)

BY THOMAS G. SLOANE.

177

SOOPODES TASMANICUS Bates.
iTab.— Laimceston, Deiiison Gorge, George's Bay, Deloraine, Strahau (Sim-
sou, No. 311(i); Wilmot (Carter and Lea). Also found in Gippsland.

SCOPODES BOOP.s Erichson.
Haij.— Laimceston, West Tamar, Ben Lomond (5000 feet), Strahan (Simson,
Nos. 3117, 3691); Cradle Mountain (Carter and Lea). Widely spread in Aus-
tralia.

ScoPODES SIGILLATUS Gcruiar.

{= S. intermedius Blackburn.)
7fof,._Evanda!e, Epping'. Flinders Is. (Simson, No. 2971). Widely spread
in Australia.

I think there is no doubt but that No. 2971 of the Simson Coll. is S. inter-
medins Blac'kl)., hut I eannot differentiate it from .S'. sigillatus Germ.
ScoPODES PLAViPES Blackburn.
(= S. lineatii.s Lea.)
Hab. — Launeeslon, Golconda (Simson. No. .3507); Waratali (Carter and
Lea); Iving Is. (Lea).

I have in my collection a specimen of ,S'. flavipes Blackb., sent to me under
that name by Mr. Blackburn, and a cotype of .S'. lineatus Lea, received from Mr.
Lea. also several specimens from near Melbourne. With these materials before
me I cannol diflVrentiatc S'. flarijies iind N. IhieiitKs. therefore have felt compelled
to unite them.

ScOPODES ATERBiMU.s Chaudoir.

(== S. sydneyensis Sloane.)
Specimens which I obtained at Albany are the same as my 6' sydneyensis;
other specimens which I took in South-western Australia are the form with the
head more rug-ulose, which I considered ,s'. aterrimus in 1903: one of these speci-
mens measures 5.5 mm. in leni;th. Witli the data now availahle 1 consider one
name sufficient for the species.

Hah. — Great Lake (No. 11940, South Australian Museum)- Launeostoii
(Littler).

ScoPODES GRIPFITHI Sloane.

Hah. — Mount Welling'ton (Lea and Griffith).
Tribr Pseudomorphini.

Antennae short Adelotopus.

Antennae long, slender Silphomobpha

Genus A d e l o t o p u .s.
Table of Tasmanian species.

1 (4) Prosternum not carinate.

2 (3) Prothorax with anterior angles prominent, triangular; upper surface

impunctate. Elytra without post-basal pores. Length 7.5 — S.5
mm haemorrhoidalis Erichs,

3 (2* Prothorax with anterior angles not prominent, widely obtuse; upper

surface minutely punctate. Elytra with two post-basal pores near

scutellum. Length, 5.5 — 6.5 mm scolytides Newm.

i (1) Prosternum carinate. Length. 5,6 mm. (After Blackburn.)

tasvumi Blackb.

178 THE CARABIDAF. OF TASMANIA.

Adei.otopus hakxiorrhoidalis Eriehson.
(= ,1. inqtiinatus Newman.)
Hab. — Kelso (Simson, No. '2(ill). Widely spread in Australia.

Adelotopus scolytides Newman.
What I consider the typical form has the elytra with a very narrow reddish
apical eilge (Strahan. Zeehan. Simson); other specimens are coloured like ^1.
haemorrhoidalis Erichs. [Brighton (Sirason); Parattah, Hobart (Lea).] Also
found on the mainland.

Genus S I L P H 0 M o R P H A.

Tasmanian species.
Black, prothorax and elytra with a narrow reddish margin. Length, 8 — 9 mm.

decipiens Westw.
Black. Length, 12— 15 mm tasmanica Cast.

Only S. decipiens Westw., was in the Simson Coll., numbered 2812, but with-
out exact locality. S. dubia Cast., is conspecitic with .s'. tasmanica, as I have
ascertained from named specimens in the Howitt Coll. S. decipiens and S. las-
manica have a wide range on the mainland.

APPENDIX.

List of species now attributed to Tasmania, but of which I have not seen
specimens from that island, or which have not been dealt with in this paper.

Species marked with an asterisk are only known to me by description.

Species marked with a note of interrogation are those which I believe to be
doubtfully Tasmanian, and which might be deleted from the list of Tasmanian
species till they are ilctinitely reported from tliere.

'!('liri>ia lepiila Putz. ^Simo(lonliis urtlionioides Cliaud.

*C((r,enutH pnlitidiim Westw. *Lo.ta)idrus gai/utitius Cast.

"Promecoderus modeslus Cast. ILeptopodiis subgaijatinus Cast.

•p. subdepressus Guer. 'Ilomothes rotundatiis Blackb.

Diaphnromencs amaroides Cast. *Lucordairei anchomenoides Cast.

?/). australasiae Dej. *L. erichsoni Cast.

I.Thenarotes discoidalis Blackb. *Dicniciiile piaictipeiniis Cast.

*Harpalus vestigialis Erichs. "Xanthophaea anijustula Chaud.

''Bembidinm hobarti Blackb. *Trir/()iiothops lineata Dej

*Dyscolus (?) a M»(rafo Erichs. T. longiplaija Cham\.

'Vpscolns (?) dilatatus Erich-s. *T)iabaticus pauper Blackb.

'Idacarabus flavipes Lea. Ct/mindis iUauarrae Mad.

/. truglodi/les Lea. Pentaijonica vittipeiniis Chaud.

ISimodotitus ehmpatus Chaud. *Adclcit(ipiis tasmaiii Blackb.

Three other sjjecies recorded from King Island by Mr. Lea are not dealt with
in tills paper, viz., Amblf/lelus breris Blackb., Chlaenius australis DeJ., and Trig-
onothops vittipeinii'' SI.

179

ORDINAEY MONTHLY MEETING.
28th April, 1920.
Mr. J. J Fletcher, M.A., B.Sc-. President, in the Chair.

Messrs. William Faris Blakely, Butanie Gartlens, Sydney; Arthur
Neville St. George Handcock Burkitt, B.Sc, M.H., Lecturer in Anatomy, The
University of Sydney, H.4rry Flocktox Clarke, The Hillside, View St., Chats-
wood; Rt. Rev. JO.SEPH Wilfrid Dwyer, R.C. Bishop of Wagga; Albert H.
Elston, 50 Lefevre Terrace, North Adelaide; Anthony Musghave, Wycombe
Road, Neutral Bay; Torrington Hawke Pincombe, B.A., Public School, May-
field, Waratah; and Augustus Selwyn Taylor, Geological Survey of N.S.W.,
Sydney, were elected Ordinary Members of the Society.

The President announced that the Council had elected ]\Iessrs. C. Hedlev,
F.L.S., W. W. Froggatt, F. L.S.. A. G. Hamilton, and Professor H. G.
Chapman, M.D., B.S., to be Vice-Presidents; and Mr. J. H. Campbell (Royal
Mint, Sydney) to be Hon. Treasurer for the current Session, 1920-21.

Tiie President announced that a Special General Meeting of the Society will
be held on Monday, 14th ,Iune, for the purpose of celebrating the centenary of the
birth of Sir William Macleay.

The President reminded members of the Council's invitation to subscribe to-
wards the cost of the Honour Roll.

The President also reminded members of the Council's request tiiat notices of
exhibits should be curtailed and confined to the scientific significance of the objects
exhibited .

The Donations and Exchanges received since the previous Monthly Meeting
(31st March, 1920), amounting to 9 Vols., 49 Parts or Nos., 7 Bulletins, 4 Reports,
and 8 Pamphlets, etc., received from 46 Societies and Institutions, and one private
donor, were laid upon the table.

notes and exhibits.

Mr. Fred Turner exhibited a specimen of, and offered observations on, Amar-
antvs macrocarpiis Bentli.. which, after the January and February rains of this
year, covered, with Boerhuavia diffusa Linn., thousands of acres of Wootton Sta-
tion, Upper Hunter, to the exclusion of all other herliage, including many noxious
exotic weeds which previously had been abundant. The first-named plant, locally
known as "Boggabri," has Ijeen used for salad, for which it is considered superior
to "water cress."

Several years ago the late Honble. G. H. Cox, M.L.C., brought to the exhibitor
for identification from his station on the Liverpool Plains a specimen of Stipa
iiristirjliimis F. v. M., that was nine feet six inches tall. That growtii had resulted
from heavy summer rains, and had completely suppressed thistles which had pre-
viously occupied thousands of acres on his property.

180

lu Uie Brewaiiina district souu' years ago, after suinnier raius, twenty-five
tliousand acres of land became densely covered with Anisacantha muricata iloq.;
where only a few plants of this species had previously been seen. During Mr.
Turner's extensive travels over the country he had made a number of similar
observations on the indigenous and acclimatised flora, and he purposed publishing
these when time permitted.

Mr. J. L. Froggatt exhil)iled a spc'cimeii of Marlijiiia lulca which has heconie a
noxious weed in some country districts owing to the seeds becoming caugiit in the
wool, or getting round the hocks of sheep or horses t)r cattle. Men employed
in cutting the plants become extremely dizzy in ihe head after working on it for
any lengfh of time It is known locally as the "Ram's Horn'' or "Devil's Oriii. '
The specimen came from live miles south of Dalby, (Queensland.

Mr. Walter W Froggatt exiiibited, and read a note im, thi' identiticatioii nl ihe
Thrips damaging the tobacco in the Tamworth District as TItripa striatu-s, the
"Grass Thrips" of the United States, not previously recorded from Australia; also
other small Hemiptera infesting the leaves.

Mr. E. ('heel exhibited a leaf and fruits of Pisonia Bruiiotiiana, together with
an abstract from a letter received by Mr. Hugh Dixson, of ''Abergeldie," Summer
HiU, from Mr. K. E. Shaw, of Austinmer, as follows: — "A young lady was in tlie
scrub yesterday, and noticed a little' bird fluttering and bemg held captive, she
tbiDking a large spider 'had caught it, but found it hopelessly stuck fast to the
leaves of a tree by the gum exuded from the flower seed bud. She did her best
to free the little creature, but some of the tail feathers held fast, and it got away,
somewhat the worse for the encounter."

For previous records of this species trapping birds, etc., by the exudation ot
a viscid substance on the ribs of the fruits, see these Proceedings, 1915, p. 029.

181

A NEW GENXTS OF AUSTRALIAN DELrilACIDAE (HOMOPTERA).

By 1'\ UiiR. F.E.S.

(Communicated hi/ E. IP. Feriiicoii, 31. B., Ch.M.)

(Witli iiiu' trx(-li};iirf. )

Very little is known of the Australian Ddphacidae, and most, if not all, of
the species recorded are from the Eastern States. The finding of an undescribed
species from Kins;' George's Sound, South-west Australia, in the Macleay Collec-
tion at the Sydney University is therefore of interest.

T have proposed a new genus for this species for reasons stated Ijelow, and
consider that it is entogenic. Of the fourteen genera, containing about fifty species,
recorded as Australian, I consider only one. with one species (Proterosydne
arhorea Kirk.) can be regarded as entogenic, all the others being genera whose
centres of density are situated outside of Australia, or they are so nearly allied to
such genera as to demonstrate their origin clearly.

The character of the tibial spur places tliis genus in the Tropidocephalini.
From Tropidocephalus it differs in having the head much more elongate and flat-
tened laterally instead of horizontally. The Hawaiian genus DictiiophorodelriJm.r
Swezey is superficially like it, but belongs to the Alohini ; the head is not fiattened
laterally and the tegniina are truncate at apex. The South African genus Embo-
lophora Stal, I only know by the description. Stal sank it into Libuniia Stal, st)
tor the present we must consider that it belongs to the Delphacini. The head is
not so long a.s in Pseudemholophora.

PSEUDEMBOLOPHORA, n.g.

Type, Pseudemholophora macleayi.

Head very long and flattened lateraUy, three times as long as the pro- and
meso-nota together; vertex narrower at apex than at base, a median carina on
basal third after which it fades out; median frontal carina entire from base to
apex, lateral carinae from base to eye, and another from near the eye to apex, a
transverse carina on gena; eye oblong with a slight antennal emargination ; clypeus
in profile produced into a strong point in middle, tricarinate; antennae terate
reaching slightly beyond apes of face, fii'st joint about as long as wide, second
joint twice the length of first, slightly enlarged to apex, arista apical. Pronotum
Iricarinate, lateral carinae very slightly diverging posteriorly, reaching the hind
margin; mesonotum tricarinate. Hind femora short, reaching one-foiu'th from
apex of abdomen in male and about one-half in female ; tibiae longer than femora ;
tarsi shorter than tibiae, first tarsal joint sube(|ual to the other two together;
spur slightly shorter than first tarsus, cultrate, thick, slightly concave on inner
surface, a strong tooth at apex but none on hind margin. Teginina long and
nan-ow, the apex produced to an acute point.

182

A NEW GENUS OF ADSTRALIAX bKLPHACIDAE (HOMOPTERa),

PSEUDEMBOLOPHORA MACLEAYI^ D.Sp.

Male. — Brachypterous ; ocliraceous or light brown, earinae of bead and thorax
ligbtcr; cloi-sum of abdomen dark brown. Tegnnina hyaline, veins and apex of
tegmina brown, the brown veins broken by small white dots. The pygofer cannot
be made out very well as the specimen is carded and too old to relax and re
mount. Tlie ventral edge of opening straight, the sides angTdar and curved in-

n

J

Pstudt'inbo/op/ioia iinnUayi. ii.sp.

1. Left tegmen.

2. Head and pronotum, lateral view.

3. The same, dorsal view.

ward; anal segment large with large anal style; genital styles small, slightly curved
and gi-adually narrowed to a point. Lengfh, 5.5 mm.; tegmen, 3 mm.

Female. — Macroi)terous and V)rachypterous ; similar in colour to the male.
Pygofer large, ovipositor small, reaching about half way along pygofer; anal seg-
ment large, wider than deep, anal style large, nanowly oblong. Leng-th. (i mm.;
tegmen, 4 mm.

Hub. — King George's Sound, South-west Australia.

The material consists of one carded male in good condition witli tegmina b\it
no wings, as is generally the condition of brachypterous Homoptera; two females,
one on a pin in fairly good condition with teginina and no wing's, and one female
on card with no tegmina but witli wing-s present, l)ut in a bad condition. 'I'his in-
dicates that tliere are l)oth macropterous and bracliyplerous forms, at least in the
lemale .sex. Whether the macropterous forms liave a different shai)ed legmen I
am unable to say. There is also one nearly full grown nymph carded; the liead
is not so long projiortionately and the tegmina jiads are pointed at ai>ex. All the
material is in the Macleay Collection.

183

AN UNDESCKIBED SPECIES OF CLYTOCOSMUS SKUSE.

(Tipuliilae, Dipti'i'ii. )
ISv C"n.u!i,Ks P. Alkxaxder. Pii.D., Ukuana, Illinois, U S.A.
{Communicated hij It. J. Tillyanl. M.A., D.Sc, F.L.S., F.E.S.)

The gemis ('liitocoNmii.y was erecteil by Skuse* to receive the reinarkablv
beautiful new species of crane-fly, Clytocofimits helmsi, from Mt. Kosciusko, New
South Wales. The senus has remained monotypic until the present day. Through
the kindness of Dr R. J. Tillyard, I am now able to describe a second species, a
superb fly from the Dorrigo Tableland, about three hundred miles north of Syd-
ney. Some time ago Dr. Tillyard wrote me that he had once found a magnificent
crane-fly in the Northern scrubs with much the general appearance of a great
robber-fly. The only specimen then in his possession was an injured female in
rather poor condition to be made a type. An effort was made to secure additional
specimens during March and April, 1919, when the insect was due to appet^r on
the wing, but a prolonged drought, followed by floods, badly damaged the habitat
frequented by this fly, and it was impossible to secure more material at this tune.
Dr. Tillyard has kindly sent me the unique specimen above discussed, and it is
made the type of tiie new species descrilied herewith. It is with great ple.'jsure
that this exquisite creation is dedicated to Dr. Tillyard, through whose kindlv
interest the species was first made known to science. The type has been returned
to Dr. Tillyard. and will ultimately be placed in the Australian Museum w'ith the
Skuse types.

The two known species of Chjtocosmiis may be separated by means of the
following key: —

Prothorax black; mesonotal praescutum orange with a black spot anteriorly;
pseudosutural foveae black; scutellum and postnotum velvety black; thoracic pleura
velvety black with brown and white spots; abdomen velv'jty black with white spots,
only the genital segment reddish fulvous helmsi Skuse.

Prothorax orange; mesonotal praescutum orange without black markings; pseu-
dosutural foveae orange; concolorous with the remainder of the praescutum; scu-
tellum and postnotum orange; thoracic pleura orange with white spots; abdomen
orange with tergites one, the caudal part of three, and segments four to seven black
with white spots tillyardi n.sp.

Clytocosjius tillyardi, n.sp.

General colouration fiery orange, the thoracic pleura spotted with white', legs
black; wings yellow the posterior and anal cells with paler centres; abdomen with
the basal tergite black with lateral white spots; intermediate tergites (three to
six, and the caudal part of two) similar to the basal tergite; remainder of the
abdomen orange.

?■ — Length, 33 5 mm.; wing, 22 mm.; head alone, 5 mm.; thorax alone, 7.5
mm.; abdomen alone, 21 mm.; hind leg, femur, 13 mm.; fore leg, femur, fl mm.;
tibia, 9.2 mm.

Frontal i)rolongation of the head bright orange, long and slender (2.3 mm.),
with no indication of a nasus; dorsal surface with small, scattered, erect or

•Proc. Linn. See, N. S. Wales, 2nd. Ser., V., 1890, pp. 74-76,

184 AX UMiESCRIIiED SPECIES OF CLYTOOOiSSrUS SKUSE.

slightly proclinate hairs, the lateral and ventral surfaces glabrous; palpi and
mouth-parts dark brown. Antennae with the tirst segment orange, stout, nnrrow
at base, with two or three pale, transverse rings beyond midlength ; seeond segment
dark brown, the base obscure yellow; flagellum broken. Summit of the vertex im-
mediately behind the antennal bases. Head fiery orange with numerous short
black setae that become very long and dense on the curiously baccate post-genae.
Eyes relatively small with fine ommatidia.

Pronotum narrow, flattened, dull orange. Mesonotal praescutuni fiery oningo,
the margin with a moderately broad white line; interspaces pale with numerous,
short, erect setae; the broad median stripe is split by a capillary white line;
scutum orange, the lobes fiery orange, margined prosimally and caudally and less
distinctly laterally with white; seutellum moderately projecting, orange, with a large
whitisi] spot on either side; postnotum orange. Pleura orange, spotted with wiiite;
a s]iot on the mesepisternum, immediately behind the anterior spiracle; anotlier on
the mesepimeron immediately beneath the wing-base; three others surrounding the
posterior spiracle; a large blotch on the sides of the mesosternum between the
fore and middle coxae. Halteres with the base of the stem orange, the remainder
of the halteres broken. Legs with the coxae orange, more or less whitish on the
outer face, least distinct on the ]iosterior coxae; coxae clothed with delicate liairs.
shortest on the posterior coxae: trochanters blackish, indistinctly margined dis-
l.illy with red; femora and tibiae black; tarsi broken; fore legs much shorter than
tlie hind legs. Wing's with a strong yellowish tinge, darkening into fulvous blown
in the apical and caudal portions; veins conspicuously yellow; centres of cells
M, Ut Mi, .2nd M2, Mi, Cm, 1st A and 2Hd A paler. Venation: Sci lacking,
Sc2 ending in Ih just before r; cell B-> narrowed at its inner end; cell Jst M\i
large, pentagonal; iietiole of cell Mx short, about one-half of m. Macrotrichiae
on the veins lacking or very sparee.

Abdomen with the first tergite narrowly margined with orange, the disk deep
black with a large rounded white spot near each cephalic — lateral angle; suture
between tergites one and two ill-defined; tergite two with the basal half orange
with a small, median, basal, black mark, the caudal half black witli a rouiuled,
lateral, white spot and much fainter submedian sjiots; tergites three to six black,
each with the conspicuous, rounded, lateral, white spot, the third and fifth also
with fairly distinct, submedian, white markings; each of these black tergites,
jtroximad and caudad of the lateral white s|iots, have about six or seven small,
lens-shaped silvery dots arranged in a roughly oblique group; on each of the
second and thii-d tergites, cephalad of the lateral wliite spots is a small, transverse,
'moressed area as in many other Tipuline ci'ane-flies; seventh to ninth tergites
orange. Sternites uniformly orange. On the ventral surface of the abdomen,
nine distinct and approximately subequal sternites are visible; on the dorsal sur-
face, however, there are ten tergites visible unless we consider the first tergite as
fused with the very long second tergite as above described ; in this latter case, the
basal tergite is as long as the basal three sternites; tergites three to seven are
approximately e(|ual in length, but the last two are greatly narrowed. Ovipositor
horn-coloured, the tergal valves long, straiglit and very slender; sternal valves
much shorter, compressed, the tips obliquely truncated,
mi?;.— New South Wales.

[fiihitiipe, 9, Ulong, on tlie spurs of the Dorri'io Talilejand. nltiludc aliout 2<ll'll
reel, .Vpril. 1017 (W. Heron).
Typo returned to Dr. Tillyard.

I'nor. Lixy. Sor. X.S.W. lO'JO.

'liATR r.

Leaves of Reversiou-Foliage of Acacia suaveoleiis. (Nat. size).

Proc. Linx. Soc. N.S.W. 1920.

Plate ii.

■ t.'.

EuiJhyllode and SeeiUing of A. iinple.xa (/). (Nat. Size).

04

r j^

7^ >r«

'ROC. Lixx. Soc. N S.W. 1920.

PlATK IV.

1. lieai oi A. Baileyaiui. 2-5. Leaves of Reversion-Shoots of W. /w/Z^".™ ('.■^'j. (Nat. size).

I'KOC. LiNX. Sdc. N.S.W. 1920.

Plate vii.

Leaves of Reversion-Shoots of A. iinplexa (/) -, last stages. (Nat. ■■*'zf

pRO(\ I.ixx Soc. N.8.W. 1020.

Plate viii.

1-7. A. podalyriaefolia. 8. .1. iiivrtifolia. \^. .i. discolor. 10. Jacaraiida. 11. A. deairrens. (Nat. size).

I'liuv. Li.w. Soc. N.S.W. U)20.

Pl.ATi; IX,

.#"■

Hnctpria eausinu; Kopiness in Wattln Baik Int'iusions.

PROC. Lixx, Soc N.S.W. 1920.

Pla'ii: X.

1-2. Sv/Zi's c'arif'-a/a.

.3-6. S. pti'finiDis.

"-1-t. .?. /riiiica/a. 15. S. gracilis.

Vi:oc. Lix.v. Soc. N.S.W. 1920.

Plate xi.

31 30

1-16. Syllis piou-tiihi/a. 17-18. S. fnulKrifiis. W-ii. S. iiugenrri. 23-27. S. tiiibfixiniia . 28-31. S. coriiscans.

I'KOc. Li\x. Soc. N.S.W. 19-.MI.

Platk XII.

A A

a

91
I

110

1-2. S. kiiibi'i-giiiim. 3-10. S./erriiginea.

11-16. J^ioiiosyl/is iiulacnoiU'l>hra.

i;(ir. Linn Sor. N.S.W. I'.llid.

Plate xiii.

1. PioiiosyHis tnelacnoncphra.

-3. P. divarkata. 4-10. AinblyosylUs spec/abilis.

185

DESCRIPTIONS OF AUSTRALIAN FLIES OF THE FAMILY ASILIDAE,
[Diptera] with synonyms AND NOTES.

By G. H. Hardy.

In this paper synonyms are recorded, and two new species of the genus Xeoi-
tamus are described. Other species of the g-enus Neoitamus are given a l)etter
taxonomic treatment than has hitherto been attempted.

Australian species of the family Asilidae were revised by Miss Ricardo in
1912-13, but a number of descriptions were left outstanding, as the types were
either missing or net in a condition suitable for recognition. Since then, consid-
erable attention has been given to the Tasmanian Asilidae, chiefly by the late
Arthur White, and as Tasmania is the type locality of much of the described
material, it has become possible to establish the identity of many of the out-
standing descriptions of species recorded from there.

Sydney is also an important type locality, but the Asilidae of this district re-
quire further attention and a number of common species have yet to be described.
Only a few of the i utstanding descriptions of species recorded from this locality,
and from New South Wales generally, have been identified.

Considerable further knowledge, accumulated since Miss Ricardo's work, re-
quires to be incorporated with a new revision founded upon a better taxonomic
treatment of the species.

I am indebted to Dr. E. AV. Ferguson for the loan of his collection of the
genus Neoitamus. which contains many specimens identified by Miss Ricardo and
Arthur White.

Subfamily DASYPOGONINAE.

Cabasa pulchella Macquart.

Dasypogon pukhellus, Macquart, Dipt. Exot., suppl. 1, 1846, p. (j2, PI. 7, fig. 9

(wing) .
Cabasa pulchella, Walker, List Dipt. Brit. Mus., vi., suppl. 2, 185-1, p. 499;

Ricardo, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (8), ix., 1912, p. 479; White, Proc. Roy.

Soc. Tas., 1916, p. 155.
Dasypogon veniio. Walker, List Dipt. Brit. Mus., ii., 1849, p. 359.
Cabasa venno, Walker, List Dipt. Brit. Mus., vi., suppl. 2, 1854, p. 500.
Cabasa rufithorax. Walker, Ins. Saund. Dipt., i., 1850, p. 100, PI. iii., fig. 5;

Walker, List Dipt. Brit. Mus., vi., suppl. 2, 1854, p. 499.
Dasypogon rubrithorax, Macquart, Dipt. Exot.. suppl. 4, 1850, p. 66, PI. vi.,

fig. 10.
Cabasa rubrithorax Ricardo, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (8), ix., 1912, p. 480; Wliite,

Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 1916, p. "155.
Synonymy. — Miss Ricardo has identified Cabasa rufithorax Walker with
Cabasa pulchella Macquart, and also Cabasa venno Walker with Cabasa rubri-
thorax Macquart. All the types are described from Tasmania.

18G AUSTRALIAN FLIES OF THE FAMILY ASILIDAE,

A long series of Tasmanian specimens, collected by Mr. C. E. Cole, shows a
complete merging of Cabana rubrithorax Walker into C'abasa pulchella Macquart,
and establishes beyond dispute this long suspected synonymy.

Hab. — Tasmania, Victoria, New South Wales and Queensland.

A specimen with semi-hyaline wings was taken at Blackheath, New South
Wales, on the 27th November, 1919.

Subfamily ASILINAE.

The outlines for the elassitication of Australian genera of the subfamily Asi-
I'niac were laid down by White in 1917. White's scheme offers the only practi-
cal solution for the present treatment of Australian species of the genus Neoitamus,
under which group he includes species placed previously in this and allied genera.

White's scheme for the classification of the Asillnae is accepted here for the
genera. The subgenera of the genus Neoitamus, however, are not satisfactory,
and for further remarks see under the genus Neoitamus below.

Ommatius pilosus White.

Ommatius pilosus, White, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 191G, p. 169.
Ommatius levis, White, ibid., p. 170.

The holotype of 0. levis White is in the Australian Museum. A long series
of specimens shows that this form completely merges into O. pilosus White, and
therefore it cannot be considered distinct.

Genus Neoitamus Osten-Sacken.

Itamus, Loew, Lin. Ent., iv., 1849, p. 84 (preoccupied).

Neoitamus, Osten-Sacken, Cat. Dipt. N. America, edit. 2, 1878, pp. 82, 235;
Ricardo, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist. (8), xi., 1913, p. 431; White, Proc. Roy.
Soc, Ta-s., 1913, p. 274; 191(j, p. 173; 1917, p. 91.

Under the genus Neoitamus a number of diverse Australian species which
have a similar general appearance are grouped. The generic name is used for
convenience, and the species do not necessarily conform to the description of the
genus given by Loew.

When structural characters of the described species are published, and a gen-
eral survey is made of the allied genera of the world, it will become possible to
give this group of Asilids an adequate treatment for generic and subgeneric divi-
sion.

White proposed the three following subgenera: — Trichoitamus White (type,
Dysviaehus rudis Walk.), Neoitamus Loew (type, .Y. cyanurus Loew), and Rhab-
dotoitamus White (type, N. brunn<eus White).

Neoitamus cyanurus Loew is a European species.

The type species of Rhabdotoitamus was not fixed by White, but E. bnmneus
White {^= N. vittipes Macquart) conforms best to the subgenus as White describ-
ed it, and also it has the advantage of being widely distributed and common.

In the present paper the species are dealt with as belonging to one genus
Neoitamus, so as to avoid the confusion that w<iuld otherwise arise, due to tlie
species being placed in arbitrary subgenera (hat have unsatisfactory or even no
structural differences; and, moreover, the collection shows a number of species
that could be divided into subgenera, or even genera, ujion apparently sound struc-
tural characters. It is premature, however, to subdivide the genus until adequate
study has been made of all the described forms.

BY G. H. HARDY. 187

The exoskeleton jsIiows dififerenees oi specific value in the characters disciissed
below .

Head. — On the face there is a tubercle varying in size in the different species,
and on this is situated the moustache which varies in density approximately in re-
lation to the size of the tubercle. N. claripes White, N. volaticus White, and iV.
aKstralis Ricardo have a very small tubercle and moustache, whilst the other spe-
cies have these characters generally much more pronounced.

A row of bristles is situated behind the eyes in most of the species, but in a
few apparently undescribed forms they are absent. Some species have these
bristles arranged in two rows or more.

Thorax. — The presutural bristles are those lateral bristles situatefl anterior
to the transverse suture; they are always two in number close to the suture, and
anterior to these there are sometimes one or more further bristles .

The sviperalar bristles are those situated above the wing's, between the trans-
verse suture and the postalar callus. They may be one, two, or three in number,
rarely more.

The postalar bristles are those situated on the postalar callus, and may he
from one to four in number.

The dorsocentral bristles are confined to two rows on the dorsum placed on
each side of, at some little distance from, and parallel to the median line. 1 hese
bristles are usually regularly placed and alternate with a row of hairs placed in a
closely adjacent or a contiguous line; if one of the bristles is suppressed or
obsolete, the hair on each side of it becomes much stronger and bristle-like. When
counting, allowance must be made for these suppressed bristles, but sometimes
specimens will be found too irregular for the alternating hair and bristle character
to be seen.

As these dorsal thoracic bristles appear to have a definite limit of variation
in each species, they afford important characters for identifying female specimens.

The metapleural bristles are situated below the halteres ; these are erect and
are arranged in a vertical line. Below, above the hind coxae, and continuing in
the same line, are also erect hypopleural bristles. The metapleural bristles are
invariably present, but sometimes the hypopleural bristles are reduced to depi-cssed
hairs, or are completely missing. Both sets of bristles are very thin and hair-
like, but as they stand erect on an otherwise bare surface they are very con-
spicuous .

Scutellmi. The seutellar bristles are situated on the margin of the seutellum,
and are from two to six, rarely more, in number.

Abdomen. A row of bristles may be present on most of the abdominal seg-
ments. These bristles are generally in a complete line on the first segment, but
are interrupted bv a bare space on the dorsum of the other segments; they are
placed parallel and anterior to the posterior margins; they are smallest towards
the centre, and become longer laterally, where they are often erect and conspienous.

Legs. The femur is more or less oval in cross section, and when the legs are
at right angles to the thorax, that flattened surface which faces towards the head
is known as the anterior side; the other three sides are called the dorsal, posterior
and ventral sides.

The anterior femur is generally spineless, but occasionally a spine is to l)e
found towards the apex of the posterior side, and A^. armatus Macquart has four
spines on the ventral side.

A complement of spines on the intermediate femur appears to consist of n

188 AUSTRALIAN FLIES OF THE FAMILY ASILIDAE,

row on the anterior side, one subapical spine on the posterior side, and a ventral
i-ow. The row on the anterior side niaj' vary in the number of spines, and may
even be reduced to one or two ; this row often runs on to the dorsum, and, in !-uch
a case, if the last spine is isolated with a bare space between it and the other re-
maining spines, it will appear to be a subapical dorsal spine.

A complement of spines on the posterior femui- consists of two rows on the
anterior side and one ventral row. Besides these there are a few suba]iical
spines .

In a long series of specimens a wide range of variation will geueraliy be
found, but in a few species the variation is limited.

Wings. The wings are hyaline, or more or less tinted with fuscous, and
fuscous spots are present in a few species. The venation is constant with regard
to the veins and cells, but slight variations occur in the relative '5hape and length
of some of the cells.

Male genitalia. The exposed genital forceps of the male aft'ord the only
satisfactory characters for identifying a species. This organ lias a wonderful
variety of characters that have been all but overlooked by earlier authors, and
it is the purpose of the present paper to utilise them as the main objective for
establishing species. The females in such a system of classification are, neces-
sarily, of secondary consideration ; nevertheless, thej' can generally be identified
by other characters by comparison with their respective males.

The male genitalia contain a pair of upper forcepa, between the two branches
of which is situated the dorsal msdian lamella, and a pair of lower forceps — in
all, five visible parts

The upper forceps vary considerably in shape in the various species, and
may contain a terminal process, or may be simple and without a process, and,
finally, may contain bristles.

The genitalia of ^i. exilis ^Macquart, il. filiferus Maccjuart and Cerdistus
australis Ricardo are described as having bristles.

Female ovipositor. Few descriptions convey any real idea of the length of
the ovipositor, yet sometimes females of closely related species can be separated
by the comparative length of this organ. White refers to the ovipositor as being
long in all his species except .Y. abditiw;, where, he states in the original descrip-
tion, it is rather short, and in 1917 he refers to it as unusually short. This
species, however, has a very distinctive ovipositor, and, on the strength of this
organ, it should be placed in a separate genus; it is somewhat compressed ven-
trally, but has a conspicuous dorsal surface which decreases posteriorly, and at
the apex there is a pair of small, separated, conical lamellae. All the other
species in the collection contain one, more or less cylindrical, stylilorm lam-
ella at the apex of the eighth abdominal segment which is usually entirely com-
pressed. Sometimes the seventh abdominal segment is black, shining, and com-
pressed on the dorsal surface, but shows a ventral area ; this character is called
subcompressed in the descriptions given below. In two species, one described
below as new, the sixth abdominal segment is also black, shining and subcom-
pressed .

Both White and ]\Iiss Eicardo refer to those subcompressed segments as
forming part of the female ovipositor, but as gradations in the various species
make the line of demarcation difficult to determine, it is not advisable to interpret
the character in that manner.

BY G. H. HAEDT. 189

There are forty-seven specific names, all of which probably belong to the
group of species here classed as the genus Neoitamus, and in this paper twenty
of these names are distributed among twelve species, and two new specific names
are proposed. Twenty-seven further specific names require more adequate de-
scription than has yet been given to them; these, under their respective authors,
are given in the following Ust: —

Macquart: Asilus acutangulattis, A. australis, A. exilis, A. feriferus, A. julvi-
puhesceiice, A. lo'iigiventris, A. nigrinus, A. rufocoxatus, A. rufometatarsis, A.
varifemoratns and finally A. laticornis, which does not conform to any known spe-
cies, and Jliss Ricardo states that the ovipositor is short and conical.

Walker: J.si7)/.< coedicius, A. elicit us, A. maricus, A. ohumbratus, A. cilicatus
and Dysmachus rudis.

Sehiner: Glaphyropyga australiasiae.

Ricardo : C'erdistus aitstralis and Neoitamus australis (both of which specific
names are preoccupied by Macquart's .1. australis), N. gibbonsi and X. hi/ali-
jieiinis ; the S]iecies described as N. hyalipennis by White may not be identical with
Miss Ricardo's species.

White: Neoitamus divaricatus, Rliabdotoitcimus lautus, B. lividus. H. rusti-
canus and B. volaticus.

There are four other outstanding descriptions belonging to the Asilinae and,
judging from the described characters, they cannot belong to the group dealt with
here. These must be retained in the Asilits group sensu lato, and are as follows : —
Asilus ferrugiiieiventris Maeqnart, A. alligans Walker, A. behebulb Wiedemann
and A. regius Jaennicke.

■ Asilus crabroniformis Meigen is cancelled from the Australian list. This is
a well known European species that was erroneously recorded from Tasmania by
Macquart in 1847.

Key to the species of the genus Neoitamus described below, of which both sexes

are known-

1. The female ovipositor short, with two small separated lamellae. Male genitalia

without an apical process. Two super- and one post-alar bristles

ahditus White.
The female ovipositor with one styliform lamella. Male genitalia with or with-
out an apical process 2.

2. The upper forceps of the male genitalia with a terminal process 3.

The upper forceps of the male genitalia without a terminal process 6.

3. The male genitalia short and globular, th« apical process is above the centre of

and more or less at right angles to, the outer margin. Female ovipositor

short. Two super- and three post-alar bristles xydiuyeiisis SchineT.

The male genitaha elongate, the apical process rarely at right angles to the
apical border: if at right angles, it is situated below the centre of the apical
border 4.

4. The seventh segment of the female abdomen black, shining and subcompressed,

and as long as the moderately long ovipositor. Seen laterally, the apical half
of the male genitalia is more swollen than the basal half. Super- and post-
alar bristles three each (?) flavicinctits White.

The seventh segment of the female abdomen normal. Seen laterally, the apical
half of the male genitalia is not swollen. Female ovipositor short 5.

5. The dorsal and ventral surfaces of the male genitalia are more or less parallel.

Super- and post-alar bristles two each fiaternus Macquart.

190 AVSTRALIAX FLIES OF THE FAMILY ASILIDAE,

The dorsal and ventral surfaces of the male genitalia taper towards the apex
which is truncate. Two super- and one, rarely two, post>alar bristles

vUtipes Macquart.

6. The male genitalia with bristles 9.

The male genitaUa without bristles 7.

7. The anterior femora with a conspicuous row of ventral spines. Female ovi-

positor very long. Two super-, one, rarely two, post-alar bristles

armatHS Macquart.
The anterior femora without ventral spines. Female ovipositor short 8.

8. The female ovipositor entirely compressed. Super- and post-alar bristles one each

claripes White.

The female ovipositor compressed ventrally, but with a dorsal surface. Two

super- and one or two post-alar bristles maculatoidcs, n.sp.

9. The upper forceps of the male genitalia wHth a row of about ten slender dorsal

bristles. Female ovipositor short. Two super-,one or two post-alar and two

scutellar bristles iiiargi/es Walker.

The upper forceps of the male genitalia with one long, ventral, subapical bristle,
and a row of ventral bristles on the lower forceps. The female ovipositor is
short, and the sixth and seventh abdominal segments of the female are sub-
compressed, black and shining. Two or three superalar, three or four postalar
and four scutellar bristles se/osus, n.sp.

Neoitamus ABDiTtJS White. (Text-figs. 1-3.)

Neoitamus abditus. White, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 1916, p. 178, text-fig. 29 (wing) ;
and 1917, p. 93 (in key).

Synonymy. Outstanding descriptions of the AsiUnae are not sutlicient i'or
N. abditus White to be identified as one of them, but it is possible that A.
acutangulatus Macquart may belong here.

Description. The species will be readily recognised by the small separated
lamellae of the female ovipositor.

d". The face has a large tubercle containing black hairs which increase in
length towards the centre; the centre of the tubercle contains six. shorter, black
bristles; below these bristles there are slender white hairs which are sometimes
bordered laterally by a row of very fine l^laek hairs. Behind the eyes there is a
row of black bristles.

The dorsal bristles of the thorax are disposed on each side of the median
line as follows: — two presutural ; two sujieralar. one of which is weak; one post-
alar; about six dorsocentral, between each of which there is a thin bristle-like iiair.

The hypopleural and metapleural bristles are present, and the scutellar
bristles are two or four in number. All the bristles of the thorax and scutellum
are black.

The bristles towards the apex of the abdominal segments are mostly white,
but black bristles occur on the posterior se,gments. The second to fifth segments
have two conspicuous, erect, lateral white bristles. The upper forceps of the male
genitalia are .simple and moderately hairy; seen laterally, they yre more or less
parallel-sided.

The le.gs have the anterior femora without spines; the intermediate femora
have a row of spines on the anterior side, but this row is often reduced in num-
ber to two spines: the subapical spine tm the posterior side is present; the pos-
terior femora have only one row of spines present on the anterior side; there is
one stihnpical dorsal spine and a ventral row of spines.

BY G. H. HARDY.

191

The wings have a normal venation; the intermediate crossvein is situated
about the middle of the discal cell; the second posterior cell is long and consider-
ably constricted subapically.

Text-figs. 1-3. — Neoitamus abditus. 1, female ovipositor seen dorsally;
2, the same seen laterally ; 3, the male genitalia seen laterally, (x 25) .
Text-fig. 4. — Neoitamus sydneyensis. Tlie male genitalia, (x 25).

?. The female differs from the male in having the abdouiinal bristles obso-
lete. The ovipositor is short, compressed ventrally only, the dorsal portion taper-
ing apically and terminating in a pair of small, more or less conical, separated
lamellae.

Hah. — Tasmania and Victoria. (February to April.)

Type- — White only described the female of this species. The holotype female
was purchased by the British Museum with White's collection. The allotype male,
described above, is in the Australian Museum. There are five paratype males.

'Note. — The collection under revision contains six males and seven females.
One of the females was originally identified by White, and two paii's were taken
in copula at Hobart and Melbourne respectively, thus establishing the sex rela-
tionship. All the specimens were taken by the writer.

Neoitamus sydnetensis Sehiner. (Text-fig. 4.)

Cerdistus sydneyensis, Sehiner, Reise Novara, Dipt., 1868, p. 187; Ricardo, Ann.
Mag. Nat. Hist., (8), xi.. 1913, p. 43C: and (9). i.. 1918, p. (53.

Description. S- The face has a moderately large tubercle; the moustache is
composed of stiff black bristles, with black hairs aljove and on each side; below,
there are longer white hairs bordered hiterally by a row of very fine black hairs.
There is a row of black bristles behind the eyes.

The dorsal bristles of the thorax are disposed on each side of the median
line as follows: — two presutural; two superalar; three postalar, composed of one
long bristle in the centre and one hair-like bristle on each side of it; four to
six dorsocentral ; all the above bristles are black. The metapleural bristles are
black and the hypopleural bristles are usually white. There are two black scu-
tellar bristles.

192

AUSTRALIAN PLIES OF THE FAIIILY ASILIDAE,

■J"he abdominal bristles aie long, mostly black, and verj- pronounced as tar
as the fifth segment. The upper forceps of the male genitalia are short, and have
a process situated slightly above the middle of the outer border and turning at
right angles to it.

The leg-s have the anterior femora without spines; the intermediate femora
have the system of spines more or less complete, but the spines on the anterior
sides are usually reduced to two or three; the posterior femora have a complete
system of bristles but the upper row on the anterior side is reduced in number.
The bristle system is explained in the introduction.

The wings have a normal venation. The intermediate crossvein is situated
about the middle of the discal cell and, beyond this vein, there is a conspicuous
hyaline area. The second posterior cell is short and normal.

?. The female is similar to the male. The ovipositor is short, compressed,
and contains a cylindrical styliform lamella.

Hab. — New South Wales : Sydney, IMilson Island, Palm-beach, and Blackheath.
(October to December.)

yote. — In the collections under revision, tliere are seventeen males and fifteen
females. One of the females is labelled Cerdistns sydneyensis Schiner in JfOss
Ricardo's handwi'iting

NTeoitamus flavicinctus White. (Text-figs. 5, 6.)
Neoitamus flavichictus. White, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 1913 (1911). p. 275; 1916,
p. 174; 1917, p. 92 (in key).
Description. >?. The face 1ms a large tubercle and a black moustache
There is a row of black bristles behind the eyes.

The thorax has abundant black bristles which extend towards the anterior
margin, gradually diminishing in size. Besides the usual two presutural, there
are four more bristles situated between the humeral angle and the transverse su-
ture. Above the wings there are three or four bristles, referred to here as the

Text-figs. b-Q.—NeoilatiiHS Jiavicinclus. o, fcMii:iIi' m-ipositor; (1. male genitalia. (.\ 25).

BY G. H. HAliPY. 193

superalar. The postalar bristles are three in niuuber, aud tlie dorsocentral
bristles are represented by a complete line of mixed hairs and bristles that do
not conform to the usual alternating hair aud bristle order. The scuteUum has
six marginal bristles. All the bristles, including the hypopleural and mctapleural,
are black.

The bristles on the abdmnen are lung aud umstly white; they are very pruiu-
inent as far as the iifth segment. The upper forceps of the male genitalia are
long, and seen laterally the apical half is swollen, and terminates in a digitate
process which branches about the middle of the apical border.

The legs have the anterior femora w-ithout spines; the intermediate femora
have, besides the complete sj'stem of spines, a second row of spines on the an-
terior side. The posterior femora have a complete system of spines. These
spine systems are explained in the introduction.

The wings have a normal venation; the intermediate crossvein is situated at
about half the lengih of the discal cell; the second posterior cell is I'ather long
and slightly constricted subapically.

2. The female api)ears to l)e similar to the male, but the bristles arc some-
what flattened aud broken. The sixth abdominal segment is partly bare of to-
mentum, and appears to be slightly compressed. The seventh abdominal segment
is sub-compressed, bare and shining, and as long as the moderately long ovipositor
which has a terminal stj^le-like lamella.

Hab. — Tasmania: Cradle Mt. (January, 1917, 1 male, 1 female.)

Note. — The collection under revision contains only two specimens that can
be referred to this rare species. The identification is probably correct, as the
specimens agree entirely with White's description. The female ovipositor (text-
flg. 5) is drawn as it appears on the insect, and it seems probable that the sixth
abdominal segment is distorted at the aj^ex.

Xeoitamus fraternus Macquart. (Text-figs. 7 and 8.)

Asihis fraternus, Macquart, Dipt. Exot., suppl. 1, 1846, p. 91; Walker, List Dipt.

Brit. Mus., vii., suppl. 3, 18.55, p. 738; White, Proc. Rov Soc. Tas.,

1913, pp. 274 (in key) and 275.
Asiliis luctificiis, Walker, Ins. Saimd. Dipt., i., 1851, p. 144; Ricardo, Ann. Mag.

Nat. Hist., (8), x-i., 1913, p. 447.
Neoitamus varius, Ricardo {nee Walker), Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (8), xi., 1913;

p. 431 (part).
Neoitamus vulgatus, White, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 1913 (1914), p. 276; 1916, p.

177, text-fig. 28 (wing),; 1917, p. 93 (in key) .
Synonymy. The types of A. fraternus Macquart, A. luctificus Walker, and
N. vulgatus White are from Tasmania. Miss Ricardo placed A. fraternus, female
as a synonym of N. varius Walker, a New Zealand species, but this is probably
not correct. Miss Ricardo also suggests that A. luctificus Walker should be ex-
punged from the Hot of species as the type is lost, but the description conforms
well with this common Tasmauiau species.

According to his key characters. White took his description of N. fraternus
JIacquart from Miss Rieardo's description of N. varius Walker, and he further
states that he did not meet with any species agreeing with Maeqnart's description.
It is possible, however, that White did not refer to Macquart's description, as
there is not a copy of Macquart's "Dipteres exotique" in Tasmania, and moreover,
if he had had access to this w^ork, he \vould not have overlooked so many species
of Diptera described from Tasmania.

194

AUSTRALIAN FLIES OF THE FAMILY ASLLIDAE,

In the eolleeticn under revision, there is a male cotype of N. vulgatus Whitf,
and this is identical with a male of a pair taken in copula, and thus establishes
the sex relationship; the female has a short o\-ipositor, not long, as stated by
White in his description.

New South Wales specimens identified by White, and represented by various
specimens in the collection under revision, have longer ovipositors, and there-
fore N. vulgatus var. White cannot belong to the same species, and, moreover, N.
vulgatus White is only known from Tasmania, although White's description
covers more than one species occurring on the mainland of Australia.

Description, d". The tubercle of the face is large, and the moustache con-
sists of white hail's below, and black liaii-s above: sometimes there is a lateral
row of small black hairs bordering the white hairs. Behind the eyes there is a
row of black bristles.

The dorsal thoracic bristles are disposed on each side of the median line as
follows: — two presntural, two superalar and two postalar, and, besides these,
there may be one or two extra presntural and superalar bristles present, and also
an extra postalar l^ristle; about six doi-socentral bristles alternating with black
hairs; all bristles black. The two scutellar and the metaplonral bristles are black,
the hypopleural bristles are mostly white.

THxt-tigs. 7-8. — Neoitamiis fratfruits.
7, male genitalia ; 8, female ovi-
positor, (x 2.5).

Text-fig. 8. — Neoiiamus vitiipes,
male genitalia, (x 25).

Text-fig. 10. — Neoilaiitiis aniia/iis,
male genitalia, (x 25).

The bristles of the abdominal segments are mostly white, and there are two
erect, white, lateral bristles on the second to fifth segments. The upper forceps
(if the male genitalia arc elongate, and have a digitate apical proiess which
branches about the middle of the apical border; seen laterally they are more or
less parallel-sided.

The legs have the anterior femora without spines; the intermediate and pos-
terior femora have the system of spines more or less complete; these spine systems
are explained in the introduction.

BY G. H. HARUY. 195

The wings have a normal venation; the intermediate erossvein is situated
at about half the length of the diseal cell, and the second posterior cell is short.

S. The female is similar to the male and the ovipositor is short.

Hub. — Tasmania.

Note. — The collection under revision contains twenty males and eighteen
.females, all Tasmanian. Other specimens, labelled N. vulgatus by White belong
to widely different species, and are dealt with under their respective names.

Neoitamus vittipes Macquart. (Text -fig. 9.)

Asilus vittipes, Macquart. Dipt. Exot., suppl. 2, 1847. p. 43; Walker, List Dipt.

Brit. Mus.. vii.. suppl. 3, 1855, p. 741.
Asilus cognatus, Macquart, Dipt. Exot., suppl. 4, 1850, p. 94.
Asilus alicis, Walker, List., Dipt. Brit. Mus., vii., suppl. 3, 1855, p. 738.
Neoitamus brunneus, White, Proe. Roy. Soc. Tas., 1913 (1914), p. 279, 1916, p.

180.
Bhabdotoitamus brunneus, White, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 1917, p. 100.

Synoiujmy. Mac(|nart's types of A. vittipes and A. cognatus are from Tas-
mania, and their descriptions conform to two colour forms of White's variable
species, N. brunneus, which is the genotype of the subgenus Rhdbdotoitamus.

Walker's type of .4. aMcis, from Australia, is recorded as lost by Miss Ricardo,
and was therefore placed by her amongst the species she proposed to cancel from
the list, but the description conforms to Australian specimens of White's geno-
type, and in this way establishes its probable identity with A. vittipes Macquart.

Description, d. The moustache is white, and occupies a moderately large
tubercle; occasionally there at-e one or two black hairs above. There is a row of
white bristles behind the eyes.

The dorsal thoracic bristles are disposed on each side of the median line as
follows: — two presutural, two superalar, one, rarely two, postalar, and al)out four
dorsocentral ; all the bristles black. There are two black scutellar bristles, and
the metapleural and hypopleural bristles are white.

Both sides of each abdominal segment from the second to the fifth contain
two long, erect, white bristles; the other abdominal bristles are black.

The upper forceps of the male genitalia are short, tapering apically. and
terminating in a digitate process which branches from the ventral jiosterior angle.
The upper and lower forceps are reddish-brown in colour, and are partly dark-
ened with fuscous.

The legs have the anterior femora without spines; the intermediate and pos-
terior femora have their system of spines more or less complete.

The wings have a normal venation; the intermediate erossvein is situated at
a little beyond the middle of the diseal cell, and the second posterior cell is sliort.

?. The female is similar to the male; the ovipositor is short.

TLab. — 'Tasmania. Victoria, and New South Wales. (January to March.)

Note. — The collection under revision contains thirteen specimens, four males
and one female from Tasmania, three males and four females from New South
Wales, and one male without locality. A female from Sydney was labelled by
White as his N. brunneus.

Nkoitajius armatus Macquart. (Text-fig. 10.)

Asilus armatus. Macquart, Dipt. Exot., suppl. 1, 1846, p. 91, PI. 8, fig. 17; Walker,

List Dijit. Brit. Mus., vii., suppl. 3, 1855, p. 737.
Asilus setifemoratus, Macquart, Dipt. Exot., suppl. 5, 1854, p. 65.

J 96 AUSTRALIAN- FLIES OF THE FAMILY ASILIDAE.

Asilus aniilco, Walker, List Dipt. Brit. Mus. ii., 1849, p. 458; vii., suppl. 3,

1855, p. 737.
Machimus antilco, Ricardo, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (S), xi., 1913, p. 423.
Itamus planiceps, Schiiier, Reise Novara, Dipt., 1868, p. 189.
Neoitamus planiceps, Ricardo, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist.. (8), xi., 1913. p. 434;
White, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 1913, p. 275.

Synonymy. — Asilus armatus Macquart is described from Tasmania, but
Walker gives Australia and Tasmania for Macquart's species. A. setifemorata
Macquart is from Adelaide. A. antilco Walker is from Port Stephens. N.
planiceps Schinei' is from Sydney. lu the collection under revision there are
specimens from Sydney and Tasmania which cannot be separated from each other
or from the various descriptions.

In describing /. planiceps, Schiner states that his species does not agree with
the descriptions of Macquart's A. setifemorata and A. rufotarsis; Schiner's de-
scription, however, appears to agree with A. setifemorata in spite of his state-
ment to the contrary.

The reference to A. rufotarsis Macquart is not traceable; A. rufometalarsis
Macquart is not described as ha\'ing spines on the anterior femora, and therefore
A. rufotarsis evidently is not a misprint for that name.

In describing the male genitalia, Schiner states that the posterior border is
serrated; as this does not conform to the illustration of the male genitalia given
here, it is necessary to point out that when the two obtuse points, one at the
apex of each branch of the upper forceps, are seen laterally, one above the
other, the posterior border of the genitalia has a bi-toothed serration.

A. armata Macquart is described with, and the drawing shows, four ventral
spines on the anterior femora. There can be little doubt but that the Tasmanian
specimens in the collection belong to this species, and specimens from Sydney are
identical, making I. planiceps Schiner an undoubted synonym.

A. setifemorata Macquart and A. antilco Walker, from their descriptions, are
referable here.

Description, (i The tubercle of the face is large; the moustache is mostly
black, but there are about six white bristles in the centre. There is a row of
black bristles behind the eyes.

The dorsal thoracic bristles are disposed each side of the median line as fol-
lows : — two presutural ; two superalar ; one postalar, but sometimes a second,
very thin, postalar bristle is also present ; about six dorsoceutral ; all these bristles
black .

There are two black scutellar bristles. Tiie metapleural bristles are black
or white, and the hypopleural bristles are white and not very prominent.

The abdominal bristles are mostly white. The upper forceps of the malo
genitalia are simple, and without a process; they broaden apically, and the pos-
terior margin is obliquely .Tugled or rounded.

The anterior femora have four conspicuous, thick, black, ventral spines; the
intermediate and posterior femora have their respective spine systems sometimes
complete, but the rows generally have a reduced number of spines.

The wings have a normal venation ; the intermediate crossvein is situated at
nearly two-thirds the length of the discal cell, and the second posterior cell is
long and slightly constricted subapically.

2. The female is similar to the male, but the moustache and abdominal
spines are very variable in colour. The ovipositor is very long and ril)bon-l!ke.

BY G. H. HARDY. 197

Hab. — New South Wales and Tasmania. (October to January, April.)
Note. — In the collection under revision there are twenty specimens; two males
and eight females from Sydney, one female from Milson Island which is labelled
by White as his N. vulgatus; two males and four females, in the Maeleay Museum,
from New South Wales, and three females from Tasmania, one of which was laken
in April.

Becker* described a species from British East Africa under the name N.
armatus. This appears to be a true Neoitamiis for which a new specific name
will be required if Macquart's species, described above, is allowed to remain within
this genus.

Neoitasius claeipes White. (Text-fig. 11.)

Bhahdotoitamus claripes. White, Proc. Roy. Soe. Tas., 1917 (1918), p. 98.

Description. <S. The face has a small tubercle. The moustache is small, and
composed of about twenty bristles and hairs. There is a row of small, thin, yel-
lowish bristles behind the eyes.

The dorsal thoracic bristles are disposed on each side of the median line as
follows: — one black a second yellow or black, presutural; one yellow, rarely
black, superalar and sometimes a second yellow or black bristle is present; from
two to five dorsocentral, of which the two posterior are always yellow, the others,
if present, are black. There are two yellow scutellar bristles; the metapleural
bristles are yellow, and the hypopleural bristles are suppressed.

The abdominal bristles are mostly black on the first segment, and long, pro-
minent and yellow on the second to fifth segments. The upper forceps of the
male genitalia are rather long, and thin; they curve upwards apieally, and are
without a process.

The legs have the anterior femora without spines; the intermediate feinora
with only three spines, one of which is placed about one-third and the second about
two-thirds the length of the anterior side; the third is placed subapicaUy on the
posterior side; the posterior femora have the spines on the anterior side reduced
to two or three representing the lower row, and one or two representing the
upper row; there is a complete ventral row. but the spines are often reduced in
size to bristles.

The wings have a normaj venation ; the intermediate crossvein is situated a
little beyond the middle of the discal cell, the second posterior cell is long and
slightly constricted subapicaUy.

5. The female is similar to the male, and the ovipositor is rather short.

Hab. — New South Wales: Sydney and Blackheath.

Note. — The collection under revision contains nine males and eleven females
from Blackheath, taken from the 14th to the 25th November, 1919, and one
female from Sydney taken on the 30th March, 1919; there are also two females
from New South Wales in the Maeleay Museum. They agree in every respect
with White's description.

Nfoitamus maculatoides, n.sp. (Text-fig. 13.)

Description. A black species with a superficial resemblance to N. maculata
White, but the female ovipositor is shorter and only slightly compressed. There
is no description amongst the Australian species of Neoitamus that can in any
way be associated with this species.

'Bull. Mus. Paris, 1909, p. 144, and Ann. Soc. Ent. France, Ixxix., 1910, p.22.

198

AUSTRALIAN PLIES OF THE FAMILY ASILIDAE,

Text-fig. 11. — Neoitamus claripes, male genitalia, (.x 2.j).
Text-fig. 12. — Neoitaiims margites, male genitalia, (x 25).
Text-fig. VA. ^Neoitaiims iiun-ulaloides, n.sp., male genitalia.

(x25).

d. The front, face and most of the tubercle are brownish; from the oral
margin to behind the eyes, the head is covered with a light grey tomentum. The
hair on the front is black. The tubercle is large, and contains a large moustache
of mostly black hairs, but at the oral margin the hairs are white. The beard is
white. There is apparently a double row of bristles behind the eyes. The an-
tennae are black, the first joint is twice the length of the second, the third is
elongate and tapering, and without any apparent differentiated style, and this is
longer than twice the length of the two ba-sal joints united. The eyes, proboscis
and palpi are black, the latter has white hairs.

The thorax is black, with traces of four darker, thin, median stripes and light
grey tomentum stripes and spots. The dorsal thoracic bristles are disposed each
side of tlie median as follows: — two presutural; two superalar: two postalar; and
about seven dorsocentral . There are also numerous bristle-like hairs on the
dorsum. All the liristles including the two seulellar, the mctapleural and hypo-
pleural are l)lack. The hairs on the thorax are mostly black, but there are long,
thin, white hairs posteriorly and on the shoulder tubercles.

The abdomen is black, with the incisions and sides dark grey. The hair
above and below is white. The bristles are long, black and prominent as far as
the sixth segment. The upper forceps of the male genitalia are long, naiTow
and .without a process.

The legs have the anterior femora without spines, and tiie intermediate and
posterior femora with their respective spine systems more or less complete.

The wings have a normal venation; the intermediate crossvein is situated a
little beyond the discal cell, and the second posterior cell is short. The lower
brancli of the cubital fork is rather strongly curved ujiwards. and there are
fuscous spots situated at the usual positions, one each at the apices of the mar-

BY G. H. HARDY. 199

ginal, first and second posterior, and the discal cells, and also one at the cubital
fork .

S. The female is similar to the male; the ovipositor is very short and only
subcompressed ; it shows a ventral surface as linear, but the dorsal surface is
convex and tapers apically and in transverse section a "V" is formed by the two
sides.

Length. — Male, 14 mm.; female, 18 mm.

Hab. — New South Wales : Sydney ; holotype male and allotype female, 31st
March, 1918 ; one paratype male, 29th March, 1918.

Type. — The holotype and paratype are in the Australian Museum.

Neoitamus maegites Walker. (Text-fly:- 1-)

Asilus margites, Walker, List Dipt. Brit. Mus., ii., 1849, p. 461; vii., suppl. 3,

1855, p. 737; Ricardo, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (8), xi., 1913, p. 448.
Nieoitamus caUginosus, White, Proc. Roy. Soe. Tas., 1913 (1914), p. 277; 1916,
p. 176; 1917, p. 93 (in key).

Synonymy. — Walker's type is from Melbourne, and White's type is from
Tasmania. In the collection under revision there are specimens from Sydney
identified by White as his N. caliginosus; these agree with the Tasmanian speci-
mens, and also with Walker's description of A. margites.

Description, d. The face has a large tubercle, and a moustache composed
of mostly white hairs. There is a row of black bristles behind the eyes.

The dorsal thoracic bristles are disposed on each side of the median as fol-
lows:— two presutural; two superalar; one postalar; five dorsocentral. The num.
her of bristles appears to be constant, and normally they are black. There are
two scutellar bristles which are normally black, but often one or both are white.
The metapleural bristles are black and the hypopleural bristles are white and weak
or obsolete.

The abdominal bristles are mostly black, small and not very conspicuous.
The upper forceps of the male genitalia are simple and without a process, but they
have a row of about ten long, slender, dorsal bristles which somewhat conceal the
median lamella.

The legs have the anterior femora without spines; the intermediate femora
with the row on the anterior side usually reduced to two spines, a subapical
spine on the posterior side, and the ventral row of spines complete ; the posterior
femora with the system of spines complete.

The wings have a normal venation ; the intermediate erossvein is situated aliout
the middle of the discal cell, and the second posterior cell is short. Sometimes
fuscous spots are present on the wing.

?. The female is similar to the male and generally has a few black hairs
above the white in the moustache ; the ovipositor is short.

Rab. — Tasmania and New South Wales.

Note. — In the collection under revision there are twenty-five specimens; three
males and four females from Tasmania, and five males and thirteen females from
New South Wales. One female from Sydney and one from the Hawkesbury River
are labelled by White as his N. caliginosus.

Neoitamus setosus, n.sp. (Text-figs. 14, 15.)

Description, c?. The tubercle of the face is large, the moustache is mostly
white, and the hairs above and laterally are black. The front is black, covered

200

AUSTRALIAN PLIES OF THE FAHILY ASILIDAE,

with grey tomentum, and contains some long black hairs on the ocelli; these hairs
extend in two rows parallel to the eyes. The antennae are black ; the first joint
contains some short black bristles and some long black ventral hairs; the second
segment is half the length of the first and contains some short black bristles; the
third segment is as long as the second and tapers into an apparently unjointed
arista, the whole length of the joint and arista is slightly longer than the two
basal joints united. The proboscis is black, and the palpi are black with black
hairs. The beard is white. Behind the eyes there is a double row of black bristles.

The thoracic markings are of the usual form containing a pair of median
stripes and an interrupted lateral stripe on each side. The dorsal thoracic
bristles are disposed on each side of the median as follows: — two presutural;
two, rarely three, superalar; three, rarely four, postalar; seven dorsocentral. All
these bristles, the four scutellar bristles, the metapleural and hypopleural bristles
are black. The thorax ventrally is covered with grey tomentum and white hairs

The abdominal bristles are yellowish, long, and conspicuous from the third to
the sixth segments only. The segments are black dorsally, with mostly black
hairs; the incisions, sides and ventre are grey, with grey tomentum and lon^- yel-
lowish hairs. The upper forceps of the male genitalia widen apically, and each
branch has a long, strong, ventral bristle placed subapically, and anteriorlv to
these there are a few long hairs. The lower forceps have a row of eight \entral
bristles each ; the first and eighth bristles are weakest .

Text-tigs. 14-1.'5. — Neoilamiis setosus, n.sp. It, female ovipositor;
15, male genitalia, (x 25).

The legs have the coxae covered with gi'ey tomentum and hairs, and the irter-
mediate coxae have two black bristles; the femora are black with white pub-
escence. Tlic anterior femora are without spines; the intermediate and posterior
femora have their respective system of spines more or less complete.

BY G. H. HARDY.

201

The tibiae are reddish with the apical hith blaek, all bristles black. The
larei are black, with black bristles and reddish pubescence beneath.

The mng-s are slifjiitly infumed and have a normal venation; the inter-
mediate crossvein is situated before the middle of the discal cell and the second
posterior cell is rather long and slightly constricted subapically.

$. The female is similar to the male; the abdominal bristles are smaller; the
ovipositor is short, and contains a cylindrical styliform lamella. The sixth and
seventh abdominal segments are black, shining and subcompressed ; sometimes the
seventh segment is quite compressed, and both the sixth and seventh segments are
as long as the ovipositor.

Length. — Males, 15 — 16 mm.; females, 13 — 19 mm.

Hab. — New South Wales: Sydney and Katoomba. (November to .Januaiy.)

Type. — The holotype male and the allotype female were presented to the
Australian Museum by Dr. E. W. Ferguson. They were taken in Sydney, at
Eoseville, on the 17th and 8th November, 1919; respectively. There are eleven
paratypes, four males and three females from the type locality, also taken by
Dr. Ferguson; one male taken at Katoomba during 1912, by Mr. E. Green, a
pair taken by Mr. F. H. Taylor in Sydney, and one in the Macleay Museum.

Note. — This species cannot be made to agree with any description so far
published. A. exilis Macquart has bristles on the apex of the male genitalia, but
differs according to its description in several respects and is from Kangaroo
Island. Asilus villaticiis Walker from New South Wales, and Cerdistus austraUa
Ricardo also do not conform to this species, although the latter, and probably tlie
former, have bristles on the male genitalia. The females of both these are known
to Miss Ricardo, and it is taken for granted that no species known to that author
has the sixth abdominal segment of the female ovipositor-like. Both Miss
Ricardo and White state that the sixth abdominal segment does not form part of
the ovipositor in Australian species. Asihis Jillferus Macquart, from Sydney
Island, has also filaments to the male genitalia, but Maequart's drawing of this
organ differs considerably from that of the species described above.

Neoitamus jiaculatus White. ( Text-%. 16 . )

Neoitamus maculatm, White, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 1913 (1914), p. 278; 1917. p.
93 (in key).
Description 9. The face has a large tubercle; the moustache is composed
chiefly of long black hairs, but there are white iiairs along the oral margin. Tliere
appears to be a double row of black bristles behind the eyes.

Text-fig. 16. — Neoitaiiins inacuhitus, female ovipositor, ch'awn from
the holotype. (x 25) .

202 AUSTRALIAN' FLIES OF THE FAMILY ASILIDAE.

The dorsal thoracic bristles are disposed on each side of the median line as
follows: — two superalar, and anterior to these there is a third but very weaK
bristle; the postalar are represented by three in the holotype and two in the para-
type; about live dorsocentral; all these bristles are black. The two scutellar and
the metapleural and hypopleural bristles are black.

The abdominal bristles are mostly black, but some white occur laterally. The
ovipositor is short and compressed; the lamella is cylindrical, stylifonn, and
slightly longer than usual in the genus.

The leg's have the anterior femora without spines; the intermediate femora
have about four conspicuous black spines on the anterior side and one subapical
spine on the posterior side; the posterior femora have about three subapical si>ines
and a few black spines on the anterior side, and also a row of white, ventral,
bristle-like spines.

The wings have a normal venation ; the intermediate crossve'n is situated at
about two-thirds the length of the discal cell and the second posterior cell is rather
short and slightly constricted subapically. Fuscous spots are present in the usual
positions ; one each at the apices of the marginal, first and second basal, and the
discal cells, and also one at the cubital fork.

(3. The male is unknown.

Hob. — Western Australia: Armidale and Darlington, near Perth; King
George's Sound.

Type. — The holotype, in the Australian Museum, was taken at Armidale on
1st October, 1912. The paratype is smaller and was taken at Darlington on 7th
October, 1912.

Note. — Two female specimens, from King George's Sound, are in the Aus-
tralian Museum collection, and agree with the type. This makes four specimens
so far known, l)ut it is jii'obably quite a common species.

Neoitamus mistipes Macquart.

AsiJus mistipes, Macquart, Dipt. Exot., suppl. 4, 1850, p. 94. PI. 9, fig. 3 (wing).
Neoitamus graminis, White, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 1913 (1914), p. 278; 1916,

p. 179.
Rhtibdotoitamus graminis, White, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 1917, p. 99.
Jf Neoitamus mistipes, Ricardo, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (8), xi., 1913, p. 433;

White, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 1913, p. 275 (in key).
ffRhabdotoitamus mistipes, White, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 1917. j>. 100.

Syiwni/mi/. — Asilus m>isti2Jes Macquart is described from Tasmania, and the
description agrees with White's R. graminis.

Miss Ricardo described a species from Mt. Gambier, South Australia, and
refen-ed it to Macquart's name. White overlooked Macquart's locality, and in his
references he refers to Miss Ricardo's description only, using the locality given
there. It is doubtful if Miss Ricardo's species is the same as Macquart's.

Unfortunately there is not a specimen of 7?. graminis White in the collection
under revision, nor a specimen of N. mistipes Ricardo from Soutii Australia,
nevertheless the above synonymy appears to be convincing enough from a com-
parison of their respective descriptions.

203

ORDINARY MONTHLY MEETING.
26th May, 1920.

Mr. J. J. Fletcher, M.A.,, B.Sc, President, in the Chair.

Mr. Robert Jacksox Noble, B.Sc, Biological Branch, Dept. of Agriculture,
Sydney, was elected an Ordinary Member of the Society.

The President offered the congratulations of Members to Dr. L. A. Cotton
(in absentia) on attaining the Doctorate of Science.

A circular was read from the Hon. Secretaries of the Institute of Pathological
Research of New South Wales, calling attention to the establishment of the Insti-
tute, and appealing for funds.

The Donations and Exchanges received since the previous Monthly Meeting
(28th April, 1920). amounting to 8 Vols, 65 Parts or Nos., 20 Bulletins, 1 Report
and 3 Pamphlets etc., received from 41 Societies and Institutions and three
private donors, were laid upon the table.

NOTES AND EXHIBITS.

Mr. F. H. Taylor exhibited specimens of Lucilia fucina Walker, Neopollenia
papua Walk., — both recorded for the first time from Australia, the former being
originally described from S. Africa, the latter from Papua. L. fucina is one of
the sheep maggot-flies in Queensland, and probably in other States, and seems
to have been confused with L. sericata. — CJiri/som/jia rnfifacies (Macq), C. varipes
(Macq.), and Ophyra analis Macq., also sheep pests, C. dux Esch., Lucilia solain
Walk., PyreUia naronea Walk., and Chaetodacus tryoni (Frogg.), a fruit fly
which breeds in grenadillas in North Queensland; also Binellia tayloriana Bezzi
and Euprosopia piinctifaeies Bezzi.

Mr. E . Cheel exhibited specimens taken in October last, from a cultivated
plant of a so-called double flowering peach-tree (Pruniis persica var. dianthiflora)
showing, in addition to the ordinary flowers with an increased number of sepals
and corresponding number of petals and single pistils, quite a number of flowers
with two, three and four carpels distinct from the calyx and from each other in
the one flower. An illustration, together with a note, is published by M. J.
Berkeley in the Gardener's Chronicle for 18.52, p. 452, of a similar occurrence in
a "Golden Drop Plum," but the number of carpels according to the drawing was
usually two, or occasionally three, in the one flower. Kemer and Oliver ("Vol.
ii., p. 548) refer to this peculiar growth under the term "Antholysis," whilst
Berkeley's drawing and note is quoted by Masters (Teratology, p. 365, fig. 186),
under the term Polyphylly of the flower. Worsdell (The Principles of Plant
Teratology, vol. 2, p. 93, 1916) mentions that in dovible flowers of the cherry, two
carpels are almost invariably present. Daydon Jackson defines the term "Antho-
lysis" as a loosening or a retrograde metamorphosis of a flower.

Mr. A. R. McCulloch exhibited a small collection of fishes recently presented
to the Australian Museum by Mr. David G. Stead, general manager of the State
Trawling Industry. These had been trawled in 150 fathoms, East of Sydney, on
the edge of the continental shelf, and included several species not hithei-to recorded
from New South Wales waters.

204 XOTES AND EXHIBITS.

Mr. A. A. Hamilton exhibited a series of speeiniens of Aroids from the
National Herbarium, illustrating Chromatism, Vireseence and Multiplication of
Spathes. (1) Anthurium chelseiensis Hort., Botanic Gardens, Sydney (E. N.
Ward, April, 1914). (2) .4. AiKlreaniim Linden, "Uralla," Concord (J. H.
Horton, July, 1917). In both examples tlic highly coloured pigfment. which under
normal conditions covers the spathe, is only partially developed. On a portion of
the surface the chlorophyll is disclosed (vireseence) indicating the leafy origin of
the spathe. In the example of A. Andreanum the spadix is suppressed and the
spathe slightly malformed. (3) Bichardia africana Kunth., Manly (W. Ellison,
August, 1914), showing (o) a coloured leaf (chromatism) on the flower stem simu-
lating the spathe, (b) drawing by Miss M. Flockton of a flower grown at Sum-
mer Hill by Mrs. W. H. Hughes, depicting a supernumerary spathe enfolding
the normal floral envelope. (4) Bichardia Elliottiana >< Pentlandii, Sydney
Botanic Gardens (C. Woolnough, January, 1920) from a seedling raised b.\- H.
H. B. Bradley. In this example the colouring pigment of the spathe is partially
developed in the supporting leaf. Worsdell (Prin. of Plant Teratol., i., PI. xvii.)
figures a similar example of chromatism in B. Elliottiana, and it is interesting to
note that a seedling of this stock raised in Australia ha-s perpetuated the
abnormality.

Jlr. Fletcher eyhibited a remarkable leaf of Jacaraiida ovalifolia, 12i inches
long, apparently bifurcated apically for 3 inches, one branch having 9A, and the
other 8i pairs of jjinnae, with 13A pairs of pinnae on the undivided pro.fimal
portion; and he raised the (juestion whether it was really a case of division of the
gi-owing point; or, seeing that the apparent bifurcations have pairs of pinnae,
whether it was a ease of the incomplete fusion of two leaves. He showed also
flowering branches of .1. discolor with leaves with one pair, two paii-s, and three
pairs of pinnae; leaves of advanced seedlings which had not yet flowered, with
ten and eleven pairs of pinnae; and reversion-shoots and seedlings of euphvllo-
dineous Acacias, to illustrate the importance of taking account of the terminal
setae.

205

REPORT ON THE NEUROPTEROID INSECTS OF THE HOT SPRINGS
REGION, N.Z., IN RELATION TO THE PROBLEM OF TROUT FOOD.

By R.J. TiLLVARu, M.A.. D.Sc, F.L.S., F.E.S., Lixxeax Macleay Fkllow
OF THE Society ix Zoology.

(With two Text-figures.)

On arrival at Auckland from Sydney on November 5tli of last year, I was
met by Mr. D. Miller, Government Entomologist, and Mr. H. Hamiltoi., Zoolo-
gist to the Dominion Museum, and proceeded with them to Rotorua, where I met
Mr. Moorhouse, in charge of the Fish Hatchery in Lake Rotorua, and Mr. Hill,
Head of the Tourist Department. All these gentlemen offered me every assist-
ance in carrying out my investigations, and I desire to thank them very sincerely
for their aid.

Three weeks were spent in the Hot Springs Region, the following' being the
itineraiy : —
Nov. 7tb-10th: Rotorua. Yisit(?d Te Wairoa, Whakarewarewa and portions of

the Lake.
Nov. llth-17th: Te Wairoa and Lake Tarawera.
Nov. 18th-19th: Rotorua. Visited Fairy Spring, Hamurana Spring, Lake Ro-

toiti and Okere Rapids.
Nov. 20th-21st : Wairakei and Taupo.
Nov. 22nd-26th : Tokaanu.
Nov. 27th : Lake Roto-Aira.

Nov. 28th : Wairaarino.

It was hoi)e<l that a return visit might have l)een arranged later in the seascm
(February) in order to see the other lakes and streams of this region, and to
study the insects in the height of summer. Circumstances, however, made it im-
possible to carry out this plan.

The work done in the field may be divided into two parts : —
(i.) Examinations of the contents of trout-stomachs.

(ii.) Collection of the larvae and imagines of Nenropteroid Insects from
the streams and lakes.

' (i.) The Contexts op Trout-Stomachs.

An examination of a considei'able number of trout-stomachs during the
month of November showed a great diversity of food eaten. The Green Mauuka-
Beetle, Pyronota festira, was found to be the most abundant food. This beetle
visits the Manuka bushes fringing the lakes and streams, and frequently falls or
is blown off into the water, when it is at once seized and swallowed by the trout.
Next in importance to this were found to be the larvae of the Caddis-flies of the
family Leptoceridae. which form their cases of the green weed Nitella. The
stomachs of a number of trout were found to be filled with this green weed, which,
on being placed in a basin of water was seen to consist entirely of caddis-fly

206 XEUROPTEROID IXSECTS OF THE HOT SPRINGS REGION, X.Z.,

cases, many of the larvae being still ali\e within the trout's stomach. Another
important food was a small Mollusc, Potamopyrrjus sp., of which no less than 140
■were counted in the stomach of a "slab" taken at Rotorua. Other foods found
Jess commonly were the laiTae of Dragonflies, Mayflies, Stonefiies and the other
families of Caddis-flies, occasional remains of the Crayfish, small fish, and a
number of insects of various kinds which may be considered to have no definite
value as trout-food being only chance captures.

Besides these, it is important to note that some trout-stomachs were found
containing nothing but pebbles, and several were quite empty.

A considerable number of the trout examined were definitely "slabs." The
slabby condition appeared to be due, not only to the usual poor health of the fish
for some months after spawning had taken place, but more definitely to both
semi-starvation and indigestion. It was not surprising to find that fish with
their stomachs empty, or only filled with pebbles were in poor condition. But
there were also cases in which the slabby condition appeared to have been caused
by the indigestibility of the food. In one case the large claws of a crayfish were
found fixed inside the stomach of a trout in such a way as to block the passage
of other food ; and they had evidently been there a considerable time, seeing that
all the rest of the animal had been completely digested. This led me to conclude
that the crayfish is only a good food for trout when it is of not too large a size.
Consequently the introduction of any larger or more ^ngorous species of crayfish
than the one endemic in the region ought not to be encouraged.

(ii.) The Neuropteroid Faux a of the Streams axd Lakes.

The Neuropteroid Insects inhabiting the streams and lakes of the Hot Springs
Region may be divided into .six Orders, three of which belong to the more primi-
tive division of the winged insects, viz., those that have no true j>ui)al or resting
stage (Hemimetabola) and three lielong to tlie more higlily evolved division, pos-
sessing a true pupal stage (Hok)nietabola). Tliey may be classified as follows:—
Division Ilemimetdhola: (Winged insects without a true |)ui>al or resting stage).
Order 1. Perlaria or Stone-flies.
,, 2. Plectoptera or May-flies.
,, 3. Odonata or Dragonflies.
Division Uohniietabolu: (Winged insects iiossessing a true pupal stage).
Order 4. Megaloptera or Alder-Hies.
,, 5. Planipennia oi- Lacewings.
„ 6. Trichoptera or Caddis-flies.
(^Xote. — The Scorpion-flies, Order Meooptera. ai-c not reiiresented in the
Region under discussion.)

Of the six Orders enumerated we may omit from the discussion Order 5
(Lacewings) Avhose larvae are either terrestrial, or else lurkers along the moist
borders of streams. They attack the larvae of the other Orders wliich are
of value as food for trout. Thus, in so far as they affect the problem at all,
they act detrimentally to the food-supply. But they are exceedingly rare in the
Hot Springs Region, and were only found by me in two localities, viz.: Hanniiana
Spring, and the waterfall at Wahi, near Tokaanu.

Order 4 (Alder-flies) is only repi'esented in New Zealand by a single species,
Arclmcliauliodes dubitatm, an insect of large size, whose fat, succulent larva is
found under rocks in streams, and forms an excellent food for trout. This larva
is called the "Black Creeper," or sometimes the "Toe-biter." Though very nbun-

BY R. J. TILLY ARD. 207

dant in most parts of New Zealand, it appears to have been exterminated by the
trout in most parts of the Hot Springs Keaion, thouali it is still fairly al)undant
on the Tongariro Biver and tributaries.

The other four Orders, Stone-flies, May-flies, Dragon-flies and L'adilis flies,
are of the gi-eatest importance as trout-food, and we liave to consider them in
somewhat greater detail.

The Stone-flies.

These insects confine themselves to running watei-, preferring rocky streams,
with a fairly fast current. Their larvae live on rocks and stones, where they
wander freely in search of food. The perfect insects, or imagines, are sluggish,
and seldom fly, preferring to sit about on the vegetation overhanging the streams.
Nevertheless, they frequently fall into the water, and are eagerly seized by the
trout. Both larvae and imagines are soft-bodied insects with a plentiful supply of
fat, and form an ideal and easily digested food for trout.

Except along the Tongariro River and its tributaries, where the Stone-By
fauna is still abundant, these insects are very rare in the Hot Springs Region ;
and it is very clear that they have been greatly I'educed in number by the trout.

The large green Stone-fly, Stenoperla prasiiia, generally abundant tlirough-
out New Zealand, and one of the best of trout-foods, was only to be found in
streams above high waterfalls, where trout were absent. It has been almost
completely annihilated in the Hot Springs Region.

The Black Stopc-fly, Austrnperhi ci/re>ie, the most abundant Stone-lly through-
out New Zealand, has likewise been almost eliminated by the trout. A colony of
larvae was discovered at the extreme head of one of the small streams at Hamu-
rana. There are also a few larvae left here and there in the Tongariro River.

Of the slender Stone-flies (family Leptoperlidae) a number were found on
the Tongariro River and its tributaries. Some of these are new to science, and
will be described later. But, generally speaking, it may be said that these valu-
able flies, like the rest of the Perlaria. are on the verge of extinction in the Hot
Springs Region.

It would, I think, be well within the mark to estimate that more than 80 %
of the original Stone-fly fauna of the Region has already been destroyed by the
trout.

The May-flies.

These insects inhabit both streams and lakes. In all parts of the world they
form one of the most important articles of diet for the trout. Both the larvae
and the imagines are soft-bodied and easily digested. In the Northern Hemi-
sphere, where the evolution of the May-flies has taken place alongside that of the
native trout, the larvae have resorted to many cunning devices in order to escape
their rapacious enemies. Those of the larger species mostly burrow into the
banks of streams, and thus secure immunity from attack; while the smaller forms
hide under rocks and stones, and evade attack by their quick running powers.
Thus the trout only secure the May-flies in their winged stages (subiniago and
imago ) .

In New Zealand, the native May-fly fauna has been evolved without exposure
to the attacks of rapacious fish such as the trout. There is only one large species
whose larva burrows into the river-banks, viz., Ichthybotus hudsoni; and it is
clear, for many reasons, that this May-fly did not evolve this habit in New Zea-
land, but migrated thither long after the adoption of it. All the rest of the

208 XEUROPTEROID INSECTS OF THE HOT SPRINGS REGION', X.Z.,

large May-flies, forming together a magnificent fauna unequalled in any other
part of the world, have evolved little or no protective habits against such a
fish as the trout. The larvae of Oniscif/a-ster, one of the finest May-Hies in the
world, sit about on rocks or on the gravelly Ijottoms of streams; and. when at-
tacked, they only wriggle foi-ward like a shrimp. Consequently they have become
un easy prey to the introduced trout, whicli gorged themselves for some years on
this large supply cf choice food. This magnificent genus is now quite extinct
throughout the Hot Springs Region, and also in the streams around Christchurcli,
though still to be found here and there in out-of-the-way places in both Ishmds.
Anotlier fine genus. Ameletus, has larvae capable of quicker movement, and is
therefore still fairly abundant in most parts of New Zealand. But these larvae
are also on the verge of extinction in the Hot Springs Region. I did not dis-
cover a single Ameletus larva throughout my investigations, though I caught a fine
imago of a new species belonging to this genus above the high waterfall at Wahi,
near Tokaanu. where trout are absent. A third May-fly genus of great import-
ance is Coliibrtrisciis. The larvae have a certain amount of protection against the
trout, owing to their bizarre form, their gills being arranged so that they look like
a small piece of tangled moss or weed. They are very sluggish and hide under
rocks and stones in running water. Coloburiscus humeralis is one of the most
abundant May-flies in New Zealand; yet it has been practically eliminated fr<im
all parts of the Hot Spring's Region, except only on the Tongariro River and its
tributaries, and on those small streams where trout are absent, from some cause
or other, such as the intervention of a high waterfall, as at Wahi.

Besides the larger May-flies mentioned above, there are two genera of smaller
■\[ay-flies, Atalophlehia and Deleatidium, containing numerous species whicli are
very abundant all over New Zealand. The larvae live under rocks and stones in
streams and lakes, and are fairly active. Most of them are vegetable feeders,
but a few are carnivorous. A number of species of these genera were collected,
some of 'them new to science. These latter will be described later. Througlioui
the Hot Springs Region, a very considerable diminution of the supply of the
small ]\ray-flies is noticeable; and this cannot fail to exercise a serious effect upon
the future of the trout.

To svmi up the position, we may say tluit tlie largest May-flies, which lorm
the very finest possible food for trout, ha\-e been ])ractically exterminated, v.hile
the smaller forms Iiave been reduced, at a moderate estimate, by over 50 '"f .

Tlie Dmgon-flies.

New Zealand is poor in species of Dragonflies. but most of them are common.
Seven species are found very commonly throughout the Hot Springs Region. Of
these the largest {Uropetala carovei) is of no importance as trout food, the larva
dwelling in holes in the moss and peat of swamps. The larvae of the bright red
Diplacodes bipunctata, dwelling in still back-waters, may also be left out of ac-
count. The larvae of the other five were all found by me in the stomachs of
trout, tlie most fref|uently occurring being those of Procordulia smitliii, Pr. r/rai/i
and X(()itliiic»emis celandica. No doubt, later on in the season, the trout would
also feed upon tiie imagines, as in Tasmania.

In certain parts of New Zealand. T found Dragonfly larvae to he the principal
food of the trout. In the Hot Springs Region, the trout seem to have consider-
ably diiiiinislied the number of larvae, and they do not form so important an
article nf diet, perhaps because they are more protected by their peculiar colour-

BY n. J. TILLYARD. 209

ation and habits than are some other aquatic insect larvae, such as those of May-
flies. It seems clear that their numbers have been much decreased since the trout
were freed in these lakes and rivei-s, although I am unable to estimate this reduc-
tion as clearly as in the cases of Stone-fiies and May-flies.

TJie Caddis-flies.

Observations in other parts of the world, as well as in other parts of New
Zealand, show that Caddis-fly larvae foi-m one of the most important articles of
diet for the trout. Most of these larvae construct cases for themselves out of
weeds, sticks, sand or small pebbles; and one would imagine that such habits as
these would serve as eflicient protection for them. But this is not the case. The
trout know well the habits of the Caddis larvae. They watch carefully for any
suspicious movement amongst the weeds, sticks, etc., that strew the bottoms of the
lakes and streams, and they pounce upon the larvae and swallow them whole in
their cases. The substance of the case is usually indigestible; but the larva itself
is a succulent, fat morsel, and an excellent food for the fish. Those most sought
after are the elongated, more or less cylindrical eases of the Leptoeerid-ae and
Sericostomatidae, the former usually made from weeds, pieces of leaves or sticks,
the latter from grains of sand or a thin transparent substance secreted by the
iarva itself. In the Leptoceridae, the genera Notanatolica, Triplectides and
Oecetis are abundant throughout New Zealand; in the Sericostomatidae the same
is true of Olinga and Piicnocentria. Throughout the Hot Springs Region the
trout have most seriously diminished the number of these and other Caddis-flies.
Only two species now remain at all common, viz., Oecetis unicolor, whose larva
is still common, feeding in the green NitellaAj^As in the lakes, and Ilydropsyche
colonica, whose larvae form fixed houses of small pebbles attached to rocks. This
latter species still exists in great numbers in such places as the Okere Rapids,
where the rush of water is too swift for the trout to search for it. Its comparative
absence in other parts is strong- evidence of the reduction of the Caddis-fauna,
due to the trout.

The most striking instance of the almost complete loss of the original rich
Caddis-fauna is afforded by the condition of the Te Wairoa stream, flowing into
Lake Tarawera. Except in the rough water below the Falls, where no trout
exist, it is almost impossible to oI)tain any caddises in the stream. But a
short distance off there is a nuich smaller stream, rising from a hill
near the lake. This stream has been dammed off by boards, and the water
drawn off close to its exit into the lake by a force-pump. No trout pass up
this small stream. On examining it I found that it was swarming with caddis-
larvae under every stone and stick, and upon the gravelly bed and sides of the
stream these little creatures were most abundant. Yet a day's search in the Te
Wairoa stream yielded far less than I was able to ]iick out in the course of ten
minutes in this tiny stream a mile away from it.

It would not be overestimating the depredation caused by the trout amongst '
the Caddis-fauna of the Hot Springs Region, if the loss were put at 90 % of the
original fauna.

TirE St.\tk of the Insect Food Supply.

My survey of the insects of the Hot Spring-s Region quickly convinced me
that the balance of nature has been completely upset by the introduction of the
trout. By comparison with the state of affairs in most parts of the South Island,

210 XEUROPTKROID IN.SEC'TS OF THE HOT SPRIXGS REGION, X.Z.,

where the fauna, though seriously reihu'eil in many places, is usually found to
be more abundant than it is in this Region, it appears certain that the Rainbow
Trout has had a gi'eater share in the eating-out of the insect fauna than has the
slower and less greedy Brown Trout. The histt)ry of the Trout-flslieries of the
Region may be briefly stated as follows : —

(i.) Before the introduction of the trout the rivers of New Zealand swarmed
with an aquatic insect fauna as abundant as that to be found in any
part of the world. The lakes carried a less abundant fauna of fewer
species,
(ii.) The great majority of these insects, having evolved to their present
state without the stimulus of the predatory action of any rapacious
fish, possessed no means of defence against the trout when they were
introduced.
(iii.) The introduced trout, and especially the Rainbow, gorged themselves at
leisure upon the rich food ; so tliat, in the course of a few years, trout
of record size were being caught, and the fisheries obtained a world-
wide reputation.
(iv.) No scientific attempts have been made to conserve or renew the food-
supply. On the contrary, the only idea seemed to be to put in more
and more fry.
(v ) As soon as the food supply began to fail, some of the trout became
weakened; "slabbiness" became noticeable; and disease in the form of
thread-worm and fungoid growths appeared. There is also consider-
able evidence of actual starvation of trout in certain streams.
(vi.) Rome attempts liave been made of late years to reduce the nunil)er of
trout by netting and trawling. These efforts may be said to have
tjrouglit about some slight improvement in the condition of the fish.
At the same time, the destruction of shags has diminished the pre-
valence of the thread-worm (of which the shag is said to be the inter-
mediate host). But the disease is by no means stamped out. and most
certainlv recjuires further careful study.
The present ]iosition of the trout-fislieries of the Hot Spring's Region is that
there is, throughout most of the Region, not enough food for the trout present.
Many of the streams, especially those in which the fish spawn legularly. are
almost totally "eaten-out," and the amount of food in the lakes is woefully defi-
cient. The only part of the Region in which the state of affairs can be described as
at all hopeful, so far as my investigations go, is the Tongariro River and its tri-
butaries, where the supply of food is still fairly abundant.

One might sum up the position, somewliat caustically, t)y comparing it with
that of a gi-azier who put 10,000 head of cattle into a very rich 1000-acre paddock,
left the animals to feed, and, when the food supply began to fail, prepared to
remedy it by putting in a fresh supply of calves every year, without making any
attempt to improve the impoverished food supply !

(iii.) Recommexiwtions.

It is clear that improvement in the Trout fisheries of the Hot Springs Re-
gion can be effected along two distinct lines, \nz.: — improvement of the food supply
and reduction in the numh^r of trout. No considerations of the attractions to to\irists
or anglers, from a super-ubundant supply of trout, should be allowed to cloud
the main issue, which is this that, unlesx a natural balance can he brought about

BY R. J. TILLYAKD. 211

between the iiitradiiced tntnt mid the fnod f^itpidii, the fislierief: are sooner or later
doomed to failure.

With regai'il to the improvement of tlie food supply, the position is at pre-
sent a very serious one, in so far that the balance has been so greatly upset, that
no measures for the introduction of fresh types of food can be expected to suc-
ceed, unless such food is most carefully protected until it becomes well established.
It is, therefore, necessary to adopt at once measures which will not only help to
conserve the remnant of the food supply still existing, but will also give the
afiuatic fauna a chance of multiplying and approximating towards its original
abundance. To bring this about I would make the following recommendations: —
1. A badly impoverished stream should be selected, and should be completely
blocked by means of specially designed trap-nets, so as to prevent any trout jtass-
ing up it to spawn; also any trout at present in it should be taken out. Aquatic
insects should then be introduced from neighbouring small streams where no
trout exist (e.g., such parts of streams as lie above high waterfalls), and a
■:-areful record kept by means of annual or biennial visits, upon the progi'ess of
the aquatic insect life in the stream. I estimate that it will take at least three
years, possibly five, for such an impoverished stream to return to its original con-
dition. If, at the end of two or three years, it becomes evident that the aquatic
fauna is increasing, steps should then be taken to block off in the same way each
spawning stream in turn; so that, in any given year, there will only be certain
streams open to the trout for spawning, wliile the rest will be given a chance
cf recuperation.

For this purpose I would recommend either of the following two streams : —
(a) The Te TTairoa stream, from the waterful to the outlet of Lake Tarawera.
(There is an abundant supply of aquatic insects in the small creek on the left-
hand side of the road leading down to the wharf, about a mile from the Te Wniroa
stream) .

(6) The Tokaanu stream. (Aquatic insects are abundant in the small streams
around Wahi, two miles away.)

In both cases, the nature of the river-bed (pumice) and frequency of flood
water make it impossible to block the stream by means of stake or pile-nets. I
would, therefore, recommend that the nets be strung on strong supports driven
into the banks, and that their lower ends should hang freely into the stream, and
cari-y lead weights at short intervals. The accompanying diagrams (p. 212). show
the type of net to be used.

If at the end of three years there is no sign of the native aquatic insect
fauna reasserting itself, I would i-ecommend that an attempt be made to intro-
duce the English "Oreen Drake" Mayfly. Ephemera daiiiea, or such other species
as are known to be of great value as food ior trout. These could be set fi'ee in
the larval condition in the streams selected as a sanctuary under recommenda-
tion (2) following this below.

2. It is of the gTeatest importance that one lake, together with the streams
flowing into it, should be set aside as a sanctuary for the natural food-supply.
Most unfortunately, this aspect of the f|uestion was not considered when the
stocking of the streams with trout was undertaken. The result is that there is at
present no lake in the Rotorua District which does not contain trout. In the
Taupo District, an undertaking was given by the Government to the Maoris that
Lake Roto-Aira should be kept free from trout. Unfortunately, trout were sur-
reptitiously introduced into this lake two years or more ago, and have grown to a

212 XElIiOPTEROID IXSKCTS OF THK HOT SPRIXd.S IffXlIOX, X.Z.,

B.

.1

/>'.

Double trap-net with leaded bottoms, suitable for river with unstable

pumice bed, and set so as to catch trout running (foztiisiream.
Tlie same net, set with two extra pairs of steel-rope liraces, so as to
catch trout running !ipslrea)ii.

Tlie arrows indicate the courses taken ))y the trout.
fj. — The nets should be so designed that xilenty of " slack" is sillowed
for above the leaden weights, so that, if a flood washes the pumice
liottom out, the slack will allow the net to sink without lifting
the weights from the bottom.

considerable size. Roto-Aira is at pi'esent' tlic only possible lake that i-duld be
maintained as a sanctuary.

I would therefore recommend that this Lake, tosetlier witii all streams Hew-
ing into it, and the Pouto River flowing out of it. to within a mile of its entry
into the Tongariro River (or to such point as will be suitable for the erection of
nets to ))revent access of trout) should be jiroclaitned a-« a Kaneliiari/ for the native
aquatic fauna, and that immediate steps should be taken to eliminate from this
area any of the trout that were surreptitiously introduced.

BY R. J. TILLYARD. 213

3. Following upou (2), steps should be taken to have an exhaustive scietititic
survey made of the natural trout-food existing within the bounds of the sanetuary,
and experiments made with a view to improving it. 1 think this could be done
by erecting a small Biological Station in a convenient locality near the sanctuary
lake, and either placing it under the charge of a competent biologist>, or else
affording facilities for leading scientists to visit the station and study the fauna.
In this connection I should like to point to the Cass Biological Station, which is
under the charge of Prof. C . Chilton, and is owned by Canterbury College, as an
excellent example of what can be accomplished in this direction at a very mod-
erate cost.

With respect to methods for reducing the number of trout, I would point out,
in particular, that over-sized lish are a serious menace to the success of a trout-
flsherj', because they not only consume far more food than do their equivalent
weights of smaller fish, but they also take possession of the best feeding grounds,
prevent the younger fish from obtaining an adequate food supply, and frequently
themselves make inroads upon the smaller trout. "With the maximum possible
native food-supply, a New Zealand fishery ought not to be expected to prodtiae
anything beyond a steady and assured supply of reasonable-sized fish; and it
should be one of the chief aims of a scientific directorate to produce tliis very
desirable result. Consetiuently means must be devised, not only for reducing the
general very obvious conditions of overstocking in the lakes wliich I \-isited. but
also for removing "pirates" and over-sized fish wherever possible.

4. A more vigorous policy of netting the trout, either by the use of trawlers
or small launches, on Lakes Taupo, Rotorua, and Tarawera. The money realised
by the sale of such trout, either fresh or smoked, should be devoted to objects
which might further the scientific study and direction of the fisheries; as, for in-
stance, the provision of a Biological Station advocated under Recommendation (3).

5. The adoption of the regulations generally in use in the South Island con-
cerning permis.sible baits; i.e., besides the artificial fly, it should be allowable to
take trout on the natural fly. grasshopper, etc. I am well aware that all true
sportsmen abhor anything but the artificial bait; but it is time that they realised
that every inducement must now be offered to get a marked reduction from the
present seriously over-stocked condition of the lakes.

6. Limitation of spawning to certain selected streams, which should be
changed from year to year when practicable. This has already been dealt witli in
connection with Recommendation (1).

The above recommendations, if adopted, may be expected to show good re-
sults, in the case of the Taupo fisheries, within a few years' time. The fisheries
of Lakes Rotorua and Tarawera are a more formidable problem; and it would be
advisable to attempt the solution, in these cases, only in the light of the experi-
ence gained from the treatment of the Taupo fisheries.

314

THE PANORPOID COMPLEX.

Additions and Corrections to Part 3.

By E. J. Tillyard. M.A., D.Sc, F.L.S., F.E.S., Linnean Madeay Fellow of the

Society in Zoology.

(With one Text-figaire. )

During my recent %'isit to Xew Zealand, I was fortunate in <:)l)tainiiig' fairlv
plentiful supplies of the larvae and pupae of a Tiiyridid moih. Mora ra {Siciilodes)
subfasciata (Walk.). The dissection of the pupal wings of this species has
enabled me to fill in one of the gaps in the evidence in Part 3 of this work.

This moth lays its eggs, which are flat, circular, fringed discs, somewhat simi-
lar to the Tortricid type, on the stems of the Parsonsia vines which are found com-
monly in the bush throughout both North and South Islands. The young larva
bores into the stem, and feeds there, causing a noticeable swelling in it. It
pupates in its own tunnel in the stem.

The imago is not unlike Bhodoneura scitaria in appearance, but the fore-
wings are distinctly falcate at their tips. The genus Morova differs from Rho-
doneura in having Mi of the hindwing not directly connected with Rs, but joined
to it through the cross-vein m-r, while in the forewing it has Rs and R4 anasto-
mosing, the cross-vein ir being absent. In these characters, as Dr. A. J. Turner
has pointed out to me, this genus resembles the Australian genus Addaea very
closely.

In view of the al)ove differences, it seems scarcely necessary to figure the
imaginal venation of Morova siibfasciata here. Reference should be made to
Text-fig. 98 on p. 677 of Part 3 (these Proceedings, xliv., 1919. part 3), where
the imaginal venation of Bhodoneura scitaria is shown.

Text-fig. 113 shows the pupal tracheation, as drawn by me from dissections
made from pupae taken on January 1st of this year in the Woodhaugh Gardens,
Dunedin. For help in obtaining these specimens I am much indebted to my
friends, Mr. G. Howes and Mr. C. Clarke, of that city.

The chief point of interest in the forewing is the condition of the radius and
its sector, which is shown enlarged in Text-fig. 113 b. There is only a single
radial sector, which forks in the normal Heteroneurous manner; the radial cell,
or areole, is present, but exceedingly narrow, and is not closed distally. The
condition in the imago, in which R4 anastomoses with Rs, is evidently due to the
suppression of the main stem of R4i:i. and the non-development of the cross-
vein ir. Comparing the imaginal conditions of this region in Moroni and
Rhodoueura, we are able to deduce from this that, in Rliodoneura pupal wings,
the condition of the radial sector of the forewing would be the typical one found
in the Tortricina and many Tineina, viz., a single Rs with an areole formed
between its two branches, this areole being closed distally by ir. Further con-
sideration shows us that, in Bhodoneura, as in Morova, the main stem of R^^j

BY R. J. TILLTARD.

215

does not cbitinise in the imago; and hence the cell of the forewing is a true aneocel
of the Tortricid type.

Thus this portion of the forewing indicates some affinity with the Tortricina,
as does also the form of the egg.

The contrast between the form of the radial sector of the forewing in Morova
and in the Butterflies can be noted at once by comparing Text-fig. 113 with
Text-figs. 99 and 101 of Part 3 of this work already referred to. I think that this
character alone should put out of court any suggestion that the Thyrididae can
possibly be ancestral to the Butterflies. It is only in the Cossidae, the oldest ex-

Ri R,

Text-fig. 113.
Morova (Siculodes) sub/asciata (Walk.), (fam. Thyrididae). a, tracheation of pupal wings
(x 18). b, the contlition of the racUal trachea and its sector in the forewing, further
enlarged (x 45) .

isting family of Heteroneura, that we find conditions at all approximating to
those of the Butterflies with respect to the separation of Rs into two stems arising
well apart from Ri, This should incline us to look for the origin of the Butter-
flies much further back, almost certainly in some group that has long ago become
extinct, and has left no very close relatives existing to-day.

216 TIIK PANORPOID COMPLEX^

Another point of interest in the forewing is that Cm forks very far distad,
well beyond the level of the forking of Mi_4. This should be compared with the
condition to be seen in Euschemon, where the fork of Cui is placed much nearer to
the base; and, consequently, in the imago, Cui„ and Cuih leave the areocel much
further apart than they do in the Thyrididae. There can be little doubt that
the condition to be seen in Euschemon and in other Butterflies is the more primi-
tive of the two.

In dissecting the forewing of the pupa of Morova, I looked carefully for
the trachea 3A, but failed to find it. This trachea is (juite easily seen in the pupal
wing of Euschemon. Thus there is here a third character in which the Thy-
rididae are more highly specialised than the oldest forms among'st the Butterflies.

In the hindwing, trachea Ri is dominant over trachea Sc, as in the Tortricid
Carjjocapsa (Part 3, p. 665, Text-fig. 89) the Oecophorid Wiiiyia (Part 3, p. 660.
Text-fig. 90), and the Butterfly Euploea (Part 3, p. 685, Text-fig. 101), but not as
in Euschemon (Part 3, p. 680, Text-fig. 99), where the reverse is the ease. This
character is not, however, of much importance, as we do not yet know how vari-
able it may prove to be in the different families. Of more interest is the absence,
in Morova, of any sign of a humeral veinlet in the hindwing. Such a veinlet is
to be seen in the pupal wings of many Butterflies.

The very strong arching up of Mi towards Rs in the hindwing of Morova ap-
pears to be a somewhat more specialised condition than that found in Euschemon.

The anal area of the hindwing in Morova is of very great interest. The
pupal tracheation fully confirms my original interpretation of the anal veins in
the imago of Rhodoneura. Trachea lA is present in the pupal wing, in much the
same condition as in the Cossid Xlyeutes (Part 3, p. 661. Text-fig. 87), but
slightly more spe^'ialised by reduction, in that it fails to reach much more than
half-way towards the wing-border. It has, as in Xyleutes, lost its original con-
tact with Cu2. and makes a strong downward curve towards 2A, without actually
coming into contact with it. In the imago, lA and 2A l)eeome fused, thus form-
ing the basal anal Y-vein shown in Text-fig. 98.

This condi.tion is much more primitive than that to be seen in the pupal
hindwings of Butterflies, where lA is completely absent, and consequentlj' there
is no basal anal Y-vein present. It would seem to indicate a close connection
between the Thyrididae, and the more primitive types of Heteronenra, in wliich
trachea lA is preserved in much the same condition.

Trachea 3A is present in the pupal liindwing of Moroca. as in that of the
Butterflies, and bscomes chitinised in the imaginal venation. Trachea Cu2 is also
present in the pupal hindwings of both groups, but fails to become chitinised in
the Butterflies, tliough it is sometimes partially and very feebly indicated in the
imagines of Thyrididae.

To sum up, then, there are three characters in tlie forewing of tlu' Thyriclidw,
which are more liighly specialised than the corresponding conditions to be lound
in the oldest Butterflies. The hindwing, on the other hand, is in most respects
more archaic than that of the Butterflies.

We may conclude from this that, while there are obvious affinities between
the Thyrididae and the older groups, especially the Tortricina. and also lietween
the Thyrididae and the Pyralididae (thougli the [luiial wing-s of this latter family
still remain to be studied), yet there is no evidence that the Thyrididae stand in
any direct ancestral line to the Butterflies, as Meyrick and Hampson have averred.
There is, on the contrary, very distinct evidence, in tlie form of three clinracters

BY R. J. TILLYARD. 217

in the forewing, ;ij.':aiiist this claim. The proper degree of relationship between
the Thyrididae and the Butterflies is probablj best expressed if we say that the
old Protocossid stem gave origin in ascending order to (a) the Zygaenoid group
of families (Meyrick's superfamily Psyt-liina), (b) the Pyraloid group of fami-
lies, of which the most archaic, having very distinct affinities with the Tortneina.
is the Thyrididae, though these are not even to be considered as directly ancestral
to the Pyralididae themselves, and (c) the Rhopalocera, as a very distinct series
whose origin is to-day lost to us.

At this stage we must leave this interesting problem, until such time as
pupae of the Zijgaenidae and Pyralididae can be obtained and their wings
studied with a \-iew to ol)taining further light upon it. Sufficient evidence has,
however been obtained to show the extreme unlikeliness of any existing Hetero-
neurous type representing e\en a close apjiroximation to the original archetype
of the Rhopalocera

Corrigenda to Part 3.

p. 5(31, line 14 from bottom, for "one'' read "two."

p. 588, for "Text-fig. 53" read "Text-flg. 58."

p. 594, remove the Lepiduptera from (C) to (D).

p. 623, interchange lines 26 and 27.

p. 635, in Table II., to the characters given under (4) add "veinlet dec."

p. 647, line 19, for "Homoneura" read "Heteroneura."

p. 650, in last line, the percentage for Hepialidae should be 57.5, and that
for Prototheoridae 32.5.

p. 676, lines 3. 7, and 14, for "lA" read "2A," as in Text-flg. 97.

p. 682 and ]>. 686, in Text-flgs. 100 and 102, in Iiindwing, for "acl" substi-
tute "bc"=basal cell. There is no true areocel in the hindwing.

p. 685, line 6 from bottom, complete the bracket after "Etischemon."

p. 689, lines J and 5 from bottom, the percentage for Hepialidae should l)e
68.5, that for Prototheoridae 50.0.
In Text-tig 110, the forks of Ei + -„ Mii- - and M3 -tt should be hdjelled

p. 701, line 2. for "M" read "Mr,".

X. y, z. respectively, to conform with the text.

p. 707, in Table V (2), under Lepidoptera, for "C" read "D".

p. 708, in the Phylogenetie Diagram, for "CRETACECUS" read "CRETA-
CEOUS", and alter the bracket for "Sialoidea" so as to enclose only the
Sialidae and Corydalidae.

p. 711, line, 13, for "evolutions" read "evolution".

p. 717, in the explanation of Plate xxxi., fig. 16, for "The arrows point to"
read "The arrow indicates the position of".

I have to thank my friend Mr. A. Philpott, of Invercargill, N.Z., foi- reading
through Part 3 \-ery carefully several times, and thus disco\ering a number of the
above errors.

218

SPECIAL GENERAL MEETING.

14Tn June, 1920.

In Commemoration of the Centenary op the Birth of Sir William Macleat.

Mr. .J. J. Fletcher, M.A., B.Se., President, in the Chair.

Presidential Address, "The Society's Heritage from the Macleays."

Brief Synopsis, and List of Some of the Exhibits.

Yesterday (Sunday), the one hundredth anniversary of the birth of Sir Wil-
liam Macleay, at Wiek, County Caithness, 13th June, 1820 — Came to Australia
with his cousin, W. S. Macleay, in March, 1839 — His scientific usefulness, and
how he came to be useful : in the first stage of his scientific career largely the
product of family influence and family example: the youngest and last of a suc-
cession of Macleays interested in Science — Other reasons for the Society's interest
in the Macleays: its Hall stands on part of the old garden, in proximity to the
old home — The Macleay collections are now in the possession of thy University of
Sydney : the accessibility of the collections to members of the Soeietj' for study
jtrovided for by Sir William — The Society's memorials of all of them, and of some
of their friends — Their long connection with the Linnean Society of London, 1794-
1891: and with the Australian Museum, ab inito (1826) to 1877 — Both branches
of the family in which it is interested have now come to an end in the direct line;
the Society may be considered to have inherited the family scientific traditi;>ns.

The Macleayan Succession: Alexander Macle.w. F.R.S., F.L.S. (1767-
1848)— William Sharp Macleay, M.A., F.L.S., eldest son (1792-1865)— Sir
George Macleay, F.L.S., third son (1809-1891) — Sir William Macleay, Kt.,
F.L.S., M.L.C, nephew (1820-91).

Details of the development of their interest in science, and of their scientific
work — History of the old garden and of Elizabeth Bay Himsc; records of
scientific and other visitors — Records of their scientific and other friends — History
of the Macleay Collections up to the year 1874 [The account of their later develop-
ment, based on Sir William's own records, is reserved for another occasion] —
Memorials of all of them.

Exhibits.

Mementoes of Alexander Macleay: Portrait — Portraits of the Tradescants
(father and sim), Linnaeus (in his Lapland dress). Buff on, Peter CoUinson (Bot-
anist), George Edwards, Dr. William Hunter, Sir Ashton Lever, Dr. A. Russell,
Captain Cook, and William Curtis (with an inscription, from Dr. Sims).

Books: Fr. Willughbeii Ornithologia (1626); Linnaci Systema Naturae
(1767) — Four author's reprints inscribed "from his affectionate friend," "from
Lis attached friend R. Brown" — Original made-up copy of J. W. Lewin's "Lepi-
dopterous Insects of Now South Wales." with the MS text and title page, as .sent
to England; original drawings of Lepidopterous larvae — Sale catalogue of collec-
tions.

NOTES AND EXHIBITS. 219

Mementoes of W. S. Macleay — Books, reprints of his papers — Author's re-
prints presented to him by Robert Brown, Charles Lyell, and others— John
Vaughan Thomson's '•Zoological Researches" (1828-30) — His copy of Robert
Lowe's famous macaronic poem composed on the visit of the Princess Victoria, and
her mother, the Duchess of Kent, to Oxford in 1833 — Original Drawings of Tuni-
cates, and of the Fruit-fly (Ceratitis citriperda) for the illustration of two of his
papers — Coloured drawings of Cuban lepidopterous larvae, spiders, etc. — Miscel-
hineous sketches — Sketch-book containing drawings of pelagic organisms caught
in the townet on the voyage to Australia — Sketch of a pelagic tunicate {Appeiidi-
cdaria) taken in the townet by Mr. Huxley in Torres Straits — Charles Curtis'
original drawings of Paussid beetles, and spiders, for the illustration of tw.D
papers — Original drawing-s of remarkable spiders and Membracid insects sent by
Dr. Cantor, of Calcutta — Dr. James Stuart's collection of drawings of Australian
animals, chiefly Port Jackson fishes, bequeathed to W. S. Macleay — Original
drawings of Lepidoptera, spiders, and of a "^'egetable Caterpillar," by the Misses
Scott of Ash Island— Sketch of a Pselaphid beetle by the Rev. R. L. King, 1S58—
Gerard Krefft's original drawing of Chaeropus. and etchings of Aboriginals and
marsupials seen in the Lower Murray and Darling country, about 1857 — Lei ter to
iliss Harriet Scott, explaining the synonymy of the species of Charagia — Letters
from scientific friends — Original sketch of Phi/llirhoe by Dr. J. Denis MacDonald,
II . M . S . Herald — Dissecting microscopes.

M.emento of George Maeleay, donor of some of W. S. Macleay's entomolo-
gical books, and of the Stuart collection of drawings to William Macleay : his
portrait.

Mementoes of William Macleay — Portraits — Bust presented by Memliers —
The Society's home, much of its library, and of its other possessions, including
nearly all the foregoing.

Other Exhibits (not Maeleayan relics).

Photo of the bust of W. S. Macleay, kindly sent by Dr. B. Daydon Jack-
son, General Secretary of the Linnean Society of London, by permission ol the
Council — Photographs of original drawings, by Conrad Martens, of the Colonial
Secretary's official residence in Bridge Street, and of Elizabeth Bay House viewed,
from Darling Point, kindly sent by Mr. Clive Lord, Hon. Secretary of the Royal
Society of Tasmania, by permission of the Council.

Portraits of Rear-Admiral P. P. King and Mrs. King, and their son, the Hon.
P. G. King, M.L.C., an early Member of the Society, Member of the Council,
and donor of his father's author's copy of J. D. Hooker's "Flora Antarctica"
(the photos kindly lent by Mr. G. Goldfinch).

Portrait of Mrs. Charles Meredith, who, with her husband, came out to Sydney
in 1839, and afterwards removed to Tasmania : authoress, some of her books illus-
trated with her own drawings of plants and animals.

Portraits of Mr. A. W. Scott, and of his younger daughter, Mrs. Edward
Forde, entomologists and artists, formerly of Ash Island.

Professor J. T. Wilson unveiled the Society's Honour Roll, on which are
inscribed the names of members who served abroad during the Great War, 1914-
1919.

A cordial vote of thanks was tendered to Professor Wilson for unveiling the
Honour Roll.

220 XOTES AND EXHIBITS.

The President, on behalf of Members, offered Professor "Wilson hearty eon-
gratulations on his appointment as Professor of Anatomy in the University of
Cambridge, at the same time expressing their keen regret at his departure from
Sydney, and also asked him to convey a message of remembranc-e and regard to
Professors Martin and Hill.

Professor Wilson expressed his appreciation of the invitation to be proent
and unveil the Honour Roll; he also thanked Members for their congratulations
on his recent appointment.

On the motion of Professor David a heai'ty vote of thanks to the President,
Mr. J. .J. Fletcher, was eai-ried by acclamation.

The Meeting closed with eheere for His JIajesty the Eng, and H . R . H . the
Prince of Wales.

221

ORDINARY MONTHLY MEETING.
30th June, 1920.

Mr. J. J. Fletcher, M.A., B.Sc, President, in the chair.

The President announced that a telegram had been received from the Koyal
Society of Tasmania wishing the Society a successful Macleay Centenary Meeting.

A letter was read from Dr. L. A. Cotton, returning thanks for congratula-
tions on his attaining the Doctorate of Science.

The Donations and Exchanges received since the previous Monthly Meeting
(2nth May, 1920), amounting to 8 Vols., 65 Parts or Nos., 20 Bulletins, 1
Report and .3 Panmhlets, etc., received from 41 Societies and Instihitinns and 3
private donors, were laid upon the table.

NOTES AND EXHIBITS

Mr. E. Cheel exhibited herbarium specimens, together with samples of timber
taken from two distinct forms of Callistemon viminalis (Sol.) Cheel, showing the
following distinctive characteristics : —

(1) Calyx-tulii' glal)rous; bark of a thick corky appearance similar to that

of the common "Broad-leaved Tea-Tree" {^lelaleiica leucadendrom var.

albida Sieb. Cheel). (2) Calyx-tube silky-hairy; bark ni' a more or less

fibrous nature.

He also exhibited specimens of two forms or varieties of Ccdlistemon pachy-

pliyllua Cheel, showing the following characters: —

(1) Flowers of rich dark crimson similar to the type specimensv but the
lea\"es very narrow. (2) Flowers of a greenish-yellow colour and leaves
naii'ower than the type. The two latter forms are from Coff's Har-
bour, whilst the type is to be found at Bullahdelah, Byion Bay, and in
Queensland
Mr. G. A. Waterhouse exhibited a male Tisiphone rmcnsleyi, which he had
mated with a female Tisiphone abeotia, together with the five butterflies reared
from eggs laid by tlie female. The male T. rawnslei/i was reared from a larva
found at Mooloolah, Queensland, which pupated at Sydney on 9th September,

1919, and emerged on 18th October, 1919; the female T. aheona from Sydney
emerged on 19th October, and the pairing took place the same day. The butter-
flies were placed in a mosc|uito net hung on a clothes line, and the actual mating
was observed, the female was then caged over a growing plant of swordgrass
(Gahnia sp?) and ten fertile eggs were laid on 20th and 21st October, which
emerged in 15 and 16 days. The young larvae were left undisturbed, the only
artificial condition being the surrounding wire of the cage. Early in February,

1920, five pupae were found, and these produced three males and two females
from 21st to 29th Feln'uary, all being very similar in markings. Two further
snatings of. these first generation hyln'ids were obtained and the young second
generation larvae are now under observation. As seen from the specimens ex-
hibited the first generation hybrids combine the characters of both parents, the
broad orange band of the forewing of aheona being very much reduced in size and
much paler in colour. When it was neeessaiy to keep the specimens alive for
more than a day, they were artificially fed with a mixture of honey and water.
He also exhibited for comparison a series of Tisiphone aheona from Eastern
Australia showing the northern and southern forms and the wonderful variation
existing at Port Macquarie.

222

NOTES ON SOME AUSTRALIAN TENEBmOKIDAE. AVITH
DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES;— ALSO OF A NEW
GENUS AND SPECIES OF BUPEESTIDAE.

By H. J. Carter, B. A., F.E.S.

(With fourteen text-figiires.)

Family BUPRESTIDAE.

Ctrioides, n. sen. Clirysocbroinorum (Text-fig. 1).

Near Cijria, but differs from that g'enus in the following: particulars. An-
terior margin of prosternum straight, without medial notch or lobe: presternum
furrowed in middle, narrowed and rounded at apex to fit into mesosternal ex-
cision. Antennae. — 1st joint long, bent and thickened at
apex, 2nd sliortly obconic, 3rd longer than 4th, but con-
siderably shorter than 1st; 4th-8th subequal. elongate sub-
triangular and flattened, lltli elongate ovoid.

Posterior tarsi with 1st joint not as long as the two
following combined; last abdominal segment of c? with
wide triangular excision at apex between two rounded
lobes; of 9 round and subacuminate.

Following Kerreman's table of the tribe in the "Genera
Tnsectonim." Cijrioides is separated from all other describ-
ed genera, except Cyria and Epistomentis by having its an-
tennal cavities small and rounded. From Epintomentis it
differs in having the 3rd antennal joint decidedly shorter
than the 1st; the strongly bisinuated front of prothorax;
the proportions of the hind tarsal joints; and the abdomen
not carinated in any part.

Ctrioide.s ses-spilota^ n.sp. (Text-fig. 1.)

Navicular, rather flat, smooth; nitid black above with
the posterior sides of pronotum sanguineous and each ely-
tron with 3 yellow spots, the first small, jiosthumeral (not
seen from above), the second large and ovate, opposite
lateral tooth and nearer sides than suture, the third of
same size and foiin as the second on posterior third. Legs
and underside with long white hair, the smooth parts nitid
black with metallic reflections. Head carinated in front,
furrowed on vertex, with large sparse punctures. Pm-
thorax 5 X 4J mm., widest at ba.sp, bisinuate at base and
apex — more strongly so at apex — the medisn lobe of this
Cyrioides sex-spi/o/a. l"""''«C'e(i foi-ward; scarcely (in <?) or nit (in ?) excised,
n.sp. .mterior angles acute (as seen from above), >ides very little

tefl'.

w

Text.fig. 1.

BT II. J. CARTER.

223

rounded in middle and sinuate behind, base with medial lobe subanj^ilate, posterior
angles widely acute (about 80°) ; disc with medial furrow strongly impressed, ter-
minating in a wide depression near base, sparsely punctate with larsje and deep gem-
mate foveae near posterior sides. Scutellum invisible from above. Elytra slightly
wider than prothorax at base, and thrice as long, gently sinuate at sides and
slightly widened behind middle, thence narrowed to apex — each apex strongly
bideutate, the interior tooth longer; posterior sides entire; disc striate-punctate,
the punctures large on basal third, thence smaller and almost evanescent at apex;
prosteruum and apical segment of abdomen coarsely, the rest of underside finely
and sparsely punctate ; fore-tibiae curved. Dimensions : c?- 18 X 6, S. 21 x 7 mm.
Ilab. — Johnstone River, Queensland (Mr. H. W. Brown.)
A pair of this fine species, sent for identification from the South Australian
INIuseum, are the only examples I have seen.

Types in the South Australian Museum.

Stigmodera aeneicornis Saund.

Specimens frim N.W. Victoria (Hattah, Sea Lake, etc.), are so labelled in
the National Museum, Melbourne, and exactly correspond with the description and
figure. The name is of no value for purposes of identification.

Family TENEBRIONIDAE.

Through the helpful co-operation of Mr. K. G. Blair, of the British Museum,
and by the specimens compared with type, sent for inspection, I am now able to
correct mistakes of identification and to indicate further synonymy. Mr. Blair's
notes have further led me to a close re-examination of the species belonging to
the closely allied g-enera Daedrosis, Licinoma, Brycopia and their allies, and this
necessitates a considerable modification of the tabulations published by me.*

Caedius. C. sphaeroides Hope = C. tuberculatus Cart.

This beach-dweller is found on both the East and West coasts of Australia.
I was misled by a comparison between fresh and abraded specimens.

Hyocis. The species of this genus, though commonly found at the roots of
maritime plants on the sandy sea beaches, are not so restricted. Thus I have received
E. pallida Macl. from Narromine, N.S.AV., and have taken H. pubescens Macl.
(described, like tho former, from Gayndah) in my garden at Darling Point. H.
bicolor Cart., originally from Botany, I found again at Burnie. Tasmania. . The
species vary much in colour and pattern, and while pointing out at least two
synonyms, it is probable that a further reduction in the number of names may be
desirable.

H. bakewelli Pase. = H. occidentalis Blackb. var.

77. sub-parallela Champ. = H. variegata Blackb. var.

Regarding the first of these it is evident that Champion's notesf refer to
occidentalis Blackti. which varies much in colour and marking's, but is inseparable
in form from concolorous examples that are found from Victoria to Albany. Re
sub-parallela Champ., Mr. Blair writes "at my request he [Mr. Champion] "has
looked at the type and finds it identical with variegata Blackb. except that in the
latter the pale spots are a little more extensive. The other foi-m is completely
dark, with the elytra curiously irregular." A new species is described below.

•Trans. Key. Soc. S. Aus., xxxviii., 1914, p.388-391.
tTrans. Ent. Soc. Lend., 1894, p. 36.3.

224

XOTES ox SOME AUSTRALIAN TESEBRIOXIDAE,

Phaennis fasc-icidata Champ. The female only of this species was described.
I have lately seen a male example from Zeehan, Tasmania [Simson Coll., South
Australian Museum] and I possess another taken by Dr. Ferguson in the Blue
Mountains, N.S.W. The head has pronounced sexual eharactei-s as follows :

c?. Head with three prominent horns; one, sharply conical, on centre of
forehead, pointing oblif|uely backwards, and one on each side of head, triangular,
forming a projection over the points of insertion of the antennae.

AxEiiiA cAVLOBioiDES, n.sp. (Text-fig. 2 . )

Short, rather squarely ovate, black, pronotum sub-opacjue, elytra i-atlier nitid,
upper sui'face sparsely clothed at sides with upright reddish hair. Head wide,
labrum evident, epistoma with circular excision in front, without defined sulcus
behind, and rounded in a single curve from the apical excision to behind the eyes;
apical joints of palpi subulate, eyes large, almost completely divided by a narrow
canthus; closely punctate; antennae short, joints trapezoidal, gi-adually enlarging
to the 10th; apical narrower than preceding and widely ovate. Prothorax widely
transverse, truncate at ajiex and base, slightly narrowed at the former, sides
rounded, all angles obtuse, densely and finely punctate, without medial line or
foveae. Seutelbim triangular. Eh/fra con^•ex laterally, of same width as pro-

Text-fig. 2.
Aiieiiiia caii/ohioides, n.sp. 2a, front leg; 2b, mid leg; 2c, hind leg.

thorax at base, sides parallel, without evident margin, the whole finely punctate,
with some transverse strioles; the punctures larger and less dense than on pro-
notum. Epipleurae narrow, body winged, mctasteruum coarsely punctate, tibiae
dentate on outside margin, spinose and pectinate at the enlarged apex; tarsi witli
a few spiny bristles, claws very tine. Dimensions: 5 — 6 ^ 2i — 3 mm.

Hab.—W.A.: Swan River and Geraldton (J. Clark), Yallingap. (R. E.
Turner, in British Museum).

Twenty specimens examined of this scarab-like Tenebrionid, sent to me, as
also to the South Australian Museum, by Mr. Clark. I had already described
this as a new genus and species, but a timely note from Mr. Blair, to whom [
had sent a specimen, brought an additional example taken by Dr. Turner, with
the information "Anemia sp.(prob)n., near .1. sardoa Gene and A. denticulata
WoU; but differs from both in having thorax much more finely and closely punc-
tate. From A. sardoa it differs also in its shorter, more squat shape." The

BY H. J. CARTER. 225

srenns Anemia is widely distributed in S. Europe, Asia (Syria to India). Atrica
(widely) and America (California). The above record is the first for Australia.
It is found in sandy beaches or sandy soil.
Types in the Coll. Carter.

Hyocis minor, n.sp.

Shortly ovate, convex, opaque brownish black, elytra with some undefined
reddish markings, chiefly in humeral region, antennae and leg's red. Head coarsely
punctate, antennae stout, .ioints 9 and 10 transverse, 11th oblong oval. Prothorax
emarginate at apex, front angles rounded but prominent, sides rounded, slightly
sinuate behind, posterior angles rectangular, base bisinuate, disc coarsely and
closely punctate, very sparsely pilose towards sides, with well marked medial
sulcus. Elytra wider tliau prothorax at base, oval and convex, deeply punctate-
striate, the punctures moderately large and round, more widely separated than
usual in the genus, underside more finely punctured than upper surface. Dlmen-
gions: 2 — 2^ X IJ mm.

Hub. — Stradl)riike Island. Queensland (Mr. Pottinger and H. .7. Carter);
Sydney (Dr. E. W. Ferguson).

Six examples taken on the sea-beach near Dunwich (Stradbroke Is.), seem in-
separable from the Sydney specimen, which has long been in my collection as a
probable sp. nov. It shares with H. nigra Blackb. the distinction of being con-
sistently smaller tlian the other described species, while distinguished from nigra
by its more convex and wider form and rounded sides of prothorax. //. hake-
welli Pasp. is larger aiul has much coarser elytral sculpture with caneellate ridges
between the square seriate punctures, and with more angulate humeri.

Type in Coll. Carter.

Alphitobius blaiei, n.sp.

Sub-parallel, depressed, piceous above (elytra nearly black), underside, legs
and antennae castaneous. Head closely punctate, eyes rather large, antennal orbit
not prominent, antennae submoniliform, slightly and successively widened out-
wards, not extending to base of prothorax. Prothdra.r: apex truncate (as seen
from above), base bisinuate, anterior angles rounded, posterior angles sub-rect-
angular, widest at base, sides arcuately narrowing to the front; disc closely, not
very finely punctate, with two small basal foveae. Elytra of same width at ba-se
and about two and a-half times as long as the prothorax; finely striate-]iunctate,
intervals flat and minutely punctate; underside closely punctate, the prosternum
coarsely, abdomen more finely so, tibiae very little enlarged at apex, their margins
entire. Dimensions: 3J x Ij (approx.) mm.

Hal).— Townsville, Queensland (F. P. Dodd) .

Two specimens were sent from the British Museum, labelled as above, of a
species that is dillicult to place; and which I was inclined to think was a
Vlomoides, but the shorter body and antennae, more transverse prothorax pre-
clude this.

T V p e in British Museum.

Alphitobius xajiiaphila, n.sp.

Elongate-ovate, sub-nitid ; head, prothorax, underside and appendages red, the
first often blackish ; elytra piceous, more or less suffused with red, tarsi luteous.
Head coarsely and eonfluently punctate, eyes large, prominent and coarsely faceted,

226 NOTES ox SOME AUSTRALLW TENEBRIOXIDAE,

epistomal suture arcuate and -well-impressed; antennae extending nearly to half
the length of prothorax; basal joints sub-cylindrie — 3rd slightly longer than 4th;
gradually enlarging from 5th to 8th; 8th — 10th wider than long, 11th largest,
ovoid. Prothorax strongly trans\erse, truncate at apex, feebly bisinuate at base,
sides evenly rounded, all angles obtuse, disc closely and coarsely punctate, without
medial line, two large, shallow, foveate depressions near base. Scutellum large,
curvilinear triangular. Elytra wider than prothorax at base and about 3 time;5
as long, sub-parallel (or feebly ovate) moderately convex (narrow border not
evident from above), striate-punctate, intervals lightly convex on disc, more
markedly so at sides; seriate punctures large; intei-%-als thickly punctate (giving
semi-opaque appearance to surface). Underside coarsely, metastemum more
sparsely punctate Prostemum narrowly compressed between coxae, the apex
produced backwards forming an ellipse, fitting an arcuate triangular depression
in mesostemum, metasternum channelled ; middle and post intercoxal processes
arcuate; legs clothed with longish yellow hair; tibiae with short spine at apex,
posterior tarsi with claw-joint nearly as long as the rest combined. Dimeiisionf::
4 X IJ— 2 mm.

77nb.— N. Territory: Stapleton (Mr. G. F. Hill); also British :\ruseum; in
both cases taken in <? flowers of Zantia.

Five specimens from !Mr. Hill, and two sent from the British Museum show a
species that I place with much diffidence under Alpliitobiits.

Type in Coll Carter.

Platycilibe integricollis. n.sp.

Short, broad, depressed, sub-parallel, nitid brown above and below ; antennae,
jialpi and tarsi reddish. Head wide and convex, eyes small, surface — as also
that iif [tronotum — closely and rather coarsely punctate; antennae short, with 3-
jointed club — less enlarged than in P. brevis mihi. Prothorax truncate at base,
squarely emarginate at apex, anterior angles rather sharply advanced, sides
straight — slightly -n ider at base than at apex, with narrow, horizontal, lateral
border bounded internally by a fine sulcus, the external edge entire, disc without
medial line or foveae. Scutellum small. Eli/tra of same width as and closely
adapted to prothorax, punctate-striate, the intervals a little convex and smooth,
the punctures in striae roimd, regular and close. Under surface of head and
sternum strongly punctate, abdomen sparsely punctate; fore-tibiae (at least)
spinose on outside edge. Dimensions: 4^2 mm.

Hah. — Acacia Creek, JlacPherson Ranges, X.S.W. (H. J. Carter). Xa-
tional Park, Q'land. (H. Hacker) and Queensland. [British Museum ((^liallenger
Expedition).]

Six specimens examined show a species so close to P. brevis Cart, that my
own two specimens had been placed under that label in my cabinet. The two
Queensland examples sent by Mr. Blair, who called attention to their ditferenca
from P. brevis, made me examine them more closely and the following distinctions
were noted : — Head and pronotiim more coarsely punctate, antennal club 3-
jointed: sides of prothorax entire; underside less coarsely and more s]),Trsely
punctate; size smaller. (N.B. — In my description of P. brevis, I omitted the
fact that the sides of prothorax are finely, irregularly crenulated. wliile the an-
tennal dub, as seen in figure, is more or less 4-jointed.)

Types in Coll. Carter.

bt h. j. carter. 227

Pterohelaeus.
Synonymy.

(a) P. planus Bless. = P. liepaticits Pasc = (?) P. bagotensis Blackb.

(b) P. pice^ts Ivirby ^ P. pascoei Mad. = P. iiruinosus Pasc

(c) P. dispar Pasc. ^ P. abdoininaUs Lea.

(d) P. tristis Germ = P. memnonius Pasc. ^ P. tenwistriatus Lea.

(e) P. geminatus Blackb. = P. sub-punctatus Cart.

(/) P. dispersus Macl. ^ P. fraternus Blackb. = ( ?) P. ofdZf's Blackb.
(«) ^rfe Blair. (?)) Mr. Blair writes: "The type of P. piceus Kby appears
to be lost, but I send a specimen of what passes with us for this species, and
with which I consider P. pruinosiis Pasc. and P. pa.scoei Macl. (det. H. J.C.I
identical." (c) My own examples have been compared with Lea's type and
secondly with an example of dispar (?) from the British Museum. An example
of P. dispar c? (f) much smaller than the S (14 X 9 mm.) is identical with P.
broadhursti Lea, but I consider this specimen to be doubtfully conspeeific with
the female example sent, and Mr. Lea's name should stand till further evidence
is adduced, (d) Mr. Blair states "The type of memnoiiitis Pasc. certainly has
quite distinct granules (= tristis Germ.) ." An example of meinnonius sent me
from the British Museum agrees with my own example that has been compared
with P. tenulstriattis Lea. (e) is certain from example sent of geminatm. (f)
fide Blair, with some doubt as to ovalis.

P. semis Pasc. — A specimen sent from the British Museum is identical with
examples in my collection from Walgett and Nan-abri, N.S.W. The type was
described as from Victoria.

P. agonus Pasc. — An example sent is quite new to me, and in size and form
near peltatus Erichs., but has head and thorax more cleai'ly punctate, the elytril
margins narrower, all intervals f|uite flat, and seriate punctures much finer.

Pterohelaeus intbrruptus, n.sp.

Elliptic, depressed, subnitid, black, tarsi and apical joints of antennae red-
dish. Head very minutely punctate, eyes separated by a space of about the
diameter of one eye, antennae with last 4 joints enlarged, 9th-10th round, 11th
oblong, elliptic. Prothorax 3 X 7i mm., length measured in middle, base bisinu-
ate, apex deeply emarginate, anterior angles sharply produced — though slightly
blunted at extreme end; sides continuing the elliptic curve of elytra but slightly
sinuate before the anterior angles; posterior angles acute and falcate; disc nearly
smooth or merely microscopically punctured ; foliate margins a little concave, rather
wide medial basal impression and shallow foveae on each side of this. Scutellum
equilatero-triangnlar. Elytra of same width as prothorax at base, widely ovate
and depressed, foliate margins wide and sub-horizontal; irregularly linear-punc-
tate, with nine more or less raised inteirvals of which the 1st, 3rd, 5th and 9th
are more raised than the others, the 1st bifurcating at scutellum, the 9th eosti-
form; from halfway to apex these intervals broken up into rows of noduleK; be-
tween the intei-vals are double rows of small punctures, those near suture very
irregular; outside the 9th and limiting the foliate margins, a row of large punc-
tures ; abdomen finely strigose. Dimensions : c?. 14 X 9, 9 15 X 10 mm.

Hob. — Forest River District, W.A. (Western Australian Museum), also
Kimberley District W.A.

228 NOTES ON" SOME AU.STRALIAX TK.VEIiRIOXIDAE,

Two examples examined show a species rather closely allied to the Queens-
land species P. arcanus Pasc, having rather similar elytral sculpture, but the
form is more regiUarly elliptic, the foliation less wide, the sides of prothorax
feebly sinuate. In I'. arcanuK the lines ot nodules are continuous throughout, ex-
cept for the costate 3rd interval.

Type (c?) in the \Yesteru Australian Museum, Perth.

Pterohelaeus nodicostis, n.sp.

Widely ovate, convex, reddish brown, head and pronotum black, paliii and
legs red, antennae wanting. Head and pronotum very finely punctate, eyes
moderately distant (as in P. piceiis Kii-by). Prothorax transverse, foliage mar-
gins wide and horizontal, anterior angles widely rounded, posterior angles pro-
duced, but widely blunted at apex, medial line faintly indicated. Ehjtra of same
width as prothorax at base, sides sub-parallel to halfway, widely rounded be-
hind; very convex, foliate margins wide and horizontal, little narrowed behind;
disc with 17 rows of punctures, besides a short scutellary row ; all, except this and
extreme lateral row, in pairs between costate intervals; the seriate punctures tine
near suture, much finer than in piceics, larger towards sides, there as large as in
piceus; the suture raised, the 1st and 3rd costae flattening out on basal half, the
rest earinate-crenulate on basal half; all costae nodulose on apical half, a single
row of nodules forming a crest on each raised inter\-al. Underside lightly
strigose, apical segment punctate. Dimensions: 21 X 13} uim.

ffab.— Moree District, N.S.W. (Mr. P. C. Morse).

A single specmien lately sent by its captor, is a very distinctly differentiated
member of IMacleay's Sect. 1.2. Species of broadly ovate form, and largely
expanded margins to both thoi-ax and elytra. It is the only one besides arcanus
Pasc, raucus Blackb., and interrupt us (supra) in which the elytra have grannies;
arcanus is, however, much more widely oval, with the wide sutnral interval con-
fusedly punctate, and the suture itself nodulose inter multa alia: rattcus has a
totally different sculpture. In size and foliation it is near piceus Kirby, hut i5
more convex. It differs from interruptus (stipra). which has the costae clearly
interrupted, leaving island nodules.

Type in Coll. Carter.

Pterohelaeu.s oblongus, n.sp.

Elongate parallel, whole surface rather nitid black, legs very nitid ; antt nnae
— especially apical half — and tarsi reddish. Head finely punctate, eyes sei)ar-
ated by a space '>f about half the diameter of one; antennae with third joint as
long as 4th and 5th combined, 2nd — Cth linear, 7th obconic, 8th — lOtli enl.ii'ged,
ovate, 11th elongate ovate. Prothorax (4X9 mm.), emarginate at apex, bisinu-
ate at base, widest a little in front of base, thence converging lightly to base,
more strongly and arcuately to apex; base nearly twice as wide as apex (9 :5) ; foliate
margins wide and slightly concave, extreme margin reverted: anterior angles
prominent but bhuitly rounded, posterior sharp and sub-rectangular (feebly fal-
cate) ; disc nearly smooth, very minutely punctate, medial line , dearly impressed;
two deep triangular foveae at base. ScuteUum very large, curvilinear triangular.
Elytra slightly wider than prothorax at base and about four times as long, sides
parallel for the greater part, margins very narrow, slightly widened at the shoul-
ders, there forming an obtuse angle; disc coarsely striate-punctato, with about 18
sub-obsolete striae, including a short scutellary and a lateral row nf larger punc-
tures, seriate punctures round and deep, l)ecoming finer at shoulders and apex,

liV 11. .1. CAIiTKU. 229

humeral gibbus prononneed, intervals flat, except the sutural, 4th, 8th, and 12th,
these wider than the rest and more or less costate, the sutui-al eosta l)ifurcating at
the seutelliim and continuous to the base; prosternum shaiply carinate and lightly
transversely rugose, basal segments of abdomen punctate and strigose, apical
segments very finely punctate. Dimensions: 21 — 22 x 10 mm.

Hab. — Gingkcn. Blue Mountains (R . B. Carter), Blue .VIountains (Mr.
Deu(juet ) .

Two examples show a species that I have hitherto hesitated to distinguish from
memnoniits Pase. (= tristis Germ.), but with the information lately acquired from
examples sent by Mr. Blair, it is evidently not that species. It belongs tj
Macleay's Sect, ii.. Sub-section 1, and is neai'est to the Ta-smanian species P.
reichei Breme, from which it is chiefly distinguished by (1) more nitid surface,
and wider form, (2) more clearly channelled and foveate proiiotum, (3) narrower
elytral margins, (-1) considerably larger seriate punctures.

Type in Coll. Carter.

Helaeus latifolius, n.sp.

Widely obovate, sub-nitid brown black, elytra with short upright fine bristles;
tarsi, apical joints of antennae and tarsi reddish, underside opaque black. Heaii
densely and fuiely ]5unctate, antennae with 3rd joint as long as 4th-5th combined;
joints beyond 8th wanting. Prothurax 5X9 mm.; foliate margins wide, in d'
arcuately narrowed from base to apex, in ? expanding in front of base, thence
widely rounded to apex; disc and margins very flmely and sparsely punctate; the
punctures on margins bearing each a short bristle, foliate margins a little concave
and raised at the edges, anterior processes concave above, overlapping and
lather sharply rounded at apex, posterior angles falcate and overlajiping elytra;
disc with feebly-raised carina terminating behind in a small, narrow, rounded knob
in front of ba.se, the latter widely l)!sinuate. S'cutellum widely transversely oval.
Elytra of same width as prothorax at base and more than twice as long; obovate,
shoulders obtusely rounded, margins wide, concave and reflexed, more minutely
setose than those of tlie prothorax, each elytron separately rounded at apex, disc
with suture carinate and two strongly raised carinate costae, these sub-parallel,
less than 2 mm. apart, slightly diverging at scutellum, and suddenly terminating at
apical third ; space between costae, as also area between costae and margins,
coarsely punctate, each puncture producing a short reddish bristle, the extra-
costal spaces with two or three ill-defined longitudinal ridges. Abdomen densely
punctate, prosternum finely shagi'eened, e|iipleurae coarsely and closely punctate.
Dimensions: 18 X 21} mm.

Hab. — Margaret River, Western Australia (Mr. .J. Clark).

Two examples, the sexes, show a species near H. ijilesi Cart., but diftVriiig iu
;1) much wider foliate margins of prothorax and elytra, (2) shorter and less
widely separated elytral costae, (3) much more coarse punctures on both elytra and
epi]i!eurae. Though the dimensions appear the same as those of II. gilesi, the
species is really more elongate and nearer II. frenehi Cart, in outline, the width
bein" largely due to the very wide margins sliown by the following comparison.
In H. gilesi the width of body and of combined margins are ft and 2 mm. respect-
ively. In n. latifolius the corresponding widths are 7i and 3} mm.

Type c? in Coll. Carter; ? in that of Mr. Clark.

Men'farchus, n.gen. Tenebrioninarum. (Text-fig 3.)
Lightly obovate, depressed; antennae long (extending nearly to base of pro-
thor.ix), 3rd joint very little longer than 4th, apical joints widely oval and flat-

230

NOTl;S ON SOME AUSTRALIAN TENEBRIOXIDAE,

tened; epistoma arcuate (concave) iu front, without marked sulcus separating
forehead; meutum cariuate in middle, its sides straight and narrowing to apex — this
bilateral, fuiiuing a triangular notch; all palpi with apical joints securiform,
i'ront coxae round, posterior transverse, all coxae furn-
ished with troehantins. Prostenium convex, produced
oetween fore-coxae into a blunted process, received into
a triangular inesosternal notch; mid-intercoxal process
widely, post-intercoxal process squarely rounded, abdomen
with wide longitudinal depression; fore-tibiae strongly
ueni and enlargeil at apex, post-tibiae curved and strongly
tomentose within, all tibiae shortly bispinose at apex;
elytra sulcate-sub-puuctate. A genus quite at variance
with any other yet described. ^lore ijvate than Hi/ixiuJax,
less so than Asphalus^ more depressed than either, its
most striking features are the combination of the usual
Tenebrioninae characters of the bead, body, and strongly
cur\ed tibiae, together with more elongate antennae and
a sculpture sui generis.

MeNEARCHUS lilPRESSO-SULCATUS^ n.sp. (Text-fig. 3.)

Opaque black above, nitid beneath, glabrous; antennae,
oral organs and tarsi piceous. Head large and flat, labrum
emarginate. epistoma arcuate, its sides ailvanced ; antennal
orbits wide and depressed; eyes narrow and transverse;
Text-fiij. S.| u]iper surface — like that of prouotum — uniformly very

Meneuir/iiis im- densely and finely punctate. Frothora.r: 5X7 mm.

presso-siilcaliis. (length measured in middle), arcuate emarginate at apex,

bisinuate at base, anterior angles sub-acute, tips blunted; sides evenly rounded,
widest at middle, posterior angles rather widely acute and produced so as to over-
lap slightly the elytra; lateral border narrowly raised — not sulfite within — still
narrower at base and ol)solete at apex; disc with a faint indication of medial
channel. Scutellum convex, strongly transverse, punctate. Elytra slightly wider
than prothorax at base and two and a-half times as long, widest behind middle,
cpipleural fold forming a marked but wide humeral angle; with 9 sulci, in-
cluding extreme lateral one (besides a very short scutcllary sulcus) ; the intervals
evenly and roundly convex and impressed on sides by shallow sub-jnmctate im-
pressions, these more pronounced laterally, the two outside sulci definitely punctate;
intervals everywhere covered with dense system of fine punctures as on head and
pronotum. Undersurface and legs closely punctate, abdomen more coarsely and
less closely than upper surface, hind femora dentate — a line of tomentum extending:
from base to this tooth ; fore-tibiae having apical third abrui)tly bent inwards and
thence mudi enlarged, mid-tibiae triangularly enlarged at apex, posterior tibiae
strongly curved, widely dentate near base, with a line of coarse tomentum on inner
edge; three basal joints of front tarsi enlarged, basal joint of hind tarsi about as
long as the 2nd and 3rd combined. Dimetnfions: 19 — 20 x 7J — 8 mm.
II ah. — New South "Wales (Mr. Deuqnet).

Two c? specimens taken by Mr. Deu(iuet, one of which has been generously
idaced at my dis])osal. Tlie tibial diaracters alone would distinguish this unusual
insect from any other Australian member of the Tenehrionidae.

BY H. J. CARTER. 231

Type in Coll. Carter. It is unfortunate that the captor of this fine s-pecies
did not aflix a locality label to his specimens, and in consequence there is some
doubt as to the exact habitat, but Mr. Deuquet thinks that he took them near
Mulgoa (Upper Nopean River).

Menephilus longicollis, n.sp.

Elongate, sub-parallel, nitid blaek; antennae, palpi and tarsi castaneous.
Head closely and finely punctate, widest in front of eyes, these not pronunent.
Protliorax very convex laterally, strongly and widely produced in middle at apex,
base truncate, anterior angles obsolete (widely rounded off) ; sides nearly straight
(or feebly arcuate) on apical half, narrowing considerably and rather abruptly to
base, posterior angles widely obtuse; basal border naiTowly raised, lateral border
not seen from above, disc evenly and finely punctate, without any sign of foveae
or medial line. Scutellum triangular, punctate. Elytra wider than prothorax at
base, and about twice as long, humeri sharply rounded and prominent and
a little produced forward ; sides parallel to near apex, with very narrow
horizontal border; disc striate-punctate, with 8 deep striae besides a
short scutellary stria on each elytron, containing rows of large punc-
tures crenulating the sides of interstices and rather irregularly placed,
those near suture more closely placed, more widely separated in external striae; in-
tervals raised but somewhat flattened above, and minutely punctate. Pro- and meta-
sterna smooth, the latter with medial depression; abdomen finely punctate, each seg-
ment uith a row of large punctures on front margin, a similar row surrounding the
hind coxae. Dimensions: 10 — 11 X 3^ — 4 mm.

Hab. — Kellerberrin, Western Australia (Mr. W. Crowshaw).

Three specimens examined show a very distinct species nearest to M. coeru-
lescens Haag, but clearly differentiated by the longer and more cylindric prothorax,
wider head (in coerulescens the head is widest at the eyes; in longicollis the can-
thus extends laterally in front of but beyond the eyes), coarser elytral sculpture,
besides the unusual character of the rows of large punctures at the margins of
abdominal segments.

Type in Coll. Carter. (N.B. — The colour of 31. coerulescens Haag varies
from blue to black — the latter being more often seen.)

Brises. In my revision of the Tenehrioninae* the table of Brises, line 4.
should read "4(6) Elytra iricostate" (for bicostate).

Cyphaleinae. In my revision of this sub-familyt the numbers on Plate vi.,
corresponding to the index, p. 105, were misplaced, and should be read in vertical
columns downwards, instead of in horizontal rows.

Ospidus. From a comparison with type, it is clear that my original identifica-
tion of 0. chrysomeloides Pasc. was erroneous.

In consequence, 0. chrysomeloides Pasc. ^ O. paropsoides Cart., and O.
chrysomeloides Cart, (nee .Pasc.) requires a name, and is defined below. The
genus Ospidus placed by its author in the Helaeinae, should be classed, as I now
consider, with the Cyphaleinae, near Bolbophanes.

Ospidus major, n.sp.

Widely ovate, very convex, nitid castaneous bronze above, less nitid beneath
and rather densely clothed with short recumbent golden hairs. Compared with 0.

•These Proe., xxxix., 1914, p. 46.
• tThese Proc, xxxviii.. 1913.

232 NOTES ox .SOME AUSTRALIAN TEXEURIOMDAE,

chrD^umeJoides Pasc. the liead is less coarsely rugose, the pronotum is minutely
;iik1 lightly jjunctured and more nitid — the former rather strongly depressed be-
tween the eyes, the latter with only a taint depression near base to indicate the
medial channel, the foliate margins transversely rugose. Elytra with shoulders
obtuse, the sub-obsolete costae even less obvious, the disc much more finely punc-
tate, without anywhere a sign of linear arrangement. Dimensions: 15 >^ 10 mm.

Rah. — Cooktown, Cairns, etc., N. Queensland.

A species easily separated from O. chrijsomeluides by its lai-ger form, brighter
colour and much liner puncturation. 1 have O. chrysumehiides from Townsvillc
Brisbane and Tambourine Mountain, S. Queensland. 0. gihbus Blackb. from Cajie
I'ork is even more convex than major, is castaneous, not metallic, with black
markings, and coarse irregular punctures. The three species may be distinguished
as follow: —
1 — 3 Concolorous and metallic.

2. Coppery bronze, pronotum closely and finely rugose.

Hab. — S. Queensland f/irysotne/oides Pasc.

paropsoides Cart.

3. Castaneous bronze, pronotum very lightly punctate major, n.s,p.

4. Xon-metallic castaneous with black maculae gibbus Blackb.

ADELIINAE.

C A R D I O T H O R A X.

{a) C. acHtuiiguhis Bates = C. constrictus Cart. ='!. aeripennis Blackb., var.

(b) C. aeneus Bates = C. coeruleo-niger Cart., var. A ^ C. macleayensis
Cart., var. B.

(a) The first of these is certain by a comparison of specimens by ]\Ir. Blair.
I was misled by three inaccuracies in Bates's description. — (1) the colour is not
black, (2) there is a sulcus between margin and disc of prothorax, (3) tlie
liabitat is not Brisbane. In general C. aeripennis Blackb. differs from acutamju-
1ns Bates in the following respects, — hind angles of thorax less wide, narrower
sinuation, extreme border- thicker, with a characteristic carina at anterior angles,
luited l)y author. However, these differences are so modified in some examples
that it must be confessed that the distinctions are in some eases evanescent. I
rook a large number of acntangulus at Capertee, N.S.W., and some dozens of the
tvi^ical aeripennis at Mount Wilson, Blue Mountains.

{h) These are well-marked colour variations in fresh exam)des, but I can
find no structural dift'erences whatever between tlie three. I found the first two.
aenetis and coeruleo-niger. in separate batches — never in company — some mile or
two apart at Bullahdelah, Port Stephens, while macleayensis occurs from the
Macleay River to Coraki on tlie Richmond. The typical aeneus has a blue-lilack
thorax, with lirassy elytra; coeruleo-niger is wliolly blue-lilack, while niacleayensis
is a bright brcmze, often with brassy gleam at .sides. The varietal names should be
retained. Four new species are described below.

Adelium calosomoides Kirby =,1. bicolor Cart. (The latter is, I think, oiil,-
one of the many varieties of the former having red antennae.)

Adelium angulatiim Blackb. My notes on this species* were based on <i mis-
named specimen ;.'ivcn me as angulatum by the late Canon Blackburn. This is
certainly angnlicoll? Casteln. The type of angulatnm. Mr. Blair writes, "is cer-
tainly not -1. angiilicolle Casteln. It resembles in thorax and elytra .1. scytali-
cum Pasc, and is, I think, tlie same species."

•Those Proc, xx.xii.. 19()H, p.2r)9, and Trans. R. Soc. S. Aust., xxxviii., 1914, i).40:i.

BY H. J. CARTER.

23'3

Seirotrana ereuicnllis Pasc. = ,S'. de>iticollis Cart. I now consider the latter
as merely a variety of the former (a Victorian species) ; and that Mr. Dulxmlay
was mistaken as to the locality of capture.

Cardiothorax marcixatu.s^ n.sp. (Text-fig-. 4.)

Elongate-ovate, polished black, antennae reddish-brown, tarsi with red tomen-
tum beneath, llead smooth on front, minutely punctate on clypeus, the latter
produced in middle, the usual frontal impression deep. Frothuray ciirdate, wide:-;!,
before middle, arcuate-emarginate at apes, front angles rounded, sides well
rounded, sinuate behind, dentate posterior angles pointing obliquely backward;
foliate margins divided from disc by sulcus, lateral border wide and I'ound. disc

Text-fig. 4. Caidiotlwyax inarginaius.
Text-fig. ia. Cardiothorax walckenaerii Hope.

%.ith flue medial sulcus, a ti'ansverse suleate impression parallel to and near liast,
and two deep triangular foveae near hind angles. Scutellum with a single large
puncture. Eli/tra slightly wider than prothorax at base, humeri obsolete, suleate,
intervals of uniform width, flat on disc, a little convex at sides and apex; under-
side smooth. Dimensiuiis : 16 — 17 X 5^ — Q mm.

Hah. — Mittagong (Mr. Deuquet) ; also Blue Mountains (H. J. Carter).

Two examples from Mittagong, and a specimen I have fro.ni Newnes, which
I think is eonspeciflc, are allies of the common Sydney species C. walckenaerii
Hope. The following distinctions necessitate a speeifle name :

niarginatus.
Colour. Polished black.
Clypeus. Produced in middle.
Prothorax. Border wide.

Transverse sulcus near base.
Latero-basal foveae triangu-
lar, running into lateral
depression .
Elytra .—V^Wa 7 flattish intervals on
disc; space beyond these
smooth, with the usual lateral
striae .

walckenaerii (Text-fig. 4(;.)
Sub-nitid bronze-black.
Widely rounded.
Border narrow.
None.

Basal foveae elongate (parallel to medial
line), not connected with lateral depres-
sion.

With 8 convex intervals: space beyond
these with 2 rows of large punctures.

234 NOTES ON SOME AUSTRALIAN TENEBRIOSIDAE,

The sexual distinction is very similar hut less definite than is the ease with
C. walckenaerii.

T y p e s in Coll. Carter.

Cardiothoras metallicus, n.sp. fXext-fig. 5.)

Elongate-oval; above metallic blue, sometimes with violet or brighter sheea
towards margins, underside black, antennae fuscous, tarsi clothed beneath with
red hair. Head finely punctate, frontal impression sharply angulate, a seta near
each angle on epistoma; a round fovea between eyes and a few foveate punctures
on forehead, antennal joints pear-shaped, 3rd much longer than 4th, and sub-
cylindrie, 11th half as long again as 10th, ovate-acuminate. I'rothorax 3^4 mm.
widest in front of middle, arcuate-emarginate at apex, base angulate and nar-
rowly marginal, sides moderately rounded, converging to base, anterior angles
rounded, posterior obtuse, undentate; lateral foliation narrow, without separating
sulcus, and bearing two or three setae ; disc with well marked medial sulcus, and
basal impression near angles, sometimes with a few shallow impressions on eacii
side of middle. Scutellum convex, elongate, rounded behind. Elytra rather nar-
rowly ovate, shoulders obsolete, epipleural fold very narrow, with 9 well-markeil
sulci on each (the 9th on the sides), intervals evenly convex, the first two and
sixth continuous to apex, 3rd joining 5th on declivity. Underside smooth; legs
without sexual charactei's. Dimensions : 13 — 14 ^ 4 — 4J mm.

Hah. — Bunya Jlouiitains, S. Queensland (INIrs. Ilobler. Jlr R. Illidge and
H. .7. Carter)."

Twenty specimens taken by the author, besides those taken by the shove,
during a cainp of the Royal Austsalasian Ornithologists' Union. The species ea!i
only lie confused with C. coeruleo-niger Cart., which, however, has a truncate base
to the prothorax, with dentate posterior angles, each elytron with only five ciearly
defined sulci inter alia.

Types in Coll. Carter.

Cardiothorax regularis, n.sp. (Test-fig. 6.)
Elongate-ovate, opaque brown-black, antennae and tarsi brown, legs and
underside nitid black. Head with epistoma rather sharply produced in front, witfi
rhomboidal frontal impression; antennae having joint 3 half as long again as 4.
Prothorax arcuate-emarginate at apex, feebly arcuate at base, anterior angles
rounded, sides well rounded at middle; posterior angles narrowly dentate, with a
small blunt tooth directed downwards and outwards; foliate margins horizontal
with narrow nitid border throughout; disc rather flat, with a medial sulcus, two
small foveae on each lobe (more or less connected by a depressed line), and a
wide depression between disc and foliate margins. Scutellum oval. Elytra sul-
cate, with nine regular convex intervals, the lateral three narrow: epipleurae and
underside .smooth. Dimensions: 15 — 17 X 5 — 5i mm.

Hah. — Toronto (Lake Macquarie), 00 miles N. of Sydney (Mr. Deu(iuet).
Five specimens examined — showing no marked sexual distinction — of a species
very near C. altrrnatu>< mihi Imt clearly differentiated as follows: — -
renii/iiris. aUernatm.

Head. Narrower and more pointed. Wider and squarer.

.intciiinic. More slender. Stouter.

Prol/uiyax. Anterior angles rounded. .-Xnterior angles sub-acute.

Posterior tooth narrow. Posterior tooth wide.

/ilvlid. Intervals* sub-equal. 1st, 3rd & iith evidently wider than rest.

BY H. J. CARTER.

235

C %

Text-fig. .5 Cardiothorax inetallicus.
Text-fisf. 6. C. reertilaris.

Text-fig. 7. C. iiiidiilatirostis.
Text-fig. la. C. hiniieralis Bates

*The Srd and 5th elytral intervals are slightly wider than ths adjacent intei--
vals near the base in many spp. (including regularis), but this is quite different
from the evident alternate inequality shown in alternatus.

Types in Coll. Carter.

Cardiothorax IjNdulaticostis, n.sp. (Text-fig. 7).

Elongate, opaque black, costae of elytra and abdomen nitid black, tarsi and
apex of tibiae clothed with golden tomeutum. Head: frontal impression square
in front, rounded behind, containing a triangular impression within, cl-vpeus
rounded in front, rather prominently angulated at sides in front of eyes ; antennae
stout, Srd joint not much longer than 4th, 4th — 10th more or less oblong ovoid,
11th scarcely longer than 10th. Prothorax (5 X 6J mm.) eordiform, wider at
apex than at base, widest about middle, arcuate-emarginate at apex, base sub-
truncate (except at angles), anterior angles widely rounded, sides gradually widen-
ing to half-way, then strongly sinuately narrowed, the posterior angles forming a
strong triangular tooth bent diagonally outwards and a little backwards; I'oliate
margins wide and up-turned, separated from disc by a wide depression; extreme
border nitid and thifk; disc with deep medial sulcus, and a linear depression on
each side of this, besides two large, triangular, ba.sal foveae. Elytra considerably
wider than prothoiax at liase and nearly 2i times as long, obovate and flat, humeri
(formed by epipleural fold) very prominent and irregular (the ri§;ht clearly angu-
late, the left rounded and ear-like) ; each elytron with nine raised, crenulate or
wavy costae — the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 5th and 7th more sharply raised than the rest,

23G XOTES ox SOME AUSTRALIAX TKXEBRIOXIDAE^

especially the 7th; the yth (on side) not visible from above; th'i external eostae
less wavy than those near suture; the wide depression between eostae of irregular
width, the (ith and 7th wider than the rest, and showing- faint, obsolescent, punc-
tures; underside smooth, prosternum opacjue. Dimensious: 19 ^ 7 mm.

Hab. — Moruya, New South Wales (E. H. MacD. Murray).

Two examples were obtained by !Mr. W. DuBoulay, of which one \va^ kindly
given me some years ago. At the time, 1 erroneously identified it as C. hiinierali^
Bates, but the true hiimeralis has lately been clearly identified by the couiteous
help of Mr. Blair, to whom 1 sent drawing's of the two species to compare with
the tjrpe (no Australian Museum possesses a specimen). Bates's species has a
very differently shaped prothorax (.see fig. 7a), while the elytra have 8 uniform
< ostae, scarcely, or very feebly, crenulate, with narrow-er sulci of equal width.
The only cxamisle T have seen (exce]>t the type, in 1907) was taken at Port.
Maequaric by Dr. E. W. Ferguson and generously given to me. The two .sj'ecies
are, however, allied and belong to the same section of my tabulation. (X.B. — Tn
this section there are no external sexual characters.)

Type in Coll. Carter. '

CaRDIOTIK.IKAX KXCISICOLLIS. U . Sp .

(jbovate, depressed, opaque l)lai-k above, underside nitid. Iltat} with iim-
iiouuced stirrup-shaped impression on front, this outlined by deep sulcus; an-
tennae very stout, joints oval, 3rd longer than 4th; clyiJeus sub-truncate. Pro-
tJiorax — length in middle slightly less than width; widest near front; foliate mar-
arins wide and obliquely raised, separated from disc by wide sulcus, anterior angles
widely rounded and jiroduced, lateral recurved border moderately wide; sides
arcuately converging behind, with a wide notch or excision preceding the acuta,
outwardly-directed, hind angles; base sub-angnlate (scarcely coan-tate) ; disc with
wide and deep medial sulcus and a short sulcus on each side of this. Scut ell iii-t
transverse, with a triangular depression behind it. Elytra widely obovate and
rather flat, considerably wider than prothorax at base, shoulders formed by epi-
iileural fold sr|uarely I'ounded, each elytron with 9 rather sharply raised nitid
eostae, those near suture feebly undulate, 1st to 5th subgeminate, divided by fine
sulcate line, the Sth short, extending from half-way to tlie apical declivity, the 9tli
starting immediately behind epipleural fold and forming a limiting border to the
elytra throughout ; between, the 9th and the epipleural fold a wide convex interval
bounded on each side by a row of t'ovento punctures. Underside smooth. le-:rs
simple. Dimensions: 21 ^ 8 mm.

Jiah. — Eidsvold, Soutii Queensland ( .\ustralian and Queenslan<l Museums).

Two examples in the Australian ^Museum and one in the Queensland Museum
(-an only be confused witii ('. iiiiadridentatus Waterh. from Port Boweii, wlii.-h
lliey resemble in form, colour and in the curiously excised posterior sides of
thorax. The following oorapari-soti will <listinguish them.

C. quadriilculalus. C. e.rcisicollis.

Piolhorax. .-Xnterior angles acute and Widely rounded, less prom'iient.

prominent.

Lateral border sub-obsolete; Lateral border moderately thick; base

base sub-truncate. sul>angulate.

lUxtra. .Alternate intervals costate. .Ml eostae uniformly raised.

BY H. J. CARTER. 237

Liciiiotna. Daedrosis, Bri/eopia aud Diiioria.

Pasooe's genera were insiifliciently defiiu'd, while be omitted Daedrosis t'rora
his tabulation of the group* tiiougii Bates's genus was published some six months
earlier. Of Diiiaria its author stated "very similar to Brycopla and only to be
distinguished by the pihise tarsi." Of this distinction Mr. Blair writes "on an
examination of the types I fail to perceive." My own specimens, gummed on
cards, had not hitlierto been critically examined ; but having now closely examined
73. picta Pasc. and B. piloseUa Pasc. under a Zeiss binocular, I cannot separate
them on this tarsal <-haracter. lioth showing hairs together with a short
tomentum. It is clear, tlierefore, that the name Dinoria should be sunk as a
synonym. From a specimen sent from the British Museum it is certain that B.
diemenensis Cart, is the same species as T). coelioides Pasc. Of the latter Mr. Blair
writes "the type is from Queensland though we have 8 specimens from Tasmania,
and one from K. George's Sound." I thiid'C that the Queensland and Western
Australian localities are prol)ably label mistakes, the species of Bri/copia being,
in general, localised; though I have one species.. B. minuta Lea, from Sydney,
Mulwala (Vic), and Barossa (South Australia). I had always been puzzled
over D. coelioides, and my difficulty was enhanced by the fact that another species
from Tasmania, described below as B. hexai/oiia, has. in the form of the pro-
thorax, a much closer affinity to D. picta than the real D. coelioides.

A close re-exaniination of all the species of Daedrosis and Licinoma avail-
able, in conjunction with Bates's very detailed generic description, has had a some-
what disturbing effect on my previous ideas, which had been formed on a too
prominent consideration of what now apjtear to me as secondary characters,
antennae and sculjiture. My predecessor Blackburn evidently held similar views,
since the two insects he described as Daedrosis are both Licinoma, and indeed one
of them, D. rictoriae, is a synonym of L. iiitida Pasc, the genotype of Licinoma.
Mr, Blair's note on this is "L. nitida Pasc. is certainly generic with Blackburn's
(ypc of Daedrosis rictoriae .... and in my opinion victoriae should not be more
than a var. of nitida (the puncturation of the thorax is a little coarser and less
regular.") The two genera are to be distinguished as follows: —

Daedrosis. Licinoma.

Protliorax. Emarginate at apex; sides .\ot emarginate at apex: sides entire.

crenulate .
Hidiicii. Prominently dentiform. Rounded.

Other characters which differentiate the great majority of species lie in the
antennae, tarsi, sculpture and clothing. Tn Daedrosis the antennal joints are
round and coarse with an unusually large terminal joint. In Liciaoma the joints
are obeonic or triangular with terminal joint of moderate size. Concerning the
tarsal joints. Bates states (under Daedrosis) "The comparative length of the first
and last joints of the posterior tarsi does not appear to be a character possessing
any generic value. In TJioracopherus [now Cardiothora.r] the first joint is longer,
equal to, or shorter tlian the last, according to the species, and even, I believs,
according to the sex." I have just examined both sexes of 16 species, including
7 species of that author, and find in ereri/ case that the first joint is longer than
the la.st. Again it would appear that this comparative leng-th of joints is a
generic test. In Daedrosis (i.e. in the species included below), also generally in

• Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist.. (4), iii., 1869, p. 133.

238 XOTES ON' SOME AUSTRALIAN TEXEBRIOXIDAE,

Leptogaatrtis, the first joint is shorter than the last, while in Licinoma and Bry-
copia the first joint is either greater or (in a tew cases) of e<|ual length to the
claw joint. The leulpture of Daedrosis is generally coarse, with more or leiis
pilose clothing, while the species of Licinoma are generally glabrous, with fine
sculpture. Brycopia is distinguished from both Daedrosis and Licinoma by the
round (as seen from above) and generally prominent eyes, the prothorax is not
emarginate at apex, and the species are generally smaller, and of shorter iorm.
The sculpture is generally coarse (except in the femorata, minor group), and the
surface glabrous, or pilose; the apical joint of the antennae is of moderate size,
the other joints in general more or less moniliform. In this difficult group of
genera there are cases where some compromise is necessary," at least so far as the
secondary characters, referred to above, go, as the jireferable alternative to the
erection of nev.' genera on fine distinctions.

The following synonymy of the group has been investigated: —

Brycopia = Dinoria.

Brycopia (Dinoria) coelioides Pasc. ^ B. diemeneusis Cart.

Licinoma nilidn Pasc. = var. Daedrosis victoriae Blackb.

L. {Daedrosis) monticola Blackb. = L. pinicta-latera Cart.

L. elata Pasc. = L. violacea Macl.

In the last case I compared the specimen of elata from the British Museum
with specimens labelled elata Pasc, and the type of violacea in the Australian
Museum, and note that elata was correctly named and that the type ciolacea is
merely a larger specimen of the same species.

On the Bunya Mountains (S. Queensland) last October, I ttxik 3 examples of
a Licinoma which may at present be called L. elata Pasc. var., but which differ
from the typical form in the following characters:^ — (1) Antennae and tarsi black
(or nearly so) — red in L. elata; (2) sides of prothorax less widened in middle,
less abruptly narrowed behind. I bad described this a.s new, but its sculpture and
form approach that of elata so closely tliat it is inail\'isat)le to separate it bv
name.

In Daedrosis my tablet must l)e cancelled; eight of the nine L-,pecies recorded
there being disposed as follows: — Daedrosis crenato-striata Bates = 7). amhigiM
Bates = D. pyymaea Haag.

D. angulala Cart is a Brycopia, while Lejilof/aslrus was incorrectly placed as
synonymous with Daedrosis, and is a distinct genus, differentiated by the complete
absence of (1) hind angles of thorax. (2) slioiilders, tlie iia'rowing of both
segments in this region causing the "pedunculation" stated by Macleay. Besides
the original L. mastersi, my Daedrosis apifurmis and D. hirsiita umst be trans-
ferred to Leptoyastrus, and the following new species added, while the species
identified by me as Daedrosis monticola Blackb. is described l)elow as TK anten-
iialis. Daedrosis interrupta mihi umst be transferred fo Adelium.

In regard to the Daedrosis synonymy above, there is little doul)t. that tlie fine
distinctions made by Bates for "amhiyua" disapiiear in the examination of a
long series, tlie Blue Mountains forms being generally darker and larger. The
small forms taken on the coast, that I had identified as pyymaea. happened to lie
more pilose, but Mr. Blair considers that they are not specifically distinct from
the type of crenato-striata. Daedrosis now, therefore, contains two species, the

•See noto, infra, on /,. triiiicala.

tTraus. Roy. See. S. Aus., xxxviii.. ISUl. j). :!88.

BY H. .1. CARTER. 239

genotype and D. antenuulis, easily distiugiiisbed. Macroperas has the pronounce!
toothed humeri as in Daedrosis, together with the unusual development of the api-
cal antennal joint; but I do not think these genera should be merged. Leptogas-
irus, Licinoma and Brt/eopia are now tabulated below.

Table of Lcptogastru$\
1 — 5 Elytral inter\-als raised (sub-costate) .
2 — 4 Colour bronze.

3 Pronotum coarsely punctate iiiasteisi Mad.

t Pronotum finely punctate occidenialis, n.sp.

5 Colour blue cvanens,n.s^

6—8 Elytral intervals flat.

7 2nd and -Ith elytral intervals impunctate hirsulns Cart.

S All elytral intervals coarsely punctate api/oriins Cart.

LEPTOG.i.STRU.S CY.^NKU.S, n . Sp .

Narrowly elongate-uvate, body pedunculate, upper surface nitid dark blue,
thinly clad with dark upright hair; antennae, oral organs, legs, underside, lateral
margins of pronotum and humeral region eastaneous. Head and pronotum
rugose-punctate, the punctures coarse and sub-confluent, the ridges with
a longitudinal tendency. Head rather flat on vertex, epistomal suture
straight, eyes large and transverse, antennae moniliform, elongate and
very robust. 3rd joint clearly longer than the 4th; from 4th to 10th
increasing in size, 7th-10th spherical, 11th twice as long as 10th, widely ovate.
Prothurax sub-cordate, considerably wider at apex than at base, anterior angles
forming a sharp triangular tooth pointing a little outwards ; sides with a slightly
uneven outline (scarcely crenate), with a small sinuation before the hind angles
and a wider one at anterior; the posterior angles finely dentate, the point directed
outwards; extreme lateral border sharp, narrowly horizontal within, the latter
with a row of large impressed punctures. Eh/tra sub-cylindric, shoulders widely
rounded, sides parallel, apex rather bluntly rounded ; punctate-suleate. the sulci
deep, closely placeil and lined with densely packed, rather large punctures, the
intervals sharp, except the sutural — this wide and smooth— with three or four
large setae, etiually spaced. Flanks of ))rosterniun coarsely punctate, abdomen
wanting, legs long, posterior tarsi having claw joint as long as the rest combined.
Dimensions : 7 ^ 2i mm.

Hah. — Queensland. (Blackburn collection.)

A single specimen (the type) in the South Australian Museum, is clearly dis-
tinguished from its congeners by colour, besides the sharply angulate prothorax
and subcylindric elytra.

LePTOGASTRUS OrCTDKNTALIS, n.sp.

Elongate, sub-pedunculate, head and pronotum dark, elytra violet bronze,
snteiuiae, palpi, tibiae and tarsi red, upper surface moderately clothed with long
upright hair. Head finely and evenly punctate, part between forehead and epis-
loma depressed, antennal ridge prominent ; antennae long, the joints obconic and
gradually widening outwards, apical joint less enlarged than usual. Prothorax
subcordate, subtnnii ate at apex and base, sides arcuately widening from the base,
the gi'eatest width in front of middle, all angles obtuse, the posterior widely so,
surface finely punctate, with some larger setiferous punctures irregularly placed,
the medial sulcus distinct and terminated behind in a wide depression. F.hitra

240 NOTES ox SOMK Al'STlJAI.I AX TEXEBRIOXIDAE,

subcyliuilric, about as wide as in-otlioiax and more than twice as long, shoulders
rounded, sides parallel for the greater j)art ; striate-suleate, the intervals sharply
laised and suberenulate, the punetures in sulci large and apparently only i^artly
separated by cancellate ridge; the 3rd, 5th, and 7th intervals containing seta';:
underside with sparsely scattered setiferous punctures, these more close on the last
abdominal segment, each bearing longish white hairs. Posterior tarsi with first
joint sliorter than claw-joint. Dimr)it<ioii!< : c?. 5i x limm. 5. 7 X l] ram.

Hub. — Parkerville. AA'estern Australia. (.T. Clark.)

Three specimens (2 c?, 1 2) sent by Mr. Lea from the South Australian
Museum, ai"e the only ones of the genus yet recorded from Western Australia.
It is nearest, though not very near, to L. masters! Macl., haraig much more finely
uunctured jirothorax. subcancellate elytra, and f|uite different antennae.

T y p e s in the South Australian Museum.

Daedrosis axtexxalis, n.s[>.

Subcylindric. dark bronze, nitid : undei'side and let;-s nitid black, palpi and
tarsi red; antennae opaque brown (basal joints bronze). Head sparsely and
coarsely inmctate, epistomal suture straight ; forehead rather flat, antennae monili-
form, 3rd joint slightly longer than 4th, 7th-10th very gradually increasing in .size,
llth ovate-acuminate, as long as the preceding three joints combined. Prothorax
iecbly emarginate in front, convex in the middle, anterior angles bluntly obtuse;
slightly wider at apex than at base, sides lightly rounded, a little irregular in out-
line (suberenate), posterior angles obtuse; disc evenly, finely and closely punctate,
without any sign of medial line, an elongate fovea on basal margin near each hind
angle. Scutellum very small. Eli/tm wider than ]irothorax at base and more
than twice as lonj.', humeri produced as usual, sides very lightly widened l;ehind
middle; striate-punctate, the striae deep, the punctures therein smaller and less
evident than in crenato-striata Bates, the intervals flatter and more nitid — the
3rd and 5th slightly wider than the rest, but all sharjily convex at ajiex. Pros-
ternum sparsely, its epimera and the elytral epiiileurae coarsely punctate; ab-
diimen smooth; iiost tarsi witli 1st joint slinrter than claw joint. Dimfiisioits:
8—10 X 3—33 mm.

Hab. — Mount Irvine (Blue Mountains), Xew South Wales. (11. .] . Ci-rter.)

Five exami>les. of which one has been sent to the British Museum, belong
to a species I have long had in my cabinet as D. mariticola Blackb. The true
monticola, howeve;, turns out to be a Liclnoma, and is the species I described as
L. pwicto-latera. wliich nuist now be known as L. moiilirola Blackb.. leaving my
species without a name tUl now. D. aiiterinalif: is clearly separated from I),
crenato-striata Bates (^ amhigua Bates) by the following differences: (1) apical
joint of antennae very large (in Bate.s's species this joint is about as long as the
twn preceding) ; (2) Prothorax mucli more finely pun<-tate, the sides more i-ouiided
iind sub-entire, its hind angles obtuse; (3) Elytral intervals flatter and sniootlier.
1 have not been able to find any external sexual characters.

T y |i !■ s ill Cell. Carter.

LicixojrA AKiiKA, n.sp. (Text-fig 8).

Elfinaate-oblong, brilliant l)rassy bionze above; antennae, leg-: and underside
castaneous. IJeail with dee|) wedge-sbape<l depression behind epistoma. th" latter
wide and convex: finely and evenly punetate. antennae with 3rd joint as long as
4th-5th combined, 5th-10th sub-cupuliform, successively and rather strongly

BY ir. J. CARTER. 241

widened, lltli ovate, considerably larger than lOtli. Prothnrax feelily emarglnate
at apex, anterior angles rounded, sides widely and evenly rounded, posterior angles
obtuse, base sub-truueate, lateral border very narrow, the sub-vertical area between
disc and margin showing a rugose punctate surface: disc very nitid, covered with
fine, shallow, sub-punctate impressions with a few, irregular, larger, shallow im-
pressions (in general one on each side of middle), medial line sometimes feebly
indicated near base (in one example fine and distinct). Scutellum small, round
and nitid. Eli/tra rather wide and flat, clearly wider at base than prothorax,
shoulders rather squarely rounded, sides slightly widening behind middle, disc
sulcate-punctate, the punctures chiefly hidden in the deep narrow sulci, but (iii
good light) seen to be close and regular: inter\als very nitid. rather flat and
wide on centre, becoming convex and narrow at sides and apex, the 3rd and 5th
wider than their neighbours; underside very nitid and glabrous, epipleurae fiuely
punctate: protibiae lightly curved, post -tarsi with 1st joint longer than elaw-
.loint. Dimensions: 8 — 11 J X 3i — 4^ mm.

Hab. — Dorrigo, New South Wales. (W. Heron).

Five exampl-is (2 <?) . L. viohicea Macl, is clearly distinct l)y its subaiigular
sides of prothorax and unifoiin elytral intervals.

Types in Coll. Carter.

Var. eomboynerhiis Cart. — with sides of prothorax less widened and the pos-
terior angles blunted.

Three examples in Mr. Lea's collection may possibly deserve specific rank
Two of these are labelled "(Comboyne, N.R.W. H. Muldoon)," the third, N.S.W.
These three are of the same colour as aereo and augusticollis Cart, and inter-
mediate in form between them; but angusticnllis has a quite sraootli (inqiutictatei
pronotum and the elytra sulcate, without seriate punctures.

LiciNOMA APASioiDES, n . sp . ( Text-fig. 9.)

Elongate-ovate, nitid black, glabrous, antennae reddish b"iiwn, tarsi red.
Head with deep, irregular impression on forehead, suture arcuate; strongly punc-
tate within the impression, eyes large, antennal joints oval, 3rd half as long again
as 4th, 11th ovate-acuminate longer than 10th. Prothorax truncate at apex and
base, narrowest at the latter, anterior angles rounded, sides rather widely rounded,
widest before middle, thence more sharply narrowed to the defined obtuse posterior
angles, lateral margin narrow; l)ase with a ]iseudo-margin defined by a,
sulcus interrupted at middle; disc minutely and lightly punctate; medial
line indicated in front and behind Ijy a faint depression, an elongate
fovea near lateral margin and (in two examples) four discal foveae, symmetrically
placed. Scutellum triangular. Elytra clearly wider than prothorax at base,
cvate, shoulders rather widely rounded; punctate-sulcate, the sulci deep, the punc-
tures therein close and rather coarse, those near suture erenulating interior side
of sulci ; intervals strongly convex at sides and apex, somewhat flattened on disc,
and impunctate; underside smooth, apical segment (only) finely punctate; tibiae
straight. Dimensions : 12^ X 4i mm.

Haft.— Forrest, Victoria. (Mr. H. W. Davey.)

Four examples (T think males from their wide anterior tarsi) sent me some
yeai-s ago, were put aside as L. nitida Pasc. The recent identification of these
shows this to be a distinct species, nearest, but not very close, to L. monticola
Blackb., but differing in its larger size, more rounded prothorax, with more sharply
defined hind angles, clearly punctate elytval sulci, etc. Tt forms a link witli

242

NOTES ON SOME AUSTRALIAN TENEBRIONIDAE,

Text-fig.8. Licinonia aerea. Text-fig.9. L. apasioides. Text-fii^.lO. L. iiieridiana.

Apasis, and there are few characters which separate these genera, beyond the more
developed humeri and the square posterior inter-coxal process of Apa.yif.
Type in Coll. Carter.

LiCINOMA MKRIIJIANA, n . Sp . (Text-fig. 10. I

Elongate-ovate, nitid black; antennae, tibiae and tarsi red. Head with reel
angular frontal depression, coarsely punctate ; antennae sub-moniliform, 3rd joint
lialf as long again as 4th, apical three joints successively enlarged, 11th elongate-
ovate, twice as long as 10th. Prothorax sub-rhomboidal, narrow, longer than
wide, apex nearly straight, with the anterior angles very slightly protruding and
sub-acute, sides feebly arcuate and narrowing to base, posterior angles obtuse,
base truncate, disc rather strongly and regularly punctate; medial sulcus sharply
defined throughout, with a i'ovea on each side of sulcus near middle (in one ex-
ample), the narrow raised border separated from disc by a fine sulcus cont.aining
a row of punctures Scutelhim small. FAiitra wider tlian prothorax at base, and
about twice as long ; subeylindric, shoulders rounded; punctate-striate, tiio intervals
flat, impunetate on disc, eonvex at sides and apex, of even width, the 3rd with a
seta near apical declivity, and one on the .5th about half-way, abdomen nitid,
bind tarsi with 1st joint shorter than claw-joint. Dimensions: 8 X 2i mm.

H«/). -Aft. Lofty Hangcs, South Australia ( Mr. K . .T. Rnrti.n. A. IT. El.ston;
South Australian and British ^tuseums.)

Many specimens examined, in which T cannot see any sexual distinction. The
nearly straight sides of prothorax. the feebly i>rominent anterior angles, the

BY 11. J. C'ARTKR. 243

definitely ohannelleil pninotum, distinguish this species from all its congeners.
The South Australian Museum examples were erroneously labelled L. xitida.

Var. with femora red (in Coll. Elston).

Type in Coll. Carter.

LiCINOMA TRUNCATA, H.Sp.

SubcylLndric, dark bronze, nitid; iinderside and legs castaneous, tarsi pale
red, antennae opaque Reddish brown. Head and pronotum rather closely but
unevenly pitted with coarse punctures; epistomal suture straight and deeply im-
pressed; antennae moniliform, 3rd joint a little longer than 4th, last joint much
larger than 10th. Protliorax rather convex in the middle, in front; apes and
base truncate (as seen from above), slightly longer than wide, clearly wider at
apex than at base; sides moderately arched, with greatest width before the
middle; margins irregular in outline (scarcely crenate), posterior angles obtuse
and blunt, medial line rather widely but interruptedly impressed; some irregular
foveate impressions on each side. Scutellum very small. Elytra convex, of about
the same width as the prothorax, humeri not produced (as seen from above) ;
crenate-sulcate, the punctures in sulci close and forming crenulations at the sides of
intervals; these slightly flattened on centre and finely punctured, the 3rd and 5th
showing setae (four on the 3rd and one on 5th). Prosternum and epipleurae
coarsely punctate, the last segment of abdomen finely punctate, the rest smooth;
post tarsi with first joint shorter than the claw joint: hind intercoxal process
narrow and subtruncate. Dimeusions : 10 x 4 min.

Hab. — Victoria (Blackburn Coll. and DuBoulay).

Two specimens are in the South Australian Museum, of which one — wanting
the abdomen — bears Blackburn's No. 4473 and the name "ambigua Bates" in his
handwriting (besides Victoria) — a manifestly incorrect identification. The other,
the type, is labelled ''Victoria Du Boulay Aug. /89". This pu/!zling specie.s is
very like Daedrofilfi. hut is without the toothed humeri; the prothorrx has the sides
entire, and rounded.

Type in South Australian Museum.

Table of Licinoiiia.

1 — 28 Elytra seriate punctate.

2 — 23 Elytra! inter\-als of uniform width.

3—11 Elytral intervals fiat.

4 — S Elytral intervals clearly punctate.

5 Prothorax transverse, sides well rounded .... iiitida Pasc. ; r»/V/o;-/«cBlackb.

6 — 8 Prothorax as long as wide, sides nearly straight.

7 Elytral intervals nodulose ;/oo'«fo.?(7 Champ.

S Elytral intervals not nodulose tnsniauica Champ.

9 — 11 Elytral intervals impunctate*

10 Legs dark iiitidissinia 'L&a..

11 Legs testaceous pa/lipes Blackh.

12 — 23 Elytral inter\-als convex.

13 — 22 Prothorax transverse.

14 — 18 Prothorax widest at middle.

15 Prothorax sub-circular, highly polished (sublaevigatei .. .. cyclocoUis Cart.

16 — IS Hind angles of prothorax clearly defined, disc clearly punctate.

17 Elytral intervals narrow and punctate .. .. elafa Pasc: violaiea Macl.

IS Elytral intervals wide and striolate only n-i/esi Cart.

19 — 21 Prothorax widest before middle, not channelled in middle.

244 XOTES ox SOME AUSTRAIJAX TEXEBRIOXIDAE^

20 Hind angles rounded uiontiiola Blackli. ; f>U}ir/a-lahia Cart.

21 Hind angles defined iifiasiohfes, n.ip.

22 Prothorax widest before middle, channelled in middle ituncaia, n.sp.

23 Prothorax longer than wide, clearly channelled uicyidiana, n.sp.

24 — 29 Elytral intervals not of uniform width. t

2.5- -27 Elytral intervals fiat.

26 Elytral intervals impunctate and non-seto.se sylvicohi Blackb

27 Elytral intervals punctate (3rd and 5th setosel • amiiiioda Pasc.

28 Elytral intervals convex (sulci feebly punctate) at'iea, n.sp.

29 Elytra sukate a7tj:iistiaillis QvX-

"Impunctate does not refer to the presence of occasional setae found in pa/lipes

and others.

f The 3rd and 5th intervals sometimes considerably wider than the rest; only
distinct and constant examples so included.

BryCOPIA (30MATA, 11. sp.

Oval, black nitid, strongly pilose, antennae and tarsi red. Head and pro-
notum densely rugose, punctate and clothed with long upright hairs; eyes large and
prominent, antennae unusually long and slender, 3rd .ioint cylindrie, nearly as
long as 4tb-5tli combined, 4th-10th oval, 8tli-10th increasing in size, 11th elongate-
oval, twice a.s long as 10th. Prothorax truncate at base and apex, sides crenulate,
angulately widened and widest at middle, thence obliquely narrowed each way,
base and apex of about same width, all angles oljtuse (anterior wider than pos-
terior), disc without medial line or basal foveae. Scutelhini triangular. Eli/trit
wider than prothorax at base, and two and a-half times as long; punctate-striate,
the striae wide, the punctures therein coarse, crenulating the sides of interstices;
these convex, cross-wrinkled, each bearing a row of setae; underside strongly
punctate. Leg-s hairy like the body. Dimensions: G X 3 (vix) mm.

Hah. — Murray River, South Australia (A. H. Elston).

A single specimen, sex uncertain, was generously given me by Mr. Elston,
and shows a species distinct from all others by the combination of black colour,
verv hairy surface and legs, and subaiigulate-sidcd thorax .

Type in Coll. Carter.

Brycopia globicollis, n.sp. (Text-fig. 11).

Ovate, brownish bronze, antennae and leg-s i-ed, tarsi and palpi testaceous,
whole upper surface rather thinly clothed with jjale upright haii-s. Head with
a few scattered punctures, epistomal suture straight, deep and shortly imidiKH d
backwards at its extremities; antennae stout, nionoliforni, joints -, 3 and 4 sub-
equal, thence gradually widening; 11th wider than and twice as long as 10th,
cvate. Prnthornx very ccmvex, subcircular, truncate at apex and base, sides entire,
widely and evenly rounded, widest at middle ; anterior angles widely rounded, pos-
terior widely obtuse; disc coarsely and unevenly punctured, with a few smooth
rugosities; without foveae or medial line. Sciitellum very small and round.
Elytra ovate, two and a-half times longer than iirothorax and at the shoulders
slightly wider than it; humeri obliquely rounded; striate-punctate, the inlervals
flatfish, but more convex at sides and apex. 3rd and ijth intervals wider than the
rest, intervals unequally setose, the sutural interval smooth. 2nd with about two
setae, 3rd and .'5th with 6-8 setae, 4tli nearly smooth ; sides of prosternum ami epi-
pleurae spar.sely mid coarsely punctate, abdomen smooth. Dimeiisioiix: 6* X
21 mm.

Tlah. — r>aunccstoii. Tnsinaiiiii (X. if. Lea).

BY H. J. CARTER.

245

Five specimens on a card sent by Mr. Lea show a species near B. pHosella
Pase. and B. creiiaticollis Cai-t., but clearly separated from both by the almost
circular prothorax. the sides of which are nowhere crenated; the antennae are also
more robust than in either of these. The prothorax of globicollis in the middle is
nearly as wide as the elytra, whereas in the two species mentioned the prothorax
is decidedly narrower than the elytra. The elytra! intervals are less strongly
punctured than in B. pilnsella and are without the transverse wrinkles shown in
Pascoe's species, which, moreover, has its intervals of equal width.

Types in South Australian Museum.

Brycopia hKAi, n.sp. (Text-fig. 12).

Shortly ovate, rather tlat, dark bronze, nitid, almost glabrous, antennae, palpi
and legs pale red, tarsi testaceous. Head and pronotum thickly and strtjugly
punctate, antennae with joints 4-8 shortly obconic, 9 and 10 sub-trianguler, 11
ovoid. Prothorax sub-cordate, apex nearly straight (from above), base feebly
bisinuate, anterior angles obtuse, sides arcuately widening to half-way, tlience
angulately narrowing in a concave curve to the acutely produced posterior angles ;
disc with medial line partly indicated by a short smooth space, a large shallow
fovea on each side of this, a triangular impression near hind angle and a fe-v

It

15

Text-fig.ll.

Brycopia

iilobiiollis.

Text-fiK-l-'!.

B. hexagona

Text-fig. 12.

B. leai.

Text-fig. 14.

B. ohtnsa.

larger punctures niterspersed amongst the others. Scutellum triangular and small.
Elytra considerably wider than prothorax at l)a.se, and about twice as long, shoul-
ders rounded, sides sub-jiarallel for the greater part ; punctate striate, seriate
punctures large, round and regular, not at all hidden in the fine striae, intervals
quite flat and dotted with distinct but smaller punctures than those in striae, the
.3rd and 5th each with about 5 large setae, a few fine pale hairs discernible; Banks
of meso- and meta- sternum with sparse punctures, last segment of abdomen closely
punctured, rest of underside smooth or nearly so. Dimensions: 7X3 mm.
Hab. — Launceston, Tasmania.

246 NOTES ON SOME AUSTRALIAN TENEBRIONIDAE,

I took a single specimen in January, 1918,- and from its close likeness in form
— especially of prothorax — to Dinoria picta Pasc, I thought it was Dinoria
toelioides Pasc. It is perhaps nearest to B. femorata Cart, in sculpture.

Type (unique) in Coll. Carter.

Brtcopia hexagona, n.sp. (Text-fig. 13).

In form and colour near the former (leai), but clearly differentiated from it as
follows: — Head and pronotum much less strongly punctured; antennae coarser
and monilifoi-m, joints 6-10 almost round. Prothorax with sides less rounded in
front, the lateral angulation more strongly emphasized, posterior angles rectangular
and less prominent, disc without the central foveae. Elytra with much larger
seriate punctures, coarser and deeper striae — the intervals thus appearing from a
side view, sub-convex — intervals almost smooth, except for the few setiferous
punctures on the 3rd and 5th intervals. Underside smooth, except for the minute
punctures of the apical segment of abdomen, and a row of large punctures on
front part of epipleurae. Dimensions : 7J ^ 3 mm.

//of). — Near summit of Mount Wellington, Hobart (A. M. Lea).

A specimen was given to me by Mr. Lea some time ago a-s Dinoria sp., from
a short series in his collection.

Type in Coll. Carter.

Brtcopia obtusa, n.sp. (Text-flg. 14).

Widely oval, dark bronze, glabrous; antennae piceous, tarsi reddish. Head
wide, coarsely punctate, clypeal suture deeply impressed, eyes large and prominent,
antennae moniliform, not extending to base of prothorax, joint 3 little longer
than 4, 8th-llth enlarging gradually, 11th sub-spherical. Prothorax, Ijase and
apex truncate, of nearly equal widtli, sides widely rounded, widest at middle,
thence rather straightly narrowed to base; all angles widely obtuse, sides without
obvious foliation, narrowly margined throughout, disc irregularly and rather finely
punctate; medial line indicated at base only by a very short sulcus; two trans-
verse foveate impressions, one on each side behind the middle. Sottelhim small
and bead-like. Ehjtra wider than prothorax at base, widely oval, humeri rounded,
punctate-sulcate, seriate punctures large, set in deep, well-marked sulci; intervals
a little convex — strongly so at sides and apex, 1st (sutural) narrow, rest of uni-
form width and impunctate. Sternum finely, epipleurae coarsely punctate, ab-
domen smooth; posterior tarsi with 1st joint longer than daw-joint. Dimevsions:
7 X 3i mm.

Hab. — Lizard Island, Queensland.

A specimen, sex uncertain, amongst some Adeliinae sent from the I'ritish
Museum, shows a species near B. cheesmani in its wide form, but differs widely
in sculpture and shape of prothorax, especially in its sub-convex, smooth inter-
stices of elytra. The pronotum is punctured somewhat as in Adelium calnso-
moiden Kirby.

Type in British JIuscuin.

Table of Rrycofyia.

1 — 9 Sides of prothorax crenulate.

2 — 6 Upper surface pilose (not including occasional setae) .

3 — 5 Colour bronze.

4 Sides' of prothorax rounded (not sinuate behind) pilosella Pasc.

h Sides of prothorax sinuate behind (pilose dothing sparse) tninnta Lea.

6 Colour black, sides of prothorax angidately widened coiiiata, n.sp.

BY H. J. CARTER. 247

7 — 9 Upper surface glabrous.

8 Elytra with pale border — form fiat (Dinoria) picta Pasc.

9 Elytra concolorous — form very convex. . .' cretiaiicollis Cart.

10 — 39 Sides of prothorax entire.

11 Upper surface pilose globicollis, n.sp.

12 — 39 Upper surf.ice glabrous.

13 Elytral intervals tuberculose tuhercnlifera Champ.

14—30 Elytral intervals flat.

15 — 23 Sides of prothorax sinuate behind.

16 3rd and 5th elytral intervals widerthan rest taylori Cart.

17 — 23 Elytral intervals of uniform width.

18 Pronotum finely punctate dubia Macl.

19 — 23 Pronotum. coarsely punctate.

20 — 22 Each elytral interval with a single line of punctures.

21 Form convex, seriate punctures small aiinulata Cart.

22 Form depressed, seriate punctures large hexcigona, n.sp.

23 Elytral intervals thickly punctate /^a?, n.sp.

24 — 30 Sides of prothorax rounded (not sinuate behind).

25 Form wide, pronotum coarsely punctate. . c/ieesmam' Cart

26—30 Forixi narrower, pronotum finely punctate

27 Form depressed, each elytron with 4 to 6 foveate impressions feiiiorata Cart.

28 — 30 Form convex, elytra not as in 27.

29 Size larger, sides of prothorax nearly straight behind. (Dinoria) coelioides P^sc.

30 Size small, sides of prothorax evenly rounded minor Cart.

31 — 39 Elytral intervals convex.

32 — 34 3rd and 5th intervals wider than rest.

33 Form depressed, elytral inter\'als coarsely punctate . . . . punciaiissima Cart.

34 Form convex, elytral inter^-als finely punctate globiilosa Cart.

35 — 39 Elytral inteir\-als of uniform width.

36 — 38 Elytral intervals smooth.

37 Sides of prothorax sinuate behind .. .. monilicornis Macl.

3ft Sides of prothorax not sinuate behind obtusa, n.sp.

39 Elytral intervals punctate longipes Macl.

Adelium politum, n.sp.

Oval, black, nitid, glabrous; antennae and palpi fuscous, tarsi red. lleuit
vide and, like the pronotum, mirror smooth, with a straight, deep, post-epi^fomal
iurrow, eyes very transverse, antennae with joint 3 little longer than 4; 4th-8lh
moniliform, 7th-llth successively widened, 9th-10th widely triangular, 11th larger
than 10th, bluntly oval. Prothorax transverse, moderately convex, sub-truncate a"
apex and base, anterior angles rounded, sides evenly and rather widely rounded,
posterior angles obtuse, sides not foliate,' narrowly margined throughout ; an
elongate fovea near hind angle, another near lateral margin, otherwise without
medial line or puncture. Scutellum widely triangular. Elytra wider than prothorax at
base and nearly three times as long, oval, striate-punctate, the .striae deep an !
clearly cut, the seriate punctures sub-obsolete — a few very small punctures bareh-
visible in one or two striae near base; intervals smooth, flat on disc, convex od
sides and apex. Tarsal joints short, the posteiior tarsi with first joint about as
long as the claw-joint. Underside .smooth. Dimensions: 9 x 3J mm.

Hafj.— Mount Victoria, Ne^v South Wales (H. J. Carter).

I took this specimen in January; it is clearly of the breviconie regulare typ'"
differing in its glassy smooth pronotum and its scarcely punctate elytra.

Type in Coll Carter.

248 NOTES ON SOME AUSTKALIAX TEXEBKIOXIDAI::

Seirotrana itixoR, n.sp.

Ovate, bronze, apical joints of antennae opacjue biuwu. Head ratlier coarsely
rugose punctate, depressed on each side within the epistoma; antennal joints short,
stout and sub-triaiij:ular, 3rd about 11 times longer than 4th, 11th ovate, and much
larger than preceding. Prothora.r '_' x il mm., transverse and rather flat, arcuate-
emarginate at apex, anterior angles acute, widest at middle, sides well rounded,
sinuate behind, posterior angles rectangular, not dentate, base feebly sinuate
(slightly advanced in middle) apical and lateral border narrow, the latter with
slight tendency to crenulation; disc densely and finely rugose-punctate, medial
Ime indicated by depression near base. Scutellum widely oval and punctate.
Elytra considerably wider than protliorax at base and nearly thrice as longj ovate
and moderately convex; striate-jiunctate, the striae containing row^ of close regular
punctures; intervals microscopically punctate, the 3rd, 5th, 7th, and 9th with shiny,
raised, elongate citenulations, the other intervals on apical half with minute round
nodules; sutural intervals' flat; epipleurae and flanks of presternum coarsely punc-
tate, apical segment of abdomen finely iiunctate. otlier segments strigose. dimen-
sions: 9 — 10 X 4 — 41 mm.

Ha!^.—Bunya Mountains, S. Queensland; \.\k. A: Tenterfleld, N.S.W. (11 X
4i mm.) (H. J. Carter.)

Three specimens taken near the foot of! Mount Mowbullan ( F>uuya ^lountainsl
show the smallest .species of the genus, structurally nearest to .s'. proiiina Pa.sc. and
>S'. i^icina Cart., but with nuicli finer elytral seriate ]iunctures and more elongate
and less strongly raised nodules. In Var. A. the lateral crenulation of prothorax
is a little more, and tlie hind sinuation a little less nuirked than in the examples
from Bunya Mts., but it is, I consider, conspecific with fliem.

Types in Coll. Carter.

EC'TYCHE SEMI-BULLATA^ U.SJ).

Oblong-oval, subnitid black, legs piceous, antennae and tarsi castaneous, upper
surface thinly clad with long upright black hair. Head and pronotum finely and
densely rugose-punctate, epistomal suture arcuate, antennae submoniliform, 3rd
joint scarcely longer than 4th, successively increasing in size from the 6th onv.-ards,
9th and 10th sub-spherical, 11th oval. Prothorax convex, transverse, subtruni ate at
apex, sides widely and evenly rounded, anterior angles obsolete, posterior sharplv
rectangular, preceded by an abrupt sinuation on sides and followed by a sub-ol)solete
sinuation at base. Eli/tra oval, humeri S{iuarely rounded, at shoulders about as wide
as prothorax at widest ; apex bluntly rounded ; striate-punctate ; the round, closely-
packed punctures placed in fine striae; the 3rd, 5th, and 7th intervals each with
about 6 large tubercles and a few much smaller tul)ercles on tlie sutui'al interval.
Epipleurae coarsely and chisely, iibdouu'ii siiarsely iiiuictnte, glabnms. Ihmeu-
sions: 4.5 — 5 X 2 mm.

JTob.— Geraldton, Western Australia (W. D. Dodd).

Two specimens sent from the South Australian Museum slinw a sijecies easily
differentiated by its sculpture from its allies. The oidy ntlur species having
tuberculate elytra is E. tuhereulipetniis Bates, in which small tulicrcies are (venlv
placed on all the intervals, besides many other differences. 1 have s))ecnnens if
the latter taken by Mr. H. W. Brown at Lake Austin. AV . .\ . I have not l)ee;i
able to make out any sexual distinction.

T v II e s in the South Australian Museum.

BY H. J. CARTER. 249

Omolipus punctato-sulcatus, n.sp.

Moderately elongate, sub-nitid. Head, pronotum, underside and legs black,
elytra dark blue (almost black), antennae and tarsi reddish brown. Head
jninutely punctate in front, smooth on vertex. Prvnotum moderately convex, apex
produced in midde, base truncate, sides but slightly rounded anteriorly and a
little sinuate behind; lateral border visible from above; disc smooth. Elytra elon-
gate-ovate, shoulders rather sharply rectangular and a little advanced ; sides Jeebly
enlarged behind middle, lateral border narrowly horizontal; punctate-sulcate with
8 well-marked sulci (besides the extreme lateral one), and without the usual indi-
cation of a short scutellary row of punctures; the intervals convex, punctures in
sulci large, regular, crenulating the sides of intervals. Underside nearly smooth,
some minute punctures on sternum and apical segments of abdomen.

Dimensions : 7 — 9 X 3 — 4 mm .

/fab.— Batchelor and Stapleton, N. Territory (Mr. G. F. Hill).

Three examples (1 d', 2 2) sent by Mr. Hill (of the Institute of Tropical
Medicine, Townsville) show a species near coeruleus Cart, in form and sculpture,
but in colour something between 0. (jnesioides Pasc. and 0. cyaneipennis Champ.,
the elytra being of a blue-black shade sometimes seen in gnesioides, while the
pronotum is smoother but less nitid than in that species. In most other species
there is a short scutellary row of punctures (in O. gnesioides about 2 or 3), or a
short sulcus as in O. coeruleus; the absence of this in punctato-sulcatus is a di.i-
tinctive character.

Types in Coll Carter.

Besides the synonymy noted above the following should be recorded : —

(i.) Chalcopterus smaragdulus F. ^^ C. cairnsi Blackb.

(ii.) C. cupreus F. ^ C. rusticus Blackb.

(iii.) C. setosus Blackb. = C. cupriventris Cart, (var.)

(iv.) Axgniton championi Blackb. = Catopherus corpulentus Cart.

(v) Sirrhas liiiibcitu,'. Champ. = Nof.ulea limbata Cart.

Of C. cupreus F. (a long-standing mystery), Mr. Blair writes "is brassy be-
coming pijrple and iinely narrowly bluish behind, the latter" [rusticus.] "purple
becoming bluish behind. The sculpture seems to be identical."

Of (iii.) Mr. Blair writes, "I think — are colour forms of the fame." Appar-
ently the metallic underside is not constant.

In (iv.) and (v.) the genera Catopherus and Notolea must be sunk. In the
former case I failed to diagnose Blackburn's species; in the latter I had not seer
Mr. Champion's paper dealing with this very unusual Lagriid.

250

ON THE MALE GENITALIA OF SOME ROBBER-FLIES BELONGING
TO THE SUBFAMILY ASILINAE. [Diptera.]

By G. H. Hardy.

(With twelve Text-flgures.)

A study of tliC male genital forceps of Australian Robberflies belonging to
the subgenus Asilus has been undertaken for the purpose of establislung a satis-
factory method of identifying the described species. A further species with extra-
oidinarily developed male genitalia is described as new.

This opportunity is taken to publish a figure of the male genitalia of Protna-
chuti doddi Ricardo, which belongs to a genus containing several closely allied

species.

Genus P I! () M A c H r s Loew.

Ql,g_ — This geuus is very scantily represented in the various collections in
Australia, and the specimens available for study do not readily conform to the
descriptions already published. There are six names representing sis supposedly
distinct species and the only named specimen in the collections under revision is
P. doddi Ricardo, which was identified by Miss Ricardo.

Text-tig. 1. The male genitalia of Proiiiac/iKS doddi Ricanlo, seen dorsiiUy. (x 14).

BY G. H. HARDY. 251

Promachus doddi Ricardo. (Text-fig. 1).

Promachus doddi, Ricardo, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (8), xi., 1913, p. 41-').

Description. — A male specimen identified by Miss Ricardo has the genitalia
<mite distinct from that of other species examined in the collections under revision.
]t contains a pair of widely separated upper forceps, each branch of which is
conspicuously kidney-sbaped. Seen dorsally, in the centre there are two flat,
partly overlapping appendages which are undoubtedly the lamellae. Further
parts of the genital organs, usually covered bj' the forceps, are exposed in this
species. The upper forceps apically have a number of long thick bristles, and
there are three short bristles on the inner side, directed towards the median line
but not meeting. The whole surface is covered with hairs which become stronger
apically and merge into bristles.

Obs. — In Mr. F. H. Taylor's collection there are two specimens of this
species and one, from which the above description is taken, was identifipd by Miss
Ricardo. Two other species in the same collection are unidentified.

Genus A s I L u s Linnaeus.

Obs. — White has given a key to the genera of the subfamily Asilinae* and
in it the forceps of the male genitalia of the genus Asilus are stated to be globular.
This character is typical of only a few Australian species and the remainder have
male genitalia of remarkal)ly diverse forms. The description "large, brightly
coloured species" will also only apply to a few as a number are sombre coloured,
and they range in size down to species no bigger than some belonging to the
group Neoitamus.

The material upon which the . following study is based consists of the col-
lections in the Australian and Macleay Museums, the writers collection which
contains species from Western Australia, Tasmania and New South
AVales, the specimens from Queensland collected by Mr. F. H. Taylor, and tinally
a very valuable collection made by Dr. E. W. Ferguson containing species that
occur around Sydney and identified by comparison with specimens in the British
Museum.

Asilii.t ref/iuri Jaennickc. and Asihis aureus White have not been recucnised
in the above collections.

Characters. — The genus Asilus contains two subgenera in Australia. The
subgenus Neoaratus is represented by one species, iV. hercules Wiedemann, and is
distinguished by the male having the costal border of the wings inflated, and, in
addition, each branch of the upper forceps of the male genitalia is bifid. The
subgenus Asilus contains species without the costal inflation, and the upper for-
ceps of the male genitalia are of various shapes, with or without a process, but
not bifid in the known species.

Key to the species of subgenus Asilus

1 . The forceps of the male genitalia set v;ide apart and exposing other parts of the

" .nital organs 2.

The lorccps of the male genitalia concealing ' the other parts of the genital
organs j .

2. The branches of the upper forceps containing an apical process on which is

situated a branching appendix genitalis, n.sp.

* Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 1917. p. 88.

2o2 OX THE MALE ITEXITALIA OF SOJtE ROBBER-FLIES.

The branches of the upper forceps containing an apical process without an
appendix rubrithorax.

3. The upper forceps atteruir-ted apically 4.

The upper forceps not attenuated apically 6.

4. The attenuated portion of each branch of the vipper forceps distinctly forms a

process /eriHginehentris.

The attenuated portion of the upper forceps forms a continuation of the basal

portion and does not form a process 5.

0. The upper forceps constricted subapically pelago.

The upper forceps not constricted subapically but tapering more or less uni-

foiTnly to the apex malleolus, inglorius a.nArufiveiUiis.

5. The upper forceps ending in a minute projection and each branch of the upper

and lower forceps containing three subapical bristles on the ventral side.

hlasio.
The upper forceps more or less rounded and without bristles.

iiiuriinis, sydiieyeiisis and alctias.

AsiLUs GEXiTALis, n . sp . (Text-fig. 2.)

Description. — 6. The head is covered with light yellowish tomontum; the
moustache of the same colour contains bristly hairs in the centre; the ))eard, the
bristles and hairs of the occiput are also the same colour; there are a few, red-
dish, short hairs on the tubercle containing the ocelli. The palpi are deep reddish-
.vellow, with similai-ly coloured hairs which, apically, are bristle-like. The an-
tennae are missing in the holotype and partly damaged in one paratvpe, but in
the second paratvpe they are reddish-yellow, with similarly coloured hairs on the
two basal .joints . The proboscis is also reddish-yellow but is strongly stained
))lack on the apical half; the hairs are light yellowish.

The thorax has a mixed yellowish and reddish-yellow ground colour, and con-
tains two black median stripes, and an interrupted lateral stripe on each side.
Dorsally, the bristles and liairs on the pronotum aio yellowish, and on the re-
mainder of the thorax black. The dorsal thoracic bristles consist of two pre-
sutural and one anterior to these, three superalar, four postalar and three or towv
dorsocentral. The scutellum is similar in gi'ound colour to that of the thorax
and contains four, black, marginal bristles, but in one of the jiaratypes there are
six reddish bristles on the apical margin. Yentrally the thorax is whitish with
very sparse whitish hairs. Tlie metapleural bristles are strong and yellow, and
the hy]>opleural bristles are weak and whitish.

The abdomen, dorsally. is reddish-yellow with similarly coloured jiubescence
and whitish, bristly, lateral hairs. Yentrally, the abdomen is unicoloured Avith
the under side of the thorax.

The genital organs are very large and the for<'eps are set v.ule apart ex-
])osing other parts which are hidden in most species of tlie genus. The lower
half of each branch of the upper forceps is produced apically into a very long
jirocess which curves upwards, and, near the base of this, there is a shoif ajipendix
Avhieh branches towards the median line and is directed downwards. Tlie lower
forceps are short, and the apical prong can be seen diverted so that it ])oints to-
wards the base. The lamella is broad and short, and issues from a two-pronged
aiipendage, the apices of which can be seen l)etweeTi the process and the basal jKir-
tion of the upper forceps.

The legs have their coxae whitish with yellow liairs and livistlcs. Tlie
inihilli arc yellow and (lie claws are reddish hasally ami l)hick .-iiiically; the

BT G. H. HARDY.

253

Text-fig. 2. The male genitalia of Asil us genitalis, n.sp., seen laterally, (.x H).
Text-fig.3. The male genitalia of Asiliis rubrithorax Macquart, seen laterally, (x 6).
Text-fig. -1. The male genitalia of Asiltisferrugineiventris Macquart, seen laterally, (x 14).

remainder of the legs are reddish yellow with similarly coloured hristles. The
anterior femora are without spines; the intermediate femora have two rows of
pines on the anterior side, one ventral row, one subajsical and two median
spines on the posterior side; the posterior femora have two rows of bristles on
the anterior side, one ventral row and a number of subapical spines.

The wings are hyaline with a slight yellowish tinge.

The female is unknown.

Length, .30 mm.

Hah. — Queensland. Two specimens are without labels; the specimen in the
]\Iacleay Museum is from Cairns.

Type. — The holotype male, in the Australian Museum, was presented by Mr.
F. H. Taylor. A paratype is in Mr. Taylor's collection and a second paratype
is in the Macleay Museum.

AsiLUS liUBRiTiiOR.vx Macquart. (Text-fig 3.)

Asilus ruhrithorcu, Macquart, Dipt. Exot., i. (2), 1838, p. 143; Walker, List Dipt.
Brit. Mus., vii., suppl. 3. 185.5, pp. 72!) and 735; Rieardo, Ann. Mag. Naf:.
Hist.. (8), xi.. 1913, p. 441.

Description. — Two specimens, identified from the description only, arc some-
what similar in appearance to Asilus murinus Macquart, larger in build and dis-
tinctly different in the male genitalia.

(?. The head is light yellowish; the moustache consists of some black hairs,
below which there are much longer bristly white hairs. The hair on the vortex
and a little of the hair on the occiput is black ; the hair on the remainder of the
head, including the beard, is light yellowish or white. The antennae are black,

254 ox THE JIALE GENITALIA OF SOJIE ROBBER-FLIES,

containing black hairs on the two basal segments. The palpi are blaok with
lilack hairs and the proboscis is black.

The thorax has a pair of black median stripes and between them there is a
slightly obscure yellowish line ; on each side a lateral stripe, interrupted anteriorly,
is separated from the median stripe by a bright yellow stripe; the lateral border
is bright yellow merging into the light greyish on the postalar callus.

The thoracic bristles consist of a row of three presutural with one anterior
to these, three or four superalar, three or four postalar and about six dorso-
central. The scutellum is greyish, with about four, black, marginal bristles and
black pubescence. Ventrally the thorax is light yellowish, with the hairs and
bristles, including the metapleural and hypopleural, yellow or white.

The abdomen, dorsally, is yellowish brown in colour and obscurely black
along the median line forming a broad obsolete stripe. The pubescence is mostly
black but yellowish laterally, with yellowish hairs and bristles.

The forceps of the genitalia are black and large, set wide apart, and expo-se
the other parts of the genital organs; each branch of the upper forceps contains
a process issuing from the upper half at the apex and curves upwards ; the
whole surface is covered with l)lack pubescence and some conspicuous white pub-
escence; the lower forceps are black, with long whitish hairs which become bristly
at the apex; the black lamella is conspicuous and broad.

The legs have their coxae unicoloured with the under side of the thorax. ;ind
contain long whitish hairs and bristles; the femora are red with a black stripe
on the anterior side; the tibiae are red with black at the apices; the tarsi are
black; the claws are red at the base and black at the apes; the pulvilli are yel-
low. The pubescence is mostly yellowish on the femora and tibiae, and black on
the tarsi. There are some long, black, bristly hairs on the anterior femora which
are spineless; the intermediate femora contain two rows of spines on the anterior
side, one ventral row and one row on the posterior side ; the posterior femora con-
tain two rows of spines on the anterior side and a few subapical spines.

Length of male, 30 mm.

Hab. — New South Wales : Hampton, near Rydal — one male specimen col-
lected by Dr. R. J. Tillyard during January, 1918. There is also a male speci-
men in the Macleay Museum, with the genitalia distorted, from Walcha; the label
indicates the month "November," but the year of ca^iture is not specified.

AsiLUS FERRUGiXEiVENTRis Macquart. (Text-fig. 4.)

Asilus ferrugineiventris, Macquart, Dipt. Exot., suppl. 4, 1850, p. O'J, PI. ix. fig. 1.
Asihis hyagnis. Walker, Ins. Saund. Dipt., 1851. p. 139; Walker, List Dipt. Brit.
Mus., vii., suppl. 3, 1855, pp. 730 and 739; Ricardo, Aim. ^fag. Nat.
Hist, (8), xi., 1913, p. 445.

Sgnongmy. — The description of A. ferrugineiaextris Macquart conforms to
specimens of A. hyagnis Walker in all essential points.

Stattis. — Although the synonymy is given here with the writer's convictions,
the identity of the species with A. hyagnis Walker is accepted upon the evidence
that Mr. Taylor sent to Miss Ricardo some specimens from a long series col-
lected in Queensland and these were identified as A. hyag)ii!i Walker. In conse-
quence, the specimens retained were labelled as such and were subse(]uently ex-
amined by the writer. The retained specimens belong to only one species and a
mah' was selected for inclusion in the collection of the Australian ^Museum. A

BY G. H. HARDY. 253

second specimen, taken near Sydney, was found to agree with the Queensland
specimens and also with the descriptions.

Description. — A straight process issues from the apex of each branch of the
upper forceps of the genitalia at the lower half.

Hah. — New South Wales, Queensland and two female specimens in the Mac-
leay Museum from King George Sound, Western Australia.

AsiLUS PELAGO Walker. (Text-fig. 5.)

Asiliis pelago, Walker, List. Dipt. Brit. Mus., ii., 1849, p. 419; and vii., suppl. .3,
1855^ pp. 729, 731, and 735; Schiner, Verh. z.-b. Ges. Wien, xvii., 1867,
p. 400; Ricardo, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (8), xi., 1913, p. 443.

Description. — The attenuated portion of the upper forceps of the male
genitalia is short, slightly constricted subapically, and broadly rounded at the
apex; it is conspicuously deflected from the considerably arched basal portion;
the whole area is covered with a vestiture of short bristly appearance.

Hah. — Western Australia: one male and one female from Perth; South .4us-
tralia: two males and four females in the Macleay Museum probably belong
here, but neither male specimen has the genitalia in sufSeiently good condition for
positive determination.

AsiLus JIALLEOLUS Walker. (Text-flg. 6.)

Asiliis malleolus, Walker, List Dipt. Brit. Mus., ii., 1849, p. 418; and vii., suppl.

3, 1855, pp. 729, 732 and 736.
Asilus discutiens, Walker, Ins. Saund. Dipt., 1851, p. 135; Walker, List Dipt.

Brit. Mus., vii., suppl. 3, 1855, pp. 729 and 736; Ricardo, Ann. Mag. Nat.

Hist., (8), xi., 1913, p. 445; Wliite, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 1916, p. 182.
Asilus unilineatus, Macquart, MS. name.

Synoui/my. — The above synonymy is accepted on the authority of Miss
Ricardo. A. malleolus Walker takes precedence over A. discutiens Walker, under
which name the species has been well known liitherto.

Description. — The upper forceps of the male genitalia are attenuated and
curve downwards; on the dorsal surface of the genitalia there is a hump ■^^■hich
partly conceals the lamella.

Hah. — New South Wales. Miss Ricardo reports the species from "Van
Dieman's Land" which locality is usually taken to be Tasmania; there is, however,
a "Van Dieman" marked on some old maps in the north of Australia, and this
may be the locality of the many species recorded from Tasmania but only known
from the northern lialf of Australia.

Asilus ingIjOriijs Macleay. (Text-fig. 7.)

Asilus inglorius, Macleay, in King's Narr. Surv. Austr., ii., 1837, p. 467; Wiede-
mann, Auss. Zweifl. Ins., ii., 1830, p. 644; Walker, List Dipt. Brit Mus.,
ii., 1849, p. 423; and vii., suppl. 3, 1855, pp. 730, 734 and 738; Schiner,
Verh. z.-b. Ges. Wien, xvi., 1866, p. 690; Schiner, Reise Novara, Dipt.,
1868, p. 183; Ricardo, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (8), xi., 1913, p. 439.

Asilus ami/cla. Walker, List Dipt. Brit. Mus., ii., 1849, p. 423 (?) ; and vii.,
suppl. 3, 1855, pp. 730, 734 and 741.

Asilus centho, Walker, Ibid., ii., 1849, p. 431 (9) ; and. vii., suppl. 3, 1855, pp.
730. 733 and 740.

256

ON THE MALE GENITALIA OP SOME ROBBER-FLIES,

Text-fig.5. The male genitalia of Asiliis pelago Walker, seen laterally, ^x li).
Text-fig.6. The male genitalia of Asilus malleolus Walker, seen laterally, (x 1-t).
Text-fig. 7. The male genitalia of Asilus inglofius Macleay, seen laterally, (x 14).
Text-fig. 8. The male genitalia of Asilus rufiventris Macquart, seen laterally, (x 14).

Asilus planus, Walker, Ibid., vii., suppl. 3, 1855, pp. 730 and 741 ($).
Asilus sericeiventris, Macquart, MS. name.

Synonymy. — The above synonymy is given on the authority of Miss Ricardo,
who accepts Sehiner's authority for the identification of Asilus inglorius Macleay.

The species referred here is the only known form to which Macleay's descrip-
liiin can be applied.

Description. — The upper forceps of the male genitalia are long, slender and
attenuated ai)ieally; the attenuated portion is deflected basally and then curves
back to the horizontal line at the apex. A hump at half the length on the dorsal
surface partly conceals the lamella.

Ilab. — Queensland, New South Wales, Victoria, South Australia and Western
Australia. These States are represented liy specimens in the Australian and
Macleay Museums.

Asii.is liUFivENTRis Macquart. (Text-fig. 8.)

Asilus rufiventris, Jfacquart, Dipt. E.xot., !., (2), 1838, p. l-H; Walker. List Dipt.

Brit. Mus., vii., suppl. 3, 1855, pp. 730 and 739; Ricardo. Ann. Mag.

Nat. Hist.. (8). xi.. 1913. p. 442.
.Lsilus alligans, Walker, Iliid.. vii., suppl. 3, 1855, p)). 730, 734 riid 740.

HY G. H. HARDY. 257

Synonymy. — The description of A. alUgans Walker conforms to A. rufiventris
Maequart, and therefore the name is placed here as a synonym of that species.
Miss Ricardo states that the type is lost.

Description. — Each branch of the upper forceps of the male genitalia has an
attenuated apex which curves upwards apically ; a hump on the dorsal surface
of the genitalia, at half the length, partly conceals the lamella.

Ilab. — Queensland, New South Wales, Victoria and South Australia.

A.siLus BLASio Walker. (Text-fig. 9.)

Asilm blasio, Walker. List Dipt. Brit. Mus., ii., 1849, p. 441; and vii.. .supid. 3,
1855, pp. 730, 731 and 758; Ricardo, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (8), xi.,
1913, p. 444.

Status. — The species was described from Western Australia, hut Miss
Ricardo redeseribed it from a Victorian specimen as the type is very old au'I
worn. It is possible that the specimen described by Miss Ricardo is closely allied
to, but distinct from, Walker's species. A series from New South Wales is also
referable here and is used for the study of the genitalia. A male specimen from
Perth, Western Australia, differs in the genitalia by having the dorsal digitate
process missing ; the specimen has its genitalia broken on' one side but the other
side appears to be complete, as a line of fracture cannot be traced ; nevertheless,
it is advisable to I:eep these specimens under one specific name until the dif-
ferences in the male genitalia can be contirmed with new material from Western
Australia.

Description. — The upper forceps of the male genitalia are more or less ellip-
tical in shape. Each branch of the upper and lower forceps contains a minute
projection at the extreme apex, aftid three conspicuous subapical bristles on the
ventral side. On the dorsal edge of the upper forceps there is a digitate process
situated at about three-quarters the length, which, however, is missing in the
specimen from Western Australia ; this specimen is also very mui'h brighter tlinn
those from New South Wales.

Hah. — Western Australia: Perth, one male specimen: New South Wales:
Blue Mountains, Blackheath, a series of each sex collected during November, 1919 ;
Victoria: Dandenong Ranges (Ricardo).

A.'siLUS MURINUS Maequart. (Text-fig. 10.)

Asilus murinus, Maequart, Dipt. Exot., i., (2), 1838, p. 144; Walker, List Dipt,
Brit. Mus., TO., suppl. 3, 1855, pp. 729 and 736; Ricardo, Ann. Mag
Nat. Hist, (8), xi., 1913, p. 440.
Asilus murinus, var. Maequart, ihid., suppl. 2, 1847, p. 45.

Description. — The shape of the male genitalia is more or less globular, a little
smaller in proportion to but scarcely differing from that of A. sydneyensis Mac-
quart. The Tasmanian A. alcetas Walker also contains similar shaped geni-
talia and, moreover, there does not appear to be any structural difference be-
tween the three species.

^1. murinus Maequart is a dingy coloured species, whilst ^4. sydneyensis
Maequart is brighter and has a reddish tinge on tiie abdomen: thev are both from
New South Wales. A. alcetas Walker from Tasmania, is similar to A. murinus
Maequart, and much smaller in size.

258

ON THE MALE GENITALIA Or SOME ROBBER-FLIES,

II

Text-fig.9. The male genitalia of Asiliis blasio Walker, seen laterally, (x 14) .

Text-fig.lO. The male genitalia of Asilus vmrinus Maequart, seen laterally, (x 14).

Text-fig. 11. The male genitalia of Asilus syifit eye list's Maequart, seen laterally, (x 11).

Text-fig. 12. The male genitalia of Asilus alee/as Walker, seen laterally, (x 14).

AsiLU.s SYDNEYENSis Mar(|uart. (Text-fig. 11.)
Asilus iiiyritarsis, Maequart, Hist. Nat. Dipt., i., 1834, p. 304 {preoccupied);

Walker, List Dipt. Brit. Mus., vii., suppl. 3, 1855, pp. 729 and 736; v.d.

Wulp, Cat. Dipt. S.Af., 1896, p. 93.
Asilus si/diieensis Maequart, Dipt. Exot., i., (2), 1838, p. 144; Walker, ibid, ii ,

1849, p. 425; and vii., suppl. 3, 1855, pp. 730 and 739.
Itamus sydtieyensis, Sehiner, Novara Raise, Dipt., 1868, p. 189.
Neoitamus sydneyensis, Kertesz., Cat. Dipt., iv., 1909, p. 294.
Asilus sydneyensis, Eicardo, Ann. Mag. Nat. llist., (8), xi.. 1913, p. 442: White,

Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 1916, p. 182.
Asilus jacksonii, Maequart, Dipt. Exot., i., (2), 1838, p. 145; Walker, ibid., ii ,

1849, p. 451 ; and vii., suppl. 3, 1855, pp. 730, 733 and 740.
Asilus tasmaniaes Maequart, Dipt. Exot., i., (2), 1838, p. 145; Walker, ibid.,

vii., suppl. 3, 1855, pp. 729 and 735.
Aratus? tasmaniae, v.d. Wulp., Term. Fuz., xxi (1), 1898, p. 237.
Asilus ami/thann. Walker, ibid., ii., 1849. p. 423.
Asilus tnuso. Walker, ibid., ii., 1849, p. 424.

Synonymy. — The name Asilus nigritarsis was used by Wiedemann in 182]
for Basypngon (now Mallophora) nigritarsis Fabrieius from America. The
sjTionymy is given on the authority of Rehiner and Miss Ricardo.

Description. — The shape of the male genitalia is more or less globular and
similar to but laiger than that of A. murinus Maequart, under which species fur-
ther particulars will be found.

Hah. — New South Wales. In the collections under revision the specimens
with locality labels are invariably from New South Wales. The Tasmanian re-
cords are e^ndentlv incorrect.

BY G. H. HARDY. 259

AsiLUS ALCETAS Walker. (Text-fig. 12.)

Asiliis alcetas, Walker, List Dipt. Brit. Mus., ii., 1849, p. 425; and vii., siippl. 3,

1855, pp. 729. 732, and 736.
Itamus alcetas, Schiner, Verb, z.-b. Ges. Wien., xvii., 1867, p. 408.
Neoitamus alceta.'^, Kertesz, Cat. Dipt., iv., 1909, p. 290.
Asilus alcetas, Rieardo, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (8), xi., 1913, p. 447: Wliite. Proc

Boy. Soe. Tas., 1916, p. 181.
Asilus trachaliis. Walker, Ins. Saund. Dipt. 1851, p. 143; Walker. List Dipt. Brit.

JIus., vii., suppl. 3, 1855, pp. 730 and 738.
Synonymy. — The synonymy is given on the authority o£ Miss Rieardo, who
states that the species refen-ed by Schiner to the genus Itamus, now Neoitamus,
must be an altogether different species from the type. Although this is probably
correct, there is not sufficient information in the description to allow Schiner's
species to lie identified with any known species of Neoitamus and, moreover,
Asilus alcetas Walker has a very striking resemblance to Neoitamus.

Description. — The shape of the male genitalia is more or less globular and
similar to that of A. murimis Macciuart, under which further particulars are given.
Hab. — Tasmania : Mount Arthur, one male and one female collected by Mr.
r. M. Littler, to whom the writer is indebted for these specimens now in the
collection of the Australian Museum. This is the only species of the genus
definitely known from the State.

260

NOTE? FROM THE BOTANIC GARDENS, SYDNEY.
Bv A. A. Hajiiltox, Botanical A-ssistaxt.

SciEPUs scpixus L.

Conteunial Park (A. A. Hamilton, 2, 191(i.) — a new habitat for a species
apparently rare in iliis State. The only specific locality recorde'l for this jilant
in New South Wales is Nepean River (Coll. R.Br.).* Australian forms of this
species are represented in the National Herbarium, Sydney, by specimens from
the British Museum under Isolepis supina R.Br. (Coll. Banks and Solander, New
Holland, 1770) and Lake Albert. Victoria, a locality given by Bentham, loc. cit.
There is also an example without collector's name, locality, or date. The speci-
mens now recorded agree with those collected by Banks and Solander in all the
important characters, differing only in the leng^th of the invohicral bract, which
does not exceed the measurement (2 inches) given by Bentham. In some of the
Banks-Solander specimens — which were probably collected at the Endeavour
River — it attains a length of 15 cm. The Victorian specimens are diminutive,
!.) — 8 cm. high, with slightly llexuose stems. An examination of the exotic her-
barivun material disclosed considerable variation in the leng-th of the invohicral
bract. It appears to be an exceptionally variable species, as, according to the
descriptions given in the works consulted, it is found to vary greatly in such im-
portant characters as the shape of the fruits, number of style branches, and the
presence or absence of rudimentary sepals or petals; and is usually (juoted as
an exception in the section in which it has, for convenience, been placed. Ex-
amples with biconvex fruits and 2-style branches, and others with triangular fruits
and 3-style branches were noted throughout the series. In sexeral European
specimens the lamina of the leaf sheath is occasionally produced to a length of
3—5 cm.

• SCHOENUS MOOREI Benth.

Moore and Betehef i)laced S. Moorci systematically in a group with smooth
fruits. This is misleading, as an examination of the fruits througliout a series of
specimens from various localities shows them to be prominently transversely
rugose. The character of smooth as opposed to rugose or tuberculate fruits is an
important factor in the determination of members of this genus, liut in tliis par-
ticular species Benthamt has omitted to mention this feature, tliouyh he refers to
both the shape and ribbing of the fruit.

•Fl. Austr., vii.. 1878, 330.
tH'book J'l. N.S.Wales, 1893, p.458.
:A.r.,p.367.

BY A. A. IIAJIILTON. '201

Lepidospekaia quadraxgulata, n.sp.

South Brotliei>, John's River (J. L. Boormau, 6, 1915); Port Macquarie
(J. L. Boorman, 1], 1915).

Stipes 1 111. altus, 2 mm. latus, foliis latioribus, 75 cm. longis, stipes t'oliaque
codiuu iiiodo quadrangulata. Panicula 2 ad 5 cm. longa. Bractea paniculae in-
feiior 1 — 5 ad 3 em. longa. Niix obovoidea triangularis, eostis prominentibus
Squamae angustae setaceae.

Stem about 1 ui. high, under 2 mui. broad, Huely striate, smooth, 4-angled, the
edges slightly produced and rounded. Leaves 4-angled, broader and flatter than
the stem, from 50 to 75 cm. long, the rounded edges of the angles prominent, form-
ing a shallow channel more conspicuous on the broad side of the leaf. Panicle
from 2 to 5 cm. long, compound, dense, ovoid-oblong to pyramidal, branches few,
erect. Bracts of the inflorescence striate, the lowest 1| to above 3 cm. long,
the lamina oecnpying about half its lengfh, the upper ones gradually smaller.
Spikelets clustered, sessile, crowded on the panicle branches, 5 — 6 mm. long.
Barren flowers 1 — 2 below the jierfect one. Flowering glumes acuminate, 3 — 4
outer ones shorter and broader. Nut obovoid, 3-angled, the rite prominent, pale
when young, but gradually becoming mottled with brown. Hypogynous scales
narrow, frequently tapering into a seta.

Its nearest affinity is L. Neesii Kunth., from which it is easily separated by
the quadrangular leaves and stem, though in some forms of L. Neesii the stems
show a degree of angularity. Quadrangiilar stems and leaves are represented in
the genus by L. tetraqiietrum Nees, an exceptional species placed by Bentham*
in his otherwise flat-leaved series Floribundae, a position to which it is entitled
by its inflorescence, an elongated panicle of 6 — 12 inches. The much reduced
compact panicle of L. quadrangulata is tliat of Bentham's series Tereticaules,
though it differs in the shape of stem and leaf from the other members of the
group, which have — as the series distinction indicates — -cylindrical stems and
leaves .

Grkvillf.a punicea R.Br. var. crassipolia, n.var.

Gosford (J. Purser, 9, 1899) ; Penang Ranges, Gosford (J. H. Maiden, (i,
1903) ; Road to Wiseman's Ferry, Gosford (A. A. Hamilton, 1, 1916).

Leaves crass, rigid, flattened, from ovate to rotundate, J, to 2 em. long, the
intramarginal vein prominent and slightly tubereulate. A variety differing from
the typical Port Jackson form in the size and rotundity of the leaves, and the
conspicuous infra-marginal vein which gives the refiexed leaf margin a spreading
rather than the typical recurved habit. This variety appears to be confined to
the neighbourhood of Gosford.

Hakea saligna R.Br. var. angustifolia, n.var.

Woronora Rivei;, Heathcote (A. A. Hamilton, 10, 1915). Growing among
boulders in the river bed.

A compact shrub 2 m. high. Leaves narrow, I to 1 dee. long, 3 — 5 iniu.
broad, rigid, almost veinless. Fruit carpels small, 2 cm. long, 1 — 1] cm. broad,
nearly smooth, the beak straight or barely produced, approaching the fruit of H.
microcarpa R.Br. An example from Lawson (A. A. Hamilton, 9, 1914) of

•Fl. Austr., vii., p.385.

262 NOTES FROM THE UOTANIC GARDENS, SYDNEV,

H. saligna, a spreading tree 6 m. high, has leaves from J to IJ Jec. long and 1 to
nearly 3 cm. broad, distinctly veined, and fruit carpels 3J cm. long. 2 cm. broad,
covered witii large prominent tubercles, the beak recurved. Specimens in the
National Herbarium forming connecting links are from Cockle and Cowan Creeks
(W. F. Blakely, 3, 1915), "taU slender shrubs 15—20 ft." (CoUector's note),
with narrow acuminate leaves, the venation indistinct, and comparatively large,
prominently tuberculate fruits; Nowra (J. L. Boorman, 1, 1915). "a small tree
32 — 14 feet'' (Collector's note) with short acute leaves, midway in width between
the Lawson and Heathcote specimens, and small fruits with an elongated beak, the
tubercles less prominent than in the examples from Lawson. Bentham's descrip-
tion of H. saligna* may be interpreted to include all the forms here reviewed,
but the morphological differences between the typical specimens from Lawson, and
those from Heathcote appear to be sufficiently pronounced to warrant a vsrietal
distinction. The figure presented by Mr. Maidenf is probably the nearest ap-
proach to the type available.

Pdltenaea ferruginea Rudge.

Trans . Linn . See, xi., 300, t. 23 .

Rudge's species is upheld by De Candolle,t who quotes Sieber's n. 420, but is
reduced to a variety (latifolia) of P. villosa Willd. by Bentham.§ The latter aho
mentions Sieber's n. 420. He bases his varietal distinction on the smaller, very
pubescent leaves, from narrow cuneate to broadly obovate, together with the larger
flowers of the variety We have in the National Herbarium a series of specimens
collected in the neighbourhood of Glenbrook, which agree with Rudge's figure, and
conform to his description, viz., Lapstone Hill (J. H. Maiden and R. H. Cam-
bage, 10, 1904); Glenbrook (W. F. Blakely, 10, 1913; A. A. Hamilton, 11,
1914); Blue Mountains, without specific locality (E. Betche, 12, 1882). P. vil-
losa has a wide range and as a consequence shows considerable variation, but none
of the numerous specimens in the National Herbarium collection which were ex-
amined approach, either in habit or foliage, the form under review. The pen-
dulous branehlets and narrow concave leaves of the typical P. villosa are replaced
by an erect branching habit and leaves — as in Rudge's figure — rotund, slightly
emarginate, and much larger than those of P. villosa typica. The hairs on the
leaves of the typical P. villosa are short, erect, and bulbous at the base, and the
flowers entirely yellow. In P. ferruginea the leaf hairs are long, weak, and
appressed, and the carina of the flower is rust-coloured . Rudge gives some prom-
mence to certain dots (sub-lente punctata) on the leaves of his species, including
details in the plate showing both surfaces of a leaf to demonstrate this charac-
ter. These dots arc filso discernible in a greater or lesser dcgi-ee tliroughout the
series of specimens of P. villosa examined. It will be seen that we have a difTor-
ence in the habit of the plant, size and shape of leaves, size and colour of flow-
ers, and a distinct vestiture separating these plants. When, after the passing of
a century, examples are found in the neighbourhood in which Sieber (upon whose
n. 420 the species is founded) is known to have collected, which arc the counter-
part of those figured by Rudge, it would appear that the characterization is

•Fl. Avistr., v., 51?,

tPor. Flora N.S.W., v., p.l09. PI. 171.

tProd. Syst. Vcr., ii.. 111.

§F1. Austr., ii., i;t4.

BY A. A. HAMILTON. 263

siiffieiently stable to warrant the retention of the speeitic rank and nomenclature
as proposed by him.

Peostanthera densa, n.sp.

Cronulla (A. A. Hamilton, 9, 1911; E. Cheel, 7, 1918.)

Frutex compactus subarboribus florens 5 — 9 dec, altus. Folia sucida, brevi-
ter petiolata, cordata ad ovata-lanceolata, costa hirsuta prominente precursa, 5 mm.
ad 1 cm. longa, apud extremitates ramorum crebra, nonnumquam fasciculata.
Semina metallica ritentia. P. marifoUa R.Br, affinis.

A compact erect undershrub 5 — 9 dec. high with terete hirsute l)ranches.
Leaves succulent, very shortly petiolate, from cordate to ovate-lanceolate with re-
volute margins, scabrous hispid above, somewhat paler underneath with a prom-
inent liirsute midvein, 5 mm. to 1 cm. long, densely crowded at the tips of the
branches, occasionally fasciculate. Flowers axillary on very short pedicels with
linear hirsute bracts 3 mm. long, the floral leaves similar to those of the stem,
'^alyx hirsute, 5 mm. long, the lips entire and nearly equal. Corolla more than
twice as long as the calyx, sprinkled on the outside with short hairs, the broad
thi-oat bearded inside with long white hairs. Anthers with one apisendage about
twice as long as the cell, the other short and adnate. Seeds with a metallic lustre

Its position in the genus is under Bentham's series Convexae following, in
.specific sequence P. marifolia R.Br., with which it is connected by a series of speci-
mens from Helensburgh (A. A. Hamilton, 10, 1913) taken from a shrub of 9 — 12
dec. with an upright spreading habit. The typical P. marifolia of the Port Jack-
son district is a scrambling undershrub of 3— -5 dec.

The plants were found gi'owing in profusion on the ocean slope of the rock\-
headland (Hawkesbury Series) at Cronulla, and the crass foliage is doubtless a
response to the halophytic conditions prevailing in this station, as plants growing
in the vicinity of tidal waters frequently develop a succulent habit. The species
is confined to a limited area Ijetween the ocean beach at Cronulla and the
northern entrance to Port Hacking.

Pkostaxthera i!hojii!ea R.Br.

Port Macquarie (E. R. Brown, 2, 1897); Douglas Park ( A. A. Hamilton,
12, 1915) . Two new specific localities extending the range of this somewhat
rare species. Previously recorded from the Blue Mountains and Tllawarra.

Prostantheea saxicola K.Br. var. Montana, n.var.

Katoomba; Narrow Neck (A. A. Hamilton, 1, 1903). Larger in all its
parts than the typical P. saxicola, the flowers and young shoots more thickly
clothed with liairs, the setaceous bracts minute and only occasionally developed.
This variety approaches a form of P. Behriana Schlecht, but differs from that
species in the length of the calyx lips (longer in P. Behriana), the minutes bracts,
and the bristly tomentiim. (The bracts are conspicuous in P. Behriana and
the tomentum of a fine texture.) It is usually found in scattered patches on' shel-
tered hillsides, on the higher elevations of the Blue Mountains. Specimens in the
National Herbarium are from Mt. Victoria (R. T. Baker, 12, 1890) ; Blue Moun-
tains (E. Betche, 12, 1902); Blackheath (J. H. Maiden, 1, 1904). A specimen
from Milton, near top of Pigeon House, n. 775 (R. H. Cambage, 12, 1902) is
also referred to this variety.

2c4 xott;s proji the botanic gakiikn's, sydxky,

Prostanthera debilis F. v. M.

New tor New South Wales. Recorded from the Grampian Mountains. A'io-
toria.* Examples in the National Herbarium are from Gulgong (J. H. Maiden,
4, 1901), Warrumbungle Ranges (W. Forsj-th, 10, 1901), Molong (J. L. Boor-
man, 11, 19()(il, expert ee (J. L. Boorman, 12, 1915). An interesting range for
a species liitherto regarded as exclusively Victorian. Tlie New South Wales
forms of P. debilis approach very closely specimens in the National Herbarium
irom New England (the type locality) of P. sckcicola R.Br. var. major, differing
chiefly in the distpnt canaliculate leaves, and the dense hoary tomeutum on the
calyces and young shoots. The leaves of P. saxicola var. major are flat and
crowded and the calyces and young shoots sparsely tomentose.

•Frag. Phyto. Austr., F.v.M., viii., 1874, p. 147

365

ORDINARY MONTHLY MEETING.
28th July, 1920.
Mr. ,1. .). Fletcher, il.A., B.Se.. Presiilent, in the Chair.

Dr. Arthur H.\iiilton Tebbutt, 185 Maoquarie-street, Sydney, was elected
an Ordiuarj' Member of the Society.

The President amioimced that a Pan-Pacitie Science Congress was to be held
at Honolulu, commencing on 2nd August, and that a number of Australian repre-
sentatives had left to attend, including Mr. E. C. Andrews, Assistant-Professor
L. A. Cotton, Messrs. C. Hedley, and C. A. Sussmilch, from Sydney, Professor
Wood-.Junes from the University of Adelaide, and Professor H. C. Richards, from
the University of Queensland.

The Donation-; and Exchanges received since the pre\'ious Monthly Meetin'^
(30th June, 1920), amounting to 31 Volumes, 56 Parts or Nos., 10 Bulletins, and
2 Reports, received from 39 Societies and Institutions, and two private donois,
were laid upon the table.

NOTES .\XD EXHIBIT.S.

Dr. E. AV. Ferguson exhibited specimens of the imago and larvae of <*>
muscid tiy belonging to an undetermined genus. The imago was bred from a
pupa taken in the nest of a Leatherhead by Messrs. W. G. and R. C. Harvey,
of Mackay, (Queensland. The larvae live on the nestling birds, and when
mature conceal themselves in the nest and pupate. Out of twenty pupae ob-
tained by Messrs. Harvey, only one hatched out, the others being parasitised by
a chaleid wa-sp, a pair of which were also exhibited. Mr. P. H. Gilbert, of
Lakemba, Sydney, has found what appears to be the same species on nestling
birds (New Holland Honeyeater).

Mr. E. Cheel exhil)ited some very interesting specimens of a rare lichen
collected on Mount Kosciusko by Miss A. V. Duthie.

The only specimens previously collected, so far as can be ascertained at pre-
sent, are in a solitary collection by Rev. F. R. M. Wilson, found on earthy
rock on Mount Hotham, Victoria, in January, 1890. The specimen is labelled
Ihifnurea madreporiformis (Wulf.) Ach. (AA'ilson No. 1157, in National Her-
barium, Sydney). It seems to have close affinities with Dactylina artica (Hook.)
Nyl., and further investigation is needed to settle the generic position, as no
apothecia are present in either the Mount Hotham or Mount Kosciusko specimens.
Unfortunately there are no specimens of the above-mentioned genera (recorded
from Arctic Regions) available for comparison.

266

THE ATRYPIDAE OF NEW SOUTH WALES. WITH REFERENCES TO
THOSE RECORDED FROM OTHER STATES OF AUSTRALIA.

Bv JoHx Mitchell, late Principal of the Newcastle Technical College and
School or Mines, N. S. Wales, and W. S. Dun, PALAEONTOLOCiisT, Dept. of

Mines, Sydney.

(With Plates xiv.-xvi.; Text-figures 1-5.)

One reason for tlie present paper is to make some additions to our present
knowledge of the Atrypidae found in the Palaeozoic rocks of New South Wales,
with a view to facilitate their correlation with those of similar age in other
countries in which such rocks have been chronologically classified.
The value of the Atrypa group for this purpose is hardly surpassed
by any other group of brachiopods and because of this, ajid that a supply of
good material has become available to work upon, the task of systematically deal-
ing with members of the gi-oup represented in the Middle Palaeozoic rocks of this
State is now undertaken. Besides the foregoing reasons, another inducement to
deal with the group was the discovery, some time ago, of a number of remarkable
brachiopods belonging to the Atrypidae, but not placeable in any of the existing
genera of the family.

Up to the present the following species of Atrypa have been recorded from
New South Wales, — Atrypa reticularis Linn., A. desquamata Sowerby, A. plica-
tella de Koninck, and A. marginalis Dalman. To these species we are able to
add Atrypa pulchra, n.sp., A. erectirostris, n.sp., and A. duntroonensis, n.sp.

If the doubtful -1. plicateUa be omitted, New South Wales would be repre-
sented by six species of Atrypa, and this is quite a good contribution, for nowhere
are the species of Atrypa found to be very numerous, as is the case with some
other genera of brachiopods. In addition to these tnie Atrypas we find it neces-
sary to add a new genus to the group, for the reception of some brachiopods col-
lected from Molong, Yass and Bowning districts. From external features, these
remarkable fossils were considered to belong to Meristina, but the discovery of
specimens exhibiting internal structures proves that their ti-ue position is with the
Atrypidae.

For this new genus we have decided upon the name Atrypnidea, and in it we
have placed the following species: — Atrypoidea aiistralif^, n.sp., and A. aiigiista,
n . sp .

Atrypa UETirri.Anis Linnaeus.
(PI. XV., figs. 1-7; PI. xvi., figs. 0. 10, 20.)

It is unnecessary to snjiidy the synonymy or the description of this world
widely distributed and stratigra|)hically persistent brachiopod. Its lii.story for
this State is a brief one. •

The first record of its occurrence was made by the late J. W. Salter in a
letter to the late Rev. W. B. Clarke, dated 28th Nov., 1858, wherein he states

BY JOHN MITCHELL AND W. S. DUN. 267

that he had identified this species in a collection of fossils from New South Wales
whicli had been sent to the Woodwardian Museum of Cambridge University by
Clarke in 1844 for description.*

In 1877 its presence is noted by Prof, de Koninckt from Kempsey. and the
banks of the Murrumbidgee [Devoniair] . With regard to the Kempsey locality
there is considerable doubt, the formations in that area being of Upper Palaeozoic
age. In 1888 the species was reported from the Bowning Beds.l In 1880 R.
Etheridge, Jr., recorded A. reticularis from Bombala, and the variety aspera froiii
Collins Flat.^

Normal specimens of this fossil from the Bowning- Yass Beds, exclusive of
their foliated margins, appear to be rather smaller than the European species.
The dimensions of one of the largest specimens from these beds are^length and
width, 20 mm., depth 11 mm. Judging from the figures of A. reticularis in
Davidson's British Brachiopoda, it would apjsear that adult British species usually
exceed an inch in length and width, and are more gibbous than our forms. The
pedicle valves of our specimens too seem less convex in the umbonal region, and
more concave laterally and anteriorly. Some specimens from Wellington Caves,
N.S.W., have been obtained of relatively large size, their length and width ex-
ceeding 43 mm. without the fringe, with a thickness of 26 mm. In these speci-
mens the radial ribs are coarse, and the marginal sinus in front deep and tongue-
like, but, except for their unusual size, their external and internal features, as far
as they are revealed, are quite typical of the normal A. reticularis.

In tlie upper beds of the Bowning Series, a form occurs, possessing features
which would place it about midway between A. aspera and A. i\eticularis, and al-
though these features are unvarying in all the specimens of it that have come
under our notice, we deem it undesirable to separate it from the type form at
present. Vide PL xvi., fig. 13.

The stratigraphical range of the species in the Bowning Series extends practically
from base to summit ; but it is most abundant in the lower beds of the series espe-
cially in those of Hatton's Corner and the limestones of Limestone Creek, Silver-
dale. Its associates in these beds are Barrandella linguifera var. wilkinsoni Eth.,
Bhizophyllum interpunctatum de Koninck, Encrinurus mitchelli Foerste, Bronteus
jenkinsi E. and M., etc.

Loc. and horizon. — Hatton's Corner, Yass River, Parish of Y'ass, County Mur-
ray; Limestone Creek Parisli of Derrengullen, County King; Bowning Creek,
etc . , Parish of Bowning, County Harden . Upper Silurian — Wenlock or Bar-
rande's etage E of Bohemia; and in the upper part of the. Bowning Series pro-
l)ably passing into Devonian.

Atrypa erectirostris, n.sp. (PL xv., figs. 10, 11; PI. xvi., figs. 17, 18.)

Shell subdiscoidal when the fringe is attached in mature specimens; radial
striae numerous, fine, strongly arcuate laterally and dichotomous at more or less
frequent intervals. Pedicle valve moderately convex at the umbonal region, con-
cave laterallj', and at front margin only mildly sinuate, umbo inconspicuous, beak
erect, high, acutely-pointed, laterally supported by strong divergent umbonal
ridges. Aperture circular, the under half enclosed by the deltidial plates, false
area conspicuous, hinge line wide, undulating; cardinal angles high and rounded.

•Sed. Form. N.S. "Wales, 1878, p.l.5.j.
+Mem. Geol. Surv. N.S.W., Pal. No. (i, 1898, pp. 77-78.
JMitehell, Proc. Aust. Assoc. Adv. Sci., i., 1887 (18S8), p. 293.
SJour. Proc. Eoy. Soc. N.S.Wales, xiv., 1880, p.216.

268 THE ATRVl'lUAi; Oi' NEW SOUTH WALES,

Brachial valve very convex to gibbous in large specimens, laterally strongly turned
up. The spiralia are of the true Atnjpu type and, with cones, consist of ten or
more spirals with their apices directed towards the outward centre of the brachial
valve; apices of the cones are apart, but opposing sides compressed. Uimensiuns:
The lai-gest of specimens has a length and width of one and a-half inches without
the marginal fringe, and a depth of three quarters of an inch. This specimen,
with the fringe, would have had a width of not less than two and a quarter inches.

Qlis. — The valves in young specimens are very mildly and about equally con-
vex, and the umbo, cardinal ridges and beak form an isosceles triangle, the base
of which is from one cardinal angle to the other, but with age the brachial valve
becomes more and more convex until, when full growth has been reached, it is
strongly s-o, or gibbous. This form resembles both A. reticularis and A. des-
quamata, but differs from each of them in the fineness of its surface ornamentation
and the strong curve of the radial striae which is directed laterally. From ^-1.
reticularis it differs in the high, erect, pointed beak of the pedicle valve, the more
exposed deltidium and false area, exceedingly fine concentric growth lines, and
much greater dimensions when compared with normal representatives of the
species. In the proportions of the leng-th to width, and also in contour it agi-ees
with A. reticularis. It resembles ,1. desquamata in having a high pedicle valve
beak, exposed circular foramen and deltidial plates, prominent umbonal ridges
and false area, also in the features of the brachial cones, but with some of these
resemblances it is merely a matter of degree, because the beak of the present
species is very much higher and erect, more acutely pointed and practically with-
out incurvation. The umbonal ridges are less divergent, higher, and with the
beak form a triano-lf with an acute apical angle, <|uite different from the triangle
formed by these ridges in ^-1. desquamata. Then there are the differences already
referred to — the much finer superficial ornamentation of the shells of the local
form, and the strong curving of the radial striae laterally and towards the cardinal
angles. The liinge line of A. desquamata is mildly arcuate, that of the other un-
dulating. Plainly our species resembles in several particulars both ^-1. reticularis
und A. desquamata, and the latter in more than it does the former.

Considering the tendency to variation among the Atrypa group some might
be disposed to recognise A. erectirostris as a variant of A. desquamata, but it is to
be noted that, though the differences between the two forms in some instances
appear only to be of degree, V'et they are permanently estaljlislied ; for, though
the normal form of .1. desquamata is found in association witli tlic one hero de-
scribed, there is no evidence of gradation of the one form into the othi>r. and this
affords an additional reason for a separation of the two types.

Loc. and horizon. — Cave Flat, near the jiuiction of the Goodradigbce with
tlie Murrumbidgee River, an area that is now submerged by the waters impounded
within the Bai-ren Jack (Burrin.jiick) dam, where it occurs i)lentil'ully in a stratum
'of limited thickness, associated with Spirifer i/assensis and many other Spiriferi
not yet determined, Iiht/ncli<iiiella, Atrypa desquamata, Ci/rtina, etc. Parish of
Woolgarlo, County of Harden. Probably lower Middle Devonian.

Atrypa MARGiNALis Dahnan . (PI. xv., figs, l-l-lti; PI. xvi., fig-s. 1-5; Text-figs. 1-5.)
The following is Davidson's description of this species*: —
"Spec. Char. Transversely subpent agonal or almost elliptical: hinge line

nearly straight; lateral margins rounded, very slightly so in front, beak of ventriil

•Mon. Brit. Dev. aii.l Sil. I!i-iu-hio]ioaa. vul. iii.. Scot. Sit. Hracli., iii>.l.Ti-4.

BY JOHN" 3IITCHELL AXD W. S. DUX.

2Gfl

valve small, straight, moderately inourvecl with a circ-iilar foramen under its ex-
tremity, and distinctly separated from the umbone or hinge-line of dorsal valve
by a deltidiuui in two pieces, almost surrounding the aperture. Dorsal valve
moderately convex and trilobed ; mesial fold extremely narrow at first and sud-
denly widening, slightly elevated, flattened along the middle, and sharply separated
from the lateral portions of the valve by a deepened groove. The fold is also
often bent upwards close to the frontal edge. "\'entral valve almost flat or very

Text-figs. 1-5. Artypa inarginalis Dahii. Enlarged drawings to show the surface
oruaiiientation, muscuhir scars and, in one, greater portion of a spiral.

sliglitly convex near the beak with a rather deep and sharply defined sinus, mar-
gined on either side by a prominent ridge, while the lateral portions of the vahe
are gently concave and vertically turned up at the extremity; lateral margins un-
dulating; front margin abruptly raised, straight along the middle; surface of both
valves ornamented with numerous small bifurcating ridges or ribs." The above
description applies to the Australian representatives so fully as to make it un-
necessary to give them a separate one.

In North America this species occurs associated with A. reticularis in Silurian
rocks (Niagara Formation), f and is there said by the authors quoted to have been
short lived, just as it appears to have been, as far as evidence yet available goes
to show, in Australia.

The discovery of this very remarkaljle Atrypa in Australia is of considerable
interest to paleontologists, adding, as it does, another instance of the remarkalile
powers for world wide distribution possessed by certain types of brachiopoda.
It would appear too, that this species originated in the British Isles and lived
there through a longer geological period than elsewhere. In this State it occurs
plentifully in the lowest zone of the Lower Trilobite Beds of the Bowning Series
on the East and West sides of the Bowning S^Ticline. Its vertical range here
seems to be very limited. It is not improbable that it occurs also in the Orange
district, for the fossil described by one of usf under the name of Camarntecli/ia

•Hall and Clarke, Pal. N.T.. vol. iii., Brachiopoda. pt. ii., p. 173.

tDun. Rec. Geol. Surv. N.S.W., viii.. pt. 3, 1907, p. 127, PL xl., figs. 3, 3b.

270 TlIK ATKYPILUK OF NEW SOCTH WALES,

sussmilchi may be iilentioiil with this species. In En<rlan<l it seems to range from
Lower to middle Upper Silurian. In our Bowning rocks it is found associated
with Encrinurus silverdalensis E. & M., E. mitchelli Foerste and below beds con-
taining Odontopleiira howningensis E. & M., O. parvissima, E. & M., (Jeratoce-
phula vogdesi E. & M., and these rocks are not younger than those of Wenlock
age. The occurrence of this small Atriipa at such a distance from places where
pre\'iously found will no doubt be of much interest to geologists, and may help to
indicate the route along which Palaeozoic marine faunas were distributed from
Europe to Australia or vice versa.

The first record of its presence in Australian rocks appears to have lieen
made by one of us.*

Loc. and horizon. — Silverdale, Parish of Derrengullen, County King; and one
mile south of Bowning Public School. Parish of Bowning, County Harden.
Lower Trilobite Beds, Bo^vning Series.

Atrypa pfLCHRA, n.sp. (PL xiv.. tig. 19; PI. xvi.. tig-s. 14-lf).)

Shell subdiseoidal or rarely oval, biconvex, radial ami concentric striae very
fine, and form a beautiful caucellate pattern ; marginal Iriuge very narrow, and
mildly recurved, hinge line arcuate, front margin very mildly sinuate. Pedicle
valve about as convex as the brachial valve, from the umbo for two thirds of its
lengfh medially decidedly ridged, and opposed to this in the brachial valve is a
shallow sulcus; benk moderately prominent, mildly incurved, foramen conspicuou-^
iuid circular. Brachial valve evenly and moderately to fairly strongly convex
in adult specimens; sulcus faint and vanishes as it reaches the middle of the valve.
Dimensions of an adult specimen — length and width, 15.4 mm., depth, 9.4 mm.

Obs. — This species differs from the .1. reticularis in (1) its small size. (2)
exceedingly fine ornamentation, (3) approximately equal biconvexity of the
valves, (4) greater prominence of the beak of file pedicle valve and of its fora-
men, (5) its uniformly subcircular outline. (6) very narrow marginal fringe.

We have no specimen showing internal structure, but from external eviden^'e
we assume it to closely resemble that of A. reticularis in this particular. The
specimens of this species used for the present description were obtained chiefly
from the upper of the lime.stone beds of Limestone Creek, Silverdale, immediately
below the Lower Trilobite Beds of the Bowning Series, and were associated with
numerous corals representing the genera Favosites, Heliolites, CiMtliopIiiillum and
Tryplasma and with .1. reticularis, etc. The vertical range of this fossil is ap-
parently limited.

I^dc. and hnrizoH. — Limestone Creek, Silverdale. near Bowning, Parish of
Derrengullen, County King. Probably Wenlock.

Atrypa DrxTROONEXsis, n.sp. (PI. xvi., figs. 8-12.)

Shell almost equally biconvex oval, radial ribs subsharply ridged, not pro-
minent, dichotomise two or three times, concentric striae fine and very numerous
and undulating towards the front. Pedicle valve moderately convex throughout,
slightly upturned at the margins, umbo and beak not prominent, the latter de-
pressed. Bracliial valve slightly more tumid than the other, muscle scars incon-
spicuous, the margin in front very slightly sinuate. Dimensions: Length, 10.7.
width, 17, depth 11 mm. These dimensions are for mature specimens.

•Mitchell, Proo. Aust. Assocn. Adv. Sc, i., 1887 (1888), p.293.

BY JOHX MITCHELL AXD W. S. DUK. 271

Obs. — Among specimens forwarded by the late Rev. W. B. Clai-ke to the
late Rev. Sedgwick in 1844* from Dimtroon, N.S.W., Salter reported having
recognised Atrypa reticularis Linn. We are of the opinion that the shell
now under review is specifically identical with the one referred to by Salter.
It certainly bears some resemblance to the normal A. reticularis, and on first in-
spection we were inclined to make it a variety of the normal form but on closer
study of it, determined to give it specific rank. From A. reticularis it differs in
having the valves almost equally convex, little or no foliated margin, very fine
wavy and numerous concentric striae, no defined sulcus in either valve, slightly
sinuate margins, and the length invariably gi'eater than the width. In some re-
spects this species resembles A. (?) headii Billings var. anglica. Found asso-
ciated with Encrinurus duntroonensis E. and M. and Trinuclem clarkei Mitchell.

Loc. and horizon. — Near Duntroon homestead. Parish of Canberra, County
jMurray .

Atkypa desquajiata Sowerby. (PI. xv., figs. 12, 13.)

This species was recorded by de Koninck from New South Wales, but no
particulars of locality were given.

Specimens of the species have been collected from the black cave limestone
beds of Cave Flat, and Goodravale, Parish of Woolgarlo, County Harden, and the
Tarago District, by officers of the Department of Mines, Sydney, and one of us,
and it will be noticed, on reference to our figures given of a specimen of the local
form, that it agrees with the Euroj^ean types.

Atrypa plicatella de Koninck.

This species was said to have been found in a black limestone in Yass district.f

No subsequent reference seems to have been made regarding the occuiTence

of this species in New South Wales rocks. Judging by the figures and description

we are not disposed to accept de Koninck's determination. Externally it bears

little if any resemblance to an Atrypid.

Atrypoidea, n.g.

Geii. chars. — Shells strongly biconvex and at maturity some forms ovoid to
globular, not conspicuously inequivalve, surface smooth, but sometimes very
faintly showing concentric growth lines. Beaks not prominent, hinge line
straight and moderately long; cardinal angles high and rounded. Pedicle, valve
less convex than the brachial, with or without a faint sulcus, beak of the pedicle
valve relatively small, depressed and incurved. Foramen apical and circular in
mature specimens. Anterior margin moderately to very intensely sinuate. The
deltidial plates and teeth have not been observed. Muscle scars appear to be
large and moderately defined. Brachial valve very convex, no defined median fold
except in cases of mature specimens in which, towards the front, a short fold is
sometimes developed, but sometimes bearing a very faint medial sulcus. No
cardinal area, beak incurved and concealed. Crura unknown. Brachidia or
spirals form cones, consisting of about ten volutions in specimens reaching two
thirds maturity. The apices of the cones are directed towards the centre of the
brachial valve cavity, but in one or two cases they had a droop anteriorly which
may have arisen from accidental causes.

'Ofi. cH.

Me Koninck, Mem. Geol. Siu-v. N.S.W., Pal. Xo. (i, 1898, p. 78, PI. iii., figs. 4 and 4rt.

272 THE ATRYPIDAE OF NEW SOUTH WALES,

06s. — The features which separate this genus from Atri/pa are the great
bicouvexity and smoothness of the valves, absence of marginal fringe and radial
striae or ribs.

Genotype, Atrypoidea australis.

Atrypoidea australis n.gen. et sp. (PI. xiv., tigs. 1-18; PL xv., figs. 8, 9;

PL xvi., figs. 7, 13.)

Shells intensely biconvex to subglobular in mature specimens. In young
specimens mildly convex beak, as maturity is approached the convexity and front
sinus of the valves rapidly develop, and at no stage of growth is the difference
in the convexity of the two valves of this species very pronounced, though that
of the brachial valve is the greater: cardinal angles rounded, hinge line wide,
straight or only gently arcuate. Pedicle valve has, in some large specimens, a
faint medial fold extending from the umbo to the front and, on each side of this
fold, a very shallow faint sulcus; opposed to this in the brachial valve is a faint
sulcus bounded by an exceedingly faintly defined fold, but this feature does not
appear to be constant, for, in some forms, the plainness of the surface is unin-
terrupted and in others a feeble sulcus takes the place of the fold; front sinus
wide and deep in mature specimens, its intensity gradually develbping with age,
^ery immature shells having none. Brachial valve very convex and at no stage of
growth showing a decided fold, beak small and concealed. Dimetisions of a ma-
ture individual (PL xiv.. figs. 5 and 6) : Length, 28, width, 28, thickness, 22 mm.
The projiortions of these measurements remain very constant for sizes of shells
from half to full maturity.

06s. — A specimen of this species was described l)y one of us* under tiie
name of Merlstina australis. This determination and description was based upon
superficial features only, which indeed very closely resembled those of the Meris-
ti)ia group. That there were good reasons for this determination is shown by
the fact that specimens of this new group, showing only external features, were
submitted to British palaeontologists and they referred them to Meristina tumida.
More recently, specimens of the group with spirals preserved enable us now to
place it in or near its proper phylogenetic position, and that it belongs to
Atnjpidae, we believe, cannot be disputed, though certainly a few features of its
internal structure remain to be revealed, but we do not expect the revelation of
them will materially alter the views we have arrived at with respect to its classi-
fication. Externally the group shows some features rot seen in Atrypa, yet
on the other hand has others that are truly Atrypoid, as, for instance, the straight
hinge line, absence of cardinal area, high rounded cardinal angles, d?nressed in-
curved beak of the pedicle valve, and very strongly convex biachial valve. They
are certainly extraordinary Atrypids and up to the present are known to occur
only in the limestones of Molong and the impure limy shales of the Bowning
Series, and the specimens in these different districts are, for the most part, alike
specifically. Those belonging to the present species from IMolong are uniformly
of much larger size than the Bowuing-Yass (Hatton's Corner) representatives.
Tliis variation may have arisen from more favourable conditions for their de-
velopment having prevailed in the Molong area than at Bowning. In the former
the sea was clear, and free from the muddy sediment present in the latter. Be-
sides the relative smallness of the Hatton's Corner members of the species, they

•Dun. Records Geol. Surv. N.S.W., vii., 1904. p.318.

BY JOHN MITCHELL AND W. S. VUK. 273

also appear to have a slightly less conspicuous umbo and beak than those from
Molong; also the strong tongue-like anterior sinus would seem to have developed
at an earlier stage of growth in those from Hatton's Corner than in the others.
Further, in one specimen of this species from Molong, the braehidia show a rather
strong droop apically, but this would appear to be accidental, for others from
Molong show the apices of the spiralia to be directed almost towards the centre
of the brachial valve, and this agrees with the Hatton's Corner types.

Loc. and horizon. — Near Molong, Parish of Bomey, County Wellington; Hat-
ton's Corner, Parish of Yass, County Murray; Gurnett's Selection, three miles
west of Bowning, Parish of Bowning, County Harden. Upper Silurian.

ATRYPOinEA ANiiUSTA, n . sp . (PI. xiv., figs, 20-29.)

Shell intensely biconvex, subquadrate, smooth; length greater than width,
valve margins intensely sinuate, front sinus very deep. Hinge line mildly ar-
cuate; umbonal ridges low and spreading. Pedicle valve transversely and longi-
tudinally strongly convex, just below the umbonal region the inflation is so great
that it gives the shell quite a hunchback aspect; towards the front a very faint
sulcus is developed, the sides of it being slightly more depressed than the medial
portion, indenting lip tongue-like and long. Umbo of moderate size, beab
strongly incurved and depressed, aperture small. Brachial valve very much
arched transversely, highest in front of its centre, and developing into a strong
fold on the anterior third. Dimensions: Length, 23.4, width, 22, thickness, 18.7
mm., for the largest specimens from Bowning and Molong; but the specimens
from Hatton's Corner so far collected, are much smaller, the largest from here
measuring— length, 19, width, 17.2, thickness, 14 mm., respectively, and an im-
mature specimen from Molong had the same dimensions. The relative propor-
tions of these measurements are fairly constant for the specimens from all three
localities". .

(Jbs. — The internal structure of the species has been observed in the Bowning
form only and agi'ees in the spiralia with the genotype. From the foregoing
species the present differs in being much more biconvex, having a less conspicuous
umbo, more strongly incurved and depressed beak, narrower hinge line, greater
length than width, a greater relative thickness, much stronger sinuosity of the
lateral and front margins.

It may be noted that very immature shells of this species cannot be dis-
tinguished from similar ones of A. australis. or at least we have not been able to
do so up to the present.

Loc. and horizon. — The same as for the preceding species.

References to records of Atrypa from other States of Australia.

Queensland.

Atrypa reticularis Linnaeus. — The occurrence of this species has been re-
corded from the Fanning River, Burdekin Downs, by the late R . Etheridge Jun . *
tnd by Foord.f In 1892, R. Etheridge repeated his previous records.!

Through the courtesy of Mr. B. Dunstan, Chief Government Geologist of
Queensland, we have been enabled to inspect the original specimen referred to

•Proc. E. Phys. See. Edinh., v., 1880, p.270.

tGeol. Mag., vii., (3), 1890. p. 100.

JGeol. Pal. Qld. and N.Guinea, 1892, p.05, PI. 4, t. -t. .

,^'A.»^-S:y

274 THE ATRYPIDAE OF XEW SOUTH WALES,

this species by the late Mr. K. Etheridge, Jim., and after a very critical exataina-
tion of it, coucliide that it is not A. reticularis, but an immature A. desquamata.
Our reasons for this conclusion are the prominent beak, the exposure in the
specimen of an area, and the strong curvature of the lateral ribs towards the car-
dinal angles. In addition, the alleged A. reticularis is represented in the Mu-
seum of the Geological Survey, Brisbane, only by the single specimen which served
Mr. Etheridge Jr. for his determination. This of itself is a very suggestive fact,
for A. reticularis was a very gi'cgarious brachiopod and wherever it occurs, does
so, almost without exception, in numbers. It is also worthy of remark, that this
fossil occurs in association with numerous individuals of Atrypa desquamata; a
circumstance which supports the contention that it is an immature specimen of
the latter species.

Atrypa desquamata J. de C. Sowerby. — The occurrence of this brachiopod
is also recorded by Mr. Etheridge Jun.§ It is found plentifully in the middle
Devonian Rocks outcropping in the valley of the Fanning, Burdekin and Broken
Rivers in the Burdekin Downs District, and the specimens collected from this
locality agree very fully with the original types. In New South Wales, to my
knowledge, A. reticularis has never been found in association with A. desquamata.
May this not be the case also in Queensland? In England, the two species are
found commingled in Middle Devonian Rocks.

Victoria.

F. Chapman* has recorded the occurrence of A. reticularis var. decurrens
from the Yeringian of Yeriug and Loyola; A. aspera Schloth. from Loyola and
the Middle Devonian of Bindi; and A. fimbriata from Lilydale. The latter form
he compared with ^1. hystrix and A. spinosa J. Hall from the Chemung and
Hamilton Groups of N. America. In general these forms have extra- Australian
Devonian affinities.

Mr. Chapman observes with reference to the occurrence of .1. reticularis
that he tinds it to be very common in the limestone beds and much less common
in the shales of the Yeringian beds of Victoria. In the Downing- Yass beds of
New South Wales, the same thing is noticeable, and it appears that this preference
for clear sea Hoors on the part of this reniarkal)!e brachiopod is manifest in every
part of the world where it is found. With reference to his A. aspera, recorded
from the Yeringian beds and which he says had been recorded from tlie Silurian
and Devonian of Victoria previously by McCoy, it must be observed that the
latter regarded it as a variety of A. reticularis. We have some doubts as to the
correctness of this determination, though it must be admitted that the concentric
lamellae exhiliited liy Mr. Chapman's species closely resemble tliose of the ori-
ginal type. Whether Mr. Chapman's conclusion is right or not, it must not be
overlooked that many palaeontologists recognise A. aspera only as a variety of
A. reticularis.

Atrypa reticularis var. decurrevs, to ns, seems a slightly abnormal A. reticu-
laris. Some similar specimens have been noticed by one of us from the Bowning
Beds. ,1. fmhriata Chapman is a very interesting species and as Mr. ('lia)iman
points out is very like A. hystri.r J. Hall. Notliing similar has yet been collected
from New South Wales. Mr. Chapman t has also recorded ^1. reticularis from
O'Keefe's Gully, Aberfeldy River, and Atrypa sp. from Tyer's River.

§Aof. rif.

•Proc. Roy. Sec. Vict., xxvi., (N.S.), Pt. i., 1913, pp.107-109.

+Rec. Geol. Survey Vic, ii., Pt. i., 1907, pp.68, 71.

BY JOHN MITCHELL AND VT. S. DUN.

275

Western Australia.

A. H. Foordt records Atrypa reticularis from Mt. Piene, Kimberley Dis-
trict, associated with Ulnjiichonella pleurodnn and RhijnclioneUa cuboides, in the
Stroraatoporoid horizon which Nicholson considered to be Upper Devonian. To
our knowledg-e, no specimen of this species from a similar horizon in Eastern
Australia has vet been collected.

Figs.

Figs.

Fig.
Figs.

Fig.
Figs.

1 — 4

S.

9 —11

12.

13— IS

19.

Fig.

Pigs. 20-21

Figs.
Pigs.

Fig.
Fig.

22—26,

27 28 .

EXPL.\N.\TION OF PL.\TES XTV.-XVI.
Plate xiv.

(.-Ml figures natural size.)

Alrvf>oiiiea aiistnilis. Mitchell and Dun.
Ventral, profile and dorsal view? nf two perfect young specimens.
Molong. Coll. Mitchell.
Front, profile and ventral view of a mature specimen. Molong,

ing. Coll. Mitchell.
Front view of a nearly mature specimen. Molong. Coll. Mitchell.
Front, profile and ventral views of the largest specimen from Down-
ing. Coll. Mitchell.

Ventral view of specimen shown in figure S. Molong. Coll. Mitchell.
Specimens from Hatton's Corner, Yass River. Fig. 13 shows the
largest shell from that locality; fig. 18, a small, square-shouldered
form with inconspicuous umbo. Coll. Mitchell.

Atrvpa pulchra Mitchell and Dun.
.\ perfect specimen, dorsal aspect.. Silverdale, near Bowning. Coll.
Mitchell.

Atrvpoidea aiigiisfa ^litchell and Dun.
Oblique profile and front view of largest specimen from the Bowning
series. This shows, in the original where the brachial valve is weath-
ered slightly, faint outlines of one of the spirals. Gurnett's fann,
three miles west of Bowning. Coll. Mitchell.
29. Specimens from Molong, at various stages of growth.
Front and profile views of two specimens from Hatton's Corner, Yass
River .

Plate XV.

Atrvpa rciicnhiris Linn .
A beautifully weathered transverse section of a large shell, showing
the spiral cones and great inflation of the brachial valve. Wellington
Caves. Coll. Mining Museum. Sydney.

Same specimen as fig. 3, but enlarged to show the surface ornamen-
tation.

JGeol. Mag., Dec. 3, vii., 1890, pp.lOO-l.

276 THK ATRYPIDAF, OF NEW SOFTH WALES.

Figs. 3— 4. Ventral and front views of normal specimen from the same locality

and Collection .
Fig. ."). A very large specimen (silicifiedi. showing, rather plainly, one spiral

cone with some twenty coils and tongue-like, sinuation in front.
Reduced. Wellington. Coll. Minmg ,Museum. Sydney, X.S-W.
Figs. 6 — 7. Ventral views of two adult shells. Derrengullen Creek, near its
junction with Limestone Creek. Coll. Mitchell.
Atrypoidea aus/ralis Mitchell and Dun.
Figs. 8 — 9. Dorsal and ventral views, enlarged. Coll. Mining Museum Sydney.

A/iypa ereilirostris Mitchell and Dun.
Figs. 10 — 11. Dorsal and ventral views of two specimens, slightly reduced. Cave
Flat. Coll. Mitchell.

Atrypa desquamata Sowerby.
Figs. 12 — 13. Front and dorsal views of a specimen from Cave Flat, near the junc-
tion of the Gcodradigbee and Murrumbidgee Rivers. Coll. Mining
' Museum. Sydney, N.S.W.

Aiiypa inwginalis Dalm.
Figs. U — 16. \'entral. dorsal and front views of three nearly adult specimens.
Limestone Creek. Silverdale, near Bowning. Coll- Mitchell.

Plate xvi.

^■Itrypa Jiiarginalis Dalm.

Figs. 1 — ,5. Photos of specimens of different stages of growth, slightly enlarged.

Coll. Mitchell.
Fig. 6. A small specimen with concentric ornamentation, like A. Aspeia

Schloth. Coll. Mitchell.

Atrypoidea ans/ralis Mitchell and Dun.
Figs. 7 and 13. A sketch and photo, of a specimen from which the brachial is re-
moved and the spiral cones exposed. Fig. 13 (enlarged 2*.
Atrvpa diiii/i-ooiu'lisis Mitchell and Dun.
Figs. S — 11. Four different specimens, dorsal and ventral views.
Fig. 12. Same specimen as Fig. 9, enlarged (x 2).

Atrypa pn/r/ira Mitchell and Dun.
Fig. 14. Dorsal view, sHghtly enlarged.

Figs. 15 and 16. Ventral and dor.sal views of mature specimens (x 2'. Fig. 16
same as fig. 14. 'Limestone Creek. Coll. Mitchell.
Atrypa erec/irostris ilitchell and Dun.
Fig. 17. A voung specimen — shows the high, erect umbo, acutely pointed

beak, steeply sloping umbonal ridges, and radial striae, (x 2.1
Fig. IS. An immature specimen in which the dorsal valve has been weathered

away and exposed the spirals. The apex of the beak has been
weathered off. (x 2.1 Coll. Mitchell.
Atrypa reticularis Linn.
Figs. 19 and 20. Two specimens with the marginal fring s partly preserved.

277

NOTE ON CERTAIN VARIATIONS OF THE SPOROCYST IN A
SPECIES OF SAPROLEGNIA.*

By Marjoeie 1. Collins, B.Sc, Linneax Macleay Fellow of the Society m

Botany.

(Witli eleven Text-figures.)

Introduction.

During the summer of 1919, a quantity of Saprolegnia Avas made available to
the writer by the aecidental drowning of a beetle, in a tank situated in the glass-
house of the Botany Department, University of Adelaide. The material, with a
little water from the tank, was transferred to the laboratory and kept under
observation for some weeks. It was found to show variations in sporocyst forma-
tion similar to these recorded by Lechmeref for Saprolegnia Thureti and certain
additional variations which are thought to be of sufficient interest to place on
record.

Since sexual reproduction was not observed, it was impossible to identify the
species under examination with any accuracy. Judging by the stout nature of
the hyphae, however, it seems probable that the species is identical with that
of Lechmere's work. Saprolegnia Thur.-ti.

The writer's thanks are due to Professor T. G. B. Osborn. University of
Adelaide, in whose Department these observations were made, for his interest in
the work.

Previous In restigations.

In his investigation of certain species of Saprolegnia Lechmeret draws atten-
tion to the marked variability in the nature of sporocyst formation and dis-
charge. In addition to the normal Saprolegnia type of sporocyst, he records five
variations, each of which shows features which are characteristic of a distinct
genus of the Saprolegniaceae. These variations are all concerned with the nature
of discharge of the sporoeysts, and sometimes result in the suppression of the
first, second or of toth motile phases. The following is a brief summary of the
sporocyst variations observed by Lechmere : —

1. Leptolegnia condition, where the zoospores are arranged in a single row
in a long cylindrical sporocyst. Two motile phases.

2. Pythiopsis condition, where the spores swarm feebly from a club-shaped
sporocyst, and come to rest near the mouth of the sporocyst. No record of a
second motile phase.

*The observations recorded in this paper were made while the writer held the position
of Demonstrator in Botany, The University of Adelaide.
tNew Phytologist, ix., 1910, p.-TOS.
ILoc. lit.

278 NARIATIOX.S OP THE SPOROCYST IS SAPROLEGNIA,

3. Achilla eoiulitiun. wliert- the tirst iiKitile phase is merely represented by
the liberation of the spores, which encyst in a mass near the mouth of the sporo-
cyst. The second motile jjhase occurs later.

■i. Dictiiuchus condition, where the spores encyst within the sporocyst, re-
gardless of the terminal opening formed for their exit. Later, the spores leave
their cyst cases, enter upon the second motile phase, pass out through the
terminal opening, often pushing their empty cyst cases befoi-e them. A second
Dictyuchus condition is described* where the zoospores pass directly through the
wall of the sporocyst. There is no definite statement as to how the zoospores
pass through the sporocyst wall, but from Lechmere's figure 17 we can only
infer tJiat the sporocyst wall degenerates at certain places to allow the escape of
the zoospores.

5. Aplanes condition, where all motility is suppressed, and germination is
direct within the sporocyst, the germ tubes growing out through the wall of the
sporocyst.

A variation of the sporocyst known as the "Dictyuchics-torm." was recorded
for the Saprolegniaceae prior to Lechmere's work. Hartogt refers to this form
in his analysis of the genera in the Saprolegniaceae , as follows : —

"Dictyuchus-iorui. When the spores of Achlya or Saproleynia fail to leave
it [the sporocyst] at maturity, they encyst within, constituting this fomi or
dictyosporange. They either swarm ultimately in the second form or germinate
in situ by emission of a hypha." The "Dictyiichiui-lLorm" of Hartog is evidently
the dictyosporocyst of Lechmere wliich includes the Dictyuchus and Aplanes condi-
tions.

In the present investigation, which was made upon material growing under
natural conditions as well as upon white of egg cultures, the writer observed
sporocysts of the Lepiolegnia, Pythiopsis, Achlya and Aplanes types similar to
those described by Lechmere. In addition, certain remarkable composite sporo-
cysts were observed which combine the characters of from two to four genera;
also a new Dicti/uchtis condition which diffei's from either of those described by
Lechmere.t

Material was selected from the body, legs, wings and antennae of the in-
sect in order to ascertain whether the sporocyst variations were restricted to any
particular part of the host, and whether their occurrence is influenced by the
amount of available nutriment. Although the general growth of the hyphae was
found to be more vigorous upon the body of the insect, the abnornial sporocysts
occurred freely on all parts.

Upon transferring part of the material to tap water in the laboratory, the
production of sporocysts was stimulated in both old and young hyphae. Young
liyiihae show a preponderance of the normal Saprolegnia type of sporocyst in
which two motile (iliases were observed. In old hypliae, however, the new sporo-
cysts often form within or at the base of three or four discharged sjjorocysts. In
these cases some of the new zoospores find dilliculty of escape, and encyst during
their passage through the old dischai-ged sporocysts (Text-fig. 1). Encystment
within the sporocyst under these conditions is found to occur at apin-oximately
the same time as that of zoospores which succeed in escaping. Retained zoospore.";

•Now Phytologist, x., 191.1, pp. 167-203.

+Ann. Bet., xi.. 1888-89, p.20;{.

♦New Phytologist, ix., 1910, 1...W8: aii.t x.. liltl, p.lO;

BT MARJORIE I. COLLINS.

279

which encyst in tlie above manner, do not enter upon a second motile phase, but
germinate directly within the sporocyst. In some eases a germ tube from an en-
cysted zoospore has been observed to grow back through a series of empty sporo-
cysts and penetrate the hypha behind for some distance (Text-fig. 2) . The
Aplanes type of germination by penetration of the wall of the sporocyst, does not
occur under these circumstances.

In cultures made upon white of egg, early sporocyst formation was decidedly
of the Saprolegnia type, but after some days, all the variations recorded ap-
peared in the culture. Owing to the rapidity of their formation, it was impos-

Text-fig. 1. ShowiBg formation of new
sporocyst at base of old discharged
sporocysts. Note encystment of
some of the zoospores (luring pass-
age through empty sporocysts.
(x about 170).

Text-fig. 2. (iermination of spore which
has encysted within old sporocyst.
Note penetration of hypha behind,
(x about 170) .

sible to discover any definite sequence of formation of sporocyst types. It was
found, however, that normal sporocysts occur more abundantly in the young cul-
ture, though they continue to be formed to a slight degree, after the abnormal
forms have made their appearance. Leptolegma, Pythiopsis and Achlya condi-
tions were found to be more rare than Dietyuchus and Aplanes conditions.

The most noticeable feature of the material was the prevalence, under both
natural and cultural conditions, of two forms of sporocyst unrecorded by previous
investigators. The first of these is certainly a Dietyuchus condition, though it
differs in salient features from either of the Dietyuchus conditions described by
Lechmere. In reference to the formation of the Dietyuchus condition on a white
of egg culture, Lechmere says : —

"The numerous resting sporocysts present on the mycelium commenced to
develop into sporocysts. In by far the greater number of cases observed, the
spores encysted within the sporocyst before its discharge, in spite of the fact
that a tubular process was developed on the sporocyst before the spores encysted.'"'

•New Phytologist, ix., 1910, p.316, PI. 2, figs. 30, 31.

280

VARIATIONS OF THE SPOROCY><T IX SAPROLEGXIA,

Also, "The zoospores were observed lea\iug their cyst walls ami escaping through
the tubular process, pushing before them the empty cyst cases which were in the
tube/'t Leehmere only observed this condition during the development of rest-
ing sporocysts in white of egg cultures. It is interesting to note that here the
second motile phase commences within the sporocyst. A further Dietyuclnts con-
dition is recorded by Lechmere in his second paper.J He says of these sporo-
cysts : "they are always derived from gemmae, and in shajje they are broad and
short. The empt> spore eases form a dense network within the sporocyst, the
wall of which is very thin and is apparently directly penetrated by the zoospores
on their escape froiii their encysted condition."

The Dictyuchus condition observed by the writer, resembles the second of
Lechmere's Dictyuchus forms in the fact that the- second motile phase occurs out-
side the sporocyst, the first being suppressed. The sporocysts are found to be
either short and club-shaped, or long and cylindrical; they are never observed to
arise from resting sjjorocysts and occur freely under natural as well as cultural
conditions. The encysted spores send out a protuberance which penetrates the
sporocyst wall and projects for a distance of varying length (Text-fig. 3). The
protoplast then shrinks from the cyst wall, streams out through the cyst tube, the

Te.xt-tii^.S. Portion of younj; J)iclyi(c/ius sporocyst. Note germiiiiition of encysted
spores and passing of protoplast through cyst tube. (.\ 2:iO) .

Text-figs. 46. k 'la. Club-shaped /-'/V/,l7«7;ft.s' sporocyst show-ing liberation af ciliated
zoospore and the coming to rest and second encystinent of tlie latter, (x 2;iO).

tip of wliich degenerates. A ciliated zoospore is liberated which reuuiins at-
tached to the cyst tube for about five minutes, maintaining a rocking motion. It
then swims away and comes to rest close to the sporocyst after a period of from
3 — 5 minutes (Text-figs. Ah and 4«.). Tliis motility is noticeably feelile in com-
parison with the vigorous motility in Lechmere's first Dicttiuclius condition where
the zoospores push (lieir eiiii>ty cyst cases l)e1'orc them wlieii leaving the sporo-

ifd., ix., 1910, p.:il7.

:/(/., X., 1911, p.l8(i, fig. 17.

BY MARJORIE I. COLLINS.

281

cyst. Direct gennination follows this second encystment. This mode of dis-
charge, through cyst- tubes which penetrate the wall of the sporoeyst, is similar
io the mode of discharge described and figured by Lotsy for the genus Dictyn-
chus.^

Text-fig. 5. Dictyuchus type of sporoeyst incompletely discharged.

projecting cyst tubes from empty cyst cases, (x about 170) .

,, - Text-fig. 6. Portion of a cylindrical sporoeyst showing combination of

■ ' Z?/r/j'i<r/zKi and W/>/ff«fi- conditions, (x 230).

'• Text-fig.7. Composite spoi-ocyst showing predominance of ' ' Dictyit-Aplanes' '

C(/ndition. Mote Achlva type of branching with lateral sporocysts of

normal Saprolcgnia form. In the latter, complete discharge has led

to encystment and germination within the sporoeyst. (x about 170).

The partly or wholly discharged sporocysts with their empty cyst cases and
projecting cyst tubes with abruptly broken tips, present a peculiar and striking
appearance (Text-fig. 5). In some instances there is evidence of a primary attempt
at discharge of the sporoeyst in the nonnal Saprolegnia manner through a terminal
opening (Text-fig. 5).

§Lotsy, Pflanzensystematik, i., 1907, p. 164, fig. 95,

282

\ AHIA'DONN oy THE ISPOKOC'YST IX SAPROLE(iXIA,

In the opinion of the writer tlie al)ove is the true DictiiudiuH couditiou, that
described by Leci'.niere being a transitional stage to this condition.

In addition to a true Dictyuchun and a true Aplanes condition, an interesting
transition often occurs which combines the featui'es of both these types. In cer-
tain sporocysts a number of encysted spores germinate directly, producing long
narrow tubes resembling young hypliae. which penetrate the sporoeyst wall.
Other encysted spores, within the same sporoeyst, after producing a cyst tube,
cease to germinate and enter u])on a Dicti/iichus condition, the second motile
phase taking place with the liberation of a zoospore from a broken cyst tube
(Text-fig. 6) . This type of sporoeyst is a combination of that where all motility
is suppressed (Aplanes) with one in which the second motile phase is present,
although noticeably feeble and short in duration. It is interesting to note that
transitional form-i occur, between the true Dictiiucln(s conditioii, through com-
posite sporocysts where either the Dictyuchus or Aplanes condition is predomin-
ant, to the pure Aplanes form. It is suggested that this composite sporocy.st
should lie known a'; tlie "Dicti/ii-Aplaves" condition.

Text-fig.8. Club-shaped sporoeyst of the Aplanes form. Swollen structures at "a"
and "b" ai-e formed by the streaming of the protoplasm towards the tip of the
germ tube, (x 230).

Text-fig. 9. Shows formation of two germ tubes in terminal swelling after streaming of
protoplasm has ceased, (x 230).

Rare examples of composite sporocysts are found, in which the features of
Achli/a, Saprolegnia, Dictyuchus and Aplanes are eoipbined. In Text-fig. 7 the
Achhja type of branching is shown. The main sporoeyst is of the "Dictyu-
Aplanes" form, while the two basal sjiorocysts are normal Saprolegnia sporo-
cysts incompletcl ,- disduirged.

BV JIAKJOKIK I. IJOI.LIXS.

283

An interesting feature often occurs iu the Aplaties type of sporocyst. iu wiiat
may be regarded as an attempt at escape of the protoplast during germination.
After some of the germ-tubes liave readied a certain length, a streaming move-
ment is observed from the body of the germinating spore. Part of the proto-
plasm streams to the tip of the tul)e, where a large swollen structure is formed
(Text-fig. 8). Tbi? swollen structure never ruptures the tip of the germ-tube.
but appears to function as an encysted sj-)ore from which one or two germ-tubes
may ultimately develo]i (Text-fig. 9).

From these observations it seems conceivable that the Aplanes cunditiiju has
arisen from the Dictiiuchus condition by the delay of protoplasmic activity until
the length of the germ-tube renders escape ineffective.

Formation of New Sporoeysts.

Owing to the prevalence of Dicti/iichiis, Aplanes, and "DictyH-Aphinefi" forms
in which the original spoi'm-yst remains l)lockeil either by empty cyst cases or bv

Text-fig. 10. Short Didyuchus sporooyst showing penetration of hypha at base in
attempt to form new sporocyst. (x 230).

Text-fig.ll. Base of old Dictyicchus sporocyst showing lateral divergence of hypha
to form new sporocyst. (x 230) .

germinating spores, the formation of a new sporocyst almost invariably takes
]ilaie l)y the lateral outgrowth of the hypha from the base of the sporocyst. The
hypha grows forward until further progress is blocked, lateral divergences then
taking place (Text-tigs. 10 and 11). In this manner a pseudo-^4c/;Z(/o condition
is obtained.

284 VARIATIOXS OF THE SPOROCTST IN SAPBOLEGNIA.

Summary.

1. Certain speeiw ol' iSaprole<jnia are known to show variations in sporocyst
formation and discbarge, wlien grown under cultural conditions.

2. In the present investigation certain variations are recorded tor an undeter-
mined species of Saprolegnia growing under natural as well as cultural con-
ditions. Leptolegnia, Fytliiopsis and Achlya conditions occurred rarely, while
Dictyuchuf: and ApUuies conditions were found freipiently. These variations oc-
curred in botl? club-shaped and cylindrical sporocysts, but weie not observed
arising from resting sporocysts.

3. The Bictyuchzis condition described here diti'ei-s from either of those described
by Leehmere and is held to be the true DictyiKhus condition.

4. Composite sporocysts were observed, the most important of which combine
the features of Dictyuchus and Aplaiies. The name "Dictyii-Apla>ie$" is sug-
gested for these sporocysts.

5. Evidence is given in favour of the suggestion that ttie Aplaneg condition has
arisen from the Dictyuchus condition, by failure of the protoplast to escape
from the germ-tube during its early growth.

6. New sporocysts are frequently formed as lateral, basal brandies of old sporo-
cysts, owing to the blocking of the latter with empty cyst cases and germin-
ating spores.

All Text-figures were made at table le\el, with Zeiss camera lucida and tube at
160 mm., Leitz objectives 3 and (i and oculars 2 and 4.

285

THE GEOLOGY AND PETROLOGY OF THE GREAT SERPENTINE
BELT OF NEW SOUTH WALES.

Part IX. — The Geology, Palaeontology axd Petrography of the

CURRABUBtTLA DISTRICT, WITH NOTES ON ADJACENT REGIONS.

By Professor W. N. Benson, B.A., D.Sc, F.G.S., W. S. Dun, and
W. R. Browne, B.Sc.

Section A. — General Geology.

By W. N. Benson, B.A., D.Sc, F.G.S. Professor of Geology, The University
of Otago. N.Z • formerly Linnean Maeleay Fellow of the Society in Geology.

(Plates xvii.-xvii(/; Text-figures 1-9.)

CONTENTS.

Page

Introduction and Acknowledgments 285

General Geology of the Western Zone of the Great Serpentine Belt, especially

the Somerton-CarroU District 286

The Geology of the Currabubula District 292

Tectonics ■ 307

The Age of the Werrie Volcanic Series and its relation to the crust-movements 308

The Physiography of the Peel River Valley and its bordering Ranges 309

Summary of Geological History 315

Introduction and Acknowledgments.

It has been the endeavour in previous parts of this series to present in each
part a fairly detailed account of some area or problem investigated in the Great
Serpentine Belt. The preliminary survey of the whole belt, described in Parts
i. and vi. (1-2),* and other studies (3) have indicated the significance of the
Carboniferous crust-movements and ^'rilcanicity in the general tectonic and petro-
logic evolution of the Serpentine Belt, and it is therefore desirable that there
should be made a detailed investigation of the Carboniferous history of the Ser-
pentine Belt, in addition to the Devonian history to which attention has chiefly
been directed hitlicrt(i. For this reason the Currabubula disti'ict was selected as
most suitable for study, being easy of access, and hang midway between the
Burindi and Rocky Creek regions already examined (though but rapidly ), and the
more fully-known extensive development of Carboniferous rocks in the region
north of Newcastle. Some four weeks were spent by the writer in surveying iu
1915, but he was unable to visit the region again until January, 1917, when,
accompanied by Browne, he spent a week in completing the mapping of about

* The figures in brackets refer to the bibliography at the end of the paper.

286 GEOLOGY ANU PETROLOGY OP' THE GREAT SERPEXTISE BELT OF X.S.W.

seventy-five square miles aud visiting some outlying districts. Removal to New-
Zealand prevented the writer from continuing in further detail the mapping thus
rapidly outlined. Meantime, the investigations by Mr. SussmUeh and others
showed the widespread nature of the tluvioglacial phenomena in Carboniferous
rocks discovered in 1914 by Professor David, and of this work an exceedingly
important statement has just appeared (4). A two days* visit to C'urralndiula
jiaid by Browne in September, 1919, resulted in the discovery of the glacial
phenomena in this district also, an observation coniii-med immedi:itely afterwards
by Professor David. The wiiter paid further brief visits in December, 1919, and
.January, 1920, and noted the extension of these glacial beds, and, in more detail,
tlie stratigraphica' succession. While, therefore, we are now able to give a general
account of the geology of this tlistrict, it is obvious that much remains to l>e done
in the detailed study of all the formations, and in particular it must be pointed out
that the boundaries of the subdivisions of the sedimentary series and the estimates
of their thickness are only rough approximations, and no attempt has been made
to differentiate between the numerous igneous formations, sills, dykes, breccias,
etc.. grouped together as the roughly outlined Warragnndi complex. The im-
probability of oppi.rtunity for further detailed work in this region seems to jus-
tify the publication of results of our studies up to the present time.

For the purpose of linking this study to those made in the regions about
the head of the Manilla River (2), the available data concerning the intervening
region have also been summarised.

T'le writers thanks are due in the tirst place to his collaborators, Mr. W. R.
Browne and Mr. W. S. Dun, to Professor David for helpful discussion in the
field and in the laboratory, to Professor Lawson for his interesting palaeol)otanical
notes, and to Mr. F. Chapman, A.L.S., for descriptions of oolitic limestones.
Cliaetetes and Bryozoa. Mr. Porter, of Tamworth, first directed our attention to the
occurrence of fossils at Currabubula, and Mrs. Scott to the south-eastern corner o''
the Parish of Babbinboon, from whicii locality she has made a large collection avail-
able for our study. To the hosjiitality of her parents, Mr. and Mrs. Mackay, of Allan-
bank, the writer is indebted for the opportunity of visiting this most interesting
area. The hospitality of Mr. and Mrs. Doyle, of Purle\-vvah, TVei-ris Creek, made
possible the examination of the upper parts of \Verrie's Creek, and to the gui<lance
of Mr. Hammond, of Escott Park, is due the knowledge of the Permian Rocks of
this district.

(iKXKRAf- Geology of the Wester.v Zone of the Great Serpentine Belt,
EspECLiLLT tti'-; So.mekton-Carroll District.

In the northern region of the Great Serpentine Belt (2) the general strm;-
ture is as follows: — Immediately west of the zone of serijentine, there are strongly
folded Devoni.an rocks, with dccasionally infolded Carboniferous rocks. West
from this, lie gently, sometimes stee])ly, folded Upper Devonian (Barraba) uuid-
st(mes with tuffs, etc., passing uj) into Lower Carboniferous maiine limestones,
with occasional bands of conglomeiate, limestones and tuffs, the Burindi Series,
on which lie a largely conglomeratic series and beds containing Carboniferous
plant fossils with abundant tuffs and volcanic^ rocks, to which the term Rocky
Creek Series was applied, the whole forming a conformable se(|uence. The two
Carboniferous formations are developed chiefly in a synclinal zone lying abi>ut
twenty miles west of the serpentine. [See (1), p. 50.3 and PL xxi., fig. 4, and

BT W. N. BENSON, W. S. DUN^ AND W. R. BROWNE. 287

(2), pp. 264-272, PI. xx., fig. 4.] Studies iu the southern regiou by Professor
David and Mr. Sussmilch (4) have shown that there also the Carboniferous is
divisible into a lower marine portion, which, as pointed out by the writer (1, p.
504), is to be correlated with the Burindi Series, and an upper portion of con-
glomerates, tuffs and other volcanic rocks and glacial formations. As this por-
tion is so much more extensive and varied in the Southern district than in the
Northern, tlie name Rocky Creek Series was clearly not sufficiently inclusive, and
the term "Kuttung Series" was adopted to cover all those formations that lie
between the top of the Burindi and the base of Permo-Carboniferous Beds. The
term Rocky Creek Series, if it be retained, must, then, be considered as indicat-
ing a local development of the Kuttung Series, and the latter term will be em-
ployed herein iu its original significance. The possibility of correlation of por-
tions of the Kuttung Series in different localities, e.g., the Rocky Creek and Wal-
larobba conglomerates, or the several horizons of "Varve Rock" can be determined
only after much more extensive work than has yet been undertaken.

If we trace the development of the Carboniferous rocks southwards from the
Gwydir, the following is the outline of the structures observed. The syncline,
which seems to be broken by strike faulting, is seen to form the northern spur of
the Nandewar Ranges, west of Horton River. It is intersected liy Rocky Creek,
and extends beyond the head of the Manilla River. It is the most marked of
several }iarallel synclines, the axes of which undulate southward from the head
of the Manilla River. The fold axis seems to have been warped upwards, and
the Kuttung sediments have been removed for some miles {see text-fig. 1). The
rocks outcrojiping at the surface are the underlying Burindi beds, and those near
Rangira have been hastily examined by Mr. Pittman (5) who obtained therefrom
specimens of Bhynchonella and Cyrtuceras. In the Parish of Tulcumbah, Mr.
Porter collected oolitic limestone which has been examined by Mr. F. Cliaiiuian
(see below). The Kuttung rocks appear again, however, where this synclinul
zone crosses the \amoi River, striking S. 35° E., as noted by Pittman (6) and
Andrews (7) . At Keepit, the syncline is Ijroken by a strike-fault throwing down
to the west (6), and this faulted structure has also been recognised by Messrs.
Cotton and Walkom (8) at Carroll Gap, two miles to the south of the river,
•where Burindi rocks only occur. Eight miles in a south-easterly direction from
here, the low ridges rise up to form the northern extremity of the Peel Range.
According to the writer's hurried observations, this range here consists of the
eastern limb of the syncline of Kuttung rocks, the eastern lieing Iiere tlie down-
thrown side of the fault. The underlying, richly fossiliferous Burindi rocks
forming the trough and western limb of the syncline make the foothills to the Peel
Range and extend for several miles on either side of it. From this point, the axis
of the syncline pitches steadily to the south, and the Kuttung rocks on either
limb of the syncline make up the Peel Range, which, for some distance, consists
of two series of opposed, slightly divergent, dip-ridges or cuestas.

A digTession must here be made to point out the great interest of the region
just described, which, unless its geology is unduly obscured by the recent alluvial
deposits noted bv Cotton and Walkom (8), is likely to be of very great im-
portance in the study of the Burindi rocks of this State. The first examination of
the region was made by Sir T. L. Mitchell in 1831 (9. pp. 38, 30). The lii^-
torie interest of the early work on this region makes full quotation desirable :

"We met with a rather singular formation of little hills formed l)y pro-
jecting strata, the strike extending in a direction of N. 30 W., and the dip being

288

GEOLOGY AS]) PKTKOLOGT OF TllK GREAT SERre.VTIXE BELT OF N.S.W.

nV W. X. BENSON, W. S. DUN, AND W. R. BROWNE. 289

to tlie east at au angle of about 3U° . The rock appears to consist in some parts
of a butt' ealcarecus sandstone, calcareous tuff, and more abundantly of limestone,
with disseminated portions of calcareous spar, principally due to
fragments of crinoidea. At a lower part in the same rock less compact, I found
a beautiful ehalcedonic cast, apparently of a terehra' (Loxonemaf) ; ''the cal-
careous sandstone .... contained fragments of shells of the liitorina or
turbo" (Macrocheilus filosa). ''We encamped on the 'Nammoy' or Peel river at
the foot of a small hill named 'Perimbungay.' In the left bank of the river 1
found a conglomerate-rock consisting of waterworn fragments of serpentine and
trap cemented b\ calcareous spar." "The range we had crossed at Turi was near
us to the westward and a conical hill called 'Uriary' in the direction of Turi, was
the most prominent feature to the south-east. The Peel continued its course
through this range which presented a more defined and elevated outline where it
continued beyond the river."

In 1852, the Rev. W. B. Clarke, visited this area (10) and recognised the
I'elationship of the marine beds with those elsewhere in the Colony. "In my
report of September 6, 1852,'' he says, "I stated my opinon that there is a
regular sequence of the various beds of this formation over the Lepidodendron
beds of the Manilla and Goonoo Goonoo. I have now to show that the middle
beds of this formation, those of the Hunter and Hawkesbury, are widely distri-
buted in the western border of the countrj' between New England and the in-
terior. Sir T. L. Mitchell in 1831 found strata having the usual strike and
dip of the region and bearing fossils which evidently belong to similar roc'js
which I have founJ abundant in similar remains at the base of the Carboniferous
on the Paterson and Hunter, and more recently I have obtained from the same
neighbourhood near the junction of the Peel and Namoi rivers other fossils
which are identical with specimens coming from WoUongong jn the Illawarra,
where they occur in beds that pass in ascending order into the coal-bearing grits
and sandstones of the Wollondilly and Hunter River basins."

About the years 1888-90, Mr. Donald Porter collected a number of fossils
from here which were transferred to the Australian Museum and to the Mining
Museum, and in Ihe following year Stonier (11) remarks that at Somerton the
marine beds "appear to belong to two distinct series which are unconformablo,
and may perhaps belong to the Upper and Lower Marine. The evidence is not
conclusive, nor are the sections sufficiently clear to establish the uneonformiiv
without a detailed survey." Mr. Etheridge (12), in the same year, accepted,
with some doubt, the correlation of these beds with the Upper Marine Series, a
correlation which was abandoned in the following year when a more extensive
study of the fossils had been made (13) . No further field studies were made of
this region for a long time, except the visits of Mr. Pittman (6) and Mr.
Andrews (7), })ut large series of fossils were obtained by Messrs. Porter,
Musson, Pittman and Cullen, which were in part described by Mr. Etheridge (14,
15), and have also been studied by Mr. Dun and the writer in the present paper.
These have been supplemented by collections obtained from the south-eastern
portion of the parish of Babbinboon by Mrs. Scott and the writer. Hers,
adjacent to portion 14 of the Parish, there is a low hill capped with a horizontal
layer of fine-grained limestone, beneath which is a calcareous and tuttaceous mud-
stone with abundant fossils. The following is the list up to the present date of
the fossils recognised in the region contained l)etween Carroll, Babbinboon, Mt.

2i)0 (jEOI.OGY AX1> PKTROI.OtiY OK THK (lUKAT SKIIPKNTINK. IlKLT OF X.S.W.

Uriari and Somertou. lu a subsecjuent paper the localities ±or oaili will be in-
dicated as I'ar as possil)le with tlie jiresent indefinite statements available. The
list cannot be considered exhaustive. A distinctive feature is the abundance oi
Pnxtuctus »)«)"/(■«?«,■>'. casts of Loxoiifma, and forms of GusaeMina.

Plaxtae. — Girianella.

PoRlFERA. — Sponge spicules.

COELEXTERATA. — Zapliretitls culUui, '/.. smnpliuens^ Z. sp. indet., Aiiii/yilai-
ophyllum etheridgei, gen. et sp. nov.. Diplii/phiilliim sp. indet.. .' Lithostrntion sp.
indet., ? Tri/plaama s)!. indet.. Mirhelinia tenHixepta, Michelitiia sp. nov., Chaetetes
spiiiiiliferus, sp. nov

Hrvozoa — Fistulipora microficopica, sp. nov., Cyclnidntriipa ou-ilralis, gen.
et s]i. nov. llaHopura fruticosa, TImmniscus sp.

Hrachiopoda. — Orthotetef! crenistria, Chonetes aspinoaa, Pnidnctiiri hemi-
>:phaericiis, P. miiricatKS, P. puitulnsux, P. !iemireticulatu!<, P. sp. indet.. Orthis
(Rlupidomella) aMstrtilis, Orthis {ifchizoplwria) resupinata. Rlnjiicli(/)ieUu plewn-
do)i, R. sp. indet., Diel<ismn sacculitm var. hat-tata, D. saccnlum var. amygdala, D.
sp. indet., Semiiiula subtilita, Spiriferu bisulcata, 6'. davidis, S. duplicicontata, .V.
mosquensix, S. pingttis, S. pingwx var. elongatn, var. nov., .5. striata, S. striato-
conrohttn, sp. nov.. >'. sp. indet.. Siiriiigntln/ris e.r^iiperoiix. Rct:in vf. idntrir,
Actinocunch us plano.sitlcata.

PELECrpODA. — Saiiguiiioliles triradiatiis, sp. nov., .S'. sj). indet., Kdmniidia sp.
indet., Ctenodonta sj). indet.. S uadaua sj>. indet., ParaUeindon canifi, sp. nov,
Pteronites subpitttmini. P. taiiipteroid^g, Kochia striata, sp. nov.. Conocardinm
sp. indet., Pnsidoiiiella.' spp. indet., Spathella sp. indet.. Pavenka purlrri, sp. nov.,
Ai'icidopecten sp. indet. (ef. A. granosus), A. sp. indet., Entolium ariculatum, E.
sp. indet., Leiopteria aiistrnlis, Scaldia sp. indet.

Gastropoda. — Pleiirotomaria sp. indet., Ptiicumphalns culleui. sp. nov..
Ptgcomphalitia sp. indet.. Mourlonia ortiata, sp. nov.. .1/. sp. indet.. Gosseietinu
aiistralin, G. auatralis var. aita, var. nov., G. maclaiii, s]i. nov.. G. acotti. sp. nov..
Porcellia piearsi, Phanerotremata australis, sp. nov., P. aiistralis var. alta, var.
nov.. Miirchisonia spp. indet.. Belierophon sp. cf. /i/x/cd.v, B. sp. indet., Eiwni-
phalus carrolleuxii sp. nov.. E. cera, E. pentangulatus, E. sp. indet., StrapnroUii'i
davidis, s\t . nov.. \alici>j>sis Jir,''rispira, X. ghdidsa. X. tibliqua, sp. nov.. Macru-
eheilus filostts, M. sp.. Loxnnema babbinboonettsis, L. cf. lefevrei, L. sp. indet.,
Platyceras sp. indet , Conidaria sp. indet.. Tfyidiies sji. indet.

SCAPHOPODA. — Dentalium sp. indet.

CephaLiOPODA — Orthoceras sp. indet., Trochncerns sji, indet.. Cyrloceros sp.
indet. (? Gyrnceras). Gomplniceras.

TRiLOniTA. — Phillipsin .' mhitsta.

As will l)e shown in section B of tliis paper, this series of fossils indicates
that the Burindi beds here may be correlated witli the middle portion of the
Carboniferous limestone of Western Europe. It is not possible yet to indicate
the thickness of the fossiliferons beds, or to state whethei- there is any zonal dis-
triI)ution of forms, but tliis area is strongly to be reconnnended as one suitalile for
such furthei' studies.

Tn regard to the lithohigy of these beds, little can yet l)e added to the ro-
marks made above save to call attention to the importance of the oolitic limestone
bands .which are so frequent a feature of Bnrindi rocks. Besides the occurrene>>
in the Parish of Tulcunihah. north of Carroll, noted above, there is also a patch

CV W. X. UKNSOX, W. 8. DUX, AXU \V. R. BROWXF;. 291

aljout a huuflred yards in leng-tli ou the western edge of Conditional Purchase
Leiiso 172 in the south of the Parish of Baljbinboon. Mr. Chapmnn in private
communication states that the former rock contains stem-joints ;'nd nodal joints
of a crinoid, which are like those that may be seen in the IIexaeri)iichte, though it
would be hazardous to point out their exact relationship on such n\eagre evidence.
Numerous gT'ooved brachial ossicles occur as nuclei in the oolitic gi-ains of this
Jock. This limestone is interstratified in a calcareous mudstone with abundant
crinoids and some corals, dipping E 30° X. at 40°.

We now return from this long digression to trace further southwai'ds the
tectonic structures. The Bnrindi beds have lieen traced down the western side of
the Peel Range to the ('urral)ubula Creek at Piallaway, and preserve throughout
an easterly dip, though with slight variation in strike and inclination, and doubt-
less form the western limb of the syneline, and are overlain by Kuttung rocks.
South-east from Piallaway, the diverging ranges of Kuttung rocks are sei^arateJ
by an extensive volcanic formation, the Werrie Series, chiefly composed of basalt
flows overlying the Kuttung rocks, and as the main syneline plunges more deeply
to the south, these form the broad i>lain l)etweeu Currabubula and Werris Creek
townships, enclosed by the ranges of Kuttung rocks to the east and west. The
eastern range is the main Peel Range and is the more continuous, though tra-
versed by several gaps. It extends past the Cunabubula. Werrie's and Quii)olly
Creeks and continues southwards towards the Liverpool Ranges, the component
rocks liaving a gei.eral dip of 35° to 40° in a direction about W. 20° S. The
euesta or diji-ridge cliaracter of the ranges is most marked, es]iecially where, as
in the Currabubula District, tliey contain very resistant stratiform masses of
andesite. The marine rocks continue in a zone dipping beneath the Peel Range
and resting in turn upon the Lepidodendroti aiistrale beds (Barraba Series), as
noted at Goonoo Goonoo by Clarke (10) and Stonier (111. Ch:iracteristic fos-
sils have l)een obtained east of Curi-abubula (see later) and further south at
Gowrie and particularly at Goonoo Goonoo.

The following fossils have been recorded in the last two districts: — Martinia
sp., Xiieula sp., Entolium aricidatum. Ariculnpecten sp.. yincrdchilhui, Yraiiin
konixcki, Orthoceras •<]!.

The westerly segment of the syneline of Kuttung rocks crosses t'urral)ul)ula
Creek by Piallaway and continues southwards across "Werrie's Creek (whicii occu-
pies a narrow defile ) to Quipolly Creek.

South of Werris Creek, the opening between these diverging ridges is par-
tially closed by a little cross warping bringing up a minor anticline of Kuttung
rocks and cutting off a small basin of Werrie Basalts. Between this ami the
western range there lias been let down into the Werrie basalts a small patch of
Glossopteris-henrins: sandstone, possibly belonging to the Newcastle Series. Thus
the region of Werrie basalts between Curral)ul)ula and Werris Creek forms almost
an enclosed' basin. Within this the low land is interrupted by the resistant moun-
tain ma.ss of Warragundi, a volcanic complex, from which extends a
series of ridges following a bundle of dykes, running in a curve to the south-west.
To the north-west, the Dunover Mountains appear from a distant inspection to be
also a complex of volcanic rocks, more resistant to erosion than the surrounding
basalts. Here and there are minor intrusions of basalts, probably of Tertiary
age. and recent alluvium occurs in some amount in tlie valleys.

The main structures and formations have been now outlined, but the details
of stratigraphic succession of tlie sef|UPnce of iuiieous events and flie coniiilexifies

292 GEOLOGY AND PETROLOGY OF THE GREAT SERPEXTIXE BELT OF N.S.W.

of struetui-e introduced by faulting, can be i)aitl\ realised from a t-ousideratioa
of tbe features of the Currabubula district.

The Geology of the CuRRABunvLA District.

Previous Investigation.

Tile tiist account of this district was given l)y Sir T. L. Mitchell in 1831
(1, p. 31), in the following words: "The country appeared tolerably open and
level, so that we could pursue our course in one direction nearly eight miles.
The most conspicuous hiU on our right was named by the native "Barragundy."
It was \-isible during the whole of our day's journey. We at length entered upon
an open and grassy plain, and found in the skirts of the wood beyond it a channel
containing water in alnindance. and which was known to the natives as "Carra-
bobila."* Beyond this channel arose a peaked and picturesque range whereof tlie
highest summit was named "Turi." Several guUies were dilTicult for the passage
of the carts, and detained the party in its ascent, but at length we reached the
top of tlie pass and crossed the range, which appeared to be continuous, thus
separating the basin of the Peel from that of the water falling into the Liverin)ol
Plains.** We were agreeably surprised to ttnd that the opposite side of these
hills, and the whole face of the country beyond them presented a very different
appearance from that through which we had passed. A gently sloping extremity

lay before us for eiglit miles in the dii-ection of our proposed route

The heights which we had crossed appeared to extend from the Liverpool Range
to the northward as far as could be seen; but the native told me tliat it soon
terminated on the river 'Callala' (or Peel), whose course he said turned west-
ward."

The Rex-. W. B. Clarke, twenty years later, determined the height of Turi
Peak as 2,952 ft., but made no reference to the geology of the region (10) ; Mr.
Etheridge received samples of erinoidal limestone from Glen Donald, four miles
east of Currabubula in 1890 (11) ; and in 1905 Mr. Andrews briefly referred to
the topogi-aphical features (17). In 1913 Mr. Carne examined the Glnssoptcris
sandstones of Werris Creek (18) and Mr. Cambage obtained Itliacopteris near
Currabubula (19) . The occurrence of Archaencalamitea was also reported in
1914 (20). No connected account of the geology of the region has, Lowever, yet
been given.

The Buritidi Series.

Tlie eastern iiurtimi of tlie Cuiialmbula region consists of rocks of marine
origin. They eomurise a lower and an upper portion. The former is made up
of marine mudstones of an olive-gieen colour showing Carboniferous fossils
mostly as easts. They contain here and there small lentides of limestone up to
a few inches in thickness and a few feet in diameter, and are interbedded with
tuffs of intermediate or keratophyric composition, the tuffaceous zones being also
at times fossiliferous. Narrow zones of conglomerate or pebbly tuff occur, and
locally larger masses of coralline (Zaphrentis) and erinoidal limestones. In
general, these beds resemble quite clearly the Burindi rocks in the western slopes

•Mitchell mills : "Even before iiiy men had seep this .spot, the uative name in their
mouths was corruiiteil into 'Teri-ible Billy." Locally this name is now apjilieil to the
hill. olHcially teniiod " Wan-ai^umU ' " or "Ten-ililc Mountain."

•'PioViably Mitchell's party passed thi'ou>;h the ijap north of Duii I'eak.

BY W X. BENSON, W. S. DUN, AND W. R. BROWNE.

293

Plains

n

Werris Creek Warraoundi fom^ilen Kurfung Scncs, Tamwrth

Plains (Bosalt-)

/Indesiffs Sills Plains

Livert^ool
Plains

B

Lower Carbs
Burindi 5er<es

L'|3^er Oevonian
Barraba 5ene«^

D

Text-fis-2. Geological Structure of the Currabubula and Werris Creek Districts.

of New England (2) and near Dungog (4). To the west they appear to pass
down into the tfpper Devonian (Barraba) rocks at Goonoo Goonoo, which con-
tain Lepidodendron australe, but the exact position of the zone of passage has
not been determined In the north-western portion of the area mapped, in a
small gully in portion 197* there occur four narrow seams of very impure coal,
the thickness being only twelve inches. They are all much veined by calcite.
They recall the carbonaceous shales of Clarencetown (21) to some extent, but are
not among freshwater strata. Among these marine rocks has been thrust a sill
of glassy (sometimes lithoidal) andesite which forms the easternmost of the more
or less continuous zones of sills in this region, leaches a thickness of about four
hundred feet but pinches out south of the railway line; where thickest it forms
the high cuesta called Minnarooba. Here, in its northern part in portion 199, the
intrusive character of the igneous rocks is clearly indicated at its upper surface
where the andesite has enclosed and indurated the fragments of mudstone. The
mudstone is also somewhat indurated adjacent to the andesite in the small ridge
crossed by the railway cutting in portion 35. A few fossils have been noted in
portion 199, but the majority were found near the railway cutting in portions 83
85, and 35 in Mr. Donaldson's property (11) . The writer's attention was called
to these fossils by Mr. Donald Porter, and in collecting them he was aided by Mr.
C. E. Tilley, B.Sc, and Mr. D. A. Pritchard, B.Sc. The gem of the collec-
tion, however, the Cactocrinus, was presented by Mr. Donaldson and found prob-
ably a short distance south of the railway line. The collection is remarkably
depauperate. A i^ebbly or conglomeratic layer is intercalated in the mudstone
here and a small lenticular mass of limestone, a few yards in leng-th and width,
occurs which is made up almost entirely of crinoidal fragments and Zaphrentis.

The following are the forms recognised, ob\'iously representing the Burindi
fauna: — Cactocrinw hrownei, sp. nov., Zaphrentis culleni, Zaphrentis sp. indet ■
Fenestslla sp. indet.. Chonetes hardrensis, Orthotetes crenistria, Productus longi-
spiniis, Ortli'is {Tthipidomella) australis, OrtJiis (Schisophoria) resupinala, Spiri-

* Portion numbers refer to the Parish of Currabubula except where otherwise stated.

294 OKOLO(;V and PKXIiOUJdV ok TIIK IIREAT SERPENTIXK llELT OF N.S.W.

fera bisiilcala, ,Spirifera sp. iiidet., Spin'feri>iu iiisculjilti, Vielu.-nnu auccuhoti var.
hastata, two indefinite species of Pelecypoch, Conularia sp. '?, PhilUiJsia sp. ?.

The lower limit of the Burindi })eds is not definiti'. hut we may assume their
thickness to be not less than twcnty-tivf hundred feet, and the lower portion, con-
taining marine fossils, to be about half that amount, which agrees with the esti-
mate of their thickness in the type locality (1, p. 508) . The upper moiety of
the Burindi Series does not make any marked outcrop, but seems to consist of
mudstone and also of very easily <lecomposed basic tuffs, yielding a tenacious
red soil. At the base of these a stronger band of tuff was found to contain hspi-
dodendron veltheimianum. Scattered through the belt of red soil are irregular
nodular masses of silica, sometimes apparently chalcedonic, at other times clearly
silicified tuffs, more often replacements of some unknown material. This horizon
of silicification runs throughout the region mapped, and is immediately ff)llowed
by rather more felsitic tuft's.

Above tliis there is a zone of passage into the more keratophyric tuft's wliich
form the base of the Kuttung Series. This zone is developed along the eastern
slopes of Mts. Cobla and Sugarloaf, and here Mr. Donaldson found the silicified
plant remains described in the jialaeontological section of this paper, and consist-
ing of gymnospermous wood and a bundle of roots, both of an indeterminate
nature.

Lower Portion of the Kuttung Series.

In the region mapped the distinction between the base of the Ivuttmig Series
and the top of the Burindi Beds is not sharp. The former are less readily de-
composed and contain one or more marked pel)bly zones. This basal portion of
the Kuttung Series may be traced along the scarp of the easternmost line of the
westerly inclined dip-slopes of the Peel Range, which line of ridges is made up of
a nearly continuous band of more or less glassy hypersthene andesite about five
hundred feet in tluekness. The relation of this to the adjacent Kuttung rocks
is not clear, for distinctive outcrops bave not been discovered (but see p. 304).
The Kuttung Kocks are here mostly of medium grain, gritty tuft's composed
chiefly of acid felspar, and are associated with occasional zones of thinly bedded
olive-green mudstone; and of pebbles wliich are apparently waterworn. No
glacial striae have been found on any of these yet, but they have not been closely
investigated. In Turi Creek (Portions 57 and 59) a thin flow of basalt occui's.
Through this portion of the series there extends another series of stratiform
masses of more or less gkssy audesite. Duri Peak, for example, is a magnificent

Text-fig.y. Duri Park tioiii the east.

BY W. N. BENSON, W. S. DUN, AND \V. R. BROWNE. 295

cuesta, formed of a' sheet of igneous rock over three hundred and fifty feet in
thickness, tlie western dip slope and almost vertical eastern scarp being very dis-
tinctive (see Text fig'. 3.) South of this, there is a small hill in portion llfi which
seems to be composed of a lenticular mass of tlie rock about two hundred feet in
thickness. Further south, in Sandy Gully, is a larger mass composed of both
vitropliyric and litlioidal andesite which together reach a thickness of nearly
fifteen hundred feet, and further south again, oh the margin of the map, is the
great mass forming Kingsmill's Peak, the thickness of which has not yet been
a-scertained. It does not seem likely that these isolated masses of pyro.xene
andesite are repetitions In* faulting of portions of the continuous median zone,
though perhaps not impossible. Strike faulting occurs to some extent, but its
fiill effects are unknown. Thus along the two lines of section north of Curra-
bubula Creek, the apparent thicknesses of the lower portion of the Kuttung
beds are respectively forty-two and forty-four hundred feet. Along the southern
line of section, the apparent thickness of these beds is only thirty-four hundred
feet, and there is additional evidence (see pp. 307-8) to suggest that the move-
ments differed on the two sides of Currabubula Creek, that some portion of the
Lower Kuttung rock was repeated by strike-faulting north of the Currabubula
Creek, or was cut out by the same process south of the same creek. The trun-
cation of the western margin of the andesite of King'smill's Peak suggests tho
latter as the more probable alternative. In either case, the exact thickness of the
Lower Kuttung Series remains in doubt. No fossils have been found in this
portion of the Series, unless tlie plants assigned to the uppermost Burindi rocks
should rightly be included here.

The inclination of the beds is between 35° and 40° to the S.S.W. in the
northern part of the region, but less in the southern.

Middle Portion of tlie Kuttung Series.

(a) The Lower Glacial Beds. — Tliis is the most varied and interesting portion
of the Kuttung rocks in the district. The succession of beds has been traced in
approximate detail along four lines of traverse. In portion 223, a mile and a half
to the east of Currabubula railway station, a small cpiarry exhibits a very fine-
grained, almost porcellanous, creamy-white banded rock which has some of the
characters of the "varve" rock of De Geer (22) (see Text-fig. 3a, Section iii.).
Beneath and especially above it the bouldery rock is not a normal conglomerate,
but in place of closely-packed, contiguous, rounded pebbles, more or less uniform
in size, the pebbles present are sub-angular, very varied in size, and are set in a
matrix of gi-itty felspathic material, in which they are often widely spaced and
not contiguous, and there is little sign of stratification. The rock has thus some
of the cliaracters of boulder clay or tillite. Tliis bouldery material, with inter-
bedded tuff lying above the flne-gi'ained banded rock, is about 1000 feet thick, and
extends into portion 321 (Mr. Proctor's jiroperty). Above this is a second zone
of fine-grained banded rock, but here the comparison with "varve" rock is even
more marked. The bedding planes of this rock are often strongly contorted, and
scattered through it are small or large pebbles of granite, aplite, etc. — evidently
small erratics. This zone of "varve" rock has Ijeen proved to be continuous for
at least five miles, and is, therefore, termed tlie main "varve" zone; it is about
fifty feet in thickness. Lying above it are laminated, olive-green mudstones very
like those in the Burindi Series, but so far these have not been found to be fos-

296

GEOLOGY AND PETROLOGY OF THE GREAT SERPENTINE BELT OF N.S.W.

UJI

u

•-
ifi\

— il

<
u

(J
o

_l
o|

UJ

L- )

LD

CO
QQ

D:::

7-

f?

z

ii

C)

>:

r:

t:

o

rf

p

ii

fe

p

Z

fe

t7

■J

g

<

re

X

^

k

lu

X

e

d

SjUD|l} PSIJI)I|IS

00

Otinoj 9U'J01^
Jo pojli JO c)o5

woij ^losog

o

-l-llciejD

»■«

aiisspuy a

jatoj^j

^ lo-y _a * JON , (^V ;■;>;
puo >uoiip.llN

(up jimod'ilaj

"'."IN

(UOjDjJO^ , |000|^ o.'nij

■Mi|l'i

iinjOft uo JuO)5pniFj

JJ"i 9J'|okHy

C
Z. 8iJtf|j9M> UjniAnji^

,. J° Jj.ioloo-,

O . I —

in

— M^:i^ ?'JPfi pajjpjuin
^ iuojspriftj p»jpuiuitn

■oj in

pup 9no?70Jjr>j_

— aujO; ujiM ^MOM

c i

„ t a4ijKi4(jjoj puD

3 g sj'Jaii'O -J" ^II'S

BY W. N. BENSON, W. S. DUN, AND W. R. BKOWNE. 297

siliferous . Theb^c imidstoues are about tilty feet thick. Upon them lie conglom-
erate Or bouldery beds, interstratifled with flne-gi'ained tull containing plant re-
mains. On the steep sides of the hill in portions 320, 321, immediately south of
Mr. Proctor's homestead, Mr. Browne and Mr. Waterhouse obtained from this
horizon a number of fossil plant-remains, including Rhaeopteris intermedia,
Aneimites ovata, and reed-like impressions, possibly of Calarmtes. These beds
are followed by the gritty felspathic rock which is desci-ibed below as the main
felspathie grit. Tlie total thickness of the beds here described as forming the
lower moiety of the Middle Portion of the Kuttung Series is about thirteen hun-
dred feet. They are grouped together as the Lower Glacial Beds. The main
"varve" zone may be traced to the south, and has been studied two miles from .
here, where the eastern branch of Rocky Creek approaches Sandy Gully (portion
278). The ridge separating Rocky Creek from Sandy Gully consists of a succes-
sion of banded mudstones, felspathic tuffs, narrow zones of tillite and traces of
varve rock overlain by a definite zone of tillite. The main "varve" zone follows
this, and can be seen in the valley of Rocky Creek below the northern sharp
bend, and it is followed by the main felspathic grit {see Text-fig. 3a, Section iii.,
E — F). The boundaries of the glacial beds southwards from here are largely con-
jectural.

North of Currabubula Creek, still more distinct evidence of glaciation is
available (see Text-fig. 3a, Section ii., C — D) . Tracing the sequence of beds up
from the valley of Turi Creek we find that the upper portions of the easterly
facing slopes are rather too covered with shed rock to yield a clear succession to
a hasty traverse. The rocks appear, however, to be felspathic grits with
pebbly layers and some well stratified material, and possibly represent the lowest
"varve" horizon. Above these, forming the almost vertical cliffs at the scarp edge,
IS a thick stratum of boulder-bearing rock which ])erhaps is more like a normal
conglomerate than a tillite Above it, is a narrow zone of fine-grained, creamy,
felspathie tuff containing abundant remains of Rhaeopteris intermedia, Aneimite'
ovata and Calamite-like impressions. These were first obtained here by Mr.
Cambage (19). Probably, also, the Archaeocala/inites was obtained from this
.spot (20). These plant-beds are followed by a thick zone of tillite, which forms
the highest part of the ridge where it is crossed by the line of section (C — D),
and may be traced down the valley of Browne's Creek. Here the glacial origin of
the rock is shown, not only by similarity of the structure to that of a boulder
clay but by the presence of polished striated and more or less faulted pebbles
collected by Professor David and Mr. Browne.* These are, however, difficult co
obtain, for the matrix of the tillite is strongly cemented. Moreover, as in the
Paterson-Maitland District, the striations are found almost solely on the quartzite
pebbles, the boulders of granite, porphyry and ajilite being generally withoui
striation, though they are often only partially rounded. The largest boulders are
of granite which may be over two feet in diameter. Above this tillite lies the
main "varve zone" first discovered by Browne, and Mell exposed here in Browne's
Creek. Here the contorted character of the rhythmically banded "varve" rock is
most striking (se.e Text-fig. 4) and so also is the presence of abundant erratics of
granite, some over a yard in diameter, embedded in these fine-grained sediments
(ser Text-figs. 5 and 6) . The main varve zone is followed as usual by laminated

•For photographs of glaciated pebbles from Browne's Creek and Eocky Creek see Plate
xxiv., figs.9,10 of section B of this paper, to appear in Part 3 of these Proceedings for 1920.

298

GEOLOGT AND PETROLOGY OF THE GREAT SERPEXTIXE BELT OF X.S.W.

oiive-gi'een nuulstones about sixty feet in thickness overlain by a tliiu tuflfaceous
conglomerate containing Rhacopteris intermedia and E. racmerif (probably tha
equivalent of the Rhacopteris beds by Proctor's homestead) . TJiese are followed
by the Main Felspathic Grit. The main "varve" zone and the olive-green mud-
stones are weak structures compared with the tillites below and the g^its above,
and their extension for some miles to the north is indicated by the manner in
which the heads of creeks open out into strike valleys following the base of the
^lain Felspathic Grit In the three jireeeding traverses across steep slopes only
broad subdivisions of the Lower Glacial Series have been traced. The exposures
in Currabubula Creek, where it passes through the township, indicate that in
reality the succession of beds is more complex. The section from the point where
the Creek is crossed by the Duri Road to that where it is joined by Anstey's Creek

Text-fig. 4. Contorted "varve-rock" in Browne's Creek.

Text-fig. 5. A rounded granite houlder in
"varve-rock," Browne's Creek.

Text-fig. 6. Subangular granite
boulders in contorted "varve-
rock," Browne's Creek.

merits detailed study. Commencing the section is a thick band of conglomerate
followed by banded mudstone 40 ft., tillite 10 ft. (including a granite-erratic
three feet in diameter), well bedded felspathic tuff 30 ft., tillite 10 ft., contoi-ted
'•varve"-like felspathic tuff 50 ft., tillite 30 ft., followed by thii-k conglomerate
extending to the bond where Kocky Creek enters. Here the section is broken by
a zone of crushing probably denoting a fault. There follows banded contorted
"varve" rock 60 f t , containing many small erratics; this must be considered to be
the main "varve" zone. It is overlain by laminated olive-green mudstones, and

BY W. N. BENSON^ W. S. DUN, AND W. B. BROWNE.

299

tliese again by the Main Felspathic Grit which extends beyond the point where
Anstey's Creek enters the main stream. The grit contains intercalated bauds of
conglomerate.

(b) The Main Felspathic Grit which thus immediately overlies the lower
glacial beds is the most uniform portion of the Kuttung Series in this district.
It is a strongly cemented grit chiefly composed of fragmental grains of orthoclase
and quartz with a little albite et cetera. Here and there it contains interstratified
pebble-bandSj passing into deiinite layers of conglomerate, and also occasionally
thin bands of mudstone. Its great resistance to erosion is seen from the per-
sistency with which it forms the highest ridges throughout the whole of the district.
It probably forms "Rocky Peak," between Quipolly and Werrie's Creeks, and then
north of it rises to form Soma, and the point immediately north of it (both
of which are higher than Duri Peak) ; it also forms the ridges east of Rocky
Creek, and those lying just west of the watershed between Currabubula and Turi
Creek. No fossils Lave yet been found in this formation, which is approximately
a thousand feet thick. It evidently resulted from prolonged explosive eruptions
which culminated in the production of a little rhyolitic tuff, possibly in some parts
rhyolitic flow-breccia, about fifty feet thick. This last has been traced down
the eastern side of Rocky Creek, and along- the western foothills of the ridges
north of Currabubula.

The Upper Portion uf the Kuttung Series.

The beds following this are again more or less glacial in character. North
of Currabubula Creek, a little basic tuff and a flow of basalt only a yard wide
intervene between the rhyolitic tuff and the tillite, but these are absent from the
development in Rocky Creek where also some faulting appears to have obscured
the succession. The tillite has the same general characters as that in the Lower
glacial beds, and contains striated pebbles of quartzite {see footnote on p. 297)
among many more or less rounded boulders of granite, porphyi-y, and aplite.
It becomes more conglomeratic in character in its higher portions, and is inter-
stratified with a large amount of felspathic tuff. About fifteen hundred feet above
the top of the Main Felspathic Grit there is a narrow zone of fine-grained, white
felspathic tuffs, which may be traced up the face of and the spur to the south of
the hill immediately to the south-east of Currabubula. Traces of Hhacopteris
have been observed in this, and associated with it are contorted banded tuffs some-
what resembling "varve" rock. Altogether these are rather more than fifty feet
thick. Two miles from Currabubula Station, in portion 274, where the western
branch of Rocky Creek crosses what is probably this horizon, coarse tillite is seen
containing several narrow layers of "varve" rock up to a foot in width.

TJie Kuttiinri Rocks West of Werris Creek.

The Kuttung rocks, which make the western limb of the syncline, form the
hills to the north and south of Werris Creek Gap. They have not yet been in-
vestigated in detail, but appear to be similar to the upper portion of the Kuttung
Series near Currabubula. Intercalated in these is a mass of andesite thirty feet
thick, which closelv resembles the rock termed the Martin's Creek andesite in the
Paterson District, which there has been shown to be a flow. Immediately to the
west of these hills extend the Liverpool Plains which, near the Werris Creek Gap,
are covered by black soil, probably derived from the Werrie basalts. It is
possible that the western face of these hills is parallel to a line of strike-fault

300 GEOLOGY AND PETROLOGY OF THE GREAT SERPEXTIXE BELT OF X.S.W;

bringing up the Burimli beds beneath the cover of black soil. The width of the
range does not seem sufficient to permit of the development here of the full thiefe-
ness of the Kuttung Series (see Text-fig. 2).

General Bemarks Concerning the Kuttung Series.

Summarising the above facts we find that the Kuttung Series in this region
is made up of the following members: — ■

Upper Portion: Approximate Thickness.

Tuft's and conglomerates 1600 feet .

Bhacopteris tuffs and varve beds 50

Upper Tillites, conglomerates and tuffs 1500

Middle Portion :

Khyolite Tuff 50

Main Felspathic Grit 1000

Lower Glacial Beds 1300

Lower Portion:

Felspathic tuffs and pebble beds (say) 4000

Total 9500

The total thickness of the Kuttung Series in this district is thus comparable
with the thickness of 7000 feet measured in the same series in the Paterson area
by Professor David and Mr. Sussmilch (4) . It would, however, be quite pre-
mature to attempt any detailed correlation. A striking point of distinction is the
comparative rarity of actual flows of volcanic rock in the Currabubula district, con-
trasted with their frequent occurrence in the Paterson region.

Attention may here be directed to the writer's comment on the section exposed
on Rocky Creek near Bingara (2. p. 268), — "The series is, in ascending order;
Burindi tuft'aceous mudstoncs. followed by tuffs covered by a very gi'eat thickness
of coarse conglomerates with boulders of granite, porphyry and rhyolite in a tuff-
aceous groundmass, with interbedded layers of rhyolite and rhyolite tuff. Following
this there is more tuff, and al)ove a band, about fifty feet thick, of a hard cherty tuff,
very fine grained but including small pebliles of gi-anite, etc." [See also the
microscopic description (23, p. 720, M.B. 16).] "Following this is a mass of
coarse rhyolite tuff. Altogether the series cannot be less than two thousand feet
thick, and the hill at the side exposes at least five hundred feet more."

The experience now gained leads the writer to conclude that this "hard
cherty tuff," observed by him in 1911, was also a glacial rock containing small
erratics, and that the section exposed on Rocky Creek is perhaps comparable \vith
the Middle and Lower Portions of the Kuttung Series as here described.

As regards the conditions under which these sediments were deposited, it is
evident that the epoch of their foi'mation was one of continuous and energetic
explosive volcanic activity, accompanied by extensive glaciation. The apparent
absence of striated pavements and the rarity of the preservation of striae except
on the quartzite pebbles, together with the abundance of waterwom pebbles and
of "varve" rocks, seem to indicate that fluvio-glacial rather than purely glacial con-
ditions predominated, a conclusion whicli accords with that of Professor David and
]\rr. Sussmilch (4) . At the same time, the unstratified beds containing large
boulders scattered through a felspathic matrix have soine features like those of
subglacial till. It must also be pointed out that the discrimination between glacial

BY W. N. BENSON, W. S. DVS , AND W. R. BROWNE. 301

l)eils autl mere conglomerates rests at preseut upon a rapid survey only. It will
be necessary to establish and apply critically discriminative criteria before definite
conclusions concerning these beds may be obtr.incd.

'Hie Werrie Volcanic Series.

This consists cf an immense mass of basaltic rocks, which are now probably
over two or three thousand feet thick near Warragundi, and must originally have
been much more extensive. Invading these is an extensive series of siUs and
dykes described below The lavas are chiefly very decomposed basalts, of which
the petrological examination is very diiticult. No fresh examples have been ob-
tained, though the nature of the rock may be fairly well determined in a speci-
*men from the bottom of a deep well near the head of Anstey's Creek. The rocks
are very vesicular, the vesicles being either empty or filled with zeolites, calcite,
chlorite, or a form of silica. Here and there there is evidence that the mass is
composed of many flows of small size. In the banks of creeks the irregular out-
lines of the chilled margins of slaggy flows may be seen.

On the summit of a hill in portion 110, Parish of Werrie (west of the
area mapped), at the highest point of the Werrie lavas so far as is yet known,
slaggy and ropy lava is found deeply weathered and of red brown colour. It is
not, however, a true basalt.

Warragundi, ur Terriljle Mountain,* and the group of hills around it probably
formed the centre of the ancient volcanic activity. In all probability the original
volcanoes were dissected and reduced in Permo-Carboniferous times, and covered
with Glossopteris-hearing sandstones, of which a remnant still occurs near Werris
Creek. This covering being stripped off by subsequent erosion, perhaps in com-
paratively recent times, renewed dissection has cut deep into the core of the old
volcano. Probably there is no finer examjilc in Australia of a dissected volcanic
complex than is afforded by these liills, the detailed examination of which will
form a most fascinating study. The writer has been able to spend only three
days among these hills, and has therefore merely indicated on the map, Plate xvii.,
rouighly the area in which the gTeatest variety of rocks is to be found, classing
the whole as the Warragundi complex. A few notes, ho'wever, may be given to
indicate the nature of this complex. The basaltic rocks are in one place associ-
ated with rhyolite, possibly a flow. They have been broken through by large
masses of trachytie or felsitic agglomerate, the largest of which forms Warra-
gundi itself, and adjacent to these are more basic agglomerates. In addition,
there is a varied and extensive series of intrusive rocks, which form dykes, sills
or sheets, or less regularly shaped masses, the rocks of which may be termed
provisionally felsites or granophyres and keratophyres, porphyrites of several
types, and dolerites. These are clearly related to the intrasive rocks, dykes and
sheets in the Carboniferous sediments, as will appear more clearly after a con-
sideration of the latter rocks. It will suflRee at present to point out that the
dykes in the sediments tend to radiate out from about Warragundi. From this
centre two bundles of dykes pass outwards, the one extending to the east, form-
ing the ridge at the head of Anstey's Creek, and extending for a considerable dis-
tance through the Kuttung rocks; the other bundle strikes to the south-west and
bends round almost to a southerly direction on crossing Werrie's Creek, and being
resistant to erosion the dykes have determined the yiresenee of the creseentie

' See footnote p. 292.

302 GEOLOGY ANLi PETROLOGY OF THE GREAT SERPEXTIXE BELT OF N.S.Vl .

row of hills which lie east of the railway line. Possibly this continuous ciyke-zono
marks the site of fissures from which the Werrie basalts were eject etl.

The consideration of the age of these rocks is deferred to a later section
(p. 308), but the most probalik; conclusion is that they were formed in late Car-
boniferous or earlv Pernid-Carlinniferous times.

Tlie Iiitrnsive Igneous Itnckn.

We have just remarked that the Werrie Series and we may now say the
underlying sedimentary formations also, have been invaded by numerous, more or
less concordant intrusions and dykes composed of a variety of igneous rocks.
These intrusions fall into several gi'oups: ,

(a) Sills and sheets. The most striking of the intrusive rocks ai'e sills of
glassy or lithoidal pyroxene andesite. Of these there are three zones, a com-
paratively short ard intermittent eastern zone, the main continuous zone, and the
western zone of intermittent Init large intrusions which rise t<i form two of the
highest peaks in the district. The resistance to erosion offered b.y these sills is
very great, and as they are inclined at a considerable angle they usually form
high, sharp-ridgeil cuestas.

The eastern i'one commences in a low hill in the south-western corner of the
Parish of Warral and thence continues intermittently southwards, rising into a
well marked ridge. In portions 2(56 and 197 of the Parish of Currabubula, ex-
posures of the upjier surface of the sill seen in a creek, sliow that the andesite
has invaded the mudstone, and included fragments of it, wliich have been con-
verted into a dense flinty hornstone. The sill is not seen from about a mile south
of the Duri road until it appears again in portion 83. after which it continues
intermittently, forming a low ridge extendino for a mile and a half further to the
south-east. The railway cutting through tliis ridge reveals a complex of shat-
tered and indurated mudstones, conglomerate, and tuffs.

The main zone of pyroxene andesite extends from the Parish of Wiuton on
the north into the area mapped, crosses the low divide at the head of China-
man's Gully, and rises int(j the strongly asymmetric hill east ot Duri Peak which
has a precipitous westerly-facing scarp and a long, smooth, but steep dip-slope
to the east, rising until the surface of the andesite is half a mile wide. The
andesite is truncated by a fault, the same which forms the soutliern boundary of
the igneous rocks of Duii Peak, and by this fault the outcrop is displaced a
quarter of a mile to the west, the down-tlirow being to the north. A basic dyke
occupies this fault-fissure. Tlicnce the andesite continues in a succession of dip-
ridges or cuestaii. broken by minor dip-faults and occasionally crossed by nari'nw
dykes of l)asalt, which weather so rapidly that they have determined in several in-
stances the positions of the valleys crossing the andesite (see p. 310) . The most
marked instance is that between Mts. Cobla and Sugarloaf. Fault-fissures also
have determined transverse valleys, as in the ease of Currabubida Creek. South
of the latter the andesite liand wedges out and is replaced by a second zone com-
mencing to the east of this termination of the main l)and. The nari'ow strip of
sediments between these two masses of pyi'oxene andesite consists of fragnaentnl
jaspery rock. The zone now continues across the upper part of Currabubuhi
Creek, and rises into the higli ridges forming the western boundary of the Parisli
of Goonoo Gdonoo. It aiipcars to cont'nue for several miles furtlier tn tlie
south-east .

BV W. N. BENSON^ W. S. DUN^ AND W. R. BROWNE. 303

No indubitable evidence of the intrusive nature of this main zone of
pyroxene andesite has yet been found, and its classitieation rests chiefly on litho-
logical similarity with the rock of the eastern zone, and the similar absence of
characteristically volcanic features. The jaspery character of the brecciated rock
between the two overlapping portions of this zone, suggests that here is contact
metamorphism which has become most marked between the separated portions of a
split sill, but it is still possible that the apparent S]ilitting and shattering may be
due to a powerful strike-fault.

The third zone is the most intermittent, thcnigh containing the broadest ex-
posures of pyroxene andesite. Of these the northernmost extends into the area
mapped from the Parish of Winton, crosses the upper portion of Chinaman's
Gully without producing marked relief, and becomes rather narrower until it is
fliaridy upthrown by a fault to form the shapely ridge of Duri Peak (Text-fig. 3).
In this the andesite is exposed as^a clift' of prismatic rock on the north-eastern
face, showing that the igneous stratum is about three hundred and fifty feet thick.
The south-western face is a dip slope inclined at an angle of 40° . The southern
flank of the mass is grooved by an L-shaped valley, the position of which was
apparently determined by a small strike fault intersecting a dip-fault, the latter
partly truncating the andesite, its plane being occupied by a basalt dyke. The
remnant of the andesite extending beyond this fault is cut off by a second one a
short distance to the south, which also displaced the main zone of andesite.

The portion of the pyi-oxene andesite included between these two faults shows
most markedly a flow structure, especially on weathered surfaces, where the lines
of phenocrysts of plagioclase and pyroxene stand out distinctly from the glassy
matrix, which is often weathered to a bright red colour by the separation of dusty
haematite .

About a mile to the south-east from here is a small mass of pitclistone (in
portion 116) from which was obtained the sample which has been analysed. It
forms an inconspicuous knoll.

The pyroxene andesites appear again in the valley of Sandy Creek. Thev
are l)rought up to the surface by 9, fault (which has been traced westwards for
some distance), and thence the mass swells out to a width of about half a mile,
continuing for two miles to the south-east and rising to form a small group of
hills about five hundred feet above the floor of the valley. Two faults cross this
mass, displacing it slightly, and its southern margin is also a fault traceable tor
some distance westward. An interesting feature of this mass is its three-fold
nature. The highest hill is seen to be craggy on the easterly and westerly
aspects, the rock composing the slopes being very glassy, but in the centre of the
hill there is a smooth saddle, slightly lower than the sides, and composed of
lithoidal andesite. Possibly the mass is twofold in nature, the vitrophyric ex-
ternal segments having a lithoidal inner portion. In other parts of this
region is seen a close association of lithoidal and glassy rocks uf otherwise simi-
lar nature, and forming part of a simple mass. The significance of this will be a
matter of interesting research. A somewhat analogous association has been
found to be not uncommon in Western Scotland (24). This ma.ss, if stratiform,
must be nearly fifteen hundred feet thick.

The last occurrence of pyroxene andesite remaining for description is that
which forms Kingsmill's Peak at the head of Curiabubula, Werrie's and Back
Creeks. In this mass the width of the exposed surface of pyi-oxene andesite is
gi-eater than elsewhere owing to the smaller inclination of the dip-slope. The

304 GEOLOGY AND PETROLOGY OF THE GREAT SERPENTINE BELT OP N.S.W.

western boundary of the mass is a strongly marked fault which crosses Werrie's
Creek obliquely. The eastern margin is a steep scarp. The andesite appears to
be cut off to the south by a dip-fault, and does not reach Back Creek. The thick-
ness of the sill does not apparently exceed three hundred feet at its eastern
margin . • *

As in the case of the occurrences along the main zone of pyroxene andesite,
no exposures have been found of the contact between the igneous rock and tha
surrounding sediments^ and the classification of the four western masses as intru-
sive bodies again rests on their lithologieal resemblance to the rocks intrusive
into the Burindi beds two or three thousand feet lower in the stratigrapliical suc-
cession. Against this it might be urged that there is a lithologieal similarity no
less marked between the rocks of the main and western zone of pyroxene andesite
and those which in the Seaham and Clarencetown areas are considered to be
flows (4) . In our area the rocks are marked by concordant fluxional banding, and
by an absence of any evidence of a scoriaceous or spherulitie upper surface, or of
the presence of fragments of similar rock in the tuffaceous beds among which
they occur. These features, together with their gi-eat thickness and continuity,
are perhaps more in favour of an intrusive than an extrusive origin for the
andesite.

Among the main minor sheets and sills, we may consider tliose of andesite,
quartz basalt and doleritc, and also those of keratophyre.

A short distance below the Lower Glacial zone is a band of hornblende
andesite extending along the eastward slope of the ridge north of Cun'abubula, and
occurring again in a similar horizon in portion 88, near Proctor's, south of Curra-
bubula Creek. It is of the type of rock known as Martin's Creek andesite in the
Paterson region (4), weathers to an ochreous or buff colour, showing strongly-
marked fluidal structure, and in the rare fresh specimens is a grey-blue with
plentiful phenoerysts of plagioclase and hornblende. As before noted, the same
type of rock may be found in the Kuttung Rocks in Werris Creek Gap. The
rock of this type in the Paterson region is considered to be a flow : here it is classed
doubtfully as a sill. Decisive evidence is not yet available.

Andesites and porphjrrites of several other types occur forming sheets in the
Warragundi hills. The (|uartz basalts are fine-grained, greenish-grey rocks which
are generally more or less vesicular. They occur in most noteworthy amount
forming two layers extending through the uppermost portion of the Kuttung
rocks from Werris Creek to within two miles of Currabubula. These are not
associated with basic tuffs, but seem to transgress the bedding planes of the sedi-
ments, and to be associated with dykes of the same composition. In the north-
west corner of the region mapjied, however, is an irregularly bo\inded layer of the
same rock, only about a yard in width where observed, intei-calated in ba,sic tutf.
This may perhaps be a flow. Some sheets of the same type of rock occur along
the eastern slopes of the Warragundi hills. Sills of dolerite occur in the Werrie
Volcanic Series, two very thick masses being known in, the hiUs east of WaiTa-
gundi Mountain, and thinner ones to the west, but these have not yet been
studied in detail . In the tuffs and conglomerates half a mile south-soiith-east of
Currabubula railway station, there is a sill whicli runs for about a quarter of a
mile, increasing in width until it is 120 feet across near the northern angle of
portions 271 and 287, where it is tnincated by a fault. Altlumgh of teschenitic
character and resembling some of the Tertiar\' intrusive masses, it is not neees-

BY W X. BEXSOX, ■«■. S. DUX^ AXD W. E. BROWXE.

313

'■'.•"■'. ^' ti+ +

t>.^. ■• ^i

Serbenfin; M>dO(vr flaimwrfh) Cheri''s ere

Co.b'? ^Werfid Bosair Dev"(fa5temlJospe''flid i'

W»5dJr"

Tt'xt-fiy.it. Topographical ;incl (_ieolut;ical Map of the Peel River and Goonoo Goonoo District.

314 GEOLOGY AND PETROLOGY OF THE GRIiAT SERPENTIXK BELT OF N.S.W.

Tamwoilh Common north-westwards to Moore Creek, and is continued to the
south-east in the ridges running out into the Common, where tlie liack slope or
scarp of tile tilted block has been deeply dissected by streams which have worked
back along- the soft elaystones and crush zones between the hard agghmiorates and
tuffs, and have even captured part of the drainage that previously llowed to the
north-west.

Again in the Nundle District {see 28) the varying elevation of the Tertiary
gravels shows that warping and faulting has occurred since their formation, per-
haps during and certainly also after, the period of Tertiary volcanic activity.
The following facts will indicate this, reference being made to the geological and
topographical map of the Xundle District (28, Plate xxii.), the figures being based
<m aneroid observations. Commencing at Hanging Kock there are a number of
occurrences of a "deep lead" or gravel-filled valley covered over by basalt. The
floor of this valley descends nine hundred feet within a distance of three miles
in a south-westerly direction, the sharp drop including one fault of two hundred
feet. This steep descent is, however, only a local feature, for in an adjacent dee|i
lead beneath the basalts of Yerrowinn, the fall is only two hundred and ten feet
in a distance of two and a half miles in a north-westerly direction. In Yellow
Rock Hill the slope of the base of the gravel is 140 feet in a distance
of two miles to the north-east, but the slope of the base of the overlying
basalt is 160 feet in the opposite direction, the gravel being 340 feet thick at the
soutli-c-astern end and 40 feet only at the other.* Moreover, the lowest point of
these gravels is lower now than anj' possible outlet for the Tertiary stream sys-
tem in which they were formed. It seems, therefore, certain that the region abo\it
Yellow Rock Hill has been depressed relatively to the surrounding regions, during
later Tertiai'y or post-Tertiary crust movements. To this wari>ing' and faulting is
)irobably due also the sharp decrease in the height of the Liverpool Ranges soutli
of the head of Nundle Creek. We must therefore conclude that within the water-
shed cf the Peel River System, late or post-Tertiary differential crust-movements,
as well as differential erosion, have been significant factors in determining the
present topogi-apliv . This is in accord with the conclusi<m obtained from a study
of the western slopes of New England between the Namoi and Gwydir Rivers, and
in particular tlie "Nandewar Buttress" (2) .

Probably several epochs of movement and subsequent erosion occurred, as
Andrews (2!)/f) has urged. Of these some evidence is afforded in the Nundle
district. The study of the relation between the present contour lines and the
boundaries of the Tertiary basalts there suggests that tliey flooded over a fairly
matured ])eneplain, and down into comparatively youthfid valleys filled to a con-
siderable deptli with gravel. Uplift of the jieneplain to iiermit dissection, and
subsequent depression, accounting for the great thickness of the gravel appears |o
have occurred. From the plateau of basalts and the older rocks, however, have
been caivod out broad mature valleys to a depth of about 300 feet, wliich lead into
the deep lanyons of the upper, but not head waters of sonir of tlie streams of th<i
ju'csent cycle. Thus we realise the complexity of the history of the ])resent topo-
graphy and drainage system. If it be indeed a superimposed system, formed by
the cutting down of streams through a more or less uniform Mesozoic or Permo-
('arboniferous sandstone covering (now I'emoved) on to a foundation of Upper
Palaeozf)ic rocks of very variable hardness, it must be recognised that it has not

"Coiiipivri.son should ho made with the facts recorded cono'rning the relative levels
of basalts and underlying gravels in the Nandewar Kange (2, pp.27l'>-2"8).

BY -W. K. BENSOK, ■«•. S. DVS, AXD W. R. BROWXE. 315

beeu by a siuglf cycle of movement aud erosion, Ijut by a series of movements,
regiojal and locals the effects of which would alone suffice to give much com-
plexity to the present drainage system even if it were not for the complicating
factor of the very variable hardness of the structures on to which they were super-
imposed. In the regions of harder structures some indications of the former
valley system may still be preserved, but in the softest mudstones the streams have
now succeeded in obliterating nearly all trace of their complex history, producing
the apparently simple, and approximately consequent drainage of the Tamworth
Plains.

Summary or Geological History.

The long-continued subsidence and sedimentation of Devonian times was con-
tinued into the Carboniferous Period, and an invasion of a marine fauna with
strong aflBnities with that of Western Europe took place about the middle of
Lower Carboniferous times. Volcanic eruptions occurred from time to time,
producing intercalated layers of tuff, and occasional bands of conglomerate may
indicate some crust movement. The presence of Lepidodendron leUheimiaiium in
place of the L. oust rale of Devonian times indicates a change in the flora of ad-
jacent lands.

Crustal upwarping became more pronounced, and explosive volcanic activity
gi-eatly increased. Hydrothermal siliceous solutions affected some of the flora
(gymuosperms and some indeterminable roots) and an overwhelming predominant
deposition of keratophyric tuff took place, intercalated with conglomerate bands,
a little mudstone, and rarely flows of basalt. Glaciers formed on the adjacent
uplands, and discharged great masses of fluvio-giacial conglomerate and till, and
locally there appeared widespread lakes in which the water, charged with rock
flour, deposited seasonally banded "varve" sediments, which became contorted
through subsequent thrusting from stranding ice-floes, the presence of which float-
ing in the lakes, is indicated by the occurrence of large boulders drop]3cd among
the banded clays. The plants of the period were now Ehacopteris and Calamites.
Meantime explosive eruption continued with varying intensity, felspathic material,
but occasionally rhyolitic, being produced, and this was interstratified with con-
glomerate, etc. Perhaps some ba.sie flows occurred. There followed, however,
possibly after a hiatus, a huge development of flows of basalt derived from fis-
sures, and perhaps at the same time a great development of sills of intermediate
and basic rocks in the sediments beneath the basalts. Crust warping, fracturing,
and extensive differential movement (block-faulting) followed, and with or after it
a great development of keratophyi-e and quartz keratophyre sills and dykes radi-
ating from the volcanic centre of Warragiuidi. Here, too, many dykes, sheets
and sills were formed in the basalts about the volcanic centre, where several large
masses of breccia now filled the volcanic vents. Dykes of basalt and dolerite, ex-
tending into the older formations, formed aljout this time also. This great eruptive
activity concluded the Carboniferous or ushered in the Permo-Carboniferous
Period.

Long continued erosion followed, but at tlie close of this latter period, the
region had become one of deposition of the Newcastle Series of Glossopteris-
bearing sandstone. The final movements of the epoch of crustal instability which
appeared in Carboniferous times, broke up the Permo-Carboniferous. or Permian
sediments, and let down small blocks into the general platform of older structure,
where they have been preserved from erosion. The jfesozoie Era closed with the

316 GEOLOGY AXD PETROLOGV OF TUE GREAT SERPEKTIXE BELT OF X.S.W.

formation of a peneplain, which in Tertiary times was uplifted by a series of
comparatively small uplifts and finally by a much larger one, these acting
regionally but being lomplicated by local warping and faulting, whUe basaltic
eruptions occurred after the first, but before the last of these movements. Erosion
acting throughout this period has jjroduced wide valleys or plains on the softer
structures, but lemnants of the harder stnictnres are still preserved in narrow
ridges or wide plateaus.

BIBLIOGRAPHY.

1. Bensox, W. N. — The Geology and Petrology of the Great Serpentine Belt

of New South Wales. Part i. These Proceedings, xxxviii., 1913,
p. 490 517.

2. Part vi.. Ibid., xlii.. 1917, pp. 223-282.

3. The Tectonic Conditions accompanying the Intrusion of Basic and

Ultrabasic Igneous Rocks. Bull. Geol. Soe. Amer., 1919 (Abstract.)

4. David. T. AV. E. and Sussmilch, C. A. — Sequence, Glaciation and Corre-

lation of the Carboniferous Rocks of the Hunter River District, New
South Wales. Jouru. Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W.. liii., 1919 (1920),
pp. 246-338.

5. PiTTMAX, E. F.— Annual Report Dept. Mines, N.S.W., 1897, p. 137.

6. . Ibid p. 135.

7. AxDREws. E. C— Ann. Rep. Dept. Mines, N.S.W., 1914, p. 198.

8. COTTOX, L. A . and Walkom, A. B. — Notes on the Relation of the Carbon-

iferous and Devonian Formations West of Tamwortla. These Pro-
ceedings, xxxvii.. 1012. pp. 703-708.

9. Mitchell, T. L — Three Exjieditions into tlie Interior of Eastern Australia.

London, 1838.

10. Clarke, W. B. — The General Prospects and Conditions of Hanging Rock

and Peel River Gold Fields. Reports v.-vii., xii., 1852. Votes and
Proc. Leg. Council, X.S.W., ii., 1852, pp. 485-487.

11. Stoxier. G. a —Ann, Report Dept, Mines, N.S.W., 1891, p, 261.

12. Etheridge, R.. JrxR.— a jMoiidgrapli of the Carboniferous and Permo-

Carboniferous Tnvertel)iata. Pt. i. Coelentei-ata. Mem. Geol. Surv.
N.S.W., Pal. V. (i.), 1891, p. 17.

13. Pt. li. Echinoderniata. Annelida and Crustacea, Ibid., Pal. v. (ii.l,

1892, p. 129.

14. Palaoontoloi;ia Novae Cainbriae Mcriilioiialis. No. 3. Rcc. Geol.

Surv. N.S.W., v., 1897, pji. 177-9.

15. No. 5. Ibid., viii., 1907, pp. 192-190.

10. Clarke. W. B. — The Sedimentary Formations of New South Wale.
Fourth Ed. 1878, p. 25.

17. AxDiiEws, E. C, — An Outline of the Tertiary History of New Knuland

Rec. Geol. Surv. N.S.AY., vii., 1903, p. 109.

18. Carxe, ,L E.— Ann. Rep. Deiit. Mines, N.S.AY.. 1913, p. 179.

19. CAJir..u;K, R. H.— .Tourn. and I'roe. Roy. Soe. N.S.W., xlvi., 1912, p. xxiv.

20. Dc-x, W. S.— Ann. Rept. Dept. Jlines, N.S.W., 1914.

BV W. N. BENSON^ W. S. DUN, AND W. R. BROWNE. 305

sarily to l)e separated from the grtnip of Carboniferous igneous roeks. Its age is,
therefore, uncertain .

Sills of keratophyre occur in the Kuttung' Series and can be traced along
the eastern scarp of the ridges north of Currabubula. One very interesting sill
occui-s immediately south of Duri Peak. It extends in the felspathic tuifs in por-
tion 255 for about half a mile, then turns sharply and runs as a dyke up the slope
to the west, cutting several bauds of conglomerate (or tillite) and turns once mors
into a sill in the Lower Glacial Beds at a horizon more than a thousand feet
higher than the part of the siU in portion 255. A little to the south of the dyke
which thus connects the two portions of the sill, there is a second dyke extending
downwards from the upper moiety of this twofold sill, till it reaches the Duri
pyroxene andesite, which, however, it does not traverse, though it seems to be
represented by an extension of the same dyke of keratophyre on the opposite
eastern side of the Duri andesite. There is here evidence of the contemporaneous
origin of at least one group of dykes and sills of keratophyre. South of this,
similar dykes are found to extend upwards into the sills of which they were per-
haps the feeding channels, and one of these appears to intersect tlie hornblende
andesite described above.

South (if Currabubula Creek they appear in the Middle and Upper portions
of the Kuttung Beds, and have been noted in portions 212, the north-western
corner of 229 and elsewhere. With these we may perhaps class a sheet of felsitic
rock which makes a striking feature in the extreme north-west of the area
mapped, occurring in a iissure wliich runs parallel to the Currabubula Creek
fault zone.

(6) Intrusions of less regular form. The most striking of these is perhaps
that which occurs in the Werrie basalts immediately west of Currabubula. Ap-
pearing beneath the alluvium of Currabubula Creek about a mile north-west
of the railway station, it extends to the south-south-east and becomes 700 yards in
width, and splits to the south into several thick sills- which appear in the decom-
posed basalts exposed in the railway cuttings. The rock of which these are com-
posed appears to be a normal keratophyre, but in the centre of this laccolitic in
trusion it is a quartz keratophyre, with a peculiar interstitial development of
quartz. Quartz is also found in the rock of the two following masses which invade
the Kuttung rocks. The smaller lies in the lowest portion 'of the series in the
south-eastern extremity of the region mapped, and just below the main sill of
andesitic pitchstone. Though its southern extremity has not been mapped, the
lenticular outline of the northern extremity suggests that the mass is probably a
laccolite.

The larger mass lies in the valley of Werrie's Creek between Kingsmill's Peak
and Mount Soma. It is a roughly circular area about a mile in diameter, and as
it truncates sharply the planes of bedding of the grits and conglomerate on the
southern flanks of Mt. Soma, it may be a small boss rather than a laccolite. Its
southern margin has not been closely examined. It is invaded by a narrow dyke
of pyroxenic keratophyre.

(c) Dykes. The dykes consist of a very varied assortment of i-ocks, quartz
keratophjTes, keratophyres, trachytes, latites, lamprophyre, andesites, dolerites
and basalt. As yet they have not been sufficiently studied to determine their
chronological relationships. In the northern portion of the map they have a
general north-easterly trend, but in the southern ])ortion they run more nearly
east and west, tending thus to radiate from the volcanic centre of AVarragundi,

306 GEOLOOY AND PETROLOGY OF THE GREAT SERPEXTIXB BELT OP N.S.W.

whieh, however, is probably a local centre of radiation in a region of general
east-north-easterly trend of dyke-fissures (Compare 25). Dykes very frequently
occupy fault fissures, so that it is probable that the main fault-movements accom-
panied or preceded the formation of the dykes.

The more acid dykes consist of rocks closely resembling the material compos-
ing the keratophyTe sills. These are most obvious in the conglomerates and fels-
patliic grits, but have not yet been traced through into Burindi Mudstone. The
longest of these dykes crosses from the hills west of the head of Anstey's Creek,
and may be traced thence across the sills of quartz basalt and through the Kuttun*
rocks as far as the slopes overlooking Sandy Creek. The fissure which it occu-
pies seems to be continued by the fault truncating, on the south, the pyroxene
andesite in the valley. Of the basic dykes, we may note the group of outcrops,
which commence in the railway cutting in portion 34, pass through the gap be-
tween Cobla and Sugarloaf, and seem to be continued in a dyke crossing Curra-
bubula Creek in portion 140 and the main road in portion 319 . The rock in these
is generally decomposed, but in the above-mentioned gap is a compound dyke of
decomposed basalt containing another dyke in the centre composed of fresh dole-
rite. Other fresh specimens of basic dykes have been found, particularly where
such traverse well-cemented conglomerate. Very frequently decomposed basic
dykes occur in fault fissures, and such fault-dykes traverse the sills of pyroxene
andesite.

Dykes of porphyi-itic dolerite occur abundantly in the Warragundi complex
but have not yet been studied in detail. They also occur in the arcuate line of
hills that run to the south-west from that volcanic centre.

With regard to the relative age of these various dykes and sills, little can
yet be stated, except that, apart from the cases in which the keratophyre dykes
and sills may be contemporaneous, but older than the pyroxene andesites, the dykes
are younger than the sills wherever their intersections have been observed. Per-
haps here also the ])hase of minor intrusions was one of increasing basicity (Cora-
pare 25). Nevertheless, it must be emphasised that much detailed observation of
these rocks is yet required, and that the present list of types of rock developed,
and mapping of intrusions is far from being exhaustive .

The Permian ( ?) Glossoptkris Sandstone.
These rocks were first noted by Mr. J. E. Carne (18), being pointed out
to him and later to ourselves by Mr. Hammond, of Escott Park. They are not
present in the area mapped in detail, but occur in Grenfell Parish, and extend
along the western side of the railway line for a mile and a half, commencing two
miles south of Werris Creek. Mr. Carne noted a dip to the W.S.W. at 20° on
the eastern edge of the sandstone, and we observed a dip of like amount in the
opposite direction on the western side. The sandstone is thus bent into sympathy
with the folding of the Kuttung Beds and lies over the synclinal axis. It is prob-
ably not merely a residual mass left by erosion ; its sharp, almost rectilinear
boundaries are more in accord with the view that it is an infaulted outlier brought
now into relief by differential erosion of the softer basalts about it. The rociv
consists of sandstone and a little conglomerate, (|uite different from that of the
Kuttung rocks; indeed the sandstone is remarkably similar to that in the New-
castle Coal Mea.«UJ'es west of Pokolbin, with which it is tentatively correlated.
Like them it contains several species of Glossopterix with Yertchrnria and silici-
fied (coniferous?) wood. Mr. Carne, however, suggested that it might be cone-
lated with the Creta dial Measures.

bv w. n. benson^ \v. s. dun, and w. s. browne. 307

Tektiarv Igneous Rocks.
A tew masses of rock may be referred to this epoch. More than three miles
to the south-south-east of Currabubula railway station, in the centre of portion 178,
there is an oval patch of basalt, the major and minor axes of which are forty and
twenty feet respectively: this is probably a pipe. A second and smaller patch
occurs a mile and a half east of t'urrabubula on the lane between portions 31t)
and 68. The rocks comprising these are indistinguishable in hand specimen from
the normal Tertiary basalt of this State. Mr. Browne considers there is con-
siderable similarity between the Tertiary teschenitie dolerites found in the
vicinity, e.g., at Goonoo Goonoo (23, p. 703) and near Muriiirundi and the tes-
chenitie dolerite occurring south of C'urrabubula township. This similarity is
not, however, suflicient to determine that the latter is (jf Tertiary age.

Recent Alluvium.
No features of the Tertiary alluvium call for special comment, except the
widespread character of the alluvial fans where gullies open out on to the areas
of WeiTie basalt. The distribution of ochreous felsitic detritus on the black
soil of the plains at the north side of the Warragimdi hills shows how much
alluviation of piedmont plains may be produced, not by definite streams, but
merely by the creeping of the soil mantle down the slopes of the hills directly
leading to the plains. An extensive alluvial fan has formed at the mouth of
Browne's Creek, the result of a land slide whicli occuiTed a few years ago.

Tectonics.
The general structure of the district is simple. As shown in Text-figures 1
and 2, it is a syncline, the region mapped in detail forming the eastern limb.
This consists of a long secjuence of sediments of Carboniferous age with a total
thickness of about fourteen thousand feet, and covered by lava flows of unknown
thickness. The whole dips to the west-south-west at an angle varying between
28° and 45°. but usually about 37° in the northern portion, but less steeply near
Werris Creek. Complexity is brought in by the faults, of which there are two
series. The dip-faults are very obvious and numerous and often have a very con-
siderable tlirow. Of these the most important is that first made apparent by the
discovery of the glncial beds of Browne's Creek and at Proctor's liomestead, which
though formerly continuous, have been displaced about half a mile. Approximate
determinations show that the downthrow on the southern side of the fault at
Currabubula must be about twenty-seven hundred feet. But, where (presum-
ably) the same fault crosses the main zone of pyroxene andesite, the downthrow
is on the northern side and is only a hundred feet. If we consider this fault to
have therefore had a pivotal movement, the present westerly inclination of the
beds on tlie soutli side of the fault should be about ten degrees greater than it is
on the north, but instead there is no noticeable difference of dip. The same
absence of evi<lence of pivotal movement wliere it might be expected arises in
other eases as shown below. Parallel to this fault are several other features,
the long dyke of hornblende andesite in the north-western portion of the area
majaped, the large laccolite of keratophyre west of Currabubula. a narrow zone
of crushing which crosses Currabubula ( "reek just below its junction with Rocky
Creek, the lower course of the valley of Rocky Creek itself, and the dyke of
keratophyre that extends from the "elbow" in this creek, past Proctor's home-
stead towards the Gap south of Cobla — these all combine to show that a broad
belt of fracturing traverses the Peel Range at this place, into which were injected

308 GEOLOGY AND PETROLOGi' OF THE GREAT SERPEXTIXE BELT OF N.S.W.

felsitic magmas iu late Palaeozoic times, and by which, at the present time, the
structures have been rendered less resistant to stream erosion. Concerning other
miportant dip-faults, we may note that these have also very extensive throws.
The fault immediately north of Duri Peak thi-ows the andesite down nearly nine
hundred feet, but, though the displacement of the andesite directly to the east
has not been measured, it has clearly not been moved along the fault to the same
extent as the mass composing Duri Peak. This mass again is cut off to the south
by two faults with an aggregate throw of over twelve hundred feet. This, how-
ever, does affect the rocks to the east, but the southern side of the fault is the up-
throw side to almost as great an amount. Two miles further south there is an-
other fault, possibly a branch of the Currabubula Creek fault zone, and this has
moved the main zone of andesite so that the southern side of the fault has been
thrown up over six hundred feet.

South of Currabubula Creek the mass of andesite in the valley of Sandy
Gully is brought up by a fault of at least nine hundred feet throw, which is fol-
lowed immediately by another of about four hundred feet throw. Both these
seem to affect the sedimentary rocks immediately to the west to some extent,
but have no noticeable effect on andesite to the east, unless the first strikes through
Currabulnila Creek Gap also, where a fault movement of about a hundred feet ha'!
occurred . The mass of andesite in the valley of Sandy Gully is again cut by
faults, the one throwing up to the south about four lumdred feet, and the other
with a throw of perhaps nine hundred feet completely cutting off the mass of an-
desite, but neither of these appeai-s to have had any effect on the andesite of the
main zone immediately to the west. This extraordinary diversity of movement
along the one fault line, witliout an accompanying change of dip, owing to local
warping, can lie best explained Ijy the presence of several strike-faults, and the
assumption that the region was tilted, fractured by strike and dip-faults, and the
blocks into which the crust was thus separated moved up and down to various ele-
vations. Unfortunately direct evidence of the existence of such strike-faults is
wanting save for that running west of Kingsmill's Peak. The occurrence of a belt
of mudstone beside the main zone of andesite directly east of Duri Peak, and
again midway between the western and main zone of andesites crossed by the
section line two miles to the south, may result from the presence of such strike
faulting (Compare Text-fig. 3a, Sections A — ^B and C — D). The sections, how-
ever, merely indicate that some of these strike-faults occur: their positions and
amount of throw .ire as yet almost entirely conjectural.

The occurrence of dip-faults recalls the faults of the Loomberah District (261 .
It may be that these faults are the continuation of the same regional series per-
pendicv;lar to the fcild axes as are there represented. Moreover, it was shown in
the paper cited, that the movements along the lines both of dip- and of strike-
fault must have continued on into the close of the Pcrmo-Carbon-
iforous times, or have been then repeated as jiostliumous movement. The
same appears to lave been the case near Werris Creek where the Permian ( ?)
(rlnsxopferis sandstone has been let down anidiig the Wcirie basalts alcm^ fatiltl
parallel to the old strike lines.
The Age of the Werrie Volpaxic Serte.s and Tt.s Relatiox to the Cru.st

M0\T5MEXTS.

The sequence of events shown by the sedimentary and igneous record indi-
cates a close association between crust-movements and igneous action. An ex-
tensive upward warping of the crust is indicated by the gradual change in con-

nv W. X. BENSON, W. S. DuN, AND W. R. BROWNE. 309

ditious from those when the Buriudi mudstones were deposited in a sea some
distance from land, to those during the formation of Kuttung times, when in the
vicinity of this area appeared high land from which glaciers carried a load of
granitic erratics, and streams discharged abundant more or less rounded boulders,
nud land plants flourished. As Professor David and Mr. Sussmilch _have pointed
out (4), though this movement did not produce a stratigi-aphieal unconformity, it
was one of great importance, and with it there occurred immense and prolongea
explosive volcanic activity yielding- the felspathic tuft's. These are clearly related
to the keratophyres in the Werrie Series. It requires more detailed survey than
has been possible as yet to determine whether the Werrie Series lies conformably
upon the Kuttung sediments, or whether some crust movement and erosion of the
Kuttung rocks preceded the outpouring of the basalts, probably through fissures
radiating from volcanic centres. It is evident, however, that no gTeat hiatus
occurred. The intrusion of pyroxene andesite may have occurred sometime be-
fore the outpouring of the basalts. Crust-fracturing and extensive faulting
supervened, and especially at this period would we note the formation of the
Cun-abubula Creek zone of fractures, into which were injected felsitic magmas
(keratophyres and perhaps the hornblende andesites) of much the same composi-
tion as the pre-basaltic tuffs. The magma rising in fault fissures also was thrust
out into sills (see p. 305).

Perhaps also at this period were formed the large intrusions of quartz
keratophyre on Upper Currabubula Creek, Werrie's Creek, and west of Curra-
bubula township. The age of the porphyrites and dolerites we do not yet know,
but among the latest extrusions must be placed the basalt dykes, now largely de-
composed, and as these occur so frequently in the fissures of powerful faults, it is
probable that crust movements were still in progTess at the time of their intrusion.
We have thus evidence of long, but not necessarily unbroken succession of igneous
events accompanied by crust-movement.

No evidence of the extension of these dykes of felsite, dolerite or basalt into
the Glossopteris sandstone has yet been found, and therefore we conclude that the
igneous activity about the Warragundi centre had ceased before their formation,
though the crust movements had not then ceased. Thus, in the presence of ex-
tensive igneous activity extending from the Carboniferous period possibly into
Permian time, with cnistal instability of even longer duration, we find some
analogy here with the sequence of events in the Hunter River District (4).

PHrsiofiRAPHV OF THE Peel River Vallet and its Bordering Ranoes.

In this section we discuss first the detailed physiography of the Currabubula
district as an introduction to a general consideration of the valley of the Peel
River. The special interest of the physiography of the Currabubula district lies
in the vivid manner in which it illustrates the effects of differential erosion of a
complex terrane. The western portion of our area is formed of the wide lowland
of the Tamworth Plains; the portion west of the Werris Creek and Piallaway
Gaps is similarly portion of the Liverpool Plains, both of which lowlands ai-e
(near our area) cut from the soft Burindi mudstones. The broad valleys of
Turi and Sandy Creeks are cut from the soft felspathic tuffs comprising tlie
lowest portion of the Kuttung Series, while the lowland basin between Curra-
bubula, Werrie's and Qui|ioIly Creeks is cut from decomposed basalts. These sur-
faces lie between 1200 and 1400 feet above sea level. The elevations are all of

310

GEOLOGY AKl) I'ETKOLOGV Oi' TUt; GREAT SEBPE^TI^E BELT OF X.S.W.

hard rock. Most striking are the "cuesta" ridges of tlie northeru part of the
eastern zone of pyroxene •ludesite, the main zone, Duri and ICingsmiU's Peaks.
Here and there for reasons not yet apparent, these hard rocks have been reduced
to rounded hills, as in .Sandy Creek valley or the low knoll in the valley of Duri
Creek, or they have even been reduced to lowland as in the valley of Chinaman's
Creek, just north of the region mapped. (Perhaps this la.st is an old water gap.)
West of these rise the complex ridges cut from the Middle and Upper portions of
the Kuttung rocks and moulded in a great degree by the resistant masses of the
lower tillites and the main felspathie grit. Between this is the softer horizon of
the main ''varve'" zone, and overlying mudstone, in which extend tributary heads
of the small streams, the adjustment of streams to structures being as yet far from
complete. Westward again the hills around Warragundi, made up of resistant
trachytic breccia or strengthened liy sills and dykes of dolerite and andesite, rise
above the surrounding easily-eroded Werrie basalts. These greater elevations all
rise approximately to a height of 3000 feet or rather less, or nearly two thousand
feet above the general level of the lower land.

In minor topographic features, the adjustment of streams to structures is no
less marked. Nearly every stream which crosses a resistant band or zone of roek
follows through a belt of weakness, a line of faulting or crush brecciation, or a
dyke, generally one of the very readily decomposed basic dykes, often in a fault-
fissure. Attention may be called to several instances of this feature. The main
transverse valley of the district, that by which Currabubula Creek passes through
the Kuttung Series follows the fracture line, the existence of which is shown by
the displacement of the rocks of this Series, and by other features. To the
same direction are parallel the lower portion of Rocky Creek and the fault and
dyke extending beyond it towards the gap in the main zone of pyroxene ande-
site. The main transverse valley in the district thus follows a marked and ancient
zone of weakness.

Of the gaps determined by the presence of decomposed basic dykes we have
already indicated that that between Mts. Cobla and Sugarloaf is the most marked.
To the same cause, however, must be assigned the form of Duri Peak, a striking
landmark seen from most points between Barral)a and Hanging Rock {see Text-fig.
.3) . A decomposed basalt dyke crosses the ridge between the two summits, and
may be traced down cither side. Though only a few feet wide, it has in all
probability determined the depression in the ridge between the summits.

Text-fig.7. Block diagram of Rocky Creek Valley.

By W. N. BENSON, W. S. DON, AND W. E. BROWNE. 311

There are, however, other peculiarities of the courses of streams which do not
appear to be referable to either of these causes [see Text-fig. 7) . The eastern
branch of Rocky Creek, for example, rises on the upper surface of the very resistant
Main Felspathic Grit, and owing to monoelinal shifting (in Gilbert's sense, 27),
the upper part of its course, which approximately follows the strike, has been
moved down to the western edge of the dip-slope of felspathic giit. The easterly
scarp of this dip-slope is very steep, but the stream, a mile from its source
turns back across the line of the highest ridges and for half a mile flows along a
niche cut in the scarp slope, before again turning at a sharp angle, and returning
through a deep gorge to the upper surface of the dip slope once more, down whicl;
it continues for the remainder of its course. Though no sign of fracturing has
been observed along the course of this lower gorge through the main grit, the ap-
proximate collinearity of a fault through the andesite in Sandy Gully, the gorge in
question, and the most important tributary to Anstey's Creek, may be not with-
out significance.

We may compare with this the course of Upper Currabubula Creek, from
the western side of the main andesite sill through to the eastern,
where it is separated by a very low divide from the head-waters of
the tributaries of the Peel River, which it might be expected to join,
but instead of so doing, it returns through the gap in the andesite-sill and
flows north-westwards across the hard Kuttung rocks. Similarly, the western
branch of Rocky Creek continues approximately along the dip slope of a band
of (glacial?) conglomerate in the upper portion of the Kuttung Series, and is
very little entrenched therein, but just where it would be expected to foUow the
natural slope down into Anstey's Creek it turns at a right angle, forming a smaU
gorge through the conglomerate, to join the - eastern branch described above.
Again, there is the little gorge in which the western head-waters of Turi Creek
cut across the mass of pyroxenie andesite. Also, the passage of Werrie's Creek
through Kuttung rocks at the Gap to the west of the township, rather than south-
wards along the soft Werrie lavas in the depression followed by the railway line, is
apparently a striking instance of the want of adjustment of streams to structures.
These features suggest that the present drainage scheme is a super-imposed
drainage, now greatly modified by adjustment to structures through perhaps
several cycles of change, an idea for which tb.e writer is indebted to Mi'. W. R.
Browne. The presence of the Glossopteris sandstones at WeiTis Creek and in
several other districts to the south and north, and again of Permo-Carboniferous
marine rocks, and Glossopteris beds near Bowling Alley Point (25), both infault-
ed outliers, renders it probable that the intervening area was at one time covered
by Permo-Carboniferous or Permian strata lying perhaps unconformably upon
the Devonian and Carboniferous rocks. These have been almost completely re-
moved and the original valley system existing on these rocks has been superposed
upon the underlying complex of varied rocks. Tlie extent to which the present
drainage bears sign of its ancestry depends upon the ease of erosion of the rocks
upon which the drainage was superposed. Tn the Tamworth Plains, carved out
of yielding Barraba and Burindi mudstones, a high degi-ee of maturity has been
reached and a thickness of two tliousand feet of sediments may have been re-
moved from the greater part of the area. Where more or less resistant rocks oceui*
they have been brought into greater or less relief, notably at Round Mountain,
nine miles south of Tamworth, which is composed of a hard tufifaeeous conglom-
erate (26) and rises several hundred feet above the plain. It is also the case in

312

GEOLOGV AXD PETROLOGY OF THE GREAT SERPENTINE BELT OF N.S.W.

the Livei'pool Plains where the underlying stinietures seem to have been more
uniformly weak, and the base-levelling is more complete. But in the interven-
ing zone the valley systems superimposed on the diverse structures have retained
their position to a varying degree on the hard structures, though modified by
monoclinal shifting and the more rapid development of valleys on the softer stnic-
tures.

This suggestion must be considered in connection with that of the eastern
margin of the Tamworth Plains, the discussion of which has been postponed
until this region should be studied. Keference should be made for this to the
topographic maps in the writer's previous papers (26) (28) (29) and to Text-fig.
9 herewith. The Moonbi Ranges to the north and south of Tamworth rise up
from the Tamworth Plains to a level of about three thousand five hundred feet,
rising to the south to four thousand feet, as about Hanging Rock. They are com-
posed of the resistant jaspers and cherts, the altered equivalents of the Lower
Tamworth (Middle Devonian) claystones and tuffs with perhaps older rocks

^^^^^^^

Text-fi^.8. Block tliau^i-am of the Tamworth District.

grouped together as the Eastern Series. West of them there is the zone of un-
altered Tamworth rocks of less hardness, passing still westward into the Barraba
series of mudstones with resistant tuffs. This forms the zone of foothills of the
Moonbi Range, and in these differential erosion has had a considerable effect. In
the series of hQls in the Loumbcrah District, in which the ridges of harder rock
reach a level approximating to three thousand feet, we may see the greatly dis-
sected remnants of the plateau that once extended across to the Currabubula re-
gion, where again the resistant hills rise to a comparable general level.

The course of the Peel River is of special interest. It rises in two main
head streams, Wombramurra Creek and the Peel River itself, which fiow for the
most part over the soft Barraba mudstones. the latter in a very open valley.
This closes north of Nundle as the harder cherts of the lower portion of the
Tamworth Series are encountered, and beyond the valley passes between steep
rough hills, through the jasperoid rocks of the eastern series from Bowling Alley
Point to Piallamore, but returns once more to the softer rocks of the Tamworth
Series, and thence on to the BaiTaba rocks of the Tamworth Plains. This alsD
may perhaps be an example, on a gi-and scale, of a superimposed river.

But this does not exhaust the variety of physiographic interest of this region.
The small area lying between the Peel River and a line nmning north-north-
westward from Tamworth to Moore Creek (29) has many of the features of a
tilted block (see Text-fig. 8) . A very mature aggraded surface slopes from the

Proc. Linx. Soc. N.S.W. 1920.

Plate xiv.

noDH

4

3

8

^-■-^■-~

•^V

10

11

12

13

14

C # I ^

15

16

17

18

19

>-'">

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

^.: W^s

29

Atiypidae of New South Wales.

Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W. 1920.

Plate xv.

A/rvpidac of New South Wales.

Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W. 1920.

Plate xvi.

fv\

0 W^ w$

Wt}^

4

.-i/rypi(hie of Xew South Wales.

l*Koc LiNS. 8w<c. N.S.W- im).

^nm^'^h^r.

Geological M;i]) of tlif Oiiriabul'ula District.
Toposjri-apnical Map of the Currabnbiila District.

!•/. -IT/ .. 1

.0£(>r 'npM. .o>>» iiKiJ ,oon"-l

.■-.; JA^,

J uiJaiU «liir(ii<ljiTiirj Hcl} tu quM lifjidqir^'oqoT

J'KOC. Ll.NX. Soc N.>5 "W. lill'd.

Plate xvii

Geolojfical Map oi thf Currabubula District.

BY W N. BENSON. W. S. DUN. AND W. R. BROWNE.

317

21. Jaqtjet, J. B.— The Iron Ore Deposits of New South Wales. Mem. Geol.

Surv N.S.W., vi., 1901, pp. 63-71.

22. De Geer. — A Geochronology of the last 12,000 years. Compte Reijdu. Con-

gres Geol. Internat. (Stockholm), 1910, pp. 2-11-253.
See also Sayles, K. W.— "The Squantum Tillite." Bull. Mus. Comp.
Zool. Harvard, hi.. No. 2, pp. 141-175; Seasonal Deposition in
Aqueo-glacial Deposits. Mem. Mus. Corap. Zool. Harvard, xlvii..
No. 1 1919.

23. Benson, W. N. — The Geology and Petrology of the Great Serpentine Belt

of N.S.W. Part iii. These Proceedings, xxxviii., 1913, pp. 662-
724.

24. Anderson, E. M. and Kadley, E. G.— The Pitehstones of Mull and their

Genesis. Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc, Ixxi., 1915, pp. 205-217.

25. Harker, a. — The Tertiary Igneous Rocks of Skye. Memoirs Geol. Survey

of Great Britain, 1904.

26. Benson. W N. — The Geology and Petrology of the Great Serpentine Belt

of N.S.W. Part vii. These Proceedings, xliii., 1918, p. 320.

27. Gilbert, G. K.— The Geology of tlie Henry Mountains, 1877, pp. 135-8.

28. Benson, W N. — The Geologj' and Petrologj' of the Great Serpentine Belt

of N.S.W. Part v. These Proceedings, xl., 1915, pp. 540-624.

29. Part ii., Ihid., xxxviii., 1913, pp. 569-596.

29a. Andrews, E. C. — The Geographical Unity of Eastern Australia. Proe. Rov.

Soc. N.S.W., xliv., 1910. pp. 420-480.
296. Notes on a Model of New England. Ihid.. xlvi.. 1912, pp. 143-155

(an.l several other papers by the same author).

EXPLANATION OF PLATES XVII.-XVTIrt.

Plate xvii. — Greological Map of the Currabuhula District.
Plate xviirt.— Topographical Map of the Curvabubiila District.

318

ORDIXARV :\r()XTHLY MEETING.
25th August, 1920.
Mr. .J. .J. Fletfher. M.A.. B.Si-., Piesideut, in the Cliair.

Mr. NORMAX Bartlett I'rienu. 42 Pile Street. Dulwii'h Hill, was eleeted an
Ordinary Member of the Society.

The President made regretful reference to the death of Mr. F. M. Clements,
who had been a member of the Society since 1911.

The Donations and Exchanges received since the jirevious Monthly Meeting
(28th July, 1920), amounting to 2 Volumes, 49 Parts or Nos., 2 Bulletins, 1
Report and 2 Pamphlets, received from 45 Societies and Institutions and one
private donor, were laid upon the table.

NOTES AND EXHIBITS.

Mr. T. Steel exhibited a jiortion of the liver uf a domestic fowl showing a
common pin one inch in length embedded in the liver substance. Both ends
of the pin projected for several mm., and were enveloped in liver tissue, the
head and point bein;-' distinctly outlined. The pin must have been swallowed and
then worked its way through the tissues until it became tixed in the position found.
Mr. Steel mentioned having been shown the crop of a domestic duck which was
crammed with common pins picked up by the bird when running about a back
verandah where dressmaking was going un.

Mr. W. W. Frogg'att exhibited specimens of the larva of the t'up moth
{Apoda xylomeli) on a Waratah from Sydney.

Miss Y. Irwin Smith exhibited a female specimen of the conuuon "hug moth"
{Metura elongata Saunders), and gave an account of its observed method of pro-
gression up a vertical pane of glass. In climbinsi; it clung to a narrow transverse
bar of silky threads by its forelegs, while it spun a similar bar about half an incli
higher up, and in two hours spun over 80 rung's and climbed a vertical distance of
four feet. Each rung was cumposed of 7 or 9 strands, the rung always being
commenced on tiie right side and finished on the left. The threads are not sticky,
but each is glued down securely at both ends by some adhesive substance.

Mr. W. F. Blakely exhibited specimens from the National Herbarium of Eupa-
torlum glandulosum H.H. et K. in Nov. Gen. et Sp.. 1820, iv., 122, t. 34(), and
Crepis lietuait Hall f. in Rocni. Arch., i., 2, 1. The first is a native of Mexico,
and is a garden escape, which appears to be well established in several |)laces in
the Port Jackson district, namely — Neutral Bay (J. White); Parramatta River
near Gladesville bridge; Lane Cove River, Killara; head of salt water. Lane Cove
River; between Marsfield and Epping (W. F. Blakely).

On the Lane Cove it is firndy established, and vegetates freily among>;t the
native vegetation, the moist loamy banks corresponding to some extent to the
moist plateaus of its native cm irdimient. except that in its native country it

XOTKS AND EXHIBITS. 319

thrives at an elevation frum 5000 to 8000 feet, while here it flourishes at sea
level, and appears to be sufficiently stable to be considered a naturalised alien.
It is depicted in the Botanical Reijister t. 1732.

Crepls setosa is a native of Europe and Asia Minor, and is now recorded for
the first time for Australia. Several jilants were found growing- in a lane off
Florence-street. Hornsby (W. ¥. Blakely). In New Zealand it is classed as a
roadside weed . For a ready reference to the description, see Hookers Students'
Flora of the British Isles, p. 228.

Mr. A. A. Hamilton exhibited a seed of Biitia yataii Beec. (Cocos yatai/
Mart.), grown in the Sydney Botanic Gardens by J. H. Camfield, which had pro-
duced twin seedling's Worsdell (Prin. of Plant Terato.. 1, pi. 9) figures twin
seedlings in the "Desert Rod" Eremostuchys laciniata, and attributes the dicho-
tomy (p. 94) to fasciation. Patterson f Journ. of Heredity, x., 350) figures an
example of polyembi-yony in the '"Mango." Mangifera hidica, showing a series of
seven seedling's arising from a single seed. The occurrence of twin stems in a
seedling of Acacia juniperina has been noted bv Mr. R. H. Cambage (Journ. Rov.
Soc. N.S.W., xlix.. 93.)

Mr. Fletcher exhibited a stunted In-anch of Encaliiptu.'< sali(/tia with a cluster of
about thirty-five four-pronged female galls of the Coccid, Brachiisceli>/ munita
Schrader, together witli numerous grouped or single male galls. One horn of one
of the female galls, about 13 inches long, carries a small female sail-

320

A LIST OF THE SPECIES OF AUSTRALIAN CARABIDAE WHICH
RANGE BEYOND AUSTRALIA AND ITS DEPENDENT ISLANDS.

By Thomas G. Sloaxe.

Only synonymy that is new is given, but occasionally references are given for
species wbich have been generally knowji under a name that now lias to be dis-
carded in order that the evidence for the unfamiliar name may be easily found.
The date of each name cited is given, so that, if it be not foand in existing
catalogues, it may be traced in the literature of the year given for its appearance.

Clivlna aiistralasine Bolieniann (1858). — Australia. New Zealand, Lord Howe
Island.

Clivina clilutipes Putzeys |18C8|. — Australia, New Zealand.

Clivina ephippiata Putzeys (1867) [= C. felix Sloane, 1896 = C eximia
Sloane, 1890]. — Having seen specimens from Java, and having obtained many
more Australian specimens, chiefly from tropical Australia, I have no hesitation in
placing my species ('. felix and ('. eximia under C. epliippiuta as synonjins. The
differences on which I relied to separate C. felix and C. eximia were not of speci-
fic value. — Australia, Celebes, .Java.

Calosoma oceavicum Perroud (1864) [= C. walkeri Waterhouse, 1898].- —
Both C. oceanicum Perr., and C. ualkeri Waterh., are known to me, but I cannot
differentiate them. I brought this opinion before Mr. H. E. Andrewes, of Lon-
don, and, after looking into the matter, he has written to me tliat lie concurs in
this synonymy.- -Australia, New Caledonia.

Gnathaphami^ licitwides Hope (1842) \= Catadromusf impresstis Montrousier
I860; = llnrpalus alieniaiis Castelnau, 1868. Cf. Andrewes, Trans. Ent. Soc.
Lond., 1919, p. 202].- — Australia, New Guinea, New Caledonia.

Gnathaphnvu.s pjliiliji/ieii'^i.'i Chevrolet (18411. — .\nstralia, Malay .Vrclii-
pelago, S.E. Asia.

(iiialhajitiuini't 'mprrs^ii peiniis t'astelnau (18li8). — Australia, New Cale-
donia, New Guinea, Sumbawa.

Diaplioromerus melanarius Dejean (1829) . — I now restrict the genus Giiatha-
phamis to species having at least the third interstice of the elytra pluripunctate.
and for that reason amongst others, refer JIarpalm mehiiiariiis: Dej. to Diaphnro-
merus. — Australia, New Caledonia.

Ilypharpax australi'' Dejean (1829).- — Australia. Lnrd Howe Island.

Pacliiitraehelu-'^ nbknHjiis Dejean (1831).- — I have received specimens of this
species from the National ^Museum. ^Melbourne, ticketed Oenpili, N. Territory.—
Australia, Malay ArchiiJelago. India.

Ambli/xtomiis metalliciix Blackburn (1887) . — A specimen whicji T cannot dif-
ferentiate from A. (Thenarotes) metalllcus Blackb. was in the Van der Poll.
Coll. as from Sumbawa. — Australia (widely distributed), Sumbawa.

BY T. G. SLOANE. 32i

Amhliistomits indtcus Nietner ( 1 858 ) . — Mr. A. M. Lea sent me speoimens
ticketed Dalby, Queeusland, which agree so well with Nietner's description ot ^1.
{Megaristerus) indicus that I am compelled to regard it as that species. Mr.
H. E. Andrewes has sent me an Indian specimen under the name of Amblystomus
guttatus Bates (1873) which is conspecific with the Queensland species. — Aus-
tralia, Asia, Ceylon.

Aiiiblij^toiiiHfi steiiulopliuides Xietner (1858). — Mr. F. P. Doild sent me a
species from Kuranda Queensland, which agrees so well with Nietner's descriptior
of A. (Megaristenis) steiiolopJioides Niet., that I identity it as that species.- -
Australia, Ceylon.

Stenolojjhus smaragdulus Fabricius (1798). — Mr. H. E. Andrewes has re-
cently published the synonymy of this species (Trans. Ent. Soc. Lond., 1919, pp.
178,189). He reported the 5-spotted form, S. qui )i que- past iilatus Wied.. as occur-
ring in Queensland; it has been sent to me from Kuranda by Mr. F. P. Dodd. —
Australia, Malay Archipelago, Asia.

Stenolophus dingo Castelnau (18G8) {_= S. robiKttis SI. 1907]. — When I
described S. rohustus I believed .s'. dingo to be conspecific with ,S'. (Acupalpui)
picens Guer., but, Ijaving since received what I now consider to be the true
iS'. dingo from N. Queensland, I beliexe my species to be the same as Castelnau's.
The description of <S'. (Amphibia) pallipes Perroud (1860), is useless, but I
believe it to be the same as S. dingo; the name .S'. pallipes was already in use
in 1860. so Fauvel in 1882 proposed S. grandieeps to replace it, but, if I am right
in my surmise as to its identity with S. dingo, this name was not re(|uired. —
Australia. New Guinea, Java, (?) New Caledonia.

Bembidium iipnlentum Nietner (1858) [^ B. enrops Bates 188() = B. river-
inae Sloane 1894] — Mr. H. E. Andrewes has published the opinion that B.
opulentum Niet. is the same thing as B. europs Bates (Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., 1919,
p. 472) ; I believe there is no doubt but that he is right in this. He sent me a
specimen of B. europs which showed me that my B. riverinae was the same species.
From Fauvel's treatment of his B. hamiferum (1882) in his Faune Analytic|ae des
Coleopteres de la Nouvelle-Caledonie (1903). it would appear as if it would nl.so
prove iohe B. opulentum. — Australia (widely distributed), Sumbawa, .Java. Ceylim.
Southern Asia.

Tacln/s triangularis Nietner (1858). — Australia, New Caledonia, ^lalay Archi-
pelago. Asia, Africa.

Limnastis pilosus Bates (1892) [= Tachgs setiger Sloane. 1903].— After
seeing specimens from Borneo. I liave no hesitation in placing ray Tachgs s.etigrr
as a synonym of L. pilosus Bates. — Australia, Borneo, Burma.

Coelostomus picipes Macleay W.S. (1825). — Mr. H. E. Andrewes has gone
very fully into the synonymy of this species;* it has been reported as having
been found at Mount Ernest, Queensland, by d'Albertis (teste Chaudoir, under
name of Stomonaxus striaticoUis Dej.. Col. Nov., 1, 1883. \>. 39). — Australia. .lava,
S.E. Asia.

Morio longipennis Putzeys (1875). — Australia. New Guinea.

Catadromus tenebrioides Olivier (1790) [=-■ C. elseyi White (1859)]. — I
have specimens from Australia and .Tava, but cannot differentiate them as sep-
arate species. — Australia, .Tava, Amboyna.

Chlaenioidius prolixus Erichson (1842). — Australia, New Caledonia.

* Trans. Ent. Soc. Lond., 1919. p. 160.

322 ArsTRAl.IAX ('AIJAItllJAK WIIK 11 l.'ANCK BEYOXl) AlSTRAI.IA,

VhlaeniokUus mellki Montrousier (ISIJU). — C. Ittrbucci'.s t/hauduir (181)5), the
name usually given to this species, is a syuonym. — Australia. New Caledonia.

Cosmodiseus rubripictus Sloane (1907). — A specimen trmn the \'an der Poll
Coll., was ticketed "Am Is."; it ag:reed so closely with C. rubripictus SI. (though
smaller) that it was evidently conspecific. — Austialia, Aiu Islands.

Colpudas subinetallicus White (1S4G) [=^ Platyiius muryinicollis .Macleay
1871.] — Both C. nubmetallicus \Vt. and 1'. maryinicullis Macl. are in my collection,
but 1 <lo not see specific distinctions between them. — Australia, New Zealand.

Colpudes laj'ertei Montrt)usier (1800). — Australia, New Caledonia.

Culpodes viulaceus Chaudoir (18.59) . — Australia, New Guinea.

Dicranoucus qu&siisUindicue Sloane. — A specimen of this species has been
sent to me by Mr. H. E. Andrewes, of London, ticketed Nilgiri Hills, and I
have another specimen labelled "Ceylon."

Aepluiidiu^s adeloides Macleay (18251. — Australia, Malay Archipelago, Asia

Periyuna iiiyriceps Dejean (1831). — A cosmopolitan species which 1 have
described from (Queensland as J', austrulica.

Dicraspedu ttitida Sloaue (1917) . — 1 described this as a species cf Eudaliu,
but now consider it to belong- to tliii older genus Dicraspeda. — Queensland, Java .

CIdaeiiius ophonoid,es Fairmaire (1843). — Australia, New Caledonia.

Clilneiiius flai-iyuttatus Macleay W.S. (1825). — Mr. H. E. Andrewes has
recently made known the fact that C. fUiriyuttatu^ Macl. must re])lace the more
recent name (_'. binotatua Dc.j. (182G), uuder which this species has bee;i generally
known. — Australia Java, Sumatra.

Chlaenius maculiyer Castelnau (1808). — Australia, New Guinea.

Chlaenius hamifer Chaudoir (1856) [= C. queenslandicm Sloane, 1910]. —
After seeing specimens of ('. Iiumifer sent to me by Jfr. H. E. Andrewes, I
have no hesitation in putting C. queenslandicus under it as a synoiijTij. — Aus-
tralia, (Celebes, India

llolnleim nitlJulus Dejean (1820). — Australia, Asia.

Catascopus eleyans AVcher (1801). — This species is widely (lis(vil)uted from
Asia to Australia; Chaudoir considered Hope's C. austrulasiae (18421 a variety.

Miscelu-f niorioformis ■\lacleay (1870). — North Australia, New Guinea.

Lebia picipennis Macleay (1871). — Australia. New Guinea.

Celaeiiephes parallehi.i Schmidt-Goebel (1840). — Australia, New Caledouia,
Malay Archipelago, S.E. Asia.

Dolichochtis tetrastiynm Chaudoir (1809). — Australia, New Guinea, Celebes.

Phloeodromms playiutus .Macleay (1870). — Australia, New Guinea.

Peniagonica olivaceus Chaudoir (1877). — I obtained in the grass beside the
margin of a small creek near Brisbane, one specimen of a species which I identify
from the description as P. olivaceus Chaud. — Australia, New Caledonia.

Creayris labrosus Nietner (1858). — Australia, Java. Slam. Ceylon.

Agonochila binotata White. T cannot differentiate IVoiri one .•mother, speci-
mens of this species from New Zealand and Tasmania.

There arc three exotic species, unknown to me in nature, which seem to re-
semble their nearest Australian congeners so closely that I believe there is a great
probability of their lieing identical; comjiarisons certainly rei|uire to ^\- made, as
indiiafi'd lielow, before their validity as sjiecies can be recognised as absolutely
settled.

BY T. (i. SLOASE. , 323

Steiioloplius se.cualis Fauvel (1882), N. Caledonia, with ,S'. (Acnpalpus)
piceus Gueiin (1831), Australia.

Ehytisienius nigifrons Brown (1880), N. Zealand, with N. miser l"hau<loir
(1865), Australia.

Peiitagaiiica rittata IJrciwn (1880), N. Zealand, with P. vlttlpeiniis Chaudoir
(1877), Australia.

The ('AR.iBiDAR OF Tas.maxia. — Corrigenda.

Some errors escaped notice in my paper on ;he Carabidae of Tasmania, pub-
lished in Part 1 of the present volume of these Proceedings, pp. 113-178, and at-
tention is in)w directed to the following: —

Page 113, line 2G of text, for stria, read interstice.

Page 11-1-. In the figures given the external stria has been omitted.

Page 118. line 27, for Australian, 1, read Australian 61.

Page 142, line 12, for P. tasmatiica read P. tasmanicus.

Page 152, lines 32 and 33 fur beside second stria, posterior puncture beside
third stria, read beside third stria, posterion puncture beside second stria.

324

ON DENTAL INCRUSTATIONS AND THE SO-CALLED "GOLD-PLATINa"

OF SHEEP'S TEETH.

Bv Tuos. Steel.

For many years past there have appeared from time to time, in newspapers
and magazines published all over the world, statements as to the occun-enee of a
metallic incrustation on the teeth of sheep. The incrustation in question is usu-
ally found more or less thickly coating the sides of the molar teeth, and. being
fre(iuently of a shining, yellowish, metallic appearance, has been popularly
attributed to gold supposed to have been derived from particles of that metal
scattered about the pastures. So deeply-rooted is the popular belief that the
incrustation consists of gold, my friend, Mr. J. H. Campbell, informs me that
persons have brought jaws of sheep to the Eoyal ilint. Sydney, with a view to
selling them for the supposed adherent gold. Quite recently, it was most confi-
dently asserted by correspondents in Xature* that the incrustation consisted of
iron pyrites, and various fantastic theories were put forward to account for the
presence of this substance in such a situation.

In 1905 Professor Liversidge exhibited at a meeting of the Royal Society of
New South Wales! part of a sheep's jaw. heavily coated with yellow metallic-
looking deposit, and read a descriptive note with a qualitative analysis, clearly
showing the true nature of the substance to be a deposit derived from the saliva,
and that the metallic appearance was due to the refraction of light by the over-
lapping edges of the thin lamellae of the deposit. Again, in .Tuly. 190.5. the same
gentleman exhibited and explained the deposit at a meeting of the Sydney section
of the Society of Chemical Industry. Similar specimens were exhibited by
Horan to the New South Wales Naturalists' Club in 1013. t

As will be shown in this paper, the presence of such deposits is by no means
confined to the teeth of sheep, but is a common occuiTence on those of a very large
variety of animals, including man. It is, in fact, a dental calculus analogous to
those occurring in the urinary tract.

The earliest account of the true nature of dental incrustations witli which T
have met, occurs in the Annals of Philosoi-)hy.§ In the course of a series of
articles entitled "General Views of the Composition of Animal Fluids," Rerzelius
gives a correct explanation of the nature of the deposit from human teeth, and his
analysis of a specimen, which will be quoted further on.

In 1834, Dr. G. Bennett || re(!ords having observed a layer of "metallic sub-
stance" incrusting the teeth of kangaroos, and correctly diagnosed it as "tartar"

•Nature, xcix., 1917, pp.2fi4, 284, 290. .'itX); c, 1917, p.l06.

+Journ. Roy. Soc. N.S.Walt-s, xxxix., 190.'), p.3:ij .also Chem. News, xcii., 1905. p. 11.5;
.Tour. Soc. Chem." Tnd.. xxiv., 1905, p.lO.TO.

tAustralian N.ituraliat, ii.. 191,^, pp!l74, 187.
§Thoinson's Ann. Phil., ii., 1814. p..'i80.
ilWamWinors in New South Wales, i., 1834. p. 294.

BV T. STEEL. 325

precipitated from the saliva. He mentious its occurrence in the ox and sheep,
and remarks that on account of its yellow colour it is freqiiently mistaken for
gold. He quotes the analysis by Berzelius mentioned above.

In a paper published in 1879, "On Macrodontism." N. de Miklouho-Madayt
described and figured the huge projecting teeth which he observed in natives of
the Taui or Admiralty Islands, and refers to a sketch in Xature* which he de-
scribes, liowever, as a caricature. In a subsequent paperf he explains that fur-
ther investigation had shown that he was mistakin in supposing that the projec-
tions were due to dental malformation, but that they really consisted of an enor-
mous deposit of '"tartar," probably largely due to the habit of these people of
chewing betel nut and lime. The deposit could be detached, leaving the teeth
quite normal. The late Mr. P. R. Pedley, surgeon-dentist, who examined the
deposit, identified it as dental tartar. Unfortunately there is no record of a
chemical examination having been made. Miklouho-Maelay proposed the term
"odontolithiasis" fur this condition.

From the stocks of bones passing through a large bone charcoal factory in
Sydney, I have been able to examine the teeth o*' numerous sheep and also those
of oxen, horses, pigs, etc., and to secure ample material for a complete chemical
analysis of the deposit from the teeth of sheep and oxen . From other sources
I have obtained sufficient for (]uantitative analysis from the teeth of a number
of animals, including man. By the courtesy of the late Mr. R. Etheridge, speci-
mens from the teeth of animals in the Australian Museum, Sydney, were secured,
sufficient in a few cases for full analysis, and in a considerable number of others
for qualitative determination. Mr. H. A. Longman, F.L.S., Director of the
Queensland Museum, kindly allowed me material from the skeleton of a camel.
In all such cases care was taken to insure that the dejiosit obtained was pure and
not contaminated with lime whicii may have been used in the preparation of
skeletons .

Very eommonlv the taxidermists api)ear to have carefully cleaned the teetii.
My kinsman. Mr. A. Ross Brown, B.D.Sc, L.D.S.. of Windsor, Melbourne, and
nw friend, Mr. J. Dartou, surgeon dentist. Petersham, furnished me with an ample
supply from human teeth, secured in the course of their professional practice in
the operation of "scaling." Mr. Charles Hedley, Acting Curator of the Aus-
tralian Museum, kindly gave me facilities, with the aid of Messrs. Thorpe and
Troughton, to examine the large collection of skulls in the Museum. To Pro-
fessor J. Douglas Stewart, of the Veterinary School, Sydney University, I am in-
debted for explaining to me details regarding the structure of teeth and giving
me other information. To all of these gentlemen I desire to tender my best thanks.
Further material was obtained from specimens in my own collection and passing
through my hands. In addition 'to examining the dental deposit, I have, in the
cases of the ox and camel, made an analysis of the cement or cementum layer
(cntsta petrosa). In these animals this layer is strongly developed, extending
well up on the exposed part of the tooth, and can be readily separated. The
incrustation could, in most cases, be easily flaked off from either the cement or
the enamel and the surface beneath was always f|uite sound.

The figures following give the results. The samples were ground, and air-
dried at ordinary temperature.

tProc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, iii., 1879, p. 169.

•Nature, xvi., 1877, p.a.'jl.

tProe. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, x., 1886. p.682.

32G ox UKXTAL IXCRI'STATIOXS,

ANALYSES OF DENTAL INCRUSTATIONS. Cement layer

(Ciiisla pe/rosa)

C

Lime (CaO) ■10-75 28(X) 29-38 37-75 37-00 46-13 47-50 35-119 3(i-21

Mao-nesia (Mg O) 0-18 4-19 3-69 0-27 0-18 0-56 0.68 112 . 0-98

Phosphoric oxide (Po O5) 34-73 26-.55 2817 29.33 2948 7-95 714 26-68 26-88

Carbon (Uoxide (CO2) 1-32 1-45 1-10 2-70 2.88 22-65 1 ^^ 2-90 1-80

Organic matter* 17-23 24-65 23-90 16-20 16-82 17-48 j " 23-54 24-74

Water at 110° C. 5-38 11-03 10-30 11-65 10-40 3-85 2-63 9-35 8-66

Sand 0-10 2-30 2-00 0-60 0-30 055 0-39 nil nil

Undetermined and loss 0-31 1-83 146 1-50 2-94 0-83 0-03 0-72 0-73

100-00 ia)-ai loo-oo lo-ooo loo-oo loo-oo loo-oo loo-oo loo-ai

•Containini; nitrogen 1-20 1-48 0-71

Sp. Gr. 2-317 2-025 2112

Mikloulio-Maclay mentions that specimens of teeth similarly iiiornsted to
those which he describes were forwarded by F. A. de Roepstorff from the Xicobar
Islands to Professor Yin-how. Berlin. -t The deposit from these was analysed by
Salkowski, and the results published by Virchow. llu- following being the figures: —

Water 0 . 93

Organic matter !) . iU

Silica and iron oxide .87

Iron phosphate 2.26

Lime 45 . 24

Magnesia .68

Pliosphoric oxide 30.73

(,'arbiin dioxide 4.87

S):) . 70
This shows more lime and carbtm dioxide and consideraldy le.ss organic matter
than I found in the normal incrustation from hunuui teeth. Probably this is a
result of the addition of carbonate of lime from the lime-betelnut habit, but the
high phosphoric acid shows that essentially the deposit has been derived from the
saliva. The presence of so much iron phosphate is peculiar, and T am uniible to
explain it. I found no apiireciable iron in any of ray samples.
The analysis l)y Berzclius mentioned above, is thus stated :--

Eartiiy phosidiates 70.0

Mucus 12.5

Peculiar salivary matter 1.0

Animal matter soluble in muriatic aciii 7.5

100
There is no mention of water. It is probable that Herzelius merely ignited
and took the ash as "earthy phosphates," and the organic substances include
water. For a rough comparison it will suffice to consider the "phospliates" as
being tribasic phosphate of lime and to lump tou-etlior tlie orsranic substauces.
This would give: —

tVerh. Berlin. (Jes. Anthrop., June, 1881. p. 219.

BV T. .STEEL.

327

Lime ■^S •

Pliospboric oxide 3l) .

Oi"auie matter anil wattT -l-

100.

These figures agree very well with my analysis of the liumau prodiu-t. In
my examination 1 found the total loss on ignition, including water and carbon
dioxide, was 24 % and the ash 76 %.

In my analysis, in every case the sand was m the form of mechanically em-
bedded grains. It will be noticed that the incrustations from the Rhinoceros and
Babirussa (a pig-like animal from N. Celebes) differ from the others in contain-
ing but little phosjihoric acid and a considerable proportion of calcic carbonate.
In both of these the scale, w-hen detached, was in appearance much like that from
the sheep and ox, being in clean shining flakes. In man it is chalky-looking and
has not got the metallic, or more commonly, nacreous look of that from the sheep.
The similarity in comiiosition between most of the incrustations and that of the
cement layers of ox an<l camel is striking. Ordinary maunualian lione has also
a very similar composition.*

In making the analyses, care was taken in separating lime an<l magnesia, by
double precipitation of the lime in the cold to avoid co-precipitation of magnesia.
The proportions of lime and phosphoric acid present are such as to indicate
that the phosphate of lime does not exist entirely as the tribasic (Cas P2 O.s). but
that a variable amount of the tetrabasic (Cai P2 On) is also present. I have
found. this to be a usual condition in many natural phosphates sucli as those from
Ocean Island.

Bearing in mind the analogy between these dental salivary incrustations and
urinary calculi, a careful examination was made of those from man, sheep and ox
for oxalic and uric acids, but with entirely negative results.

I have examined the deposit from a large variety of animals in addition to
those already mentioned, using micro-chemical methods when the amount available
was minute, and in every case have found it to be of substantially the same nature.
The quantitx- present varies from a mere trace of brown film, to a heavy incrusta-
tion packed round the crowns of the teeth and forming a continuous coating along
the sides as much as a quarter of an inch in thickness. It is heaviest in herbivorous
animals and in man. The teeth of the carnivorae and rodents are usually very
clean ; this is well seen in dog-s, cats, mice and rats, though all of tiiese. particu-
larly when old. and also rabbits, frequently have a thin brown film even on the
incisors. Some individuals are more predisposed to dental incrustation than
others. This is well-known in man, and T have noticed it in sheep and other
animals. The teeth of snakes, lizards and fish in so far as I have noticed, ap-
))ear to be always quite free from deposit.

I do not think that the nature of the pasture, as has sometimes been asserted,
has anything particular to do with the abundance or otherwise of the deposit on
sheep's teeth, but tliat it is purely a physiological idiosyncrasy. Sheep and oxen
very commonly have the teeth coated with a uniform, thin, dead black film, but
this does not differ in composition from the thicker deposit. The common pig
has very clean teeth . I have examined many hundreds of pigs' jaws, and have
never noticed more than traces of a brown film.

'Watt's Diet. Chem.,.vi., 1879, 1st. Supp., .357.

328 ON' KENTAI. iNcur.vrATioxs

Extended observation has satisfied me that the incrustation, in greater or less
degiee, is common to all mammals, and also to a number of otlier animals, in
every ease being of the same general character. I have found it. for instance, in
the crocodile (C. purosus) Queensland, killer v.hales {Orca gladiator), and in
one individual or another of practically every mammalian species examined. It
will suffice to give the names of a few as indicating the scope of the investigation:
Tapir, eland, American bison, hippopotamus, various bears, dog, cat, rat, mouse.
Examination of the skulls of marsupials in the Australian Museum collection and
elsewhere disclosed numerous examples: Mucropins major, cjuite as heavy as that
of the sheep, J/, ijiganteus, 21. riifus, Phascolarctus civereus. Phaf^colomys mit-
chellij Da.si/tire, and many others. The original observations of Dr. Bennett are
thus completely confirmed. Fossil marsupial teeth from Wellington Caves, Xew
South Wales, in the Australian iluseum, still ha^e adhering brown patches which
I take to be the same deposit. Where\"er the teeth of animals were noticed to
have a yellow or brownish tint as in aged rats, minute examination showed this to
be due to the same cause.

In response to queries from me, Mr. Brov.n has supplied me with the follmv-
ing very interesting notes: — '"Tartar fonns on artificial plates, especially lower
plates, quite as readily as on the natural teeth; it is an everyday occurrence to
see that. It is deposited along the lower portion of the lingual side of the plate,
and dentists are continually asked by patients what it is and how to remove it.
I do not remember seeing teeth forming jjart of a Ijridge witli tartar deposited on
them, but frequently find that the gum having slightly receded after the bridge has
been fixed; a slight deposit is to be seen round the gingival margin of the natural
roots to which the bridge is attached. Porcelain crowns (pivots) and gold
crowns or caps remain free from deposit. I once had to remove from an elderly
woman's mouth a little lower plate having three teeth on it, and there was such
an accumulation of tartar all about the whole structure and the remaining teeth
that two of the latter were extracted in the removal of tlie plate; these. ho\vevc>r.
were loose from pyorrhoea. In this case the tartar had certainly eiu-roached to
some extent on the artificial teeth. The iiatient informed me that she had not
removed the denture since the dentist luit it in place many yeai-s before. This
case was an exceptional one, and as I have mentioned. T do nut remember seeing
deposit on artificial teeth at any other tinu\"

I think it is proliable tliat the nature of the surface of ixircelain teeth and
gold crowns inhibits the adliesion of deposit. In the case of the urinary tract, it
is well known that any solid foreign body, such as a piece of broken catheter,
soon becomes coated with phosphate, and that a little blood clot or even bacteria
mav foim the nucleus of a urinarv calculus.

329

ON THE STKUCTURE OF THE RESIN-SECRETING GLANDS IN SOME

AUSTRALIAN PLANTS.

By Marjorie I. Collins, B.Sc, Linnean Macleay Fellow or the Society in

BOTAXY.*

(With Test-figures 1-12.)
Introductiox.

While engaged upon an investigation of the resinous secretion of the bud
in certain Australian genera of the Natural Orders Sapiiidaceae, Leijiiininoseae
(Sub-Order Mimo^eae) , Compositae, Goudeniaceae and Myoporineae, the writer's
attention was drawn to certain types of glandular hair, some of which have not
been recorded previously for these Orders.

Since in all cases the developmental stages tlmiAv an interesting light upon
the structure of the mature gland, and since the results obtained might prove to
he of systematic value, it is thought desirabJij to place these observations on
record.

Glandular hairs are described for the following species : — Dodonaea viscosa
Linn. [Sapindaceae). Acacia rupieola F. v. M., A. armata R Br., A. pi/criantha
Benth.. ,1. rerniciflua Cunn., (Leguminoseae, Sub-Order Mimosieae), Ixodea achill-
eoides R.Br., Heliclirysum semipapposum DeCand., and Hiimea cassiniacea F. v. M.
{Compositae). Mi/oporum serratuni var. ivfiilare R.Br., Mi/oporum serratum v^ar,
viscosum R.Br., and Eremophila latifolia F. v. M. (Myoporineae) .

^ly thanks are due to Professor Osborne, University of Adelaide, for the
■nterest he has slio'mi during the progress of the work.

Description of Glandli.ar Hairs.

N. 0. SAPINDACEAE.

In his account of the Sapindaceae, based iipon Radlkofer's monograph {'2),
Solereder states that glandular hairs are widely distributed, and are present on
young leaves throughout the order (3, p. 230). The glands are described as being
multicellular peltate .scales, in which the cells of the shield either show a radial
arrangement (Arytera). or are polygonal and irregularly placed (Filicium, etc.).
It is recorded that in some genera, e.g., Melai/odifcus. the external glands are
analogous to glandular shaggj' hairs, since they possess a palisade-like secretory
region at the perijihery.

In Dodonaea viscosa, which was examined by the present writer, the glandular
hairs resemble the Melanodiscus type. They are large in propoi-tion to the thick-
ness of the young leaf, and show a tendency towards radial arrangement of the

•Tlie observations recorded in this paper were made while the writer held the posi-
tion of Demonstrator in Botany, The University of .\delaide.

330

liKSI.V-SECliKTING CLANDS IN SO.XtK ArSTKAI.IAX PLANTS,

peripheral lioad-cells. Sometimes tbis tendency ]s very marked, giving- tlie gland
a colleter-like appearance, while often there is no sign of peripheral elongation,
the gland merely being a mass of polygonal cells, irregularly arranged.

Development uf the Glands. — The first sign of gland development in On-
donuea viacosa, is the projection from the epidermis of a papillose cell which
reaches a height of about twice that of the adjacent epidermal cells (Text-tig.
]«) . Tile nucleus divides and the first wall is formed in a \-ertical direction, divid-
ing the initial cell of the gland into two cells of equal size (Text-iig. lli). The
second division follows in either of the cells thus formed. The wall is either
placed in a slightly oblique position, when fbe resulting cells are unequal in size
(Text-fig. Ic) or it may be vertical, when the resulting cells are e<|ual (Text-fig.
1//). Whether the mature gland possesses a pedestal region, made up of two or
three rows of cells, depends upon the manner in which this second wall is formed
in the young gland. From observations on a number of glands it stems pro-
bable that there are never more than two vertical divisions in the first stages of
development, while in a number of cases there is only one. The vertical divisions
are followed by a series of o1)lique divisions (Text-fig. Ic-/, /(-/), which result in
the formation of a projecting cell mass almost spherical in contour (Text-fig. Ij).
At this stage there is a marked increase in the size of the cells making up the
gland. Those at the periphery tend to elongate in a radial manner, causing the
differentiation of the gland into marginal and central regions (Text-fig. Ik).
The mature glands are large ])eltate hairs which overlap one another and spread
out to cover a considerable area of the epidermis (Text-fig. 2). The multicellular

Text-fig. 1. — (a-k). St.iges iu the develop-
ment of the glandular hairs of J)oJoiiaea
viscosa Linn, (x 200).

Text-£ig.2. — Mature u;lands of Dodouaea
viscosa crowded and overlapping on
S'-ii-face of young loaf. Note their
height in comparison with thickness of
leaf, (x 120).

head is borne upon a i)edestal of 2 or 3 rows of cells which- umy become more
numerous by later divisions. At maturity the radial elongation of the peripheral
cells of the gland is often partly and sometimes totally obliterated by a series of

irregular divisions which nccur during the later stages of development (Text-fig.

2).'

iV. 0. LEGUMINOSExlE (Sub-order Minw.seae).

Solereder refers to the constant formation of glandular hairs in the .Mimosene.
The glands may possess a uniseriate stalk of varying length, with a nuilticcllular

BY MARJORIE I. C'OLLIXS.

331

head divided by butli liuiizoutal and vertieal walls, e.g., eertaiu species of
Parkia, Entada, Acacia, and Albizzia (3, p. 296), or the head may be shield-like
and consist of two layei's of cells (certain species of Mimosa). Glands with a
short stalk and a few head cells have been observed in Acacia dud onae folia
Willd., A. exsudanti Liiid., and A. leprosa Sieb. (3, p. 296).

In species of Acacia, A. rupicola F. v. M., A. vertiicij'lua Cunn., .1. armuta
R.Br., A. iJtjcHuntha Benth., found in the neighbourhood of Adelaide, the writer
observed four distinct types of glandular hair lutherto unrecorded for the genus
Acacia.

A. rupicola. — In Acacia rupicola the mature gland consists of a uniseriate
stalk of from three to six small cells surmounted by a large balloon-like head cell
(Text-fig. 3). The cells which make up the stalk are not cut oft' from the base
of the head cell, but are formed by a series of parallel transverse divisiiais within
the stalk rudiment. The head cell appears to be more actively secretory than the

Text-fig. 3. — Mature glands of Acacia rupi-
cola showing uniseriate stalk of varying
length and inflated head cell, (x 230).

Text-fig. 4. — Surface view of glands of
Acacia verniciflua showing head cells
and upper tier of stalk, (x 230) .

stalk cells. The glands of A. rupicola. differ from the uniseriate type of gland
already recorded for species of Acacia l)y Soleieder, in that the head is always
unicellular; they jirobably re)iresent a simpler tvpe of gland than any previously
recorded for the Mimoseae.

Acacia verniciflua. — In Acacia verniciflua the mature gland resembles
the type recorded for species of Mimosa with i-hield-like head and consisting of
two layers of cells (3, p. 296). Here the normal mature gland is made u]i of a
large head of from eight to sixteen radiating cells in a single layer, supported by
a stalk of one or two rows of cells (Text-tig. 4n. h). Each row of the stalk nor-
mally consists of four cells, but in some cases iiTegnlar divisions may occur,
converting the stalk region into a mass of cells of variable number.

Gland Development.

After the first horizontal division differentiating the gland rudiment from the
epidermis, a second horizontal division parallel to the first separates the head and
stalk rudiments (Text-flg. ba-d). The third division is vertical in the median plane
of the head, and is followed almost immediately by a horizontal division within the
stalk, cutting off a second stalk cell (Text-flg. 5e-f). Further vertieal divisions are
now formed in the head, many of which are quite radial, others nearly so. Closely
following the first of these vertical divisions in the head, two vertieal divisions

33:2

RKSIX-SKCRETlXCi III.AXIIS IN SOJIK AUSTRALIAX PLANTS,

appear bisecting tlie uppermost stalk cell in planes at right angles (Text-%. 5^;).
Similar tlivisions are then tVirniecl in the second stalk cell anil ultimately in the
basal epidermal cell (Text-tig. 5//). Owing tn the position of the original hori-

l^^lfl

Text-fig. 5. — («-/') • Stages in the development of the normal gland of Acacia verniciflua ;

i, shows commencement of irregular divisions iu the upper tier of the stalk; y, and^,

types of gland formed by the omission of the second stalk cell, (x t'M).

Text-fig. 6 — Mature gland of cicada I'crnicijina in which tlie two-tiered nature of tlie

stalk has been ol)literated by irregular lUvisions during the later stages of

development, (x 230).

zontal division, at a level sometimes above that oi' the neighbouring epidermal
cells, these basal cells often project for some distance, and appear to form part
of the gland (Text-tig. 5ft, i, j).

In Text-fig. 5ft we have what is |irob:il]ly the normal type of gland, in which
each tier of the stalk is made up of four cells. Text-fig. 5 j and A- represent a
ty])e of gland often met where the second stalk cell has been omitted.

With gi'owth of the gland cells, however, an irregular division often takes
place in the upper tier of the stalk wliicli is then made up of five or six poly-
gonal cells, irregidarly arranged (Text-fig. 5/). When this irregular division
proceeds to the second tier of the stalk, the resulting gland liecomes more com-
plex, the sliield-like head being supported by an irregular mass of cells in whicii
all trace of the two-tiered stalk is obliterated (Text-tig. (i).

Acacia armata. — During the development of the glandular hairs in ,1. urmata
there is marked variation in the sequence and number of cell divisions. This
variation is accountable for the number of gland forms which are mingled freely
on the surface of the young phyllode. These gland forms resemble one anothei-,

BY 3IARJ0RIE I. COLLINS.

333

in that the bead is always vertically elongated and never shield-like. What ap-
pears to be tlie normal type of gland is figured in Text-fig. la. There the head
is composed of an octant of cells, and is supported by a short stalk of two cells.
The stalk may possess two or three cells (Text-fig. la-c), but is often absent

Text-fig. 7. — (a-d). Gland forms of Acacia
armaia in which stalk region is present;
e-f, types where stalk is absent, (x 200) .

Text-fig. 8. — Glandular hair from the base
of the phyllode in Acacia pycnantha.
(x 200) .

(Text-fig. 7e-f). The head in the greater number of glands is characterised by
vertical and horizontal divisions which vai-y in number and sequence (Text-fig.
7h-e). Text-fig. If sliows a new type of gland which has arisen by the omission
of the divisions giving i^ise to stalk cells.

Acacia pi/ctiaiitlia. — In ^1. piicn.antha the glandular hairs are restricted to a
Z(me at the base of the phyllode. The mature glands are elongated in form, and
show no differentiation into head and stalk region. They are multicellular, club-
shaped bodies in which both vertical and horizontal walls are formed ( Text-fig. 8 ) .
These glands are of interest in that they resemble the stalkless type of gland
found in A. armata (Text-fig. 7/'), and could conceivably have arisen from tliis type
by tlie interpolation of further divisions.

N. 0. COMPO SITAE.

Resin-secreting glandular hairs are widely distributed in the N. 0. Compositae,
and have been recorded by various investigators (1, 4, 5, 6, 7). The most com-
mon type of gland is shortly stalked and possesses a head divided by a median
vertical wall into two rows of cells. These are recorded for species of AnthemiK,
Baccharis, Brachiilaena, etc. (3, p. 460), and have been observed by the writer in
Ixudea achiUeoides R.Br., llumea cassinlacea F. v. M., and Helichrysum semipap-
posum DeCand. The glands figured by Vogl for a species of CJirysanthemam
(see 3, i., p. 458, fig. W3h, after Vogl), evidently represent a transitional stage be-
tween those observed by the writer for Helicliri/siim semipappufiiim and I.mdea
achiJleiiides.

Gland Development. — In tliese three types the first transverse division whicli
cuts off the rudiment of the gland from the epidermis is followed by a median

334

RESIX-SECRETIXG GLANDS IX SOME AUSTRALIAN' PLANTS,

vertical division in both gland rudiment and basal epidermal cell (Text-figs. 9a-c,
]0«-b). This vertical division is fdllowed by a series of transverse divisions
parallel to the first transverse wall formed. In the case of Helichrnsum semi-
papposum the median vertical division is followed by one transverse division only.
The gland cells then increase in size, the upper pair being markedly inflated
(Text-fig. 10 c, d). In Ixodea and Humea there are three transverse divisions fol-
lowing the median vertical division, so that the mature gland possesses two vertical
rows, each of four cells surmountin.i;' a basal epidermal cell (Text-figs. 9e-f). In
the glands of a species of Chri/santliemtim figured by Solereder after Yogi (3, i.,
p. 458, fig. 103/f.). only two transvei-se divisions iollow the vertical divisiim.

N. (>. MYOPOBIXEAE.

Glandular hairs are of common occurrence in the two genera of Mi/oporineae —
Myoporum and Eremophila. Solereder states tliat these glandular hairs possess
"varied structure within the individual species, but agree in the tact that the

Jfef

Text-fig. 9. — (a-/). Stages in the development of the glandular hairs of Ixodea achille-
oides ; g, h, surface and lateral views of glandular hairs, (x 280).

Text-fig. 10. — (a-d). Stages in development of the glamlular hairs of Helic/nrsiuii seini-
papposuiii. (x280).

ghuididar lu'a<l is, in ahimst all cases, divided by vertical walls only" (3, p. ()26).
(ihindular and clothing hairs are also known to occur in the same leaf-bud, and,
according to Solereder, transitional forms of a d\ial nature are often found (3, p.
(i271. These facts suggest that glandular hair formation in the Mf/oporineae is
in an unstable condition. Observations made by the writer upon gland develop-

BY MAKJOKIE I. COLLINS.

335

meiit in Mi/oporum serratum and Eremophila latifolia give additional evidence in
support of this view.

The most common type of gland in the Mijoporitieae is that found in species
oi Myoporum. e.g., (M. serratum var. insulare I?. Br., and 3/. serratum var. vis-
cosiim R.Br.), where a large shield, consisting cf four cells in a row, is placed
e.xeentrically upon a stalk of two cells.

Gland Bevelopment.

Myoporum serratum. — In the initial stages of gland formation a splierical
projection from an epidermal cell is cut off from the remaining epidermal cells
by a transverse wall (Text-tig. 11a, b). A second transverse division differen-
tiates the gland rudiment into head and stalk regions (Text-fig. lie). A third
transverse division now takes place in the stalk (Text-fig. lid), and is immediately-
followed by a vertical division in the median plane of the head (Text-tig. lie).
The 5th and 6th divisions are also vertical in the head, and parallel to the first head
division (Text-tig. 11/). Growth of the cells continues after division has ceased.

Text-fig. 11. — (a-f). Stages in the development of the glandular hairs of Afyoponitii
serratum ; g, /i, surface and lateral views of the glands, (x 280).

330 KESIX-SKCRETIXG CLAXDS IN" SOMK AUSTRALIAN PLANTS,

In the glaiul head there is greater growth of the fells to one side causing the
eceentrieity noted above (Text-tig. 11/'. /( ) ■ This une(|ual lateral growth always
occurs in the longitudinal plane of the leaf, and is directed towards the leaf ape.\.
Text-fig. 11(7 shows gland in surface view.

Eremophila latifolia. — In Eremophila hitifoba the general plan of gland de-
velopment resembles that of Mi/uponim. Here, however, the liead shield is coni-
jiosed of eight cells and shows two distinct forms within the species.

After the differentiation of the young gland into head and stalk legion, tlie
first division which takes place is vertical in th? median plane of the head. This
is either followed immediately by a horizontal division forming a second stalk
cell, or the latter is postponed until the later head divisions have taken place.
From the number of glands found in which a bead shield with full number of
divisions is suyiported by a single stalk cell, it seems probable tiiat tliis second
stalk division is often omitted. The later divisions in the head are all vertical and
according to the arrangement of the walls, give rise to two distinct types of liead
shield.

In one type tlie vertical divisions are formed in a radial manner and result
in a subspherical sliield of 8 radiating cells (Text-fig 12«). In the other type
two sets of parallel or almost parallel divisions meet the original, median vertical

Text-fig. 12. — (a-b). Surface view of the two ^laiid
forms of Eremophila latifolia. (x 230).

division at approximately equal angles, and result in the formation of a shield
of eight cells arranj^ed in two rows of four (Text-fig. 12J)).

The relation between these types of gland and that of MiinjicrKm is oli\ious.
All the gland cells in EremnphUu latifolia are clu'racterised by the inclusion nl' a
clustered crystal of calcium oxalate.

All text-figures were made at table level, tube at Kit) mm., with tiic aid of
Zeiss camera hu-ida and with Leitz objectives 3 and (i, oculars 2 and 4.

LITERATURE.

1. Martinet. — "Organes de secretion.'' Ann. Sci. nat.. ser. 5, t. xiv.. 1872.

p. 1()8, PI. 15.

2. Radlkopeu. — "Ueber die Gliederung der Familie dcr Sapindaceen." Sitz.

k.b. Akad. Wiss. Munchen, xx., 18!)(), pp. 105-379.

3. Solereokr. — Systematic Anatomy of the Dicotyledons. \"ols. i. and ii.. IIHIH.
*4. Van Tiegiieji. — "Appareil secret, dans les Com]iositae." Hull. Soc. I'.ot. dc

France, 1883, pp. 310-13; 1884. pp. 112-1 Hi.
*5. V(x;l.— Sitz. k. Akad. W'wn.. xlviii., Abt. 2, 1S(i3, p. ti88.
6. VOLKEXS. — "Ueber Pflanzen mit lackirtcn P.laltern." Per. Deutsch. Hot.

Oesell.. viii., 1890. pp. 120-140, PI. viii.
*7. VuiLLEMix. — "Appareil secret, dans les t'ompositac." Bull. Soc. Hot. de

France, 1884, pp. 108-10.

•The works marked thus were not directly accessible to the writer.

337

THE GEOLOGY AND PETROLOGY OF THE GREAT SERPENTINE
BELT OF NEW SOUTH WALES.

Part IX. — The Geology, Palaeontology and Petrography op the

CURRABUBULA DISTRICT, WITH NoTES ON ADJACENT REGIONS.

By Professor W. N. Benson, B.A., D.Sc, F.G.S., W. S. Dun, and
W. R. Browne, B.Sc.

Section B. — PALAEOXT0LO(;y.

By W. S. Dun, Government Palaeontologist and Lecturer in Palaeontologj", The

University of Sydney, and AY. N. Benson, P.. A.. D.Sr.. F.G.S. . Professor of

Geology', The University of Otago, N.Z.; formerly Linnean Maeleay F'ellow

of the Society in Geology.

With an Appendix by F. Chapman, A.L.S., Lecturer in Palaeontology, The
University of Melbourne.

(Plates xviii.-xsiv. ; Text-tigures 10-17.)

Descriptive portion (VV. S. Dun and W. N. Bien?onl 337

Appendi;-:. — Lower Carboniferous Limestone fossiii from New South Wales (F.

Chapman ) 364

Comparison of the Burindi Fauna with the Lov.-er Carboniferous Faunal Suc-
cession in the British Isles (W- X. Benson i 367

(i.) Descriptive Portion.

(W. S. Dun and W. N. Benson.)

In the following section we have remarked'upon the noteworthy features of
all fossils obtained by us from Currabubula and the shelly ridge in 'the south-east
of the parish of Babbinboon, and also the extensive collection from the latter area
presented to us by IVfrs. Scott, to whom we are greatly indebted. The opportunitv
has heen taken to examine also the undescribed fossils in the collection of the Aus-
tralian Museum and that of the Geological Survey which were obtained in the
region around Carroll, Somerton and Babbinboon. chiefly by Mr. Donald Porter,
and the late Charles CuUen . We are thus able to gi\e a list of the known forms,
including critical descriptions of five forms previously known in the State but
only from provisional determinations* seven new records for the State, and fifteen
species and three varieties which we believe to be new. We are indebted to Pro-
fessor Lawson, D.Sc. and Mr. Chapman for the description of several of the fos-
sils. Apart from the leaf impressions of Rhacopteris, Aneimites and Archaeo-
cala mites in the Kuttung, which do not call for special notice, two silieitied plant
remains are noteworthy. They were found on the eastern slopes of Mts. Cobla
and Sugarloaf, three miles east of Currabubula. Professor Lawson describes

338 GEOLOGY AND PETROLOGY OF THE GREAT SERPEXTIXE BELT OF X.S.W.,

these as follows: — "The first is represented by a single specimen about four imlu's
in either dimension ; portion of a large stem of gymnospermous wood. The
••ellular structure shows no sharp definition ; the tracheids may lie made out rather
vaguely, and these are traversed by numerous medullary rays, some of w'hieli ai'e
several cells in width, others only a single cell. Vague indications of bordered
pits appear in the tracheids, but on account of the poor definition of the tracheids
themselves, it is impossible to determine how many rows of these are present on
the tracheid. From the evidence of their more or less circular outline as seen on
the radial wall, one is inclined to the conclusion that there is only a single row of
these in each tracheid. The length of a single tracheid cannot be defined."

The second form is illustrated by two specimens possibly originally united;
the one has roughly the appearance of a portion of a stem about five im-hes in
diameter, though really a bundle of parallel roots, each 5 to 8 nun. in diameter,
the other shows its fascicular nature more evidently. The tissues are preserved
in a red jasper, and dusty haematite considerably obscures tlie structures. "The
cellular structure has been (|uite disintegi'ated. There" is a solid core of woody
tissue traversed by innumerable medullary rays that run almost from the very
centre to the cortex, traces of the latter being ciuite evident (see Plate x.\i., figs.
11. 12). All trace of protoxylem seems to have been destroyed. There appears
no sign whatever of annular rings, though the secondary wood is of considerable
thickness, the average radius of the roots l)eing 6 — 7 mm. There is no trace of
pith structure. The secondary wood starts abruptly upon an indefinite mass
showing no cellular structure, but which we may interpret to be at least the jiosi-
tion of the phloem, the entire phloem having been replaced by silica. An out-
standing feature of the secondary xylem is the apparent uniformity of its cellular
structure. If its elements are tracheids, which seems to be the case, they appear
to be uniform in their size and structure from the position of tlie phloem to the
cortex. From the longitudinal section all traces of bordered pits liave been com-
pletely obliterated. To what gi-oup of plants these roots belong it would lie diffi-
cult to say until further evidence is obtained as to the detailed structure of tlieir
protoxylem and other tissues." The slides are in the collection of the Univevsitv
of Sydney.

Mr. riiapman describes, in the aiijiendix. the occurrence of Oirraxelhi in tlie
oolitic limestones of the Parish of Babbinboon.

The marine fossils of the Burindi Series so far obtained from the Turra-
bubnla, Somerton, Carroll ;ind Babbinboon Districts comprise the follciwing
forms : —

COELENTERATA.

Zaphrextis (Plerophyllum) crLLEXi Eth. fil.

Mem. Geol. Surv. N.S.W.. Pal. No. 5. pt. 1. 1891. p. 13, I. 0. f. 1-7.

This form occurs rathei' abundantly near the railway cutting Un\r miles east
of Currabubula. Collected by Benson.

Zaphrextis simpiivexs Eth. fil.

Mem. Geol. Surv. X.S.W.. Pal. No. 5. pt. 1. \i. 10. t. 11. f. 4-0.

This form was described from the Somerton District; it also occurs in tlie
south-eastern portion of Babbinboon. Collected by Benson.

by w. n. benson, w. s. dun, and w. r. browne. 33!)

Zaphrentis sp. indet.

This is a large form, the calyx of which is about an inch in diameter, but is
stated by Dr. Smith (in a private communication) to be too poorly preserved to
admit of specific determination. It occurs in the small mass of limestone north
of the railway cutting four miles east of Currabubula.

LiTHOSTROTION SP.

Mitchell has reported finding a specimen of this genus, as recognised by
Sowerby, at Perimbungay, near the junction of the Peel and Namoi Rivers in
1831 (9).

Amygdalophyllum etheridgei, gen. et sp. nov. (Plate xviii. ; Text-fig. 10.)

The material for the investigation of this form consists of one specimen show-
ing the external form, but not that of the interior of the calyx, and four other
specimens from which have been obtained six transverse and two longitudinal
sections .

The corallum (Plate xviii., fig. 1) is simple and turbinate, marked by slight
growth ridges, and rapidly increasing in diameter from apex to the bell-like
calyx. The length of the corallum must have been originally about sixty milli-
metres; its greatest diameter is forty-two. The external wall has been removed
for the most part, exhibiting the ends of the septa, which follow the plan, normal
to the Rugosa, of addition at four points. Where the coral has a diameter of
about ten millimetres there are thirty-eight septa visible, but where the diameter
is thirty-five millimetres the number of visible septa is increased to between ninety
and a hundred. Transverse sections show that the outer wall was thin, and very
slightly undulating, being apparently devoid of rugae and costae. The septa are
in two cycles, the longer reaching to the columella, the shorter extending to the inner
limit of the dissepimental zone. Septa of lioth cycles are stout, generally increas-

Diamerer tOmm iStnm 55 mm

Text-fig. 10.— Section of portions of the corallum of AtnygdalophylLuiu etheridgei, gen.
et sp. nov., to show the relation of the septa to the wall. Babbinboon.

ingly so as they proceed further from the columella, this being especially marked with-
in the dissepimental zone. Generally the longer septa are more thickened than those
of the second cycle, but in some cases this distinction is not noticeable in the outer
parts. The septa of both cycles nearer the apical portion of the corallum pass
directly into the wall (Plate xviii.. f. 3; also Text-fig. 10a), but later they become
much thinner as they approach the wall, somewhat flexuous in some cases, and
supported from the wall by a number of obliquely placed lamellae (Plate xviii.,
fig. 2, Text-fig. 106) In the sections of greatest diameter the septa may not
reach the wall at all, but near it branch out into the oblique supporting lamellae

340 GEOLOGY AND PETROLOGY OF THE GREAT SERPEXTIXE BELT OP X.S.W.,

wliieli in turn are joined to the wall {see Text-fig. 10e|. Indeed, in some eases,
the wall is replaced by a broad zone of vesicular tissue composed of long cells
flattened parallel to the outer surface (see Text-fig. lOd). The septa spring from
the inner side of this zone. In regard to the illustrations, it should be noted that
the originals of Text-flgures 10 a and d are cut from the same eorallum. The
greatest number of septa observed in a transverse section was sixty of the longer
cycle, and an equal number of intervening septa of the shorter cycle. No trace of
a fossula is present. Some variation is seen in the manner of attachment
of the longer septa to the columella. In some cases (Plate xviii., tig. 4) they
pass directly into the columella and appear to radiate from its outer margin,
though two or three of the septa occa-sioually coalesce before reaching the colum-
ella; in other cases (Plate xviii., tig. 2) they are crowded together, bent, and even
broken as if they had been twisted and thrust against the columella. Intermedi-
ate stages of partial twisting occur (e.g., Plate xviii., fig. 3), but this does nut
seem to be referable to the stage of growth.

The most remarkable feature of the coral is the nature of the columella which
is a thick solid rod of rougldy ellijitical cross section, one end of the major axis
being drawn out into a sharp point, directed ])robably towards the cardinal septum
(Plate xviii., fig's. 2, 4). As in the case of Lithostrotion, this appears to be essen-
tially an enlargement of the plate joining the cardinal and counter septa. This
plate may be clearly seen in the centre of the columella (Plate xviii., flg-s. 4, 6) and
in the larger transverse sections is about three millimetres long and a fifth of
a millimetre in width. About it has been deposited a layer of lime carbonate
3 mm. thick, so that the major and minor axes of the columella are as much
as 9 and 5 or 6 mm. respectively. This layer is made up of fibres'
radiating from the original plate within, and to a less extent from
the extensions of this plate into the septa at either end (Plate xviii., fig. 6) . The
other septa also appear to be continued into the structure of the stereojilasm an<l
to join the primitive plate. The connection is most clear in the cases where the
.septa are not twisted (Plate xviii., fig. 4), in which case the darker, rather llexuous
fibres of the columella are continued into the centre of the septa. Between such
flark lines connecting with the septa are intervening dark lines, as if corre-
sponding to the distant septa of the secondary cycle. In other cases the
relation of lines to sei)ta is not so clear, and if the septa are tiuich twisted al)out
the columella, the connections are more or less destroyed (Plate xviii., fig. (il.
Sometimes the dark lines cannot be separated from the general radiating structure,
which closely resend)les that of oolite. At other times this resemblance is rendered
still more striking by the development of concentric layers in the thickening of the
columella (Plate xviii., fig. 4).

The dissepiniental zone extends about tliree (|uarters of the distance, more
or less, from the wall to the columella. The vesicles are most closely jiacked in
that portion which is nearest to the columella and forms a half to a third of the
width of the dissepiniental zone. The outer and inner limits of this zone of
closely packed vesicles may have the dissepiments so thickened as to form more or
less continuous walls, the latter or thecal wall at, or just within, the circle toucli-
ing the ends of the shorter septa. Generally, however, there is little or no sign of
those structures. The nl)li(|ue but nearly longitudinal section (Plate xviii., fig. 5)
shows that the dissepiments are ranged in a steejdy descending sei'ies; tlie largest
vesicles in the central portion of (lie dissepimental zone are about three millimetres
in length, and one in width, though usually tliey are about half tliat size, and less
than that in the region of closest packing.

BY W. X. BEXSOX, W. 8. DUN, AXD W. R BROWXE. 341

The taljulae are somewhat irregularly spaced, being frequently about a milli-
meti'e apart, and often closer together. They have a general upward arching, but
this is not marked. Sometimes they are continuous across several septa, but at
jther times are confined to one interseptal space. There is no apparent stereo -
plasmic thickening on the tabulae and very little if any on the dissepiments.

This form appears to be closely related to Koninckophyllum inopinatum Eth.
til., which occurs in the- Carboniferous limestone of Lion Creek, Stanwell, near
Rockhampton.* It differs from this form, however, in that the primary septa
reach and unite with the columella, while those of Koninckophyllum do not do so,
and that the septa of the second cycle are two-thirds or three-quarters of the
lengfh of the priraary septa, instead of being only one-half as in the case of
Koninckophyllum. In some respects also the form appears to be allied to Cya-
thaxonia, as pointed out in a private communication from Dr. Stanley Smith.
Though the corallite is simple, its structure resembles that of such forms of Litho-
strotioti of much smaller diameter, as L. stanveUense Eth. fil., which Dr. Smith has
recognised in the Burindi Beds at Hall's Creek, soutli of Bingara.** It is interest-
ing to note that his remark that the stoutness of the columella, and the tendency
of the septa to end in the area of dissepiments, and not quite reach the epitheca,
features which are present in the form described here, are features which dis-
tinguish the Australian forms of Lithostrotion from the British types. On
account of the shape of the transverse section of the columella, we have adopted
for this genus the name Amygdalophyllum, suggested to us by Professor David,
F.R.S. The species, the only one yet known, we dedicate to the late Robert
Etlieridge, Junr., in appreciation of his fifty years of work on the Geology and
Palaeontology of Australia. This form was collected in the south-east of Babbin-
boon by Mrs. Scott and Benson. The type material will be placed in the collec-
tion of the Geological Survey.

DiPHVPHYLLUJt SP. IXDET.

Indefinite sjiecimens provisionally referred to this genus were obtained
by Cullen from the Parish of Moorowarra. These are recorded as numbers 4510
and 4515 in the collection of the Geological Survey. This is perhaps a Lithostro-
lioii ((■/. Smith, 1920, loc.cit.).

TrYPLASMA ? SP. IXDET.

A very indefinite fragment doubtfully referred to this genus is found on
specimen 4419 in +he collection of the Geological Survey, and was obtained by
Cullen in the Parish of Moorow-arra.

MiCHELINIA TENUISEPTA (Phillips).

Cahtmnpora tenuisepta, Phillips, Illus. Geol. York., ii., 1836, p. 201, t. 2, f. 3.
Michelinia tenuisepta, De Koninck, Anim. Foss. Terr. Carb. Belg., p. 31, t. c, f. 3;

R. Etheridge, Junr., Mem. Geol. Surv. N.S.W., Pal. No. 5, pt. 1, 1891

p. 28, t. 4, f. 1.
Tlie form was found in New South Wales first at Carroll, and compared
dubiously by Mr. Etheridge to the above species. Later and more perfect speci-
mens have confirmed the determination. Our specimen was collected by jMrs.
Scott in the south-east of Babbinboon.

•R. Etheridge, Junr., Geol. Sxirv. Queensland, BuU. 12, 1900, T)p.20-21, t.l, f.2 ; t.2,
f.9, 10. AccordinET to a private communication from Dr. S. Smith, Etheridge's Konincko-
phyllum is certainly not Thompson's l\oninckof>hvlliiiii.

*'S. Smith, On AphropvUum hallense, gen. et sp. nov. and Lithostrotion from the
Neighbourhood of Bingara. N.S.W. Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., liv., 1920.

342 GEOLOGY AXD PETROLOGY OF THE GREAT SERPENTIXE BELT OF X.S.W.,

CRINOIDEA.
Cactocrinus ? BROWXEI^ sp. nov. (Plate xix., fig. 1.)

The specimen is an external cast, in a ferruginous mudstone or aririllaceous
limonite, of a part of a calyx showing the upper portion of the first columnal and
the right and left massed basal plates, the anterior not being visible. In the
radial cycle can be seen the hexagonal anal plate, broad and symmetrical in form,
with its superimposed inter-radial plates, of which three cycles are preserved .
The plates generallv are characterised by their regularity of form and hexaradiate
ornamentation, the point of radiation being marked by a tubercle. Xo definite
idea can be obtained as to the nature of the tegmen, nor as to the condition of
the anal opening, nor yet of the brachia. The general form of the calyx is glo-
bose and somewhat depressed. The form is not comparable directly with any
known form except perhaps Ca-ctocrinus ectypus (Meek and Worthen). though
differing widely from it in urnamentation. The classification of the Actinocrin-.-
(lae, so characteristic of the Lower Carboniferous formations, is based on the con-
dition of the anal tube, and the conformation of the brachials, information iis to
■which cannot be obtained from our specimen. It appears, however, from the shape
of the radial and fused brachial plates to approach closely to Waclismuth and
Springer's Cattocrhius.

Dimensions: Height of calyx. 18.5 mm.; breadth of calyx, 26.0 mm.; heiglit
of anal plate, 4.0 mm.; lireadth of anal plate, 4.0 mm.; height of right posterior
radial i^late, 4.5 mm.; breadth of right posterior radial plate, 3.7 mm.

We name this in honour of our colleague, Mr. W. R. Browne, B.Sc. Our
specimen was collected by Mr. W. Donaldson, south of the railway line, four
miles east of Currabubula, and is now specimen No. F12,454 in the collection of
llie Geological Survey.

A fragment of a calyx with an ornamentation very similar to that shown on
C. brownei which has been figured and described as Actinocrinus sp. indet. was
found in the Star Beds near Rockhampton, Queensland.*

BRYOZOA.

ThaJIXISCUS sp. INDET.

King, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist, (2). iii., 1849, p. 389.

In manuscripts left by the late Mr. R. Etheridge. Junr., a form not deter-
minable specifically was described as belonging to this genus. It was collected
in the parish of Moorowarra, south of Somerton, by Cullen, and near Carroll by
Porter.

Fenestella spp. ixdet.

Indeterminate specimens belonging probably to this genus, occur four miles
east of Currabubula. Collected by Benson.

BRACHIOPODA.

Orthotetes (Schellwienella) crexistria (Phillips).

Orthotetes crenistria. Dun, Rec. Geol. Sur. N.S.W., vii., 1002, p. 82, t. 23, f. 11.
and Bibliography.

•K. Etheridge Junr., in Geol. Vn\. Qslfl., 1892, p.207. t.7. f.9.

BY W. N. BENSON, W. S. DUN, AND W. R. BROWNE. 343

Schdlu'ieneUa crenistria, Thomas, The British Carboniferous Orthotetinae, Mem.
Geol. Surv. Gt. Brit., Pal. I., Pt. ii., 1910, p. 92.

Tliis readily recognised form was found by Benson at the railway cutting four
miles east of Currabubula, and again in the south-east of Babbinboon. The largest
specimen found, if perfect, would have had a breadth of 70 mm. and length o'c
40 mm.

According to De Koninck (30) this form is rather rare in the Lower Car-
boniferous but very abundant in the upper beds of the Carboniferous Limestone.
Modern British workers, however, have divided O. crenifstria into a number of
varieties of which the most important form is termed Schellwienella crenistria
and recognise the species sensu strieto extending from the base of the Car-
boniferous up to the zone Ca,* while varieties, e.g., var. senilis, extend up to the
zone D2. It has even been found in the Millstone Grit of the Welsh Border (31,
p. 251) (? a facies of D2) . It is apposite here to cite a remark of Davidson
(31, p. 290) apropos of Streptorhi/i/chns cnenistria var. senilis. — "Some palaeont-
ologists seem disposed to erect this important variety into a distinct species, and
it cannot be denied that in some localities, particularly in Au.stralia, it alone
occurs."

Chonetes aspinosa Dun.

Dun, Rec Geo! Surv. N.S.W., vii., 1902, p. 69, t. 19, f. 1-3, t. 20, f. 1-5.

This species was proposed by Dun to receive forms previously classed as
Chonetes cf. comoides, Daviesiella cf. comoides, or Productus cf. giganteus. Pro-
bably should be here included the form referred to the last designation which was
obtained by Mr. Pittman from Somerton. Forms compared, but not identified with,
any one of the three above-mentioned species, are cited as occurring between the
zones Ci and Di in the Carboniferous rocks of Great Britain.

Chonetes cf. habdbensis (Phillips).

For Bibliography see De Koninck, Pal. Foss. N.S.W. Mem. Geol. Surv. N.S.W.,

Pal. No. 6, 1898. pp. 66-8.

Two small specimens, not well preserved, which may be referred to this spe-
cies were obtained by Benson from the railway cutting four miles east of Curra-
bubula. The dimensions of these were length, 5 ram., breadth, 8 mm.

This form occurs both in Devonian and Carboniferous beds of this State as
elsewhere, though De Koninck (op. cit.) urges that specific differences may be
found between the types belonging to the two Periods. This, however, does not
appear to be the view of modern British workers who record it as ranging from
the base of the Carboniferous System up to the zone C2.

Productus hemisph.*ericus (Sowerby). (Plate xix., fig. 8.)
Jas. Sowerby, Min. Conch., 1822, t. 328; Productus giganteus var. hemisphaericus,
Davidson, Brit. Carb. Brach., 1858. p. 144, t. 40, f. 4-9.
Of this form there is only the cast of a pedicle valve available for study.
It agrees so closely with Davidson's diagnosis and figure that no individual de-
scription is necessary here. Its dimensions are: Length, 28 mm.; breadth, 35
mm.; length of hinge line, 30 mm.

This form was obtained by Benson from the south-east of Babbinboon, and
is in the collection of the University of Sydney. It was also recorded by Dun as

•For the explanation of this notation, see p. 368.

344 OKOLOliY AN'll l'KTl;(>l,OGY OF THE GREAT ^:EI!PEXTINE BELT OF X.S.W..

the provisional detciiiiiiiafioii of a shell from Hawdon VaU'. Tu Great Kritain ami
Jrelariil this form ranfji's Itetween the zones Si and Dj.

Pkoductus cf. LOXGlSPixrs (So\verl)_v).

Jas. Sowerby. Min. Conrili., i., 1814, p. 154, t. 08, f. 1: Davidson. lirit. Carb.
Brach., 1858. p. 154, t. 35, f. 5-17.

This small form is rejireseutetl liy a single pedicle vahe obtained by Benson
from four miles east of Currabubula. It is a dejiauperate form. 7 mm. long- and
C mm. broad, but otherwise conforms to Davidson's diajj'nosis. The species \va.s
provisionally recorded as being found at Greenhills. near Paterson. in 1898.
This form is '"present in almost any Carboniferous district where brachiopoda
have been found." In Great Britain it ranges from the zone S:; to the zone Di.

PROi)rcTU.s jiuiucATrs (Phillips). (Plate xxiii.. tigs. 1-3.)

Phillips, lUus. Geol. York., 183U. t. viii., f. 3; Davidson. P.rit. Carli. Brach.. 18.58,

!>. 153. t. 32, f. 10-14.

This shell is sub-circular in outline, the hinge line somewhat shorter than the
greatest width of the shell. The [ledicle valve is very evenly rounded so as to give;
an almost semicircular profile. It is ornamented by numerous rounded ribs with a
small amount of reticulation near the l)eak. This is large and incurved. Except
for the absence of spines (and our specimens are only casts), this form agrees
closely with Davidson's diagnosis.
Dimensions of three forms :

a h c ,

Breadth in millimetres 18 18 18

Length from beak to margin 15 18 15

Convexity !l 7 0

This form is remarkably abundant at the soutli-eastern portion of Bahbin-
hoon, and was also (■ollect<'d liy Pittman from the "Whale's Egg."»tive miles soutli
of Somerton. in 1897, being represented by specimens 1574. 1575. and 1578 in tho
collection of the Geological Survey.

Davidson (31) states that it occurs in the Millstone firit, I'pper ami Lower
Limestone Sei'ies of Scotland. In England and Ireland it occurs in the zone of
Di.

PitoorcTus pu.STi'LO.sus (Phillips').

Phillii)s, Tllus. Geol. York., ii., 183G, p. 'ilti. t. 7. f. 1-5: Dun. Rec. Geol. Sur.
N.S.W., vii., 1002, )). 72. t. 23. f. 1. 2. 3. 4. and Bibliography.

This form was determined i>rovisionally I'nr this distri<'t on s))ecimens Xo.
4579 and 4(il0 in the collection of the Geological Survey, obtained by Cullen trom
two miles west of Mt. Uriari These have not been re-examined by us.

This form is present in the Lower Limestone Series of Scotland (31). ant
ranges in England and Ireland from zone Z2 to D2.

PRODUCTrS! .SEMlRFTlcur.ATtis (Martin). (Plate xix.. tigs. 2-7: 'fexl-tig. 11.)

Dun. Kcc. Geol. Surv. X.S.W.. vii.. 1902. p. 79. t. 23. f. 4-9.

A number of examples of this vei'V variable six'cies are figured to show the
range of characters Figures 2 and 3. Plate xix . illustrate a form, wjiich we will

BY \V. X. BENSOX, \V. S. DUX', AX'l) W. R. BIJOWXE.

345

term (<(). in wliit-h the radial ridges are very marked and extend only abnut a
<|uarter of the way from the beak to the margin. Figures 4 and 5 illustrate (b),
a form that is rather crushed so that the curved outline is fractured. The radial
and transverse ridging is not so deeply marked, but the sinus is more noticeable.
It has a heavier, coarser ornamentation than the majority of the examples of this
sjiecies from the Burindi Beds. The shell (c ) in Figures (> and 7, is smaller than
the other foims, and the outline of the pedicle valve seen in profile is more
acutely elliptical than usual. The well-marked concentric ridging covers more
than a third of the surface of the valves. The i-adial ridges, however, are not so
continuous as usual. The fourth specimen, Text -fig. 10, is distinguished from the
other forms by its greater breadth relative to the length, by the presence of prom-
inent ears, by the even convexity of the pedicle valve and by the fact that the
reticulate area covers almost half the shell. The dimensions of these four shells
are as follow : —

abed

Breadth in millimetres 30 30 17 24

Length of hinge line 27 34 15 23

Distance from beak to margin .... 23 — — 17

Convexity of pedicle valve 10 — 11 9

This form was collected by Porter near CaiTolI; by Mrs. Scott and Benson in
the south-east of Babbinboon.

According to Davidson (31), it extends through the Calciferous Sandstone of
Scotland into the Upper Limestone, and is also found in the Millstone Grit of

Text-fig. 11 . .- Prod mi us
seinireticu/aliis. Bab-
binboon.

Text-fig. 12. — Dielasma
saitnluiii var. amyg-
dala (Dana). Soiner-
ton.

the Welsh Border. Freeh (32) states that it occurs in the lower portion of the
Visean in France and Belgium, and in Russia, and in America it is found through-
out the Tpjier and Lower Carboniferous Formations (33) .

Ortiiis (Sciiizophori.4) kesupinata (Martin). (Plate xix., figs. 1(1, IL)

Anomitea resupinata, Martin, Petrif. Derb., 180i;, p. 12, t. 49, f. 13-14; Schi-'o-
plioria resupinata, Dun, Rec. Geol. Surv. N.S.W., vii., 1902, p. 78, t. 21,
f. 3-9 and Bibliography there cited.

This widely distributed form has been obtained from most of the knowa
fossiliferous localities in the Somerton District, and was also found by Benson
four miles east of Currabubula. None of the forms are well preserved, but those
here figured conform in all essentials to the diagnosis of the species. In both, the
margin forms a smooth curve, but the sinus is rather marked in one, while in the

340 GEOLOGT AND PETROLOGY OP THE GREAT SERPENTINE BELT OF X.S.W.,

other the Ijeak Ls more proniineiit and separated from the ears l)y a marked
flexure. Its margin also is elliptical rather than quadrate. The length of the
ioriu from beak to margin is from 30 to 35 millimetres; the breadth is 45.

According to De Koninck (30) who first recorded this form in New South
Wales, it ranges throughout the whole of the Carboniferous System. In Scotland
it is found from the Upper Limestone Series to the base of the Calciferous Sand-
stone (31) . In England and Ireland the range is from the zone Za to that of Di.

Orthls (Bhipidomella) australis (McCoy). (Plate six., fig. 9.).

Orthis australis, McCoy, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., xx., 1849, p. -234, t. 13, f. 4-4A;
Rhipidomella australis, Dun, Rec. Geol. Sur. N.S.W., vii., 1902, p. 81, t.
21, f. 10-11, and Bibhography there cited.

The specimens obtained by Mrs. Scott from the south-east of Babbinhuon, are
all such as show the external form only, and therefore difficult to assign to either
Orthis miehelini or Orthis australis. The known abundance of the latter, and im-
jirobability of the occurrence of the former may be taken as deciding the nomen-
clature of these specimens. The size is normal or rather small. Breadth, 21 mm.,
length, 19, and depth or thickness, 5 mm. Less well developed specimens were
collected by Benson four miles east of Currabubula, and by CuUen from Somerton.

Rhynchonella pleurodon (Phillips).

Terebratula pleurodon, Phillips. lUus. Geol. York , ii., 1830, p. 222, t. 12, f. 25, 30;
Bhynchonella {Puijnax) pleurodon, Dun, Rec. Geol. Surv. N.S.W., vii.,
1902, p. 18. t. 23, f. 10, 11 and Bibliography.

This form is represented by specimens Nos. 4385, 4434, 4435, in the collection
of the Geological Survey, obtained by CuUen from the Parish of Moorowarra,
south of Somerton. These have not been critically examined by us. The species,
however, has been determined critically in specimens from Clarencetowu occurring
in the Burindi rocks, and is also abundant in the Upper Devonian rocks of Mt.
Lamhie and "S'alwal. In Scotland it is known in the Calciferous Sandstone and
Lower Limestone Series (31) .

Rhynchonella (?) sp. index. (Plate xix., fig. 13.)

A single specimen of an indeterminate form which may be related to this
genus has been obtained by Mrs. Scott from the .south-east of Babbinboon. Its
length and breadth are about 8 millimetres, and it is ornamented by fourteen
strongly-marked radiating ribs. The evidence is insufficient to justif\ our assign-
ing this to any known species.

DiELASMA .sACCUiiUiM (Martin) var. h.vstata (Sowerby). (Plate xix., fig. 12.)

Terebratula liaslata, J. Sowerby. Min. t'onch., 1824, t. 440, f. 2, 3; Dielasmii sac-
culum var. liaslata, Dun., Rec. Geol. Surv. N.S.W., vii.. 1902, p. 83, t. 21,
f. 13, and Bibliograpliy cited.

Numerous examples of this form have been obtained by Mrs. Scott from the
south-east of Babbinboon. The dimensions show considei-able variation, the fol-
lowing measurements Ijeing representative : — •

a b c tl

Length (beak to margin) 20 27 18 9

Breadth 10 10 14 10

Thickness 8 — 8 —

BY W. N. BENSON, W. fS. DUN, AND W. K. BROWNE. 347

The last is a small form obtained by Benson from the railway-cutting, four
miles east of C'urrahubula.

This form ranges from the base of the Carboniferous to the Upper Limestone
Series in Scotland (31), and is most abundant in the Upper Carboniferous Lime-
stone of Belgium, though extending to the lower portion (30). In England it
ranges from Ci to Di. It also is found in the Permo-Carboniferous beds of this
State.

DiELASMA SACOULUM (Martin) var. amygdala (Dana). (Text-tig. 12.)

Terebratula amygdala, Dana, Amer. Jour, of Science (4), ii., p. 152; also in
Report Wilke's U.S. Esplor. Exped., Geol., 1849, p. 682, t. 1, L 2a, b.

This variety differs from D. hastata in its very elongated form. The figured
specimen, now in the collection of the University of Sydney, was obtained by Mrs.
Scott from the south-east of BabbLuboon, and has the following dimensions: —
Length, 27 mm., breadth, 17 mm., thickness, 12 mm.

This form also has been obtained from the Burindi rocks at Somertoii,
represented by specimen 1511 in the collection of the Geological Survey. This
was tig-ured (Mem. Geol. Surv. N.S.W., iv., t. oS, f. 8) a.s D. hastata. At pre-
sent its Museum label is D. hastata amygdala (Dana).

The form was first described from the Upper Marine Permo-Carboniferous
Beds which are probably Permian (4) .

Spirifera bisulcata (Sowerby.) (Plate xxi., fig. 1.)

J. Sowerby, Min. Conch., iii., 1820, p. 17, t. 23, f. 2, 3; Ddvidsou, Brit. Carb.

Brach., 1850, p. 31, t. 4, f. 1 (?); t. 5, f. 1 ; t. 6, f. 1-19; t. 7, f. 4;

L. G. de Koninck, Foss. Pal. N. Galles, 1877, (English Translation,

1898, p. 192-3, t. 14, f. 5.)
This form is smaller than S. striata, and is characterised by the deep sulcus
on either side of the mesial fold. The form figured here closely resembles David-
son's figure {Op. cit., t. 6, f . 8) of Sowerby's type specimen. There are thirteen
ribs on either side of the sinus, in which are three obtusely rounded ribs . Length,
about 25 mm.; breadth 26 mm. Locality,— S . E . Babbinboon. Collected by
Mrs. Scott. This form was also obtained by Mr. Pittman, 5 miles S.E. of Somer-
ton. In the railway-cutting, four miles east of Currabubula, Benson has col-
lected small and rather more transverse specimens, with a greater number of ribs,
resembling Davidson's t. 6, f. 19. This form has the sulci on either side of
the mesial fold more strongly marked, and small ribs intercalated near the margin
separate the three low, broad ribs on this fold, and these are slightly sinuous.
Length, 15 mm.; breadth, 32 mm. De Koninck points out that this species is
very al)undant in the upper beds of the Carboniferous Limestone at Vise in Bel-
gium and in Great Britain, but occurs also in the Lower Limestone Series and
Calciferous Sandstones of Scotland (31) . In England and Ireland the range is
from the zone C2 to D2, and also extends into the Millstone Grit (31, p. 251) .

Spirifera davidis Dun.
Rec. Geol. Surv. N.S.W., vii., 1902, p. 323, t. 60, 1. 1, a-f.

This species was obtained by Cullen from the Parish of Moorowarra, south
of Somerton, and also near Carroll. (See specimens 4360, 4374 and 4390 of the
collection of the Geological Survey). Nothing need here be added to the descrip-
tion previously given.

348 GEOLOGY AND PETROLOGY OF TKB GREAT SEUPEXTINE BELT OF N.S.W.,

Spirifera duplicicostata (Phillips). (Plate xxiii., fig. 4.)
Phillips, Illiis. Geol. Yorks., ii., 183ti, p. 218, t. 10, f. 1; Davidson, Brit. Carb.

Brach., pp. 24, 22l! t. 3, f. 7-10; t. 4. f. 3, 5-11, 15-10?; t. 5, f. 3.5, 37;

t. 52, f. 6.
The pedicle valve is very similar to Davidson's t. 4, f. 15-l(i. though it is too
imperfect to permit tlie observation of the marked inflection of the margin'il
regfiou. There is, however, a broad sulcus with about thirteen fine ribs therein,
and about thirty-five striatious on either side. While originally considering- the
forms illustrated in tliese figures as S. humerosa, Davidson later (\). 221) states
that he is inclined to refer these forms to S. duplicicostata- This course is there-
fore followed here The specimen is No. F.1652 of the Geological Survey col-
lection, and was obtained near the "Whale's Egg," five miles south-east of .Somer-
ton by Mr. Pittman. This form occurs in the zone of Di in England.

Spirifera cf. jiosquen.sis (Fischer). (Plate xx., figs. 4, 5, U.)
Choristites musquensis, Fischer de Waldheim, Programme sur les Chonstite. p. S,

No. 1, 1837. and Oryctogr. du gouv. de Moscow, 1831, p. 140, t. xxii., t.

3; t. xxiv., f. 1-4; Spirifera mosqueii!<is, De V'ernueil and Keyserling,

Russie et Oural, Vol. II.. p. 161, t. v., f. 2; Davidson, Brit. Carb. Hracli.,

p. 22-3, t. iv., f. 13, 14; t. xiii., f. Iti.*
Tliis form differs from ,S'. striata in the greater length of the shell, in nur
form there are about sixty ribs, which are very much broader on the siuus than
towards the ears, about ten ribs occurring on the sinus and mesial fold. Tlicre
is very little sign of concentric ornamentation. The length of hinge line is rather
less than the greatest width of the shell, and the area on the pedicle valve has
almost parallel sides and is about 3 mm. wide, and marked with faint vertical
.^triation.

Dimensions: Breadth, 37 nun. (leng'th of hinge 33 mm.); length of pedii-le
valve, 35 mm. ; thickness of shell. 23 mm.

Our specimen was obtained by Mrs. Scott from the shelly ridge in the iS.E.
of Babbinboon, and is in the collection of the University of Sydney. Other speci-
mens from Carroll Gap have been received by the Australian Museum from ]\Ir.
D. A. Porter; and these forms approach more closely to Davidson's illustration
of S. mosquensis tlian does oui' specimen in the more marked chiirHcfer of the
median fold.

According to Freeh (32) this species is a characteristic fossil of the lower
portion of the Upper Carboniferous. A variety of it occurs in the zone D2 in
England.

Spirifera pinguis (Sowerbyk (Plate xxi., figs. 9, 10.)
Sowerby, Min. Conch., iii., 1820, p. 125, t. 271; Davidson; Brit. Carb. Bracli., p.

50. t. 10, f 1-12; .S. pinguis var. rotundatiis^ L. G. de Koninck, Foss.

Pal. N. Galles Sud., 1877, English Translation 1898. p. 185, t. 14. f. 2, 2a;

S. pinguis, Dun, Rec. Geol. Surv. N.S.W.. vii., 1902, ]). 84, t. xxii., f. 1,

2, 5.
The specimens obtained from Mrs. Scott are typical exani|des of llic species.
The larger has a* length of 43 mm. and a breadth of 40 mm., there being eight

• Diiviilson states: — "Prof. L. G. de Koninck assures me that the true Russian
Spirifera uioaquensis has not been found in (treat Britain, and that what lias been re.
ferred to it are merely variations in shape of Spirifera striata, and I feel incHned to
adopt the Professor's view." Brit. Carb. Brach., Suppl., 1880, p.;U5.

BY W. N. BEXSON, W. S. DUN, AND W. R. BROWXE.

349

ridges on either side of the sinus, whieh, liowever, are unusually coarse in charac-
ter. The otiier form is slightly less elongated proportionately. The length is 29
mm. and breadth ?■'?. mm. Locality: Shelly Ridge, S.E. of Babbinboon. De
Koninek states that this is one of the most abundant forms in the Middle Car-
boniferous Limestone. In Great Britain this form ranges throughout the zones
Ci-Cs.

Spibifera PiXGUls var. eloxgata, var. nov. (Plate xx., lig. 11; Text-tig. 1.3.)

This form differs from ,S'. pinguis in the greater elongation of the shell. Two
specimens have come under our notice. That illustrated in Plate xx., tig. 11, is
a single pedicle valve with much the same form as S. reedi (Davidson), though
twice the size. It has an elongate-oval outline; the hinge line is shorter than
the greatest width of the shell, and the cardinal angles are rounded. The beak
is of moderate size and strongly incurved over a triangular delthyrium. The
shell is smoothly convex with a broad medial sinus extending into a tongue-like
projection of the margin. On either side are about ten low, rounded ribs; coa-
eentrie lamellar growth lines cross the sinus near the margin. The other, shown
in Text-figure 13, is even more markedly elongate, and somewhat distorted in out-
line. The shell has been largely removed but sutticient remains to show that the
ornamentation was much finer than in the first specimen, about twenty ribs occur-
ring on one side of the mesial fold on the brachial valve, and the ornamentation of
the pedicle valve appears to have been as fine. A few concentric growth lines
are present on each valve. The dimensions are: —

Fig. 11. Text-fig. 13.

Length in millimetres 34 24

Breadth 26 19

Length of hinge line 1.5 12

Total thickness — 18

Depth of pedicle valve 11 10

The first of these forms was obtained by Benson in tiie south-east of Babbin-
boon, and is in the collection of the University of Sydney. The second (Specimen
No. F4360 of the Geological Survey Museum, N.S.W.) was obtained by Cullen
from Reserve 121. Parish of Moorowarra.

Text-fig. 13. — Spirifera pinguis rar. elongala,
var. nov. Moorowarra.

Text-&g.l4,.—Posidonie//a ? spp.
indet. Babbinboon.

350 GEOLOGY AND PETROLOGY OF THE GREAT SERPENTISE BELT OF X.S.W.,

Spirifera STRIATA (Sowerbv). (Plate xx.. figs. 1-3.)

Sowerby, Min Coneli., 1820, t. 270; Daviason, Brit. Caib. Bracii., 1852, p. 19, t. 2,
f. 12, 14: t. 3, f. 2-6: Ibid. Carb. Suppl.. 1880. p. 274. t. 31. f. 1. 2, 3, 4;
Dun, Kec. Geol. Sun.. X.S.W.. vii.. Ft. 2. 1902. p. 8.^-4. t. xxii.. f. 6-9.
and Bibliogxaphy.

As may be seen from Davidson's figures, there is considerable variety in tUe
forms grouped under this species. Three specimens are illustrated here. That
represented by Plate xx., lig. 1, closely resembles Davidson's illustration (op. cit.
■iupra, t. 3, f. 4), though the ribs are not so numerous. It is the most alate of
the three. There are about fifty radial ridges ei-ossed by faint concentric lines.
The sinus of the pedicle valve is somewhat deeply impressed near the margin,
which is here flexed rather sharply and projected like a tongue in the dorsal direc-
tion. The beak is not quite centrally placed in one form. Its dimensions are
(restored) : Breadth. 55 mm. : length, 23 mm. The other forms are less broad.
That shown in Plate xx., fig. 3, has forty strongly-marked ribs, on wliich slight
beading gives the only traces of concentric ornamentation. The (restored)
breadth is 36 mm., the lengih 25, and thickness 14 mm. That shown in Plate xx.,
Sg. 2 has less accentuated ribbing with scarcely any other ornamentation. There
are about fifty ribs which are much narrower and more closely spaced towards the
ears than in the median portion of the shell. Brcadtli (restored). 56 mm.; length,
30 mm. ; thickness, 18 mm. These three forms were collected by Mrs. Scott from
the south-east of Babbinboon. They were also obtained by Mr. Pittniau in 1897
from the "Whale's Egg,'' 5 miles S.E. of Somerton.

This form appears to occur throughout the Carboniferous limestone, and is
most characteristic of its lower portion (Davidson, op. cit. sup. p. 21). The re-
cent workers record the range of the form in the British Isles as from the zone
of Ci to that of Di.

Spirifera steiato-cox\'Oluta. sp. nov. (Plate xx.. figs. 7, 8.)

This form is intermediate in character between ,S'. striata (Sowerby) and <S.
convoluta (Phillips). It is broader in proportion to the length than 5. striata
but not so broad as convoluta. The hinge line resembles that of convoluta in ex-
tending the fnll width of the shell. The area also is narrow, with parallel sides,
is marked by faint transverse striation, and jiierced by a triangular delthyrium.
The ribs, both simple and intercalated, are about sixty in number, and arc almost
as numerous as in the larger forms of iS. striata, and more so fiuin is normal for
S. convoluta, though Davidson illustrates a form of S. convoluta (Biit. Carb.
Brach., t. 5, f. 9-10) in which the broad mesial ribs are succeeded (but on one side
only) by numerous narrower ribs, there being altogether twenty-seven ribs on this
side of the shell as against twenty on the other side. Our form is more sym-
metrical and the ribs decrease gradually in size from the mesial portion to the ears
of the shell. Tlie rather sinuous character of the ribs acconls with S. convoluta
rather than S. striata, though it is not unknown in the latter. There i.s little sign
of a concentric ornamentation, for the form is partly decorticated, but the growth
lines give an appearance of overlapping lamellae. The valves are approximately
of equal convexitv the shallow sinus on the pedicle valve corresponding to a
mesial fold on the dorsal which becomes more elevated near the margin, and is
bent backwards into a tongue-like projection. No internal structures are visible.
Dimensions: Length. 25 mm.; breadth. 49 mm.: thickness, 9 mm. Coliccted by

BY \V. X. BEXSOX^ W. 8. DUX, AXD \V. R. BROWXE. 351

Mi-s. Seott from the Shelly Ridge iu the S.E. of Babbiiiboon. The type-speei-
men is No. F 12461 in the Museum of the Geological Survey.

Spiriperina insculpta (Phillips).

J. Phillips, Geol. Yorkshire, ii., 1836, p. 216, t. 9, f. 2-3; Davidson, Brit. Carb.

Brach, p. 42, t. 7, f. 48-55; De Koninck, Foss. Pal. N. Galles Sud, 1877,

English Translation, p. 197.
A portion of the pedicle valve of a specimen of this form, corresponding, as
far as could be seen, to the diagnoses of Davidson and De Koninck, was found by
Benson four miles east of Currabubula. It is a pedicle valve, moderately convex,
ornamented by five large bold angular ribs, separated by deep narrow gi-ooves.
Length of valve, 8 mm.; breadth, 11 mm.; thickness, 25 mm. De Koninck states
that this form belongs principally to the upper beds of the Carboniferous lime-
stone (30). It is recorded from the Upper Limestone Series only in Scotland
(31). In England it ranges from the zone of Ci to D2.

SYRixciOTHYRis EXSUPERANS (De Koninck).

Spirifera exsuperam, L. G. De Koninck, Foss. Pal. N. Galles Sud, 1877, English

Trans., 189S, p. 195, t. 15, f. 1; Syrlti^othyris exsuperans, A. H. Foord.

Geol. Mag. 1890, p. 149, 153; R. Etheridge fil., Ree. GeoL Surv. N.S.W.,

vi., Pt. i 1897, pp. 43-49.

An example of this form has been recorded from "a shelly ridge twenty miles

west of Tamworth." possibly that we have examined in the south-east of Babbin-

boon, where a distinctive fragment of this form was obtained by ilrs. Scott.

Retzia cf. ULSTRix (De Koninck) .

Terehratula (Crispata) iilstrix, De Koninck, Anim. Foss. Belg., p. 292, t. 19. f.

5; Retzia ulstrix, Davidson, Brit. Carb. Brach., 1858, p. 88, 218, t. 18. f.

14, 15; t. 54, f. 45.
A specimen referred provisionally to this form has been recorded from the
parish of Bective at a spot to the south-east of Mt. Uriari. It has not been ex-
amined by us. This specimen is in the collection of the Geological Survey.

AcTixocoxcHUS PLANOSULCATCs (Phillips). (Plate xxi.. figs. 3, 6.)

Spirifera planosulcata, Phillips, Geol. Yorkshire, ii., 1836, p. 220, t. 10, f. 12;
Athyris planosulcatus , Davidson, Brit. Carb. Brach., 1859, p. 80, t. 10, f.
2-13, 15; De Koninck, Foss. Pal. N. Galles Sud., 1877, English Trans-
lation, 1898, p. 172, t. 9, f. 6; Actinoconchus planosulcatus, R. Etheridge,
fil., Ree. Geol. Sur. N.S.TY., v., Pt. 4, 1898, p. 177, t. 19, f. 18; Dun, Rec.
Geol. Sur. N.S.W., vii., 1902, p. 87, t. 21, f. 17; t. 22, f. 12-14.
Of the forms figured here, the larger has a length of 24 mm. and breadth of
36 mm., the size of the single valve being thus nearly three times as great as the
Australian form described by De Koninck. The other is somewhat smaller and
less oblong-ovate. Length, 23mm.; breadth, 27 mm. This shows numerous traces
of the ornamental fringes extending from the lamella, but the shell is smoothly
convex, whereas the other form shows the characteristic broad shallow sinus.
Collected by Mrs. Seott from Shelly Eidge, S.E. of Babbinboon, and by Cullen
from Parish of Moorowarra.

De Koninck points out that this form occurs mostly in the Upper portion of
the Carboniferous (Limestone?) especially at Vise. It occurs in the Upper and

352 nEOLOGY AXD PETROLOGY OF THE GREAT SERPEXTINE BELT OF X.S.W.,

Lower Limestone Series iu Scotland, hut not in the Caleit'erous SauJsu ue (31),
In England antl Ireland it ranges between the zones Si and Di.

Semixttla subtilita (Hall). (Plate xxi., figs. 2, 4, 5.)

Terebratida subtilita, Hall (In Stransburg), Explanation of the Valley of the

Salt Lake of Utah, 1852, p. 409, t. 2, f. 1 a, b, 2 a, b, c; Davidson, Brit.

Carb. Brach.. p. 18, t. 1, f. 21, 22; Seminula subtilita, Hall aad Clarke,

Pal. New York, viii., pp. 93-98, t. xlvii., f. 17-31.

This form was the first example of this widespread genus to be recognised in

this State, but it has since been recognised in the beds at Gosforth, which are

probably transitional between the Burindi and Lower Marine Permo-Carboniferous

Beds (4). The species is protean, and "one feels at first disinclined to include

under the same specific designation the broadly ficiform, the narrow elongate, the

sinuate, non-sinuate and tri-lobed forms, which are customarily thus referred,

but the very abundant material shows the impossibility of separating them."

(Hall and Clarke, op. cit., p. 95). Our form is a very neat shell. The margin is

smooth, non-sinuate, and the test is ornamented by fine radial striae and broader

concentric bands with a few irregular growth lines. Its length is 18 mm. ; breadth,

25 mm.; hinge line, 19 mm.; total thickness about 16 mm. It was obtained by

Mrs. Scott in the shelly ridge in the south-east of the parish of Babbinboon, and

now is in the collection of the University of Sydney.

This form is widely developed in the Upper Carboniferous beds in the United
States, but is found rarely in the St. Louis Limestone belonging to the Upper
portion of the Mississi]ipian System, the American e<|uivalent of the Visean For-
mation (33). In Belgium, however, it descends to the Tournaisian, according to
De Koninck, as cited by Davidson (31, p. 219).

PELECYPODA.

SaxguikoIvITe.s triraiuatus, sp. nov. (Plate xxiii., fig. 8.)

Sanguinolites, McCoy, Synop. Carb. Limestone Foss., Ireland, 1844, p. 47; Brit.
Pal. Foss., Fasc, ii., 1852, p. 27ti.
The shell is very elongate, the beak anterit)r and the lower posterior margin
projects beyond the hinge line. It is characterised by the presence of three
obtusely-rounded earinae, extending from the umbo to the posterior margin. It is
also marked by numerous delicate concentric growth lines. It differs from 6\
tricostata (De Koninck)*, which is the most nearly allied form, in that our form is
much narrower and the cariiiation is less pronounced than in the Belgian form
(which is found in the Visean Series). The dimensions of S. triradiata are:
Height, 10 mm. ; length, 28 mm. ; thickness, 25 mm. The species is based upon
Specimen F. 4584 of the collection of the Geological Survey, obtained by Cullen
from the ))arish of Moorowarra, south of Somerton.

Saxgi'ixolites sp. ixdet. (Plate xxiii., fig. 11 )

This form docs not appear very closely similar to any of the forms we luive
seen figured, but is not sufficiently well preserved for specific description. It has
a carina forming a low rounded ridge except near the margin of the shell, and
another running a short distance below it, commencing as an angular ridge near
the umbo, but fading out into the general curve of lower posterior margin.
•Faune Calc. Carb. Belg., v., 1885, p.84, t.l5, f.l5.

BV \V. X. BENSON, \V. S. DUN, AND ■«". R. BROWNE. 353

There is a faint sign of concentric ornamentation. The superior extent of the
shell is slig:htly saddle-shaped. Tlie dimensions of the shell are : Leng-tn, 35 mm. ;
height. 15 mm. ; thickness, 7 mm.

This form is represented by Specimen No. 4642 in the collection of the Geo-
logical Survey, and was obtained by Cullen from the parisli of Jlooroivarra.

Edjiondia sp. indet.
This form is represented by Specimen No. 43G3 in the collection of the Geo-
loaical Survey obtained by Cullen from the parish of Moorowarra.*

Ctexodoxta sp. index.

A form provisionally referred to this species was obtained by Mr. Pittman
from Carroll . *

NUCULAXA SP. INDEX.

This form is represented by Specimen No. 4689 in the collection of the
Geological Survey. Collected by Cullen from ^It. Uriari.

Parallelodon carxei, sp. nov. (Plate xxi., fig. 7.)
Parallelodou, Meek' and Worthen. Proc. Chicago Acad., i.. 1866. p. 17.
This is represented by the cast of a single left valve covered with a little of
the original shelly material. It is nine mm. in height. The hinge line is seven
mm. long and shows no sign of teeth. The umbo is, three mm. from the anterior
end, and from it radiate many delicately marked striae crossed by a few concen-
tric folds. This form resembles P. arijutus (Phillips) of the European Carboni-
ferous, but is more delicately ornamented. It is named in honour of Mr. .J. E.
Carne. the late Government Geologist. It was collected liy Mrs. Scott from the
south-eastern portion of Babbinlioon.

PXEROXIXES (?) XAX'IPXEROIDES Eth. fU.

R. Etheridge Junr. Rec. Geol. Surv. X.S,W., viii.. Pt. 3. 19oT. p. 1II3. t. 37. f.
9-10; t. 38, f. 10.
Obtained from tlie west of Mt. Uriari.

PXERONIXES SUB-PIXXJIANI (?) Eth. til.

K. Etheridge, Jun., Rec. Geol. Sur. N.S.W., iv., Pt. 1. 1894. p. 29, t. 6; ibid., viii ,
Pt. 3. 1907. p. 194, t. 38, f. 3.
In the original specimen of this species the umbo was missing, and the form
could not, therefore, be distinguished from the Devonian form, P. pittmani. It
was suggested, however, that should further collecting yield forms with a well-
developed umbo, such differences might be found as would .justify the erection of a
new species — P. sub pittmani. The form originally described was obtained from
west of Mt. Uriari. and is in the collection of the Geological Survey.

KOPHIA STRiAXA, sp. nov. (Plate xxi., fig. 8.)
Kochia, Freeh. Die Devonisehen Aviculiden Pentsehlands, 1891, p. 72: Clarke,
New York State Museum, Memoir No. 6 1904, p. 26, t. 13, f. 1-8.
This form at first sight resembles a capulid genus, but the shape of the umbili-
cal region, and its relation to the posterior margin of the shell, together with the
presence of a slightlv developed posterior ear, lead to the conclusion that it ought
to be placed in Freeh's genus, Kochia. The umbo is a little posterior of the

•Annual Eep. Dept. Mines, N.S."W., 1897, p. 200.

354 GEOLOGY AXD PETROLOGY OF THE GREAT SERPENTIXE BELT OF X.S.W.,

median line, incurved and directed anteriorly. On tbe posterior ear can be seen
a sharp fold along the hinge line. The shell is ornamented by simple and inter-
polated radial folds spaced eight or ten to a centimetre and travereed by a tew
faint concentric undulations. The height of tlie type specimen is 42 mm. ; the
height of the umbo above the hinge-line, 14; the breadth, 35, and the thickness of
the single valve is 18 mm.

It was collected by Donald Porter from Swain's Conditional Purchase Lease,
seven miles south-east of Carroll, and is in the Museum of the Geological Survey,
No. FlSll.

CONOCARDICII SP. IXDET.

An indefinite shell which has provisionally been referred to this genus is seen
in Specimen No. 4424 in the collection of the Geological Survey, obtained by
Cullen from the jjarish of Moorowarra, south of Somerton.

P0.SIDONIELLA ? spp. INDEX. (Plate xxiii., fig. 6; Text-fig. 14 a, b.)

Posidoniella, De Koninckj Faune Calc. Carb. Belg., 1885, p. 184.

These three forms all occur in the south-east of Babbinboon, and were ob-
tained by Mrs. Scott. The following features are common in the three shells,
which are obviously generically related. The shell has a prominent bean or umbo,
incurved and placel subcenti-ally, generally slightly anterior. The hinge line is
straight with round angles producing small ears. They are marked with a few
(five to eight) prominent ridges, with broad sulci between, in which are seen thin
radial striae sometimes extending as spines from, the margin. The two forms, a
and h, are rather inflated, but c is much Hatter. The shells are rather like the
illustrations of forms of Posidoniella; particularly marked is the resemblance of
(a) to Posidoniella suhsulcata* as illustrated by Dr. Wheelton Hind, but they
differ from that form in the sub-central character of the umbo and its general
prominence above the hinge line. They resemble Atliijris rui/ssii to some extent, are
the possessors of a lamellar fringe as shown in b (which is the only bilaterally
symmetrical form), but differ from it in the presence of so few concentric ridges,
and usually asjTnmetric character and anterior inclination of the umbo Tenta-
tively, however, the^e forms have been assigned to the genus Posidoniella, awaiting
the investigation of further material.

The following are the characters of the three forms : —

(n). This is the form illustrated in Text-flg 14a, and two specimens of it are
available. The following are tbe dimensions of this form: — Heiglit, umbo to
margin, 13, 14 mm. ; length, 11, 12 mm. ; length of hinge line, 9 nun. ; height of
umbo above hinge, 4 mm.; thickness of valve, (i ram.; iiumbei' of coiiceiili-ic folds,
7—8.

The beak in both cases is not quite central, and tlie middle line is very slightly
obli(|ue to the normal to the hinge line. The ears, liowever, are very nearly eiiual
and the hinge line is straight. The radiating striae are marked.

(b) . This also is represented by two specimens, and is proportionately broader
than the first. The following are the chief diniensions of the two specimens: —
Height, 6.5, 6.2 mm.; length, 8, 7.2; length of hinge-line, 5. 4.5; height of umbo
above hinge-line. 2.5. 2.5; thickness of valve, 3.7, 3.5.

In both there were five marked concentric lolds with intervening fhie railial
markings, which are continued into a fringe along the margin of one of these

•Brit. Carb. LameU., II. (iii.), 1904, t.25, f.2-6.

BY VC. N. BENSON, W. S. DUN, AND W. R. BROWNE. 355

specimens. (The djawing is a composite of tb'- characters of both.) The ears
are scarcely developed, the straight hinge-line being- broadly rounded on the ex-
tremities. These sliells appear to be quite symmetrical about the middle line.

(f). The form illustrated in Plate xxiii., tig. 6, is represented bj a single
specimen only. The shell is depressed and subquadrate, the lower margin being
almost semicircular. The shell is depressed, the beak scarcely rising above the
hinge line. The anterior ear is marked, but rather smaller than the posterior ear
which extends to a sharp terminal angle. The hinge line is straight and slightly
oblique to the middle line of the shell. The umbo is subeentral but slightly an-
terior. There are seven prominent, rather angular, concentric folds crossed by
radial striae. No sign of adductor scars is noticeable. The dimensions of this
shell are: Height, 10 mm.; length, 9 mm.; thickness, 2.5 mm.

The specimens are numbered F^ 12457 in the collection of the Geological
Survey.

Spathella sp. indet. (Plate sxiii., figs. 5, 7.)

Spathelhi. Hall, Geol. New York, Pal. v. (i.), Lamellibranchiata, 1885, p. xxxiii.;
Wheelton Hind, Brit. Carb. Lamellibranchiata, ii., 1897, p. 153, t. 23.

There are two specimens which we refer to this genus with some hesitation,
seeing that they are certainly specifically distinct from any forms of which we have
seen figures. The larger form is an internal cast. The shell is elongated, rounded
at the terminations, with a sub-anterior umbo, which is narrow and shghtly m-
curved. There are faint traces of concentric gi'owth lines and the anterior ad-
ductor scar is strongly marked, but the posterior is faint. The smaller form ia
almost exactly half the size of the larger, and differs in the marked character of
the concentric growth lines giving the shell a lamellar appearance. It is slightly
constricted along a band running obliquely from tlie umbo to the middle of the
lower margin. The dimensions of these two shells are as follow: — Length, (a),
32, (h) 15 mm.; height, (a) 16, (b) 7; thickness (only one valve), {a) 7, (6) 3.

The two forms are found on Specimen No. F. 4650 in the collection of tlie
Geological Survey, and were obtained by Tullen from the hills, two miles west of
Mount Uriari.

Panenka porteei, sp. nov. (Plate xxi., fig. 10.)
Panenka, Barrande, Systeme Sil. Boljeme, vi., 1881, p. 128.

This interesting shell is represented by a specimen in the Australian Museum
here illustrated, and Specimens 1752-3-4-5 and -7 in the collection of the Geolo-
gical Sur\-ey, obtained by Mr. Donald Porter from Swain's Conditional Purchase,
8 miles south-east of Carroll, and also by No. 1756, from Goonoo Goonoo. 'The
form illustrated has a lengfh of 51 mm., and breadth of 57. The thickness of
the single (right) valve is 14 mm. It is folded into numerous simple or inter-
polated straight, obtusely-rounded, radiating ridges, spaced about ten to the cen-
timetre. There is no concentric ornamentation or imbrication, though there are
a few growth lines and concentric undulations jjlaced irregularly. The postenoi'
ear is strongly developed, flange-like, and striated. The umbo is acute, highly in-
curved and slightly carinate. The posterior adductor scars are high and faintly
marked .

Our forms resemble most closely Panenka niultiradktta (Hall), a Devonian
form, but are more delicately ornamented than this American t>T3e. The umlx) is
also more acute and incurved. This form is named in lionour of Mr. Donald Por-
ter, the first to make extensive collections of Bnrindi fossils in this region.

350 GEOLOGY AXn PETROLCKIY OF THE GREAT SERPEXTIXE BELT OF N.S.W.,

ExTOLiril AVICULATU.M (Swullow).

Etheridge and Dun, Mem. Geol. Sur. N.s;A\'., P:i1. No. 5, Vol. ii., Pt. 1. 1000, p.
30, t. 15, f. 1-4 and Bildiu.m-aiiliy.
This form was obtained by Cullcn from Mt. Uriari, near Sonierfon.

Entolipm sp. indet.

An indetermin'ite form belonging to this genus, represented by S]ii'i'imen
r.'45il in the collection of tlie Geological Survey.

AVICULOPECTEX SPP. IXDET.

cf. Aviculopecten knockonensis, De Koninck, 1877, Pal. Foss. N.S.W. (1898), p.
232; Avieulopeclen granosus, ibid., p. 234, t. 22, f. 10; Aviculopecten
.^p., Etheridge and Dun, Mem. Geol. Sur. N.S.W., Pal. 5, 1904, p. 14, 20,
t. 15, f. 10, 11, 12.

Indeterminate forms, which, according to Etheridge and Dun, are not deter-
minable specifically. lia\c l)een obtained by Cullen from the hills west of Mt.
I'riari. Two of these may be similar to the forms which De Koninck compared
with .1. yranusus and A. knockonensis respecUvely, and a third form also is
present.

LeIOPTERIA (?) AUSTRALIA Eth. HI.

Etheridge, Juur., Rec. Geol. Surv. N.S.W., v., 1898, p. 178, t. 19, 1. 19.

This form is represented by Specimens 4539, 4508, 4571 and 4579 in the col-
lection of the Geological Survey, which were obtained l)v Cullen in the hills west
of Mt. Uriari.

SCALDIA SP. ixuET. (Plate xxi.. (ig. 9.)

tScaldia, Kyckh(jlt, Melanges Palaeontologiqucs, 1852. t. 10, f. 24-20: ,i,i(l., 1853,
p. 07.

This form is a single right val\-e, oblong-ovaie in shape, with the beak slight-
ly anterior, and the surface ornamented with tine radial striae and delicate concen-
tric gi'owth lines. The shell substance is thin. Its dimensions are: Length of
hinge-line, 27 mm.; breadth of valve, 33; height of valve, 27; thickness, 11.

It is less elongate than the form described as Scalilia ? depressa by De Kon-
inck,* derived from the Burindi rocks of Huchan on the Gloucester Kiver, and
differs also from the Belgian forms described by the same author, and also from
the American forms to which we have made reference. It is not, however, suffi-
ciently well jireserved for specific description. The specimen is in the collection
of the Australian Museum, and was t)btained by Mr. Donald Porter from Carroll.

GASTROPODA.

Ptvcoiiphalus cullexi, si>. nov. (Plate xxiii., iig-s. 12,14.)

Pliicompludus, Agassi/., Tradnct. Conch. Min. .U> Sowcrby. 1838. \>. 222, t. 115.
f. 1 , 2, 3.
Thi' shell is turbinate, elevated and markedly uiiibilicate, consisting of alumt
five whorls with imi)ressed sutures. The aperture is sul)-circulai-. The slit-band
is placed medianly between two prominent ridges, and aliove the np|)'T of these
ridges there are five finer ridges, while below, between the slit-band and the

•Pal. Poss. N.S.TV.. (1898). p. 20:^, t.l."). f.f)-

BY \V. N. BEXSOX, W. S. DUN, AND W. R. BROWN K. 357

umbilicus, the ridges or spiral striae are more than a score in number and extend
into the umbilicus itself. The faintly marked and delicate growth lines cross
these ridges, giving- the shell a slight sub-cancellate appearance. Two specimens
are available of this form, respectively 4684 and 4642 in the collection of tlie
Geological Survey. The dimensions of these are : Diameter of base, 29 mm.,
or in the more complete shell 25 mm. In the latter also the height of the shell
is 17 mm. ; the heia-ht of the aperture is 12 mm., and the breadth 14 rmn. These
forms were collected by C'ullen from the Parish of i\Ioorowarra, south of
Somerton.

MouRLO.viA ORXATA, sp. nov. (Plate xxii., fig. 1.)

Mourlonia, De Koninck, Ann. Mus. Roy. Nat. Hist. Belg., viii., 1883, p. 75.
This beautiful fossil is represented by Speoimen No. 4382 in the collection
of the Geological Survey, obtained by Cullen from the Parish of Moorowarra,
south of Somerton. The shell is turbinate and elevated, only two wliorls are
present, the upper jiart having been broken away. The body whorl is highly
distended, oval in cross section, with two marked ridges limiting the narrow
slit-band on the periphery. Between these and the upper suture there are four
small spiral ridges alternating- with four others that are still smaller. On the
lower side of the slit-band there are several less distinct ridges. These are tra-
versed by delicate growth lines g-iving a sub-cancellate appearance. There is a
small umbilicus. The dimensions are : Probal)le height, 25 mm. ; diameter of
base, 21 mm.; height of body whorl, 12 mm.; l)readth, 13.5 mm.; angle of spire,
70°.

MOURLOXIA SP. INDET. (Tcxt-tig. 15.)

The forms are turreted, but depressed, the spiral angle being about 95°.
They consist of three or four pentagonal whorls with strongly impressed sutures.
The upper surfaces of the whorls are excavated and bordered by a strongly-
ridged shoulder, below which the flattened area of the broad slit-band slopes out-
wards and d<iwnwards to the lower angular ridge, where the whorl bends sharply
in t'owards the umbilicus. Below this, but lying nearer to the periphery than to '
the centre of the liroad flat umbilicus, is a third but \ery subordinate angular
ridge .

The specimens are internal casts only, and do not show the external orna-
mentation. The dimensions of two specimens are as follow: — Height, 8 mm., 8.5
mm.; diameter, 15 mm., 22 mm.; height of aperture, 6, 8; breadth, 9, 10 mm.

These forms of this type were obtained bv Mrs. Scott in the south-east of
Babbinboon.

WORTHENIA (?) CAXALICULATA Etll. fil.

R. Etheridge, Jun., Rec. Geol. Surv. N.S.W., viii.. Pt. 3, 1907, p. 192, t. 38, f. 4.
This specimen was obtained at Carroll by D. A. Porter, and is in tlie collec-
tion of the Geological Survey.

GOSSELETIXA AUSTRALis var. ALTA, var. nov. (Plate xxii., figs. 5, 0.)

Gosseletina australis, Etheridge, Junr., Rec. Geol. Sur. N.S.W., ii., 1890, ji. 82;
ibid., vii., 1907, p. 192, t. 37, f. 6, 7, 8; t. 38, f. 7, 8.
This shell consists of four or five convex whorls; the spire is short and de-
pressed, and the height of the body whorl is slightly greater than the height of
the remainder of the shell. It is reg-ularly convex, almost circular in cross see-

358 GEOLOGY AXD PETROLOGY OF THE GREAT SERPEXTIXE BELT OF X.S.W.,

tion. The slit band is placed nearer to the suture than to the greatest periphery
of the shell, but is not presei-\ed in our specimens, a little patch of obliquely
striated test from below the slit band serving to indicate its position.

The following are the dimensions of two specimens : Height of spire, 9, 9mm. ;
diameter of base, 17, 21; height of aperture, 9. 9; breadth of aperture, 9, 10;
angle of spire, 115°.

This variety differs from the type of the species in the greater height of the
spire proportionately to that of the body wliorl. These forms were collected by
Mrs. Scott from the south-east of Babbinboon, and are Nos. n2455 in the collec-
tion of the Geological Survey.

GosSELETiXA MACKAYi, sp. nov. (Plate xxii., fig. 2.)

The spire consists of four or five whorls, the first three being discoid, but
the body whorl is depressed so that the top of the aperture rests against the
middle line of the previously-formed whorl. The whorls are turreted. with a
sharp angle placed half-way between the suture ;ind the periphery and marked by
low tubercles. The slit -band is half way between this angle and the suture.
The aperture cannot be seen.

The dimensions are: Height of spire, about 16 mm.; diameter of base, 32;
height of body whorl. 11.

The specimen is a cast obtained by Mrs. Scott from the shelly ridge in the
soutb-east of Babbinboon, and named after her parents in appreciation of their
hospitality and helpfulness. The type is specimen No. F 12456 in ths collection
of the Geological Survey.

GossELETixA .scoTTi, sp . nov. (Plate xxii.. figs. 3, 4.)
Shell composed of four or five whorls, the cross section of which is very
characteristic. The suture is rather deeply marked, and the slit-band lies at a
sharp angle close to the suture line, less than a quarter of the distance from the
margin to the periphery, and beneath it is another but much fainter ridge. The
margin is rounded and subangular. Tliere is a small umbilicus.

Dimensions: Height, 8 mm.; breadth of base, 20; height of aperture, 8;
breadth of aperture, 9; angle of spire. 135°.

This form differs from G. aiu^tnilis in its greater size, and the position and
angular character ef the slit band. It was obtained by Mrs. Scott from the
shelly ridge in the south-east of Babbinboon. The type is specimen No. F 12458
in tiie collection of the Geological Survey.

YVAXIA KOXIXCKIl Elh til.

Baylea komiickii, Etheridge, Junr., Rec. Geol. Surv. N.S.AV.. ii.. 1890. p. 82;

Yranin koninckil, ihid, Geo]. Pal. (^Id. and N. Guinea. 1892. p. 288, t.

41, f. 7; ibid., Rec. Geol. Surv. N.S.W.. viii.. 1907. p. 192. t. 38. f. 2, 3.
This form is represented in our region by S|iecimen 1804 in the collection of
the Geolosrical Survey, obtained from Carroll by Donald Porter.

PORCKLLIA PEARSi Etli. fil. (Plate xxii., fig. 7.)
R. Etheridge, Junr., Geol. Pal. Q'sland and N. Guinea. 1892. p. 290. t. 15. f. 7,8.
This form' is represented by Specimen 437(i in the collection of the Geo-
logical Survey, and -was obtained by Cullen from the parish of Moorowarra. It
consists of a cast of the base of a single shell. It contains about four or five

Br TV. X. BEXSOX, TV. S. DUX, AXD W. R. BROTVXE.

359

approximately quailraugular whorls, with rounded angles, the lower exterior
angle of each whorl bearing prominent tubercles. The shell is loosely coiled into a
low spiral with a very broad umbilicus, the conical angle of which is about 120°.
The base is 18 mm. in diameter and the body whorl at the aperture is 6 mm.
in diameter .

This species was instituted by Etheridge to include forms obtained from the
Star, Gympie, and Middle Bowen Series of Queensland.

Phaxerotrema .wstralis, sp. nov. (Plate xxiii., fig. 13; Text-fig. 16.)

Phanerotrema, Fischer, Man. Conchyl., 1887, p. 851,

The shell is depressed, sub-tui-binate, and umbilicate, consisting of four or
five rapidly enlarging whorls, coiled into a laterally compressed or oval spiral.
The superior whorls are rounded, but the greatly enlarged body whorl is flat-
tened on the upper portion with a distinct shoulder, at the angle of which is

Te.xt-fis;.15.— v7/o«)-/o//;(r Te^t-^g-m.—Phatierolreiiia Text-R^-IT .—Bf/Zeivp/ioii

sp. indet. Babbinboon. aus/ni/is, s^i. no\. to shov; of. /»'«/<-;« Martin, and

/jj 4^ form of body whorl. Bab- Bellerophon sp. indet.

^ ■'■^" hinboon. Babbinboon.

situated the slit-band between two ridges. Thi rounded lower surface nf the
body whorl passes fonvard into a sharp lower peripheral angle making a sub-
quadrate aperture. A little of the original test preserved on the original of
Text-fig. 16 "is composed of three layers, and is marked with very fine gi-owth
lines descending obliquely forward .iust below the slit-band.

Dimensions : Plate xxiii., fig. 13, Text-flg. 15.

Height of spire 12 mm. . —

Body whorl near aperture.. 29 mm. 34 mm.

Height 15 mm. 16 mm.

Breadth 15 nun. 16 mm.

The fii-st of these has an angle of spire of 135°, but the tip of the spire has
been broken from the second shell. The first shell is Specimen 4659 in the col-
lection of the Geological Survey; the second was obtained by Mrs. Scott from
the south-east of Babbinboon, and is in the collection of the University of Sydney.

Phaxebotrema australis var. alta, var. nov. (Plate xxiii., figs. 9, 10.)

This form differs from the type of the species in tlie more elevated character
of the spire, the dimensions being: Height, 25 mm.; breadth, 30 mm.; aperture of
whorl, height and breadth, 20 mm. It consists of four whorls with a spiral
angle of 110°. In the form studied there was faint evidence of some concentric
spiral striae, crossed by gi-owth lines. The form is represented by Specimen
4642 in the collection of the Geological Surrey obtained by Cullen from ^looro-
warra.

360 GEOLOGY AXD PETROLOGY 01' THE GREAT SERPENTINE' BELT OF N.S.W..

MURCinSONIA SP. INDET.

Forms referable to this genus were obtained by Mr. Pittnian from near
Carroll.*

Bellerophon spp. indet. (Text -fig. 17.)
Out of several specimens of Bellerophon collected by Mrs. Scott, east of
Babbiuboon, two types only apjicar to be represented. Both are so poorly pre-
ser\'ed as to be incapable of specific determination. The larger is In'oad and oval,
the mouth broadly crescentic. The umbilicus (to the right of Text-%. 17a) is
■wide and shallow. The upper edge of the lip is thickened, and there seems to be
no umbilicus. There is only the faintest indication of a slit -band, and no sign
of ornamentation. The height is 13 mm. and greatest diameter '23. The heiglit
of the aperture is 18 mm., and breadth 10.

This form is evidently closely related to B. Iihilciis (Martin) t (Cf. Sowerby,
Min. Conch., t. 470, f. 1).

The second form, Text-iig. 17b, is narrower and markedly carinate. The
fragment of the lip preserved indicates that it had a widely spreading mouth.
This form is probably more allied to B. costaluf:, though it is apparently rather
narrower than the typical form of that species. {See Sowerby. op. cit., t. 470,
f. 4.) The specimen is an internal cast only, and no sign of ridu-insr or tither ex-
ternal ornamentation is to lie found.

Euomphalus carrollensls, sp. nov. (Plate xxii., tig. ii. )
The shell is sub-turbinate to sub-conical, consisting of five to six whorls of
which all but the body whorl are sub-circular in cross section, while the latter has
a broad flattened upper surface, and is entirely of the pentaiuiulatu.t type. The
ornamentation of the shell consists of numerous gi'owth lines of the nornud
Euomplialid type. Dimensions: Height of spire. 15 mm.; breadth. 33; height
of body whorl, 9; spire angle, 120°.

The specimen was obtained at rari-cill. and is Specimen No. '2771 in the col-
lection of the Geological Survey.

Euomphalus cer.\ (Eth. fil.).
R. Etheridge, Jun., Kec. Geol. Surv. N.S.W., vi.. 189G. p. 17, t. 1, f. 5. (i.
The specimens examined from the south-east of Baljbiubood (which were
obtained by Mrs. Seort) resemble in all respects the illustrations of Euomphalus
cera given by Etheridge, save that tlicy are smaller than the illustration. As no
dimensions or statement of the nuiltiplication involved in illustrating are men-
tioned, the following are g-iven as tlie dimensions in millimetres of several forms
examined : —

Height of shell 4 5 —

Diameter 1<5 20 '24

Height of aperture 4 5 6

Breadth S 7 8

Euomphalus PEXTANGUi.ATf^ (Sowerl)y).
J. Souerbv, l\Iin. Conch. Grt. Brit., 1814, j.. it7, t. 4.5, f. 1 and 2; K. Etheridge,
Junr.. Rec. Geol. Surv. N.S.W., ™i.. pt. 3, 1907, p. 19(i, t. 38. f. 1.
The specimen closely resembles that from Moonan Brook, desciibed and
figured by Etheridge. Its dimensions are: Height (d' sliell, 9 mm.; hreadtii of
shell, 29; height of aperture, 7; breadth of aperture, 10.

" • Annual Kept. Dept. Mines^ N.S.W., 1897, p.aOO.

tPetref. Derbiensis, 1809, t. 40, f. 4.

BY W. N. BENSOX, W. S. DIX, AND W. R. BROWXE. 361

This form is rcpi-escnted by Specimen 4370 in the collection of the Geologi-
cal Survey, ()l)taine(l by Culleu from Moorowarra Parish, and another from
Carroll.

Straparollus davidis, sp. nov. (Plate xxii., fig. 10.)

Straparolhis, Moutfort, Conch. Syst., Vol. ii., 1810, p. 174.
The form is sub-discoid, and consists of five or six gently enlarging whorls
which are sub-circular in cross section, making a low spiral with an extremely broad
umbilicus. The shell is ornamented by transverse striae which cross the whorls
almost perpendicularly. The dimensions are: Height of spire, 7 mm.; diameter
of kase, 24 mm.; height of aperture, 5 mm.; breadth, (i mm.; (ingle of spire, 135°.
This form has no analogy among the Belgian Carboniferous forms described by
De Koninck, but is not unlike S. clymenoides (Hall) from the Devonian (Scho-
harie Grit and Helderberg Series) of the United States. The specimen upon
which this species has been instituted is No. F ] 773 in the collection of the Geo-
logical Survey, and was found at Carroll by Mr. J. G. Gritfin. We dedicate the
species to Professor David, F.R.S.

Naticopsls brevispika (Ryckholt). (Plate xxii., fig. 8.)
P. de Ryckholt, .Melanges Palaeontol., Pt. i., 1847, p. 78, t. 3, f. 8, 9 {non
Roemer) ; De Koninck, Faune Calc. Carb. Beige, Pt. 3, 1881, p. 22, t. 1,
f. 23, 24, 25, 26.

Several small specimens are available for examination. The spire has four
whorls ornamented with fine striae with the same sinuosity as is general for this
genus. The form agrees fairly closely with De Koninck's diagnosis, the following
being the dimensions of the largest example: Height of spire, 12 mm.; width, 14;
height of aperture, 10; width, 6; spiral angle, 135°.

Soine callus occurs on the inner margin, but its tubercular nature cannot be
observed. In Belgium this form occurs in Stage VI. of the Carboniferous
Limestone at Vise. That chosen for illustration is No. 1814 of the Geological
Survey, and was obtained at Carroll.

Naticopsis globosa (Hoeninghaus). (Plate xxii., figs. 15, 16.)

Hoeninghaus, Verzeichniss des von E. W. Hoeninghaus dem Museum der Uni-
versitat Bonn uberlassen Petrifacten Sammelung, 1829, p. 8; De Kon-
inck. Faune Calc. Belg., Pt. 3, 1881. p. 15, t. 1, f. 1, 2, 8, 9, 10, 11;
t. 2, f. 25.

Our specimens are the internal casts of three individuals, one of which has
been slightly flattened by crushing parallel to the spire. The spire is composed of four
or five whorls. The measurements of the two forms are as follows: —

A. B. (flg-ured).

Leng-th of spire 10 mm. 17 mm.

Breadth 10 mm. 14 mm.

Length of aperture 9 mm. 14 mm.

Breadth 7 mm. flattened.

Spiral angle 114° 110°

This form' was collected by Mrs. Scott from the S.E. of Babbinboon, and
examples are Specimen No. F 12459 in the Museum of the Geological Survey, and
two others in the collection of the University of Sydney.

362 GEOLOGY AXD I'KTIiOI.Of; V OF TI[K GliKAT SKRPKXTIXK BKLT OF X.S.W.,

In Belgium, this form occurs in Stage VI. of the Carboniferous Limestone
at Vise. It is also found at Bolland, in Yorkshire, near Glasgow, and in the
Chester Group (Upper Mississippian) in Illinois.

Naticopsis obliqua, sp. nov. (Plalc xxii., figs. 13, 14.)

This form has some resemblance to A', consimilis (De Kon.), but dilt'ei-s
from it specifically. It is also quite unlike any American form of which we have
information. It is an internal cast, the spire consisting of five or six whorls.
The last whorl is for the most part below rather than around the preceding
whorls. The distinguishing feature is the very eccentric position of the spire in
regard to the upper surface of the last whorl.

The dimensions' are as follow : — Height of spire, 13 mm. ; breadth of base,
18; height of aperture, 14; breadth of aperture, 8; angle of spire, 115°.

The specimen was obtained by Mrs. Scott in the south-east of Babbinboon,
and is No. F 12460 in the collection of the Geological Survey.

Macrocheilus filosus (Sowerby).

lAttorina filosa, Sowerby, in Mitchell's Three Expeditions into Eastern Australia,

1838, p. 15, 38, t. 3, f. 5: Morris, in Strzeleeki's Phys. Descr. of X.S.W.

and Van Diemen's Land, 1845, p. 285, t. 18, f. 14; Macrocheilus filostts,

De Koninck, 1877, Pal. Foss. N.S.W., (1898), p. 264, t. 23, f. 16.

This form was among the first fossils found in the district, and was obtained by

Mitchell at Perimbungav. just below the junction of the Peel and Namoi Rivei-s.

PLATrCERAS SP. IXDET.

Specimen 1811 of the collection of the Geological Survey has been referred
to this genus. It was obtained near Carroll.

LOXOXEMA BABBINB00XEN8I.S Etll. fil .

Etheridge, Junr., Rec. Geol. Surv. N.S.W., viii., 1907, p. 194, t. 38, f. 5, (i.
This form was collected by Stonier from the parish of Babbinboon, and
probably near the south-eastern portion.

LOXONEMA .SP. IXDET.

Rec. Geol. Surv. N.S.W., viii., 1907, p. 195, t. 37, f. 4, 5.
This form, aceoi'ding to Etheridge, resembles L. lefevrei and other species in
ornamentation, but is not identical with any of them. It wa-s obtained by
Porter from Carroll.

LoxoxEiiA SP. IXDET. (Plate xxii., figs. 11, 12.)
The specimens figured were obtained by Mrs. Scott from the south-east of
Babbinboon. These are greatly weathered examples, possibly of L. rwjifera.

Specimens of Loxonema, generally in an obscure and imperfect state of pre-
servation, are very abundant in the last-mentioned locality. Mitchell was jtro-
bably referring to a Loxonema when he mentioned the presence of Terehra in this
region . *

COXUI.ABIA SP. IXDET.

An indeterminate lorm, possibly referable to this genus, was oblalued hy
Benson, four miles east of Currabubula. Another example has been reported
from Somerton.

•Three Expeditions into Eastern Australia, i., 1838, p. 38.

by w. x. bexsox, w. s. dun, and w. r. browne. 363

Hyolites sp. index.

Specimen 4682 iu the collection of the Geological Survey contains an indefin-
ite tapering form that has been referred to this genus. Its occurrence at Carroll
has also been reported.

SCAPHOPODA

Dentalium sp. indet.

Several Ladefinite forms, possibly referable to this genus, have been found by
Mrs. Scott in the south-east of Babbinboon. The largest of these is quite straight
and the remaining portion is 46 mm. in length. It is oval in cross section with
diameters of 8.5 and 6.5 mm., tapering to diameters of 4 and 3 mm.

CEPHALOPODA.

A gi'oup of exceedingly imperfectly preserved cephalopods have been ob-
tained from the Somerton-Carroll District, which have been provisionally referred
to the following old and comprehensive genera, it being f[uite impossible to deter-
mine them closely and on modern lines.

Orthoceras sp. indet.

Specimen 4491 in the collection of the Geological Survey, obtained by
Cullen from the Parisii of Moorowarra.

Trochoceras sp. indet.

Collected by Mr. Pitt man at Rangira.

Ci'RTOCERAS sp. indet.

Specimen 4682 of the Geological Survey, obtained from Somerton.

Cyetoceras (? Gyroceras) sp. indet.

Specimen 1843 of the Geological Surve}', obtained by Mr. Pittman at
Rangira.

GfOMPHOCERAS SP. INDET.

Specimen 1835 of the Geological Sui-vey from Carroll.

TRILOBITA.

Phillipsia (?) robusta (Mitchell).

PUllipsia gratidis, Eth. fd., Mem. Geol. Surv, N.S.W., Pal. No. 5, Pt. ii., 1892,
p. 128, Text-fig. 5; Phillipsia (?) robusta, J. Mitchell, Proc. L,inn. Soc.
N.S.W., xliii., 1918, p, 451, t. 47, f. 1, 8.

This form was obtained by Porter at Swain's Conditional Purchase Lease,
seven miles south-east of Carroll.

Phillipsia sp. indet.

A fragment of a small pygidium was obtained by Benson, four miles east of
Currabnbula. It has unfortunately since been lost.

364 GEOLOGY AND PETKOLOGY OF THK GREAT SERPEXTISE BELT OF N'.S.W.,

APPENDIX.

Lower Carboxiferous Limesto.ve Fossils prom New South Wales.

By Frederick Chapmax, A.L.S., Palaeontologist to the Natioual Museum and
Lecturer on Palaeontology, Melbourne University.

(With Plate xxiv., figs. 1-8.)

A tew months ago Dr. W. X. Benson forwarded for my inspection a rock
specimen composed largely of tlie eorallum of a species of Chaetetes, from the
parish of Moorowarra, New South Wales. Accompanying: these were some thin
slides of other limestones from New South Wales, including three apparently new
polyzoa and some interesting oolitic structures. At Dr. Benson's re(|uest I have
written the following notes on these minute fossil remains.

PLANTAE.
CYASOPllYCEAE (Blue-green Algae.)
Genus G I R V A X E L L A Nicholson and Etlieridge.

GiRVAXELLA .SP.

Description. — The granules forming an oolitic limestone from the Lower
Carboniferous, represented in the present collection, are circular to ovoid in sec-
tion. In many eases the filamentous growth ot' which they are formed enwraps
adventitious particles near their periphery, as distinct from the nuclei, and which
ai)parently were wasiied against the grains during the process of their formation.
This precludes any idea of a mere chemical deposition, as it denotes a tiiread-like
thallus, free at the extremity during its winding- growth and ready to tangle on
to surrounding fragments.

The structure of the thallus in these oolitic grains is clearly that of Girvan-
ella, although the preservation is such as to present some difficulty in their study
under high powers. The thallus consists of a fine tube, whilst here and there in
its course are indications of strings of minute globular cells, proliably repro-
ductive.

The nuclei upon which the pellets are moulded consist of shell-fragments,
pieces of Polyzoa, ossicles (arm and .stem joints) of Crinoids and Echinoid plates.
A four-rayed sponge-spicule is also present.

Comparisons. — In 1900 ^\v. G. W. Card, A.K.S.l\r., gave an account of
"Oolitic Limestones from Lion Creek, Stanwell, near Rockhainpton."* In this
paper Mr. Card describes an oolite very sinnlar in character to the i>resent,
formed of &irvaneUa tubules enwrapping \arious nuclei, as coral traginents,
< rinoid ossicles and other organic particles. The age of this rock is either Car-
bopenniaii or Carboniferous. From the occurrence of .'Lithtistrotion and some
Cither older-ranging corals, one would judge Iho balance of evidence as supi>ort-
ing a CarlionifeiTOus age.

Mr. Card also recordsf oolitic linicstniu's Irnui New Soutli Wales and
Queensland i\s follows : —

'Queensland Geol. Surv., Bull. 12, 1900, pp.25-32, PI. iii. ~

iOp. cU. p..Sl.

BY W. X. BENSON^ W. S. DUX, AXD W. li. BEOWXE. 3(55

1. Yellow Kock Limestone, Upper Muswe'l Creek, Muswell Brook, N.S.

Wales; ])robably of Carboniferous age. (*?)

2. Manning- Kiver N.S. Wales, containing Foraminifera and of similar

geological age. ( "? )

3. Bingara, N.S. Wales. Of Lower Carboniferous age.*

4. Rocky Creek, Horton River, N.S. Wales *

5. Mount Siluria, 4 miles S.W. of Gracemere, W. of Rockhampton, Queens-

land.

6. Co. Murehison, Parish of Horton, N.S. Wales.*

7. Co. MmThison, Parish of Pallal. {Girvanella.)*

8. Torryourn, Paterson, N.S. Wales*.

9. Yass District, N.S. Wales. Upper Silurian.

The present specimens closely resemble the Stanwell Oolites.

Occurrence. — Lower Carboniferous Limestone. Parish of Babbinboon, N.S.
Wales.

Note. — Many of the oolite granules sliow the presence of dolomite crystals,
probably due to metasomatism, and perhaps the result of a slight deformation of
the rock. The result of rock movements within the mass is seen also in the par-
tial solution of the granules where the surfaces under greatest pressure have
dissolved or become etched ; whilst others have been faulted and re-cemented.

The matrix of these oolites is now chiefly calcitic. All the grains are fairly
evenly spaced, a fact probably due to the simultaneous and radial crystallization
of the original aragonitic deposit.

ANTHOZOA.

Sub-Order Tabulata.

Genus Chaetetes Fischer.

Chaetetes spinuliferus, sp. nov. (Plate xxiv., tigs. 1, 2.)

Description. — Corallum, massive, growing on a base of stony or argillaceous
material and expanding over an irregular area.

Corallites tubular, polygonal, more generally pentagonal or tetragonal, oc-
casionally hexagonal, and sometimes with one wall incurved, indicating division by
fission; multiplying by division at frequent intervals, radiating and strongly
cur\'ed; walls fairly thick and imperforate, with spinules resembling those seen
in Alveolites. Tabulae numerous, not very regular, thin, occasionally incomplete.
Diameter of corallites averaging about 1 mm. Longest diameter of corallites
(worn and incomplete), 8 cm.

Relationships. — The strongly-curved corallites with their short spinules, best
seen in longitudinal section, at first sight recall Alveolites. The calicular orifices,
liowever, are polygonal and not lunate, and the walls are not perforated. It is a
true tabulate coral since the tubes are all of one kind and do not show imperfect
fusion of the walls as in the Montieuliporoids.

There is an interesting species, formerly described as Chaetetes petropoli-
tanus by Lonsdale, from the Ordovieian of Russia, t which (in its thin-walled cor-
allites and irregularly contracted tubes resembles the above species; it differs,
however, in having no spinous projections on the corallite walls. The transverse

•These limestones are in the Burindi formation W.N.B.

tMurchison, Geol. of Russia (Corals by Lonsdale), Vol. i., 1845, p. 596, PI. A, figs.lO,
10<(.

3(j6 CiEOLCXJY AXl) PETHOLOGY OK TllK (iHKAT SKliPEXTIXK BELT OF X.S.W.,

\iew of tile eorallites in the Russian species is not given, liut tliey are saiil to be
polygonal and in'egularly arranged. The species has since been referred to Man-
ticuUpora on account of its double-walled structure.

Undoubtedly the nearest allied form is the ''Alveolites'' septosa Milne Ed-
wards and Haime,t a coral described from the Mountain Limestone (Upper Car-
boniferous) of Corwen, near Bristol, Lee in Northumberland, in Westmoreland,
Derbyshire and Ireland; also at Novgorod, Russia. Chaetetes septosus M. Edw.
and Haime sp. has been shown by Messrs. Nicholson and Etheridget to belong
to the genus Chaetetes and not to Alveolites. That species differs from the i)re-
sent Chaetetes spinuliferus in the greater development of the septal teeth and
spines seen in vertical section at or near the junction of the tabulae, and also in the
more irregular growth of the eorallite walls, which in C. septosus are nearly
uniformly parallel. The form of the eorallites in transverse section and the
development of the septal tooth are in both species nearly comparable .

Occurrence. — Lower Carboniferous Limestone. Parish of Moorowarra, New
South Wales.

POLYZOA.

Order CYCLOSTOMATA.

Genus Fistulipoea McCoy.
FiSTULipORA iiicROscopicA, sp . uov. (Plate sxiv.. fig. 8.)

Description. — Zoarium small, parasitic or encrusting; more or less lamellate;
zooecial tubes sparsely tabulate, open and flexuose; interspaces with two or more
series of vesicles. Diameter of zooecial tubes, .13 mm, diameter of vesicular
cells, .08 mm.; height of zoarium, 2.5 mm.

The zoarium is seated on a base of calcareous algae and is in turn overgrown
by a similar organism. The zooecial opening's are not clearly seen, but all other
structures point to its being a typical FistuVporu, although of such snuill ilinu-ii-
sious.

Comparisons. — This species resembles Hexagonella* another of the Fistuli-
porids, in structure, but is more minute and is not dendroid in habit of growth.
The interzooeeial tissue is more horizontally extended in vertical section, and the
mesopores are larger than in Fistulipora incrustans Phillips sp.,$ which our spe-
cies otherwise much resembles. Moreover, F. incrustans is a larger form, having zooe-
cia of twice the diameter of /•'. microscopica. It is interesting to note that F. in-
crustans is also a Carboniferous species, being found in the Carboniferous Lime-
stone of Yorkshire, Northumberland, Derbyshire, West of Scotland, and Ireland.

Occurrence. — In Lower Carboniferous Limestone. Parish of Mcorowarra.
New South Wales.

Genus C ViC I. o I n o T R Y p a, gen. nov.

Zoarium adnate or encrusting and repent; filling up intei-stices in sliells, etc.
Apertures of surface maculae sub-circular; vesicrdar tissue not well developed.

tMon. Pal. See, vi., 1852, p.l57, PI. xlv., figs.S, 5a, b.

JJoui'n. Linn. Soc. Lend., xiii., 1877, p. 365.

'.See Hinde, Geol. Mas-, Dec. iii.. Vol. vii., 1890, p.aoo, Pl.viii., fig.ti; Pl.viiia., fi'jcs.
5, 5a-d.

gPhillips, Geol. Yorkshire, Pt. ii., 18.36, p.200, PI. i., figs.63, 64 ( Calamofiora iii-
rnis/'ins). A/so Nicholson and Foord. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., ser.5, vol.xvi.. 1885, p.500.

nV \V. N. BEXSOX, W. S. DIX, AXD \V. R. BROWNE. 3(j7

CrcLOiDOTRYPA AUSTRALis, geii. et sp. uov. (Plate xxiv., flg-s, 3, 4.)

Description. — Zoarium encrusting; surface maculae sub-circular, slightly
larger than the surrdundiug zooecial tubes. Vesicular tissue ra»'e. Tabulae very
irregularly developed. Diameter of a typical zoarium, about 7 nun.; diameter of
a macula, .33 mm.

Observations. — Tliis genus is of later appearance than the typical Ci/clotri/pa
(Devonian of North America). The character of the central zooecial openings
(maculae), being typically sub-circular or ovoid, as -well as the open-structured
and rare vesicular tissue, seem to distingiiish thri Lower Carboniferous fossil.

Occurrence. — Lower Carboniferous. Parish of Moorowarra, New South
Wales.

Order TREPOSTOMATA.

Genus li .V I, L o IM) R A Bassler (Callopora J. Hall pre-occupied.)
Hallopok'a froticosa, sp. nov. (Plate xxiv., figs. 5, 6, 7.)

Description. — Zoarium at first encrusting, then bluntly ramose or bushy.
Zooecia sub-circular or ovoid, surrounded by polygonal mesopores, sometimes very
abundantly developed. Zooecia tabulate at distant intervals; mesopcres tilled
with vesicular tabulae. Walls of zooecia thick, of the mesopores thin. Dia-
meter of a branch, 3.4 mm.; diameter of zooecia, circ. .33 mm.

Occurrence. — Lower Carboniferous. Parish of Moorowarra. New South
Wales.

Note. — The range of this genus in North America is from the Ordovician to
the Devonian.

(ii.) A Comparison of the Burindi Fauna v.-ith the Lower Carboniferous
Faunal Succession in the British Isles.

(W. N. Benson.)

The discussion of the Burindi Beds in an earlier paper in this series laid
stress on the fact (first brought to the writer's notice by Dr. Stanley Smith) that
the occurrence of Lithostrotion in this series uf beds indicates that some portions
at least of it are newer than the lowest Carboniferous rocks. As remarked (p.
269), "Dr. Vaughan (37) states, e.g., 'Lithostrotion both massive and dendroid,
enters the early Visean' (Upper Moiety of the Lower Carboniferous) 'in North
America, Britain and Belgium. It may be, therefore, that the true base of the
Carboniferous System lies at some unrecognisable horizon in the Barraba Mud-
stone. For the purpose of mapping, however, the base of the Burindi Series
is the lowest recognisable horizon that can be traced."

One of the objects of the detailed palaeontological study of these beds was to
discover its bearing upon this point. For this purpose, the stratigiaphically
classified lists of Carboniferous forms given by Davidson for Scotland (31) and
by the late Dr. Vauv:luin (34, 35. 36, 37, 38, 39),* Sibly (40, 41, 42, 43), Douglas
(44). Garwood (45). and Parsons (46) have been examined to ascertain the
position of forms with representatives in New South Wales. The results hav-e
been noted in regard to Britisli forms described on the previous pages. The
significance may be considered briefly. The stratigraphical classification and

•Unfortunately tlie modern investigation of the Carboniferous Eocks of Bela;iuni by
Carpentier, Delpine and Dordolot, cited by Vauglian (39), are not accessible to the writer
at the present time.

3G8

GEOLOGY AND PETROLOGY OF THE GliEAT SERPEXTIXE BELT OP X.S.W.,

notation adopted by Dr. \auj;lian has not yet been applied to Australian Geology.
In most simplified form we may record it thus: —

Lower Carboniferous^ — Avonian Series.

(= Dinantian = Mississippian. )

Tournaisian

X'isean

Cleistopora

Zaphrentis

I _ I
Cnninia

I
Dibunophylliuu

Syringothyris

Seminula

I ! I 1 I I i I I

Lower l^ipi)er Lower Upper Lower Upper Lower Upper Lower Upper
Ki K2 Zi Z2 Ci C2 Si S2 Di 1)2

The division between tlie Tournaisian and the A'isean was i)laced at first
between the Syringothyris and Seminula Zones (Si), but now part of the Upju'r
Syringothyris Zone, C'l', is inclu<lfd by Vaughan and the Helgian authorities in
Ihe Visean (39).

The braohiopods afford our best grou]) of forms for comparison with British
types on account of the better determination. Out of twenty-three species oc-
curring in the Somerton. Carroll and Habbinboon region, the following are found
in the British Isles, together with the highest and lowest horizon recorded for
each in England and Ireland by workers publishing since 1905. In the second
column are Davidson's records for Scotland in 1880, referred as far as possible
to the new terminology.

Orthotetes crenistria and varieties Ki to Di;

and M.G.VS

Chunetes harArensis Ki to C2 (Da)

I'ruductus hemisphericus Si to D2

longispiniii S2 to D2 (Ki?)t

muricatus , Di (M.G.)^

pusiulosun Z2 to Di

semirctictihili(f:\\ Zi to D2

(and M.G.*vN) (Ki ' M.G.)§

Orthis {Schii<iphori(i) resujiimita Z2 to Di (Ki ?)

Rhynchonella pleurodoii Di (Ki '?)

Dielasma hasUittiin Ci to Di (Ki ?)

sacculum Si

'See (31), p. 251, but this may be a phase of Di.

fKi ? ^ Calciferous Sandstone.

§M.G. = MiUstone Grit.

il Passes into Upper Carboniferous in Rvissta.

BT W. K. BENSON, W. S. UUX, AND W. R. BROWNE. 369

Sfiirifera hisuicata C2 to D-j

andM.G. (Id?)

duphcoftata Di t(i D2

mosquenxh var* D2 (l.C.)

pinguis Ci td Ta

striata] Ci to D2

Spiriferiiia >i:sci(lpl'<i ('i to D2

Actiiiocoiichwi phduisiilcdtux Ri to D2

Perhaps the best manner to obtain an approximate idea of the average horizon
of such a fauna is to accord numerical values to the zones from Ki {= 1) to D2
(=10), and obtain thus the arithmetical average position of the Burindi fauna by
comparison with the modern British work. It is then found that the Burindi
fauna centres in the Si (the Lower Semirmla) zone, near the base of the Visean.
If, however, we consider also the older Scottish records and place a value of 12
on the Millstone Grit, and 14 on a form rising higher than this we find the same
result. « Comparing this with our Australian faunae we may note that the fact
tliat Bhynchonella pleurodon descends into the Upper Devonian may be balanced
against the ascent of Dielasma saeculum var. hastata, and var. ami/gdala to the
higher parts of the Upper Marine Permo-Carbouiferous Series.

Quite in accordance with this conclusion we may note that Michehnia temii-
septa which occurs in our region, ranges in Great Britain from Z2 to Di,and that
Seminula subtilita, though it occurs in the Tournaisian of Belgium and its equiva-
lent in America, and is sometimes in the equivalent of the Visean Beds; it is
chiefly found in the Upper Carboniferous Formations of that continent. More-
over, there appears at several localities in Great Britain, in the Middle of the
Lower Carboniferous Beds (C and S zones), a great influx of species of gastro-
pods, particularly Eiiomphalus, Bellerophon, Lo-conema, Straparolhis and Nati-
copsis, genera also well represented in the Burindi fauna. It is questionable,
however, whether this is a factor of correlative ^alue, being possibly indueiu'cd by
the general shallowing of the British province at this epoch.

A wider study of the Burindi fauna shows a somewhat similar result. In a
later part of this series of papers the writer hopes to give a complete census of
the Burindi fauna as far as is known for the legion extending from Port Ste-
phens to the Gwydir River near Moree (Graveseud). We may. liowevi r. antici-
pate this by stating the results of study of the ranges, so far as the writer can
ascertain them, in tlie British Isles of the remaining brachiopods that also occur
in the Burindi fauna in New South Wales. The following are stated in the
same way as before: —

Orblculoidea r.ithla Ci U.C.M.||

Leptaena analor/a Ki to D2

Chovetes la<piefsiaiia Ki to Z2

papiUonacea (and varieties) Zi to Si

•According to Freeh this passes into the Upper Carboniferous.

fPasses into the Upper Carboniferous in Russia.

§In this 'calculation it is assumed that all forms recorded from the Calciferous Sand-
stone extend as low as Kl. If, as may well be the case, this assumption is not strictly
true, the average Burindi horizon would then be somewhat higher than indicated above.

IIU.C.M. Upper Coal Measures.

370 OEOI.(Wy .\XD PKTROi.OGY OF TIIK CRKAT SERPEX'TINK UELT OK N.S.W.,

Piotluctus acuieatu^ Z:; tn D:; (Ki .')

cora* Z2 to Di (Ki?)

fimbriatus Si tci Di

flemiiigii (== burrmfiiiiiuns.s) .. .. K2 to Ci

pHiictatWi Ci to Si (Ki ■?)

scabriculus Ci to Di (Ivi ?)

loidatus Viseant

Reticularia lineata Zi to D2

Spiriferina octoplicatat Ki to Ci

Ci/rtina carhotiaria Si to Di

The a\eiage position of this fauna, calculated in the same manner as be-
fore, is in the middle of the Lower Siirinr/iitht/ria zone, Ci, or, if we take into
account the Scottish records, the result is merely to bring the average down to the
base of the same zone. Combining the two lists we reach as an average derived
from the thirty-one British lirachiopods in the Burindi Series, a horizon in the
middle of the Upper Syri)igothiiri<< zone, or as nearly as possible on the dividing
line between the Tournaisian and Yisean. This accords with Professor David's
view that the Burindi Series is approximately coeval with the Osage Series (Midille
Mississippian), the Burdiehouse Limestone of Scotland, the Visean System of
Europe and perhapi^ the Lipak Series of Spiti in the Himalayas (4). Analysing
the lists more closely, we may point out that Spiriferina oclnplieatci. occurring m
the Clarencetown district, is confined to the Tournaisian, and particularly charac-
terises the zone K2. Orthis resupinata, though it-', mutations extend to the Dilrnvn-
phyllum zone, is characteristically abundant in Z2, and Leptaena ano'topa and
Ch'Onetes papilionacea, both most common in tlie southern region, are chiefly con-
fined to the Tournaisian in Britain, though Parsons records the former as com-
mon in the D2 zone in Leicestersliire.^ On the other hand, the Productids, with
the exception of P. flemingii, are almost all Visean, and the exclusively Visean
foi'uis of Lithiist ration appear in the northern, but not so far as it is yet known
with certainty, in the southern region of tlie Burindi Series. There is, therefore,
perhaps some reason to hope that as the detailed stratigraphical study of the
Burindi Beds proceeds, accompanied by refined palaeontological work, a regular
succession of faunal zones may be shown to exist in this State as elsewhere. Such
investigation, however, will he particularly difficult in the absence of much or
regular variation in the lithology of the Burindi locks.

It is of interest to recall the great contribution to this study made by Pro-
fessor De Koninck over forty years ago. Summarising his study of the Car-
boniferous fauna of the State he said, "In order to deduce from the collection of
species described the stratification of the formations which have furnished them,
I have had to confine myself to the use of the eighty-one European species repre-

'P. cora extends into the Upper Carboniferous (Uralian) Series in Russia.

fProdiif/iis undafits occurs in the Upper and Lower Limestone Series of Scotland
^Visean.

Jin regard to Spiriferina oc/oplicala. Davidson regards it as oonspecific with a
smaller form Sf>. crislahi in the Permian and accojits the former name. (Brit. Carb.
Kracli., 18(;3, p.2t>7). Later (Suppl., 1880, p. 2,58), he revives ocfoplicala as a varietal
name, and some modern British workers consider it as of specific value. Mr. Dun remarks :
(1902, p. 88) "it appears that the term ocloplicata is of more value from a stratigraphical
than from a palaeontolowiciil point of view." Recent British work shows how important
is the stratigraphical signifiance of this variety or species.

§ Dr. Wheelton Hind, however, is of the opinion that the beds studied by Parsons
should be assigned to the Seinimila zone (4f)A).

BY AT. X. BENSOX^ W. S. DUX, AXD W. R. BROWXE. 371

M'uted among- them and to study the beds in which they were found. This exam-
ination has proved to nie that twenty-two of these are common to the upper,
niiildle, and lower beds of the Carboniferous Limestone; thirty-six belong ex-
clusively to the upi^er beds; five or six to the upper or middle beds; and six or
seven to the lower beds. It must be observed that while the thirty-six species of
the upper beds contain a small number of characteristic species, ....

the middle and lower beds furnish no decidedly characteristic species

I believe then that 1 am right in concluding that the most of the Carboniferous
rocks of New South Wales belong to the upper beds, that a part . . . may
belong to the middle beds, and that, if the lower beds are represented at all, it is
only by some insignificant spots where fossils are rare." (30). Perhaps it was
because of the speedy recognition that these fossils came in part from what we
now term Permo-Carboniferous beds, this very important conclusion of De
Kouinck has been almost entirely overlooked. Vet if we confine attention to the
fossils as described by De Koninck, which come merely from the Carboniferous
localities shown in the list appended by Professor David to the oflfleial translation
of De Kouinck's Memoir, we find that there are sixty-one European forms recog-
nised by him. Setting aside from these sixteen, as being questionable identifica-
tions, and four the horizons of which are not specified, there remain forty-one
usable determinations, of which twenty-four are of brachiopods. We find that of
these forms, nine range throughout the Carboniferous Limestone, of v hich four
are more abundant in the upper beds, four are chiefly in the lower beds, one in
the middle beds ; five forms occur in both the middle and upper beds, and twenty-
two are almost wholly in the upper portion of the Carboniferous Limestone. On
De Koninck's showing, therefore, the Burindi fsuna is a very distinctly Visean
one. The difference between his conclusions and those now put forward is to be
explained by the increased knowledge that has l)een gained during the forty years
that have elapsed since De Koninck's work. It has thus been shown, for example,
that nine of the brachiopods considered by him typically of Upper Carboniferous
Limestone age. descend also into the middle portion, and that four of them (L.
analoga, C. laguessiana. C. papilionaaea, and 5'. cristata (octoplicata) are really
most characteristic of the lower portion of the Carboniferous Limestone. Pro-
bably similar adjustments would be required in other groups.

It has been a pleasure to the writer to bear tribute to the excellence of the
pioneering work of the Rev. W. B. Clarke, whose footsteps he has now followed
from Crawney to Warialda ; he has an added gratification in bringing into clearer
liaht than before the remarkable residts of the investigations of the Rev. W. B.
Clarke's collections of Carboniferous fossils published over forty years ago by his
distinguished Belgian colleagTie, Professor L. G. De Koninck, of Liege.

BIBLIOGRAPHY.'

4. David. T. W. E., and Sussmilch, C. A. — Sequence, Glaciation and Correla-
tion of the Carboniferous Rocks of the Hunter River District, New
South Wales. -Tourn. Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., liii., 1919 (1920),
pp. 246-338.
9. "Mitchell, T. L. — Three Expeditions into tie Interior of Eastern Australia.

London, 1838.
30. DE Koxixc'K, I., (t. — Reeherches sur le-; fossiles paleozoiques des Nouvelle — -
Galles du sud (Australie). Mem. Soc. Roy. Sci. Liege, 3870-1877.

3/2 GEOLOGV AXD PETROLOGY OP THE GREAT SERPENTINE BELT OF N.S.W.,

2 (ii.j. Translated as Descriptions of the Palaeozoic Possils of
New South Wales, Australia. Mem. Geol. Surv. N.S.W., Pal. No. 6,
1898. (References are given to the pages of the translation,
throughout this paper. )

31. Davidson, T. — A Monograph of P.ritish Fossil ISrachioiKHla. Supplement. Part

iii., 1880.

32. Freoh, F.— Lethea Palaeozoica, Bd. ii., 18<)7-19()2.

33. GiiABAU, A. W., and Siiimer, H. — North American Index Fossils.

34. Xaighan, a. — The Palaeontological Sequence of the Carboniferous Rocks in

the Bristol Area. Quart. Jouru. Geol. Soc. Ixi., 1905, pp. 181-304.

35. and Matley, C. A. — The Carboniferous Rocks at Rush. County

Dublin. Loc. cit., Ixii., 1900, pp. 275-322.

36. . The Carboniferous Rocks at Loughshinny, County

Dublin. Loc. cit., Ixiv., 1908, pp. 413-472.

37. and Reynolds, S. H. — The Avonian of Burrington Combe. Somer-
set. Loc cit., Ixvii., 1911, pp. 342-392.

38. and Dixon, E. E. L. — The Carboniferous Succession iu (lower.

Loc. cit., Ixvii., 1911, pp. 477-571.

39. The Correlation of the Diiiantian and Avonian. Loc. cil., Ixxi..

1915, pp. 1-49.

40. Sim.Y, T. F. — The Carboniferous Limestone of the Weston-Su|)('r-Mare

District. Ldc. cit., Ixi., 1905, ]>. 561.

41. The Carboniferous Limestone (Avonian) of the Mendi|> Area,

Somerset. Loc. cit., Ixii., 190(i, |)p. 324-378.

42. The Faunal Succession in the Carboniferous Linic^tonc nl' the ^fid-

land Area. Loc. cit., Ixiv., 1908, pp 34-80.

43. and Dixky, F. — The Carboniferous Limestone Series on tiie south-
eastern Margin of the South Wales Coalfield. Loc. cit , Ixxviii.,
1917, pp. 111-160.

44. Douglas, J. A. — The Carboniferous Liuu'stone of County Clare, Ireland.

Loc. cit.. Ixv., 1909, pp. 538-583.

45. Garwood, E. J. — The Lower Carboniferous Succession in the nor(l'.-west of

England. Loc. cit., Ixviii., 1912, pii. 449-582.

46. Parsons^ L. M. — On the Carbonifenms Limestone of the Leicestershire

Coalfield. Quart. Journ. Geol. So.., Ixxviii., 1917, pp. 84-110.
40r(. Smith, S. — On Aphrophi/Utitti halloine, gen. et sp. nnv. and Lithnstmlion

from the neighbourhood of Bingara, N.S.W. Proc. Roy. Soc. X.S.

Wales, liv., 1920.
40?). TT:xn. W.— Letter in Geol., Mag., 1918, i.. 480.

EXPLANATION OF PLATES XVIIt. XXIV.

Plate xviii.
Aiins^dalop/iylluiii li/icriiii;/'!. gen. et sp. uov.

1. Complete CoraUuin. (x f).

2. Transverse section sliowing the manner in wliioli tlie septa are crushed against the

large pointed-oval columella, (x 2).
'■^. Transverse section near tip of corallum. (.x 2).

4. Transverse section showing "oolitic structure" of the columella. (x2).
."). Vertical section showing dissopimental and taLular portions and columella. (x2).

BY W. N. BENSON, W. S. DUN, AND W. R. BROWNE. 373

Fii,'. fi. Enlarged transverse section of the columella showing the median plate, and the
relation of the radial portions of the columella to the septa, (x 5i).
Locality. — Babbinboon.

Plate xix.

Lower Carboniferous (Burindi) fossils from S.E. Babbinboon (except tig. 1.). All
figures natural size, except fig. K{. •

Fig. 1. Car/arn'iii/s Aron'iiei, sp. nov. Cast of specimen obtained four miles east of

Currabubula.

2. Proditr/tis sei/iiriiini/a/ns (Martin). Lateral aspect.

3. ., ,. Pedicle valve of same specimen as Fig. 2.

4. ,, ,, tJmbonal aspect.

5. ,, ,, Pedicle valve of same specimen as Fig. 4.

6. ,. ,, Pedicle valve.

7. ,. ,, Lateral aspect of same specimen as Fig. o.

8. Prodiictus lunnispliaericiis (Sowei'by). Lateral aspect.

9. Ortliis (Rhipidoinella) austratis (McCoy). Brachial valve.
UK Otlliis (Sc/iizoplioria) vesupiiiala (Martin). Pedicle valve.

11. ,, ,. ,, Another specimen, pedicle valve.

12. Dielasma sacciitiiiii var. /laslata (Sowerby). Lateral aspect.
,, 13. An [ndetermiuate Rhynchonellid. (x 3).

Plate XX.

Lonei- Carliouiferous (Burindi) fossils from S.E. Babbinboon. All figures natural size.

Fig-. 1. Spiri/cra s/riata (Sowerby). Pedicle aspect.

2. ,, ,, Brachial aspect.

3. ,. ,, Pedicle aspect.

4. Spirifera cf. inoiqitensis (Fischer). Brachial aspect.

5. ,, ,, Lateral aspect.
(). ,, ,. Pedicle aspect

7. Spirifera strinlo-coiixv/iita, sp. nov. Pedicle aspect.

8. ,, ,, Brachial aspect.

9. Spirifera pini^uis (Sowerby). Pedicle aspect.

10. ,, ,, Another example, petlicle aspect.

11. Spirifera piiiguis var. elongaia, var. nov. Pedicle aspect.

Plate .xxi.
Lower Carboniferous (Burindi) fossils, all from S.E. of Biibbinboon, excejjt Fig. 10.

Fig. 1. Spirifera hisulcala (Sowerby). Pedicle aspect, (xi).

2. Seminula snbtilita (Hall). Brachial aspect, (x^).

3. ,, ,. Pedicle aspect, (x^).

4. ,, ,. Lateral aspect, (x^).

5. Actinoconchus planostilcata (Phillips). Pedicle aspect, (nat. size).
(). ,, ,, Pedicle aspect of another example, (nat. size).

7. Parallelodon carnei, sp. nov. (x 3).

8. Kochia stria/a, sp. nov. (nat. size).

9. Sea/dia, sp. indet. (nat. size).

10. Panenka porteri, sp. nov. Carroll, (xi).

11. Cross-sections of a bundle of roots of an indeterminate form of plant in the top
of the Burindi or base of the Kuttung Series, (x 2).

12. Enlarged microplmtograph of one root-section, (x 7).

374

GEOI-OGT AND PETROLOGT OF THE GREAT SERPEXTIXE BELT OF X.S.TV.

Plate xxii.
Lower Carboniferous (Burimli) fossils from District of Somerton, Babbinboon and Carroll.
Pi?. 1. Mourlonia. Parish of Moorowarra. (nat. size).

2. Gosseletina vnictayi , sp- nov. S.E. Babbinboon. (x^).
•i. Gosseletiiia .fro///, sp. nov. S.E. Babbinboon. (.x^).

4. „ ,, Another view of the same specimen as Fiu;. :i (xi).

.. .5. & ti. Gosseletina ai/s/rci/is var. a//a, var. nov. S.E. Babbinboon. (xi).

7. Porcellia pearsi (Eth. fil.) Somerton. (x^).
,, 8. NatiiOpsis brevispira Ryckholt. Carroll, (x 3).

9. Euomphalus carrollenais, sp. nov. Carroll, (nat. size).
.. 10. S/raparollus daviilis, sp. nov. Carroll, (xf).
,. 11. A 12. Loxonema sp. intlet. S.E. Babbinboon. (x^).

I.'?. Naticopsis obliqua, sp. nov. S.E. Babbinboon. (xi).
.. 14- „ ,. ,, „ (x|).

.. 1."). k Hi. Xaticopsis glohosa Hoeninghaus. S.E. Babbinboon. (x \).

Plate xxiii.
Lower Carboniferovis (Burindi) fos.sils from the Somerton District.
Proditctus w/«)7Vi;///i (Phillips) from S.E. Babbinboon. Brachial aspect. (x2).
,, ., Lateral aspect of pedicle valve, (xi).

Pedicle aspect, (xi).
Spirifeia dnplieicostata (Phillips) Reg. No. G.S. H)52 Somerton. (nat. size).
Spaihetla sp. indet. Mt. Uriari. (xi).

Fi

1.

ti. Posit/on !e//<i / sp. inAet. S.E. Babbinboon. (xi).

7. Spathella sp. indet. Mt. Uriari. (x J).

8. Sanguinoli/es iriradiatus, sp. nov. Mt. Uriari. (xi).

9. Phaiieio/reiita niistralis yax. nl/a, \.\.v. now Viewed from above. Moorowarra.

(nat. size).

10. Phanerotreuia aiistralis y&r. alta. Lateral view. (nat. size).

.. 11. Sanguiitolites sp. indet. Moorowarra. (x^).

12. Ptycoiiiphaliis culleiii, sp. nov. Moorowarra. (nat. size).

i;f. Phanerotreinata aus/ralis, sp. nov. Moorowarra. (nat. size).

1-1. Ptycoinphalus. culleni, sp. nov. Moorowarra. (nat. size).

Plate xxiv.
Piif. I. C/iaetetes spiitiili/erus, sp. nov. Transverse section of coralhim, showing
irregular character of ooraUites and septal teeth. Spec. 4491F. (x 4).
Chaetetes spinuli/eriis, sp. nov. Vertical section of corallum, showing coral-

lites and thin tabulae. Spec. 4491 F. (x 4).
Cye/oido/rvpa aus/ralis, gen. et sp. nov. Transverse section of zoarium. Spec.

4405F. (x 18).
Cycloidotrypa auslralis, gen. et sp. nov. Vertical section of zoarium attaelied

to calcareous nodule. Spec. 4405F. (x 18).
Hallopora friitiiosa, sp. nov. Tangential section of a branch of the zoarium,

showing zooecia surrounded with mesopores. Spec. 4405F. (x VX).
Hallopora fruticosa', sp. nov. Vertical section of zoarium showing sparsely
tabulate zooeoial tubes and vesicular character of the mesopores. Spec. 4405F.
(xl8).
7. Hallopora frulicosa, sp. nov. Transverse section of zoarium, showing group-
ing of mesopores. Spec. 4405P. (x 18).
H. Fisttilipora microscopica, sp. nov. Vertical section of zoarium. Spec. 4405F.

(X 78).
9. (tlaciated pebble of quartzite collected by Professor David from below the
••Varve" Rocks in B^o^vne's Creek, below the Middle Kuttung Main Felspathic
Grit. Approximately natural size.

10. Glaciated pebble of quartzite from the base of the Upper Kuttung rocks, im-
mediately above the Main Felspathic Grit in Rocky Creek, (x ^).

375

DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES OF AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA.

Part xvi.

By Arthur M. Lea, F.E.S.

By courtesy of the late W. J. Rainbow, I was able to examine some of
Maeleay's and Olliff's types, belonging to the Australian Museum, and to make
notes on synonymy, as given in some of the following pages.

STAPH YLINIDAE .

PiNOPHILUS GRAXDICEPS Maol.

The type of this species is very close to a specimen in my collection identified
as P. trapezus, but its prothorax is less dilated to the apex than on that specimen
(this is possibly a sexual difference) . It is very close to P. mastersi (the type
of that species has lost its prothorax). but has the suture of the elytra raised (as
on trapezus) .

Philoxthus aexeus Rossi.

{('nfus amhlijtenis Oil.; Cafius laeiis Oil.)

The type of C. ambhitenofi agrees perfectly with specimens from New South
Wales and Tasmania identified by Blackburn and myself as P. aeneus, and I am
convinced belong's to that species ; C. laeus also belongs to' the species, the speci-
men from Adelaide (marked as the type) having the three conspicuous punctures
(and a smaller apical one) on each side of the middle of the pronotum as on
laeus, but in addition there are two irregular punctures on the right row, and
one on the left. In comparing amhlyterus and Jaeus, Olliff commented on the
difference in the width of prothorax; the sliglit difference, however, appears to
be sexual; the punctures at the base of the prothorax (one on each side) are
exactly the same, and exactly as on aetieus.

QuEDius RUFicOLLLS Grav.

(Philovthtis chah/beipemiis Macl.)

The type of P. chnli/beipennis is a rather small female of Q. ruficollifi.

Aleochara puberula Klug.

(Oxypoda analis Macl.)

Oxypoda analis has already been referred to Alencliara by Olliff, and from
examination of the type I have now to record it as a synonym of the introduced
A. puberula.

37(5 descript:cxs or xew speciks of Australian coleoptera,

POLTLOBUS PALLlDlPENXis AFacl. ( f'oniR'ily lliimalota).

(P. paUtd-nminor Lea.)

The original description of P. pallidipennis is too short for identificalam of
the species, as it would apply to many small Stnpliyllnidne. There are two speci-
mens mounted on one card with a type label, one is in finite unrecognisable con-
dition, and the other is somewhat dirty but on comparison with the typo of P
paUid-ominor appeared to agree with it, except that the base of its head is not
quite as dark as on the type of the latter species, but this may be due to its
having somewhat faded. Olliff, on referring the species to Poli/lobtiif. and re-
describing it, noted the eh-tra as having "a moderately large indistinct spot near
the external apical angles," but I can find no trace of such a spot on eitlier of the
Gayndah specimens, so it is possilile that Olliff's description may not liave been
drav»-n up from these, as he records the species also from Xew South Wales.

POI.VT.OPi'S LONGVLUS Oil.

(P. teiiaif' Lea. "I

A specimen from Shelley's Flats bearing Ollifif's laljcl as P. lotu/iilus (but
not marked as the type) agrees with the type of P. leriuis. It agi'ees with the
description of tlie structure, but not of the colour, of P. Inngidits. a's the elytra are
twice noted as being "pitehy-black" ; whereas on the specimen now before me
they are scarcely darker tlian the prothorax, although in some lights appearing in-
fuseated posteriorly. Tf the specimen in riuestion is really the type of lo)ii)idiii
the original description is misleading.

POLYLOr.US APICAI.IS Fxl .

(P. (wufioda Oil.)

The type of P. fungicnla agi'ees with two Tasmanian specimens that some
years ago T identified from its description as P. apicalix, and on checkinsr with
that description aoain appear to agree with it. Fauvel notes the pronotum a?
having a rather wide basal foveole; on one of the Tasmanian specimens there is
a fairly conspicuous transverse impression near the base, but on the other speci-
men, and on the iype of fungicrda the depression is scarcely evident.

PSELAPHIDAE.

RvDASIs ATKlCEPs Mad. (forincrly Brgaxis) .

(P. (ic(iiithoslfn)(( Tjca . )

There were two males mounted on one card as the types of R. at rice ps. and
side by side these agi-ee with the types of P. ncanthosterna. Maeleay did not
mention the remarkable features of the sterna, abdomen, and front tibiae, and his
description of the elytra is misleading "Elytra bistriatcd. one on each elytron" as
there are two conspicuous striae on each elytron: a subsutural one, and a sub-
median one.

Rybasis ei-kctrica King, Vav. A.

Mr. A. H. Elston took a specimen of this vaiiety from the nest of a species
of Pheidole on Kangaroo Island.

BY ARTHUR JI. LEA. 377

HISTERIDAE.

Platysoma coxvbxiusculum Macl.

There are tliree specimens mounted on a card as types of this species, Init
of these only two (those on the front of the card) agree with the description;
their elytral striation is much as on P. hipunctatum,, but they are considerably
wider, larger, more convex and otherwise different from that species. The other
specimen differe from the types in being smaller, narrower, and in having an
additional short stria on each elytron, the medio-basal impression on the pronotum
absent, etc., and belongs to P. completum.

I'AiiOJiALUs PLANiCEPS Macl. (formerly Platijsoma) .

This species is a Paromalus, larger, wider, and more depressed than P. iimhid-
catus or P. mctoriae and with considerably larger punctures.

Tribalus australis Macl. (formerly Abraeus).
( T. leae Lewis . )
The fdur types of T. australis agree perfectly with two eotypes of T. leae.

NITIDULIDAE.

Haptoxcura ocularis Fairm. (formerly Epuraea)*

(Uaptoncus tetragonus Murrayt ; Carpophilus convexiusculus Macl.)

Blaekburnt recorded Haptoncura ocularis from Queensland and the Hawaiian

Islands, pointing out Sharp's opinion^ as to its identity with Raptoncus tetragonus.

The types of Carpophilus convexiusculus agree with the specimen he had named

a^ H. ocularis, and one of them agrees well with Murray's figure of H. tetragonus;

the other has elytral markings more extended. I have also taken the species in

the Cairns district.

TROGOSITIDAE.

Lepebina cibeosa Pasc.
(L. mastersi Macl.; L. burnettensis Macl.)
Ollitt' commented upon L. cirrosa as being remarkable "for the great length
of the white scales on the sides of the prothorax, and the large size of the elytral
fascicles"; but the scales and fascicles are very easily abraded and I cannot look
upon the type of L. mastersi as other than a large, partially abraded specimen of
the species; I think also that L. hurnettensis was founded upon small specimens
of the species, as OUiff thought possible. It occurs from Northern New South
Wales to Darwin.

SoRONiA AMPHOTiFORjiis Rcitter.
{Aiicgrona vesca Oil.; Ancyrona arnica Oil.)
The types of A. vesca agree with specimens identified by Blackburn as S.
amphotiformis, and I cannot regard the type of A. arnica as othei' than a large,
partially" abraded specimen of the same species.

•Rev. et Mag. Zool., 1849, p.28.
tMon. Nitid., 1863, p.401, PI. xxxiii., fig. 7.
JTrans. Boy. Soc. S. Aust., 1902, p.306.
§Tr. Dubl. Soc, 188.5, p.231.

378 DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES OF AUSTKALIAX COLEOPTERA,

LATHRIDIIDAE.

HOLOPARASIECUS CAtlLARUM Aube.

Ann. Soe. Ent. Fr., 1843, p. 244. I'l. x.. figs. 2. 5-10.

Mr. Froggatt and I obtained numerous specimens of tbis species in a stack
of wbeat at Peak Hill (New Soutb Wales) . I am indebted to Mr. G. J. Arrow
for the name of the species, now lirst recorded as occurring in Australia.

SOAR ABAEIDAE .
OcNODus LUGUBRis Blackb.

A specimen from Coolgardie may represent a variety of this species; it differs
from the typical form in being somewhat smaller, 9 mm., and almost eutirelx'
black .

OCNODUS TRIDENTATUS Lea.

A specimen from the Flora River (Northern Territory) in the National
Museum may represent a variety of this species; it differs from the type in being
somewhat larger, and by having the labrum more conspicuously notched, and the
pygidium longitudinally carinated.

POLYSTIGMA VITTICOLLE Macl.

There are sexes of this species in the National Museum from the King River
(Northern Territory) and they differ somewhat from the types in markings: on
two males the small black subapieal spot (of the types) on each elytron is joined
to the suture, this being entirely black; on the female the subapieal spot and
postmedian fascia form parts of a complete but somewhat irregular ring, which
encloses a conspicuous flavous spot on each elytron; on the males also there i^ a
distinct, but not isolated, spot in each upper corner of the pygidium; the small
humeral spot on all three specimens is also more angular than on the types. The
male has a wide and rather shallow depression on the abdomen; its front tibiae
liave but two distinct teeth (on one male the third tooth of the female is feebly
indicated, but not at all on the other) ; the hind tibiae are shorter and wider than
those of the female, and on its under surface there is a dense fringe of golden
hair commencing near the base and becoming denser to the apex.

EUCNEMIDAE.

Nematodes pubescens Macl. (formerly Acroniojjus).

The type of this species is a female (its ovipositor is protruding) and it does
not belong to the Elateridae, but to the Eucnemidae* In Blackburn's table of
the subfamily it would be referred to AA (the line marking off the pronotum
from the prosternum is acutely carinated, and inwards of the carina' is a shallow
depression as in Nematodes, certainly not a conspicuous groove as in A), BB, C,
D (the apical process is short and truncated), E — Nematodes, to which accordingly
I refer it, although it certainly looks somewhat out of place in that genus. In
general appearance, at first glance it strongly resembles Fornax parvoniger, but
is somewhat narrower, the prothoracic punctures distinctly coarser, and the elytra!
ones somewhat stronger, the clothing also is uniformly pale ; the sternal characters,
however, are xevy different.

'Acroiiiopiis rufipennia Macl.. iloes belonj; to thp /'laUriihn-.

BY ARTHUR M. LEA. 379

ELATERIDAE.

MoNOCREPiDiiJS MINOR Macl .

(j\I. alpicohi Blac'kb. ; M. dolosti.s (Cand. MS) Sc4i\varz. )

The types of minor agree well with some cotypes of M. alpicola. A specimen
of the species was sent to me some years ago by M. Candeze, as M. dolosus Cand.,
an MS. name subsequently published by Sehvvarz, whose description agrees with
the types of M. minor, and also with the specimen sent by Candeze.

MONOCREPIDIUS EVEILLARDI Le G.

{M. hreviceps Macl.; M. rubicundus Macl.)

The type of M. hreviceps agrees with specimens in the Blackburn and Lea
collections identified by Candeze as M. eveillardi; its head has been forced upwards
and backwards, so that it _ appears shorter than usual, and its median carina is
concealed. The type of M. rubicundus is an abraded specimen of eveillardi, with
the derm and punctures in consequence more clearly exposed ; its head is in the
normal position, the left hind angle of its prothorax has been broken off at the
tip, but the right is as on the type of hreviceps. The two discal spots of denser
clothing on the pronotum, typical of eveillardi, are present on both of the Gayn-
dah types.

MoNOCREPlDiu.s APHiLOiUE.s Cand.

{M. mastersl Macl.)

The types of M. mastersi agree well with some specimens identified by Can-
deze as M. aphiloides, and with others standing under the latter name in the
Blackburn collection. The species varies c(msiderably in size, and occurs in
(Queensland, New South Wales, and Victoria.

Lacox VARIABILIS Cand.

(L. alternans Macl.)

The type of L. alternaxis is quite an ordinary male of L. variabilis, of which
there are specimens in the Blackburn and Lea collections, identitied by Candeze.

Lacon guttatus Cand.

(L. maculatus Macl.)

The type of L. maculatus is a rather small specimen of L. guttatus, of which
there are specimens in the Blackburn and Lea collections, identified by Candeze.
Its derm, as well as the clothing, is mottled.

ANTHICIDAE.

AXTHICUS INTRICATUS King.

{A. ovipennis Lea.)

This species is distinct amongst the Australian Anthici by its pronotum being
densely and finely longitudinally strigose (or suhreticulate) ; King speaks of the
"intricate markings" of the prothorax, no doubt referring to its sculpture. In

380 DESCRIPTIONS OF XKW SPECIES OP AUSTRALIAN OOLEOPTERA,

my own description the bead am', ]irutli(>iax were incorrectly described as "shal-
lowly punctate." Unfortunately with my type of A. ovipennis, I had two speci-
mens of another species (obtained subsequent to its description) and I appear to
have sent a specimen of this other species to Mr. Champion, who on it (and no
doubt on my inaccurate description) recorded ovipe»iiii< as a synonym of his
A. in flatus, but the latter name being already in use he suggested that ovipennis
might stand; in size, colour and general appearance in flatus and intricatus are
extremely close together; but Champion's description of the punctures of infhilnf
renders it quite certain that the two species are distinct.

AXTHICUS ALBAXYEXSIS Pic.

Bull. Soc. Ent. Fr., 1895. p. cccl.

(A. inflatus Champ.)

In M. Pic's Catalogue of the Anthicidae, A. inflatus and A. ovipennis are
placed as synonyms of A. albanyensis; but as will be seen by the above correcting
note, inflatus and ovipennis are not equal.

AXTHICUS HESPERI King.

{A. mastersi Macl.; .i. similis Lea.)

Placing the types of A. hesperi, A. mastersi and A. similis side by side 1 am
convinced that they belong to but one species; the sexes differ somewhat in the
size of head and apex of protliorax; the punctures vary slightly in size, and the
markings are extremely variable in extent, but these have been ijreviously com-
mented upon under notes on mastersi. *

Anthicus scydmaexoioes King.

The tj'pe of this species now has the head no darker than the protliorax, and
the "strong black setae" have been nearly all abraded ; the sides of the prothorax
are armed with small spines, from the hindmost one of which (almost in the exact
middle) a pubescent line extends backward to the base.

A specimen taken in rotting leaves in the National Park (near Sydney)
evidently belongs to this species, but dili'ers I'rum the type in being slightly smaller,
tlie head entirely black, and the antennae with the first and seventh-tenth joints
conspicuously darker than the others.

AnTHICUS I.M.MACL'l.ATUS King.

This species occurs in abundance at the roots of plants on the sand-dunes at
Port Lincoln and Glenelg in South Australia; the head and prothorax (except
for a slight difference in shade) appear to be constant in colour; but the elytra
vary from entirely pale to entirely black (except that the base and suture are
obscurely diluted with red), with or without a sliglit metallic-green gloss; on nuuiy
specimens the dark parts consist of a large infuscation (scarcely a distinct s|)ot)
on each side. The subsutural striae iu-e well-defined, and by this character alone
entirely pale specimens may be distinguished from other pale species of the genus.

•Proc. Linn. Soc. X. S. Wales. 1894, p.620.

BY ARTHUR M. LEA. 381

AxTHicus RARUS King.

A. Icrefftii King; A. propinquus Macl. ; ,1. (iii--ytralis Champ, {not King) .

Although placeJ in a different section of the genus hy Iviug, i cannot satisfy
myself that the type of A. Icrefftii is other than a specimen of A. rarm, with the
markings of the elytra almost obliterated; the shape of the elytra (including the
conspicuous subsutural striae) and the lateral foveoles of the prothorax are iden-
tical, but the elytral punctures are not quite as strong as usual (I have, however,
specimens with the typical markings of ranis, and with punctures no stronger than
on the type of krefftii) . Tasmanian specimens have larger and darker markings
and somewhat stronger punctures than those on the mainland. The other
synonymy has been already noted.

AxTHicus MYRTEUS King.

(-1. ghibricoUis King.)

Specimens that some years ago were compared and agreed with the type of
A. myrteus, structurally agree well with the type of A. glahricollis, although the
former was referred to Group 4, and the latter to Group 10. The dark parts
vary from moderately infuscated to deep black, the prothorax (as on the type of
glahricoUis) is sometimes of an uniform lurid-brown, but is usually paler at the
base than in front, occasionally it is entirely black. The species occurs in abund-
ance on flowers in New South Wales, Victoria, and South Australia.

AxTiiicus xiTiDissuirs King.

In general appearance this species is very close to A. xerophilus, and the
elytral marking-s of the type are practically identical, but it diffei-s in being slightly
wider, head darker (on some specimens, however, the head is not infuscated), pro-
thorax more dilated in front, and elytra with distinct punctures only in front of the
median markings; on xerophilus there are quite distinct punctures on the median
markings, and beyond them to the apex (althougli becoming smaller posteriorly)
and the punctures in front of the markings are also considerably denser than on
A. nitidissimus. From A. exiguus it differs in being somewhat larger, elytra con-
spicuously wider, and with much smaller punctures; the elytral markings are also
not quite the same.

The original description of the colour of the elytra is somewhat misleading;
ihey are pale eastaneous, with a blackish median fascia narrowed towards and
rot meeting at the suture, an infuscate spot on each side of the apex, the space
between the spots and the median fascia paler than the basal half; a fairly large
space about the scufellum is slightly darker than the rest of the basal half, but
certainly not "piceous." The colour of the tyiies has perhaps slightly altered
since they were taken (over fifty years ago) but agrees well with some recently
taken tmes. The species occurs in Western Australia as well as in South Australia.

MECYNOTARStTS ZICZAC King.

Mr. J. S. Clark took numerous specimens of this species, about the Swan
River, from nests of Ponera httea.

o82 description;* of xew species of Australian coleopteka,

CHKVSOMELIDAE.

Cadmus fasciaticollis Lea.

Mr. H. J. Carter and I rfi'ciitiv touk .^i.x sin'ciuR'Us of this sjiecies. at Laun-
eeston and Cradle Mountain, in Tasmania, tliat aurue in colour witli llii- tyi)e.
except that, ou two of them, from four to six of the ajiii-al joints of the antennae
are more or less deeply infuseated. Tliree other specimens, from Warataii and
Wihnot, differ considerably, however; of tliese a female has the prothoracic fascia
extended so as to occupy most of the disc, but not touching' any of the margins;
its elytra are blue-black at the base, with a wide extension along the middle to
the summit of the apical slope, and a narrow extension from each shoulder, the
tips of its antennae are lightly infuseated ; a second female has the prothoracic
fascia irregularly extended so as to touch the base in places and to leave hut |iale
edgings at the sides and apex; its elytral marking's are less extended tlian on the
other female, and the antennae are entirely yiale; the third specimen, a male, lias
the prothorax dark excejit fm- a naiTow edging at apex and sides, the elytra are
dark except for part of the apical slope, a narrow marginal strip on each sidis
and an obscure post-humeral spot, the two apical joints of its antennae and tii)s
of several of the preceding ones are infuseated.

DiTROPiDUs ocHROPrs Er.

'I'he type was described as having <lark hind femora, and several specimens
before me have them dark: but they are usually no darker than the others. The
species occurs in Soutli Australia (Mount .Lofty, Adelaide and ^fonnta) as well
as in Tasm'ania.

DiTROpinrs ^ aurichai.ceus Suff .

Numerous specimens from Xew South Wales (Gosfi.rd, Sydney, and Taui-
wortlil and Victoria (Dividing Range) agree witli specimens identified by Black-
burn as belonging to this species. They have tlie upper surface uniformly bronzy
and the leg's bright red; the ])ronotum densely and finely strigose at tlie sides
and apex, but with punctures only on the rest of its surface; tlie eyes are rather
close together on the male.

DiTROPIDUS AMABILIS Balv.

Xumerous specimens from (Queensland ( I'uiidaberg, Rockhaiiipton, and
Oayiidah ) probably belong to tliis s])ecies; tiicy are chisc to I), liiericollis, Imt liave
the |)i'othorax more metallic, with denser imni'lures (especially on the sides, lint
they are nowhere oblong as noted for .1. (iniiiliilis) and the dypeus not in the form
of a narrow transverse ridge; the ahdomen is usually entirely pale in the female,
largely infuseated in the male.

DiTROPiiu's imriniATrs P.Mly.

Ten specimens before me,- 2.2,5 — 3.25 mm. in h'ugth, jirobably lielong to D.
(limidiatir."; they have tlie prothorax decidedly longer than is usual in the genus,
its median leng'th being fully two-tliirds of t!ie median leiigtli of the elytra, and
witli rather dense and sharply defined punctures, becoming more crowded on the
.«ides; the prosternal process is deeply, on Hie male almost triangularly, notched.
Ill the original description the prothorax was noted as "distinctly and somewhat

BY ARTHUl! M. LEA. 383

closely imnctuivil,"' a cluiracter wliicli should at once distinguish it from IJ. elejait-
tulidf. and other species having the prothorax red and elytra black. The legs
vary somewhat in colour, on some specimens being entirely pale, on others the hind
ones, or the four hind ones being partly black or infuscated; but on all of them
the liead is entirely red. Two of the specimens, from Tamworth, have the pro-
thorax. excei)t for its narrow basal edging, entirely red, and elytra entirely black;
two, from Brisbane, are similarly coloured, except that a pale spot is vaguely in-
dicated on each elytron about the basal third; two, from Cairns and Charters
Towers, have the prothorax red and the elytra with two reddish fasciae, the first
commencing on each side at the basal third, and dilated so that near the suture,
which it almost touches, it occupies about the basal half, the second fascia is
apical ; one, from Cairns, is like the preceding ones, cxcejit that the subbasal fascia
appears as two large round disconnected spots; two, from Sydney, have a large
black blotch occupying most of the pronotum, and the elytra are entirely black;
the last specimen, from Cairns, is like the preceding ones, except that on each
elytron a pale spot, as on the ones from Brisbane, is vaguely indicated . A
specimen from Cape York, in the British Museum, has the elytra pale, except
that the base and suture are very narrowly Idack, and that tliere are feel)le infusca-
tions on the sides.

DiTROPinus onF:wAiixii Baly.

Specimens before me 1.75 — 2.25 mm. in length, ajjpear to belong to this
species; their prothoracic jjunctures are usually very feeble. They are from
New South Wales (Whitton and Forest Reefs) and South Australia (Adelaide.
Port Lincoln, Goolwa and Quorn) .

DiTROPIDUS ANTENNARIUS Balv, 1877.

(I>. antennarius Chp., 1878; I), baccaefonms Chp., var. )

This species, from the female, waa descriljed by Chapius as entirely pale,
except that the five apical joints of the antennae were dark; there are six females
before me that agree with his description, except that the junction of the prothorax
and elytra is very narrowly black (apparently an invariable character in pale
species) ; they are from Brisbane, Cairns and Bloomfleld River, their antennae
are of f|uite the ordinary type in the genus, l)ut the male has very different ones,
seven of the joints being dark, and all, after the second, being several times longer
than wide, so that the tip of the eleventh joint actually passes the elytra ; a charac-
ter that, by his table, would generically separate the sexes.

Baly's description of colours differs from Chapius' only in six of the joints
of the antennae being noted as black, and "Body beneatli and legs more or less
stained with piceous"; he notes the name as being "Suffr. MS," and probal)ly
Chapius also received his specimens with that manuscript name.

Yar. A. Five females from Roekhampton, one from Boweu and one from
Brisbane, differ in having the metasternum, abdomen and hind femora black, and
sometimes other parts of the legs infuscated, the antennae have from four to six of
the apical joints dark. A male from Roekhampton, and one from Bowen, are
coloured as the females, except that seven of the joints of the antennae are dark,
their antennae are almost as long as those of the typical form, extending exactly
to the tips of the elytra. The Bowen female is rather larger, 4.5 mm., than usual,
and its front legs are almost entirely dark ; except in this variable feature, and for

384 DESCRIPTIOXS OF KE\T SPECIES OF ArSTRALIAS COLEOPTERA,

.5 mm. in length, it agrees well witli tlie description of haccaeformU (tlie sex of
the type of which was not noted), and tliat name appears to be varietal only; a
femaie (without locality) apparently belons-inj; to this variety is still larger. 5 nnn.,
but its antennae and legs are all damaged.

A male, from Ooldea in South Australia (the only specimen I have seen,
except from Queensland) also appears to belong to the species, but its antennae
are slightly shorter, not quite extending to the tips of the elytra, and only six of
its ioints are entirely dark, its metasteruum and abdomen, except for a median
space at the base of each, and most of its middle and hind legs are black.

DiTROPiDUS JACOBTI Balv .

A short, thick-set species with large eyes, almost touching in both sexes; the
elytra] striae are strong, and contain large punctui-es, the striae actually extend
to the suture ; on most species of the genus there are two or three, well-impressed
striae on each side, but towards the suture these are represented by rows of punc-
tures. The prothoracie punctures are strong and rather dense on the sides, be-
coming more or less sparse on the middle; the seventh joint of the antennae (first
of the club) is distinctly larger than any of the following joints in tlie male, and a
trifle larger than any of them in the female. The upper surface is usually of a dingy
testaceous, vai-ying to obscurely piceous, or even black, with the apical portion of
the elytra paler or not; occasionally there is a large infuscate blotch on the pro-
notum; the legs also vary from almost entirely pale, to almost entirely dark.
There are specimens before me from many localities in Xew South Wales, Vic-
toria, Tasmania and South Australia.

Var. a. Some specimens! from New South Wales (Tamworth), Victoria
(Alps) and Western Australia (Pinjarrah and Mount Barker) differ from most
specimens of the species in having the prothorax with dense pimctures throughout,
the elytral striae are deep throughout, witli all the interstices strongly convex (on
the typical form the elj-tral striae although distinct, are not as deep as on this
variety, and the interstices near the suture are flat and wider than the striae), and
the upper surface is of a uniform pieeous-brown . A specimen from Victoria and
another from Tasmania resemble the variety, except that the ehira are obscurely
flavous at the tips.

Var. B. a specimen frcjm South Austi-aliii ( Lucindak') is stniclnndly like
the preceding variety, but is flavous, exi-eiit that the metasternuiu and al)domcii
are deeply infuscated.

Var. C. Some specimens from Western Australia (Albany. Blount Barker
and Darling Ranges) resemble the typical form, but the prothorax is without
punctures, except for a few on the margins. One of them in colour resembles
the preceding variety, but the others are darker.

DiTROPinus i;i.,E(iAXTri.fs Haly.

Only the male of this species, from "Australia," was described by Baly. and
his specimen was noted as having ''Body beneath stained with piceous"; I liave
only seen one specimen agreeing with this character; on another the under surface,
including the pygidium, is entirely red, and cm another the pygidium is red but
the rest of the abdomen is black; on all other males the metasternum and ab
<lomen, including tlie pygidium. are deep l)lack. altlioiigh (•lotlie<l witli thin wliit"

DY ARTHUR 11. LEA. 385

pubeseence. The female (there are several pairs taken in cop- before me) ditfers
fi'om the male in being- slightly larger, the head, except for a small part of the
muzzle, and prothorax of the same bronzy or brassy colour as the elytra, and the
prosternuin entirely black; its head is smaller, antennae, especially the joints of
the club, thinner, prothorax more rounded in front and with more distinct'
punctures, distance across junction of jirothorax and elytra less, abdomen more
convex, and with a large apical fovea, and legs, especially the front ones, shorter
and thinner.

The species occurs in New South Wales, Victoria and Tasmania, and is some-
times common on species of Dilwi/iniia and Pulteiiaea. In general appearance
it is close to a specimen I have identitied a.s T). riificolhs, but the elytra are not
at all green, the head is densely punctured and obliquely strigose. with a con-
spicuous median line, eyes larger, etc.; the specimen of riificollJx has the inter-
ocular space with sparse and snuiU jiunctures, and is without an impressed median
line there.

DiTROPiDUs SEREXUS Baly.

This sjjecies varies considerably in length. 2.2.3 — 3.. 5 mm., and the smaller
specimens usually have a rather wide space at tlie apex of the elytra infuscated;
on two small males the elytra are slightly infuscated throughout. It occurs in
Victoria, as well as in South Australia.

DlTROPIDUS ORXATUS Billv.

A specimen from Murray Bridge (South Australia) appears to Ijelong to
this species, but differs from an undoubted one of it (from Western Australia) in
having the jjubescence on the head ^very feeble, and the two pale parts on each
elytron disconnected, owing to the black submediau fascia extending to both the
suture and sides. Three other (old) South Australian specimens, also appear to
belong to the species, but have the inter-ocular space glabrous ; the prothorax has
a dark green gloss and the dark parts of the elytra a purplish gloss, their mark-
ings, except for slight differences of detail, are as on the Murray Bridge specimen.

DlTROPIDUS PULCHELLTTs Baly.

This species ranges 3.25 — 4.. 5 mm. in length; the pale elytral markings vary
from bright flavous to a moderately dark red, but appear to be always paler
than the prothorax ; the latter is usually without diseal marking's, but occasionally
has a black transverse median fascia, or there may be a scries of spots represent-
ing the fascia. I cannot distinguish the species stracturally from ornaUi.i.

DlTROPIDUS C'ORxuTus Baly.

A curious species readily distinguished by the armed muzzle of the male, the
processes on the clypeus and mandibles, however, vary somewhat in size. The
upper surface usually has a slight brassy-green gloss ; on the elytra of the male
there are usually four dark blotches, sometimes only two; on the female the
blotches are usually scarcely in evidence; the male also has most of the under-
surface black, on the female usually only the nietasternum is infuscated. The
types were from "Australia" ; the specimens before me are from Western Aus-
tralia (Warren Eiver and Karridale) .

386 DESCRIPTIONS* OK NEW SPKCIES OP AUSTRALIAX COLEOPTERA,

DlTROPIUUS FASCIATIS Baly.

il). caiiescens Clip.)

Ou this species there is a sliort (il)li(|ue earina on each side of the prothinax
at the base, very distinct on tlie male, feeble on the female; the wide fascia on
the elytra varies in extent, sometimes being- continuous except for a very narrow
interruption at the suture, at other times appearing as a large spot on each side;
the leg's are usually entii'cly dark or almost so. The clothing of the itrothoi-ax
varies apparently in accordance with the elytral fascia, on specimens having tliis
of gi-eat extent the pubescence in <lecidedly denser than on those whose fascia is
gi-eatly reduced in size; the elytra are usually entirely glabrous, but on an occa-
sional specimen the sides are feebly pubescent towards the base.

DiTROPinus FASCiATUs var. pictipes, n.var.

Sis males, from Cue, differ from thu typical form in having the |>riithuracic
punctures somewhat coarser, and the leg's red, except that the tarsi are almost
black, that there is a black streak on the under surface of the front femora, and
that the knees are slightly infuscated. the elytral fascia is wide and very narrowly
interrupted at the suture, and the dark parts of the elytra, although brassv, ai-e
paler than the prothorax.

A specimen, from Port Lincoln, appears to represent another variety; it has
the elytra entirely pale, except that a small amount of the base is <lark and the
suture is infuscated; the colour, however, is less flavous than usual; tlie front logs
are dark, but with the coxae and part of the tibiae obscurely reddish, the other
legs are red, except for the tarsi and knees. The outer lialf of each elytron is
sparsely l)ut rather distinctly pubescent.

A female, from "Western Australia, nuiy reiiresent still another variety, it is
unusually small (3 nun.) and at first glance the elytra ai)|iear to be entirely dark,
but from some directions a fairly large space on each side about the basal third
appears to be obscurely diluted with Havous; the legs are almost entirely dark,
the prothorax has denser punctures than usual, with it tendency to become longi-
tudinally cuntl\u'nt. and the latero-basal earinae are scarcely indicated.

DlTROPIIIfS llOFtlAE ('hl>.

Numerous s])eciniens from Northern Queensland (Cape York, Cairns, JIackay
and Bundaberg) ]irobably belong to this species, but only two of them could fairly
be noted as having both prothorax and elytra "nigTo-cyaneis"' ; on most of them
the elytra are purple, or deep purplish-blue, and the prothorax blue or black,
with a slight greenish gloss; the elytra usually have some of tlie interstices
obliquely strigose. but on some of them tliey are feebly strigose only near the
apex. The eyes of the male are close together, about half the length of the
basal joint of the antennae separating them; on the female the distance Ixt ween
them is about eriual to the len.gth of that joint.

DiTitDi'iurs TiiiiAi.is Clip.

A small metallic sjjecies raliiei- (Mimnioii in New South AVales ; the typical form
has legs i)ale, )mt hind femora dark; the prothoracic punctures are rather dense
and sharply defined.

liv Airniuu ii. LEA. 387

Var. a. Some specimens (from Sytlney, Maitlaml and Aimidale) differ in
being of a darker and less coppery-g-reen, and with the legs entirely dark; but I
can tind no structural differences from the tyi)ical foi'm.

DiTROPIDUS PUNCTULDM Clip .

This species ranges 1.25 — 1.5 mm. in lengfh. The eyes are rather widely
separated in the male, still more in the female. There was a ootype in tlie Black-
burn collection and otiiei' specimens before me are from Queensland { Hribie
Island), South Australia (Mount Lofty, Port Lincoln and Murray Bridge), and
Western Australia ( Swan River) .

DiTHOPiDU.s co.vvExiuscuLus Clip, (formerly Elaphodes.)

Two specimens, from Bowen, appear to belong to this species, described, with-
out the sex of the type being noted, originally as an Elaphodes. The antennae
of the male are lirokeii, but those of the female are slightly shorter and stouter
than in T). ctimuHs, referred by Chapius to Ditropidus. The male has a conspicu-
ous cross of white pubescence on the pronotum, on the female the cross is present
but less distinct ; the female has a conspicuous median fascia of white pulicscence
on the elytra, but on the male this is not di.stinct, owing to their clothing being
almost entirely white. In appearance the sjiecies is fairly close to cumrnis, l)ut
differs in having the jirothorax scarcely gibbons, not shagreened, its punctures
more sliari)ly defined and not at all elongate, and the elytral striae distinct only
near the sides.

DiTROPIDl'S COJIAXS Chp.

On this species there is usually, but not always, a distinct median fascia of
W'hite clothing on the elytra, the prothorax is gil)boHS in front, and at the middle
is either glabrous or very sparsely clotlie<l, allowing the dense punctures and finely
shagreened surface to be clearly seen . The distance between the eyes is about
equal to the length of the basal joint of the antennae in the male, considerably
more in the female; the length ranges 1.5 — 3 ram. The species occurs from
Dalby, in Queensland, to the Swan River, in Western Australia.

DiTROPIDUS PUBICOLLIS Chp.

Recorded by Chapius without exact locality ; specimens before me agreeing
with his description are from New Soutii Wales (Goulliurn, Tamworth and Wind-
sor) and Soutli Australia (Quorn and Lucindale) .

DiTROPIDUS PUBKRULUS Clip.

A specimen from Geraldton (Western Australia) possibly belongs to this
species; it is a male (the type was a female) and differs from the description in
being slightly smaller (2.25 mm.) and in having the parts flavous that were noted
by Chapius as ferruginous, except that the Joints of the club are infuscated at
their tips.

DiTROPIDUS ilACULICOLLlS Clip.

A s])ecimen from Brisbane (the type was from Sydney) agrees well with
the description of this species; its abdomen is more strongly convex than is usual
in males, and the tip of the jivgidium is not encroaching on the lower surface; but

388 DESCRIPTIOXS OF XKW SPECIES OF AUSTRALIAN OOLEOPTERA,

as it is nonfoveate I presvnuo the speeiiiieii must be a male. Two other males,
from Geraldton, appear also to belong to the species, one is slightly larger than
the Brisbane specimen, and its prothoracic blotch is broken up into two spots;
the other is still larger (2.5 uim.) and its prothorax is immaculate.

DiTROPIIH'S AC'K'ri.ATUS Clip.

Two specimgns from Victoria and South Australui (Mount Lofty) possibly
belong to this species, but differ from the description in being smaller (1.75 — 2
mm.), and with the sides of the prothorax narrowly reddish; the differences are
possibly sexual, as they are males, and the type was a female. They both have
the shoulders slightly infuscated, and one at first glance appears to have a large
scutellum, owing to the derm in its vicinity being deeply infuscated .

DiTROPIDUS LEXTULUS Clip.

Three cotypes of this species from Tasmania have the legs entirely dark, and
tliere are many similar specimens before me, but the legs, especially the front and
middle ones, are often obscurely reddisli; the upper surface frequently has a
greenisli gloss, rarely a purplish one. There is a i-ather wide and shallow median
line on the head, and the eyes are moderately widely separated on the male, more
so on the female.

DiTROPIDUS SUBAENEUS Chp .

There were two females of this species in the Blackburn collection, one bear-
ing a label "Ditropidiis subameiis Chp. Type" (no doubt it is a cotype), and I
took one at Hobart. All three have the hind legs black with a metallic gloss, liut
the middle and front leg's vary somewhat in colour. The head has a conspicuous
median line (not mentioned in the original description) and the eyes are widely
sejiarated, l)ut no doubt they are closer together in the male.

DiTROPIDUS COSTATUS Chp.

Two females from Dalby and one from Bowen possibly belong to this species
(recorded from "Australia"), but they are brightly metallic (the types weie de-
scribed as ''subnitidus") . The Bowen specimen has the apical half of the abdomen
brightly coppery, the others have most of it more or less red . They are close to
venustKs, but the prothorax has slightly smaller punctures, its sides could fairly
be called strigose, and its colour is but little different to that of the elytra, the
legs are also of a bright red.

DiTROPIDUS I.A3IIXATUS Clip.

On the male of this species the elypeus hn.s two subtriangular elevations, each
side of the elytra has a large opaque patch (in striking contrast to the adjacent
polished surface), and the front legs are stout and rather long. The female differs
from it in t)eing less dilated at the .iunction of the prothorax and elytra, the latter
nowhere opa(|ue, the tu))ercles on the dypeus uiudi smaller, the front legs shorter
and thinner, the antennae thinner, and the abdomen more convex, with a large
apical fovea. On the male the eyes are separated about the length of the two
basal joints of antennae, on the female about three. The specimens before me
are all from Queensland (Cape York. Cucii. Cairns. Bowen. and Clinrtors Towers).

BY ARTUl•I^ :\[. LEA. 389

DiTROPIDUS IMI'KRIALIS Clip.

Seven females, t'loiu Cape York, Coen, and Cairns, appear to belong to this
species, the finest of its genus from Australia; only one agrees at all well with the
type in colours, the others have the prothorax and soutellum coppery or coppery-
red, and tlie elytra deep purple, or purplish-hlne ; on some of them the antennae
have the basal joint no darker than the second, but on two it is partly infuscated;
the distance between the eyes is about e(iual to the length of the two basal joints
of antennae. Two males, from Cairns, differ in being smaller, 4 — i.25 mm., the
eyes larger and closer together, the distance between them less than the length
of the basal joint, front legs stouter, abdomen smaller, sloping to base and apex,
and non-foveate, and the clothing of the under surface denser; the prothornx and
scutellum are coppery with a slight greenish gloss, the head is darker and the
elytra are purple.

DlTROl'IDU.S INsrLARIS Lea.

(D. chalceus Lea: D. lateralis Lea.)

After reexamining the types and many other specimens I now believe that
D. chalceus and D. lateralis can only be regarded as varietal forms of D. insularis;
the upper surface is usually brassy, but varies to entirely blue, the legs vary from
entirely dark to almost entirely red; the prothoracic punctures are always sharply
<lefined, and are fairly dense. The species is evidently close to D. distingnendus,
but all the specimens before me are larger, up to 3.5 mm. in leug-th, than the
type of that species, and the prothorax could not be regarded as "lateraliter
strigero . "

DiTROPIDUS xiGRicOLLis Lea.

A male, from Northern Queensland, probably belongs to this species, but
differs from the type in being smaller, 1.75 mm., the head and prothorax reddish-
flavous, and elytra flavous (except that there is a narrow black line at the junc-
tion of the prothorax and elytra) ; its under surface has a conspicuous black cross,
the upriglit part of which extends from the prosternal process to the end of the
first abdominal segment, and the cross-piece is on the metasternum, ending abruptly
at the episterna. Another male, from Sydney, agrees with it. except that the
cross-piece on the under surface is larger and less sharply defined, its sides in-
eluding the metasternal episterna.

DiTROPIDUS suBSiMiLis Lea.

A female of this species, from the Blue Mountains, differs from the types in
having a small, round, black spot, towards each side of the pronotum.

DiTROPIDUS NIGRIPENXIS Lea.

On the male of this species the clyi^eus is depressed in the middle, and each
side is elevated into a small subtriangular, slightly curved, black-tipped process,
about half the length of the basal joint of the antennae; the armature is different
from that of D. corimius, and there are many other differences of sculptui'e and
colour .

Var. a. Three males, from .lenolan, agree so closely with the types that I
cannot regard them as representing a distinct species, but the processes on the
head are much longer (somewhat longer than the basal joint of the antennae) more
stronglv cur\ed. and conspicuous from most directions.

4^

L I E i\ /-, .

390 DKSCRIPTIOXS OF XKW SPKCIES OF Al'STHALIAX COLEOPTKRA,

DiTROPiDUs LAEvicoLLis Lea.

This species occurs in South Australia (Lucindale and Port Lincoln) as well
as in Western Australia. Its elypeus appears as a narrow transvei-se rid^e, and
in many other respects it agrees witli the description of D. suhmetaUexcenn, hut
all the specimens before me are somewhat larger, 2 — 2.75 mm., than the type of
that species. z^Hn., which was also noted as having "thorace subremote, tenuiter
piiiictato''; the prothoracic punctures of /;. laevicoUis are certainly not subremote,
bi'iiig fairly dense, althougli not crowded.

DlTBOPIDlS MTKrATOPUXCTATrs Lea.

A short compact species, the prothorax with sparse and small punctures on
the disc, but the sides densely longitudiuall.y strigose. Specimens from Sydney
and Galston agree well with the type, except that the legs ai-e entirely black; the
eyes of the male are separated rather more than the length of the basal joint of
the antennae, still more in the female.

DiTROPiDUM sOBRixvs Lea.

Numerous specimens from South Australia (Petersburg, Quorn and Para-
<-hilna) belong to this species, but range in lengih 2.25 — 3 mm., the males usually
being smaller than the females. The eyes are moderately widely separated in the
males, more widely in the females; the jiunctures in the inter-ocular space are
i-ather dense and sharply defined; there is usually a well-defined median line there,
but occasionally it is almost absent; tlie discal striae of the elytra are very feelile;
the labrum is reddish, and the red occasionally extends to tlie elypeus.

DiTROPiDus VEXUSTUS Lea.

A specimen from Northern Queensland, and another from Mungar .Junction,
<liffer from the types in having the ui)per surface entirely purple, altliough the
protliorax is of not quite the same shade as the elytra.

DiTROPinrs .scitui.tts Lea.

Of two specimens from the Swan Kivei' one agrees well with the type, but
the other has the elytra of a vivid cn|iiiciy-green .

DiTROPIUUS LATIFRONS, U . SJI .

^ c?. — Coppery-bronze, in places with a sliglit imriilisii gloss; lal)rum, antennae
(the club infuscated) and )ial).)i ledilisli, ti))s of tibiae obscurely reddisli. MckUt-
ately densely clothed with white pubescence.

Head wide and flat in front; witli I'ather dense, partially <'nncertlecl punct\tfes.
Eyes widely separated. Prothorax about twdce as wide as the median length,
evenly convex, a feeble oblique carina on each hind angle, these acute; punctures
rather dense and sharply defined, but not very large. Eli/tra with siunewhat
coarser punctures than on prothorax, the interspaces slightly rugose; striae well-
detlned on sides, but scarcely traceable elsewliere. Le()S rather stout,
the front ones somewhat longer than the otliers. Lenglii (c?. ?), 3.75 — 4 mm.

?. — Differs in l)eing rather more robust, iiead smaller, labrum less prominent,
antennae somewhat thinner, with the club no darkei- than the basal joints, front
legs no longer than tlie liind ones, more of tlie tiliiiie reil. ;ind in tlie iiliduineii.

nv AKTUIR M. LKA. 391

Hafe.— New South Wales: Condobolin. in October (W. W. Froggatt) .

On the under surface the clothing is somewhat longer than on the upper; on
the disc of the pronotuni it has a somewhat rusty appearance, across the middle
it forms a whitish line that is fairly distinct on the types, and on another speci-
men that was returned to Mr . Froggatt ; but as a similar line is to be seen on
occasional specimens of other species, it is probably not to be depended upon.
The distance between the eyes of the male is about e(iual to the width of the
clypeus, on the female it is slightly more. The species is close to D. puhescens,
but the prothorax has a short obli(|ue carina on each hind angle (somewhat as on
D. faseiatus, hut less distinct) the legs are darker, an<l the punctures are slightly
coarser: the sliape is more oblong than in U. pubicolUn and D. ichitei, and the
clothing is denser.

DiTROPIDUS OKXICTLATrS, n . sp .

c?. — Coppery-bronze; clypeus. lalnum, parts of antennae, base of tibiae and
usually parts of abdomen and elytral epipleurae red. Under surface moderately
clothed with white pubescence, more sparsely on u(>per.

Head with a wide and rather shallow median line; punctures dense and rather
sharply defined, becoming confluent in places. Eyes widely separated. Pru-
th 0 rax ahont twice as wide as the median length, ratlier strongly and evenly convex,
scutellar lobe small ; punctures rather small and not x'ery dense in middle, becoming
crowded and confluent, or substrigose, on sides. Eli/tra ol)long, with dense and
rather small but asperate punctures, the interspaces flnely rugose (almost shag-
reeaed), striae distinct on sides but scarcely traceable elsewliere. Legs moderately
stout, front ones scarcely longer than the hind ones. Lengfh (<?, 2), 3 — 4 mm.

9. — Ditjfers in being rather more robust, head slightly smaller, the median line
deeper and almost foveate in the middle, antennae somewhat thinner, legs slightly
shorter, and in the abdomen.

Hab. — Western Au-stralia: Geraldton (A. M. Lea).

A sub-oblong species, not very densely but almost evenly clothed on the upper
surface. The third, fourth, and fifth joints of the antennae, and the lower parts
of the fii-st and second are reddish, the others being blackish ; the red of the clypeus
varies in extent and intensity; the sides of the three or four basal segments of
abdomen and the tip of the pygidium are usually, but not always, reddisli (the
variation is not sexual) ; the elytral epipleurae are of a rather bright red on some
specimens, obscure on others; the red of the tibiae sometimes extends to the tips
of the femora. The distance between the eyes is about equal to the width of the
clypeus on the male, rather more on the female. F)-om above the hind angles of
the prothorax appear to be acute, but from tlie sides they are seen to be rectangu-
lar; the sides are not evenly strigose, the punctures there being dense and fre-
quently confluent, but as tlie derm is partially concealed by the cloth-
ing, the surface at first glance appears c|uite conspicuously strigose.
On the apical segment of the abdomen ol' the male there is a vague
depression, but on the female this is increased to a large round fovea,
In general apjiearance it is fairly close to D. puhicollin but is somewhat narrower
and the eh'tra are not glabrous; from I), rji/nmrjptenis, to which it is closer in
shape, it differs markedly in the finer sculpture of both ]irothorax and elytra, as
well as in the latter being clothed; D. intonstis is much smaller and more roundtd;
T). irhitei is larger, more rounded, and with the fliiei' sculpture different. The

392 DESCRIPTIONS OF XEW SPECIES OF AUSTRALIAX COLEOPIKRA,

antennae are somewhat longer than is usual, but the joints of the club are not
sufficiently long and loose to warrant the species being referred to Elaphod-es.

DiTKOPiin's iiinvs, n.sp.

d". — Coppery-bronze: elytiii llavdus. slioulders, base, and suture infuscated.
six basal joints of antennae (except upper surface of first), knees and trochanters
reddish, rest of antennae and of legs infuscated or black. Head, protliorax, under
surface and legs with white puljeseenee.

Head large and wide, obliquely flattened Ijetween eyes, shagxeened and finely
punctate; dypeus large, rounded in front, less shagreened and with stronger punc-
tures than between eyes ; labrum wide and feebly bilobed ; mandibles large and
strongly curved. Eyes prominent and widely separated. Protliorax about twice
as wide as the median length, base not mucli wider than apex; with small and
sparse punctures on middle, becoming more numerous, but not crowded, on sides.
Elytra slightly longer than the basal width, sides moderately naiTowed posteriorly:
with rows of small but distinct punctures, on the sides set in distinct striae ; inter-
stices subopaque or very inconspicuously sliagreened . Front legs much longer
than the othei-s. Leng-th, 4 — i.25 mm.

ffab.— New South Wales: Moree (W. W. Froggatt's 107 L).

A remarkably distinct species, with mandibles suggestive of those of the male
of Elaphodes vidpiiiiis, although the antennae are of normal length; the eyes are
unusually wide apart, and the eanthus of each is rather feeble; the great lengtli
of the front legs is due partly to the tarsi, but mostly to the tibiae, the latter being
at least half as long again as the others. I know of no closely allied species, al-
though the colour of the elytra is at first suggestive of D. />(.<<■/« his.- on the male of
D. mandibidaris the jaws, although very powerful, are of different shape, the eyes
are closer together (although widely separated) with the eanthus larger, and the
prothorax entirely glabrous.

DiTROPirns r.iMACULATrs, n.sp.

d". — Black; muzzle. Ijasal hall' of antennae, palpi, a large spot on each elytron,
and parts of front legs fiavous or reddish-flavous. Head, under surface and legs
with sparse, whitish jiubescenee.

Head with rather small and dense but sharply defined punctures; median line
feel)ly defined. Eyes moderately separated, tlu- distance between them about equal
to the length of two basal joints of antennae. Prothorax not quite twice as wide
as the median length, base almost twice as wide as apex; punctures about as large
as on head, but not ([uite as dense. Elytra slightly narrowed posteriorly; with
rows of rather small but distinct suboblong (lunctures, becoming larger and set in
strong striae on tlie sides, interstices with minute puiu-tures. Legs rather short.
Length. 2.G nmi.

Hah. — Queensland: Dalby (Mre. F. H. Hobler), unique.

The non-metallic upper surface, with two large red spots on the elytra, ren<ler
this a very distinct species, to which I know no closely allied one; each spot is
tear-shaped, and extends from the middle of the disc (where it is narrowest)
almost to the inner apical augle, where it occupies about two-thirds of tiie width;
the red of the nuiz/.le extends to slightly beyond the ocular canthi. the front
femora are almost entirely red. the under surface and apex of the front tibiae

BY ARTHLR M. LEA. 393

and the tips of the others are also more or less reddish. The median length of
the prothorax is slightly more than the apical width.

DiTROPIDUS LATICOLLI.S, n.Sp.

?. — Black; labiiiui, basal lialf of antennae (the club infuscated) and palpi rather
obscurely tlavous; elytra with sides and apex widely tiavous, elsewhere infuscated;
leg's in parts obscurely diluted with red. Under surface and legs slightly pubescent.

Head shagreened and with dense, fine, aciculate punctures, more distinct on
clypeus than elsewhere. Eyes rather widely separated. Antennae short. Pro-
thorax more than twice as wide as the median length, apex scarcely half the width
of base; shagreened and with dense, tine, aciculate punctures, becoming crowded
in front angles. Elytra scarcely as long as wide, sides moderately rounded; with
rows of distinct but not very large punctures, becoming larger and set in deep
striae on the sides ; interstices with dense and very fine punctures, or feebly
shagi'eened. Abdomen with a large, round, deep, apical fovea. Length, 2.75^
3 mm.

Rah. — Queensland: Duaringa (G. Barnard).

A curious round species of which I know no close ally. On two speci-
mens the elytra have the sides widely tlavous, from the base to and across the
apex (but there is a slight infuscation on the sides above the abdomen), thus
bounding on three sides a large, subc^uadrate, deeply infuscated patch; on a third
specimen the infuscation is extended so that the tlavous parts (which are consider-
ably reduced in intensity) are confined to the vicinity of the shoulders and apices;
on the third specimen the median line of the head is very distinct, on the others it
is feeble. The distance- between the eyes at their nearest is about eciual to the
length of the three basal joints of the antennae, but it would be less in the male.
The pronotum has a vague bronzy gloss, but it could hardly be regarded as me-
tallic; from some directions it appears to be very finely pubescent, but under a
compound power it is seen to be quite glabrous ; the hind angles from above ap-
pear to be quite sharply acute, but from the sides they are seen to be rectangular;
the notch of the scutellar lobe is very feeble. The intercoxal process of the pros-
ternum is almost twice as wide as long, truncated in front, and feebly incurved
behind .

DiTROPIDUS IMPCXCTICOLLIS, n.sp.

?. — Black; lalirum, basal half of antennae (the club infuscated), pa]];.i, ab-
domen, legs, and a variable amount of elytra tlavous. Under surface and legs
vei-y feebly pubescent.

Head shagreened and subopaque; median line feeble. Eyes widely separated.
Prothorax about thrice as wide as the median length, sides stiiongly narrowed to
apex; impunctate. Elytra about one fifth longer than wide, sides moderately
rounded : with rows of rather small but distinct punctures, on the sides set in dis-
tinct striae. Abdomen with a large, round, deep, apical fovea. Length, 1.75 — 2
mm.

Tlab. — Western Australia: Karridale (A. M. Lea).

A minute species without punctures on tlie prothorax, even on the sides.
The hind end of the prosternal process is almost truncated, but as the scutellar
lobe is notched, the scutellum minute, and club five-jointed the species was re-
ferred to Ditropidiis without hesitation. Of the two specimens under examina-

394 DESCRIPTIONS OF XtW .SFECIES OF AUSTRALIAN COLF.OPTERA.

tiun the larfTcr one has the elytra Havous, except for a narrow Ijla.-k hiusal e.ly'mg,
and a short infuseation of the suture at the base; but the smaller one has about
halt' of the elytra l)lack or infuscateil, tlie dark part not sharply defined on its
edges, but extending from each shoulder to the suture beyond the middle, so that
the sides and apex are widely flavous.

DlTliOl'IUrS IIETALLICUS, n . sp .

^_ Coppery, prothurax sometimes with a greenish gloss; labruiu, basal half

of antennae (the club infuscated), tips of elytra, abdomen (except part of base),
legs (the claws infuscated) reddish-llavous. Head, under surface and legs
sparsely pubescent.

Head with crowded and more or less obliquely confluent punctures; median
line rather shallow. Eyes widely separated. Prothorax at apex abimt as wide
as the median length, sides increasing in width to base; with dense and rather
sti'ong punctures, the sides conspicuously strigose. Elytra oblong; with rows of
rather large punctures, at the sides set in rather deep striae. Length [S, V),
2—2.5 mm.

?. — Differs in being somewhat more robust, eyes more widely separated, pro-
thorax and legs slightly shorter, and abdomen larger, with a large, round, deep,
apical fovea.

//a6.— Tasmania: Sheffield (il. 11. D. Griffith's No. 1204).

The prosternum is usually coppery, the niesosternum and metasternuiu bronzy ;
the dark part of the abdomen is sometimes semicircular, and almost confined to the
intercoxal process; the pygidium is entirely pale. The median line of the head is
rather shallow, but is very conspicuous on account of the converging punctures;
the front legs of the male are no longer than the hind ones. The description of
D. apiciflavus (from "Nouvelle Hollande") agTees in most respects with this
species, except that of the prothorax, which is noted as "parce et subtiliter pune-
tulato, lateraliter substrigoso." Specimens from New South Wales (Gosford,
Sydney, and .Jenolan) agree in all respects with its description (except that some
of them are larger) ; the present species differs from these in having the prothorax
with dense, and, for the genus rather strong punctures, with the sides densely
strigose; it has also larger elytral jnuictures, is narrower and more cojipery (alino.-t
golden) than brassy. It is the only species now known from Tasmania, witii the
elytra tipped with red, althougii the red is not always snari)iy limited; I). rir'uViae-
neus has the prothorax wider and very ilifiVicntly sculptured.

DiTROPIDUS INSIGNIS, n . sp .

5.- — Deep violet-blue, labrum. i>alpi and p.iii nl' antennae re(l. Tender surface
and legs with sparse pubescence.

Head with crowded and sharjdy ilcHncd ]iiuictur<'s. lic'cuiiiiug i-iigosc on
clyi)eus, median line shallow and irregular. Kyes widely separated. I'mllnirar
at base scarcely twice as wide as tiie median length, sides strongly rounded; with
crowded, longitudinally confluent punctures, excejit on scutellav lobe, where they
are separately impressed. Eli/tra briefly suboblong; with rows of not very large
but deep punctures, becoming larger and set in fairly deep striae on the sides;
interstices with sparse punctures, except posteriorly, where they are moderately
dense and rugose. Under surface with rather ilense and coarse punctures; ab-
domen with a large, round deep apical fovea. Length, 4.25 mm.

BY ARTHUR M. LEA. 395

Hub. — Western Australia: jMullewa (Miss J. V. May), imif|ue.

A beautiful deep-blue speeies, very distinct from all others known to me by
the sculpture of the prothi>rax; at first ,y'lanee this apjiears to be densely longi-
tudinally strig'ose, but it is really densely punctate, the punctures everywhere
continent except on a small part of the scutellar lobe. The elytra are of the
same shade of colour as the prothorax, but owing to their smoother sui'face they
appear brightei-; the antennae are rather long for the genus, and the second-fourth
joints are i)artly or entirely red, the others being more or less deeply infu.scated.
The pygidiuni is glal)rous, and its jninctures are (|uite as sharply defined as those-
on the head.

DiTnoHinrs py(;tiiialis, n.sj).

(f. — Black; tiiree basal joints of antennae obscurely reddish. Under surface
and leg's with sparse pubescence.

Head with dense punctures at base and on clypeus; median line wide, shallow,^
and with smaller and sparser jnmctures than on the adjacent surface. Eyes
moderately separated. Pmthora.v at base not twice as wide as the median length,
sides strongly rounded; with sparse and minute punctures, the front angles finely
strigose. Eli/tra briefly suboblong, with rows of not very large punctures, at the
sides set in deep stria; interstices faintly wrinkled. Length (c?, ?), 2.6 — 3 mm.

2. — Differs in being .slightly more robust, prothorax shorter, legs somewhat
shorter, and in the abdomen .

Hab. — New South Wales: Sydney (A. M. Lea).

There is a single specimen of each sex before me ; on the male the elytra have
a slight bluish or bluish-green gloss, but this is absent from the female; the dis-
tance between the eyes of the male is about equal to the length of the three basal
joints of antennae, in the female of the five basal joints; on the male the front
angles of the prothorax are densely and finely strigose, but the strigae are so very
fine that the surface at first appears to be slightly shagreened, on the female they
almost reach the vanishing- point; the hind angles from above appear to be acute,
and to slightly embrace the shoulders, but they are really almost rectangular; tlie
punctures on the pygidium are dense and subreticulate.

DlTROPIDUS CARIN.WICEP8, U . Sp .

2. — Blue; labruni, palpi, and second-sixth joints of antennae red. Under
surface and legs with sparse,- inconspicuous pubescence.

Head large; with rather small but sliarjily defined punctures, becoming crowd-
ed and irregular in front ; median line well-defined ; clypeal suture marked by a
bisinuate carina. Eyes very widely separated. Prothorax about twice as wide
as the median length, sides strongly rounded, lateral gutters well-defined; punctures
small but sharply defined. Elytra sub-oblong; with rows of fairly large punc-
tures, on the sides set in deep striae; interstices witk sparse and minute punctures.
Abdomen with a large, round, deep, apical fovea. Length. 4.5 mm.

Hah. — New South Wales: Forest Reefs (A. M. Lea), unique.

The side of each elytron is gently incurved between the base and the sudden
deflection before the middle, the dilated part being unusually deep, and the sub-
lateral interstice cun'ing around on to it; the clypeus has two small transversely-
oval, impunctate areolets, each bounded behind by a narrow carina, and in front
by a more obtuse elevation (it is probably vei-y different in the male) ; these

396 DESCRII'TIO.NS OF NEW SPKCIE.S OF AVSTRALIAX COLEOPTERA,

characters at once distinguish the species from B. armatus, D. vigilans, D. uhdoiii-
inalis and the blue variety of D. concalor; from the variety, it is also distinguished
by its red labruin, longer elytra, different inter-ocular space, non-strigose sides of
protliorax, and punctures of metasternum notably coareer and sjjarser towards the
sides. In D. coelestis the sides of the elytra are almost the same, but the punc-
tures of the head and prothorax are considerably larger and denser, and the head
has a circular inter-ocular fovea. The head and parts of the under surface have
a greenish gloss, the elj-tra a purplish one; the tip of the abdomen and middle of
the metasternum are obscurely diluted with red, but from most directions the red
is invisible, parts of the co.xae are also obscurely reddi.sh. The prothoracic punc-
tures, although small, are sharply defined, on the sides they are slightly elongated,
but not at all confluent.

DiTROPIDUS StTBARJIATU.S, n . Sp .

c?. — Bronzy, labrum, basal half of antennae, palpi, and under surface of front
femora and tibiae reddish. Head, under surface antl legs with white pubescence.

Head with rather distant punctures; median line lightly impressed; clypeus
subtuberculate at each end. Eyes rather close together. Prothorax at base not
twice as wide as the median lengfh, sides strongly narrowed to apex ; with small
but sharply defined punctures in middle, becoming larger and crowded on sides.
Elytra not much longer than basal width, sides rather strongly narrowed pos-
teriorly; with rows of rather large punctures, interstices with dense but faint
punctui'es (almost shagreened) . Front legs slightly longer than hind ones.
Length, 2.75 mm.

Hah. — Western Australia: Swan River (A. "Si. Lea). uni(|ue.

This species has been placed amongst those having dark legs, as, although the
under surface of the front ones is reddish, their upper surface is blackish; the
elytra have a vag-ue greenish gloss. The distance between the eyes is hardly more
than the length of the basal joint of antennae; the rows of punctures on the
elytra, even the short subsutural ones, are set in shallow striae; as a result the
interstices are gently separately convex: on the sides, however, the striae are
much deeper, and the interstices are acutely costate; although the type is a male,
the third abdominal segment is distinct across the middle. The sides of the clypeus
denote an approach to some of the armed species, as they are slightly elevated and
shining, with the intervening space depressed : this character at once distinguishes
the species from D. cognatus, D. quadratipeiinis. D. indisti)tcti(.<i, D. conge)! it iis
and others, to which at first glance it seems close; in general appearance it is like
a small D. concolor, but the jaws and clypeus are very different .

DiTROPIDUS LOBICOLLIS, U.Sp.

(?. — Black, upper surface with a slight bronzy gloss, labrum and basal half of
antennae (upper surface of first joint infuscated) reddish. Head, under surface,
pygidium and legs with white pubescence.

Head with rather small, dense, partially concealed punctures; median line
vague. Eyes as far apart as the length of two basal joints of antennae. Pro-
thorax at base almost twice as wide as the median length, sides strongly rounded,
with small and sharply defined but not crowded punctures in middle, becoming
larger and denser on sides. Ehitra short; with rows of not very large punctures,
becoming larger and set in deep striae on the sides; interstices with fnirly dense

BY ARTHUR il. LEA. 397

but very minute ijuueturos. Front legs sliohtly longer than hind ones. Length,
3.25 mm.

Hab. — Queensland: Brisbane (A. J. Coates), unique.

The three apical joints of the club are missing from the type, but the two
basal ones are of normal appearance, the scutellar lobe is acute, slightly elevated
and not notched. The type at first looks like a small female of D. concolor, but
has very different punctures and jaws; the prothorax is less narrowed in front
than D. subannatus, the eyes are slightly more distant, and the dypeus is not
subdentate on the sides; the protlioraci<' inuictures differ, lioth on the middle and
sides, from those of D. puncticnllis and tlie labrum is reddish, etc.; the elytra are
not shagreened as in D. costatus.

DlTROPIDUS CAERULEUS, U . Sp .

c?. — Deejj blue, under surface almost black, front of elypeus, labrum and
basal half of antennae (upper surface of basal joint infuscated) reddish. Under
sui'face and legs sparsely clothed, head almost glabrous.

Head with dense, sharply defined punctures. Eyes widely separated. Pro-
thorax mure tlian twice as wide as the median length, sides strongly rounde<l ;
with fairly dense and rather small, but sharply defined punctures, becoming
slightly smaller on sides. Elytra briefly suboblong, sides gently narrowed pos-
terioi'ly; with rows of small punctures, becoming slightly larger and set in dis-
tinct striae on the sides; interstices faintly wrinkled, and with very small punc-
tures. Front legs slightly longer than hind ones. Length (d', S), 2.75 — 3 mm.

?. — Differs in being more robust, eyes slightly more apart, elytra less nar-
rowed posteriorly, front legs no longer than liind ones, and abdomen with a large,
round, deep, apical fovea.

Hab. — Western Australia: Rottnest Island and Vasse River; New South
Wales: Sydney (A. M. Lea).

A beautiful, deep blue species, with unusually small seriate punctures on the
elytra; the head occasionally has a slight greenisli or coppery-green gloss, and two
specimens have the sides of the elytra, from some directions, distinctly coppery,
occasionally the upper surface is almost purple; the tips of the tibiae and the
extreme base of the front femora are sometimes reddish. It is more conspicu-
ously blue than D. tropicus, eyes (sex for sex) more widely separated, protlioracie
imnctures larger, seriate ones of elytra much smaller and the interstices faintly
wrinkled; structurally it is close to D. ch/pealis, which also has the elypeus red.
t)ut tlie colour and punctures are different; it has the sharply defined inter-ocular
punctures of D. frontalis, D. tnelasomus, D. seminulum and D. sobrinus, but differs
from all of these in being shorter and broader, prothorax with sides more strongly
narrowed in front, and punctures denser and stronger. The median line of the
bead is very feeble at the base, and on some specimens is rejiresented by a sliallow,
almost circular depression in the middle, but from some specimens it is altogether
absent .

DlTROPIDUS CORIAC'EUS, U . Sp .

c?.— Black, with a slight bronzy gloss, basal half of antennae obscurely red-
dish. Glabrous. Upper surface shagreened.

Head with very minute punctures, median line very feeble. Eyes rather
widely separated. Prothnra.v about thrice as wide as the median lena-fh, sides

398 DESCKIPTIOXS OF XEW SPECIES OF AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA,

Strongly rounded; punctures very minute. Elytra short, sides beyond middle
stronjilv rounded. Length, 1.2 — 1.3 mm.

2.— Differs in the usual particulars of eyes, legs and abdomen.

//a^._-\Vestei-n Australia: Geraldton and Swan River (A. M. Lea). Dirk
Hart og Island (Dr. Michaelsen).

In general appearance very near punctulum, but slightly narrower and elytra
shagreened, on that species the head and prothorax. but not the elytra, are shag-
reened. the shagreening is not so pronounced as that of the head and prothorax,
but is (]uite distinct ; from some directions vague lines reiiresenting series of punc-
tures may be seen on the discal parts, and even the lateral striae are very feeble,
on several specimens only the marginal stria on each side is present: an incon-
spicuous depression traverses the base of the seutellar lobe; the median line of
the metasternum is diliited at the base so as to form a fairly large but shallow
fovea .

DlTROPIDUS TRAXQUILLUS, n . sp .

d".— Black, labium, basal half of antennae (club infuscated) palpi and parts
of legs more or less reddish or flavous. Glabrous.

Head evenly convex; with small, but rather sharp punctures; median line
scarcely traceable. Eyes rather widely separated. Prothorax more than twice
as wide as the median length, sides strongly rounded; with rather dense and small,
))ut sharply defined punctures. Elytra subquadrate; with series of small punc-
tures, on the sides set in deep striae. Length (c?, ?), 1.75 — 2 mm.

9. — Differs in the usual particulars of eyes, legs and abdomen..

Ilah.—'tiew South Wales: Sydney and Como (A. M. Lea).

Slightly larger and more compact tlian D. ragans, and elytral jninctures almost
the same, but prothoracic punctures slightly smaller, and all parts of the upper
surface shining and nowhere shagreened or opaque ; the prothoracic punctures are
much smaller than on D. rotuncliformi.-i, and the legs are paler. There are dense
and sharply defiiied punctures on almost the whole of the under surface. The
knees, tarsi, and hind femora are usually d.Trker than the rest of the legs, some-
times the hind femora are only partly dark, occasionally the tibiae are scarcely
paler than the tarsi.

DiTROPIDUS RUFISr.\NUS, H.Sp.

d". — Black; clypeus, labrum, most of inter-ocular space, l)asal half of an-
tennae (the club infuscated) palpi, front legs (knees infuscated), middle and hind
tarsi, more or less red. Under surface and legs with \-erv sparse pubescence.

Head subopaque; with small and fairly dense punctures; median line liglitly
impressed. Eyes rather widely separated, rrothora.r about twice as wide a.s the
median length; with very small but sharply defined punctures. Elytra briefly
suboblong, with rows of rather large punctures, becoming much smaller posteriorly,
and set in deep striae on the sides. Fmnl h'l/s slightly longer than hind ones.
Length (c?, $), 2—2.2.5 mm.

$. — Differs in being more rol)ust, eyes more apart, inter-ocular space, clypeus
and front femora black, seriate punctures of -elytra smaller, front legs no longer
than hind ones, and abdomen larger, more conve.x, and with a large, ajiical fovea.

Wa!*.— South Australia: Mount Lofty (A. M. Lea).

In some respects fairly close to the description of D. farialif, but middle (ibiae
dark, on the head of the female only the labrum is pale, the sides of the metas-

BY ARTHUR JI. LEA. 399

ternum are not pale, and five joints of the antennae are dark; tlie elothing and
[junctures also do not agree with the description. Only one specimen of each sex
was obtained, and it is probable that the colours of the legs are variable.

DiTROPIDUS SCULPTIPENNIS, n . sp .

c?. — Black; muzzle, basal half of antennae, pal])i, and parts of leg's more or
less flavous. Under surface and legs very feebly pubescent.

Head opaque and witli small punctures ; median line lightly impressed . Eyes
large and close togetlier, the distance between them hardly more than half the
length of the basal joint of antennae. Protliorajc more than twice as wide a^ the
median length, sides strongly rounded ; with rather small but sharply defined
punctures in middle, becoming larger and crowded on sides. Elytra short; with
rows of rather large ])unctures, on the sides and apical half in distinct striae.
Abdomen with a vague apical depression. Front Jeg.-f slightly longer than hind
ones . Length, 2 . 1 mm .

Hah. — Western Australia: Geraldton (A. ]\I. Lea), unique.

Approaching the D. jacohyi gi'oup, but the punctures on the medio-basal half
of the elytra, although in quite distinct rows, are not in deep striae, on the sides
the interstices between the striae are carinated . The tai-si, trochanters, front
tibiae and base <if fnmt femora are paler than the other parts of the legs, whicii
are more or less deeply infuscated ; the pygidiuin is of a deep black, and the elytra
in its vicinity seem dark brown, although from above they seem to be jiolished
black throughout. Frorii above the soutellar lobe seems to be entire, but from
behind it is seen to be slightly notclied .

DiTROPIDUS SUBSUTURALIS, U . Sp .

, S. — Black, upper surface with a vague metallic gloss; labrum, basal half of
antennae, paljii, tarsi, front leg's (knees excepted) and parts of middle and of
hind tibiae more or less flavous. Glabrous.

Head shagreened and with minute punctures; median line lightly impressed.
Eyes moderately separated, their distance apart slightly more than the length of
basal joint of antennae. Prnthora.r about thrice as wide as the median leng'th,
sides strongly rounded, scutellar lobe shorter than usual; punctures very small.
Elytra short, rather strongly narrowed ixisteriorly ; rather strongly striated, the
striae becoming smaller towards suture, and towards the base near the suture
represented by rows of punctures. Length, 1.75 mm.

Hab. — New South Wales: Tweed River (A. M. Lea), unique.

The elytral striae are much as in the preceding species, but their contained
punctures are much smaller, the eyes are also more apart, so that the divergence
from the D. jacohyi type is still more apparent; at fir.st glance the species seems
close to D. hrevicollis and B. vicarius, but the striae occupy the whole of the apical
half of the elytra, instead of being confined to the sides. The basal segment of
the abdomen, and the whole of the metasternum, have dense and small, but shar]dy
defined punctures.

DiTROPIDUS BRUNNEIPENXIS, H . Sp .

d". — Black, in places with a slight metallic gloss, but head distinctly copi>ery;
elytra dark browi, becoming paler at ape.x and sides, the suture narrowly black;
labrum, basal half of antennae (club infuscated) and leg's more or less flavous.
Glabrous .

400 DESCRIPTIOKS OF NEW SPECIES OP AUSTRALIAN COLEOPTERA,

Head sbagreeneil but with fairly tlistinet punctures; median line taint and
becoming feebly foveate between eyes. Eyes moderately separated, the distance
between them abdut eijual to the length of three l)asal joints of antennae. Pro-
thorax more than thrice as wide as the median lenglh. sides strongly rounded,
median lobe unusually short ; punctures very small but from some directions rather
sharply defined. Elytra about as long as the basal width, apical half rather
strongly rounded ; with series of punctures of moderate size, set in deep striae on
the sides, and lighter ones posteriorly. Abilom^ii with a shallow apical depres-
sion. Front legs slightly longer than hind ones. Length (S,2). 1.5 — 1.75 mm.

?. — Differs in having eyes more apart, front legs no longer than the hind
ones, and abdomen with a large apical fovea.

jjah. — Western Australia: Swan River and Karridale (A. M. Lea).

A short rounded species, with elytra! striation approaching the species of the
D. jacobyi group, but the striae on the medio-basal jiortion giving place to rows
of punctures, the eyes are also more ajjart than in any species of that group. The
intercoxal. process of the mesosternum is larger than usual, and with punctures
much as on the prosternal process.

Elaphode.s RHIZOmOIDES. n.sp.

5. Black, elytra with a purjilish gloss; lalirum. antennae (club more or less

infuscated), palpi, abdomen, and parts of coxae and of tarsi reddish-Havous.
Moderately densely clothed with somewhat gdldcn imbescence. becoming shorter
and sparser on under surface and legs.

Head with dense and sharply defined punctures; median line fairly distinct.
Prothorax more than twice as wide as the median leng-th, sides strongly narrowed
in front; punctures about the size of those on head, but less crowded. Elytra
rather short; punctures larger and less crowded (although still fairly dense) than
on prothorax, only the marginal stria on each side distinct. Abdomen with a very
large apical fovea. Length, 3.25 mm.

Hob. — New South Wales: Dalmorton. in March (A. M. Lea). unif|ue.

The pubescent body and fairly long club seem to indicate that this species is a
member of Elaphodes rather than of Ditnipidits. to which in consequence it has
been referred. At a glance it resembles Rhisobius ve>itralis, of the CoccineUidae.

Elaphodes haemorrhoidalis, n.sp.

?. — Black; muzzle (including a subtriangular space to between the eyes),
antennae (club infuscated). tips of elytra, abdomen and legs red. With moder-
ately dense and comparatively long white ]iubescence, becoming sparser and
shorter on under surface and legs.

Head shagreened and with dense punctures, many of which are obliquely
confluent; median line feeble. Prothorax more than twice as wide as the median
length, sides strongly rounded: iiunctures dense and sharply defined. Elytra ob-
long; with rows of fairly large iiunctures. on the sides set in striae; interstices
each with a row of distinct ])nncturcs. Jhilininii with a large apical fovea.
Length, 3.75 — 4 mm.

Hab. — Tasmania: Hobart (A. M. Lea).

Structurally and in appearance like the jireceding species (and as with that
species it might almost as well have been referred to Ditropidiis). but clotiiing
not i|uite tlie same, legs and tips of elytra icd. and punctures of dytra larger and

BY ARTHUR M. LEA. 401

seriately arransed. those on the interstices are almost as large as those in the
regular rows, although not so closely placed, as a result the series appear to be
very numerous .

Elaphodes halticoides, n.sp.

c?. — Head and prothorax reddish with a coppery gloss; muzzle, basal joints
of antennae (the others blackish) presternum, mesosternum, part of abdomen and
legs reddish-flavous, elytra pale flavous (almost ivory-white), with darker mark-
ings and punctures, extreme base, scutellum, raetasternum, and part of abdomen
black or blackish. Moderately clothed with short, wliitish pubescence, Init elytra
glabrous .

7/earf with crowded punctures; median line feeble. Prothnras more than
twice as wide as the median length; witli dense Init not very large punctures,
becoming crowded on sides; with remnants of an impunctate median line; scutellar
lobe scarcely visibly notched. Elytra suboblong; with rows of rather large punc-
tures, in distinct striae throughout; interstices with very sparse punctures. Front
legs slightly longer than hind ones. Length {S, 2), 2.25 — 2.5 mm.

?. — Differs in being larger and more robust, under surface entirely pale, and
in the usual particulars of the eyes, leg's and abdomen.

Hab. — Western Australia: Bridgetown (A. M. Lea).

As the antennal club is but five-jointed this species cannot be referred to
PolijacliHS : as the prothorax is clothed and the joints of the club rather lax 1 have
tlierefore referred it to Elaphodef< ; at first glance it appears to belong to the
Halticides, the resemblance to some of the ])ale sjiecies of Plectroscelis and to some
small ones of Arsipoda being quite striking. The markings on the elytra are
somewhat the colour of the prothorax, except that in some lights they have a
purplish gloss; they are not exactly the same on both specimens; on the male on
the left elytron theV form an irregular j (reversed on the right) and a spot on
the shoulder, on the female they are more diffused and connected together: the
punctures at first appear to be infuscated, but are really slightly metallic. On
the male the eyes are larger than on the female, and the distance between them is
slightly less than the width of one, on the female their distance apart is more than
the w-idth of one.

COENOBIUS LONGlrOKXIS, U.Sp.

d". — Black ; nnizzle, basal joints of antennae and parts of legs obscurely paler.
Under surface and legs scarcely visibly pubescent.

Head with a few large punctures in front. Eyes almost touching. Antennae
considerably longer than usual in genus. Prntliora.r not twice as wide as the
median length, sides strongly narrowed in front, with a fairly deep oblirjue impres-
sion on each side about the basal third; without punctures except on the margins.
Eliitra short ; with rows of fairly larg'e punctures, becoming larger posteriorly
and on the sides, and on the latter set in dee)) striae. Front legs slightly longer
than hind ones. Length, 2 mm.

Hah. — Queensland: Cairns (Dr. E. W. Ferguson), unique.

The eyes are as close together as on C. parvnniger, but the antennae are de-
cidedly longer and thicker, and the oblique impressions on the prothorax are fairly
deep and distinctive: these characters also distinguish the species from C. incon-
stans. The antennae, when at rest, pass the base of the abdomen, the first joint
is slightly longer tlian the second and tliird cnmljined. the sixth-eleventli arc sub-

402 DESCRiPTioxs or xew .species of avstraeiax cw.eoptera,

equal, ami eaoli is iibout twice the lengtli ami twice tlie widtli ut tlie fifth. Tiie
elytra have a vague bluish gloss.

COENOBIUS SPISSUS, 11. sp.

S. — Black 111- hhickish; imizzle, five l>asal joints of antennae and legs (parts
of tarsi infuscatcd I more (jr less Mavous. TiKler surface and legs scarcely visil)ly
pubescent .

Ileiul with rather coarse punctures. Eyes large and close together. An-
tennae moderately long. Protliorux at apex scarcely as wide as the median length,
a distinct oblique or slightly curved impression on each side of the base, in front
of which the surface is rather strongly gibbous; with rather coai-se punctures
throughout, dense in the middle, crowded on the sides. Elytra slightly longer
than wide; with rows of large punctures, in distinct striae througiiout. Length
{3, ?), 1.75—2 mm.

?. — Diffei-s in being more robust, most of prothorax, elytra and under surface
pale, eyes more apart, antennpe and legs smaller, and abdomen with a large apical
fovea .

Hab.—y.v\y S(mth Wales: Sydney (A. M. Lea).

A small species very variable in its colours, but readily liistinguishcd from all
others of the genus by its dense and coarse jirothoracic ])unctures, and by the rows
of elytral punctures all being in distinct striae, of which the lateral ones, however,
are deeper than the others. There are seven males before me and six females;
of these the males scarcely differ in colour, except that the tip of tlie abdomen is
reddish on some specimens, but not on others; but no two females are exactly
alike, one is not much i)aler than the nudes, hut they usually have the prothorax
dull red, except for a narrow black basal margin, and elytra tiavous with the suture
and a variable extent of the base (on one specimen a narrow black basal margin
only) l)lack, the metastermim and middle (transversely) jiarts of abdomen are
more or less deeply infuscated, the rest of the under surface being flavous. On
most of the specimens the second joint of antennae is distinctly darker than the
first and third.

CoEXOBius iN.sui,iroLA, n.sp.

iS . — Black with a metallic gloss, more distinct on head and inothorax than
elsewhere; elytra piceous-brown, the tiyis paler, antennae (a variable number of
joints of the club infuscated) and leg's (femora more or less deeply infuscated) of
a rather dingy flavous or testaceous. Under surface and legs minutely pul)escent.

Head with rather dense and sharply defined punctures. Eyes large and
close together. Protluirax about twice as wide as the median length, sides strongly
narrowed to apex, with a shallow oblique impression on each side directed to the
middle of the scutellar lol)c; ]iunitures dense and sharply defined, Init not very
large in middle, becoming coarse and crowded on sides. Elijlra briefly sub-
oblong; with rows of distinct ininctures in ratliei- narrow striae, Init on the sides
striae deeper and wider. Length (c?, 2). 12 — 2.?> mm.

?. — Differs in being larger and more rolmst. nuuh paler, eyes more apart
(the distance between them almost c(|ual to the length of the liasal joint of an-
tennae), punctures smaller, antennae and h'gs shorter and abdomen more convex
and witji a large a|>ical fovea.

//f(/(.— Western Australia: I'clsart Island (A. M. Lea).

BV AHTIIUR M. LEA. 403

As the antennae have a six-.jointetl ihib. the eyes are close together, and the
scutellar lobe not notched I have referred this speeies to Coenobius, despite the
shape of its prosternal ]irocess: its posterior end is outcurved inetead of slightly
incurved to tlie middle. From the preceding species (wliosie prosternal ))rocess is
normal) it differs in being metallic, in having the prothorax less gibl)ous in front,
with much smaller punctures, although the discal ones are sharply detined, and
elytral punctures distinctly narrower than the interstices instead of wider, as on
at Ica.st the males of that species. Six males before me are practically identical
in colours except tliat on two of them the median intei-stice on each elytron is
slightly paler than the adjacent ones; four females have the elytra (except the
shoulders and extreme l)ase) and legs entirely pale, and the prosternum. mesos-
ternum and two basal segments of abdomen obscurely reddish ; two of them also
have parts of the protliorax and of the muzzle obscurely reddish.

404'

ORDINARY MONTHLY MEETING.
29th Septembeh, 1920.
Mr. .). J. Fletclier. M.A.. B.Sc, President, in the Chair.

Mr. Herbert Charles Furst, Linwood Avenue, Killara, an<l Dr. Edwix Tueo-
PHILUS •Je.s.se Ick-Hewins, Dimedoo, were elected Ordinary jlembers of tlie
Soeietj-.

The President made regTetful reference to the death of the Rev. \V. W.
Watts.

The Donations and Exchanges received since the previous Monthly .Meeting
(25th Aug'ust. 192IM, amounting to 6 Volumes, 89 Pai'ts or Nos.. 4 Bulletins, 2
Reports, and 1 Pamphlet, received from 3(i Societies and Institutions and one
private donor, were laid ujion the table.

NOTE.S AND EXHIBITS

-Miss Hyiies e.xhihited a very symmetrical concretion from Natal Downs Sta-
tion, about 90 miles inland from Charters Towel's, Q.

Mr. E. G. Jacobs exhibited specimens of Epacris piirpiirasceus showing
perfectly doubled flowers. The plant from which these specimens were collected is
growing naturally beside one or two plants showing single flowers only, on a
stony ridge at Kyde.

Mr. E. Cheel exhiliited two living plants of Erigeron, w-hich had been re-
garded as forms o^ one species, namely, E. linifolius, as recorded in these Pi'o-
ceeding's, xliii., 1918, p. 610, but which on investigation seem to be identical with
specimens in the National Herbarium labelled Canyza Naudinii Bonnet (BuU.
Soc. Bot. Fr., XXV., 1878, p. 208). Another specimen from the Ea-stern Pyrenees
labelled Canijza altissima Ch. Naud. et. U. Debx. seems to be scarcely distinguish-
able from C. Naudinii, but as the works describing these species are not available
in our libraries, the differences between the two species cannot be settled.

He also exhibited specimens of a wild strawlierry, Fragraria itidica Andr.,
from Summer Hill, which is also spreading rapidly on the Bellingen River in
Paspalum paddocks. Specimens from the latter place were lirought in for deter-
mination by Mr. D. Boland.

Mr. W. F. Blakely exhibited specimens from the National Herhariuin of a
supposed hybrid form of Boronia serrulata Sm., ^ b_ floribunda Sieb., and a
variety of B. serrulata, both from the Homsby district. The leaves of the hybrid
closely resemble tliose of B. serrulata, and are nearly all simple; some, however,
are binate. others tcrnate on the same branch. The inflorescence is axillary and
terminal, while the flowers are solitary and cymose, but do not vary essentially
from those of B. serrulata. As most of the im]iortant characters agree with
those of B. serrulata the evidence points to it being the seed bearer. This form
is almost identical with the one exhibited by Mr. J. H. Maiden, on behalf of
Mr. T. Steel (these Proceedings, 1906, p. 566), but differs from the specimen
exhibited by Mr. A. A. Hamilton (these Proceedings, 1915. p. 4191 in the
majority of the leaves being simple.

Boronia serrulata Sm. var., a virgate plant about 18 inches high; young
shoots minutely tomentose; leaves lanceolate, acute, slightly erenulate, 12 mm.
long, 3-4 mm. broad ; bracts, sepals and petals more acuminate than in the normal
B. serrulata Sm. It differs from B. serrulata Sm. in the narrow lanceolate leaves
and relatively smaller flowers. He also exhibited a white form of Bornuia flori-
bunda Sieb., which, as far as he could ascertain, had not been previously recorded.

Mr. C. Hedley gave a short account of the work of the Pan-Pacific Science
Congi'ess held at Hcmolulu in August.

405

THE GEOLOGY AND PETROLOGY OF THE GREAT SERPENTINE
BELT OF NEW SOUTH WALES.

Part IX. — The Geology, Palaeontology and Petrography of the

CURRABUBULA DISTRICT, WITH NOTES ON ADJACENT REGIONS.

By Professor W. N. Benson, B.A., D.Sc, F.G.S., W. S. Dun, and
W. R. Browne, B.Sc.

Section C. — Petrography.

By W. R. Browne, B.Sc, Lecturer and Demonstrator in Geology,
The University of Sydney.

(Plate XXV.)

Page.

Introduction 405

Extrusive Rocks 406

Intrusive Rouks ■ • 410

General Remarks 421

Comparison with other Carboniferous Areas in the State .. .. 422

Introduction.

The igne<ius rocks ot the Currabubula district are of interest, both on account
of the variety in type and in mode of occurrence which they present, and because
of the striking resemblance which many of them bear to the volcanic rocks of
Carboniferous age in other parts of the State, and particularly to the extensive
series which form so important a part of the Carboniferous area at Clarencetown,
Paterson. Seaham and elsewhere in tlie Hunter River basin, about 100 miles away
to the S.S.E. of Currabubula.

Igneous activity appears to have l)egun in this area during the Burindi epocli,
and was confined, so far as is at present known, to explosive outbursts : no out-
crops of massive volcanic rock have been found, but fine-grained tuffs occur at tlie
top of the Burindi Beds. The display of igneous activity, however, culminated
during the laying down of the Kuttung Series and continued apparently right
to the close of the Carboniferous period.

The chronological sequence of the igneous rocks can never be determined with
the same accuracy and definiteness with which it can be established in the more
southern areas, for the reason that the series is partly extrusive and partly in-
trusive, and so mutual relationships can often not be observed. This must also
render tlie precise stratigrapliical position of some of the rocks a matter of un-
certainty : for example, the great series of pyroxene andesite sills, whicli are so
important both physiographically and petrologically in the area, have been found
intrusive only into the Burindi Beds and the overlying "gi-its," so that their exact
time-relations to the conglomerates and glacial beds of the Kuttung Series cannot

406 GEOLOGY AND PETROLOGY OF THK GREAT SERPESTIXF. BELT OF X.S.W.,

be established, except iiulirt'ctly tliiougli tlie fact ot tlic Martin's Cieek type of
andesite (which presumably is closely connected with the pyroxene andesite) being
found at Werris Creek Gap among the conglomerates.

The earlier and more acid portions of the series appear to have been ejected
largely in fragmental form, and are now represented by the tuffs which occur so
abundantly at the base of the Kuttuug Series, and resemble very closely those
found in the Hunter \'aliey. This tendency of certain of the acid rocks to form
pyroclastic material has been noted and commented on by Flett (47) and othei-s.
It is exhibited in this State at the base of the Devonian at Taemas, near Vass,
and it appears as a constant feature of our Carboniferous vuleanicity. Probal)iy
it is in some way connected with the viscosity of the highly alkaline magmas.

At intervals during the deposition of the tuffs (which continued during most
of the Kuttung epoch) small Hows of basalt were poured out, and there were also
local eruptions of soda rhyolite and associated tuffs.

The most important and definite manifestation of volcanic activity took place
subsequent to the deposition of the Kuttung Series, when there were extensive
outpourings of l)aisalt, with tuffs and agglomerates, succeeded l)v wides]iread intru-
sions, and probably extrusions, of magma. Of these we have evidence in the sills
and dykes of dolerite. Iioridilende and pyroxene andesite. and. lastly, of trachytoid
keratophyres.

It js here assumed that the sills, dykes, and other intrusions which are found
so extensively about the district were closely connected if not actually synchronous
with the igneous activity of which tlie Warragundi volcano was one expression;
the field evidence, as well as the petrological study of the rocks, tends to .justify
this assumption.

The petrological examination of the rocks has been carried out on material,
the Inilk of which wa.s collected by Benson during the progress of the field-work,
and the field-relations as determined by Iiim have been accepted .

EXTRI'SIVK K0CK.S.

Tuffs of the Burindi Beds.

A comprehensive study of these lias not been nuide, but specimens have been
collected and examined from the railway cutting in Portion 34, about 1} miles
north-east of the railway bridge over Currabubula Creek. Here the mudstones
and tuff's have been invaded and indurated by a sill of glassy andesite, and an
interesting though complicated section is exposed.

The tuft' itself is an extremely hai'd, compact, siliceous-looking rock with a
short and subconchoidal fracture. Under the microscope it is seen to be a
keratophyric tuff, consisting of a microfelsitic or cryptocrystalline matrix thickly
set with angular chips of felspar. These are of pure all)ite and vary nuu'h in
size, the bulk of the fragments being very minute iiuleeil. while the largest are
not more than .5 mm. long. This felspar is a good deal kaolinized and the rock
as a whole is slightly stained with limonite. Quartz could not be detected with
certainty, and ferromagnesian minerals are absent. Tliere has l)een some silicifica-
tion, indicated by little aggregates of chalcedonic (luartz-granules. Just where
the andesite has invade<l it, the tuff giades into a type crowded with angular
fragments of a hard butf or cream-coloured porpliyritic rock. Tliese grade from
pieces about l.J inches in diameter down to the nunutest chips. It is evident, on
examination with the microscope, tliat the rock has undergone a cei-tain amount

1!Y W. X. BEXSOK, \V. S. DUX, AND \V. R. CROWXE. 407

4

of eoutact metamorpbism. Augiilar aggregates eompused of tiuy clialcedonic
quartz-granules are numerous, and the rock is crossed with veinlets of the same
material, while many of the rock-fragments included in the tuff have been devitri-
tied. Tliese fragments include examples of a trachytic rock, a.s well as the por-
pliyritic rock already mentioned. This latter proves to he keratophyre, the only
phenocrysts recog-nisable microscopically being albite ; a few aggregates of chlorite
and quartz may possibly represent original pyroxene. In the larger fragments
the glassy base has been completely kaolinized and is characterised throughout by
well-marked perlitic cracking with traces of devitrification : in the smaller frag-
ments tlie base has comidetely dexitritied into spongy-looking fels]}athic material
with a lower R.I. than Canada Balsam.

Underlying the andesite sill there is a tuff (1-155) of rather unusual constitu-
tion, consisting as it does for the most part of albite, pyroxene and fragments of
trachytic rock. The felspar is generally fragmental, but in some cases shows
almost perfect scjuare sections. It often contains inclusions of apatite needles
and of chloritic material, which at times assumes the rounded outline characteristic
of inclusions of glassy base. The pyroxene, which is mostly augite, with a little
hj'perstheue, still retains in a large measure its stout prismatic habit, although a
good deal cracked and somewhat altered . The rock fragments are small, none
being more than 3 mm. in diameter. Almost all of them have trachytic faliric
and are porphyritic in columnar albite. A few are partly gla.ssy. The inter-
stices of the rock are filled mostly with cidorite. but some parts of the matrix
appear to consist of an extremely fine-grained trachytic hypocrystalline rock, and
here and there are evidences of silicification . Tlie rock may be termed a pyroxene-
bearing keratophyre tuff.

In view of the fact that the albite of many l)asic rocks is secondary and that
many keratophyres must be regarded as albitized porphyrites (49), it is i)roper
to in(|uire into the possibility that the albite in the rocks under discussion may be
secondary. As far as can be observed there is no positive evidence that all)itiza-
tion has occun-ed. Neither are there traces of still unaltered basic felspar (50),
nor does the albite exhibit a suspicious cleai-ness (51), nor yet is it crowded with
epidote and other alteration products, such as (me might expect in the endogenic
albitization of a basic felspar. The allute then may fairly be considered a primary
mineral .

Felspathic Tuffs <,f tlie Kuttiuicf Series.

These form an extensive series of gritty-looking rocks constituting much of
the Kuttung Beds and intercalated with the conglomerates. Megascopically, a
typical specimen obtained from the Main Felspathic Grit is iiinkish-grey in colour,
composed mostly of small felspar chips and crystals, both pink and white, and sub-
ordinate i|uartz. with a few dark minerals, all endx'dded in a greyish matrix. In
thin section the tutt'aceous character of the rock becomes apparent. Tlie dominant
mineral is orthoclase, in crystals and fragments averaging about 1 mm. and much
kaolinized; there is a minor amount of plagioclase, mostly albite. Quartz, of the
type found as phenocrysts in volcanic rocks, is fairly aljundant, mostly a.s frag-
ments but often retaining traces of crystal form and showing corrosion and stony
inclusions. A few small pieces of augite, hornblende and ilmenite are also seen.
Of lava fragments there are many, mostly glassy and often pumiceous, sometimes
possessing fluidal or spherulitic fabric.

408 GEOLOGY AND PETROLOGY OF THE GREAT SERPEXTISE BELT OF X.S.W

All these constituents are compacteil together and set in a biMJwn-stained un-
resolvable matrix containing uiuiierous tiny cliii>s of (|uartz, felspar ami pumiceous
glass .

I>iterbedded Floas ami Tnjjs in the Kutluiig Series.

(a) Suda rhyolites and tuffs. luterbedded with the Kuttung Series are what
appear in the iield to be rhyolitii- tlows or tuffs. Thc.'se form a series of striking
outcroi^s on the right bank of Rocky Creek in Portion 322. Three specimens
have lieen sectioned and examined, and they prove to be soda rhyolites or soda
rhyolite tuffs. The rocks are fragmental wholly or partly, but it is not clear from
a microscopic examination whether they should be classed as tuffs or essentially
massive volcanic rocks with a gi-eat deal of tuffaceous material included .

1493 from the east end of Portion 273, Currabubula. is in hand-specimen a
light gi-eyish-green rock with a dull felspathic-looking gTuundmass containing small
phenoerysts of felspar and quartz. Under the microscope the (|uartz is seen to
be fragmental and much corroded, as is also the felspar which is pure albite of
the variety known as checker-albite . The groundmass is largely crypt ocrystalline,
is free from tiow-structure, and in addition to little gi-ains of felspar and quartz,
contains large numbers of remains of collapsed pumice in the shape of little cus-
pate bodies now devitritied and represented by strings of chalcedonic (|uartz
granules and little prisms of clear albite. There are also little irregular pockets
consisting mostly of granules of clear secondary albite. A few vei'y small
rounded vesicles are tilled with the chalcedonic quartz and chlorite.

1534 from Portion 322 is a green, hard, dense lithoidal rock recalling in a])-
peai'ance some of the Pokolbin rhyolites. There are phenoerysts of (|aartz up to
1 ram. in length, originally idiomorphic but now much shattered and corroded,
and with inlets and inclusions of groundmass; also fragments of pure albite up
to 2 mm . long and a good deal shattered . The groundmass consists of small
chips of quartz and felspar and numberless pumice fragments, set in a crypto-
crystalline base in which there are occasional streaks of glassy material. A little
apatite is present. Tlie groundmass (if the rock contains inclusions of rhyolitic
rock, the largest being of fluidal fabric, and poryphyritic in quartz, orthoclase,
and albite.

Specimen 1535 (PI. xxv., fig. 1), descril)ed as a "llnw bi-eccia fi'om Portion
322, Currabubula," looks more distinctly like a. tuff than cither ol' the others in
hand specimen; it has a hard stony base of pale green colour, in which can he seen
tiny fragments of quartz and of white and pink felspar, as well as larger dark-
coloured inclusions of rock. The microscope shows it to be composed of abinulant
small fragments of quartz and felspar and deviti-ified pumice with chips of fluidal
and spherulitic rhyolite, set in a eryptocrystallinc base containing little nests of
secondary (|uartz. The quartz fragments are angular and corroded; felspar com-
prises albite and orthoclase, the former ])redominating and both a good deal de-
composed. The rhyolitic inclusions are sometimes much chloritized. and the flow-
lines are indicated by strings of secondary (juartz granules. What a|)pear to
have been cavities are now lined with tiny prisms of clear (|uartz and filled with
a colourless zeolitic (?) substance stained in jiatches with haematite.

(h) Basaltic Rocks. In Portions 57 and 5!), Currabubula. there is a small
flow (1407) of peculiar type (PI. xxv., fig. 7) . In hand-specimen the rock is dark
greyish-brown and aphanitic, with a very few small felspar phenoci-ysfs showing.
Microscopically felspar is the only fresh constituent, in laths about 6 ram. long,

BY W. X. BENSOX, W. S. DUX, AXD W. R. BROWXE. 409

with frayed ends. Measurements indicate acid andesine, about Abes An32. There
is a second crystallization of microlitic felspar liiving approximately straight
extinction, which would point to olig'oelase. This forms a kind of mesostasis of
sub-variolitic aspect. The spaces between the felspars are tilled with a confused
mass of chlorite, some of which is pseudomorphous after a mineral giving rect-
angular sections, possibly ]iyroxene, while the rest is just interstitial and may
represent original glass. It is sprinkled with rod-like microlitic iron-ore. Car-
bonates are present in fair amount, both a-s little interstitial patches and also, with
quartz, tilling a few vesicles. The rock may provisionally be termed an andesine
basalt, though probably more acid than normal basalt.

Specimen 1440, collected from Portion 57, a little south of the andesine basalt
just mentioned, is possibly from another interbedded flow. It is typically basaltic
in appearance, liluish-black, very comjiact and with a i-atlicr hackly frnchue.

In thin section it is hypocrystalline intersertal and very fine grained. Laths
of bytownite, varying' from a length of .75 mm. down to microlitic dimensions,
and slightly altered, are distributed through a matrix composed of pyroxene and
magnetite. The pyroxene is a bright yellow-green colour and occurs in dense
masses of extremely tiny, rounded, and almost e(|uidimensional granules and
crystals. Some of these are distinctly pleochroic and have straight extinction, in-
dicating hypei-sthene, but the bulk of the pyroxene is augite. There is abundance
of magnetite as tiny crystals and locally as clouds or patches of fine dust.

The relative proportions of the different constituents vary very much from
point to point in the slide, but on the whole felspar probably predominates, with
pyroxene and magnetite in the order given. There are fairly frequent in-egular
small patches of altered brown glass into which felspar and pyroxene crystals
protrude, and in the neighbourhood of these patches minerals may be rather lai'ger
and more idiomorphic than usual. Minute apatite needles are scarce. Occa-
sional aggregates of magnetite with some indeterminate material, up to 2 ram. in
length, appear to be pseudomorphs, possibly after olivine. This may be called a
hypocrystalline intersertal basalt.

Basalts of the Verrie Series.

For the most part the rocks are very decomposed, and only one specimen
(1510) was available for sectioning (PI. xxv., fig. 9). This was obtained from a
well in Portion 239, at the head of Anstey's Creek. It is a rather weathered, grey,,
fine-grained rock, amygdaloidal in structure, the vesicles being filled sometimes with
calcite and sometimes with white or colourless zeolites. Under the microscope
the rock is seen to have suffered considerably from surface alteration. The prin-
cipal constituent is a plagioelase, in laths averaging about .8 mm. long which
are at least as basic as labradorite. There are occasional traces of parallel orien-
tation, and the interspaces between the felspars are filled largely with augite which
is interstitial rather tlian ophitic. It is of a greyish-l)rown colour, very faintly
pleochroic, and has magnetite plentifully distributed through it. What were pro-
bably small crystals of olivine are now represented by aggregates of serpentinous
material always rimmed with translucent haematite. Evidently the original olivine,
if such it was, was highly ferriferous. Further alteration of the rock is indicated
by interstitial patches of fibrous radial green chlorite. The amygdules are filled
with quartz crystals and calcite, or with calcite and a zeolite which may be cha-
bazite.

410 geology an'l) i'etkol.ogv ok tiik gkkat skkl'kntine itklt of x.s.'.v.,

Intrusive Kock.*<.
Trachytoid Quartz Keratoplnjres.

Tlie locks (lescribed iii the account of the field-geology as felsites, trachytes,
etc., forming sills, dykes and other intrusions, fall, with few exceptions, into the
keratophyre class, although varying among themsehes in details of texture and
mineral constitution. The variations are fairly reg^Uar, so that subdivision is
rather difficult, and it will be l)est perhaps to mention tlie general mineralogical
features of the series before proceeding to more detailed description.

The series as a whole has l)een called the trachytoid quartz keratophyres to
distiuguisli them from the soda rhyolites, from which they differ in texture, mode
of occurrence and most probably also chemical composition.

As no essential differences were found between the rocks composing the dykes
directly emanating from the Warragundi volcano and those forming the sills and
dykes cutting througli the Kuttung Series elsewhere in tlie area, all liave l)eeu
grouped together.

Megascopically the rocks are fairly conijiact. occasionally slightly \esicular,
and varying in colour through buff, pink and pinkish-grey to dark greenish-grey.
The majority of the specimens have phenocrysts of pink or white felspar ranging
up to 6 mm. in length; in other cases the, plienocrysts are small, while in certain
types they are entirely absent.

Microscopically the rocks are all holocrystalline; the grain-size is tine to very
fine, and the fabric may be trachytie or orthophyric, with or witliout lluxion struc-
ture, or again no definite fabric may be recognisable. Of the minerals present
acid plagioelase is by far the most abundant and iui])ortant. Accurate deter-
minations of composition were generally most difficult and sometimes (|uite im-
possible owing to alteration and fineness of grain, but there appears to be a varia-
tion from pure or almost pure albite in certain members of the series to oligocla,se
in others. Tlie felspar may be zoned, with apparently an oligoclase kernel and
an albite rim. It is possible that the variation in habit of the felspai-s is to
some extent a function of their chemical ccmiposition, the slender, almost aeicular,
crystals of oligoclase being conti'asted with tlic stumjjv prisms of tiie more albitic
rocks. The extent to which orthoclase enters into the rocks is doubtful. Tn some
it is certainly present, in others, especially those ccmtaining the more acid plagio-
elase, it is undoulitedly absent, while in otiiers again its presence cannot be de-
'finitely determined. It is probable, of coui-se, that orthoclase molecules exist
to a small extent in solid solution in the jilagioclase.

Quartz is i)erhaps the mineral next in importance after felspar; it is almost
always interstitial, but in two cases its occurrence is i>eculiar and gives the imjires-
sion of early crystallisation. Rarely it encloses the felspar in uiicropoikilitic
fashion. Tlic ])roportion of quartz varies very much in the different rocks, but
does not ai)])iNir tn be con-elated with the fluctuation of any other constituent
save possibly tlic iron ore. The latter varies consideral)ly in amount, both mag-
netite and ilmenite being present.

Primary ferro-magnesian minerals are comparatively scarce; certain of the
rocks must have been entirely devoid of them, while in others the occurrence of
chlorite and other secondary material indicates that some dark minerals were once
present. In a few rocks the original l)iotite, hornblende or pyroxene still re-
mains. The Jiresence of tlie last two iioints to a genetic connection with the an-
desites. Apatite in small amounts is a fairly constant constituent.

BY \V. X. BENSOX, W. S. DUX^ AXD W. R. BROWXE. 411

Many of tbe more albitic types are eliaracterised by ortliopliyrie fabric. We
may take as an (Example 1408, from a dyke in Duri Creek, S.E. of Duri Peak,
cutting' through the Kuttung- grits and conglomerates. Phenocrysts of albite up
to 3 mm. long, sometimes aggi-egated in glomero-porpliyritic fashion, are set in a
matrix of stumpy prisms of albite averaging about .25 mm. long and at least
as acid as Aboo Anio in general composition. The spaces between these are filled
with quartz, which composes about 10 % of the rock. The felspar is much
kaoliuized and stained witli haematite, and disjiiays a narrow clear him round a
decomposed kernel. Tiny crystals of magnetite are fairly plentiful and little
apatite needles and biotite flakes are infrequent .

Another rock (1499) resembles 1498 except for the presence of definite il-
menite much leucoxenised, and that the biotite is chloritized (PI. xxv., fig. 4) .
This rock occurs as a sill which passes into the dyke from which the pre\'ious
specimen was taken. Another specimen (1.530) from the same dyke diffei-s in
the lugher proportion of iron ore and in the smaller amount of biotite, which is
reiJresented by a little chlorite.

A dyke which occurs in Portions 240 and 178 may be connected with the
Warragundi volcanic centre, and belongs to the orthopluTie type, differing from
the rocks just described only in having slightly coarser texture and having more
interstitial chlorite .

A much more basic though allied type is 1528, from a dyke 24 yards wide,
half a mile north of Portion 1. This has a much higher proportion of iron ore
than the others, while ferro-magnesian minerals are represented by abundant
augite. The grain-size is coarser, too, the felspars averaging about .6 mm. long,
and the rock is non-porphyritic. Felspar (Abn.-, An-,) is slightly zoned, and ha.s
the usual clear rim round a decomposed kernel. The interspaces between the
felspars are filled chiefly with abundant jiale granular augite, iron ores and very
subordinate quartz. Augite and magnetite are also included in felspar. Tiny
apatite needles are fairly numerous, while chlorite is (juite common, often filling
cavities .

In 1494 (dyke crossing Rocky Creek) and 1490 (dyke in the S.E. of Portion
11), the texture is finer than that of 1498, and there is rather more elongation of
the felspars of the base, although their general composition is still very acid, about
Aba.'-, An.-,. Ilmenite is fairly plentiful, and may appear among the phenocrysts.
The felspars are much replaced by carbonates, but the rocks were evidently de^■oid
of ferro-magnesian silicates. Vesicles in 1496 are filled with calcite, and partially
lined with little quartz prisms.

These two rocks may very probably represent dykes radiating from Warra-
gundi. A dyke (1511) from the N.E. corner of Portion 70, Werrie, has much
in common with them, but has rather more iron ore and retains chloritic pseudo-
morphs after (?) hornblende.

There are a number of very fine-grained rocks (1437, 1514, 1529) consisting
mostly of lath-shaped or acicular felspars, apparently oligoclase, and exhibiting a
more or less perfect trachytic habit. Orthodase is sometimes associated with the
other felspar, generally in subordinate amount, but its presence is not always
recognisable. In all of these there is practically no evidence of the former pre-
sence of ferro-magnesian constituents, though mag-netite is plentifully dusted
through the rock. Small phenocrysts of oligoclase are jiresent, and there is much
alteration to kaolin and carbonates. Cavities are filled with chalcedonic quartz.

412 GEOLOGY AN'D PETROLOGY OP THE GREAT SERPENTINE BELT OP N.S.W.,

Primary tjuartz is very sparingly prest-ut, aud is practically abscut m 1437. Kock
1515 is a very ftne-gi-aiued porpbyritic type witbout traebytic arrangement of tbe
felspars, and is notable as being tbe only one of tbe series containing bornbleude.
Jn band-specimen tbis is seen as fairly al)undant rod-like plienocrysts up to al)out
6 mm. in leng-tb. In tbin section it is of a ligbt brown colour and strongly pleo-
chroic. In addition to tbe predominant oligoclase of tbe rock, tbere is probably a
little orthoelase as small shapeless interstitial grains. Quartz is fairly abundant.
Tbe rock (1448) from the Church Hill railway cutting at Currabubula pre-
sents some unusual characters. It consists largely of lathy oligoclase showing
traebytic fabric, vitb subordinate orthoelase. Locally tbe grainsize of the
felspar may increase slightly and its habit may alter to a stout prismatic
or to a gi-anular form; this may be due to local variation in the water-gaseous
content of tbe crystallizing magma. A large square-shaped section of labra-
dorite, comparable with that found in the andesites, may be a xenocryst. The
abundant iron-ore is in minut* octahedra, rods and grains, some of it being
titaniferous, judging liy the frequent coronas of secondary sphene. Apatite is
very scarce. The interesting feature of tbis rock is in the habit and disposition
of the quartz, which is present as optically continuous patches, enclosing the fel-
spars in micropoikilitie fashion . It also fills what have evidently been drusy
cavities, giving a pseudo-porphyritic appearance to tbe rock (PL xxv., fig. 2).
In this case the (|uartz, which may consist of two or more grains of different
orientations, lias its boundaries determined by tbe felspar-laths forming the ori-
ginal walls, which often project into it. This quartz is to be regarded as of
primary crystallization; it often contains tiny inclusions and may pass out with
optical continuity into the poikilitie quartz. A few of the druses have been filled
with opal or with chalcedony, associated with little rosette-shaped bundles of
chlorite needles growing on tbe walls of the cavity. One gi'ain of opal includes
a granule of ilmenite completely suiTounded by a rim of secondary sphene.

This rock, being tbe freshest in the collection, was selected for chemical in-
vestigation, and the result of an analysis by Mr. H. Yates, B.Sc, is given in
the first column of the table.

T. TI. Til. TV.

SiOo 07. 71 69.20 71.52 75.06

AbO:! 15.24 15.00 11.76 14.21

FeiiOg 1.48 1.57 1.52 1.31

FeO 1.89 1.83 3.44 0.27

MgO 0.46 0.60 1.18 0.00

CaO 3.00 1.88 2.72 0.42

NaoO 5.87 5.87 5.05 6.88

K2O 1.81 1.81 0.26 0..58

H2O+ .. .. 1.89 0.67 1.25 0.62

H2O— .. .. 0.39 0.00 0.14 0.56

TiOo 0.47 0..52 0.28 abs.

PaOr, tr. 0.10 0.20 0.03

MnO — 0.15 0.04 0.04

CO2 abs. abs. 0 .38 —

FeS2 — — 0.12 SO3 0.11

100.21 100.19 99.86 100.18

BY W. X. BEXSONj W. S. DUN, AND W. It. BROWNE. 413

I. Trachytoid quartz keratojiliyre, Clmrch Hill, (JuiTabubiihi. Analyst, H.

Yates.
II.* Kliyolitt', Aiu'on Hill, Panama Canal Zone. Analyst, G. Steiger.
lll.f (|)iiai'tz keratopliyre, Portion 175, Par. Neminglia, N.S.W. Analyst, W. N.

Benson .
IV. t Soda rbyolite, Paddy's Sngarloaf, nr. Raymond Terrace, N.S.W. Analyst,
W.'a. Grieg.'

The analysis indicates the sodic character of the rock, although the CaO per-
centage is rather high. It also points to the presence of about 10 % of ortho-
olase, either as a definite mineral or in solid solution in ther oligoclase. The cor-
respondence of this analysis with that of the rbyolite from the Panama Canal
Zone is very striking. Analyses 111. and IV. have been inserted for contrast
rather than comparison; there are evidently important differences between the
Carboniferous rock and the Devonian quartz keratophyre from Nemingha, while
the Paddy's Sugarloaf rock, which is probably to be correlated, chemically as well
as petrologically, with the soda rhyolites of Rocky Creek, emphasises the difference
between these rocks and the trachytoid quartz keratophyres .

This Clhurch Hill intrusion is an offshoot from or prolongation of a laccolitic
mass invading- the Werrie basalt and forming a small hill about a mile west of
Currabubula. The rock composing the intrusion differs but little from that just
described, but shows some additional features of interest. The cavities in the
rock have not always been filled completely with quartz, and open spaces may be
left, into which project felspar crystals. These spaces may, however, be filled
with calcite or more frequently with what appears to be a zeolite, having a R.I.
of about 1.49, complex twinning, and a birefringence about the same as that of
quartz. This mineral has evidently formed after the consolidation of the quartz,
which it occasionally enwraps. Embedded in both quartz and zeolite are isolated
little crystal aggregates of felspar and an occasional flake of rather pale-coloured
biotite. The conclusion seems warranted that the zeolite represents the last
and the quartz the penultimate stage in the continuous process of rock-crystalliza-
tion .

The rock (1520, 1526) composing the laccolitic mass S.W. of Soma has some
features which mark it off from the foregoing types. It is very fine-grained, with
a few small plienocrysts of oligoclase, and a gToundma.ss composed mainly of little
albite laths and quartz, with ])robably some orthoelase. In contrast to its usual
habit, the quartz is characterised by distinctly squarish outlines, sometimes with cor-
rosion embaymeuts, as though it was of early crystallization. It makes up about
40 % of the slide . Bleached and ragged biotite and a little ilmenite are seen .

An interesting rock is that found in a kind of sill cutting through a mass of
felsite on Werrie's Creek. The plienocrysts include, in addition to oligoclase and
(?) orthoelase. infrequent chloritized crystals of augite and hypersthene. The
gi'oundmass is of stumpy oligoclase with some orthoelase, abundan.t magnetite, a
little pyrites and apatite, and a good deal of quartz and biotite.

The presence of both rhombic and monoclinie pyroxene links up this rock
with the andesites.

•Washingtou's Tables (United States Geol. Surv., Prof. Paper 99), p. 231.
tThese Proceedings, xliii., 1918, p. 602.
^Washington's Tables, p.lf).3.

414 GEOLOGY AXD PETROLOGY OP THE GREAT SERPENTINE BELT OF X.S.W.,

Quartz Trachyte.

The only potash trachyte is 1500 from the S.E. coiner of Portion lUT. It
is very sparingly micro-porphyritic in orthoclase, which also predominates in the
fine-grained gToundmass. The felspar is in ill-formed laths, much spangled with
alteration-products, and is accompanied by a little acid oligoclase. Quartz forms
an imperfect micro-poikilitic setting to the felspars and ii-on ore is fairly abundant
with a little apatite. A small amount of chlorite probably represents original
biotite.

Quartz Latite.

Only one specimen (1495) of this rock type has been en'countered, occurring
as a dyke near the centre of Portion 273, Currabubiila. It is distinguished from
the other felsitic rocks, from which it does not differ noticeably in appearance, by
the presence of a more basic plagioclase . In thin section the rock is slightly
porphyritic, the phenocrysts being felspar, probably andesine; a few crystals with
only simple twinning or with straight extinction may be orthoclase. In the
groundmass, zoned andesine (Abeo An4o) predominates, but there are indications
of the presence of orthoclase as well, though the relative proportions are impos-
sible to tell. The felspar laths of the groundmass average about .6 mm., and
there is at times a tendency to traehytic fabric. Iron ores are fairly abimdant,
while interstitial quartz is less important. A few remnants of a pale monoclinic
pyroxene ai-e seen, but much altered to carbonates, and tiny apatite needles are
scattered about. Chlorite is present in good amount, and there is a small pro-
portion of interstitial carbonates.

Andesites. •

These are of two distinct, though probably related types, ehai'acterised by
the presence of hornblende and pyroxene respectively. The former type is the
more acid, and this is reflected in the composition of the felspar.

(ft) Hornblende Andesites. Rocks belonging to this type have been found
occurring as sills: (a) in Portion 117 of the eastern limb of the syncline and (6)
at the Werris Creek Gap, on the western limb. We have also been supplied by
IVIrs. Scott with a specimen of the same type of rock from a mass oeeun-ing near
"AUanbank," which lies about 13 miles slightly W. of N. from the Gap. This
rock-type is fairly constant in its main characteristics, and is identical with one
phase of the well-known Carboniferous lava in the Hunter River district quamed
at Martin's Creek, near Pateison .

The rock in hand specimen is purplish-grey in colour, and is studded with
small phenocrysts of felspar and hornblende, the former predominating. A
characteristic megascopic feature of the felspars is the existence in them of kernels
of dark-coloured material, presumably chlorite. In thin section the Werris Creek
Gap specimen (1491) is seen to be hj'pocrystnlline. The plagioclase phenocrysts
are tabular, fairly well-formed, and slightly zoned, the general composition l)eing
about Abso An45 (andesine) . The felspar is much cracked and resorbed and is
considerably altered to kaolin, with occasional patches of carbonates. Inclusions
of the groundmass are not infrequent. Hornl)lende is. as usual in stich rocks,
much I'csorbed, and is surrounded by a dark rim composed largely of magnetite
granules. Magnetite is also beginning to separate out along the cleavage jilanes
from without inwards. The linnibleiide is green, but looks bleaclied at times and

BY V7. N. BEXSOX;, W. S. DUX^ AXD W. R. BROWXE. 415

exhibits occasional carbonate alteration. Ilmenite shows hexagonal and irregular
plates. Tiny apatite prisms are quite abundant either in the grouudmass, or as
inclusions in the phenocrysts, notably in the felspars. Little zircon prisms, too,
sometimes appear. There is a fair amount of chlorite in rosette-shaped aggi'e-
gates, often pseudomorphous after what appears to have been felspar, judging
by its outlines, and by the abundant enclosed apatite needles. The groundmass
is largely crj-ptocrystaUine, with irregularly sinuous aggregates of secondary
quartz and chlorite. Magnetite dust may be fairly abundant locally. An im-
portant feature of the groundmass is the presence of numerous irregular patches
of brown glass showing marked fluidal fabric, and with streaks of cryptocrystalline
material through it. These patches pass rather quickly into the ordinary gi'ound-
mass, and it is hard to say whether they represent remnants of a once completely
glassy base, or whether the present texture as a whole is due to heterogeneity in
the original magma.

Specimen 1441, from the centre of Portion 117, evidently represents a slightly
different phase of the same type. There is a much gi-eater proportion of glass iu
the groundmass, tlie felspar phenocrysts are rather more numerous and more
altered, while hornblende is also more abundant. Further there is another ferro-
magnesian mineral present, which is now represented by clusters of magnetite
granules, with or without an indeterminable greyish or brownish substance. The
sections are idiomorphic and very elongated, almost rod-like, and the original
mineral appears to have been biotite. Apatite is less abundant than in 1491 and
zircon is infrequent. This rock corresponds rather more closely to the Martin's
Creek type than does 1491.

A rock of somewhat similar habit to the hornblende andesite outcrops in
Portion 88, about half a mile east of Rocky Creek, but the place of hornblende is
taken by biotite, and a single phenocryst of corroded quartz was observed in the
slide examined.

(b) Pyroxene Andesites. These present many variations in texture, as regards
both crystallinity and fabric, and in composition are evidently more basic than the
hornblende andesites .

The rocks may be conveniently subdivided into tlie litlioidal. vitrophyric. and
pilotaxitic types, the first of these terms being applied to those rocks of which the
groundmass. as seen under the microscope, consists of a mosaic of spongy-looking
felspar grains.

The first two types are closely associated in the field, combining to form the
great series of sills which have invaded the tuffaceous grits at the ba.se of the
Rocky Creek Series, whereas it is rather significant that all the pilotaxitic rocks
of which specimens are available have quite a distinctive appearance, and occur
as dj-kes connected with the Warragundi complex. It is quite possible that, al-
though all three types are linked together by mineralogical similarities, there are
chemical differences between them, but the data available do not warrant a positive
statement on this point. It is difficult to say whether the mosaic groundmass of
the lithoidal type is jirimary, or results from devitrification of an original pitch-
^ stone. Anderson and Radley have put forward the suggestion for certain pitch-
stones of Mull, that the stony types have been derived from the glassy by de-
vitrification due to the escape of some of the chemically combined water. This
suggestion is based on field observations supplemented by determinations of the
water present in the rocks (24) . In the case of the Currabubula rocks special

416 GEOLOGY AXD PETROLOGY OF THE GREAT SERPEXTIXE BELT OF X.S.W.,

tield-examination of the relations of the glassy and stony types lias not been made,
but tbey are known to be at times associated in the same sill. A similar close
association has been obser\ed in the Hunter ^'alley area, and it is ijossible that
the question of the origin of the stony gToundmass will eventually be solved in
the field rather than in the laboratory. It is to be noted, however, that in none
of the slides examined does the stony type contain anj' traces of glassy base, or
vice versa, although in the hornblende andesite the association of glassy and crys-
talline patches appeal's to be the rule.

Lithoidal Type. The rocks belonging to this type exhibit a hard stony base
of a purplish-grey colour, with very numerous and conspicuous tabular felspar
l^henoerysts up to 4 mm. in length and smaller and subordinate pyroxene pheno-
crysts, without any definite arrangement. The rock weathers to a very charac-
teristic, soft reddish crust which is pitted by the alteration and removal of the
felspars .

Microscopically, in specimen 1444, from near the summit of Duri Peak, the
felspar phenoerysts prove to be basic labradorite, zoned, but not conspicuously so,
and showing well-marked albite and occasionally carlsbad and i^erieline twinning.
The crystals are somewhat cracked and altered, sometimes zonallj', and are often
crowded with tiny pyroxene and magnetite inclusions, with a few apatite needles.
The pyroxene phenoerysts comprise both augite and hypei-sthene, the former being
tlie more abundant ; both occur in well-formed stout prisms, the augite being occa-
sionally twinned. Hypersthene is notably pleochroic, and shows a disposition
to alteration along the periphery. Ilmenite is fairly plentiful. The gi-oundmass
at first sight appears cryptocrystalline, but really consists of an ill-defined mosaic
of spongy-looking, mitwinned felspar, of indeterminate composition, but with a
refractive index apparently higher than that of Canada Balsam. This groundmass
is plentifully dotted with iron ore and less almndantly with pyroxene granules,
and is microporph;iTitic in plagioclase.

Specimen 1503, from the Summit of Duri Peak, is exactly similar to the
foregoing except that the rock has been more weathered, while in 1454, from tlie
lower portion of ISTorth Cobla, the only differences are that the proportions of the
pyroxenes are approximately e(|ual and Miat the groundmass is liut sparsely micro-
porphyritic.

Vitropht/ric Type. When fresh the rock is a brownish-black colour, very
compact, with a resinous or pitchy lustre, and porpliyi-itic in felspar. Some-
times the phenocrysfs show marked flow structure, but mostly this is absent. In
oonnnon with ilie lithoidal type, tlie pitchstones have tY))ically a i-atlier smooth
fracture.

For the microscopic features we may take as a type specimen 1531. from the
west face of Duri Peak (PI. xxv.. fig. 6) . The porphyritic felspar is basio labra-
dorite (Ab35 An.'.o) or even ftcid bytownite; it is tabular prismatic in habit and
may be up to 2.5 mm. in length. The crystals are much fresher than in any
of the lithoidal andesites examined, but are much corroded and cracked. Twin-
ning on albite and carlsbad laws is present, and zoning is very marked in some
crj-stals. There are very abundant inclusions of pyroxene and to a less extent
of magnetite gri-anules, as well as of the groundmass, the latter sometimes having
a schiller-like arrangement, while the mineral grains may be disposed in a rude
zonal fashion. Hypersthene and augite are fairly abundant, tlie former perhaps
Ijeing in excess, in much cracked prisms up to about 1.5 mm. long. Occasional

BY W. N. BENSONj \V. S. llUX^ AND \V. It. BROWNE. 417

parallel iiitergrowths of the two are seen. Slight alteration is noticed in the
hyperstheue, but the augite is quite fresh. Irregular grains of magnetite or
ilinenite are fairly numerous. The groundmass is hypohyaline and micropor-
phyritic, small grains and crystals of plagioclase and pyroxene being set in a
base composed of greyish-brown glass with much mierolitic augite, felspar" and
magnetite. Round the microlites there is often exhibited the characteristic border
of glass of lighter colour than normal.

The chemical composition of the pitchstone may be gathered from the analysis
of a spoeimeu from Portion IIG.

1. II. III. IV.

SiO- lJU.2(i 58. 7i) 61.17 59.48

AI2O3' 16.46 17.51 17.74 17.38

TeaOa 1.15 2.11 1.78 2.96

FeO 4.87 3.87 3.51 3.67

MgO 3.09 2.23 2.70 3.28

CaO 5.25 6.18 5.90 6.61

NaaO 4.23 4.84 3.79 3.41

K2O 0.98 0.68 1.71 1.64

H2O+ .... 2.22 2.61 ,

H2O- .... 0.22 0.71 ; "-^^ "-'^

Ti02 0.84 1.21 0.45 0.48

P2O5 0.29 — 0.14 0.20

CO2 abs. tr. — —

S .; 0.03 _ _ _

Cr208 abs. — — —

MnO 0.08 — 0.12 0.15

BaO abs. — 0.06 —

SrO abs. — — —

99.97 100.74 99.96 100.00

I. Andesitie pitchstone, portion 116, Currabubula. Anal. W. N. Benson.
II.* Andesitie pitchstone, Pokolbin. Anal. AV. R. Browne.
Ill.t Hypersthene andesite, Lassen Park, California. Anal. Hillebrand.
IV. t Osann's Average of hypersthene andesite.

It will be seen that there is a very close correspondence between the Curra-
bubula and Pokolbin rocks, quite sufficient to place their consanguinity beyond
aU doul)t. In mag-nesia and lime both rocks are somewhat lower than usual, and
though the total of the alkalies is normal, soda is conspicuously high and potash
correspondingly low.

The pitchstone from the small intrusion revealed in the railway cutting in
Portion 34 differs from that of the larger masses in having a certain amount of
perlitic cracking, while the phenocrysts are smaller and less numerous. In some
parts of the sill a certain amount of alteration has occurred, rendering the rock
lustreless and giving it a purplish-gTey colour. In thin section this peculiarity
is seen to be due in part at least to the separation of haematite from the base.

•See (52), p.404.

tQuoted by Tclflmg.s. — Igneous Rocks, Vol. ii., p.44:i.

IQuoted by Daly. — Igneous Rocks and Their Origin.

418 GEOLOGY AXD PETROLOGY OF THK GREAT SERPEXTIXE BELT OF X.S.W.,

The Pilotaxitic Type. In band-specimen this is readily distinguished from
the lithoidal type by its short, hackly fracture and by the fact that phenocrj'sts
are as a rule less abundant. A specimen (1439) collected in the hill in the S.W.
part of Portion 100, Werrie, is porphyi-itic in basic labradorite distinctly zoned,
but exhibiting rather less resorption than the felspar of the other types. The
phenocrysts are generally fresh and contain rare needles of apatite. A very
little pyroxene is present, both hypersthene and augite being represented. The
proportion of pyroxene among the phenoerj'sts is notably smaller than in the
llihoidal.and vitrophjTie types. Little fibrous, pleochroie, purple-brown prisms with
feeble birefringence may represent bastitie alterations of the pyroxene. Some ilmen-
ite may be included among the phenocrysts. The gToundmass consists of a felted
mass of micnilitic felspar, either untwinued or simjily twinned, with a R.I. greater
than that of Canada Balsam, and ajiproximately straight extinction. This is
probably oligoclase. There is flow structure developed, and interetitial minute
granules of pyroxene and iron ore occur, so that the fabric is typically pilo-
taxitic. The groundmass is mottled or blotched with ovoid and irregular patches
of chlorite enclosing the felspar microlites (PI. xxv., fig. 5) .

Other examples of the pilotaxitic type showed a general similarity to this
rock with occasional minor variations such as the absence of flow structure in the
groundmass .

Lamproplit/re.

One rock (1450), described as a "felsitie extension of an audesite dyke" in
a branch of Upper Currabubula Creek, 5 miles S.E. of Currabubula, belongs
to the lamprophyres (PI. xxv., fig. 3). It is pinkish-grej' and felsitie, with a
spangled or frosted appearance due to the presence of countless, tiny, rod-like,
hornblende crystals never more than 3 mm. in length. I'ndcr the microscope
these are seen to be fresh well-formed crystals and microlites, light brown in
colour, showing a characteristic cross-fracture and often broken at the ends.
Pleochroism is weaker than usual, and there is occasional simple twinning. Some
of the larger crystals might be considered plienocrystic; the smaller ones show
traces of parallel orientation. A few gTaius of almost colourless pyroxene ap-
pear, and others are probably pseudomorphed by carbonates. The groundmass
contains, in addition to hornblende, much-altered acid felspar, with a plentiful
sprinkling of magnetite and a little apatite. A vei-y abundant constituent is a
zeolitic mineral, similar to that found in the quartz keratoph^Te of Clmrcli Hill,
which acts as a kind of matrix to the other minerals over irregular small areas,
and fills the central portions of cavities, which may sometimes be lined with tiny
quartz-prisms.

This rock is possibly allied to the kcratophyres, but the habit of its eon-
stittient minerals would place it rather in tlie lamprophyre group.

Basic Intrusive Rocks.

There is a great variety of basic intrusive rocks developed in the Currabubuhi
district. They occur for the most part widely distributed throughout the area as
dykes intrusive into the Kuttung Series. An interesting series of basic dykes
is also found in close connection with the Warragundi centre, intersecting the
Wenie Series. So great is the amplitude of the textural and mineralogieal
variation in these rocks tliat it is difficult to conceive how thev all emanated from

BY \V. X. BENSON, W. S. DUN, AND W. R. BROWNE. 41!)

the same magma reservoir. The majority of tlie types are normal dolerites, but
the collection also includes some containing albite or oligoclase, and there is a
single example of a teschenitic dolerite. The normal dolerites, though ditfering
much among themselves in te.xture, may quit* probably conform to a common
chemical type and may have affinities with the Werrie basalt, and the albitic rocks
may have resulted from albitization. The teschenite, however, stands apart from
the others, and its miueralogical characteristics are closer to those of the Tertiary
alkaline intrusives of the State than to anything of Carboniferous age with
which we are acquainted. However this fact is hardly sufficient in itself to
justify any conclusion as to the geological age of the intrusion and the field-
relations shed no great light on the matter.

(a) Normal Dolerites. These comprise most of the dykes around Currabubula,
as well as those actually in the Warragundi complex. The rocks are all holo-
crystalline, with or without phenocrysts, and vary considerably in grainsize.

Specimen 1502, cutting through the liasalt in Portions 302 and 307, is a por-
phyritic rock. The phenocrysts, roughly prismatic zoned crystals of basic laln-a-
dorite (near Abso Anro) up to 4 mm. in length, are much cracked and carbonated,
the cracks being often filled with what appears to be clear secondary albite.
There are also long streaky inclusions of devitrified glass. The felspar of the
groundmass is zoned acid labradorite in rather stumpy laths about .25 mm. long,
without any definite arrangement. Augite is plentiful in small prisms, occa-
sionally slightly ophitie towards the felspar. It is pale reddish-brown and faintly
pleoehroic. Ilmenite is almost as abundant as augite and is much leucoxenised .
Apatite is rare. Chlorite is interstitial but may also be associated with calcite
as pseudomorphs after some unknown mineral.

A somewhat similar roek in many respects is 1527, from a dyke in Rocky
Creek, in Portion 287, Currabubula. The i)lagioclase phenocrysts appear slightly
less basic than those of 1502, and are much altered to carbonates, with inclusions
of what appear to be devitrified base. Slight zoning is noticed. The felspars
of the groundmass are andesine, about Ab-,:, An4r., about 3 mm. long and slightly
zoned, and there is abundant well-crystallized magnetite, with very tiny apatit«
needles. Ferro-magnesian minerals are reiiresented only by interstitial chhu-ite,
and by small amounts of carbonates. There is a small amount of interstitial prim-
ary quartz.

The medium-grained rock forming the central part of a dyke in the railway
cutting in Portion .34, Currabubula, is a felspathic dolerite (1509). It is non-
porphyi'itic. The felspar, tabular-colunmar in habit, ranges in lengtli from .3
to 3 mm. It is strongly zoned, the variation being from bytownite to andesine.
Alteration is a very marked feature, the crystals being seamed with irregular veins
of what appears to be secondary albite. The subordinate augite, of a pale
greyish-brown colour, is partially idiomorjiliic and partly opliitie to the felspar.
It is altering to brown, strongly pleoehroic hornblende. Ilmenite is fairly plenti-
ful, and long apatite needles are included in the felspar. Interstitial chlorite and
calcite are fairly plentiful, and a zeolite, (?)' chabazite, occurs in places.

The basic rocks in immediate association with the Warrag^undi volcanic centre
occur as sills and dykes intersecting the basalt, tuffs and other products of erup-
tion. They have not been exhaustively studied in the field and will accordingly
be only briefiy referred to here. The specimens that have been examined exliibit
many textural variations. Some of the rocks are porphwitic and a few exhibit

420 GEOLOGY AND PETROLOGY Or THE GREAT SSRPEXTINE BELT OF N.S.W.,

flow strupture, while others are more or less opliitif. Gralu-size is uiediuni to fine.
Jliueralogieally they consist of plagioclase, augite and iron ores, but there is much
variation in the relative proportions of these constituents. In the porphyritic
rocks the felspar of the phenocrysts is usually a zoned basic labradorite, while
that of the groundmass is acid labradorite to andesine. The felspar of the non-
porphyritic tyjies is labradorite about Ab40 Anno. Most of the rocks ha\e suf-
fered considerable alteration, which is best exhibited by the ferro-magnesian
minerals, now largely- represented by iiralite, chlorite (pennine), epidote and
carbonates. Iron ores are plentiful, both ilmenite and magnetite having been
identified, while in one rock a little pyrites was noticed. Primary quartz is a
very minor constituent in a few of the rocks.

One type should be noticed, although its field relations have not yet been
completely determined. It occurs as a dyke in the Warragundi complex, and is
unusually coarse in grain, the felspars often attaining a length of 12 mm. Un-
fortunately the specimens so far obtained have proved vei-y difficult to section,
but still the rock has been determined as belonging to the gi-anophyric diabases
or quartz dolerites, a small amount of interstitial mieropegiuatite being visible
here and there, the felspar of which is an acid plagioclase in optical continuity
with the zoned large crystals. Normal augite, much uralitized, is apparently the
only pyroxene. Skeletal ilmenit-e and some apatite complete the list of con-
stituents. The occurrence of this fiuartz dolerite is interesting, inasmuch as a sill
or other intrusion of gTanophyre occui-s not far away, which microscopical ex-
amination proves to be composed almost entirely of quartz and albite. The asso-
ciation of quartz dolerites and granophyres or aplites. particularly of sodic type,
has been noted in various parts of the world, and a genetic connection has in many
eases been proved. This fact adds to the interest as well as to the complexity
of the Werrie volcanic series.

(h) Dolerites characterised hi/ Acid Pkir/ioclase. Two specimens of this typo
were collected, the first (1451) from the narrow dyke through the conglomei'ates in
C.L. 3,000, Currabubula. A close-grained, dark greenisli-brown rock, in thin
section it is flue-grained and non-porphyritic, and of distinctly basaltic aspect
(PI, XXV., fig. 8) . It is composed of subidiomorphic laths of albite averaging
about .3 mm., cleai' and fresh, tiny augite prisms, and' magiietite in crystals and
skeletal forms. The interspaces are occupied mostly by brownish chloritic ma-
terial forming at least 30 % of the section, and possibly representing an original
intersertal glassy base. The suspicious clearness of the felspar miglit be taken
to point to albitization. The rock may be termed a fine-grained Albite Dolerite.

Of a generally similar character is specimen 1492, from ''a dyke through the
Church Hill felsite in the railway cutting li miles west of Currabubula." This
is a dark-coloured, compact, basaltic-looking rock . lender the microscojie tliere
are seen to have been two periods of crystallisation, the older felspar being in
elongated laths averaging about .(5 mm. These are very much clouded with
decomposition products, so that optical determinations are difficult, but there is a
symmetrical extinction of 10" and the R.I. appears to be a little less than that
of Canada Balsain. so the mineral is probaldy acid oligoclase. No ferro-magnesian
minerals are present, but there is a good deal of chlorite, and there are abundant
tiny granules of secondary sphene. Ilmonife and magnetite are very plentiful in
little octahedra, and in rod-like and skeletal forms. There is in places a meso-
stasis consisting mostly of microlitic plagioclase with magnetite dust and chlorite.

BY W. K. DEXSOX, W. S. hVS , AXL W. K. BROWNE.

421

Patches of calfite are sporadically distributed and tiny vesicles are filled with
ualcite, or with chlorite, chalcedonie quartz and a hexagonal (?) zeolite.

(c) Teschenitic Dolerite. An interesting rock, and the only one of its kind
so far discovered in the area, is that forming the sill or dyka about half a mile
S.E. of Currabubula Railway Station. It is megaseopically fine and even-
grained, with felspar apparently constituting a little less than half of the entire
rock. JVIieroscopically it is subophitic in fabric. The augite is titaniferous,
purplish-brown and pleochroic, and occurs in two ways: (1) as largish subidio-
morphic to allotriomorphie individuals, often ophitic towards felspar, and (2) as
nests or clusters of small stout well-foi-med prisms. Felspar is in elongated laths
up to .8 mm. in length, slightly decomposed, and is labradorite bordering on
bytownite. 01i\-ine, usually enclosed in augite. is fairly abundant, sometimes as
large regular gTains, but generally in small roimded prisms, much cracked and
altering peripherally to a brown-gi-een serpentine . Fresh subidiomorphic ilmenite
is plentiful, often surrounded by tiny flakes of biotite, and apatite is very abund-
ant. There is a mesostasis composed of analcite which makes up at lea.st 25%
of the rock and often completely encloses tiny crystals of most of the other
minerals, particularly augite and apatite. Indeed the bulk of the apatite is found
in the analeitic mesostasis, which recalls the fact recorded by Dr.. Elsdeu in regard
to certain of the quartz dolerites of St. David's Head (53) that the interstitial
quartz contains over 70 % of the apatite present in the rock, indicating a very
high solubility for this mineral under the conditions obtaining in the magma.
The analcite is always interstitial, never forming definite crystals. It is in some
places quite clear, but elsewhere is quite turbid, and flecked with highly bire-
fringent alteration products. Occasionally its place may be taken l)y calcite.

It is now generally agreed that the analcite of teschenitic rocks is often to be
regarded as belonging to the period of primai-y rock crystallization, and to re-
present the consolidation of the last watery soda-rich magmatic fraction (54) (55).
In the present instance the analcite has all the appearance of a primary mineral
of late crystallization. It has attacked the felspars to a very slight extent, but the
augite inclusions present well-marked and unaltered boundaries, and there is no
development of a soda-rich border (55) . The serpentinization of the olivine may
possibly be, as Bailey has suggested, due to the action of residual magma or
"juvenile" waters (54a) .

Gexeral Remarks.

The foregoing investigation establishes the essential correspondence between
the rocks of the Warragundi complex and those of the intrusions at a distance
from that centre. Some points of difference have been noted, but the conclusion
of a close mutual relationship seems inevitable.

If we consider the series as a whole, tuffs, flows and intrusions — and this
seems a reasonable tiling to do — a curious association of alkaline and calcic types
is revealed. On the one hand there are the typical calcic andesites and dolerites,
and on the other the soda rhyolites and keratoph^'Tic rocks, tlie albitic dolerites
and the tuffs, both sodic and potassic — an assemblage of distinctly alkaline facies.
The two groups are of equal importance in tlie series, and. as we have seen, are
linked by intermediate types, so that there can be no doubt of their derivation
from a common stock-magma, a conclusion with which th« field evidence is in com-
plete agTeement. What was the nature of the original magma we can only con-
.-'ecture. In dealing with the rocks, of the Seaham-Paterson-Clareucetown area

422 GEOLOGY AXD PETKOLOGY OF THE GREAT SE.^rEXTIXE BELT OF X.S.TT.,

(4) the present writer took the view that possibly the hornblende andesite might
represent the original undifferentiated magma, but a thorough chemieal investiga-
tion of the whole series is needed belcire any definite opinion can be formed.

CosiPARLSox With Other Carboxiferous Areas ix the State.

The Currabubula rocks show many analogies with those of other Carboniferous
areas further to the south. One of the localities whose rocks have been petrol-
ogieally studied in any detail is Pokolbin (52), and many points of similarity
are noticed with the rocks under discussion, although the sequence of eruption ap-
pears to have been different, a point which, however, inay not be of any great
significance .

A re-study of the slides of some of the Pokolbin locks reveals a closer rela-
tionship to the Currabubula types than tlie published descriptions would indicate.
For example, though Mingaye's analysis proves the existence of a strongly potassie
rhyoUte, yet slides of other rhyolites show a dominance of albite among the pheuo-
crysts, linking these rocks with the soda rhyolites of the Kuttung Series.

The Pokolbin rocks described as trachj-tes also contain considerable albite in
addition to the orthoclase (indeed the soda-felspai- occasionally predominates) and
although there are slight textural differences, these do not obscure the similarity to
the quartz keratophyres of Currabubula. The chemical similarity of the ande-
sitie pitchstones from the two localities has already been commented on. In
addition, certain of the Pokolbin andesites are pilotaxitic and are strikinglj' simi-
lar to those from Warragundi, except for the almost complete absence of pyroxene
phenocrysts .

The present writer has recently been privileged to examine a series of rocks
collected by Mr. C. A. Sussmilch during his investigation, iji conjunction with
Professor David, of the Carboniferous sections at Paterson, Seaham, Clarence-
town and Eelah , (4) . The series comprises soda rhyolites, toscanites, dellenites,
dacites, homlilende andesites, hornblende mica andesites and pyroxene andesites
and pitchstones. The hornblende andesite of the ]Vlartin's Creek type and the
pyroxene andesite and pitclistone are absolutely identical with the corresponding
Currabubula rocks . The soda rhyolites usually contain biotite, but some of them
are quite <"omparable with the Currabubula rocks. There is, however, a complete
absence of tracliytoid keratophyres in the southern area, if we except the trachytic
fragments present in the tuffs. whiU^ the extensive series of toscanites, dellenites,
and dacites is wanting at Currabubula. It may be, of coui'se, that these two
groups are chemically equivalent. Nothing more basic than pyroxene andesite
lias been discovered by David and Sussmilch among the rocks definitely known
to be Cai'boniferous in the area examined by them. Dr. "Walkom and the pre-
sent writer, however, considered that the natrolite basalt of Pokolbin. which was
regarded as forming contemporaneous flows in tlie Lower ^larine conglomerate,
might rejiresent the la.st phase of the vulcanicity initiated in Carboniferous times
(52, p. 304) and Professor David has recently suggested that the Werrie basalt
may be the equivalent of the natrolite basalts which are so extensively developed
in tlie Hnnter River Valley at the base of the Permo-Carl)oniferous (41 .

A noteworthy fact in connection with the Currabubula area is the great im-
portance and extent of the intrusive rocks in it as contrasted witli the soutliern
area-s, where intrusions are comparatively insignificant. Tlie elucidation of the
causes of tliis <lifference belongs to tectonic geology rat1i(M- than fo ]ietrnlogy, and

BY W. N. BEN"SOX, W. S. DUN^ AND -W. R. BROWXE. 423

will involve a close comparative study of the tectonic conditions attending the
vulcanicit y .

The present study has shown that Benson's suggested correlation of certain
rhyolite flows in the Eocky Creek Series (48, p. 508) with the Pokolhin rhyolites
can be considerably extended. In the present incomplete state of our knowledge
of the Carboniferous rocks of New South Wales any hasty attempt at detailed
correlation is inadvisable, but there is every reason to hope that ultimately this
gi'eat series of rocks, so widespread in occurrence and so uniform in character-
istics, will be of the greatest stratigi'aphical importance.

BIBLIOGRAPHY.

4. D.wiD, T. W. E. and Sussmilch, C. A. — Sequence, Glaciation. and Corre-
lation of the Carboniferous Rocks of the Hunter River District,
N.S.W. Journ. Proc. Roy. See. N.S.W., liii., 1919 (1920), pp. 246-
338.
24. AxDERSox, E. M. and Radlet, E. G.— The Pitchstones of Mull and their
Genesis. Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc, Ixxi., 1915, pp. 205-217.

47. Flett, J. S., and others. — The Geology of Newton Abbot. Memoir Geol.

Surv. England and Wales, 1913, p. 57.

48. Bexsox, W. N. — The Geology and Petrology of the Great Serpentine Belt of

New South Wales. Part i. These Proceedings, xxxviii.. 1913, pp.
490-517.

49. Bailev, E. B. — The Geology of the Glasgow District. Mem. Geol. Surv.

of Scotland, 1911, p. 127 (Citing Neithammer) .

50. and Grabhaii, G. W. — The Albitization of Basic Plagioclase Fel-
spar. Geol. Mag., 1909, p. 252.

51. Flett, .1. S. and Dewet, H. — British Pillow-lavas. Geol. Mag., 1911, p.

204.

52. Browne^ W. R., and Walkom, A. B. — The Geology of the Eruptive and

Associated Rocks of Pokolhin, N.S.W. .Journ. Proc. Roy. Soc.
N.S.W., xlv., 1911.

53. Elsdex, J. v.— The St. David's Head Rock Series. Quart. -Journ. Geol.

Soc, Ixiv., 1908, p. 289.
54fl. Bailey, E. B.— Geology of Ea.st Lothian, in Mem. Geol. Surv. Scot., 1910,

p. 114.

54b.- Geology of Glasgow District. Ihhl. 1911, p. 132.

55. Tyrrell, G. W. — The Picrite-Teschenite Sill of Lugar. Quart. .Tourn.

Geol. Soc, Ixxii., 1916, p. 100.

EXPLANATION' OF PLATE XXV.

Fig. 1. Soda rhvolite tuft" (1535): X 16*. Ordinary light.

Fig. 2. Trachytoid quartz keratophyre (1448): X 16J. Ordinary light. At the

top is a quartz-filled cavity with felspar prisms projecting into it. The

light-coloured patch underneath is quartz poikilitically enclosing felspar.
Fig. 3. Hornblende lamprophyre (1450) : x 16i. Ordinary light. Showing irregular

patches of zeolite.
Fig. 4. Trachytoid quartz keratophyre with orthophyric fabric (1499) : X 23*.

Crossed nicols.
Fig. 5. Pilotaxitic pyroxene andesite (1439) : X 16i. Crossed nicols.
Fig. 6. Vitrophyric pyroxene andesite (1351) : X 15. Ordinary light.
Fig. 7. Andesine basalt (1497): X 15. Ordinary light.
Fig. 8. Albite dolerite (1451): X 15. Ordinary hght.
Fig. 9. Basalt of Werrie Series (1510); X 15. Ordinary hght.

i24

THE CHEMICAL EXAMINATION OF MACROZAMIA SPIRALIS.

Bv James M. Petrie, D.Sc, F.I.C, Linneax Macleat Fellow op the
Society in Biochemistry.

(From tlte Plii/siological Laboratory of the Universiti/ of Sydney.)

Historical Importance, and Distribu tion of Cycads 424

Record of their poisonous Character • . . . 425

Experimental Work on 3/itrro:tiiiii(i spiralis : Proximate Composition of leaves

and nuts 429

Complete Chemical Examination 431

Feeding Experiment;: 439

Summary 440

Historical. — The family of the Cycadaeeae are all tropical or subtropical plants.
The genera have a very limited distribution, and are few in number, but these
represent the remnants of a once extensive flora which covered the earth in the
Palaeozoic and Mesozoic Eras. Scott, in his "Evolution of Plants," says that
in the Secondary Floras al)out one plant in every three was a Cyead, and they
stretched from the Equator to the Poles. They were the dominant class; there
was nothing above them: they were the best thing in the way of flowering plants
that their age had produced. Though these in giving rise to the Angiospei'ms
gradually became extinct, yet from some less progressive and therefore less highly
organised cycadeau forms, we may trace through the Tertiary Era the plants
which linger on to our present day. In the descendants of this ancient race of
jilants we still find those primitive functions and primitive structures which closely
resemble those indicated in the fossils of the Carboniferous Period, and which
give to the Cycads a history and an interest uni(|ue among plants.

The fossil cycadj make their first appearance with the genus PterophyUnm in
the Upi^er Carboniferous formations, and reach their maximum towards the end
of the Triassic and the beginning of the Jurassic Periods. Of these ancient forms
Schimper recognised 34 genera which include 278 species.

Distribution. — The Cycadaeeae of the present day, according to Engler and
tlie Index Kowensis, include mdy nine genera and 75 species. Four genera, in-
cluding Zanria, belong to tropical America, two are confined to the African con-
tinent, and three are found in Australia. The last include Cyca^ which is widely
distributed from India to Japan and through the Islands to Australia, oiu^ Queens-
land genus, and 'Macror:amia whicli is limited to Australia.

BY JAIIE.S M. PETKIE. 425

There are fourteen species of Macroznmia, four of wliicli belong to New South
Wales, and four to Queensland ; four are common to Ijoth States, and two are
found in Western Australia. They are confined to the coastal regions of our
Continent, and on the Eastern side are not found beyond the Dividing Ranges.
There are no native cyeads in Victoria, nor in the great central deserts of Aus-
tralia. Macro:amia spiralis has a geographical coast range of over 800 miles ex-
tending from north of Brisbane to the Victorian border.

Evidence of Poisonous Character.

Nearly all the cycadaceous plants are believed to contain some poisonous prin-
ciple in their sap, and it is said to be concentrated in the seeds. This fact seems
to be well known to all the native races in the lands where cyeads are used for
food. We find that they uniformly pursue an elaborate course of preparation
to destroy the poisonous properties. This consists in crushing the seeds with
large stones, in washing the pulp in bags laid in running' water for a certain time,
and lastly, in drying the mass and heating it over a fli-e. This method of washing
and baking the pulp, as used by the Australian aborigines, is almost identical with
that used by the natives of Brazil in preparing the arrowroot from the poisonous
cassava — Manihot utilissima.

In this connection also, GreshofE describes how the natives of the Malayan
Archipelago eat the seeds of the jjoisonous cyanogenetic plant, Pangiiim edide,
but never without submitting them to the same treatment.

Cycas revoluta, a Japanese tree, and Cijcas circinalis, a tropical East Indian
cultivated plant, are both described as having poisonous properties. In preparing
the starch or sago for food their seeds are first roasted, and tlien washed in run-
ning water for a long period to remove an astringent emetic substance. The
aqueous extract is described as fatal to chickens. Van Dongen (23) examined
the latter plant in 1903, and mentioned an amorphous glucoside, pakoein, as the
poisonous principle, but apparently nothing further was done with it.

Cijcaif werf/a of Queensland, the lai-gest of all cyeads, is also poisonous (7), and
produces a kind of paralysis of the hind limbs in cattle, sheep, and horses
rPammel (28), Ewart (29)].

In Banks' .Journal (1770) there is an incident recorded, where some of Cap-
tain Cook's men found the hulls of the nuts round a desei-ted camp fire of the
aborigines on the coast of Eastern Australia. They were thus assured that these
nuts were used as food . They found them growing in the bush and ate one or
two, after which they became very iU and were violently affected with vomiting.
Some of his pigs died and many others after showing very severe symptoms just
recovered (1) . Leichhardt also described this cycad and how the natives prejiared
food from it (16) -

Zamia integrifolia of tropical Florida is also used in a similar manner for
the preparation of arrowroot. American chemists have attempted to isolate tiie
poison, but without success.

Zamia murieata and Z. Fraseri have the same poisonous seeds, which are
treated in a similar manner for the preparation of their starch. The tuberous
bulbs also are poisonous.

Xanthnrrlwea, the Australian gi-ass-tree, though a monocotyledonous plant
and therefore far removed from the cyeads, is reported to cause the same poison-
ous symptoms as the latter', when the young shoots or green buds are eaten bv
cattle.

J2(j THE CHEMICAL EXAJIIXATIOX OF IIACKOZAIIIA SPIRALIS,

Macrozamiu. — All the species of this are reputed poisonous plants, and the
lecords of their harmful nature extend from the earliest days of the colonies.
Governor Phillip, in 1789, gave an account of M. spiruUs having formed pai't of
the diet of the Port Jackson aborigines, and of its having caused La Perouse's
sailors to become very ill with vomiting and diarrhoea after eating the nuts or
kernels of the seeds (16) .

In Grey's Journal of his two Expeditions in 1837 we have a detailed account
of the use of the seeds by the natives, of the careful treatment in order to remove
the poisonous constituent, and of the evil effects produced by eating these seeds
without this preparation . Grey found M. Frazeri on the Gairdner Range and
Mount Horner. Several of his men ate the nuts and were taken violently ill
with vomiting, vertigo and other distressing ailments, but all recovered next day
(3). This "By-yu"' nut of the natives he describes as a violent emetic and
cathartic. The natives soak it in water, bury it in the earth till the pulp is
dry, then roast it for food (2) .

Mr. J. H. Maiden records the poisoning of tiu-ee boys at Springsure in
Queensland through eating the nuts of Macrozamia Perowskiama (16) .

Baron von Mueller was quite convinced that all the eycadaceous plants are
pervaded b\- a virulent poison principle, which becomes inert or is expelled by
heat (6).

Moore, in describing the methods of the aborigines in jireparing the starch for
food, says that in the fresh state the seeds are dangerously acrid (8) .

Macrozamia spiralis was first examined chemically by Xorrie (a Sydney
pharmacist). His report was published, in Dr. Milford's paper (5), which was
read before the Royal Society of New South Wales in 1876. Norrie stated (a)
that the kernels of the seeds contained much starch and gluten; the soluble por-
tion had an acid reaction, and lime water precipitated calcium oxalate; (h) that
he had isolated potassium binoxalate which he stated was the poisonous substance
in these nuts: and (c) that he had also observed microscopic crystals of an alkaloid
in small quantity. He believed that when the nuts were heated by the natives
the potassium binoxalate would be converted into carbonate, and thus rendered
innocuous. Dr. Milford, in his paper, described the effects on human beings
after eating the nuts, viz., the severe suffering like sea-sickness, diarrhoea, and
cramps in the abdomen.

On the other hand. Dr. Bancroft stated in a Government report that the
kernels contained no poison, and that extracts of the nuts produced no delet^^rions
effect when injected into frog's and guinea-pigs. He observed that when fowls
r.nd ducks were fed at one time with a large quantity of the kernels death fre-
quently ensued after 1 or 2 days from gastro-enteritis, caused by the indigesti-
bility of the material. He stated that all parts of the plant are indigestible (9) .

Mr. F. Turner, in 1893, described the poiscmous properties of the two species
M. Miqu-elii and M. spiralis, and the methods of the aborigines in preparing the
starch for food (11).

In 1894, Govt. '\''et. Surgeon Edwards, of Western Australia, wrote a report
describing his experiments on feeding cattle with Macrozamia, and the disease
produced Imown as rickets or "wobbles." This is the most detailed account we
have. He says the disease has been known since 180,5, and is peculiar to Zamia
districts. It is characterised by partial jiaralysis of the hind limbs, the diminished
muscular power giving rise to a wobbling gait. The symptoms occurred after a

BY JAMES M. PETRIE. 427

definite period according to tlie amount eaten. A one year calf ate U lbs. of
leaves per day with other food, and showed symptoms on the seventh day; another
ate 4 lbs. per day with wheat chaft', and became ill on the eleventh day. The
author could thus induce the disease at any time and had no doubt as to the
cause. After the second week the disease became thoroughly established. It
did not produce death, but resulted in starvation. Edwards fed cattle with the
leaves, nuts, the mucilaginous secretion, and aqueous extracts of all parts of the
plant. These mucilaginous juices and extracts produced, in cattle, congestion of
the fourth stomach, intestines, liver and kidneys. He concluded that the dele-
terious effects were due to the extremely indigestible nature of the plant, and not
to any organic poison (12, 13).

Lauterer, who was experimenting in a similar way in Queensland, doubted
the conclusion of Edwards, and set out to prove his assertion of the existence of
a direct poison in the Macrozamia. In 1898, he published his results, and de-
scribed the symptoms he observed of spinal meningitis or progressive paralysis
(18).

Bancroft, after many trials in searching for micro-organisms in the animals
affected with "wobbles," obtained invariably negative results. He described the
disease as Zamia paralysis.

Lauterer stated that the leaves of M. spiralis, at certain times of the year,
contained a considerable amount of a poisonous resin, soluble in ether. The
time corresponded to the period of flowering and fruiting. The resin existed in
greatest amount in the nuts, and was also present in the half subterranean stems
or bulbs and the leaves.

In guinea-pigs and cats the feeding produced gastro-enteritis and death.
The author could not produce "wobbles" in any animals, but stated that enteritis,
through inanition, might lead to it.

Lauterer and Pound then continued their experiments, by feeding calves with
chaff mixed with the cut-up leaves of Macrozamia in the flowering stage. The
first calf ate 8 lbs. of Macrozamia leaves per day for 3 days, then refused to eat
more, and died on the fifth day. The second calf refused to eat Macrozamia
on the fifth day, ate lucerne for 2 days, and died on the tenth day. The third
calf ate for 6 days before refusing, and lived on green pasturage till the tenth
.day, when it, too, died. All these animals walked slowly, and staggered from
weakn'Bss. Post-mortems revealed symptoms of gastro-enteritis only, with in-
flamed membranes of stomach and alimentary tract (18) .

Lamb, in 1895, recorded the death of a great number of cattle in North
Queensland from paralysis of the hindquarters, attributed 4o the eating of young
shoots of 31. Miquelii (17) .

Poisoning by BI. Fraseri is recorded by Crawley in Western Australia, 1898.
Twenty-four bullocks died after eating the leaves. Owing to a gradual loss of
vitality, the animals lay down for a few days in a helpless and semi-paralysed
condition, and finally died. On post-mortem examination, the contents of the
omasum were found impacted with ingesta, which were abnormally dry. The
abomasum and intestines were empty. The spinal cord and meninges were in an
abnormal condition (19) .

Dr. Himt, of Queensland, carried out a series of feeding experiments in
1899. He observed that cattle fed on leaves, stem, bulb, and male and female
fruits, became affected after 14 days, the ration being 2 to 4 lbs. per day. Of

428

THE C'HKMICAL KXA.MIN A'i'lOX OF .\lA(,'I!OZA.MIA .SPIHALIS,

these animals suffering with Zaiuia paralysis, some being recent acute, others old
chronic cases, the author took blood, spinal and synovial fluids, and emulsion of
cord, and injected these into other healthy cattle. He failed in all cases to infect
the latter. He remarked that no case of disease had ever been produced by in-
jecting hypodermically, or by internal dosing with any substance extracted or
isolated from Macrozamias, but only by feeding with the plant itself. After long
persistence in feeding with the ])Iant, the j^ractical pennanence of symptoms
was associated with peripheral neuritis (20) .

Similar conclusions were arrived at by Professor Smith, of Sydney Univer-
sity, as a result of his experimental work.

Mr. J. H. Maiden descriljed a convincing instance of cases of poisoning in
1895-1898. In a paddock in which Macrosamia plants were growing, stock were
badly affected. The cattle were removed and the cycads cut down completely,
but left lying in the paddock. Next year the stock were put back, and in six
weeks were again suffering badly. Their stomachs were filled with the dried
Macrozamia leaves. In 1897, the paddocks were closed again, till after one year
cattle were admitted. They ate the dried withered leaves and all became ill.
In 1898 the withered leaves had all disappeared, and only the roots were left,
which had been dried for over 3 years. Cattle, when i)ut in again, ate the
roots, and became ill as before (16) .

Professor J. D. Stewart, in 1899, then chief Veterinary Officer for New
South Wales, conducted an enquiry into an outbreak of the disease at Moruya.
A hundred head of cattle of all ages were affected. The symptoms were ob-
served in all stages, and were described in detail and illustrated by photographs.
Post-mortem examinations also were conducted. These led to the conclusion of
the existence of partial motor-paralysis of the hind extremities, due to loss of
nervous control over the actions of the muscles of the parts affected (21).

In the following year. Professor Stewart caiTied out feeding experiments on
cattle. He gave each 2 lbs. per day mixed with cliaff. Symptoms of the disease
were indicated on the 23rd day, and the condition tlioroughly established in all
its manifestations 8 days later. This condition was shown to be permanent, and
for all practical purposes incurable (22) .

In 1906, Mann and Wallas analysed Macrozamia Fraseri, the Western Aus-
tralian species, and concluded that the effects upon cattle induced by eating the
plant are caused by potassium oxalate [confirming Norrie's result on 1/. spiralis
(5)]. The authors referred to the plant but did not say whether leaves or nuts
were used (24) .

In 1912, Inspector Marks was sent to the Tabulam district. New South
Wales, where in 1900 over 400 cattle had died. Heavy losses had been experi-
fnced each succeeding year till at last the leases had been given up. Zaniia
eaters with the confirmed luibit had taught the whole herd, though plenty of
green fodder was available. After some yeai-s, this neglected land was again
leased for grazing and the herds were at once affected, there being many fatalities
(25).

Dr. Cleland carried out feeding experiments on Milsou Island in 1912 and
1913. The leaflets of M. spiralis were cut up small and mixed witli cliaff, 1 to 2
lbs. per day being given to each animal which was then well fed with other
nourishing food. These experiments were of 5 months' duration, and no signs
of any poisoning effects were discovered. The author's comment is that if

BY JAMES II. PETRIE. 4:29

Maerosamia eontained any actual poisouous constituent, some signs of its action
would have been manifest in 5 months. Cattle in the poor Macrozamia country,
however, would eat the plant in sutfieient quantity to keep alive, Ijut were not
being sujiplied with vitainine (26) .

The dietetic deficiency theory put forward by Dr. Cleland was not accepted
by Professor Stewart, who has since conducted further feeding experiments.
These eliminate any suspicion of lack of vitamines being the cause of the disease.
He has obtained positive results in so far as the disease was established in animals
receiving a '"sufficient" diet, with an allowance of Macrozamia. It is understood
that the details of these later feeding experiments will be published shortly.

In 1917, Mr. F. B. Guthrie analysed the nuts and leaves of M. spiralis, and
the following results were published (27) .

Kernel- Leaves.

Water 81.79 76,67

Ash 1.07 .99

Ether extract 18 .40

Fibre 4.74 6.18

Albuminoids .03 2.64

Carbohydrates 12.19 13.31

100.00 100.00

It is important to note from these figures for the kernels, after deducting
the water and calculating the dry substance, that two thirds of this is starch and
one quarter fibre.

Experimental Work.

Macrozamia spiralis Miq. grows in great abundance in certain districts, north
and south of Sydney. A large stock of the leaves obtained from Bateman's Bay
on the south coast of New South Wales, was made available by Professor Watt
in connection with the investigation of this plant as a possible source of raw
material for tlie manufacture of commercial alcohol.

The sample consisted of the entire rachis and leaflets, each about six feet
long. Through the kindness of Mr. 6. Wright, these were air-dried and put
through a disintegrator in the School of Agriculture at the University. The fine
dry poT\'der thus obtained weighed 10.4 kilograms.

Proximate Composition of the Leaaes.

A portion of the leaf-powder was dried at 100° C. for water content, then
incinerated to obtain the amount of crude ash. Another portion was completely
extracted successively with various solvents, in a Soxhlet extractor; the extracts
were evaporated, and the residues dried at 100° and weighed. There was left
an insoluble powder containing the cellulose, fibre, and other indefinite substances.
The following results were obtained for the air-dried leaf-powder, and have
been also calculated for the fresh and completely dried leaves.

Fresh leaves. Air-dried. Dried
at 100°

Water 60.0% 9.6% —

Crude ash 1.7 3.8 4.2%

Extd. by solvents 12-9 29.2 32.3

Insol. residue 25.4 57.4 63.5

430 THE CHEMICAL EXAMINATIOX OF MACROZAMIA ISPIRALIS,

The various organic solvents removed in solution the following amounts: —

Air-dried leaves.

1. retrulfuui spirit (Ij.p. luuli-r 50^) extracted 1.19%

2. Ether „ 1.2ti

3. Chloroform „ 6.04

4. Ethyl alcohol „ 13.08

5. Water „ 7.GU

Total soluble substances 29 . 17 %

A portion of the leaves was specially te.sted for alkaloids by extracting with
ehloroform-ether-alcohol mixture. The extract, after removal of the solvents,
was heated with dilute acid, and on applying the characteristic tests for alkaloids
gave entirely negative results.

Another portion of the leaf-powder was treated specially for the isolation
of oxalic acid or oxalates, and these were proxed to be absent.
Proximate Composition of the Suts.
The bright red ovules or seeds were collected and used in the fresh condition.
One average ovule consisted of: —

Soft red outer cover 10 gms.

Hard shell 2 ,,

Soft white kernel 6 „

Total weight 18 „

These kernels eontained a harder core in the centre, and were easily cut like
a potato. When they were grated down they became a sticky pulp, resembling
thin dough, mixed with much mucilage. Exposed to the air, the pulp soon
became dry and brittle, and was then easily powdered in a mortar. A portion of
this was extracted with alcoliol. which dissolved out a small amount of fixed oil,
and then extracted with water. The insoluble residue from this extraction was
dried and weighed. In a second portion the nitrogen was estimated by Ivjel-
dahl's method. In a third portion a careful examination was made for salts of
oxalic acid . This was subsequently repeated with a much larger sample, and
the minute precipitates carefully examined under the polarising microscope, but
in none of these were any of tlie characteristic calcium oxalate crystals seen.

A large sample was washed in a muslin cloth under cold water, after which
the white starch which deposited was dried and weighed, likewise the insoluble
fibrous residue in the cloth was sep.irated and weighed. The aqueous solution
contained a considerable amount of a thick gelatinous slime, or mucilage.
Compoaitinn of the Kernels or Seeds of the Mfiero~nmia Xiits.

Calculated on
Fresh Kernel. Dried at 100°

Water 426 To —

Ash 1.0 1.7%

Extracted bv alcohol (oili .. .. 4.2.5 7.4

hot water 4.2 7.3

Insoluble residue 4S.0 83.6

100.0 100.0

Nitrogen 1.8% 3.2%

Starch .39.0 68.0

Residue left in cloth (fibrel .. .. 15.1 26.3

2nd

,. 3

3rrl

3

4tli

3

5th

, 3

6tb

. 3

7th

3

8th

4

9th

3

by james si. petrie. 431

Complete Chemical Examination.

Extraction . — For the purpose of a detailed investigation of the constituents
of the leaves, 6 kilograms of the air-dried plant powder were extracted with 80 %
alcohol, by maceration and percolation at room temperature. Three large per-
colators were employed. The fresh spirit was addetl to the first, the percolate
from this run into the second, and the percolate from the second added to the
third, thus making one complete extract. Each complete extract was assayed
for total solids contained in it ; in this way the progi-ess of the extraction was
ascertained .

1st extract, 3 litres, contained 285 gms. solid matter.

246
171
114
,) <J3 „

» 36 „

" -4 „

28 litres 975 gms.

The total solid matter, soluble in alcohol, thus obtained, represents 16 % of the
air-dried leaf -powder. The 28 litres of alcoholic extract consisted of a dark
brown fluid, and were distilled under diminished pressure to a thick syrup. The
temperature of distillation did not exceed 40° ('. After removing the solvent in
this way there remained in the still a thick, black, tarry product.

Distillation of the Extract in a Current of Steam . — The semi-solid mass was
then distilled in a current of steam, when there was obtained 2.5 litres of
aqueous distillate, and in the still an insoluble resinous mass with a large volume
of hot aqueous liquid. The latter was filtered hot, the solid portion boiled in
■water, and decanted many times till the washings were colourless. This sub-
stance, insoluble in hot water, when dry weighed 392 gms. The filtered solution
and washings were set aside to cool, and after a few days a quantity of a lirown
solid deposit separated, which was washed with cold water, and when dry weighed
64 gms . The following portions were obtained : —

A. Volatile steam distillate 2.5 litres

B . Aqueous solution 7

C. Chlorophyll and insoluble resins 392 gms.

D. Brown deposit on cooling the aqueous soln. 64 ,,

The insoluble substances in C and D. weighing 456 gms., made up 47 ff of the
whole alcoholic extract.

Examination of the Volatile Portion, A.

The distillate, measuring 2.5 litres, and showing a distinctly acid reaction to
litmus, was shaken out with ether many times.

( 1 ) . The remaining aqueous fluid was first examined : it was still acid in
reaction to litmus. When boiled with Fehling's solution it produced a slight
reduction. It also reduced mercuric oxide and silver nitrate when boiled, in-
dicating the presence of a small amount of formic acid. A little of the solution

432 THE CHEMICAL ESAIIIXATIOX OF MACROZAMIA SPIRALIS,

was evaporated with sulphuric acid, when the pungent vapours of acetic acid
were recognised, and on addition of alcohol, the odour of ethyl acetate was very
marked .

The whole fluid was neutralised with baryta water and evaporated to dry-
ness. This left a residue of barium salts of the organic acids weighing 0.93
gm., which was converted into barium sulphate.

0.93 gm. Ba salt yielded 0.847 gm. BaS04=91.1 %
Acetic acid requires „ =91.3
The barium salt represents 0.54 gm. of acetic acid in the aqueous solution, with
a trace of formic acid.

(2) . The ether extract of the volatile distUlate was agitated successively with
ammonium carbonate, sodium carbonate, and sodium hydroxide until nothing, fur-
ther was removed in solution by each solvent. These alkaline fluids were then
acidulated and extracted with ether, the solvent distilled off, and the residue
converted into barium salt by titration with decinormal baryta solution. The
latter was decomposed by sulphuric acid, and the barium sulphate weighed.

The ammonium carbonate extract was too small in amount for analysis, but
the sodium carbonate solution gave 0.226 gm. of barium salt.

0.04G5 gm. Ba salt yielded 0.032 gm. BaSO4=68.80 %
Valerianic acid, C4Hn .COOH, requires ., ^68.73
By titration the sodium carbonate extract was found to contain 0.3 gm. of
valerianic acid.

The sodium hydroxide extract was neutralised by 0.5 ec. of baryta. It
left a small residue on evaporation, which possessed the odour of cresol.

The ethereal solution remaining after the treatment with alkaline liquids
was dried and distilled at a low temperature. There was obtained in this way
a pale yellow limpid essential oil weighing 2.15 gms. This oil possessed a
strong fi'agrant odour like canq^hor, and when kept in a desiccator over suli>huric
acid, it was nearly all lost by evaporation in 3 days. This exceedingly volatile
oil left about 0 . 25 gm . of a yellow solid on spontaneous evajioration .

The volatile constituents in the steam distillate were thus identified: —

trace of formic acid ('H2O2

0.54 gm. acetic acid t^2H402

0.30 gm. valerianic acid . . . . Cr.HioOa
2.15 gms. essential oils.

For comparison with these acids we may mention the historic work of
Chevreul on another plant survival from the past, G-inlcgo hihiha, the maiden-hair
tree of China and .Japan. This is the sole representative now existing of the
very ancient branch constituting the second Order of the Gynmosperms. and
has much in common with the cycads. Ciievreul and Becharap* isolated a com-
plete series of acids from Ci to Ct, viz., formic, acetic, propionic, butyric, vale-
rianic, eaproic and caprylie acids. The second, fourth and sixtli predominated.
This result was ot)tained after many trials, and only after extracting a large
amount, 30 kilos, was sufficient of the third, fiftli and seventh acids obtained
to enable them to l)e identified. It is quite probable that small amounts of the
other acids are present in Macrozarma also, but if so they can be recognised only

•Comptes rendus de I'Acad. des Sciences, 5.3. 1861, 1225; Annales chim. et de phys., i.,
1864, 288.

By JAIIES M. PETRIE. 433

by taking a much greater quantity of material, and making this a special object
of research.

Exammatioii of the Aqueous Solution, B.

The aqueous solution : — The voluminous wa.shings and aqueous solutions
were concentrated at a low temperature, and freed from a small amount of oil
by shaking with petroleum spirit. The solution was then treated with an equal
volume of 10 % lead acetate solution, and the brown precipitate removed by the
centrifuge and washed. The filtrate was next treated with basic lead acetate
solution, and a white precipitate separated in the same way. The lead was re-
moved from the solution Ijy sulphuric acid and hydrogen sulphide, and the solu-
tion concentrated at 60° C. The hydrogen sulphide was lemoved by an air cur-
rent passed through the warm solution. The black solution was shaken up re-
peatedly with (1) ether, (2) chloroform and (3) amyl alcohol. Ether removed
about 2 gms. of a viscous resinous substance, chloroform removed only a trace,
and amyl alcohol a dark brown syru]!. These substances yielded nothing of a
crystalline natui-e. They were dissolved in ether and shaken out successively
witli ammonium carbonate, sodium carbonate and sodium hydroxide, neutralised
and again agitated with ether, but nothing could be obtained in this way.

Each of these extracts was carefully tested for alkaloids but only negative
results were obtained.

The aqueous solution remaining after treatment with the above organic sol-
vents, was distilled in a current of steam till free from amyl alcohol, and set
aside. After some time crystals separated, and these were found to consist only
of potassium salts. No tannin was present in this solution, and saponins were
absent .

Picric acid gave a large precipitate of needle crystals of potassium salt.
When boiled with potash, much ammonia was evolved, and Fehling's solution
showed an immediate and strong reduction .

The osazones were next prepared from the solution, and when the product
was examined under the microscope it was identified as the characteristic yellow
crystals of phenyl glucosazone. These were purified by six recrystalUsations
from dilute alcohol, and then showed a melting point of 206° C. (corrected).

The melting point of the osazone of glucose is given as 205° . The pre-
dominating sugar is therefore glucose.

The solution also gave strong reactions for furf uraldehyde .

The total solid content of this aqueous fluid was 350 gms. or 36 % of the
alcoholic extract.

Ej:amitiation of the lead acetate jirecipitates. — These lead deposits were treated
with sulphuric acid and hydrogen sulphide to remove the lead, and the hydrogen
sulphide boiled off. The solutions were treated with animal charcoal till nearly
colourless and then concentrated. They showed no reactions with ferric chloride
or sulphuric acid. When neutralised with sodium hydroxide, heavy gelatinous
white precipitates were obtained, and Feliling's solution was strongly reduced.

The fluid was shaken out with ammonium carbonate, sodium carbonate and
sodium hydroxide, then agitated with ether and acid, but nothing was obtained
from any of these extracts in this way. The remaining solution from the normal
lead precipitate, after standing some time, deposited a considerable amount of
anhydrous calcium sulphate, in masses of white, needle-shaped cr>-stals, matted
together .

434 THE CHEMICAL EXAUINATIOX OF IIACROZAMIA SPIRALIS,

Examination of the Resins, C.

The resinous mass insoluble in hot water, which was left in the still after
the removal of the volatile eonstituents by steam distillation, when dry weighed
392 gms., or 40 ^c of the total contents of the alcoholic extract .

This substance was a dark brown powder. It was dissolved in the smallest
amount of alcohol, mixed witli purified sawdust and completely dried to constant
weight. The dried mass thus rendered porous was transferred to a Soxhlet ap-
paratus, and extracted successively and completely with petroleum spirit (b.p.
below 50° C), ether, cldoroform, and alcohol. After each of these extracts was
distilled to remove the solvent, and the residues dried at 110° and weighed, the
following results were obtained : —

1 . Petroleum sjiirit extract 35 gins . 8.9%

2. Ether extract 38 „ 9.7

3. Chloroform extract 4 ,, 1.0

4. Alcohol extract (iO „ 15.4

Left unextracted 255 „ 05.0

Total 392 .. 100.0

This table shows that although 392 gms. of this mixture originally were in
alcoholic solution, being extracted from the leaves with this solvent, 255 gins, had
now liecome insoluble in that liquid, forming nearly two-thirds of tlie original
extract .

Two factors may explain this anomaly: — The i)etroleum spirit extract con-
tains all the oils and fats. Certain substances are intimately associated in tlie
plant with these oils and are soluble in them alone. 'I'licy are removed together
■with the oils in the extraction of the leaves by alcohol. When subse(|uently the
oils and fats are removed by petroleum spirit these other constituents, having
lost their special solvent, are now rendered completely insoluble in alcohol. In
the second place the leaves were originally extracted with 80 % alcohol (contain-
ing 5 % wood-spirit), and in the resin analysis 98 9r ethyl alcohol was used.

i. Petroleum spirit extract of the Ttesins. — The solvent was removed by
distillation, and the residue of 35 gms. was dissolved in ether leaving a small
amount of insoluble brown residue, which weighed 0.2 gm. The ethereal solution
was then agitated a number of times with (1) ammonium carbonate, (2) sodium
carbonate. (3) sodium hydroxide, . (4) water, for the separation of organic acids.
The alkaline extracts were rendered acid with sulphuric, and shaken back with
ether, the solvent distilled off, and the residue examined. In this way (1) am-
monium carbonate yielded 0.25 gm. of a grey amorpjious residue. (2) The
sodium carbonate extract yielded a small <|uantity of a dark brown oil. At the
same time there was precipitated by sulphuric acid about 10 gms. of a brown
solid substance. The latter with the acid fluid was distilled in a current <if
steam, hut from the distillate only a trace of volatile acids was obtained. Tlie
acid liquid remaining in the still, however, when titrated \v\th baryta snhiticm
and evapoiated, yielded the barium salt of acetic acid.

0.4(i0 gm. Ra salt gave 0.410 gm. BaS04=89.2%
Barium acetate requires „ =-01.3
The amount was eiiual to about 0.7(1 gm. of acetic acid. The l)ro\vii solid sub-
stance mentioned above, of 10 gms. weight, was treated witli petrdlcum spirit

BY JAllKS M. PETRIE. 435

in wbieh 3.3 gms. dissolved, etiier dissolved 1 gm., and the remainder was soluble
in aleoliol only. These residues appeared to he complex mixtures of acids, and
were not further examined. (3) The sodium hydroxide extract contained much
chlorophyll. When acidiHed and shaken out with ether 0.2 gm. of substance
■was obtained. (4) The water extract after caustic soda treatment yielded to
petroleum spirit 6.6 gms. of a white fatty substance, which was filtered and
waslied with cold alcoliol. On recrystallisation a number of times from petro-
leum s])irit, it showed a melting point of 47.5° ('., and solidified at 46° ('. The
solution of this substance possessed an acid reaction.

0.155 gm. required 4.85 ccs. of decinormal alkali to neutralise it to phenol-
phtlialein. This gives for a monobasic acid, the molecular weight of 320. The
iodine-value by Hubl's method was determined: —

(1). 0.1097 gm. absorbed 0.058 gm. of iodine=52.9 %
(2). 0.1012 „ 0.054 " „ =53.1

The iodine-value eorresppnds to 59 % of oleic acid, and leaves 41 % with a mole-
cular weight approximating 374, as probably one of the higher homologues of
stearic acid.

Isolation of Phytoaterol.

The ethereal solution which remained from the last section, after extraction
with alkalis and water, was distilled off. This residue consisted of a mixture of
fats and oils, with cei-tain unsaponifiable substances, and weighed 10 gms. It
was hydrolysed by boiling for 6 hours with an alcoholic solution of potassium
hydroxide, and the products of saponification brought into aqueous solution by
heating on the water-bath. In this way there were separated a black insoluble
unsaponified portion, and a strongly alkaline aqueous solution . The whole was
cooled and agitated with ether many times until notliing further was brought out
in solution .

The unsaponified portion. — The ethereal solution, dark l)rown in colour, con-
tained 0.5 gm. of solid, and was distilled off leaving a residue of impure, much
discoloured crystals. The latter were dissolved in alcohol and digested with
animal charcoal. They were then obtained in a fairly pure condition, and were
redissolved and recrystallised twice from dilute alcohol.

The crystals were pure white witli glistening surfaces, but under the nucro-
scope appeared of two kinds — a few broad rectangular flakes with dome ends,
and the greater portion consisting of lath-shaped forms with pointed ends.

The broad flaky crystals presented the appearance of cholesterol, with low
refractive index, and with the characteristic bites out of the sides.

The lath-shaped forms resembled some phytosterol crystals.

The crystals were exceedingly soluble in chloroform, and the following
specific tests were applied : —

Salkowski's reaction — A chlorufurm solution and concentrated sulphuric
acid were mixed, when the former assumed a blood-red colour and the acid a deep-
green fluorescence; the red solution when removed and evaporated slowly changed
colour, through purple, violet, blue and finally colourless ; on again adding sul-
phuric acid the original crimson colour was restored .

Liehermann's reaction — acetic anhydride and a drop of sulphuric acid added
to a chloroform solution gave a rich rose-red colour.

Iodine and sulphuric acid gave a violet colour, changing to blue and green .

Schiff's reagent gave a reddish violet residue.

436 THE CHEMICAL EXAMIXATIOX OF MACROZAMIA SPIRALIS,

These positive reactions place the substance in the group of phj-tosterols.

Purification and physical properties of the phytosterol. — After five recrys-
tallisations from 95 % alcohol the greater portion of the substance was obtained
in one fraction which, under the microscope, showed crystals of a uniform kind,
laths with pointed ends. A second small fraction contained a mixture of the
phytosterol with some few crystals like cholesterol. The first fraction was used
for the following determinations : —

Estimation of water of cri/stallisation.

0.3301 gm. heated in the oven at 110° C. lost 0.015 gm.
Loss in weight 4.54 ^r water

C27H40O.H2O contains 4.46

Formation of acetate.
.2657 gm. of the anhydrous crystals was boiled with acetic
anhydride; the product evaporated and weighed, gave
.2937 gm. of phytosterol acetate.

Increase in weight 10 . 0 %

C27H460(CO.CH3) requires 10.9
Melting points. — The first fraction of the phytosterol containing its water of
crystallisation showed a constant melting point of 132° C. (corrected). The
second fraction gave a melting point of 135° ('. The phytosterol acetate crystals
melted at 120° C. (corrected^.

Optical properties. — A polarimetric deteruiination nf the substance was made
with a Schmidt and Haensch polarimeter. A solution of .2657 gm. of the
phytosterol crystals in 15 ccs. of ether, and equivalent to a 1.7714 '^,'c solution,
was used in a 1 dcm. tul)e. A laevo-rotation was recorded of — 0.61° at a tem-
perature of 16° C.

The specific rotatory jiower. „ = — 34.5.

This biochemical group, of which cholesterin is flic licst known, has l)een
called by Abderhalden the sterins (Lehrbuch der physiol. Chemie) . These ap-
pear to be intimately a^^sociated with the fats and oils in all living cells, and have
certain well defined properties. Their physical constants, however, are found to
vary within certain limits, showing that not one substance but several closely
related compounds exist.

Cholesterin of animal tissue has been known for fifty years, but of the
analogous compounds iu plants, the pliytosterins, our knowledge is very recent.
They occur both in the free state and as esters. Chemically, they are unsaturated
alcohols of high molecular weight, having the constitution of cyclic polyterpenes.

In the literature available to the author the investigation of 06 different plants
includes the isolation and identification of their phytosterins . In the English
literature the term phytosterols is adhered to throughout. In ultimate composi-
tion they arc found to range from C20 to C.-io. l)ut two-thirds of the number have
the formula ('27H4(iO and the great majority possess tlie general formula
C^Hon—gO. These 44 phytosterols have —

a melting point between 130° and 138° C.

optical rotation „ — 30 „ — 41

2 groups of acotafcs fl ) m.]-). ., 118 „ 122

(2) „ „ 125 ., 128

BY JAMES M. PETIvIE. 437

Tliose possessing- the latter constants for their acetates were distinguisheil by
Burian as sitosterols

The phytosterol of Macrozamda spiralis possesses the following physical
constants : —

molting- point, 13-2. C' C.

oiitical rotation. — 34.5
acetate m.p., 120.0° C.

It therefore falls in the tirst of the two groups.

Separation of Hydrocarbons.

The alcoholic mother-liquors, left after crystallising- out the phytosterols, were
united, and on further concentration a small quantity of cream-coloured fatty
solid was separated. This substance, when purified by digesting with animal
charcoal and se-^-eral crystallisations, possessed the properties of a saturated hydro-
carbon, and a constant melting point of 65° C. The weight was insufficient for
analysis, and was not further examined. The melting- point of the paraffin
triacontane, C30H82, as observed by Tutin, is 65° C.

There now remained of the unsaponified substances only an uncrystallisable
dark yellow oil, weighing about 2 gms.

Something of the nature of this oil was ascertained by treating a portion
with a small piece of sodium, when only a few micro-bubbles of gas were pro-
duced, even on heating to 75° C. The substance therefore was not an alcohol.
This point was confirmed by acetylation of the substance: when boiled with acetic
anhydride and the products separated, no gain in weight was observed. The sub-
stance therefore did not contain a hydroxyl group.

The yellow oil was next distilled under a pressure of 30 mms. ; the first
drop collected at 180° C, and the greater part passed over at about 220°. The
distillate was a pale yellow fluid which solidified on cooling in microerystalline
needles. This clear distillate was quite solid at 16° C, and when carefully
warmed became a viscous fluid at 20° ; the melting point lay between 17° and 19°
C. By careful bromination of the substance in solutions of carbon bisulphide,
it was oljscrved that the bromine decolourised but almost no hydrobromic acid
was formed, — evidence that onl.y addition products were present. The absence
of substitution of bromine points to the absence of paraffins.

The olefine hydrocarbon, oetodeeylene, CisHso. possesses the melting point
of 18° C. and boiling point 183° C., under a pressure of 30 mms.

The Sapoiiified Oils.

The strong alkaline solution obtained by hydrolising the petroleum spirit
extract of the resins, and after removal by ether of the unsaponified sul)stances,
was now treated for fatty acids by adding sulphuric acid and distillation in a
current of steam.

The distillate was faintly acid, and contained a small amount of a greenish
solid, which was filtered off and examined. Tlie substance was recrystallised
from alcohol a number of times, and then consisted of 50 mgs. of nearly white
crystals in small globular masses. The melting point was 45° C. The neutral-
isation equivalent was determined in alcoholic solutions, the titration ended sharply
and required 20 ccs. of eentinormal alkali to neutralise 40 mgs., which is equiva-
lent to a neutralisation value of 200.

Laurie acid, C12H24O a, requires 200 and possesses a melting point of 43.6° C.

438 THE CHEMICAL EXAMINATION' OF MACROZAMIA SPIRALIS,

The titrated sodium salt in alcoholic solution was then precipitated by baryta,
and the barium compound convei'ted into sulphate.

0.0383 gm. Ba salt yielded 0.0162 gm. BaSO^.
e(|uivalent to BaS04 42.3 %
Barium laurate requires 43.5 %
The substance was therefore lauric acid, ('12 H24 O2

The aqueous distillate, from which the above solid lauric acid had to be
filtered, was treated by shaking out with etlier; but nothing was removed in solu-
tion except a trace of an acid too small to identify. The acjueous distillate was
titrated with decinormal barium hydroxide, and required 42 ccs. The solution
was evaporated to dryness and weighed. During the lieating the strong odour of
acetic acid was detected.

0.3973 gm. Ba salt yielded 0.3(571 gm. BaS04=92.4%
Barium acetate requires „ 01.3

The substance is therefore acetic acid, C2H4O2.

The acid liquid remaining in the distillation fla.sk was shaken out with petra-
leum spirit. This removed a dark coloured solid nuiss which weighed 3 gms., and
consisted of the higher fatty acids including stearic and oleic acids; they were
not further examined.

The same acid liquid after treatment with petroleum spirit was agitated with
ether. This solvent removed about 1 gm. of solid substance in solution, which
eousisted of resins and resin acids.

ii. The ether ea-tract of the h'esiitn: — 'I'lie ether extract weigliing 38 gins.
■was examined in the following manner.

A portion of the extract was dissolved in alcohol and poured into a large
volume of water, when a dark green insoluble mass separated and was deposited.
The a(|ueous portion was a pale green colloidal solution wliich did not settle. The
resinous contents could not be induced to separate either by spinning in a high-
speed centrifuge, filtering by the suction pump, allowing to .stand several weeks,
or by addition of such reagents as sodium citrate, magnesium sulphate, ether or
alcohol. When agitated, however, with a little dilute sulphuric acid, instant
separation took place, light green resins were deposited, which were filtered off
from a clear a(|ueous fluid, and washed with water till acid-free.

The total deposited resins were dried and extracted with prepared sawdust in
a Soxlilet extractor (1) with chloroform, (2) with alcohol. From each of these
exti-acts the solvent was removed by distillation, dried and weighed.
27 gms. soluble in chloroform.

5 gms. insoluble in chloroform, soluble in alcohol.

6 gms insoluble in chloroform, insoluble in alcohol.

Each of tlu'se i)ortions was examined separately in great detail. Their solutions
in ether were agitated with sodium carbonate, sodium hydroxide, and water. Each
solution was carefully purified by animal charcoal and evaporated spontaneously,
but in no case could any crystalline substance be isolated. Amorphous residues
were obtained in all cases.

The jjortion insoluble in chloroform but solul)Ie in alcohol was a black bi'ittle resin-
ous substance; when its alcoholic solution was poured into water it assumed .1
brilliant pale g-reen and bright blue fluorescence.

iii. The chlorofdrm and iv. tlie alcohol extracts of the oriyiiial renin. — Tliese,
following the petroleum spirit and ether extractions, were treated in the same
manner as the ether suhible portion, l)ut only aiii()ri)1ious resins wei-c obtained.

BV JAMES M. PETRIE. 439

The liesi>is (lepo^iited from Cold Water, D.
The light browu resinous powder obtained by settling the original aqueous
solution of the resins, and weighing 04 gms., was dissolved in a little alcohol and
mixed with prepared sawdust. The whole was then thoroughly dried, and ex-
tracted ia a Soxhh't apparatus, successively with organic solvents. The jdeld ob-
tained was : —

Extracted by ether 10 %

„ chloroform 1

„ alcohol 21

Insoluble 68

The brown resin contained 1.2 % of inorganic salts. From each of these
extracts the solvent was distilled, and the residual substance examined. Nothing
crystalline was obtained from any [jortion, and they seemed to be composed of
amorphous resins.

Fekdixg Experijiexts with Maceozajiia spiralis.
The animals used were white rats. They were kept singly in metal cages,
and their normal food consisted of bread, or dog-biscuit, and water.

(i.) With the fnesh leaf -powder. — The powdered leaves were mixed with
bread or biscuit into a paste with water. 10 gins, of leaves were thus given daily
to each of four rats. In most cases the ration was tinished, but at the end of two
weeks they ceased to eat any more, and after starving for a number of days they
were put back on normal diet.

These animals were very lively and active, showing no ill effects at the end
of the experiment, nor after some weeks.

(ii.) With the constituents of the <ether extract. — It has been stated in the
historical part above (p. 427), that Lauterer, of Queensland, separated from the
ieavt'S of Macrozamia by extraction with ether, a quantity of resin, to which he
attributed the poisonous effects.

For the purpose of testing tliese resins a quantity of the leaves were treated
in a special manner.

A quantity of the air-dried leaf-powder weighing 2.5 kilos was thoroughly
extracted in large i)ercolators with ether. After distilling off the solvent, there
remained a viscous residue weighing 94 gms. (dry weight), which consisted of
oils, fats and resins. Instead of using this entire extract it was further analysed by
dissolving in a little alcohol, mixing with prepared sawdust, and completely drying
tiie mass. This was extracted in a Soxhlet successively with {a) petroleum
spirit, (b) ether, tc) alcohol.

The petroleum spirit extract was found to be the greatest in amount : it was
further subdivided by shaking out successively with (1) sodium carbonate, (2)
sodium hydroxide.

The weights of these different portions finally obtained were : —
(a) Petroleum spirit extract —

Sodium carbonate solution 15 o-ms.

Sodium hydroxide ,, 30

Petrol, spirit ., 20

(6) Ether extract 24

(c) Alcohol extract 5

94 „

440 THE CHEMICAL EXAIIIXATIOX OF IIACROZAJIIA SPINALIS,

These various portions were divided into small amounts for feeding purposes,
to last about two weeks. Each portion, mixed as before with about 10 gms. of
bread or biscuit, was fed to a rat. Water also was given in each case.

All these extracts were readily and completely eaten. The rats apparently
enjoyed the rations- and remained throughout the period of two to three weeks
very active and well. These experiments show that nothing of the nature of
Lauterer's poisonous resins was jircsent.

(iii.) With the aqueous extract of tlie nuts. — About 1 kiln, of the seeds was
made intj a pulp, and extracted with 2 litres of water and 1 cc. of toluene.
After 3 days, with frequent stirring, it was filtered through cloth into a tall
cylinder, to allow the gi'eater portion of the starch to deposit.

The solution thus obtained was given to two rats, the ration for each being
made up of 30 ces. of the fluid, with bread and biscuit soaked in it. This was
given daily for 22 days, at the end of which period the two rats appeared quite
normal and active.

The supposed poisonous principle said to be removed fi'om the nuts by wash-
ing with water, and which would have been in the above solution, was not found
in these experiments

(iv.) With the fresh nuts. — Nuts were fed to two rats, with no other food, but
with plenty of water. Both animals died of impaction within three days, and no
other abnormal s_\Tuptoms were detected.

In the historical record given above (p. 425), it will be noticed that animals
were affected in two different ways. (1) Symptoms were rapidly manifested with-
in the first three or four days after eating the Macrozamia. The animals became
slow in their movements, dragged the hind limbs, and finally died of impaction.
This condition would include the gastro-enteritis mentioned l)y certain authoi's.
(2) Symptoms wei'c gradually produced after three or four weeks' feeding-. 'I'he
condition was entirely different from the fonner, and was said to produce peri-
pheral neuritis, and partial paralysis, etc. The animals, though incurable, might
live on if cared for. but if not, they usually died of starvation.

The results of the experiments with the white rats were positive for the
former, but entirely negative for the latter condition.

The symptoms rie-scribed for the real Jilacrozamia poisoning are characterised
by the slow onset of the disease, but when fully established, the disease has not
been associated with any very definite pathological changes. These symjitoms, in
a general sense, have also been observed after animals lia\e fed for long jieriods
on certain other plants, for example, the Grasstrees, the Darling Peas, Lnthiinis,
Loco weeds, etc., and in none of these has any active poisonous chemical compound
been identified.

This cliemical investigation has shown that the Macrozamia contains no active
poisonous principle which could be isolated or identified, or any indiridual con-
stituent which could be a.ssociated with the disea.se.

Summjusy.

Macrozamia spiralis, which grows abundantly along the East Coast of New
South Wales, has been regai'ded as a poisonous plant from the earliest days of
the Colony.

A complete summary of its poisonous record is given.

The chemical composition of its leaves is eharaeterised by a large amount of
amorphous resins.

to J

BY JAMES II. PETKIE. 441

The t'ollowing constituents were identified : —

Formic, acetic, valerianic and laurie acids.

Oleic, stearic, and higher fatty acids.

A very volatile essential oil.

A phytosterol with m.p. 132°, opt rot. — 34.5, and in.p. of acetate 120° C

A jiaraffln, with the properties of triaeontane C30H62, and an oleflne having
the properties of uctodecylene.

The nuts contained 39 % of starch, and much mucilage.

In the feeding experiments, white rats were given, with their ordinary food,
(1) the crushed fresh leaves, (2) the grated seeds, (3) the rich, fatty, and resinous
components extracted from the leaves by ether, and which Dr. Lauterer stated
contained the poisonous principle, (4) the aqueous extracts of the leaves, and the
seeds, by which the aborigines believed the poison was removed.

The animals showed no signs of being affected after three weeks' feeding
the material was apparently not poisonous to white rats. With careless feed-
ing the animals are easily killed by impaction, which is due to the fibrous nature
of the material .

References to the Poisonous Properties or Australian Cycads
(Arranged in chronological order of publication.)

1. Banks. — Jouru. of Sir J. Banks on Cook's First Voyage, 1770, pp. 299,

313, E. coast of Aust. ; p. 421, Prince's Is.

2. Grey, G. — Yo'-.. of Dialects of S.W. Aust., Notes on Food of Aborigines,

1840, p. 22.

3. Journ. of 2 Expeds. of Discovery in N.W. Aust., 1841, vol. ii.,

p. 61, 295.

4. Bennett.— N.S.W. Med. Gaz., ii., 1871, 1.

5. Mii.FORD.— Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., x., 1876, 295.

6. Mueller.— Chem. and Drug., Melb., 1883.

7. Palmer.— Journ. Boy. Soc. N.S.W., xvii., 1883, 97.

8. Moore.— Journ. Roy." Soc. N.S.W., xvii., 1883, 115.

9. Bancroft.— The Queenslander, 1890 (thro. Turner (11).)

10. Brisbane Courier, Oct. 29, 1892.

11. Turner.— Agric. Gaz. N.S.W., iv., 1893, 158.

12. Edwards.— Journ. Bur. Agric. W.A., i., 1894, 225.

13. Producers' Gaz. and Settlers' Record, W.A., v., 1898, 399.

14. Maiden.— Agric. Gaz. N.S.W., iv., 1893.

15. „ viii., 1897, 20.

16. „ X., 1899, 738, 1259.

17. Lamb.— Agric. Gaz. N.S.W., vi., 1895, 505.

18. Lauterer.— Proc. Roy. Soc. Q., xiv., 1898.

19. Cra wlet.— Producers' Gaz. and Settlers' Record, W.A., v., 1898, 399.

20. Hunt.— Ann. Rep. Dept. of Agric, Q., 1899, 71.

21. Stewart.— Dept. of Agi-ic. N.S.W., Misc. Pub. No. 344, 1899.

22. „ „ ,, Ann. Rept. Stock Branch, 1900, p. 20.

23. Van Don gen. — 1903, thro. Wehmer's Die Pflanzenstoffen.

24. Mann and Wallas.— Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., xl., 1906, xxi.

25. Marks— Agric. Gaz. N.S.W., xsdii., 1912, 1056.

442 THE CHEMICAL EXAMIN'ATIOX OF MACROZAMIA SPIRALIS.

26. Clelant).— Ann. Rept. Bur. of Mirrobiol., 1(112, p. 212.

27. Guthrie. — Agxic. Gaz. N.S.W., x.xviii., 1917, G25, 865; [p. 625 also ((not-

ed in Turner (11).]

28. Pammel. — Manual of Poisonous Plants, p. 325.

29. EWART. — Weeds and Poi.sonous Plants, p. 65.

References to Gums and Storcli.

30. Blackett.^ — Gums. Aust. Supp. to Cliem. and Drug.. May, 1882.

31. Maiden. — Macrozamia gtim. Pharm. Joum., xxi., 1890, 7.

32. Lauterer. — Macrozamia gum. Cbem. and Drug, of Anstrala-sia, 1890.

33. Wagner.— The Zamia Palm of N.S.W. and Q. Starkefabrikation, 1886.

34. Rowley. — The Coml. Utilisation of Macrozamia in W.A. Joum. Soc.

Chem. Tnd.. 35, 1916.

35. Harker. — Macrozamia spiralis a.s a source of industrial alcohol. Joum

Inst. Sc. & Ind., Melb., i., No. 8, 1919, p. 470.

443

TWO NEW HYMENOPTERA OF THE SUPERFAMILY
PROCTOTRYPIDAE FROM AUSTRALIA.

By Alan P. Dodd.

{Communicated brj W. W. Froggatt, F.L.S.)

(^ LIBRAF

Among a small collection of Micro-Hymenoptera kindly lent me by Mr. W.
W. Froggatt, Government Entomologist of New South Wales, the two species
described herein were picked out as new ; of these one is of special interest, being
a primary parasite of the Sheep-Maggot Flies.

I am very miii^h indebted to Mr. Froggatt for the loan of the sjjecimens.
and also for the data and information contained in his lettei-s.

Family DIAPRIIDAE.

Hemilexomyia, n. gen .

?• — In Kieffer's table of genera (Genera Insectorum, 1911), running to
Uemilexis Foerster, Paramesius W^estwood, and Spilomicrus Westwood; closely
related to all these genera and combining many of their characteristics, but at
once differing in the incised base of the body of the abdomen, and the very
long stigmal vein ; Uemilexis and Spilovucrus possess a more or less truncate
abdomen at the apex, but in botli the.se the base of the body of the abdomen is
distinctly raised from the petiole, whereas Paramesius, which does not possess
the latter character, has the apex of the abdomen narrow and pointed. The
detailed generic characters are given in the description of the species.

Type, Hemilexomyia abrupta, n.sp.

Hemilexojivia abrupta, n.sp.

?. — Length, 5.5 mm. Shining black; legs, including the coxae, bright red;
antennae red, the apical half more or less dusky; tegulae red.

Head normal ; smooth and shining, except for scattered small punctures
each bearing a long fine seta; viewed from above, sub-rectangular, about twice
as wide as long; viewed from the side, the frons triangular, the antennal prom-
inence distinct; cheeks broad; eyes moderately large, giving off a few long setae;
ocelli large, close together. Antennae inserted on a prominence in centre of
frons, 13-jointed; scape long and slender; pedicle and flagellar joints with scat-
tered long pubescence; pedicel twice as long as its greatest width: flagellum
without a distinct dub, the apical seven joints a little thickened; joint 1 cylin-
drical, one-half longer than pedicel (in two specimens from ]\Iarsden longer and
twice as long as pedicel) ; joint 2 one-half as long as 1; joints 3 and 4 subequal,

444 TWO NEW HYMENOPTERA OP THE SUPERFAMILY PROCTOTRYPIDAE,

a little shorter than 2, joints 5-10 suliequal, subglubose, aliuul as long- as wide;
apical joint conical, one-third longer than preceding. Thorax normal, twice as
long as its greatest width; pronotal neck short and stout, the pronotuin itseli'
hardly \'isible from above; scutum and scutellum smootli and shining, with a few
small sctigerous punctures; scutum almost as long as its greatest width, broadly
rounded anteriorly, the parapsidal furrows very deep, complete, and foveate;
scutellum longer than its width at apex, subquadrate, at base with two large
deep almost circular foveae, situated slightly obliquely to each other, each tra-
versed by two or three more or less obscure earinae, their inner margins carin-
ate, the narrow area between appearing as a shallow fovea (sometimes there are
two of these shallow foveae) ; lateral margins of scutellum without a fovea, the
posterior margin finely foveate; postscutellum conspicuous, carinate; median seg-
ment long, rugose, at base with an acutely laised carina (from lateral aspect
appearing as a raised tooth) which branches to form laterally a distinct blunt
tooth on either side, below these teeth are the blunt-toothed or subacute latero-
posterior angles, and there is also a blunt tooth or protuberance on either side
against the lateral margins anteriorly; median segment jiosteriorly with a short
stout neck, rorewing-s very long and broad, extending a little beyond apex of
abdomen; stained yellowish; venation thick and distinct, fuscous; submarginal
vein well distant from the costa which it joins at half wing length; marginal
vein somewhat thickened, almost as long as the stigmal vein which is perpendicu-
lar and very long for tlie family; pale yellow lines indicate basal, median, dis-
coidal, recurrent, and radial veins. Hindwings two-thirds as long as the fore-
wings, narrow slender, with a long costal vein. Petiole of abdomen stout, a
little longer than wide, its lateral margins carinate, rugose, and with a paired
median carina that projects into the incised abdomen ; body of abdomen slender,
about three times as long as its greatest width, conical, but the apex is blunt;
\iewed from the side gently convex above and beneath, and aljruptly truncate at
apex; smooth and shining, with a very few scattered setae; consisting of one
segment only; anterior margin triangularly incised to form a short basal fovea.
Legs slender; trochanters long and slender; femora slender for basal third, then
much thickened ; tibiae and tarsi slender, the latter 5-joint.ed with a pair of slen-
der tarsal claws; intermediate tibiae a little longer than their femora, their tarsi a
little longer than t'le tibiae; posterior tibiae plainly longer than their femora,
and a little longer than their tai-si, the basal tarsal joint as long as 2-4 united ;
legs pilous, the tarsi spiny; posterior tibiae with two apical spurs.

Described from the following series; three females collected by L. Wilson
at Mai-sden, South-west Riverina, N.S.W., 15.5.19in, and bred from pupae of
one of the sheep-maggot flies; one female lired from jiupae of Opln/ra iiifjra
Wied., Uardry, near Hay. N.S.W., 20.8.101(1, J. L. Froggatt; three fcm."iles
bred from pujiae of CaViplioni {NcopoUinnxa) viUosa R.D., Moree, N.S.W.. .T.
L. Froggatt; one female caught by sweeping pine scrub, Grenfell, X.S.W., 1918,
W. W. Froggatt. Thus the species is well established in the State.

In Farmer's Bulletin No. 113, June, 1917. of the Xcw South "Wales Deiiart-
ment of Agiiculture, "Sheep-Maggot Flics, No. ."?." l)y W. W. Froggatt and J.
L. Froggatt, on page 32 the discovery of this parasite is recorded and a general
description gix'cn, and on the opposite page \cry good fig-iircs are gi\en. The
following extract is taken from this bulletin : "This is a very dififerent hymenop-
teron from the previous ones found attacking the maggots and pupae of the

BV ALAN P. DODD. 445

blow-Hies,* and, iis only about half a dozen specimens have been secured, it is
not of much economic importance; yet, as it is evidently a primary parasite, it
is well worth noticing."

The Diapriidae appear to conliue their activities to Dipterous host*;, but so
far this record of their breeding is the first in Australia.

The species is somewhat \ariable in tlie relative length of the pedicel and
first flagellar joint, and in the foveae at the base of the seutellum. One
female has a consnieuous thick protuberance at the apex of the abdomen; this
process is very p()ssil)ly retractile, which would account for its absence in the
other specimens.

The types and cotypes are in the collections of Mr. W. W. Frog-gatt ; one
cotype i.s in the author's collection.

Family BELYTIDAE.

This family does not seem to be well represented in Australia, sixteen spe-
cies having been recorded. The species described below differs considerably from
all the Australian forms, falling in the group in which the seutellum is more or
less spiued or toothed, and containing four South American species described by
Kieffer (Ann. Soc. Sci. Brussels, xxxiii., 1909) in four different genera, Pros-
oxylahls Kieffer, Monoxylabis Kieffer, Aci<Jopf<iliis Kieffer, and Odontopsilus
Kieffer, of which the first alone is founded on a female; the insect described
herewith shows some diversity in the venation from all these, but the autlior does
not deem it advisable to propose a new genus for its reception.

Prosoxylabis pictipennis, n.sp.

?. — Lciigth, 3.5mm.

Head, thorax (except the scutum), abdominal petiole, and the legs very deep
red; scutum and body of abdomen bright chestnut; the first eight antennal joints
bright reddish yellow, the apical seven black.

Head uoi-mal, subglobose, the antennal in-ominence \ery distinct: from lateral
aspect the frons triangular, covered with a dense fine golden pubescence; eyes
moderately small, ocelli small, close together. Antennae 15-jointed; scape slender,
as long as the four following joints, combined ; pedicel short, a little longer than
wide; funicle joint 1 distinctly longer, twice as long as its greatest width; 2-6
gradually shortening. 6 as wide as long; club 7-jointed' (the first club joint really
forms a transition between the funicle and club), its joints 1-6 somewhat wider
than long, the apical joint twice as long as the penultimate. Thorax about twice
as long as its gieatest width; pronotum not visible from above; scutum plainly
wider than long, covered with long fine golden pubescence, the parapsidal fur-
rows delicate; seutellum on either side of basal fovea with dense golden pub-
escence, its disc with scattered pubescence; basal fovea large, subcircular, divideil
by a median carina that continues along the disc to terminate in a blunt tubercle
or tooth ])osteriorly ; postscutellum and median seginent with a dressed sparse
pubescence, the latter long. Forewings long and broad, extending well beyond
apex of abdomen, marginal cilia short ; discal cilia very dense and rather coarse
very deeply embrowned, with a broad subhyaline band across the wing a little
before the apex, a small subhyaline area just before the marginal vein, and a

'The two other known enemies of sheep-maggot flies are the Chalcids Nasonia brez'i-
coniis Oirault ami Saunders, and Cha/cis calliphorae Froggatt.

44tj TWO Nfc:\V HYilKXOPTERA OF TJIK >['PK1!FA-\IILY PROCTOTRVPIDAK.

similar area a little beyoud the marginal vein, both against the costa ; the broiul
band has its proximal margin straight, its distal margin deeply incised at tlic
middle; venation obscure, consisting ot a submargiiial vein which joins the costa
at nearly half wing length, a short linear marginal vein continued in a very
oblique stigmal vein; no other veins visible. Petiole of abdomen long, several
times as long as wide, and half as long as body of abdomen, carinate laterally
and with three dorsal carinae; body of abdomen broadly ovate, not much longer
than its greatest Avidth, whollj' smooth and shining, the second segment (first
body segment) occup\'ing four-fifths of the suiface, the remaining segments very
short and transverse. Legs nonnal, the femora elavate, the tibiae and tarsi
slender.

Described from une female labelled "In moss. Mt. "Wellington, Tasmania,
20.2.1902."

The paucity in the venation is possibly due to the cloudiness of the wings.

The type is in the collection of 'Sir. "W. W. Froggatt.

447

CYANOGENESIS IN PLANTS.

Part IV. — The Hyiuiocyaxic Acid of Hetkrodkxdijox — A Foddei; Plaxt of

New Socth Wales.

By James M. PExniE, D.Sc, F.I.C., Linxean Macle.\y Fellow of the Society

IX Biochemistry.

(Fruiii the I'lii/niological Laboratory of the Univeraity of Is'ychiey.)

Ileterodeiidroii oleaefuliu was a tree little kninvii till the comiug- of the recent
great drought which has devastateil su large an area of the stock country.

In times of plenteous rain the rich grass-lands of the Western Plains yield
abundance of food for large herds of sheep and cattle. But when the periodic
recurrence of a drought approaches, the grass gradually disappears, and other
fodder plants also become scarce. It is then that food for stock is supplemented
by cutting down tlie foliage of trees and mixing the latter with the available
food. Then the time soon arrives when only the foliage of trees is left to feed
the starving animals. JIauy of these trees are evergreen, and display their
young fresh leaves in a tempting way, when all other vegetation has dried up
and disappeared. Such are the conditions under which Nature affords us op-
portunities for fee.ling expei'iments on a large scale, yet we find the periods go
past and the results and observations are unrecorded.

Some of these plants, the foliage of which was used in this way on the large
stations by the Castlereagh River during the last great drought, are gi\en in the
following list under tlieii- local names. They are all evergreen trees, and speci-
mens have been sent down at various times for examination.

Trees Used for Feedixg Stock During the Drought ix the West.

1. Rosebush — Heterodendron oleaefolia Desf. (Fam. Sapindaeeae.)

2. Whitewood — Atalaya hemiylaucn F. v. .M. (Sapindaeeae).

3. Wild Orange — Capparis Mitchelli Lindl. (C'apparidaceae), also called wild
pomegranate and bumble.

4. Quinine-tree — Alstonia constricta F. v. M. (Apoeynaceae) .

5. Supple Jack — Ventilago viminalis Hook. (Rharanaceae).

6. Wilga — Geijera parviflnra Lindl. (Rutaceae).

7. Leopard AVood — Flindersia mucidosa F. v. M. (Rutaceae).

8. Myall — Acacia Cunninghami Hook. (Legiiminosae).

9. Beef wood — Crevillea striata R.Br. (Proteaceae).

10. Needlebush — lluhea leucoptera R.Br. (Proteaceae).

11. Quandona' or native peach — Fusanus actimiiiaturi R.Br. (Santalaccae).

12. Sandalwciod — Fiisanns persicarius TP. v. M. ( Santalaeeae).

13. Belar — Casuariiia gluuca Sieb. (Casuarinae).

14. Kurrajong — B rachy chiton populneus R.Br. (Sterculeaceae).

15. Box (Eucalyptus spp.), Pine, Honeysuckle creeper.

The foliage of all the aliove trees formed good food for sheep and cattle, and
the animals fattened on it. While on certain stations sheep would not eat the

44S CVAXOGEXESIS IX PLANTS,

leaves of some particular tree, such as Sandalwood and Eucalyptus, on a ueigb-
bouring- station tliey were fed entirely on it.

It was observed by one station-owner that Supple Jack gave the best results,
although in general the mixed foliage was most satisfactory and Ijeneticial to the
cattle.

The Wild Orange was eaten by sheep and cattle with great relish: both the
leaves and stems as thick as a man's finger were eaten with no ill effects.

The foliage of some trees, such as the Rosebush, Wild Orange, Supple Jack
and Wilga was eaten in large quantities, while small quantities of other trees
like the Myalls satisfied the cattle. The feeding of cattle and sheep with the
Rosebush will be described separately.

Heterodendron, the Rosebush of the Castlereagh, is endemic in Australia, and
grows plentifully in the Western and Northern Interior of New South Wales,
and also in the other States. There are only two species, 11. oleaefolia and H.
diversifolia, the latter being more confined to the nurtheni areas and Queensland.

H. oleaefolia is a large shrub in some districts, while in others it gi-ows as a
tree to a lieight of 40 feet. It is known by many vernacular names, according
to the locality, and samples bearing some of the following- names have been re-
ceived by the writer: — Whitewood (Dubbo), Rosewood (Coonamble), Western
Rosewood, Rosebush ( Coonamble), Emubush. Cabbagebush (Broken HiU), Boon-
ery tree (Narrabri). Dogwood, Ironwood (Xymagee). Bluebnsh (Bourke to
Cobar), Bullock liusli (Broken Hill). This serves as a good example of the in-
adecpiacy of common names for plants; but the danger lies, not only in the num-
ber of such names, but in the fact that the same vernacular name is applied, in
another locality, to some quite different plant, for example, Whitewood, as in
the two list*. Nor do these local names refer in a single case to the well-known
trees of the same name growing in older countries; for example, the ^^'Mltewood
of Nortli America, t'le Leopard wood and the Beefwood of South American forests,
and the Indian Rosewood are quite ditt'ercut trees.

K'ECOKD or SaXJCK-FEEDlXG WITH RO.SEBUSII.

Hetenidriuhoii has been described by a number of writers as a goiid cattle
fodder, and by one as "'the best fodder-tree of the West." Notwithstanding
these statements by local authorities and others, a considerable mortality among
"both sheep and cattle occurred in 1915 on stations near the Castlereagh River.
At Enfield. 400 sheep died in a single niglit after eating the fresh leaves of this
plant. The latter was therefore suspected and specimens were sent to the writer
for examination.

In the beginning of 1918, when the last great drought commenced, tlie mixed
herbage was used with apparently no bad results. Gradually, as time went on,
the trees other than Roselnisli became very scarce, and at last on certain stations
owners were left with no alternative but to use Rosebush alone. In 1919, on
Nelia Station 90 sheep died; on Loyola station 4 sheep died, and 3 cows, which
had eaten only a little of the leaves, were very sick, but recovered. At Wyreeuui
station a single branch of Rosebush was eut and fed to sheep, and C died. En-
field station kist 9 ))ullocks, and Oakstand station a number of sheep tlirough the
same cause. In tlic latter instance the leaves were cut in the evening, .niul next
morning 3 shec)i weiv found lying down and l)rentlung heavily. Their e.ai-s were
cut, but no Idood flowed. Two died during the morning, and tlie third was
treated by artificial rcsjiiratitm, and by putting salt in its mouth. It recovered a
little, and after a few hours got up and walked about. Tlie next morning it

Br JAMES ir. PETRIE. "1-19

was seen tu <lrag- the liind legs slightly but otherwise it was apparently- ^\-ell. It
died two days afterwards. There was no other food available Init the fresh leaves
of Heterodendron.

On the same station, in 1920, when the drought was very severe, and the
stock were being- fed almost entirely on this one plant, the animals died at the
rate of one or two each day. In June, on Locharino station, a Rosebush was cut
m the afternoon for 15 cattle, and towards evening- the whole 1.5 were ill. They
were treated for some hours with warm water and salt, and in a few days 1-2 had
recovered. In every case the animals showed frothing at the nose and mouth.

The record from Narrabri district may also be given. The plant is known
here as the "Boonery tree," and is much used for feeding- stock in times of
drought. It is considered by the stockmen to be a good edible shrub, and the
animals are said to be very fond of it. The Stock Inspector informed the writer,
however, that frei|uently numbers of sheep died suddenly when first fed on the
leaves, more especially if rain fell at the same time.

On one cattle station in this district, in 1919. a stock-owner lost G cattle.
They died suddenly, succumbing without a struggle. On another station in the
same locality, a number of cattle died suddenly. They were seen to eat the
suckers, or young- growth of the Boonery trees, which had been topped for
cattle food during- the previous year.

Prelimixaet Te.sts.

In the first samples which were tested it was proved that no poisonous alka-
loid or other group of well-known active principles w'as present. However, on
allowing the crushed leaves to macerate with water for a few hours, free hydro-
cyanic acid -was detected in the solution. The presence of hydrocyanic acid was
confirmed by the almost iimnediate change of colour of the sodium picrate test-
paper, and by the formation of prussian blue. The powerful reaction obtained
by testing- quite a small quantity, even a single leaf, was sufficient to indicate
the presence of a considerable amount of some poisonous eyauogeuetic compound.

In the list of trees whose foliage was used for feeding stock, two only -were
found to be cyanogenetic — i.e., to yield hydrocyanic acid when treated in the
manner described, — namely, the Rosebush and Wild Orange. In the latter, Cap-
paris Mitchell!, we have the first record of a cyanogenetic plant in the family
Capparidaceae.

Heterodendron oleaefolia. — Samples were received from the Stock Inspectors
at various times and also from a number of station-owners. They were tested
in the following months, during the period 1915 to 1020.

January, Gulargambone.
« February, Narrabri district.

May, Coonamble district,
.lune, Coonamble district.
November, Coonamble district.
December, Gulargambone.
All these sam]iles were very strongly cyanogenetic.

That the hydrocyanic acid was involved in the constitution of some cyano-
genetic glucoside was shown by its behaviour towards enzymes.

fl) A small quantity of the leaf-powder was placed in two bottles with strips
of sodium picrate paper suspended from the corks: (ol to one was added a few
drops of chloroform, and (b) the other was left as a control. The result was
hvdrocvanic acid evolved from («) onlv.

450 c \ A.\(MiK.\KSIS IN PLANTS,

(2) The plant -powiler, with suffieient water to cover, was phu-cd iu two test-
tubes. («) was kept at 40° C. for 1 liour; {h) was boiled for 5 minutes and also
kept at 40° for 1 hour, the test i>aper used in eaeh. The result showed in (a) a
colour cliange to deep red within a minute, and in (h) no colour reaction after "24
hours, (c). To the tube ib) was then added a small speck of emulsin powder
prepared from sweet almonds, and the mass again digested at 40° (". After a
few minutes the test-paper showed a deep red colour.

These experiments were done also witli aqueous extracts from the plant, tlie
boiled solutions yielding no hydrocyanic acid till emulsin was added.

The plant therefore contains a g-lucoside and an enzyme, the latter being al)le
to decompose the glucpside with liberation of hydrocyanic acid, umler conditions
favouring enzyme action. The glncoside is also decomposed by the emulsin of
alniduds.

CVAXOGKXKTIC Pr.AXTS OF THE b'AillLY SAPIXDACEAK.

In the chemical literature of the cyanogenesis in jdants there already exist-
the records of six i^lants of the family Sapiiidacrae in which hydrocyanic acid has
been obtained. These are: —

Alectryon excelsum Gaertn.. a Xcw Zealand tree (Greshoff).

Alectryon tomentoaus b'adlk., a native Xcw South Wales tree (Smith and
Whit«).

Alectryon coriaceiis Hadlk., ibid.

Cupania sp^j. (Greshoff) .

Schleiehera trijttga Willd., an East Indian plant.

Ungnadia speeinsa Endl., a Mexico and Texas tree (Cheel and Penfold).
Heterodendron oleaefolia added to this list makes the seventh cyanogenetic plant
of the Sapindaceue.

The only other existing species, B. diverfifolia, has been tested by the writer
in specimens from New South Wales and Queensland, but has always u-iven nega-
tixe results, showing the absence of any cyanogenetic compound.

ESTIIIATIOX OF THE HtdROCYAXIC ACID.

Many diflieulties were met with in attemjiting to determine the true amount
of hydrocyanic acid which this [ihiiit is capable of evolving under special cir-
cumstances.

The enzymes characteristic of the various cyanogenetic plants are known to
act differently in most cases, especially as to their relative \elocities and the
position of the equilibrium point. These jdants also contain substances which
act as inhil)iting factors during the hydrolysis of the glucoside. that is, which
oppose its decomposition. There are likewise present certain bodies whose in-
fluence tends to recombine the ])roducts of hydrolysis and thus decrease the
amount of hydrocyanic acid available for estimation.

When the leaves of fresh i)lants are macerated in water, there is no doubt
that their protoplasm continues its ])hysiological function for some time, and
utilises part of the liberated hydrocyanic acid in the synthetic processes of meta-
bolism. Although in a few cases it has l)een shown that the same glucoside
occui-s in certain widely different ])lants, such as phaseolunatin in Beans and
Flax seeds, gynocardin iu Panfjium- edide and Ofiiiocardia nditnilu. the great
majority of the cyanogenetic ))lants probably contain different glucosides. In
artificial hydrolysis such as with mineral acids, etc.. these glucosides behave dif-
ferentlv towards the hvdrolvsiiig agent.

BY JA3IES jr. PETRIE.

451

These few statements, to whieli otliers could be added, will sul'fiee to show
that no single stereotyped method can be used for all eyanogenetic plants in the
determination of their hydrocyanic acid. Results of some kind will be obtained,
but unless that particular method is discovered which is entirely suited to the
plant under investigation, the results w-ill be remote from the truth. These dilfi-
culties can be surmounted only by conducting extended series of experiments to
determine the value of these various factors, and their influence on tlie amount
of hydrocyanic acid obtained. Details of such experiments on Heterodeiidron
form the subject matter of this paper.

(JUAXTITATIVE ESTIHATIONS.

The Material Investigated. — For the purpose of these experiments a c|nantity
of the plant was obtained from stations on the Castlereagh.

Sample i. was collected in December, 1915, near Gulargambone town, in a
paddock where cattle were lying dead or dying. It was named •'Whitewood."

Sample ii. was collected in June of 1917, near Coonamble, under the name
of Rosewood. It was described as a valuable fodder plant when mature, but con-
sidered very poisonous to stock when in the state of young and succulent growth.

Sample iii. was obtained from Coonamble in November, 1917. under the
name of Rosebush.

The samples ii. and iii. may tlierefore be looked upon as representing the
winter and summer growths of the same year, just before the commencement of
the drought.

Sample iv. was obtained from Oakstand Station, near Coonamble. in Febru-
ary, 1920, when the drought was very severe.

The writer desires to express his indebtedness and thanks to !Mr. Symons,
Chief Inspector of Stock, and to Mr. C. S. Campbell, of Oakstand Station, for
the supply of plants for this investigation.

The General Method. — The jdant material was mixed with water and the
glucoside decomposed by various means. The hydrocyanic acid which was li))er-
ated was then distilled by boiling in a steam or air cun-ent into sodium hydroxide
solution. This alkaline solution was evaporated in a vacuum still at a tempera-
ture below 70° C. to about 1 ec. volume. The latter was converted into prussian
blue, and the tints observed in a Dubosc(| colorimeter, were compared with stan-
dard Prussian blues prepared from solutions of known strength iif potassium
cyanide.

In some cases the alkaline solution of the distillate was titrated with centi-
normal silver nitrate.

The processes by which the glucosiile may be hydrolysed and the hydrocyanic
acid set free are:— •

frt) Boiling with water.

{b) Boiling with mineral acids (hydroddoric and sulphuric).

(f) Maceration with water at 40° C. (autolysis).

((?) Maceration with emulsin of sweet almonds.
Tliese processes have yielded widely differing results when applied to the diffei'ent
eyanogenetic plants, and investigators have discussed them in detail, with refer-
ence to some of the well-known fodderplants. such as sorghum.

A. Direct distillation in a current of steam.

The sample of ]iowdered leaves was treated rapidly in the distillation flask
with 250 CCS. of boiling water in order to destroy the enzyme. It was then boiled

45-J

CYANOGENESIS IX PLANTS,

in a ciUTent of st'am and the distillate received in a solution of sodium hydrox-
ide. After distilling for one hour, the contents of the flask were acidified to 5 %
with sulphuric acid, and the distillation continued. In some cases the enzj-me was
destroyed by treating the leaves directly with boiling 5 ':''c sulphuric acid and
immediate distillation.

Besitlts. — The hydrocyanic acid obtained is expressed as nulli'.;ranis in 100
gTams of iilant-material dried at 100° C.

Tablk a.

/h'lii'/ tHs/i//afioii of /eai'e.s.

Exp. Time.

Particular treatment.

HCX.

Sample I.

1

1st hr

containing;

2nil ..

(io niiJS. 'r

:ir(l ..

HON.

Distilled with water alone in steam cur.
,, with .5 Or sulphuric iicid

Total in H hrs., unfiuished-

10

hr.

Distilled with water alone in steam
with 5 % sulphuric acid

Total in 41 hrs., iinfinished-

none
none
0-'5

o-r>

30

•to

hr.

Distilled with water alone without steam
with ."> % sulphuric acirl

none
2

2
2
2

none

Total in 5 hrs., finished-

8

Added boiliny: '> Or sulphuric, distilled
in current of .-iteam

2

Total in 2 hrs.

tinished —

J
none

3

5

I hr.

1 ,.
1 ,.
1 ..

Added boiling .5 % hydrochloric,
in rapid aiv-current

distilled

S
1
I
none

Total in 4 hrs., finished-

13

Sample II.

cc.ntaining

328 m!,'s. f^

HCN.

6 ; 1 hr.
1 ..
1 ,,

1 hi

Distilled with water alone in air-current

.\dded boilinj; li '/r sulphuric, distilled
in air-current

Total in 3 Ins.. unfinished

BY JAlIliS ir. PETItlK.

453

Deductions from Table A. — (1). The glucosidc in this plant is not decom-
pused by lioiliug with water. In most cases no hydrocyanic acid was obtained,
and in some a verv small amount was distilled over. The maximum quantity
thus obtained was 2 rags., or about 3 % of the total acid, and was pro})al)ly the
result of the enzyr.ie acting for a short interval Ix^lnre its complete destruction,
that is, before the wliole mass could be raised to the temperature of the boiling
water.

(2). Boiling with dilute acids likewise results in very incomplete decom-
position. Two kin Is of results are apparent: in one the hydrocyanic acid slowly
increases per hour (\os. 1, 2 and 7), in the other the evolution comes to an end
in the third or fourth hour of boiling (Xos. 3, 4 and .5). Hydrochloric acid pro-
duces more than sul]ihuric acid.

B. Aut.oh/sis, or Macer(itio)i nf the plcwt in icater.

Here the glucoside comes in contact with its own enzyme, and is dccumjiosed
with liberation of hydrocyanic acid. Into a distillation flask fitted with its cork
and tubes were placed 5 — 50 gms. of leaves with 500 ecs. of water. This was kept
in an iiu'ubator at 40° C. for varying periods, then distilled with and witliout
5 % sulphuric acid

Table B.

Aiiiofysis of leaves.
Time of
No. maceration. Particular treatment.

HCN.

mgs. %

Sample I.

8

1

hr.

then distilled with sulphuric

acid

12

containing

9

3

,, ,,

2.5

(10 mgs. %

10

IK

, > ,,

33

HCN.

11

1

day

, , , ,

4,5

12

1

^.

with hydrochloric acid

.51

13

3

with sulphuric

acid

40

14

5

,^

,,

40

1-^

8

"

,,

17

Sample II.

1(!

1

day

then distilled with water

328 mgs. %

alone in air-current

July 1917

120

HCN.

17

1

,,

Aug. ,,

111

18

1

••

••

•Oct. ,,

111

Sample III.

19

1

day

then as in Sample ii.

Nov. 1917

109

307 mgs. %

20

1

,,

Dec. ,,

113

HCN.

21

1

,,

Jan. 1918 .

111

22

1

>•

Oct. ,,

121

Sample IV.

23

1

day

then as in Sample ii.

38

50 rags.' %

Deductions from Table B. — (1). When the leaves are allowed to stand at an
optimum temperature, which in the case of most cyanogenetic enzymes is about
40° C, hydrocyanic acid is set free in amounts much greater than were obtained
with acid hydrolysis

(2). With regard to the time of maceration, the maximum yield, as shown in
Nos. 8-15, was that obtained for 1 day: 45 mgs. % when distilled with sulphuric,
and 51 rag's. % when distilled with hydrochloric acid.

(3). Leaves of sample ii. were dried and jiowdered at the beginning, and the
powder left in an o])pn tray. "When taken for expci'lments 16-18, it is shown that

454

CTAXOdEXKSIS IX PLAXTS,

the yield is practically the same tVom July to October. Leaves of sample iii.
were powdered separately for each expei-iment, and here again the yield is almost
constant during the entire period of one year.

(4.) Sample ii., collected in midwinter, yielded the same amount of liydm-
cyanic acid as the sample iii., collected in the summer, in the same locality.

C. Auloli/sis with added enzyme.

The object of these experiments was to determine whether there existed in
the plant sufficient enzyme for the complete hydrolysis of its giucoside. It has
been stated already that when the plant-enzyme was destroyed by boiling water,
the giucoside could still be hydrolysed by adding the enzyme prepai-ed from sweet
almonds. In these experiments "emulsin" was added simply as grated almonds.

The method was the same as in the previous series. — The leaf-powder with the
emulsin added was macerated with water in an incubator at 40° C. for 1 day,
then distilled by boiling in a cun-ent of air.

Throughout series B and C, the whole of the liberated hydi-ocyanic acid -was
obtained in li hour's distillation.

Table C.
Aii/olrsis -icitlt euiii/siii.

HCN.

No.

Pai-tiouliir tri'^itmcnt.

mgs. %

Sample 1.

11

Control— autolysed without emulsin

45

24

10 gms. leaves autolysed with 10 gms. emulsin

fiO

Sample II.

16

Control — autolysed xvithoitt emulsin

120

25

5 gms. leaves autolysed with 2 gnis. euuilsin

1!57

2H

5

2(i2

27

10

328

Sample III.

19

Control— autolysed -a-illiout emulsin

109

28

5 !^ms. leaves autolyseil with ."> ^ins. euuilsin

29-t

29

5 ,. .5 ,,

297

30

10 ,. 5

30(1

31

10 ., 10

307

32

10 ,, 15

297

33

10 ,, 20

302

Sample l.V.

23

Control — ci'il/ioiit emulsin, autolysed 1 day

38

34

10 gnis. leaves autolysed with 10 gnis. emulsin

50

Deductions from 'I'able C. — (1), It is seen at once, from the greatly inci'Ciised
yield of hydrocyanic acid in all samples, that tlio jilant was deficient in its
enzyme.

(2.) The maximum amount was ol>tained by addition of 30 gms. of enmlsin,
wliidi liberated tlii' very large amount of hydrocyanic acid (No. 27) coiTesponding
to 0.328 % of the leaves. Therefore by addition of emulsin during the nmcera-
tion of the leaves the yield of hydrocyanic acid was increased alnuist tlireefold in
samples ii. and iii.

(3) . The amount nt enzyme is important also. A snudl quantity was not
able to liydrolyse unlimited amounts of giucoside, for in the case of sample ii.,
Nos. If) and 27, the lilicraticm nt ttic addHinnal 9 mgs. nl' hvdrocvanic acid fronj

BV JAJIES jr. I'KTIUE. 455

5 gius. of leaves re(iiurt'il the enzyme from 10 giiis. of aliiudul pnwiler. 'fhe
ratio of enzyme to ghieoside was not eonstant.

D. On the existence of free liijilnici/aiiic acid in jilaiits.

Xumeious attenn^ts have been made in tlie past by various investigators to
determine what they assumed to be the uncombiued portion of the hydrocyanic
acid in the planis. In most of these the methods used have been shown to be
faultj-. When boiling water or dilute acid is poured on a mass of leaves in a
flask the glucoside and enzyme, both being soluble, gre brought into contact with
one another, and some portion of the mass will remain at a temperature sulfi-
ciently low for enzyme action during at least a few seconds. In this initial period
enzymes are known to be exceedingly active, and so it happens that vmless special
precautions are taken some hydrocyanic acid will l)e liberated in most cases.
Since it is so difficult to destroy tlie enzyme in plant leaves in this manner,
other substances have been tried \\liose presence will prevent enzyme action.
The chief of these is tartaric acid .

Method. — Leaves were powdered, water with a little tartaric acid added, and
the llask jilaced in the incubator, at 40° C, for 1 day. In some, the leaves were
allowed to fall from the gTinding mill into the tartaric acid solution, in others the
intact leaves were steeped in the solution for 5 minutes, tlien jint through the
mill in presence of excess of solution, and the powder received also iu tlie solu-
tion, ^laceration and distillation followed as previously described.

Table D.

.-ht/o/vsis ill />i-fse/icc' of iaiiarir ariif.

HCN
No. Particular treatment. uigs. %

Sam]ilr 11.

16
.3,5
.36

Saiui.lH III. ' 37

Control -ivitlioiit tartaric acid 12o

Macerated in 1 % soln. of tartaric acid 4(1

5 % .. I 10

Leaves steeped and ground in o % tartaric acid
soln., distilled direct for 2 hrs.

Deductions from Table D. — The results given in the Table show that although
the amount of hydrocyanic acid obtained is considerably reduced (Nos. 35, 36)
when maceration takes place in presence of tartaric acid, yet this has not pre-
vented a certain degree of decomposition from taking place. It is only when tlie
leaves are kept in presence of tartaric acid during the whole of the crushing and
bruising of their tissues that enzyme action is entirely pi-evented (No. 37) . Any
free, uncomljined hydrocyanic acid, existing in the plant as such, would have
distilled over from the tartaric acid solutions.

Therefore no uncombined hydrocyanic acid exists in the leaves of Hetern-
(leiidroii.

E. The influence of chloroform on antoh/sis.

In the preliminary testing of a plant for hydrocyanic acid the plasmolysis of
the tissues is iisually brought about by chloroform vapour. Chloroform is also
often used as a preservative of plants and their extracts against the formation of
moulds. Plants or extracts on which moulds have been allowed to grow are

456 CYAXOOEXKSIS IN" PLAXTS,

valueless for these investigations, as it is known that fungi can simulate many
enzymes in their action. For this reason ehlorofonn is much used in the bio-
ohemical, laboratory.

To test wliether chloroform exerted any influence on the action of the enzyme
during these autolysis experiments a number of trials were made. To the tiask
containing the plant-]iowder was added 1 cc. of chloroform dissdlvcd in 500 ccs.
of water. (The solubility of chloroform is 1 in 200.)

Table E.

Autolysis ill presence of ehlorofonn.

HON
Xo. Particular treatment. mgs. fr

Sample II. Ifi Control — macerated ivithoiit chloroform 1 day ' 120

38 ^Macerated with chloi-oform n-2 '!r solutimi I ,, "-'

39 ., ., 4 .. 79

The results of a number of experiments were, in general, the same as those
lepresented in Table E. The yield of hydrocyanic acid was considerably decreased
by the addition of 1 cc. of chloroform during the autolysis.

F. Autolysis of the extracted glucosicle.

In some plants which have been investigated, comjilcx factors have been re-
cogtiised whicli greatly interfei'e with the proper action of the enzyme. The ditfi-
eulty has been frequently overcome by first extractiEg the glucoside with water
(ir alcohol in a Soxhlet extractor.

In the-se experiments the leaves were first treated ra|iidly with boiling alcohol
to destrov the enzyme, and then extracted in a Soxhlet with ah-nhol. Aftei- dis-
tilling off the solvent the residue left was: —

In No. 40 mixed with water and autolysed with emulsin.

In No. 41 again extracted with water in Soxhlet, and the solution autolysfd
with 5 gms. of emulsin for 1 day.

Table K.

Aiiiolysis after extraction of tlie ,s:lucoside.

HCX
N '. Particular treatment. mgs. %

Sain|il'' III. :ii' ' Control — plant autolysed with emulsin for 1 ilay 300

li> Extracted residui' autolysed with emulsin 27-">

41 Aqueous solution of extracted residue autolyspcl with

emulsiu for 1 <lav 27 1

Besnlt. — In the case of Iletemcletidron the yield is not increa.sed by previous
extraction of the ';iucoside and hydrolysis of its solution.

Discussion ok ■vnv. Results.

Table A.^The direct distillation of the leaves with water alone yields some-
times a trace of hydrocyanic acid and sometimes mme. Until recently, any hydro-
cyanic acid obtained in this numner wa.s considered to exist in the fi'ee state in

BV JAMES -U. I'ETRIE.

457

the plant, t'yiiodon iHcompletus (blue touoli grass), when its enzyme was de-
stroyed by pouring on boiling water, and then distilled, yielded 35 % of its
hydrocyanic acid, although it was found subsequently that no free hydrocyanic
acid existed in this grass. Where plants were distilled, starting with cold water,
it has frequently been found that the whole of the hydrocyanic acid was evolved
within half an hour, although the enzjTne must have been destroyed at an early
stage .

That the hydrocyanic acid obtained iu this way is not free acid in the plant
tissues was proved later iu Table D. The work of numerous investigators has
shown that enzyme action is very powerful during the tii-st few seconds, and it
is on this account almost impossible to destroy instantly the enzyme of leaves
by pouring ou boiling water. As the temperature of the mass rises the activity
of the enzyme is lapidly increased, and this increased activity acts in opposi-
tion to the destruction of the enzyme, until the latter by rise of temperature
overpowers it. At high temperatures, therefore, one may obsei-ve a great initial
velocity of enzyme action, and this, after a few seconds or minutes, comes to an
end. It is generally found that enzyme action is very incomplete at higher
temperatures. Dr. Treub, late Director of the Gardens of Buitenzorg, has
stated that this very rapid decomposition of the glucoside was of great physio-
logical importance, as at a sudden demand hydrocyanic acid could be liberated
and immediately utilised in the metabolism of the leaves.

Direct distillation with acid gave varying figiires, the evolution of hydro-
cyanic acid ranging from 5 to 25 % of the possiljle amount. Some plants, such
as Sorghum, Poa flava, etc., when treated in this way yield the whole of their
hydrocyanic acid.

The glucoside of Heterochndrvii is very incompletely hydrolysed by boiling
with dilute acids.

T.\BLE B. — The plant, when autolysed for 1 day, and the glucoside decom-
posed by its own enzyme, liberated in sample i., 45 mgs. %, in samples ii. and iii.
120 mgs. %, and in sample iv. 38 mgs. %. Numbers i. and iv. are equivalent to
three fourths of the total hydrocyanic acid present, while ii. and iii. are only a
third.

These experiments show that the leaves are deficient in enzyme.

Some cyanogenetic plants such as Sorghum. Pruints spp., Paiiiciilaria spi».,
etc., yield much less hydrocyanic acid after maceration, and this method cannot be
used for the estimation. In these plants the greatest yield was obtained by direct
distillation with acid.

Table C. — When the action of the natural enzyme of the plant is assisted by
adding eniulsin. the yield of free hydrocyanic acid is gi-eatly increased, the maxi-
mum amount obtained being 328 mg-s. %.

In similar investigations, Guignard showed in the case of Sambucws nigra
(the elder), that the addition of emulsin before maceration gave no further in-
crease. ^'iehoever, and his colleagues, in America, found the same condition to
hold in tlieir experiments on Tridens flavus; and the writer has found that in
numerous other grasses an abundance of enzyme existed, sufficient to decompose
the whole of the glucoside.

Treub's investigations show that emulsin of almonds has vei-y little action on
the cyanogenetic compounds of Phaseolus lunatiis, Pangium edule, Passiflora
fju-adranfjiilaris, Maiiihot, etc.; in certain other plants such as Sorghum, Hevea,

458 CVAXOliKXES*l.s IX I'LAXTS,

Alocasia, the aetiuu is ueitlior regular uor abuiKlaut,. ^vliile in numerous others the
enuilsiu acts rajiiclly aud freely, llctfrudetidruii belongs to the latter group.

T.vui.K D. — When amygdalin is boiled with dilute mineral acids such as
hydrochloric or sulphuric, it is hydrol\sed. When the latter are replaced by
organic acids sucli as tartaric, no deeompositiou of the glucoside takes place.
Tartaric acid, like the mineral acids, has been shown to prevent the action of
enzymes entirely. For these reasons it is used to detect the presence of any
hydrocyanic acid which may exist in the uncond)ined state, that is, not in a gluco-
side. Various workers have recorded the presence of noa-glucosidal hydrocyanic
acid in plants, but the writer has not yet detected it in a single instance.

Gexeral. — (a). There are some plants in which the cyanogenetic glucoside
increases to a maximum amount during the earlier and vigorous period of their
metabolism. It then gradually becomes less till towards the end of the season it
has dwindled to a relatively snuill amount and sometimes has disappeared entirely.
In such plants the glucoside is stored only temporarily, it is used up during the
acti\e vegetatixe periods, and there is none found in the ripe seeds.

Examples of these jilants are the Sorghum, which in the ripe stage is left
with an amount of dhurrin ef|uivalent to about 14 mgs. % of hydrocyanic acid
(Brunuich), and sometimes with none (Treub) ; aud the Lotus of Egypt, which
>ields 345 mgs. ^o of hydrocyanic acid during the height of its vigorous growth,
but when its seeds are ri}ie it yields no hydrocyanic acid. Agaiu. I\il)es (cur-
rants) and others gi-adually lose their hydrocyanic acid compounds.

{})). There is another group of cyanogenetic plants in which the hydrocyanic
acid remains almost constant throughout the whole .period of growth. This in-
cludes I'ussifJora sp)>., Samhucus nigra, Phuseolus lunatns and Imligofera yale-
r/oirle.i. Although it is diflicult to compare these plants with the e\ergreen tree
Ileterodendron, it may be noted from Table B that the latter plant contains ])rac-
tically the same amoimt of glucoside in winter as in summer.

(c) When cyanogenetic plants are collected and spread out to dry. two
courses are followed: one in which the glucoside gradually disappears, the other
in which it remains unchanged for very long periods.

As examples of the first course may be mentioned t'ljiiodon iiicompletiis (blue
couch gi-a.ss), which shows during four weeks' drying in the open air, a gradual dim-
inution to zero; -Aloeasia macrorrhiza, fium which no hydrocyanic can be obtained
after a few weeks ; .nnd Sorghum, which loses about three-quarters of its glucoside
under these conditions. As an example of the second course we note from Table
B that samiile ii. during four months remained almost constant, and sample iii.,
lying openly for twelve months also remained about the same. It may be stated
then that though jilants like Sorghum may be rendered much less deleterious by
air-drying or curing, the foliage of Ileterodetidroti cannot be treated in this way
with any a<lvautage.

The enz_\inc in the dried leaves of Heterodendron is apparently i|uite inactive
at the ordinary temperature, hence the constancy of the yield of hydrocyanic acid
during long jicriods (d' drying. In this respect it differs from the enzymes of
most other plants— for instance. Brill found that his samples of Pomjium edule.
owing to the action of a very active enzyme, continued to lose hydrocyanic aci I
from the time they were cut.

The quantity of hydrocyanic acid evolved from Heterodendroii is relatively
very large. It nmv be conipareil with thai Ironi some of the richest cyanogcne-

BY JA^r^:s .\r. i-ktijik. 459

tie i>lants hitherto investigatefl. The lea\es of the I'dlhiwiiiu- phiiits cnutaiii the

aiuoiints stated in )iigs. '^■'c of the dry luateriah

HCX

Paiiyium edule, Greshoti 11(10 uig-s. ^^

Taraktoyenos Blumei, Treiib 333

Ileterodendroii oleaefolin, this i>a|)er 328

Pliaseolii.s hinafus (Lima beans), Treiib 320

Gynocurdia odoratci, Treub 220

Indiffofera (jalegoides^ Treub 154

Bitter abnonds (seeds), Guignard 150

Passi flora II erbertiana (native to N.S.W.), Treub .. 143

Hecea Brasilieiisis (Para rubber plant), Treul) .... 138

Andropojioii sorghum, Dowell 51

Ci/iiodo)i ineompletu^ (blue couch grass), Petrie .. 25

Calcidation of fatal dose of Heterodendron leaves.

The lethal aniuunt of hydrocyanic acid is usually stated as 1 nig. [ler kilo-
gram of body-weight.

A man or sheen would therefore require about (JO mgs.

This amount is obtained from about 40 bitter almonds.

This amount is also obtained from 90 gms. of fresh gTeen leaves of Hetero-
dendron, which is equivalent to 3 ozs. in weight, and 230 fresh leaves of average
size, or to 1 oz, of air-dried leaves.

A single leaf of Heterodendron of average size will yield 0.35 mg. of hydro-
cyanic acid; and 1 oz. weight of leaves which have been cut and lying in the sun
and air to dry, will give sufficient hydrocyanic acid to poison a sheep. Hetero-
dendron is therefore much more poisonous than bitter almonds; in fact, it is
more than twice as strong, and thirteen times more so than the blue couch gi'ass.

SU3I1I.\RY.

Heterodendron oleaefolia is a native Australian e\ergreen tree, the foliage of
which was much used for cattle-feeding during the drought. It contains a cyano-
genetic glucoside yielding, when hydrolysed, 0.328 % of hydrocyanic acid. It
is therefore one of the most poisonous cyanogenetic plants known, yielding more
than twice as much hydrocyanic acid as bitter almonds. One ounce of the air-
dried leaves forms a lethal amount for one sheep.

The leaves are invariably found to be deficient in enzyme, and required the
addition of emulsin in the estimation, to bring about the comjilete decomposition
of the glucoside.

460

NOTES UN AUSTRAL1A.N TABAXLUAE.
By Eustace W. Ferguson, M.B., Ch.M., and Gerald i'. Hill, F.E.S.

The present papei' is tlie outcome of correspoudence between the two authors
on the question of the identification of specimens of Australian Tabanidae.

One of us (E.W.F.), while in London, had the opportunity of examining
the types of Australian Tabanidae in the Natural Historj' Branch of the British
Museum, and of comparing specimens with the types. In many instances the
identifications were made by Miss Ricardo. Authentically identified specimens of
many species were thus available, and these have been compared with such types
as are in the collection of the Australian Institute of Tropical Medicine at Towns-
viUe.

The correspoudence and comparison of specimens have revealed the fact that
considerable synonymy exists among lecently described species. Some of this
is due to misidentification of previously described species, but much is due to too
much reliance having been placed on slight variation in characters whidi can be
sliown, with long series, to be variable within the one species.

Incidentally it has shown that the groups suggested by Miss Ricardo for the
division of the genus Tabanus are valueless, at any rate as applied to Australian
species. The characters separating gi-oups vii., viii., ix. and x. ai'e entirely super-
ficial, depending solely on clothing, so that the grouping of a species is dependent
on the degree of abrasion of the specimen .

While the paper deals mainly with synonymy, one new sjK'cics ha-s been
described, and the descriptions of one or two others have liceii held up pending
the receipt of further material or information.

We should like to acknowledge the lielp we have received from Dr. (lay .V.
K. Marshall, Director of the Imperial Bureau of Entomology, in cniiiiiai-ing
specimens with types in the British Museum.

Dkm()i>l.\tu.s nicrovittatu.s, n.sp.

Closely allied to I), aiislraliti Kicardd, liiil differing in culdiiriitiiiu (it the
abdomen.

c?. Face brown, with yellowish-brown tomcntum and rather sparse brown
hairs; separated from cheeks by deep groove; cheeks similar; beard white. Palpi
with second joint long, somewhat club-shaped as in D. aiistralis, but black. Pro-
boscis comparatively short. Antennae reddish-brown, second joint about half the
length of the first; third joint apparently 8-annulate, but anuuli somewhat indefin-
ite and hard to distinguish, ba.sal part somewhat wider than rest of joint, first
and second joints with long dark hairs. Eye^ contiguous, moderately finely face-
ted, bare. Ocelli present. Thorax dark brown, with brown tomcntum and indis-
tinct traces of 3 longitudinal tomentose vittae, the median darker, the submedian

BY EUSTACE W. FERGUSOX AND G. F. IJILL. 461

more yellowish in :iiiterior hall', darker posteriorly, the lateral margins with
similar yellowish-grey tomentum; pubescence long and fine, gi'eyish in colour,
ratlier scanty, denser posteriorly and above wing roots. Sides dark brown with
long, silky, light gxey pubescence. Scutelhtvi dark brown, with long grey
pubescence. Abdomen reddish, with a moderately broad, median, black vitta ex-
tending the length of the abdomen, and somewhat expanded on first segment;
lateral borders with black markings on 3-6 segments; pubescence light brown,
with traces ot creamy on the segmentations. Venter of a Ughter reddish-yellow
colour, without any black vitta; with fine greyish pubescence and a fringe of
shelter fine creamy pubescence along posterior margin of segments. Legs reddish-
yellow, tarsi with apical joints infuseate; posterior tibial spurs rather short.
Winffs clouded with brown, most marked along the anterior border and along the
cross veins; distribution of shading similar to 1). auMralis, but darker. Length,
11.5 mm.

//ab.— N.S. Wales: Kendall. (Miss M. Henry.)

Desci-ibed from two males caught on flowers in garden on 26th February and
18th March, 1920. Both specimens have the wings damaged at the tips, and it
is uncertain whether the first posterior cell is closed or open; but it is probably
open as in D. aitstralis. Apart from the colour of the abdomen, which is most
striking, the species can be separated by the structure of the 7th tergite. In D.
nigroviltatus the apical bol-der of this segment is practically truncate, while in D.
australin the margin is strongly bisinnate. the median portion being produced in a
strongly rounded lobe. The antenna! annulations are hard to distinguish, in this
respect resembling D. cmstralis, though the shape of the annulations is slightly
different in the two species.

Ty|ic ill Australian Museum, Sydney.

SiLvius IXDISTINCTUS Ric.

Rieardo, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (8), xvi., (1915), p. 262; ,S'. hilli, Taylor,
Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., xl., Pt. 4, 1915. p. 806; S. borealis, Taylor, loc. cit.,
p. 809.

Specimens of S. indistinctus Ric. were detennined by Miss Rieardo, and are
uiifiuestionably the same as 6'. Mlli Taylor, a series of which has been examined Ijy
both authors, and the type by one of us (G.F.H.). Mr. Taylor was probably
misled in his identification of S. indistinctus (Prop. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales, 1916,
xli.. Pt. 4, p. 753) by a specimen so identified by Mr. Austen and quite distinct
from the species as identified by Miss Rieardo herself.

The species is a variable one in the colouration of both thorax and abdomen
and in the presence or absence of the median abdominal spots.

The tyjie of S- borealis has also been examined and. though there ajipears to
lu' a very slight difference in that the callus is less bulbous, we cannot regard it
as other tlian eonspecific with S. ind^istincliis Ric.

SiLVIUS XOTATU.S Ric.

Rieardo. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (8), xvi., 1915, p. 264; Taylor. Proc. Linn.
Soc. N.S. Wales, x]iv., Pt. 1, 1919. p. 43; ,S'. psarophanes. Taylor, op. cit., xlii.,
Pt. 3. 1917. p. 520; ? S. fuliginosm, Taylor, op. cit., xl., Pt. 4. 1915. p. 810.

This appears to be a very widespread species and to a certain extent variable.
Among our specimens is one from Sea Lake, !Mallee District, Victoria, which was

462 NOTES ox AUSTRALIAN TABANIDAE.

compareil witli the type (K.W.F.) from Kalamunda, Western Australia, in the
British Museum.

We associate with this specimens from Lake Hattah, "\'ictoria; Narrabri,
N.S. Wales; and Springsure and Burnett River, (Queensland. The New South
Wales and Queensland specimens show some slight difference in that the forehead
is sUghtly narrower and the antennae are rather lighter. The Burnett River
specimens {d, ?) were bred out by Miss Bancroft and bear a label: — "Bred from
larvae found in wet sand at river edge, Burnett R.. 18.11.19."' They are in
excellent preservation^ and the abdominal clothing is much more marked than in
our other specimens, in which it is somewhat abraded. Through them we were
able to associate Silriits psarophanes with S. notatus; the former species being
identified with the Burnett River male. Males and females of psarophanes have
also been bred out in Towiisville (G.F.H.) and correspond with the Springsure
and Burnett River specimens.

S. fuliginosvs Taylor, of which we have examined the type and compared it
with our series of .S. notatus, appears hardly separable. It is somewhat smaller
and the forehead is •distinctly nan-ower than in the Victorian specimens, in which
respect the New South Wales and Queensland specimens are intermediate. The
antennae and legs are decidedly lighter in colour than in the Victorian specimen,
but Iiere again it is linked up by the intei-mediate specimens. We are inclined
to regard it as not being specifically distinct, though it may be necessary to re-
tain the name as a subspecies. Further specimens from the Northern Territory
will probably be necessary to settle the status of S. fi(h'(}itwsvs.

Siuius soRDiDus Taylor.

Taylor, I'roc. Linn. Sue. X.S. Wales, xl., Pt. 4, 1915, p. 808; ^,'. tabaiiifonnis
Taylor, loc. cit., p. <S13.

AVe ha\e examined the types of Tayloi's species and other specimens from the
same district (G.F.H. ), and cannot find any valid reason for maintaining tliem
as distinct. The ty])e of S. tahaviformis has more conspicuous clothing, but the
type of .s'. sordidiis is certainly considei-ably abraded. The colour of the abdomen
is somewhat lighter in tahaiiiformis, but the type is apparently an immature speci-
men.

In his description, Taylor states that the inner margins of the eyes in S.
sordidus are parallel, while under S. tahanifonnis he states that the inner margins
are slightly convergent towards the base. The difference, however, when the two
types are compared is inappreciable.

Tabanus leucopterus van de Wulp.

Van de Wulp Tijdsch. voor Entom., xi.. 1868. p. 98: T. (irheohirtiis. Taylor.
Proc. Linn. Sec. N.S. Wales, xli.. Pt. 4. 1916. p. 753.

This si)ecies was originally described from the Aru Islands, and a s|icciiiu'ii
in the collection of the South Anstialiaii Museum from Stewart River. Queens-
land, was determined by Miss Ricardo. This has been compared with a series of
T. uriseohirlus Taylor, including the type, and the species are certainly identical.
The series shows some variation in size and in the colouration of the clothing, a
specimen from Kimberle\ perhaps i-epi-esenting a vaiiety. but too closely allied
to be separated. The sp.iics appears to be wides|.read in the nortli of Au.sfralia
and in the islands immediately to the north.

BY EUSTACK W. FEKGL'SOX AND G. F. HII.L. 463

Tabaxus pallipe.vnis Mac<i.

Macijuart. Dipt. Exot., Suppl. 1, 1844, p. IGO ; Bicardo, Anu. Mag. Nat.
Hist.. (8), xiv., 1914, p. 397.

A species of Tahanus from the Burnett River District, Queensland, bred out
from larvae by Mi-s Bancroft, is tentatively referred to T. palUpennis.

Following is a detailed description of the specimens : —

A moderately -mall species with three well-detined abdominal vittae.

c?. Face rather deeply sunken, black, densely clothed with grey tomentuni
and with white puliesctoce; cheeks with grey tonientum and pubescence; beard
grey. Palpi with second joint short, oval, creamy yellow, with mixed grey and
black pubescence. Antennae brown, the basal joints more greyish; first joint
broader and partially concealing second joint, the latter small, somewhat crescen-
tic, both joints with a few, short, black hairs at apices; third joint rather slender,
the basal portion angulate but hardly toothed above. Eyes large, contiguous for
greater portion of length, separated below to allow of the appearance of a small
strongly nitid black callus; the upper two-thirds of the eyes set with moderately
large facets, the lower third with much finer facets.

Thorax black with median, submedian and sublateral grey tomentose stripes,
clothed with black erect pubescence and with rather scanty, decumbent, golden
pubescence on the grey stripes ; sides clothed with gi-ey tomentum, with long, fine,
pubescent tufts, mingled dark and grey. Seutellum dark brown with slight red-
dish tinge, with black pubescence on dorsum and rather scanty, golden hairs along
free margin.

Abdomen dark brown to black, with three vittae of elongate, pale grey, some-
what creamy spots, the segmentations also narrowly edged with same colour;
median vitta extending from third segment to apex, spots elongate, broader at
posterior margins of segments, forming a continuous vitta; sublateral vittae ex-
tending from first segment to apex, the vittae more interrupted, the spots not
reaching the anterior border of each segment and not triangiilar in shape ; pubes-
cence black, with a few creamy hairs on some of the spots. Venter dark brown,
segmentations narrowly edged with grey, pubescence black, gTcy on segmentations.

Legs dark brown, tibiae lighter yellowish-brown, apical half of fore tibiae
darkly infuscate, tarsi rather darker than tibiae, the anterior tarsi black; pubes-
cence grey on femora and liasal half of anterior tibiae, black elsewhere.

Wings rather dark grey, with whitish areas in centres of cells, only visiljle
from certain direct 'ons against a black background, cross veins lightly suffused
with brown ; veins brown, stigma narrow, fairly conspicuous ; appendix present.

?. Resembles male in general appearance. Face not sunken, densely clothed
with greyish tomentum and rather dense, whitish pubescence, cheeks similar, beard
white. P.ilpi with second joint short, very stout, apex not produced l)ufc ratlier
sharply pointed, yellowish brown, with short, mixed pale and dark pubescence.
Antennae as in male. Forehead rather broad, distinctly wider at vertex than an-
teriorly, densely clothed with grey tomentum, with brownish tinge in places and
darker on vertex, pubescence black in centre and above, shorter and creamy at
sides; callus transverse, reaching eyes, black, tumid and shining, a second, round,
black callus in centre of forehead, occupying about half the width. Eyes with
facets uniform, bare. Thorax as in male. Abdomen witli median -s-itta extending
to first segment, with more distinct, creamy, almost golden pubescence on the

404 XOTES ox AUSTKAI.IAX TAUAXIDAK,

vittac. Neuter witii tiiK' black pul)r.--<-fiicc' in i-uiitrt' of the ><.'giiKMiIs. grey at the
sides. Legs aud wings as in male.

Dimenbions: c?. ?, 12 mm.

Bred from larvae found in wet mud, Cattle C'nrner, Wiugtiekl (GO niilis li-dui
Eidsvold), November, 1919 (No. 1).

This species is related to T. rujiiiotuliis liigot. liut dift'ers in its broader- torju.
and broader forehead with larger secondary callus, spotted wings, and in its gen-
eral appearance. This species has been placed under T. pallipennis Mact)., though
it does not completely agree in all details; in Macquart's description there are
said to be three calli on the front, the lower two contiguous and sometimes united;
in the iireseut specimens there are only two calli, unless the dark area on the
vertex be regarded as a third callus, and the middle one is equidistant from the
vertex and the lower callus. The wing^ also ditt'er from the description; in /'.
pallipennis they are described as a little greyish, though the name pallipennis
would indicate a whitish winged species. Under a lens the wings appear as
described above, but in certain lights they appear decidedly jjale and the dark
spots around the cross-veins are not cdnspicuous. This pale appearance is more
marked in a female recently received from Lake Hattah, Victoria (Nov., 1919 —
J. E. Dixon) . It is possible that T. pallipennis Macq. is a distinct species, but
until specimens are available agreeing comjiletely with the description it seems
preferable to treat tliese specimens as belonging to Macquart's species.

Tabanus duplonotatus Ric.

Ricardo, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (8), xiv., 1914, p. 39(i; T. pa n-i callus us,
Taylor (nee Ricardo), Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, xlii., Pt. 3, 1917, p. 524;
ibid., Rec. Aust. Mus., xii.. No. 5, 1918, p. 64.

This species has been wrongly identified by Taylor; we have specimens
compared with the types of both Miss Ricardo's species, and specimens identitied
by Tayhir and recorded above as 7'. pnrric((Iliisus agree with T. ilnpUniiitatua.

Tabaxus iNxoT^VBiLis Walker.

Walker, List Dipt. Brit. Mus., Part 1. 1848, p. 177; T. dorsobimaculutus
Macr]., Dipt. Exot., suppl. iv., 1850, y. JS; Ricardo, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (8),
XV., 1915, p. 273; T. duplonotatns, Taylor {nee Ricardo), Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.
Wales, xli., Pt. 4, 1916, p. 755.

As the species identified by Taylor as 7'. duplonotatus Ric. did not at all cor-
respond with a specimen ccmipared with tlu' ty|ie (E.W.F.), specimens were
sent to London (G.F.H.) and have l)een identitied hy Dr. (J. A. K. Mai-shall
as '/'. innolahilis W;dker.

Tahaxi's apbki'ks Tiiylor.

Tayha-, Proc. Linn. S,ic. X.S. Wales, xliv.. I'l. 1. 1919. p. 5(i; 7'. hatchclori.
Taylor, loc. cit., p. 58.

The types of the two siiecies have been very < aiefidly compared and we are
unable to maintain them as rlistinct; the i)rincipal dilference between them is
that T. hatchelori has the wings slightly clouded with brown along the veins,
whereas in T. aprepes the wing-s are practically- clear. A series from Burnett
River, however, shows con.siderable variation in the amount of suffusion, and varies
from sjiecimens in which the wings ai-e more stroimly mai'ked than in T.

BY kusta(;e \v. FKRr,r,sox and (i. f. hill. 4Gj

hatchelori to speciiiii'iis in wliicli the wing's are clear. Tliere is also considerable
variation in tlio colouration of the abdomen, i)ossibIy depending' on nuitiirity, us
all of the specimens ai'e bred. Both tyiies can be a))solutely "u)at<-hed" among
the series.

Tab.\xus xeogermaxic'us Kicardo.

Kicardo, Ann. .Mag. Nat. Hist., (8), xv., 1915, p. 283; op. cit., (8). .\i.\.,
1U17, p. 219; T. liilU Taylor, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, xliv., Pt. 1, 1919, p.
6i; T. j'ugith-us, Taylor, luc. cit., ]i. 01.

The determination of the above synonymy is based on the comparison by one
of us (G.F.H.) of specimens identified by jMiss Kicardo as T. neogermatiicus
Kic. with Taylor's types. Taylor has placed his species in two different groujis,
fiifjilivtis in Group ix. and liilli in Group x., but the distinction between these two
gi'oups is often a matter of aljrasion and the groups are not natural ones, in any
case, from the description, liilli would appear to be wrongly placed in Group x.,
as the segmentations are described as greyish. A comparison of the two descrip-
tions reveals no difference apart from differences in what might be described as
shades of colour. The determination in regard to fitgitivus was checked by the
examination liy both of us of a paratype whicli is absolutely identical with the
specimens determined l)y Miss Ricardo.

Tabanus brevior Walker.

Walker, List Dipt., 1, 1848, p. 188; T. cmellusus, Summei-s, Ann. Mag. Nat.
Hist., (8), X., 1912, p. 226; Rieardo, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (8), xv., 1915, p.
279: T. atiiitralis, Taylor, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. AYales, xli., Pt. 4, 1916, p. 257;
T. crypserijthrus, Taylor, oji. cit., xliv., Pt. 1, 1919, p. 60.

This species li;is been misidentitted in Australian collections. Specimens of
T. australis sent to London (G.F.H.) have been detei-mined by Dr. G. A. K.
Marshall and Mr. E. E. Austen as T. brevior Walker. Examination of a short
series of specimens of T. australis and T. criipsert/thrus, including specimens
identified by Taylor, showed that the species were identical. Tlie types of Tay-
lor's two species have also been compared (G.F.H.).

Tabaxus neopalpalls, nov. nonien.

T. iialpalis. Tayhu' iiimii. praeiicc.]. Pro<-. Liiiii. Sue. X.S. W.'ilc-^. xliv.,
Pt. 1, 1919, p. 116.

The name of this s]:)ecies l)eing' preoccupied by an Indian species — T. palpuUs
Eicardo (Records Indian Museum, iv.. No. vi., 1911, p. 212) — we propcse the
ahove to replace it. The name T. milsoni Taylor, is also preoccupied by 7'. mil-
soiiix Ricardo, but in this instance we understand that the name has already liecn
altered by Jlr. Taylor.

Tabaxus xiGRniAxrs Walker.

Walker, List Dipt.. 1, 1848, p. 183; T. IhhUii.'^, Summers. Ann. Mag. Nat.
Hist., (8), X., 1912, p. 225; Ricardo, op. cit., (8), xv., 1915, p. 285; ? T. iJaplwe-
mis, Taylor, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, xliv., Pt. 1, 1919, p. 54.

Comparisons of s]iecimens of T. daplweiiKs Taylor with the descriptions of T.
nigrimanuK Walk., and T. hatlhts Summers, leaves no doubt in our minds that
Taylor's species is the same as Walker's. We have thought it lietter. however, to

466 XOTES ox AVSTEALIAX TABANIUAK,

query the identifieation until a specimen of T. dapliot'iiun can bo aetually compared
•with the type of T. nigrimanuf^.

Tabanus jiixLscuLUs, nov. nomen.
Tabaiius minor Taylor (iiec :Mac4uart I. Proc Linn. Sue. N.S. Wales, xliv.,
Pt. 1, 1919, p. 64.

A change of name is necessary for Taylors species, as T. minor has already
been utilised by Maeqiiart (Dipt. Exnt.. Suppl. 4, 1850. p. .S3) for a species from
Patagonia.

Tabaxts eegis-geoegii !Macr|nart.

Maequart, Dipt. Exot., 1, 1838, p. 132; Ricardo, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (8),
svi., 1915, p. 276; 1. spadix, Taylor, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, xli., Pt.
4, 1916, p. 761; T. brisbanensis, Taylor, op. cit., xlii.. Pt. 3. 1917, p. 527; op. cit.,
xliv., Pt. 1, 1919, p. 67.

We ha\e compared a long series of T. ref/is-georgii with specimens of T.
hrishanen^is Taylor received from the Queensland ^Museum, and with the type of
T. spadix, and are imable to discover any tangible differences. The species is a
very variable one in the colour of the clothing, in the width of forehead and
shape of callus.

The Tasmanian specimens referred by Mr. Taylor to T. bri-'ibaneiisis are evi-
dently the species described by one of us (E.W.F.) as "T. daemenensis. distin-
guished by the facetting of the eyes in the male.

For our identification of T. regis-georgii we are relying on Miss Ricardo's
determination of the species in the British Museum. At tlie same time it seems
unlikely, though not impossible, tliat the range of our east coast species extends
to King George Sound. On the other hand we have seen Victorian specimens.
Should the species from King George Sound prove to be different it will be
necessary to re-establish the name T. spadix.

Dasybasis APPKXDirri.ATA Mai(|.

Maequart, Dipt. Exot., Suppl. 2, 1846. p. 25. pi. 1, fig. 1 ; Walker. List Dipt.,
Pt. v., Suppl. 1. 1854. p. 267; Ricardo, Ann. :\lag. Xat. Hist., (7), xiv.. 1904, p.
350.

This does not a]>pear to have been identified in Australian collections of Aus-
tralian Tabanidae since it was first described, though Bigot has referred a second
species from Chili to the genus.

We have specimens before us of a species that agi'ees fairly well with both
generic and specific descriptions with the exception that there are the usual five
divisions on the tlurd joint of tlio antennae. The dirisions are however, obscure
and might readily be miscounted, and the base of the third joint is not angulate
but somewhat swollen in the middle, corresponding in this respect to Macquart's
description.

The species is alHed tu '/(dndiii.t ncntilis Erichson. and 7'. frii;igatti Ric. liut
may I)e distinguished from buth by the liead being sniiiewhat compressed antero-
posteriorly so that the fcu'eliead is relatively shoi-ter and bi-oadcr than in these
species.

Walker's notes on the genus are valueless, as lie placed therein two species
now referred to Pelecorrhynclnts and some of tlie generic characters given by him

'Description spnt for publication to the Royal Society of Victoria.

BY EUSTACE W. FERGUSON AND G. F. HILL.

467

are founded on these. Should our identification prove correct, the genus Dasy-
basis would have to sink as a synonym of Tabauus, as the species is too closely
allied to Tahaiius froggatti and T. gentilis to admit of separation, and these two
latter species are oonneeted by others with the more typical hairy-eyed species of
Tabmuts.

Stibasoma hemiptera Surcouf.

Bull. Mus. nat. d'Hist. nat., Paris, No. 2, 1912, pp. 62-63.

This species seems to have been quite overlooked by recent workers in Australian
Tabanidaf. The tyjje had the antennae broken when described, which leaves some
doubt in our minds as to whether it is ascribed to the correct genus. On the
other hand there are other instances where South American genera have been re-
corded also from Australia.

The descriptioji does not tit any species known to us.

468

DESC'RIPTJONS OF NEW FORMS OF BUTTERFLIES FROM THE

SOUTH PACIFIC.

Br G. A. Watebhouse, B.Sc, B.E., F.E.S.

For some time past 1 have been receiving bvitterflies from the islands of the
South Pacitic, and amongst them there have been many new records and several
new races The pur])ose of this paper is to record the more impoi-tant of these,
particularly as my friend Mr. H. W. Siminonds has succeeded in capturing, in
Piji, some species of liigh interest. In the Transactions of the Entomological
Society of London, 1004, I gave an account of some collections from Fiji, and
Fruhstorfer, in Stett. ent. Zeit., 1902, also gives a list from the same islands,
■whilst in the Proceeding's of the Zoological Society of London. 1892. Mr. H. H.
Druce gives a list of the Liicaeniflne of the South Pacific. Besides the new races
described below. Mv. Siunuonds was aide to caiitui'c the rare Eidrpix caphinitls
Hew.

XVMPHALINWE.

Ridepis pyrrlnis libcrins, n. subsp.

?. Above, this race differs from sempraiiius in l)eing paler and the orange
tornal patch of the liimlwing is not so prominent.

Beneatli, the forewing is paler, the dark l)ar across nuddle of cell is narrower.
In tlie hindwing the central white area is larger, the three, red-brown, crescent-
shaped spots towards the tornus are much smaller, the black sulitcrminal spots
are faint and the orange-brown terminal line is very pale.

7/«6.— Lord Howe Is., Feb., 1915. One female.

When T received this sjiecimen, I at once recognised that a distinct race in-
habited the island, being nnich palea' above and the markings beneath being
obscure. Its chief difference is the great reduction of the dark subterminal spots
of the hindwing lieiieath. There are two other specimens recorded from the island,
but they seem to have been lost. The late Mr. Geo. "Masters, who !i:id seen
tliese specimens, ahv.-iys considered they were different from sfiii /iriiniii.'i.

Hypolimnas hiDpimita. n.sp.

(S. .\}>ovp. Forewing- rich black; a broad disi'al liand l)eyond <'ell, from
oosta to vein 3, white margined with iridescent purple; a band of four subapical
spots, white; sometimes two small discal white spots below vein 3. Cilia white,
at veins black. Hindwing rich black; a very large central spot, iridescent
purple. Cilia white, at veins black.

Be)irath. Forewing red-brown; tornus shading to l)lack; markings :is ;d)ove
but wliite liaiid not margineil |inrple; lowest, nf suba])ical spots and two towards

BY G. A. WATERIIOLSK. 469

tornus iliisteil with pale uietallic-blue scales; a series of iuterrupted terminal
liues white, towards tornus dusted with pale metallit-blue ; costa towards base
and upiier edge of cell pale metallic-blue, extending- as two pale blue bars into
cell, the outer the larger; an irregular pale blue bantl beyond end of cell. Cilia
white, at terminations of veins black. Hindwing brown; costa and bar at end of
cell red-bro\yn; basal half of wing dusted with white scales; discal series of
spots pale metallic lilue; tornus black; a series of broad tenninal lines white, to-
wards tornus pale metallic-blue : a white line on dorsum near tornus, above which
is an irregular pale blue area. Cilia white, at terminations of veins black.

? as in male, larger, more highly coloured beneath. The pale metallic mark-
ings in both sexes appear greenish in some directions.

Hub. — Waidoi, Fiji. Four specimens caught by Mr. Sinunonds, May. July,
and August, 1919. One male, Nasogoto. Navai. Fiji, caught by Mr. E. ,) .
Goddard. Feb.. 1905.

This species has puzzled me very much, coming as it dues from a locality
where the race of H. bolina is extremely variable, but the different white band
above and the different underside to the hindwing do not place it with bolina, of
which I have numbers of Fijian specimens. Mr. Simmonds, who has caught
bolina, is confident it is distinct. He tells me that it is a purely mountain species,
lives in the rain forest and, like all butterflies in Fiji, it responds readily to the
fii-st glimpse of sunshine and is only found along the rivers, where they rise
rapidly to the mountains. At one time 1 tliought it might be an extreme eastern
race of II. alimena.

Issoria egista Cram.

The following races have been described from the South Pacific, — gaberti from
Tahiti, samoana from Samoa, bowdenia from Tonga, sci/llaria from Lifu, Loyalty
Is., and shortlandica from the Solomoii Is. Of these, the race from Samoa is the
most distinct. To these I now add races from the New Hebrides and Fiji.
From the typical form from the southern Moluccas, the eastern races differ chiefly
in their jialer upper sides, the nari'ower dark liorflers to the wing's and the much
smaller dark spots on the underside.

Ifisoria egista ritieiinifi. n. suhsp.

c?. Above. Forewing bright orange; apex and termen narrowly black; bar
beyond cell and subapical bar black. Hin<hving bright orange; tcrnien narrowly
black.

Beneath. Forewing orange-red; a series of cell bars brown; a whitish bar
beyond end of cell; between veins 5 and 6 a large whitish spot; a discal series of
pale bluish lunules inwardly edged brown. Hindwing orange-red; a series of
pale bluish lunules outwardly edged brown; beyond is an indication of a series of
brown dots; an interrupted brown subterminal line from apex to vein 3.

Hab. — Labasa. Yanua Levu. Fiji, Mar.. 1908, caught by Mr. R. N. Ross.

This race has much narrower dark borders to the forewings above than the
Australian propinqua or scyllaria, and on the under side the pale discal spots
are more prominent, whilst the discal brown spots have almost disappeared. It
is intermediate between scyllaria and samoana.

Issoria egista hebridina, n. subsp.

<?. This race occupies an intermediate place between intiensis and sci/Uaria.
Above, the bordei-s to the wing's are not so narrow as in vitiensis, a discal series

470 NEW FORMS OF BUTTERFLIES FROM SOUTH PACIFIC,

of brown spots is imlieated on the torewing-, and the general colour is not quite so
bright .

Beneath, the iliseal series ot dark spots is present on both wings and the pale
spots are not so prominent as in tlie Fijian race. In both hebridina and vitiensis
the purplish suffusion found on the underside of several other races is absent.
My specimens are from Vila, New Hebrides.

LYCAENIDAE.

Deudorix epijarbas diovella, n.subsp.

d". Above. Forewing black; a central red patch below cell in upper portion
of interspace between veins 2 and 3, and slightly extending above vein 3 ; a slight
red scaling on vein la at one-third from base. Cilia black, ilindwing red;
costa broadly and base black; dorsum brown; termen and veins in red area faintly
black; anal lobe black, inwardly bordered with red and outwardly with metallic-
blue; tail very short, brown. Cilia red, towards tornus black.

Beneath. Forewing In-own; a slightly darker bar at end of cell and a much
darker brown discal band, both faintly edged whitish; dorsum paler. Cilia dark
brown. Hindwing brown; a slightly darker bar at end of cell and an irregular,
darker, broad, discal band narrowly edged white; a subcaudal spot in area 2
black, outwardly edged orange and inwardly metallic-blue; anal lobe black, out-
wardly edged metallic-blue, inwardly white; tornus above anal lobe irregularly
metallic-blue. Cilia dark brown.

i/af).— Suva, Fiji. Four males caught by Mr. Simmonds, Feb., 1920.

Allied to diovis from Australia and woodfordi from Guadalcanar, Solomon
Is., but with even less red on the forewing than the latter, the tail shorter than
that of mathewi from the New Hebrides. It agi-ees with the other eastern races
in not having the black spot of the anal lobe above completely ringed with colour,
and with the figure of matJiewi in having the subcaudal spot of hindwing be-
neath crowned with metallic-blue, and not completely ringed with colour. This
capture by Mr. Simmonds extends the range of D. epijarbas further eastward
than has hitherto been known.

PAPILIONIDAE.

Papilio macleayatiHs iiisulano. n. subsp.

?. Above. Forewing brown-black; l)asal portion of cell and ddrsiira at
ba.se pale green; a spot at end of cell, a large subcostal spot at three-fourths
and a smaller spot in base of area 4 gi-een ; a series of large subterminal spots
cream; base of areas 2 and la whitish. Hindwing brown-black; hase green; rest
of basal half of wing whitish; a series of subterminal spots cream.

Beneath. Forewing as above, but paler; green basal area larger and sub-
terminal spots obscured. Hindwing brown ; basal half gi'een, outwardly edged
white; subterminal spots obscure.

Hab. — Lord Howe Island, where the insect is not uncommon, but very diffi-
cult to capture.

This race is readily recognised from that found in Australia by the much
larger subterminal spots to both wings above. I have now seen a number of
similar specimens, all females, and there is no difficulty in distinguishing them
from typical macleayanus.

BV G. A. WATERHOUSE. 471

HESPERIDAE.
Badamia exclamationis subflava, n. subsp.

3. Aboce. l''orewmg biuwii ; eosta lined yellow-browu ; a large spot about
middle of cell, yellowish hyaline; a pair of large discal spots in areas 2 and 3,
yellowish hyaline; sometimes a minute subapical dot yellowish hyaline; some-
times an orange spot just above middle of vein la. Cilia brown. Hindwing
brown; central area extending towai'ds dorsum, yellow-brown. Cilia yellow-
browu .

Beneath Forewing yellow-browu; hyaline spots as above, margined yel-
lowish ; area la towards base brown-black ; large patch towards tornus yellowish.
Cilia brown. Hindwing yellowish-brown; indications of a paler discal band, end-
ing above tornus in a large yellow spot; towards tomus broadly brown-black.
Cilia yellowish-brown.

Hah. — Waidoi, biji, two specimens caught by Jlr. Simmonds, Nov., 1910; Ba
Mts., Fiji, two specimens caught by Mr. L. V. Waterhouse, .Jan., 1906.

This subspecies has a much yellower appearance than any specimens from
the large number I have from both within and without Australia. Mr. Simmonds'
specimens are in fine condition, and he writes that on a trip in Fiji, he saw this
skipper in company with a number of Parata hiluriata. Between 6 and 7.30 a.m.
numbers of skippers were seen passing the boat ; the morning was wet, the wind
oflE shore, and the distance Ijetween two and four miles.

472.

OKDINAKY MONTHLY MEETING,

27tli OUTUBEK, l'J20.
Mr. J. J. Fletcher, M.A., B.Sc, President, in the Chair-.

The Presideul aunouueed the receipt of a very valuable addition to the library,
of books and pictures bequeathed to the Society by the late Mr. ¥. M. Clement*,
F.L.S., F.Z.S.

The President ottered the con^-atulatious ot members to Professor Sir Edge-
worth David, K.B.E., (in absentia), and Mr. J. H. Campbell, M.B.E., on the
Honours recently conferred on them by their inclusion in the British Empire
Order.

The President announced tliat the Council is prepared to receive applications
for four Linnean Macleay Fellowships, tenable for one year from 1st April, 1921,
from qualified Candidates. Apphcatious should be lodged with the Secretary,
who will afford all necessary information to intending candidates, not later than
30th November, 1920.

T'he Donations and Exchanges received since the previous Monthly Meeting
(29tli September, 1920), amounting to 7 Vols., (33 Parts or Nos., 1 Bulletin, 5
Reports and 18 Pamphlets, etc., received from 40 Societies and Institutions and
one ijrivate donor, were laid upon the table.

NOTES AND EXHIBITS.

Ml'. W. W. Froggatt exhibited a series of Hies from India, including Vhry-
somyia hesziuna Villeneuve, C. flaviceps Walker, C. nijifacies (= C. albiceps
W.), C. nigricepa Patton, Lucilia aerenitisiiiia Fabr. and L. cruggii Fatton. A
number of these cause cutaneous myiasis in man and animals in India. Also
specimens of Bibio imitator from suburban gardens.

Mr. G. H. Hardy exhibited a pair of flies, Chrysomyza aenea Fabr. taken
in a garden at Haberfield, 28th March, 1920. The species is new to the Australian
fauna.

Mr. Waterhouse exhibited the first specimen of Heteroiiympha solandri
Waterh. reared from the egg. The history of the specimen is that a female was
caught at Mt. Kosciusko on 15th February, 1920, and on dissection of the ab-
domen four eggs were obtained; one only was fertile and this emerged on 28th
February and was looked after very carefully; the larva jjupated at Sydney on
8th September, and a male emerged cm 10th October, ahout three months earlier
than the usual time of appearance at Mt. Kosciusko. The female parent, tiio cast
larval heads from tlic 2nd, 3ril, nud final instars and the pupal skin wi're also
shown .

(Printed off .31st October, 1920.)

I'ltdi'. LiNx. Soc. X.s.W. i:)2().

Pl/ATK Win.

.iiitviidiilopltylluin ti/wi'idgt'i , n, gen. et sp.

PrO(;. Linn. Soc. N.S.W. 1920.

Plate xix.

'iii^li^ r iSi-*.

Lower Carboniferous Fossils from S.E. Habbinboon.

Proo. Linn. Soc. N.S.W. 1920.

Plate xx.

Lower r'uTlionit'erou.s Fossils tVoiri iS.E. Hiililiiiiliooii.

Fiwc. LiN.v. Soc. N.S.W., 1020.

PlATK XXI.

Lower Carbunii'eruus Fossils from S.E. Biilil.iiuliuou.
Silicitied Koots from nt'iir Curraljiiljula.

Piioc. Lkn. Soc. N.S.W. 1920.

Platis xxu.

■S^Ai^Y (3i^

Lowpv Carliriiiifei'ous Fossils fi-rnii Sonicrton, HiiMiinlionn and Carroll.

pROC. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 1920.

Plate xsni.

Lower Carliouiferous Fossils from Somerton District.

Prop. T,in-n. Soe. N.S.W. 102(1

Pl>ATK XXIV.

-^^ \.

V

1 (X4)

^^i;«^

^•^.^

:,:^

(XI3)

(X4)

I;

7

'%

(xI8)

^#

V

(XI8)

6 (xl8)

-•'■\

>^k

A

(x 18)

8 \

/

^-^^"^ (x78)
FC. ad nab ael

10

Lower Carbouif'proiis Fossils from Halibinboou and Mooroowarra ; and (tlafiated Pebbles
from Browne's Creek and Rocky Creek.

Pnnr. Liw. Soo. N.S.W. 1020.

Pt.ATR XW.

Cai-boniferous Rocks'from'tlie Currabubula Di;trict.

NOTES AXD EXHIBITS. 473

ilr. E. Clieel exhibited a series of specimens collected iu the coastal district
from Sydney to the Upper Clarence, also at Hill Top and on the Blue Mountains
including Boro«/« ledifotia J. Gaz. ; B. ledi folia vnr. ninmarinifolia (B. rosmar-
jnifolia A. Cunn.) witli pure white flowers from Hill Top (E. Cheel, July,
1914), Bell (Miss H. Greg-son, Sept., 1914). Mount Wilson (.1. H. Maiden, Dec.,
1914), near Cowan Station (W. F. Blakely and D. W. C Shiress, Sept., 1919),
and specimens with double flowers from Hill Top (E. Clieel, Aug., 1915); B.
ledifolia var. trijiln/Ua (B. triphylla Sieber) from Port Hacking (W. Slade,
Aug., 1914), Kurra.iong Heights (H. Dixson, Sept., 1897), National Park C^I.
Bell, Aug., 1901), Woy Woy (Miss A. C. Johnstone, July, 1916), and doulile-
flowered specimen from Lindfield (E. G. Jacobs, Aug., 1913); Boronia phniata
Sm. with double flowers from Kedfern (Mrs. Boyce, Nov., 1900) and Hornsby
(W. r. Blakely, Apr., 1914); Eriostemon' latice<ilatus Gaertn. with pure white
flowers, Tomago (Lady AVindeyer, Sept., 1903), Kose Bay (Oct., 1906), Nelson's
Bay (J. L. Boorman, Aug., 1911) ; E. Crowei F. v. M. with pure white flowers
from Hornsby (W. F. Blakely and D. W. C. Shiress, Feb., 1920); Keiniedya
ruhicunda Vent, with greenish-white flowers, Wahroonga (M. S. Barnett, Sept.,
1920); and ('<?r<it<ipet(duin cjuinmiferum Sm. with white flowers from between
Hornsby and Dural (W. J. Pitty, Dec, 1919).

Mr. Cheel also exhibited on behalf of Miss A. A. Brewster specimens, and
a chart, showing doubling of flowers and deterioration of the stamens of Erios-
temon lanaeolatiis from Maroubra (October, 1920) . In one specimen the stamens
had multiplied to 16; in the more changed flowers the imniber varied from 1 to 4,
and in one case there was left only a single anther seated on one of the inner
petals. In two flowers tlie pistil was absent and 5 small petals were present in
place of the carpels; in another tlie five degenerated carpels were partly green
and partly pink.

Mr. -John Mitchell exhibited a series of Sihirian and Devonian brnrhioi.ods
from N.S.W.

474

REVISION OF AUSTRALIAN LEPIDOPTERX—LIPABIDAE.

By A. Jefperis Turner. M.D.. F.E.S.

Whatever tlie cause, the study of the Bombycine Families of Lepidoptera has
been strangely neglect ed. No revision of the world-fauna of these groups has
appeared, although from the smaller number of species this would l>e an easier
task than it has been with the Noctiddae, Geometridae, Pyralidae, lortricidae,
and Tineidae. A revision of the genera is badly needed, and there has been
even considerable confusion as to the families. This perhaps is one of the rea-
sons why they have been neglected, though it has been to a large extent removed
by the researches of Sir G. Hampson, published in the tu'st volume of his Cata-
logue of the Lepi(kjptera Phalaenae and in his Moths of India. Another dififi-
eulty with regard to the Australian species is that so many of them have been
described by authors innocent of morphological knowledge, and are therefore
difficult of recognition. Fortunately, I ha\e been able to examine many Aus-
tralian types in the British Museum, and nearly all of the older species have
now been identified, and can be referred to their right positions. Since then I
have examined not only my own collection and that of the Queensland Museum,
but also many specimens sent to me by Mr. George LyeU, of Victoria, by Mr.
J. A. Kershaw from the National Museum, Melbourne, and by Mr. A. M. Lea
from the South -\ustralian Museum. Thanks to their generous help, and to
the permission of the Directors of these Museums, a very large amount of ma-
terial has been available for the purposes of this paper.

Family LIPARIDAE.

This family has also been known a-s the Li/maiitriadae. The older name was
abandoned under the impression that the generic name Liparix Oehs. was pre-
occupied, Imt it appears that this preoccupation was pre-Linnean, and conse-
quently inoperative. Formerly I enlarged the conc-eption of the family (Trans.
Ent. Soc, 1904, p. 470) to include the Tlypsidae and Anihelidae as subfamilies,
but I am now of opinion, for reasons which will be given presently, that the
three groups are better regarded as three families.

The Liparidae may be defined as fdllows: — Tongue absent. Antennae bi-
pectinate to apex in d, and nearly always in 2 also. Head, thorax, abdomen, and
femora hairy. Forewings with 1 (usually known as Ic) absent. 5 approximated to 4
at origin, 8 and 9 always stalked, either from cell or areole. Hindwings with
frenulum present ; 1 absent, discocellulars angled. ,5 arising from below angle and
apjiroximated to 4, 6 and 7 usually stalked. 8 approximated and usually con-
nected with cell somewliere between i and middle, i-arely anastomosing.

BV A. JEFFERIS TUEXEIt. 4lO

The absc'Ui-i' of a ttmgm', thf aiiproxiiiuitidn of the origin of the second
branch of the median (vein 5) to the cubitus, and the connection of the sub-
costal of the hindwing with the cell about its middle, are sufficient to distinguish
this family. In all these respects except the first it agrees with the Hypsidae.
Its next nearest ally is the Noctuidae, the distinguishing point, apart from tlie
presence of a tongue, being that in the latter the subcostal anastomoses with the
cell in the hindwing near its base. This basal anastomosis is present in the
genus aptly named by Mcyrick Haplopseiistix (for it is an evident deceiver), as to
whose correct position there has been some difference of opinion. Tlie presence
of a tongue, although short and weakly developed, confirms the conclusion that
Haplopseustis belongs to the Noctuidae; for, although the presence of a tong-no
in a primitive gemis of Liparidae would be a not impossible disco\-ery, the vena-
tion of the forewing of Haplopseustis shows that it is not piimiti\e. Tlie con-
nection between the hindwing cell and subcostal in this and other families is
really due to the persistence of the first branch of the radial, wliicli has been
shortened by their approximation. Sometimes the \eiii is not distinctly de-
veloped between the approximated points, or there may be an actual anastomosis
as in Aeyplias. In the more primitive genera a typical areole is present as in
most Xoetuidae. In many cases this has been lost by coalescence, leaving 7, 8,
9, 10 stalked, an intermediate condition being preserved in the African genus
Lacipa, which has a small areole from which proceeds the common stalk of
these veins. But the areole may also be lost by the obsolescence of the
base of vein 9, lea^-ing 10 disconnected, as sometimes occurs in Iropoca. In
Bedoa the areole becomes long and narrow, the allied Leucoma from Europe and
Eii-om differ from this in 10 having become disconnected. There is a tendency
in this family for the obsolescence of the wings in the 2; this occurs in three of
our genera (f^iiiinh". Orgyia. Iropoca).

The family is a fairly large one, and in Australia there are 60 species, which I
refer to 18 genera. This is a larger number of species than is found in the Palae-
aretic region, and in the Nearctic region the family is still more poorly repre-
sented. On the other hand Hampson's Moths of India contains a larger number,
and Janse's check-list of the Moths of Soutli Africa records twice as many spe-
cies. The group is most developed in warm regions, and most of our species
are from the coasts of North Australia, Queensland and New South Wales.
Only seven species (Porthesia, Oligeria, Aeyplias, Orgyia) come from South-east
Australia, and onlv two (Aeyplias, Orgyia) come from the South-west of the con-
tinent. Our genera may be divided into three or four natural groups:—

1. Those witli a normal areole, Laelia. Dasychira, Olene. Orgyia, widely dis-
tributed genera, which are very scantily rejiresented here, together with the inono-
typical Iropoca and Axiologa.

2. A small gi-oup in which the areole tends to obsolescence, first by becomina-
long and narrow as in Bedoa, and then by 10 becoming disconnected as in Eazora
and in the exotic genus Leucoma. Of this we have only two species.

3. A much larser group in which the areole has disappeared liy coalescence,
leaving 7. 8, 9, 10 stalked. This may be divided into (a) the Lymaiitria group,
containing also Eiiome and Dura, and (h) the Euproctis gi-oup containing also
Heracula, Habrophylla, Aeyplias, Oligeria. Porthesia, and Icta . This last is the
only group at all largely represented in Australia, where it comprises three-
fifths of the whole number of species.

4/0

KEVISIOX DP ATSTUALIAN' I.KPIDOPTKHA-l.lPAIMUAK,

1. Fore wings without areole 2.

Forewings with areole ( 10 sometimes disconnected

in Iiopoca) 12.

2. Forewings with 7, S, 9. 10 stalked, or 9 absent and

7, S. 10 stalked 3.

Fore-.vings with 7, S. 9. stalked. 10 separate . . . . Jiu~oi\i.

3. Hindwings abbreviated, cell i Ida.

' Hindwings and cell normal 4 .

i. Hindwings with 4 absent Porl/icsid.

Hindwings with 4 present : o-

.5. Hindwings with S anastomosing with c=ll from J to i 6.

Hindwings with S appru.\imated and connected

with cell at a point only <S.

o. Forewings with 9 absent 7.

Forewings with 9 present Habrophylla.

7. Posterior tibiae without middle-spurs Oligeria.

Posterior tibiae with middle-spurs Acyplias

S. Forewings with 7 arising long before 10 9.

Forewings with 10 arising before, or opposite, or

at least near 7 10.

9. Palpi short or moderate, porrect or oblique . . . . Juipioclis.

Palpi long, erect, reaching vertex Heraciila.

10. Forewings with 11 anastomosing or connected

with 12 Dtiya.

Forewings with 11 free 11.

11. Posterior tibiae without middle-spurs, V with wings

much aborted I-'.nonic.

Posterior tibiae with middle-spurs, V with wings

normally developed /.yiiiaiilria.

12. Forewings with areole long and narrow, 7 from

about middle A'edoa.

Forewings with areole normal, 7 from its extremity 13.

13. Forewings with 7. S, 9 stalked from areole, or 10

disconnected. $ apterous 14.

Forewings with 7 approximated or connate (\ery
rarely short-stalked i, 'i with wings developed .. .. 1-").

14. Posterior tibiae without middle-spurs i)i"yi(t.

Posterior tibiae with middle-spurs Iropoia.

1.5 Forewings with 11 anastomosing with 12 Axiologa.

Forewings with 11 free 16.

IG. Palpi with terminal joint very short or concealed . . 17.

Palpi with terminal joint well-developed I.ailia.

17. Abdomen with dorsal crest on second segment,

palpi with second joint strongly dilated Olene.

Abdomen without crests, palpi not dilated /)asyi/iira.

Gen. 1. 1 r T A.

/(•?((, Wlk.. List Lcp. Uril. .\Iiis., iv.. p. !)■_>•_'.

Head and lluirax with ajuiresscd hairs; Irons thit. I'alpi very slu)rt. \mr-
reet; terminal joint minute. Tiiorax and al)douu'n not ircstcd ; abdomen hairy,
tuft in c? large. Tiliial spurs short and stout; posterior tibiae witli hotli pairs
present. Forewins;-s lonu and narrow; without areole, 2 from *, , 3 from .sliortly

Br A. JEFFKRIS TUIJN'ER.

477

before angle. 4 and 5 connate from angle, C irom upper angle nearly connate
with 7, 7, 8, 9, 10 stalked. 11 from shortly before angle; discoeellulars strongly
angled inwards, hlndwiugs nearly as broad as forewings Imt much shorter; cell
very long (1), discoeellulars strongly oblique. 2 from % 3 and 4 stalked from
angle, 5 curved at base and somewhat apiiroximated to 4, 6 and 7 stalked from
upper angle, 8 anastomosing or connected with cell about middle .

An isolated genus with curiously elongate forewings and alibreviated hind-
wings, almost zygaeniform.

Head orange fulviceps.

Head blackish tanaopis.

1. ICTA FULVICEPS.

Ida fulviceps Wlk.. List Leji. Brit. Mus.. iv.. p. 922.

c?. 28-29 mm Head brownish-orange. Palpi i; brownish-orange. An-
tennae bro-miish-orange: pectinations in c? 9. Thorax dark-fuscous; tegnlae and
extreme bases of patagia brownish-orange. Abdomen dark-fuscous; tuft brown-
ish-orange. Legs ochreous; middle and posterior femora and tibiae mostly
fuscous. Forewings narrow-elongate, costa straight to near apex, there gently
arched, apex rounded, termen very obliquely rounded; fuscous; costal edge nar-
rowly ochreous; cilia fuscous. Hindwings about * length of forewings. termen
rounded ; fuscous ; cilia fuscous.

Two examples in the British Museum, one labelled "Australasia," the other
"New Holland." The locality requires confirmation, but probably like the fol-
lowing, it comes from the north of the continent.

2. TCTA TANAOPIS, n . Sp .

TavacoTTic;, elongate.

c?. 30 mm. Head, palpi, and thorax blackish. Antennae blackish; pectina-
tions in c? 10. Abdomen reddish-orange; basal segment, a median dorsal line,
and underside blackish. Legs blackish. Forewing's elongate, spathulate. costa
sinuate, slightly concave to J, then arched, apex rounded, termen very obliquely
rounded, termen as long as dorsum; blackish; cilia blackish. Hindwings short.
about 4 length of dorsum of forewing. tennen rounded, tornus somewhat pro-
jecting; thinly sealed; fuscous; on dorsum pale-ochreous ; cilia fuscous.

Type in National Museum. Melbourne.

N.Q. : riaudie River, in Febmary; one specimen taken by ^Mr. .T. A. Ker-
shaw.

Gen. 2. P o n Tii k s i a.

Porthesia. Stph.. 111. Brit. Ent.. ii., 1829. p. 65.

Palpi moderate, porreet; second .ioint sometimes hairy beneath; terminal
.ioint very short. Thoi-ax and abdomen without crests; tuft lai'ge. especially in
9. Posterior tibiae with two pairs of spurs. Forewing-s without areole ; 7. 8. 9,
10 stalked, 7 arising from before 10, 6 connate or short-stalked with the pre-
ceding veins. Hindwings with discoeellulars angled. 3 and 4 coincident. 5 ap-
proximated or connate. 6 and 7 stalked. 8 closely approximated to cell near or
beyond middle, and connected with it .

Type. P. simili.s Fuesl. from Europe.

■i'S nKVISION" OF AUSTRALIAN I.KPIDOPTERA-LIPARIDAK,

1. Wings white 2.

Wings more or less ochreous or orange 5.

2. Dorsal edge of forewings with long, spathulate,

ochreous scales 3.

Dorsal edge of forewings without ochreous scales .. 4.

3 Dorsum of abdomen partly blackish eiil/nsaiia.

Dorsum of abdomen not blackish parado.ra.

4. Dorsum of abdomen, except base, blackish iiielaiiosoiua.

Dorsum of abdomen ochreous. bases of segments

fuscous alicua.

Dorsum of abdomen whitish galactopii.

5. Forewings suffused with dark-fuscous iiielaiiibap/ies.

Forewings not suffused with dark-fuscous 6.

6. Forewings without transverse lines 7.

Forewings with pale transverse lines S.

7. Forewings often with pale terminal fascia, termen

slightly oblique fiwhrialn.

Forewings without pale terminal fascia, termen

strongly oblique xntlioptera.

S. Forewings very pale ochreous, lines indistinct .. .. acatluirta.

Forewings dark-ochreous or orange 9.

9. Forewings with pale spots on termen Irispila.

Forewings without pale spots lutea.

3. PORTHESIA EUTHYSAXA.

Porthesia euthnimui Turn., Trans. Roy. See. S. Aust., xxvi- ]ii(l2. p. 175.

The sexes are similar.

Q. : Mount Tambourine; N.S.W. : Ebor.

5. Porthesia paradoxa.

Cliioiiophu.-<ina paradoxa Butl., Trans. Ent. See., 1886, p. 385; Porthexia patuihra
Turn., Trans. Roy. Soe., S. Aust.. 1902, p. 176.
There is nothing paradoxical about this species. I have examined Butler's
type; it has the ordinary structure of the ffenus.

Q. : Rockhampton, Brisbane, Mt)nnt Tambourine, Coolangatta; N.S.W. :
Sydney. Bnlli.

5. Porthesia melaxcsoma.

Porthesia melaiiosoma Butl.. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., (5), ix.. p. 87; I'lirthcda
mi.iid Butl., loc. fit.. 11. 88.

c? $. .34-40 unn. Hea<l. thorax, and antennae white. P:ilpi and pci-tus
blackisii. Abdomen blackish; dorsum of two ba.sal segments white; apices of seg-
ments on underside white; tuft in c? white, sometimes ochreous-tinged. in V
ochreous. Legs white; anterior and middle paii-s partly fuscous; in c?, anterior
tibiae and part of two basal tar.sal .joints ochreous. Wings white: in c?. costa of
forewings on underside suffused with fuscous.

Vic: Beaconsfield. Moe, Gisbcmie, Forrest; Tas. : Launceston.

f>. Porthesia alieva.

Portheaia alieiw. But!.. Trans. Ent. Soc, 1886, p. 386.

<?. Head and thorax white. Palpi whitish-ochreous. upper surface near
ba«e fuscous. Abdomen jiale-oclueous; bases of segments fuscous on dorsum;
beneath wholly ochreous. Wings white; underside of hindwings jiartly ochreous-
tinged . ,

BY A. JEFFERIR TURNER. 479

These iiavtieulars were noted from tlie British IMuseum type. I have seen
no other example.
Q. : Peak Downs.

7. PORTHESIA GALACTOPIS.

Porthesia galactopig. Turn.. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., xxvi., 1902, p. 176.

N.Q.: Prince of Wales Island, Cairns, Mareeba, Townsville ; Q. : Gayndah,
Brisbane, Southport, Coolangatta.

S. Porthesia xuthoptera, n.sp.

5o'j6o7t7£po; , ta'svny-winged.

(j'. 24 mm. 'i. 28-38 mm. Head, thorax, palpi, antennae, abdomen and
legs oehreous. Forewings triangular, rather narrow, termen strongly oblique;
ochreous without markings; cilia oehreous. Hindwing-s similar, in c? paler.

Differs from the following in the sexes being of the same colour.

N.Q.: Kuranda. near Cairns, one 2 received from Mr. F. P. Dodd; Stan-
nary Hills, one S, two $ received from Dr. T. Bancroft.

9. Porthesia fijibriata.

Teara fimhriata. Luc Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, 1891, p. 285: Porthesia fm-
briata. Turn., Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., xxvi., 1902, p. 176.

The primary character given in the tabulation suffices to distinguish only
the typical form of the c?. There is another form nearly as common, which has
the forewings wholly ochreous. This can be distinguished from .luthoptera by
the forewings being proportionately broader, with less oblique termen . The ? is
whitish, has narrower forewing-s, and can scarcely be distinguished from gatac-

topis.

Q. : Stradbroke Island, Coolangatta. Attached to Banksia serratifolia.

10. Porthesia acatharta.

Porthesia acatharta, Turn., Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., xxx., 1906, p. 124.

Termen of forewing with long spathnlate ochreous scales.
N.A.: Port Darwin: X.Q.: Cairns.

11. Porthesia TRispiLA, n . sp .
-pioTiiXoi;, three-spotted.

c?. 25-27 mm. Head, palpi, and antennae pale-ochreous . Thorax and
abdomen ochreous. Legs whitish-ochreous. Forewings triangular, costa moder-
ately arched, apex rounded, termen bowed, oblique; pale-ochreous irrorated, ex-
cept towards costa, with brown-f uscons ; absence of irroration leaves two trans-
verse lines and three terminal spots; first line from i costa to beyond i dorsum,
at first outwardly-enrved, then sinuate: second line from f costa to beyond | dor-
sum, similar in form to first line: large pale-ochreous spots at apex, above mid-
termen, and above tornus: cilia pale-ochreous, bases whitish, barred with fuscous
on midtermen and tornus. Hindwings and eilia whitish. Underside whitish.

N.Q. : Kuranda, near Cairns: two specimens received from Mr. F. P. Dodd.

4S0 REVISION' OF AUSTRAMAX l.KI'IDOPTKRA-LIPARIDAK.

12. PORTHKSIA .MKI.AJIl'.APHES, 11. Sp.
(xsXatipacpr,; , Oark-eyetl.

6. 28 mm. HeaJ ami tliorax fuscous, with some oclireous hairs. Palpi
and antennae fuseous. Abdomen dark-fuseous, tuft and undei-side oehreous.
Legs oehreous mixed witli fuseous. Forewings triang-uhir, costa gently arched,
more strongly so near base, apex rounded, termen shghtly bowed, ol)li<jue; oehre-
ous, thickly irrorated with dark-fuscous; a large basal patch mostly fuscous; a
suffused, fuscous, subterminal baud with an acute, median, posterior tooth ; cilia
fuscous, apices partly oehreous. Hindwings with termen rounded; deep oehreous,
with slight fuseous irroration; cilia oehreous, with some fuscous admixture.
Undereide oehreous .

Type in Coll. Lyell.

Vie.: Ocean Grange, near Sale, in March;, mw specimen.

13. PORTHESIA LUTEA.

Botiihijx lutea. Fab., Syst., Ent., p. 574; Arta.ia chri/sojiJdla. Wlk.. List Lep. Rrit.
Mus., xxxii., p. 334; Arlcua iolimtn, ^[eyr.. Trans. Rov. Soc. S. Aust.,
XV., 1891, p. 194.

£?. 23-32 mm. $. 32-3G mm. Head, thora.x, and abdomen orange-yeUow,
rather paler in $. Palpi pale-ochreous, apices fuscous. j^jitennae orange-
yellow, paler in ?, pectinations fuscous. Leg-s orange-yellow; tarsi pale-oehreous.
Forewings broadly triangular, more elongate in ?, costa moderately arched, apex
rounded, termen slightly oblique; orange-yellow, paler in ?; two whitish, slightly
denticulate, transverse lines, rarely obsolete; first from r^ costa to -j dorsum,
angled outwards above middle ; second from | costa to % dorsum outwardly curved,
slightly sinuate towards dorsum; cilia orange-yellow. Hindwings and cilia
orange-yello\\-.

lobrota is a much darker form, the forewing-s ochreous-brown, the himhving's
fuscous. Intermediate examples occur.

N.A.: Pt. Darwin; N.Q.: Cairns. Atherton, Stannary Hills. Dunk Tslan.l,
Ingham, Towns\-ille; Q. : Rockhampton, Gympie, Nambour, Brisbane, Stradbroke
Island. Also from New Guinea.

Gen . 3 . 0 l i ( ; k i; i a. n . gen .

oXiyTipioq, sniiUl.

Palpi minute. Antennae in c? short (less than J), strongly bipectinate to
apex. Posterior tibiae without middle s|)urs. Forewing's without areole, 9
absent (coincident with 8), 7, 8, 10 stalked. Id arising before 7. Hindwings with
3 and 4 connate or stalked, 5 separate, 0 and 7 stalked, 8 anastomosing with cell
from before middle to J.

A development of Aci/phag distinguished by the uuuute pal])i and Idss of
middle-spurs .

14. Oliceria iiemicai-i.a.

Orgyia hemicaUn. Low., Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., xxix., 1905, p. 17li.

<S. 18-20 mm. Head dark-fuscous; face oehreous. Antennae, thorax, and
abdomen dark-fuscous. Leg-s fuseous; tibiae and tarsi oehreous. Forewings tri-

BY A. JEFFERIS TURNER.

481

angular, costa gently arehetl, apex rounded, terinen bowed, strongly oliliriue, longer
thaji dorsum; clark- fuscous ; cilia oehreous. Hindwing-s rather short, ternien slight-
ly rounded; orange; basal half fuscous, the line of junction irregularly dentate;
cilia orange. Underside similar.

N.S.AV.: Sydney; two specimens received from tlie late Mr. Masters. A<!
they were taken many years ago and bore no laliels, the locality needs eonfirnui-
tion. Vic. : Melbourne .

Gen. 4. Ac y p ha s.

Acyplws, Wlk., List Lep. Brit. Mus., iv., p. 798; Kirby, Cat. Moths, i., 1892, )..

472; Anepa, Swin., Trans. Ent. Soc., 1903, p. 478.
/ Palpi short, porreet; second joint sometimes hairy beneath; terminal joint
minute. Thorax and abdomen without crests; tuft large, especially in S. Pos-
terior tibiae with two pairs of spurs. Forewings without areole, 9 absent (coinci-
dent with 8), 7, 8, 10 stalked, 10 arising before 7, 6 approximated, connate, or
short-stalked. Hindwings with <lisc(icellulars angled, 3, 4, 5 separate, 6 and 7
stalked, 8 anastomosing with cell from * to 5 or beyond .

T y p e, A. fulviceps Wlk.

The three genera Porthesia, Acijphas, and nahrophylla are doubtless deriva-
tives of Euproctis, wliicli they resemble in general appearance, but there are im-
portant structural differences. Acyphas is different from Euprnctk in the vena-
tion of both wings, and there is room for one or more intermediate genera . The
first species ascribed to this genus by Walker appears to be an Orgijia, but I
opine that the type was tixed by Kirby, and Swinhoe's name comes too late.
Although Acyphas is at present known only from Australia, it is not improbable
that it will be found to have a wider distribution, when the Indo-Malayan species
referred to Euproctis are critically examined.

1. Wings white with or without markings 2.

Wings not white 4.

2 Forewings in c? wholly white chionilii.

Forewings in S not wholly white 3.

3 . Forewings in S with a subterminal oehreous line . . leptotypd.

Forewings in c? with a tornal fuscous spot, or with .

more or less fuscous suft'usion at least on underside leiicovieh

\. Wings oehreous or orange amphidetd\^^- , ;j»^

Wings fuscous fulviceps. \^" !\. ^

15. Acyphas ciiionitis. ^ —

Euj>riictk cliidiiitis, Turn., Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., xxvi.. 1902, p. 177.
N.Q.: Cairns Herberton, Cardwell ; Q.: Eidsvold, Nambour, Brisbane,
Stradbroke Island, Mt. Tambourine; Vic: Healesville; S.A. : Adelaide; AV.A. :
Waroona.

l(i. Acvpuas leptotypa.
Euproctis leptotypa, Turn., Trans. Ent. Soc, 1904, p. 47.5.
N.Q. : Town:-ville, from larvae feeding on Acacia aidacocarpa (Dodd),
Cairns .

17. Acyphas leucojielas.

Euproctis leiwomelas Wlk.. List Lep. Brit. Mus., iv., p. 838; Porthesia anacausta.

Meyi-., Trans. Roy. See. S. Aust., xv., 1891, p. 193; P. hololenca. ibid.

<?. 28-38 mm. ?. 28-42 mm. Head, thorax, and abdomen white. Palpi

oehreous in c?. whitish in 2. Antennae white, pectinations fuscous. Pectus ochre-

482 REVISION' OF AUSTKALIAX LKPlIlOFTEKA-1-IPARIDAE,

ous in 3, faintly ochreous-tinged in 2. Leg's wliite ; anterior pair with coxae and
anterior surface of femora and tibia ochreous in 6. Forewings triangular, costa
gently arched, apex rounded, termen bowed, slightly oblique, more so in ?; white;
in 6 sometimes a fuscous spot at tornus, or whole apical and terminal area suf-
fused with dark-fuscous; cilia white, in dark examples of the S they may be fus-
tous. Hindwings with termen rounded; white; in 6 sometimes with a broad
dark-fuscous suffusion over terminal half; cilia white, in dark examples of the
c? they may be fuscous. Underside white; in c? a costal streak and apical blotch
more or less fuscous, sometimes extensively suffused with dark-fuscous as on
upper side.

The c? is very variable in the amount of fuscous suffusion, but some is
always present on the underside of the forewing. This will distinguish it from
the c? of A. chionitis, which has an ochreous costal streak from base on underside.

Vic: Melbourne, Gisborne. Mt. St. Bernard (5000ft.); Tas.: Hobart, Swan-
sea; S.A. : Penola.

18. ACYPHAS AMPHIDETA.

Euproctis amphideta. Turn., Trans. Roy. Roc. S. Aust.. xxvi.. 1902, p. 177.

I have not seen a ?.

N.Q.: Innisfail, Athertou, Townsville.

19. ACYPHAS FULVICEPS.

Charnidas fulviceps, Wlk., List Lep. Brit. Mus., iv., p. 797; Acifpha^ fwca Wlk.,
List Lep. Brit. Mus., iv., p. 798.

d. 36-40 mm. Head and thorax orange-oehreous . Palpi 1; orange-ochre-
ous. Antennae fuscous, base of stalk whitish-ochreous; pectinations in d" 16. Ab-
domen fuscous. Legs fuscous; anterior pair, except tarsi, orange-oehreous.
Forewings triangular, costa gently anhcd, apex rounded, termen bowed, ob-
lique; fuscous; cilia fuscous. Hindwings with termen rounded; fuscous; cilia
fuscous. Underside fuscous.

Described from a small series, including the types, in tlie British Museum.

Tas. : Hobart .

Gen. 5. H A b ro p ii y l i. a, n.gen.

appo<puXXo?, soft-winged.
Palpi short, pon-ect, densely hairy; terminal joint concealed. Tliorax and
abdomen without crests. Posterior tibiae with terminal spurs only. Forewings
without areole, 7, 8, 9, 10 stalked, 7 arising before 10, 6 connate. Hindwings
with discocellulars angled; 3 and 4 stalked, 5 approximated, C and 7 stalked. 8
anastomosing with cell from J to |.

A development of Euproctis, thu venation df the forewings being, that of

Euproctis and Parthe^ia; the former ha-s 3 and 4 of the liindwings sometimes

stalked. In the long anastomosis of 8 with cell, it differs from both, and agre."

with Ari/plias; in the loss of the middle spurs it differs from all three.

20. Habrophylla etibyzoxa.

Euproctis euri/zoiin. Low., Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust. xxvi., 1902, p. 213.

Gen . G . E !• P R o c t i s.

Euproctis. HI)., Yerz., p. 1.59.

Palpi moder.ite or short, porrect or o)ili(|uely imrrect ; second Joint s<imctinii'S
hairy; terminal joint sliort or moderate. Thor.-ix and abdomen without crests;

BT A. JEPFERIS TURXKK. 483

tuft large especially iu ?. Posterior tibiae with two pairs of spurs. Forewiugs
without areole, 7. 8, 9, 10 stalked. 7 arising from 8 before 10. fi ennnate or from
slightly below angle. Hindwings with discooellulai-s angled. 3 and 4 approxi-
mated, eonnate, or stalked. 5 well sejiarated at origin. 6 and 7 stalked, 8 approxi-
mated or connected with cell about middle.

A large genu--. Tyjie. E. chri/fiorrhoea Lin. from Europe.

1. Hindwings wholly or partly ochreous-tinged,

ochreous or orange 2.

Hindwings fuscous 17.

2. Hindwings with fuscous terminal band s/t-iwi/iorp/nt.

Hindwings without fuscous terminal band 3.

3. Hindwings with orange terminal band subiiobilis.

Hindwings without orange terminal band 4.

4. Forewings with darker transverse lines or fasciae .. 5.
Forewings without lines or fasciae S.

5. Forewings with lines or fasciae fuscous 6.

Forewings with lines or fasciae reddish-brown . . 7.

6. Wings whitish, slightly tinged with ochreous .... idoiiea.
Wings pale-ochreous agaiwpa.

7. Forewings with postmedian fascia epaxia.

Forewings with antemedian fascia /ivinnoHs.

S. Wings unicolorous. without markings 9.

Wings not so 12.

9 Wings pale ochreous 10.

Wings deep ochreous 11.

10. Forewings with costa and cilia darker /Hfifiixa. 'i

Forewings with costa and cilia not darker epidela- ?

11. Wings and abdominal tuft ochreous crocea.

Wings reddish-ochreous, abdominal tuft whitish.. arrogans.

12. Hindwings with base fuscous 13.

Hindwings with base not fuscous 14.

13. Forewings whitish-grey /labrosMa. 9

Forewings fuscous actor. 'i

14. Forewings unicolorous. whitish-grey habrostola.i

Forewings not so 1.5 .

15. Forewings with pale transverse lines epidela. i

Forewings without transverse lin^s 16.

16. Forewings with pale ochreous terminal band .. .. ed-ivardsi {^-Axt).
Forewings with ochreous spots only actor. S

17. Hindwings with termen not whitish IS.

Hindwings. with termen whitish 20.

IS. Fore- and hindwings nearly unicolorous edwardsi {yt-Axt').

Fore- and hindwings dififering in colour 19.

19. Forewings without transverse lines prratislis.

Forewings with paler transverse lines lucifiiga. iS

20- Forewings with complete, whitish, terminal fascia 21.
Forewings with writish incomplete fascia or ter-
minal spots 22.

21 . Forewings with anterior margin of fascia slightly

^^■avy baliolalh.

Forewings with anterior margin of fascia dentate.. marghialis.

22. Forewings with terminal spots not extending to

apex Ihnlyalis.

Forewings with terminal spots extending to apex niphobola.

484 IIKVISIOX OF AU.STRALIAX LEI'IDOPTERA-LIPARIDAE,

21. ElPROCTIS STEXO.UORPllA^ n . sp .
aT£vo|jiop90i;, narrowly formed.

c?. 30 mm. Head oi-auge. Palpi short (i) ; fuscous. Antennae ilark-tu--
cous. Thorax dark-fuscous tegulae and a posterior spot orange. Ab'louien
dark-fuscous, tuft orauge. Legs ochreous; tibiae and tarsi fuscous. Forewiugs
elongate-triangular: rather naiTow, eosta straight, apex pointed, ternien bowed,
strongly oblique; dark-fuscous; an inwardly oblique, orauge-ochreous , median
fascia, dilated beneath, but not reaching eosta; cilia fuscous. Hindwings ^vith
termen slightly rounded: 3 and 4 connate or stalked: ochreous: a fuscous terminal
band narrowing to a 'point at tornus: cilia fuscous: on tornus and dorsum ochre-
ous. Undei-side similar but paler: a central ochreous suffusion in forewings ex-
tending on dorsum to base.

The wings narrower than in other species of the genus, ami with a different
fades, but a true Ewproctis.

N.A.: Port Darwin, in Septemljcr: two s]iecimens received from Mr. F. P.
Dodd .

22. ErPROCTIS IDOXEA.

Euproctis idonea, Swin., Trans. Ent. Soc, 1903, p. 4iil.

I ha\e not seen this species.
N.W.A.: Sherlock River.

23. Euproctis aoaxopa, n.sp.

ayavtoTTOS, of gentle iippeanince.

<S. 30-32 mm Heatl, antennae, thorax, abdomen, and legs pale-ochreous.
Palpi moderate (1), obliquely porreet; pale-ochreous. Forewing's oval-triangular,
eosta strongly arched, apex round-pointed, termen bowed, oblifjue; pale-ochreous
with a few fuscous scales; a dark-fuscous discal dot beneath eosta about middle;
two, fine, fuscous, transverse lines; first oljsolete towards eosta. angled outwards
in middle, ending on J doi'sum: second from l)eneath J eosta. sinuate, ending on §
dorsum; in a second example the median area between lines is uniformly fuscous:
cilia pale-ochreous. Hindwings with tennen strongly rounded: 3 and 4 connate:
pale-ochreous: cilia pale-ochreous. Underside wholly pale-ochreous.

N.Q. : Evelyn Scrub, near Herberton, in November; three specimens received
from Mr. F. P. Dodd.

24. EfPROCTIS PYRAl'S'l'lS.

Kiijirtictis iiiir((iislis, .Meyr., Ti'aus. Koy. Soc. S. Aust.. .w.. 1801, |). 104:
Euproctis scotocliijta. Turn.. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust.. xx\i.. 1002. ]>. 17S.

Hindwings of df with 3 and 4 aitproximated. The ? is unknnwi,.
N.A.: Adehr.de River; N.(^: Cairns. Townsville.

25. Euproctis LrcmcA.

Artaxa lucifuga, Luc., Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, 1892, p. 250: Euproctis chry-
sophaea. Turn.. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. 'Wales, 1002, p. 178; »ec Wlk.

Hindwings of <S with 3 and 4 apiiroximated, of $ with 3 and 4 stalkeil. I
have already described tiiis species, of which the .sexes are strikingly dissimilar.
N.(|). : Cairns. Townsville: (J.: Eidsvohl. Oayndah. Caloundra. Brisbane.

r.V A. JEKFEins TCRXER. 485

2(). Erri;ocTis ei'idki.a.

Euproclis epUhla. Tuiii.. Tiiius. Koy. Sue. S. Aust.. xxx., l!)0(i. \<. 125.

Hiiulwings witil 3 ami 4 stalked iu buth sexes.
N.A.: Port Dprwin ; X.(,>.: Cairns.

27. EUPROCTIS EPAXIA.

Euproctis cpd.iid. Turn., Trans. Wax. Soe. S. Aust.. 1906. p. 125.

Hinilwings witli .3 ami 4 approximated or stalked in S . 1 have not seen a 2.
N.A.: .^Iel\■ille Island; N.(^: Cairns, Herbert on .

28. ErpRocTis hyjixolis, n.sp.

uiJ.voAi(;, worthy of praise.

c?. 40 mm. Head oehreous. Palpi slender, rather long (21); ochreous.
Antennae oehreous. Thorax orange-oehreous. Abdomen oehreous, tuft grey.
Legs oehreous. Forewings suboval, costa strongly arehetl, apes rounded, termeu
bowed, strongly oblicjue; orange-ochreous ; a transverse fa-seia before middle de-
fiued) by pale lines, angulated outwards above middle, above angle wider and
orange-oehreous, beneath angle narrower, dark reddish-brown; posterior to fascia
the veins are outlined in pale streaks; a postmedian band of slight reddish-browu
irroration; cilia oehreous. Hindwings with termen rounded; 3, 4, 5, approxi-
mated at origin; pale-oehreous; eilia pale-oehreous. Underside pale-oehreous.

T y p e in Coll. Lyell.

N.<^. : Kuranda. near Cairns, in .June; one specimen received from All-. V. P.
Dodd.

29. Euproctis subxop.ilis.

Porthesia siihnnhih't:, Snel.. Ti,i<l. v. Eiit.. xxiv.. 1881. ]). 128: Artarn sinntlaiiy,
Butl.. Ann. Mag. Xat. Hist., (5), xiii.. 1884. ]>. 200; Euproctis erici/iles,
Turn.. Trans. Ent. Soc, 1904, p. 475.

Hindwina^ witli 3 and 4 a]>iir(iximated.

N.(J. : Cairns. Innisfail. Also from Kev I. and Ambovna.

30. Euproctis croce.

Teara cnicca. ^Vlk.. List Lep. Brit. Mus., xxxii.. ]). 3.55; Eupmctis Icihunlha,
Turn.. Trans. Roy. Sue. S. Aust.. xxvi.. 1902. )>. 178.

c?. 40-45 mm. S. 52 mm. Head, thorax, and antennae deep oehreous-
yellow. sometimes orange. Palpi moderate (1), porrect ; second joint not hairy;
terminal joint moderate; oehreous. Abdomen oehreous or orange-ochreous, dor-
sum sometimes suffused with fuscous exeei>t towards base, tuft oehreous. Fore-
wings triangular, costa slightly arched in c?, more strongly in ?; apex rounded,
termen bowed, ol)lique; deep ochreous-yellow, sometimes ochreous-miuige; some-
times with paler discal <lot beneath mid-costa ; cilia concolorous. Hindwings with
termen rounded; 3 and 4 apjiroximated. connate, or stalked; as forewnig-s or
slightly paler. Undei-side oehreous.

X.A.: Adelaide River; N.Q.: Innisfail. Townsville: Q. : Rockhauipton.
Brisbane. Mt. Tambourine. Also frcmi Xew Guinea.

48(> 1!K\1SI()N OK AI's-|1;a1.IAN' I,KI'IIK)I'TKRA-1.I1'ARIDAE,

31. EUPKOCTIS ARKCHJAXS.
.1 ;•/((.(« urrmjuii^, Luc, Proc. Koy. Soc. (/land, 18!)!). p. 14U ; Tiini., Trau*. Hoy.
Soe. S. Aust., xxvi., 1902, p. IT!); ^1. meeki, Dnice, Ann. Mag-. Nat.
Hist.. (7), xii.. 100!!. \i. 222 ; Eaprddis (irchida, Swiii.. Trans. Ent. Soc.
1903, p. 409.
Reddish-ochreous ; abduiuiual tuft whitisli. Hindwings with 3 and -i approxi-
mated. One 2 has a niinutt' areole in both t'orewings; this is a revorsional ab-
normality.

N.(/: Cooktovvii. Cairns, Innistail. Cai'ilwcll. Ingham. Atherton. Also from
New Guinea.

32. EUPROCTIS HAliROSTOI.A.

Euproctis habroalolti. Turn., Trans. Koy. Soe. S. Aust., xxvi., 1!)02. p. 179 •.
Euproctis pura, Swiu., Trans., Ent. Soe., 1903, p. 405.
c?. 47 mm. Head, thorax, and antennae brown-whitish. Palpi short (J),
|iurreet; seeon<l point somewhat hairy beneath, terminal point minute; ochreous.
Abdomen fuseous; base, tuft, and underside oehreous. Legs ochreous. Fore-
wings triangular, costa moderately arched, apex rounded, termeu bowed, oblique:
brown-whitish: cilia brown-whitish. Hindwings with termen rounded; 3 and 4
approximated or connate; ochreous-yellow ; cilia slightly paler. Underside
ochreous .

9. GO mm. Palpi i?. Hindwings with ba.-.al and dorsal an-a fuscous lioth
above and beneath, its edges suffused.

N.Q.: Townsville; Q. : Rockhampton.

33. ECPROCTLS ACTOR, n.sp.
aXTcop, a leader.
(S. 55 nun. Head reddish-brown; face ochi-eous-f uscous . Palpi short (I),
|pnrrcct; terminal joint minute; ochreous-f useoits . Antennae ochreous-fuscous .
Thorax reddish-brown. Abdomen fuseous, sides brownish, tuft and under sur-
face ochreous. Legs pale-ochreous . Forewings oval-triangular, costa strong! v
arched towar<ls apex; apex rounded, termen bowed, oblique; rather pale fuscous:
an outwardly-oblique, oval, pale-ochreous, discal spot beneath costa about middle:
a series of lon^tudinal, oval, pale-ochreous. terminal spots of fairly large but
unequal size, separated by fuscous or reddish-brown lines; cilia fuscous. Hind-
wings with termen strongly rounded; 3 and 4 ai)proxiniated; oehreous, towards
dorsum orange-ochreous; cilia ochreous. Underside wholly pale-ochreous.

?. 70 mm. Head, thorax, and forewings wholly fuscous. Hindwings
ochreous; basal third' dark-fuscous. Underside similar.

N.Q.; Kuranda, near Cairns, in Mareli (Ic?, 19); N.S.AV.: Lismore (^ 9\.
It is quite possible tliat tlic i>ale spots on forewing of (? are variable and iiicun-
sti^nt.

34. Euproctis edwardsi.

Tram, ahrimhi, Newm., Trans. Ent. Soc. 1856, PI. 18, f. 10; Tenra deficitu. WlK..

List Lep. Brit. Mus., xxxii.. p. 352; Teara indecora Wlk.. op. cit.. p. 353;

'Team togata, Luc, Proc Linn. Soc N.S. Wales. 1891, p. 285.
c?. 40-50 mm. Head and thorax orange-ochreous. ochreous or greyish-
oehreous. Palpi and antennae pale-ochreous or whitish. Abdomen dark-fuscous.
Tuft and underside ochreous. Legs pale-ochreous or grey. Forewings oval-

BY A. JEFFERIS TURNER. 487

triansiilar, costa straight tuwards base, strongly arolied towards apex; apex
rounded, termen obliquely rounded; pale-grey; sometimes with oehreous discal
sjjiit and terminal band, the latter with irregular anterior margin, sometimes pro-
longed along dorsum ; cilia orange-oebreous, greyish-ochreous or grey, on dorsum
long. Hindwing-s with termen strongly rounded; 3 and -i approximated or con-
nate; oehreous or oehreous-grey-whitish, often suffused with fuscous towards base
and dorsum; cilia ^oncolorous.

9. 53-5b mm. Head, thorax, palpi, antennae, wings, abdomen, and tuft
fuscous .

The c? varies much in colouration .

Q.: Gayndali. Brisbane ; N.S.W.: Sydney; S.A.: Adelaide.

35. EUPROCTIS BAIJOLALIS.

Urocoma baliolalis, Swin., Cat. Oxf. Mus., i., p. 215, PI. vi., f. 7 (1892).

d"?. 40-48 mm. Head thorax, and antennae pale brownish-fuscous. Palpi
short (i), porrect; second joint hairy; terminal joint minute; pale brownish-
fuscous. Abdomen fuscous or dark-fuscous; tuft in d' brownish, in
S fuscous. Legs whitish-brown. Forewings rather narrow, elongate-oval,
costa strongly arched, apex rounded, termen bowed, strongly oblique; paie-
brownish-f uscous ; a white terminal fascia suffused wholly, or only towards ter-
men, with pale brownish-fuscous, anterior edge of fascia wavy; cilia whitish,
tinged with pale brownish-fuscous. Hiudwings with termen gently rounded ; 3 and
4 connate in (?, separate in ?; fuscous; a terminal fascia and sometimes also costal
area whitish; cilia whitish. Underside pale-fuscous with terminal white fascia on
both wings, but sometimes forewings and costal area of hindwings are whitish.

N. Q.: Atherton; Q.: Brisbane, Toowoomba; Vic: Kewell (Jas. Hill).

36. EUPROCTLS JIARGIXALI.S.

Triclh?tra marr/iiinlis, AVlk., List Lep. Brit. Mus., iv., p. 845.

d ?. 44-49 mm. Head fuscous or dark-fuscous, sometimes ochreous-tinged.
Palpi short (J); fuscous. Antennae grey; pectinations ochreous-tinged. Thorax
fuscous or dark-fuscous, sometimes ochreous-tinged. Abdomen dark-fuscous; tuft
pale-ochreous . Legs fuscous. Forewings elongate-oval, costa rather strongly
arched, apex rounded, termen slightly bowed, strongly oblique; fuscous with a
few whitish scales; a continuous terminal whitish fascia from costa to tornus, its
anterior edge sharply and irregularly dentate, its ternunal edge more or less
broadly suffused with pale-fuscous; cilia pale-fuscous. Hindwings with termen
only slightly rounded; 3 and 4 connate or separate; fuscous; a broad white ter-
minal band, sometimes prolonged along costa, narrowing to a point at tornus;
cilia whitish or pale-fuscous, on tornus and dorsum fuscous.

Vic: Grisborne: Tas.: ; S.A. : Port Lincoln.

37. EuPROCTIS LIMRALIS.

Urocoma I'lnbrilis, H-Scli., Ausser. Schmet., i.. f. 389.

d"?. — 42-54 mm. Head dark- fuscous ; face ochreous-fuscous. Palpi 1;
fuscous. Antennae whitish, towards base fuscous, in ? fuscous; pectinations
ochreous-tinged. Thorax dark-fuscous. Abdomen dark-fuscous; tuft pale-

488 REVISION (IF AfSTRALIAX LKPIDOPTERA-l.IPAKIDAE^

uelireous. Legs tuscous. Forewiug-s elongate-oval, costa latlicr strongly arched,
apex rounded, termen nearly straight, strongly oblique; dark- tuscous; a white
terminal faseia, commencing in a point beneath apex and gradually increasing in
breadth to tornus, its anterior edge wavy, its terminal edge broadly suffused with
pale-fuscous ; cilia pale-fuscous. Hindwiugs with termen only slightly rounded;
3 and 4 separate; fuscous, a broad, white, terminal band, sometimes produced
along eosta, narrowing to a point at tornus, in ? less pronounced or lu'arly tibsu-
lete; cilia white, on tornus and dorsum fuscous, in $ sometimes wholly tusi-uus.
Underside similar.

Q. : Toowoomba; X.S.W. : Sydney; Mc. : Melbourne.

38. El'PROCTIS XlPllOBOLA.

Euproctis niphobcila Turn., Trans. Roy. Soe. S. Aust., xxvi., 1902, p. 179.

The ? expands up to 51 mm. Hindwings with 3 and 4 approximated or
stalked. The white terminal fascia of hindwiugs is not only interrupted in 5 by
the veins, but in both sexes is narrower than in niarcjinalls and linibalis.

N.Q. : TownsviUe; (^. : Brisbane, Toowoomba, Chinchilla.

In the South Australian iluseum is a small c? (32 mm. ) hibellcd "S. Aus-
tralia Guest Coll.'' with the whitish terminal s|)ots obsolclc. I Ihjnk it is an
aberration of this species.

(tcii. 7. H K i; A (• r i. \.
JleracuUt. Moore, i'vw. Zool. Sue, 1S()5, ]). 894; limps., Moths ind., i.. \i. 408 .

Characters of Euproctis but pali)i long. ere?t, reaching vertex. Type. II.
disci ritta Moore, from India.

39. HeHACCLA LBONIXA.

Jleraculd iedtinia. Turn., Trans. Roy. Soe. S. Aust., xxvii.. 1903. p. 17.

N.y. : . The type of this species formerly in the (jiiecnshind .Musctmi

lias disappeared. Tlicrc is a specimen in the British Museum irom Xew (niiuca.

Gen. 8. U u i! a.

Dani, iloore, Lep. Atk., 1879, ji. 5U ; lliii|is.. Moths iud.. i., |i. 407.

Palpi moderate, ascending, sometimes reaching vertex; second joint long,
densely rough-haired antej-iorly; terminal joint \ery short. Thorax and abdomen
without crests. Posterior tibiae with two pail's of spurs. Forewings without areole,
6 from below upper angle or short-stalked, 7, 8, 9, 10 stalked, 7 arising before 10,
11 anastomosing, connected, or at least closely approximated to 12. Hindwings
with ti and 7 separate, connate or stalked, 8 connected with cell slightly before
middle .

This natural genus uuist be sepanitiMJ rnnn Iniiiiis Mooi<'. uliich has 11 well
separated from 12. Du-sijchiruides B.-Bak. ilifl'ers ijuly in ihr inuiuh",] hiiiduiiiL:,
and is not I think tenable as a distinct genus. T y p e, l>. hIIki .Mooie, from
India. The genus is Papuan, extending into India and Australia.

1. Termen of hindwings angled 2.

Termen of hindwings rounded 3.

2 Forewings white )iiartiiiiepiiiirl,itii.

Forewings ochreous-grey or/irins.

3. Hindwings fuscous [»atti.

Hindwings whiti,=h prioiiodesiiia.

b\ a. jefferis turner. -189

40. Dura marginepuxctata.
I mans murginepunctata, B.-Bak., Nov. Zool., 1904. p. 410.

i. 35-37 mm. H^ad and thorax whitish. Antennae whitish, pectinations
ochreons-brown. Palpi moderately long (li), porrect, with dense long hairs on
inferior surface; terminal joint moderate; whitish, external surface fuscous. Ab-
domen whitish. Legs whitish. Forewings triangular, costa rather strongly
arched, apex round-pointed, termen slightly bowed, slightly oblique; whitish; four,
slender, dentate, fuscous, transverse lines; first from costa near base, not reach-
ing dorsum ; second from l costa to 'i doi-sum ; third from % costa, curved inwards
in disc and then downwards to f dorsum j fourth subterminal; costal edge fuscous
towards base; a faintly marked, orbicular, fuscous ring in disc before middle;
sometimes a dark-fuscous dot before middle of third line; dark-fuscous costal
dots at commencement of lines; a terminal series of blackish dots between veins;
cilia whitish. Hindwings suboblong, with a prominent rounded angle on vein 3;
whitish; sometimes with slight grey terminal suffusion, and one or two, fuscous,
terminal dots near angle; cilia whitish. Underside whitish.

N.Q. : Kuranda, near Cairns, in November, December, and February; Ather-
ton ; four specimens. Also from New Guinea.

41 . Dura ochrias.

Imains ocJirIm, Turn.. Trans. Roy., Soc. S. Aust., xxx., ?90t), p. 126.

N.Q.: Thursday Island, one 2 in Coll. Lyell, similar to <? but much larger
(42 mm. ) ; Caims.

42. Ddra pratti.

Danychirokles pratti B.-Bak., Nov. Zool., 1904, p. 406, PI. vi., f. 7.

d. 44-46 mm. Head and thorax whitish. Antennae whitish, pectinations
ochreous-brown . Palpi moderately long (1:1), obliquely porrect, rough-haired
beneath; terminal joint moderate; whitish, external surface, except terminal joint,
dark-fuscous. Abdomen grey with some whitish admixture, tuft whitish. Legs
grey-whitish . Forewings elongate-triangular, costa strongly arched, apex rounded-
rectangular, termen not oblique, rounded beneath; whitish, median area some-
times suffused with grey; four slender, dentate, fuscous, transverse lines; first
near base ; second from J costa to mid-dorsum ; third very acutely dentate, from t
costa to I dorsum, curved outwards Ijeneath costa, then strongly inwards, then
downwards; fourth subterminal, with traces of a fifth line beyond and parallel;
a terminal series o'f fuscous dots between veins; cilia whitish. Hindwings with
termen rounded; fuscous; cilia whitish. LTnderside fuscous, dorsal and terminal
areas of forewings whitish.

Probably D. hicolora B.-Bak. and D. hniiineostrigata B.-Bak. are conspecific.

N.Q.: Kuranda, near Cairns, in October and December; three specimens re-
ceived from Mr. F. P. Dodd. Also fium New Guinea.

43. Dura prionodesma, n.sp.
TrpiovoScdtio?, with saw-Uke band.
<?. 46 mm. Head ochreous-whitish. Falpi 1^; whitish; outer surface of
second joint partly dark-fuscous. Antennae whitish, pectinations pale-grey.
Thorax grey-whitish, tegulae ochreous-whitish. Abdomen whitish-oehreous. Legs
whitish-ochreous. Forewings triangular, costa straight to beyond middle, thence
arched, apex round-pointed, termen slightly bowed, oblique; 6 short-stalked, 7

490 KEMSIOX OF Al'tiTRALIAX LKI'IlKDI'TKliA-LIPARIDAK.

arising before 10, 11 anastomosing: at a point with 12; grey-wliitisb; markiiig>>
fuscous; a dot on costa near base; an interrupted slightly wavy line from i eosta
to i dorsum; a shyirply dentate sinuous line from ij eosta to j dorsum; some
minute subterminal and terminal dots; cilia grey-whitish. Hindwings with t^rmen
rounded; whitish, towards base faintly ochreous-tinged ; cilia whitish. Underside
whitish .
" Type in Coll. Lyell.

N.A. : Port Darwin in November; one specimen received from Mr. F. P.
Dodd.

Gen. 9. E x o M e.

Eiiome, Wlk., List Lep. Brit. Mus., iv.. p. 883.

Palpi moderate, porrect; second joint hairy; tei'minal .ioint short. Thorax
and abdomen without crests, tuft moderate. Posterior tibiae without middle
spurs. Forewings without areola, 7, 8, 9, 10 stalked, 10 arising before 7, 6 ap-
proximated or stalked. Hindwings with diseocellulars angled. 3, 4, 5 separate.
6 and 7 connate oi- stalked, 8 approximated and connected witli cell at about i. V
with wing's much aborted.

Type, E. ampla Wlk., from India.

1 . Hindwings white, forewings without discal dot .... pelospilu.

Hindwings tinged with fuscous or rosy, forewings
with discal dot anteniiata.

44. EXO.MK PELOSPILA.

Lymantria pelospila. Tuni., Proc. Koy. Soc. Q'land. xxvii.. 1915. p. 24.
N.A. : Pt. Darwin.

45. ExOilE AXTEXXATA.

L I) Ill-nil trill anteinnita, Wlk.. List Lep. Brit. Mus.. iv.. 881; Liimaiitria aurmii,
Turn., Trans., Roy. Soc. S. Aust., xxvi., 1902, p. 181 (inaeocc.l : Liinum-
tria tumeri, Swin., Trans. Ent. Soc, 1903. p. 484.

The rosy suffusion of the hindwings is vei-y variable in degree and may lie
wholly absent and replaced by fuscous.

N.Q. : C'ajie York, Cairns, Stannary Hills, Townsville; Q. : Brisbane;
N.S.W. : Richmond River.

Gen. 10. L Y ii A X T R I a.
Lymantria, Hb., Vei-z., p. 160.

Palpi moderate or short, poiTect; second joint more or less hairy beneath;
terminal joint moderate or short. Thorax and abdomen witlrout crests. Pos-
terior tibiae with two pairs of spurs. Forewiug-s without areole. 7, 8, 9, 10 stalked.
10 arising before, or opposite 7. Hindwings with 3 and 4 approximated at
origin, 6 and 7 connate or stalked, 8 ajipiMxinuited and connected with cell at, or
siiortly before middle. $ with wings fully developed.

Type, L. moiiacha Lin., from Eurojje.

1. Forewings with numerous interrupted, dark trans-
verse lines nephrographa.

Forewings with only two transverse lines 2.

2. Forewings with discal spots whitish hinotata.

Forewings with discal spots dark-fuscous and

ochreous redmia.

i!V A. .ii;FFKi;r'~ TrKXEif.

491

4(i. LyMANTUIA XKPIIlICMiKAPHA.

Liimaiitiia veiihn,(jruiihii , Turn., Pnic. Roy. Sot-. Q'land. xxvii., 1915. p. 23.

Forewin!i:> with 10 arising opposite 7. Hiniluiug-s with 6 and 7 separate or
stalked.

In the type vein 10 arises on one side after 7, but the venation' of this wing-
is al)normal. vein 7 being connected beyond its middle by a crossbar with 8.

Q. : Jit. Tambourine, Ivillarney; N.S.W. : Dorrigo (South Australian Museum.
A ? example, wing> fully developed, expanding 82 mm., forewings with 10 aris-
ing on one side shortly beyond 7, on the other side absent. It seems that this
species is subject to venational abnormalities.)

47. Lysiantkia reducta.

Darala ledncta. Wlk., List Lep. Brit. Mus., iv., p. 888.

(?. 40-4.5 mm. 2. 5U-liO mm. Head and thorax fuscous. Antennae fusc-
( us, pectinations ochreous-tinged. Palpi in c? 1, in ? IJ, porreet : second joint
hairy beneath; terminal joint moderately long; fuscous, darker in d". Abdomen
and legs fuscous. Porewings elongate-triangular, costa strongly arched, apex
rounded, termen obliquely rounded; 10 arising before 7; pale fuscous-grey; a suf-
fused fuscous spot on ba.se of costa; a wavy fuscous line from i costa to about
mid-dorsum; a circular, ochreous, orbicular spot outlined and centred with dark-
fuscous; an irregular reniform, fairly large, dark-fuscous spot, edged anteriorly
and posteriorlj- with, ochreous, and this again with fuscous;' a slender, slightly
dentate, slightly sinuate, fuscous line from 3 costa to f dorsum; some obscure,
darker, terminal dots; cilia iiale fuscous-grey. Hindwings with termen only
slightly rounded ; 0 and 7 stalked ; whitish with pale-fuscous terminal suffusion ;
in 2 wholly pale-fuscous ; a suffused fuscous spot at end of cell ; cilia pale-fuscous.
Underside grey-whitish with two fuscous discal spots in forewings, one in hind-
wings.

N.Q. : Cairns. Atlierton : Q. : Gympie, Xambour. Brisbane, Dalby, Cunua-
mulla; N.S.'VT.: Lismore.

48. Lymaxtria bixotata.

Leptiioieria blnotata, Butl, Trans. Ent. Soc, 1886, p. 386. PI. 0. f. 3.

c?. 34-38 mm. 2 42-54 mm. Head whitish or whitish-ochreous. Palpi in
t? 2, in 2 2i • whitish, outer surface of second joint sometimes fuscous. Antennae
whitish-ochreous; pectinations in cJ 16, in 2 5, Thorax whitish, grey-whitish, or
whitish-ochreous. Abdomen ochreous-grey-whitish. Legs whitish or ochreous-
whitish. Forewings elongate-triangular, in 2 suboval, costa gently arched, apex
rounded, termen slightly bowed, oblique; grey-whitish or whitish-ochreous; mark-
ings fuscous or grey; white-centred discal spots at J and middle, the former some-
times reduced to a dark-fuscous dot ; a fuscous transverse line at i ; a second line
from 3 costa to * dorsum, outwardly curved beneath costa, then parallel to termen,
and sometimes denticulate, sometimes obsolete; denticulate subterminal and sub-
marginal lines more or less distinct ; cilia eoncolorous . Hindwings with termen
slightly rounded; whitish, grey-whitish, or ochreous-whitish ; cilia eoncolorous.

In the Port Darwin form the d' is slightly ochreous-tinged with fuscous mark-
ings in forewing. the 2 gi-ey-whitish with grey marking's. Butler's c? type from
Peak Downs aiijiroximates more to the 2 form.

N.A.: Port Darwin; Q. : Peak Downs. .

492 REVISION OF AUSTRALIAN" LEPIDOPTF.RA-LIPAIi'IDAE,

Geu. 11. E r zoR A.

Euzora, Turn.. Proe. Eoy. Soc. (^'land. x.xvii.. 1(115. p. '22; ('iii-(i<jol(i. MiKire, Lt'p.
Atk., p. 4G; Hmps., Mollis IncL, i., p. 489 {prneoec).

Palpi very short, pon-ect; sec-ond joint hairy beneath; terminal joint mmutc.
Thorax and abdomen not crested, tuft small. Posterior tibiae without middle
spurs. Forewings without areole, 7, 8, 9 stalked, 9 separating near apex. 10 from
cell. Hindwing-s with 3, 4. 5 well separated at origin, C and 7 connate or short-
stalked, 8 api>roximatf(l tn cell at i or before middle.

4i). ErzoRA coLLrcExs.

Porthesia collucem, Luc, Proe. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, 1889, p. 1090.

c?. 29 mm. 2. 35 mm. Head, thorax, and abdomen white. Palpi J ;
whitish-ochreous . Antennae white; pectinations, whitish-ochreous. Legs white;
anterior femora in c? jiale-ochreous. Forewings triangular, costa gently arched,
apex round-pointed, termen slightly bowed, oblique; lustrous white; there are no
true markings, but dwing to irregularity of surface, there appear to be two,
oblique, postmodian bands; cilia white. Hindwings with termen slightly rounded;
■white; cilia white. I'nderside white.

This may be the same a« clam Wlk. from India.

N.Q.: Atherton;Q.: Brisbane.

Gen. 12. Red o a.

Recloa, Wlk., List Lep. Hrit. Mus., iv., p. 826.

Palpi moderate, obliquely ptirrect. thickened with appressed hairs; terminal
joint concealed. Thorax and abdomen not crested. Posterior tibiae with two
pairs of spurs. Forewings with areole long and narrow, 7 from about middle of
areole. 8 and 9 connate or stalked from end of areole, 10 connate with them from
end of areole. Hindwings with cell long (*l, disct>cellulars angled, 3 and 4 widely
separated at origin, 5 separate, (i and 7 connate or stalked, 8 api>roxiniated and
connected with cell at \.

Bedna siihiiKirfiiimlci. Wlk., List Lep. Hrit. Mu>;.. iv., \i. S2(); I\til<iti trniixioif:^
Wlk.. Linn. Soc. Lond., Zool. vi., ]>. 128; Leitcoma hippdria, Swiii., Ann.
Mag. Nat. Hist.. (6), xii., p, 214 (1893).

<S. 37-38 mm. 5. 41-42 mm. Head white, face orange-ochreous. Palpi
1; orange-ochreous. inner surface and base white. Antennae wliite. ))ectinations
oehreous-tinged. Thorax and abdomen white. Leg's white; apices of tarsi
ochreons; anterior and middle pairs with a dark-fuseous spot on tibia near base,
and another on I ase of tarsus. Forewings triangidar, costa straight, slightl,\
arched towards ape.x, a|)ex pointed, termen nearly straight, slightly obli<|ue;
lustrous white with ii striguhifed appearan<-e ]>rodueed by small ine(|ualities of
surface; sometimes a minute blackish dot at end of cell; cilia white. Hindwings
with termen nearly straight; white; cilia white. Underside white.

N.Q.: Cairns, Townsville. Also from the Archipelago, China, Ceylon, and
India.

BY A. JEFFEItIS TURXER.

493

Gen. 13. Orgy r a.
Onjiiia, Oclis.. Sehniet. Eur., iii.. p. 208.

PaliJi moderate, porrect, hairy beneath; terminal joint minute. Thorax with
a posterior crest. Abdomen with a large dorsal orest on second and sometimes
a small crest on third segment. Posterior til)iae without middle spurs. An-
terior tarsi with dense tufts of hairs. Forewings with areola present, 7, 8, 9
stalked from areole. 10 separate. Hindwings with 3 and 4 connate, 5 well sep-
arate at origin, 6 and 7 stalked, 8 anatomosing with cell at about '.. ? with
wings minute or absent ; antennae short, serrate .

Type, 0. antiqua Lin., from Europe. Sir Geo. Hampson has recently
substituted the name of Notolophus Germar, which is unfortunate, and used the
name Orin/ia for the genus hitherto known as Basychira. which seems mischievous.
When a name has been almost universally employed in one sense for about a
eentuTV, to employ it in a different sense, even if it were not so changed by the
adoption of an artificial mode of "fixing the type," is to reduce nomenclature
into confusion. No one can tell, unless he knows the particular predi-
lection of the author, what the name used by him really means.

1. Hindwings yellow with blackish terminal band anaiioides
Hindwings not yellow and without terminal band '?

2. Forewings with whitish apical blotch athlophora.

Forewings without whitish blotch australis.

51. OR(iVIA AXARTOIDES.

Tela anartoides, Wlk., List Lep. Brit. Mus., iv., p. 804; Tela pusilla, Butl., Ann
Mag. Nat. Hist., (5), ix.. 1882, p. 88.

<S. 22-26 mm. Head ochreous. Palpi 1; ochreous. Antennae fuscous.
Thorax fuscous mixed with ochreous, especially anteriorly. Abdomen dark-
fuscous. Leg-s ochreous; anterior and middle tibiae and tarsi annulated with
dark-fuscous. Forewings elongate-triangular, costa straight to |, thence strongly
arched, apex rounded, termen nearly straight, oblique ; ochreous-brown ; a straight,
blackish, sub-basal, transverse line; a circular darker brown spot, slenderly out-
lined with pale scales just beyond this above dorsum; a fuscous-brown line from
3 costa to near mid-dorsum, anteriorly suffused, posteriorly acutely angled out-
wards above middle, and from this to dorsum dentate; a few, scattered, whitish scales
in mid-disc, and a slender, oval, whitish ring beyond middle representing reni-
f orm ; a blackish dentate line from l costa, bent first outwards, and then strongly in-
wards, finally downwards to 4 dorsum, followed by a brown suffusion; traces of a
slender, whitisli, subterminal line; cilia ochreous-brown with bars of darker brown.
Hindwing-s with termen nearly straight; ochreous-yellow ; a broad, blackish, ter-
minal fascia; cilia ochreous. Lfnderside of forewings ochreous; costa broadly
suffused with fuscous; a short, broad, blackish, central streak from ,base; a
blackish postmedian fascia not reaching dorsum; of hindwings as upperside.

S. Apterous; clothed with dense hairs, dark-grey; antennae short, serrate.

Q. : Blackbutt (Tillyard) ; N.S.W. : Sydney; Vic: Melbourne; Tas. : .

52. Orgyia .\thi,ophora, n.sp.
d6Xo9opo(;, bearing the prize.
c?. 34-38 nun. Head and thorax pale ochreous-grey. Palpi li ; ochreous, upper
edge fuscous. Antennae pale fuscous. Abdomen whitish-ochreous, dorsal crests fuse-

4S)4 KF.VISIOX OF ArsTRAI.IAX I.KPIIXIPTEHA-LIPARinAE,

Oils. Legs whitish-ocbreous anmilatcil witli lust-ous. Forewings triaugular, costa
straight to f. tlieuee strongly arched, apex roumlwl, tennen very slightly bowed,
slightly ol)li(]ue; pale ocbreous-brown : a blackish, obliquely transverse, sub-basal
line; a dentate, fuscous, transverse line from if costa to t dorsum, preceded by a
fine whitish line, and edged posteriorly by a narrow whitish suffusion; reniform
slenderly outlined in whitish, not always distinct; a blackish, finely dentate line
from I costa, bent inwards below middle, and then downwards to J dorsum; a
whitish subapical blotch, from whicli proceeds a slender, interrupted whitish line
to a whitish spot above tornus; an indistinct submarginal line, partly whitish,
partly fuscous; cilia pale ochreous-brown. Hindwings with ternien rounded:
ochreous-whitish slightly suffused with fuscous towards termen; cilia concolorous.
Underside of forewings pale ochreous-grey. costal area to 4, and a transverse line
at f suffusedly fuseous; hindwings wliitisli-ochreous, a fuscous line from 3 costa
towards but not reaching tornus.

?. Apterous: clothed with dense haii's; antennae short, serrate.

TV. A. : Perth: 3 d and 2 2 specimens received from TIr. L. -T. Xewnian.

53. OeGVIA AUSTRALIS.

Orgyta australis, Wlk.. List Lep. Brit. !Mus., iv., p. 787; Lacicla postica, Wlk.,
op. cit., iv.. p. 803; Orgijia canifa.^cia, Wlk., up. eit., xxsii., p. 325;
Orgiiia ceiilaiiica, Nietner, Edinb. New Phil. Journ.. xv., 1864. p. 34;
Orgyia ludellinjii. Snel.. Tijd. v. Ent.. 1879. p. 104, PI. 8. f. 5.

c?. 29-33 mm. Head, thorax, and antennae fuscous. Palpi IJ; ochreous-
wliitish with some fuscous suffusion. Al)domen fuscous, dorsal crests some-
what darker. Leg's ochreous-whitish; anterior and middle pairs annulated with
fuscous. Forewings triangular, costa moderately arched, more strongly towards
apex, apex round ])ointed. termen straight, oblique; pale-brown; sometimes indi-
cations of a sub-basal, transverse, fuscous line; a dentate, fuscous, transverse
line from i costa to | dorsum; a second line from f costa, at firet outwards, then
bent strongly inwai-ds. and again downwards to | dorsum; the included median
area is suffused with whitish, and contains a brownish i-eniform spot, partly out-
lined with fuscous; an obscure, whitish, subterminal line preceded by two or three
short, longitudinal, fuscous streaks in costal area and followed by s<ime fuscous
suffusion; a slender interrupted, submarginal. fuscous line; cilia brown. Hind-
winu's with termen gently rounded; fuscous; cilia fuscous. Underside fuscous.

9. Apterous; covered with dense grey hairs; antennae short, serrate.

This description refei-s to Bris!)ane example. Males from Port Darwin and
Cairns are rather smaller (22-28 una.), the markings less distinct, and the me-
dian band infusca^ed. obscuring oi- covering tlie whitish area.

N.A.: Port Darwin; N.Q.: Cairns. Townsville; Q. : Brisbane: X.S.W.:
Sydney. Also from the Ai-chipelago. Formosa. Ceyhm. and India.

Gen. 14. T R o I' 0 (' A.

Ir(ijiiic((. Turn.. Trans. Ent. Soc. 1904. ]i. 477.

Palpi moderately long, porrect, with dense long hairs beueatii; terminal .jouil
short. Thorax with a posterior crest. Abdomen without crests but densely ;-ov-
ered with lonu' hair;. Posterior tibiae with two pairs of spurs. Forewings with
areole usuallv iiresent. 7. 8, 9 stalked from areole, connecting bar between 10 and

BY A. JEFFERIS TURNER. 495

Uieir eomiuon stalk somotimes imperfectly or not developed. Hindwings with 3
and 4 approximated or connate. 0 and 7 connate, 8 connected with cell at or shortly
before middle. ? with wing-s absent; antennae very short, serrate; posterior
tibiae without middle spurs.

The following species, the only one at present referred to the genus,
sliows considerable variability in the venation. When the areole is
absent, the position of the lost connecting bar is shown by a slight devia-
tion and thickenins: of the two adjacent veins. I have one very abnormai speci-
men in which (1) in the right forewing the areole is absent, but indicated as just
stated, (2) in the left forewing the areole is more elongate than usual and 7 is
connate from its narrow extremity, (3) in the left hindwing 3. 4. 5 are stalked,
in the right hindwing 3 and 4 are coincident, 3 and 5 stalked; but both hindwings
are smaller than usual, and the right has a pathological notch near tornus. The
9 is much degraded, and densely covered throughout with long hairs.

.54. Ieopoca rotdxdata.
Team rotundata, Wlk.. List Lep. Brit. Mus., iv., p. 851.

<S. 45-50 mm. Head grey-whitish. Palpi 1]; dark-f useous . Antennae
whitish iiToratecl with fuscous, pectinations brownish. Thorax grey-whitish, crest
fuscous with some brownish hairs. Abdomen ochreous-brown, base of dorsum
fuscous, underside grey-whitish. Legs grey-whitish; anterior and middle tibiae
annulated with dark-f useous. Forewings triangular, costa straight to near ajiex,
then strongly arched, apex rounded, termen oblic|uely rounded ; grey-whitish ;
markings dark-fuscous ; a basal patch extending to i, its posterior edge dentate on
margins and middle, its centre irregularly suffused with grey-whitish; a denticu-
late tran.sverse line from J costa, curved first outwardly, then inwardly, ending
on dorsum before tornus; a dentate and blotched line near and parallel to this,
thickened to a blotch beneath costa. again in middle, and thickened towards doi'-
sum; cilia grey-whitish. Hindwing-s . with termen rounded; fuscous with whitish
suffusion; cilia whitish. Underside grey whitish.

?. Wholly apterous. Head, thorax, and abdomen covered with dense, long,
grey-whitish hairs. Antennae very short, slightly dentate. Leg's whitish-ochre-
ous, posterior tibiae without middle spurs.

Q.: Brisbane, Toowooniba. Both sexes from ]>upaei found under 1)ark of
Eucahiptus; N.S.W.: .Jervis Bay. near Nowi-a; a series of six <? and one S
bred from the larvae by Mr. Moss-Robinson; Vic: Beechworth, Gisborne.

Gen. 15. A x I o l o G a.
Axiolopa. Turn.. Trans. Ent. Soc. 1904. p. 477.

Palpi moderate, hairy, porrect. Antennae well pectinated in 5. Thorax and
abdomen not crested; base of abdomen densely haiiy above. Posterior til)iae
with two pairs of spui-s. Forewings with 10 connected with 8, 9 opposite 7 to
form an areole, 11 anastomosing shortly with 12. Hindwings with & approxi-
mated at base with 4, 6 and 7 short-stalked, 8 anastomosing with cell before
middle.

As I have no material for examination, I have transcribed my former diag-
nosis. Type, A. pura Luc.

53. AxiOLOCiA PURA.

Teara pura, Luc, Proc Roy. Soc Q'land, 1891, p. 75.

49C REVIJSIOX OF AUSTRALIAN' LKIMDOPTERA-LIPARIDAE,

Gen. IG. Olek e.
Olene, Hb., Ziiti-., ii., p. 19; Hmps., Moths Ind., i., p. 45'J.

Falpi rather long, obli(juely porrect ; set-ond joint greatly thickened by dense
long hairs anteriorly; terminal joint minute, concealed. Thorax with a small
posterior crest. Abdomen with a large doi-sal crest on second segment. Pos-
terior tibiae with two pairs of spurs. Anterior tibiae densely hairy, tarsi also
haii-y. Forewings with areole present, 8 and 9 stalked from areole, 7 connrtte
or closely approximate, 10 well separate. Hindwing-s with 3 and 4 approximated
at origin, 5 from shortly above angle of cell. (! and 7 stalked. 8 ajiproximated and
connected with cell at \ or before middle.

Nearly allied to Dasychira, from which it differs in the pronounced abdominal
crest and strongly dilated palpi. T y p e, O. mendosa Hb.

5() . Olen'e mexdosa.
Oletie mendosa, Hb.. Zutr., ii., p. 19, f. 293, 294; Antipha basalis, Wlk.. List Lep.
Brit. Mus., iv., p. 806; Moda ficsiformis, TVlk., op. cit., v.. p. 1070;
Rilia lanceolata, Wlk., op. cit., v., p. 1075; Dasychira hasalis, Wlk.,
op. cit.. xxxii.. p. 362; Dasychira dirisu, Wlk., op. cit., xxxii., p. 363;
Dasychira distinyuevda, Wlk., op. cit., xxxii.. p. 435; Olene basivitta,
Wlk.. np. cit., xxxii., p. 436; Dasychira saivantn, Moore. Lep. E.I. Co.,
p. 340; Tiirriga invasa, Wlk.. Char. Undesc. Lep.. p. 15.

c?. 28-44 mm. Head, thorax, palpi, and abdomen brownisli-grcy. Abdo-
men grey-whitish, crest fuscous-brown. Legs gre\--wliitish mixed, especially tai-si.
with brown and fuscous. Forewing-s triangular, costa rather strongly arched,
apex rounded, termen very slightly bowed, slightly oblii|ue; brownish-gi-ey ; mark-
ings fuscous; a sub-basal transverse line; a slightly dentate line from \ costa to
f dorsum ; renif orm partly outlined with fuscous or whitish ; a dentate line from |
costa, at first outwardly curved, then bent inwards to beneath reniform, and again
bent to end on * dorsum: an interrupted sul)marginal line; sometimes a large d.ark-
fuseous spot just posterior to sub-basal line; sometimes a whitish spot in the same
situation; sometimes whole of costal half of wing suffused with whitish; cilia
brownish-gi-ey, sometimes with fuscous bai-s. Hindwings with termen rounded;
oehreous-grey-whitish ; cilia concolorous.

?. 50-60 mm. Forewings elongate-triangular, costa strongly arched, ajiex
rounded, termen sinuate, strongly oblique ; brownish, median area partly suffused
witli whitish; sub-basal line obsolete; a suffused fuscous streak on fold from base;
a short, fuscous, subcostal streak from about s, not reaching termen; sometimes a
small ajjical whitish suffusion.

The sexes differ and the c? is varialjjo. but the species is always easily recog-
nisable. T have also several dwarfed ?. .34-40 mm., pale-ochreous, with markings
nearly obsolete.

N.A. : Pt. Dai-win; N.Q.: Cooktown, Cairns, Ingham, Townsville; Q.:
Rockhampton, Duaringa. Brisbane. Also from Java, Ceylon, and India.

Gen. 17. Dasychira.

Dasychira, Stpli.. 111. Brit. Ent. Haust.. ii.. p. ,58.

Palpi rather hmg, porrect, hairy beneath ; terminal joint short or concealed.
Thorax with a small posterior crest. Al)domen with dense long hairs at Ijase of
dorsum but no true crest. Posterior tibiae with two pairs of spurs. Anterior

BY A. JEFI'ERrS TURNER.

497

tibiae and tarsi densely hairy. Forewings with areole present, 8 and !) stalked
from ai-eole, 7 connate or closely approximated at origin, 10 well separate.
Hindwings with 3 and 4 approximated or connate, 5 from shortly above lower
angla of cell, 6 and 7 stalked, 8 approximated and connected with cell at J or
shortly before middle.

Type, D. pudihuiida Lin. from Europe. A lars;e aenus. well represented in
Indo-Malaya and Africa; but in Australia by only three species, two of which
have a wide range outside the Australian region.

1. Hindwings with dorsal area deep-ochreous Iwrsfieldi.

Hindwings uniformly ochreous-whitish 2.

2. Forewings whitish with fuscous-brown postmedian

blotch ostraciinj.

Forewings pale-ochreous with fuscous median streak securis.

57. Dastchira horspieldi.

Dasychira Iwrsfieldi, Saund., Trans. Ent. Soc 1851, p. 162; Da.'iychira. ijrotei,
Moore, Lep. E.I. Co., p. 338; Da.'<i/chira arga, Moore, Lep. E.I. Co.,
p. 339; DasycTiira kansalia, Moore, Proc. Zool. Soc, 1879, p. 401; Dasy-
chira nilgirica, Hmps., 111. Het., viii., p. 58, PI. 141, f. 13, 14; Teora
farenoides. Luc, Proc. Roy. Soc. Q'land, 1892, p. 75.

<S. 45-48 mm. Head white. Palpi about 1; white, upper part of outer
surface blackish. Antennae white, pectinations ochreous-brown . Thorax white
with a few fuscous scales, crest mixed with fuscous and brownish. Abdomen
deep-ochreous, underside and tuft whitish. Legs whitish; tibiae and tarsi with
blackish dots on dorsum. Forewings elongate-oval, costa straight to near apex,
thence arched, apex rounded, termen obliquely rounded; white, sometimes partly
grey-whitish: slender lines and a few scattered scales fuscous; an irregularly,
dentate, sub-basal line; a slightly dentate line from | costa to mid-dorsum; reni-
form slenderly outlined with fuscous; a denticulate line from J costa to tornus;
an interrupted, irregularly dentate, subterminal line; a submarginal line, discon-
tinuous on veins, the terminal ends of which are also fuscous; cilia whitish or
gi-ey-whitish irrorated with fuscous. Hindwings with termen rounded; deep-
ochreous, paler towards termen ; sometimes a terminal band of fuscous suffusion ;
cilia whitish sometimes mixed with fuscous. Underside whitish with some ochre-
ous suffusion on basal area of forewings and dorsal area of hindwings; erescentic
fuscous discal marks on both wings, sometimes also fuscous postmedian lines.

?. 98 mm. Forewings with costa rather strongly arched; markings more
suffused. Hindwings whitish with a suffused dorsal ochreous blotch.

N.Q.: Cairns. Innisfail, Townsville; Q.: Brisbane. Also from Java, Malay
Peninsula, Ceylon, and India.

58. Dasychira ostracina.

Laelia ostracinu. Turn.. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust.. 1902, p. 181.

The type, which is the only example I have seen, is a 9 in poor condition, but
there appears to be a large reniform spot outlined with fuscous and with a
central fuscous mark preceding the postmedian blotch on forewing. The correct
locality is Cape York

498 REVISION' or .ilSTRALIAX I.EPIDOPTERA-T.lPAlilDAE,

59. Dasychira secoris.

Psalis secuns, Hb.. Zutr.. ii., p. 19, f. 291. 292; Moore, Lep. Ceyl.. ii., PI. 115,
f. 1; Arestha (intica, Wlk., List Lep. Brit. Mns., iv., p. 805; Rigema
fcdcatu, AVlk., op. cit., xxxii., p. 437; Bigenia facta , Wlk., op. cit., xxxii.,
p. 438; Anticyra approximata, Wlk., op. cit., xxxii., p. 440.

^. 40-40 mm. Head and thorax whitish-oclireous. Pal])! 3; pale-oclirfous
•with some dark-fuseous irroratiun on outer surface. Antennae whitish, pectina-
tions pale- fuscous. Abdomen whitish. Legs ochreous-whitish; anterior jiair
pale-fuscous. Forewings elongate-oval, eosta rather strongly aix-hed, apex round-
pointed, termen obliquely rounded; oehreous-brown-vrhitish with a very tew.
scattered, dark-fuseous scales; a broadly suffused, fuscous, median streak from
base becoming indistinct in disc; dorsal area with slight fuscous suffusion; cilia
pale-fuscous. Hindwings with termen slightly rounded; ochreous-whitish; cilia
ochreous-whitish. Underside ochreous-whitish .

The only V I have seen is one from South Africa sent me Ijy !Mr. A. .1. T.
.Tanse. It has the forewing's narrower than the c?, costa more strongly arched,
apex acutely pointed, termen more oblif|ue; the central streak more pronounced
and expanded on termen .

N.Q.: Cairns; Q. : Rockhmiipton, Dunriilga, P)risbane. Also from .Java.
Ceylon, India, and Africa.

Gen. 18. L a e l i a.
LaeHa, Stph., Syst. Cat. Brit. Ins., ii., p. 52.

Antennae in c? well-developed with very long pectinations; in ? al>breviate<l
with very short pectinations. Palpi rather long, porrect; second .ioint with dense
long hairs beneath; terminal joint long (about i) . Thorax and abdomen witliout
crests. Posterior tibiae with two pairs of spurs. Anterior tibiae densely hairy,
tarsi also hairy. Forewings with areole present, 8 and 9 stalked from areole, 7
connate or rarely short-stalked, 10 well separate. Hindwings with 3, 4, 5 separ-
ate, 6 and 7 stalked, 8 approximated and connected witli cell at about I.

T y p e, L. coe)iosa Hb. from Europe. A genus of some size in the Indo-
Malayan and African regions. It differs from Dasychira in the much longer ter-
minal joint of palpi, and absence of any thoracic crest.

60. Laelia obsoleta.

Bnmhyx obsoleta. Fab., Ent. Syst., iii. (1), p. 403; Laelia ercmaea, Mcyr.. Trans.
Roy. Soc. S. Aust., xv., 1891, p. 193.

c7. 30-43 mm. Head oehreous. Palpi 3; ochreous. Antennae ochreous-
whitish; pectinations very long, fuscous. Thorax and abdomen ochreous-whitish.
Legs ochreous. Forewings triang-ular. costa straight, ajicx rounded-rectangular,
termen straight, scarcely oblique; ochreous-whitish, with slight fuscous tinge;
cilia whitish. Hindwings with termen very slightly rounded; as forewings.
Underside similar.

2. 38-44 mm. I'alpi 2. Antennae sliort : pectinations very slioit (1). Ab-
domen with tuft and umlei-side whitish. AVing< witFmut luscous tinge; forewings
with costa moderately arched.

N.Q. : Cliunlie River, Cairns, llcrbcrtim ; Q. : Dnariniia, Xainbour. T^iilsliane,
l\rt. T.ambounne; N.S.W.: Sydney.

PV A. .IKKFKI.'IS TURXER.

499

Species Hiirecmjiiised nr in-iniijln referred to the fdinitij.

(il. Anm. e.iolelu, Swin., Cat. ()xt. Mus., i., p. 197. Perhaps mit Australian.

()2. Porthesia ? irrurat((^ Luc, Proc. Roy. Soc. Q'land, 1892. p. 77.

(i.3. Artaxa compacta, Luc, Trans. Nat. Hist. Soc Q'land, 1894, ]i. lOti.

Ii4. Artaxa itsta, Luc, Proc Roy. Soc Q'land, 1901, p. 7G.

fl.5. Kuproctis peloiles, Low., Proc Roy. Soc S. Aust., xvii., 189.3, p. 159. Pn

bably a synonym of Epicoma tristis Lew. (Notodontidae) .
6(). Teara erehodes, Low., Trans. Roy. Sof. S. Aust., xvi., 1892, p. 14.

synonym of Ochror/aster contraria Wlk. {Notodontidae.)
07. Teara coralliphora. Low., Proc Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, 1900, p. 32.
68. Orgi/ia retinopepla. Low., Trans. Roy. Soc S. Aust., 1905, p. 170.
09. Ocneria heJiaspis. Meyr., Trans. Roy. Soc S. Aust., xv., 1891, ii. 192.

have not seen this species.

IxDEx TO Genera.

No.

No.

No.

No.

Aeyphas

i

Euproctis

(>

Iropoca

14

Orgyia

13

AxiolOfja

15

Euzora

11

Laelia

18

Porthesia

2

Dasychira

17

Habrophylla

.")

Lymantria

10

Redoa

12

Dura

8

Heracula

7

Oleue

16

Enonie

9

Icta

1

Oliijeria

•■i

In'dex to Species. *
Synonyms and unrecognised species in italic;

No.

No.

No.

No.

acatharta

10

crocea

30

idonea

22

pelodcs

65

actor

3.S

dejicita

34

indecora

34

pelospila

44

aganopa

23

distingiienda

56

iiivaia

56

postica

53

aliena

Ii

divisa

.56

iobroia

13

pratti

42

aiiiphideta

18

edwardsi

.34

irrorata

62

prionodesma

43

anacaiis/ii

17

epaxia

27

lanceolata

.56

pura

55

anartoides

51

epidela

26

leonina

39

pitra

32

antennata

45

erehodes

66

leptotypa

16

piisilla

51

antic a

59

cricydes

29

leueomelas

17

pyraiistis

24

approxiinata

.59

creniaea

60

liinbalis

37

reducta

47

aniada

31

euryzoua

20

lucifuga

25

retinopepla

68

arga

57

euthysana

3

liidekiiio;ii

53

i-otundata

54

arrofians

31

exoleta

61

lutea

13

sazvanta

56

athlophora

52

falcata

59

marginalis

36

scotocliyta

24

aurora

45

farenoides

57

marginepunctata

40

securis

59

austraUs

53

fulviceps

1.19

iiieeki

31

sitiitiluii.s

29

baliolalis

35

fusca

19

melambaphes

12

stenomorpha

21

hasalis

56

fusiforinis

56

melanosoma

.5

subraarginata

.50

basivUta

56

galactopis

7

inendosa

56

subnobilis

29

binotata

48

grotei

57

Dii.vta

5

facta

59

caiiifascia

53

habrostola

32

nephrographa

46

tanaopis

2

ceylanica

53

heliaspis

69

nilfiirica

57

togaia

34

chionitis

15

hemicalla

14

uiphobola

38

traiisiens

.50

chrysopJiaca

25

hipparia

50

obsoleta

60

trispila

11

clirysophila

13

holoUuca

17

ochrias

41

turiwri

45

collucens

49

Iwloxutha

30

ostracina

58

iista

64

compacta

63

horsfieldi

57

panabra

4

xuthoptera

8

coralliphora

67

hyiimolis

28

paradoxa

4

5(10

A NEW AVIAN TREMATODE.

By Eleanor E. Chase, B.Sc, Demoxstbatoe ix Zoologv, UNi\-ERSiTy

OF Sydney.

(Commnnicated by Professor S. J. Johnston, B.A., D. Sc.)
(Pliile xxvi.; and cue Text-figure.)

I.VTItODl'CTlO.V.

The presence of Holastopiiim as an endoparasite of herons has been i-ecorded
by two authoi's. Brandes (1891, p. 594) records' H. corini Xitzsch and U. cinc-
tum Brandes from various species of Ardea. Johnston (1904, p. 112) described,
under the name of Holostomum simjAex, a trematode frojn the intestine of the
white-fronted heron yotoplioyx novae-lioUandiae, collected dt Creel Bay. Broken
Bay, N.S.W.

I record here the occurrence of another species of Holostomum in this heron,
my description being based on three pieseived specimens, one of which had been
mounted whole, and two sectioned by Prof. S. J. Johnston, who had collected
them at Terrigal, N.S.W. The limited and imperfect nature of the material,
and, in particular, the lack of living sjieciniens has prevented more than a sum-
mary description being given.

Description of tiik New Species.

Family I10L()ST0:\rATinAE.

SubfamUv HOLOSTOMEAE.

Genus H o i, o s t o ji r m Nitzsch.

Hoi.osTOllUJi repkxs, n.sp. (PI. xxvi.. fiijs. 1-5.)

External Characters. — 11. re pens is 0 mm. in lenjith and shows tiie umuiI
divnsion into two regions, not well marked otf from one another, the anterior 2 mm.
and the posterior 4 mm. long. The latter is narrower than the anterior regiun,
the diameter increasing towards the posterior end, and being gi-eatest in tlie
region of the testes, where it exceeds the width of the fore part of the body. In
preserved specimens the dorsal surface has a concave curvature, owing to the
contracted condition of the dorsal loniiitudinal nuiscle band>.

BY ELEAXOt; K. ('HASE.

501

The dingiug plug exfciuls a sbort distance I)eyoiul tlie margin of the beaker-
shaped anterior region, and the genital papilla also projects a short distance
from the bursa posteriorly. (Text-flg. 1.)

f^eg. iiL. lit

Text. fig. 1. — Holosliiiuiii ripiiis, ii.sp.

In all the described species of Hnlostomum, the oral sucker and tlie pharynx
are both well-defined structures, but in H. repens only one cavity with thick mus-
cular walls is found in connection with the mouth. With the limited amount
of material at my disposal, a difBeulty has been experienced in determining
whether this structui'e represents an oral sucker, or pharynx, or a union of the
two. In the -Trematoda the absence of a pliai-ynx is not common, ;dtb(]ugh it

502 A XKW A\ IAN THK.MATUDE,

does occur in some yeuera, e.g., Ooryuderu, but here the couclusiou is I'ureed upon
me that the pharynx is present, and that no distinct oral sucker is represented.
The posterior sucker, (1.133 mm. long-. 0.095 mm. broad, with thickness of wall.
0.038 mni., opens into the narrow cavity between the doisal body wall and the
median process of the clinging plug.

The Clinging Plug. — The clinging jjlug comprises (1) a main ovoid mass,
larger basally, divided into two lateral lobes by an oblique septum running from
the dorsal body wall at half its length anteriorly to the ventral wall at its hinder
level posteriorly. In this septum lun the two branches of the alimentary canal
and certain large excretory spaces (PI. xsvi., fig. 4, int. ex.). Anteriorly the
mass projects forward as two smaller lateral lobes, which end a little forward of
the narrowest diameter of the cup (PI. sxvi., tig. 3, d. ic.) : (.2) a median process
attached to the dorsal body wall anterior to the main lobes, narrowing distally,
and enlarging into two small flattened lobes, capable of being bent over towards
the ventral wall (PI. xx\"i.. tig. 3, m.d.p.), but, when extended, reaching to the
boi-der of the cup; (3) a lamellar fold arising from the ventral body wall at the
anterior level of the main mass, and expanding on both sides to form a collar
embracing the median jjrocess, and the doi'sal and ventral processes next men^
tioned (PI. xxvi., fig. 3, r.ic.) ; (4) a capitate process arising from the base of the
median lobe dorsally and extending forwards to the level' of the cup margin (PI.
xxvi., fig. 3, pr2) ; and (5) a similar larger ventral process arising at the base of
the lamellar fold, and projecting forwards to the same distance (PI. xxvi., fig. 3.
pn).

The main ovoid mass of the plug arises from the dorsal Ijody wall pos-
terior to the narrowest regri<m of the cup (PI. xxvi., fig. 3) . It is divided into two
lateral lobes, into which muscle fibres pass through the base of attachment from
l)<)tli an anterior and posterior direction. Vitelline glands are found throughout
this division of the i)lug. but do not occur in any of the other pi'ocesses.

The large gland spoken of by Brandes (1891, p. 3t)0l as secreting a corrod-
ing substance, is situated just behind the base of attachment of this main doi'sal
mass (Pi. xxvi., fig. 2, gl.). The aiTangement of the follicles of the gland point
to the fact that the secretion is carried fonvard by a number of fine ducts, but
no connection can be traced between this gland ^ind certain ducts containing a
definite secretion, whicli appear at the posterior extremity of the main mass of
the plug, and run forward in the accessory processes.

The cup in which the plug lies occupies almost one third of the total body
length, and is divided posteriorly into two lateral cavities by the obliiiue sei)tum
before mentioned (PI. xxvi., fig. 4, c.c).

Miiscidature. — Lying directly below the cuticle are two layers of nuisde
fibres, an outer circular, and an iiuier longitudinal layer. In addition, definite
strands of oblique nuisde extend tl.rouuh tlie parencliyma from tlie outer to t\n-
inner wall of the cup.

The region of the ventral sucker is very nuiscular. and it is liere that thi-
two main dorsal longitudinal bamls of nuisde have their origin. These band>
run back below tlie dorsal surface to tlie i«)sterior end of the body, and adil
greatly to tiie efifectiveness of the ])liig as explained l)y lirandes (1891, ji. 5591.
Contraction of these fibres causes a sharpening of the angle between the anterior
and posterior i-egions. and tlie pressure of the individnal jiarts of the iiiui; ai;ain>t
one another.

BY ELEANOl! K. CUAt^E. 503

The dursal median iirui-ess of the clingiug ijlug has nuuieruus tibres at its
base, and the bifid extremity is capable of being bent back on itself by the eon-
traction of the fibres contained within these lobes (PI. xxvi., fig. 3, m.d.p.).

There is a strong layer of circular muscle in the parenchyma of the wall
surrounding the main ovoid mass of the plug, and it is continuous with the fibres,
which run into the septum dividing the cavity of the cup (PI. xxvi., fig's, 2, 4 cm.).

Alimentary Canal. — Owing to the absence of a definite oral sucker as stated
above, the mouth leads directly into a pharynx 0.114: mm. long, 0.057 mm.
broad, with thickness of wall 0.019 mm.

The intestine is dorsal in jjosition in fore part of the body, but (PI. xxvi.,
fig. 4, int.) shows the two limbs crossing over in the septum to take up a ventral
position in the posterior cylindrical region (PI. xxvi., fig. 5, int.).

Excretory System. — There is a ramifying system of excretory vessels, but with
the present imperfect specimens I am unable to give a detailed account of their
distribution .

Reproductive System. — The reproductive system of H. repens is very similar
to the description given by Brandes (1891. p. 590, PI. xli., fig. 1) for //. variahile.
The genital organs are, however, confined to the posterior third of the animal.
The uterus, with the exception of its connection with the vesicula seminalis, has
the same relations as in H. variahile. In the latter the vesicula seminalis opens
into the uterus at the base of the genital papilla, whereas in H. repens it- joins
the female duct near the extremity of the papilla (PI. xx\'i., fig. 1).

The eggs are large, 0.095 x 0.07(5 mm.; 0.133 X 0.095 mm.

There are numerous vitelline glands, which extend into the anterior region,
and are found in the two swollen masses of the dorsal wall of the plug (PL xxvi.,
fig. 2, v.g.). In the region of the reproductive organs, the follicles are confined
to a ventral position, but they do occur dorsally both in front of and behind these
organs.

Affinitie.^:. — //. variahile Xitzsch, according to Brandes (1891. p. 590, PI. xli..
fig. 1), is closely allied to H. repens in the general arrangement of the organs, but
in shape U. repens is considerably more elongated, and the plug occupies a much
greater proportion of the body. Holostomum simplex Johnston (1904, p. 112,
PI. vii., figs. 1-3), from the same host, has somewhat the same fonn, but the
clinging plug is of a simpler tyiie. In no other species described have I found
the absence ol oral sucker noted.

Host. — Fi'om the intestine of Xotophoyx twvae-hnllandiae, collected at Terri-
gal, N.S.W.

Type Ko. Vr.544 in the Australian iluseum, Sydney.

References.

Braxdes. 1888. Uber das Genus lldlostdinHni Xitzsch. Zool. Anz., xi., pp.

424-426.
1891. Die familie der Holostomiden . Zool. Jahrh., v., pp. 549-G04,

PI. xxxix.-xli.
"DujAEDlx. 1845. Histoire naturelle des Helminthes ou vers intestinaux. Paris.
Johnston. 1904. On some species of Holostomidae from Australian Birds.

Proc. Linn. Soe. N.S. Wales., xxix., pp. 108-116, PL v.-vii.
LiNTOX. 1892. Notes on Avian Entozoa. Proc. U.S. Nat. Mm., xv., pp. 87-113.

PL iv.-viii.

504 . A NEW AVIAN TREIIATODE,

Explanation or Plate xxvi.
Holostomum repens, n.sp.

Fig. 1. — Reconstruction of posterior region, showing relations of tlie leproductive organs.
Fig. 2. — Transverse section through the main lateral lobes of the dorsal w:ill of the plug.
Pig. 3. — Reconstruction of anterior region, showing various processes of the clinging plug.
Fig. 4. — Transverse section through the posterior region of the cup.
Fig. 5. — Transverse section through the testes, shell gland, uterus, vas deferens.

Explanation of Lettering for Text Fk.ire axu Plate.

b.c. bursa copulatrix; c.c. cavity of cup; on. circular muscle; c.p, clinging plug;"
d.hn. dorsal longitudinal muscle; d.2v. dorsal wall of plug ; e.g. eggs ; eg. in lit. eggs in
uterus; ex. excretory vessel; gl. gland; g.p. genital pajjilla ; inl. intestine; Ic. laurer's
canal; It. lobes of testis; m.d.p. median dorsal process of plug; m.v.d. single unpaired
vitelline duct ; oi>. ovary; oot. ootype; ovid. oviduct; ph. pharynx; pr,. process arising
from base of ventral lamellar wall ; /r^. process arising from base of median dorsal lobe ;
r.a.u. receptaculum seminis uterinum ; ih.g. shell gland ; t ,. anterior testis ; t^. posterior
testis ; td. transverse yolk duct : ut. uterus ; vd. vas deferens ; v.g: vitelline glands ;
v.s. ventral sucker; I'.sein. vesicula seminalis; v.u\ ventral lamellar wall of plug;
y.r. yolk reservoir.

505

STUDIES IN LIFE-HISTORIES OF AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA
BRACHYCERA.

Part i. Stratiomyiidae.

No. 1. Metoponia rubriceps Macquart.

By Vera Irwin-Smith, B.Sc, F.L.S., Linnean Macleay Fellow of the

Society in Zoology.

(Plates xsvii.-xxviii., and 23 text-figures.)

Introduction.

During- the jiast twelve months I have had the opportunity of collecting, in
the neighbourhood of Sydney, many soil-inhabiting dipterous larvae, belonging,
for the most part, to the section Braehycera. Of these, I have succeeded in rear-
ing through to the imago, species of the families Stratiomyiidae, Mydaidae, Tab-
anidae, Asilidae, Therevidae, and Bombylidae. and to the pupal stage, many other,
as yet unidentified, species.

Very little work has been d(UK% in any part of the world, on the early stages
of the Braohyoera, and the Australian forms have , been, up to the present time,
almost entirely unknown . The material now collected is therefore of considerable im-
portance, as affording an opportunity of studying the life histories of these files.
Many gaps yet remain to be tilled. In no case has it been possible to observe
all stages in the development, but it is hoped that the preliminary study of the
data obtained will prove useful as a basis for later, more extensive, investigations.
The present paper is intended as the first of a series dealing with the biology of
the group, arranged in the order of the families .

The Stratiomyiidae, usually placed by taxonomists at the beginning of the
Braehycera series, are of special interest because of the peculiar, intermediate
position which they occupy, in their mode of development, between the two great
sub-orders of Diptera, distinguished Ijy Brauer under the names Orthorrhapha
and Cyclorrhapha.

Although classed with the Orthorrhapha, and developing a more or less perfect
"pupa obtecta," they pass the entire pupal period within the last larval skin,
which constitutes a h&rd, protective case, recalling the "puparium" of the Cyclorr-
hapha. And the opening up of this case, at the emergence of the fly, is in the
form of a combination of the straight dorsal split of the Orthorrhapha, and the
anterior circular split of the Cvclorriiaplia.

A discussion of the significance of these characters is outside the scope of the
present work. Bat the Stratiomyiidae have been taken first, both on account of
the usually accepted position of the family, and because the abundance and ac-
cessibility of the material makes possible a fuller investigation of the life-liistory
of one of this gi-oup, than is the case with the majority of the other families
studied .

506 STUDIES IN LIFE-HISTORIES 01" AUSTRALIAN- UIPTERA nKACHYCERA^ 1..

I wish here to acknowledge my imlebteduess to Mr. G. H. Hardy, who is
at present engaged ou the taxonomic study of the species, Metopunia rubriceps
Macq. with which this paper deals. It was his observation and identification of
the fiy in Sydney, in 1919, which afforded me the opportunity of studying its
life-history, and 1 owe to him many helpful suggestions, and assistance with sys-
tematic work and with literature. I have also to thank Mr. C. Hedley, Acting
Curator of the Australian iluseum, for the facilities afforded me at the Museum
for carrying out the investigation; and members of the Museum staff, generally,
lor their constant helpfulness during the progi-ess of the work. To my mother
I owe the preservation of living larvae over a period of two months, when,
through illness and an enforced absence from Sydney, ^ was unable to attend
to them myself. For the execution of Plate xxvii., in collaboration with myself,
1 have to thank my friend. Miss Edith Horrocks.

Historical.

At the end of this paper 1 append a list, with accompanying bibliography, of
ail the species of tSlratiomyiidae which have been recorded in the early stages.
The latest list of this kind, of which I am aware, was published by Brauer in
1883, nearly forty years ago. In addition to being now very much out of date,
its value is impaired by the incomplete way in which the references are quoted,
and the lack of dates, and of a bibliography. Nevertheless, I have found it of
great service, in the preparation of a revised and more up-to-date list, and
have taken from it many references which I have had no opportunity of seeing
elsewliere. The bibliography, which I have added, has been extended to cover,
as far as possible, all works dealing in any way with the biology of the Stratio-
viyiidae. Here again I have been obbged to rely on earlier workers, and on
catalogues such as those of the Royal Society and the British Museum, and the
Zoological Record, for many references, since a large part of the literature
(juoted is not available to me. But I have endeavoured to make it as accurate
as possible by a comparison of records in the various catalogues. Arranged in
chronological order, and with explanatory notes, it forms in itself a brief his-
torical review of all the work done to date ou this subject. In appearance this
is of considerable bulk, but its scope is limited. Certainly, more attention has
been paid to the early stages of the Stratiomyiidae than to those of any other
family of the Brachycera. Stratiomyid larvae seem to lie plentiful in most parts
of the world, and very often live under conditions which excite interest, or where
they are readily found. But in many instances the reference to them consists
merely of a record of their occurrence, and habitat, with or witiiout a brief de- ■
scription of the larva. Thus Packard (1871). Lucas (1879), and Griffith (1882)
note their occurrence in the salt water, and hot water of lakes and springs;
Pearson (1882),, the finding of a larva on a very exposed ])art of an ocean
lieach, Florentin (1899), a great mass of them in excessively saline pools in
Lorraine, Markel (1844), tlieir association with a nest of ants. The larvae
which liave been most frequently recorded and described are those living in water,
especially the gener:i Odontomyia and Stratiomyia ; and of these the species Stra-
tlomyia chamaeleon L. has received the most attention. Being easily obtainable,
these species have been used by workers engaged in a study of the comparative
anatomy of the larvae of various insects, notably l)v Kunckel d'llerculais (1879),
and Viallanes (1882 18851 . Rut the descripti<ms have been, as a rule, confined

BV VERA IRWIX SMITH. 507

to special organs, and no att(-'mi)t has been made to give a general and complete
account oi' the larval morphology and the metamorphosis of any of the Stratio-
myiidae. Portions of the nervous system have been described, in this way, by
Kunckel d'Herculais (1879), Viallanes (1882, 1885), and Henneguy and Binet
(18'J-J); the integument, by Leydig (1860), Viallanes (1882), and Plotnikow
(1904) ; the malpighiau vessels, by Vaney (1900) ; the pharynx, by Vaney (1902)
and Jusbaschjauz (1910), and the head and mouth parts, by Becker (1910) .
The most important work on the development is that of Jusbaschjanz (1910),
who deals in great histological detail with the development of the imaginal discs,
etc. ; but he gives no account of the general metamorphosis . He explains that
such an account would require a much richer material than he had at his disposal
at the time, and that he had not succeeded in getting many pupal stages, the
few pupae he obtained being all in the later phases of development. He pro-
poses to deal more completely, in a later work, with the phenomena of meta-
morphosis and development; but, if the promised work has appeared, it has not
been accessible to me, and I have found no record of it in the catalogues. I
have not seen Swammerdam's book (1737), but, according to Jusbaschjanz, he
describes the metamorphosis of Stratiomi/s chamaeleon with an accuracy remark-
able in such an early work. Good descriptions of the external features of larvae
exist in various papers dealing with individual species; but the most important
works, from a systematic point of view, are those of Brauer (1883), and Lund-
beck (1907) . Although Brauer deals with dipterous larvae in general, his work
is very comprehensive in character. After discussing the value of larval charac-
ters in classification, and the metamorphosis of the different groups, he gives a
section on the characters of the sub-orders and families, followed, in the case of the
Stratiomi/iidae. by a systematic table (p. 23) of the larval characters of the dif-
ferent genera. Lundbeck, in his valuable work on Danish Diptera, supplies a
description of the larvae under the heading of each genus of the Stratiomyiidae,.
and finishes with a svTioptic table (p. 74) of the larvae of all Danish genera.

Little or nothing is known of the life-histories, or even of the larvae, of the
Australian Stratiomt/iidae. The only published record of the early stages of any
of this group, which I have been able to find, is that of Froggatt (1896), which
relates to Ephippiuni alhitarsifi (?) Bigot.

Observations on thh life-history of Metoponia rubrioeps Macq.

For a few weeks in the spring, and again in the autumn, this species makes
its appearance, in fairly considerable numbers, over grassy areas in the neigh-
bourhood of Sydney. Well cultivated lawns seem to be specially favoured
haunts, and the flies, which are small, with feeble powers of flight, are usually
found on, or about, the grass. They seldom rise far above the gi-ound, though
in the autumn of this year, one female specimen was captured on a window of
the third floor of the Australian Museum. Like most Stratiorayids, they are sluggish
in their habits, and remain for long periods at rest on the grass blades, where
they are easily caught by inverting a glass tube over them. Mr. G. H. Hardy
informs me that he has taken specimens from the middle of March to the end
of April, and in the early part of November, but has never seen them at other
times of the year.

The present investigation into the life-history was begun in May, 1919, when
I received from Mr. Hardy a specimen tube containing a cluster of eggs on a
grass blade, with the information that they were deposited by Metoponia rubri-

508

STUDIES IX LIFK-IUf^TORIKS OF .U'sTUALIAN DIPTKRA BRACHYCERA, 1.,

ceps witliiii a lew liuiirs (if her capture on the morning of the IGth April.
Owing to an aeeiJontal delay in transmission, they did not reach me for nearly
three weeks, during which time they had become shrivelled and dry, and, though
kept undisturbed for another month, they failed to hatch out.

Attempts to seciu'e further batches of eggs, by confining the two sexes '.n
breeding cage* containing grass sods, all proved unsuccessful. It was found that
the flies, for the most part, remained nK)tionless in the one position from the
time they were put into the cage until their death, a period varying from three
to ten days; and no case of ovijiosition was observed.

In the following November Mr. Hardy directed my attention to the re-
appearance of M. rubriceps on a grass plot behind the Australian Museum, with
the suggestion that this might prove a natural breeding ground for it.

Te.\t-fif;.l. Larva of Metoponiix rubriceps Macq. Dorsal view, (x 10).
Text-fig. 2. ,, ., Ventral view, (x 10).

Text-fig.3. M. rubriceps. 9 emerging from larval skin, (x 6J).

Text-fig. 4. Hf. rubriceps. Empty larval skin of f;^. (x 6J).

Text-fig. 4(7. Detached 'hoail cap' of larval skin, (x lij).

Here a small sloping bank thirty feet long by twelve feet wide, in the middle
of an asjihalted courtyard, has been formed by laying down sandy black loam,
to a depth of one to two feet, on a rubble foundation of broken bricks and
stones, and planted with paspalum and coucli grass, interspersed with dandelion
plants and other weeds. It is kept well tended, and always contains a fair

BY VERA IRWIX SMITH. 509

amount of moisture, so that tlie grass grows well, with thick rhizomes and closely
matted roots.

On the Ttli November a small portion of this turf was dug up, and a search
made for larvae in soil spread out over a white concrete path. Together with
numerous Hymenopteron and Coleopteron larvae, and some cocoons of wasps,
and Syrphid flies, some twenty-eight larvae were found, of an undoubtedly Stra-
tiomyid type, ranging in size from 5 to 11 mm. (Text-flgs.l and 2) . Fourteen
of these were kept alive, and confined together in a small cylindrical glass pot,
containing an inch or two or soil, and some small grass sods, and covered witii a
glass lid. As the grass decayed, fresh sods were put in at intervals of two or
three weeks, and a few drops of water added with them, so that the soil was kept
just slightly damp. Five months later most of the larvae were still alive, but
showed very little increase in size.

On the morning of tlie 13tli April a male Metoponia rubriceps was found to
have emerged. This date corresponded closely with that on which the tlies had
been observed first on the Museum lawn in the previous year. Accordingly, on
the following morning, a visit was paid to the spot from which the larvae had
been taken. Here, large numbers of imagines, both males and females, were
found already out, swarming above the grass in fairly rapid flight, the unusual
activity l)eing due, probably, to a period of warm sunshine following several
days' rain. From Mr. Hardy I learnt that a few individuals had first appeared
a week or two before, but tliat they had not become numerous until within a
few days of this time.

Larvae were found to be jiresent in the soil in much greater numbers than
had been observed in the previous November. A rough searcii tlirough turf
taken from an area less than two feet sf|uare revealed eighty-five larvae, in all
stages of development, from lar\ae 3.2 nmi. long, to fully developed iiujiae in
larval skins 8 to 11 mm. long. Two female imagines were found just in the
act of emerging, and were killed and Hxed in this position, half way out of the
larval skin (Text-fig. 3). These were both taken just at the surface of the
soil. In the same position, among exposed rhizomes, were many empty caseS;
all showing a clean-cut, circular, aperture at one end, and measuring from 7 to
11 mm. long. In several instances the anterior extremity, forming a lid-like cap
to the case, was still lightly attached to it on the ventral side (Text-fig 4), but
broke away with the slightest movement (Text-fig. 4a).

The vertical levels, in the soil, from which larvae of different sizes were ob-
tained, were carefully noted. The fully grown larvae were all found almost on
the surface, about the junctions of stems and roots, mostly wedged in between the
thicker rhizomes, especially of the paspalum grass. In colour, and seginented
appearance, these bear a rather striking resemblance to the larvae. From this
level, down to one to two inches below the surface, fifty of the larger larvae
were taken. At a slightly lower level, three to four inches down, among the
finer grass rootlets, were smaller larvae, always in close association with the
grass. Several were found attached l)y the head-capsule to roots, and one, removed
from the soil with its head buried in the root of a dandelion plant, remained in
this position for several hours. About eighteen inches below the surface, the
sub-soil and rubble foundation of the lawn were reached. No larvae were found
at, or below, this depth, and only a very few at the ten-inch level. These last
were of medium size, from 5 to 8 mm. long.

510 STUDIES IX LIFE-IIISTORIES OF AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA BRACHYCERA, I.,

For the next two or three weeks Hies continued to emerge in the large glass
jar, containing grass sods, iu which these larvae were confined. They made
tlieir appearance successively on the 19th, 23rd, and 30th April, anil 3rd and
4th May. With the exception of two females on the 23rd, these were all males.
By this time most of the remaining larvae of the larger size had been chloro-
formed and dissected. Some twenty of them were found in various stages of
pupation within the larval skin; the rest still retained the unaltered larval struc-
ture.

On the 30th April, a second imago, a male, emerged from among the larvae
collected in the previous November. These two are the only ones of this collec-
tion which have emerged to date (September, 1920). Six of the larvae are still
alive, but none of them show any signs of pupating as yet.

After an interval of one month, on the 13th May, the ^Museum lawn was
again examined. Imagines were now very scarce, only one male and two females
being observed. There was a corresponding scarcity of mature larvae in the
soil, but numerous empty larval skins were found on, or close to, the surface.
In the deeper levels, among the terminal rootlets of the grass, smaller larvae
were still plentiful. Over forty were collected in a few spadefuls of earth, the
smallest of them being barely 2 mm. long, while others ranged up to 6 and 7 mm.
A few larger larvae were found closer to the surface. Of these, three were found
to contain female pupae, two of them being dead, and already beginning to decay.
From a fourth, a dead and dried, but fully-formed male imago was taken.

It seemed evident that the smaller larvae belonged to one or several younger
generations which were burrowing down to pass the winter at deeper levels, as
the mature larvae migi-ated to the surface to pupate. But it was necessary to
follow them up, later on in the winter, in order to find out just what had Ijecome
of them. Accordingly, on the 3rd August, another examination of the lawn was
made. On this occasion the soil was very damp after five or six weeks' con-
tinual rain, and only a small area of gi-ound, about the size of the surface of the
spade, was dug up. No larvae were found close to the surface, but eighteen,
varying in size from 5 to 11 mm., were found among the terminal rootlets, at a
depth of three or four inches, four larvae, from 5 to 8.5 nuu.. a little lower
down, and three from 7 to 8.5 mm. at a slightly greater depth.

It will thus be seen that larvae of very varying sizes occur at aU periods of
the year, and that except when they are about to pupate, most of the larvae
are found always at a depth of two or three inches below the surface.

Living lar\ae of all sizes, from 4 to 9 mm., and of all collections, from No-
vember onwards, are still being kept under observation, though a good many
have died or been lost, owing to the predations of rats and mice, which infest
the laboratories of the Macleay Museum, and appear to have developed a taste
for fly larvae. On several occasions glass pots left overnight uncovered, or with
loosely-fitting covers, have been fomid in the mcjrning witli the soil ovcrfnnnMl,
and all the larvae gone.

lAfe-cjicle.

Fargeau and Scivillc, as early as 1825, (|Uoting Macquart's description of
Paehygaster ater, made the statement that the larvae require more than a year
for their complete development. And West wood (1S40) says that the larva of
Clitellaria cpliippium found by Van Roser, although more tluan half-grown when
found, was two years in arriving at the perfect state. Later writers appear to
have paid very little attention to this question of the period occupied in the life-

RY VERA IRWIX SMITH. 511

cycle of any of the titratiomi/iidae. Jlost of them content themselves with rather
vague statements, as. for instance, -that "the larvae hibernate, and development
takes place in the spring- and summer."' Tragardh, in his description of Paclii/-
(jatiter miiiuti.'-sima (1914) makes the observation that during the summer only
small larvae can be found, from which fact the deduction is drawn that only one
generation is produced annually, which hibernates in the larva-stage, conforming
to the aeeount given by Perris (1870) concerning Pachygaster pini. Cros, in his
interesting observations on the larval habits of Stratiornyia anubis (1911), records
that, of a dozen larvae collected on the 22nd October, 1903, four yielded ima-
gines in the following June, while from twenty-six larvae collected on the 31st
December, 1909, hve flies were obtained successively on the 25th .June, and on
the 4th July, 1910. But he gives no account of the fate of the remainder of
the larvae.

Xonc of the larvae of Metoponia riibriceps have grown very much during
their period in captivity, and some time must elapse before it is 23ossible to de-
termine the normal time occupied in larval development. However, it is already
clear that, although two broods of flies appear annually, the larval period re-
quires more than six months for its completion, and very probable that it re-
quires considerably longer than twelve months. This may be deduced from the
very slow gi-owth of larvae in captivity, and the fact that larvae, already more
than half-grown when taken in November, show no sign of pupating in the fol-
lowing Sejitember. Although it is not safe to arrive at definite conclusions from
larvae kept under abnormal conditions, these conclusions are borne out by obser-
vations in the field, since small larvae are found at all times of the year, and
larvae less than 5 mm. long five months after the last appearance of the adult
flies. The smallest larva found, being only a little more than twice the size ot
the egg, was probably still in the first larval instar when taken, one month after
the appearance of the imagines. It seems reasonable to assume that larvae of
this, and ]ierhaps the 3 and 4 mm. lengtli. hatched from the egg during the sea-
son in which they were taken.

Unfortunately, no eggs were found in natural conditions, and, though several
batches were obtained from females captured in glass tubes during the past
autumn, none of them hatched out.

^'arious methods of keeping them were adopted — on damp blotting paper
over a layer of damp soil, in a covered glass pot; on growing rhizomes of paspa-
lum grass ; directly on damp soil ; or kept in the tube in which they were de-
posited. In most cases they were covered up from the light, and care was taken
to prevent them from becoming completely dry. Under drj- conditions they soon
shrivelled up, while, when conditions were at all damp, the eggs were continuous-
ly thickly coated with fine beads of moisture, and many of them were found to
be infested with fungus after a short time. However, a fair number retained
their normal sliape and appearance for ten weeks or more, but in no case did
they show any sign of development. It is possible that all these eggs were in-
fertile .

Ovipositinn.

Gravid-looking females taken during the morning, between 10 and 11 o'clock.
usually oviposited vei-y rapidly, the egg-laying being finished before midday.
Usually the eggs were laid on the side of the glass tube, sometimes on cotton-
wool. In one instance they were placed in a single, fairly even row, along the

512

STUDIES IN LIFE-HISTORIES OF AUSTRALIAN- DIPTERA BRACHTCERA, 1.,

side of the vessel, adheriug tu one anollier laterally, and to the vessel liy means
of a stieky substance with wliich they are coated (Text-fig. 5a). But all the
others laid in tubes, as well as those obtained in the single instance in which
one female oviposited on soil in a Ijreeding cage, formed one or two clumps,
the eggs being- jiiled up iriegularly on one anotlier, though often remaining in
contact at the pole (Text-tiy. 5?').

Text-figs. P-8. Posterior end of larva of
RI. rubriceps.

Fig. 6. Lateral view. Fig." Dorsal
view. Fig.8. Ventral view, (x 10).

Text-fig. 5. a. Egg cluster ^[. ruhriceps. (x 5);
^, eg^ cluster. (xlO); c, single egg. (x.32);
d, sculpturing on chorion of egg. (x 19.S) .

The number of eggs dei)osited. in each case, by four females was carefully
counted. The numbers were, respectively, 130, lli3, l(i4, and 181. If these
tigures represent anything like the normal nund)er, the fecundity of this species
is much lower than is the case with Strdtiiniii/io clnnnaeleun Beg., for which Mik
(1896) gives the figure 630.

The Eijcj.

Tiie eggs are opaque white in colour, and elongated oval in outline, slightly
broader at one end tlian the other (Text-fig. 5c ) . They measure from .80 to .88
mm. lu length, and .22 to .27 nun. in diameter. The chorion is thin, and its
surface shows a very delicate sculpturing in the form of an irregular network
of raised lines enclosing polygonal-sluiped spaces (Text-fig. 5rf). This marking
can only be seen under high magnification, and when the chorion is torn away, or
freed fi'oin the internal contents of the eggs by clearing. Treatment with caustic
potash, or willi clearing agents, such as clove and cedar oil, did not give good
results, but more sicccss was obtained when the eggs were immersed in chloro-
form, an<l afterwards cleared in xyjnl. Tlu^y tlien mounted fairly well in Canada
balsaiii.

F.cdiis'ix.

1 ha\(' liein umililc l<> dctermiiu' the total Muml)er of ccdyses occurring during
the larval ])eriiid. Oiilv niic of tlu- larvae kept in the laboratory has been ob-
served to mnult Iwice. once on tlii' 3ril December, and the second time on the

nv \KRA IRWIN SMITH. 513

8th June, when 8.2 mm. long. A single moulting occurred in a number of
cases among the larvae taken in April and May. The majority of these were at
the 7 mm. stage, but tliere were a few at ti, 8, 9, and 9.5 mm. Whether these
leugtiis represent successive instars. there is not yet sufficient evidence to prove.

All the larvae escape from the old skin in much the same way. Before
moulting the skin liecomes dry and withered looking, much softer than when
functional, and a lighter colour. The process, which usually occupies about an
hour, begins by a splitting of the moult skin, along one side, from the third to the
ninth or tenth segment, tile larva slowly moving from side to side, and contract-
ing. The skin of the anal region remains intact, and that of the anterior end
is split off entire, between the thii'd and fourth segments. Frequently the larva
emerges from the posterior portion with its head still enclosed in this anterior
"cap," which is subsequently shed. The empty moult skin stands out stiffly,
retaining the same size and shape as when the larva is still enclosed in it .

The new larva' skin is a delicate white or creamy colour, its surface flecked
with glistening particles, and showing the typical hexagonal pattern very dis-
tinctly. It assumes a brownish tinge only very slowly, and is still light in colour
at the end of several weeks. Older larvae show the more normal grey-brown
colour, which tones very well with the soil in which they live. The coating of
particles of dirt which invests most of them increases this resemblance to their
environment.

Pupation.

During the period of pupation the larval skin becomes much darker, and as-
sumes a dry, rigid appearance, by which the condition is easily recognised,
although there is no change in outward fonn . Larval skins of male jiupae mea-
sure from 7 to 8 mm., those of females from 10 to 11 mm. For some time be-
fore the emerg'enco of the adult fly the pupating larva is quite motionless, and
to all appearances dead. One found in this condition on the 13th April, did
not emerge until the 30th April, so that the pupal stage occupies at least eighteen
days. This is a longer period than is given by .Jusbasehjanz, who states that
the pupal stage lasts eleven to thirteen days.

Larval Ii(ihit.'<.

The larvae are all extremely sluggisli in their movements. Usually they re-
main quite immobile for Hve or ten minutes after being disturbed; then begin
slow movements of contraction, and, if lying ventral side uppermost, roll over,
and crawl slowly and stiffly along, seeking to take cover beneath the soil, a pro-
cess which occupies half an hour or more. On a hard surface, or a layer of
soil too thin to burrow into, their rate of progression is of the order of 5 to 10
mm. in ten minutes. Larvae conflneil in glass pots in the laboratory are usually
found wedged amony' the roots of grass soon after the fresh sods are put in with
them, and sometimes adhering to a root by the head capsule. It is evident that
their main, if not only, source of nourishment is in the juices of the living plant-
But I have never been able to detect any scars, or perforations, or other evidences
of injury on the roots, and, even where the larvae are yery numerous, the grass
which harbours them shows no ill-eft'ects from their presence. While living
normally in soil in which a fair degree of moisture is present, they are able to
sustain life in much drier conditions. Individuals left for twenty-four hours or
more, without soil, in a dry Petri dish, showed no ill-effects from the experi-

514 .STUDIES iX LIFE-HISTORIES OF AISTRALIAX DIPTERA BRACHYCERA, i..

ence. Others, covereil witli a thin hiyer of sandy soil, which, owing to evapora-
tion, soon became quite dry, were still alive, and quite healthy after several days.
But larvae which had been placed in small porous flower pots, planted with grass,
were found rjuite dead, dry and shrivelled, together with the grass, when, owing
to a week's enforced neglect, the soil had been allowed to become dry and caked
hard. Returned to damp conditions none of them showed any signs of reaniina-
tion. In their powers of resistance to desiccation, therefore, they are strikingly
different from the aquatic species of Stratiomyia observed by Cros (1911), and
by Laker (1880). The former records having kept larvae of Stratiomyia
anubis in a phial containing 15 mm. depth of completely dry sand for seven
months l)efore the emergence of the imago. And Laker found a living larva
of a Stratiomyia sp. in the dry sand at the bottom of a box formerly used as
an aquarium, after it had been emptied of water, and stored in a cellar for fully
three months.

Description of the larva.

The larvae are very similar in general appearance to those of the genus
Sargus Fabr., as described by Brauer (1883), and Lundbeek (1907). But the
Sargus larva, like those of all other Stratiomyids, is said to have only eleven
post-cephalic segments, whereas a lateral view of Metoponia ruhricepa shows that
twehe segments are actually present. From a dorsal aspect only eleven seg-
ments are seen (Text-fig. 1), and in ventral view another segment is not readily
distinguishable. But, when viewed laterally, it is seen that what appears to be
the terminal segment, consists, really, of the imperfectly fused eleventh and
twelfth, the twelfth segment being directed ventrally, and di^'ided off from the
eleventh by a very oblique line (Text-fig. G).

The segments are all much broader than long, and of uniform width from
the second to the tenth; the terminal segments are slightly narrower. The bodv
is elongate, and, in the older larvae, flattened dorso-ventrally. Younger larvae
are more nearly cylindrical, larvae of 4 mm. length having a lateral diameter
of 1.0 mm., and a dorso-ventral of .93 mm., whereas the corresponding propor-
tions in a larva of 9 mm. length are 2 . 0 and 1 . 6 mm . In transverse section
the segments have the shape of a bi-convex lens, with the lateral edges expanded
into tumid ridges, marked off from the main body, on both surfaces, by a shal-
low groove. The eleventh segment is somewhat spatulate, with a median and
two lateral convexities on the dorsal surface (Text-figs. 1 and 15). Between
the segments, the body is slightly constricted, and, in contraction, the segments
.ire imbricated, overlapping from behind forward in front of the fourth segment.
and in the reverse direction from the fourth backward. The incisure between
the tenth and eleventh segments is strongly arched forwards (Text-fig. 1).

At the anterior extremity is sit\iated the dark brown, strongly chitiniscd
head, which can be retracted into the first thoracic segment.

Integument. — The whole body is invested in a thick, firm integument of the
typical stratiomyid type, consisting of large hexagonal plates, separated by
granular areas, w'lich cause a grating sound when scratched with the point of a
needle (Text-fig. 9) This armoured coat is strongly impregnated with car-
bonate of lime. Fixation in Carl's fluid, containing glacial acetic acid, gives
rise to a rapid and long continued evolution of gas, proved, with baryta water,
to be CO2. Along the posterior nuirgin of each segment (Text-fig. 10) are
two or three transverse rows of specially differentiated amber-coloured plates

BY VERA IRWIX SMITH.

515

(pi), which probal)ly mark the points of insertion, internally, of the segmental
muscles, as described by Viallanes (1882, p. 7) . Similar plates are numerous
on the eleventh segment, and in the reaion of the anus. The latter is in the

^mw^ 9

Text-fig.9. Spii-acle of abdominal segment, and portion of the integument surround-
ing it. (x210).

Text-fig. 10. View of lateral ridge of a segment, showing spiracle on dorsal side, and
arrangement of lateral bristles, (x 18).

Text-fig. 11. Portion of a bristle, broken off its base /'/^^. (x 210).

form of a longitudinal slit, with thick, stroni;:ly chitinised lips, situated medianly
on the ventral surface of the end segment. From it a deep groove runs back-
wards to connect with a terminal transverse split (Text-flgs. 2, 8) .

Bristles. — Long, stiff, black hairs, or, rather, bristles, are present orr all the
segments. They are very brittle, and are easily broken off at the base, so that
their regular arrangement on the body is best seen on a freshly-moulted speci-
men. In cross-section they are circular, and each consists of an outer brownish-
coloured sheath enclosing a dark solid core, which extends almost to the tip
(Text-fig. 11) . Most of them taper to a fine point. As in the larvae of the
genera Sargus, Chloromyia, Microchrysa, and in Pachygaster minutissima Zetr.,
and Xylomyia maculata Wied., each abdominal segment from the first to the
seventh bears a transverse row of six, equally long, backwardly directed bristles
on each surface. The dorsal bail's are slightly longer than the ventral, the
average lengths in larvae of 2 mm. width being about 0.7 and 0.6 mm. respect-
ively. On the dorsal surface they all slope inward, towards the mid-dorsal Ime;
those on the ventral surface form groups of three on each side, the three con-
verging posteriorly (Text-fig. 8). On each of the lateral ridges of the same
abdominal segments is a group of four bristles, in two rows, set diagonally
across the ridge, and sloping upwards and backwards from the dorsal side (Te.xt-
fig. 10). The two of the anterior row are short and blunt; the other two,
which are arrangeil alternately with them, are more than twice as long, and
sharply pointed. They are usually longer than the other body bristles, and in-
crease in length posteriorly, the longest of them, on the seventh abdominal seg-
ment, measuring 0.8 or 0.9 mm. There is a pair of short pointed bristles
on the middle of the dorsal surface of the eighth segment, a longer pair on its
lateral ridges, and a transverse row of four on the ventral surface. The lower
of the two lateral bristles is inserted just at the end of the terminal split.

516

STUDIES IX LIFE-HISTORIES OF AUSTRALIAN" DIPTERA BRACIIYCEKA, 1.,

Close to the anus, ou each side, ami directed towards it, is a single short bristle.
Further back a jiair of bristles is situated on tiie ridge ou eacli side of the anal
groove, and another pair on the terminal apex ot the ridge, where it Ixiunds uie
transverse split (Text-fig. 8).

Among these large bristles there occur on the body a few very small colour-
less bristles, about 0.05 mm. long. Eight of them are in constant a.ssocuitioii
with the bristles bounding the transverse split, in which the aperture of tracheal
chamber u]iens. Two are inserted above and two below the aperture, one close
beside the bristle at the angle of tlie split, and one between each pair of apical
bristles (Text-fig. 7) . A similar hair occurs laterally on both surfaces of every
segment, just beyond and below the outermost bristles of the transvei'se rows.

Text-tig. 12. Anterior end of l:irv;i. Ventral view, (x 12).
Text-fig.i;i. ,. ,, Dorsal view, (x 12).

Text-fig. 14. Prothoracic spiracle. Surface view, (x 112).

Text-fig. 15. View looking down ou posterior end of larva, (x 22). /, terminid groove ;
s, spiracular aperture; i7, anus; D, dorsal surface; V, ventral surface.

The arrangement of the bristles on the thoracic segments is somew-hat dif-
ferent. On the dorsal surface of tiie fii'st segment there are two transverse rows,
with four small bristles in the first row, six in the second (Text-fig. 13). Meso-
and nieta-thoracic segments each bear the usual row of six on the dorsal surface.
But on the ventral surfaces of tlie tlu'ee segments there are only four. On the
prothoraeic segment these are arranged in two rows, on meso- and meta-thorax
in a single row, with the two outer bristles directed forwards instead of back-
wards (Text -fig. 12) . The lateral ridges bear each only a single pair of long
bristles, but a small colourless hair, siuiilnr to the other microscopic liairs on
the bodv, is also present.

Except in the relative length of llic bristles, the smallest larvae found (2
to 3 mm.) are exactly similai" to tlie fully-develo|ied larvae. The bristles are
proportionally much longer in the younger larvae, and give them a distinctly
hairy appearance. The two long bristles of the lateral ridges are specially well
developed, while the two smaller ones are very minute.

The Head. — The head is short, and broadly conical, having a basal width
of 0.48 mm., and a length of 0.,57 mm. in larvae of 8 mm. length. It is deep
yellowish-brown in colour, darkest in front, where it is most strongly cliitinised,
and divided into a uiedian and two lateral lolies (PI. xxvii.. figs. 1, 2) . The
median lobe terminates in a small, cylindrical process, with smooth surface, and

BY VERA IRWIX .SJIITII. 517

l)luntly roiindeil tij). Tlu' lateral lohfs are situated some ilistaiice tuvtlier back,
0.15 mm. behind the median process. They are short, broad, rounded "bosses,"
with rugose surface, composed of thick, dark chitin. Behind them, in the pos-
terior third of the head, there is, in the clear', membranous area on each side, a
prominent eye-swelling, bounded by a semi-circular membrane. The greater part
of the upper surface of the head is covered by a broad sclerite, presenting an
irregular series of transverse ridges, with two specially prominent ones on each
side (PI. xxvii., fig. 1). In front of each of these is a small bristle. Another
very small bristle is situated on each side of the median process. At the base of
the eye-swelling on both dorsal and ventral sides is a stout prominent hair,
about 0.32 mm. long. The ventral hair is accompanied by another very small
one. Two smaller bristles, of unequal lengih, are situated in front of them,
close to the ventral base of the lateral "boss." On either side of the mid- ven-
tral line, on a level with the lateral "bosses," is another small bristle, and a
similar pair is situated further back, towards the base of the head. There are,
thus, six pairs of Ijristles on the ventral surface, and four jDairs on the doi-sal
surface. All the bri.stles appear to he sensory in character, but none of them
correspond to the jointed antennae which are said to be present on the heads of
Stratiomyid larvae. If true antennae exist I have not been able to detect them.
In the figure whicli Brauer gives of a Sargus larval head, he marks the lateral
lobe "Fuhler," but in the Metoponia head this is clearly a portion of the chitinous
skeleton. However, there is, on the ventral base of each lateral lobe, a curious struc-
ture having much the appearance of a spiracle. It is in the form of a shallow,
cup-shaped projection, with a row of tooth-like processes projecting from its
inner margin, into its cavity (PI. xxvii., fig. 2) .

The mouth parts are small, and dilfleult to distinguish, on account of the
dark colour and density of this part of the chitinous skeleton. They consist of
the median process, which probably corresponds with the structure called by
Becker (1910) the upper lip, and two pairs of small, pointed scale-like processes
lying close against its under side (PI. xxvii., fig. 2). The two inner processes
arc bent over towards each other at the tip, and so are somewhat hook-shajsed ; the
outer are sharply ]5ointed. In structure and arrangement, these mouth parts
differ considerably from those described by Becker and others for Stratiomyid
larvae, and will be considered more fully in a later paper.

Stigmata. — The two prothoracic spiracles, situated close to the lateral mar-
gins of the segment, are large and prominent, dark brown in colour, and slightly
salient. They appear to be exactly similar to those of Patliygaster minutissima,
as described by Tragardh (1914). Two narrow oval slits open on a flat surface,
with a regular rounded outline, below which lies a larger area of chitin, of dis-
tinctive shape, shown in Text-fig. 14. A pair of very small spiracles is situ-
ated on the meta-thoracic and the first to the seventh abdominal segments, in the
lateral grooves, a little in front of the middle of the segment. They are of
simple structure, having a triangular aperture, bounded Ijy a dark brown circular
area (Text-fig. 9) . The two main tracheal trunks terminate internally, in the
last segment, in large spiracles, which open into a median pear-shaped air
chamber. This communicates with the exterior by a narrow aperture with
chitinous lips, situated at the bottom of the deep transverse split at the posterior
end (Text-fig. 15). If the supposition that a twelfth segment is really present,
is correct, this split would represent the dorsal incisure between the eleventh and

518 STUDIES IN LIFE-HISTORIES OE AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA BRACHYCERA, i.,

twelfth segint'iits, and the jjositidu of the posterior spiracles would eorrespoiid with
that in which they are usually fouud in dipterous larvae ha^^ing twelve segments.

Pupal metamorphosis.

In this paper I do not propose to do more than indicate in a general way
the external features of the development of the pupa.

Jusbaschjanz (1910) has studied, in great histological detail, the metamor-
phosis of various internal organs in the larva, but says very little about the
pupa, and, so far as 1 am aware, no description exists of the stages in the
gradual change of form during its growth from the larva.

As the pupa is hidden inside the old larval skin during the whole course of
its development, it is necessary to remove the skin in order to study it. At a
very early stage in its metamorphosis, the pupa comes to lie free inside the
skin, surrounded by a watery fluid, and retaining its connection with the skin
only by means of the stigmata on each segment Its removal, therefore, is an
easy matter, and is rendered still easier by the existence of lines of weakness in
the skin at the points where it is subsequently split open by the emerging fly.
Old, empty larval skins show the lines of cleavage very well. By a clean,
circular cut round the upper part of the second thoracic segment, the portion of
the case anterior to this is separated ofi in the form of a sort of "head-cap.''
In the mid-dorsal line, the circular cut dips to form a sUght angle, and from
this point a straight split extends down to the ujiper part of the first abdonunal
segment, wbei'e it meets a second transverse split extending nearly across the
full width of the dorsal wall. After the emergence of the fly, the edges of these
splits fit closely and evenly together, owing to the rigidity of the walls, so that
the skin has the appearance of an entire ease, with a circular aperture at one
end (Text-fig. 4) . '

These natural lines of cleavage are found to be present from the earliest
stages of pupation. The "head-cap" is easily removed by light pressure with the
point of a needle^ and a similar pressure opens up segments two to four, mid-
dorsally, in a longitudinal direction, then circularly round the fourth segment
(Text-fig. 16), so that this portion of the skin, forming a "thoracic band'" can
be stripped off in a single piece. By carefully cutting along the mid-dorsal line
of the abdominal larval skin, the pupa can be removed, still enclosed in a deli-
cate transparent Dupal membrane.

In the earliest stage of a female pupa removed in this way (PL xxvii., fig. 3)
pupal head and thorax have become differentiated, but the abdominal segments
still retain the larval shajie. and differ from those of the larva only in the char-
acter of tlie integument, and in the presence of stout, projecting spiracles with
brown chitinised tips. With this exception, the entire pupa is very soft, and
pure white. No trace remains of the hexagonal armoured plates of the larval
skin, or of the bristles, or other integumental structures. The enclosing mem-
brane fits closely over the body, and, except where it is raised into "blisters"
over developing appendages, it is not apparent.

The position of the mouth parts is indicated by blister-like swellings of this
character. Already well defined at this early stage, they form, at later stages,
much more conspicuous features of the pupal head, than do the moutli parts on
the adult.

The iliree tiioracic segments arc still distinct, and the appendages of each
are folded closely against its ventral surface, and do not extend beyond the seg-

BY VEltA IRWIX SMITH.

519

ment from which they originate. In the specimen shown in PI. xxvii., tigs. 3
and 4, the appendages had been stretched out for examination, and had not com-
pletely resumed their normal closely-packed condition when figured. The seg-
ments of the antennae and the limbs are indicated only by faint grooves in the
uniform, tinely-granular, white matter of which all the appendages are composed
at this stage.

The halteres are relatively much larger than in the imago, and appear
clearly as the rudiments of meta-thoracic wings (PI. xxvii., %. 4).

The first appearance of colour on the body is in the region of the eye rudi-
ments. These soft, white, rounded prominences assume a yellowish tinge about
the same time that the thoracic appendages, still white and indistinctly divided
into segments, unfold, and extend down over the ventral surface of the body.
As the eyes deepen in colour, the yellow tinge extends over that part of the
head which is orange-coloured in the adult female.

Text-fig. 16. Diagram showing way in which larval case of pupa is opened up. (x 11).
Text-figs. 17-20. Metamorphoses of posterior end of larva during, pupation, (x 12).

Fig. 17. Lateral view of early stage. Pig. 18. Ventral view of later stage.

Figs. 19-20. More advanced puirae, lateral views. 7th sp., spiracle of 7tli

abdominal segment.

At this stage the terminal abdominal segment loses its larval character, and
becomes slightly bilobed at the tip (Text-fig. 18), while a bilobed protuberance
gTOws out from its ventral surface. The latter probably originates from the
upper, or eighth abdominal segment, while the bilobed tip belongs to the ninth
(fused) segment.

The development of this terminal, or fused eighth and ninth segment, into
the external genitalia of the adult fly, is the most noticeable feature of later pupal
growtlr. It has been followed out in more detail in the female than in the male,
and is shown in Text-figs. 17 to 20. The male pupae secured did not show the
same range of developmental stages, but eight distinct abdominal segments are
present in all.

Other changes take the form of depositions of colouring matter, and of
chitin in various parts of the body, as the segments of the appendages become
more clearly defined ; and the outgrowth of hairs on these segments, and of a
fine pubescence on the abdomen (PI. xxvii., fig. 6). The wing sheaths lie flat
against the ventral surface of the body, and cover the first and second abdominal

520

STLUIES IN LIFK-HISTOKIE.S OF AILSTHALIAN DIPTERA ISRACHYCERA, 1.,

segments. Within tlieni the much crumpled and folded wings can be seen, very
dark in colour. The lirst pair of legs extentls down to the tip of the wing, the
second pair to the middle of the third segment, and the third pair almost to the
fifth segment. The limb sheaths lit loosely over them, and are slightly constrict-
ed at the level of each joint.

The form of the sheaths for the mouth parts is shown in PI. ssvii., fig. 7.
They consist of four thin- walled vesicles, two central, upper and lower, with
enlarged bilobed extremities, and a narrower one on each side, bluntly rounded
at its extremity, and with a small secondary lobe attached to its' upper surface.
Through their walls it is jtossible to see portions of the developing mouth parts,
at first pale yellow in colour, later darkening to a deep brown. There is a
certain amount of rigidity in the pupal skin, so that the vesicles retain their
shape unsupported by the underlying organs, these being much smaller than their
covering. When the latter is removed it is found that the lateral vesicles enclose
the maxillary palps, and the lower median vesicle the "proboscis," its bilobed
extremity forming the sheath for the labellae. The parts enclosed by the upper
vesicle are very small and inconspicuous, but a careful examination of them

Text-fig. 21. Mouth parts of pupa tlissected out from pupal slieath, surface view, (x 57).

Text-fig. 21(;. Labrum epipliaryux of same.

Text-tig. 22. Back view of the same.

Text-fig. 23. Portion of sheath of mouth parts, showing; enclosed labrum-epipharynx, and

palp.
fr.cl., f ronto-clypeus ; l.cp., labrum-epipliaryux ; ///>., hypopharyux ; in. p., maxillary
palp; pli , pharynx; lab, labella.

when dissected out (as shown in Text-figs, lil, 22) reveals the presence oT most
of the structures described by Peterson (1916), and shown in his figures of
Stratiomyia apicula. Within the proximal end of the vesicle is a small saddle-
shaped piece of ehitin, the fronto-cly))eus, which supjiorts. on its lower, invei-ted
V-shaped nuirgiu, a triangidar, beak-like process, projecting outward from tlu!
face, the labrum-epipharynx (Text-fig. 21h). In the i)upa, the line ol' juiu-tion
between the constituent parts is still visible, and the underlying epipharynx is
clearly distinguishable from tlie lal)rum. I>ying below this structure, and still
quite separate from it. is the lliin grcKivcd hypopharyux. In the inuigo (PI.

BY VERA IKWIN SlIITH.

521

xxvii., tig 8 J its basal portion is united with the labnim-epipliaryux, to form the
basi-proboscis, and tlie ireu distal end is scarcely distinguishable.

The tip of the labrum-epipharynx, in the pupa, does not reach beyond the
proximal half of the slieath enclosing it (Text-tig. 23), and the existence of the
enlarged, bilobed, distal portion is puzzling. No structure is contained within
it at any stage of development. The double nature of the sheath enclosing the
maxillary palp is also peculiar, but seems to suggest the presence, originally, of
well-developed maxillae, with their galeae and laeiniae.

Between the lateral sheaths, just below tiie upper median one, there are, in
the very early pupa! stage tigured in PI. xxvii., tigs. 3 and 4, two small, tliin,
needle-like, chitin pieces, whicii are not enclosed in sheaths. These structures,
which do not appear in later stages, would seem, from their position, to repre-
sent rudimentary mandibles, though no trace of mandibles exists in the imago.

Other swellings of the pupal skin, for which no apparent reason exists,
occur on the head. A small double vesicle is situated l)etween the base of the
antennae, and the sheaths for the mouth parts (PI. xxvii., fig. 7). .Just below
the eye on each side, in the position of the gena, is, a prominent, downwardly-
projecting, hollow vesicle.

Stigmata. — A pair of lateral spiracles is present on each abdominal seg-
ment from the tirst to the seventh. The iirst six pairs are very prominent from
the earliest stages of pupal development, and are of compli(;ated structure.
The greater ijortion of eacli one lies outside the body wall, in the region lietween
it and the pupal skin, which is here raised into a sharp peak, and strengthened
by a funnel-shaped piece of chitin. The wide mouth of the funnel faces in-
wards, and serves to protect the underlying stigmatie apparatus. This consists
of a pear-shaped bulb with thick muscular walls, penetrated by a fine lumen,
and terminating in a long slender tube, with strongly chitinised walls, wiiich
runs through the neck of the funnel, and extends out to the larval skin ( Text-
fig. 19) . The tip of the spiracle appears on tiie outer surface of the larval skin
as a dark brow-n projection in the region of the larval stigma. A slender tra-
cheal tube, g-iven off from the base of the bulb, and opening independently on
the pupal skin, is probably the original larval tracheal tulte, the pupal sjiiracle
being a secondary growth. These structures will be considered more fully in a
later paper, dealing with the tracheal system of larva and pupa. A trachea of
the ordinary type connects the base of the stigmatie bulb with a circular aperture
in the body wall. Shortly before the emergence of the imago, this tube becomes
detached from the body, and the whole stigmatie apparatus is left behind in the
pupal skin (PI. xxvii., fig. 9). The only trace of it which remains on the body,
is a wide, deep hole, with chitin rim, on the lateral margin of each segment
(Text-fig. 20).

The spiracles of the seventh )iupal segment differ from the rest. They pro-
ject very little beyond the body, and are of simple structure, lacking the gi'eat
development of chitin supports . The reason for this is seen when the larval skin
is dissected away from the dorsal wall of the pupa (PI. xxvii., fig. 5) . The first
six alidominal segments correspond exactly with the segments of the larva, and
are in close contact with the larval walls in tlie region of the spiracles. But
the terminal segments undergo a considerable change in size and shape during
metamorphosis, becoming telescoped to a certain extent, and reduced in width;
so that a wide space is left round the posterior end of the pupa, and the seventh
pair of spiracles is not opposite the corresponding pair in the larval skin, and
cannot reach the exterior to function in lireathing.

5'22 STUDIES IX LIFE-HISTORIES OF AUSTRALIAN DIPTERA BRACHYCERA, 1.,

All the figures, for both Plate and Text-figures, were drawn at stage level,
with the help of Zeiss camera lueida. and Zeiss and Reiehart oculars and ob-
jectives.

Type specimens of larva, and male and female pupae and bred specimens of
both spring and autumn broods have been deposited in the Australian Museum,
Sydney. [Specimens Nos. K 4330-1^08.]

Figures of bred specimens, both male and female, are shown on Plate xxviii.

List of the Species of STKATioiiniDAE which have beex Observed in the
Earlier Stages, with References to the Literature Relatixo to These.

[To avoid unnecessary repetition the authors ai'e quoted here only with date
and page of work. Thi' complete reference will l)e found in the lit-erature list at
the end, which is arranged in chronological order. The names of the species are
those given in the descriptions referred to. No attempt has been made to deal
%vith synonjTiiy.]
Beris chalybeata Forst.— Walker, 1851, pp. 11, 12; Schiner, 18U4, p. 24; Brauer,

1883, p. 58; Lundbeck, 1907, p. GU.
Beris .spp.— Williston, 1908, p. 165; VerraU, 1909, p. 199.
Chloromyia formosa Scopoli.— Lundbeck, 1907, pp. U5-U6, fig. 26; Yerrall, 1909,

p. 189.
Chorisops [Acti>ia) tibialis Meigeu. — HandHrsch, 1883, pp. 243-245, fig's. 1-4;

Brauer, 1883, p. 58; Lundbeck, 1907, p. 70; VerraU, 1909, p. 204.
Chrysomyia formosa Zett. — von Roser, 1834, p. 267; Cornelius (Sargus formosus

Schrank), 1860, pp. 202-204, t. ii.; Brauer, 1883, pp. 58 and 23.
Chrysomyia polita Linnaeus.^Reaumur, 1742, t. 14, fig. 6; von Roser, 1834, p.

267: Bouche, 1834, p. 49; Scholz, 1848, -pp. 1-3, 10; Beling, 1882, p.

188; Brauer, 1883, p. 58.
CUtellaria ephippiiim Fabricius.- — Meigen, 1818. iii., p. 130; von Roser, 1834. p.

267; Westwood, 1840, p. 533, fig. 127, 8; Zeller, 1842; Markel, 1844. pp.

266, 478-480; Scholz, 1848 (?); Jaennicke, 1866, p. 226; Brauer. 1883,

p. 58 {Ephippium thoracium) ; VerraU. 1909, p. S3.
Ephippium alUtarsis (?) Bigot.— Froggatt, 1896, p. 84, PI. ix., figs. 12, 13.
Geosarpmi (Sargus) spp. — Williston, 1908, p. 165.
Hermetia albitarsis Fab. — Brauer, 1883. p. 58.
Hermetia illucens L.— Bellardi. 1861, p. 26; Brauer, 1883. jk 58; Dunn. 1916,

pp. 59-61.
Hermetia spp. — Williston, 1908. ]>. 165.
Hoplodonta viridula Fabricius. — Lundbeck, 1907, pp. 57-58.
Microchrysu polita Linnaeus. — Lundbeck, 1907, p. 67; VerraU. 1000, p. 192.
Microchrjisa spp. — Lundljeck, 1907. ]i. 67.
Myioehrysa spp. — Williston, 1908, p. 165.
Nemotelus pantherinns L. — Lundbeck. 1907, p. 26, fig. 7.
Nemobelus uliginosun Linnaeus. — Halidav, 1857, p. 194; Brauer. 1883. pp. 58,

23.
Nemotelus spp.— Lundbeck. 1907. pp. 2.3-24; Williston. 1908. ].. 165.
Odontomi/ia. angulntn Panz. — Lundlieck, 1907, p. 56.
Oihiiitomiiia argevtata Fabricius. — ZeUer. 1842. col. 807; Zeller. 1846. iii.; Lund-

l)eck, 1907, p. 51.
Odontomi/ia hydroleon Linnaeus. — De Geer, 1778. vi., PI. 9. fig. 4; Brauer, 1883,

pp. 58, 23.

BY VEHA IRWIN SMITH. 523

Odontomyia ornata Meigcn. — Reaumur, 1742, PI. 25; Zeller, 1842; Jaennicke,

18(i(), p. 218; Brauer, 188.3, p. 58, %. 23c; Lundbeck, 1907, p. 54, figs.

20-21; Verrall, 1909, p. 143.
Odontomyia tigrina Fabr. — Lundbeck, 1907, p. 50; Jusbaschjanz, 1910, p. 685.
Odontomyia viridiila Fabricius. — Seholz, 1848, p. 34; Brauer, 1883, p. 58;

Jusbasehjsuz, 1910, p. 685.
Odontomyia spp.— Lundbeck, 1907. p. 48; Williston, 1908, p. 165; Verrall, 1909,

p. 130.
Oxycera meigenii Staeg'. — Heeger, 1856, p. 335; Brauer, 1883, p. 58.
Oxycera morrisii Curtis. — Haliday, 1857, p. 193; Verrall, 1909, p. 102.
Oxycera triliniata Linnaeus. — Heeger, 1856, p. 335: Brauer, 1883, p. 58; Lund-
beck, 1907, pj). 31-32, 34, flg. 14.
Oxycera spp.— Bremi. 1846, col. 164; Halidav. 1857. p. 193, PI. 11; Brauer, 1883.

p. 23.
Paclvygaster ater Panz. — Meigen, 1818, vi.. p. 344; vii., p. 104; Macquart, 1823;

St. Fargeau, 1825, p. 779; Schilling, 1829, p. 94; Seholz, 1848, p. 1-3,

19; Dufour, 1841, p. 264; Heeger, 1853, fig.; Brauer, 1883, p. 58; Verrall,

1909, p. 71.
Pachygaster leachii Curtis.— Perris. 1870, p. 212; 1876, p. 180; Verrall, 1909,

p. 78.
Pachygaster meromelas Dufour. — Dufour, 1841, pp. 264-266, figs. 17-19.
Pachygaster minutlssimus Zett.— Zetterstedt, 1851, viii., p, 2961; Brauer, 1883, i>.

58; Lundbeck, 1907 (P. minutissima). p. 21; Tragardh, 1914, pp. 192-

196, figs. 3-5; Verrall, 1909, p. 68.
Pachygaster orbitalis Wahl. — Verrall, 1909, p. 75, flg. 99.

Pachygaster pini, Ferris . —Perris, 1870, p. 210, ten figs. ; Brauer, 1883, p. 58.
Pachygaster tarsalis Zett. — Lundbeck, 1907, pp. 20, 22, flo- 4- Verrall 1909 p

72, fig. 100.
Pachygaster spp.— Westwood, 1840, p. 532, figs. 127, 129; Zetterstedt, 1851, viii.,

p. 2961; Brauer, 1883, pp. 58, 23; Williston, 1908, p. 165; Verrall, 1909,

p. 66.

Sargtis hipunctatus Scopoli.— Reaumui-, 1742, p. 59, PL 14, fig. 4. PI. 22, fio-s 5-8-
Brauer, 1883, p. 58, fig. 24. , ^ • ,

Sargus ciiprarius Linnaeus.— Lyonet. 1832. PI. 17. fig-s. 21-24, 29; Bouehe, 1834.
p. 48, PI. 4, figs. 31-36; von Roser. 1834. p. 267; Westwood, 1840. p. 533.
fig. 127, 10; Dufour, 1846 (Comptes rendus), p. 318-319; Beling, 1882.
p. 187; Brauer, 1883, p. 58; Lundbeck, 1907, p. 61; Verrall, 1909,"p. 184.'

SargiA^s flavipes Meigen. — Lundbeck. 1907, p. 64.

Sargus formostis Schrank. — Cornelius. 1860. pp. 202-204. PI. 2.

Sargus iridatus Scop. — Lundbeck, 1907, p. 62, fig. 24.

Sargus spp.— Perris. 1870, p. 206; Lundbeck, 1907, p. 60; Verrall, 1909. p. 165.

Stratiomya anubis Wiedem. — Cros, 1911. pp. 99-103. figs.

Stratiomys chamaeleon Linnaeus.— Frisch. 1720. p. 10; Swammerdam, 1737. Pis
39. 40, 41; Reaumur, 1742, PI. 22; Sparmen, 1804; Schrank!, 1793. pp.'
7-25, PI. 3, figs. 1-9; Geoffroy. Entom.. ii., p. 17; Westwood, 1840. p.
532; Leydig. 1860. p. 157. fig.; Leydig, 1861, p. 39; Brauer. 1883. p
58, figs. 22. 24; Mik, 1896, pp. 110-111; Florentin, 1899, p. 274; Jus-
baschjanz. 1910. p. 685; Fanthom and Porter, 1913, pp. 609-620 PI xli •
VerraU. 1909. p. 152. ' ''

524 STUDIKS l.\ I.IKK-IIIS'WHIKS OK AUSTRALIAN DIPTKKA IIHACHYOERA, i.,

Straliomii'm fdtuni'iUi Meij;eii. — Fautlioni ami Porter, 1913, p. (J0!J-(i20, PI. .\li.

Stratiumyia >^pp-— Lunilbefk 1!)U7, pp. 14-15, 41, 74.

atratiomyii fiircato Fabr. — Zetti'rstfdt, 1851, i., p. 135; Brauer, 1883, p. 57, lig.

23a; Lundlieek, l'J07, p. 44, tig. 17.
Stratiomys longicornis Scop. — Scholz, 1848, p. 34; Friedenfels, 1880, p. 1G4;

Brauer, 1883, p. 57, tig. 'I'ih; Heuneguy and Bmet, 18!>2, Isi., pp. 309-
316, PI. G; Lundbeck. 1907, p. 43; Cros, 1911. p. 101.
Stratiomys strigata Meigen [nee Fabrioius) = S. riparia. — Kawall, 18(37, p. 124.
Stratiomys striyuvu. — Henneguy and Buiet, 1892, cxiv., pp. 430-432.
sinitiomys spp. (Habitat) .^Packard, 1871, p. 102; also in Amer. Nat., ii.;

Lucas, 1879, p. 142; Laker, 1880, pp. 107-108; Bronguiart, 1881, p. 419;

Grifflth and Packard. 1882, pp. 599-000; Pearson, 1884, p. 1287; .John-
son, 1895, p. 229; Williston, 1908, p. 105.
Stratiomys >^))p. (,Miir])liol.). — Kunckel d'Herculais, 1879, pp. 491-494; Viallane.s,

1885. pp. 75-78; Vaney. 191)0. p. 300.
Stratiomys spp. — Shinji. 1901, p. 479.
Subula citripes Dufour. — Dufour, 1840. (Sue. Kiit. Fr.). ]>. 47; Dulmir. 1847. ])p.

7-8, vi.. PI. xvii.. fig. 12.
SiiliiiUi iiKiculdta Said. — Wesiuael, 1837, Ann. Soc. Knt . Fr., vi., p. 89; West-
wood, 1840. p. 534; DutV.ur. 1847; Zettersteilt. 1851. i.. )). 130; Brauer.

188.3, p. 59; Austen. 1899 (Xylomyiu muctduia), pp. 181-190; Lundbeck.

1907, p. 82; Gorhani, 1899, (Ent. :\I(). Mag.), p. 71; Verrall, 1909, p.

223.
Siibula (Xylophayus) muryituila Meigen. — Wesmael. 1837 (Bruxelles). pp. 320-

322; 1837 (Ann. Soc. Ent. Fr.). p. 90; Frcniep. Xotizen. 1838. vi., col.

39-40; Scholz. 1848, pp. 1-3, 8-19, 49; Dufour, 1847, p. 13, PI. xvii., lig.

13; Verrall, 1909 [Xylomyia maryinata). p. 227.
Snhida piiUi]>p-< Locw. — Townsend, 1893. p. I(i3.
Subula (Xylophagns) riirict Meigen. — von Roser, 1828. ]). 188; Westwood, 1840.

p. -534, tig. 127, 14; Heeger. 1858, p. 307; Brauer, 1883, p. 59.
Xylomyia {Subula Meig.) spp. — Lundbeck. 1907. pp. 79-80.
Zabracliia polita Co(|uill. — .loinison, 1900, PI. 1. fig. 8.
Zabraclria spp.— AVilliston. 1908. p. 105.

T/ITKUATIRK DkAI.INc; WITH THE BlOI.OCV OF THK StDATIO.MVIIDAE.

Arranger] in chronolngicnl artier.

1720. h'Riscii, J. L. — Beschreibnng vnn nlKily luseclcii in Teutchland, nebst
nutzliclien Annierkungen .... vim iliesen .... inlandisclien
Gewurnie. Berlin, i., .5. )). ]0.
{Stya/ioinys c/iatnaelcoii , larva).

17.37. SwAJi.MKFJMA.M. -T . — Biblia naturae. 1737-1738. London. 1758. I'ls.

[Strafioniys (/niiiidt/foi/, larva. Structure and biography described accur-
ately and in detail with figures under the name .Isi/tis).

1742. Reai'mii;, K' . A. F. — Memoires pour servir ii I'histoire iles insectes. 4
vols. I'aris. iv., pis.
(Slralioiiiyiidae, larvae).

1778. De Gker. — Memoires pour servir ;\ I'liistnire des Insectes. 7 vols. Stock-
holm, vi., I'l. 9, tig. 4.
(Odonloiin ill hydioleoii, larva).

Di- VERA IRWIN- SMITH. 525

1793. SCHRANK. — Beitrau' zur Naturyi'scliiclite der Stratiomi/x cliumaelenn.

Katurforscher StiicI,-, xxv'n., pp. 7-"25. tab. iii., fig. 1-9.
1801. Sp.\Rjr.\x. — Splirift fl. selnvedisfheii Akad.

{Stiatiomys c/iamaeleou , larva).
1822. Meigex, J. W. — Systematisflie IScsi-lnvihiuii; der l>ekaniiti'ii I'jm'(i|)aisflieii

ZwciHu'Teliuvn Tnsektoii. Haiiiii. iii., p. 130; vi., p. 344: \ii., |i. 104.

(F.p)nppiuiii thoraciuui, J'ar/irs^ns/er sj>y>.)
1823-1827. MAcyr ART.— Dipt, dii Noid de Fraiiee. Lille, Travaiix, 1823-24, pp.

59-244; 1825, pp. 324-499; 1820-27, iip. 213-201. LlUe, Mem. Soc.

Sci., 1827-28, pp. 149-371; 1833, pp 137-368.

{Pac/iygaster sp. larva).
1825. St. Fargeau and Serville. — Les larvcs du ^'a]>|-)(>ll Lat. Fahr. [Pacln/-

f/«.s/pr Meig'., Maoq.] Eiiciichipedie nic'tliudique, x., p. 779.

(Larvae received from Carcel l)y Macquart and described by him. His des-
cription quoted).
1828; Vox RosKR. — Beitrage zur Naturg-. d. Gatt. XijlophtKjnx. Xctlnrwiss.

Ahhandl., Stuttgart u. Tubingen, ii.. Heft. 2, p. 1S8.

(Larva of Xylotnyia varia ( Xylopbagus varius) described) .
1829. ScHii.Lixo.— Entomol. Beitrg., i.. p. 94, Tab. 8, fig. 8.

(Larvae of Pacliygaster ater under the bark of Pinus silvestris).
1832. Lvoxet, Pierre. — Recherclies sur rAiiatomie et les Metaiu(n-phoses do

difterentes especes d'Tnsectes. Ouvrage posthum. publie par

M.W. de Haan, Paris, J. Balliere, 580 pp., 54 Plan;-iie.'^.

{Sargus cuprarius larva, t. .wii., figs. 21-24, 29).

{See also Pons, Mm. Hist. Nat., Mem., xviii., 1829, pp. 233-312,

377-457; xix., 1830, ])p. 57-131, 341-455; xx., 1832, pp. 1-41.)
1834. Bouche, p. F. — Naturgescliiclite der Insekten, besonders ilirer ersten

zustande als Larven und Puppen. Berlin.

(C/irysoinyia polita, larva, i., p.49. Sargus cuprarius).
1834. Vox RosER. — Wurttemb. ('(irrespondbl., i., p. 267.

(Larvae of Chrysomyia polita, and CIt. forinosa under stones; liphippiuin

thoraciuui larva; Sargus cuprarius h\,v\A).
1837a. We.smael, Coxstaxtix. — Sur les metamorphoses d'un Xylopliage. (Suh-

ula marrjiHata). Bull. Acad. Sci. Brii.celles, iv., pp. 320-322.

(Also in Froriep. Notizev. vi.. 1838. col. 39-40.)
1837^1. Wesmael, Cox-staxtix. — .1)/);. ,S(ic. Kiit. i'r.. \i.. P.nll. Entomol. p.

Ixxxix-xe.

{Subula ( Xv/o)iiyia) u/aigiiin/a Mj;., or Suhu!a tiiacu/a/a larva).

1840. Westwood. — Introduction to tlie Mndcrn Classification of Insects, ii., pp.

532-534

(Preparatory sta;^es of Subu/a iiiacu/afa found in dry rotten tree in the Xew
Forest and imago reared, lipliippium thoraciuni larva, p. 533, fig. 127, 8.
Pacliygaster spp., p. 532, fig. 127, 9. Sargus cuprarius, p. 533).

1841. DuPOUE, Leox'. — Note sur la laivc du Pacliygaster meroinelas, insecte de

I'ordre de.'; Dipteres. Aim. Sci. Xal., Zool., ser. 2.. xvi., pp. 2G4-266,
figs. 17-19.

1842. Zeller.— "Dipterologische Beitrage." Oken, 7s/.s, xi.. col. 807-847.

(Odoii/oiiiyia argeiitata, Larve in feuchten Erlengeholzen, Herbst, Winter
und Friihjahr unter faulem Laube, Taubnesseln u. a. Vegetabilien. Epliip-
piuui thoracium larva, Odontomyia ornala larva).

5'2ti STUDIES IX LIFF>I1IST()RIKS OF AUSTRALIAX DIPTERA I5RAC1I VCERA. 1.,

1844. Markel. Friedrick. — Beitrage zur Kenntniss der unter Anifisen lebeden
Insekten. Germar's Zeitisch. f. Ent., iii., 1841, pp. 203-225; Ibid.,
v., 1844, pp. 193-271. Ucbcr die Larve von CliteUnriii rphippium.
Ibid., v.. pp. 478-481).
{Rphippium ihoraciiiin with Formica fuligiuoid).

1846. Bremi. — Beitiag zur Kunde der Dipteren. Oken, Isx^, iii., n<\. 1(34-175.

(Oxycera spp. larvae).
1846a. DlTOUR, Leon. — Sur uiie c-olonie d'insectes vivant ilaiis Tulcere de

rOrmeau. Comptes rendus Acad. Paris, xxii., pp. 318-319.

(Larvae of Sarins cupraritts) ■
1846b. DuFOTR, L — Queltiue chose sur le Bruchyopa bicohir et le Subidaria cit-

ripes. Ann. Soc. Ent. Fr., ser 2, iv., p. xlvii.

(Subula ci/ripeslnrva).

1847. DuFOUR, L. — Histoire des Metamorphosts du Stibula citripes et de

quelques autres especes de ce genre de Dipteres. A)iii. Sci. Sat.,
Zool., ser. 3., vii., pp. 5-14, PI. xvii.

1848. SOHOLZ, H. — Ueber den Aufenthalt der Dipteren wahrcnd ihrer ersten

Stande. Ent. Zeit. r. Breslau, iv.. pp. 1-34.

{S!ralioinvs longiiornis, larve in Pfiitzen, p. 34; C/irj'SOi>iyia poli/ii la,rve
in Kuhdiinser, p. 1-.3, 10; Ephippiuiii thoraciiim, ? Odontomyia vitidula,
Pachygaster ater).

1851. Walker. — Dipt. Brit. i. [probably Inseeta Britanniea. Diptera, 3 vols.].
(Larva (?) of Beris chalybeata, pp. 11-12).

1851. Zetterstedt, J. W. — Diptera Seandinaviae. Lund., i., viii.
(Larvae of Slralouiyiidae).

1853. Heegee, Eexest. — Beitrage zur Naturgesebiehte der Tnsei-ten — Als Beit-
rage zur Fauna Oesterreiehs. Sitz. k. Akad. ll'iss. Wien, x.. pp.
7-30, 161-178.460-481.
(Figure of Pachygastcr aler).

1856. Heeger, E. — Neue Metaniorphosen einiger Dipteren. Sitz. k. Akad. Wiss.

ir/ifw, XX., pp. 335-350.

(Oxyceya meigciiii, 0.ry. triliniata).

1857. Haliday, a. H.— -Va«. hist, review, iv., pp. 177-196. On some remaining

blanks in the natural history of the native Diptera (Larvae). List
of the genera and speeies of British. Diptera, the earlier stages of
which are more or less perfectly known, with references to the prin-
cipal authorities, pp. 188-195. Additional note on the metamor-
phosis of some speeies of Diptera, hitherto undescribed, or known
but imperfectly. Proc, pp. 192-196.

1858. Heeger. E. — Beitrage zur Naturgesebiehte der Insecten. Sitz. k. Akad.

Wiss. ^]^ietl. xxsi., pp. 295-309. {Subnla i^aria, p. 307.)
1860. Leydig, Franz. — Uber Kalkablagerung in der Haut der Insecten. Larve
von Stratiomys cliamaclcoii. Arcli. f. Saturtj., xxvi.. jip. 157-160.

1860. Cornelius. — Zur Ernahrung und Entwickelung der Larven von Sargus

formosus Schrank. Ent. Zeit. Stett., xxi., pp. 202-204, t. ii.

1861. Letdig, Franz.— Berlin. Ent. Zeit., v., p. xxxix.

(.St)-atio>iiys spp. larvae).

BY VERA IRWiy SJIITH. 527

ISlil. Bellardi, Luigi. — Sagi;io <li Dittt'roloyia Messicana. Mem. Acead

Torino, six., pp. 201-278.

{Hcrinctia illucens larvae numerous in closets).
18(j4. ScHiNEK. — Fauna Austrica. (Diptera). Vienna, 2 vols.

(Larva of Berts c/talybeata,i., p. 24).
1866. Jaennicke. — Beitrage zur Kenntniss der europaisehen Stratiomyitlen,

Xylopbagiden, iind Coenomyiden. sowie Nachtrag zn den Tabaniden,

Bed. Eiit. Zeit., x., p. 218.

{Odontomyia ornata bred from a larva found in water near Frankfort.

Larva of Kpliipfiiuiu //mraciitin taken by von Heyden in a nest of Fonnica

fuligiiiosa, p. 22(5).
1807. Kawall. — Miscellanea entomologica. Stett. Ent. Zeit., xxviii., pp. 117-124.

(Transformations of Stralioiiiys strigata briefly described, p. 124. Larva

found among black ants in an old fallen Piniis sylt'estris).

1870. Ferris. — Histoire des Insectes du Pin maritime. Ann. Soc. Ent. Fr., ser.

4, X.

{Pachygaster pini larva, p. 210).

1871. Packard. — The larvae of an unknown Stratiomys found in salt water,

t'lear Lake, California. Amer. Jour. Sci. Arts, New Haven. (3),

vii., p. 102. (See also Amer. Nat., ii.).
1876. Ganin. — Materialen zur Kenntniss der post embryonalen Entwickelungs-

geschichte der Insekten. Protukolle der Sitzungen der Sektion fur

die Zoologie und vergleichende Anatomie der 5. Versammlung rus-

sisclier Naturforscher und Aerzte in Warschaic, Sept. 1876, Mitge-

teilt von Hoyer.

(S/ratiomys compared with Aiilhoiiiyia).
1879. Lucas. — Larvae of Strdtlomijs sp. living in hot water in Euboea, and very

tenacious of life. Bull. Soc. Ent. Fr., (5), ix., p. cxlii.

1879. KuNCKEL d'HERCULAis, .J. — Rechercbes morpbologiques et zoologiques

sur le systems nerveux des Insectes dipteres. Comptes Rendu.'t,

Ixxxix., pp. 491-494.

(Includes larvae of Slratio)iiyi!dae).

1880. Laker, A. G.—Entomol., xiii.. pp. 167-168.

(Larvae of Siraiioinys in winter. Habits) .

1880. FREiDExrELS, E. vox. — Ueber Artemia salina und andere Bewobner der

Sooknteicbe in Salzburg. Mitth. d. Siebenburg Vereiiis f. Nattirw.
in Hermannst., xxx., pp. 112-178, PI.
(Larvae of S/ra/ioiiiys /ongh'ortiis, p. 1(54).

1881. Brongxiart. — Note sur les Tuts quaternaires de Bernouville, pres Gisors.

BhU. Soc. Geol. France, (.3), viii., p. 419.
(Larva of Siraiioniys found).

1882. ViALLAXES, H. — Note sur les terminaisons uerveuses sensitives des in-

sectes. Bull. Soc. Philom., (7), vi., pp. 94-98.
(Nerves in skin of larva of Stratioiiiyia described) .
1882. ViALLAXES, H. — Recbercbes sur I'Histologie des Insectes, et sur les pbeno-
menes bistologiijues qui aceompagnent le developpement post-
embryonnaire de ces animaux. Ann. Sci. Xat.. (Zool. ), xiv.. 1, pp.
1-348, PI. iv.

(Includes an account of integument, nerve terminations, etc., of S/nxiioiiivs

larvae) .

(See also Bibl. Ecule, xxvi., 3, p. 348, PI. xviii.).

'>-S STfDlKS ].V LIFF.-HISTORIES OF AT-STRALIAN DIPTERA IIRACU VCKItA. i..

1882. Griffith and Packard. — Larvae of Stratiomi/ia sj). fdund in aliot spring

in Colorado. Amer. Nat., xvi., pp. 599-000.
1882. Bkaukr, V. — Die Zweifliiaer des Kaiserlielien Aluseums zu Wien. ii.

Denkschr. k. Akad. ir/>.v. iri?«, xliv.. pp. 59-110. Taf. i., ii.

(Discusses classification for Xylopkagus and Siihlila, based on study of the

larvae, pp. 61-62).
1882. Ostex-Sacken. — On F'rot'essor Urauer's pai)er: Versiicii .einer Cliaracteris-

tik der Gattungen der Notucantlien 1882. Berlin. Ent. Zeit.. xxvi.,

ji . 3G5 .

(Prom arguments diawn from the imaj^ines, larvae, mode of pupation, and

nervous system of the larvae, determines the correct classification of Suhu/a,

etc.).

1882. Belixg. — Beitra;;- znr Metamorphose zweiHugeliger Insecteu aus den

Familien Tabanidae, Leptidae, Asilidae. Empidae. Dolieliopididae,
und Syrpliidae. Arch. f. Naturf/., 48. 2. i)p. 187-240.
(Includes larva of Sargus cuprarius and Chrysoiiiyia polita, p.118).

1883. Brauer, F. — Die Zweifluger des Kaiserlielien Museums zu Wien. iii.

Systematise-he Studieu auf Grundlage der Dipterenlarven, nehst
einer Zusammenstellung \on Beispielen aus der Literatur uber dies-
elben nnd Beschreilmng nener Forinen. Denkschr. k. Akcuh Wiss.
Wien., xlvii., pp. 1-100. Pis. i.-iv.

(A ilctailed statement of the characters of the larvae of the various sections
in Slraiioniyiidae, even to genera, pp.22-2.S).

1883. PEAR.SOX. — Amer. Nat., xvii., p. 1287.

{Strat iomy.'i larva occurring in sea water) .

1883. Haxdlirsch. — Vcrli. .:.-b. Ge^. Wien, .xxxiii., pp. 243-245. Hgs. 1-4.

{^C/iorisops (.-Ictiiui) lihin/is Meig. larva described and figured, with remarks
on the larvae of allied genera) .

1885. VlALLAXES, H. — Sur la structure interne du ganglion optique dc quelques
larves de Dipteres (Musca, Eristalin, Stratiomijs). Bull. Soc. Philnm.,
(7), ix., pp. 75-78. See also Ann. Sci. Nat., (6), xix., Art. 4. pp.
1-34, Pis. i. and ii. Etudes histologiques et organologiques sur les
centres nerveux et les organes des sens des animaux articules.
Troisieme memoire: Le ganglion opti(|ue de ffuehiues larves de Dip-
teres (i1/i(.scf(, Eristali'^, Stratinmiis) .

1892. Henneguy, F. and Bixet, A. — Contribution a I'etude mieroscopique du
systeme nerveux larvaire de S'trntiomi/x lonriirornis. Ann. Soc. Ent.
Er.. Ixi.. ]ip. 309-310. PI. vi.

1892. Hexnec.uv, F. and Bixet, A. — Structure du systenu; nerveux larvaire

de la Stratinmys strigoaa. (.'nmptes Ttendun, exiv., ])p. 430-432.
(Sunnnary in .Toiirn. h'o/i. Micr. Soc. 1892. |i. 350.1

1893. TowxsExn.— is:«(. News, Philad.. p. 103.

{Suhiila pa/lipes larva described) .
1895. Jonx.sox. — A review of the Stratiom/iia and Oilonloniiiia of North America.

Trans. Amer. Ent. Soc, xxii.. pp. 227-278. Pis. iii. ind i\

(Jiarvae of Slralio»!yia in thermal springs) .
1890. Froggatt. — The entomology of the gra.ss tree {Xnnthorrhoea) . Prnc.

Linn. Soc. N.S.W.. 1890. pp. 74-87. Fl. ix.

(Larva and metamorphosis of Eplnppinm albitarsis, p.8t, figs. 12 and i:{).

P.V VB:itA IRWIN' SMITH. 529

1806. ■Miic. — DilitoroIoErisclie IMiseellon (2 series), vii. Ueber die Friiclibarkpit

von Stratiomi/ia chamwleon Deg. pp. 110-111. Wien Ent. Zeit.,

XV., pp. 100-114.
ISi'O. Florextix. — Etudes siir la Faune des Mares salees de Lorraine. Ann.

Sci. Nat., (Zool.), X.. pp. 209-340. Insects, pp. 274-270.

(Larval habits of Slra/iomys chameleon , p. 274).

1899. ArSTEK, E. E. — On the preliminaiy sta^:es and mode of escape of the

imago of the Dijiterous genus Xiihimjiiri Rond. {Suhiihi ]Mg. et.
(met.) with sjiecial refei'ence to X>ilom>ila maculata F., and on the
systematic |iositi(iii of the genus. Ami. Mag. Nat. flist. (vii.). iii.,
pp. 181-190.

(Xyloiiiyia represents a primitive, ancestral form of Stralioiiiyiidae ifiven off
from the common stem after the evolution of the characteristic type of larva
and mode of pupation, but before the assumption on the part of the imatto
of the equally characteristic features (venation, spurless tibiae) exhibited by
tlie more specialised types of the family).

1900. Y.iXEV, V. — Note sur les tul)es de Malpighi des larves de Stratiomys.

Bull ,Soc. Ent. France, p. 360.

1901. SH.iRP.— Camb. Nat. Hist., vi., p. 479.

(Larva of Stratioiiiyiidae).

1902. ^'axey, C. — Contributions a I'etude des larves et des metamorphoses des

Dipteres. Ann. I'liir. L/ion., N.S. 1, Fasc. 9, 178 pp., 4 Plates.
1904. Plotxikow. — Ueber die Ilautung und uber eiuige Elementc dcr Haut bei

den Insekten. Zeitschr. f. Wi^s. Zool., Ix.xvi.
1906. JOHXSOX. — Notes on some dipterous larvae. Psi/clie. Boston, Mass., xui.

(Larva of Zabrac/iia polila, pi. 1, fig. 8).
1007. LrxDBECK. TV. — Diptera Daniea, Pt. 1, pp. 13-75.

(Stratioiiiyiidae. General account of e^ga, larvae and pupae, pp. 14-15.

Synoptic table of Danish larvae, p. 74).
1908. WiLLisTOX, S. \\ . — Manual of North American Diptera. New Haven,

3rd edit., p. 165.

Eggs, larvae and pupae of Stratioiiiyiidae. Habitat.

1009. T'err.^ll, G. H. — British flies, \o\. v. Strutiomyidae and succeeding

families of the Diptera hrachycera of Great Britain. London.
(1-780). "Metamorphoses" by D. Sharp, pp. 31-30.

1910. Becker. — Zur Kenntniss der Mundteile und des Kopfes der Dipteren

Larven. Zool. Jahrb. Anat., xxix., pp. 281-314, PI. 18, figs. 19, 20.

1010. JusBA.sCHJAXZ. S. — Zur Kenntniss der naeh embryonalen Entwiekelung

der Stratiomyiden . Jenaische Zeitscli., xlvi., pp. 681-736. 3 Taf.

1911. Cros. — Notes sur les larves de Stratiomys aiiuhis Wiedemann. Feuille

jeunes natural., Paris, xli., pp. 99-103.

1913. Faxthoji and Porter. — Kerpetomonas stratiomyiae, n.si>., a flagellate

parasite of the flies Stratiomyia chameleon and S. potainida, with
remarks on the biology of the hosts. Ann. Trop. Med'. Liverpool,
vii.. pp. 609-020. Pl. xli.

1914. Tragardh, I. — Skog-sentomologiska bidrag 1-5. Entom. Tidskrift, Upp-

sala, XXXV., pp. 188-200. Pacliyya-^ter miniitissima Zett., en under
bark levende stratiomvid. pp. 102-106. figs. 3-5. English summajj
p. 208.

/

^,;;^A»5. v;

530 STUDIES IN LIFE-HISTORIES OF AUSTR.VLIAX DIPTERA BRACHYCERA, !.

1916. Peterson, Alvah. — The head-capsule ami mouth parts of Diptera.

Illinois Biol. Monog., iii.. 2. pp. 1-112.
1916. Dunn, L. H. — Ilermetia illucens breeding in a human cadaver. Eitt.

News, Fhilad., ssvii., pp. 59-61.

Explanation of Plates xxvii.-xxvin,

Plate xxvii.

Metamorphosis of IMetoponia rubriceps Macq.

Fig. 1. Head of larva, dorsal view. X 45.

Fig. 2. The same, ventral view. X 45.

Fig. 3.' Pupa; early stage. Ventral view. X 14.

Fig. 4- The same, lateral view. X 14.

Fig. 5. Dorsal wall of larval case cut away to show the enclosed pupa. X 7.

Pig. 6. Pupa; Fairly advanced stage. X 14.

Fig. 7. Head of pupa, enveloped in pupal sheath. X 28.

Fag. 8. Mouth parts of imago. X 28.

Fig. 9. Posterior end of pupal sheath, removed from lar\-al case. ^ 9.

Plate xxviii.

Metopoaia rubriceps llacquart.

Fig. 1. Bred specimen of male. Emerged .April. Natural size, 5.3 mm. long
from head to tip of tail.

Fig. 2. Bred specimen of female, drawn two days after emergence, in Xovember.
Abdomen extended to much greater length than is found in most cap-
tured specimens. Natural size, 14 mm. long from head to tip of tail.

Fig. 3. Abdomen of a captured female, dorsal view, showing the more usual
appearance.

531

ORDINARY MONTHLY MEETING.
24th November, 1920.
Mr. .]. J. Fletther, M.A., B.Se.. President, in the Chair.

Dr. JiRi YlCTOR Daxes, Consul General of the Caefko.sIo\ ak Republic, 40
Bayswater Road, Darlinghurst, Miss Marguerite Henry, B.Sc, "Derwent,"
Oxford St., Epping, and Miss Margaret Helena O'Dwyer, B.Sc, "Elstorie,"
Copelaud St., Beeeroft, were elected Ordinary Members of the Society.

Candidates for Linnean Macleay Fellowships, 11)21-22, were reminded that
applications must be lodged with the Secretary not later than Tuesday, 30th inst.

The Donations and Exchanges received since the previous Monthly Meeting
(27thOctober. 1920) amounting tot) Vols., 188 Parts or Nos., 42 Bulletins and 5
Reports, received from 40 Societies and Institutions and 3 private donors, were
laid upon tlie table.

NOTES AND EXHIBITS.

Mr. Fred Turner exhibited and offered observations on a specimen of Lolium
iemulentum Linn., wliieh he bad received for determination from Mr. R. Baird,
Multagoona, Darling River, vho had never hitherto seen it growing in the dis-
trict. The seeds of this exotic gi'ass are considered injurious, and if eaten are
said to produce drowsiness, lieadaehe, and vertigo. According to Sir J. D.
Hooker and the Revd. Canon Tristram, "this species is identical with the 'Tares'
of Scripture, and is one of the worst weeds in the wheat crops of Palestine, and
the only grass with a poisonous seed."

Mr. W. W. Froggatt exhibited specimens of the Bag Shelter or Boree
!Moth. Teara contraria, showing the masses of eggs covered with the down off the
tips of their bodies. One of the egg masses contained a number of eggs of a
parasitic moth, the larvae of which feed upon the eggs of the Boree Moth and
pupate under the cover of the egg down. The larvae of this Bag Shelter Moth
ever\- year strip the foliage from thousands of Boree trees, Acacia pendula, one
of the most valuable fodder trees in Australia.

Mr. G. A. AYaterhouse exhibited Tlsi/ilioiie rawiisleiii c? and T. ahenna 5
which he had paired, together with 3 c? and 2 $ obtained from this cross and
also two small families obtained by pairing these first generation specimens. One
family consisted of 3 c?. 1 $ , and the other of 1 c?, 2 ?. Also four specimens of
the iirst generation obtained by crossing T. abeo)ia c? with T. ravrunleyi ?. Also
Heteront/mpha mirifica and H. paradelplia reared from larvae, together with dead
pupae of both species.

Mr. H. J. Carter exhibited (i) specimens of eacli of the six Australian
genera of Chalcophorinae (Bupresticlne). These six genera were at an earlier
period all classed as Chalcoplinra though they are clearly differentiated in modem
work; (ii.) specimens of three closely allied CiipTiogastra. concerning two of
which there is some confusion in Kerreman's "Monographic": (iii.) Ci/rioides
ser-spilota Carter recently collected by 'Sir. H. W. Brown on the .Tohnstonc
River, Q. ; (iv.) an example of a new genus taken by Dr. E. W. Ferguson at
Fort Macquaric and (v.) a new species of Stigmodem from the Blue Mts.

Dr. A. B. Walkoni exhibited a number of seeds a.ssociated with Glos/topteris
in rocks of Permo-Carboniferous age from Three-mile Creek, on the Bowen
Coalfield. Queensland.

Mr. .J. J. Fletcher exhibited specimens of Persnoiiin hicida R.Br., from
the Lane Cove district, being portions of the only two plants, both solitary, he
had ever seen growing. The opinion was expressed (hat this species needs fur-
ther investigation.

532

A REVISION OF THE CHIROMYZINI (DIPTERA).

l!v G. H. Hahuy

(Plates xxix.-xxx.)

INIiss Inviu Smith's paper on the hirva uf Mtin/joiiia rKhrirepf Macfiiiart, has
made it necessary to study the genus and its allies in a more comprehensive
manner than has been done hitherto, so that the position of the species may be
adequately determined and the genus may be disting-uished from the allied genera
of the World .

The literature on the group of StrntioniijiiiUie, here placed in the tribe Chiro-
myzini, shows considerable disagreement of ideas concerning the relative value
of characters hitherto used for grouping the species into genera, so the system
independently adopted here was based on the study of Australian forms only.

Attention is drawn to the fact tliat various genera hitherto proposed were
founded uj^on venation characters, in accordance with the usual custom of
grouping the StratiomyiirJae, but such a treatment is not only impossible with the
species under discussion, as shown in this study, but also will have to be aban-
doned as a main factor in grrouping other species of Stratiovu/iidae before a
natural classification of the family can be attained .

It is scarcely to be expected that any alteration will l)e made upon the prin-
ciples underlying the present scheme of treating the genera under the tribe Chiro-
myzini, but it is possible that the genus Chiromyza is divisible into two groups,
formed according to whether the eyes of the male are contiguous or separated, but
this development, for obvious reasons, cannot be undertaken in this paper.

A list of species jilaced in this tribe is as follows: —
METOlfixiA ^[aci|uart. (Synonyms. — Ituipiis Walker: and Criptoheri^ White.)
ruhrici'p.'i ^facouart. [Syn. — fitirii-apiit Walker, drupectius Walker. Iierben-
ceoN White], ( X(-w Soulli Wales. X'ictoria and ? Tasmania ). /yfHi/)if(, n.sp. (Xew
South Wales).
Chirojiyza WiedeiiKinn. ( Synonyins. — XemiDiorphti Ma<-(|u:nt : .' Nonaeris Wal-
ker: JTi/liiriis Philippi: Ldiiariix I'liihiipi; /.((iiiiriinis Endevlcin: and
M.^ld/iiiiiid White, tier ^laciiuart.)
rittata Wiedemann (P.razil), ocliraceri Wiedemann (South America), /(fs-
cana Witdemann (Central and South America), leptiformia Mactiuart
{ViTazi\). aiislnilis Macquart (Australia), pn.wrt Walker (Tasmania). ? tran-
seq)(fi Walker (South Amciica). r/p/H« Bigot (? Australia). iraM.>.p/ Philippi
(riiile). jHiMs/cH) Philii>pi (Chile). ;)rtro(7(,'.rf( Enderlein (Chile).

BY C. ir. JIAFJIIY. 533

Uncertain generic positiox.

grandicornis Hordy [XeiK/iiiorplia), (Tusnuuiia).

BOREOIDES, u.gen.

subidatiiri n.sp. (New South Wales, Victoria, aiitl ? Tasmania).

Allognosta Osten-Sacken. (Synonyms. — Metoponia Loew, ner .Mai-(|uail anrl
Anucautlioberis Brunetti.)
fuscitarsia Say [Syn. — dorsalis Say, brevis Walker, IiUu Walker, pallipea
Wiedeiiiann] ( Unilei! States of America), obscuriventris Loew (Canada),
si milts Loew (United States of America), vagans Loew [Syn. — iiiermis Bru-
netti] (Europe and Asia), crassitarsis de Meyere (Java), crassa de Meyere
(Java), barbieUinii Bezzi (Brazil), assamerisis Brunetti (Assam).
Of the above twenty-three species the flrst fifteen belong to the Chiromyzini,

and the eight species under the genus Allognosta probably belong to the same

tribe.

T desire to record my thanlcs to Mr. J. A. Kershaw, of the National Museum,

Melbourne, for the loan of specimens of Chiromyzini under bis charge, which

included the manuscript species, Boreomyia subulata Walker also to Miss Irwin

Smith and Dr E. W. Fero-uson who have afforded me every np])(irtunity to

examine specimens in their collections.

Tribe CHIROMYZINI.

Definition. — The antennae are situated low down on the head, ai-e short, and
are composed of three short joints, the third of which consists of several segments
which ai'e fused or almost fused, so that they are found not to foi'm independent
segments when dissected; the face recedes. The scutellum is without spines and
its contour is smooth. The abdomen contains seven segments* ; the male has the
genitalia exposed, and the female has a protensive ovipositor containing a pair of
cerci. The wings, when at rest, lie horizontally and partly overlap above the
abdomen; they have a venation which is variable in each species; at most the
wings <-ontain a full complement of veins occurring in the family Stratiomyiidae,
or certain veins consisting of the upper branch of the cubital fork, the third
posterior vein, and the cross-vein between the second and fourth posterior veins
may be partly or completely obsolete. The tifth ]3osterior vein issues from the
second basal cell and joins the anal vein considerably before it reaches the wing
margin. The female is apterous in one genus.

Notes. — The tribe Chiromyzini is adopted here as the characters of the genera
placed under it are not of sufficient importance to wan-ant their isolation from
the subfamily Beridinae. Osten-Sacken made a family of the genus Chiromi/za,
and Kertesz, in his catalogue, treats it as a typical form of a subfamily under
the family Coenomiiiidae bnt does not associate the genus Allognosta with it. The
genus Allognosta is not known to me but judging' from the chai-acters ]>ublislied
it appears that the species placed under it belong to the tribe defined above.

Key to the genera of the tribe Chiromgsini.

I. The eyes separated in both sexes; the two basal joints of the antennae equal in

length, the third joint of the male four times the length of the second and

of the female only twice the length: the male with wings, the female

apterous Boreoides, n.gen.

•All the works dealing with Beridinae seen by the writer state that the abdomen has
seven visible segments; actually, however, there are eight visible in the female,
not including the apical one, usnally referred to as the ovipositor and which
contains the cerci.

534 A RKVISION OF THE CHIROMTZIXI (DIPTERA),

Both sexes with wings, other characters variable 2.

2. The male with contiguous or separated eyes: the antennae with the basal joints
about equal in length, the third joint about twice the length of the second.

Clii>-0)ity~a Wiedfiuann .
The male with contiguous eyes; the antennae with the basal joints variable in
proportion, the third joint four times the length of the second.

Metoponia Macquart.

Genus M E T O P 0 X I A Macquart .

Metoponia, Macquart, Dipt. Exot., suppl. 2, 1847, p. 28; Walker, List Dipt.

Brit. Mus., v., suppl. 1, 1854, p. 112; Osten-Sacken, Berl. Ent. Zeit..

xxvii., 1883, p. 297; White, Proe. Roy. Soc. Tas., 1914, p. 46; and

191G, p. 2G0; Hardy, Proe. Roy. Soc. Tas., 1920, p. 34.
Inopus, Walker, Ins . Saund . Dipt., 1850, p . 2 ; List Dipt . Brit . Mus., v., suppl .

1, 1854, p. 112; Osten-Sacken. Berl. Ent. Zeit., xxvii., 1883, p. 296.
Cryptoberis, White, Proe. Linn. Soc. N. S. Wales, xli., 1916, p. 73.

Definition. — The eyes are contiguous in the male and widely separated in the
female. The auteunae do not exceed the length uf the head: the tirst joint may be
s the length of the third or considerably less, the second joint is short; the third
joint is rather long, at least four times the length of the second. The abdomen
is depressed in both sexes, and normal in shape. The venation is variable; the
radial vein may issue from the first basal cell, or it may branch off the cubital
vein at a little distance from the basal cell; the upper branch of the cubital vein
is usually present, but may be absent in isolated specimens; the diseal e«ll has
three posterior veins issuing from it, all of which reach the wing border. The
first and second posterior veins may issue separately from the diseal cell or from
a point, or they may be stalked; these characters are variable within a species.
The third posterior vein is never present; the fourth is normal; the fifth issues
from the second basal cell and joins the anal cell considerably before it reaches the
wing margin.

Metoponia rubriceps Macq\uirt. (Plate xxix.. figs. 5. B. )

Metoponia rubriceps, Macquart, Dipt. Exot., suppl. 2, 1847, p. 28. I'l. i., fig.

4; and .suppl. 3, 1848, p. 15; Walker, List Dipt. Brit. Mus., v., supj)!.

1, 1854, p. 113; Osten-Sacken, Berl. Ent. Zeit., xxvii., 1883, p. 297;

White, Proe. Roy. Soc. Tas., 1914, p. 46; and Proe. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales,

xli., 1916, 1). 75; Hardy. Proe. Roy. Soc. Tas.. 1920, p. 34. text-fig. 1:

Smith. Proe. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, xlv., 1920, p. 505, PI. xxvii.-xxviii.
Chiromijza flavicaput, Walker, Ins. Saund. Dipt., 1852, p. 163.
Cryptoberis herbescens, White, Proe. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, xli., 1916, p. 97.

text-fig . 1 .
f Inopus despectns, Walker, Ins. Saund. Dipt., 1850, p. 2, PI. i., fig. 7; List

Dipt. Brit. Mus., v., suppl. 1, 1854, p. 112 (dispectus) .
Si/>ionymy. — The reasons for considering that Cryptoberis herbescens White
is identical with Metopotiia rubriceps Macquart have been dealt with in my paper
in the Proceedings of the Royal Society of Tasmania, 1920, and no further com-
ment is needed here. The illustration of Inopus despectus Walker shows that
the upiier branch of the cubital veiti is mis«;ing, which character is rare in Meto-
ponia rubriceps, but the other characters agree so well with this common species
that tile generic position is beyond dispute; the basal joint of the antennae, which

BY G. H. HARDY. 535

is about as long as the third, and the radial vein issuing from the first basal cell,
agree with this species.

Characters. — This species, in which the female is usually black and the head
red and the male brown or somewhat blackish, never with red, has the antennae
with the first and second joints together about equal in length to the third, the iirst
rather long, and the second joint al)out one quarter the lengih of the third. The
ladial vein invr.riably issues from the first basal cell.

D.escription. — (?. The head is black, the eyes are contiguous and have a little
•pubescence. The antennae are black, the first joint is long, about three times the
length of the second, the second joint is about as long as broad, the third 'joint is
four times the lengfli of the second. [The text-fig. 1, in the Proc. Roy. Soc.
Tasm., 1920, ji. 35. shows the antennae drawn from a micro-slide.] The thorax
and scutellum are black and have some black pubescence and depressed yellowish
tomentum. The abdomen is black and contains denser pubescence; there are
seven segments and exposed genitalia which conform in shape with those of other
species of Beridinae. The anterior coxae are black, and the remainder of the legs
are yellowish, slightly stained fuscous. The wings are obscurely fumed and the
halteres are similarly coloured.

S. The head is red with some short pubescence, the ocelli and the eyes are
black : the latter have a little pubescence. The antennae are black, sometimes red
at the base, and conform in proportions to those of the male. The thorax and
scutellum are black with short pubescence, and sometimes tracings of lighter mark-
ings can be seen laterally. The abdomen is depressed, black, and usually with a
thin light border at the extreme lateral edges. There are seven abdominal seg-
ments, the ovipositor (the eighth segment) bearing a pair of eerci; in the speci-
men described and illustrated here the ovipositor contains a small, inflated, yellow,
ventral .sack which can be detected bulging on each side. The abdomen contain'^
short pubescence. The legs are variable in colour, they are usually reddish and
n uch stained with black ; in the specimen illustrated the anterior coxae are red —
the intermediate and posterior coxae black; the trochanters are reddish, the basal
half of the femora is black, the apical half red; the middle third of the tibiae is
black, the base and apex reddish ; the tarsi have the base of the first and second
joints red, the pulvilli and the basal half of the claws red, the remainder black.
Tlie wings are rather strongly fumed and the halteres are similarly coloured.

Hah. — New South "Wales: Sydney. (51 c?. 20 ?.) Specimens have also been
seen from Victoria, but are not available for study at the time of writing this
paper. Macquart adds Tasmania as a locality, but specimens from this State
do not seem to be represented in recent collections.

Metoponia gemina, n.sp. (Plate xxix., figs. 1-4. )

Characters. — In this species the female has a red head and the remainder
is usually blackish, with a brownish scutellum; the male is brown or blackish with
a lighter brown scutellum, and also often the second and third abdominal seg-
ments are of a lighter brown dorsally. The first joint of the antennae is but
little longer than the second, and the third joint four times the length of the
second; the radial vein of the wdng branches from beyond the base of the cubital
vein. The head differs in shape from that of M. riihriceps when seen dorsally.
the face appears to be more prominent.

Description. — S. The head is red, with the ocellar tubercle and the eyes

536 A REVISION' OF THB C'HIHOMyzlN 1 (DIPTERA),

black. Seen dorsallv tlie iieai! is coiis|)ii_niimsly more prominent iR'tween the eyes
than in Metopuuiu rubriceits Maequart. The tiist joint of the antennae is about
twice the length of the secontl, and the tliird joint is missing.

The thorax, seutellum and abdomen are as in M. rubrieeps; they are black
with a dull yellowish tinge on the post-alar callus, which character is also often
present in M. rubrieeps; this colour extends on to the seutellum and fonns an
apical margin in the holotype only.

The legs, as in M. rubricep.-:, are red and nuii-h stained with black.

The wings are fuscous and liave the radial vein branching from the base or
fslightly' beyond the base of the cubital vein, wliich is forked at, or beyond, the
middle of its length . _ The first and second posterior veins issue from the discal
cell separately.

S. This sex is blackish in cohnir and has a yellnwisli tomentum; the eyes are
contiguous, the ocellar and antennal triangles are \ eiy small, the latter reddish ;
the epistoma is yellowisli. The antennae are re<ldish or yellowish and much
stained with fuscous. Seen dorsally, the shape of the head anteriorly is arched
and not flat as in M. rubrieeps.

The thorax is black and has depressed yellow liairs, tiie liumeral -and jjost-
aiar calli and the seutellum are ochraceous.

The abdomen is black, l)nt the first and second segments may contain a con-
spicuous area of yellowish brown ; the genitalia are yellowisli .

The legs are yellowish and similar to those of the male -of M. rubrieeps.

The wing's are fuscous and have the radial vein branching from near the
base to about one-sixth the length of the cubital vein which is forked at about
two-thirds of its length. Tlie first and second posterior veins issue from the
discal cell separately or from a point, or they may be stalked.

Length. — ^. 6 — 7 mm. i ?. 10 mm.

Hab. — New South Wales:. Leura, Blue Mountains. ;\Iincli. 1020, coHected by
Dr. A. Maclean.

Type. — The holotype 5 and the allotyjie c? were presented to the Australian
Museum by Dr. E. ^Y . Ferguson. The i)aratypes. (3 d', 1 V) are in Dr. Fer-
guson's collection.

Genus C h i r o ii v z a Wie<lemann .

Chiromyza. Wiedemann, Nova Dipt. Gen., 1820, ]>. 19; and Auss. zweiil. Ins.,

i., 1828, p. 237; Bigot, Ann. Soc. Ent. France. (5). ix., 1879, p. 185.
Xenomorphu, Maci|uart. Dipt. Exot., i., 1, 1838, ]^. 193; and i., 2, 1839, ]i. 190;

Hardy, Froc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 1920, p. 37.
Larjurn'i, Phillppi, Verb. z.-b. Ges. AVien.. xv., 18(>,5, ji. 728 { ])icoc<iipicd ) ;

Osten-Saeken, Berl. Ent. Zeit., xxvi., 1882, pp. 3C(), 3(58 and 3§0.
llijlorus, Philii3i)i, loc. cit., p. 728: Osten-Sacken, Inc. cit., i>)). 3(58 and 380.
Lagarinus, Enderlein, Zool. Anz., xlii., 1913, p. 251; Krober, Wvtsman's Gen.

Ins., fa.sc. IGl, 1914, p. 13.
Metaponia, White, {nee Macquart), Pnn-. Linn. Soc. X.S. Widcs. xli.. 101(1,

p. 74.
f Noiiacris, Walker, Ins. Saund. Dipt., i., 1850, p. 7; Osten-Sacken, I'.erl. Ent,

Zeit., xxvii., 188.3, p. 296.
Sijnonijmii. — Tlie genus CJiirnnn/ui Wiedemann was founded ujioii a Brazilian

BY C. h. HARDY.

537

speeies, C. vittata, in which the upper branch of the cubital fork and tlie third
posterior vein are obsolete, and the discal cell is complete.

The genus Xenvmvrpha Macquart was founded upon a species, X. leptiformis,
in which only the upper branch of the cubital fork was obsolete, that is, the third
posterior vein wa-s present, otherwise the characters are identical with Wiede-
mann's species. Australian specimens show variations in which the upper branch
of the cubital vein may be present or absent and the discal cell may be partly
open, and finally the third posterior vein may be absent, but such an occurrence
is rare.

The genus Uiilirrua Philippi was founded on a Chilian species, //. krausei,
in which the thinl posterior vein is absent. Australian specimens conform to
this and individual specimens with the discal cell partly open are rather common,
thus showin.^- a connecting link with Lugarus; the upper branch of the eutiital
fork is also sometimes absent and in this way unites Lagarus with the typical
Chiromyza.

The genus Lagarhnt^ Enderlein was proposed for a Chilian species, L. para-
doxus, which conformed in the characters to Lagarus (preoccupied). Enderlein
placed Lagarus as a synonym of his new genus Lagariniis and erroneously re-
moved the group to tiie family Scenopidae. Krober copied Enderlein's description
and appended it to the end of his revision of the genera of Scenopidae without
comment .

Tiie characters of the genus Metoponia. given by White, conform to the
Xenumorpha of Macquart.

The following key will make the relation between these various species clear. —

1. Speciies with four posterior veins 2.

Species with five posterior veins, the third of which is stunted . . Xenornorpha.

2. The discal cell open, all traces of the cross vein closing the discal cell obsolete.

Lagarus and Lagariiuis.
The discal cell closed, or at least the vein that closes the discal cell is indi-
cated '^ ■

3. The cubital vein forked Hy/oius.

The cubital vein simple Chiroinyza.

These differences of character are variations that grade into each other and
are of less than specific value.

In the original description, the genus Nonacris Walker is described as having
the antennae seven segmented and the second joint much longer than the first,
but Osteu-Sacken states that the type, X. trausequa, from South America, appeai-s
to be a Chiromyza as he could not find any difference.

Definition. — The eyes are contiguous or separated in tlie male and widely
separated in the female; the antennae are shorter than the head, the first joint
is short, the second about the same size, and the third scarcely exceeds the length
of the two basal joints united; a species described as Xenornorpha grandicornis
Hardy, has the third joint considerably longer and does not belong to this genus
as defined here. The abdomen of the male is depressed; the genitalia conform to
those of other genera of the Beridinae. The female has the basal segments of the
abdomen distended and the apical segments attenuated ; there are four distended
segments and three narrow elongate segments, at the apex of which is the pro-
t-ensive ovipositor, the true eighth segment, which bears a pair of cerci. Both
sexes have wings; the venation is very variable within a species, more so than in

538 A REVISION OF THE CHIROMYZIS'I (dIPTEBA),

the geiius Metoponia. The radial vein invariably issues from the first basal cell;
the upper branch of the cubital vein may be present or obsolete; the discal cell
may be open or closed and is short; three posterior veins issue from the discal
cell and often another, but stunted vein, the true third posterior vein, is also pre-
sent; the first and second posterior veins may issue from tlie discal cell separately,
or from a point, or they may be stalked; these characters are variable within a
species. The fifth posterior vein issues from the second basal cell and joins
the anal vein considerably before it reaches the wing margin.

Chibomyia vittata Wiedemann .

Chiromyia vittata, Wiedemann, Nova Dipt. Gen., 1820, p. 20, fig. 8, ?. (For
further references see Kertesz, Cat. Dipt., iii.. 1908, pp. 144-5.)
Note. — Schiner gives X. leptiformis Macquart as a synonym of this species.

Chiromyza ochracea Wiedemann.

Chiromyza ochracea, Wiedemann, loc. cit., p. 20, c?. (For further references see
Kertesz, loc. cit.)

Chiromyza fuscana Wiedemann.

CJiiromy^a fuscana, Wiedemann, Dipt. Exot., 1821. ji. 115, ?. (For further
references see Kertesz, loc. cit.)

Chiromyza leptiformis Macquart.

Xenomorpha leptiformis Macquart, Dipt. Exot., i., 1, 1838, p. 193, PI. xxiii., fig.
1 (?) ; and i., 2, 1839, p. 190 (d") ; Walker, List Dipt. Brit. Mus., v..
suppl. 1, 1854, p. 66.
Note. — Schiner gives this as a synonym of C. vittata Wiedemann.

Chiromyza australis Macquart. (Plate xxx., figs. 12-16.)

Xenomorpha australis, Macquart, Dipt. Exot., suppl. 4, 1850, p. 54, PI. iii., fig.
7; Williston, Trans. Ent. Soc. Fbilad., xv., 1888, p. 244; Hardy, Proc.
Roy. Soc. Tas., 1920, p. 38, text-fig. 2.

Characters. — This species has already been fully described, but it is subject
to considerable variation in wing venation and colour markings. The eyes are
separated in both sexes; the wings have a very complete venation, but the upper
branch of the cubital fork may be partly or completely absent; the third pos-
terior vein is almost invariably indicated by a stunted vein which is variable
in length, and in one specimen the cross-vein between the second and third pos-
terior veins is obsolete. The illustration is taken from one of the series of speci-
mens from Gisborne already described by nie.

Macquart described the male as having rather thick posterior tarsi, which
character applies better to Ch. prisca, whilst the drawing shows the eyes separated
in the male, and a stunted third posterior vein which conforms to the species
idefatified here.

//a6.— New South Wales and Victoria. (6 <i,8 9.)

1 Chiromyza transequa Walker.

Nonacris transequa. Walker, Ins. Saund. Dipt., 1852, p. 7.

Chiromyza transequa, Osten-Sackcn. P>erl. Ent. Zeit., xxvi.. 1882. p. 368.

BY G. H. HARDY. 539

Chiromyza prisca Walker. (Plate .xxix., figs. 7-11.)

Chiromyia prisca. Walker, Ins. Saund. Dipt., 1852, p. 162.
3f.etoponia prisca, Hardy, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 1920, p. 36.

Characters. — Eyes contiguous in the male, separated in the female; the wings
have a variable venation, in which the upper branch of the cubital vein is pre-
sent or obsolete, the first and second posterior veins may be stalked, or issue
from the discal cell from a point or independently; the third posterior vein is
obsolete; the transverse vein between the second and fourth posterior veins may
be incomplete, making the discal cell partly open, and in one ease which is
illustrated (Plate xxix., fig. 7) the second basal cell is also partly open by a
similarly incomplete cross-vein. In the male the posterior tarsi are thickened.

Note. — Walkers type from Tasmania is evidently a male and is not ade-
quately enough described for its identity to be positively determined ; the only
species known from that State that appeai-s to approach Walker's description
was subsequently identified and described as Metoponia prisca, but the identifi-
cation is not a satisfactory one.

Chiromyza vicina Bigot.

Chiromyza vicina, Bigot, Ann. Soc. Ent. France, (5), ix., 1879, p. 200 (2).
Metoponia vicina, Kertesz, Cat. Dipt., iii., 1908, p. 115.

Note. — The position of this species is open to doubt, but as it was described
from a female, it cannot belong to the genus Boreoides, and its colour does not
agree with the known species under the genus Metoponia. The inadequate de-
scription reads like that of a typical female Chiromyza, and its habitat is queried
Australia.

Chiromyza krausei Piiilippi.

Hylorus krausei, Philippi, Verb. z.-b. Ges. Wien., xv.. 1865, p. 728, PI. xxvi., fig.
33 (c?) ; Osten-Sacken, Berl. Ent. Zeit., xxvi., 1882, p. 368; Hunter,
Trans. Amer. Entom. Soc. Philad., xxvii., 1901, p. 133.

Chiromyza pauslbni Philippi.

Lagarus pausleni, PWlippi, Verb. z.-b. Ges. Wien, xv., 1865, p. 728 (?) ; Hunter,

Trans. Amer. Ent. Soc. Philad., xxvii., 1901, p. 132.
Lagarinus pausleni, Enderlein, Zool. Anz., xlii., 1913, p. 253.

Chiromyza paradoxa Enderlein.

Lagarinus paradoxus, Enderlein, Zool. Anz., xlii., 1913, p. 252, figs. 1 and 2 (c?) .

Species of uncertain generic position.

Xenomorpha grandicornis Hardy.

Xenomorpha grandicornis. Hardy, Proc. Roy. Soc. Tas., 1920, p. 39, text-fig. 3.

Genus B 0 R B o I D E s, n . gen .

Boreomyia, Walker, MS. name.

Definition. — T);e eyes are separated in both sexes; the antennae have "the
two basal joints of equal length and the third joint about twice the length of the
basal joints united in the male, and about the same length as the basal joints

540 A UKVISION lIK TIIK ( 'II 1 KILM VZl \ 1 ( IH I'TKHA ) ,

united in the female-. Tiie abdomen is depressed in the male, and in the female
the four basal segments are distended and the apical segments attenuated. The
wings of the male contain a complete or almost complete venation; the upper
branch of the cubital fork and the stunted third i)osterior vein nuiy be absent.
The female is aptt-rous.

Etymology. — A female specimen in tlie National Musium, Mcll)ourne, bears
a label in Walker's handwriting identifying the species as Boreomyia nubulaia,
and. in consequence, tiie species has been rather well known under that name.
It appears tliat the name has not been published, and Dr. Ferguson informs me
that he tailed to And a specimen of the species in the British Museum, on
which account it is reasonable to suppose that the specimen labelled by Walker
and now before me, was' intended to be the type of a new species. The name
Boreomyia is preoccupied by Boriomyia Banks. 1906, a North American Neurop-
teron of the family llemerobiidae, and, moreover, the strict meaning of the
name^is scarcely applicable to the species under discussion. Boreomyia would
mean '■norlhern Hy" accordina' to its derivation, and this does not appear to \w
the meaning intended by Walker, who evidently noted the shape superficially re-
sembling the Panorpid genus Boreus and intended in his name to convey the
meaning BoreusMy. The name is modified here to Boreoides, meaning "like
Boreus."

HOKEOIDKS sUBUl.ATi:s, n.sp. (Plate XXX., figs. 17-22.)

Boreomyia yubtilata. Walker, MS. name.

Description. — The female is much infiated and apterous; the male is winge<l,
more or less uniforndy coloured brownish, and is slender in build.

c?. The front is on^ fifth the width of the head, parallel-sided and bulges
slightly; the ocellar tubercle is very slightly raised, and anterior to tins a median
dejiression I'eaches the antennae. The antennae have their two basal joints equal
in length, and the third joint twice the length of the basal joints united, and
obscurely annulated. The face is small and the oral aperture is shallow and wide,
and beneath it can be detected the minute mouth between the small palpi. The
thorax and seutelium are normal, the former often stained with fuscous. The
abdomen is rather long and slender, depressed, and consists of seven segments.
The exjiGsed genitalia conform in shape to those of other species of the Bcri-
dinae. The legs are light brown in colour, long and slender.

?. The front is about (me-third the maximum width of the liead, is unitorin-
ly wide, and bulges considerably. The ocellar tubercle is but slightly raised,
and anterior to this there is a ]>air ol large prominences divided by a deep
median depression whicli reaches the base of the antennae; the front contains
conspicuous yellowish pubescence anteriorly. The antennae are situated low on
the head and close together; the two basal joints are about ('(lual in length; the
third joint is eciual to the basal joints together; the apical half of the third joint
is obscurely annulated and three or four divisions c:in be seen. The oral aper-
ture is shallow and wide, and it contains a tubercle occupying a larger portion
of its area; below the tubende, a minute mouth can be detected between the small
palpi.

■ The tiiorax anteriorly is i»s wide as the head, but widens (■onsid<'ral)ly to-
wards the abdomen; it is glabrous and shining, but contains a little golden to-
mentum dorsally. The sculcllum is flattened so that it lies like a plate upon

BY <!. n. HARDY. 541

the metanotuni, whioh is also depressed hut wrinkled, and separates the scutellum
from the abdomen . Laterally tlie thorax is normal, and ventrally it is almost
entirely concealed by the coxae. The wings and halteres are obsolete, but there
are minute prominences indicating the position where these appendages should be.

The abdomen normally is large and distended, but in some specimens it is
shrivelled and no larger than that of the head and thorax combined. There are
four distended segments followed by three elongate narrow segments, at the
apex of which the ovipositor (the eighth segment) protrudes and contains a pair
of cerci. In all the specimens the abdomen shows tendencies to shrivel, an(i
in some specimens dark bands are to be seen on the three basal segments and
dark longitudiral stripes on the apical segments. In the holotype the apex of
the first dorsal segment has a thin transverse apical band, the second and tliird
segments have a broader central band and the fourth to seventh segments have a
pair of black stripes. The ventre has tracings of corresponding bands and
stripes more or less visible; in dark specimens these markings are more or less
obliterated .

The legs are long and have fiieir anterior coxae very broad, covering half
the lengih on the ventral side and almost touching the intermediate coxae which
are normal. The posterior coxae are situated at the distance of their own width
from the intermediate coxae and are normal ; the legs contain a minute pubes-
cence.

Length.— d. 8-10 mm.; 5 15-25 mm.

Hah. — There are 35 d" and 24 2 from New South Wales and Victoria. Vic-
toria : the labelled specimens invariably indicate May as the month of occur-
rence and the localities are Western District, Myer's Creek, Brigiiton, Mordialloc
and Portland; and Mount Buifalo, males only, taken by Miss Irwin Smith, 19th
February, 192(1. New South Wales specimens are from Mount Kosciusko, females
only, taken by Dr. E. W. Ferguson, February, 1920; females from Bago Forest,
in the Australian Museum, taken by ('. Kosegger; and males labelled Moonbar
and Kosciusko, 3000ft , taken by Helms in March, 1889, are also in the Australian
Museum. Tasmania: specimens from this State taken on the summit of Mt.
Wellington, and one taken by Mr. ('. E. Cole near Bellerive, Hobart, im-
dqubtedly belong to this species, but unfortunately they are not available for
study at the tir.ie of writing this paper,

Ti/pe. — The holotype ? and the allotype c? are in the National Museum, Mel-
l)ourne; paratypes will be found in various collections, including that of the
Australian Museum ,

Genus A L L o G N o s T A Ostcn-Sacken.

Metoponia. Loew, nee Macquart. Dipt. Faun. Sud. Afr., i., I860, p. 1.
Allognosta, Osten-Sacken, Berl. Ent. Zeit., xxvii., 1883, p. 297; Bezzi, Deut. Ent.

Zeit., 1908. p. 470; Coquillett. Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., xxxvii., 1910, p. ,505;

Brunetti. Faun. Brit. Ind., Dipt. Braehy., i., 1920, p. 93.
Anacanthoheris, Brunetti. Ree. Ind. Mus., vii,, 1912, p. 45(i.

Characters. — A definition of this genus has been published by Brunetti, 1920,
who, apparently, based it on the two species known to him. The illustration
given by Brunetti in the same work represents A. vagans Loew, and the figure of
the antennae shows the third joint to be four times the length, of the second;
both the figure and the description give eight annulations to the third .joint. The
abdomen of the male is shown to be considerably wider than the thorax, but the

542 A REVisiOK or the chiromyzini (diptera).

text states "slig:htly wider."' The female specimen is described as having the
sixth abdominal sequent distinctly narrower than the fifth, and the seventh and
eighth narrower than the sixth, which character is typical of the Chiromyzini.

The genus Allognosta can be distinguished from the genus Metopon/ia by the
abdomen of the male which is wider than the thorax and also relatively shorter
than in all other genera of the Chiromyzini.

In Metoponia there are only seven annulations to the third antennal joint
(Macquart gives eight); in AUognosta these annulations are stated to be eight,
but the character requires confirmation.

The following list contains the references to the original descriptions of the

species placed under the genus AUognosta to which are added the references from

works published subsequent to those given in Kertesz's catalogue.

fuscitarsis, Say, Jouni. Acad. Nat. Se. Pliilad., iii.. 1823, p. 20 {Beris); Bezzi,

Deut. Ent. Zeit., 1908, p. 474. [United States of America.]

dorsalis, Say, in Long's Exped. St. Peter's River, ii., appendix, 1824, p. 377

[Sargus]
pallipes. Wiedemann, Auss. Zweifl. Ins., ii., 1830, p. 41 (Sargus) .
lata, Walker, List Dipt. Brit. Mus., i., 1848, p. 127; v., suppl. 1, 1854, p. 10

(Beris ) .
brevis. Walker. List Dipt. Brit. Mus., i., 1848, ]i. 127 (Beris); v.. snp])l. 1,
1854, p. 10 (Bens).
similis, Loew, Berl. Ent. Zeit., vii., 1863, p. 299, d' (Metoponia) ; Bezzi, Deut. Ent.

Zeit., 1908, p. 474. [United States of America.]
ohseuriventris, Loew, Berl. Ent. Zeit., vii., 18()3, p. 299, 9 ( Metoponia) ; Bezzi,

Deuv. Ent. Zeit., 1908, p. 474. [Canada.]
vagans, Loew, Beschreib. Europ. Dipt., iii., 1873, p. 71 (^[etopofiia) ; Bezzi,
Deut. Ent. Zeit., 1908, p. 474. Brunetti, Faun. Brit. Ind., Dipt. Brachy.,
i., p. 94, PI. 1, figs. 25-26, c?. [Europe. Asia.]
inermis. Brunetti, Rec. Ind. Mus., vii., 1912, p. 455, c7. (f AUognosta — Ana-
canthoheris) [India.]
harhieUinii, Bezzi, Deut. Ent. Zeit., 1908. p. 472. [Brazil.]
crassitarsis, de Meyere. Tijdschr. Ent., Ivi., suppl., 1913 (1914). \>. 19. [,Iava.]
erassa, de Meyere, Ti.idschr. Ent.. Ivi., suppl., 1913 (1914), p. 20. [.lava.] .
oi'samerhsis^ Brunett-. Fauna Brit. Ind., Dipt. Brachy., i., 1920, p. 95. [Assam.]

Explanation op Pi.atks .\,\ix.-xxx.
Plate xxi.\.

Pigs.1-4. — Meiop07!ia gemi7ia,n.sp. 1. female, from holotype; 2. male, from allotype;

3. head of female holotype ; 4. antenna from a paratype male.
Figs. 5-6. — Afetopoitia riihricifis Macquart. .5. head, male; 6. antenna.
Pigs. 7-11. — C/iiroiiiy~a prisca Wallcer. 7, female; 8, head of female seen anteriorly;

9, antenna of female; 10, male; 11, head of male seen anteriorly.

Plate XXX.

Figs.12-16. — Chiroviyza aiistra/is Macquart. 12, female; l.S, head of female seen anter-
iorly ; 14, antenna of female ; 1.5, male; 1(5. head of male seen anterioily.

Figs.17-22. — Boreoides subiihita, u.sp. 17, female; 18. head of fem.ale .seen anteriorly;
19, antenna of female; 20, male; '21, head of male seen anteriorly; [22, antenna of
male.

543

SOME NEW BRACHIOPODS FROM THE MIDDLE PALAEOZOIC ROCKS
OF NEW SOUTH WALES.

By John Mitchell, latk Principal of the Technical College and School of

Mines, Newcastle.

(Plate xxxi.)

The fossils dealt with in the present paper represent seven genera and as
many separate speeies of brachiopods. One genus and four of the species are
new. Three of the genera are typically Silurian; one (Merista) is characteristic
of Middle Devonian, and the range of the proposed new genus Molongia remains
to be ascertained. Two of the species have previously l)een recorded from this
State, viz., Betzia salteri Sowerby, by de Koninck from Yarralumla, and Orthis
striatula Schloth. by W. S. Dun. From a palaeontological point of view, per-
haps the most important of the species under notice is Merista plebe'ia. because
it is so typically an index of middle Devonian age in Europe, and in North
America; in these countries it has but a limited vertical range For this reason
it should be very helpful in correlating the sedimentary rocks in which it occurs,
however distant apart they may be. With regard to this fossil it is to be noted
that, although its existence was, apparently, only a short one geologically, its
distribution was world-wide, and these remarks apply to its a-ssoeiate Orthis
striatula Schloth. ; in Australia, just as in Europe, these two fossils are associates,
and lielp to confirm the assumption that the rocks in this State, from which they
have been collected in association, are approximately of Devonian age. and,^ in
that case, they would appear to form an inlier surrounded by rocks of Carbonif-
erous age, portions of which have recently been discussed and described (Thess
Proceedings, xlv.. 1920, Pt. 2, pp. 285-316). From the same limestone have
been gathered a few Sprrifers, one of which is near if not identical with 5. pitt-
mani Dun and considered by him to be of Devonian age. The pentamerid, B.
m.olongensis, resembles in shape juvenile forms of Barrandella linpuifer var. wil-
kinsoni Eth., but in the latter the umbo of the ventral valve is always much more
strongly developed and overhanging than it is in the former; and in the latter,
too, the length always, at all stages of growth, exceeds the width, while in the
former the values of these dimensions are reversed. The Molong fossil occurs
with Atrypoittea australis and A. angusta Mitch, and Dun. Etheridge's species

544 NEW BRAt'HIOFOUS FROM THK MIDDI.K PALAEOZOIC ROC'KS, N.S.W.,

occurs with these same Atrypids at Hatton's Corner in the Bi)unyonj^ian Beds
but the Hatton's Corner species has not yet been obtained from the Moloner Beds.

Spirifer houningensis is very characteristic of the Lower Trih)bite Beds of
the Bounyongian Series, and is also one of the few individuals of the fauna of these
lower beds which survive to app.?ar in the Middle Trilobite Beds.

If the suspected occurrence of the genus Seminula should be i)roved an ac-
tuality in this Gunneubene limestone patch, an uiiusiuU cDinininirlinsj of Devonian
and Carboniferous genera would be the result .

It may not be out of place here to remark how vi'ry iMi])nrtaiit a help it
would be towards the completion of a satisfactory geological survey of the State,
if full and systematic palaeontographies were made of the stratified rocks of
Moloug, Wellington, and Orange in conjunction with tliose of the Bounyongian
Beds. Besides, a work of this kind would without doubt result in many valuable
palaeontological discoveries being made; for the .stratified rocks of these localities
are not to be suri)assed for fossiliferous wealth.

Family MERISTELLIDAE Waagen.

Merista plebeia Sowerby. (Plate xxxi., tigs. 13.)

Spec. Char. — Shell biconvex, subtriangular, valves about equally convex,
smooth. Pedicle valve a good deal deeper than the brachial one, strongly convex
especially in front of the umbo; anteriorly depressed umlione pi'ominent, incurved
apically, truncated by a circular foramen. Brachial valve slightly more convex
than the pedicle valve; in some specimens a very inconspicuous fold is present;
umbo modeiately prominent, strongly incurved, and overhung by that of the
pedicle valve; a well developed septum present. Hinge line mildly arcuate.
Cardinal angles l)luiit. Lateral and front margins very mildly sinuate. Only
a small portion of the brachidium has been observed in one specimen.

Diuieiisiotis. — Four individuals gave tlic following measurements: —
Length 18.7 mm. Width 18.7 mm. Depth 11.7 mm.

17.3 .. 17.3 „ 10.2

,, 15.fi „ 15.2 „ n.4

„ 15.6 „ 15.2 „ 0.4

But while these four specimens yielded fairly constant piniiortions for tlie
three dimensions tlie following did not: —

Length LM.lt mm. Width 17.2 mm. Deptli 12. .5 mm.

20.85 „ 18.23 ,. 12.5

21.9 „ 21. n „

These variable dimensions do not afford int'onnaticn of much value in de-
termining' its specific position.

f)I>s. — The form now dealt witli licars close rdationsliip exteinally to ."If
vleheia Sow. sp. and to If. lenncfseeimis Hall and Clarke, yet diffeis in some
respects from both.

Dimensionally, the adult specimens of .1/. plebeia and the local form closely
agree in size as is sluiwn by a comiiarison of the measurements of the two forms.
The dimensions of .1/. plebeia given by Davidson for two specimens arc (Brit.
Fos.s. Brach.. iii. 1804-71. PI. iii.. figs. 2-10)-

Length 18.75 mm. Widtli 20.8 mm. Dci.th 10.4 ,„;n.

20.8 ,. 10.5 ., 12.5

r,v JOHN' MiTCi[i';i.i.. 545

The longtli ami ilt'plh oi the latter speciiueu arc practically iduntioal with the
similar measurements of one of the two large specimens of the local forms given
ahove. In the case of the former species sometimes the length is greater than the
width and sometiiiieis the reverse; in the latter, the length is always greater than
or equal to the width, as far as nuiy he determined from the specimens at present
available. In (uitline and external features, adult specimens of the two shells
are not sejjarable, and if the specific determination of the local shells were to be
made after a comparison with the adult specimens of M. pleheia Sow., I would
without hesitation place it with that species, but the youthful forms of the British
(Plymouth) species, as represented in figs. 7-8 (loc. cit.) are unlike any of the
youthful specimens of our form. Further the umbo and beak of the pedicle
valve of the local form seem more prominent than are* these pai'ts of the British
species. These slight differences may hardly justify the separation of the two.

The relationship between M. tennesseensis Hall and Clarke, ajid ours is also
close. The largest specimens figured by Hall and Clarke (Nat. Hist. N.Y., Pal.
18()4, Vol. iii., Brach. ii., PI. xlii., figs. 1-0) have length 15.6 mm., width 14.75,
depth 9.4 mm.

In figure 5 thi' length and width are 15. (J mms. for each dimension. By
referring to the dimensions given above for local shells, the close agreement of
some of them will be plain. Therefore, from dimensional evidence, these two
might be placed together; but M. tenmsseemis, .iudging from the figures, was
smaller, and possessed a more conspicuous sulcus in the pedicle valve than the
New South AVales type. The valve margins, lateral and anterior, of the latter
are more sinuous than they are in the former.

After full consideration it seems to me that the Australian type might be
placed with either the British M. pleheia or tlie American M. tennesseensis Hall
and Clarke, but appears to be nearer the former than the latter; therefore it is
placed with that species, though the immature specimens of our form do not
appear to exactly agree with the similar British ones.

As far as I am aware this brachiopod has not previously been recorded from
this State. In England it occurs plentifully in rocks of middle Devonian age.

The specimens here described and figured were collected from a mass of lime-
stone within an extrusion of trachyte at the base of Bulga Hill, Tulcumbah, near
Carroll, on the property of Mr. John Tydd. The geological age is, doubtless,
middle Devonian. A brachiopod which, outwardly, bears a strong resemblance
to the shells above described, was collected by the writer from Cave Flat, near
the junction of the Murrunibidgee and Goodradigbee Rivers, from rocks which
are referred to as lower in middle Devonian.

Family SPIRIFERIDAE.

Spirifer bowningeksis, n.sp. (Plate xxxi., figs. 21-22.)

Spec. Chars. — Shell transversely subelliptic, radially strongly ribbed, and
finely and densely striated. Pedicle valve strongly convex, possesses ten to twelve
folds, sulcus dee]) and very wide anteriorly, umbo prominent, beak pointed, in-
curved, and somewhat obscuring the area; folds abutting the sulcus very pro-
minent. Brachial valve mildly convex, has ten folds exclusive of the medial one
which is prominent, and medially traversed by a shallow wide sinus; beak not
conspicuous. Hinge line long, straight, almost as long as the greatest width

546 NEW BKACHIOPODS FROM THE MIDDLE PALAEOZOIC ROCKS, S.S.W.,

of the shell; area short, narrow, and usually contracted by pressure; cardinal
angles mildly rounded. Front margin strongly sinuate.

Dimensions. — Length 18 mm., width 29.7 mm., depth 12.5 mm.
Length 21.9 mm., width 32.8 mm., depth 15.6 mm.

The first of these measurements is of a very perfect specimen three-fourths
grown. The other is of an adult specimen. The different dimensions do not
seem to bear proportional relations in either case.

Obs. — This Spirifer belongs to Hall and Clarke's group I. Radiati, and sec-
tion 1, Pauciplicata of that group, approaching closely to ,S. radiatus and S.
plicatellus Sowerby externally; but more to the latter than the former, more espe-
cially to the Swedish representatives of the species. In a less degree it resembles
5. eudora Hall, from the Niagara formations; but dimensionally is very different.
Both S. radiatus and N. plicatella differ from the local species in the absence of a
medial sinus on the fold of the brachial valve. The radial ribs of the former
are not prominent, and diminish in this respect as they approach the umbo in
the latter; they are very prominent throughout their length, except, in the case
of the outer rib or two on each valve. The hinge lines and areas of
the two species are much alike. In adult specimens of the Bowning
one there are constantly six ribs on each side of the sulcus on the pedicle valve;
and on each side of the medial fold of the brachial valve, the ribs are five. In
the case of S. plicatella Sow. the ribs on the similar parts seem to be more variable
in number and in prominence. The two are easily separable from each other.
and the same may be said of S. radiattis and the local one.

This Spirifer is very characteristic of the Lower Trilobite Beds of the Bown-
ing Series, where it is common and has very few other Spirifers for associates,
but instead, numerous trilobites, among which are Od-ontopleura bowningensis E.
and M., O. parinssirrm E. and M., Ceratocephala rngdesi E. and M., Sphaer-
exochus mirus Beyrich, Stauroceplinlus murchisoni Barr.. etc.

It is one of the few representative members of the fauna of the Lower Trilo-
bite Beds that pass upward into the Middle Trilobite Bods; and probably sur-
vives to the lower Devonian period, for some fragments of a Spirifer near to. if
not identical with it, have been collected from the limestones near the junction of
the Goodradigbee and Murrumbidgee Rivers.

Loc. and horizon. — Lower and Middle Trilobite Beds, Bowning, Parish of
Bowning, Countv Harden, N.S.W. Upper Silurian — Wenlock or Barrande's etage
E.

M o LO X r, I A, n.gen.

The Bowning and Molong districts of New South "Wales yield a Spiriferoid
Brachiopod which T have been unable to place in any of the genera of this large
group. It possesses a well-defined smooth sulcus in the pedicle valve and an
eciually distinct median fold in the brachial valve: the spiralia too are very like
those of true Spirifers. But they have no cardinal area, neither is an open
delthyrium present; but, instead, there is a foramen truncating the apex of the
])edicle beak. It seems not distantly related to Hall's genus Trematospira, but
it lacks some of the essential features of that genus, for instance, its shell is
imperforate and within the sulcus of the pedicle valve there are no folds. Failing
to be satisfied that it can be i)laced in any existing genus, a new genus is proposed
for its reception .

BY JOHN MITCHELL. 547

Gen. char. — Shell imperforate; umbo of pedicl* valve prominent, incurved,
depressed, and truncated by a circular foramen; cardinal area absent; hinge-line
straig-ht or nearly so; spiralia spiriferoid. Other internal structures not ob-
served.

Genotype, Molongia elegans, n.sp.

MoLONGiA ELEGANS H . sp . (Plate xxxi., figs. 6-8, 12.)

Spec. char. — Valves strongly convex, the pedicle valve more so than the other.
Pedicle valve subrhomboidal, sulcus deep, smooth and wide, and on each side of
it are four radial ribs, all of which are prominent, except the one on each side
adjacent to the cardinal angles. Umbo prominent, incurved, truncated by a cir-
cular forapaen and resting on the umbo of the brachial valve, or nearly so. Brachial
, valve subquadrate, medial fold prominent and medially traversed by a narrow,
shallow sinus; the lateral folds agree in number and character with those of the
ventral valve, and alternate with them, thus giving to the lateral margins a zig-
zag outline: umVjo moderately prominent, and fills up the delthyrium. Hinge-
line straight, or almost so, and reaches to the cardinal angles which are nearly
rectangular in perfect and mature specimens. Hinge-line elevated. The whole
surface of the shell is traversed by faint, undulating, concentric growth-lines.

Ohs. — This fossil in several respects is very spiriferoid. and in other features
it approaches forms of Trematospira.

Loc. and horizon. — About eight miles west of Molong, Parish of Bomey,
County Wellington; Bowning, Parish of Bowning, County Harden. In both
localities it is a.ssociated with Atrjjponlea auatraUf; Mitchell and Dun. Appar-
ently Upper Silurian .

Family RETZIIDAE.

Retzia salteri Davidson. (Plate xxxi., figs. 4-5.)

Terebratula salteri, Dav., Bull. Soc. Geol. France, 2nd ser.. vol. v., 1848,
p 331, PI. iii.. tig. 31; Bet~~ia salteri, Schmidt, Sil. Form. Ehsland, etc., 1858,
p. 212; Salter, Siluria, 2nd. edit., 1859, p. 250, Foss. 57, fig. 7; H. hai/lei, Lind-
strom, Gottlands Brachiop., Of vers. K. Vet.-Akad., Forhandl., 1860, p. 337;
K. salteri, de Koninck, Mem. Geol. Surv. N. S. Wales, Pal., No. 6, 1898, p. 27.

Spec. char. — Shell e(|ually and strongly convex, oval ; valvjs almost of equal
size and each medially depressed. In the depressed part of the pedicle valve are
two less robust ribs than those on the lateral parts of the valve, and, in the corre-
sponding depression of the brachial valve, there is one such rib even less distinct
than those of the pedicle valve. On each side of these depressed ribs, in each
valve there are ten, simple and relatively strong ribs, making a total of twenty two
and twenty one on the pedicle and lirachial valves, respectively. The umbo of the
pedicle valve is only moderately prominent, incurved and apically truncated by
a foramen. The unibonal parts of each are strongly inflated. Hinge line short
and arcuate. Deltidial plates obscured. Margins practically non-sinuate. On
one side of our solitary specimen which is weathered the spiral lamellae are suffi-
ciently exposed to show that they possess the characteristics of the genus. The
concentric growth lines are fine, numerous and a.sperate.

Dimensiom. — Length, 5.25, width, fi and depth, 3 lines respectively. These
measurements agree fairly closely with those given by Davidson for 7?. salteri

548 NEW BRACIIIOPOnS PROM THK MIDDI.K PALAEOZOIC ROCKS, N.S.W.,

and its varieties, R. bouckardii. ami A', hai/ln (Brit. Foss. Bracb., iii., pp. 126-
128.).

Obs. — The form liere described a^ees witb R. salteri Dav. in (i.) valves
equally convex; (ii.) small incurved beak; (iii.) medial radial ribs finer and at a
lower level tban tlie lateral ribs; (iv.) strong convexity of the valves; (y. ) bavins:
in the ventral valve a low narrow sinus extending from tlie beak to the front
margin; (vi.) valves ornamented with fine eimoentric lines; (vii.) having the
front margin slightly indented; (viii.) having the central ribs smaller and at a
lower level than the lateral ones. It differs from that species in the depressed
central area having fewer ribs and a smaller number of lateral ribs. With R.
bouchardii, it agrees in being almost as long as wide, and in the number and
character of the lateral ribs. It appears to differ from that species in having
only two depressed central ribs in the ventral valve and one in the dorsal valve.
The local specimen is smaller; this lias little significance when only a single speci-
men is available for comparison. Were I convinced that R. Imnchardii was
an established variety of 7?. salteri I would not hesitate to place our form with
that variety. Salter, Lindstrom, and de Koninck considered that 7?. boitchardii
and R. hai/Iei of Ilavidson were inseparable from R. salteri.

de Koninck (Mem. Geol. Surv. N.S.W., Pal. G, p. 27) recorded the species
from Yarralumla, N.S.W., and gave an outline of Davidson's description of the
species, which he applied to the Yarralumla form ; he did not figure it. but stated
that it exactly agreed with Davidson's fig. 27a, PI. xii. Our fossil closely re-
sembles fig. 29 of the same ]ilate, that is, the varietal form R. houfhardii Dav.

The specimens ilealt with by de Koninck were destroyed by fire in 18S2. Tlie
occurrence of the genus R.etzia in Australia adds another to the list of brachiopods
which have a world-wide distribution which, in the case of this gcmis. appears to
have been accomplished in a relatively sliort geological period .

Ldc. and hnriznn. — The limestone bed of Tiimestone Creek, beneath the Lower
Trilobite Beds of Downing- Yass series. Parish of Derrengullen, County King.
Upper Silurian (= Wenlock) .

This fossil was found associated with Farosites qnllilatidird Linn., /■'. Imiiallica
Gold.. F. multitahulata, Sphaere.rorhiis xiirus, Atri/pa reticularis Linn., .1. pulchrn
M. and Dun, etc.

Family PRXTAMERIDAE.

P> AKi.-ANDELLA iroLOKGEX.sis, u.sp. (Plate xxxi.. figs 0-11 . )

Spec. char. — Sliell sul)pentagounl to suliti-iaiigular. small, smooth, biconvex.
Pedicle valve strongly convex, es))ecially in the umbonal region, umbone promin-
ent, beak sluirt, depressed, gently incurved, but not overhanging the beak of the
brachial vahe; me<lial sinus wide and shallow (in some s]ieciuiens being hardly
visible, and in some, where it is more pronounced, there are traces of one or two
faint folds within it, and on the shells of young individuals neither sinus nor
opposing fold is pri^senl ) ; anteriorly mildly to moderately sinuating the brachial
valve. Brachial valve relatively small, moderately convex near the umbo, laterally
and anteriorly n\ore or less depressed, fold varies much in prominence, corre-
spciuding in this res]iect with the sulcus of the opposing valve in some individuals;
anteriorly its prominence is increased by the sliell surface on each side of it being
depressed (a feature coirniion to R. linpuifera Sow.), umbo moderately pro-

BY JOHN MITCHKM.. 549

minent, beak small, always visible. Hinge line straight or very mildly artiiate,
cardinal angles rounded. The septa are short.

Dimensions of adult individuals. —

Length 10.5 mm. Width 13.5 mm. Depth. 8.3 mm.

„ 8.3 „ 12. „ 7.

„ 10.4 „ 13. „ 8.3

. 10.4 „ 12. „ 7.8

These measurements are fairly proportional.

Obs. — In some respects this species resembles youthful individuals of B.
linguifera var. u-ilkiiisorii Eth. Jr., and is suggestive of having been derived from
t!)at species by the arrest of its development in the early stages of growth, but
at no stage of development can the one form be mistaken for the other. Dimen-
sionally they are widely different, — the one seldom reaching a length of 10.5
mm. and only rarely exceeding 13 mm. in width, while the other may reach 25 mm.
for each of these dimensions. The width in tlie Molong species is always much
{Teater than the length, but in the other the width only very slightly exceeds the
/ongth. This fossil occurs in clusters, numbering hundreds of individuals occa-
sionally in a cluster in a massive bed of grey limestone associated with Atrypoidea
australis Mitch, and Dun, A. angusta Mitchell and Dun, Leptaena rhomboidalin
Wilckens, etc.

Loc. and horizon. — Some eight miles west of Molong, Parish of Bomey,
("ounty Wellington. Probably Upper Silurian.

SlEBKRELLA GLABRA, n . Sp . (Plat* XXxi., flgS. 13-15.)

Spec. Chars. — Shell smooth, thick, subpentagonal or subquadrate according
to stage of growth, concentric lines faintly visible on some specimens. Pedicle
valve very convex, umbo very tumid and prominent in adult specimens. Beak
acutely pointed, incurved and strongly depressed on to that of the brachial valve.
Fold only moderately conspicuous, originating just in front of the umbonal region
and terminating with a straight edge at the anterior sinus. Hinge line wide, car-
dinal angles high and rounded. Brachial valve only moderately convex in the
posterior half, laterally flat to subeoncave; sinus wide, shallow and moderately
indenting the opposing valve.

Dimensions (adult specimens). — Length, 21, 21.9 mm.; width. 21, 20.8 mm.;
depth, 16.5, 13.0 mm.; (specimen of medium growth), length 15.6, width 18.7,
depth 8.8 mm.

From these measurements the development of the shell would appear to have
been very variable in different individuals, or rather at different stages of growth.

06.*.— This shell is different from the old Sieherella (Pentamerus) ijaleatus
in several particulars, so evident that their enumeration is unnecessary. The
radial ribbing characteristic of the genus is practically absent fi;om the Australian
species, for the only traces found on it are very faint folds on each side of the
sinus anteriorly, and an equally faint and hardly visible fold on the medial part
of this sinus.

Specifleally, as far as my knowledge enables me to judge, the species here
described has no very close relation among the species occurring in Europe and
America.

Up to the stage of medium growth, the umbo of the pedicle valve of .?.
glabra is not prominent, and the beak does not overhang that of the brachial

550 NEW BKACIIIOPODS PBOM THE MIDDLE PALAEOZOIC ROCKS, N.S.W.,

valve ; but from that to the adult stage the umbo and umbonal regions strongly
develop; and so throw the pedicle valve beak on to that of the brachial valve.

In the classification of this brachiopod 1 have adopted the divisions proposed
by Hall for galeatiform pentamerids (Pal. N.Y., Vol. viii., Brach., ii., 1894, pp.
240 and 247).

Loc. and horizon. — Hatton's Corner, Yass River, Parish of Hume, County
Murray, associated with Barrandella [Clorinda) linguifera var. wilkinsoni Eth.
Junr., Atrypa reticularis Linn., Hhiiopht/llum interpwnctalum de Kou., Kncrinurus
mitchelli Foerste, etc. Uj^per Silurian (Wenlock).

Family ORTHIDAE.

Orthis ( Schizophoria ) striatula Sowerby. (Plate xxxi., figs. l('-20.)

Spec. Chars. — Outline subcircular or subelliptic, transversely biconvex, sur-
face densely covered with fine radial striae which increase in number anteriorly
with the growth of the shell by dichotomy and occasional interpolations; at in-
tervals the larger striae open to the surface and discontinue. All the striae along
their whole length are surmounted by slight asperities ; concentric growth lines
faint except anteriorly. Pedicle valve distinctly convex except anteriorly, where
it becomes depressed, and in senile shells a distinct sulcus is formed ; beak only
slightly incurved and higher than that of the brachial valve. Brachial valve more
convex than pedicle, beak incurved. Cardinal area of moderate length, triangu-
lar, elevated in each valve. Delthyrium conspicuous. Cardinal angles rounded.
Anterior margin in immature shells very mildly sinuate; rather strongly in some
of full growth .

Dimensions (mature and nearly mature specimens). —

Length 20.3 mm. Width 23.4 mm. Depth 15.6 mm.

20.3 „ 23.3 „ 12.5

17.2 „ 22. (i „ 11

„ 17.2 „ 22.7 „ 12.5

20.7 • „ 25.0 „ 12.5

These measurements show proportionate relations more or less, for the three
dimensions. The first, which has the greatest thickness, has also the appearance
of greatest age; it would appear that depth continued to increase after the other
dimensions had reached their full development.

Ohs. — Some ])alaeontoIogists have contended that O. (Sch.) striatula, is
idiMitical with (>. (iSch.) resupinata; but a larger number recognise its specific
rank. The Australian representatives of the species are of smaller size than the
European and North American forms; but agree with them in external features.
The local O. {Sch.) striatula has only half the width and length of the local 0.
(Sch.) resupinata Martin, but in depth often exceeds the latter, in the case of full
grown specimens, ami is mu(^h more convex. In no instance have I noticed the
anterior marginal sinus so pronounced in the latter as it is in the former when
the shells are of mature growth. The muscular scars of the former, as far as
my observations have enabled me to decide, are less distinct than are those in the
latter, and in other respects the scars appear to differ. The local fossil seems
nearer in form and dimensions to the North American form than to the British
one.

The specimens here dealt with occur in association with Merista plebeia
Sowerby; and in th:\l respect agree with the European and North American a.sso-

BY JOHN MITCHELL. 551

ciations. Other associates are some Spirifers, one of which has a strong re-
semblance to S. pittmani Dun, and with what appears to be a species of the genus
Seminula which would be an unexpected associate.

Loc. and horizon. — Tydd's farm, Tulcumbali, Parish of Gunnenbene, County
Nandewar. If judged from the presence of Merista plebeia, the horizon would
certainly be declared Middle Devonian; but sliould the presence of Seminula
be proved, then the geological horizon of the rocks from which the fossils were
obtained will be a matter for reconsideration.

ITXPLANATION OF PLATE XXXI.

FigsA-S. ^Meris/a /i/efieia Sowerby. Ventral, brachial and profile views of mature speci-
mens.
Figs. 4-5. — Ret::ia salleri Davidson. Ventral aspect and weathered side of a specimen.

In the latter six turns of a spiral are exposed.
Figs. 6-8 and H.-^Molongia elegans Mitchell. Dorsal, ventral, and profile views of three

mature specimens (x 2); Fig. 12 has the dorsal valve removed to show the spires,

enlarged. .
'F\<!,s.^-n.~Barrandel/a moloiigetiis Mitchell. Dorsal, ventral, and front views of three

nearly mature specimens (x 2).
FiasA^-l^.—Sieberi'lla glabra Mitchell. Dorsal, ventral, and front views. Figs. 13 and 14

are of adult specimens. Fig. 15 represents a shell of medium size.
Pigs. 16-20.— 6'/-///7.r (Sc/iizop/ioria) slrialiila Schloth. In figs. 16-19 the ventral, oblique,

front and cardinal aspects are shown. Fig. 20 is the part of a cast to show the

muscular scars of the pedicle valve, (x 3).
Figs. 21-22. —5/>w-;/fr boK'tiingensis Mitchell. Fig. 22 shows a specimen three-fourths

grown (x i), and fig. 21 is part of a valve (x 3J to show the radial striae, etc.

552

NEMATODE PARASITES OF THE DOMESTIC PIGEON [CULUMBA
LIVIA DOMESTICA) IN AUSTRALIA.

By Vera Irwin-Smith, B.Sc, F.L.S., Linnean Maci.eay Fellow of tub

Society in Zooi.OGY.

(Nineteen Text-figures.)

The only Nematode hitherto recorded from tlie dtJiuestic j)igeoii in Australia, is
Ascartd'ia (•oliimhae Gmelin (lleterakis maculosa Kud.). T. Harvey .Johnston
reported the presence of this parasite in New South Wales in 1909 and 1910, and
recently (1918) gave a description of specimens found in Queensland. An earlier
reference hy Krefft (1871) to Ascaris sp. is stated by Professor Johnston to refer
to the same species.

The material dealt with in the present paper comprises three distinct species,
two of which are new for this part of the w-orld. One of them has been found
l)reviously, only in America, and the original description of it is contained in a
circular of the Bureau of Animal Industry, U.S.A.. which is now out of print,
and therefore difficult to obtain. In view of tiiis, and of the verj' varying de-
scripti(ms and unsatisfactory figures contained in most of the existing records of
the other species concerned, I have thought it desirable to give fairly full notes
and drawings of the specimens examined here.

The (lassification adopted is tliat used by Stiles and llassall (1905), Railliet
and Henry (1914), and Hall (191()), to whose work tlie reader is referi-ed for super-
family, family, and subfamily diagnoses.

For the material examined I am indebted to Dr. S. Dodd. and Di. .1. H.
(Teland .

Early in 1919 several pigeons, dying and dead, were sent to Dr. Dodd, at the
A'eterinary School of the Univei-sity of Sydney, to a.scertain the cause of the mor-
tality anumg the Hock. In the post-mortem examination, small filiform worms
were found in fair numbers throughout the length of the intestines; but the walls
of the alimentary canal appeared to be in a perfectly healthy condition, and it is
doubtful whether the worms were a ccmtributory cause of the deaths. Dr. Dodd
informs me that poisoning was suspected, aii<l that there were no more deaths
after steps were taken to prevent this.

BY VERA IRWIN SMITH. 553

The small worms found comprised two species of Nematodes, which, on super-
ficial examination, are very much alike, though belongring to two distinct families, —
TrichinelUdae and Tricltostrongylidae. Apparently, Nematodes of the latter family
are not at all common in pigeons . None were recorded until 1904, when Stevenson
found one species in considerable numbers in the intestines of a flock of fancy
pigeons at Washing-ton, and described it under the name of Strongylus quadri-
radiatus. He states that a single specimen contained in the helminthologieal col-
lection of the U.S. National Museum, which was collected by Hassall at Washing-
ton in 1892, belongs to the same species. I have not been able to find any re-
cords of later observations of this worm. All the more recent references' relate
to Stevenson's description. But examination of the specimens found here shows
them to be identical with Stevenson's species.

In his original description, Stevenson observed that he retained, merely tem-
porarily, the generic name Strongylus (properly limited to the Sclerostomes),
pending an extensive revision of the whole gToup. By means of a diagnostic
table he compared the new parasite with the three species S. pergracilis, S. nodu-
laris, and S. tenuis, which he considered closely allied forms. In the following
year (1905) Loos established the genus Tricliostrongyluf to include four species
separated from the old genus Strongylus, and in 1909 Shipley added the species
Tr. pergracilis, Tr. nodularis, and Tr. tenuis, and suggested that Strongylus
quadriradiatus was possibly also a Trieliostrongylus. But Ransom (1911) pointed
out that Strongylus nodularis, and S. quadriradiatus differed widely from the
type, and should be excluded from the new genus, and in 1912 Neveu-Lemairc in-
cluded the latter in his work under the name Strongylus 1 qvadriradiatus, wjith
the note "Ce strongyle appartient certainement h la sous-famillie des Trieho-
strongylinae, mais le nom generique de strongyhis ne lui eonvient pas; sa de-
nomination n'est done que provisoire."

Stevenson's species certainly does not belong to the genus Trichostrongylus,
outstanding differences from the type being the relative sizes and positions of
the bursal rays, the form of the spicules, and the vesicular swelling of the cuticle
of the head. Eight other genera have been included in the sub-family Tricho-
strongylinae, but the present species does not conform to the description of any
one of them. It thei-efore becomes necessary to establish for it a new genus, for
which I propose the name Cephalostrongylus.

Superfamily STEONGTLOIDEA -Weinland, 1858.

Family TRICHOSTRONGYLIDAE Railliet, 1915.

<

Subfamily TRICHOSTRONGYLINAE Leiper, 1908.
Genus C e p h a l o s t r o n « y l ii s, n.g.

Generic diagnosis. — Cuticle enveloping cephalic end inflated to form a vesicu-
lar enlargement. Mouth simple, no papillae. Bursa bilobed, supported by six
paired rays and one median unpaired ray; the two ventral rays close together and
parallel, curved ventrally at the tips, thicker than any of the other rays ; the three
lateral rays arising from a common stem, but mutually divergent; externo-dorsal
ray thinner and shorter than the lateral rays, given off from the base of the
doi-sal ray; dorsal ray still shorter, but thicker, shortly bifurcated at the ex-
tremity, the outer branches being a little longer than the inner, each of which is

554

XEMATODE PARASITES OF THE DOMESTIC PIGEON',

again biluroated . Two three-pointed spicules, short and thick, joined by a
membrane to form a tube; a star-shaped chitinous piece with four rays, the two
lateral rays curved forward, surrounding the spicules when they are protruded.
A pair of prebureal papillae. Anterior half of female body tUiform. Vulva in
posterior fourth of body.

Type species, CephalostrongyJus quadriradiatus Stevenson, 1904.

Cephalostrongylus quadriradiatus Stevenson.

1904, Strongyliis quadriradiatus, Stevenson, Bur. Anim. Industry, Washing-
ton. Circular 47, 10 tig's. — 1905, Neumann-Macqueen, Parasites Dom. Anim., 2nd
edit., p. 414. — 1909, Trichustrungylvs qwadriradiaiw, Shipley, Pi'oc. Zool. Soc.
London, p. 335. — 1911, Strongrjlwi quadriradiatus, Ransom, Fjoc. U.S. Nat.
Mus., xli., p. 363. — 1912. Neveu-Lemaire, Parasif. Anim. Dom., Paris, ))p.
718-719.

The specimens in this collection agree closely with the description given by
Stevenson, though tlie dimensions are all somewhat smaller. They were reddish
in colour when first collected, and many of the females were spirally coiled,
especially towards tlie anterior end, which, being long and filifoi'm, gave them

Text-figs. 1-3. — Cephalostrongylus quadriradiatus.
1. Anterior end. (x 230), 2. Region of genital pore ^^.;>. J of female, showing
ovijector (ut.) and oviduct (ovi.) ix 140); 3. Posterior end, female, an., anus.
(x322).

a superficial resemblance to the Tricliiiicllids found with them. The peculiar,
four-rayed, chitinous piece connected with I lie siiicules, to which the species owes
its name, is just as figured by Stevenson. The vesicular swelling of the cuticle

BY VERA IRWIN SMITH.

555

at the cephalic end is still visible in most of the preserved specimens, and does
not appear to have shrunk at all in the glycerine jelly mounts from which the
measurements and drawing (Text-tig. 1) were made. Males measured from
6.2 to 6.8 mm. long, with a maximum wituh, in front of the caudal bursa, of
0.072 to 0.083 mm. ; females, 12.3 to 16.2 mm. long, with a maximum width of
0.143 mm. in the region of the genital pore. Cephalic swelling, 0.093 to 0.104
mm. long and 0.046 to 0.052 mm. broad; oesophagus, 0.352 to 0.400 mm. in the
male, 0.430 to 0.510 mm. in the female, with an average width of 0.020 mm. ;
nerve ring, 0.230 to 0.260 mm., and excretory pore, 0.268 mm. from anterior end.
The diameter of the body just behind the cephalic enlargement is 0.040 mm. in
males, 0.049 mm. in females. The female genital aperture is situated 2.25 to
3.33 mm. and anal aperture 0.140 to 0.156 mm. from tip of tail. The cuticle
is marked by a fine transverse striation at intervals of 0.0015 mm., except on the
anterior swelling, where the striae are much coarser. Stevenson describes only
longitudinal markings, which are also visible on these specimens. The terminal
portions of the two divergent uteri, which form the ovijectors, differ slightly from
the figures given by Stevenson. Each consists of three parts (Text-fig. 2); the
first, opening at the vulva with very thick muscular walls, is about 0.220 mm.
long, and is separated by a sphincter, in the form of a prominent, ring, from a

Text-figs. 4-6. — Cephalostrongylus quadriradiatus.
Posterior end of male, side view, (x 200) ; 5. The same, dorsal view. (x200).
j'.Z'., ventre- ventral ray ; I. v., latero-ventral ray; f./. , externo-Iateral ray;
ni.L, medio-lateral ray; p. I., postero-lateral ray; e.d., externo-dorsal ray ;
d.r,, dorsal ray; 6, male spicules and chitinous support, (x 380).

narrower, but still muscular part 0.117 mm. long, which is continuous with the
uterus. Eggs contained in this part of the uterus measure 0.067 by 0.039 mm.,
and are still in the early stages of segmentation . The genital pore is a transverse

556 NEMATODE PARASri'ES OF TlIK DOMESTIC PIGEON,

slit U.04U iiim. wide. The boily is U.U44 uuu. iu diameter id the anus. Be-
hind it the slender tail (Text-fig. 3) ends bluntly; the fine terminal spine which
it bears, is about 0.015 mm. long, and penetrates the cuticle to connect with the
internal protoplasm. It appears to te hollow, and of a glandular nature.

Each lobe of the male bursa (Text-figs. 4, 5)' measures about 0.143 mm. in
width, and 0.130 to 0.170 mm. in depth. The tips of the two ventral rays are
only 0.006 mm. apart. Of the lateral rays, the externo-lateral is the longest,
and is curved \entrally, its tip being some distance from the margin of the
bursa, and 0.034 mm. from that of the latero-ventral . The distance between
the posterolateral and externo-dorsal is a little less, 0.028 mm. The distances
between the tips of the lateral rays are greater, 0.04fl mm. between postero- and
medio-lateral, and twice as much between medio- and externo-lateral. The pre-
bursal papillae are 0.013 mm. long, and are situated laterally, 0.052 mm. in
front of the base of the bursa. The two equal spicules (Text-flg. 6) measure
0.148 mm. long, and taper distally to end in three slender pointed branches,
which are surrounded by the chitinous supporting piece, 0.041 mm. long.

Stevenson states that this worm, when present in large numbers, causes a
debilitating diarrhoea, and general disorder of the nutritive functions of the host
bird This he thinks to be due both to a loss of blood, and to the piercing of
the mucosa, leaving open channels for fatal infection with bacteria. Shipley
(1909") includes the species in his list (p. 335) of those harmful to birds, and
Ncumaiin-l\facqneen (1905). and Neveu-Jjcmaire (1912). referring evidently to
Stevenson's statement, both record it as producing grave disorders, bacterial in-
fection, catarrh, and profuse diarrhoea.

But in this case there was no evidence that the worm, though present in fairly
large numbers, caused any harmful effect. The walls of the intestine were not
in nn inflamed catarrhal condition, and. as already stated, ajipeared to bo perfectly
healthy .

Family TRICHINELLTDAE Stiles and Cvaiio, 1910.

Subfamily TRICHURINAE Ransom. 1911.

Genus Capillakia Zeder, 1800 .

Generic diag)!osis (from Hall 1916).— Body very slender, capillary: anterior,
oesophageal portion of body shorter than, or rarely equal to the posterior portion
of body. Bacillary band dorsal, ventral, or lateral, or absent. Oesophagus long
and slender, gradually increasing in size posteriorly. Spicule long and slender, sur-
rounded by a sheath which may present a smooth outer surface when evaginated,
or a surface armed with spines. Tail of male may or may not be provided with
membranous wings, and a membranous bursa-like structure, these being usually in-
conspicuous when present. \'ulva located near the base of the oesophagus. Eggs
lemon shaped, with the usual opercular plugs.

Type species, Capillaria tumida Zecler, 1803 (= Tritiioicp/ia/iis ana/is Sclirank.
1790 = Trichosoina hrevicolle Kudolplii, 1819).

This genus, established by Zedcr to include forms characterised by a filiform
l)ody, with a very slender anterior part merging almost insciisildy into a I'ather
tliicker posterior jtart, was renamed Tricluisowa b.y Rudolidii in 1819. Tt is under
this name that most of its species have since been described, the original name
being re-established by Stiles and Hassall only in 1905, when they published their
"Determination of Generic Types, and a List of Roundworm Genera."

BY VERA IRWIN SMITH. 557

Most of the descriptions of species are very meag're aud unsatisfactory. In
1845 Bellingham remarked tliat "as the species are all exceedingly small, and
resemble each other very closely (almost the only difference being a little greater
or less thickness of body), and as the male and female are not always found to-
gether, it is very difficult to determine the species accurately." Later hehuinth-
ologists seem to have experienced the same difficulty, and a good deal of confusion
still exists in regard to specific diagnosis.

However, only one species of Capillaria has been recorded from pigeons,
namely, Capillaria columbae, and the worms found here have been identified as
belonging to this species. Bellingham did not give any name or description to
the Nematode which he found in the small intestine of C'olumba livia in Ireland,
but it was probably the same worm. Dujardin, who states that several specimens
had been sent to the Museum of Paris from the Museum, of Vienna, and were
described by him for the first time, supplies the description (1845) which has
been repeated, or closely followed, in nearly all subsequent records. In Vienna,
according to Dujardin, it was found nine times in 245 in the large intestine of
C'olumba domestica. Neumann records it as a frequent and abundant species in the
small intestine of this pigeon, and quotes Pauly and Zurn as stating that it often
determines an intense intestinal catarrh, which leads to anaemia, and consump-
tion. Neveu-Lemaire also refers to a "trichosomosis" of the pigeon caused by
its presence, which had been studied both by Tartakowski and Pauly and Zurn.
He says that, at an autopsy of an infected bird, the intestinal mucosa was found
to be greyish, tumefied, and covered witli red striae and petechiae.

None of these symptoms were observed in the bird, from which tho present
specimens were obtained, though they were found in fair numliers throughout
the intestines.

Capillaria colujibae Rudolphi.

Triclwsoma coliimhne, Cat. Ent. Vind. Msc. — ISlil. Riidol|ihi, Synops.. p.
15.— 1845. Bellingham, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., xiv.. p. 477.— 1845, Calodiiim
tenue, Dujardin, Hist. Nat. de Helm., p. 28. — 1851, Trichosomum [Calodium)
tenuissimwm Diesing, Syst. Helm., ii. pp. 256, 257. — 1861, Calodium tenue,
Molin II. sottor. d. Acrofalli, Mem. Instit. Veneto, ix., p. 192. — 1803. Trich-
osomum lenuissimum., Eberth, Nemat. Untersuch., Leipzig, p. 56, tab. vi.. fig. 2.
— 1878, Linstow, Compend. d. Helm., p. 119.— 1883. Pauly and Zurn, Deutsche
Zeitschr. f. Thiermed., ix., p. 200.— 1886. Leidy, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad., p.
310.— 1890. Stossich, Boll. Soc. Adriat. Sc. Nat.. Trieste, xii., p. 12.— 1895,
Eailliet, Traite Zool. Med. et Agric, 2nd edit., pp. 485-486.-1898, Trichosoma
columbae. Stossich, Program, civ. Scuola reale super., Trieste. — 1899, Trichosoma
teriuissimum, Perroncito, Giorn. R. Soc. Acad, veterin. ital.. xlviii.. n. 38, p.
889. — 1901. Tartakowski, Arehiv. veter. Nauk. p. 1045. — 1905, Neumann-Mac-
queen, Parasites and Par. Diseases Dom. Anim., 2nd edit., p. 414. — 1906. Bar-
bagallo. Boll. Soc. ciilto. sc. med.-natur. Cagliari. ii.. n. 4, p. 143. — 1912, Parona,
L'Elmint. Italiana. ii.. p. 118. — 1912. TricJiosomum columbae, Neveu-Lemaire.
Parasit. Anim. Dom., Paris, pp. 764-765. — 1914. CapiUaria dujardin! , Travassos,
Brazil-Medico, xxviii.. p. 429. — 1915. Travassos. Rio de .Taneiro. Mem. Instit.
Oswaldo Craz, vii.. pp. 153. 160.

Found in about equal numbers with Ceplialostrongylus columbae in the in-
testines of the same bird. The measurements correspond fairly closely with those

558

NEMATODE PARASITES OF THE DOMESTIC PIGEON^

given by Dujardin. The males are from 8.4 to 11.7 mm. long, and the anterior
part, occupied by the oesophag-us, is a little less than half the total length, in
a specimen 9.7 mm. long the proportions being -4.64 : 5.06. The females mea-
sure from 13 to 16.24 mm., an<l the relative lengths of anterior and posterior
portions 6.24 : 10. The diameter at the anterior end is about 0.006 mm. In
a male of 11.3 mm., the maximum diameter is 0.049, at the posterior extremity
0.028, at the base of the oesophagus 0.039, and about the middle of the oeso-
phagus 0.026 mm. The spicule. 1.44 mm. long, has an almost uniform width
of 0.007 mm., but is swollen at its anterior extremity into a hollow open knob
0.020 mm. wide (Text-fig. 13) . At its posterior extremity it is bluntly rounded
(Text-fig. 14). It is enclosed in a sheath which is very distinctly marked with
transverse striae at intervals of 0.002 mm. in the posterior 'part, the striae be-

Text-fit;s.7-14. — Capi/laria colimihac.
Anterior end. (x 230). 8. Posterior end of female, (x 230), <;h. , amis; 9. Pos-
terior end of male, (x 230) ; 10. Kegion of junction of oesophaj^us (oe.) and
intestine (int.), (x 2.30). i6.,bacillary band; /., lumen of oesophagus; «.,
nucleus; 11. Vagina and uterus, containing eggs, (x 140) ; 12. Egg in
terus. (x 230) ; 13. Anterior end of male spicule, (x 230) ; It. Posterior end
of spicule, in sheath, (x 230).

coming fuier. and more indefinite towards the anterior end. In a few specimens
a considcralile portion of the sheath is everted, and the si)icule is projecting, but
in the majority the spicule is withdrawn some distance into the interior of the
body. It shows delicate. l>ut iiTegular, eross markings. The doacal aperture
is tierminal, and is |irovided with a small bursa-like stnicture, consisting of two
lateral lobular projections of the internal piotoida-smic substance, connected by a
delicate membrane. Travassos states it In lie tlircc-lolx'd, and in side view it has
this appearance (Text-fig. 9) .

In the females the maximum diameter is 0.060 to 0.067 mm., at the ba,se of
the oesophagus 0.049 mm., middle of oesophagus 0.036 mm., and at posterior
extremity, which is bluntly rounded (Text-fig. 8), 0.030 mm. The anus is sub-

BY VERA IRWIN SMITH. 550

terminal, and the vulva opens on a very slight prominence 0.026 mm. behind the
junction of oesophagus and intestine. The muscular vagina into which it leads
is 0.224 mm. long (Text-fig. 11) . The eggs nearest to it measure 0.044 by 0.023
mm. There are two lateral bacillary bands extending along the whole length
of the body (Text-fig. .10) . In both sexes the width is from ;1 to J the diameter
of the body. The spots on their surface, corresponding to unicellular glands, are
irregularly distributed, and vary in size. According to Jagerskiold (1901) these
glands replace the ordinai-y Nematode excretory system in this family. The
general structure of CapiUaria columb(ie corresponds very closely with the de-
scription given Ijy Sliii^ley (1909) of Trichosomicm longicolle. The cells of the
"cellular body" or oesophagiis (Text-fig. 10) are from 0.096 to 0.143 mm. long,
and are marked, by circular constrictions, into a series of from 8 to 12 segments.
An oval nucleus (n.) 0. 023 by 0.018 mm. in size, is centrally situated in each
cell, and the very fine lumen of the oesophagus (Text-fig. 10,2) extends through
the middle of the single row of cells. Two lobes can be seen of the glandular
body situated at the junction of oesophagus and intestine.

In 1914 Railliet and Henry separated the sub-family Ileterakinae from the
family Ascaridae, and raised it to family rank, including in it all polymyarian
Nematodes in which a pre-anal sucker is present in the male. In this family
they included Dujardin's old sub-genus of Ascaris, Ascaridia, which had been
united by Schneider, and all subsequent workers, with the genus Heterakis. The
species found in different Columbiformes and commonly known as Heterakis
maculosa forms one of the thirty-four species enumerated by them as belonging
to this genus.

According to tliis classification, its systematic position is as follows: —

Family HBTERAKIDAE Railliet and Henry, 1914.

Genus A s C A R I D I .\ Dujardin, 1845.

Species Ascaridia columbae Gmelin. 1789.

Generic diagnosis (from Railliet and Henry 1914). — Mouth with three lips.
Oesophagus club-shaped, without bulb. Generally two lateral membranes. .Male
with feeble caudal wings; spicules equal or sub-equal, without accessory piece;
preanal sucker slightly projecting, rounded, with horny ring: papillae relatively
large. Female with vulva towards the middle of the body; uteri divergent; eggs
with thick .shell, with a clear granulation inside the shell, at one of the poles.

Ascaridia columbae Gmelin.

1782, Ascaris teres, Goeze, Naturg., p. 84, PI. 1. fig. 6. — 1789, Ascaris
columbae, Gmelin, Syst. Natur., p. 3034. — 1809. Ascaris maculosa, Rudolphi,
Entoz., ii., 1, p. 158. PI. 1, figs. 14, 16.— 1802, Rudolphi, Wiedem. Arch., ii., 2,
p. 22. — 1819, Rudolphi, Synops., p. 45. — Bremser, Icones helm., PI. iv., figs.
25-28.— 1842. Civinini, Catal., Lucca.- 1844, Bellingham, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist.,
xiii., p. 170. — 1845, Ascaridia columbae, Dujardin, Hist. Nat. d. Helm., p. 219.
—1851, Diesing, Syst. Helm., ii., pp. 182-183.-1861, Diesing, Sitz. k. Akad.
Wien, xlii. (Revis. d. Nemat.), p. 666. — 1857, Ascaris teres, Prestal, Allgem.
deutsch. naturh. Zeitg., iii., p. 353. — 1858, Leuckart, Trochel's Arch., ii., p. 108.
— 1866, Heterakis maculosa, Schneider, Monogr. d. Nemat., p. 72, tab. iii., fig.
11, text-flg.— 1871, Ascaris sp., Krefft, Trans. Ent. Soc, N.S.W., 2, p. 212.—

560 NEMATODE PARASITES OF THE DOMESTIC PIGEON,

1878. Eeterakis maculosa, Linstow, Compeud. d. Helm., p. 119. — 1868, Ascaris
maculusa, Unterbergei-, Oest. Viert. f. wiss. Veterin., p. 38. — 1877, Ueterakis
VHiculosa, Ereolaui, Mem. accad. sc. istit. Bologna, ser. 3, vii., pp. 465-467. —
1877, Bassi, II. med. veterin., Torino, vi., 4, pp. 232-236, and in Giorn. mod.
veterin. praetica, Tdiino. — 1887, Parona, Ann. Mus. civ. Geneva, xxiv., ser. 2.
IV., pp. 275, 483.— 1889, Linstow, Comp. d. Helm., Nacbt., p. 43.— 1890. Stos-
sicli. Boll. See. adriat., Sc. nat., xii., p. 49. — 1891, Stossich, Boll. Soc. adriat..
xiii., p. 109.— 1892, Neumann, Traite d. malad. para.sit., 2nd edit.— 1893, Stos-
sich, Boll. Soc. adriat., xiv.. p. 83. — 1895, Railliet. Traite d. zool. med. et. agric,
2nd edit., pp. 406-407. — 1898, Stossich. Progr. civ. Scuola reale super., Trieste.
—1899, Linstow, Mitt. Zool. Samm. Mus. Berl.. 1 (2), p. 11, taf. 11, fig. 17.—
1896, Galli-Valerio, Manuale pai-assit., Milano. — 1901, GaUi-Valerio, Bull. Soc,
Vaudoise Se. Nat., xxxvii., p. 343. — 1901. Messner, Zeitsehr. f. Flpisch u. Milch
hygiene, xi., p. 241. — 1902, Perroncito, I parassiti, 2nd edit., p. 380. — 1902,
Lisi. II nuo Ercolani, Pisa, an. vii., p. 211. — 1005. Stiles and Hassall. Bur.
Anim. Indust., Bull., 79, p. 118. — 1905, Neumanu-Mac(iueen, Parasit., 2n<l edit.,
pp. 413-414. — 1904, Sabrazes and Salm, Gaz. hebd. d. se. med. de Bordeaux, p.
117. — 1906, Barbagallo, Boll. Soe. eulto. Sc. med.-natur. Cagliari, an. xi.. p.
143. — 1907, Neumann, F'ara.sites et mal. parasit. des oiseaux dom., pp. 146-148. —
1907. Alessandrini, Boll. Soc. Zool. ital.. Roma. ser. 2. viii.. pp. 220-224.—
1907. Alessandrini. Ann. d'Igieue. Roma, n.s..xvii., pp. 323-329. 1 tab.— 1909.
Alessandrini, Ann. d'Igiene speriment., Roma, p. 497. — 1909, Hautefeuille.
Amiens Bull Soe. Linn., xix.. No. 392. pp. 429-431.— 1912. Neveu-Lcmaire,
Parasitol. Anim. Dom.. Paris, pp. 677-679. — 1909, Johnston. Free. Linu. Soc.
N.S. "Wales, xxxiv.. p. 412.-1910, .Johnston, Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W.. xliv.,
p. 121. — 1911, Wolffhugel, Rev. d. Centro Est. de Agi-onomia y Vet., Buenos
Aires, p. 78.-1912, Johnston. Rep. Gov. Bur. Microbiol. N.S.W.. ii., p. 1.35.
— 1912. Ascariih'a maculosa, Railliet and Henry, Bull. Soc. Pathol, exot., v.. No. 4,
p. 251. — 1913. Ascaridia columhae, Trava.ssos, Mem. d. Instit. Oswaldo Cruz, v.,
3. pp. 289, 291. PI. 28. fig. 16.-1914. AscaricUa maculosa. Railliet and Henry,
IXo Congres Internat. d. Zool.. Rennes, p. 678. — 1918. Ascaridia cnhdiihac,
Johnston. TMeni. Queensland Mus.. vi.. pp. 171-174.

In the same bird which harboured C epltalustrongyhts quadri radial us and
Capilhiria columhae were two large specimens, apparently of this worm. One
was inadvertently thrown out wath the faeces, and the other consists of the pos-
terior half. only, of a female.

More recently. Dr. Cleland handed me a phial containing a large number of
preserved specimens of this species. He informs me that they were found in
great numbers, closely packed, in the intestines of some young squabs, sent to the
Board of Health for post-mortem examination, and were considered to have caused
their death.

Dr. Harvey .Johnston says (1018. p. 171): "The parasite was found in
several Brisbane i^geons. occurring in some of them in considerable number, many
of the worms reaching a large size."

Tn other parts of the world it is a common parasite of the pigeon, and is
well known as the cause of a serious, and often fatal, lielminthiasis. especially in
the case of young s(|uabs; b>it it has evidently not been noted, hitherto, as the
cause of mortality among pigeons in this State. Inquiries from the manager of
a large squab company in Sydney elicited the infornintion th;it several squabs.

BY VERA IRWIN SMITH.

561

ranging in age from three to four weeks, had died within a few months from an
unknown cause, and the symptoms described seem to point to the presence of this
worm. In view of the importance of the industry of squab raising, and the pos-
sibility of successful anti-helminthic treatment, it is desirable that all cases of the
occurrence of the worm should be carefully noted. In 1868 Unterberger called
attention to the pathological effects of the parasite, and various writers since,

Text-figs. 1.5-19. — Ascaridia columbae. (x 38).
15. Posterior end of male, ventral view ; 16. Tlio same, lateral view, s., sucker; .«;>.,
spicule; a., anus; 17. Anterior end, showing the three lips; 18. Posterior
end of female, a., anus; b., corpuscles in interior of body; 19. Eggs, (x 38).

including Hautefeuille and Alessandrini, have dealt with the same subject. The
results of their researches, and the treatment adopted to cope with the disease, are
given in most modem text-books on helminth parasitology.

It seems probable that the worm is of fairly general occurrence in pigeons,
but only occasionally in such numbers as to give rise to morbid conditions. Early
helminthologists, descriliing this Nematode, make no mention of any disease caused
by it. ^

Some measurements of the specimens found here are : —

Males, 29 to 31 mm. long. Females, 31 to 37 mm. Maximum diameter, 1.3
to 1.6 mm. Diameter at base of lips 0.22 to 0.32 mm. Anus in female 1.20
mm. from tip of tail, in male 0.40 to 0.51 mm. Preanal sucker 0.20 by 0.16
mm. Spicules 1.7 to 1.9 mm. long. Eggs 0.048 by 0.072 mm. The number
and arrangement of the papillae on the male tail are shown in Text-figs. 15 and
16. The characteristic, large "orbicular corpuscles" in the interior of the female
body, mentioned by Dujardin. from which the specific name maculosa was derived,
are very noticeable (Text-fig. 18 b) .

Literature.

1907. Alessakdrixi. — Sopra una epizoozia nei piccioni da Heterakis maculosa.

Ann. Igieue Soma, n.s. xvii., pp. 323-329, 1 tav.
1845. Bellingham, O. — Catalogue of Irish Entozoa, with obser%'ations. Ann.

Mag. Nat. Hixt.. xiii.. pp. 101-105, 167-174.

562 NEMATODE PARASITES OF THE DOMESTIC PIGEON,

1851. DiESiNG, K. — Systema lielinintlium . Viiulobonae. Vol. ii., pp. 77-360.
1845. DujABDiN, r. — Histoire naturelle des helmintlies ou vers intestinaux. Paris.
1916. Hall, M. — Noraatode parasites of the orders Rodentia, Lagomorpha. anl

Hyraeoidea. Pruc. U.S. Nat. Mus., 50. pp. 1-258, 1 PI.
1896. Hassall. — Check list of the animal parasites of pigeons. U.S. Dept.

Agric, Bur. Anim. Industry, Circ. 15.

1908. Hautepeuille. — Entente vermineuse epidemique des pigeons. Amiens

Bull. Soc. linn., xix.. No. 392. pp. 429-431.
1901. Jagerskiold, L. — Weitere Beitrage zur Kenntniss der Nematoden. Chap-
ter 4. Hautdiiisen bei dem Nematoden. Knngl. Xr. \'el.-Aka(i.
Handlingar, xxxv., No. 2, pp. 1-80.

1909. Johnston, T. Harvey. — Notes and Exhibits. Proc. Linn. Soc. X.S.

Wales, xxxiv., p. 412.

1910. Johnston, T. H. — On Australian Avian Entozoa. Proc. Boy. Soc.

N.S.^y.,x\i\■., pp. 84-122.

1912. Johnston, T. H. — On Australian Avian Entozoa. Bep. Gov. Bur.
Microbiol, N.S.W., ii., pp. 122-130.

1918. Johnston, T. H. — The Endopara-sites of the Domestic Pigeon in Queens-
land. Mem. Queensland Mu.s., vi., pp. 168-174.

1871. Krefpt. — On Au.stralian Entozoa. Trans. Ent. Soc. .^'..S'.ir., ii., p. 212.

1878. Linstow, 0. von. — Compendium der Helrainthologie. Hannover.

1889. Linstow, 0. von. — Compendium der Helminthologie . Nachtrag.

1905. Neumann-Macqdeen. — Parasites and Parasitic Diseases of Douiest. Ani-
mals. 2nd edition.

1912. Neveu-Lemaire, M. — Parasitologie des Aniiuaux domestiques. Maladies
parasitaires non bacteriennes . Paris.

1912. Parona, C. — L'elmintologia italiana da suoi primi tempi all'anno 1910.
Vol. i. Bibliografia. Vol. ii. Storia, sistematiea, corologia.

1895. RaHjLiet, a. — Traite de zoologie raedicale et agricole. 2e. ed. Paris.
Nemathelminthes, pp . 385-571 .

1912. Railliet, a. and Henry, A. — Quelques Nematodes parasites des Reptiles.
Bull. Soc. Pathologic CTotique, v., (4), pp. 251-259, 3 figs.

1914. Railliet and Henry. — Essai de classification des "Heterakidae." Bep.
9th Congres internat. de zool., Rennes, pp. 674-682.

1911. Ransom, B. — Two new species of parasitic nematodes. Proc. U.S. Xat.

Mus., xli., pp. 363-369.
1866. Schneider, A. — Monographic der Nematoden. Berlin.
1909. SiiiPLKY, A. E. — The Threadworms (Nematoda) ot the Red Grouse

{Lagopus scoticus). Proc. Zool. Soc. Lorid., i.. ]i]). 335-350. Pis.

48-55.

1904. Stevenson. — A new parasite (Strongi/liis iinadriradialiis, n.sp.) found

in the jiigeon. Preliminary report. U.S. Dcjil. .lyric. Bur. .{nini.
Undtuilry, Circ. 47.

1905. Stiles and Has.sall. — The determination of generic types, and a list of

round worm genera, with tlicir original and type species. U.S. Dept.
Agric, Bur. Anim. Indusl.. Bull. 711.

1890. Stossich, M. — 11 genere Trichosoma Rudolphi. Lavoro monografieo. Boll.

Soc. adriat. Sc. nat. Trieste, xii., pp. 3-36.

BY VERA IRWIN SMITH. 5(33

1899. Stossich, M. — Strongylidae. Lavoro monogi-afico. Boll. Soc. adriat. Sc.

Nat. Trieste, xix., pp. 55-152.
1913. Travassos, L. — Sobre es espeeies brazileiras da subfamilia Heterakinae

Railliet and HeniT. Mem. Instit. Osvaldo Cruz, v. (3), pp. 271-

318, P'.K 27-31, figs. 1-35.
1915. Travassos, L. — Coiitribuicao para o coubecimento da fauna helmintolojica

brazileira. v. Sobi'e as espeeies brasileiras do genero Capillaria

Zeder., 1800. Mem. Instit. Osiraldo Cruz, vii. (2), pp. 146-172, Pis

23-26, flgs. 1-14.
1868. Unterbergep. — Ueber Vorkommen und Entwicklung von Ascaris macidosn.

Oesterr. Vierteljahrssclir. fur unssensch. V eterinarkunde, Wien, p. 38.
1911. WoLFPHUGEL. — Los Zooparasitos de los Animales Domesticos en la Re-

publioa Argentina. Bevista Centr. Estud. Agron. Y. V,eter., Buenos

Ayres. pp. 1-108, Nematodes pp. 49-79.

564

A FEW NOTES ON THE BOTANY OF LORD HOWE ISLAND.

(Sixth paper.*)

Br J. H. Maidex^ I.S.O., F.R.S., F.L.S., Government Botanist and
Director of the Botanic Gardens, Sydney.

Since the publication of my last paper, the following have appeared : —

1. "A revised list of Norfolk Island flora, with some notes on the species,"
by Robert M. Laiug. Trans. N.Z. Inst., xlvii., 1915.

2. "The vegetation and flora of Lord Howe Island," by W. R. B. Oliver,
Trans. N.Z. Inst., xlix, 1917, 94. Free access was given Mr. Oliver to the Lord
Howe and Norfolk Islands collections in the National Herbarium, Sydney, when
he was preparing his paper.

Mr. J. L. Boorm.an paid a \-isit to Lord Howe Island from February to
April of the present year, on business of the Board of Control of tlie Island, and
took the opportunity of making botanical collections for the National Herbaiium,
Sydney.

The vast majority of the plants he brought have already l)een recorded, but
the following presumably indigenous species are believed to be new records : —

1. Malcastnim tricuspidatum A. Gray. 2. Erythraea cmstralis R.Br.

I am aware that there may be a difference of opinion as to whether they
are truly indigenous, judging from observations in regard to the Norfolk Island
flora (see Laing).

He collected Mesembryanthemum australe Sol., recorded by Oliver, p. 137;
also Kyllinga monocephala Rottb. (Oliver, p. 128).

Messrs. H. T. Wilson and E. King brought specimens of Adiantuin for-
mosum R.Br, (name confirmed by Mr. T. Whitelegge) from the south-^est
slope of the Island, locally known as the "Little Slope," near the salt water.
"Grows 2 ft. 6 inches, and very strong, and not noticed before." This fern does
not appear to liave been previously recorded from the Island.

Mr. Boorman brought specimens of a variegated Palm, and in view of the
fact that variegation is not a common chai-aeter in the Family, it is worthy of
record. The plant is Howea Forsteriana Becc, and a pleasing parallel variega-
tion extends throu'j:hout the plant, affecting both rachises and leaflets. The
tree (the only one on the Island), is about 30 feet high,, and i)rol)ably 30 or 40
years of age. It is growing at Erskine Valley, near the Burnt Hut.

•Previous reference, These Proceedings, xxxix., 1914, p.377.

BT J. H. MAIDEX.

565

Oliver (p. 129) draws attention to Hybrids of Howea. I have had some of
these plants under observation since 1910, but hesitated to jjublish anything, as
I desired to keep them under observation. My original plants came from the
holding the late Edward King, who had four trees. Five additional plants
(from the same locality) were obtained from the late Rev. AV. W. Watts in
September, 1916.

Mr. Boorman reports that during his exploration of the more coastal areas
of the Island, he met with several additional instances of hybrid Howeas, more
particularly at the north end of the Island in the vioinity of the rifle-range; also
on property occupied by a Mr. Campbell Stevens, and by Mr. Thompson ad-
jacent. They all appeared to be of the same character as those on Deep Creek
to the south-west of the Island, already refeiTcd to.

I contrasted the hybrids in 1916 with H. Belmorea»a and H. Forsteriana as
follows : —

H. Belmoreana.

2. H. Forsteriana.

3. Hybrid.

(a) Leaf segments con-
verging upwards.

(b) Fruit spikes elon-
gated { individual ) .

(c) Fruits plump, pro-
duced into a shortly
truncate apex.

(a) Drooping.

(b) Fruit spikes shorter
than those of H. Bel-
moreana (clustered at
the base, from 3 to 8.)

(c) Longer and narrower
than those of H. Bel-
moreana, the truncate
apex not produced.

(a) and (b) Leaf seg-
ments and fruiting
spikes as in i?. Bel-
moreana, and its fruits
barely separable from
that species . The mid-
rib of the leaf has the
leaflets (segments)

converging upwards,
but not quite so curly
as H. Belmoreana.

(c) Colour of fruits duU
carrnine lake (Plate
106, shade 4), with a
base of cherry red
(Dauthenay's Reper-
toire de Couleurs,
Plate 91, shade 3).

Mr. 5). N. W^rd (18th August, 1920) reports on these hybrid Hoiveas as
follows : —

"They are verv variable in size, habit and colour of stem. Five are still in pots
in the small bush house. The five planted out in November. 1916 have grown well;
two of these are in the palm bed in section 9 in the Lower Garden, one in bed 25
near the Keieleeria japonica tree, and one in bed 20 in the Middle Garden. The
other is on the western side of the creek. Upper Garden.

Of the four planted eleven months later, onlj' one is alive and that is doing
badly in bed A, lawn 22, Lower Garden, These were planted on low lying ground,
very wet in winter, and while these conditions suit some palms they did not suit
these hybrids," ■ '

The following introduced plants collected by Mr. Boorman appear to be new
records : —

566 A FEW XOTES OX THE BOTANY OF LORD HOWE ISLAND.

COMPOSITAE. — Ageratum conyzoides L. (Garden escape); Galinsoga paryi-
flora Cav.; Aster sub ulatim Micbx. ; Eupatoriiim catinabinum L.

Crucifebae. — Sisymbrium officinale L.

Labiatae. — Stachys arvensis L.

SoLAXACEAE. — Datura Stramunium L. ; Nicotiaiia alata Liiik and Otto (Gar-
den escape).

Umbelliferae. — Daucus bracliiatus Sieb.

LiLiACEAE. — Asparagus plumosus var. nanus Baker (Garden escape). (Not
in flower or fruit, ftnd therefore subject to confirmation. Its tough stems point it
out as likely to become a pest.)

Gramineae. — Dactyloctenium aegyptiacum Willd.

5(57

SPECIAL GENERAL MEETING.

14th June, 1920.

In Commemoration of the Centenary of the Birth of Sib William Macleat.

Mr. J. .). Fletcher, M.A., B.Se., President, in the Chair.

Presidential Address,

"THE SOCIETY'S HERITAGE FROM THE MACLEAYS."

Yesterday (Sunday, 13th June) was the centenary of Sir William Maeleay's
birth. At that time George iv. was King. The Princess Alexandrina Victoria,
afterwards Queen Victoria, was an infant about thirteen months old. "Science
all over the world" was about to lose "its Nestor," Sir Joseph Banks, whose
splendid labours ended six days later (on .June 19th, 1820) . William Sharp
Macleay, cousin of William, had published his first contribution to scientific know-
ledge. Part i. of the Hor* Entomologieae, in the preceding year, 1819. Part ii.
of the same work was published in the year following (1821), so that William
Macleay was bom in the interval between the issue of the two Parts.

Coming nearer home — Sydney, the first British settlement in Australia, had
been founded a few months over thirty-two years. Major-General Laehlan Mac-
quarie was Governor of New South Wales. Not (juite five years before, the ex-
plorations of Blaxland, Lawson and Wentworth, and later of Evans, and the
subsequent construction of a road over the Blue Mountains by William Cox, had
made it possible for the Governor, "accompanied by his lady, and followed by a
numerous retinue," including J. W. Lewin, artist, to jpurney to Bathurst Plains,
and fix upon the site for the township of Bathurst. Railways, telegraphs,
steamers, penny postage and postage stamps were then unknown.

Of the century now ended, into which William Macleay was born, he spent
about eighteen years and nine months in Scotland, his native land, and on the
voyage out to Australia. For nearly fifty-three years he resided in New South
Wales, except for a few months on his expedition to New Guinea in 1875. His
fruitful labours ended somewhat more than twenty-eight years ago.

Sir William Macleay, by his example and influence, and by his own efforts
during a period of about seventeen years, and by his benefactions, largely made
the Linnean Society of New South Wales possible in its present developed form.
The sustained co-operation and help of a long succession of members, extending
over a period of more than forty-five years, have contributed to make it what it
is to-day. A question in which we are interested, and that may be asked in a
legitimate way. is : How came he to be so interested in science as to become first of

508 president's address.

all a scientific- worker; and then later on, to undertake the role of benefactor and
promoter of Natural History, in the broad sense, in New South Wales? What
were the elemental circumstanees which shaped his career, from a scientific stand-
point?

Unfortunately we have no autobiographical information, and very little in
the way of biographical details, which will supply satisfactory answers to these
([uestions. Nevertheless, there are some records of important facts, which, when
one knows how to correlate them, will supply an outline of the story of his scien-
tific life. These will be considered later in their proper place. Just at the
present stage, it suffices to say that, when the facts are appreciated, it is realised
that William Macleay does not stand alone; but tliat, primarily, he was largely
the product of family influence and example; and the last and youngest of a
succession of Macleays interested in science, in which, under the circumstances,
it was natural that he should take his place. For this reason alone, the Society
is interested in the Macleays. But there are other reasons also.

The Society's Hall, which it owes to the generosity of Sir William, is lucated
on part of the old garden, which was laid out by Alexander Macleay about ninety-
two years ago. The old home is in the immediate neighbourhood. Many dis-
tinguished visitors, who knew the occupants of Elizabeth Bay House, have left
records of their ^'isits and experiences.

Alexander Macleay may be called the "Father of Zoology" in Australia. He
brought liis collection of insects and his library with him from England in 1825.
and ended his days here. When he left England, his collection was considered to
be the finest in the possession of a private individual. Tlie amalgamated collec-
tions of Alexander Macleay, W . S . Macleay, and William Macleay were presented
to the University of Sydney in 1889, to form the nucleus of the Macleay ]\[useum.
I may remind you that one of the conditions attached to the gift was — "That the
[Macleay] Museum should be made easily accessible to students of Natural
History and members of the Linnean Society of New South Wales."

The Macleays were uninterruptedly associated with the Linnean Society of
London, as Fellows, for a period of ninety-seven years (1794-1891), and for
twenty-seven years Alexander Macleay was Secretary. For about forty-seven years
they were Members of the governing body of the Australian Museum or of its
forerunner, the Colonial Museum.

The Society has interesting memorials of all of them, as well as of some of
their scientific and other friends and contemporaries.

The two branches of the family in which we are interested have now come
to an end, in the direct line. In the sense in which I mean it, the Society may be
considered to have inherited tlie family scientific tinditions. as well as some of the
family possessions.

The original sources of information of a biographical character concerning A.
and W. S. Macleav are brief obituary notices wliich w-ere published in the Sridney
Morning Herald, and the memorial notices of them, as Fellows, communicated to
the Linnean Society of London. Later notes in various Biographical Dictionaries
or elsewhere, are based on one or other of these, usually the second. It is pos-
sible to amplify tliese to some extent in respect of matters in which we are
specially interested, but tlie sources of information are fnigmentary and scattered.
Anytliing like detailed formal biographies, or even satisfadoiy bioLiiniihicnl
sketches, are not possible, from a lack of adequate material.

THK society's HERITAGE FROM THE MACLEAYS. 569

It is to be remembered, too, that the Macleays were interested in Science lor
its own sake, and as a study to be cultivated in their leisure hours. Less than a
century ago, an interest in Zoology was a good asset for a hobby, especially
for a man of means and leisure, but an unfruitful one for embarking on a
professional career. One of a later generation who ventured to make the ex-
periment, Edward Forbes (1815-54), almost repented of his choice of Zoology as
a profession. Writing to his friend Thompson in January, 1847, he said: "The,
more I see, the more I am convinced, that no man should take up Science as his
profession, unless he has some independence to fall back on." (Memoir of
Edward Forbes, F.R.S., by G. Wilson and A. Geikie, p. 410, 1861.)

A lack of uniformity in the mode of spelling the family surname wiU be
noticeable. By the members of the family in the old days, MacLeay was the
customary way ; but, in their later years, both W . S . and William Macleay signed
their names in the manner to which we are accustomed. By writers outside the
family, the name was sometimes written McLeay or M'Leay.

W. S. Macleay's Christian names were William Sharp, and not William
Sharpe, as so often printed.

Alexander Macleay, F.R.S., F.L.S.

Born in the County of Ross, June 24th, 1767 — Chief Clerk of the Prisoners
of War OflSce, 1795 — Head of the Department of Correspondence of the
Transport Board, 1797— Secretary of the Board, 1806-1818— Colonial Secre-
tary of New South Wales, 1825-1836— First Speaker of the Legislative
Council, 1843-46— Died in Sydney, July 19th, 1848.

No definite record of the beginning of Alexander Macleay's interest in
Entomology is available. But his election to the Linnean Society, in 1794, offers
a suggestive clue. The inaugural meeting of the Society, convened by Dr. J. E.
Smith, the possessor of the Linnean collections, was held on 26th February, 1788,
seven Naturalists being present, one of whom was Thomas Marsham. At the
second meeting, on 18th March, six gentlemen were present. The roll of the
foundation members was made up consisting of twenty ordinary Fellows, includ-
ing the Rev . William Kirby, three Honorary Fellows, including Sir Joseph Banks,
and eleven Associates. Dr. J. E. Smith was elected President, and T. Marsham
Secretary. At the third meeting, "at the Opening of the Linnean Society," on
8th April, the President delivered a "Discourse on the Rise and Progress of
Natural History."

A. Macleay was elected a Fellow of the Society about six years afterwards,
in 1794. In the absence of more exact information, his election may be taken to
imply an awakening interest in natural history, and particularly entomology.
It is probably true that his friendship with Marsham and Kirby spurred his
pursuit of entomology; just as, at a later period, "close relations" with Kirby
and Spence, and Alexander Macleay, are said to have spurred W. J. Hooker's
pursuit of entomology in his early days, before he devoted himself entirely to
botany. In 1798, Marsham retired from the position of Secretary, and was
appointed Treasurer; while A. Macleay succeeded him as Secretary. His service
in this capacity lasted for twenty-seven years, until May, 1825. when he resigned,
in consequence of his contemplated removal to Australia, to fill the position of
Colonial Secretary of New South Wales.

570 PRESIDENT S ADDRESS.

We have, unfortunately, no autobiogi-aphical details of liis experiences as
Secretary of the Linnean Society, or of the eminent scientific men of the day
whom he came to know; and very little can bo gleaned from the Society's printed
records. Xor, beyond the bare statement of his official connection with the Trans-
port Board, have any details of his work in that direction come down to us.

The obituary notice of Alexander Macleay read at the Anniversary Meetiug
of the Linnean Society of London, 24th May, 1849, subsequently printed in the
Proceedings (Vol. ii., p. 45), brief as it is, is the most complete biographical
sketch at present available. In this it is stated that — "As a naturalist, Mr.
MacLeay devoted himself almost exclusively to the study of insects, of which he
had formed, previous to his quitting England, the iinest and most extensive col-
lection then existing in the possession of a private individual. Of this great class
of animals he possessed an intimate knowledge, without, however, having pub-
lished anything on the subject, although he had made preparations for a mono-
graph of the singular genus Paiu'isun, in which his cabinet was peculiarly rich."

The history of the collection is brieily but imperfectly given in Barff's "Short
Historical Account of the University of Sydney" (1902) . To this I shall refer
later. I am now able to give a more complete account of it. In outline, but the
particulars wiU be given in chronological order as far as possible, the collection
at the time of its arrival in Australia, in 1826, represented the British or Euro-
pean insects collected by Alexander and W . S . Macleay themselves, of the results
of exchanges with their friends, of specimens purchased from at lea.'^t six noted
private collections, in one ca.se during the owners lifetime, or in the others on
the dispersal of their collections by sale after the decease of the owners, and of
acquisitions of specimens from Brazil, India, North Africa, Australia, and else-
where, some of them possibly donations, but the details of their acquisition are
wanting. The fragmentary history of A. Macleay's collection is the most im-
portant source of information we have about the development of his interest in
zoology.

Thomas Marsham (ob. 1819), and the Rev. William Ivirby (1759-1850),
Rector of Barham, near Ipswich, in Suffolk, seem to have been the two earliest
scientific friends of Alexander Macleay, who profoundly influenced him. They
were both senior in age, and as Fellows of the Linnean Society, keen entomologists,
and owners of important collections. Marsham's collection was eventually sold
in 1819, a few months before his decease; Kirby's was presented to the Entomolo-
gical Society soon after its foundation, in 1833. As Kirby lived in the country,
when railways were unknown, his visits to London were infrequent; but he corre-
sponded regularly with his scientific friends. His biography, "Life of the Rev.
Wm. Kirby," by John Freeman, now a scarce book, was )>ublished in 1852.
This is the only available source of information about mucii that relates to Alex-
ander Macleay tliat is of interest to us. I have been glad to make use of it. an<l
gratefully acknowledge my indebtedness.

A very interesting account of an entomological excursion by Marsham and
Kirby into the Isle of Ely, Northamptonshire, and home by Huntingdonshire,
Cambridge, and Norwich, in July, 1797, is given in Freeman's "Life." Brief
reference is also made to an entomological excursion l)y Kirby, Marsliam, and
Alexander Macleay ; but neither the date nor scientific details are given.

But a letter, to Kirby, dated "Transport Office, 5th Novemlx-r, 1802." is of
the gi-eatest interest, because it is the earliest record, by himself, of his interest

THE society's HERITAGE PEOM THE MACLEAYS. 571

in entomology that ^ve have, written after his return from a visit to Scotland :
"Jly dear Friend, — I return you my best thanks for your letter, which I would
have answered from Caithness, if I had met with anything worth communicating.
But I could only tell you of my being- prevented from looking after insects by
continued rains, snow, and high winds, during the whole of my stay in the county.
Indeed, so bad a season was never known ; and a more serious consequence
than my entomological disappointment is, that the crop of oats in Caithness has
almost entirely failed. Notwithstanding the unfavourable state of the weather,
however, I was much gratified by my visit to the north. I had reason to believe
that very considerable improvement had been made in my native county during
the sixteen years I had been absent; but, I assure you, I found the county im-
proved far beyond my most sanguine expectations." ....

"In order that I might see as much as possible of the north of Scotland, I
\isited the Orkney- Islands, and the north coast of Scotland, as far as Cape
Wrath." . . .' .

"Through the whole of my travels, I lost no oppoitunity of collecting insects.
Indeed, I collected almost every one that I saw. I have, in the whole, about 250
or 300 specimens, but they are not yet arrived here ; and I know not whether there
be anything new. There are very few Hymenoptera. If there be any duplicates
worth your having, they are yours."

The offer of duplicates of Hymenoptera recalls the fact that, in the early part
of the year, one of Kirby's many contributions to science had been published,
■'Monographia Apum Anglise," Ipswich, 1802.

Alexander Macleay's collection thus probably began with British insects which
he himself collected, or obtained by exchange with his entomological friends.
The earliest published reference to his active interest in exotic insects known to
me is to be found in a "Memoir of Dru Drury," contained in Vol. xv., of "The
Naturalist's Library," presumably written by the Editor, Sir WiUiam Jardine
(1846) . The writer says: "An individual to whom Drury showed much kindness,
in the hope of being supplied through his means with the insects of New South
Wales, was J. Vi . Lewin, author of a small, but original, and really valuable
work, entitled "A Natural History of the Lepidopterous Insects of New South
Wales." It appears from Lewin's letters that he was in a great measure illiterate,
and had been subjected to many difficulties so that it was a good while before he
could do much towards the fulfilment of Drury's wishes. They continued, how-
ever, to communicate with each other for a considerable time; Di-ury supplying
goods to no small amount, which were to be repaid in insects. In his necessities,
Lewin is not backward in his demands on the liberality of his friend, who sup-
plied him, among many other miscellaneous articles, with the copperplates on
which he engraved his insects and birds, and even with the paper for printing
them. Thomas Marsham, author of the Entomologia Britannica, and Alexander
Macleay, afterwards united with Druiy in advancing money to Lewin while he
was at Botany Bay, expecting the value to be returned to them in insects."

Dru Drury [172,5-1804] was a very remarkable man, a goldsmith, silversmith,
and cutler, and one of the "most zealous and successful collectors of insects that
ever prosecuted the study in this country." He was also the author of "Illustra-
tions of Exotic Entomology," 3 vols. (1770-82), "in which be made the most in-
teresting objects of his collection known to the public."

After his death, the collection was sold, the sale lasting for three days (May
23-25, 1805) . Professor J. 0. Westwood issued a second edition of the "Illustra-

572 president's address.

tions" (3 vols., 1837), and, in the preface, he gives the names of the purchasers
of some of the lots, and the prices paid, as an interesting record. Among those
given, Mr. Macleay was the purchaser of Lot 64, ''Papiliu claviger and five
others (£7/10/)"; Lot 104, "Thirteen species of the Buprestis genus (£8)";
Lot 112, "Cetonia hamata, nitens^ grandis, Scarabaeus festivus, and 12 others
(£17)"; and Lot 123, "A variety of small insects of the Mordella, Forficula, and
other genera, among which are Diopsis lehneumonia, and also a species of
Paussus, 37 specimens (£7)."

The first published reference to Alexander Macleay's collection, that I know
of, is to be found in the Preface to "An Epitome of the Natural History of the
Insects of New Holland, New Zealand, New Guinea, Otaheite, and other Islands
in the Indian, Southern and Pacific Oceans; with Descriptions and one hundred
and fifty-three beautifully-coloured Plates of the more splendid, beautiful, and
interesting Insects, hitherto discovered in those Countries," &c. : By E . Donovan,
F.L.S., published in 1805. Besides specimens in Sir Joseph Banks' collection,
and in his own, some of them purchased at the sale of Drury's Collection, "The
author has also further to acknowledge the benefit he has derived from inspecting
two other cabinets of celebrity in this country, without the assistance of which
the present illustration would have been far less copious and interesting than it is
at this time: these are the cabinets of Mr. FranciUon, and that of A. Macleay,
Esq., to both of whom he begs leave to express his warmest thanks for this testi-
mony of their friendship." The copy of this rare book in the Society's library
was purchased and presented by Sir William Macleay, the only copy of it which
he had seen.

Another letter from A. Macleay to Kirby, dated 20th February, 1805, is of
very special interest. The writer says: "I have been describing eighteen Botany
Bay Lepidopterous insects which are about to be published by Lewin, with all
their changes and natural history. Amongst them there is a most distinct new
genus (in my opinion), which I propose to name Nycterobius from NuxTopoj3io<;
Noctu victum quaerens. The caterpillars form for themselves holes in
the trunks of trees, where they hide themselves in the daytime: at night, they
come out and gnaw off leaves, which they drag to their holes; and when they
have provided a sufficiency for the nest day's consumption, they retire and feed
leisurely, with their heads towards the mouth of the hole, which is covered by a
curious contrivance. . . . Pray when shall we see you in town?"

The first edition of Lewin's book, entitled "A Natural History of the Lepi-
dopterous Insects of New South Wales. Collected, engraved, and faithfully
painted after Nature. By John William Lewin, A.L.S., late of Parramatta, New
South Wales. Illustrated with 18 Plates (small 4to)," was published in London
in the same year, 1805. Some time before its publication, however, a circular
entitled "Proposals for publishing by subscription a small work of Phatena In-
sects of New South Wales" had been distributed. A second edition, with an addi-
tional plate, was issued in 1822. The book was dedicated to the Right Hon.
Lady Arden, "in grateful remembrance of that goodness which gave the author
an opportunity of employing his talent, as it were, in a new world." As already
mentioned. Drury, Marshara, and Macleay also assisted Lewin.

J. W. Lewin and Thomas Lewin were the sons of William Lewin, F.L.S.
(ob. c. 1795) . the "best zoological painter, and one of the most practical natural-
ists of his day" (Swainson), and author of "The Birds of Great Britain" (7 vols..

THE society's heritage from the macleats. 573

1789-95; second edition, 8 vols, 4to., 1796-1801), "The Insects of Great Britain"
(1 vol., 4to., containing the Papilios only, 1795), and of a paper, "Observations
respecting some rare British Insects" (Trans. Linn. Soc, Vol. iii., 1797) ; and a
contemporary of Dru Drury, and A. Macleay. Drury was always on the lookout
for opportunities of getting into touch with intending travellers and others about
to visit foreign countries. In 1771, with the financial co-operation of Sir Joseph
Banks, the Duchess of Portland and some others, he had enabled Henry Smeath-
man to go to Africa as a travelling naturalist and collector. With his know-
ledge of the Lewin family, he was able to get into touch with J. W. Lewin be-
fore the latter left for Australia.

J. W. Lewin ai'rived in Sydney in 1800. The plates for his book were en-
graved and coloured by himself in 1803, in Parramatta. They were the earliest
engravings produced in Australia. The text was printed in London, bound up
with the plates as sent home to his brother Thomas Lewin, and issued as a book
in 1805. But with the plates, J. W. Lewin sent home a made-up complete copy,
with a title-page and some text in manuscript, as far as he could complete it. This
copy, together with the original coloured drawings of some of the larvse and pupae,
were afterwards acquired by Alexander Macleay, and are now in the Society's pos-
session. Possibly examples of the perfect insects, and a letter of supplementary
information may also have been sent; but if so, there is no available record of
them. A comparison of the original copy with the book as published, explains
what is stated in Macleay's letter to Kirby.

J. W. Lewin was an artist, a good observer, and a practical entomologist,
but without technical knowledge, and without books. The text, as he sent it to
England, was insufficient, and not in a suitable form for publication. It con-
sisted merely of the explanations of the figures, more or less copious, of the
larv« and their habits, but without descriptions of the perfect insects, to which
only fanciful vernacular names were given. The title-page was "Natural History
of Eighteen Nondescript Moths with Descriptions," &e.

Thomas Lewin was an artist, and had not quite all the necessary technical
knowledge to enable him to supply the deficiencies in the text, as written by his
brother, notwithstanding the statement in the last sentence of the Preface : "Of
the style of the publication, and the aiTangement of the subject, we can only
say, being well instructed in the Field of Nature, we have endeavoured to render
the book useful." As Editor of the contemplated book, therefore, he sought the
advice and assistance of the President and Secretary of the Linnean Society, as
narrated in the Preface : "And all that was left for us to do was merely to define
the genus, and name the "individual in some cases, which we have done sometimes
from the plant on which the insect is found; and for the names of those plants
we make our acknowledgments to the learned President of the Linnean Society,
Dr. Smith, and also acknowledge the kind observations of the Secretary of the
Linnean Society, Alexander Macleay, Esq., for whose abilities as an Entomologist,
we have the highest respect, though we cannot avoid differing greatly from him on
some points." Dr. Smith supplied the names of the food-plants, as well as ha
could, for some of them were without flowers or fruits. A. Macleay offered, or
consented after being asked, to draw up the necessary technical descriptions of
the perfect insects, with the addition of binomial names; and, judging from his
letter to Kirby, did so. What, then, were the points on which Thomas Lewin, as
editor of the book, differed from him?

574 president's address.

On the eviclenee, it seems to be a reasonable conclusion that Dr. Smith and
A. JIacleay successfully opposed the publication of nondescript insects, and
that T. LewLn accepted and made use of the technical descriptions; but that,
■wishing to keep the naming of the insects as much as possible in his own hands,
he did not accept al! the binomial names proposed by Mr. Macleay, and altered
some at least of them to suit his own ideas. The proposed new generic name
did not get into print; and A. Macleay certainly cannot be held responsible for
the specific names of Sphinx Ardenia, Tortrix Australqna, and especially that
of the insect now known as Charagia lignivora Lewin, but described and figured
in Plate xvi., and referred to in the index, as Hepialus Ligniveren. Nor is the
expression "Noctua Hepialus" likely to have been his, in the statement — "The
larvaa of this beautiful Noctua Hepialus feeds" (sic), &c. From these, and other
peculiarities, T. Lewin seems to have been responsible for the form in which all
the text, except the technical descriptions and tlie sectional names, finally ap-
peared .

Another relic of J. "W. Lewin acquired by A. Macleay was what seem to
be first impressions of three of the plates of Lewin's "Birds of New Holland,"
the first edition of which wa.s published in 1808. The plates are roughly bound-
up with three pages of text in manuscript, without binomial names, or descriptions
which an ornithologist would consider satisfactory. They were perhaps intended
as a sort of prospectus for possible subscribers to the work.

Some very interesting information about Alexander Macleay's entomological
acquisitions are given in a letter from Kirby to his friend Spenee, in a letter of
date September 24th. 1806: "I have boxes [of insects] from Haworth and

[W. J.] Hooker to name In London, I went over Sir Joseph's

[Banks] Staphylini; but there was nothing very remarkable among them, except
S. aureus, which is of the same family with S. murinus, &c. I found several non-
descript species in Mr. M'Lcay's cabinet, which he purchased from the Leverian
Museum, and one large and blue one from old Drury's ealiinet. And the ]iiece
of entomological news I can tell you — that ]\I'Leay has purchased all Donovan's
foreign insects, a most valuable addition to his collection, which, in value, falls
not far short of Franeillon's." [p. 281.] These are the only records of purchases
from the two collections mentioned that I know of. Sir Ashton Lever, who lived
at Alkington, near Manchester, brought his collection to London about 1775, where i
it was opened to the public. Tt was subsequently disposed of by lottery in 1785,
and came into the possession 'of Mr. Pai-kinson. It was eventually sold by auc-
tion in 180(5, the sale lasting about a month. It was a celebrated collection in its
day, and the sale attracted much attention. Some of the specimens had been
presented to Lever by Captain Cook.

Alexander Macleay's Collection was supplemented by extensive purchases
from the collections of Mr. Francillon and Mr. Marsliam, in the years 1818 and
1819. We have, in the Society's library, ^^Ir. Macleay's copies of the sale-
catalogues of these collections, with MS. notes, possibly representing his purchases.
I have been unable to find any biographical details respecting these two entomolo-
gists.

The Francillon Collection, a celebrated one in its day, was sold by auction, in
.Tune, 1818, shortly after the owner's decease. Charles Lyell, the geologist, was
interested in entomology in his younger days. In a letter to liis father, written
from Yarmouth, on .Tuly 20tli. 1S17. after a visit to London, lie says: "I visited

THE society's heritage from the 3IACLEAYS. 575

the cast of Phidias and (talking ot thing's on a gi'and scale) the elephant at

Exeter Change; also Bullock's Museum Saw the whole of Tran-

cillon's collection of British and foreign insects, the finest in the world ....
Let those who wish to have an idea of the magnificence of Nature, visit the ele-
phant, those who wish to judge of her varietas insatiabilis, see FrancUlon's col-
lection" [Life, Letters, and Journals, Vol. i., pp. 40-41, 1881]. The Catalogue
speaks of it as undoubtedly "the most magnificent Cabinet of Insects that has
e^•er been brought to sale in this country; containing many unique and remark-
able Specimens, and generally in a high state of Preservation." The sale lasted
eight days, and realised £725/11/6. The collection was offered in 122 lots, con-
tained in 72 drawers, in three cabinets, of 64, 36, and 24 drawers. One feature of
the collection of interest is, that it contained specimens collected and presented to
the owner, by Surgeon-General John White, who came out to Australia with the
First Fleet, under Captain Phillip, in January, 1788.

Freeman, Kirby's biographer, gives some very interesting details about the
sale of Francillon's collection. Kirby attended the sale: "He made some con-
siderable additions to his treasures, though not nearly to the extent of his friend
Mr. [A.] McLeay, who purchased little short of half the collection. Mr. W.
[S.] McLeay thus notices the circumstances [in a letter to Kirby] — 'I understand,
from my father, that you are one of the soiols of the sale of Mr. Francillon's
cabinet, giving it life, activity, and, above all, value. I suppose you have added
extensively to your collection : as for my father, he has made his as brilliant for
the amateur as it is instructive for the entomological student, but to arrange it,
'hie labor, hoe opus est.' The French Museum has been prevailed on to let my
father have one of the Hexodous; so that now he will have every described genus
of Latreille's family of Lamellieomes' " [p. 349].

Mr. Marsham's collection was sold by auction in September. 1810, about
two months before his decease on 26th November following. The owner was
a foundation member of the Linnean Society, the first Secretary (1788-98), and
Treasurer from 1798-1816. He was the author of the "Entomologica Britannica,"
of which only the first volume (Coleoptera) was published (1802) ; and of nine
entomological papers contributed to the Transactions of the Linnean Society.
His collection was !.n important one, though not so extensive as Francillon's.
The sale lasted for three days. The collection was offered in 115 lots, contained
in 36 drawers, in two cabinets, each of 24 drawers. The cabinet of British in-
sects, described in the Ent. Brit, was offered separately in one lot. Twenty-eight
additional lots, including the two cabinets, five boxes of insects, a microscope, and
sundries, were also offered. But beyond some pencil entries of prices in A. Mac-
leay's copy of the catalogue, no further information is available.

Another important collection, from which Alexander Macleay purchased
specimens, was that of General Thomas Davies, of the Royal Artillery, "well
known as a most accurate observer of nature, and an indefatigable collector of her
treasures, as well as a most admirable painter of them" [Kirby and Spence,
Introd. to Entom., i., 108]. W. S. Macleay, in his paper on the "Annulosa of
South Africa" (p. 74), published in London in 1838, shortly before he left for
Australia, says of CerapteruR latipes [Paussidre] — "The original specimen which
General Davies sent to Swcderus for description is now in my collection, my
father having purchased it at the sale of the General's museum." But neither
the sale-catalogue nor anv further information are available.

576 president's address.

General Davies was interested in birds as well as insects; and he described,
with a coloured figure, the Lyre-bird ol' Australia, in his paper "Description of
Maenura superba, a Bird of New South Wales," Trans. Linn. Soc, Vol. vi., 1802,
p. 207.

Another important addition to the Macleay Collection was the specimens of
insects and some miscellaneous invertebrata collected by Captain P. P. King.
These are referred to by W. S. Macleay in his paper, "On the Structure of the
Tarsus in the Tetramerous and Trimerous Coleoptera" [Trans. Linn. Soc, Vol. xv.,
p. 68] in these words: — "I had scarcely, however, corrected the press of the first
number of that work [Annulosa Javanica], when Captain King of the Navy, ona
of those enterprising and accomplished navigators who at the present moment
confer so much honour on our country, requested me to examine the insects which
he had collected during his late expedition to explore the coasts of New Holland."
The record of this collection, comprising 192 species of insects, of which 81 were
described as new, four species of Arachnida, and about 30 of marine inverte-
brata, collected, under great drawbacks, by Captain P. P. King during his sur-
vey of the Intertropical and Western Coasts of Australia between the years
1818 and 1822, is given in King's "Narrative of a Survey," &c. [Vol. ii.. Appen-
dix, p. 438, 1827]. The collection was apparently presented to W. S. Macleay
by Captain King. In his paper on "The Genera and Species of the Amycteridae,"
communicated to the Entomological Society of New South Wales, by William
Macleay, on 7th August, 1865, the author says that the insects originally described
by W. S. Macleay in the work above cited, "are in the late Mr. [W. S.]
MacLea/s collection now in my possession" [Trans. Ent. Soc. N.S. Wales, Vol.
i., p. 267]. The rest of Captain King's collection was apparently presented either
to the British Museum or to the Museum of the Linnean Society [Trans. Linn.
Soc, xiv., p. 603]..

A. Macleay's collection of sale-catalogues comprises five others besides the two
mentioned — one of the "collection of insects of a gentleman well-known for his
knowledge of Nat. History" [name not given] sold in June, 1814; two of the
three parts of the Catalogue of Bullock's London Museum, sold in April-May,
1819, the sale lasting for eighteen days; the catalogue of the duplicates from Mr.
Stephens' collection, sold in May, 1825; and W. S. Macleay's copy of the South
African Sluseum [vertebrates, especially birds, and anthropological specimens]
sold in June, 1838. The first and second of these have marginal notes in i)eucil.
and may indicate purchases.

Numerous specimens in Alexander Macleay's coUection were described, and, in
some cases, figured, while in his possession ; but others had become type-speci-
mens before he acquired them. Donovan, iu his "Epitome" (1805) described
and figured certain species, as already mentioned. At a later date, descriptions,
sometimes with figures, of specimens in the Macleay Collection were published by
Dr. W. E. Leach in his "Zoological Miscellany" (3 vols., 1814-17); by E. Dono-
van, in the Naturalist's Repository (Vols, i.-ui., 1823-25); by N. A. Vigors, in
a series of papers entitled "Descriptions of some rare, interesting, or hitherto
uncharacterized subjects of Zoology," in the Zoological Journal, Vol. i., pp. 413
et seq., 537 et seq.; Vol. ii., pp 238 et seq.; 514 et seq. (1825-26) ; and especially
by W. S. Macleay, in the Horse Entomologicae (1819-21).

The specimens, mostly of Australian species, described by Dr. Leach from
Alexander Macleay's collection, in addition to birds (one, Polophil-u,i phasianus,

THE society's heritage from the macleats. 577

an Australian species), included a Volute (F. lineata) and various insects from
Australia, including Phasma violescens (figured from the splendid collection of
Mr. Macleay) ; Myrmelemi erythrocephala, Mantis Australiae, Nymphes myrme-
leonides, Hipparchia Banksiae, and Papilio Macleayanus, "named after my much
esteemed friend, Alexander Macleay, Esq., Secretary of the Linnean Society, to
whom I cannot suflBciently express my full sense of his repeated marks of kind-
ness and friendship"; one species from New Caledonia; and one or two from un-
certain localities.

The insects described by Vigors included specimens collected in the vicinity
of Madras, and brought to England by Major Sale, of the East India Company's
service; others from North Africa, collected by Captain Lyon, R.N., the com-
panion of Mr. Ritchie, who died at Mourzouk, on 20th November, 1819; and some
from Brazil, collected by Mr. Such.

In the first part of the Horse Entomological (1819), W. S. Macleay men-
tions that his father possessed a cabinet containing nearly 1800 species of the
Linnean genus Scarahaeus; and the study of these, mainly, resulted in his first
contribution to knowledge. Specimens were described or recorded from Northern
and Southern Europe, North Africa, Cape of Good Hope, Mauritius, Isle of
Bourbon, India, East India, China, Java, North America, Georgia, South
America, Brazil, Demerara, Cayenne, Trinidad, Jamaica, Australasia, New Hol-
land, and Van Dienian's Land. The material studied in the second part was in
other collections, chiefly that of the British Museum.

As evidence that Alexander Macleay's official connection with the Linneaa
Society had broadened his interest in Natural History, it is interesting to note
that this was not wholly confined to insects. At one time he seems to have
had a collection of South American bird-skins. This is referred to by two
writers. Dr. Leach says of Laniux lineatus : "This elegant bird, which is figured
from Mr. MacLeay's collection, inhabits Berbice" [Naturalists' Miscellany, Vol. i.,
p. 22, 1817] . '

Mr. G. Such, of Magdalen Hall, Oxford, who had resided for some time in
Brazil, in describing a new species of the family Laniadae, Thamnophilus macu-
latiis, says of it : "I had originally conceived that my specimen was the first which
had been brought to England ; but I found a second in Mr. MacLeay's collection.
Its chief difference, as has been pointed out to me by Mr. W. S.
MacLeay," &c. [Zoological Journal, i., p. 557] . In both these cases the speci-
mens referred to were probably included in the first two of Alexander Macleay's
donations to the Museum of the Linnean Society — "34 Birds from Berbice [Trans.
Linn. Soc, vol. x., p. 413, 1811] ; and "11 specimens of Birds from New South
Wales, not before in the Society's collection" [Vol. xii., p. 598, 1818]. This and
his third donation of "Two specimens of Quadrupeds, and six Birds from New
South Wales," as recorded in Vol xiii., p. 636, 1822, show that he was in receipt
of specimens from Australia, other than insects, from undisclosed sources, even
at this early period.

Except for a few specimens which W. S. Macleay needed to retain for study,
the Macleay Collection, as it was brought out to Australia by Alexander Macleay,
in 1825, comprised British insects collected by A. Macleay; British or other
European insects collected by W. S. Macleay; gifts from or exchanges with their
friends; specimens purchased from at least six important private collections [Dru
Drury's, Ashton Lever's (Parkinson's), E. Donovan's, Francillon's, Marsham's,

578 president's address.

General Davies', and possibly some others] ; and acquisitions of sj^eeimens Irom
Brazil, India, North Africa, Australia, and elsewhere, possibly some of them
donations, but the records of them are indefinite. As mentioned later, some
specimens were left with W. S. Maeleay to enable him to continue his work on
them. These were afterwards brought to Australia by him in 1839.

With the removal of the Maeleay Collection to Australia, the most important
private entomological collections in England seem to have been the Rev. F. W.
Hope's, Tvirby's, Stephen's, Haworth's, Westwood's, and Melley's.

Kirby and Spence, authors of the well-known ''Introduction to Entomology,"
thus express their appreciation of the Maeleay Collection and of the owner's en-
couragement: "To Alexander MacLeay, Esq., they are under particular obliga-
tions for the* warm interest he has all along taken in the work, the judicious adv^ice
he has on many occasions given, the free access in which he has indulged the
authors to his unrivalled cabinet and well-stored library, and the numerous other
attentions and accommodations by which he has materially assisted them in its
progress" [first ed., p. xxi., 1815] .

Alexander Macleay's ofiicial connection with the Linnean Society must have
stimulated and -widened his interest in Natural History, and, at the same time,
have brought him into personal contact with many of the eminent men of the
day. He was elected a Fellow of the Royal Society in 1809, when Sir Joseph
Banks was President; and to the Council in 1824, when Sir Humphry Davy was
President. Sir Stamford Raffles, first President of the Zoological Society, was
also a member of the Council at this time. Macleay's friends of whom we have
records, besides the entomologists Kirby and Marsham, included Robert Brown,
and Sir James E. Smith, Founder and President of the Linnean Society.

Robert Brown (1773-1858) had collected zoological specimens, including in-
sects, as well as botanical material, during his visit to Australia and Tasmania.
We may be sure, therefore, that before accepting the offer of an appointment in
Australia, A. Maeleay had discussed the prospects with the great botanist. The
fact that he brought his collection with him seems to show" that the fauna was one
of the attractions to migrate. The records of their friendship are meagre, but in-
dicative of warm regard. R. Brown named the new genus, Macleai/a, in honour
of hLs much valued friend, in 1826. Our Society is fortunate in having in the
library four reprints of papers by Robert Brown, with inscriptions to Alex.
McLeay, Esq., from his "affectionate friend" or from his "attached friend."

A pleasing record of Alexander Macleay's friendship with Sir .James E.
Smith is given in the Proceeding's of the Linnean Society. 1872-73, p. i. At the
meeting of the Society held on November 7th, 1872. Mr. G. Beutham, President,
in the chair — ''The President read two letters, in her own hand, from Lady
Smith (now in her 100th year), offering for the acceptance of the Society, seventy-
four letters, addressed to its Founder by the late Alexander M'Leay, Esq., Secre-
tary to the Society from 1798-1825. The letters were accompanied by a photo-
graph from the portrait of Lady Smith, taken by Opie in 1798, signed, and bear-
ing the date of her birth. May 11, 1793. Resolved, that tlie Special Thanks of the
Society l)e presented to Lady Smitli for this very valnahle and acceptable dona-
tion."' The number of the letters is perhaps to be accounted for by the fact, that
Sir .Tames Smith's home was in Norwich, tho\igh for some time he occupied a
house in London.

After the death of W. S. Maeleay, in J.nnuaiT. 18()5. his brother, (Jeorge
Maeleay, inherited the family heirlooms. At a meeting of the Linnean Societv, on

THE SOCIETT'S heritage prom the ilACLEAYS. 579

December 16tb, 188G— "The President [W. Carruthers, F.R.S.] announeed that
Sir George MacLeay, K.C.M.G., F.L.S., bad presented to the Society a framed
•water-colonr portrait of the Rev. William Kirby, F.L.S., the distinguished
entomologist; also the manuscripts and correspondence of his father, Alexander
MacLeay (elected P.L.S. 1794), for many years Secretary to the Society" [Pro-
ceedings, 188(1-87. p. ()]. But these have not so far been utilised for biographical
purposes .

In anticipation of this evening's meeting, I wrote to the Council of the Linnean
Society of London some time ago, pointing out the scanty documentary details of
the early scientific life of Alexander and W. S. Macleay available to us here in
Australia, and that we were without a portrait of any kind of W. S. Macleay;
and, at the same time, asking if the Coimcil would be good enough to spare me
copies of any documents that would be of special interest in connection with our
celebration of the centenary of Sir William Macleay's birth. I have pleasure in
recording my indebtedness, and cordial thanks, both to the Council and to Dr. B.
Daydon .Jackson, General Secretary, who has kindly sent me copies of five very
interesting letters, and a photograph of the bust of W. S. Macleay in the Society's
possession.

One of the letters referred to, from Sir .James E. Smith [1759-1828] to
Alexander Macleay, dated "Norwich, March 13th, 1825," was apparently written
in reply to a letter announcing the writer's acceptance of the appointment of
Colonial Secretary of New South Wales, and of his contemplated departure to
the antipodes. The portion of the letter of most interest to us is as follows: —

"My dear Friend, — Now that I have got through the irksome correspondence
that so much opprest me — (rendered most irksome, I assure you, by the con-
tinual association of your departure, which weighed like a millstone upon my
heart), I may indulge in more pleasant writing. I am not a man of compli-
ments, but your wide removal, as it were to another world (and it may really be
so with respect to me), seems to excuse and indeed require an opening of heart
between us. I am happy to recall the 31 years [1794-1825] to which you advert,
and to say with all sincerity, that so far from misunderstanding or coolness, I
have ever felt the warmest estimation for your character, the most grateful sensi-
bility to your constant active friendship and attention. I have always known
where to find you, and was always sure you would do the kindest and most
judicious thing. Judge then if I can part with you unmoved, or if I can avoid
being warmly interested for all that belongs to you ! — I speak now not with much
reference to our Society, for which you have done so much. I trust we shall
choose no unworthy successor to you — and as to yourself, I would not suggest
gloomy ideas of your great undertaking, which I trust will be advantageous, as it
is certainly highly honourable. It must on some accounts be delightful to you,
and as a naturalist I almost envy you. For the sake of the public I am well
persuaded I ought to rejoice. May God preserve your life to do all the good
you can, and to benefit your family, who I am confident will be worthy of you.
Let me, my valued friend, urge one thing especially. Take the utmost care of
your health — do not work too hard, or expose yourself to anything which ex-
perienced people think hazardous. If you feel well and strong, spare yourself,

that you may do the more good I hope your portrait will be well

done. We shall gratify ourselves by it, more than we honour you

Farewell my excellent friend — I need not say how often I shall think of you, nor
how entirely I am ever yours, J. E. Smith."

580 president's address.

The portrait referred to was painted in oils by Sir Thomas Lawrence, P.R.A.,
and presented by subscribing Fellows to the Linnean Society. A steel engraving
reproduced from this portrait by C . Fox was subsequently issued. The late Lady
Macleay was good enough to g^ve me three copies of the engraving. One is hung
in the Society's Hall. The other two, I presented to the Australian Museum and
the Public Library.

A report of the Anniversary Meeting of the Linnean Society, held on 24th
May, 1825, concludes thus: "The Society afterwards dined at the Freemason's
Tavern, where the presence of Sir J. E. Smith in improved health added much
to the enjoyment of the day. Addresses on subjects interesting to cultivators of
Natural History were delivered by various members, and other men of science;
amongst others, by tha venerable Bishop of Carlisle, Lord Stanley, the Rev. Df.
Fleming, and the respective Presidents of the Horticultural and Geological Socie-
ties. Numerous expressions of resp6ct and cordial esteem were called forth to-
wards the late Secretary of the Society, Alexander MacLeay, Esq., F.R.S., on the
occasion of his quitting this country for a time, to occupy the important station of
Colonial Secretary in New South Wales" [Zoological Journal, Vol. ii., p. 278] .

At the next meeting, on June 7th, 1825, it is recorded that — "On the retire-
ment of Alexander MacLeay, Esq.^ F.R.S., &c., from the office of Secretary of
the Society, the following Minute, recommended by the Council was adopted by
the General Meeting of the above date, \\z. — The Linnean Society of London
take the earliest opportunity after the retirement of Alexander MacLeay, Esq.,
from the Secretaryship of the Society, to record upon their Minutes the high
estimation in which he is held by them on account of twenty-seven years of un-
remitted and unrequited labour devoted to the interests of science; and that in
quitting for a tune this sphere of usefulness to fill an honourable station in a dis-
tant country, he carries with hiir the cordial esteem and sincere regret of this
Society."

There is very little, in the way of records of his own, of Alexander Macleay's
interest in the fauna and flora after his arrival in Australia in January, 1826.
But evidence of it is afforded by his donations of zoological and botanical speci-
mens to the Linnean Society's Museum, and a donation to the Zoological Society;
and, locally, by his active interest in the Colonial Museum, later the Australian
Museum. Vigors and Horsfield had completed the first part of an important
paper, entitled "Catalogue of the New Holland Birds in the Collection of the
Linnean Society" [read on June 21st, 1825], shortly before A. Macleay left Lon-
don. "In the introductory remarks to this paper, the authors express their confi-
dent expectation that the deficiency of our knowledge of the habits of the Birds
of Australia, will be in great measure supplied by the researches of Mr. A.
MacLeay during his future residence in that interesting country'' [Zool. .Tourn., ii.,
p. 279]. Mr. Macleay's official duties and other engagements left him little
time for studying the habits of Australian birds, as was aftei-wards done by John
Gould and Gilbert; but he did what he could in the way of sending specimens for
the Linnean collection, as follows : — "41 skins of Birds from New Holland ; 54
skins of Birds. 2 spp. of Squalus, and a skull of a third, and of a species of
Delphinus [Trans., Vol. xv., p. 533 (1827)]— 34 skins of Birds, one Bat [Trans.,
Vol. xvi., p. 794 (1829-33)]— A Collection of Bird-Skins and Insects from New
Holland [Trans., Vol. xvii., p. 597] — Specimens of 126 species of Fruits and
Seeds indigenous to New South Wales [Trans., Vol. xx., p. 505].

THE society's HERITAGE PROM THE MACLEAYS. 581

At a meeting of the Zoological Society of London, on May 12th, 1835 — "A
letter was read, addressed to the Secretary by A. MacLeay, Esq., Colonial Secre-
tary, New South Wales, dated Sydney, October 25, 1834. It stated that the
writer had, in consequence of the application made to him, set on foot inquiries
respecting that interesting Bird of New Zealand, the Apteryx Australis Shaw, and
that he had succeeded in obtaining a skin of it (destitute, however, of the legs),
which he had forwarded to the Society. The specimen was exhibited, and further
particulars given [Proc. Zool. Soc, iii., p. 61]. The notice ends thus: — "He con-
cludes by expressing his intention of forwarding to the Society the white-fleshed
Pigeon of the Colony, which, he conceives, would be a great acquisition in Eng-
land: it is certainly, he says, far superior to Partridge."

Shortly before his decease, the late Mr. R. Etheridge, Junr., Director and
Curator of the Australian Museum, completed his inquiries into the early history
of the Museum, from official and other records. His paper, in two Parts, is
entitled "The Australian Museum: Fragments of its early History," for unfor-
tunately the earliest records are not as complete as could be wished . But he was
able to show that "a Museum, therefore, was evidently resolved on as early as
1827," and "that a Museum of some kind was established between the years
1827-9." He also says: "Whatever connection the Honbl. Alexander Macleay
had with the inception of the Australian Museum, there can be no doubt of his
long and lasting interest in the establishment; the old minutes prove this"' [Re-
• cords of the Australian Museum, Vol. xi., p. 67 (1916) ; xii., p. 339 (1919)].

In the obituary notice of Mr. Alexander Macleay, which appeared in the Syd-
ney Morning Herald of July 26th, 1848, the day after the funeral, it is stated
that — "He was always active in the management of colonial institutions : he was
President of the Australian Subscription Library, of the Benevolent Society and
the Infirmary; and was the founder of the Australian Museum." This statement
is repeated in Flanagan's "History of New South Wales [Vol. ii., p. 192 (1862)].

In regard to the location of the Colonial Museum in its early days, Mr.
Etheridge says: "It has been stated that the Museum occupied 'a small room
attached to the Legislative Council' [quoted from Fowles, "Sydney in 1848," p.
83], but like other of Fowles' statements, lacks confirmation, as I have been
unable to find any evidence in support" [p. 342] . Confirmatory evidence is to be
had however. For example, The Sydney Herald, No. 19, November 21st, 1831, p.
4, records the fact that — "The Sydney Museum has been removed from the Old
Post Office in Bent-street, to the spacious rooms over the Council Chamber in
Macquarie street." And it was there that Dr. George Bennett first saw it, in
August, 1832 — "In company with a friend, I visited the Colonial Museum, which
i"? arranged for the present in a small room, assigned for the purpose, in the
CouneU-House, and which had been recently established in Sydney."

From Mrs. Boswell's narrative, it appears that Alexander Macleay spent his
eightieth birthday (June 24th, 1847) at Port Macquarie, during a visit to Major
and Mrs. Innes. It is mentioned that the visitor could speak Gaelic quite well,
that he was much pleased at being musically welcomed, on his arrival, by a piper,
who used to play for the special delectation of the guest as opportunity offered,
and that Mr. Macleay was entertained at luncheon on his birthday.

Mrs. Macleay, bom 13th March, 1769, died a few weeks later, on 13th
August, 1847, after a happy union of more than fifty years. Her husband's long
and useful life ended less than a year afterwards, on 19th July, 1848, in his

582 president's address.

eighty-second year. His end was hastened by a severe shock received in a car-
riage accident, when returning from a visit to Government House. The horses
took fright, and got out of control just as they were about to pass through the
entrance-gates to Macquarie street, and the caiTiage collided with one of the stone
pillars. By bis own request, Mr. Macleay was removed to "Tivoli," Rose Bay,
the residence of his son-in-law, Captain W. J. Dumaresque; but, at his advanced
age, his recovery was hopeless. In the obituarj' notice in the Sydney Morning ■
Herald of July 26th. 1848, the day after the obsequies, it is stated that — "There
was a very large attendance at the funeral, the number of carriages being fifty.
Among those present were — the Commander of the Forces, the three Judges, and
nearly the whole of the Government officers, and a large number of old colonists
of all classes. The pall-bearers were the Colonial Secretary, the Colonial Treasurer,
Colonel Gordon, Mr. Baker, Attorney-General, Mr. Macpherson, Mr. Mitchell, and
Mr. Campbell. . . . Mr. M'Leay was a man almost universally respected,
and has descended into the grave fuU of years and full of honour; and from his
consistent character, we may feel sure he has gone to his reward."

Alexander Macleay seems to have been a man of an attractive personality,
and to have had many warm friends, both in England and in Australia. He did
not escape hostile criticism in party poHtieal matters in this part of the world, at
a time when the Emancipist question, among others, evoked much bitterness. But
as a man of probity, who had the welfare of the infant Australia at heart, there
are numerous eloquent tributes to his ability and worthiness, on record. On his
retirement from the office of Colonial Secretary, he was the recipient of two ad-
dresses expressive of esteem and regret — one from 550 of his felhjw-colonists, who
also requested his acceptance of a piece of plate, in further proof of personal
regard ; the other, from twenty-fiv^ gentlemen who had been otflcially associated
with him in public life, and who asked "that you will do us the favour to allow
your portrait to be taken at our expense, for the purpose of being
placed in some appropriate situation in the colony, as a lasting memorial of our
regard and esteem for your private worth, and of the grateful sense entertained
by us, of the co-operation we have always experienced from you, in conducting
the business of our respective departments.'' The order for the piece of plate was
sent to England; and a very handsome centre-ornament for the dinner-table was
selected, on which were engraved the Arms of the Colony, and of the Royal Burgh
of Wick, by the special permission of the respective Authorities, as well as the
Arms of the recipient. This was sent out to Australia and presented in due
course. There is a copy of a rare pamphlet in the Mitchell Library, giving the
details of the gift, with an illustration; and bound up with it is a litliographic
plate of the plant Maeleaya cordata R.Br. The piece of plate was probably
taken to England by Sir George Macleay, after the death of W. S. Macleay. I
have not been able to ascertain the history of the contemplated portrait, or. if
painted, where it was or is located unless it be in some Government building. Or
it may be the portrait now hanging in the Curator's room at the Australian
JIuseum, whose histoi'v is'vmrecorded. If so, it may have been presented to the
Museum by George Macleay when he revisited Australia (before 187G) .

The family tomb, without inscriptions save the surnames Macleay and Har-
rington in large letters, and the family crests, is in the same enclosure witli that
of Captain W. J. Dumaresque in what used to be known as the Cauiperdown
Cemetery — which was opened when the Devonshire-street Cemetery was closed —

THE society's heritage from the macleays. 583

in proximity to St. Stephen's Church, Newtown. But there are cenotaphs to the
memories of Alexander and Mrs. Macleay, of Mrs. Harrington, eldest daughter
and wife of Mr. T. C. Harring-ton, Assistant Colonial Secretary, and of W. S,
Macleay, as well as of Captain Dumaresque, in St. James' Church, King-street.

Elizabeth Bat House and the Garden.

After his arrival in Sydney on January 3rd, 1826, Mi-. Alexander Macleay
occupied the middle one of the three otiflfial residences on the south side of Bridge-
street. The late Judge Forbes contributed a letter to the Sydney Morning Herald
of March 17, 1899, entitled "Old Government House, Sydney," in which he re-
corded his recollections of old Sydney. He was the son of the first Chief
Justice of New South Wales, and came to Sydney, a child of four yeai-s, with his
father in 1823. The Judge wrote : "My father lived in a house which stood in

the centre of the site of the present Lands Office Bridge-street.

which ran from George-street up to Government House gate (the gate of that
time), after passing Bent-street (which it joined then at the same place as now)
had, on the south side of it, four detached houses, built in a row, and going from
Georo-e-street towards the Government House gate. The first of these you came
to was that in which my father lived, bounded on the south and west by Bent-
street; next to it was the house which was the residence of Alexander Macleay,
the Colonial Secretary; and next to that was another house, the residence of Mr.
Lithgow, Auditor-General and Collector of Internal Revenue; (that house is now
standing, having a large native tigtree growing in the front of it) [since de-
molished to make way for the present Education Department Building] ; and next
to that was the Guard-house close to Government House gate. The first three
houses mentioned, viz., my father's, Macleay's, and Lithgow's, had gardens in
front and yards at the back, and were divided by walls from one another. The
Guard-house was close to the gate of Government House, and Government House
was about 30 or 40 yards to the east of it, which fixes the site at the place where
the plate with the inscription on it was lately found. I was often at Government
House when Sir Thomas Brisbane was there, and also when Darling and Bourke
were Governors, and I know the localities well, and remember them perfectly."

Another early notice of the Macleay's first house is to be found in an article
entitled "A Journal of Early Australia," contributed to the Sydney Morning
Herald of August 30th, 1911, by Miss Mary Salmon. This is a review of a small
volume, with the title, "Some Recollections of My Early Days. By [Mrs.] A. A.
CD. Boswell," printed for private circulation only among friends and relatives.
There is a copy of it in the Mitchell Library. The authoress was born in 1826 at
"Yarrows," in Bathurst, and was living in Scotland when Miss Salmon's article
was written. Mrs. Boswell was the daughter of Mr. George Innes, who came to
Australia in 1823 with his brother. Captain Archibald Clunes Innes. The fol-
lowing is Mrs. BosweU's account: — "Early in 1834, I found myself at school in
Bridge-street, under the care of Mrs. Evans and her friend and partner, Miss
Ferris. Mr. Evans (he was George W. Evans, who had been deputy surveyor
when he made the remarkable discovery of the plains beyond the Blue Mountains,
which led to a road to Bathurst) had a bookseller and stationer's shop, and we
used the rest of the house, which was thought handsome, and in a fashionable
street. Our house faced the old Government stores or depot, and close by
flov.ed the Tank Stream, now arched and made into the main drain of that part

584 president's address.

of the populous city. We were quite close to the old Government House and
Macquarie-place, where lived the leading Government oflScials. These houses were
back from the street, and had pretty gardens and deep verandahs, shaded by
climbing roses and other flowering plants. I do not remember ever being in
Government House, but I made many happy visits to our kind friends, Mr. and
Mrs. Macleay at Macquarie-place. He was Colonial Secretary, and one of his
daughters [Margaret] had been married to my uncle, Major Innes, of Lake Innes,
Port Macquarie. Miss Macleay (Mrs. Harrington) wanted to adopt and educate
me. She died a few weeks after her marriage, in 1836."

Among the relics of W. S. Macleay is a small pencil-drawing of the resi-
dence in Bridge-street, made by Miss Macleay, with her signature on the back .
This was probably sent to her brother in Cuba, before 1836. I exhibit this, to-
gether with the photograph of a pencil-drawing of the same house by the artist
Conrad Martens. The original of the latter is in possession of the Royal Society
of Tasmania. By the kind permission of the Coimeil, Mr. Clive Lord, the Secre-
tary, has been able to furnish me with the photograph of this interesting drawing.

In a letter from Mrs . Eliza Macleay, in Sydney, to her son, W . S . Macleay,
in Cuba, undated but written on paper with watermark 1824 [from internal
evidence written about June, 1827] slie says: "We have been very unsettled in
our house ever since we got in to it, which was the first night of our arrival [Janu-
ary 3rd, 1826] ; in the first place, it was much too small for us, which, on proper
representation was ordered to have two bedrooms and two smaller rooms built
over the library, and eating-room, and a verandah added, which has now been
about ten months and not nearly finished, so slow do the prisoner-workmen get on ;
and when you consider what sort of people they are, you may suppose we cannot
feel very comfortable while they are about. They contrived, I must say through
the carelessness of our free servants, to carry off sixty pounds' worth of plate,

which we could never hear the least account of since Your father

has little time to think of family-affairs, his whole time being occu-
pied with Government business. We have now been here a year and a-half, and,
during that time, I think he has not been absent from Sydney above ten days ; the
very little recreation that he has consists of his going out before breakfast or after
five o'clock, sometimes to a place called Elizabeth Bay, of which he has got a grant
of between fifty and sixty acres, where he is making a garden, and [hopes at]
some future time to build a house; he is now building stabling, and has built a
gardener's cottage."

[For the copy of this extremely interesting letter, kindly forwarded by Dr.
Daydon Jackson, I am indebted to t'e Council of the Linnean Society of London.]

Mr. J. A. Dowling has recently given a very interesting account of the early
settlement of the eastern suburbs contiguous to the harbour and the city. The
author points out that, as shown in Roe's map of Sydney (1822). Darlinghurst,
including Woolloomooloo, used to be called Henrietta Town, and was a reserve
set apart for the Bl;:cks. The name wa.-^ given by Governor ]\Ia"'|uarie. after the
first Christian name of his wife. Elizabeth Bay and Elizabeth Point were also
named by the Governor after the second Christian name of the same lady.

Of the grant to Alexander Macleay, Mr. Dowling says: "The Macleay pro-
perty was fifty-four acres in extent, and was granted to Mr. Alexander !Maoleay
by Governor Darling in 1828. who. in a despatch to the Right Hon. William
Huskisson, dated the 28th of March, 1828. stated: 'The land granted to Mr.

THE society's heritage prom the macleays. 585

Maeleay at Elizabeth Bay, a mile and a half from Sydney, was for the purpose of
erecting a family house and eultiv.-iting a garden. Mr. Macleay's knowledge as a
horticulturist is likely to prove beneficial to the colony. He has already spent a
considerable sum on the improvement and cultivation of his gi'ounds and in erect-
ing a stable and other offices preparatory to building a house, which it is his in-
tention shortly to commence. From the manner in which he has entered into
this undertaking and the scale on which he has commenced to settle and stock the
land he has received for agricultural purposes (the usual grant of 2500 acres),
he will no doubt prove an important acquisition to the colony. In this respect
alone, the capital which he has already vested in stock, and is still continuing
to expend, being considerable.' .... The formal gTant was dated 19th
October, 1831." ["Potts' Point. Darling Point and Neighbourhood, in the Early
Days," by .J. A. Darling, Journ. Proc. Aust. Historical Soc, Vol. ii., 190G, Part
3, p. 55 (1909).]

The conditions on which the grant was made were loyally fulfilled, and there
is ample evidence that the expectations of the value of his horticultural know-
ledge were realised.

Alexander Maeleay seems to have been interested in liorticulture before he
came to Australia. Robert Brown contributed a botanical supplement to the
"Narrative of Travels and Discoveries in North and Central Africa, by Denliam
and Clapperton," published in 1826 [Reprinted in R. Brown's Collected Works,
Vol. i., p. 270], from which I quote the following: "Respecting Bocconia cordata,
though it is so closely allied to Bocconia as to afford an excellent argument in
favour of the hypothesis in question, it is still sufficiently different, especially in
its polyspermous ovarium, to constitute a distinct genus, to which I have given
the name (Macleaya cordata) of my much valued friend, Alexander Maeleay,
Esq., Secretary to the Colony of New South Wales, whose merits as a general
naturalist, a profoimd entomologist, and a practical botanist, are well known."

Mr. Maeleay may have brought out to Australia with him plants or seeds
from England, as he certainly did from Rio Janeiro, where the vessel called on the
voyage out, as mentioned in Di'. Bennett's account of his visit to Elizabeth Bay in
1832 [po^tea']. We have no family record of the progress of the garden later
than Mi-s. Macleay's letter written in June, 1827, until about 1836, when Mr
Maeleay began to keep separate records, in two small books, of the plants and
seeds which he obtained, and of the sources from which they came.

But most interesting references to the garden by three visitors — Allan Cun-
ningham, Dr. George Bennett, and James Backhouse — during the intervening
period, are available. These accounts show that much progress had been made in
clearing, laying out, and planting the originally sterile area of Hawkesbury Sand-
stone.

Allan Cunningham visited Elizabeth Bay in 1830, and again in 1831, just
before leaving for England in the ship "The Forth" on February 25th, 1831. The
following is his account: — "I now left Parraraatta, and accompanied by a friend,
reached Sydney in the afternoon, where T learnt that the departure of the ship was
postponed until the 16th [February, 1831]. This gave me more time to settle
certain matters of business in Sydney, as also to call on several friends living at
this port, and among them was Mr. Maeleay, our worthy colonial secretary, whom
I accompanied to his retreat on the shores of Elizabeth Bay, where I was not a
little delighted to find so much had been done in planting and improving the

586 president's address.

sterile ground amidst high sandstone rocks since X visited the Bay last year.
. . . . As there were several plants of [Calostemma album] in the garden,
where it periodically puts forth its small white flowers, Mr. Macleay presented
me with four bulbs for Kew, so that the royal gardens will soon boast of possess-
ing a fourth species of this genus, so nearly related to Pancratium. [Hooker's
London Journal of Botany, Vol. i., p. 126.]

Dr. George Bennett visited Sydney in 1829, and a second time, in August,
1832. Shortly after he journeyed to Elizabeth Bay, of which he says: — "In
company with my friend, Lieutenant Bretoa, R.N., I visited Elizabeth Bay, about
two miles distant from Sydney, and the property of the Honourable Alexander
Macleay. The situation is beautiful, being in a retired bay or cove of Port Jack-
son, and the garden and farm is near the sea. This spot, naturally of the most
sterile description, has been rendered, at a great expense and perseverance, in some
degree productive as a nursery for rare trees, shrubs, and plants, from all parts
of the world. We were much gratified with the valuable and rare specimens the
garden contained, and surjjrised that a spot possessed of no natural advantages
should have been rendered, comparatively, a little paradise. In the garden, a
species of cactus was pointed eut to me by the gardener, Mr. Henderson, which
Mr. Macleay had brought some years ago from Rio Janeiro." Then follow par-
ticulars of the teratological fruits of this plant. [Wanderings in New South
Wales, &e.. Vol. i., p. 71 (1834)].

James Backhouse, the Quaker missionary, in his "Narrative of a Visit to
the Australian Colonies" (1843), thus describes his experience: "January 15th,
1835 — We [including his colleagues, D. and C. Wheeler, and G. W. Walker]
walked to Elizabeth Bay, and met the Colonial Secretary, at his beautiful garden,
which is formed on a rocky slope, on the margin of Port Jackson, of which it
commands a fine \'iew. Here are cultivated, specimens of many of the interesting
trees and shrubs of this Colony, along with others from various parts of the world,
intermixed with some growing in their native localities. . . . The walks at
this place are judiciously accommodated to the inequalities of the sinuous l)ay,
and are continued round a point covered with native bush. Peaches are ripe in
the open ground in abundance, and liberty to partake of them freely was kindly
given, by the open-hearted proprietor. Dendrobhim speciosum and D. linguiforme,
remarkable plants of the Orchis tribe, are wild here, upon the rocks, and 7>. tetra-
gonnm. is naturalised on a branch of Avicennia to meat of: a, covered with oyster-
shells, and suspended in a tree near the shore. A fine patch of the Elks-liorn
Fern, Acrosticum alciconie, retains its native station on a rocky point in the
garden" [p. 239].

Returning now to the family records relating to the garden, one of the two
books already mentioned, has, on the title-page, the entry "Plants received at
Elizabetli Bay." The watermark of the paper of this book is 1833. The first
four entries are not dated. The first of these is a list of thirty-three species, in-
cluding four of Magnolia, and six varieties of Camellia japonica, received from
the Messrs. Loddige, of Hackney, the well-known nurserymen of that time. — No. 2,
three species of Diplarrlwena morea and Sarcochilus falcatus, from Van Dieman's
Land; and Alsophila aii-'^traHs from Norfolk Island, received from Mr. J. Back-_
house, whose visit to Australia lasted from 1832 to 1838. — No. 3. twelve species,
from Jlessrs. Loddige. — No. 4, eighteen species (two unnamed), from Mr. W.
Macarthur, Camden. — No. 5. (itii Ai)ril. 1836. four species, also from Mr. W.

THE society's heritage from the macleays. 587

Macartbur. — No. G, not dated, thirteen species (tive undetermined), "From China,
Mr. Jones." Below the last entry appears the date, 1835, followed by a list of
twelve additional species from the same source. — No. 7, twelve varieties of Dahlia.
"From Mr. J. B. Richards. London, 27th April, 1836."— No. 8, seven species , in-
eludiuy three of Passiflora, and five varieties of Chrysanthemum sinense from
Messre. Loddige, Feb. 7, 1827 [? 1837]. — No. 9, thirteen species from Mr. W.
Macarthur, March, 1837. This is of interest because it shows that, at this early
period, the horticulturists were trying to cultivate native plants in their gardens,
three of the plants in the list being Bauera rubioides, Eriostemon sp.. and Boronia
sp. — No. 10. eight species "From Valparaiso, Mr. [Allan] Cunninghame. March,
1838." — No. 11, nineteen species from Camden and Brownlow Hill, August, 1837,
— No. 12, forty-seven species of "Bulbs from Captain Farquand Campbell, from
Cape of Good Hope, March, 1838," and three species of Pelargonium. — No. 13,
nineteen species from Mr. W. Macarthur, May, 1838. — No. 14, not dated, is a
single entry of Huon Pine from Capt. Drinkwater Bethune, H.M.S. Conway. —
No. 15, also a single entry of Amaryllis, from Miss Macarthur, 27tli August,
1838. — No. 16 is very interesting. "From Capt. [Charles] Sturt, December, 1838,
a large collection of Bulbs collected on his late journey in South Australia." — No.
17 is a list of "Plants brought by W. S. Maeleay, per Royal George, March,
1839," which may have been supplied by Loddige. These comprise forty-six
species, beginning with five species of Magnolia, and ending with Verbena Melin-
dris. A number of "Cape of Good Hope Bulbs" (particulars not given), as well
as an assortment of seeds, were also brought from the Cape by W. S. Maeleay.
At a later date, some of the entries had a Hne drawn across them, and the word
"Dead" written opposite to them. — No. 18, two species from Mr. W. Macarthur,
April, 1839. — Nos. 19-21, apparently received in the same month, merely record
collections received, without particulars, from Mr. Cloete, Baron Ludwig, and
Mr. Gordon. — No. 22, sixteen species received from Dr. Wallich, of Calcutta,
May. 1839. All the foregoing records are in the handwriting of Alexander
Maeleay. The continuation of the records was written by W. S. Maeleay. — No.
23, forty-five species from Mr. Wm. Macarthur, August, 1840. — No. 24, seventy-
two species from Dr. WaUich, Calcutta. October, 1840. — No. 25, thirty-eight
species, including Maeleay a cordata R.Br., from Loddige, January, 1840. — No.
26, and last, seventy-two species "from Mr. Backhouse, 1843." Mr. Maiden, in
his biographical notice of William Carron. says that — "His daughter informs me
that he arrived in Sydney in 1843. in charge of plants for one of the Macleays."
[Joum. Proe. R. Soe. N.S. Wales, xlii., p. 95.] The collection from Mr. Back-
house would, therefore, be the one he took charge of. A number of blank pages
follow the last entry. Then comes a long list (9 J pages) of "Desiderata of
Plants," in Alexander MaeleaVs wi'iting. At a later date, some of tlie plants
were obtained. The names of these are crossed out, and the dates of receipt, and
sometimes the initials of the senders, are written in the margin. This is followed
by a table of the "Subgenera of Dendrohium" in W. S. MaeleaVs writing. Then,
after more blank pages, at the end, is a list of "Epiphytal Orchids." forty-two
species, in W . S . Macleay's writing.

The entries in the Seed-book are by years, and numbered throughout. They
are in the handwriting of a lady, presumably one of A. Macleay's daughters, or
in his own, or in that of W. S. Maeleay. For the years 1836-43 (both inclusive)
the number of separate entries of seeds is 886, 347, 502, 498, 317. 101. 39, 186;

588 president's address.

and for the years 1845. 1851 and 1853, the numbers are 184, 133, 93 (there are no
records for 1844 and 1852) ; total, 380(i. These inelude seeds for the orchard and
kitchen-garden, as well as for the flower-garden. Some species ai'e not named.
The seeds were received from England, Madeira, Mauritius, India (Ciilcutta,
Madras, Neilgherry Hills), China. Java, East Indies, Brazil, Bolivia, Chili, Val-
paraiso, Tahiti, Sandwich Island'*, Society Islands, Cape of Good Hope, Australia
(seeds of native plants from many localities). Van Dieman's Land, New Zealand,
and Norfolk Island. W. S. Macleay brought with him seeds of 89 species from
England; and of 107 species (including tive species of Erica, five of Leucadendron,
and six of Protea) from the Cape of Good Hope.

These records are of interest as conti'ibutions to the early horticultural annals
of New South Wales It is worth mentioning that the Botanic Gardens in Sydney
were first opened to the public in 1831, and on Sundays in 1838.

Taking into account Alexander Macleay's efforts to foster horticulture in the
early days, as represented by the foregoing records of his efforts to obtain plants
and seeds, and also that the garden was in charge of an expert gardener, Mr.
Hendei'son, it is not sui-prisiug that visitors were delighted with what they saw,
when the garden was well established and at its best. Of some of these, of a later
date than those already mentioned, there are records.

The first is a very brief luitice of Allan Cunningham's third visit to Elizabeth
Bay, in a letter to Heward. dated November lOth. 1838: "How fine GreviUea
rohuata (forty feet high) is at this time [in the Botanic Gardens], and at Mr,
Macleay's at Elizabeth Bay, it is a mass of orange blossoms [Hooker's London
Journ.. Bot., Vol. i., p. 286] .

H.M.SS. "Erebus" and "Terror," under the command of Captain James
Clark Ross, visited Sydney in 1841, their stay lasting from July 7th to August
5th. Dr. .Joseph Dalton Hooker was Assistant Surgeon and Botanist attached to
the "Erebus." The following brief notice of this visit from "An account of the
Voyage of the Erebus and Terror" by his father, based on his letters sent home
during the voyage, which appeared in the London Journal of Botany" [Vol. ii., p.
272, 1843] — "A short time only was allowed here [Hobart, after the return from
the Antarctic] for tiie needful refreshment and rei)airs, when the 'Erebus' and
'Terror' sailed for Sydney, where numerous excureions were made and plants col-
lected, though few of these could have the charm of novelty; and after much kind-
ness received from Messrs. M'Leay (father and son) they then pursued their
course to the Bay of Islands, New Zealand."

The recent publication of the "Life and Letters of Sir .Joseph Dalton Hooker,
O.M., G.S.I.. ba-sed on materials collected and aiTunged by Lady Hooker; by
Leonard Huxley" (lfll8), is of very g'reat value, not only from the intrinsic in-
terest of the book, but because it supplements and completes the set of the three
biographies which relate to the inauguration of modern ideas of evolution, namely
"The Life and Letters of Charles Darwin. Edited by his son, Francis Darwin"
(Second Edition, 1887), and the "Life and Letters of Thomas Henry Huxley.
By his son, Leonard Huxley" (1st Edition, 1000"). This gives fuller particulars
about Hookers visit to Sydney, tliough nothing is said about the numerous excur-
sions and the collecting of plants nor are the Botanic Gardens mentioned. The
following extract [Vol. i., p. 120] contains the earliest reference to Elizabeth Bay
House known to me : "From Tasmania, a short visit was paid to Sydney in connec-
tion with the magnetic observatory, la-sting from .July 7th to August 5,1841. Syd-

THE society's heritage from the macleats. 589

ney in those days, only one year since the importation of convicts had ceased, could
boast no shops finer than the Hobart Town ones; round the beautiful harbour'
stood a few tine houses, in particular the new Government House, still uninhabited,
built in the Elizabethan style, the new Custom House, and Mr. M'Leay's house
with its garden full of interesting plants." .... "A long visit to M'Leay's
o-arden proved it to be a botanist's paradise. My surprise was unl)ounded at the
natural beauties of the spot, the inimitable taste with which the grounds were laid
out. and the number and rarity of the plants which were collected together. . .
The interior of the house, a striking specimen of Colonial architecture, the indi-
vidual trees and creepers, flowers and shrubs, the revival of nature when the
rain ceased, and a few insects came out, the Diamond birds flitted from tree to tree,
and the large Sea Eagle or Osprey left his lovely lair and commenced wheelmg
over the calm waters of the bay, and beyond the bay 'a rocky precipice christened
Sunium, on which it is the intention to buihl a temple' — all this is fully set forth
in the Journal, with one very homely touch as to 'Mr. William's workshop' : 'The
smell of camphor and specimens, so well known to me at home, reminded me
strongly of olden times, especially as I found everything in the inimitable mixture
of confusion and order in which Mr. [R.] Brown's shop at the Museum and his
rooms in Deane-street are wont to be.' " . . . . "The record of tlie visit
ends with the entry for August 5th : 'at 11 a.m. sailing down Port Jackson along
the cold-looking sandstone cliffs, leaving Sydney with few regrets but leaving Mr.
McLeay's fine establishment where there was much to see.' "

A most interesting account of a visit to Elizabeth Bay by Mrs. Robert Lowe,
towards the end of 1842 or early in 1843, is thus recorded in Patchett Martin's
"Life and Letters of Viscount Sherbrooke, Vol. i., p. 162 (1893) : "A few days ago
T saw one of the most perfect places I ever saw in my life, belonging to Mr.
Macleay. How I longed that Mrs. Sherbrooke could but see this splendid sight.
The drive to the house is cut through rocks covered with the splendid wild shrubs
and flowers of this country, and here and there an immense primeval tree; the
house is built of white stone, and looks like a nobleman's place. Mr. Macleay
took us through the gi-ounds; they were along the side of the water. In this gar-
den are the plants of every climate — flowers and trees from Rio, the West Indies,
the East Indies, China, and even England. The bulbs from the Cape are splendid,
and unless you could see them, you would n(5t believe how beautiful the roses are
here. The orange-trees, lemons, citrons, gua\as are immense, and the jiomegranate
is now in full flower. Mr. ]\Iacleay lias also an immense collection from New
Zealand. I must not omit some drawbacks to this lovely garden : it is too dry, and
the plants grow out of a white, sandy soil. I must admit a few English showers
would improve it. As we went along the wild walks, cut through the woods, the
native trees, covered with flowers, the ^^ews of rock, trees, and water were en-
chanting. The bays are innumerable, and resemble the Scotch salt-water locks."

Sir George ^laeleay. then resident in England, inherited the jiroperty at
Elizabeth Bay, after the death of his elder brother, W. S. Macleay. in January,
1865. The subsequent history of the old garden is l)riefly told by Robert Lowe''5
biographer in these words: "The beautifully situated home of the scholar and
naturalist is now no more, and on the site of its grounds stand the villas and houses
of a 'genteel' suburb. Sir George Macleay, when showing me a picture of the
house and grounds said : My brotlier would never Iiave consented to its demoli-
tion; but Sir Henry Parkes thought fit to tax the land exorbitantly, with the view

690 president's address.

of "Ijurstiug up'' such estates near Sydney, and I at length was forced to subdivide
it, and let it out on lease. But my brother,' he added, 'however much it might have
added to his income, would never have allowed a tree or shrub to be removed.' "
[Life and Letters of Viscount Sherbrooke, Vol. i., p. 103, footnote.]

This statement is one aspect of an old story — the ine\'itably increasing pres-
sure, due to the expansion of a young and steadily growing city and its suburbs,
on the open spaces within or contiguous to their boundaries, necessitating the sub-
ordination of private interests to general needs. The wi-iter of the remarks quoted
slightly misunderstood his informant. As a matter of fact, Elizabeth Bay House,
surrounded by a much circumscribed garden, was left intact. But, by the forma-
tion of new streets, including Ithaca Road, Billyard Avenue, and Onslow Avenue,
the outlying portion of the original garden was cut off from the remnant adjacent
to the house, subdivided, and let on long leases in 1875, as the entail could not be
cut off during the lifetime of any male member of the family. In the meantime,
as soon as circumstances permitted. Sir William Macleay became the tenant on
long lease, of the house and of some of the allotments bounded by Ithaca Road and
Billyard Avenue, on two of which the Society's Hall now stands. His occupancy
of the house lasted for the rest of his lifetime, until December 1891 ; and, there-
after. Lady Macleay's continued until her decease in August, 1903. With the ex-
ception of one year, when the house was sublet furnished during Lady Macleay's
absence in England, after Sir William's death, the old house was continuously
occupied by members of the family, from 1837 to 1903. The fate of the old
garden lias been similar to that of many others in Sydney and its neighbourhood.
But under the circumstances of the case, its history and associations are wortliy of
record. The picture referred to may have been painted by Conrad Martens, for
the view of the house and grounds from slightly different standpoints at Darling
Point was a favourite one of this well-known artist. By the kindness of the
Council of the Royal Society of Tasmania and Mr. Clive Lord I am able to exhibit a
photograph of a pencil drawing of Elizabeth Bay House taken from Darling Point,
by Conrad Martens.

But Alexander Macleay was not interested in horticulture only so far as
the garden at Elizabeth Bay was coneenied. In the letter from Mre. Macleay to
her son W. S. Macleay, from which I have already quoted, she says [about June,
1827]: "Your Father will soon become a large landed proprietor here; he has
[purchased 15,000 acres about 40 miles out of Sydney; and he has got a son of
David Brodie's for an overseer there." The property here referred to comprised
Brownlow Hill, near Camden, and Glendarewel farm attached to Brownlow Hill,
as mentioned by Captain Sturt in the account of his second expedition "to follow
the waters of the Morumbidgee " ["Two Exjieditions," Vol. ii., pp. 9 and 11.]

Mr. A. Macleay's efforts to develop horticulture were not confined to Elizabeth
Bay, but were extended to Brownlow Hill. Mr. .T. Backhouse records, in his
"Narrative." under date October 19th, 183(i— "Departing from .Tarvis Field [the
residence of the Police-magistrate] we .... proceeded throngli open
grassy-forest, to the Cow-pastures, where, at Bruwnlowe Hill, we were welcomed
by George and James M'Leay, sons of our kind friend the Colonial Secretary.
. We visited the agricultural establishment of the ^VI'Leays, on the
Mount Hunter Creek, where they have a garden, producing Oranges. Apples,
Loquats, Pears, Plums. Cherries. Figs. ^lulben-ies, ]\redlars. Raspberries, Straw-
berries, and Gooseberries, and where Roses are in gi'eat profusion."

THE society's heritage from the MACIjEATS. 591

George Macleay subsequently became the owner of the Brownlow Hill pro-
perty, and it was his home until his return to England in 1859. In a letter to his
mother, written from Brownlow Hill on June 5th, 1857, the Governor, Sir William
Denison, who had visited George Macleay there on two previous occasions, says —
"The j)lace where we are stopping is very prettily situated on a curious flat-topped
knoll, rising out of a plain by the side of a brook; the soil is beautiful; I never
saw such a growth either of flowers or fruit-trees as is shown in a garden whicli
has just been made in the alluvial soil of the flat." [Varieties of Vice-Regal Life,
Vol. i., p. 385, 1870.]

Additional testimony is afforded by a reprint of a lecture delivered at the
Sydney School of Arts, in 1834, bv Mr. Thomas Shepherd. This pioneer nursery-
man and horticulturist arrived in Sydney on February 12th, 1826. He received
a grant of land, at what is now Chijipendale, from Governor Darling, to enable
him to establish a public nursery and fruit-garden, long afterwards known as the
Darling Nursery. In giving an account of his early experiences, Mr. Shepherd
said : "About this time [January, 1827] I began to collect stock for budding and
gi-afting fruit-trees upon; and also other plants of various kinds, to commence
the nureery. Mr. "William Macarthur, of Camden, furnished me with a choice
collection of gTafts and trees. Mr. Alexander Macleay, of Elizabeth Bay, wa-s
also a benefactor in supplying me with numerous species and varieties of fruit,
ornamental trees, shrubs, and flower-roots; and it is to these two gentlemen that
the early settlers were principally indebted for the numerous varieties of fruit and
other trees raised in those days." ["In tlie 'Tliirties' : A Pioneer Gardener," by
A. P.O. In "On the Land" column, Siidneii Morning Herald, .luly 2nd, 1913.]

Elizabeth Bay House apparently was not occupied until after Mr. Macleay's
retirement from the position of Colonial Secretary. In the Mitchell Library there
is a copy of a "catalogue of an extensive and valuable library of nearly 4000
volumes, comprising the major part of the well-selected Library of Alexander
McLeay, Esqr.. M.C., who is removing to the country," to be sold by auction in 1-4
April [the year not given, probably 1837]. This may be taken to indicate that
the removal from Bridge Street to Elizabeth Bay was carried out soon after. At
this time Alexander Macleay was in his 70th year. The expenditure on the Eliza-
beth Bay property amounted to not less than £10,000 ; and- the successful way in
which the garden had been developed is said to have given a marked stimulus to
ornamental gardening in Sydney.

William Sharp Macleay, M.A., F.L.S.

Eldest son of Alexander Macleay, born in London, July 21st, 1792 — Edu-
cated at AVestminster, and Trinity College, Cambridge — On leaving the Uni-
versity, appointed Attache to the British Embassy in France: subsequently
Secretary to the Board for liquidating British claims on the French Govern-
ment, established at the peace of 1815 — 1825, Commissioner of Arbitration to
the Mixed British and Spanish Court of Commission for the Abolition of the
Slave Trade established at Havana, Cuba : 1830, Commissary Judge of the
same Court : 1836, Judge of the Mixed British and Spanish Court of Justice
established under the Treaty of 1835—1836, returned to England; 1837, re-
tired from the Public Service, upon a pension — 1838. left England for Aus-
tralia with his cousins William and John, arriving in Sydney in March, 1839 —
1865, died in Sydney, on .lanuary 26th : buried in the family tomb in Camper-
down Cemetery: cenotaph in St. James' Church.

f)92 president's address.

Among the sources of our interest in W. S. Macleay. the following; may be
particularised. In due time he succeeded to the collection of liis father, added
considerably to it, and eventually passed on the joint collections to William Mac-
leay. He had worked up the Scarabaeiilae in his father's collection ; also Captain
P. P. King's collection of Australian Annulosa. The results of his work and
of his influence are contributions to a not unimportant, Pre-Dar\vinian, English
chapter in the history of Zoology. He was universally recognised as the leading
representative of Zoology resident in Sydney from 1839 up to the time of his
death in 1865. But a special source of interest is that he was the guide and
mentor of William Macleay; and a most potent influence in starting his coiisin
on the first stage of his career, as a working entomologist, preparatory to becom-
ing a member of the succession. And finally, we lia\e a very interesting series
of memorials of him.

The two original sources of biograpliical information concerning W. S.
Macleay that we have are an obituary notice published in the Stidtie/i Moniivij
Herald of January .SOth, 1865; and the memorial sketch communicated by the
Senior Secretary, at the Anniversary Meeting of the Linnean Society of London,
on May 24th, 1865 [Journ., Zool., ix., Proc, p-c.]. Later notices in Biographical
Dictionaries are based on one or other of these. The first wa.s utilised by the
Rev. R. L. King in the preparation of his first Presidential Address to the Ento-
mological Society of New South Wales, on .January 30th, 1865 [Trans. Ent. Soc.
N.S. Wales, Vol. i., p. xliii.]. Mr. King adds: "The following memoir I have
taken principally from a notice which Las lately appeared from the. pen of an old
friend." This would be, almo.st certainly, the Rev. W. B. Clarke, probably
after a consultation with William Macleay. ISIr. Clarke was one of the oldest
and closest Australian scientific friends of W. S. Macleay. Their acquaintance
probably began at the meeting of the British Association for the Advancement of
Science at Liverpool, in 1837, when both were thinking of migrating to Australia.

The biographical sketch communicated to the Linnean Society, from internal
evidence, was apparently drawn up by Mr. Busk, Senior Secretary, after consul-
tation with George Macleay, possibly also with Professor Huxley. George Mac-
leay. at this time, was a Member of the Council, and would have received full
particulars of W. S. Jlacleay's decease from William Macleay.

W. S. Macleay graduated with hououi's at Trinity College, Cambridge, in
1814. His University career seems to have been without direct influence on his
interest in Natural History, as might be expected from his own remarks on the
backward state of Zoology in England in his day. Of this, he says: "Well may
the foreigner who beholds our learned establishments so splendidly endowed, note,
among the most remarkable circumstances atten<ling them, that in none whatever
should there be a zoological chair. It is not for me to enter into the causes of this,
else it were desirable to know why plants should have been deemed worthy of
attention, while animals have been utterly neglected. . . . It is true that
there are profe.ssoi-s of Natural History in three of our Northern Universities.
But we must not conceal the fact that a professorship of Natural
History is necessarily charged with duties that give ample employment in Paris
to thirteen professoi-s with their numerous assistants. I have ventured to give
this humiliating picture of the state of zoological instruction in Great Britain, be-
cause there are persons who affect surprise, that in that science which relates to
the animated works of God. FrancP should taki' precedence over a nation incom-
parably more religious" [Hor. Ent. p. 457. footnote].

THE society's heritage prom the macleays. 593

What awakened aud developed W. S. Macleay's interest in Zoology seems
primarily to have been his father's example, influence, and tine collection of in-
sects; and, secondarily. Ins sojourn in Paris, where he had the opportunity of
meeting Cuvier, Latreille, and other distinguished naturalists of that time, as well
as of apineciating the importance of the magnificent establishment of the Jardiu
des Plantes.

It is quite possible to understand, from his own record, what W . S . Macleay's
aims were; and, from the modern standpoint, to estimate fairly what was amiss in
his method of trying to realise them, if Huxley's notable maxim be kept in mind,
that "the ablest of us is a cliild of his time, profiting by one set of influences,
limited by another."

W. S. Macleay had profited by his intercourse with the French naturalists in
that, as a Zoologist, his status had improved, his horizon had enlarged, and his
standpoint had advanced. Dr. Leach, Keeper of the Natural History of the British
Museum, in succession to Dr. G. Shaw, from 1813-21, who was older than W. S.
Macleay, is said to have been the British naturalist who "opened the eyes of
English zoologists to the importance of those principles which had long guided
the French naturalists." W. S. Macleay supported him in this respect. In the
Horae Entomologicae, he recognised that, until the last few years, England stood
still at the bottom of the steps where Linnaeus had left her, while her neighbours
were advancing rapidly towards the entrance of the temple. He, therefore, en-
deavoured to pursue the example set by the new school of naturalists. He ac-
knowledges hi.;; indebtedness to the labours of Cuvier, Lamarck, Latreille, and
Savigny. and refers to Latreille as the father of entomology. He recognised, also,
more clearly than his contemporaries did, that there was a profound difference be-
tween affinity and analogj'.

But as a systematiser — the propounder of principles, and of a system, of
classification — his limitations, apart from the imperfections of the knowledge of
his time, and from the fact that he was a private individual, unattached to a teach-
ing-institution or a museum, cultivating an interest in natural history in his
leisure-hours, came in no small degree from his English traditions and nurture,
from the earlier influence of the Time-Spirit of the land of his birth. For it was
in England, in his day, that the views respecting the significance of the Natural
System, which he advocated, chiefly prevailed.

In his paper "Remarks on the Comparative Anatomy of certain Birds of
Cuba," read to the Linnean Society of London on November 21, 1826, W. S.
Macleay says: "If it be well said by M. Cuvier, that the natural history of an
ainmal is the knowledge of everything that regards that animal — then Natural
History, as a science, is only studied in effect when we are engaged in the pursint
of the natural system" (p. 13). W. S. Macleay was a naturalist in the special
sense that the primary and avowed object of his studies was the pursuit of the
natural system. Descriptive zoology, therefore, to him, was but a means to that
end; otherwise, it had little or no attraction for him; and, unless for special rea-
sons, he did not attempt it. It was the philosophical side of the subject that
appealed to him so strongly. But what is the natural system? He recurs again
and again to the theme, either in stating his own case, or in criticising the views
of others. For example, in the Preface to the Horae Ent., p. xiii., he says : "Thus
it requires neither talent nor ingenuity to invent an artificial system, and there
may be as many hundreds of such as there are heads to devise them ; but of natural

594 president's address.

systems there is and can be only one. Finally, the former is the miserable resource
of the feeble mind of man, unable to comprehend in one view the innumerable
works of the creation; whereas the natural system is the plan of creation itself,
the work of an all-wise, all-powerful Deity."

In his last paper "Annulosa of South Africa,"' before leaving England
(1838), he says (p. 52) : "It must not be supposed, however, that I offer this essay
as perfect and complete, or that I absurdly pretend, as some have most unjustly
laid to my charge, to have positively arrived at the Natural System. I merely
publish this paper on Cetoniidae as another, and perhaps closer approximation to
that Divine plan, which, every hour I have devoted to nature, whether in tropical
forests or in the museums of Eur(;pe, has shown to be the branch of natural
history most worthy of being studied by rational beings. But the truth is that
this divine plan is not one particular branch of natural history, but the study of
of every branch. It is the whole, of which it necessarily includes the knowledge
every branch of natural history is but a part, and which I shall ever regard with
gratitude, as having been the source of many moments of the purest pleasure
while my residence was in an unhealthy climate.''

Such views as these were entirely in keeping with the English Time-Spirit of
the day. They were fostered by some of the cun-ent English literature of the
time, notably a book entitled "The Wisdom of God manifested in the Works of
the Creator," written by John Ray (1628-1705). the "fatlier of modern zoology,''
a divine as well as a naturalist. It was a very popular book a century ago. W.
S. Macleay quotes from it approvingly more than once in the Horae Entomolo-
g^eae (pp. 468, 488). Another treatise breathing the same pious spirit was the
"Reflections on the Study of Nature: translated from the Latin of the cele-
brated Linnaeus," by Dr. J. E. Smith, President of the Linnean Society, and
issued together with liis Inaugural Address to the Society, and some of his smaller
botanical papers, in one volume, entitled "Tracts relating to Natural History," in
1798. In due time there followed the "Bridgewater Treatises on the Power,
Wisdom, and Goodness of God as manifested in the Creation" (numerous vol-
umes by various authors), and Paley's "Natural Theology."

The incentive to begin active work, with a view to publication, came (luite
simply. The tirst edition of Cuvier's "Regne Animal," in 4 vols., was published in
1817. while W. S. Macleay was officially resident in Paris. The entomological
portion of this important work was contributed by Latreille, who therein "applied
the name of Lamelli comes to an artificial division comprising all the insects which
compose the genera Luoarius and Scarahaeux^ as they were left by Linnaeus in his
last edition of the Systema Naturae." W. S. Macleay, therefore, decided to
revise the group, as his father's cabinet contained representatives of nearly 1800
species of the Linnean genus Searabaeics ; and, as an additional qualification for
undertaking the work, he had had the good fortune to visit almost every collection
of note in Europe, excepting those of Vienna and Berlin. The results of this
investigation were published, as a separate work, in London, Part i. in 1819. and
Part ii. in 1821. under the title of "Hora^ Entomologicae : or Essays on the
Annulose Animals, Part i., containing general Observations on the Geograpliy
Manners, and Natural .MTinities of the Insects whicli compose the Genus Sccira-
baeun of Linnaeus; to which are added a few incidental Remarks on the Genera
Lucanus and Hister of the same author. With an Appendix and Plates." A
second part was published two years after, in 1821, under the title "Part ii.: .Vn

THE society's HERITAGE TROM THE MACLEATS. 595

attempt to ascertain the Rank and Situation which the celebrated Egyptian In-
sect, Scarabaeus sacer, holds among' Organised Beings."

These two contributions to knowledge, in some respects perhaps his most
important ones, were something more than merely entomological treatises, as the
Title and Sub-titles might be taken to indicate. The arrangement of the Lamelli-
ccii-n Insects in the first part was the result of rigid analysis, whereby the author
arrived at some new principles of classification. These, in the second part, were
applied to an arrangement of the entire animal kingdom, chiefly deduced trom
synthetical investigation, and confined, moreover, to the larger and more important
groups, as pointed out by Jen>Tis. But in the course of his synthetical investiga-
tion, the author finds occasion to discuss the great problems of Philosophy, as they
present themselves to the philosophical Theist.

W. S. Maeleay's new principles of classification were incidentally treated of,
but not formulated by him. This was afterwards done by the Eev. L. Jenyns,
in a valuable "Report on the Recent Progiess and Present State of Zoology,"
covering the period from the publication of the fii'st edition of Cuvier's "Regne
Animal" (1817) to date, drawn up at the request of the Section for Natural His-
tory of the British Association for the Advancement of Science, and included in
the "Report of the Fourth Meeting held at Edinburgh in 1834" [pp. 143-251.
especially pp. 152-155, et seq. (1835)]. The writer ably and fairly reviews W. S.
Maeleay's views on classification, gives references to the work of the new school
of English zoologists [including, besides Macleay, Kirby, Vigors, Swainson, Hors-
field. and .7. E. Gray], and enables the reader to understand the zoological Time-
Spirit of the period. He thus formally states Maeleay's new principles: — "Mr.
MacLeay [in the Hor. Ent.] announced some new principles connected with the
classification of animals, which, from the circumstance of their having led to a
peculiar school of zoologists in England it will be necessary to consider a little
more in detail. The most important of these principles* [Footnote — * It may be
observed that Mr. MacLeay has nowhere formally stated these principles as above.
They are only gathered from what he has written on the subject.] are: (1st) That
all natural gi'oups, of whatever denomination, return into themselves, forming
circles; (2ndly). That each of these circular groups is resolvable into exactly five
otliers; (Srdly), That these five gi'oups always admit of a binary arrange-
ment, two of them t'eing what he calls typical, the other three aberrant; (4thly)
That while proximate groups in any circle are connected by relations of affinity,
corresponding groups in two contiguous circles are connected by relations of
analogy. Mr. Macleay has also observed [Hor. Ent. p. 518] that, in almost e\-ery
group, one of the five minor gToup.s into which it is resolvable, bears a re-
semblance to all the rest; or, more strictly speaking, consists of types which re-
present those of each of the four other groups, together with a type peculiar to
itself." These views came to be known as the "Quinary System" or tlie "Circular
and Quinary System."

Jen>T[s came to the conclusion that AV. S. iMadeay had pointed out more
exactly than others the difference between affinity and analogy in natural history;
and that he was also the first to establish by proof circular affinities. He then
proceeds: ""Whatever of error there may be in the rest of his views, whatever
modifications already have been, or may yet further be made in them, by tlie help
of the above principles he appeai-s to have approached nearer than any before
him to the true natural system, and (as has already been twice observed) [Kirby,

59G president's address.

Introd. to Eutom., "^'ol. iv., p. 359; and Swaiuson, Fu. Bor.-Ain., part 2, p. xlvi.]
been enabled to reconcile facts which upon no other plan can be reconciled."'

Ten years later, H. E. Strickland communicated a ''Report on the Recent
Progress and Present State of Ornithology" at the Fourteenth Meeting of the
British Association held at York in 1844 [Fourteenth Report, pp. 17()-2'2l]. Tliis
also is a valuable report. It is of special interest, because it includes a critical
review of the Quinary Theory, and of the work of Vigors and Swaiuson as ex-
ponents of it. At the same time, it illustrates the insuperable difficulty of finding
a scientific meaning of affinity under the influence of the creation-hypothesis.
Strickland rejects the Quinary System "as a theory which the most careful in-
ductions and the most vuiprejudiced reasonings of subsequent naturalists have

shown to have no claim to our adoption as a general law The point

at issue is this, — whether or not it formed a part of the plan of Creative Wisdom,
when engaged in peopling the earth with living beings, that when arranged into
abstract groups conformably with their characters, they should follow any regular
geometrical or numerical law." After much interesting argument, too lengthy to
quote, he concludes that irregidarity and not synuuetry may be expected to char-
acterise the natural system; ami that this view is more consistent with the benevo-
lence of an all-wise Creator.

Strickland, renewing Vigoi-s' paper on "The Natural Affinities that connect
the Orders and Families of Birds" [Trans. Linn. Soc, Vol. xiv.] says: "This
treatise abounds with original observations and philosophical references, but un-
fortunately they are apjilied in support of a tlieory which the most careful induc-
tions and the most unprejudiced reasonings of subsequent naturalists have shown

to have no claim to our adoption as a general law The application

by Mr. Vigors of these novel and singular doctrines to the class of birds contri-
buted in no small degree to the advancement of ornithological science; for, how-
ever erroneous a theory may be, yet the researches which are entered upon with
a view to its support or refutation invariably advance the cause of truth. Alchemy
was the parent of chemistry, astrology of astronomy, and quinarianisni has at least
been one of the foster-parents of philosophical zoology."

Reviewing Swainson's "Classification of Birds" foi'ming part of Lardner's
Cyclopaedia (1830-37). Strickland says of Swainson's method, that it is "only a
modification of the quinary theory, originally propounded by IMacleay and further
developed by Vigors. In following Jlr. Swainsun into the details of his method,
we miss the philosophical spirit and logical though not always well-founded rea-
soning of the last two authoi-s. Firmly wedded to a theory, he is driven, in apply-
ing it to facts, to the most forced and fanciful conclusions. Compelled to show
that the components of every group assume a circular figure, that they amount in
the aggregate to a definite number, into which each of them is again subdivisible,
and that there is a system of nnalnr/ical representation between the corresponding
members of every circle, which forms the sole test of its conformity to the natural
arrangement, we need not wonder at the difficulties with which our author is beset;
and we may certainly admire the ingenuity with which he has grapi)led with the
Protean forms of nature, and forced them into an apparent coincidence with a pre-
determined system. I need not follow out the details of this Procrustean process,
having already treated of it elsewhere" [p. 17,5. Reprinted in ''Memoirs of Hugh
Edwin Strickland." By Sir William -Tardine (1848). This .also includes a Selec-
tion from Strickland's scientific writings] .

THE society's heritage from the macleays. 597-

But Swainson did not confine his attention to the application of the Quinai-y
System, as modified by himself to the cla;isification of Birds. He narrates, in his
autobiogi-aphy, included in one of his books, how, under financial stress, he be-
came a "professional author," and, as such, the contributor of about a dozen popu-
lar textbooks on Natural History, to Lardner's "Cabinet of Natural History,"
later "The Cabinet Cyclopaedia," during the years 1834-40. In some of these he
applied his views to the classification of Quadrupeds, Reptiles and Fishes, Mol-
lusea, and Insecta, as well as to the Principles of Classification and cognate mat-
ters. He became, in this way, the most voluminous expoimder of the Quinary
System. His books contain much useful information, but they are also open to
Strickland's objection to the fanciful way in which he forced the Protean forms of
nature into an apparent coincidence with a predetermined system.

These quotations are given because, without a knowledge of what they repre-
sent, it is difficult to understand the condensed statements about W. S.
Macleay's work, as given in the Obituary Notices, to which reference has been
made. A'igors, and especially Swainsun, were the "injudicious friends" referred
to by Mr. Busk.

Other Pre-Darwinian reviewers or critics of Macleay's system besides those
mentioned, include Kirby and Speuee [Introduction to Entomology. Fifth Edi-
tion (1828), Vol. iii., p. 12; Vol. iv., p. 477], E. Newman [Entomological Maga-
zine, Vol. v.. p. ix., 1838], J. O. Westwood [Arcana Entomologica, Vol. i., p. 188,
1845], W. Whewell [History of the Inductive Sciences, Vol. iii., p. 295, 1857], and
Louis Agassiz [Essay on Classification, p. 234, 1859].

In his obituary notice of W. S. Macleay, Mr. Busk remarks: "It would be
out of place here to enter into an analysis or criticism of this work [The Hor.
Ent.], in which, however, it may be said are contained some of the most important
speculations as to the affinities or relations of various gi-oups of animals to each
other ever offered to the world, and of which it is almost impossible to overrate
the suggestive value. Speculative ideas, however, of such a general kind, even in
the hands of their author, are apt to be earned too far in their application, ami,
when they fall into those of other speculators of less information and less capacity,
can hardly fail to be grossly misused. This has been the case with Mr. MacLeay'3
ideas; and thus, as observed by the author of a notice in the 'Reader,' of his
labours, the name of the 'circular system' and of 'quinarianism' became almost
bywords, and the work of one of the most thoughtful and original of English
biologists sank at one time into most unmerited neglect."

It is a reasonable, and very probably a correct surmise, that tlie notice of
W. S. Macleay in the "Reader" referred to by Mr. Busk, was written by Huxley.
Particulars of Huxley's association with the "Reader." as promoter and editor-in-
chief, are given in the "Life and Letters" of Huxley [Vol. i., p. 305] . This
weekly journal was established after the quarterly Natural History Review was
given up, and lasted from 1863-66. It was the foreiimner of the current
"Nature," established in 1869. As far as one can judge* Huxley was the only one
of those associated with the management of the "Reader' who had personally
known W. S. Macleay. If so. his notice was his last tribute to the Sydney
friend of 1847-50. Unfortunately no copy of the "Reader" is available in Sydney.

W. S. Macleay did reply to minor critics, like Bicheno and Fleming, on
such subjects as Systems in the abstract. Natural. Artificial, or Dichotomons. But
how was the finite mind of man to grapple successfully with such supernatural

598 president's address.

problems as symmetry in the natural system versus irregularity, as judicative o£
the benevolence of an all- wise Creator?

His only reply to Swainson is contained in his paper on the "Natural System
of Fishes," dated Elizabeth Bay, near Sydney, September 12ti, 1840, sent as a letter
to Dr. J. McClelland, of Calcutta, published in the Calcutta Journal of Nat. Hist.,
July, 1841, and republished in the Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., Vol. ix., p. 197 (1842).
In this, he says: "I assure you that your excellent work on Cyprinidae has afford-
ed me the greatest delight, and the more so, inasmuch as I am convinced natural
arrangement is always best tested by accurate analysis, and also inasmuch as 1
am not by any means satisfied with Swainson's arrangement of Fishes. As from
ever\'thing Swainson writes there is information to be derived, so I assure you,

his little volume on Reptiles and Fishes has not been lost on me I

am often afraid of tmsting myself to Mr. Swainson's method of drawing analo-
gies between things in themselves wide apart The nearer two

groups are in general structure, the more striking their parallel analogies will be;
and therefore I think, that by comparing fish witli fish, we may obtain more
striking analogies than by comparing them, as Swainson does, with Mammalia,
birds, or insects; at all events, we shall have less reason to distrust the efforts of a
fertile imagination. Still I am far from denying that such analogies as he
delights in exist in nature. I only say that they are dangerous things to deal
with, and that in his hands they often become far-fetched and even ludicrous"
(pp. 203, 204).

Professor Ray Lankester, in his valuable Essay on "the History and Scope of
Zoology," points out that the history of Zoology as a science is the history of the
great biological doctrine of organic evolution as put forward, on a new basis, by
Charles Darwin in his "Origin of Species," published in the year 1859. It is a
long and involved story, and some of the details are still in question.

W. S. Macleay's published work covers the period 1819-47. Therefore, in
time, as well as in character, in so far as it has to do with the significance of the
natural system and with the principles of classification, it is pre-Darwinian.

What was needed then, no less than when Darwin offered it, in 1859, was what
Huxley said: "That which we were looking for, and could not find, was a hypo-
thesis respecting the origin of known organic forms, which assumed the operation
of no causes but such as cnuld be proved to be netually at work. We wanted not
to pin our faith to that or any other speculation, but to get hold of clear and
definite conceptions which could be brought face to face with facts and have their
validity tested. The 'Origin' provided us with the working-hypothesis we sought.
Moreover, it did the immense service of freeing us for ever from the dilemma —
refuse to accept the creation-hypothesis, and what have you to propose that can
be accepted by any cautious reasoner?" [Darwin's "Life," Vol. ii., p. 197].

In offering his working-hypothesis, Darwin first grouped his predecessors:
"Naturalists try to arrange the species, genera, and families in each class, on what
is called the Natural System. But what is meant by this system? Some authorj
look at it merely as a scheme for arranging together those living objects which
are most alike, and for separating tho.se which are most unlike; or as an artificial
means for enumerating, as briefly as possible, general propositions.
But many naturalists think that something more is meant by the Natural System;
they believe that it reveals the plan of the Creator; but unless it be specified whe-
ther in order, time or space, or what else is meant by the plan of the Creator, it

THE society's heritage FROM THE MACLEAYS. 599

seems to me that nothing is thus added to our knowledge. ... I believe
that something more is included ; and that propinquity of descent — the only
known cause of the similarity of organic beings — is the bond, hidden as it is by
various degrees of moditication, which is partially revealed to us by our classifi-
cations" [Origin of Species, p. 413, I860].

The first group included the French school, led by Cuvier, and also other Con-
tinental zoologists. The second comprised the English zoologists who concerned
themselves with the pursuit of the natural system in the first half of the last
century, among w hom W. S. Madeay was pre-eminent. It included also Louis Agassiz,
a great teacher and an eminent naturalist, whose "Essay on Classification" was
published in England as a separate work in 1859, the year in which Dai-win's
"Origin of Species" was issued.

After grouping his predecessors, Darwin presented his working-hypothesis
in the following words : — "All the foregoing rules and aids and diftieulties in classi-
fication are explained, if I do not greatly deceive myself, on the view that the
natural system is founded on descent witli modification ; that the characters which
naturalists consider as showing true affinity between any two or more species, are
those which have been inherited from a common parent, and, in so far, all true
classification is genealogical; that community of descent is the hidden bond which
naturalists have been unconsciously seeking, and not some unknown plan of crea-
tion, or the enunciation of general propositions, and the putting together anrt

separating objects more or less alike On my view of characters

being of real importance for classification, only in so far as they reveal descent,
we can clearly understand why analogical or adaptive characters, although of the
utmost importance to the welfare of the being, are almost valueless to the system-
atist. For animals, belonging to two most distinct lines of descent, may readily
become adapted to similar conditions, and thus assume a close external resemb-
lance; but such resemblances will not reveal — will rather tend to conceal their
blood-relationship to their proper lines of descent" [Origin of Species, pp. 421,
426] .

Viewed in the light of these illuminating propositions, it is obvious that the
Circular and Quinary System did not fulfil the requirements of a working hypo-
thesis, such as was needed. It was an artificial system, the fruit of philosophical
speculation. "Within its limitations, and frt«m the particular standpoint from
which it was attempted, the Horae Entomologicae was thoughtfully and ably writ-
ten; and a stimulating contribution to the English scientific literature of the
time. The defects of tlie principles and of the system were the inherent scientific
weakness of the foundation on which they were based. They were the product of
a studied attempt to develop the Natural System under the influence of the
creation-hypothesis — in the belief that "the Natural System is the plan of creation
itself, the work of an all-wise all-powerful Deity." This assumed the operation
of causes outside the domain of science, involving the obscuration of both thd
need, and the possibility of finding a scientific meaning of natural affinity, and
all that it connotes. The author's conceptions of circular affinities, of quinary
groups, and of no true affinities unconnected with relations of analog^-, were
speculative ideas without a scientific basis; because, in the belief that devisers of
systems were merely endeavouring to translate the thoughts of the Creator into
human language, affinity and analogy could be interpreted only in terms of some-
thing supernatural and beyond the domain of science.

too president's address.

W. S. Macleay's views had apparently, not profouudly changed up to the
time that Huxley said tarewell to liim in Sydney, in Jlay, 1850. Huxley's seconii
letter to Macleay, the only one which has come down to us, was written on Novem-
ber 9th, 1851, just a year after the "Rattlesnake" was paid off, after her return to
England. In this, Huxley writes : "1 am every day becoming more and mors
certain that you were on the right track thii-ty years ago in your views of the
order and symmetry to be traced in the true natural system." These were not
empty words merely intended to please. The reference to "thirty years ago,"
signities 1821, the year in which the second part of the Horae Entomologicae was
published. The extract quoted reveals the fact that Huxley had read the book,
possibly on the homeward voyage, as he had an absorbing source of interest, apart
from science, to claim his attention during his brief periodical visits to Sydney.
Macleay had some spare copies of his book, and probably gave one to Huxley,
perhaps as a parting gift. Moreover, in 1851, Huxley could write as he did. be-
cause, though he may have given up the "Pentateuehal cosmogony," he could still
say, at this time : "But my mind was unbiassed in respect of any doctrine which
presented itself, if it professed to be based on purely philosophical and scientific
rea.soning." When the letter was written, Huxley was still an, Assistant-Surgeon
in the Navy, on leave, in order to prepare bis scientific work for publication.
His future prospects were very uncertain; and, so early in his career, he had not
as yet been brought into serious contact with the Species-question. "My last
letter," he says, "is, I am afraid, nine or ten months old, but here in England, the
fighting and scratching to keep your place in the crowd exclude almost all other
thoughts. When I last wrote, I was but on the edge of the crush at the pit-door
of this great fools' theatre — now I have worked my way into it and through it,

and am, I hope, not far from the check-takers In the meanwhile,

I have not been idle, as I hope to show you by the various papers enclosed with
this." It was after this, but before the publication of the "Origin," that, as his
biographer says, he took up "a thoroughly agnostic attitude with regard to the
species-question, for he could not accept the creational theory, yet sought in vain
among the transmutationists for any cause adequate to produce transmutation."
Or, in his own words, "I imagine that most of those of my contemporaries who
thought seriously about the matter, were very much in my own state of mind — in-
clined to say to both Mosaists and Evolutionists, "a plague on both your houses!"
and disposed to turn aside from an interminable and apparently fruitless discus-
sion, tu labour in the fertile fields of ascertainable fact" [Life and Letters.]

It is a matter of history that Darwin's "Origin" made no favourable appeal
for consideration as a working-hypothesis for the solution of scientific problems,
either to Agassiz or to W. S. Macleay. not to speak of many others; and merely
presented itself as a menace to their religious beliefs. But how few there were,
who merely from a perusal of the book, without, or even witli. verbal or epistolary
explanations from the author, were ready to accept it at its face-value?

It is not surprising, therefore, that the receipt of a copy of Darwin's "Origin"
sent by Mrs. Lowe, with a request for an expression of his opinion about it,
should furnish W . S . Macleay with an opportunity only for a theological discus-
sion. In his repjy to Robert Lowe, he says [May. ]8()0] : "It is lucky for me
therefore, that both yon and Airs. Lowe have given me the subject of this letter
im asking me for my opinion of Darwin's book. To me, now on the verge of
the tomb, I must confess the subject of it is more interesting than either the ex-

THE SOCIETY S HERITAGE FROM THE MACLEAYS.

601

teiision of British commerce or even the extension of national education. Tliis
question is no less than 'What am I?' 'What is manf, a created being under the
direct government of his Creator, or only an accidental sprout of some primordial
type that was the common progenitor of both animals and vegetables. The
theologian has no doubt answered those (juestions, but leaving the Mosaic account
of the Creation to Doctors of Divinity, the naturalist tinds himself on the horns of
a dilemma. For, either from the facts he observes, he must believe in a special
creation of organised species, which creation has been progressive and is now in
full operation, or he must adopt some such view^ as that of Darwin, viz., that the
primordial cell of life has been constantly sprouting forth of itself by 'natural

selection" into all the various forms of animals and vegetables 1

am myself so far a Pantheist that I see God in everything: but then 1 believe in
His special Providence, and that he is the constant and active sole Creator and
all-wise Administrator of the Universe" [Life and letters of the Right Hon.
Robert Lowe, Viscount Sherbrooke, Vol. ii., p. 204 (1893)].

It is to be remembered, of course, that the letter was a private one, not in-
tended for publication.

From the foregoing, it is evident that the words which Sachs applies to the
contemporary botanists, are also applicable to the zoologists: — "It is easy to
understand why the first feeble attempts at a theory of descent encountered such
obstinate, nay fanatical opposition from professed systematists, who looked upon
the system as something above nature, a component part of their religion" [History
of Botany, p. Ill] .

It is not necessary to enter into details respecting W. S. Macleay's published
papers. Work done from upwards of seventy years to more than a century ago,
whether relating to the significance of the natural system, to the morphology of
insects, or to descriptive zoology, is now chiefly of historic interest, because, smce
then, all branches of knowledge have progressed. Twenty-six papers — not includ-
ing the Horae Entomologicae, Aunulosa .Javanica, Annulosa of New Holland, col-
lected by Captain P. P. King, and the Annulosa of South Africa, which were not
published by Societies — are listed in the Royal Society's Catalogue of Scientific
Papers, Vol. iv. The entire series can be consulted in the Society's library.

W. S. Macleay left England for Cuba in October, 1825, to take up his
duties in connection with the Mixed British and Spanish Court of Commission for
the Abolition of the Slave Trade established at the Havana. His residence m
Cuba lasted from December, 1825 to early in the year 1836.

At a Meeting of the Zoological Club on February 14th, 1826, "Mr. Vigors
read some extracts from a letter which he had received from W . S . Macleay,
Esqr., F.L.S., from the Havannah, December 27th, 1825. The extracts con-
sisted of Ornithological observations made by tliat gentleman, during his voyage
from England to the Island of Cuba, in the months of October, November, and
December, 1825 ; including remarks on the Ornithology of the Islands of Madeira,
Teneriffe and St. Jago; as also a few cursory observations made at Barbadoes,
Martinique, and off fhe coast of St. Domingo, on the same subject" [Zoological
Journal, Vol. ii., p. 553, 1826].

With the exception of one interesting letter to his friend Kirby. dated Janu-
ary 3rd, 1827, about a year after his arrival, few particulars of this period of his
life are available, except what can be gleaned from casual remarks in some of his
papers. To Kirby, he wrote: "I fear that you will imagine that, by crossing the

L I B R A R

602 pkesident's address.

Atlautie, I have forgotten my old friends; but the fact is that I was unwilling
to wiite to you until I had carefully studied the "Introduction' [Kirby and Spenee's
Introduction to Entomology] and had enabled myself to give you some opinion
upon this very useful and laborious work, for which I beg leave to return you
best thanks. It contains, indeed much information quite new to me; and although
we differ in some important points, time. I have no doubt, will set all things right.
"The climate has, I thank God, hitherto agreed with me much better than
that of England : but there is a languor attendant upon every kind of exertion,
which makes reading or study here a very different thing from what it is in
England.

"This is a good ])!ace for Wading Birds, Lizards, Butterflies, and Sphinges,
but apparently nothing else.

"I live in the country, where I have a large house and garden; this is my
pi'ineipal amusement, as I take great pleasure in cultivating Orchideae, particu-
larly those which are parasitical on trees. The disagreeables are ants, scorpions,
mygales, and musquetoes. The latter were quite a pest on my first arrival within
the tropics; but now I mind them about as much as I did gnats in England."'
Then follow some particulars of his having been stung by an immense scorpion
and a large wasp [Freeman's Life of Kirby, p. 422].

This letter is of special interest, because of the reference to his interest in
horticulture. The garden would be at Guanabanacoa. For in his description of
a curious spider with two eyes, Nops Guanabanacoae, g.et sp.n., in the Annals
of Nat. History [Vol. ii.. No. 7, p. 1, 1839] published after his return to England,
he says — "the trivial name of this remarkable spider will serve to commemorate
Guanabanacoa, the place where first I found it, a place in which I long resided,
devoting many deliglitful hours to the science of natural history."

Natural history soon began to claim his attention in his leisure, but in the
absence of any other records, the particulars have to be gleaned from his own
papers, or from those who recorded or described the collections or specimens he
sent to England.

Specimens of lizards, bats, and of forty-five species of birds were seut to
England, exhibited at meetings of the Zoological Club of the Linnean Society, and
recorded by Bell, Horsfield, and Vigors in the Zoological Journal [Vol. iii., pp.
235, 236, and 434 (1828)] . J. E. Gray, at a later date, described a collection of
Cuban bats sent by W. S. Macleay ; and he mentions also a foetal specimen of a
dolphin [Ann. Nat! Hist., Vol. iv.,"Sept., 1839, p. 16].

The curious rodent, Capromiis, birds, and Annulosa, especially interested W.
S. Macleay. His acquisition of a co]iy of Oviedo's book "Historia general de las
'Indias,' " the oldest and one of the rarest and best books on the Natural History
of the West Indies, published in 1547, led him to ' take an interest in the remark-
able rodents referable to the genus Capromi/K. In the first of two notes about
them, published in the Zoological .Journal [Vols, iv., 269; v., 179, 1829-30] he
says: "Having now three species of Copmnuis alive in my garden, and ready to
be sent by the first opportunity to the Zoological Society, I shall avail myself of
the information to be found in Oviedo, to correct some of the absurd errors which
have been lately propagated on the sub.i'ect of this genus." He records also his
own observations on the animals in their native haunts. It appears, from the
second note, that he sent five living specimens by the "Aurora Frigate," hut that
they did not survive the voyage.

THE society's heritage from the 3IACLEAYS. 003

One of the papers sent home duriiig- bis residence in Cuba was entitled
"Remarks on the Comparative Anatomy of certain Birds of Cuba, with a view
to their respective places in the System of Nature." [Trans. Linn. Soc, Vol. xvi.,
Part i., p. 149] . But, as remarked in a lengthy review of the paper in the Zoo-
logical .Journal [^'ol. iv., p. 483], "of comparative anatomy they contain but little,
and appear rather to be designed as prefatory observations introductory to ana-
tomical notices which are intended hereafter to be given.'' It was the author's in-
tention to examine anatomically particular genera, which were not within the
i-each of naturalists at borne; but the supplementary details were never published.

No papers dealing especially with Cuban insects were published by W. S.
Macleay. But among our memorials of him there are thirty-nine water-colour
drawings of lepidopterous larvae, from which he may have bred the perfect insects.
Besides these, there are a number of pencil or pen and ink sketches of lepidoptera,
scorpions, ticks, and mites.

After his return to England, he contributed a short paper "On some new
Forms of Arachnida," to the Annals of Natural History [Vol. ii.. No. 7, Sept.,
1838] in which he described and figured the types of four new genera, and the
type of a new subgenus of Dufour's genus S'eIetio2^s. Four of the species were
Cuban, and one Indian. These particular species were selected for their singular
ity "out of a great variety of new forms in my cabinet," "in order to prove how
little is as yet known of even that part of the class Arachnida which has been
the most studied, namely Spiders" ; and thus to enable him to re-define the
Order Araneidea.

Poultun [Essays on Evolution, Chap. viii.. p. 220, 1908] has pointed out that
"W. S. Macleay, in his Hor. Ent. alluded to certain cases which are now included
under Mimicrj', viz., the likeness of some Diptera to Hymenoptera, and inter-
preted them, together with many other resemblances of structure and life-history,
by the principle of Analogy, as distinct from Affinity in Nature [Pt. ii., p. 365]."
In the paper above referred to, W. S. Macleay described an Indian spider, in ap-
pearance resembling an ant, as the type of the new genus Mi/rmaracline, of which
he says : "Nothing is certainly known with respect to the manners of these curious
spiders, but I suppose from analogy, that they may eventually be found to feed on
ants. It has long been known that the Voluceltae in their larva state live in tbe
nests of the Bombi they so much resemble; and I have discovered that the larvae
of those tropical Bomhi/lii which have such a bee-like form live on the larvae
of the bees they so strikingly represent. Perhaps, in like manner, the object of
nature in giving such a striking form to this spider is to deceive the ants on
which they prey" (p. 12).

Only the most meagre record of W. S. Maeleay's experiences as a collector,
before he went to Cuba, has come down to us. One cannot believe that the
attractions of Combe Wood, "classical ground to entomologists" (Lyell), Wimble-
don Common, Battersea Fields, and other favourite localities for the entomolo-
gical collector resident in London a century ago, were unappreciated either by him
or his father. Probably, too, during his undergraduate days, he may have had ex-
periences like those of Charles Darwin about seventeen years later, in collecting
insects in the neighbourhood of Cambridge, and in having fellow-students who
shared his interest.

Nevertheless the solitary record of a collecting excursion before he left Eng-
land in 1825. known to me, is a casual remark in the Horae Entomologicae (Part

604 president's address.

i., p. 02) — "Mr. Kirby mentions in the introduction to Eutomologj', his having
Hound these insects [Troges] on a ram's horn. I was myself present in the forest
of Fontainebleau, with the last-mentioned entomologist, when he took a specimen
of Jroj from off a horse's scull " This was in June, 1817. Kirby, in a letter to
his friend Sutton, has given an account of his first visit to Paris, of his introduc-
tion to Latreille, and of W. S. Macleay's kindness and helpfulness to him.

It is evident that W. S. Macleay had the opportunity of making a good col-
lection of the Cuban groups in which he was interested, sufficient not only for his
own requirements, but for purposes of exchange with his scientific friends ; as well
as of supplementing it, to some extent, at the places which he visited on the
voyages outwards and homewards.

He does not appear to have had a separate collection of his own prior to his
departure for Cuba in 1825. Any specimens which came into his possession,
whether as the results of his own collecting, or as gifts or exchanges, were added
to the paternal collection. But just before the time of parting came, his father
allowed him to take over such specimens as he was particularly interested in, as an
aid to work he may have had in hand, or in prospect. These .^ormed the nucleus
of the collection he eventually brought out to Australia in 1838. Some of the
items, as well iis some of his records of observational zoologj-, are mentioned in
his paper "On the Annulosa of Sov/th Africa." On p. 22, he says — "I have found
Diplognatlia Gagales common at Porto Praya in the Cape de Verds; but I cannot
say that it is a llower-freciuenting insect, as I never met with it except in the
cocoa-nut groves below the town, and always on the foliage of the underwood
which grows beneath the Palms." On p. 54 he refers to "the Decapods of
my own collection." On p. 63, he remarks — "It becomes necessary to
point out the families of a stirps [Grapsina] which is very common in warm cli-
mates, and the study of whose manners afforded me much amusement whilst I
reside<l in the West Indies." On p. 65, of a crab, he adds — "I have found in
CJuba the species of Sesarma to live generally under stones on the banks of the
nniddy mouths of rivers." And on p. 66, of another crab, he says — "The type
of this genus is the Grapstos rurieola of Degeer, a crab whose manners are de-
tailed by me in the fu'st volume of the Transactions of the Zoological Society.
Also on p. 67 — "I liave taken abundance [of yeutilograpsus mi>iutuj: Fabr.] in the
Atlantic Ocean, adhering to the gulf-weed."

After his return to England, W. S. Macleay undertook the description of the
Annulosa, chiefly collected during an Expedition into the Interior of South Africa,
under the direction of Dr. Andrew Smith, in the yeai-s 1834. 1835, and 1836; fitted
out by the Cape of Good Hope Association for exploring Central Africa. The
first portion only of his intended contribution was published, in 1838, shortly l)c-
fore his departure for Australia. In the preface (p. 1) he says — "It may be
well that I should mention here my having lately acfjuired, by purchase, the very
extensive collection of Annulosa made by M. Verreaux during liis long residence
at the Cape, and also his manuscript notes on the species collected . Perhaps there-
fore no nat\iralist is better provided than T am with those materials wliich are
necessary to enal)lc us to form accurate notions of South African entomology.
Upon this subject also, my pei-sonal acquaintance with the habits of many exotic
genera, may to a certain degree be brfiught to bear."

Early in the year 1836, after completing more than ten yeai-s' service, W. S.
Macleay set out on his return to England. On the way, he visited the United

THE society's heritage from the macleays. 605

States. This gave liim the opportunity of getting into touch with American ento-
mologists, of doing some collecting, and the chance of entering into exchanges;
and led up to his election as a Corresponding Member of the Academy of Natural
Sciences of Philadelphia. His own brief record of this visit is given in the
"Annulosa of Soutii Africa" (p. 17) in the following words: — "The species of
Cremastocheilus are not common. In company with Dr. Pickering, and Mr. Titian
Peale, I found G. castaneae of Keck, in June, 1836, on the banks of the Delaware,
on the New Jersey side, opposite Philadelphia. These singular beetles are never
found except flying, like Cicindelae, over the sand which there lines the bank of
that noble river."

Soon after his arrival in England in the autumn of 1836, W. S. Macleay was
presented at Court, as a mark of approbation of the way in which he had carried
out his responsible official duties in Cuba.

He soon received a welcome back into scientific circles in London. In 1837,
he was elected to the Council of the Linnean Society. The Lord Bishop oZ
Norwich, Dr. Stanley, father of Dean Stanley, and of Captain Owen Stanley, was
President. Among the Members of Council were J. J. Bennett of the British
Museum, George Bentham, Robert Brown, the Earl of Derby, President of the
Zoological Society, Dr. Horsfield, and Richard Owen.

In the same year, he was elected to the Council of the Zoological Society.
Thomas Bell and Richard Owen were Members of the Council at this time. We
have some interesting relics of W . S . Macleay's connection with the Society, in
the shape of notices to attend Council or other meetings, signed by W. H .
TaiTell as secretary; and proofs of two papers submitted to him as a member
of the Publication Committee.

About the same time, too, W. S. Macleay was elected to the Council of the
British Association for the Advancement of Siience, and President of Section D at
the meeting of the Association held at Liverpool in September, 1837. The Earl
of Burlington was President, but the Address was delivered by Professor Traill.
The Presidents of Sections were: Sec. A, Sir David Brewster; Sec. B, Dr.
Faraday; See. C, Professor A. Sedg-wick; Sec. D (Botany and Zoology), W,
Sharp Macleay: and Sec. E, Professor Clark. The Vice-Presidents of Sec. D.
were Dr. Richardson, Professor Graham, and Professor Lindley; and the Secre-
taries, Professor Bahington, W. Swainson. and the Rev. L. Jen\Tis. No papers
of particular interest to us were communicated to Section D. But .John Gould
exhibited coloured drawings of Australian and New Zealand birds; and W. S.
Macleay and the Rev. F. W. Hope described some insects from the fine collec-
tion of Mr. Melly, then resident in Liverpool. It was a very successful and in-
teresting meeting, as described by R. Murchison, General Secretary', in a letter to
his wife ["Life of Sir Roderick Murchison," Vol. i.. p. 238]. The Rev. W. B.
Clarke attended ; and he, .lohn Gould, who left England for Tasmania in 1838. and
W . S . Macleay had the opportunity of meeting again in Sydney in 1839.

After the "Beagle" had completed lier voyage, and W. S. Macleay bad re-
turned to England from Cuba, Charles Darwin and he seem to have met, in 1836
or early in 1837. For, in a letter dated April 10th, 1837, written by Darwin to
the Rev. L. Jen.\-ns, he says — "During the last week several of the zoologists of
this place [London] have been urging me to consider the possibility of publishing
the 'Zoology of the Beagle's Voyage' on some uniform plan. Mr. [W. S,]
Macleay has taken a gi'eat deal of interest in the subject, and maintains that such

606 president's address.

a publication is very tlesirable because it keeps together a series of observations
made respecting animals inliabiting the same part of the world, and allows any
future traveller taking them with him" ["Life," Vol. i., p. 281].

The concluding sentence of the "Annulosa of South Africa'' contains the
first announcement of W. S. Madeay's intended visit to Australia — "1 hope, how-
ever, as I am about to visit Australia, soon to be able to make myself master of
the economy of these insects [Australian Paussi], and alsu to publish a correct
representation of the parts of the mouth" (p. 75).

A more deflnice statement about his contemplated departure, and a request
for exchanges of specimens, is to be found in a letter from W . S . Macleay to his
friend .Tohn McClelland, Assistant Surgeon, Bengal Medical Service, at Calcutta.
The latter, wishing to make known Macleay's wishes for exchanges, appended the
following extract from the letter to his own paper on "Indian Cyprinidae." which
was communicatetl to the Asiatic Society of Bengal, on 5th September, 1838, sub-
sequently printed in Vol. xix., Part ii., of the Asiatic Researches, and reprinted in
the Annals and Magazine of Natural History [Vol. viii., 1842, p. 199] — "Mr.
MaeLeay writes from London, 12th August, 1838: 'I am now on the eve of em-
barking for Sydney, where I intend to remain for the next three or four yeare ; and
what I would ask of you is. to exchange invertel)rated animals, collected in India,
as the Annelida, Annulosa, Cirripedes. Radiata, and Acrita. for other objects col-
lected in New Holland; insects, spiders, and crustaeea of India I at present desire
above all, and shall feel obliged by any notes on their metamorphoses or oeconomy.
With regard to such notes, I need not say I shall bear in mind the axiom '-Suum
cuique." If you will point out your particular desiderata in natural history, I
will endeavour to add to your collections.' " By way of commending the request,
Dr. McClelland adds — "Considering the intimate intercourse now established be-
tween Calcutta and Sydney, it is to be hoped that an appeal to India from such a
quarter will not be made in vain, and that all who are interested in the advance-
ment of natural history will collect and forward wliatever objects their particular
localities may afford, with a view to facilitate the researches of the illustrious
author of 'Horae Entoraologicae.' "

Some interesting details relating to this period are furaished by two letters
among the W. S. Macleay relics, from Edward Macarthur, eldest son of John
Macarthur of Camden, and afterwards Major-General Sir Edward Macarthur.
One of these, dated, "Thui-sday, 4 Ja.ny." [? 1838] is an intimation that his bro-
ther, possibly James, and his cousin, Captain Macarthur, were intending to call on
W. S. Macleay; that the latter, who had been appointed to conduct the
new settlement on the north shore of New Holland [Port Essington], was
desirous of taking out a good selection of plants, especially such as were
of commercial value, suitable for cultivation in the tropics; and ask-
ing W. S. Macleay if he would supply a list of desirable plants. The
interview, doubtless, took place, and we may be sure that W. S. Macleay did his
best to siipply a list of plants, l)ased mainly (m his experiences in Cuba.

The second, unfortunately not dated, Inif. probably written in July, 1838, is
as follows — "I believe that I have found, at length, the sort of ship we want. If
you could call on me to-morrow, about eleven, we might talk it over. It is very
necessary that your friends should inform yon. whether they will accompany you ;
for, on the 1st of August, the owner of the ship is to have a positive answer from
me Believe me, verv trulv vours. Edw. Macarthur."

THE society's heritage tbom the macleays.

607

What is here meant seems to be, either that Maearthur, or perhaps his bro-
ther James, was arranging to return to Australia as soon as he could hear of a
suitable ship, and that W. S. Macleay was hoping to accompany him as a fellow-
passenger. Or it may, perhaps, have meant tliat he had merely undertaken, on
W. S. Macleay's liohnlf, to make inquiries for a suitable ship for the latter and liis
friends, his cousins, William and John. W. S. Macleay was prepared to depart
in August, as appears from his letter to Dr. McClelland, written on August 12th,
1838, "I am now on the eve of embarking for Sydney," meaning approximately,
and not on the following day. But the cousins were not ready to sail so soon,
possibly on account of the last illness of tlieir mother, or of .John's delicate health.
The Plant-book gives the date of receipt of the plants brought by W . S . Macleay,
per Royal George, as March, 1839. Allowing four months for the voyage, the
embarkation of the party must have been postponed from August to November or
early in December, 1838.

W. S. Macleay's motives for \isiting Australia, besides a desire to rejoin his
relatives, from whom he had been separated for more than twelve years, may very
well have been to give the climate a trial, as that of England did not suit his
health after ten years' residence in the tropics; and to see something of the
wonderful fauna and flora, under very favourable conditions. After some experi-
ence, the attractiveness of the mild and sunny climate, of congenial friends, of the
beautiful garden, and of the harbour and the bush close at hand, irresistibly ap-
pealed to him ; the idea of remaining for three or four years only was given up, and
Sydney became his permanent home for the rest of his life. Indeed, he never
seems to have left it, except to visit Brownlow Hill, and possibly Illawarra. He
would certainly never have left Australia wliile Robert Lowe was a resident of
Sydney (1842-50).

W. S. Macleay and his two cousins arrived in Sydney in March, 1839. Other
notable arrivals in the same year were the Rev. W. B. Clarke, Mr. John Rae,
end Mr., afterwards Sir Alfred Stephen (from Tasmania), all three of whom
spent the rest of their days in Sydney ; and John Gould, and Mr. and Mrs. Charles
Meredith, who came as visitors.

After his ari'ival in Sydney, W. S. Macleay seems to have been most at-
tracted by the marine fauna. This is not surprising, as he had never before been
so favourably situated for marine collecting and study. Tow-netting, dredging,
and shore-collecting could be carried out under most favourable conditions.
The fishermen used to draw their nets on the sandy beach at the bottom of the
garden; and it was easy to get into touch with them, for the supply of remark-
able or other specimens desired, that they might capture. It was from this source,
evidently, that the sea-snake, offered to Dr. Cantor, was obtained.

The first contribution to Science after his arrival was a paper on the "Natural
arrangement of Fishes," sent as a letter to his friend Dr. McClelland, in Cal-
cutta, dated 12th September, 1840. This was published in the Calcutta .Journal of
Natural History for July. 1841; and reprinted in the Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., Vol,
is., p. 197 (1842). It was written partly to express W. S. Macleay's apprecia-
tion of McClelland's paper on Indian Cyprinidae, to which family the author had
applied Macleay's principles of classification ; partly to apply liis principles to
the classification of Fishes in general; and partly because he was not satisfied
with Swainson's arrangement. His objections to Swainson's methods liave been
•luoted above. A number of outline sketches of Sydney fishes among the W. S
Macleay relies were probably made in the preparation of the paper.

608 president's address.

In concluding his letter, W. S. Macleav says of himself — "I am sorry that I
have not been able as yet to get any Cyprinidae from our New Holland rivers; but
I attribute it to my own residence so far from any river, not to the absence of
them. I am promised by friends, who have better opportunities, the result of
their researches; but I receive nothing, as they know not how to catch the minute
fish of the river. However, I intend to try the Nepean River myself when I go
down there, which I soon propose to do [this would be near Brownlow Hill]. In
the meantime my residence on the sea-side enables me to increase my collection of
marine genera, and if there be any you wish for, 1 shall be most happy to send
them. A thousand thanks for your kind method of heating up for insects to be
sent me from India. I shall be happy to pay any fair price for the collector's
time and trouble. Tell Dr. Cantor that I depend on him to increase my collection
of Annulose animals, and that I hope he will soon write to me. Tell him also that
I have got a marine serpent of the genus Pelamys, caught in the mouth of Port
Jackson harbour, the only one our fishermen have ever seen. If he wishes for it,
it is at his service; for he knows infinitely more of .Serpents than I do, and my
grand desire is, to increase my collection of Annulose animals .... I shall write
you on Echinidae in my next, and send you some the vei-y first opportunity." It
was not known at this time tliat the family Cyprinidae is not represented in the
Austrahan fauna. But several species have been introduced.

I do not know what collections W. S. Macleay may have received from India
as the result of his offer to Dr. McClelland. But among the memorials of W . S .
Macleay are four beautiful coloured drawings of Indian spiders, two of the sexes
of a remarkable antlike spider Myrmecarachne macleay i Cantor; and three of re-
markable Membracid insects, with remarks on the back of the drawings signed
Theo Cantor, Calcutta, May-June, 1841. These were e^ddently sent to him by Dr.
Cantor; but I have not been able to find out in what Journal the original descrip-
tions of these were published. We have also several reprints of Dr. Cantor's
papers, but no letters from him, or from Dr. McClelland.

Another interesting scrap of information is the following notice of a letter
to the editor of the Annals and Magazine of Natural History [Vol. viii., No. 48,
September 1841, p. 153].— "Mr. W. K. Macleay writes from Sydney. April 28,
1841, that he is much occupied with Natural History, and making large additions
to his collection. He gratifies us with good accounts of the health of his excellent
father, who is always most affectionately remembered here. R.T."[aylor] .

John Gould, accompanied by Jlrs. Gould, left England for Tasmania in May,
1838, in order to study the birds of Australia; and returned to England in August,
1840. After spending some months in Tasmania, he visited New South Wales in
1839-40, and South Australia. In the Preface to the "Birds of Australia," he
records his best thanks for kindness and help during his stay in New South
Wales, among others, to Alexander and W. S. MacLeay, Esqs. Gould probably
visited Sydney at least twice, before setting out to collect, with Gilbert, in the
interior, and after returning. The letter which he conveyed to Shuckard was
dated April, 1840. During one of the visits, W. S. Macleay furnished Gould
with the description, and possibly showed him specimens, of a nest-building rat,
which he named Hapalotis arboricola, in the belief that it was indigenous, as it
was not uncommon in the garden. The description was afterwards published in
the Introduction to Gould's "Mammals of Australia," p. xxxv.. 1863.
Mr. E. H. Waitc suhsei|ueiitly gave full particuhirs of the remarkiihlc habits of

THE society's heritage from tiik macleays. 609

this rat [Proc. Zool. Soc, 1897, p. 857]. By Mr. 0. Thomas, this rat is re-
garded as a variety of the Black Rat, Mus rattus [see, an appendix to Waite's
paper] .

I have already referred to the visit of H.M.SS. "Erebus" and "Terror" to
Sydney, from 7th July to 5th August, 1841. Dr. J. D. Hooker, Assistant-
Surgeon and Botanist, in a letter to his father, says of W. S. Macleay that,
"Twice the naturalist came on board the 'Erebus' and spent all day looking over
the Southern collections. He is delighted with my drawings of sea-animals, of
which many are entirely new; I must, however, redouble my efforts on that head,
little as I care about them, as I hear that the Americans [U.S. Exploring Expedi-
tion, 1838-42, in command of Commodore Wilkes] have done much during their
voyage to them, and that, McLeay says, is the only thing they have done." Captain
P. P. King also visited the ship to see the collections. Some of the shells he
"recognised as South American, especially the small yellow bivalves from tbe,
Macvocystis" ["Life", Vol. i., pp. 121-122].

Within two years after W. S. Macleay's arrival in Sydney, he made the
acquaintance of Dr. James Stuart. Their friendship had a sequel, in which the So-
ciety is directly interested. I have not been able to learn anything more about this
worthy man than is given by W. S. Macleay himself, in the following extracts [date
not given] — "J. Stuart, Esq., is a surgeon in the army, who has been frequently
employed by the Colonial Government in superintending the quarantine to which
vessels arriving unhealthily in Port Jackson are subjected . . . . Here [at Spring
Cove] they remain under the care of a surgeon for the neeessai-y period ; and Mr.
Stuart, who has often undertaken this painful charge, has, by means of his ad-
mirable skill in drawing objects of natural history, and his powers of accurate
observation, been enabled to employ to the advantage of every department of
science those spare hours which otherwise, in the midst of contagion and disease,
would have proved so dreary."

'From among several great novelties which I have found in his collection of
drawings, I have selected the representation (nat. size) here given, PI. vii., of a
quadruped which I shall call Antechinus Stuartii, and of which Mr. Stuart killed
one male specimen at Spring Cove in August, 1837. As this specimen has been
unfortunately lost, and I have never seen it, I am obliged to describe it from his
notes, hoping that the attention of naturalists will be drawn to the animal, and
that some further knowledge may soon be ac(|uired with respect to the habits and
structure of the species." Then follows a description based on Dr. Stuart's notes
[Ann. Mag., viii., p. 242, 1842] .

Shortly afterwards, under date 9th August, 1841, W. S. Macleay sent a note
to the same Journal [viii., p. 337] giving "Additional particulars respecting
Antechinus Stuartii, a new Marsupial Quadruped." In this he says — "Since I
wrote to you concerning what I had reason at that time to think might possibly
prove to be a new quadruped belonging to the group of Insectlvora, I have had
an opportunity of examining a skeleton, now in the possession of Major Christie,
and which Mr. Stuart himself had prepared at the time the animal was killed.
This skeleton, by the presence of the marsupial bones, distinctly shows that the
quadruped in f|uestion belongs to the group Marsupialia. It also demonstrates
that there was an important error in the dental formula as given me in the manu-
script of Mr. Stuart, — the very error, indeed, that led me to think that the
animal might eventually be found to belong to the Insectivora." The dental for-

610 president's address.

inula was correoted, and recognised as that of Phascogale [Phascolnr/ah] '•from
which genus our animal differs in the three lateral incisors of the upper jaw being
of equal size, and also in the pseudomolars being all of equal size." But there
is no record of W. S. Macleays "hopes of soon possessing a specimen from
Spring Cove, when I shall be liable to determine how far this animal
differs from the genus Phascogale, or whether it may not be safely
assigned to it." Thomas, in the British Museum Catalogue of Mareupials,
reduces Antechinus Stuartii Macleay to a synonym of Phascologale flavipes
Waterhouse. Nevertheless, Krefft (1871) still retained both Maeleay's genus and
the species.

Under date 5th July. 1847, W. S. Macleay sent a letter to the Sychueii Morn-
ing Herald, entitled "On the skull now exhibited at the Colonial Museum of Syd-
ney, as that of the 'Bunyip'." The skull had been sent to him for report by the
Speaker of the Legislative Council [Dr., afterwards Sir Charles Nicholson] to
•whom it had been forwarded by Mr. Edward Curr of Port Phillip, as that of tho
so-called Bunyip or Kine Pratie. He was induced to send the description of it
for publication, "as another and still more extraordinary skull in my ])ossession
offers very considerable means for throwing light on the subject.'' After de-
scribing the skull sent by Dr. Nicholson, he proceeds — "I have, however, I repeat,
in my possession the skull of a foetus of a mare, which was found floating on the
River Hawkesbury, in the year 1841. This skull was prepared by the lamented
late Dr. Stewart [Dr. Stuart], and he has made drawings and notes of it, which
I intend before long to publish, with his other observations on various branches
of natural historv'." The letter concludes with the statement — "In my judgment,
however, the animal is not new, and this skull, when compared with the one from
the Havvkesbury only serves to show the extreme limits between which all
monstrous variation of the place of the eyes in the horse can possibly occur."

From this letter, it appears that Dr. Stuart died before July, 1847, but I
have not been able to ascertain exactly when. Also that his drawings and notes
were then in the possession of W. S. Macleay; for they were a bequest from the
artist.

While the drawings were in the possession of W. S. Macleay, they were
shown to the Governor, Sir William Denison, under the circumstances narrated
in a letter to his son, dated 6th February, 1859 — "I told you in my last letter, that
Sir Daniel Cooper and I were about to send a schooner down the coast to trawl
for fish and dredge for shells. . . Great excitement has been caused in tlie Legis-
lative Assembly by the production of a tortoise, which was said to have been found
alive in a cavity in the rock 13 feet under gi-ound, and 4 feet from the surface of
the rock, by the men employed upon the railway cutting. The Speaker sent it to
me, and I took it to Mr. W. [S.] Macleay, who pronounced it to be a young
specimen of the 'Emys longicoUis,' or long-necked tortoise, which is common in
this country. There must have been a crevice in the stone, through which tlie

animal had penetrated into its receptacle When I went to Mr. ilacleay

to ask him about the tortoise, he showed us a set of drawings of Australian fish,
many of which, he said, were to be caught in Middle Harbor, so we had decided
to go down and ti-y for them both with hook and line and the seine; but a
southerly wind set in, which made it impracticable to get into Middle Harhoiir
with any comfort, and as the fish never bite in a southerly wind, we gave up our
expedition" [Varieties of Vice-Regal Life, Vol. ii., p. 458].

THE society's heritage from the macleays. ■ 611

Tbe Stuart Drawings were iulierited by George Maeleay from his brother,
and by him were taken to England on the termination of his visit to Australia,
after W. S. Macleay's death. George Maeleay eventually presented them to
William Maeleay in the year 1887. I was present when the bos containing
them was opened by Mr. Masters. After going over the contents carefully, Sir
William handed them over to me for the Society; and until Dr. Walkom relieved
me, I had had charge of them ever since. There are 161 drawings, all water-
colour sketclies. with the exception of live pencil or crayon drawings — Mammals,
13; Birds, 35; Reptiles, 6; Amphibia, 1; Fishes, 82; Crastacea, 8; Mollusca, 13;
Ecbinoderms, 2; Insects, 1.

Now that I know the complete history of them, I hope to contribute a paper
giving a complete list of them, aS soon as I can enlist the help of an ichthyolo-
gist to name the fishes for me. With the Stuart drawings also came the rare
coloured jiortrait of Linnaeus in his Lapland dress, published by Dr. Thornton
in .June, 1805. reproduced from a painting by Hoffmann, now framed and hung
in the Hall; and a good watercolour drawing of the rare Marsupial, Chaeropus
ecaiulatus, by Gerard Kreti't. The entire collection was insured by George Mae-
leay for the sum of £200, when it was sent out.

Another short paper, entitled "On doubts respecting the existence of Bird-
Catching Spiders,"' dated Elizabeth Bay, -July 8th, 1841. also appeared in the
eighth volume of the Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., p. 324. This was written in correction
of a mis-statement in the "History and Natural Arrangement of Insects" (1840),
by Swainson, in collaboration with W. E. Shuckard, a copy of which W. S.
Maeleay had recently received. Speaking of the large and powerful gi'ound-
spiders of the genus Mygale, Shuckard say.s — "The fact has been doubted, of these
catching birds in their nets, and feeding upon them; but the probability of this
has been substantiated and confirmed by a communication we have recently re-
ceived from W. S. Maeleay, Esq., who informs us, that in the vicinity of Syd-
ney, N.S.W., he has met with a true bird-catching spider, — having himself found
one of the Epeiridae actually devouring the young of a Gasterops, that had, no
doubt, lately flown from the nest; and which is not a solitary instance, as his
father, A. MacLeay. Esq.. had previously observed a similar fact. He there-
fore retracts his observations upon Mygale in the Zoological Transactions; for
here, evidently, is a spider which feeds upon the juices of a warm-blooded animal."
He adds in a footnote — "From a letter to me dated 7th April, 1840, brought by
Mr. Gould from Sydney."

In reply to this, W. S. Maeleay pointed out in his paper, that the correct
name of the bird was Zosterops dorsalis; that the spider was a species of the
Epeiridae. and not of Mygale; and that the reason for mentioning the circum-
stance, when writing to Shuckard on another subject, was, that he was "anxious,
from the love of tmth, to retract a remark which I had made in a paper of
mine printed in the Transactions of the Zoological Society, some years before,
namely that 'I disbelieved the existence of any bird-catching spider.' " But he
still held to the belief that no Mygale can catch birds in its net. The observations
of Bates, however, without being conclu.sive, cast some doubt on this opinion
[Naturalist on the River Amazon, p. 83, 1879] .

The four papers contained in the Ann. >Iag. Nat. Hist., Vols. viii. and ix.
(1842), from which I have quoted, are W. S. Macleay's only contributions to
science published in England after his removal to Australia. Two others were

612 president's address.

commuiiicated as letters to the Sydney Morning Herald, of July 5th, and December
2nd, 1847. One, descriptive of the skull of the so-called Bunyip, has already been
mentioned in speaking of Dr. J. Stuart. It was reprinted in the Tasmanian
Journal of Science, Vol. iii., p. 275, 1849. The second, descriptive of some bones
of the Diprotodon, was written in response to a request from the Rev. W. B.
Clarke; and is referred to later on These six communications, unfortunately, re-
present all the author's own printed records of his scientiiic work during his re-
sidence in Sydney, that we have. Particulars of what he actually succeeded in
adding to the Macleay Collection are even more incomplete.

Information relating to his correspondence with scientific friends in England
is very meagre. He certainly sent specimens to the Rev. T. W. Hope, but all
that is known to me about them is, that when describing Scarites (Scaraphites)
MacLeaii. J. 0. West wood adds — "Mr. Hope informs me that Mr. [W. S.]
MacLeay has named this section in his manuscripts Scaraphites, and that he has
discovered a new species on the east coast of New South Wales, at Elizabeth
Bay, where it was found many feet deep in the earth, whilst trenching in sandy
soil to form a Pinetum. I would suggest that it should be named in honour of
its discoverer. . . . Mr. MacLeay has recently forwarded to Mr. Hope a

Carenum, under the name of C. 4-punctatnin It is a native of New

South Wales, and was found under stones at Illawarre'' {sic) [Arcana Eutomo-
logica. Vol. i., pp. 157, 158] .

He also corresponded with Jolm Blackwall. tlie British authority on Spiders,
in his day. A most friendly letter from the latter, dated November 18th, 1856,
in reply to one from W. S. Macleay of date July 2nd., asking for specimens of
certain British species of spiders, and for a good method of preser\'ing Arachnida
so as to retain tlieir colours, is the only record available. The requests were com-
plied with as far as possible, with an offer of future help in supplying additional
material, if desired. A list of specimensi of thirty species sent by post, by the
same mail as his letter, is given. And a copy of his "List of Species of Araneida
at present known to inhabit Great Britain,'' was enclosed.

With the exception of W. E. Shuckard, mentioned above, there are no
other available records of correspondence with English scientitic friends among the
relics of W. S. Macleay. But this is hardly a matter of surprise, as I shall point
out later on, in speaking of George and of William Macleay.

For any other particulars of W. S. Macleay's life in Australia, we are
almost entirely dependent on the records of his friendship with Robert Lowe, who
was a barrister and a politician, but not a man of science, as given in Patchett ■
Martin's "Life and Letters of the Right Honourable Robert Lowe, Viscount Sher-
brooke" (2 vols., 1893'), who lived in Sydney from 1842-50; the published or un-
published records of casual or periodical visitors to Sydne.v. who were interested in
science, including Huxley, or of resident friends, scientific or otherwise; and on
the official or other records of his association with the Australian JMuseum. as a
Trustee.

Apart from purely scientific matters, Robert Lowe's biography is tlie most
important self-contained source of information about W. S. Macleay as a private
individual, a man of ability and a scholar, a brilliant conversationalist, an in-
.spirer of friendship to those who knew him intimately, and shared his interests;
and, though keeping aloof from direct participation in politics, a colonist interest-
ed in the progress of Australia, and a believer in her future possil)ilities. This

THE society's HERITAGE FROM THE MACLEAYS.

613

well-written book, therefore, is a most important supplement to the published
Obituary Notices of W. S. Macleay.

Robert Lowe (1811-1892) arrived in Sydney in October, 1842, when he was
in his 31st year. He had graduated, with first-class honours, at Oxford in 1833 ;
was a private tutor thereafter until he began to study for the Bar, Fellow of
Magdalen in 1835; ajid was called to the Bar in 1842, and shortly after saOed for
Australia, with his wife, to whom he was married in 1836. Robert Lowe was an
albino, and his eyes were unprotected by a-pigmentum nigi-um. Three medical men,
whom he had consulted, infonned him that he would become blind in seven years,
and recommended him to follow some out-of-door employment in Australia or
New Zealand. Hence his migi-ation to New South Wales. Shortly after his
arrival, as he found that his eyes were prejudicially affected by the glare of the
Australian suuuner, he consulted a doctor, who cupped him, and advised him that
it was absolutely necessai-y to discontinue his practice of the law. To add to his
depression, he was forbidden to read. He says, in his unfinished autobiographical
sketch, in reference to these trials — "However, in this the lowest ebb of my
fortunes, I found several alleviations. The principal was the extraordinary good
fortune which gave me the acquaintance, and I am proud to say, the friendship,
of Mr. William [S.] Macleay. He had been secretary at Paris for claims of
English subjects, and aftei-wards had been a commissioner for the extinction of
the slave trade at Cuba. He was an excellent classical scholar, he knew more
of modern history and biogi-aphy than anyone with whom I was ever acquainted,
and in addition to all this he was a profoundly scientific man, thoroughly conver-
sant with Zoology and entomology. An excellent companion, with a store of
caustic wit, he reminded me continually of the best part of Scott's Antiquary.
It fell to my lot to do him some service from which he never knew how to be suffi-
ciently grateful. It would have been a good find to meet with such a person
anywhere, but in a remote colony it was a good fortune for which one could not
be sufficiently srateful. I have not seen and shall not see his like again" ["Life,"
i.,p.41].

Of this. Lowe's biographer says — "Such is Lord Sherbrooke's tribute to
William Sharpe (sic) Macleay, his most cherished Australian friend, who fully
returned his affection, and whose admiration for his gTeat abilities, indomitable

courage, and personal worth was unbounded It is not difficult to imagine

what a solace the conversation of so cultivated a man must have been to one who
felt that, despite hie own great powers and grasp of mind, his career, from im-
pending blindness, was about to close before it had well begun" [Vol. i., p. 183].

The following extracts are of great interest: — "It must be frankly admitted
that Mrs. Lowe's letters of this period [1845] are not very complimentary to
the society of Sydney. But she thoroughly appreciated the high qualities of
the one or two intim.ate friends whom they saw frequently at Nelson Bay. Of
these she specially mentions three: Sir Thomas Mitchell, W. S. Macleay, and
Sir Alfred Stephen

"Sir Thomas Mitchell, Sir Alfred Stephen, William Sharpe Macleay, and the
future Lord Sherbrooke, sitting together, as tliey frequently did at Nelson Bay,
all in the full vigour of their rare conversational powers, would have been con-
sidered a distinguished greup in any city in the world. Lord Sherbrooke always
declared, though in after years he was intimate with the cleverest and most cul-
tured men in England, that he had met no one whose conversation was more

614 presiuext's address.

varied and charming: than William Macdcay's. With such companidiis. one could
DOt be said to be out of the only world worth living in — the world of ideas —
and the leisure hours which Robert Lowe enjoyed with these old colonial friends,
within sight and sound of the 'wide Pacific,' were among'st the happiest of his
life"' (p. -280-287).

"Also in these first years [after the return to England] he [Robert Lowe]
received much Australian intelligence from the pen of his trusted and intimate
friend in Svdney. the late William [S.] Macleay. At parting they made a kind
of loose compact that they would regularly exchange the experiences and im-
pressions of their widely-sundered lives; and this was done as far as possible
until Macleay's death in 1805. Of this correspondence but a very small portion
has been preserved, and of that, only a mere fraction in any way concerns this
narrative,"

"Like all men of that highly refined and cultured type, Macleay was of a re-
ser\'ed nature, as well as of very studious habits, and admitted few to the inner
sanctuary of his feelings. But he had an afi'ection. surpassing that of a brother,
for Robert Lowe, and he felt also a great liking and admiration for the courage
and wifely devotion of Mrs. Lowe. His beloved Elizabeth Bay was never to
iiim altogether tlie same after the departure of the young English barrister and
his wife vho liad so strangely dropped into the orbit of his retired existence"
[Vol. ii., p. 92].

Extracts from, or summaries of, some of W. S. Macleay's letters, relating
to political or social matters, are given, as well as a few letters of special in-
terest to us. Mrs. Lowe's description of Elizabeth Bay House and the garden,
as well as a portion of W. S. Macleay's letter about Darwin's "Origin of
Species," have been quoted above. His last letter, written about three months
before his death, is given in its chronological place, in concluding my remarks.

An interesting memento of Robert Lowe's friendship with W. S. Macleay,
among the relies of the latter is a copy of the famous macaronic poem which
Lowe composed on the visit of Queen Victoria — then the Princess Victoria — and
her mother, the Duchess of Kent, to Oxford^ in 1833. The author was then an
undergraduate. The poem is reprinted in Lowe's "Life," with interesting com-
ments [Vol i., p. 86] . Copies are now extremely rare, and the biogi-apher had
.some difHeultv in borrowing one. for, he says, "Lord Sherbrooke had indeed lost
his own copy." I think it is extremely probable, that Lord Sheibrooke forgot
that he had given his own copy to W. S. Macleay. The poem was published
anonymously, but on the title-page of our copy is inscribed "a Roberto Lowe,
A.M." in the author's handwriting, as I think.

Among other most pleasant interludes in W. S. IMaeleay's life in Aus-
tralia, special mention may be made of his friendly intercourse with Lieutenant
J. B. Emery, of H.M.S. "Beagle," in command of Captain Lort Stokes; As-
sistant-Surgeon Huxley, of H.M.S. "Rattlesnake"; and Surgeon F. Rayner,
and Assistant Surgeon J. Denis Macdonald, of H.M.S. "Herald," in command
of Captain Denhaiu. These were all periodical visitors to Sydney during the
time tlieir vessels were on the Australian Station.

Lieuterant J. B. Emery, of H.M.S. "Beagle,'" in command of Captaiis
Stokes, was interested in Zoology, as well as the Surgeon, Dr. Bynoe, who col-
lected birds and mammals more particularly. While the "Beagle" was at Port
Darwin in September (12tli), 1830. Cai)tnin Stokes records that— "On this beach.

THE society's heritage PROit THE MACLEAYS. 615

several unsuccessful hauls were made with the seine, though a few rare aad
curious fish were taken, which Lieutenant Emery added to his collection of
coloured drawings of Australian fish; some of them will be found in the appen-
dix to this vohime." Also during the visit to Western Port, in Victoria (Janu-
ary 10-19th, 1839)— "A few rare insects were collected by Mr. Emery" [Stokes'
"Discoveries in Australia," 2 vols., 1846] . One letter, undated, from Lieutenant
Emery to W. S. Macleay, is included among the relics of W. S. Macleay. This
returns thanks, in the name of the mess, for two baskets of delicious fruit. The
writer also accepts an invitation to dinner on the following Wednesday. The
letter concludes with — "Please to make my respects to your Brother."

Thomas Henry Huxley (1825-95), Assistant-Surgeon of H.M S. "Rattle-
snake," in command of Captain Owen Stanley, arrived in Port Jackson on July
16, 1847. His biographer says of him — "He had not had, so far, much oppor-
tunity of entering the so.cial world; but his visit to Sydney gave him an oppor-
tunity of entering a good society to which his commission in the navy was a suffi-
cient introduction. He was eager to find friendships if he could, for his reserve
was anything but misanthropic. It was not long before he made the acquaint-
ance of WiOiam [S.] Macleay, a naturalist of wide research and great specula-
tive ability; and struck up a close friendship with William Fanning, one of the
leading merchants of the town" ["Life and Letters," (3 vols). Vol. i., p. 52].

In a letter to his sister, March 21, 1848, Huxley wrote— "I found it exceed-
ingly disagreeable to come to a great place like Sydney and think that there
was not a soul who cared whether I was alive or dead, so I determined to go into
what society was to be had and see if I could not pick up a friend or two
among the multitude of the empty and frivolous. I am happy to say that I
have had more success than I hoped for or deserved, and there are now two or

three houses where I can go and feel myself at home at all times I am

getting on capitally at present. Habit, inclination, and now a sense of duty
keep me at work, and tlie nature of our cruise affords me opportunities such as
none but a blind man would fail to make use of. I have sent two or three papers
home already to be published, which I have great hopes will throw light upon
some hitherto obscure branches of natural history, and I have just finished a
more important one, which I intend to get read at the Royal Society. The
other day I submitted it to William [S.] Macleay (the celebrated propounder of
the Quinary system), who has a beautiful place near Sydney, and I hear, 'werry
much approves what I have done' " [Life, Vol. i.. p. 54] .

In a letter to his mother, from Sydney, Feb. 1, 1849, Huxley wrote — "If
my various papers meet with any success, I may perhaps be able to leave the ser-
vice [after liis return to England] . At present, however, I have not heard a
word of anything I have sent. Professor Forbes has, I believe, published some
of Macgillivray's letters to him, but he has apparently forgotten to write to
Macgillivray himself or to me. So 1 sliall certainly send him nothing more,
especially as Mr. [W. S.] Macleay (of this place, and a great man in the
naturalist world) has offered to get anything of mine sent to the Zoological
Societv" ["Life." Vol. i., p. 57] .

The publication of Huxley's important paper on the "Oceanic Hydrozoa"
was unfortunately delayed through lack of official support, and was ultimately
issued by the Ray Society in 1859. The author, in the preface (p. viii. )
says — "T made a g'ood many observations during our cruise, and sent home sev-

LIBRA

I

616 president's address.

eral papers to the Linnean and Royal Societies; but of these doves, or rather
ravens, which left my ark, i had heard absolutely nothing up to the time of my
return; and, save for the always kind and hearty encouragement of the cele-
brated William [S.] MacLeay, whenever our return to Sydney took me withm
reach of his hospitality, 1 know not whether 1 should have had the courage to
continue labours which might, so far as I knew, be valueless.''

The "Rattlesnake" wa-s absent from England almost four years, and her
stay in Australian waters lasted nearly three, about eleven months of this period
being spent in Port Jackson. After his return to England, Huxley redeemed
his promise to write to W S . Macleay. His first letter is merely mentioned in
the "Life." But the second, dated November 9th, 1851, a long and very interest-
ing letter, amounting to nearly six printed pages, is given almost in full. In
this, he gives a detailed account of the scientific news of the day, and of his
own work. Of himself he says — "Had the Sydney Uijiversity been carried out
as originally proposed, I should certainly have become a candidate for the
Natural History Chair. I know no finer field for exertion for any naturalist
than Sydney Harbour itself. Should such a Professorship be hereafter estab-
lished, I trust ,'ou will jog the memory of my Australian_ friends in my belialf .
.... Believe me, I have not forgotten, nor ever shall forget, your kindness
to me at a time when a little appreciation and encouragement were more grate-
ful to me and of more service than they will perhaps ever be again. I have done

my best to justify you I send copies of all the papers I have published,

with one exception, of which I have none separate. Of the Royal Society
papers, I sent a double set. Will you be good enough to give one, with my
kind regards and remembrances to Dr. Nicholson? .... I shall be very glad
if you can find time to write" ["Life," Vol. i.. p. 132] .

All that Huxley has to say about, or in his letter to, W. S. Macleay goes
to show that he was very favourably impressed by his friendly intercourse with
file Sydney naturalist; and very appreciative of the advice and help that the
latter was always ready to give. For it may be mentioned, that there was no
scientific library for the naturalist on board the ship, though Captain Stanley
had asked, but in vain, for some money to provide one.

I regret that the obituary notice of W. S. Macleay in the "Reader," which,
I think, was Huxley's last tribute to his old friend, cannot be consulted in any cf
our libraries.

• An interesting memento of Huxley's intercourse with W . S . Macleay,
among the relics of the latter, is a pencil-sketch of a pelagic Tunicate {Appoidi-
eularia), by W. S. Macleay, with the legend — "This animal, forming a link be-
tween Ascidia and Salpa, was found in Torres Straits by Mr. Huxley, who caught
it in his towing-net, swimming with the long, transparent tail." Apparently the
sketch was made from a specimen given to him by its captor.

No complete narrative of the voyages of H.M.S. "Herald," employed on
Surveying Service in the South- Western Pacific, was pul'lished, pad it is diffi-
cult to follow the itinerary. But the "Herald" visited Sydney in 1858, and
several times before and after this year. Surgeon Rayner was interested in, and
collected insects and other land-animals, but he did not publish any papers.
After his return to England, Mr. Adam White exhil)ited portion of Dr. Kayner's
collection at a meeting of the Entomological Society of London, on November
4th, 1861 . This exhibit iiichuled specimens from Aneiteum, New Hebrides, and

THE society's heritage from the macleays. 617

Lord Howe. Island. On bis visits to Elizabeth Bay, Dr. Kayner would have
much to show to, and to discuss with W. S. Macleay. Dr. Rayner was also a
friend oi William Macleay, and used to accompany him on collecting excursions,
as narrated later on.

Dr. J . Denis Macdonald was interested in marine organisms, and the
author of thirty-five papere listed in the Royal Society's Catalogue, and covering
the period 1853-63. Some of these were sent home for publication while he was
on the Australian Station. In one of them, "On the Anatomy of Eurybia
GaKdichaudi,'' he gives a synopsis of the Pteropoda, of which he says — "This
table is advanced with a little more confidence, as it has benefited by the revising
hand of Mr. W. S. Macleay" [Trans. Linn. Soc, xxii., p. 248, read Feb. 18th,
1858]. The relics of W. S. Macleay include a water-colour sketch of the re-
markable, pelagic, footless slug, Phyllirlioe Peronii, described by Dr. Macdonald.
This is signed and dated September, 1854. He, too, would have much to show,
and to talk about, whenever the return of the ship to Sydney enabled him to visit
Elizabeth Bay.

Captain Denham, Dr. Rayner, and Dr. Macdonald were elected Honorary
Correspondents of the Australian Museum in .Tuly, 1857, as noted in Ethcridge's
History, wherein it is stated that — "All these gentlemen liad performed excellent
investigations in marine life, and the Museum gained much benefit thereby"
(p. 385).

Dr. W. Stimpson, Naturalist on the U.S.N. "Vincennes," under the com-
mand of Captain John Rogers, visited Sydney, December 26th, 1S53, to January
8th, 1854, and recorded his experiences, unpublished during his lifetime, Init
since published by Mr. C. Hedley, F.L.S. ["The Australian Journal of Dr. AV.
Stimpson. Zoologi.st." With an Introduction by C. Hedley, F.L.S. Journ.
Proc. R. Soc. N.S. Wales, Vol. xlviii., p. 140, 1914]. After visiting the Aus-
tralian Museum, when Mr. Wall was Curator, on December 31st, 1853, Dr.
Stimpson records that "we went to see Mi-. [W. S.] Maclet;y, who lives in a
large house, having extensive grounds, situated beyond the town of WooIIoomoo-
loo He treated us with kindness and showed us his fine collection of insects,
and the plants of his fine garden. He appeared to care little for marine inver-
tebrata, and on the whole I was not much interested by my visit. He is a man of
immense general infonnation, having a remarkable memory, and is equally
versed in zoology and botany. He is now about 80 [? 60] years of age, and his
working days are over."

William Swainson seems to have visited Sydney about 1851 or 1853. But no
particulars of his visit are available. He finally settled periuantntly in New
Zealand .

Dr. W. H. Harvey, the Algologist, on his world-wide quest for seaweeds,
spent some time in Sydney, in May, 1855. On May 12th, he records— "Visited
Mr. [W. S.] McLeay, the celebrated entomologist, and author of what is called
"the circular system," of wliieh (once upon a time) I was an admirer. He has
a fine house in a beautiful park of sixty acres, all within the city of Sydney.
He cultivates many rare trees, shrubs, and plants, and from his grounds there
are charming prosnects" [Memoir of W. H. Harvev, M D F R S p '^ill
1869.] . . ., J . -. ,

The Austrian Frigate, "Novara," on a circumnavigating cruise, visited Syd-
ney in 1858, remaining from November 5th to December 7th. The historian

618 president's address.

of the expedition, Dr. Karl Scherzer, says — [p. 14] .... ''Among the ex-
cursions in the immediate neighbourhood of Sydney, we at onee selected a visit
to the well-known naturalist, Mr. [W. S.] Maeleay, who resides at a beautiful
estate near Elizabeth Hay. In his beautiful garden, one sees the most interesting
plants of Australia side by side with splenditl specimens from all other parts of
the world. A stroll through the extensive grounds derives a double iutere-st
when in company with its highly-cultivated proprietor, and we are the more
grateful for this good fortune, as the venerable old gentleman [set. 6G] lives in
strict seclusion" [Narrative of the Circumnavigation of tiie Globe by the Austrian
Frigate "Novara." By Dr. Karl Sclierzer, English Edition. Vol. iii., p. 16,
1863] .

Seientitic or otiwr friends of W. S. Madeay, who lesided for some time
or permanently in Australia, and of whom there are records or mementos of some
kind, most of these forming part of the memorials of liim, may next be men-
tioned. These include, besides Dr. James Stuart, to whom reference has already
been made — Mrs. .1. S. Calvert [nee Louisa Atkinson), Dr. George Bennett,
Rev. W. B. Clarke. Sir William Denison. Rear- Admiral P. P. King, Dr. L.
Leiehhardt, Sir William Macarthur, Baron von Mueller, Sir Charles Nicholson.
Mr. A. W. Scott and his accomplished daughters, Harriet (Mis. C. W. Mor-
gan), and Helena (Mrs. Edward Forde) of Ash Lsland, Mr. Justice Therry,
Dr. John Vaughan Thompson, and tlie Rev. Dr. Woolls. Sir Thomas Mitchell and
Sir Alfred Stephen are referred to in the extracts given from Robert Lowe's
biography .

Miss Louisa Atkinson (Mrs. J. S. Calvert) [1834-72] lived at "Fernhurst,"
Kurrajong Heights, before her marriage, in 1870. She collected plants for Dr.
Woolls and Baron von Mueller, and many of them are recorded in the Baron's
"Fragmenta," or in the "Flora Australiensis." Mr. Maiden lias given a bio-
graphical notice and a portrait of this accomplished woman in his pajier "Records
of Australian Botanists — (a) General, (h) New South Wales" [Journ. Proc. R.
Soc. N.S. Wales, Vol. xlii.. 1908, p. 83]. Miss Atkinson was also interested
in "Vegetable Caterpillars," and corresponded with W. S. Maeleay on the sub-
ject. In a letter to Miss Scott of Ash Island, dated July 23rd, 1861, referred to
again later on, W. S. Maeleay wrote — "I know two species of Sphaeria that
grow from the Charagiae of this Colony, and a Lady-friend of mine, who is a
capital botanist, though no entomologist, is now preparing a work on the New
Holland species of Sphaeria, which she is studying in the country." The Lady-
friend referred to was Miss Louisa Atkinson. Her \nsiting-card, and some
"Notes on the Sphaeria and Grub," written after a visit to Mount Tomah, in
search of specimens, on April 22nd [year not given] are included among rlie
relics of W. S. Maeleay. Miss Atkinson says in her Notes, that she and her
comi^anion dug up rbout eighteen vegetal)le caterpillars, but they were old ones,
not in good condition, as no fre.sh ones seemed to have develojied since her last
researches .

Most of W. S. Macleay's scientific friends in Sydney were nieiiil)ers of
the governing body of the Australian Museum. In those early days, when there
was no scientific Society specially concerned with biology, the (^otonial Museum.
later the Australian Museum, was the rallying-ground for natur.alists, especiallv
those interested in zoology; and the Meetings of the Committee or of tlie Board
brought them together and kept them in touch.

THE society's heritage from the MACLEAYS. 619

Dr. Georgo Bennett (1804-93) paid two visits to Sydney as medieal oflieer
of passenger-ships in 1829-32. Finally lie settled in Sydney in 1836, and began
to practise medicine . Very soon after be became officially connected with the
Colonial Museum, later the Australian Museum . His official record is : Director,
Superintendent, Zoologist, Curator, previous to 1841, Hon. Secretary (1836?),
July 1838-41, Committeeman (1836?) 1838-53, Elective Trustee, 1853-74 (Etlier-
idge ) . W . S . Mudeay was a Committeeman from 1841-53, and an Elective
Trustee from 1853 until his resignation in 18()2, on account of ill-health. Both
Dr. Bennett and W. S. Macleay had known Professor Owen in London.

There is a reference to Dr. Bennett in W. S. Madeay's letter to Miss
Scott, quoted later on. There is no memento of him among the memorials of
W. S. Macleay.

But the Society has some very interesting memorials ef him, in the shape
of vakiable books, all with book-plates, purchased by the Council, at the sale of
his fine library, after his decease. One of these is J. D. Hookers "Flora Novae
Zealandiae" being the second section of "The Botany of the Antarctic Voyage of
H.M. Discovery Ships "Erebus" and "Terror," i839-43, &c." This would be
the copy to which J. C. Bidwill refers in a letter to Captain P. P. Iving, dated
February 8th, 1846 — "1 was much delighted at looking over the Flora Antarctica
at Dr. Bennett's, not the less so as I see that in it I have credit done me for
my early discoveries in New Zealand" [Maiden, "Records of Australian Botanists,"
p. 89]. Another scarce and valuable purchase was a set, complete except for
one volume, of the Botanical Journals, in four successive series, published by
Sir William J. Hooker, 1830-57 (23 vols.). Four of the volumes of the last
series. Hooker's London Journal of Botany, have original letters, from Sir W.
J. Hooker to Dr. Bennett, pasted in at the front oi- back, one in each volume.
The first, not dated, relates to Vegetable Ivory; the second, November 29th, 1852,
is about the Rice-paper Plant; the third, November 27th, 1857, returns thanks
for Macrozamia-seeds sent in salt-water, and reports that Dr. Harvey is working
at Kew; and the fourth, June 1st, 1859, is an invitation to Kew Gardens, when
Dr. Bennett was visiting England.

The Rev. W. B. Clarke (1798-1878). M.A., F.R.S.. F.G.S., the "Father
of Australian Geology," and W. S. Macleay attended tlie meeting of the British
Association for the Advancement of Science at Liverpool, in 1837; and both ar-
rived in Sydney in the same year, 1839. On his arrival, Mr. Clarke was ap-
pointed to take charge of the King's School, Parramatta; he was afterwards
Rector of Willoughby, 1846-70. He vevy soon l)ecame interested in the Aus-
tralian Museum, the record of bis official connection therewith being — Secretary
1839-41; Secretary and Curator, 1841-42; Committeeman, 1839-53; Elective Tru.s-
tee, 185.3-74 (Etheridge) . The long association of Mr. Clarke and W. S.
Macleay with the governing body of the Australian Museum provided them
with abundant opportunities of meeting.

There is but one letter to W. S. Macleay, dated from St. Leonards, 29th
November, 1847, among his memorials, which begins — "Had not this blessed rain
kept me at home, to recruit after the fatigue of living till it came, I intended
to call on you to talk over Turner's Diprotodon. He has requested me to draw
up a notice, to help him. I have done so, but with much misgiving; and I have
put to it my initials, that no one else may be blamed if I am wrong. I have taken
the liberty of calling on you to give the public a benefit — I hope you will

620 president's address.

'honour the bill.'"" W . S. Macleay complied with the request by sending a Umg
letter, "On the Bones brought to Sydney by Mr. Turner," dated December 2nd,
1847, to the Sydney Morning Herald . This, together with Mr. Clarke's letter,
and one by Dr. L. Leichhardt on the same subject, were afterwards republished
by Mr. Clarke as an appendix to his Report, No. x. [Further Papers relative
to the Discovery of Gold in Australia, p. 38, 1855] .

Owen's original description of the genus Diprotodon was based on a very
iDcomplete series of specimens, including a molar tooth, and portions of broken
bones of various parts of the skeleton . Turner's specimens were more complete,
and included a shattered skull, which Mr. ^Yall of the Museum, with the co-
operation of Mr. Clarke and Dr. Leichhardt, succeeded in putting together; this
measured four feet in length from the frontal bone to the occiput. The pelvis
was incomplete, and the marsupial bones were missing. W. S. Macleay, in hia
lengthy account, gave the dental formula, compared it with that of oilier mar-
supials, and discussed the relationship of Diprotodon. His conclusion wa.s — "Hut
this collection is above all interesting, as proving the trutli of Professor Owen's
suggestion, that there formerly existed in the Australian wilds a marsupiid
Pachyderm, thus serving to complete that series of analogies .which quadrupeds
with marsupial bones bear to the several classes of placental mammalia.'

Turner's collection of bones was afterwards sold, sent to London, and
subsequently described and figured by Professor Owen.

Mr. Clarke conducted the burial service at the funeral of W. S. Macleay,
on January 28th, 1865. An obituary ncitice appeared in the Sydney Morning
Herald of January 30th. The Rev. R. L. King, in his Presidential Address to
the Entomological Society of New South Wales, refers to this as from the pen
of an old friend. It is, I think, almost certain that it was written by Mr.

Clarke, perhaps after consultation witli William Macleay. It is much to be re-
gretted that no "Life an<l Letters'" iif this eminent Australian pioneer in geology
has been published.

Sir William Denison, the Governor General, has recorded two visits to W.
S. Macleay, in his "Varieties of Vice-Regal Life." Mr. Dea.s Thomson's position
as Colonial Secretary was about to lapse, on the eve of the inauguration of
Responsible Government ; and the (luestion for his Excellency to settle was, who
should be asked to be Premier. Sir William, in a letter to Mr. Deas Thomson,
dated January 15th, 1856, said [Vol. i., p. 332]— "I paid a visit to Mr. [W.
S.] Macleay yesterday, and had a long conversation with him on political matters,
of which I give you the substance, as it will serve to show you the views enter-
tained by a man like him, not actually engaged in the strife of party

In tlie first place, great anxiety was expressed tliat you should take the lead, mid
constitute the Government: it was said that all expected you to do so; that the
Government would be placed in great difficulty without your knowledge and

experience to keep things steady The conclusion of tlie whole matter is,

that I very much wish you to form a Government, and assist nie in working out
the experiment wliich is about to be made." Air. Deas Thomson, however, could
not see his way to accept the Governor's offer. Mr. Stuart Donaldson wius sent
for, and subsequently formed the fii-st Ministry, Mr. Deas Thomson being ap-
pointed President of the Legislative Council.

On his second visit on Febniary 6th, 1850, [Vol, i., p. 458] to show Mr. W.
S. Macleay a tortoise sent to liim by the Speaker of the Legislative Assembly,
Sir William saw the Stuart Drawings, as noted above.

THE society's heritage from the macleays. 021

Captain, afterwards Kear-Admiral Piiillip Parker King (1793-1850) was an
old friend of W. S. Macleay. They had met in London before 1820. At
Captain King's request, W. S. Macleay described the collection of Annulosa
accumulated by the former, during his survey of the Inter-tropical and Western
Coasts of Australia l)etween the years 1818 and 1822 [King-'s "Narrative," Vol.
ii., Appendix, [). 138. 1827] . CaptaiA King was a Committeeman or a Trustee
of the Colonial or Australian Museum for many yeai-s, from 1830 onwards.

Rear-Admiral King is another distinguished Australian, born in Norfolk
Island, of whom, unfortunately, no "Life and Letters" has been published. A
very interesting biographical notice of this eminent man, by the late Mr. H. C.
Kussell, will be found in the First Report of the Australasian Association for tlie
Advancement of Science (p. 48). In addition to what is therein stated, it may
be pointed out that Captain King became very interested in zoology during his
survey of the Southern Coasts of South America, 1820-30. The results of some
of his observations, dated July 8th, 1827, were sent to Mr. Vigors, who published
them, under the title of "Extracts from a letter addressed by Captain Phillip
Parker King, R.N.. F.R.S. and L.S.. to N. A. Vigors, Esq., on the Animals
of the Straits of Magellan," in the Zoological Journal, [Vol. iii., pp. 422-432;
Vol. iv., pp. 91-105]. He was also the joint author of another paper, "De-
scription of the Cirrhipeda, Conchifera and Mollusea, in a collection formed by
the Officers of H.M.S. Adventure and Beagle employed between the years 1826
and 1830 in surveying the Southern Coasts of South America, including the
Straits of Magalhaens and the Coast of Tierra del Fuego. By Captain Phillip P.
King, R.N., F.R.S., &c., assisted by AV. J. Bmderip, Esq., F.R.S., &c." This
paper likewise was published in the Zoological Journal, Vol. v., p. 332, 18,35.

The existence of these papers helps to explain why, like W. S. Macleay,
Captain King visited the "Erebus" in Port Jackson, to see Dr. J. D. Hooker's
Southern collections, and his drawings of sea-animals, as already mentioned. He
also contributed an article on "The Antarctic Expedition of Discovery" to the
Sydney Herald of August 19th, 1841, a fortnight after the "Erebus" and "Terror"
sailed from Port Jackson for New Zealand . This gives an account of the doings
of the Expedition up to the time of its arrival in Port Jackson. A reprint of
this article, no doubt presented to W. S. Macleay by the writer, is included
among tlie memorials of the former.

Another interesting relic is portion of a letter from Captain King to W. S.
Macleay, dated June 4th, 1842. The address is not mentioned, but it would be
Tahlee, Port Stephens, where Captain King resided from 1839-48, and then re-
moved to Sydney. The writer says — "I have found here to-day a sp. of Latr.
genus Mictyris running on the sand at low tide. The above [a pencil-sketch of
a crab] is, no doubt, a bad resemblance, but it will serve to show nearly what
it is, and whether it is of use to your collection. The carapace is a dull blue,
and the sides a yellow fawn colour. T believe I am right in assigning it to
Latreille's genus Mictyris. I have him in spirits, at your disposal, if wanted."

Other interesting relics are three rare pamphlets, being the first, second, and
fourth of the series mentioned by Mr. Russell as printed at Captain King's own
private printing-press, when he resided at Tahlee. These relate to the specific
gravity of sea-water, and to meteorological or astronomical observations. W. S.
Macleay's three copies have inscriptions by the author.

b-'li PRESIDENT S ALlDRESS.

A very interesting memento of Captain King, in the Society's library, is the
copy of J. D. Hooker's "Flora Autarctiea" being Section i. of "The Botany of
the Antarctic Voyage," inscribed and presented to him by the author. This was
subsequently handed over to his eldest sou, Phillip Gidley King, who generously
gave it to the Society in 1882, when the Council was trying to repla<-e the original
lilirary destrnyed in the Garden Palace Fire.

The Honourable Phillip Gidley King, M.L.C., (1817-1904) was an Original
Member of the Society, and, for six years, a Member of the Council . An
obituary notice uf liini, which includes his own account of his experiences as
cabin-mate of Charles Darwin on tlie voyage of the "Beagle," and as his com-
panion on some of Darwin's land-excursions, will be found in the Society's Pro-
ceedings, 1905, p. 5. Darwin paid a visit to Captain King, at "Dunheved," St.
Marj''s, on his return-journey from Bathurst, in January, 183(5.

The Rev. Robert Lethbridge King, second son of Kenr- Admiral King, was a
valued friend and correspondent of both W. S. Macleay, and William Macleay;
and a keen entomologist. The memorials of W. S. Macleay include an excellent
pencil-sketch by Mr. King, of a remarkable Pselaphid beetle, initialled, and
dated, Parramatta, A]iril 4, 1858; and a very interesting letter dated July 28th,
1859, in which Mr. King says — "I send you a sketch in pen-and-ink [on p. 3 of
the letter] of two ferns in my friend, Mr. Woolls' herbarium: Do you recognise
them as South Sea Islanders? I should be very glad to introduce Mr. W. to
you, that he might have a look over your garden. He is taking a very great
interest in the science, and has a good knowledge of our Parramatta ferns. I
think a trip to Elizabeth Bay would encourage him — if you will allow me to
introduce him. I have had the Eucnhiiitus fibibulu,-' (1 think) in flower in my
garden . Gen . Macarthur gavH me a small plant 2 years ago . It is now 12ft .
I think I wi'ote you before of the change of leaf — from sessile and amplexicaul,
and opposite, to peduncled (?) and alternate." Dr. Woolls was duly introduced,
and became W. S. Maeleay's friend and correspondent.

In Mr. King's ]>aper on Pselaphidae. in the Trans. Ent. Soc. N.S. Wales
(Vol. i., p. 54), he described several species from specimens found by W. S.
Macleay in his garden at Elizabetli Bay, and acknowledges his indebtedness for
them. He mentions also that he had found a single specimen of one of them
on the sea-beach in the same locality.

Dr. Leichliardt presented some insects to W. S. Macleay, as mentioned in
one of William Maeleay's papers. But this is all the available information
about their intercourse.

Sir AVilliam Macarthur (1800-82) of ("aniden was a ti-iend of all the
Macleays. He exchanged plants with Alexander Macleay. and afterwards with
W. S. Macleay. He was a neighbour of George Macleay at Brownlow Hill, for
more than thirty-one years. Both of them, as well as James Macarthur, and
others, were Magistrates in the ilistrict of Camden and Nni-ellan. He was also
a friend of William Macleay. Details of their friendship arc given later. Sir
William Macarthur was an Original Member and the first Vice-President of our
Society. Captain Arthur Onslow, R.N., grandson, on his mother's side, of
Alexander Macleay, married the dangliter of .Tames Macarthur, of Camden, in 1867.

W. S. Macleay corresponded with Baron von Mueller, but no letters are avail-
sble. The Baron, in the Eucalyptographia, und(>r E. Foflscliiamt, refers to some re-

THE society's heritage prom the macleats. 623

marks by W. S. Macleay, oh the possible hybridisation of Euealypts by birds. These
must have been coiimmnicated by k'tter to the Baron ; as I cannot iind any refer-
ence to the subject by W. S. Macleay in print. The remarks are quoted, with
coumients, by Dr. Woolls, in his "Contribution to the Flora of Australia" (p. 219),
and in his "Lectures on the Vegetable Kingdom," (p. 05) . And also by Mr.
Maiden in his paper "On Hybridisation in the Genus Eiu-alyptus"' [Report of the
U\inedin Meeting Aust. Assoc. Adv. Science, .January, 1!)(I4, )> 298]. Presenta-
tion-copies of some of the early numbers of the "Fragmenta,"' and of the ''Plants
of Victoria," duly inscribed, are included in our series of memorials of W. S.
Macleay .

Di-., afterwards Sir Charles Nicholson was a friend of all the Macleays. He
came to Sydney in 1834, and practised medicine. He was elected Speaker of
the Legislative Council on the retirement of Alexander Macleay in 1846. He
was also I'hancellor of the University of Sydney. One of the extracts given
above relates how Dr. Nicholson, as Speaker, sent the skull of the supposed
Bunyip to W. H. Macleay. He is also mentioned in Huxley's letter to W. S.
Macleay .

A very interesting memento of Dr. Nicholson, included among the memorials,
is a letter dated only May 15tli [probably 1859, and written in Sydney] to W. S.
Macleay, in which he says — "In speaking to you the other day about the Native
Bee, I mentioned a conversation I had with a Mr. Lubbock [when Dr. Nicholson
was on a visit to Englanil, in tlie ]>revious year], wlio read a ]>aper at the British
Association on some subject connected with the economy of the Bee, which, I
believe, was regarded as one of the most original Essays brought forward . I
send you his pamphlet, which pray keep.

"I shall be obliged if you can intimate to me how 1 (■(juld manage to procure

specimens illustrative of Mr. Lubbock's favorite study If you would

also give me any infomiation on the points referred to in the accompanying note,
I could send it to him."

The accompanying note by John Lubbock, afterwards Lord Avebury, was
written to Sir Charles Nicholson, from London October 12th, 1858. At this time,
Lubbock's home was at High Elms, close to Down, where Charles Darwin, whom
Lubbock regarded as "his father in science," resided from 1842 onwards. The
note is as follows —
•'My Dear Sir Charles,

"If I remember right you told me on that pleasant afternoon we spent at
Cookridge, that the Wild bee of Australia has a sting without barbs, and that it
is being exterminated by the Common Hive Bee.

"Since then, these two facts struck me as being very interesting, and I there-
fore repeated tliem to Mr. Darwin, saying, at the same time, tliat I was not quite
certain whether I had understood you correctly.

"Mr. Darwin has asked [me] to write to you, and enquire whether my
memory is correct, and if so whether you would kindly allow him to mention the
facts, giving you as his authority.

"He would also like to know in what districts especially tliis destruction of
the Australian bee is taking place; and whether it is effected by the Hive bee
actually attacking tlie Australian species, or, as Mr. Darwin presumes to be the
ease, by the appropriation by the Hive Bee of so much food that too little is left
for the Aboriginal species.

624 presidext's address.

"Mr. Darwio would also be very much obligetl if you could send him a few
specimens of the latter."

"I hope you will e.xc-use the trouble I am giving you, and believe me, dear
Sir Charles, Yours very truly, John Lubbock."

W. S. Maeleay, doubtless, did his best to answer these questions. He could
possibly have answered tiie first one. and could have supplied specimens of native
bees. But the second one was probably unanswerable, for lack of information.
Hive bees arc said to have been introduced at Sydney, about 1S22, and at Hathurst
in 1839 and 1842, as mentioned in Henniker Heaton's "Australian Dictionary of
Dates" (p. 39). I commend both Lubbock's questions to the notice of Members,
as worthy of modern investigation .

Sir Charles Nicholson was a Trustee of the Australian Museum for some
years. Both he and \V. S. Maeleay, together with J. H. Plunkett. as Chair-
man, were the C'ommissionei's of National Education in Sydney, in 1848. There
is, among the relics of W. S. Maeleay, his copy of the "Begulations and Direc-
tions to be attended to in making application to the Commissioners of National
Education, for and towards the building of School Houses or for the support of
Schools." These signed by the three Commi.ssioners, as above, were issued, with
a preface, dated i\Iay 10th, 1848, by the Colonial Secretary, E. Deas Thomson.

Alexander Walter Scott (1800-83), and his accomplished daughters, Harriet
(Mrs. Cosby W. Morgan) and Helena (Mrs. Edward Forde), lived for a number
of years at Ash Island, Hunter River, but removed to Sydney about 1862. They
were the authors of that most meritorious work "Australian Tjcpidoptera and their
Transformations, drawn from the Life by Harriet and Helena Scott, with De-
scriptions, General and Systematic, by A. W. Scott, M.A., Ash Island, Hunter
River, New South Wales." of which Vol. i., comprising Parts i.-iii., was pub-
lished in London in 1864. Vol. ii., Parts i.-iv.. with an amended title, was pub-
lished in Sydney, in 1890-93, by the Trustees of the Australian Museum, who
had purchased the unpublished matter, after the death of Mr. Scott in 1883. The
second and last volume was edited and re\'ised by Arthur Sidney OUiff and
Helena Forde.

The Seotts were friends and correspondents of W. S. Maeleay. and there
are several acknowledgments of advice and help, in regard to literature, to him
in the first volume. He was gi-eatly interested in their work, not only for its
intrinsic merit, but because they were continuing from a more modern standpoint
the investigations begun by J. W. Lewin, in his "Lepidopterous Insects of New
South Wales" (1805), and also because they were illustrating the life-histories
of some of the Lepidoptera described by him, in 1827. from Captain P. P. King's
Australian collection .

The only original, unpublislied letter written by W. S. Maeleay. that I have
seen, is one to Miss Scott, dated .July 23rd, 1861 . For this. I am indebted to
the thought fulness and kindness of the late Mrs. M. A. .7. Shaw, cousin and
residuary legatee of the late Mrs. Forde. The purport of this letter, of four
closely written pages, is explained by the concluding words, "T have now told you
pretty well all T know about Charagia."

Up to this time, four species of the genus h.ad been described and re-described
by Lewin and various European entomologists, but the synon^Tiiy was involved
and complicated. Miss Scott had obtained a firth species, which she thought wa-s

THE society's HL'UITAGE PROM THE MACLEAYS. 625

riew, but bad not tlie necessary literature at band to enable ber to settle tbe point.
She, therefore, appealed to W. S. Maeleay tor his advice, and tbe letter is bis
reply. Alter explaining the characteristics and synonymy of tbe four known
species, the letter proceeds — "You have g-ot a new and fifth species under tbe
name of C. Bamsayi Kamsay Mss . ; and my cousin has given me the ? of another
quite new and sixth species from King George's Sound, under the name of Charagia
scripta, Maeleay Junr. Mss. It has the silver spots like letters, and small instead
of being large and round as in C. Ramsayi. My cousin will, I am sure, be happy
to show you d".?. larva and chrysalis of this K. G. Sound species. He has the
larvae now alive in the roots of a Leptospermum."

Mr. Scott afterwards contributed a monograph "On tbe genus Charagia of
Walker," at a Meeting of the Entomological Society of New South Wales, lield
on September 2nd, 1807, in which be described four new species, including C.
Bamsayii and C. scripta [Trans., Vol. ii., p. 25] .

Tbe letter continues — "The larvae of all the species of Charagia, when they
die in tbe earth, give forth different species of a fungus called Sphaeria. At
least tbe Sphaeria Eoherti [Sobertsii] of Hooker, a well-known species which
proceeds from C. virescens, is altogether different from the Sphaeria Atkinsonae
Maeleay Mss. of this Colony. Indeed, I know two species of Sphaeria that grow
from the Charagiae of this Colony, and a Lady-friend of mine, who is a capital
botanist, though no entomologist, is now preparing a work on tbe New Holland
species of Sphaeria, which she is studying in the country. Dr. Bennett is quite
wrong, as I told him, in thinking that it was tbe Sphaeria Eoherti [i.e., tbe New
Zealand species] which you found at Ash Island. It nmst have been some other
species, and you had better let me see it."

Tbe belief here expressed that the lignivorous larvae of the species of Charagia,
which live in the tunnels excavated by them in the stems and branch&s of Banksia
and other shrubs, were victimised by tbe fungus Sphaeria or Cordi/ceps, though
generally accepted at that time, was incorrect. Mr. Scott, in 1864, showed that
it was the root-feeding caterpillars of species of Pielus, etc., wliicb pass some time
underground, that serve as the hosts of Cordyceps. This was pointed out in tbe
late Mr. A. S. Olliff's paper on "Australian Entomophytes," in the Agricultural
Gazette of N.S. Wales for June, 1895. One of the two species from Mount
Tomah, in which Miss Atkinson was interested, is therein described as Cordyceps
Selkirki, sp.n., the other being identified as C. Gunnii Berkeley. But tbe host
of tbe species from Asli Island, described as C. scottiamts. was shown to be the
larva of a Lucanid beetle.

The memorials of W. S. Maeleay include fourteen beautiful water-colour
drawings — seven of Ash Island spiders, six of Lepidoptera, and one of tbe Vege-
table Caterpillar found by them; and one pen-and-ink sketch of two species of
Ticks. The drawings were all done by one or other of the sisters, most of them
by Helena. They are nearly all signed, or initialled, and dated, and were done
during the period 1852-64. With the exception of two dated Sydney, 1864, the
others were done at Ash Island. These were sent from time to time to W. S.
Maeleay by tbe Misses Scott. They were carefully treasured, and are as fresh
almost as when they were done. The letter quoted above is, unfortunately, the
only one that has been preserved.

I bad the pleasure of knowing Mrs. Forde during the later years of her life.

626 president's address.

She was a vt-ry gifted woman, keenly interested in seienee. and with a memory
well stored with reeolleetions of old times. 1 regret now that I did not ask her
to give me some notes of her reminiscences of W. S. Macleay. She told me
that, when living at Ash Island, her sister and she used to come to Sydney for
periodical holidays; that W. S. Macleay used always to invite them to Elizabeth
Bay; and, because they were interested in entomology, that he used to take delight
in showing them the most attractive and beautiful specimens in his cabinets.

We have portraits of Mr. Scott, and of Mrs. Forde, but I have not been
able to get one of Mrs . Morgan . Mrs . Forde, the last of the family, died on
November 24th, 1910, at Parramatta, at the advanced age of nearly fourscore. An
obituary notice of her, with references to her sister, will be found in the Society's
Proceedings, 1911, p. 9.

Mr. Justice Therry (1800-74), of the Supreme Court of New South Wales
(1846-59), author of "Reminiscences of Thirty Years' Residence in New South
Wales and Victoria" (1863), thus refers to W. S. Macleay, in his book (p. 35).
— On a slope at the ea.stern [? southern] side of a very snug little bay, with a
lawn of English meadow-like verdure in front, stands the mansion of Mr. W.
fS.] McLeay — a name known to Europe for the scientific acquirements of its
occupant. As a botanist and entomologist, he holds a place in the foremost rank.
There, to the friends who visit him he pours forth, with a memory quite astonish-
ing, the stores of a varied and extensive knowledge from his encyclopaedic mind.
Those who have the good fortune to know this accomplislied sehnlar, will, like the
writer, regard their visits to Elizabeth Bay amongst the most agreeable reminis-
cences of New Soutli Wales." Some appreciative references to Alexander Macleay
are also contained in this book.

Among the memorials of W. S. Macleay there is a pampldet, inscribed by
the author, entitled "Letter to the Right Hon. W. E. Gladstone. M.P.; with the
Address to the Jury by His Honor Mr. Justice Therry at the Opening of the
First Circuit Court, at Brisbane, Moreton Bay, May 13, 1850; and his Speech at
the Dinner given to the Judge and Members of the Circuit, by the Magistracy
and Gentry of the District" (8vo, Sydney, 1850).

Dr. John Vaughan Thompson (1779-1847) was appointed De)mty Inspector-
General of Hospitals in Sydney on April 1st, 1836. Tlis naniu appears among
those of the gentlemen appointed "A Committee of Supeiintendence of tlie Aus-
tralian Museum and Botanical Garden," on June 14th, 1836, as printed in the
Sydney Gazette. Dr. Tiiompson was a distinguished zoologist. He was an army
surgeon, who, when stationed at Cork, in 1830, took to the study of marine In-
vertebrata by the aid of the microscope. "Thompson made three great discoveries,
which seem to have fallen in his way in the most natural and sini))le manner, but
must be regarded really as the outcome of extraordinary genius. He showed that
the organisms like Flustra are not hydroid Polyps, but of a more complex struc-
ture resembling Molluscs, and he gave them the name 'Polyzoa.' He discovered
the Pfntaerivua e-urnfiaeus, and showed that it was the larval form of the Feather-
Star Antedon (Comatula) . He upset Cuvier's retention of the Cirripedes among
Mollusca, and his subsequent treatment of them as an isolated class, by showing
that they begin life as free-swimming Crusta<-ea identical with the young forms
of other Crustacea." [Ray Lankcst^r, "The History and Scope of Zoology, p.
335, in his volume entitled "The Advancement of Science: Occasional Essays and
Addresses," London. 1890].

TUE society's herita(1e from the macleats. 027

The results of the three researches mentioned, were puhlished separately hy
the author, with the title "Zoological Researches and Illustrations; or Natural
History of nondescript or imperfectly known Animals, in a series of Memoirs,
illustrated hy numerous figures." Five Memoirs at least were published at Cork
about 1830 or later. The memorials of W. S. Macleay include four of these,
the first one bearing the inscription "W. S. McLeay, Esquire, with the Author's
Compliments." The others are without covers.

W. S. Macleay appreciatively refers at length to Thompson's observations on
Ci-ustaceous animals in the second portion of the "Annulosa of South Africa," "On
the Hrachyurous Decapod Crustacea,"' p. 53. In a footnote he says — "The credit
(if confirming Thompson's observatu'ns belongs to my friend Captain Ducane [Du
Cane], R.N., who has made at Southampton most interesting observations on the
Metamorphosis of Crustacea, which 1 trust he will soon give to the Public" [as he
did, in Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., 1839]. Among the memorials of AV. S. Macleay,
there is a sketch of two larval shrimps, signed "C.D.C., Southampton, April 30th,
1838," sent to him by his friend.

After Dr. J. V. Thompson came to Sydney in 183G. there is no record of any
interest, on his part, in the Port Jrckson fauna. He was the author of numerous
papers, of which nineteen, not including the "Zoological Researches," are listed
in the Royal Society's Catalogue. The last four were apparently written in
Sydney, but published in India, Agric. Soc. Journal, Vols. i.. ii., iv., 184'2-45.
These relate to the culture of cotton and sugar-cane. The Journal containing
them is not to be found in Sydney libraries.

Dr. Thompson was known to Alexander Macleay as a contributor of papers
to, and a Fellow of, the Linnean Society as early as 1808. He was also the donor
of seeds of Cotton to A. Macleay in Sydney, as shown in the Seed-book.
Though often mentioned in text-books, I have never seen any reference to Dr.
Thompson as a distinguished zoologist resident in Sydney, in any Australian
pul)licatiou . He died in Sydney in 1847. The following brief obituary notice
appeared in the Sydney Morning Herald on January 2(5th. — "At his residence,
Liverpool Street, Sydney, on Thursday 21st instant, John Vaughan Thompson,
Es<i., for several years Deputy Inspector General of Hospitals in New South
Wales [1836-44], in his 63rd year, after long-continued illness — distinguished for
his acciuirements in zoology and botany — possessing talents of no conmion order —
and estimable in evei-y relative duty of life — he is deeply lamented by his afflicted
family, to whom his loss is irreparable."

Dr. J. F. Watson, in his "History of the Sydney Hospital, 1811-1911" says
that Dr. Thompson was an unsuccessful administrator, and that he was sui)er-
seded in 1844. This need not obscure his fine recoi-d of work, as given in the
National Dictionary of Biogi-aphy.

The Rev. Dr. Woolls (1814-1893), referred to as Mr. Woolls in the Rev.
K. L. King's letter to W. S. Macleay, in 1859, had not been ordained to Holy
Orders at that time. The introduction to W. S. Macleay, suggested by Mr.
King, was duly made, and thereafter they fre(|uently corresponded, and Dr.
Woolls paid visits. There are several references to W. S. Macleay in Dr.
Woolls' two book^. One of them records the fact that W. S. Macleay had
collected Dendrobium cucumerimim near Brownlow Hill, growing on the swamp-
oak; and another that he believed that Corijsauthe^ hicalcarata had been found

628 president's address.

near Sydney tliougli Dr. Woolls bail not succeeded in finding it. It was also
through Dr. Woolls, probably, that Miss Atkinson came to know W. S. Macleay.
There are many references to her in Dr. Woolls' two books; as there are also to
the Misses Seott, as well as a chapter in one of them on "The Botany of Ash
Island."

The writer of the Obituary Notice of Mr. W. S. Macleay, which appeared
in the Sydney Morning Herald, probably the Rev. W. B. Clarke, says that he
was the life and soul of the Museum. But I have no information about his a.sso-
ciation with the Australian Museum, which will enable me to add to what is
given in Etheridge's article. "The Australian Museum : Fragments of its Early
History," namely — "Eor twenty years or more, that eminent Natiu-alist, William
Sharp Macleay, gave his best energies to the welfare of the Institution. Com-
mitteeman from 1841 to 1853. Elective Trustee from 1853 onwards, ill-health
compelled him to resign in January 1862. The Board presented him with an ad-
dress," a copy of which is given (Records of the Australian Museum. Vol. .xii.,
No. 12, p. 394, 1919]. But we have some interesting relics of his connection
with the Museum. These include his father's copy of the now rare "Catalogue
of the Specimens of Natural History and Miscellaneous Curiosities deposited in
the Australian Museum." compiled by the Secretary, George Bennett, F.L.S.,
and published in 1837. This was apparently an official copy, as it is inscribed,
not in his own handwriting, "Alex. McLeay, Es(|." It was subsequently corrected,
supplemented, and brought up to date, in so far as it relates to mammals and
birds, by W. S. Macleay, the alterations and additions being in his handwriting.
Charles Coxen, of Yarrundi, donor of many specimens recorded in the Catalogue,
wa.s .John Gould's brother-in-law. Other relics are three letters about scientific
or Museum matters from three successive officei-s, S . R . Pittard, G . F . Angas,
and G. Krefft, the first and last Curators, and the second. Secretary for some time.

Of W. S. Maeleay's declining days, Lowe's biographer says — "In 1865
occurred two events which, although hardly unexpected, were in their different
ways and degrees a source of sorrow to Robert Lowe. These were the death of
his much-valued Australian friend. William Sbarpe Macleay. and tliat of his great
political chief, Lord Palmerston. Lowe had kept up an intermittent corrcsjtond-
euce with Macleay ever since he left Sydney, but latterly it had become painfully
evident to him that the quaint old philosopher of Elizabeth Bay was fast de-
clining. He had. indeed, received warning from others tliat the death of liis old
friend was impending" [Vol. ii.. p. 236].

W. S. Maeleay's last letter to Robert Lowe wa.s dated, Elizabeth Bay. 21
September, 1864. In this, the writer said, concerning himself — "As to my health,
it remains in statu quo; although I think that I am getting on the whole weaker.
At times I am quite prostrated, and at times I am again more lively. I never
was what you would call a decided beauty: but if you -vreve to see me now, you
would not know the ugly, lanky, thin, scraggy, toothless individual who is now
writing to assure you that the immaterial part of him remains still the same,
and that it has no friends on earth to which it is more attached than to you
and your sensible, kind lady. So I suljscribe myself ever. Your most affectionate
friend, W. S. Macleay." [Vol. ii.. p. 234]

Death ended his sufferings on .Tanuary 26tb. 1S65. in his seventy-third year.
An obituary notice appeared in the Sydney Morning Herald of 30th January.

THE society's heritage from the macleays. 629

The Rev. R. L. Kang, in his Presidential Address to the Entoraologieal Society
of New South Wales, on January 30th, 1865 [Trans. Ent. Soc. N.S. Wales, Vol.
i., p. xliii.] quotes extensively from the notice referred to, and also supplements
it. He refers to it as "from the pen of an old friend" — probably the Rev. W.
B. Clarke, written perhaps, after consultation with William Macleay.

The cenotaph to his memory in St. .James' Church, is above that in memory
of his sister, Mi's. Harrington; but rather too high for close scrutiny. Below a
medallion-portrait, head and shoulders, side-view, is the tersely appropriate in-
scription : —

GULIELMUS SH.\RP MACLEAY.

NATURAE INDAGATOR INDEFESSUS

IXTERPBESQUE EBUDITDS ACUTISSIMUSQUE.

VIXIT ANNOS LXSII. DECESSIT DIE XXVI.

JAN. A.D. ilDCCC'LXV.

It is, I think, a reasonable conclusion that the marble portion, with the por-
trait and inscription, was prepared in England, brought out by George Macleay,
and its erection arranged for while he was revisiting Australia between 18G9 and
1874. In that ease, it is also a reasonable supposition that the inscription was
drawn up by Robert Lowe at George Macleay's request.

By several writers, W. S. Macleay, in his later years in Australia, is spoken
of as a recluse. An explanation of what this was intended to mean, is not hard
to find. He was naturally reserved; and his life in Cuba must have been rather
a lonely one, as he could have had but few English friends, w'ho shared his tastes
and interests. This would lead to habits of self-dependence, and to his finding
recreation and solace in his books, in his scientific work and collecting, and in his
garden and culture of orchids. The tropical climate prejudicially affected his
health, and seems to have prematurely aged him, as is evident from the remarks
of Dr. Stimpson and Dr. Scherzer, quoted above. Long before the onset of
diabetes, which caused his last lingering illness, he suffered from gout; and, no
doubt, like Adam Sedgwick, the geologist, and other sufferers from this complaint,
he found that gout was not conducive to amiability. But his friendship with
Lowe, Huxley, and others shows that he was no misanthrope or hermit, when the
environment was congenial. There is abundant evidence also that, as some have
testified, he was always ready to advise and help those who were genuinely in-
terested in science, and sought his assistance in a proper manner. W. S. Macleay
did not marry.

W. S. Macleay's collection, as he brought it to Australia in 1839, comprised
the specimens left with him by his father for study; what he may have collected
or obtained by exchange or gift in Cuba, or at Philadelphia and the other ports
of call on the outward and homeward voyages ; and what he may have acquired
in England, after his return, by exchange or otherwise; and especially Verreaux's
South African collection of insects, which he purchased. Details of what he
added to his collection after he came to Australia are not available. Sir William
Macleay, in writing to the Chancellor of the University of Sydney in 1874, said
that the joint collections of A. and W. S. Macleay amounted to 480 drawers,
and his own to 320 drawers. But in addition to the specimens in the cabinets,
there were a number of dry specimens on shelves. These are referred to later.

630 presidknt's address.

Sir George Macleay, K.C.M.G.. F.L.S.

Third sou of Alexaiulei' Macleay, born in London in 1809, edueatod at West-
minster, resident in Australia lor more tlian thirty years, removed to England in
1859, died at Mentone, June 26th, 1891.

George Macleay came out to Australia with his father, or soon after, but I
am not sure which. He and his younger brother James were in charge of their
father's property at Brownlow Hill and the farm at Glendarewel attached to it,
near Camden, in 1829. The first record of George in print is a.s the coniiianion
of Captain Charles Start on his "Expedition down the Morumbidgee and Murray
Rivers in 1829-30." The details of this adventurous undertaking were given in an
"Official Keport to the Colonial Government," which appeared in the Sydney
Gazette in May 1830; and more fully in Sturt's Narrative of the Expedition,
published in London in 1833, second edition 1834, as the second volume of the
work entitled "Two Expeditions into the Interior of Southern Australia, 1828-31."
The first volume gives the account of the expedition which resulted in the dis-
covery of the Darling, in 1829.

Sturt, in his Narrative, speaks in the highest terms of Macleay. He men-
tions "the generous feelings that had prompted McLeay to participate in every
danger with me" ; and, "it was sufficiently evident to me, that the men were too
much exhausted to perform the task tliat was before them without ii-ssistance [on
the return-journey against the stream], and that it would be necessary both for
McLeay and myself to take our share of labour at the oars. Tiie cheerfulness
and satisfaction that my young friend evinced at the opportunity that w;is thus
afforded iiim of making himself useful, and of relieving those under him from
some portion of their toil, at the same time that they increa.sed my sincere esteem
for him, were nothing more than what I expected from one who had endeavoured
by every means in his power to contribute to the success of that enterprise upon
which he had embarked."

Their association during this adventurous excursion was tlie beginning of a
warm and lifelong friendship . Sturt's home for some years was at Bargo Brush,
and afterwards at Varroville near Liverpool, so that their neighbourly intercourse
continued. From 1839-53 he resided in South Australia, and then returned to
England, where he and Macleay renewed their friendship.

Mrs. Napier George Sturt's biography of her father-in-law, "Life of Charles
Sturt, sometime Captain 39tii Regiment, .and Australian Explorer" (London,
1899) gives numerous extracts from Sturt's lettei-s to Macleay. The last of them,
dated June 8th, 1869, was a sympathetic reply to one from his friend, announcing
the serious illness of his wife, who suffered from bronchitic trouble, and that
alarming symptoms had supervened. Sturt died peacefully, while he was alone,
eight days Inter, on ,Iune 16th. Mrs. George Macleay died shortly after.

Another early notice of George Macleay and his brother James, is given in a
recently j)ublished, most interesting book, "Some Early Records of the Macarthurs
of Camden. Edited by Sibella Macarthur Onslow'" (1914). In a letter dated
Camden, December 27th, 1830, written by Mrs. John Macarthur to her eldest
son, Edward, then in England, she narrates bow two expected visitors, friends of
her son, lost their way, were out in the bush all night in pouring rain, and —
"in the morning they made their way to the al)ode of the young McLeays [Brown-
low Hill] — apropos, these young McLeays are very agreeable neighbours of Wil-

THE society's heritage from the macleays. 631

liain — they come here frequently — having beeu well educated and really are well
conducted — lively and conversant, with the manners of the times, their society
tends to enliven the atmosphere around Camden, where the topics of tlie day are
brought forward in an agreeable mannei' — from their father's situation as Colonial
Secretary and the correspondence witli their sisters — they hear early of all Eng-
lish intelligence'' (p. 46"2) . Reference is also made to Sturt's expedition, the
members of which had returned to Sydney a few months before the letter was
written. Slie also adds that "the younger brother, James, is going an interesting
voyage — The Comet a King's ship sails from here to Pitcairn Island for the pur-
pose of removing the Islanders to Otaheite — Mr. .James McLeay and Capt. Wal-
pole of the 39th go in the Comet as a little voyage of curiosity ' and amusement.

If .James went in the "Comet," he returned again to Sydney, because he was
still at Brownlow Hill at the time of Mr. Backhouse's visit in 1836, as already
mentioned. He did eventually go back to England, entered the Foreign Office,
was Secretary and Registrar to the mixed British and Portuguese Commission
for the Suppression of the Slave Trade at the Cape of Good Hope (1843-58),
and died in London in October, 189"2, aged 81 years.

George Macleaywas about eleven years older than his cousin William. They
were always great friends, and corresponded as long as both were alive and well.
They were elected to Parliament in the same year, 1854, George a.s Member for
the Murrumbidgee in the Legislative Council, afterwards the Legislative Assembly,
when a Constitution was granted in 1855; and \Villiam as the Member for the
Laclilan and Lower Darling. After George's removal to England in 1859,
William succeeded him as Member for the Murrumbidgee.

The list of gentlemen appointed "A Committee of Superintendence of the
Australian Museum and Botanical Garden," dated June 14th, 1830, and pub-
lished in the Government Gazette, 183(), includes the name of George Maeleay.
Later on, he became an Elective Trustee. Tliere are a number of references to
him, in that capacity, in Etheridge's History. In February, 1859, he resigned,
in consequence of his removal to England. "On March 3rd, 1859, a resolution
was passed commissioning George Maeleay, in conjunction with Professor Owen,
to select a suitable person," as Curator, in succession to Mr. Wall, who had re-
tired. This resulted in the appointment of Mr. S. R. Pittard, M.R.C.S.,
who took up his duties in February, 18G0.

George Maeleay. being then young, was one of the few Members of the
Committee of 1836, who was not a Fellow of the Linnean Society. It is very
interesting to note how punctilious Alexander Maeleay was in enlisting the co-
operation of all the available old "Linneans" — to use an expression once em-
ployed by Mr. Bentham — in carrying out scientific enterprises.

He was elected F.L.S. on January 12th, 1860, soon after his return to Eng-
land; and a Member of the Council on May 24th, 1864. His gift of his father's
portrait of Kirby, and his MSS., and correspondence, in 1886; and his bequest of
the bust of W. S. Maeleay to the Society, have already been mentioned.

George Macleay's permanent home was in the country at Brownlow Hill,
near Camden, the latter 40 miles from Sydney, on what was then tlie Great South
Road. He was specially interested ini farming and horticulture. Though not a
working zoologist, he had a general interest in zoology, whfch was enlivened and
fostered by his father's and brother's influence, the opportunities afforded by a

632 president's address.

country-life for observing and eolleeting, and his connection with the Australian
Museum as a Trustee from 1836-59. He collected specimens on Sturt's Expedi-
tion; he also added to his father's collection, though there is only one quite in-
cidental record of it.

Sturt says in his Narrative of the Expedition — "McLeay, who was always in-
defatigable in his pursuit after subjects of natural history, shot a cockatoo, a
new species, hereabouts" (p. 6'2) . He says also that — "1 have already mentioned
that shortly after we first entered the !\Iurray. liocks of a new paroquet passed

over our heads They always kept too high to be fired at, but on our

return, hereabouts, we succeeded in killing one. It made a good addition to our
scanty stock of subjects of natural history. It is impossible to conceive how
few of the feathered tribe frequent these distant and lonely regions. The com-
mon white cockatoo is the most numerous, and there are also a few pigeons; but
other birds descend only for water, and are soon again upon the wing. Our
botanical specimens were as scanty as our zoological, indeed the expedition may,
as regards lliese two particulars, almost be said to have been unproductive" (p.
188).

This report is not surprising. The journey of 1700 miles in a whale-boat
was twice as long as was expected, by reason of the failure of the arrangements
for the return of the party by sea. There was a shortage of provisions, rowing
against the stream was very laborious in the weakened condition of the men, and
a crowded boat did not offer satisfactory room for the stowage of specimens.

The only reference to George Macleay's collecting for his father, that I have
seen, is to be found in the "Annulosa of South Africa" (p. 75) . W. S. Macleay
says, of Arthroptenis MacLeaii Don. — "The only known specimen of this species
was purchased by my father at the sale of Mr. Francillon's museum. None of
the authors who have written on the species ever saw it, except Donovan, who
was its first describer in his work on the "Insects of New Holland." There is
another species of Arthropteni.'i, which T have seen in the valuable collection of

my friend, Mr. John Curtis T am ignorant which of these two my

brother, Mr. George MacLeay has lately found, or whether his discovery may
not prove, on comparison, to be still a third species. But I learn, by a letter
from my father, that my brother, 'in one of his late excursions into the interior
of New South Wales, discovered several specimens of •Cerapterus MacLeaii'
in the nests of ants, and, moreover, remarked, tliat when alive they had the power
of exploding, after the manner of Brachini.' "

George Macleay at one time had a station on the Murrumbidgee . He may
have collected the specimens mentioned above in visiting this locality. He
would have had no trouble in making a good collection in the Camden district.
But insect-collecting is not mentioned in Sturt's Narrative.

Sir William Denison and members of his family paid three visits to Brown-
low Hill in 1855, 1856, and 1857. I liave already referred to one of these.

George Macleay revisited Australia for a time after the death of Iiis brother,
W. S. Macleay, but I have not been able toi ascertain exactly when. Professor
Huxley read a paper "On Ceratndtis forsteri. with Observations on the Classi-
fication of Fishes" at a Meeting of the Zoological Society of London, on January
4th, 1876, in which he said — "Two specimens of Ceratodus forsteri have come into
my possession within the last two years. The first was kindly placed at my
disposal by the Secretary of this Society some time ago; but I was unwilling to

THE SOCIETT'S HERITAGE FROM THE MACLEAYS. 033

dissect it until 1 had a seennd. This desideratum was supplied by my friend
Sir George MaeLeay, who, on a recent visit to Australia, was kind enough to
undertake to obtain a Ceratodus for me, and fulfilled his* promise by sending me
a very fine and well-preserved fish, rather lai-ger than the first" [Proc., 1876, p. 24] .
W. S. Macleay, who was unmarried, died in January, 1865. George was
his residuaiy legatee, and inherited, among other possessions, the Elizabeth Bay
property, the family heirlooms, and his brother's library and papers, but not the
Maeleay Collections, which passed to William. The object of George's visit to
Sydney was to put his Australian affairs in order. Mrs. George Macleay died
in 1869. I have in my possession William Maeleay 's journals for several years,
commencing with 1874. George's visit ended before this, as there is no reference
to it; but ttiere is a record on July 25th, 1874, that "Brazier finished packing the
books to-day, thirteen cases in all. There are still a large number of books
remaining on the shelves, but as I have no more cases, I shall not have any more
packed at present." The books here referred to were packed for shipment to
England to George Macleay, and the others were to follow. These represented
the balance of W. S. Macleay's library after the books which George gave to
William, had been taken out. An earlier notice is offered by the entry on July
22nd — "Brazier commenced packing up the books 1 am sending home to George
Macleay." And one of July 28th, records, "Brazier has been making lists of the
books given me by my cousin George." His visit to Australia, therefore, seems
to have been made after 1869 and before 1874.

But in addition to the books, mostly entomological, G«orge gave his cousin
the letters, drawings, with the exception of the Stuart collection of drawings sent
out from England as a gift in 1887, pamphlets, or memoranda, which I have so
frequently spoken of, in the course of my remarks, as the relics or memorials of
W. S. Macleay. These were put away in the library, and, after he was rather
abruptly and completely prostrated by the onset of his last illness, forgotten by
Sir William. Everything in the house at the time of his decease was be-
queathed to his widow. When the time came for clearing-up the house. Lady
Macleay very kindly handed them over to me, as Sir William's executor and
trustee, who was interested in Natural History. This meeting has given me an
opportunity that I had been looking for, of exhibiting and recording these in-
teresting relics and memorials of the Madeays, preparatory to handing them over
to my successor, as the Society's custodian of them.

The rest of W. S. Macleay's papers, including letters from Lowe, Huxley,
and probably many others, as well as any MS. records of work that there may
have been, were presumably taken to England by George Macleay.

The concluding portion of Mr. Busk's Obituary Notice of W. S. Macleay is
as follows — "After his retirement to Australia, I am not aware that Mr. MacLeay
published anything; but he has left, as I am informed, a large collection of MSS.
on all subjects of natural history, which, as greatly to the advantage of science,
it would be extremely desirable should be carefully examined, and those among
them fitted for tlie purpose, published. There is reason, I believe, to hope that
this may be done, and that we may. as in foiTner days, again see the pages of the
'Linnean Transactions' graced by articles bearing the honoured name of William
Sharp Macleay."

The Notic* was written by Mr. Busk in May 1865. apparently after con-
sultation with George Macleay. who was then a Member of the Council; perhaps

634 president's address.

also with Professor Huxley, who, as I think, was the author of the notice in the
"Header," from which Mr. Busk quotes. By this time, George Macleay would
have received particulars of W. S. Madeay's decease from William Macleay.
The information supplied to Mr. Busk by George Macleay would be based mainly
on recollections of his intercourse witli his brother up to the year 1859, supple-
mented by anything William Macleay might have communicated by letter. Per-
haps Huxley could speak of the work W . S . Macleay was interested in during his
visits in 1847-50. Mr. Busk's hope of future results was based on tlie fact that
George Macleay was his brother's heir, and that it was necessary for him to revisit
Sydney as soon as possible, to deal with his Australian interests. The delicate
health of his wife up to the time of her death in 1809, postponed this visit for
about four years.

Prom what has been said above, it wiU be seen that the four papers published
in England or Calcutta, after W. S. Macleay came to Australia, and the two
letters published in Sydney, were overlooked by Mr. Busk. These communica-
tions, however, were not entomological. As a matter of fact, the only published
records of his own, indicative of his interest in Australian insects after his arrival
in Australia, beyond what has been stated above in speaking of his correspondence
with the Rev. F. W\ Hope, are some observations given by Mr. Hope in a Post-
script to his paper, "Observations on the Stenochoridae of New Holland, with
Descriptions of new Genera and Species of that Family," read to the Zoological
Society on June 23rd, 1840, [Trans. Zool. Soc. Vol. iii., p. 187], but the publica-
tion of this was delayed for some time. And some observations on an exhibit,
communicated by the Hon. Secretary, on his behalf at a Meeting of the Entomo-
logical Society of New South Wales on October 3rd, 1864. Both these records
will be considered later, when I come to speak of the history of the latter Society.

In the concluding sentence of his paper on the "Annulosa of South Africa"
(1838) W. S. Macleay said of the Paiissidae — "I hope, however, as I am about
to visit Australia, soon to be able to make myself master of the oeconomy of these
interesting insects, and also to publish a correct representation of the parts of the
mouth."

In his letter "On the SkuU now exhibited at the Colonial Museum of Sydney
as that of the Bunyip," he said, speaking of the teratologieal skull of a foal found
floating in the Hawkesbury then in his possession — "This skull was prepared by
the lamented late Dr. Stewart [Stuart], and he has made drawings and notes of it.
■which I intend before long to publish, with his other observations on various
branches of natural history."

Mr. Hope, in the paper on Stenochoridae, just mentioned, says of Meropachi/s
MacLeaii, n . sp . , — "This beautifully sericeous insect is named in honour of William
Sharpe Macleay, Esq., from whom we may shortly expect some valuable communi-
cations relating to the entomology of Australia."

Nevertheless, neither W. S. Madeay's intentions, nor Hope's expectation,
came to fruition.

Swainson's classifieatory and other aberrations may perhaps have exercised
some inhibitory influence on any inclination, W. S. Macleay otherwise may have
had, to continue his literary efforts; and to this, the state of his health may also
have contributed. But if he did put pen to paper on the subject of Australian
insects or Dr. Stuart's notes, and did not subsequently destroy the results, George
Macleay, perhaps after consultation with William, became the arbiter of tlieir dis-
posal, and dealt with whatever there may have been, as he thought lit. Mr.

THE society's HERITAGE FROM THE MACLEAYS. 635

Busk's hope was not realised. The memorials of W. S. Macleay, which George
Macleay left with William, comprise nothing: at all in the shape of original
observations or publishable matter, nor do they include Dr. Stuart's notes.

After his arrival in England, George Macleay purchased a beautiful house
and grounds, known as Pendell Court, at Bletchingly, Surrey, which became his
home for the rest of his life. An illustrated account of Pendell Court, and of
the garden, tropical house, fernery, stoves, orchid-houses, and aquaria, signed F.
"W. H., appeared in "The Garden," for February 5th, 1881, as one of a series
of articles on "Country Seats and Gardens of Great Britain." Mr. Maiden has
kindly given me the copy of this article, which is exhibited to-night. This will
be added to the other mementos of George Macleay.

Sir George Macleay died, without issue, at Mentone on June 26th, 1891, in his
82nd year, about six months before his cousin William. His first wife died at
Pendell Court in 1869. His second wife, a Tasmanian lady, died in England, as
recently as 1919.

Mi-s. Forde, who was good enough to let me have the portrait of Sir George
Macleay. which has been hung in the Society's Hall for some years now, told me
that she corresponded with him almost up to the last. And she added, that he
was always her good and kind friend .

Before leaving for England in 1859, or while on his visit to Sydney between
the years 1870 and 1874, George Macleay disposed of his property at Brownlow
Hill to Mr. F. W. Downes, and it has been in possession of the family ever since.
Mr. Downes, to whose memory there is a cenotaph in the old Church at Cobbity,
died in 1917. By the kind pemiission of Mi-s. Downes — to whom, and to her
son, for his kindly guidance, I desire to record our cordial thanks — my friend and
fellow-member, Mr. Charles W. Smith, and I were able to visit Brownlow Hill
last December. Having a knowledge of Sir William Denison's and James Back-
house's descriptions of George Madeay's old home, and a somewhat faded photo-
graph among the relics of W. S. Macleay, probably taken sixty or seventy years
ago, we had no difficulty in realising where we were, or the interest of what we
had come to see. Unfortunately it began to rain just as we arrived, which pre-
vented a closer inspection of the interesting plants and trees in the garden . Allow-
ing for the lapse of time, and for the fact that the maintenance of an extensive
garden is a much more expensive hobby now than it used to be in the good old
days, the old home and the garden have been consistently kept up, and are mucli
as they used to be. The "genteel cottage," as Mr. Backhouse regarded it in 1836,
was possibly enlarged about the time of George Macleay's marriage to Miss Bar-
bara Innes in 1842, and may have been added to since. A mute but eloquent
historic link with the past is the old sundial in the upper garden, close to the
house, probably a gift from some friend. On the four corners of the dial are
engraved ths words — "George Macleay Esq. — Brownlow Hill — near Camden —
New South Wales." In the centre, below the gnomon is the date, "1836." And
below this again — "anno eoloniae xlviii."

The date recalls the fact, that 1836 was the year in which James Backhouse
and his colleagues spent three days at Brownlow HiU, with George and James
Macleay, visiting Camden Park twice during their stay. Under date October 21st,
Mr . Backhouse records — "I walked into the forest by moonlight, along with George
McLeay, to see the Opossums."

(To be covcluded, with Illustratio^is, in the next Part of the Proceedings.)

636

DONATIONS AND EXCHANGES.

Received during the period 27th November, 1919, to 24th November, 1920.

(From the respective Societies^ etc., uiileas otherwise tnentioned.)

Accra.

Geological Survey op the Gold Coast of W. Africa. — Report for the Year

lillS (1919).

Adelaide.

Depahtment or Mines: Geological Survey of S. Australia. — Review of

Mining Operations in the State oi' South Australia during the Half-years

ended December 31st, 1919, and June 30th, 1920, Nos. 31, 32 (1920) .
Public Library, iMu.seum, etc., op South Australia. — Records of the S.A

Museum, i., 3 (1920) ; Report of the Board of Governors for 1918-19

(1919).
Roy'al Society of South Australia. — Transactions and Proceedings, xliii.

(1919).
Woods and Forests Department op South Australia. — Annual Progress

Report upon State Forest Administration for the Year 1918-19 (1919).

By W. Gill, F.L.S., F.R.H.S., Conservator of Forests.

Ann Arbor.

American Microscopical Society. — Transactions, xxxviii.. 1, 3. 4 (1919) ;

xxxix., 1-2 (1920).
Michigan Academy op Science. — Twentieth ■ Annual Report (1918).
University of Michigan: Museum of Zoology. — Miscellaneous Publications

Nos. 5-6 (1918); Occasional Papers, Nos. 57-61 (1918) (T.p. & c. for

Nor. 36-61); Nos. 62-64 (1918-1919).

Auckland.

Auckland Institute and Museum. — Annual Report 1919-20 (1920); Trans-
actions and Proceedings, N.Z. Institute, lii. (1920).

Baltimore.

Johns Hopkins University. — University Circular — New Series 1917, Nos.
2-10; 1918, 1-10; 1919, 1-10; 1920, 1 (1917-1920).

Maryland Geological Survey. — General Report, x. (1918); Report on Anne
Anindel County, with 4 Maps (1917) ; Report on the Qeologj- and
Palaeontology of Maryland — Upper Cretaceous (2 Vols.), (1916).

DONATIONS AND EXCHANGES. 637

Basle.

Naturporschende Gesellschaft in Basel.— Verbandlungen, xxx. (1910) .

Batavia.

KONiNKLiJKE Natuurkundige Veeeeniging IN Nkderl.-Indie. — Aflevering,
1 (Het Idjeu-Hoogland, Monogi-apbie v.); Natuurkundig Tijdschrift
voor Nederlandsch-Indk, Ixsvii.-lxxx., 1 (1918-1920).

Berkeley.

Univek.sit\- of California. — Publications. — Botaii/i, vi.. 19; vii., 6-9; viii.,
1-2 (1919-1920) .—Entomologi/, iii.. 1 (1919) .—Geologi/, xii., 1, 2 and 4
(1919-1920) .—Zoology, xix., 4, 8-12; xx., 5-6; xxi.. 3-5; xxii., pp. 1-292.
(1919-19201.— University Bulletin, 3rd Series, xiii., 5 (List of Publica-
tions. Nov. 1919) (1919).

Bern.

Njiturforschende Gesellschaft. — Verbandlungen, 191{), i.-ii. ; 1917; 1918.
(1916-19) .

Birmingham.

Birmingham Natural History and Philosophical Societv. — Annual Re-
ports for 1918 and 1919 (1919-1920) ; List of Members, 1919, 1920 (1919-
1920); Proceedings, xiv., 2-3 (1917-1919).

Boston, Mass.

American Academy op Arts and Sciences. — Proceedings, xlix., 12, (T.p. &
c): 1., 4-13, (T.p. & c); li., 1-14 (T.p. & c); Iii., 1-13, (T.p. &
c; liii.. 1-10, (T.p. & c): liv., 1-6 (T.p. & c): Iv., 1. (1914-1919).

Brisbane.

Department of Agriculture and Stock. — Botany Bulletin, No. xxii. (1920) ;

Queensland Agricultural Journal, xii., 6; xiii., 1-6 (T.p. & c.) ; xiv., 1-5

(1919-1920).
Geological Survey of Queensland. — Publications, Nos. 265, 267 (1920);

Four Reprints, Publication No. 268 in Part, Articles 1-4 in Industrial

Minerals, (1920).
Queensland Museum. — Memoirs, vii., 1 (1920) .
Royal Society of Queensland. — Abstract of Proceedings. 26/7/20, 30/8/20,

27/9/20. (1920); Proceedings, xxxi., 1919 (1920).

Brooklyn, N.Y.

Botanical Society of America. — American Journal of Botany, vii., 4 (1920).
Brooklyn In.stitute of Arts and Sciences. — Brooklyn Museum Quarterly,
(T.p. & e.) for V. (1918); vi. 1-2., (1919).

Brussels.

Academie Royalk de Belgique.— Bulletin, 1914, 2-12 (T.p. & c); Bulletin
de la Classe des Sciences, 1919, Nos. 6-12 (T.p. & c.) ; 1920, Nos. 1-3
(1919-1920) ; 1915. Communications presentees a la Classe en 1915; 1919,
1-5 (1914-1919): Tables Generales, 1899-1910; 1911-1914 (1919). Apercu
Historinue et Travaux (1772-1904) (1914). Catalogue Onomastique des

638 DONATIONS AND EXCHANGES.

Accroissemeuts de la Bibliothequc, Sciences 1883-1014 (1919). Fonda-
tions Academiques (1919). Rapport Succinct sur I'Etat du Palais des
Academies apres le Depart des Allemands (1919). Tables des Notices
Biographiques publiees dans I'annuaire (1835-1919), (19]9) .

ACADEMIE ROTALE DES SCIENCES, DES LeTTRES ET DES BeAUX-Art.S DE BeLGIQDE.

— Annuaire de I'Aeademie, 81e-85e Annees (1915-1919), (1919).
Societe ENTOiiOLOGiQUE DE Belgique.- — Aimales, Iviii., (1914-1919).
Societe Rotale Zoologique et Malaoologique de Belgique. — Annales, xlviii..

(Vol. Jub. 1863-1913); xJix.; Supplement to xlix. (Morphologic des

Frotozoaires), (1914).

Budapest.

Museum Nationale Hungaricum. — Annales, xii., 2 (T.p. & c.) (1914);
xiii., 2 (T.p. &c.) (1915); xiv., 1-3 (T.p. & c.) (1916).

Buenos Aires.

SociEDAD Argentina des Ciencias Naturales. — Boletin, i.. 7 (1914) ; Hevista
"Physis", ii., 11 (1916) .

Caen.

Societe Linneenne de Normandie. — Bulletin, 6th Ser.. vii.-ix. (1914-1919) .

Calcutta.

Geological Survey op India. — Memoirs, xlvii., pt. 1 (1920) ; Palaeontologia

Indica, N.S., \-ii., Mem. No. 1 (1920); Records, 1., 3-4 (T.p. & c);

li., 1 (1919-1920) .
Indian Museum. — Memoirs, vii., 2-3 (1919); Records, xvi., 5-7 (T.p. & c.)

(1919) ; xvii., (1920) ; xviii., 1-3 (1919-1920) ; xix., 1-2 (1920) ; xx.,

(1920).

Cambridge, England.

Cambridge Pnn.osoPHiCAL Society. — Proceeding?;, xix.. 6 (T.p. & c.)
(1920) ; Transactions, xxii., 15-21 (1919-1920) .

Cambridge, Mass.

Museum of Compar.\tive Zoology at Harvard College. — Annual Report
of the Director, 1918-19 (1919) ; Bulletin, Ixii., 12. 13. 15 (T.p. & c);
Ixiii., 1, 6, 7, 8, 9 (T.p. & e.) (1919-1920).

Cape Town.

Royal Society of South Africa. — Transactions, viii., 1-3 (1919-1920).

South African Museum. — Annual Report for years ending 31st December,
1918, 1919 (1920): Annals, xiv.. 4; xvii., 4-5 (1920); Olivier's Insects,
2. "Entomologie"; "Science in South Africa" (1915); Transactions of
the South African Philosophical Society, v., "On-Iiids.' (1888).

Chicago.

Field Museum of Natural History. — Report Series, v., 5 (Publication No.
205) (1920).

Christchurch, N.Z.

Philosophical Institute op Canterbury. — Transactions New Zealand In-
stitute, li.-lii. (1919-1920) .

DONATIONS AND EXCHANGES. 639

Christiania.

KoNGKLicE NoRSKE Frederikis Unhersitet. — Arcliiv for Mathematik og

Naturvidenskab, T.p. & e. for xxxi. ; xxsii., 1-4 (T.p. & c.) (1911);

xxxiii., 1-4 (T.p. & c.) (1912); xxxiv., 1-4 (T.p. & c.) (1914-1917);

sxsv., 1-4 (T.p. & c.) (1917); xxxvi., 1-2 (1919).
ViDENSMAPS Selskapet I Chkistiania. — Fordhandlinger, Aar 1910, 1917,

1918 (1917, 1918, 1919) ; Skrifter i Matematisk — Naturvidenskabelig

IClasse, 1916, 1 & 2, 1917. 1918 (1917, 1918, 1919) .

Cincinnati, Ohio.

Llotd Library.— Bibliographical Contributions, iii., 2-7 (1917-1918) ; Myeol-
ogieal Notes, Nos. 39-47 (1915-17) ; Synopsis of the Stipitate Stereums;
Synopsis of the genus Cladoderris (1913) .

Coldspring Harbour, N.Y.

Carnegie Institution of Washington : Department of Experimental
Evolution. — Annual Report of the Director, 1919 (Reprint from the
Year Book. 1919) (1920).

Colombo.

Colombo Museum. — Spolia Zeylaniea, T.p. & c. for x.; xi., 41, 42. (1919-
1920) .

Columbus, Ohio.

American Chemical Society. — Journal of Industrial and Engineering

Chemisti-y, xi., 7-12 (T.p. & c); xii.. 1-7, 9, 10 (1919-1920).
Ohio Academy of Science and Ohio State University Scientific Society.
—Ohio Journal of Science, xx., 1-8, T.p. & c. (1919-1920.).

Copenhagen.

AcAiiKMiE Royale des Sciences et des Lettres de Danemark. — Biologiske

Meddolelser i., 13 (T.p. & c.) ; ii., 1 (1919).
Universitets Zoologiske Museum. — Danish Ingolf Expedition, v., 8 (1919) ;

iii., 6 (1920); Publications Nos. 4-12 (1920).
Darwin, N".T.

Department of Mines of the Northern Territory of AnsTRALU. — Bulletin

of the Northern Territory, No. 19 (1919).

Dublin.

Royal Dublin Society. — Economic Proceedings, ii., 14 (1919) ; Scientific
Proceedings, N.S., xv., Nos. 35-48 (1919-1920) .

Dunedin, N.Z.

Otago Institute. — Transactions and Proceedings New Zealand Institute, Ii.
(1919).

Durban.

Durban Museum.— Annals, i., 1-5 (T.p. & c); ii., 1-6 (1914-1920).

East Lansing, Michigan.

Michigan State Agricultural College and Experiment Station, Bac-
teriological Laboratories. — Report of the Bactei-iologist, 1918 (1919) ;
Technical Bulletin No. 41 (1918), (1919); One Reprint "An Anaerobic
Culture Volumeter" (Northnip) (1918); One Reprint "The True Soil
Solution" (Northnip) (1918).

640 DOXATIONS AND EXCHANGES.

Edinburgh.

Royal Physical Society. — Proceeding:s, xx.. 4 (1919).

Royal Society ok Edinburgh. — Prof-eedings, xxxix.. 2-3 (T.p. & f.); xl., 1
(1919-1920); Transartions, lii., 3 (1920).

Firenze.

SociETA ExTOMOLOGiCA Ttaliana. — Bullettino. 1., 1918. (1919).

Frankfurt on Main.

Senokienbergische Naturforschende Gesellsciiaft in Frankfurt a. M. —
Abhandl., Bd. xxxv.. Heft 2 (1918): xxxvi.. Heft 1, 2, and 3 (1914-
1918): Bericht. 1914, No. 45. 1-4 (T.p. & c.) (1914); 1915, No. 46
(1916): 1916, No. 47 (1918); 1917, No. 48 (1918); 1918, No. 49, 1-2
(1919).

Freiburg, I.B.

N-\turforschende Gesellschaft. — Berichte. xxi., 1-2; xxii., 1 (1915-16,
1919) .

Geneva.

Societe de Physique et d'Histoire Naturelle de Geneve. — Compte Rendu,
xxxvi.. 3 (T.p. & c); xxxvii., 1-2 (1919-1920); Memoires, xxxix., 3-4
(1920) .

Granville, Ohio.

Dexisox University. — Bulletin of the Scientifie Laljoratories. T.p. & c.
for xviii. (1915-1916); xix., pp. 1-64 (No. 3); pp. 65-146 (1919).

Haarlem..

Nederlandsche Entomologische Vereeniging. — Entomolofrisolie Berichten,
v., Nos. 97-114 (1917-1920) : Tijdsehrift voor Entomoloarie, Ixii.. 3-4
(T.p. & c.) and Siipplfmcnt, .1:hi . 1920; Ixiii.. 1-2 (1920).

Halifax, N.S.

N'ova Scotian Institute op Science. — Proceedings and Transactions, xiv., 4

(1917-1918).

Hamilton, Canada.

Hamilton Associ.ation.— .Journal and Proceedings, No. xxix.. Sessions 1912-
13 to 1917-18 (1919) .

Helsingfors.

SociETAs PRO Fauna et Flora Fexnica. — \cU\. xxxix. -xliv. (1914-1919);
Meddelanden. Haftet xl.-xliv. (1914-1918).

Societe df.s Sciences de Pinlande. — Acta, xliii.. 1 (1918) : \)v.. 2. 4 (1915) ;
xlvi.. 1. 3-8 (1914-1918); xlvii. (1 Vol.): xlviii.. 1-4 (1916-1919);
Bidrag. Ixxiv., 2, T.p. & c. Ixxvii., 1-5 (T.p. & e.) (191.5-1919);
Ixxviii.. 2, 4-6, T.p. & c. (1919); Ixxix., 2 (1920); Lefnadsteckning,
1914 (1916); Minnesord, 1914 (1915); Minnestal, (3 parts) 1913. 1915
(191.5-1916); Ofversigt. Ivii., 1914-1915 C; Iviii.. 1915-1916 A; lis.,
1916-1917 A, C; Ix., 1917-1918 A (191.5-1919); Ix., (1917-1918) C,
(1919): Ixi.. A. Haftet 1-2 (1918-1919).

DONATIONS AND EXCHANGES. 641

Hobart.

Field Nati-r.^lists' Club of Tasmania.— "Easter Camp-out, 1920; General

Report, Botanical Notes, Geological Notes" (10201 .
Geological Survey of Ta,smania.— Bulletin Nos. 30. 31 (1919); Mineral

Resources No. 6 (1919); Record No. 5 (1919); Report No. 8 (1919).
Royal Society of TASiL^NiA. — Papers and Prnceedings for the Year 1919

(1920).

Honolulu, T.H.

Bernice Pauahi Bishop Museum. — Memoirs, vi., 1-2 (1919) .

Johannesburg.

South African Association for the Advancement of Science. — South
African Journal of Science, x^'., 8; xvi., 1-4 (1919-1920).

La Plata.

MusEO DE LA Plata.— Revista, xix., 1-2 (1913-1915); xx., (1913); xxi.,
(1915); xxii., (1913); xxiii., 1-2 (1915-1916); xxiv.. 1, 2 (1916-19).

Liege.

SociETE Geologique de Belgique. — Annales xl., 4 (T.p. & c); xli., 1-3
(T.p. & c); xlii., 1-3 (1914-1920); Bibliographie s'eologique du Bassin
du Congo. By J. Cornet; Publications relatives au Congo Beige, etc.,
Annexe xl., 4; xli., 1-2; xlii., 1-2 (1914-1920).

Liverpool.

Liverpool Biological Society. — Proceedings and Transactions, xxxiii., Ses-
sion 1018-1919 (1919).

London.

Board of Agriculture and Fisheries. — Journal of the Board of Agriculture,

xxvi., 7-12 (1919-1920) ; xxvii., 1-7 (1920) .
British Museum (Natural History) . — Economic Series, Nos. 0, 10 (1919) ;

Studies on Acari, No. 1. (1919) .
Geological Society. — Quarterly Journal, Ixxiv., 4; Isxv., 1-4 (T.p. & c.)

(1019-1920); List, June 1020 (1020).
Linnean Society.— Journal . Botany, xliv., Nos. 295-299 (1917-1919); No.

300 (1920); xlv.. No. 301 (1920); Zoology, xxxiii., 224 (T.p. & c);

xxxiv., 225-227 (1918-1920); List 1919-1920 (Nov. 1919); Proceedings.

131st Session (1918-1919) (1919).
Royal Bot.^nic Gardens, Kew. — Bulletin of Miscellaneous Information,

1918, 1919 (1918, 1919) .
Royal Microscopical Society. — Journal, 1919, 3-4 (T.p. & o.) (1919);

1920, 1-2 (1920) .
RoY.tL Society. — Philosophical Transactions. Series B. eeix., Nos. B. 362-

371, (T.p. & c); ccx., Nos. B. 372-375 (1919-1920); Proceedings,

Series B., xci.. Nos. B. 636-640 (1910-1020).
Zoological Society. — Abstract of P'roceeding-s, Nos. 170. 106-207 (1919-

1920); Proceedings, 1916., 3-4; 1917., 1-4; 1918.. 1-4; 1019., 1-4. (1916-

1920) .

642 DONATIONS AND EXCHANGES.

Lyon.

SociETE BoTANiQUE DE Lyon. — Annales, xl. (1915-1918), (1920).

Madrid.

Real Sociedad Espanola de Historia Natural. — Boletin, xix., 7-8; xx., 1-4
(1919-1920); Memorias, xi., 2-3 (1919).

Manchester.

CoNciiOLOGiCAL Society op Great Britain and Ireland. — Journal of Conch-
ology, xiii., 1-12 (T.p. & e. ) ; xiv., 1-12 (T.p. & c. ) ; x\-., 1-10 (T.p. &
c); xvi., 1-4 (1910-1920).

University or Manchester, Manchester Museum. — Museum Publication,
Nos. 82, 83 (1919).

Manila, P.I.

Bureau of Forestry. — Annujrt Report of the Director of Forestry of the

Philippine Islands for the year ended December 31st, 1918 (1919).
Bureau or Science op the Government op the Philippine Islands. — ■

Philippine .Journal of Science, xiv., 5-6 (T.p. & c); xv., 1-6; xvi., 1-5

(1919-1920).

Marseilles.

Faculte des Sciences de Marseille. — Annales, xxii., 1-4; xxiii., 1-4; ixiv.,

1-2 (1913-1917).
Musee d'Histoire Naturelle. — Annales, rvi. (1917).

Massachusetts.

Tufts College.— Tufts College Studies, iv., 7-8; v., 1 (1918-1919).

Melbourne.

Australian Journal of Pharmacy, xxxiv., Nos. 407-408; New Series, i.,

1-10 (1919-1920). From the Publisher.
Commonwealth Bureau of Census and Statistics. — Official Year Book of

the Commonwealth of Australia. No. 12 (1919).
Commonwealth Institute of Science and Industry. — Bulletin, Nos. 16,

18 (1919-1920) ; "Science and Industry," i., 7-8; ii., 1-9 (1919-1920) .
Department of Agriculture of Victoria. — Journal, xvii., 11-12; x\'iii., 1-7

(1919-1920).
Field Naturalists' Club op Victoria. — "Victoi-ian Naturalist," xxxvi., 8-12

(T.p. & c.) ; xxxvii., 1-7 (1919-1920) .
RoYAi, Australasian Ornithologists' Union. — "The Emu," xix., 3-4 (T.p.

<x c); XX., 1 (1920).
Royal Society op Victoria. — Annual Report of the Council for the year

1919 (1920); Proceedings, N.S. xxxii., 1-2 (T.p. & c.) (1919-1920).
University op Melbourne. — Calendar, 1920 (1919).

Mexico.

Instituto Geolot.k'o de Mexico.— Anales, Nos. ti, 7, 8 (1919-1920); Boletin,
Nos. 18, 10 (1919).

Milwaukee.

Public Museum.- Bulletin, i., 1-4 (T.p. & e.); ii., 1-2; iii.. No. 1 (1910-
20).

DONATIONS AND P:XCHANGES. 643

Modena.

La Nuova NOTARISU. — From the Editor, Vr. G. B. De Toni, Ser. xxviii.,
Genn.-Apr. ; Lugl.-Ott. (1917) ; xxxi., Genu.. Apr.-Ott., 1920 (1920) .

Monaco.

L'lxsTiTUT OcEANOGRAPHiQUE DE MoNACO. — Bulletin, Nop. 356-362 (T.p.
& c); Nos. 363-367. (1919-1920).

New Haven, Conn.

Connecticut Academy of Arts and Sciences. — Memoirs, ' iii. ; vi. (1911,
1919); Transactions, T.p. & c. for xx. (1916); xxi., pp. 145-200, 315-
442 (1917); xxii., pp. 1-248; xxiii., pp. 1-241 (1917-1920).

New York.

American GeooraphiC-U, Society. — Geograpbioal Review, viii., 2-6 (T.p.

& e.) (1919) ; ix., 1-4; x., 1-2 (1920) .
American Museum of Natural Hi.story. — Bulletin, xxsvii. ; xxxviii. (1917-

1918); Memoirs, N.S., ii., 1-2; iii., 1 (1918); "Natural History," xx..

1-2 (1920).
New York Academy of Sciences. — Annals, xxvii., pp. 245-336 (T.p. & c.) ;

xxviii.. pp. 1-166 (1917-1919) .

Nictheroy, E. do Rio.

EscoLA Superior de Agricultura e Medicina Veterinaria. — Archivos, iii.,
1-2 (1920).

Ottawa.

Geological Survey of Canada. — Memoirs, Nos. 11 1, 114, 115 (1919). 117
(1920); Munition Resources Commission. Final Report of tlie Work
of the Commission Nov. 1915 to Mar. 1919 inclusive (1920) ; Summary
Report for 1918, Farts C, D, F. G (1919) ; 1919, Parts B, D. G (1920) .

International Institute Branch, Department of Agriculture. — Agricul-
tural Gazette of Canada, vi.. 2, 10 (1919) ; vii.. 4-9 (1920) .

Royal Society- of Canada. — List. Transactions and Proceedings, Third Series,
xiii.. Sections i.-v. (T.p. & c. complete) 1919 (1920).

Oxford.

Radclipfe Library, Oxford University Museum. — Catalogue of the Books
added during 1919 (1920) .

Palo Alto, Cal.

Leland Stanford .Junior University. — Publications (Trustees' Series), Nos.
32-33 (1917-1918); (University Series), Nos. 30-35 (1918-1919); Uni-
versity Bulletin, Third Series, No. 1 (1918).

Paris.

Journal de Conchyliologie, Ixiv., 3-4 (1919-1920).

Museum National d'Histoire Natcrelle. — Bulletin, Annee 1917, Nos. 2-7

(T.p. & c); 1918, 1-7 (T.p. & c.) ; 1919, 1-3 (1917-1919); Catalogaie

des Coleoptere de la Region Malgache (1917) .

644 DONATIONS AND EXCHANGES.

SociETE Ektomologique de France. — Bulletin, 1919, Nos. 15-21 (1919) ;

1920, 1-4, (Supplement 1920), 5-14 (1920).
SociETE ZoOLOGiQUE DE Frakce. — Bulletin, .\lii. (1917); Memoirs, xxvii.

(1918).

Pavia.

IxsTiTi'TO BoTANico dell'Universita de Pavia. — Atti, Serie ii., xvi. (1916) ;
xvii.. 1-5 (1920) .

Perth.

Geological Survey of Western Australia. — Annual Progress Report for
the year 1918 (1919) ; 1919 (1920) ; Bulletin, No. 75 (1917) .

Government Statistician, Western Australia. — Quarterly Statistical Ab-
stract, Nos. 216-218 (1920).

Royal Society of Western Australia. — Journal and Proceedings, v. (1918-
1919); vi., 1 (1920).

Philadelphia.

Academy op Natural Sciences. — Entomological News, and Proceedings of
the Entomological Section of the Academy of Natural Sciences, xxx.,
8-10 (T.p. & c); xxxi.. 1-8 (1919-1920); Proceedings. Ixx.. 3 (T.p.
&c.); Ixxi., 1 (1919).

American Philosophical Society. — Proceedings, Ivii., 7 (T.p. & c): Iviii.,
1-5, 7, T.p. & c. (1918-1919).

WiSTAR Institute op An.\tomy and Biology. — Journal of Experimental
Zoology, XXX., 1-4 (T.p. & c); xxxi., 1-2 (1920); Journal of Mor-
phologj-, xxxiii., 1-2 (T.p. & c); xxxiv., 1, 2 (1919-1920).

ZooLOr.icAL Society of Philadelphia. — Forty-eighth Annual Report of the
Board of Directors, 1919 (1920) .

Plymouth.

Marine Biological Association of the United Kingdom. — Journal, N.S.,
xii., 2 (.July. 1920).

Portici.

Laboratorio di Zoologia Generale e Agraria della R. Scuola Super-
lORE d'Agricoltura. — BoUetino, xiii. (1919) .

Pusa.

Agricultural Research Instituti-,. — Memoii-s of the Department of Agri-
culture in India — Botanical Series, T.p. & c. for ix.; x., 2-5 (1919);
Entomological Series. Bulletin, Nos. 90 (1919), 92, 95 (1920); v., 5-6;
vii., 1-2 (1920) ; Report on the Progress of Agriculture in India, 1918-
1919. 0920); Scientific Reports for the year 1918-1919 (1919).

Richmond, N.S.W.

Hawkesbury Agricultural College. — H.A.C. Journal, xvi., 12; xvii., 1-9
(1919-1920).

Rio de Janeiro.

Instituto Oswaldo Cruz. — Memoria.«;, T.p. & c. for viii.. x.; xi.. 1 (1919).
MusEU Nacional do Rio de Janeiro. — Relatorio (Prof. Bruno Lobo), Anno
de 1919 (1920).

DONATIONS AND EXCHANGES. 645

Riverside, CaL

Graduate School of Tropical Agriculture, and Citrus Experiment Sta-
tion (College of Agriculture, University of California). — 10 Reprints,
Papers 54-59, 61, 63, 65, 68 and 3 Publications (Agricultural Sciences,
Vol. 2., 4; 4., 3 and Entomology, Vol. 3.. 1) (1919-1920) .

San Francisco.

Calitoknia Academy of Sciences. — Proceedings, Fourth Series, ii., Pt.
ii., Nos. 13-16 (1919); vii., (T.p. & c); viii.. 5-9 (1917-1919); ix., 1-8
(1919) .

Sao Paulo.

MusEU Paulista. — Revista, viii. (1911); xi. (1919); and one Reprint from
xi., (p. 579 to end) (1919).

Spokane.

Department of Aoriculture : Laboratory of Forest Pathology. — Re-
prints (7) from the Journal of Agricidtural Research, ii., 2; iv., 1, 3, 4;
vi., 8; X., 2; xii., 11 (1914-1918) .—Reprint from "Mytologia," xi., 2
(1919). — Reprints (2) from "Phv-topathology." iv., 5; viii., 2 (1914,
1918).— U.S. Department of Agriculture, Bulletin. Nos. 212, 658, 722,
799 (1915-1919).

Stockholm.

Entomologiska Foreningen i Stockholm. — Entomologisk Tidskrift, si., 1,
2-4 (1919).

Sydney.

Australian Museum. — Annual Report, 1918-1919 (1919); Records, xii., 12;

xiii., 1-2 (1919-1920).
Botanic Gardens and Domains. — Annual Report for 1918 (1920); Critical

Revision of the Genus Eucalyptus, iv., 9-10 (T.p. & c); v., 1-3 (1919-

1920). By J. H. Maiden, Government Botanist, &c.
Bureau of Statistics. — Official Year Book of New South Wales, 1918, 8-18,

Index (1919-1920) ; 1919, 1-8 (1920) ; Statesman's Year Book 1919.
Department of Agriculture, N.S.W. — Agricultural Gazette of New South

Wales. XXX., 12 (T.p. & c); xxxi., 1-11 (1919-1920); Science Bulletin,

No. 17 (1920).
Department of Mines. — Annual Reports for years 1917, 1919 (1918, 1920) ;

Mineral Resources, No. 29 (1919).
Department op Public Health. — Report of the Director-General for the

Y^ear 1918 (1920) .
Education Department. — Education Gazette of New South Wales, xiii., 12

(T.p. & c); xiv., 2-11; and two Supplements. (1919-1920).
Education Department: Teachers' College. — Records of the Education

Society. No. 41 (1919) ; Teaeher.s' College Calendar, 1920 (1920) .
Education Department: Technical Education Branch. — Annual Report

1918 (1919) ; Technical Gazette of N.S.W., x., pt. 1 (1920) .
Forestry Commission op New South Wales. — Annual Report of the Fores-
try Commission for year ended 30th .Tune. 1920 (1920); Australian

Forestry Journal, ii., 12; iii., 1-10 (1919-1920) ; Bulletin No. 14 "Botany

646 DONATIONS AND EXCHANGES.

of the Pilliga Scrub, N.S.W." (1920); "Forest Flora of N.S.W." By
J. H. Maiden, Government Botanist, &c., vii., 3 (1920); Report, 1918-
1919 (1920).

New South Wales Naturalists' Society. — "Australian Naturalist," iv.,
8-12 (1919-1920).

Public Libeaky of New South Wales. — Reports of the Trustees for the
Years 1918, 1919 (1920) .

Royal Society of New South Wales. — Journal and Proceedings, liii., 1919
(1919) .

Royal Zoological Society of New Southt Wales. — "Australian Zoologist,"
i., 7-8 (1919-1920) .

"Scientific Austr.\lian," xxv., 2-4; xxvi., 1 (1919-1920). From the Pub-
lisher {Peter G. Tait) .

State Fisheeies, Chief Secretary's Department. — Annual Report for
Year 1918 (1919) .

Taihoku, Formosa.

Bureau op Forestry Industries, Government op Formosa. — Icones Plan-
tarum Formosanarum, ix. (1920) .

Tokyo.

College op Science, Imperial University op Tokyo. — Journal, xxsix., 6,
10, 11 (T.p. & c); si., (T.p. & c); xli., 4-6; xliii., 1-li (1917-1920).

Tokyo Zoological Society. — Annotationes Zoologieae Japonenses, ix., 5
(1920) .

Toronto.

Royal Canadian Institute. — Transactions, xii., 2 (1920).

Tring, Herts.

ZooLOuiCAL Museum. — Novitates Zoologicae, xxvi., 2-3 (T.p. & c); xxvii.,
1 (1920).

Trondhjem.

Kongelige Noiiske Videnskabers SelsiuAB. — Aarsberetning for 191G, 1917
(1917-1918); Skrifter, 1916, Vols, i., ii. (1916-1917); 1917 (1920).

Tucson.

Desert Laboratory; Department op Botanical Research (Carnegie Insti-
tution of Washington) . — 7 Reprints and 3 Annual Reports (1915, 1918,
1919), (1915-1920).

Tunis.

Institut Pasteur de Tunis. — Archives, xi., 2-3 (1919-1920).

Turin.

MusEO de Zoologia etc., della R. Universita di Torino. — BoUetino. sxx.,

Nos. 692-707; .xxxi., 708-717; xxxii., 718-724; xxxiii., 725-730 (101.5-
1918) .

Upsala.

The University of Upsala. — Bulletin of the Geological Institution, xvi.
(1909).

DONATIONS AND EXCHANGES. 647

Urbana, 111.

University op Illinois. — Illinois Biological Monographs, iv., 1-3 (1917-1918).

Vienna.

K.K. Naturhistorische Hofmuseum. — Annalen, xxviii., 1-4; xxix., 1-4;
XXX., 1-4; xxsi., 1-4; xxxii., 1-4; xxxiii. (1914-1920).

Washington.

Bureau of American Ethnology. — Bulletin, Nos. 59, 60, part i., 64, 65, 69,
70 (W18-1919) ; Thirty-second Annual Report, 1910-1911 (1918) ; Thirty-
third Annual Report, 1911-1912 (1919) .

National Academy or Sciences. — Bulletin of the National Research Council,
i., pt. 1, No. 1 (1919) ; Proceedings, v., 10-12 (1919) ; vi., 1-7 (1920).

Smithsonian Institution. — Annual Report, 1916-1917 (1919) .

U.S. Department of Agriculture. — Bulletin, Nos. 737, 746, 796, 804, 805,
807, 808, 809, 812, 833, 834, 838, 841, 875, 893 (1919-1920) ; Department
Circular, No. 79 (1920); Entomological Reprints (10) from the Journal
of Agricultural Research, iii., 5 (1915) ; xv., 3 (1918) ; xviii., 3, 6, 8
(two), 9 (three) ; xix., 1 (1920) ; Farmers' Bulletin, Nos. 650. 675, 739.
801, 1061, 1070, 1074, 1076, 1086, 1094, 1101, 1104 (1919-1920) ; Report
of the Entomologist, 1918-1919 (1919) ; Year Book, 1919 (1920) .

U.S. Geological Survey.— Bulletin, Nos. 640 K-L, 641 J, L, 656, 658, 660
C, 661 B-G, 662-672, 676-8, 681 (2), 683-5, 687-8, 690, Pt. 1 (T.p. &
c), 090 E, 691 D-G, I-M, 692-4, 696, 698-9, 710 A-E, 711 A-D (1917-20) ;
Mineral Resources, 1915, i., 11, 15-18, 21, 23, 26, 28; ii., 18, 25, 27, 28,
30, 31; 1916, i., 1, 1 A, 4, 6-8, 10, 13, 20, 24-27; ii., 1, 2, 6, 8, 13, 14, 17,
18, 20, 21, 23, 29, 35; 1917, i., 1 A-B, 4, 6-8, 10-20, 22; ii., 3, 4, 9-19,
22-35; 1918, i., 1-9, 11, 12, 21, 23, 24; ii., 1-13. 15 (1916-1920); Pre-
liminary Report for 1918 (1919); Professional Papers, 101, 104, 107,
108 A, B, E, K, 109-10, 112-115, 117, 120 G, I, 125 A-C (1917-1920) ;
Water Supply Papers, 389, 390 (two), 402-4, 406-15, 417-424, 425 B-E,
426-436, 438, 440-3, 446, 450 A-B, 454-5, 457, 485 (1916-1920) .

U.S. National Museum. — Annual Report for Year ending June 30th, 1919
(1920); Bulletin, Nos. 50, pt. viii.; 100, Vol. 3; 103 (1919): 108
(1920); 110 (1920); Contributions from the U.S. National Herbarium,
XX., 8-9 (1920) ; xxi., (complete) (1919) ; xxii., 1-2 (1920) ; Proceedings,
liv. (1919).

Wellington, N.Z.

Department of Mines; Nevt Zealand Geological Survey.— Bulletin, Nos.

21, 22, Ft. 1 (1919-20) ; Reprints (6) from New Zealand Journal of

Science and Technology, ii., 1, pp. 33-35, 43-50; ii., 2, pp. 112-120; ii.,

3, pp. 198-209; ii., 6, pp. 380-392, 393-399 (1919).
New Zealand Board of Science and Art. — N.Z. Journal of Science and

Technology, ii., 6 (T.p. & c. ) ; iii., 1-2 (1919-1920) .
New Zealand Institute. — Transactions and Proceedings, Iii. (1920) .

private donors (and authors, unless otherwise stated') .
Bonaparte, Le Prince. Paris.— "Notes Pteridologiques." Ease. viii. (1919) .
Dehaut, E. G.— "Contributions a I'Etude de la Vie Vertebree Insulaire dans

la Region Mediterraneenne Occidentale et particulierement en Sardaigne

et en Corse (1920).

648 DONATIONS AND EXCHANGES.

DixsON, T. Storie, M.B., Ch.M., Sydney, (donor).— "Plantae Medicinales."
3 Volumes. By Mees v. Esenbeck. 1828.

Froggatt, W. W., F.L.S., Sydney. — Department of Apiculture. Entomol-
ogieal Branch, Misoellaneou.s Publications, Nos. 2057, 2065, 2069, 2075,
2182, 2192, 2195, 2231, 2235, 2240, 2248.

Guppv, H. B. — One Reprint, "Fossil Botany in the We.stern World: An Ap-
preciation." (Amer. Journ. Sei., xlix., May, 1920.)

Haswbll, Professor W. A., Sydney (donor). — (1) "Historia Naturalis et
Medica Latorum Lumbrieorum intra Hominem et alia Animalia."" By
Danielis Clerici, M.D. (Geneva, 1715) . (2) "Beitrage zur Kenntniss der
Niedern Thiere." By Karl Ernst v. Baer. (3) "Bopyro et Nereide Com-
mcntationes Anatoiuico-Physiologicae Duae." By Henrici Rathke. (Riga,
1837). (4) "Aniinalibus Quibusdam e ("lasso Verinium Linnaeana in
Circumnavigatione Terrae auspicante Comite N. Romanzoff Duce Ottone
de Kotzebue." Annie 1815, 1816, 1817, 1818. Peracta. By Adelbertus
de Chamisso. (Berlin. 1819) .

Janet, C, Paris. —Two Pamphlets, (1) "Sur la Phylogene.se de I'Ortho-
bionte," (Limoges, 1916) . (2) ''Sur le Botnjdiiim (jrauulatum,'' (Lim-
oges, 1918) .

Lord, C. E., Hobart. — Three Reprints: "Studies of Tasmanian Cetacea."
Parts iii.-iv. "Studies in Tasmanian Mammals, Living and Extinct."
No. 1. (1920).

Lord, C. E.. and Scott, H. H., Hobart. — Two Reprints; "Studies in Tas-
manian Mammals, Living and Extinct.' Nos. 1-2 (Papers and Proc.
Roy. Soc. Tasmania, 1920).

Mjoberg, Dr. E., Stockholm (donor). — Eleven Reprints of Papers, entitled
"Results of Dr. Mjoberg's Swedish Scientific Expeditions to Australia,
1910-13." By various authors. (K. Sv. Vetenskaps Akad., Arkiv for
Zoologie, x.-xi. ; xii., 15; xiii., 2 & 8; Handlingar, lix.. 4; Ix., 4 (1916-
1920).

OSEORN, Professor T. G. B., One Reprint; "Some Observntions on the Tuber
of Phi/Uoglossum." (Ann. Bot., xxxiii., Oct. 1919).

Sloane, T. G. (donor). — "Genera Insectorum." Fascicule 82. Coleoptera-
Coleoptera adephaga. By von Dr. Walther Horn (1915).

Smith, Dr. R. Greig, Sydney (donor). — County of Northumberland, Edu-
cation Committee County Agricultural Experiment Station, Cockle Park
—Bulletin, Nos. 22-24, 2"7, 29, 31, 32 (1915-1920) .—"Chemical Engineer-
ing and Mining Review," x., Nos. 109, (Index to ix.). Ill, 115-121
(1917-1918); xi., Nos. 122-132 (1918-1919); xii.. Nos. 133-135, 137,
138 (1919-1920).— Dove Marine Laboratory, Cullercoats, Northumber-
land. Report for year ending .June 30th 1919. N.S., No. viii. (1919).
— Papers and Proceedings of the Royal Society of Tasmania for the
years 1911, 1917, 1919; Annual Report of the Royal Society of Ta.«Biania
for the year 1911.

Vettch, R., "b.Sc, F.E.S.. Fiji.— Agricultural Report No. 4, of the Colonial
Sug.ir Refining Co., Ltd.. Fiji ("The Cane Beetle Borer in Fiji"') . (Syd-
ney, 1919).

649

LIST OF MEMBERS, 1920.
Ordinary Members.

1905 Allen, Edmund, c/o Resident Engineer, Yeulba, Queensland.

1906 Anderson, Charles, M-A., D.Sc, Australian Museum, College St., Sydney.

1899 Andrews, Ernest Clayton, B.A., F.G.S., Geological Survey, Department of

Mines, Sydney.

1912 Aurousseau, Marcel, B.Sc, c/o Geo-Physical Laboratory, Carnegie Institution

of Washington, Washington, D.C., US. A.

1913 Badham, Charles, B-Sc, M.B., Kendall, N.S.W.

1888 Baker, Richard, Thomas, F.L.S., Technological Museum, Sydney.

1919 Barnett, Marcus Stanley, c/o Colonial Sugar Refining Co., Ltd., O'Connell

Street, Sydney.

1907 Benson, Professor Wilham Noel, B.A., D.Sc, F.G.S., University of Otago,

Dunedin, N.Z.

1911 Bickford, Ernest I., F.L.S., "Locksley," Greville Street, Randwick.

1920 Blakely, William Paris, Botanic Gardens, Sydney.

1912 Breakwell, Ernest, B.A., B.Sc, Botanic Gardens, Sydney.

1914 Bretnall, Reginald Wheeler, Australian Museum, College Street, Sydney.
1912 Brewster, Miss Agnes. Girls' High School, Sydney.

1900 Broelemann, Henry W., Boite 22, a Pau (Basses-Pyrenees), France.

1919 Broughton, Miss Eileen Marjorie, B.Sc, "Riverview," Glenfield, N.S.W.

1911 Browne, Wilham Rowan, B.Sc, Geology Dept., University of Sydney

1920 Burkitt, Arthur Neville St. George Handcock, M.B., B.Sc, Medical School,

University of Sydney.
1910 Burrell. Harrv. 19 Doncaster Avenue, Kensington.
1910 Burrell, Mrs. Harry, 19 Doncaster Avenue, Kensington.

1912 Cadell. Miss Myall, "Bohemia," Ci-emome Road, Cremorne.
1899 Cambage, Richard Hind, L.S.. F.L.S., Park Road, Burwood.

1901 Campbell, John Honevford. M.B.E.. Royal Mint, Sydney.
1899 Carne, Toseph Edmund, F.G.S., Beecroft Road, Beecroft.

1905 Carne, Walter Mervyn. Hawkesbury Agricultural College, Richmond, N.S.W.
1890 Carson, Duncan, c/- Winchcombe, Carson, Ltd., Bridge St., Sydney.

1903 Carter, H. J., B.A., F.Ei.S., "Garrawillah," Kintore St., Wahroonga.

1912 Cayzer, Albert, B,Sc.. University of Queensland, Brisbane, Q.

1904 Chapman, Professor Henry G., M.D., B.S., Medical School, University of

Sydney.

1899 Cheel, Edwin, Botanic Gardens, Sydney.

1920 Clarke, Harry Flockton, c/o Colonial Sugar Refining Co., Ltd., O'Connell St.,

Svdney .
1901 Cleland, Professor John Burton, M.D.. Ch.M., The University, Adelaide, S.A.
1916 CoUins, Miss Marjorie Lsabel, B.Sc, Havilah St., Chatswood.

1908 Cotton, Leo Arthur, M.A., D.Sc, Geologv Dept., University of Sydney.

1900 Crago, W. H., M.D., 185 Macquarie Street, Sydney.

1913 Crouch, Miss Naomi, Hereford House, Glebe Point Road. Glebe.

650 LIST OF MEMBERS, 1920.

1920 Danes, Dr. Jiri Victor, Consul-General of the Czechoslovak Republic, 40 Bays-
water Road, Darlinghurst.

1885 David, Sir Tannatt William Edgeworth, K.B.E.. C.M.G., D.S.O., B.A., D.Sc,

F.R.S., Universitj- of Sydnev.
1883 Deaiie, Henry, M.A., F.L.S., -Sl.Inst.C.E., "Campsie." 14 Mercer Road, Mal-
vern, Melbourne, Victoria.

1916 Deer Miss Margaret, B.A., B.Sc. Montana Flats, Cremorne.

1913 Dixon, Jacob Robert L., M.R.C.S., L.R.C.P., Medical School, University of

Svdney.
1887 Dixson, Hugh, J. P., 100 The Strand, Sydney.
1881 Dixson, Thonias Storie, M.B., Ch.M., 215 Macquarie Street, Sydney.

1918 Dodd, Frederick Parkhurst, Kuranda, North Queensland.
1894 Dun, William S., Department of Mines, Sydney.

1920 Dwyer, Rt. Rev. Joseph Wilfrid, Bishop of Wagga, Wagga Wagga, N.S.W.

1920 Elston, Albert H.. F.E.S., 50 Lef-vre Terrace. North Adelaide, S.A.

1914 Enrigh't, Walter John. B.A., West Maitland, N.S.W.

1908 Ferguson, Eustace William, M.B., Ch.M., Bureau of Microbiology, Macquarie
Street, Svdney.

1919 Ferriss, Clarence Victor, B.Sc, "Hedera," Beauchamp Road. Matraville.
1908 Finckh, H. E., "Hermes," 100 Raglan Street. Mosman.

1881 Fletcher, Joseph J.. M.A., B.Sc, Woolwich Road, Woolwich.

1908 Flynn, Professor Theodore Thomson, B.Sc, University of Tasmania, Hobart.

tas.

1920 Friend, Norman Bartlett, 42 Pile Street, Dulwich Hill.

1911 Froggatt, John Lewis, B.Sc, Dept. of Agriculture, Brisbane.

1886 Froggatt, Walter W.. F.L.S., Agricultural Museum, George St. North, Sydney.
1920 Furst, Henbert Charles, Lin wood Avenue, Killara.

1915 Gilder, Percy George, c/- Sydney Morning Herald, Pitt St., Sydney.

1918 Gillies, Clvde Douglas, M.Sc, 61 Wellington Street, Windsor, Victoria.

1912 Goldfinch,' Gilbert M., "Lvndhurst," Salisbury Road, Rose Bay.
1899 Grant, Robert. 24 Edward Street, Woollahra.

1911 Greenwood, William Frederick Neville, c/- Colonial Sugar Refining Co., Ltd..
Lautoka, Fiji.

1910 Griffiths, Edward, B.Sc, Dept. of Agriculture, 136 Lower George St., Svdnev.
1901 Gurney, William B., F.E.S.. Dept. of Agriculture, George St. North, Sydney.

1911 Hacker, Henrv, Queensland Museum, Bowen Park, Brisbane, Q.

1909 Hall, E. Cuth'bert. M.D., Ch.M.. George Street. Parramatta.

1919 Hall. Leslie Lionel. Kareela Road. Cremorne.

1897 Halligan. Gerald H., P.G.S., Avenue Road, Hunter's Hill.

1909 Hallmann, Edward Francis, B.Sc, 75 Hereford Street. Fore,st Lodge.

1915 Hamblin. Charles Oswald. B.Sc, "Glengarth," 51 West Street, Petersham.

1899 Hamilton. Arthur Andrew. Botanic Garden.s. Sydney.

1885 Hamilton. Alexander G., "Tanandra," Hercules Street, Chatswood.

1917 Hardy, G. H. Hurlestone.

1905 Harrison, Launcelot, B.Sc, Zoologv Dept.. Universitv of Svdnev.

1879 Haswell, Profes.sor William Aitcheson. M..^.. D.Sc. F.R.S., "Mimihau,"

Woollahra Point.
1911 Haviland, The Venerable Archdeacon F. E.. The Rectory, Coonamble,

N.S.W.
1891 Hedley. Charles, F.L.S.. Australian Museum. College St., Svdnev.

1920 Henry, Marguerite, B.Sc, "Derwent," Oxford St., Epping.

1909 Henry, Max, D.S.O., M.R.C.V.S.. B.V.Sc. Coram Cottage, Essex Street,
Epping .

1913 Hill, Gerald F., F.E.S.. c/- Australian Institute of Tropical Medicine, Towns-

ville, Queensland.

LIST OP MEMBERS, 1920. 651

]892 Hill, Professor James P.. D.Sc, F.L.S., University College, Gower Street,

London, W.C, England.
1916 Hinder, Miss Eleanor Marv, B.Sc, "Satichie," Clifford Street, Mosman.

1916 Hindmarsh. Miss Ellen Margaret, B.Sc, Medical School, The University of

Sydney .

1918 Hopson, John, Jr., "Dalkeith," Eccleston, N.S.W.
1907 Hull, A. F. Basset, Bo.\ 704, G.P.O., Sydney.

1892 Hynes, Miss Sarah, B.A., "Isis," Soudan Street, Rand wick.

1920 Ick-Hewins, Edwin Theophilus Jesse. M.B., B.S., Dunedoo, N.S.W.
1912 Irby, Llewellyn George. Forest Branch, Lands Dept., Hobart, Tasmania.

1912 Jackson, Sidney William, M.R.A.O.U., Belltrees, via Scone, N.S.W.

1917 Jacobs, Ernest G., "Maranta," Henry Street, Ashfield.

1903 Jensen, Harald Ingemann, D.Sc, Queensland Geological Survey, George St.,

Brisbane, Q.
1899 Johnston, Professor Stephen Jason, B.A., D.Sc, Zoology Dept., University

of Sydney.
1907 Johnston, Professor Thomas Harvey, M.A., D.Sc, University of Queensland,

Brisbane, Q.

1907 Kaleski, Robert. "The Hill." Liverpool, N.S.W.

1906 Laseron, Charles Francis, Technological Museum, Sydney.

1913 Lawson, Professor A. Anstruther, D.Sc, F.R.S.E., Botany Dept., University

of Sydnev.
1S92 Lea, Arthur .M., F.E.S., 241 Young Street, Unley, Adelaide, S.A.
1915 Le Plastrier, Miss Constance Emilv Marv, "Carinyah," Provincial Road. Lind-

field.

1910 Le Souef, A. S., C.M.Z.S., Zoological Gardens, Taronga Park, Mosman.

1911 Longman, Heber A., Queensland Museum, Bowen Park, Brisbane, Q.
1891 Lower, Oswald B., F.E.S., Bartley Crescent, Wayville, S.A.

1893 Lucas, A. H. S., M.A., B.Sc, Sydney Grammar School, College St., Sydney.

1919 McCarthy, T., Bertram Street, Mortlake.

1907 McCulloch, Allan R., Austrahan Museum, College Street, Sydney.
1907 McDonnough, Thomas, L.S., "Iluka," Hamilton Street, Randwick.

1917 McKeown, Keith CoUingwood, Office of the Water Conser\-ation and Irriga-
tion Commission, Leeton. N.S.W.

1911 Mackinnon. Ewen. B.Sc, Commonwealth Institute of Science and Industry,

391 Bourke St., Melbourne.

1883 Maiden, J. Henry, I.S.O., F.R.S., F.L.S., F.C.S.. Botanic Gardens, Sydney.
1905 Mawson, Sir Douglas, B.E.. D.Sc, The Universitv, Adelaide, S.A.

1902 May, W. L., Forest Hill. Sandford. Tasmania.

1884 Mitchell John, 10 High Street, Waratah, N.S.W.

1904 Murdoch. R., Wanganui, New Zealand.

1920 Musgrave. Anthony, Australian Museum, College St., Sydney.
1888 Musson, Charles T.. "Kia-ora," Nelson Street, Gordon.

1913 Newman. Le.slie John William, "Walthamstowe," Bernard St Claremont

Perth. W.A.
1920 Noble, Robert Jackson. B.Sc, Agr., "Arleston." Wallace St., Burwood.

1912 North, David Sutherland, c/- Colonial Sugar Refining Co.. Ltd., O'Connell St.,

Sydney.

1912 O'Callaghan, M. A., Dairy Branch, Dept. of Agriculture, 140 George Street

North, Sydney.
1920 O'Dwyer. Margaret Helena, Copeland St.. Beecroft.
1910 Oliver, W. Reginald B., Dominion Museum, Wellington, N.Z.

652 LIST OP MEMBERS, 1920.

1904 Petrie, James Matthew, D.Sc, F.l.C, Medical School, University of Sydney.
1920 Pincombe, Torrington Hawke, B.A., Public School, Mayfield, WarataJi,

N.S.W.
1916 Pinkerton, Miss Ethel Corry, B.Sc, Ashford Street, Ashfield.

1908 Playfair, George Israel, Queensland Hotel, Lismore, N.S.W.

1902 Potts, Henrv William, F.C.S., F.L.S., Hawkesbury Agricultural College,
Richmond,' N.S.W.

1918 Priestley, Henry, M.D., B.Sc. Medical School, University of Sydney.

1910 Pulleine, Robert Henry, M.B., 3 North Terrace, Adelaide, S.A.

1906 Rodway, Leonard, C.M.G., Government Botanist, Macquarie St., Hobart, Tas.

1919 Scammell, George Vance, 18 Middle Head Road, Mosman.
1918 Sherrie, Miss Heather, B.Sc., Ben Boyd Road, Neutral Bay.

1911 Shirley, John, D.Sc, Queensland Museum, Brisbane, Q.
1887 Sloane, Thomas G., Moorilla, Young. N.S.W.

1899 Smith, Charles Walter. M.Inst.C.E., 336 Miller Street, North Sydney.

1909 Smith, G. P. Darnell, D.Sc, F.l.C, F.C.S., Agricultural Museum, George

St. North, Sydney.

1899 Smith, Henry George, F.C.S., Technological Museum, Sydney.
1898 Smith, R. Greig, D.Sc, Linnean Hall, Elizabeth Bay.

1916 Smith, Miss Vera Irwin. B.Sc, "Cora Lynn." Point Road, Woolwich.

1898 Stead, David G., "Boongarre," Pacific St., Watson's Bay.

1886 Steel. Thomas. "Rock Bank." Stephen Street, Pennant Hills.

1905 Stokes. Edward Sutherland, M.B., Ch.M.. Dept. of Water Supply and Sewer-

age, 341 Pitt Street, Sydney.
1911 Sulman, Miss Florence, "Burrangong," McMahon's Point.
1904 Sussmilch, C. A., F.G.S., Technical College, Newcastle, N.S.W.

1920 Taylor, Augustus Selwyn, Geological Survey of N.S.W., Sydnev.

1907 Taylor, Frank H., c/- Box 137. G.P.O.. Sydney.

1920 Tebbutt, Arthur Hamilton. M.B.. 18.5 Macquarie Street. Svdnev.

1916 Tilley, Cecil Edgar, B.Sc, Geology Dept., University of Sydney.

1904 Tillyard, Robin John, D.Sc, M.A., P.L.S, F.E.S., Cawthron Institute,

Nelson, New Zealand.
1902 Turner, A. Jefferis, M.D.. F.E.S., Wickham Terrace. Brisbane, Q.

1891 Turner, Fred., F.L.S., F.R.H.S.. "Oakhurst," Chatswood.

1904 Turner, Rowland E., F.E.S., F.Z.S., c/- Standard Bank of S. Africa.
Capetown.

1917 Veitch. Robert, B.Sc. c/- Colonial Sugar Refining Co., Ltd., Lautoka Mill.

Lautoka, Fiji.

1900 Walker, Commander John James. M.A., F.L.S., F.E.S.. R.N.. "Aorangi,"

Lonsdale Road, Summertown, Oxford, England.

1909 Walkom, Arthur Bache. D.Sc, Linnean Hall, Elizabeth Bav.

1911 Waxdlaw, Henry Sloane Halcro, D.Sc. Phy.siology Dept.. University of

Sydney.
1897 Waterhouse, Gustavus Athol, B.Sc, B.E.. F.E.S., Royal Mint, Macquarie

St., Sydney.
1911 Watt. Professor Robert Dickie, M.A.. B.Sc. Univer.sitv of Sydney.
1916 Welch, William. F.R.G.S., "Roto-iti." Bovie Street, Mosman.
1916 White, Cvril Tenison. 101 Main Street. Kangaroo Point. Brisbane Q.

1910 White, Henry Luke, Belltrees. Soone. N.S.W.

1892 Wilson, Professor James T., M.B.. Ch.M.. F.R.S., Department of Anatomy,

The New Museums, Cambridg-e, England.
Jmn Woolnough^ Walter George, D.Sc, F.G.S., University of Svdnev.
1910 Wymark, Frederick, 89 Castlereagh Street Svdnev

LIST OF MEMBERS, 1920. 653

HoNOKARY Members.
1897 De Toni, Dr. G. B.. R. Orto Botanico di Modena. Italy.

Corresponding Members.

1888 Bale, W. M., F.R.M.S.. 63 Walpole Street. Kew, Melbourne, Victoria.

1884 Bell, Professor F. Jeffrey, M.A., British Museum (Natural History), Crom-
well Road, London, S.W. 7.. Encrland.

1902 McAlpine, D., Government Vegetable Pathologist, Dept. of Agriculture, Mel-
bourne, Victoria.

1902 Meyrick, Edward, B.A., F.R.S., F.Z.S., Thornhanger, Marlborough, Wilts.,
England.

1888 Pearson, W. H.

1901 Raffrav, A., Consulat General de France. 6 Piazza Madama, Rome, Italy.
Sanger, E. B.

1893 Spencer, Professor Sir W. Baldwin. K.C.M.G., D.Sc. F.R.S.. The Univer-
sity, Melbourne, Victoria.

Members ELErxED Since the I.ssue op the L.^.st List (19131 Who Have

Died or Resigned.

1916 Bennett, Alfred L., "Oaklands," The Oaks, near Camden.

1913 Fry, Dene B., Northcote Rd., Lindfield. [Killed in action. 1917.1

1913 Harrison, Berkeley. Cudgera Park, Burringbar. N.S.W.

1916 Rosebv, Miss Mabel, B.A.. "Redlands," Mi'litarv Road. Neutral Bav.

1915 Stephens, Harry, B.Sc, Agr., "Erith." Citv Road, Darlington. [Killed ia

action, 1917.1

1913 Turnbull, Alex. H.. Wellington, N.Z,

191.5 Williams. Arthur W., Byron Ray, N.S.W.

(1920.)

(o) GENERAL INDEX.

Acacias, flowering branches, reversion-
shoots and seedlings, exhibited, 204.
— so-called Phyllodes of the Aus-
tralian Phyllodineous, 24.

Alexander, C. P., An undescribed
species of Clytucosmus Skuse, 183.

Amaranta macrocarpus, exhibited,
179.

Andrews, E. C, congratulations to, 7.

Anthurium Andreanum, exhibited, 204
— chelseiensis, exhibited, 204.

Apoda xi/lomeli on waratah, exhibited,
318.

Aroids, exhibited, 204.

Asilid-ae, Australian flies of the family,
185.

Asilinae, male genitalia of some rob-
berflies belonging to the sub-familv,
250.

Atrypidae of N.S.W., 266.

Australasian Association for Advance-
ment of Science, 13.

Australian Carabidae, 320 — Coleop-
tera. new species of, 375 — Delpha-
cidae, new genus of, 181 — Diptera
Brachycera, 505 — flies of the family
Asilidae, 185 — Lepidoptera, 474 —
plants, resin-seereting glands in
some, 329 — Siillidae, EusylUdae and
Autoh/tidae. 90 — Tahanidae, 460 —
Tenehrionidae, 222.

Autoh/tidae, Australian. 90.

Avian, a new, Trematode, 500.

Bag-moth (Metura rhmgata), exhibit-
ed, 318.

Bagshelter Moth, exhibited, 531.

Balance Slieet, etc., 1919. 47-50.

Benson, W. N., Dun, W. S., and
Browne, W. R.. The Geology and
Petrology of the Great Serpentine
Belt of N.S.W.. Part ix., 285. 337,
405.

Bihio imitator, exhibited, 472.

Binellia tni/loriana, exhibited, 203.

Birds trapped by Pisonia Brunoniana,
180.

Blakely, W. F., elected a member, 179
— see Exhibits.

Boree :Moth, exhibited, 531 .

Borunia ledifolia, exliibited, 473 — ledi-
folia var. rosmarinifolia, with double
flowers, exhibited, 473 — with white
flowere, exhibited, 473 — ledifolia
var. triphylla, exhibited, 473 — with
double flowers, exhibited, 473 — pin-
nata, with double flowei-s, exhibited,
473 — serrulata, var. exhil)ited, 404
— serrulata x B. floribunda. hybrid
form exhibited, 404.

Botanic Gardens, Notes from, 260.

Botany of Lord Howe Is., few notes
on, 564.

Brachiopods from Middle Palaeozoic
Rocks of N.S.W., 543— Silurian
•and Devonian, from N.S.W., ex-
hibited, 473.

Bracliyccra, Life Histories of Aus-
tralian Diptera. 505.

Brachi/scelis viiDiita on branch of
Eucahiptu.-< faliqna, exhibited, 319.

Brewster. Agnes A., see Exhibits.

Broken Hill, Technical Commission of
Inquiry into prevalence of disease
among mine-workers. 14.

Browne, W. R., see Benson, Dun and
Browne.

Buprestidae, iii'w genus and species,
222

Burkitt, A. N. St. G. H.. elected a
member, 179.

Bii.tia uatai/, seed of. with twin seed-
lings, exhibited. 319.

Butterflies, new forms of. from the
South Pacific. 468.

Caltistemoti r>ach i/ph filltts , two forms
exhibited, 221 — viminalis, two forms
exhibited. 221.

Campbell, .1. H., congratulations to,

472.

INDEX.

U.

Carabidae of Tasmania, 113 — which
raiisre beyond Australia and its de-
pendent Islands, 320.

C'arbunit'eioiis limestone fossils from
N.S.W., 364.

Carter, H. J., Notes on some new
Australian Tenebrionidae, with de-
scriptions of new species, — also of
a new genus and species of Bupres-
tidae. 222 — see Exhibits.

Ceratopetalum gummiferum, with
white Howers, exhibited, 473.

Chaetodacus tri/oni, exhibited. 203.

Chalcophoritiae, exhibited, 531.

Chapman, F., Lower Carboniferous
Limestone fossils from N.S.W., 364.

Chapman, II. G., elected a vice-presi-
dent, 179.

Chase, Eleanor E., A new Avian Tre-
matode, 500.

Cheel, E., see Exhibits.

Chemical Examination of ilacrozamia
spiralis, 424.

Chiromyzini, Revision of, 532.

Chromatism, Aroids illustrating, 204.

Chri/somi/ia bezziava, exhibited, 472 —
du.r. exhibited, 203 — flai'iceps, ex-
hibited, 472 — niqriceps, exliibited,
472— rufifaacies. exliibited. 203, 472
— varipes, exhibited, 203.

Chnisomyza aenea, exhibited. 472.

Clarke, H. P., elected a member, 179.

Cleland, .J. B., congratulations to, 7.

Clements, F. M., bequest of books
and pictures, 472 — reference to
death, 318.

Clytneosmivs, undescribed species of,
183.

Coccid galls nn Eucali/ptus saliqna,
exhibited, 319.

Cocos 1/ataii, seed of, exhibited, 319.

Coleoptera, new species of Australian,
,375.

Collins, Marjorie T., appointed Lin-
nean Macleay Fellow in Botany, 10
— Certain Variations of the Sporo-
cyst in a species of Saprnler/nia,
277 — On the structure of the resin-
secrctinsr elands in some Australian
plants, 329.

Columbn livln domestica Nematode
parasites of, in Australia, 552.

Concretion, exhibited, 404.

Cotton, L. A., congratulations to, 203
— letter returning tlianks, 221.

Crepis setosa. exhibited, 318.

Cup moth on Waratah. exhibited. 318.

Currabubula District. Geology'. Pal-
aeontolocv .nnd Petrocraphv of. 28.5,
337, 405.'

Cyanogenesis in Plants, iv., 447.
Cjiphopaslra, exhibited, 531.
Cyrioides sex-spilota, exhibited, 531 .

Danes, J. V., elected a member, 531.
David, Sir Edgcworth, cniigratulations

to. 472.
Delphacidac, Australian, new genus

of, 181.
Dental incrustations and the so-called

gold plating of sheep's teeth, 324.
Devonian Brachiopods from N.S.W.,

exhibited, 473.
Diptera Bracliyccra, Life Histories of

Australian, 505.
Dixson, T. Storie., congratulations to,

7.
Dodd, A. P., Two new Hymenoptera

of superfamily P roctotri/pidae from

Australia, 443.
Donations and Exchanges, 51, 179,
203, 221, 265, 318, 404, 472, 531.
Drought, remarks on, in Presidential

Address, 15.
Dun. W. S., see Mitchell and Dun—

see Benson. Dun, and Browne.
Dwver. .T. W.. elected a member, 179.

Elections. 47, 179, 203, 265. 318, 404,
.531.

Elston, A. H., elected a member, 179.

Epacris purpurascens. double flower-
ed, exhibited, 404.

Erigernti liii.ifoUiis. living plants ex-
hibited, 404.

Eriostemon Croirei, with white flow-
ers, exhibited, 473 — lanceolatus,
showing double flowers and deterior-
ation of stamens, exhibited, 473 —
with white flowers, exhil)ited. 473.

Etheridge. R.. .Ir.. Obituary notice, 5.

EiccaliiptHs saligna, stunted branch,
with cluster of galls, exhibited. 319.

Eupatorium qlnndulosum, exhibited,
318.

Ewprosopia puuctifacies, exhibited,
203.

EusgUidae. Australian. 90.

Exhibits:—

Blakely, W. P.. Eupatorium glati-
dulnsHin and Crepis setosa, 318 —
hybrid form, Bornnia serrulate x
B. fhribinida and variety of B.
serrulata. 404.

Brewster, Agnes A.. Eriostemon
lanceolatus showing double flow-
ers and deterioration of stamens,
473.

INDEX.

Exhibits : —

Carter, H. J., Six Australian gen-
era of Chalcophorinae, 531 —
Three closely-alhed dyphoijastra,
531 — Cyrioides sex-spilola, 531 —
New species of Stigmodera, 531
New sfenus from Port Macquarie,
531. ^

Cheel, E., Ceratopetalum gummi-
ferum with white flowers, 473 —
Double-fioweriiig peach-tree (Pru-
nu» persica var. dianthi flora).
203 — Erigeron litiifoliiis, living-
plants of, 404 — specimens of wild
strawberry, Fragraria indica, 404
— Kennedi/a ruhicunda with afreen-
ish-wliite flowers, 473 — Leaf and
fruits of Pisovia Briinoniana, 180
— rare lichen from Mt. Kosciusko,
265 — species of Boronia with
double flowers, 473 — species of
Bormiia with white flowers, 473 —
two distinct forms of CaUistemon
viminnlis. 221 — two forms of CaU
listenxin pacliuyihiiUw), 221 —
white flowerinsr Eriostemon lance-
olatiis and E. Croicei, 473.

Ferguson, E. W., imasjo .and larvae
of niuscid fly, 265.

Fletcher, .7. ,J., lenf of Jacarand-a
ovalifoUa, 204 — flowering bran-
ches, reversion shoots; and seed-
lings of Acacias, 204 — specimens
of Persoonia lucida, 531 — stunted
branch of Eucali/phift sn/i^na with
cluster of female galls, 319.

Froggatt, .1. L., Marti/)iia lutea, a
noxious weed in part-s of Queens-
land, 180.

Froggatt, W. W.. Bag Shelter or
Boree Moth ( Team contraria) ,
531 — Cup Moth {Apnda xglo-
meli) on Waratah, 318 — series of
flies from India, 472 — Bibio imi-
tator. 472 — Tobacco thrips from
the Tamworth District, 180.

Hamilton, A. A., Aroids illustr.at-
ing Chromatism, Virescence and
Multiplication of spathes, 204 —
seed of Bidin i/alnii which had
produced twin seedlings, .319.

Hardy, G. H., pair of flies, Chry-
aomgsn aenea, 472.

Hynes, Sarah., concretion, 404.

Jacol)S, E. G.. Evarris pHrpuras-
cens showing double flowers, 404.

Exhibits :—

McCulloch. A. R., collection of

fishe-s, 203.
Mitchell, J., Silurian and Devonian
brachiopods from N.S.W.. 473.

Smith, Vera Irwin, common bag
moth (Metnra elongata) ; its
method of progression on vertical
pane of glass, 318.

Steel, T., pin embedded in liver of
fowl, 318.

Taylor, F. H., sheep maggot-flies
and fruit fly pests, 203.

Turner, F., Amaratttus marcocarpus
aiid Boerhaavia diffusa from
Wootton Station, Upper Hunter,
179 — Remarks on Stipa aristi-
glumis from Liverpool Plains and
Aviaacantha muricata in Brewar-
rina District, 179-180 — specimen
of Lolium temiiletitum, 531.

Walkom, A. B., Seeds associated
with Glosgopteris, 531.

Watorhouse, G. A., First and .sec-
ond generations of crosses of
Tisiphone aheona and T. rawns-
leyi, 531 — Ileteront/mpha mirifica
and R. paradelpha reared from
larvae, 531 — Five Butterflies rear-
ed from d" Tisiphone rawnsleyi
mated with ? T. abeona. 221—
Ileterongmpha solandri reared
from egg, 472.

Ferguson, E. W., see Exhibits — and
Hill, G. F., Notes on Australian
Tabanidae, 460.

Fishes, small collection of, exhibited,
203.

Fletclier. J. .1., On the correct inter-
pretation of the so-called Phyllodes
of Australian Phyllodineous Aca-
cias, 24 — Presidential Address, 1 —
The Society's Heritage from the
Madcays. 507 — see Exhibits.

Flies, Australian, of the family Asili-
dae, 185 — from India, exhibited,
472.

Fossils, Lower Carboniferous Lime-
stone, from N.S.W., .364.

Fowl, pin embedded in liver of, ex-
hibited, 318.

Fragraria ivdica. exhibited, 404.

Friend, N. B., elected a member, 318.

Fruggatt, .T. L., see Exhibits.

INDEX.

Frogg'att, W. \V., elected a \-ice-pre-

sident, 17f) — see Exhibits.
Fiirst, H. v., elected a member, 404.

Galls oil biancli of EucaU/ptus saligna,
exhibited, 319.

Gellatly, P. M., Obituary, G.

Genitalia, male, of some robber-flies
belonging to the Asilinae, 250.

Geologv and Petrology of Great Ser-
pentine Belt of NVS.W., Part ix.,
285, 337, 405.

Glands, resin-secreting, in some Aus-
tralian plants, 329.

Glossopteris. seeds associated with, ex-
hibited, 531.

"Gold-plating" of sheep's teeth, 324.

Hamilton, A. A., Notes from the Bo-
tanic Gardens. Sydney, 260 — see
Exhibits.

, A. G., elected a vice-presi-
dent, 179.

Hardy, G. H., Australian Flies of the
Family Asiliilae, 185 — On the male
genitalia of some robber-flies be-
longing to the subfamily Asilinae,
250 — Revision of the Chiromvzini
(Diptera), 532— see Exliibits.

Haswell, W. A., Australian Syllidae,
Eiisi/Uidae and Autolytidae, 00.

Hedley, C, elected a \-ice-president,
179!

Henry, Marguerite, elected a member,
531.

Heterodendrnn. Hydrocyanic Aeid of.
447.

Heteroni/mpha mirifica. exhibited, 531
— paradelpha. exhibited, 531 — so-
londri, reared from egg, exhibited,
472.

Hill, G. F., see Ferguson and Hill.

Honour Koll, 3 — Invitation to sub-
scribe to. 170 — unveiled. 210.

Hybrid form, Bnronia serrnlatn x B.
florihimda. exhibited, 404.

Hydrocyanic acid of Heterodendron.
447. ■

Hymenoptera, Two new, of the super-
familv Prnctotn/pidae from Aus-
tralia', 443.

Hymes. j\riss S., resolution re Rowan
Collection of Paintings. 47 — see Ex-
hibits .

lek-Hewins, E. T. .7., elected a mem-
ber. 404.

Institute of Patholosical Research,
establishment of, 203.

International Research Council, pro-
posed, 11.

Jacaranda ovalifoUa, exhibited, 204.
Jacobs, E. G., see Exhibits.

Kennedya rubicunda, with gi'eenish-
white flowers, exhibited, 473.

Lea, A. M., Descriptions of new spe-
cies of Australian Coleoptera, Part
xvi., 375.

Lepidoptera, Australian, 474.

Liclien from Mt. Kosciusko, exhibited,
2(i5.

Life Histories of Australian Diptera
Brachycera, i., 505.

Linnean Macleay Fellowships, an-
nouncement, 472, 531 .

Lip(tridae, Revision of, 474.

Lolium temtilentum, exhibited, 531 .

Lord Howe Is., Notes on botany of,
564.

Lower Carboniferous Limestone Fos-
sils from N.S.W., 364.

Lucilia craggii, exhibited, 472 — fueina,
exhibited, 203 — serenissima, exhibit-
ed, 472— Solaia. exhibited, 203.

Macleay Centenary Meeting, 218 —
date announced, 179.

Macleays, The Society's Heritage from,
567."

Macrozamia spiralis, chemical exam-
ination of, 424.

Maiden, J. H., Few notes on the
Botany of Lord Howe Is., 564.

Martt/nia lutea, exhibited, 180.

McCulloeh. A. R., see Exhibits.

Members, List of, 649.

Metoponia rubriceps, 505.

Metitra elongata, exhibited, 318.

Mitchell, .1., New Brachiopods from
Middle Palaeozoic Rocks of N.S.W.,
543— see Exhibits— and Dun. W.
S., The Atriipidae of N.S.W., with
references to those recorded from
other States of Australia, 266.

Muir. F., New genus of Australian
Delphacidae, 181.

Muscid fly, imago and larvae, exhibit-
ed, 265.

Nematode Parasites of domestic
pigeon in Australia, 552.

NeopoUenia papua, exhibited, 203.

Neuropteroid Insects of Hot Springs
Region. N.Z., in relation to problem
of Trout Food, 205.

New South Wales. Lower Carbonifer-
ous Limestone Fossils from, 364 —
New Brachiopods from Middle Pal-
aeozoic Rocks. 543.

INDEX.

Noble, K. J., elected a member, 203.
Notes from the Botanic Gardens, Syd-
ney, 260.

O'Dwyer, Margaret 11.. elected a mem-
ber, 531.
Ophyra analis, esbibited, 203.

Pacific, New forms of Butterflies from
the South, 468.

Fauorpoid complex. Additions and
corrections to Part 3., 214.

Pan-Pacitic Science Congress, 265.

Parasites, Nematode, of domestic
pigeon in Australia, 552.

Peach-tree, double-flowering, exhibit-
ed, 203.

Persoania lucUla, exhibited, 531.

Petrie, J. M.. Linnean Macleay Fel-
low in Biochemistry: ("yanogenesis
in Plants, iv. The Hydrocyanic Acid
of Heterodendron, 447 — re-ajjpoint-
ed 1920-21, 10 — summary of year's
work, 8 — The chemical Examination
of Macrozamia spiralis, 424.

Pliyllodes. On the correct interpreta-
tion of so-called, of Australian
Fhyllodineous Acacias, 24.

Pigeon, Domestic, Nematode parasites
of, in Australia, 552.

Pincombe, T. H., elected a member,
179.

Pisonia Brunoniana, exhibited, 180.

Presidential Address, by J. J. Flet-
cher, 1 .

Proceedings, change of size, 7.

Priictotnipidae, Two new Hymenop-
tera of superfamily, 443.

Prntius persica var. dianthiflora, ex-
hibited, 203.

Pi/rellia naronea, exhibited, 203.

Rainbow, W. .7., Obituary notice, 5.

Resin-secreting glands in some Aus-
tralian plants, 329.

R<»vision of Australian Lepidoptera —
Liparidne. 474 — of the Chiromvzini,
532.

Pichardia nfricana. exhibited. 204 —
Elliottimia x Pentlandii, exhibited,
204.

Robber-flics, male genitalia of some.
2,50.

Roi)iness in Wiittle Bark Infusions, 52.

Rowan Collection of Painting?:. 47.

Saprolefinia. Variation.s of sporocyst

in a species of, 277.
Reeds associated with Gluf^snpteris.

exhibited, .531.

Serpentine Belt of N.S.W., Fart ix.,
285, 337, 405.

Sheep's teeth, "gold-plating" of, 324.

Silurian Brachiopods from N.S.W.,
exhibited, 473.

Sloane, T. G., Carabidae of Ta.smania.
113 — List of species of Australian
Carabidae which range beyond Aus-
tralia and its dependent Islands.
320.

Smith, R. Greig, Macleay Bacteriol-
ogist to the Society: Ropiness in
Wattle Bark Infusions, 52 — sum-
mary of year's work, 8.

Smith, Vera Irwin, Linnean Macleay
Fellow in Zoology: Life Histories of
Australian Diptera Brachycera. i .
SIratiomijiidae, 50.5 — Nematode Par-
asites of the domestic pigeon in
Australia, 552 — re-appointed 1920-
21, 10 — summary of year's work,
10 — see Exhibits.

Spathes, multiplication of, in Aroids,
204.

Sporocyst, variations of, in Saproleg-
nia, 277.

Stamens, deterioration of, in Erios-
temon lancenlatus, exhibited, 473.

Steel, T., On dental incrustations and
so-called "gold-plating" of sheep's
teeth, 324— see Exhibits.

Stephens, Harry, Obituary notice, 4.

Stifjmodera, new species, exhibited,
531.

Stratiomi/iidae, .505.

Strawberry, specimens of wild, ex-
hibited, 404.

Stuart, Professor T. P. A.. Oliituary
notice, 5.

Si/Uidar, Austr.-dian. 00.

Tabanidac, Notes on Australian. 460.

Tasmania, Carabidae of, 113.

Tavlor. A. S., dected a member, 179.

Taylor, F. H., see Exhibits.

Teara cmilraria. exhibited, 531.

Tebbutf, Dr. A. II. elected a mem-
ber. 265.

Teeth, sheep's, "gold-plating" of. 324.

Tenebrionidae, Australian, 222.

Thrips striatit.^. exhibited. 180.

Tillyard. R. .!.. Linnean Macleay Fel-
low in Zoology : Panorpoid complex.
Additions and corrections to Part
3., 214 — Report on Neuropteroid
Insects of Hot Springs Region,
N.Z.. in relation to problem of trout
food. 205 — summary of year's work,
8.

Tisipfiniir ahroiid. I'xhibited. 221 —

INDEX.

rawnslei/i, exhibited, 221 — rawnsleyi
X T. abeona. exhibited, 531.

Trematode, A new avian, 500.

Trout food, Neuropteroid Insects of
TTot Sprinars Region, N.Z., in rela-
tion to, 205.

Turner. A. .7., Revision of Australian
Lepidoptera-Ljpnrf'rfoc, 474.

Turner, F., see Exhibits.

Variations of the sporocyst in a spe-
cies of Saprolegnia, 271 .
Virescenee, Aroids illustrating, 204.

Walkom, A. B., appointment as Sec-
retary, 11 — see Exhibits.

Waratah, Cup Moth (Apoda xylomeli)

on, exhibited, 318.
Wardlaw, H. S. H., Linnean Macleay

Fellow in Physiology: summary of

year's work, 9.
Waterhouse, G. A., Descriptions of

new forms of Butterflies from the

South Pacific, 468— see Exhibits.
Wattle Bark Infusions, Ropiness in,

52.
Watts, W. W., reference to death,

404.
Wilson, Prof. J. T., congratulations

to, 219— unveils Honour Roll. 219.

TU.

(b) BIOLOGICAL INDEX.
Synonyms are printed in italics: new names in small capitils.

Page.

Abaeetus 156

Abax reichei ■ ■ ■ ■ ItJO

Abraeits 377

Acacia 25, 331

acauthocarpa .'. 30

alata 31

armata 33, 329, 331-

333

aulaeocarpa

. 481

Baileyana . . .

. 37

BidwiUi .. .

. 38

Burkitti . . .

. 30

buxifolia . . .

. 43

eultiata . . .

. 33

Cunninghami .

. 447

cyanopliyUa

. 38

dealbata . . .

. 38

decipiens . . .

. 33

decurrens 35, 37, 43

discolor 29, 35, 37,

204

dodonaefolia . . 331

elata

37

excelsa

. 31

exsudans . . . . 331

falcata . . 32, 33, 39

floribunda .... 45

Gilbeiti .... 38

hetcrophylla. 31, 43-

45

implexa . . . . 31, 33

implexa (?) . . 40

Jonesii 37

juniperina . . 319

leprosa . . 42, 43, 331

leptoclada .... 33

Lindleyi .... 38

linifolia .. .i 32

longrifolia . . 33, 38-9

maeradenia . . 37

melanoxvlon, 31, 33,

38, 43, 45

niTrtifoHa, 32-3, 39,

43

Oswald) .... 30

pachycarpa . . 38

pcndula . . . . 531

podalvriaofolia 33. 40

polybotrya . . 33

piMunosa . . .

37

pvcnantha, 43, :)2,
329. 331, 333
rubida . . . . 31, 43-4

Page
Acacia rupicola 329, 331

salicina 26

suaveolens . . 33, 39
suberosa . . 38

uncinata .... 45
verniciHua 329. 331-2
verticillata . . 30, 39
Acblya .... 278-9, 281-4

Acidopsilus 445

Acroniopus 378

Actina tibialis . . 522, 528
Aetinoconcbus plano-

sulcata . . 290, 351, 369

Actinocrinidae . . . . 342

Actinocrimis sp. . . 342

Acupalpus mastersi 137

piceus .... 321, 323

Acypbas . . 475-6, 480-2

ampbideta . . 481-2

chionitis . . . . 481-2

fulviceps . . . . 481-2

ftisea 482

leptotypa . . . . 481
leucomelas .... 481

Addaea 214

AdeUiiiae .... 232, 246

Adelium 238

anpilatum .... 232
angiilienlle . . 232

bicolor 232

brevicome . . . . 247

ealosomoides 232, 246

POLITUII . . . . 247

rea:ulare . . . . 247

seytalicum .... 232

Adelotopus .... 116, 177

baemorrboidalis, 177-8

scolytides .... 177-8

tasmani . . . . 177-8

Adiantum formosum 564

Aepbnidins adeloides .322

Ageratum eonyzoides 566

Agonica 130

ovalipexnis . . 131
SIMSONI . . . . 1.30-1
Agoxicini .... 119, 129
AgoTioobila .... 170, 174
biguttata . . . . 174-G
BlifACm.ATA . . 174

binotata . . 174-5, 322
corticnlis . . ■ ■ 174

curtula 17}

fen**trata .... 174-5

Page.

Agouocbila flindersi

174-5
plagiata . . . . 174-5
sinuosa . . . . 174-5

\'ittula 175

AgTiini 115, 117

Ailantlius glandulosa 36

Albizzia 331

Alectryon coriaceus 450
excelsum . . . . 450
tomentosus . . 450
Aleoebara puberula 375
Allognosta .. 533. 541-2
assamensis 533, 542
baibiellinii 533, 542

brevis 542

erassa . . . . 533, 542
crassitarsis 533, 542
dorsalis .... 533, 542
fuscitarsis . . 533, 542
inermis .... 533, 542

lata 533. 542

obscuriventris 533, 542
pallipes .... 533, 542
similis .... 533, 542
vagans . . 533, 541-2

Alocasia 458

macrorrhiza . . 458

Alphitdbins 226

liLAIRI 225

XAMIAPHILA ■ ■ 225

Alstonia constricta. . 447

Alveolites 365-6

septosa .'!(>6

Amarinae 116

Amblygiiatbus minutus 136
Ambl'yosyllis .. .. 108-9

granosa 109

madeirensis . . 108

spectabilis . . . . 108

Amblv.<;tomus, 115, 131,

135

coxvExtJs . . . . 136

giittatus 321

indiciis 321

mctallir-ns . . . . 320

niger 136

ovalis 136-7

parvus 136

stenolopboides . . ,321

AniblyteTns 152^3

bre\-is 178

(•nrtns .... 153, 155

INDEX.

Page.

Amblytelus ciirtus var.

vittata 155

NIGER 153-4

plac'idus . . 153, 155
siMSONi . . . . 153-4
STRIATUS . . ■ ■ 153

Ameletus 208

Amphibia pallipes ■ ■ 321
Amvcjdalophyllum 341
etiiebidgei 2s)u, 339
Anacanthoberis 533, 541-2
Anchoruenmi . . 120, lt>4

Anc'homenus 164

margineUus . . 164
Anehonderini . . . . 116
Aiicijrona arnica ■ ■ 377

vesca 37 <

Andropogou sorghum 459

Aiieimites 337

ovata 297

Anemia 225

CAULOBIOIDES . . 224

denticulata . . 224

sardoa 224

Anisacantha muricata 189
Anisodactvlns discoideus

115

Anisotarsus 115

Anomites resupinata 345
Anomotarus . . 170, 176

aeneus 176

Anoplosi/llis fulva • ■ 102

Anthelidae 474

Anthemis 333

Antbicidae .... 379, 380

Anthious albanyensis 380

australis ■ ■ ■ ■ 381

exiguus 381

glabricollis ■ ■ 381

hesperi 380

immaculatus . . 380

inflatus 380

intricatus . . . . 379

krefftii 381

mastersi ■ ■ ■ ■ 380
myrteus . . . . 381
nitidissimus . . 381
ovipennis ■ ■ ■ ■ 370
propinqims ■ ■ 381

rarus 381

seydmaenoides 380

similiff 3°"

xerophikis .... 381

Antbiini 117

Antbomyia 527

Anthurium Andreannm

204

chelseiensis . . 204

Anticyra approximata 498

Page.
Antipha basalis ■ ■ 496

Apasis 242

Aplanes . . 278-9, 281-4
Apoda xylomeli . . 318

Apotominae 116

Apotomini 120

Apotomus 116

ApropbyUum ballense 341
Areliaeocalamites, 292,
297, 337
Archichauloides dubi-

tatiis 206

Are»llia antica • - • • 498

Argutor holomelanus 158

niticUpenn/is ■ ■ 158

Aroa exoleta . . . . 499

Arsipoda 401

Artaxa arrogans ■ ■ 48C
clurysophila ,■ ■ 480
(•ompacta . . . . 499

iobrota 480

ludfuga . ■ ■ ■ 484

meek't 486

simulans ■ ■ ■ ■ 485

usta 499

Arytera 329

Asearidia 559

columbae, 552, 559,

560-1

maculosa • - • ■ 560

Ascaristeres 559

columbae • ■ ■ ■ 559
maculosa ■ ■ ■ ■ 559-60

sp 559

Asilidae 185, 505

Asilinae. 186, 190, 250-1

Asilus 251, 524

aeutang-ulus 189-90
alcetas .. 252, 257-9

alicis 195

alligans . . 189. 256-7

amiicla 255

amythaon ■ • ■ ■ 258

aniilco 196

armatus ■ ■ ■ ■ 195-G

aureus 251

australis . . . . 189
belzebulb, >. . . . 189
blasio .... 252, 257-8

centlw 255

cilicatus . . . . 189
eoedicius . . . . 189
cognatus ■ ■ ■ ■ 195
erabroniformis 189
<fiscuUens ■ ■ ■ • 255

elieitus 189

exilis .... 188-9, 201
feriferus . . . . 189

Page.

Asilus ferrugineiven-

tris 189, 252-4

filiferus .... 188, 201
fraternus . . . . 193
fulvipubesceuce 189

(iENITALIS .... 251-3

hyaguis 254

inglorius 252, 255-6
jacksonii ■ • ■ ■ 258
laticornis . . . . 189
longiventris . . 189
luctificus . . . . 193
malleolus 252, 255-6
margitis . . . . 199
maiicus . . . . 189

maso 258

mistipes ■ ■ ■ ■ 202
murinus 252-3, 257-8
nigrinus . . . . 189
tiigritarsis ■ ■ ■ ■ 258
obumbratus . . 189
pelago .. 252, 255-6

planus 256

regius .... 189, 251
rubrithorax . . 252-3
rufiventris 252, 256-7
rufoeoxatus . . 189
rufometatarsis 189,
196
rufotarsis . . . 196
sericeiventris ■ ■ 256
setifemoratus 195-6
sydneensis .... 258
sydneyensis, 252, 257-8
tasmaniaes . . .. 258
trach-alus ■ . ■ ■ 259
Hnilineatus .... 255
varifemoratus . . 189
villaticus .... 201

mttipes 195

Asparagus plumosus
var . nanus . . . . 566

Aspbalus 230

Aster subnlatus . . 566

Atalava heraiglauea. . 447

Atalophlebia .... 208

Athtiris planosulcatus 351

Athvris rovssii .... 354

Atrvpa. 266, 268-70, 272-5

aspera . . , , 267, 274

desquamata, 266, 268,

271, 274

DUNTROONENSIS 266,

270

ERECTIROSTRIS 266-8

fimbriata . . . . 274
beadii var. angliea 271

bvstrix 274

marginalis 266, 268-9

IX.

TNDEZ.

Page.

Atrypa plicatella 26ii, 271

PULCHRA. 2t)6, 270, 5-48

reticularis, 266-71,

273, 548, 55'i

reticularis var. as-

pera 207

reticularis var. de-
currens . . . . 274

sp. 274

spinosa 274

Atrypidae . . . . 266, 272

Atrypoidea .... 266, 271

ANGUSTA, 266, 273,

543, 549

AUSTRALis, 266. 272-3,

543, 547, 549

Aur.truperla cyreue 207

Autolvtidae 90

Autolytus 109

paehycerus . . 109
A\dculopecten gran-

osus 290, 356

knockonensis . . 356

sp 290-1, 350

Axiologa .... 475-6, 495

pura 495

Axynaon championi 249

Baceharis 333

Bacillus coli com-
munis 54

Bacterium acaeiae. . 86
Atherstonei .... 85-6
metarabinum . . 86
Badamia exclama-
tion is SUBFLAVA . • 471
Banksia serratifolia 479
Barran<lella linguifer 548
linguit'er var. wil-
kinsoni, 267, 543,
549-50

MOLONGENSIS 543, 548

Basolia 117

BaifJea koninckii ■ ■ 3.58

Bellcrophon 309

cf. liiulcus, 290. 359-
60

eostatus : 360

sp 290, 359-01)

Belytidae 445

Bembidiini .. .. 119, 151

Beml)idium 151

bipai-titum .... 144

dubium 151

europs 321

haniil'erum .... 321

hobarti 173

opulontum .... 321
riverinae ■ ■ ■ ■ 321

Page.

Bembidium secaloides 144

Beridinae, 533, 535, 537,

540

Beris b re vis 542

clialybeata, 522, 526-7
fuacitarsis ■ ■ ■ ■ 542

lata 5-42

sp 522

Bibio imitator . . . . 472
Binellia tayloriana. . 203
Boerhaavia diffusa. . 179

Bolbopbanes 231

Bombylidau 505

Bumbi/x lutea ■ ■ ■ ■ 480

obsoleta 498

BoKEOiDES . . . . 533, 540
suBULATus . . 533, 640

Boreomyia 539

subidata ■ ■ 533, 540
Boronia Uoribunda. . 404
lediiolia . . . . 473
ledifolia var. ros-

marinifolia . . 473
ledifolia var. tri-
phylla .... 473

pinnata 473

rosmarinifolia 473
serrulata .... 404
serrulata var. . . 404
triphylla .... 473
Braeliycliiton popul-

neus 447

Bracbydema 139

tasmaniae . . . . 139
vicloriae ■ • ■ ■ 139

Brachylaena 333

Bracbvninae 116

Bracbynini .... 115, 120
Bracbyscelis munita 319

Brises 231

Bronteus jenkinsi . . 267
Broscini . . 115, 119, 124

Bn/axis 376

Bryeopia. 223, 237-9, 246
angulata .... 247
cheesmani .... 246-7
coelioidos . . 238, 247
COMATA . . . . 244, 246
crenaticollis 245, 247
diemeneusis . . 237-8

dubia 247

femorata . . . . 247
G[.OBicx)LLi.s . . 244-5
globulosa . . . . 247
HEXAGONA 237, 245-7

i,EAi 245,247

longipes . . . . 247

minor 247

minuta .... 237, 246

Page.

Bryeopia momlicornis 247

OBTUSA 245-7

picta 247

pilosella . . 237, 245-6
punctatissima . . 247

taylori 247

tuberculifera . . 247
Buprestidae .... 222, 531
Butia yatay 319

Cabasa pulchella . . 185-6
Tubrithorax • ■ 185-6
rufi thorax .... 185
venno 185

Cactoerinus 342

•'. BROWNE! 293, 342

ectypus 342

Cadmus fasciaticollis 382

Caedius .. 223

spbaeroides . . 223

tuberculatum ■■ 223

Caesalpinia Gilliesii 33-4

Cafiui) amblyterus ■ • 375

laeus 375

Calamites .... 297, 315
C alamo pora tenieisepta 341

Calliandra 35

portoricensis . . 34
Callipbora villosa . . 444
Callistemon pachy-

pbyUus .. ..■ .. 221

virainalis . . . . 221

Calodium tenue .... 557

teiiuisshnum ■ • 557

Calosoma australe • • 124

grandipenne ■ ■ 124

oceanicum . . 124, 320

scbaveri . . . . 124

Wal'keri . . 124, 320

Calyptogonia . . . . 121

ATER .... 114, 121

Camarotechia sussmil-

chi 269

Caninia 368

Capillaria 5.50

eolumbae .... 557-00
dujardini . . . . 557

tuniida 550

Capi>aris Mitebelli 447,
449

Carabidae 323

apertae .... 119, 124

biperforatae 115-7,

120, 166

clausae .... 118. 121

coniunctae 115-6, 119,

124

disiunetae 115-6, 118.

121

INDKX.

X.

Page.
Carabidae uniperforatae

115-7, 119, 124

Carabinae 116

Cai-abini . . 117, 119, 124

Carabus 117

Caragola 492

Cardiotborax . . 232, 237
aeutaugulus . . 232

aeneus 232

aeripennis . . . . 232
alternatus . . 234-5
coeruleo-niger 232, 234
constrictus .... 232
EXCISICOLLIS . . 236
bumeralis . . . . 235-6
macleai/ensis ■ • 232
MARGINATUS . • 233
METALLICUS . . 234-5

quadridentatus. . 236
REGULARIS .... 234-5
UNDULATICOSTIS 235

walekenaerii . . 233-4

Carenides 122-3

Carenum 123

laevigatum . . 123
laevipenne .... 123
morosum . . . . 173
politulum . . 123, 178

CarpoL-apsa 216

Carpophilus convexi-

usculus 377

Cassia Candolleana 32, 36

Casuarina glauca . . 447

Catadromus .... 152, 164

elseyi .... 114, 321

f impressus ■ . 320

lacordaiiei .... 164

tenebrioides . . 321

Catascopuh australas-

iae 322

elegans 322

Catopherus corpulen-

tus 249

Celaenephes parallelus 322

Ceneus 159

chalybeipennis 162

Cenogmus . . . . 131, 135

rotundicollis . . 135

Cephalostrongylds 553

columbae . . . . 557

quadriradiatus 554-5,

_ 560

Ceratocephala vogdesi

270, 546
Ceratopetalum giim-

miferum 473

Cerdistus australis 188-9,

201

sydneyensis . . 191-2

Page.

Chaetetes .... 286, 364-0

petrupolitanus 365

septosus . . . . 366

SPINULIPERUS 290,

365-6
Cbaetodacus tryoni 203
Chalcis caUiphorae. . 445
Cbaleopbora . . . . 531
Cbalcopborinae. . . . 531
Cbaleupterus cairnsi 249

cupreus 249

cupriventris ■ ■ 249

rusticus 249

setosus 249

smaragdulus . . 249
C'har7iidas fulvicepa 482
Chionophasma para-

doxa 478

Cbiromyia prisca ■ ■ 539

vittata 538

Chiromyza 532, 534, 536-7,
539
australis . . 532, 538
flavicaput ■ ■ . . 534
t'uscana .... 532, 538
krausei .... 532, 539
leptit'ormis 532, 538
ochracea . . 532, 538
paradoxa . . 532, 539
pausleni . . 532, 539
prisca . . 532, 538-9
transequa . . 532, 538
viciiia . . . . 532, 539
vittata .... 532, 537

Chiromyzini 533

Chlaeniinae 116

Chlaeniini 115, 117, 120

Chlaenioidius . . 152, 164

herbaceus ■ ■ ■ ■ 322

meUiei 322

prolixus . . 164, 321

Chlaenius 117

australis . . . . 178
binotatus ■ ■ ■ ■ 322
flavi.guttatus . . 322

hamifer 322

raaculiger . . . . 322
ophonoides . . 322
queenslandiciis 322

Chloromyia 515

formosa . . . . 522

Chonetes aspinosa 290,

343

comoides . . . . 343

hardrensis 293, 343,

368

laaruessiana 369, 371

papilionacea 369-71

Chorisops tibialis 522, 528

333-4
382
472
472
203
472
525
472

525-6, 528
. . 203, 472

.. .. 203

522,

Page.

Choristites mosquensis

348

Cbrysantbemum

Cbrysomelidae .

Cbrysomyia albiceps
bezziana
dux ....
tlaviceps
formosa .
nigriceps
polita. . .
rut'ifacies
varipes . .

Cbrvsomyza aenea. . 472

Chylnus .... 124, 128-9

ater 129.

Cillenum 151

mastersi . . . . 151

Cleistopora 368

Clitellaria epbippium 510,
522

Clivina 122

angustula ■ • ■ ■ 123

australasiae . . 320

deplanata ■ ■ ■ ■ 123

dilutipes . . 123, 320
dilutipes var. tas-

maniensis . . 122-3

discoidalis . . . . 122

dorsalis . . . . 122

epbippiata .... 320

eximia 320

felix 320

beterogena . . 122-3

lepida .... 123, 178

misella 123

suturalis . . . . 122

vagans 122-3

verticalls . ■ ■ ■ 122

Cliviuides 122

Clorinda linquifera

var. wilkinsoni ■ ■ 550

Clvtoeosmus 183

belmsi 183

TILLYARDI . . . . 183

Coccinellidae . . . . 400

Cocos yatay 319

Coelostomus picipes 321

Coenobius 403

inconstans .... 401

INSUTLICOLA . . . . 402

LONGICORNIS . . 401

parvoniger . . 401

spissus 402

Coenomyiidae . . . . 533

Coleoptera 115

Coloburiscus .... 208

bumeralis . . . . 208

Colpodes lafertei .. 322

INDEX.

Page.
Colpodes submetallicus 322

viohiceus . . . . 322
Columba domestica. . 557

livia ■ • 557

livia domestiea 552

Compositae .... 329, 333

Conoeardiuin sp. 290, 354

Conularia sp. 290, 294.

3152

Convexae 2G3

Convza altissima . . 404

"Naudinii . . . . 404
Coptoearpns . . . . 168

australis . . . . 1G8
Cosmodiscus rubripic-

tus 322

Cossidae 215

Cratocerini 117

Creagris labrosus . . 322
Crepis setosa . . . . 318-9
Crispata ulstrix . . 351
Crocodilus porosus. . 328
Cryptoheris . ■ 532, 534

herbescens ■ ■ ■ ■ 534
Ctenodactylini . . 120, 105
Ctenodonta sp. 290, 353
Cuneipectini . . . . 119

Cupania sp 450

Cyathaxonia . . . . 341
Cyathopbyllum .... 270
Cyeas . .' 424

cireinalis . . . . 425

media 425

revoluta . . . . 425
Cycloidotrypa . • 306

.\usTRALis ■ . 290, 367
Cyclorrbaplia . . . . 505

Cyclotrypa 367

Cynodon incompletus 457-9
Cvphaleinae . . . . 231

C'yria 222

Cyrioides 222

.sex-spilota 222, 531
Cyrtina 268

carbonaria .... 370
Cyrtoeeras 287, 290, 363

Dactylina arctioa . . 265
Daetyloctenium aegyp-

tiaeum 566

Daedrosis 223, 237-9, 243
amhifjua ■ ■ 238, 240
aiifjulata ■ ■ ■ ■ 238

ANTENNAI.IS 238-40

apiformis ■ • • ■ 238

crenato-striata 238,

240

hirsuta 238

interrupta .... 238

Daedrosis monticola

Page.
238,
240
238

237-8
491
467
466

pi/fjmaea
victoriae ■ ■ ■

Darala reducta ■ ■

Dasybasis . . . . ,
appendioulata

Dasvcbiia 475-6, 496, 498

'arga 497

basalis 496

distinguenda ■ ■ 496

divisa 496

grotei 497

ht)rsfleldi . . . .

497

kant^alia ■ ■ ■ •

497

nilqirica . . ■ ■

497

ostraeina . . . .

497

pudibunda ....

497

satrnnta ■ ■ • ■

496

securis

497-8

Dasyehiroides . . . .

488

pratti

489

Dasypogoninae ....

185

Dam/poqon niqritarsi<< 258

ptdchpUus ■ ■ ■ ■

185

rubrilliDrax

185

veiiiio

185

Datura Stramonium

306

Daucus l)raebiatus . .

566

Daviesiella cf. como-

ides

.343

Deleatidiiim

208

Delpbacidae . . . .

181

Delpbaeini

181

Demoplatiis australis

460-1

NIGROVITTATUS

460-1

Dentalium sp. .. 290,363

Deudorix epijarbas

470

epii'arbas diovella 470

epiiarbas diovis

470

epiiarl)as mathewi 470

epiiarba.s Wood-

fordi

470

Diabatieus . . . . 17

1, 176

australis . . . .

17i)

pauper

178

Diapliornmerus 115,

131-3.

320

amaroides . . 13

2. 178

australasiae

178

edwardsi . . . .

132

iiielanarius

320

perater . . . .

132-3

qu.adrioollis . .

132-3

reetangulus

132

VIRIDIPENNIS . .

132-3

Diapriidae .... 443, 445

Dihnnoptiyllnm 368. 370

Dicranonous (pieens-

l.indicus

322

Page.

Dicra-speda 322

nitida 322

Dicrochile 166-7

br«vicollis .... 168

goryi 168

minuta 168

punctipennis 168, 178
(luadricollis . . 167-8
ventralis . . . . 114
Dictyophorodelphax 181
DiCTYU-ApLANES ■ • 281-4
Dictyuchus .. .. 278-84
Dielasma hastatum 368
saeculum . . . . 368
sac'culum var. amy-
gdala, .. 290, 345,
347, 369
saeculum var. has-
tata . . 290. 294,
346-7. 369

sp 290

Dilwynnia 385

Dinoria 237

coelioides 237, 246-7
picta . . 237, 246-7

sp 246

Diphyphyllum sp. 290, 341
Diplacodes bipunetata 208

Diptera 183

Ditropidus 400

abdominalis . . 396
aciculatus . . . . 388
amabilis . . . . 382
antennarius . . 383
apicitlavus . . 394
armatus . . . . 396
aurielialceus . . 382
baccaeformis ■ ■ 383-4
bimaculatus . . 392
brevieollis .... 399

BRDNEIPEXNIS . . 399
CAERULEUS .... 397

canescens .... 386
CARiyATICEP.S . . 395

ekalcetis . . . . 389

elypealis .... 397

eoelistis .... 396

c.ognatus . . . . 396

comans 387

eoneolor .... 396-7

eongenitus .... 396

convexiuseulus 387

OORIACEDS . . . . 397

eornutus . . 385. 389

eostatus . . 388. 397

dimidiatus .... 382

distinsruendus . . 389

doriae 386

elegantulus . . 383-4

INDEX.

V Page.

Ditropidus facialis

398

faseiatus . . 386, 391-2

faseiatus vai-.

PIC'TIPBS . . ■ •

38()

frontalis . . . .

397

GENICULATUS . .

391

gymnopterus . .

39 i

imperialis . . . .

389

lilPUXCTICOLLIS

393

indistiuctus

390

IXSIGNIS . . . .

394

insularis . . . .

389

intonsus . . . .

391

iacobvi 384, 399

, 400

laevicoUis 382,

390

laminatus . . . .

388

lateralis • ■ ■ ■

389

LATICOLLIS . ■ • .

393

LATIFRONS . . . .

390

k'litulus . . . .

388

LOBICOLLIS ....

396

maculicollis

387

mandibularis . .

392

melasomus ....

397

METALLICUS

394

MIRUS

392

nigricollis . . . .

389

nigripennis

389

ochroijus . . . .

382

odewahnii . . . .

383

ornatus

385

puberulus . . . .

387

Ijubescens . . . .

391

pubicollis . . 387

391

pulehellus . . . .

385

punoticollis

397

pnnctulum 387,

398

PYGIDIALIS ....

39b

fiuadratipennis

396

rotundiformis . .

398

ruficollis . . . .

385

RUFIMANUS

398

seitulus

390

SCULPTIPENNLS

399

seminulum . . . .

397

serenus

385

sobrinns . . 390

397

striatopunctatus

390

subaeneus . . . .

388

SUBARJIATDS . .

396-7

suhmetalleseens

390

subsimilis . . . .

389

SLTBSUTURALIS

399

tibialis

386

TRAXQUILLUS . .

398

tropicus . . . .

397

vagans

398

venustus . . . .

390

vicanus . . . .

399

Page.

nitropidus vigilans 396
viridiaeiieus . . 394
wlntei 391

Dodonaea viseosa 329-30

Dolichochtis tetra-

stigma 322

Drimostoma alpestris 157

lielmsi 157

montanum . . 156-7
tasmanica . . . . 142

Dryptinae 116

Dryptini 115, 120

Dufourea madrepori-
formis 265

Dura 475-6, 488

alba 488

bieolora . . . . 489
brunneostrigata 489
marginepunetata

488-9

ochrias 488-9

pratti 488-9

pRioxoDESiiA 488-9

Dvseolus australis 153-4,

178

dilatatus . . 153-4, 178

Di/smaclnis ricdis 186, 189

Dystrieliotliorax . . 153
iilaeidus . . . . 155

Eccoptogenius feron-

oides' 162

Ectroma 168-9

Ectyehe semi-bullata 248

tuberculipennis ' 248
Edmondia sp. . . 290, 353

Egini 116

Eblersia 101

ferrughien .... 101
Eklonia .' 91, 108

radiata 102

Elaphodes .... 387, 400-1

irAEMOERHOIDALIS

400

HALTICOIDES . . 401
RHIZOBIODES . . 400

vulpinus . . . . 392

Elaphrinae 116

Elateridae 378-9

Embolophora . . . . 181
Encrinurus duntroon-

ensis 271

mitchelli 267. 270. 550
silverdalensis . . 270

Enome 475-6. 490

ampla 490

antennata . . . . 490
pelospila . . . . 490

Page.
Entada ........ 331

Entolium aviculatuin

290-1, 356

sp 290, 356

Epacris purpuraseens 404
Epbippium albitarsis

507, 522, 528

tlioraeium 522, 525-7
Epicoma tristis .... 499
Epistomentis . . . . 222

Epuraea 377

Eremopbila 334

latifolia . . 329, 335-6
Eremostaehvs lacin-

iata . . . .' 319

Erigeron 404

linifolius . . . . 404
Eriostemon Crowei 473

laiieeolatus . . 473
Erythraea australis 564
Eucalyptus coriaeea 175

saligna 319

sp 447

Eucnemidae 378

Eudalia 322

Eulepis caphontis . . 468

pyrrhus Tiberius 468

sempronius . . 468
Euompbalus . . . . 369

CARROLLENSIS 290, 360

cera . . . . 290, 360

pentangulatus 290,

360

sp 290

Eupatorium canna-

binum 566

glandulosum . . 318
Euphyllodineae . . 33

Euploea 216

Euproctis 475-6. 481-2,

484, 488

ACTOR .... 483, 486

AGANOPA .... 483-4

amphideta .... 482

arclada 486

arrogans . . 483, 486
baliolalis . . 483, 487
chrijsophaea ■ ■ 484
chrysorrhoea . . 483
croeea .... 483, 485
edwardsi . . 483, 486
epaxia .... 483, 485
epidela .... 483, 485
ericydes . . . . 485
euryzona ■ ■ ■ . 482
habrostola 483, 486
holoxutha ■ . . . 485
HYMNOLis . . 483, 485
idonea 483-4

Page.
Euproctis limbalis 483,

487-8
lueifuga . . . . 483-4
marginalis 483, 487-8
niphuhola . . 483, 488

pelodes 49<J

pura 48()

pyraustis . . . . 483-1
scotochi/ta .... 484

STEXOMORPJIA 483-4

subiiul)ilis . . 483, 485
Euprosopia puucti-

facies 203

Eurylyclmus . . 124, 128

femoralis . . . . 128

Eurymedusa picta 101-2,

107

Eurysyllis 102

tuberculata . . 102
Euthenarus .... 132, 138

comes 139

NIGEIiLUS . . . . 138

promptus . . . . 138

Euschemon 216

Eusyllidae . . . . 90, 102

Eusvllis 100

Euzora .... 475-1), 492

claia 492

coUuc-ens .... 492

Exogonea 90

Exogoneae . . . . 102, 107

Favosites 270

basaltica . . . . 548

gothlandica . . 548

multitabulata . . 548

Fenestella sp. . . 293, 342

Feronia vilis . . . . 162

Filicium 329

Fistulipora incrustans 300

MiCROSCOPiCA 290, 3C(i

P'lindfisia maculosa 447

Floiibundae 261

Forraiea t'ulig-inosa 526-7
Fornax parvoniger 378
Fragraria indica . . 404
Fusanus acuminatns 447
persicarius . . 447

Galinsoga parviflora 566
Gattiohi sp'ectahill^ 108-9
Geijera parviflora . . 447
Geometridae . . . . 474

Geosargus sp 522

Girvanella 290, 338. 364-5
Glaphyropyga austral-

iasiae 189

Glossopteris 291-2, 301,
306, 309. 311, 315. .531

INDEX.

Page.

Gnathaphanus 131-2, 320

adelaidae . . . . 132

lierbaceus . . . . 114

impressipennis 320

liciuoides . . . . 320

philippensis . . 320

Gnathosyilis zonata 90

Goraphoceras sp. 290, 3(>3

Goodeniaeeae . . . . 329

Gorgodera 502

Gosseletina australis

290, 357-8
australis var.

ALTA .... 290, 357

MACKAYI . . 290. 358

scOTTi . . 290, 358

Granigerinae . . . . 116

Grapbiptcrini . . . . 117

Grevillea punieea var.

CRASSIFOLIA . . . . 261

Grevillia striata . . 447

Gynocardia odorata 450,

459

Gyroceras . . . . 290, 363

Habrophyi.la 475-6, 481-2
euryzona . . . . 482

Hakea leucoptera . . 447
mierocarpa . . 261

saligna 262

saligna var. an-

GUl^IFOLIA . . 261

Hallopora fruticosa

290, 367

Haplaner . . . . 131. 137

velox 137

Haplopseustis . . . . 475

Haplosyllis 100

Haptoncura ocularis 377

Haptoncus tetragomis 377

Harpalinae 116

Harpaliiii . . 115. 119, 131

Harpalus 139

(ilteniaiis . . . . 320

australis .... 135

illawarensin . . 132

inornatus . . . . 135

melanarius . . 320

moestus 134

patnteldides . . 132

promptus ■ ■ . . 138

quadraticolUx . . 160

ratidiemeiisis . . 132

verticalis . . . . 137

vestigia lis .... 178

Helaeinae 231

Hclacus frenclii . . 229

gilesi 229

LATiroLiua . . 229

^F Page.

Heliehrysum semipap-
posum . . . . 329, 333-4

Heliolites 270

Helluoiiiui 120

Hemerobiidae .... 540

Hemilexis 443

Hehilexojivia .... 443

ABRUPTA . . • • 443

Hemimetabola . . . . 206

Heracula .... 475-6, 488

discivitta .... 488

leonina 488

Hermetia albitarsis 522
illucens .... 522, 527

sp. . . • 522

Hesperidae 471

Heterakinac 559

Heterakis 559

maculosa 552, 559-60

Heterodendioii 448-9, 451,

455-9

diversifolia 448, 450

oleaefolia 447-50, 459

Heteroneura . . . . 215-6

Heteronympha rairifica 531

paradelplia . . 531

solandri . . . . 472

Hevea 457

brasiliensis . . 459
liexaerinidae . . . . 291
Hexagouella . . . . 366

Hiletini 115

Hispalis 135

Histeridae 377

Hololeius nitidulus 322
Holometabola .... 206
Holoparamecus caul-
arum 378

Holostomatidae . . 500

Holostomum . . . . 500-1

cinctum . . 500

cornu 500

REPEXS . . 500-1, 503
simplex .. .500, 503
variabile . . . . 503

Ilotnaiuta 376

Homoptora 181-2

Honuitbes 164-5

elegans 165

emarginatus . . 165
guttit'er . . . . 165

mi cans 165

NIGER 165

purvicollis . . . . 165
rotundatus . . 178

serieeus 165

vicimit'! . . . . 165
Iloplodonta viridula 522
Hormochilus 159

INDEX.

Page.
Horinochilus monoch-

rous 162

Howea 565

Belinoreana . . 565
Forsteriana . . 564-5

Humea 334

cassiuiacea 329, 333

Hydiophilidae . . . . 116

Hydropsyche colonica 209

Hfllorus . . . . 532, 536-7

Krausei ■ ■ 537, 539

Hyocis 223

bakewelli . . 223, 225

bicolor 223

mxOR 225

nigTa 225

occidentaUa ■ ■ 223

pallida 223

pubescens . '. . . 223

siib-paiallela . . 223

varieqata ■ ■ ■ ■ 2j:3

Hvolites sp. . . 290, 363

Hypaulas 230

Hypharpas . . 131, 133-4

aereus 134-5

australis . . 134-5, 320
inornatus . ■ ■ ■ 134
latiiisculus .... 134-5
moestus . . . . 134-5
noi.ae-hollandiae 134

peroni 134-5

puncticauda ■ ■ 134-5

Hypoliiuua.s alimena 469

bolina 469

INOPINATA .... 468

Hypsidae 474-5

Iclithybotus liudsoni 207

Icta '. 475-0

fulviceps . . . . 477

TAXAOPIS . . . . 477

Idacarabus 139

llavipes 178

troglodytes . . 178

Idius 171

moestus 172

Imaus 488

marqinepunctata 489

ochrias . ■ ■ . ■ ■ 489

Indigofera galegoides

458-9

Inopus 532, 534

despeetus . . . . 534

Iropoca . . . . 475-6, 494

rotuiidata . . . . 495

Isolepis supina .... 260

Issoria egista . . . . 469

egista bowdenia 469

egista gaberti . . 469

Page.

issoria egista hebri-

DiNA 469-70

egista propiuqua 469
egista samoana 469
egista scyllaria 469
egista shortlandica 469
egista viTiENSis

469-70

ftamus 186, 259

alcetas 259

planiceps . . . . 196
si/dnei/ensis . . 258

Ixodea 334

acbilleoides 329, 333 1

Jacaranda 35, 41

ovalifolia . . 34, 204

Keiinedya rubieuiida 473
Keteleeria japouica 565
Kocbia striata 290, 353
Koninekophyllum . . 341
inopinatum . . 341
KyUinga monoeepbala 564

Lacida postica ■ ■ ■ ■ 494

Laeijaa 475

Lacon alternans ■ ■ 379

guttatus . . . . 379

macidatus ■ . ■ ■ 379

variabilis . . . . 379

Lacordairei anchomen-

oides 178

ericiisoui . . . . 178

Lacordairia . . . . 166-7

argiituroides . . 167

ealatiioides . . 167

Laelia 475-6, 498

coenosa 498

eremaea ■ ■ ■ ■ 498

obsoleta .. .. 498

ustracina ■ ■ ■ ■ 497

Laemostenus . . . ._ 164

fomplanatus llv, 1G4

Lagarinus . . 532, 536-7

paradoxus ■ ■ 537, 539

pausleni . . . . 539

Lagarus ■ ■ ■ • 532, 536-7

pausleni . ■ ■ ■ 539

Lathridiidae 378

Latbyrus 33, 440

Lebia calida ■ . ■ ■ 169

civica 169

pieipennis . . . . 322

Lebiinae 116

Lebiini 120, 170

Lebiomorpha ■ ■ ■ ■ 168-9

eiviea 169

Lecanonteriis . . . . 137

Page.

Lecanomerus maryin-

atus 137

nitidus 137

Leguminoseae . . 329-30

Leiopteria australis 290,
356

Leperina burnettensis 377

cirrosa 377

mastersi 37'^

Lepidodendron .... 289
australe . . 291, 315
veltbeimiamiin 315

Lepidosperma Xeesii 261
quadrangulata 261
tetraquetrum . . 261

Leptaena analoga 369-71
rhomboidalis . . 549

Leptoeeridae . . 205, 209

Leptocneria binotata 491

Leptogastrus . . . . 238-9
apiformis . . . . 239
CYANEUS . . . . 239
mastersi .... 238-40

OCCIDENTALLS . . 239

Leptolegnia 277-9, 281,
284
Leptoperlidae . . . . 207
Leptopodus suljgaga-

tinus 178

Leptospermnin . . . . 166
Lestignathus . . . . 166

I'ursor 166-7

FOVEATU.S . . . . 166

sini.soni 166-7

Leucciiiia 475

hipparia . . . . 492

Liburnia 181

Licininae IIG

Licinini . . 115, 120, 106
Licinoma . . 223, 237-40
AEREA . . 240-2, 244
aerea var. com-

boyneiisis . . 241
angusticollis 241, 244
APASioiDES 241-2, 244
c'ommoda .... 244
('Vclocollis . . . . 243
eiata . . . . 238. 243
gilesi 243

MEBIDIANA 242, 244

monticola 238, 241,
244
nitida 237-8, 241, 243
nitidissima . . 243
nodulosa . . . . 243
pallipes .... 243-4
puncta-latera . . 238,
240, 244
sylvieola . . . . 244
tasraanica . . . . 243

otv.

INDEX.

Page.

Licinoina truncata 243-1

victoriae . . . . 243

violacea 238, 241, 243

Lininastis pilosus . . 321

Lipandae 474-5

Lithobtrotioii 34(1-1, 3(34,
367, 370

sp 2U0, 339

stanvL'llfcnsu . . 341
Littoriiia jilusa . . 3()2
Lolium tcmuk'iitLim 531
Lorocerinae . . . . IK)

Loxaudius 152

sagatiiuis 152, 178

Loxonema 3ti!J

Loxonema ? 289, 29il, 302

babbinboonensis 290,

362

lefevrei 29(1

rus'ifera . . . . 362

sp 290, 3(i2

Liu'iiia eras's'ii . . 472

I'ucina 203

serenissinia . . 472
sericata . . . . 203

solaia 203

Lycaeiiidae . . 468. 470

Lfichnus 128-9

titraiiiiulutiis . . 129

strintiduh .... 129

Lyinantria . . 475-(). 490

antennatu . . . . 490

inirursL 49(.-

binotata . . . . 490-1
inonai-iia . . . . 490
nt'))hrcis-raiilKi 490-1
reducta . . . . 490-1

tiirneri 490

Lymantriadae .... 474

Macliiinuf atitilcu ■ . 196

Maci-oclifilus Hlosus

289-90, 362
sp 290

Macrochiliiia . . . . 291

iMacroperas 239

Mai'i'opus gi}i-anteus 328

luaior 328

rufus 328

MaiTozamia 424-9. 432,
439-40
Fi-azeri . . . . 42()-S
Miquclii . . . . 42()-7
PcrowL.kiana . . 426
spiralis . . 424-9, 44U

Mallophora nig^itarsis

258

Malvastrum trieuspi-

datuni 564

Maiin'iri'ra indica . . 319

Page.
Maiiiiiot 457

utilissima . . . . '42r3

Martiiiia sp 29i

Martynia lutea . . 180

Masoreinae 116

Mecodema tasmaiucuui

129
Mecoptera. . . 116, 20()
Mecyclotborax . . . . 152-3

ambiouiis . . . . 153
Mecynotarsus ziczae 381
Megaloptpra . . . . 206
Meqarislerus . . . . 135

indicus 321

stenolophoidcs 321
Melaleuca leueadeii-

dron var. albida 221
Mclanodiscus . . . . 329
Menearchu.s . . . . 229

impresso-sulcatus

230
Menephilus eoerulescens

231

LONGICOLLI.S . . 231

Merista 543

plel>eia 543-5, 550-1
tennesseensis . . 5-14-5

Meri.stina 266

australis . . . . 272

tiimida 272

Merizodim . . 119, 139

Merizodu'; 139

ansiistieollis . . 139
MesembryantliPinuni

australe . . . . 564
Metoponia 517, 532-4.
53(i. 538-9, 541-2
despectu^ . . . . 532
flaviccifiut .... 532
GEMIXA . . 532, 535
herbescens . . 532
obscurireiilria. . 542

prisca 539

rubriceps . . 506-9.
511-2. 514. 532, .534-6

similis 542

rufians ,542

ricina ,539

Mctriitii 117

Metriiis 117

Metura clnnsata . . 318
Michelinia tenniscpta

290, 341, 369

sp 290

Micrixys 116

Microclirysa . . . . 515

polila 522

sp 522

Mici-njestes .. 170, 176
Imnii'i'alis . . . . 176

Page.

Alierolestcs yarrae 176

Misadopini 115, 119, 121

152

Mimosa 36, 331

ilimoseae . . 32, 33, 36,

329-31

Mist-eliis morioformis 322

MoLONGiA . . . . 543, 546

ELEGANS 547

Monoci'epidius ulijicola

379
aphiloides . . . . 379
breviceps . . . . 379

dolosiic 379

eveillardi .... 379
manterai . . . . 379

minor 379

rubicundus . . 370
Montic'ulipora .... 366
Monoxylabis . . . . 445
jMorio lona:ipciiuis. . 321

Morioniuae 116

Mormolycini 117

Morova 214-6

subfaseiata . . 214-5

Mourlonia 357

ORNATA . . 290, 357

sp. .. 290, 357, 359

Murehisonia sp. 290, 360

Mydaidae 505

Mviocbrvsa sp. . . 522
Mvopori'iieae. . 329, 334-5
Myoponim .... 334, 336
serratiim . . . . 335
serratuui var. in-
sulare .... 329, 335
serratum var. vis-
(•o.sum. . . . 329, 335
]\Iystropomus snb-

costahis . . . . 117

Nasouia brevieoniis 445

Naticopsis 369

brevispiia . . 290, 361
alobosa. . . . 290, 361
ODLiQUA . . 290, 362
Nemnfjlossa . . 132. 13 1'
atriceps . . . . 138

l)icolor 137

l)rpvis 137

mastersi . . . . 137

iniiioi- 138

oim-sA .. .. 137-8

tasmanica .... 137-8

verticalis . . . . 137

Nematodes pul)esfi'iis 378

Nemotehis pantlierinus

522

sp. .522

uliainosus . . . . 522

INDEX.

XVI.

Page.

Neoitamus . . 185-6, 189,

197, 251, 259

abditus .... 189-91

alcetas 259

armatus . . 187, 189,
194-5, 197
australis . . 187, 189
hrunneus . . 18G, 195
calii/hwsus . . 199
clanpes . . 187. 189,
197-8
cyauiuuh, . . . . 186
flivar'catus . . 189
flavicinc'tus 189, 19!^
fraternus 189, 193-4
gibbonsi . . . . 189
(/raminii . . . . 202
liyalipennis . . 189
maculata . . . . 197

3IACULATOIDE,-5 . . 189,

197-8
maculatus .... 201
margitis . . 189, 198-9
mistiwes . . . . 202
planiceps . . . . 196
SETOSUS 189, 199-200
si/dneyensis 189, 19]
258

varius 193

vittipes .. 186, 189,

194-5

volaticus .... 187

vulgatus . . 193-5, 197

Xeopolliiioaa villonn 444

Nicotiana alata . . 566

Nioda fusifonnis . . 496

Nissolia 33

Nitella 205, 209

Nitidulidae 377

Noctuidae 474-5

No)iacri)< .... 532, 536-7
transBQua. . . . 537-8
Notauatolica .... 209
Notodontidae . . . . 499
Nutolea limhuta . . 249
Notononius . .. 152, 163
chalybeus . . . . 163

p((ues 115

pnral'elomorplius 115
liliilippi . . . . 163
pnlitiilus .... 163
tiibeiii andus . . 163

Nnt<>ilhilu!< 135

Notoiibovx iiovat'-

hollandiae . . 500, 503
Nuculana sp . . 290, 353

Ochros'aster contraria 499

Ochrus 33

Ocneria heliaspis . . 499

Page.

Ocnodus lus'iibi'is . . 378

tridentatus . . 378

Udacauthinae . . . . 116

Odacanthiui 116, 120, 164

Odonata 206

Odoiitomyia 506

angulata .... 522
arsentat;' . . 522, 525
bydroleoii . . 522, 524
ornala 523, 525, 527

sp 523

ti^^rina 523

viridula .. 523, 526

Odontopleura liowninf;-

eusis . . . . 270, 546

parvissima 270, 546

Odontopsilus . . . . 445

Odontosyllis. . . . 105, 107

ctenostoma . . 106

detecta . . 105-6, 108

lulguiaiis . . . . 107

freycinftensis . . 107

glaiidulusa. . . . 107

livalina . . . . 106

suteri . . . 102, 107

vire-scens . . . . 106

Oecetis 209

unioolor . . . . 209

Olene 475-6, 496

bojiinittn . . . . 496

mendosa . . . . 496

Oligebia .... 475-6, 480

heiuicalla .... 480

Olins-a 209

Oinmatiiis teris . . 186

pilosus . . . . 186

Omolipus coernlens 249

cyaneipeniiis . . 249

gnesioides . . . . 240

PUNCTATO-

KULCATUS . . 249

Omopbroniiiae . . 116

Oniseis'aster . . . . 208

Oodes 139, 1118

modestus .... 168

Oodinae 116

Oodini .. 115, 120, 168
Oopterus.. .. 139, 141-2

flivinoides . . 139

Opliryostei'inis 159

Opliyra analis . . . . 203

nigra 444

Orbiciilnifli'a iiitida 369

Oroa gladiator . . 328

Orgyia .. .. 475-6, 493

anartoides . . 493

antiqua . . . . 493

ATHLOPHORA . . 493

australis. . . . 493-4
canifascia . . . . 494

Page.

Urgyia cei/lanka ■ ■ 494

luilekinnii . . 494

retinopepla . . 499

Orthis australis 290, 293,

346

micheUui . . . . 346

resupinata 290, 293,

345, 368, 370, 550

striatula . . 543. 550

Orthoceras sp. 291, 363

Ortbogonini 117

Ortborrliapba .... 505

Ortbotetes crcnistria 290,

293, 342-3, 368

Ospidus ........ 231

chrysomeloides 231-2

gibljus 232

MAJOR . . . . 231-2

paropsoides . . 231-2
Oxalis ........ 25

Oxyeera meigenii 523, 526
monlsii . . . . 523

sp 523, 526

triliniata . . 523, 526
Oxfipoda atialis . . 375
Ozaenini 117-8

Paehygaster atfr 510, 523,
525-G

leach ii 523

meromelas. . . . 523

minutissima 611, 515,

517

minutissimus . . 523

orbitalis . . . . 523

pini . . 511, 523, 527
sp. . . . . . . 523, 525

tarsalis . . . . 523

Patliytraebelus ob-

iong-us 320

Famborini 119

Panageinae . . . . 116

Panageini 120

Panageus 116

Panenka miiltiradiata 355

PORTEHi .... 290, 355

Pangium edule 425, 450,

457-9

Panicularia s|). . . 457

Papilio maclpayanus 470

raacleayaniis in-

SULANA . . . . 470

Papilionidae 470

Parkia 331

P'arallelodciji . . . . 353

argutiis 353

CARNEi .... 290, 353
Paramesius . . . . 443
Parata bilmiata . . 471
Paromalus planieeps 377

xvu.

INDEX.

Page.

Paromalus uinbilicatus STT

victoriae . . . . 377

Paisonsia 214

Passillora lierbertiana

459
quadransularis 457

sp 45S

Pelecini 115

Pelecorrliyiu-ljus . . 407

Pelophik' 114

Pentaji'oiiicii . . . . 17()

olivaceus> .... 322

vittata . . . . 323

vittipenmsi 17b, 323

Pentagonicini . . 120, 17ti

Peiitamerus f/aleatus 549

Pehcoderjius. . .. 139-40

NICiER 140

Percosoma . . . . 124,129
carenoides .... 120
siilc-ipenne .... 129

Perigona 145

australica . . . . 322

nigTiceps .... 322

Perigoninae . . . . IIG

Perlaria 200

Persoonia lucida . . 531
Phaermis fasciciilata 224
Plianerotrema aus-

tralis - . . . 290, 359
australis var. alta

290, 359

BLRINDU V.

Fhasc'olarttus (.■iiicreus

328
Pliascolomys mitchelU 328
Phaseolus lunatus . . 457-9

Pheidole 370

Phei-sita .... 152, 150-7
australi.s . . . . 157-8
CONVEXA .... 157-8

helmsi 157

melbournensis. . 157
montaiia . . . . 157
TASM.iNIC.\ . . 157
PhilUpsia grandis . . 363
robusta .... 290, 363

sp 294, 363

Philonthus aciieus . . 375

chaliibeipr)iniy 375

Philophloeus . . 170-1, 173

australis . . . . 172

BTVITTATUS . . 172-3

(•onft-rtus .... 1 73
distingui'iidus 171-2
eucalypti . . .. 171-2
eucalypti var .

ta.snianica . . 172
inoestus . . . . 172
myrmei'iipbiliis 172-3

Page.
Pbilupbloeus obtusus 172-3
urnatus . . . . 172
SlMSONi . . . . 172-3
Sydney ensis . . 173
truncatus . . . . 172
Pblaeudiomiis plagiatus

322

Pbysocratopbini . . 120

Pinopbilus grandieeps 375

mastursi . . . . 375

trapeziis . . . . 375

Pinus sdvestris 525, 527

Pionuj-vHis . . 90-1, 94,

103-4

eompacta . . . . 90-1

divarieata . . . . 104

MELAENONEPHEA

103-4

weismannoides 104

weissuianni . . 104

Pisonia Brununiana 180

Plagiotelum irinum 105

opale.seens . . 105-0

Planetes 113

australis . . . . 113

Planipennia . . . . 200

Platyceras sp. . . 290. 302

Platycilibe brevis . . 220

INTEGRICOLLI.S. . 220
Plat 1/ nun mart/iiiicolii,^

322

Plati/soma 377

bipunetatum . . 377
completum . . 377
eonvexiiiscuhuu 377
Pleetoptera . . . . 200
Plectroscelis . . . . 401
Plerop/n/Utim culloii 338
Pleurotoniaria sp. . . 290

Poa flava 457

Poecilus iridescens. . 103
iridi))ennis . . 103
Polyehaeta pbancro-

cepbala 90

Polt/deris brevicdiiils 151

Polylobus 370

apicalis 370

fmifjicdlK . . . . 37!)
longulus . . . . 370
pallidipennis . . 370
pnlUdiiiniiior . . 370

tenuis 370

Pol II m a,s- <Ms paradoxus

102
Polysticbus . . . . 113
Polvstigiiia vittieolle 378
Ponera lutea .... 381
Poi-cellia pearsi 290, 358
Porthosia . . 475-7, 48-2
acatharta .... 478-9

Page.
Portbesia ciieua . . 478
anacauiia . ■ . . 481.
collucenn . . . . 492
eutbysana . . . . 478
tiuibnata . . . . 478-9
galactopis .... 478-9
hololeuca . . . . 481
irrorata . . . . 499
lutea .... 478, 480

MELAMBAPHES 478.

480

melanosoma . . 47S

mi.ita 478

paraduxa . . . . 478
similis 477

nubnobilm . . . . 485
TEISPILA . . . . 478-9
XUTHOPTERA . . 4<8-9

Posiduuiella. . . . -. . 354

sp 290, 349, 35-t

subsulcata .... 354

Potamopyrgus sp. 200

Procoidulia grayi 208
smitbii 208

Produotus aculeatus 370
burlinatonensis 370

eora 370

fimbriatus . . . . 370
Hemingii . . . . 370
giganteus . . . . 343
bemispbericus 290,
343. 308
bcmispbaericus

var. giganteus 343

longispinus 293, 344,

368

muricatus 290, 344,

308

punctatus . . . . 370

pustulosus 290, 344,

368

seabrieulus . . 370

semiretieidalus 290,

344-5, 308

sp 290

undatus . . . . 370

Fromaebus 250

doddi 250-1

Proinceoderus . . . . 124

l)!U<!si 125

bruuuieornis . . 124-0
bruuiiieornis var.

ovicollis .... 126
cordicollis . . 125
CUPRESCEN.S 125. 127

c^JR\^PEs. . .. 125-0

deqener 125

elegans 125

gibbosuo .... 125-0
LONGUS. . . . 125, 127

INDEX.

Page.
Promecoderus mastersi

12G
modestus . . Il25, 178
ovicolli^ 120

PLEBIUS . . 125, 128

subdepressiis 125,

128, 178

tasmanieus . . 124-5

127-8

viridiaeneiis . . 124-5

Prosopogmus . . 152, 159

austrinus . . . . 159

boisduvali . . 159-60

ooracinus. . . . 160-2

delicatulus. . 160, 162

f oveipennis 160, 162

harpaloides . . 159

insperatus .... 160

LEAI 159-60

monocbrous 160, 162
uamoyensis . . 160
nitidipennis . . 160
occidentalis . . 160
oudiformis . . 160, 162

PUNCTIFERUS 159, 161

quadraticollis . . 160

reiebei 160

rubic'oniis . . . . 159
suspecta . . . . 160
TASMANICU.S 159, 161
yarrensib . . 159, 162

Prosoxylabis . . . . 445
PiCTiPENXis . . 445

Prostanthera Behriana

263

debilis 264

DENSA 263

marifolia . . . . 26^!
rhombe?. . . . . 263

saxicola 263

saxicola var. maior

264
saxicola var.

MONTANA . . 263

Prunus persica var.

dianthiflora . . 203
sp 457

Psali-t securh . . . . 498

Pselaphidae 376

P.SEUDEMBOLOPHORA 181
M.A.CLEAYI . . . . 181-2

Pseiidoceneus . . 152, 163

solicitus 163

P'seudomorpbini 120, 177
Pseudozaena orientalis

117

Psilonothvs 135-6

ovalis 136

Psychina 217

Pteroctrtu.s .... 139-41
globosus .... 141-2

Page.
Pteroeyi-tus rubescens

141-2

STRIATULUS . . 141-2

tasmanieus . . 141-2
Pterogmus 119, 152, 155

RUFIPES 156

Pterohelaeus 227

abdominalis . . 227

agoniis 227

areanus . . . . 228

bagotensis .... 227

broadhursti . . 227

dispar 227

dispersus . . . . 227

f rat emus . . . . 227

geminatus . . 227

hepalicus . . . 227

IXTERRBPTUS . . 227-8

memnnnius . . 227, 229
NODICOSTLS . . 228
OBLONors' .... 228

ovalis 227

pascoei . . . . 227
peltatus . . . . 227

)iiceus 227-8

planus 227

pruinosiK . . . . 227

raucus 228

servus 227

sub - pun ct at us 227

tenuistriatus . . 227
tristis . . . . 227,229
Pteronites subpittmani

290, 353
tanipteroides 290, 353
Pteropbyllum . . . . 424
Pterostichinae .... 116
F'terostiehini 113, 115,
119, 152
Pternsticlins coracinus

162

diemenensis . . 162

Ptero.sydiie arborea 181

Pterosiillis formosu 108

madeirensis. . . 109

plectorliyncho 108-9

spectahilis . . 108

Ptycomphalina sp. 290

Ptvcomplialus . . . . 356

CULLEXI . . 290, 356

Puqnax pleurodon 346

Pultenaea 385

ferrug-inea. . . . 262

villosa . . . . 262

villosa var. latifnlia

262

Pvf-nooentria . . . . 209

Pvralidae . . . . 474

Pvrnlidid.Tp . . . . 216-7

Pvrellia naronea . . 203

Pyronota festiva . . 205

Pagt\
Pythiopsis . . 277-9, 284

Quedius ruticollis

375

Redoa. . .. 475-6, 492
subuiarginata. . 492
transiens . . . . 492

Retii'ularia lineata 370

Betzia batilei .... 547-8
boucbardii . . 548
cf. ulstrix . . 290, 351
salteri . . 543, 547-8

Rbabdotoitamus . . 186
brunneus . . 186, 195

claripes 197

qraminis . . . . 202

iautus 189

lividus . . . . 189
■mistipes . . . . 202
rusticanus . . 189
volaticiis .... 189

Rbabdotus .... 152, 162
floridus . . . . 162
reflexus . . . . 162
reflexus var. florida

162

Rliacopteris 292, 298-9,

315, 337

intermedia . . 297-8

roemeri 298

Bhipidomella australis

346

Rhizobius ventralis 400

Rhizophvllum inter-

punetatum 167, 550

Rbodoneura . . 214, 216
scitaria 214

Rbopalocera . . . . 217

Rhyncbonella . . 268, 287

cuboides . . . . 275

pleurodon 275, 290,

346, 368-9

sp 290, 346

Rhytidoaiiatluis . . 152

Rbytisternus . . 152, 164
cvathodenis . . 164
liopleurus . . . . 164
miser . . . . 164, 323
rusrifrons . . . . 323

Rirhardia afrieana 204
Elliottiana . . 204
Ellinttirt)'n x
Pentlandii .... 204

Ttiqema falcafn . . 498
tacta 498

Pilin laiicenlafa . . 496

Robinia psendacacia 32,
36

Ei/ba.ris acanthnsterna

376

XIX.

Page.

Rybaxis atriceps . . 376

electrioa . . . . 370

Sambuc-us nisra . . 457-8

Sangninolites sp. 290, 352

TRIRADIATU.S 290, 352

Sapindaeeae . . 329, 450

SaprolesTiia 277-9, 281-2

284

TImrcti .. .. 27 1

SaprolegTiiaeeae . . 277-8

Sar^s 515, 517

bipunctatus. . .. 523

euprarius 523, 525-6,

528

tlavipes 523

lormosuf . . . . 523

iridalus 523

pallives 542

sp 522-3

Sarotliroerepis .... 168-9
benefica . . . . 169-70

calida 169

civica 169-70

corticalis . . . . 160
gravis .... 169-70
infuscatu . . . . 169
inquinata. . . . 169-70
luctuosa . . . . 169
posticialis .... 1 69

suavis 169

Scaldia depressa . . 35P

sp 290, 356

Scarabaeidae . . . . 3^8

Searaphites. . . . 123, 129

rotundipennis. . 123

Scaritinae 116

Searitini 117, 119, 122

Scenopidae 537

ScheUirienella crenistria

342-3
Schiaopfioria resupi)iata

345, 550

.'itri((tHhi . . . . 550

Scliloirliera tri.juua 450

Sclioenus Mourei . . 260

Scirpus siipimis . . 260

Seopodes 176

aterrimus . . . . 176-7

boops 17(i-7

fla\'ipes . . . . 176-7
griffitbi .. .. 176-7
intermedinfi . . 177
lineatus . . . . 177
si<rillatus .... 17ti-7
aifdneyenuls . . 177
tasinanicus . . 176-7
Spirotrana crpnifollis 233
doritieollis .... 2.33

MIXOR 248

proxima . . . . 248

INDEX.

Pas'P.
Soirotrana vieina . . 248
Seminula 368-9, 544, 551
subtilita 290, 352, 369
Sericustoiuatidae . . 209
SiebtTplla galeatus 549

GLABRA 549

Silphomor]_iba IKi, 177-8
deoipiens . . . . 178

dubia 178

tasmanica . . . . 178

Silvius borealis . . 461

fidiginosiis . . 461-2

hilli 461

indistinctus . . 461

notatus 461-2

psarophanes . . 461-2

sordidus . . . . 462

tabaniformis . . 462

Siraodontus 152, 156, 158

aeneipennis . . 158-9

australis . . . . 158-9

convexus . . . . 159

elongatus . . . . 158

holomelanus . . 158

murrayanus . . 159

orthomoidps 158, 178

transf U2:a . . . . 158-9

Sii'i'lias limbatus . . 249

Sisvmbriuiii ollicinalp 56()

Sorghum 457

Soronia ampbotiformis

377

Spatbella s)i. . . 290, 355

Sphaerexopbus minis 546,

548

Spilomierus 443

Spirifpra bisulpata 290,
294, 347, 369
BOWNiNGEysis 544-5
convoUita . . . . 350
da\-idis . . . 290, 347
'<1uplipipostata 290,
,348
dnplicostaia . . 369

pudora 54(1

r.rsuperaiis . . 351
Immerosa . . . . 348
mosqupiisis 290, 348,
369
piiiU-ui.- 290. 348-9.
369
pingiiis var. elox-

GATA .... 290, 349
jiinsruis var.

rotnndatxs . . 348
pittmaiii . . . . 551
phiDDfulrdla ■ ■ 351
idipatella . . . . .546
radiatiis . . . . 546
vppdi 349

Page.

Spirifera sp. .. 290, 294

striata 290, 347-8

350, 369

STRIATO-COXVOLCTA

290,350
subpittmaiii . . 543
ya.ssensis . . . . 268
Spirit'erina cristata 371
insculpta 294, 351
369
octopHcata . . 370
papibonacea . . 371

Sporades 143-4

spxpunctafus . . l-H

Sporozoa 95

Staehys arvensis . . 566
StapbyHiiidap . . 375-6
Stauroc*pbabis imu-

ohisoni . . . . 546
Stpuolopbns diugo 321
grandieep.s . . 321
pallipps . . . . 321
piceus.. .. 321, 323
quinque-pustulatus

321

rob list us . . . . 321

sexualis . . . . 323

sniaras'dubis . . 321

Stpnoinorplins . . . . 115

Stpnnppria prasina 207

Stibasoma bemiptera 467

Stiebonotus . . . . 121

Wi 122

piceus 122

Stigmodera 531

aenpionrnis . . 223
Rtipa aristighimis . . 179
Stomonaxiis striaticolHs

321

wtraparonus . . . . 309

clvmpnoides . . 361

DAViDis . . 290, 361

Strntiomvia 506, 514.

527-8

anubis .. .. 511, 523

apioula .520

obamaplpon 506, 512
potamidn . . . . 524

sp 524

Stratiomviidap 505-7. 511.
524, 526-9, 532

Strationiys .527-8

pbamaelpon 507, 523-5

fnroata 524

longirnrnis ,524, 526-7

sp. .524, .526

strigata. . . . .524, .527
strigosa , . . . 524
Strpptorb^^lPbus prpnis-
tria var. senilis 343

INDEX.

XX.

Pag'i.

Strongvlus 553

nodularis . . . . 553
pergraoilis . . 553
quadniadiatus 553-4

tenuis 553

Sti'.Nchnos Atherstouei 85

Subula 528

citripes . . . 524, 520
maculata . . . . 524-5
marginata .... 524-5
pallipes . . 524, 528
varia . . . . 524, 52u

SylUdfe 90-1

SyUidea 90-1, 107

Syllides 102

longicirrata . . 102

lonqocirrata . . 102

Syringothr.is . . 3(j8, 370

exsuperans 290, 351

Syllis 90-2. 94, 97, 100,

104

annanJi 94

AUGBNERI .... 98

closterobranchia 90-7
closterohranchia var.

91

compacta .... 91

corru9cans . . 99
coruscans ■ ■ 99, 100

divaricata . . . . 104

djiboutiensis . . 100

exilis 91

ferrueinea . . 101

flumensi'; . . . . 94

.s^raf'ili^ 97

hexaqonifera • ■ 91

byaliua 91

kinbergiana . . 98

Innqissuna . . 97

lussinensis . . 94

niaciooeras . . 91

inonilifnrrais . . 91

niqropunctata 91

nnrmtnnica . . 104

ochracea . . . . 102

PARTfRIENS . . 97-8
PECTINANS . . . . 93-5

prolifera. . . . 94, 104

PUNCTl"LATA ■ . 96

spongirnia . . . . 100
td'-viaefiirmis . . 101
TRUXrATA . . . . 94-5
val•ip!:■.^ta . . Ol-.'i, 98
vivipara .... 98
zebra 101

Tabanidac 460, 466-7, 505

Tabanus 460, 463

aprepes 464

australis . . . 465

Page.

Tabanus badius

. 465

batchelori . . .

. 464-5

brevior ....

. 465

briabanensis

. 466

criipserqthrv^ .

. 465

daphoenus

465-6

diemcnensis

. 466

dorsobimaculat

(s 464

duplonotatus .

. 464

frogKatti . . .

466-7

fuqitivus . . .

. 465

gentilis ....

466-7

qriseohirsutus .

. 462

hdU

. 465

innotabilis . . .

. 464

leucopteius

. 462

milsoni

. 465

milsonis . . .

. 465

minor

. 466

MINU-CULUS .

. 46(i

neogernianieus

465

NEOPALPALI.S .

. 465

nigTinianus . .

465-6

pallipennis . .

463-4

palpalis . . .

. 465

parvicalloswi .

. 464

regis-georgii .

. 466

ruflnotatus

. 464

spadix. . . .

. 466

Tachys

. 151

bifoveatus

. 151

brevicornis

. 151

captus

. 151

flindei-si' . . .

. 151

semistriatus

. 151

setiqer

. 321

triangularis

. 321

Taraktogenos Blumei 459

Teara contraria

. 531

corallipliora .

. 499

crocea . . . .

. 485

deficila . . .

. 486

edirardsi . . .

. 486

erebndei' . . ■

. 499

farennides

. 497

fimbriatu . . .

. 479

ivdec'ira . . .

. 486

vura

. 495

rottuitdata. . .

. 495

toqato

. 486

Tecomn cnnensis .

. 36

radiean? . . .

. .'56

Tela nnartdidf.

. 493

. puxiUn

. 493

Te>iehrloivd„c . . 223. 230

Tenebrioninac. . .

230-1

Teraphus ....

. 156

Teraphif! ... .

. 1.56

arqutnroides .

. 157

melbournensis.

. 157

Page.
Terebra 362

Terebratula ainimdala

347;
hast at u . . . . 346
pleurodon ■ ■ ■ ■ 346

salteri 54/

subtilita . . . . 352

ulstrix . . . . 351

Tereticaules . . . . 261

Tetragonoderini 120, 168

Thamniscus sp. 290, 342

T)ienarotes 137

bicolor 137

discoidalis 138, 178

metallicus. . . . 320

Thenarotidnis . . . . 135

Therapis 156

Therevidae 505

Thoe fusiformii . . 91
Thoraeophenis . . 237
Thrips striatus . . 180

Thyrididae 215-7

Tineidae 474

Tipulidae 183

Tisiphone abeona 221, 531
rawnsleyi . . 221, 531
Tortricidae . . . . 474
Tortrieina . . . . 217
Trechini .... 119, 143-4

Trechodes 143-5

Trechus .. .. 138, 143-6

ater 145

atriceps . . . . 145

AUSTBINUS 144, 147

baldiensis . . 144, 150
bipartitum 144, 150

BLACKBURNI 144, 149

BREVINOTATUS 144.

148-9

CARTERT . . 143, 147
CASTELNAUl . . 143.

145-6
concolor . . . . 145

coxi 144. 147

diemenensis 143, llii
gibbipennis 144, 1511
LEAl .. .. 143,145

LONGINOTATUR 144,

148-9

MACLEAYI . . 144, 150

monolobus . . 148
nitens . . 144. 149-50
PACiFici.'; 143. 145-6
ROBUSTU.s 143, 145-6
rufllabris . . . . 145
scapularis . . 148
simsoni . . 144, 147-8
solidior . . . . 146
subornatellns 143,

145, 147

XXI.

INDEX.

Ti-cehus tiibiuaniae

Page.

14-i,

14'J-5U

vR'tunae . . 143,. 147

Trematosspua. . . . a4()-7

Tribakis auslraiis. . 377

teae 377

Ti-K-betra niarsinalis 487
T.'icliinellulae . . . . 553
Trichoceuhulua anal its

551)
. . . 186
. . . . •_'0()
. . . 551)
.... 556
.... 557
(inuicolle

Ti'icboitamus

Trichoptera. .

Triehosoiiia
brevwoUe
columbae

Tricbasomum

tenwssiinum
Tricbostronsylii lae
Tric'bostror.uylinae
Tricbosti'ons.yhis .

nodularis . . .

pergracilis

quadriradialus

tenuis ... .
Tridens Havus . . .
Trisonotliops. .

lineata

lons'iplasa

Tris'onotbops ))acitioa 171

vitti)>ennis. . .
Trinufleus ehirkui .
Triplectidi

178

271

209

Trocboceras sp. 2LIU, 363

559
557
553
553
553
553
553
554
553
457
170-1
178
178

Trcgo^itidae
Trupi(loft'i)bakis
Trypauusyllis .

krui'niii. . .

nchardi

tac'uiaelonuis.

zebra . . 101
'I'l'vplasma . . .

sp 290

'I'urri(/a iinufid
Typosyllis . . 90

pulvinata . .

truncata . .

Ulomoides . . . .
Ungnadia spesiosa
Urocomu baliolalia

limbaUfi
Uropetala carovei

Ventilas'o viuiinali;
Vertebraria. . .

Pa-e.
377

181
101
101
101
101

:, 107

270
341
496

93-9
95

94-6

225
450
487
487
208

447
306

Wingia 216

Wurtbenia f eaiialieuhUa
357

Xantbocnemis zelandica

208
Xantbophaea . . . . 170
angustubi . . . . 178
bracbinoderus 170-1
infuscata . . . . 170
pilulosa . . . . 171

Page.
Xautliiipbaea setosa 17U-1

vitlala 171

Xautburrbuea . . . . 425

XenoiiKirplia 532, 536-7

UH-sl rails . . . . 538

yiaiidieornis 533, 537

539

if Ijlifo rutin ■ ■ 537-8

Xyleiites 216

Xybiuiyia 529

inai-ulata . . . . 515
iiiurt/iiiuta . . 525

sp 524

varia 525

Xylopbagus . . . . 528
murqinata ■ ■ ■ ■ 524

laria 524

varitid 525

Yvania koniiK-kii 291, 358

Zabraebia pulita 524, 529

sp 524

Zabrinae 116

Zamia .. .. .. 226, 424

Praseri . / . . 425

iutesrifolia . . 425

muricata . . . . 425

Zapbrentis.. .. 292, 368

fulleui 290, 293, 338

sp. . 290, 293, 339

suiiipbuens 290, 338

Zu))iiin 120

Zygacnidae 217

(Printed off 1st March, 1921.)

Ptoc. Linn. Soc. N.8.W., 1920.

PlATK XXVI.

E. E. Chase, del

Holostomnvi repens, n.sjj.

Feoc. Lin-x. Soc. N.bW.,1920.

Plate xx\ii.

Metainoi-phosis of Mclopoiiia luhriccps Macq.

a

E-i

<

73

J
o

73

^^ .«iiiiP^!(^^

fs

■&■

pROC LiNx. Soc. N.S.W., 1920.

Pr^ATE XXIX.

1-4 Metoponia geinina, n.sp. 5-6 J/, ritbriceps Macq. 7-11 Cliironiyza prisfa Walker/j|_,,

Feoc. Linn. Soc. N S.W., 192U.

Plate xxx.

(A)

13

12-16 Cliiroinrza australis Macq. 17-22 Borcoides subulala, n.sp.

pROC. LiNx. Soc. N.S.W., 11)20.

PlATK XXXI.

10

13

14

^,

r

15

16

17

18

19

20 ^^^^

21 22

Jliildle Pnlaeozoie Brachiopods from New South Wales.

(Issued 25th June, 1920.)

f/J^ Vol. XLV.
/I Part 1.

Ui

No. 177.

'THE

PROCEEDINGS

OF PHE

LinnEfin Society

OF

New South Wales

For the Year

1 9 2 O

FAUT I. (pp. 1-184.)

CONTAINING PAPERS READ IN

MAItVil-APBlL [ill part).
WITH THIRTEEN PLATES

[Plates i.-xiii.]

St d ne y :

printed and published for the society by

THE SYDNEY AND MELBOURNE PUBLISHING CO.. LTD.,
11 Wilmot Street, Sydney,

AND

SOLD BY THE SOCIETY.

1920.

PRICE 10/9

Agenl ill Europe :

Messrs. Dulau & Co., 34-36 Margaret St., Cavendish Square.
]^fy London, W.

d

NOTICE.

With 'the exception of Volumes I.-VI. of the Proceedings — of whii-b the Society's
stock was totally destroyed in the Garden Palace Fire — the Publications of the
Liuuean Society of N.S.W. may be obtained at the Society's Hall, Ithaca Road,
Elizabeth Bay, Sydney, or from Dulau & Co., 34-3C Mai-garet St., Cavendish
Stjuare, London, W., at the following prices: —

FIRST SERIES.

Proceedings for 1882, Vol. VII.— Part 1, 7s. 6d.; Part 2, 10s.; Part 3, 5s.;

Part 4, 10s.
Proceedings for 1883, Vol VIII.— Part 1, 10s.; Part 2, 5s.; Part 3, 7s.; Part

4, 8s.
Proceedings for 1884, Vol. IX.— Part 1, 8s.; Part 2, 12s.; Part 3, £1 5s.; Part

4, £1 5s. -

Proceedings for 1885, Vol. X.— Part 1, 12s. ; Part 2, 7s 6d. ; Part 3, 15s. ; Part

4, 17s. 6d.

SECOND SERIES.

Proceedings for 1886, Vol. I.— Part 1, 10s. 6d'. ; Part 2, 12s.; Part 3. 13s.;

Part 4, 12s. 6d.
Proceedings for 1887, Vol. Il.^Part 1. 7s.; Part 2, 8s.; Part 3, 12s.; Part 4,

£1 7s. i
Proceedings for ISSS, Vol. III.— Part 1, los. ; Part 2. £1 4s.; Part 3, £1; Part

4. 18s.
Proceedings for 1889, Vol. IV.— Part l^lls.; Part 2. 16s.; Part 3, 19s.; Part

4, lis.
Proceedings for 1890, Vol. V.— Part 1, lis. ; Part 2, 9s. ; Part 3, 9s. ; Part 4, 9s.
Proceedings for 1891, Vol. VI.— Part 1, 10s. ; Part 2, 9s. 6d. ; Part 3, 17s. ;, Part

4, 7s. 6d.
Proceedings for 1892, Vol. VII.— Part 1, 6s. 6d.; Part 2, 4s 6d.; Part 3, Ss. :

Part 4, 8s.
Proceedings for 1893, Vol. VIII.— Part 1, 5s.; Part 2. lis.; Part 3, 6s.: Part

4. 9s.
Proceedings for 1894, Vol. IX.— Part 1. 12s.; Part 2. 12s.; Part 3, 13s.: Part

4, Ks.
Proceedings for 189.5, Vol. X.— Part 1, los.; Part 2, Ss. 6d. ; Part 3, 10s..

Supplement, Is. 6d.; Part 4, 12s.

Proceedings for 1896.— Part 1. 9s. ; Supplement, 2s. 6d. ; Part 2, 6s. 6d. ; Part 3,

7s. 6d.: Part 4. £1 7s. 6d.
Proceedings for 1897.— Part 1, 10s. ; Part 2, 8s. 6d. ; Part 3, 9s. ; Part 4, 12s. 6d.
Proceedings for 1898.- Part 1, 3s. ; Part 2, 6s. ; Part 3. 12s. ; Part 4. 14s.
Proceedings for 1899.— Part 1, 12s. 6d. ; Part 2, 12s. : Part 3, 10s. ; Part 4, 10s. 6d.

Proceedings for 1900— Part 1, Ss. ; Part 2, 10s. 6d. ; Part 3, 10s. 6d. ; Part 4.

17s. 6d.
Proceedings for 1901.— Part 1, 10s. ; Part 2. 9s. ; Part .3, os.; Part 4, 17s. 6d.
Proceedings for 1902.— Part 1, 7s. ; Part 2, 7s. 6d. ; Part 3, 7s. 6d. ; Supplement,

3s. ; Part 4, 15s.
Proceedings for 1903.— Part 1, 9s.; Part 2, 12s. 6d. ; Part 3, 14s.: Part 4, 15s.
Proceedings for" 1904.— Part 1, 10s. ; Part 2, 7s. 6d.; Part 3. 9s.; Part 4, 10s.
Proceedings for 1905.— Part 1, with Supplement, 7s.; Part 2, 10s.; Part 3, 12s.

6d. ; Part 4, with Supplement, 10s. 6d.
Proceedings for 1906.— Part 1, 12s. 6d. ; Part 2, 12s. 6d. ; Part 3, 12s. 6d.;

Part 4, 15s.
Proceedings for 1907.— Part 1, Ss. ; Part 2, 8s. 6d. ; Part 3, 15s. ; Part 4, ISs.
Proceedings for 1908.— Part 1, 7s.; Part 2, 9s.; Part 3. 14s.; Part 4, 12s. 6d.
Proceedings for 1909.— Part 1, 12s.; Part 2, 17s.; Part 3, 14s.; Part 4, 16s. 6d.
Proceedings for 1910.— Part l,,lls. ; Part 2, Us. ; Part 3, 7s. ; Part 4, 12s. 6d.
Proceedings for 1911.— Part 1, 9s. 6d. ; Part 2, 9s. 6d.; Part 3, 9s. 6d. ; Part

4, 10s.
Proceedings for 1912.— Part 1, Ss. 6d.: Part 2, 25s.: Part 3, 12s. 6d.; Part 4, 15s.
Proceedings for 1913.— Part 1, 14s. : Part 2, 7s. 6d. ; Part 3, 6s. ; Part 4. 13s.
Proceedings for 1914.— Part 1, 13s.; Part 2, 17s.; Part 3, 25s.; Part 4, 19s.
Proceedings for 1915.— Part 1, 17s.; Part 2, 12s. 6d. ; Part 3, 10s.; Part 4, lis.
Proceedings for 1916.— Part 1, 10s.; Part 2, 12s.; Part 3, 15s.; Part 4, 19s.
Proceedings for 1917.— Part 1, 14s.; Part 2, 9s.; Part 3, 12s. ed.; Part 4, 16s. 9d.
Proceedings for 1918.— Part 1, 20s.; Part 2, 14s.; Part 3, 21s.; Part 4. 19s.
Proceedmgs for 1919.— Part 1, 12s. Od. ; Part 2, lis. 6d. ; Part 3, 17s. 6d.;

Part 4, 13s.
Proceedings for 1920.— Part 1, 10s. 9d.

The Macleay Memorial Volume' [issued October 13th, 1893]. Ro.yal 4to , ll
and 308 pages, with Portrait, and forty-two plates. Price £3 3s. ^

Descriptive Catalogue of Australian Fishes. By William Maeleay, F.L.S.
F.L.S. [1881]. A few copies only. Price £1 net.

The Transactions op the Entomological Society op New South Wales,.
2 vols., 8vo. [Vol, I, five Parts, 1863-6G; Vol. ii., five Parts, 1809-73; all pub-
lislied], price £2, net, are also obtainable, but neither the Parts nor the Volumes
are sold separately.

FR0CDEDING5, 1920. PART 1

CONTENTS.

PAGES.

Presidential Address, delivered at the Forty-fifth Annual Meeting,

31st March, 1920, l)y J.J. Fletcher. M.'a., B.Sc. (Plates i.-viii.) 1-47

Kopiness in Wattle Bark Infusions. By R. GREiG-SinTH, D.Sc,

Macleay Bacteriologist to the Society. (Plate ix.) 52-89

Australian Syllidae, Eusyllidae, and Autolytidae. By W. A. Has-

WELL, M.A., D.Sc, P.R.S., Emeritus Professor of Biologj\ the ^

University of Sydney. (Plates s.-xiii.) 90-112

The Cardbidae of Tasmania. By TliOHAS G. Sloane. (Four Text-

fi.gures.) 113-178

A New Genus of Australian Delphacidae (Homoptera). By F. Muir,
F.E.S. (Cominunicated by E. TF. Ferytison. M.B., Ch.M.)
(One Text-figure) . 181-182

An Undescribed Species of Clytocosmu$ Skuse. By C. P. Alexander,
Ph.D. (Communicated by R. J. Tillyard, M.A., D.Sc. F.L.S.,
F.E.S.) 183-1S4

Hon. Treasurer's Balance Sheet 48-50

Elections and Announcements 47, 51, 179

Notes and Exhibits 179-180

(Issued 16th August, 1920.)

f/n^ Vol. XLV.

Part •_'. No. 178.

THE

PROCEEDINGS

Linnmn Society

OF

New South Wales

For the Year

19 20

PAHT n. {pp. iSo-.":!?.)

CONTAINING PAPERS READ IN

APRIL (i» part)— JULY.

WITH FIVE PLATES

[Plates xiv.-xviitt.j

S Y D N E ir :
PRINTED AND PUBLISHED FOB THE SOCIETY nr

THE SYDNEY AND MELBOURNE PUBLISHING CO., LTD.,
11 Wilmot Street, Sydney,

AND

SOLD BY THE SOCIETY.

1920.

PRICE 7/6

Agent m Europe .

\l Messrs. Ddlau & Co., 34-36 Margaret St., Cavendish Square. .1/

^fy . London, W. Vj(^

NOTICE.

With the exception of Volumes I.- VI. of the Proceedings — of which the Society's
stock was totally destroyed in the Garden Palace Fire — the Publications of the
Linnean Society of N.S.W. may be obtained at the Society's Hall, Ithaca Road,
Elizabeth Bay, Sydney, or from Dulau & Co., 34-36 Margaret St., Cavendish
Square, London. W., at the following prices: —

FIRST SERIES.

Proceedings for 1882, Vol. VII.— Part 1, 7s. 6d. ; Part 2, 10s.; Part 3, 5s.;

Part 4 10s.
Proceedings' for 1883, Vol. VIII.— Part 1, IDs.; Part 2, 5s.: Part 3, 7s.; Part

4, 8s.
Proceedings for 1884, Vol. IX.— Part 1, 8s.; Part 2, 12s.; Part 3, £1 5s.; Part

4. £1 5s.
, Proceedings for 1885, Vol. X.— Part 1. 12s. ; Part 2, 7s. 6d. : Part 3, 15s. ; Part

4, 17s. 6d.

SECOND SERIES.

Proceedings for 1886, Vol. I.— Part 1, IDs. 6d.; Part 2, 12s.; Part 3, 13s.;

Part 4, 12s. 6d.
Proceedings for 1887, Vol. II.— Part 1, 7s.; Part 2, 8s.; Part 3, 12s.; Part 4

£1 7s.
Proceedings for 1888, Vol. III.— Part 1. 15s.; Part 2, £1 4s.; Part 3, £1; Part

4, 18s. ,

Proceedings for 1889. Vol. IV.— Part 1, lis.; Part 2, 16s.; Part 3, 19s.; Part

4. lis.
Proceedings for 1890. Vol. V.— Part 1, lis. ; Part 2. 9s. ; Part 3, 9s. ; Part 4, 9s.
Proceedings for 1891, Vol. VI.— Part 1, 10s. : Part 2, 9s. 6d. ; Part 3, 17s. ; Part

4, 7s. 6d.
Proceedings for 1892, Vol. VII — Part 1, 6e. 6d. ; Part 2, 4s 6d.: Part 3, 8s.;

Part 4, 8s.
Proceedings for 1893, Vol. VIII.— Part 1, .5s.; Part 2, lis.; Part 3, 6s.; Part

4 9s.
Proceedings for 1894. Vol. IX.— Part 1. 12s.; Part 2, 12s.; Part 3, 13s.; Part

4, 8s.
Proceedings for 189.'>. Vol. X.— Part 1, 15s.; Part 2, Ss. 6d.; Part 3. 10s..

Supplement, Is. 6d.; Part 4, 12s.

Proceedings for 1896.— Part 1, 9s. ; Supplement, 2s. 6d. ; Part 2, 6s. 6d. : Part 3,

7s. 6d.; Part 4, £1 7s. 6d.
Proceedings for 1897.— Part 1, 10s. ; Part 2. 8s. 6d. ; Part 3, 9s. ; Part 4, 12s. 6d.
Proceeding.-; for 1898.— Part 1, 3s. ; Part 2, 6s. : Part 3. 12s. ; Part 4, 14s.
Proceedings for 1899.— Part 1. 12s. 6d. ; Part 2, 12s. ; Part 3. 10s. ; Part 4, 10s. 6d.

BY W N. BEXSON, W. S. DtJX^ AND W. B. BROWNE.

317

21. Jaquet, J. B. — The Irou Ore Deposits of New South Wales. Mem. (ieol.

Surv. N.S.W., vi., 1901, pp. 63-71.

22. De Geer. — A Geochrouology of the last 12,000 yeais. Compte K«u(lu. Cou-

gres Geol. Iiiternat. (Stockholm), 1910, pp. 241-253.
-See ((/.so Sayles, R. W. — "The Squantum Tillite." Bull. Mus. Comp.
Zool. Harvard, Ivi., No. 2, pp. 141-175; Seasonal Deposition in
Aqueo-glacial Deposits. Mem. Mils. Cump. Zool. Harvard, xlvii.,
No. 1. 1919.

23. Benson, W. N. — The Geology and Petrology of the Great Serpentine Belt

of N.S.W. Part iii. These Proceedings, xxxviii., 1913, pp. G62-
724.

24. Anderson, E M. and Radley, E. G. — The Pitclistones of Mu)l and their

Genesis. (Juart. .Journ. Geol. Soc, Ixxi., 1915, pp. 205-217.

25. Harker, a. — The Tertiary Igneous Rock.s of Skye. Memoirs Geo!. Survey

of Great Britain, 1904.
2(). Ben,son. W N. — The Geolouy and Petrology of the Great Serpentine Belt
of N.S.TV. Part \-ii. These Proceedings, xliii., 1918, p. 320.

27. Gilbert, G. K. — The Geology of the Henry Mountains, 1877, pp. 135-8.

28. Benson, W. N.^The Geology and Petrology of the Great Serpentine Belt

of N.S.W. Part v. These Proceedings, xl.. 1915, pp. ,540-B24.

29. Part ii., Ibid., xx-xviii., 1913. pp. 569-596.

29a. Andrews, E. C. — The (}eographicaI Unity of Eastern Australia. Prne. Hoy.

Soc. N.S;W.. sliv., 1910. pp. 420-480.
29b. . Notes on a Model of New England. Ibid., xlvi.. 1912, pp. 143-1.55

(and several other papers by the same author).

EXPLANATION OF PLATES XVII.-XVTIff.

Plate xvii. — Geolo<jical Map of the Ciu-rabiiViulii District. .
Plate xviia.— Topographical Map of the Ciirrabnbula District.

PROCEEDINGS. 1920. PART 1

CONTENTS.

PA0E8.

Descriptions ot Australian Flies of the family A^llidae [Diptera],
with synon>niis and notes. By G. H. Hardv. (Sixteen Text-
figures) 185-202

Report on the Neuropteroid Insects of the Hot Springs Region,
N.Z., in relation to the problem of Trout Food. By R. J.
TiLLYARD, M.A., D.Sc, F.L.S., F.E.S., Linnean Macleay Fellow
of the Society in Zoology. (Two Text-figures) 205-213

The Panorpoid Complex. Additions and Corrections to Part 3.
By R. J. Tn-LTARD, M.A., D.Sc, F.L.S., F.E.S., Linnean Mac-
leay Fellow of the Society in Zoology. (One Text-figure.) . . 214-217

Notes on Some Australian Tenebrionidae, with descriptions of new
species; — also of a new genus and species of Buprestidae. By
H. J. Carter, B.A.. F.E.S. (Fourteen Text -figures) .... 222-249

On the male Genitalia of some Robber-flies belonging to the sub-
family AsUinac [Diptera] By G. H. Harby. (Twelve Text-
figure.O ... 1 ' 250-259

Notes from the Botanic Gardens, Sydney. By A. A. Hamilton . . 260-2b4

The Atrypidae of New South Wales, with references to those re-
corded from other States of Australia. By J. Mitchell and
W. S. Dux. (Plates xiv.-xvi,, and Five Text-figures.) .... 266-276

Note on certain variations ot the Sporoeyst in a species of Sapro-
Jegnia By Maejorie I. Collins, B.Sc. Linnean Macleay Fel-
low of the Society in Botany. (Eleven Text-figures.) .... 277-284

The Geology and Petrologj- of the Great Serpentine Belt of New
Soutii Wales. Part ix. The Geology-. Palaeontology and
Petrogi-aphy of tlie Currabubula District, with notes on ad-
jacent regions. By Professor W. N. Bekson, B.A., D.Sc,
F.G.S., W. S. Dux. and W. R. Browke, B.Sc. Section A.—
General Geology (\V. N. Benson).) (Plates xvii.-xviia. and
Xine Text-figures.) 285-317

Special General Meeting (Macleay Cenliiiary) 218-220

Elections and Aunouiicenicnts 203, 221, 265

Notes and Exhibits 203-4, 221, 265

CORRKiKNDUM.

Proceedings, 1920, Part. I.
Page 43, for line 48 (fourth from bottom) read whether, if one pair of pinna<;
persbts at a certain stage that pair is always the »

(Issued 8th November, 1920.)

^Js" Vol. XLV.
Part 3.

f

kVi

No. 179.

"■^v^

^i\1

THE

PROCEEDINGS

OF THE

LiMMEnN Society

OF

New South Wales

Fob thk Year

1920

PAUT III. (pp. 317-472.)

CONTAINING PAPERS READ IN

AUGUST— OCTOBER {in part).
WITH- EIGHT PLATES

[Plates xviii.-xxv.]

S r D N K 1' :

Feinted and published for the society by

THE SYDNEY AND MELBOURNE PUBLISHING CO., LTD.,
11 Wilmot Street, Sydney,

AND

SOLD BY THE SOCIETY.

1920.

PRICE 9/

^-

Agent in Europe :

Messrs. Dulau & Co., 34-36 Margaret St., Cavendish Square,
^fy/ London, W.

vll

The Linnean Society of New South Wales.

LIST OF THE OFFICERS AND COUNCIL, 1920^1.

President :

J. J. Fletcher, M.A., B.Sc.
Vice-Presidents :
Professor H. G. Chapman, M.D., B.S. A. G. Hamilton.
W. W. Froggatt, F.L.S. C. Hedley, F.L.S.

Hon. Treasurer: J. H. Campbell, M.B.E., Royal Mint, Sydney.
Secretary: A. B. Walkom, D.Sc.

Council :
R. T. Baker, F.L.S. A. G. Hamilton.

R. H. Cambage F.L.S. Professor W. A. Haswell, M.A., D.Sc,

J. H. Campbell.'M.B.E. F.R.S-

J. E. Carne, F.G.S. C. Hedley, F-L.S.

H. J- Carter, B.A., F.E.S. A. F. Basset Hull. ,

Professor H. G. Chapman, M.D., B.S. A. H. S. Lucas, M.A., B.Sc.

Sir T. W. Edgeworth David, K.B.E., J. H. Maiden, I.S.O. F.R.S.

C.M.G., D.S.O., BA., D.Sc, F.R.S. t. Steel.
T. Storie Dixson, M.B., Ch.M. A. B. Walkom, D.Sc.

J. J. Fletcher, M.A., B-Sc G. A. Waterhouse, B.Sc, B.E. F.E.S-

W. W. Froggatt, F.L.S.

Auditor: F. H. Rayment, FjC.P.A.

NOTICE.

With the exception of Volumes I.-VI. of the Proceedings — of which the Soeietjf's
stock was totally destroyed in the Garden Palace Fire — the Publications of the
Linnean Society of N.S.W. may be obtained at the Society's Hall, Ithaca Road,
Elizabeth Bay, Sydney, or from Dulau & Co., 34-36 Margaret St., Cavendish
Square, London, W., at the following prices: —

FIRST SERIES.

Proceedings for 1882. Vol. VII.— Part 1, 7s. 6d.: Part 2, 10s7; Part 3, 5s. ^

Part 4, 10s.
Proceedings for 1883, Vol. VIII.— Part 1, 10s.; Part 2, 5s.; Part 3, 7s.; Part

4. 8s.
Proceedings for 1884, Vol. IX.— Part 1, 8s.; Part 2, 12s.: Part 3, £1 5s.; Part

4, £1 OS.
Proceedings for 1885, Vol. X.— Part 1. 12s.; Part 2, 7s. 6d.; Part 3, 15s. ; Part

4, 17s. 6d.

SECOND SERIES.

Proceedings for 1886, Vol. I.— Part 1, 10s. 6d. ; Part 2, 12s.; Part 3, 13s.:

Part 4, 12s. 6d.
Proceedings for 1887, Vol. II.— Part 1, 7s.; Part 2, 8s.; Part 3, 12s.: Part 4

£1 7s.
Proceedings for 1888, Vol. III.— Part 1, 15s.; Part 2, £1 4s.: Part 3, £1: Part

4, 18s.

Proceedings for 1889, Vol. IV.— Part 1, lis.; Part 2, 16s.; Part 3, 19s.; Part

4, lis.
Proceedings for 1890, Vol. V.— Part 1, lis. ; Part 2, 9s. ; Part 3, 9s. ; Part 4, 9s.
Proceedings for 1891, Vol. VI.— Part 1, 10s. ; Part 2, 9s. 6d. ; Part 3, 17s. ; Part

4, 7s. 6d.
Proceedings for 1892, Vol. VII.— Part 1, 6s. 6d. ; Part 2, 4s. 6d. ; Part 3, 8s.;

Part 4, 8s.
Proceedings for 1893, Vol. VIII.— Part 1, 5s.; Part 2, lis.; Part 3, 6s.; Part

4 9s.
Proceedings for 1894, Vol. IX.— Part 1, 12s.; Part 2, 12s.; Part 3, 13s.; Part

4, 8s.
Proceedings for 1895, Vol. X.— Part 1, 15s.; Part 2, 8s. 6d. ; Part 3, 10s.,

Supplement. Is. 6d. ; Part 4, 12s.
Proceedings for 1896.— Part 1, 9s. ; Supplement, 2s. 6d. ; Part 2, 6s. 6d. ; Part 3,

7s 6d.; Part 4, £1 7s. 6d.
Proceedings for 1897.— Part 1, 10s. ; Part 2, 8s. 6d. ; Part 3, 9s. i Part 4, 12s. 6d.
Proceedings for 1898.— Part 1, 3s. ; Part 2, 6s. ; Part 3, 12s. ; Part 4, 14s.
Proceedings for 1899.— Part 1, 12s. 6d. ■, Part 2, 12s. ; Part 3, 10s. ; Part 4, 10s. 6d.
Proceedings for 1900— Part 1, 8s.; Part 2, 10s. 6d. ; Part 3, 10s. 6d. ; Part 4.

17s. 6d.
Proceedings for 1901.— Part 1, 10s.; Part 2. 9s.; Part 3, 5s.; Part 4, 17s. 6d.
Proceedings for 1902.— Part 1, 7s. ; Part 2, 7s. 6d. ; Part 3, 7s. 6d. ; Supplement,

3s. ; Part 4, 15s.
Proceedings for 1903.— Part 1, 9s.: Part 2, 12s. 6d. ; Part 3, 14s.; Part 4, 15s.
Proceedings for 1904.— Part 1, 10s.; Part 2, 7s. 6d. ; Part 3, 9s.; Part 4, 10s.
Proceedings for 1905.— Part 1, with Supplement, 7s.; Part 2, 10s.; Part 3, 12s.

6d. ; Part 4, with Supplement, 10s. 6d.
Proceedings for 1906.— Part 1, 12s. 6d.; Part 2, 12s. 6d. ; Part 3, 12s. 6d.;

Part 4, 15s.
Proceedings for 1907.— Part 1, 8s. ; Part 2, 8s. 6d. ; Part 3, 15s. ; Part 4, 18s.
Proceedings for 1908.— Part 1, 7s. ;, Part 2, 9s.; Part 3, 14s.; Part 4, 12s. 6d.
Proceedings for 1909.— Part 1, 12s. ; Part 2, its. ; Part 3, 14s. ; Part 4, 16s. 6d.
Proceedings for 1910.— Part 1, lis. ; Part 2, lis. ; Part 3, 7s. ; Part 4, 12s. 6d.
Proceedings for 1911.— Part 1, 9s. 6d.; Part 2, 9s. 6d. ; Part 3, 9s. 6d. ; Part

4, 10s.
Proceedings for 1912.— Part 1. 8s. 6d.; Part 2, 25s.; Part 3, 12s. 6d.; Part 4, 15s.
Proceedings for 1913.— Part 1, 14s.; Part 2, 7s. 6d.; Part 3, 6s.; Part 4, 13s.
Proceedings for 1914.— Part 1, 13s.; Part 2, 17s.; Part 3, 25s.; Part 4, 19s.
Proceedings for 1915.— Part 1, 17s.; Part 2, 12s. 6d. ; Part 3, 10s.; Part 4, lis.
Proceedings for 1916.— Part 1, 10s.; Part 2, 12s.; Part 3, 15s.; Part 4, 19s.
Proceedings for 1917.— Part 1. 14s.; Part 2, 9s.; Part 3, 12s. 6d.; Part 4, 16s. 9d.
Proceedings for 1918.— Part 1, 20s.; Part 2, 14s. ; Part 3, 21s.; Part 4, 19s.
Proceedings for 1919.— Part 1, 12s. 6d. ; Part 2, lis 6d. ; Part 3, 17s. 6d.;

Part 4, 13s.
Proceedings for 1920.— Part 1, 10s. 9d.: Part 2, 7s, 6d.; Part 3, 9s.

The Macleay Memorial Volume [issued October 13th, 1893]. Royal 4to., li.
and 308 pages, with Portrait, and forty-two plates. Price £3 3s.

Descriptive Catalogue of Australian Fishes. By William Macleay, F.L.S.
P.L.S. [1881]. A few copies only. Price £1 net.

The Transactions op the Entomological Society of New South Wales,.
2 vols., 8vo. [Vol. I, five Parts, 1863-66; Vol. ii., five Parts, 1869-73; all pub-
lished], price £2, net, are also obtainable, but neither the Parts nor the Volumes
are sold separately.

PROCEEDINGS, 1920. PART 3

CONTENTS.

Pages.
A List of the Species of Australian Carabidcw which range beyond Aus-
tralia and its Dependent Islands . By Thomas G. Si>oane 320-323

On dental incrustations and the so-called "Gold-Plating" of Sheep's

Teeth. By Thos. Steei ^ 324-328

On the Structure of the Resin-secreting Glands in some Australian Plants.
By Marjobie I. Collins, B.Sc, Linnean Macleay Fellow of the
Society in Botany. (Twelve Text-figures.) 329-336

The Geology and Petrology of the Great Serpentine Belt of New South
Wales. Part ix. The Geology, Palaeontology and Petrography
of the Currabubula District, with Notes on Adjacent Regions. By
Professor W. N. Benson, B.A., D.Sc, F.G.S., W. S. Dux, and
"W. R. Browne, B.Sc.

Section B. — Palaeontology. (W. S. Dun and W. N. Benson).
Appendix by F. Chapman, A.L.S. ( Plates xviii.-xxiv. ; and Eight

Text-figures. ) 337-374

Section C.—Peh-ography. (W. R. Browne). (Plate xxv.). .. 405-423

Descriptions of New Species of Australian Coleoptera. Part xvi. By

Arthur M. Lea, F.E.S 375-403

The Chemical Examination of Macrogamia spiralis. By James M.
Petrie, D.Sc, F.I.C. Linnean Macleay Fellow of the Society in
Biochemistrj' • 424442

Two New Hymenoptera of the Superfamily Proctotrypidae from Aus-
tralia. By Alax p. Dodd. (Communicated by W. TF. Frongatt,
F.L.S.) ■. ■.. .. 443-44P

Cyanogenesis in Plants. Part iv. The Hydrocyanic Acid of Hetero-
dendron- — A Fodder Plant of New South Wales. By James M.
Petrie, D.Sc, F.I.C, Linnean Macleay Fellow of the Society in
Biochemistry 447-459

Notes (m Australian Tahanidae. By Eust.-vce W. Ferguson, ^I.B.,

Ch.M., and Gerald F. Hn^L, F.E.S 460-467

Descriptions of New Forms of Butterflies from the South Pacific. By

G. A. Waterhouse, B.Sc, B.E., F.E.S 468-471

Elections and Announcements 318, 404, 472

Notes and Exhibits 318-9, 404, 472

(Issiced 7th March, 1921.)

f/l^ Vol. XLV.
'^^ Part 4.

f

%

No. 180.

THE

PROCEEDINGS

OF THE

LinriEnri Society

OF

New .South Wales

Fob the Year

1920

VAV.T ir. {pp. 473-653, i.-xxi.)

CONTAINING PAPERS READ IN

OCTOBER (in part)~~NOVEMBER.
WITH SIX PLATES
[Plates xxvi . -xxxi . ]

Sydney:

printed and published foe the sooiett by

THE SYDNEY AND MELBOURNE PUBLISHING CO., LTD..

11 Wilmot Street, Sydney,

AND

SOLD BY THE SOCIETY.

1921.

PRICE 11/

Agent in Europe :

. . Messrs. Dulau & Co., 34-36 Margaret St., Cavendish Square. , I J

l^J^ London, W. \jJ!^

7i^^ ^IK

The Linnean Society of New South Wales.

LIST OF THE OFFICERS AND COUNCIL, 1920-21.
Prasideat:
J. J. Fletcher, M.A., B.Sc.
Vice-Presidents :
Professor H. G. Chapman, M.D., B.S. A. G. Hamilton.
W. W. Froggatt, F.L.S- C. Hedley. F.L.S.

Hon. Treasurer: J. H. Campbell, M.B.E., Royal Mint, Sydney.
Secretary: A. B. WaUcom, D.Sc.

Council:
R. T. Baker, F.L.S. A. G. Hamilton.

R. H. Cambage F.L.S. Professor W. A. Haswell, MA.., D.Sc,

J. H. CampbeU. M.B.E. F.R.S.

J. E. Carne, F.G.S. C. Hedley, F.L.S.

H. J. Carter, B.A., F.E.S. A. F. Basset Hull.

Prof«ssor H. G. Chapman, M.D., B.S. A. H. S. Lucas, MA.., B.Sc.

Sir T. W. Edgeworth David, K.B.E.. j. h. Maiden, I.S.O. F.R.S.

C.M.G., D.SO., BA., D.Sc, F.R.S. t. Steel.
T. Storie Dixson, M.B., Ch.M. a. B. WaUcom, D.Sc

J. J. Fletcher, MA.., B-Sc G. A. Waterhouse, B.Sc, B.E. F.E.S.

W. W. Froggatt. F.L.S.

Auditor: F. H. Ravment, F.C.P.A.

NOTICE.

With the exception of Volumes I.-VI. of the Proceedings — of which the Society's
stock was totally destroyed in the Garden Palace Fire — the Publications of the
Linnean Society of N.S.W. may be obtained at the Society's HaU, Ithaca Road,
Elizabeth Bay, Sydney, or from Dulau & Co., 34-36 Margaret St., Cavendish
Square, London, W., at the following prices : —

FIRST SERIES.

Proceedings for 1882, Vol. VII.— Part 1, 7s. 6d.; Part 2, 10s.; Part 3, 5s. >

Part 4, 10s.
Proceedings for 1883, Vol. VIII.— Part 1, 10s.; Part 2, 5s,; Part 3, 7s.; Part

4, 8s.
Proceedings for 1884, Vol. IX.— Part 1, Ss. ; Part 2, 12s.; Part 3, £1 5s.; Part

4, £1 5s.
Proceedings for 1885, Vol. X.— Part 1, 12s.; Part 2, 7s 6d. ; Part 3, 15s.- Part

4, 17s. 6d.

SECOND SERIES.

Proceedings for 1886, Vol. I.— Part 1, IDs. 6d.; Part 2, 12s.; Part 3, 13s.;

Part 4, 12s. 6ci.
Proceedings for 1887, Vol. II.— Part 1. 7s.; Part 2, 8s.; Part 3, 12s.; Part 4

£1 7s.
Proceedings for 1888, Vol. III.— Part 1, 15s.: Part 2, £1 4s.; Part 3, £1; Part

4, 18s.

Proceedings for 1S89, Vol. IV.— Part 1, lis.; Part 2. 16s.; Part 3, 19s.; Part

4, lis.
Proceedings for 1S90, Vol. V.— Part 1, Us. ; Part 2, 9s. : Part 3, 9s. ; Part 4, 9s.
Proceedings for 1891, Vol. VI.— Part 1,10s.; Part 2, 9s. 6d.; Part 3, 17s. ; Part

4, 7s. 6d.
Proceedings for 1892, Vol. VII.— Part 1, 6s. 6d.; Part 2, 4s, 6d.; Part 3, Ss. ;

Part 4, Ss.
Proceedings for 1893, Vol. VIII.— Part 1, 5s.; Part 2, lis.; Part 3, 6s.; Part

4, 9s.
Proceedings for 1894, Vol. IX.— Part 1, 12s.; Part 2, 12s.; Part 3, 13s.; Part

4. Ss.
Proceedings for lS9b, Vol. X.— Part 1, 15s.; Part 2, 8s. 6d.; Part 3, 10s..

Supplement, Is. 6d.; Part 4, 12s.
Proceedings for 1896.— Part 1, 9s. ; Supplement, 2s. 6d. ; Part 2, 6s. 6d. ; Part 3,

7s 6d.; Part 4, £1 7s. 6d.
Proceedings for 1S97.— Part 1, 10s. ; Part 2, Ss. 6d. ; Part 3, 9s. ; Part 4, 12s. 6d.
Proceedings for 1898.- Part 1, 3s. ; Part 2, 6s. ; Part 3, 12s. ; Part 4, 14s.
Proceedings for 1899.— Part 1, 12s. 6d. ; Part 2, 12s. ; Part 3, 10s. : Part 4, 10s. 6d.
Proceedings for 1900 —Part 1, Ss. ; Part 2, 10s. 6d. ; Part 3. 10s. 6d. ; Part 4.

17s. 6d.
Proceedings for 1901.— Part 1, 10s. ; Part 2 9s. ; Part 3, 5s.; Part 4, 17s. 6d.
Proceedings for 1902.— Part 1, 7s. ; Part 2, 7s. 6d. ; Part 3, 7s. 6d. ; Supplement,

3s. ; Part 4, 15s.
Proceedings for 1903.— Part 1, 9s.; Part 2, 12s. 6d. ; Part 3, 14s.; Part 4, 15s.
Proceedings for 1904.— Part 1, 10s.; Part 2, 7s. 6d.; Part 3, 9s.; Part 4, 10s.
Proceedings for 1905.— Part 1, with Supplement, 7s.; Part 2, 10s.; Part 3, 12s.

6d. ; Part 4, with Supplement, 10s. 6d.
Proceedings for 1906.— Part 1, 12s. 6d. ; Part 2, 12s. 6d. ; Part 3, 12s. 6d. ;

Part 4, 15s.
Proceedings for 1907.— Part 1, 8s. ; Part 2, Ss. 6d. ; Part 3, 15s. ; Part 4, ISs.
Proceedings for 190S.— Part 1, 7s.; Part 2, 9s.; Part 3, 14s.; Part 4, 12s. 6d.
Proceedings for 1909.— Part 1, 12s.; Part 2, 17s.; Part 3, 14s.; Part 4, 16s. 6d.
Proceedings for 1910.— Part 1, lis. ; Part 2, Us. ; Part 3, 7s. ; Part 4, 12s. 6d.
Proceedings for 1911.— Part 1, 9s. 6d.; Part 2, 9s. 6d.; Part 3, 9s. 6d. ; Part

4, 10s.
Proceedings for 1912.— Part 1. Ss. 6d.; Part 2^ 25s.; Part 3, 12s. 6d.; Part 4, 15s.
Proceedings for 1913.— Part 1, 14s.; Part 2, 7s. 6d.; Part 3, 6s.; Part 4, 13s.
Proceedings for 1914.— Part 1, 13s.; Part 2, 17s.; Part 3, 25s.; Part 4 19s.
Proceedings for 1915.— Part 1, 17s.; Part 2, 12s. 6d. ; Part 3, 10s.; Part 4, lis.
Proceedings for 1916.— Part 1, 10s.; Part 2, 12s.; Part 3, 15s.; Part 4, 19s.
Proceedings for 1917.— Part 1, 14s.; Part 2, 9s.; Part 3, 12s. 6d.; Part 4, 16s. 9d.
Proceedings for 1918.— Part 1, 20s.; Part 2, 14s.; Part 3, 21s.; Part 4, 19s.
Proceedings for 1919.— Part 1, 12s. 6d. ; Part 2, lis 6d. ; Part 3, 17s. 6d.;

Part 4, 13s.

Proceedings for 1920.— Part 1, 10s. 9d.; Part 2, 7s. 6d.; Part 3, 9s.; Part 4, lis.

The MACLE.\r Memorial Volume [issued October 13th, 1893]. Ro3'al 4to , li.
and 308 pages, with Portrait, and forty-two plates. Price £3 3s.

Descriptive Catalogue or Australian Fishes. By William Macleay, F.L.S.
F.L.S. [1881]. A few copies only. Price £1 net.

The Transactions op the Entomological Society op New South Wales.
2 vols., 8vo. [Vol J, five Parts, 1863-66; Vol. ii., five Parts, 1869-73; all pub-
lished], price £2, net. are also ol)tainable, limt neither the Parts nor the Volumes
are sold separately.

PROCEEDINGS. 1920. PART 4

CONTENTS.

Pages.

Revision of AH.«traliau Lepiftopteia— i/par/r/nc. By A. .leffei-is

Turner, M.D.. r.E.S. .. 474-499

A new Avian Trematode. By Eleanor E. Chase, B.Se., Demonstrator
in Zoology, University of Sydney. (Communicated hij Professor
S. J. Johnston, B.A., D.Sc.) (Plate xsvi., and one Text-figure. ) .. 500-504

Studies in Life-histories of Australian Diptera Braehyeera. Part i.
Stratiomyiidae. No. 1. Metoponia riihrlceps Macquart. By
Vera Irwin-Smith, B.Se., F.L.S.. Linnean Maeleay Fellow of the
Society in Zoologj'. (Plates xrsii.-xxviii.. and Twenty-three Text-
figiues.) 505-530

A Revision of the Chiromyziui (Diptera). By G. H. Hardy. (Plates

xxix.-xxx.) 532-542

Some new Brachiopods from the Middle Palaeozoic Rocks of New South
Wales. By John Mitchell, late Principal of the Technical College
and School of Mines, Newcastle. (Plate xxxi. ) 543-551

Nematode Parasites of the Domestic Pigeon (Columba livia dcmestica)
in Australia. By Vera Irwin-Smith, B.Sc, F.L.S., Linnean
Maeleay Fellow of the Society in Zoology. (Nineteen Text-figures.) 552-563

A Few Notes on the Botany of Lord Howe Island. (Sixth Paper. ) By
J. "H. Maiden, I.S.6., F.R.S., F.L.S., Government Botanist and
Directoi- of the Botanic Gardens, Sydney 564-566

The Society's Heritage from the Macleays. Address by the President,
J. .1. Fletcher, M.A., B.Sc, at tlie Special General Meeting. 14th
June, 1920 '. . . . . 5G7-635

Donations and Exchanges 636-648

List of Members, 1920 649-653

Notes and Exhibits . . 473, 531

Elections and Announcements 531

Title-page i.

^ Contents iii.

Corrigenda vi.

List of New Tribal and Generic Names vi.

List of Plates vii.

Index i.-xsd.

MHl, WHOl l.IHHAHV

UH lADR E